JP7013810B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines , a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on the gaming board, and the lottery result is displayed as a symbol or the like and notified in advance. It is known that the game is notified in a notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-147965

In such a gaming machine, it is required to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is capable of entering a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball based on a player's operation and a gaming ball launched by the launching means. A ball-entry means, a determination means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the ball-entry means, a display means for displaying identification information for showing a determination result by the determination means, and a display means. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the display. The means has a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed, and the privilege game execution means has the means. A specific entry means that allows a game ball to enter during the period in which the privileged game is being executed, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific entry means can enter, and a game ball in the specific area. An embodiment showing that the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player and the dynamic display of the identification information on which the privilege game is executed are the specific determination results when the ball enters the ball. It is possible to have a means that can be temporarily stopped by the above-mentioned means, and to allow a game ball to enter the specific ball-entry means during the period of temporary stop in an aspect indicating that the result is the specific determination result. As described above, the information for indicating that the player is to launch the game ball has a specific period during which the information for indicating that the game ball is to be launched is available, and the information for indicating that the player is to launch the game ball is notified to the display means. The symbol can be displayed, and the mode in which the notification symbol is displayed can be changed stepwise so that the visibility can be changed stepwise .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a ball entry means. The determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the display means for displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, and the display means described above. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the above-mentioned specific to the display means. It has a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a determination result is stopped and displayed, and the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the game ball enters the specific area, the specific area where the game ball can enter during the specified period, and the specific area where the game ball can enter the specific area. In addition, the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player and the dynamic display of the identification information to which the privilege game is to be executed are temporarily stopped in an manner indicating that the specific determination result is obtained. To the player so that the game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry means during the period of temporary stop in the embodiment indicating that the specific determination result is obtained . The information for indicating that the game ball is to be launched has a specific period during which the information for indicating that the game ball is to be launched is available, and the information for indicating that the player is to launch the game ball is such that the display means displays a predetermined notification symbol. The notification symbol can be displayed in a stepwise manner so that the visibility is variable in a stepwise manner .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 23. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 2nd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 3rd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 27. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of the rear base. It is a rear view of the front base and the irradiation unit. It is a rear view of the front base. FIG. 34 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. It is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (B) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit in the XXXXB-XXXIXB line of FIG. 39 (A). (A) to (C) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit. (A) and (B) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (B) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (B) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (B) is a front view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLIVB of FIG. 44 (A). (A) is a rear view of the irradiation unit in the arrow XLVA direction view of FIG. 44 (A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit in the XLVB-XLVB line of FIG. 44 (B). (A) is a front view of the first block, (B) is a cross-sectional view of the first block in the XLVIB-XLVIB line of FIG. 46 (A), and (C) is a front view of the second block. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second block in the XLVID-XLVID line of FIG. 46 (C). It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 2nd position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first position, (B) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the intermediate position, and (C) is a transmission in the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (A) to (C) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXA-LIXA line of FIG. 54, (B) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXB-LIXB line of FIG. 55, and (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view. , FIG. 56 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXC-LIXC line of FIG. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove forming member in 2nd Embodiment, and (B) is a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove in the LXB-LXB line of FIG. 60 (A). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove forming member in 3rd Embodiment, and (B) is a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove in the LXIVB-LXIVB line of FIG. 64 (A). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. (A) is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the arrow LXVA direction view of FIG. 64 (A), and (B) is the projection plate in the LXVB-LXVB line of FIG. 65 (A). It is sectional drawing of the member, the gear member and the groove forming member, and (C) is the sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the LXVC-LXVC line of FIG. 65 (A). (A) and (B) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit in the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a sectional view of the irradiation unit. (A) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the first block, and (B) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (B) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (B) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (B) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (B) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state which the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (A) to (C) are rear views of the projection unit. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing the game state and the effect content in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the jackpot medium effect 1 in the first control example, and (B) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the jackpot medium effect 2 in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the jackpot medium effect 3 in the first control example, and (B) is a timing chart showing another example of the effect content of the jackpot medium effect 1 in the first control example. Is. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time when the addition effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is started, and FIG. 3 It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the jackpot continuation effect among the addition effect displayed by a symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the number of rounds is added among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the jackpot continuous effect among the additional effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1 control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending screen of the jackpot among the additional effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the end of a big hit among the addition effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the special symbol high-speed fluctuation after the end of the big hit among the additional effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram showing. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the jackpot continuous effect among the additional effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the special symbol high-speed fluctuation after the end of the big hit among the normal hit effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, (B). Is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a big hit is won among the normal hit effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. , Is a timing chart showing the flow of the battle mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in a battle mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the pre-battle effect among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a battle reach display mode among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is the third symbol display in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the battle reach is won among the battle modes displayed by the apparatus. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when it was drawn to the battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (B) is the figure which showed the example of the display mode in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the battle reach is defeated among the battle modes displayed by the 3rd symbol display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the revival effect of the battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the precursory effect among the suggestive effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is the third symbol in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the countdown effect among the suggestion effect displayed by a display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the specific effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing the flow of the suggestion effect executed within one variation among the suggestion effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the suggestion effect executed by a plurality of fluctuations among the suggestion effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the expectation degree suggestion effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (B) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table, and (B) is the main control device in the first control example. It is a figure which shows schematically the regulation contents of the 2nd random number table set in the ROM of. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 1st type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the variation pattern table for jackpot. It is the figure which showed, (C) is the figure which showed the regulation content of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table schematically, and (D) is the figure which schematically showed the regulation content of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is a figure shown as a target. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the special variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the jackpot transition setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 1 table. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 2 table, and (D) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 3 table. , (E) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 4 table, and (F) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 5 table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state transition 6 table among the state transition tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram showing the state transition 7 It is a figure which showed the rule contents of a table schematically, (C) is a figure which showed the rule contents of a state transition 8 table schematically, (D) is a figure which shows the rule contents of a state transition 9 table schematically. It is a figure shown as a target. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (B) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. .. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol reserved ball number counter in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the reserved rank selection table in the first control example. It is the figure which showed, and (C) is the figure which schematically showed the regulation content of the big hit middle production selection table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the additional number selection table in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the continuous effect mode selection table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the continuous value main selection table in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first continuous value sub-selection table. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the second continuation value subselection table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the final mode selection table in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram explaining the contents of the effect set as the final mode. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the expectation degree selection table in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the expectation degree effect selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st control example. (A) to (C) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on in the 1st control example. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table in the 1st control example schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation number subtraction process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit middle effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during addition effect which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the addition display processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit post-effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the extension management process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the plural variation effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (B) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the numerical command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the accessory effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the effect addition example of the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the accessory effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect addition of the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which resets the title displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the example. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (B) is the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the transformation pattern table in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (B) is the definition of the title system selection table in the effect addition example of the first control example. It is the figure which showed the content schematically, and (C) is the figure which showed the predetermined content of the title selection table in the effect addition example of the 1st control example schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the accessory operation level selection table in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (B) is an effect setting group in the effect addition example of the first control example. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the effect addition example of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the change process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the effect addition example of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the title setting process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (B) is the regulation content of the fall lottery table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fall state transition table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, (D). Is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fall state transition 1 table among the fall state transition tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and FIG. 3E is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fall state transition table, and FIG. It is a figure which shows schematically the specified contents of the fall state transition 2 table among the fall state transition tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the example. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (B) shows the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the second control example. It is a block diagram. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table in the second control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the final mode selection 3 table in the second control example. It is a figure shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state determination process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in another example of the second control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern table after the fall. It is a figure shown as a target. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the other effect example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the other effect example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the third control example, and (B) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the 1st type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 3rd control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third control example, and (B) is the fluctuation pattern selection table in the third control example. Of these, it is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table, and (C) is the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern of the variation pattern selection table in the third control example. It is a figure which showed the specified contents of the table schematically, and (D) shows the specified contents of the 2nd deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables in the 3rd control example. It is a figure, (E) is the figure which schematically showed the defined content of the special (probability variation) variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables in the 3rd control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third control example, and (B) to (D) are diagrams in the third control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the fluctuation scenarios 1 to 3 specified in the fluctuation scenario table. (A) to (D) are diagrams schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation scenarios 4 to 7 defined in the fluctuation scenario table in the third control example. (A) to (D) are diagrams schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation scenarios 8 to 11 defined in the fluctuation scenario table in the third control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example, and (B) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the 1st continuation value main selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the 2nd continuation value main selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the 3rd continuation value main selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the continuous effect mode selection 4 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which shows typically the electric structure of the display control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation effect setting process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value setting process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value-related command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the final mode command processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control device in another control example of 3rd control example, and (B) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control device in another control example of 3rd control example. Is. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the third control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation scenario A1 defined in the fluctuation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example, (B). ) Is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small hit post-variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect in another example of the suggestion effect explained in the 1st control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect in another example of the suggestion effect explained in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the countdown effect setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in another example of the suggestion effect explained in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in another example of the suggestion effect explained in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd precursor effect setting process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in another example of the suggestion effect explained in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 6 in the additional description of the 1st control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect in another example of the expectation degree suggestion effect explained in the 1st control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams schematically showing a display screen in another example of the expectation degree suggestion effect described in the first control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams schematically showing a display screen in another example of the expectation degree suggestion effect described in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the countdown effect setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in another example of the expectation degree suggestion effect explained in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in another example of the expectation degree suggestion effect explained in 1st control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the A1 Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the A1 Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the A1 Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the V prize-winning apparatus in the A1 Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the V prize-winning apparatus in the A1 Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the movable guide member in 1st Embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode that does not form a pseudo-ream displayed by the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation mode which is not pseudo-ream displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in A1 Embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the variation mode of the pseudo-ream 1 displayed by the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the variation mode of the button effect at the time of pseudo-continuous development displayed by the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation mode of the button effect at the time of pseudo-continuous development displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in A1 Embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode when the V attacker opens immediately after the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment is stopped. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation mode when the V attacker opens immediately after the symbol stop which is displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in A1 Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the A1 Embodiment. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of the various counters in the A1 Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control unit in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is the special symbol 1 random number table in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which showed the rule contents schematically, (C) is a figure which showed the rule contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the A1 embodiment schematically, and (D) is a figure which showed the rule contents schematically in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the rule contents of the ordinary symbol random number table schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is the special figure 1 jackpot type in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the rule contents of the selection table schematically, and (C) is the figure which showed the rule contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the A1 embodiment schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is the special figure 1 small hit type in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the rule contents of the selection table schematically, and (C) is the figure which showed the rule contents of the special figure 2 small hit type selection table in the A1 embodiment schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is the regulation content of the normal variation pattern table in the A1 embodiment. Is a diagram schematically showing. , Is a figure schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving variation pattern table in the A1 Embodiment. , It is a figure explaining each hit type and operation content of a hit game in A1 Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the jackpot scenario table in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small hit scenario table in the A1 embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario A in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a hit scenario A in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a hit scenario B in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the hit scenario C in the A1 Embodiment schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. .. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow in the A1 Embodiment. (A) to (I) are timing charts showing the time of passing the small hit V in the A1 embodiment. (A) to (I) are timing charts showing the small hit V non-passing time in the A1 embodiment. (A) to (I) are timing charts showing the time of passing the jackpot V in the A1 embodiment. (A) to (I) are timing charts showing the time when the jackpot V is not passed in the A1 embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. (A) to (C) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table in the A1 Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the transfer data table in the A1 Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list in the A1 Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot ending control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit ending control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear view image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error command processing, and (C) is the flowchart which shows the chance eye command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V effect command processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the A2 Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the distribution apparatus in A2 Embodiment. (A) to (D) are diagrams schematically showing the inside of the distribution device B700 in the A2 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A3 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the clown member in the A3 embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the A4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the flow path unit in A4th Embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed by the third symbol display device in the A4 embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed by the third symbol display device in the A4 embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed by the third symbol display device in the A4 embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control apparatus in A4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when passing the small hit V in the A4 embodiment, and (B) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when passing the big hit V in the A4 embodiment. Is. (A) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when the small hit V is not passed in the A4 embodiment, and (B) is the roulette display timing when the big hit V is not passed in the A4 embodiment. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in A4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the condition device determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in A4th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the V winning apparatus in A5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in A5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in A5th Embodiment. It is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing the game content and the production mode of the series of effects in the fifth control example. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing the game content and the final variation effect in the fifth control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the display content displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the production mode of the normal figure fluctuation effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which a normal figure variation effect is executed in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which the normal figure variation effect is executed, and (B) is a diagram in the fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the screen per ordinary figure displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of winning a special 2 during a special 1 change displayed on a third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of winning a special prize, and (B) is a diagram in the fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the production mode of the special 2 changing effect (challenge game) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a small hit is won by the special 2 variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode when the big hit is acquired in the small hit displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of winning a special 2 during the special 1 non-variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode at the time of winning a special prize, and (B) is a fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode in the case of winning a small hit by the special 2 variation displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time when one second has elapsed from the start of the game per normal figure displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode at the time when one second has elapsed, and (B) is the fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode when a ball did not win a prize in a 2nd prize opening during a game per game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit game displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode when a ball did not win a prize in a V winning opening during a small hit game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of an aspect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in a time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing the third symbol display device in the fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the display time saving final variation. (A) is a figure showing an example of the effect mode of the first half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is the figure which showed the third symbol in the fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode of the latter half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode showing the effect result of the latter half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode showing the effect result of the second half effect of the time saving final variation, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the fifth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time saving final variation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of hitting the special 2 after the end of working hours displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the fifth control example. 3 It is a figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time saving final variation effect displayed on a symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode which shows the end of the time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example. It is a figure which showed the outline of various counters in 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, and (B) is one of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first random number 5 table in the fifth control example, and (B) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 5 table in the fifth control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol 2 random number 5 table in the fifth control example, and (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal symbol per random number 5 table. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 5 table in the fifth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table in the fifth control example. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure hit type selection 5 table in the fifth control example, and (B) is the opening of the electric accessory based on the normal figure hit type and the game state. It is a figure which showed the operation content. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection 5 table in the fifth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 small hit type selection 5 table in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown, and (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 small hit type selection 5 table in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the fluctuation pattern 5 table in the fifth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal fluctuation pattern 5 table in the fifth control example. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the time saving variation pattern 5 table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern selection 5 table in the fifth control example, and (B) schematically shows the variation pattern selection 5 table for the time saving final in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning situation determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot-related command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit-related command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a flowchart showing the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal small hit process to be executed. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process for a series of productions executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing 5 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for a general drawing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the series effect update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the update process during a game per game executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (B) is the flowchart in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the update process during a small hit game executed by MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the 6th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the time reduction final variation in the sixth control example, and (B) is an effect during the support time displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of an embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the type selection 6 table per normal figure in the sixth control example, and (B) is an electric combination based on the type per normal figure and the game state in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the opening operation contents of an object schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern 6 table for normal use in the 6th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal map fluctuation pattern table in the sixth control example, and (B) schematically shows the normal map fluctuation pattern table for time saving A in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram, and (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the fluctuation pattern of the normal map for time saving B in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 6 for a general drawing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 6th control example. It is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example. It is an enlarged view schematically enlarged on the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example. It is an enlarged view schematically enlarged on the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example. (A) and (B) are timing charts schematically showing the flow of production of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern 7 table in the 7th control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 7 table in the 7th control example. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 7 table in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the set effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure set effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. It is a figure which showed the setting method of the series effect in 7th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general diagram scenario table in the 8th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which the scenario 2 per a normal figure is set as a series of production scenarios in the 8th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which the scenario 4 per a normal figure is set as a series of production scenarios in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the series | effect determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the related command processing per figure executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process during constant monitoring executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 8 for a general drawing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the series effect prediction setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final variation effect table in the ninth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the winning final table in the ninth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final table for disengagement in the 9th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final effect variable setting table in the ninth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the hit setting table in the ninth control example. .. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the setting table for disconnection in the 9th control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a winning information command process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a final winning process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a time saving effect setting process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a final variation effect update process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed notification screen in the first notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed notification screen in the tenth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the right-handed notification screen in the 2nd notification mode displayed on the symbol display device. It is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 7th control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the flow of the production of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 7th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example. It is a partially enlarged front view of a sorting device. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (B) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set during the change of the third symbol, and (B) is a diagram showing four reserved balls set during the change of the third symbol. It is a figure which showed the display mode in which the character J0 appeared from the display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set during the change of the third symbol and the recommended value without vacancy does not increase, and (B) is further reserved from the state of (A). It is a figure which showed the display mode when the number of balls increased and exceeded the recommended value. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls increases in a short period of time, and (B) is a diagram in which character J0 in the display area C indicates an optimum number of reserved balls according to a state. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the case. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the character J1 is displayed in the display area C during the change of the third symbol, and (B) is a diagram showing the display mode when the character J1 is displayed in the display area C, and (B) changes to a reserved ball during the change of the third symbol. It is a figure which showed the display mode when the character J2 is displayed in the display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum number, and (B) is a display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C is changed when an over prize is won. It is a figure which showed. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which a player is allowed to store up to 6 reserved balls during reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the number of reserved balls is stored up to 6 and the symbol arrangement is changed. It is a figure which showed the display mode in the case of. (A) is a figure showing the display mode of the lucky display of the previous jackpot hold, and (B) shows the display mode when the player presses the button after the number of reserved balls is accumulated up to six. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect during long opening, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the variable effect of the long opening prize. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 11th control example. It is a figure which showed the outline of various counters in 11th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the eleventh control example, and (B) is one of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special symbol jackpot random number table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the eleventh control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a random number table per ordinary hit in the eleventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) schematically shows the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table for time saving which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the winning command table in the eleventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hold change selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hold effect mode selection table in the eleventh control example. .. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding lid range selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) schematically shows the normal holding lid range selection table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram, (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the notice A mode holding lid range selection table in the eleventh control example, (D) is the notice B mode holding lid range in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the selection table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a holding lid range selection table at the time of short-term winning in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram of a holding lid range selection table during reach effect in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid command selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid color change selection table in the eleventh control example. Is. It is a schematic diagram which shows the lucky hold command table in the eleventh control example schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the background mode selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reserved character selection table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the reserved character change table in eleventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the balloon selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal balloon selection table in the eleventh control example. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the notice A balloon selection table in the eleventh control example, and (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the notice B balloon selection table in the eleventh control example. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning balloon table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a balloon table during reach effect in the eleventh control example. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the lucky hold balloon selection table in the eleventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect lottery table during reach in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reach start time calculation table in the eleventh control example. Yes, (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the lucky hold lottery table in the eleventh control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the display control device in 11th control example. (A) to (C) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the drawing list in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 11th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation execution determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 11th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the through gate passing processing executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the NMI interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lucky display determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding hold effect setting process during reach executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding lid setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold character setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the balloon lid setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the short-term winning determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lucky hold storage process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the short-term prize management process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold hold effect management process during reach executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 11th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 11th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode switching process. (A) is a flowchart showing the holding lid command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding character display processing. It is a flowchart which showed the balloon display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 11th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 11th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 11th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 11th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the flow of the special symbol variation and continuous production in the twelfth control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship between the continuous effect and the background display in the twelfth control example. (A) is a display mode showing the display screen during the continuous effect in the twelfth control example, and (B) is the display mode showing the display screen during the special effect in the twelfth control example. It is a display mode which showed the background change during the continuous production in the twelfth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving middle processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect return process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous effect return process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 13th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 14th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display screen at the time of power-on in the 14th control example, and (B) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen at the time of power-on in the 14th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after the power is turned on in the 14th control example, and (B) is a diagram showing a variable game screen of the first rotation after the power is turned on in the 14th control example. .. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 14th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the volume table in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the initial volume setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the volume setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the volume-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 14th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a storage error A screen at the time of turning on the power in the fifteenth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing a storage error B screen at the time of a game operation in the fifteenth control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 15th control example. It is a timing chart in the case of performing a retry operation in a tilting device. It is a timing chart when the touch sensor is detected in the tilting device. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 15th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an operation effect selection table in the fifteenth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting operation scenario table in the fifteenth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilting operation scenario A table in the fifteenth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilting operation scenario B table in the fifteenth control example. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the origin detection operation A table in the fifteenth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the origin detection B table in the fifteenth control example. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilt initial operation table in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the retry process during touch input executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilting device control process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilting initial operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the process during operation effect executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect backtracking operation process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the retry operation process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth control example. (A) is a diagram showing a variation of the jackpot A in the reserved ball and showing the display mode during the variation of the third symbol, and (B) is a diagram showing the display mode in which the reserved ball is further changed from the state of FIG. 483 (A). It is a figure which showed the display mode when one was digested and became a jackpot A. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which one more reserved ball is digested from the state of FIG. 483 (B) during super time, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the reserved ball is shown in FIG. 484 (A). It is a figure which showed the display mode when one more digested from the state of) and became a big hit by this fluctuation. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of chance, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode during probabilistic change. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot is started, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect of the first jackpot. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when notifying that there is a button effect during a big hit, and (B) is a diagram showing that the button is pressed from the state of FIG. 487 (A). It is a figure which showed the display mode in the case of notifying a player that a probability change was given. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot ends, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot ends and the probability variation mode is entered. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example, and (B) schematically shows the promotion lottery table in the 16th control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol switching process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol change process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize winning ball processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 16th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the stop symbol replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 16th control example, and (B) is the execution by the MPU in the display control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the game state setting process to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 16th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 17th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode during the effect when the long opening is won in the 17th control example, and (B) is a display mode in the case of the long opening effect in the 17th control example. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed the display mode in the long opening effect regulation in the 17th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the long opening effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the long opening-related processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 17th control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 18th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 18th control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the 18th control example, and (B) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart which showed the display screen and the flow of BGM at the time of power-off in 18th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the power is turned on, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of return variation after the initial setting is completed. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the background change according to the background change operation timing during the special figure change. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the background change operation is performed during the low-speed change of the third symbol, and (B) is the next figure after the background change operation is performed during the low-speed change. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of a variable screen. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the fluctuation state of the 3rd symbol in 18th control example, the validity period of a touch sensor, and the operation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch effect is executed during high-speed fluctuation, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after a touch operation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when eight hold effects are executed, and (B) shows an example of a display mode of the first variation after the eight hold effects are executed. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a new prize is awarded after the eight-piece hold effect is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when eight hold effects are executed and a new prize is awarded. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st variation. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the end of 8 hold productions. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch operation is performed during a touch effect, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a special operation is performed during the touch effect. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special effect selection table in the 18th control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the vibe pattern data in the 18th control example. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an eight-held lottery table in the eighteenth control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the display control device in 18th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the 8 production scenario selection table in the 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold number control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation return processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display rise processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity display update process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the left-right button input process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode identification process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lamp setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the counter update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed 8 display setting processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold display process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 18th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 18th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the background notice selection table in the 19th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the silhouette effect in the sea mode is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the silhouette effect in the mountain mode is executed. be. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 19th control example. 19 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 19th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 19th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the customer waiting setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the crack effect in 19th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the cracking effect, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a button is operated during the first period of the cracking effect. be. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode at the end of the second period of the cracking effect, and (B) is the display mode when the button is not operated during the first period of the cracking effect. It is a figure which showed an example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 20th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 20th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the cracking effect selection table in the 20th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 20th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 20th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 20th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the cracking effect end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 20th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 20th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 20th control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the operation effect pattern 1 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the 21st control example, and (B) is the operation effect pattern 2 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the 21st control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot medium effect screen in the 21st control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the PUSH effect screen during the jackpot in the 21st control example. .. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the success of the PUSH effect in the jackpot in the 21st control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen during the ending effect in the 21st control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing the success of the ending effect in the 21st control example. .. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 21st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 21st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special prize middle operation effect selection table in the 21st control example, and (B) is a schematic view of the contents of the special prize middle tilt operation scenario table in the 21st control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario C table in the 21st control example, and (B) schematically shows the contents of the ending scenario table in the 21st control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect execution timing selection table in the 21st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect | process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 21st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the processing during the ending executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 21st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process 11 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 21st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round process 11 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 21st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending process 11 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 21st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. It is a timing chart which shows the accessory operation, the liquid crystal display, and the flow of the pseudo voice when there is the last effect of the jackpot game period in the 22nd control example. It is a timing chart which shows the accessory operation, the liquid crystal display, and the flow of the pseudo voice when there is no last effect of the jackpot game period in the 22nd control example. 22 is a timing chart showing a bonus operation, a liquid crystal display, and a flow of pseudo voice when the bonus control device is driven during the round effect of the jackpot game period in the 22nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 22nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 22nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the final round process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 22nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 22nd control example, and (B) is a command executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 22nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the interrupt process. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 22nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the accessory control device in the 22nd control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the accessory control device in the 22nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 22nd control example. (A) and (B) are the display contents of the BGM and the third symbol display device in the 23rd control example when the power is cut off while the special figure is changing and the special figure change is restarted when the power is turned on. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relation of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a figure which shows typically the specified contents of the silhouette notice selection table specified in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 23rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation return process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 23rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display rise process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 23rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 23rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 23rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 23rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the counter update process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 23rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the mode promotion effect in the 24th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when three identical numbers are vertically aligned in the mode promotion effect in the 24th control example, and (B) is a diagram showing the mode promotion effect in the 24th control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the background mode was promoted by. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 24th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the mode promotion effect selection table defined in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 24th control example, and (B) is the schematic diagram in the 24th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the hit table constituting the mode promotion effect selection table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the out-of-order table constituting the mode promotion effect selection table in the 24th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the defined contents of the round number display data table in the 24th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 24th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode promotion effect lottery processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 24th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 24th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing content acquisition process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 24th control example. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (B) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIB-VIB line of FIG. 708 (A). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (B) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIIB-VIIB line of FIG. 709 (A). FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device in the direction of arrow VIII of FIG. 708. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. 709. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (B) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVB of FIG. 716 (A), and (C) is a side view of the tilting device of FIG. 716 (A). It is sectional drawing of the tilting device in the XIVC line. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the drive device, and (B) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIB of FIG. 719 (A). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXA of FIG. 720, and (B) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXB of FIG. 720. (A) and (B) are front views of the release member and the rotary claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of an operating device in the XXX-XXXIX line of FIG. 708. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112A (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112A to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5C having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112A (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 5C. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 5C. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51A for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112A, a launch stop switch 51B for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51A is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51A and the firing stop switch 51B are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5C (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112A (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased and the second winning opening 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 140A attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140A is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is compared with the case where the first electric accessory 140A is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140A attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times that the first electric accessory 140A is opened is increased more than in the normal state. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change during the probability change or the time reduction, and the time when the first electric accessory 140A attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first electric accessory per hit. At least one of the number of times the 140A is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 140A attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric accessory 140A and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal time, without repeating the number of times.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates between the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the first electric accessory 140A attached to the second winning opening 140 is used. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140A of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

It should be noted that the second winning opening during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140A per hit to increase the probability of hitting during the probability change or the time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140A may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 140 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 140A is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140A is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140A is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140A is displayed. It becomes an open state (enlarged state), and it becomes easy for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140A is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 140A is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140A as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140A attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140A and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65A, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65A is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65A is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65A can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65A, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65A is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65A, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so that the state and the state are repeated alternately.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65A is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65A is opened for a predetermined time, and the LED is opened. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65A is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65A while the specific winning opening 65A is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65A is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65A, 640, 82, are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65A. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112A so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112A includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51A detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51B for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes each drive motor 481,491,661,880.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the protrusion member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 of the displacement unit 400 are displaced to the retracted positions, respectively. The states in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the overhanging positions of the 400 and 400 are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively in the internal space of the back case 300. It is housed in order.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301A is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301A. It is possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a front view frame-shaped base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L displaceably disposed on the base member 410, and a right displacement member 420R. A retracting position for retracting the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and an opening 301A of the rear case 300 (that is, a third symbol display device). It can be displaced from the overhanging position on the front side of 81) (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485). By selecting the driving means to be driven, it is possible to make the displacement mode of the displacement member different (form a plurality of types of displacement modes). The details of such a structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 is a front view ring-shaped base member 610 arranged in front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and projection. A plurality of LEDs 651 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 are provided. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is used as a pattern or a pattern. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be highlighted (displayed) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In this case, the projection unit 600 adopts a structure that enhances the efficiency of incident light emitted from the LED 651 onto the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and patterns). Can be clearly highlighted). Further, a structure that enhances workability when assembling a plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610 is adopted. Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 arranged at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. The other end side of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the retracted position above the opening 301A (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300 and the overhanging position extending to the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes an urging spring SP for urging the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the urging spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the overhanging position. By balancing the restoring force, the displacement member 850 is made to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP around the equilibrium position (predetermined position). The structure is adopted. The details of such a structure will be described later.

Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement) that is displaceably arranged on the base member 410. The member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) driving means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a driving force to the displacement member are mainly provided, and as described above, the lower drive is provided. When the displacement member is displaced by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when the displacement member is displaced by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive) is displaced. When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced in a different manner. Hereinafter, the details of the structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R formed as displacement members that produce an effect by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are provided with the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. , The left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the bogie member 440, and the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is a long member arranged in a vertical posture, and has a connecting shaft 421 projecting from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 drilled at the upper end, and a slide bored at the lower end. It is provided with a moving groove 423. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back surface side of the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting shaft 421 is set to a length dimension in which the tip protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L, and the tip of the protruding connecting shaft 421 is a drive groove 494C (in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490). (See FIGS. 17 and 18) is slidably inserted. That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494C acts on the connecting shaft 421 to displace the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one of the two connecting shafts 441 of the carriage member 440, which will be described later, is rotatably inserted through the connecting shaft 441. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state where a relative posture change (rotation around the axis of rotation of the connecting hole 422) with respect to the carriage member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and the drive pin 488B (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L described later is rotatably and slidably inserted. .. Therefore, in either case where only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the posture change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410. Can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being erected between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L, and is a connecting hole 431 drilled at one end (upper end). And a sliding pin 432 projecting from the back surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 410A formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing its relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The bogie member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending along the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410F and upper front portion 410G, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is provided with two connecting shafts 441 arranged side by side in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the bogie member 440 by rolling the rolling wheels 442 of the bogie member 440 on the rolling surface. ..

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended and supported on the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the bogie member 440.

The upper left rack 450L slides a guide portion extending along the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410F and upper front portion 410G, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the bogie member 440 are rotatably inserted. A rack gear 452 is provided.

Here, the right displacement member 420R is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R with respect to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R with respect to the upper left rack 450L. Since the configurations are substantially the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, the rack gear 452 is engraved in front of the upper right rack 450R. Further, in the upper right rack 450R, the formed portion of the connecting hole 451 is offset to the front side, and the upper right rack 450R is arranged at a position different from that of the upper left rack 450L in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval. In this case, both rack gears 452 are meshed with pinion gears 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410.

Therefore, with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, FIG. 19 left-right direction) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Since the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged. The displacement direction can be the opposite direction (direction in which they are close to each other or separated from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 among the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Further, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the raising cover 413 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 is a drive in which the first drive motor 481, the pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and the pinion gear 482 are meshed with each other. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 arranged on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a rack gear 486 thereof. Mainly includes a gear train (gears 487A to 487E) to which the first gear 487A is meshed with, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R meshed with the gear 487E at the end of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front surface of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 protruding from the back surface of the left front cover 411L. The cover. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

The drive gear 483 includes an eccentric pin 483A that is located eccentrically from the center of rotation and projects from the back surface. The drive arm 484 has a shaft support hole 484A through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484B through which the eccentric pin 483A of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and their shafts. It includes a support hole 484A and a drive pin 484C projecting from the front at an end opposite to the side on which the sliding groove 484B is formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the eccentric pin 483A of the drive gear 483 to the sliding groove 484B of the drive arm 484. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 484A as the center of rotation, and the drive pin 484C of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The projecting member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485A through which the drive pin 484C of the drive arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is arranged in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is interposed between the base end rails arranged in front of the base member 410, the tip rails arranged on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and the base end rails and the tip rails. It is provided with an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485A of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or down by the drive pin 484C of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is used as a base. It is moved up and down in the vertical direction with respect to the member 410.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the elevating direction of the projecting member 485, and the gear train (gears 487A to 487E) has the front and right front of the base member 410 with the leading gear 487A meshed with the rack gear 486. It is rotatably supported between the back surface of the cover 411R and the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by moving the protruding member 485 up and down, the gear train (gears 487A to 487E) can be rotated by utilizing the linear motion of the rack gear 486.

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and the rack gear 488A is engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the drive pin 488B is projected from the front at the end portion in the longitudinal direction. And each. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are positioned differently in the vertical direction, and the rack gears 488A face each other in the left-right direction (width direction) between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412. , FIG. 19 left-right direction) and slidably held.

The gear 487E at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487D and protrudes to the rear side through the opening 410B formed in the base member 410, so that the lower left rack 488L and the lower right It is meshed with each rack gear 488A of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487A to 487E) is rotated as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gear 487A at the end causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to rotate with each other. It can be linearly moved in the opposite direction (direction in which they are close to each other or separated from each other).

The drive pins 488B of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are projected to the front side through the linear insertion groove 410C formed in the base member 410, so that the left displacement member 420L is as described above. And rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410C is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of the linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 among the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In FIGS. 17 and 18, for ease of understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper intermediate portion 410F and the upper front portion 410G facing each other.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 is a drive in which the second drive motor 491, the pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and the pinion gear 492 are meshed with each other. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

The base member 410 is formed as a divided structure in which the upper portion (upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape in front view) is in which the upper back surface portion 410E, the upper intermediate portion 410F, and the front surface portion 410G are sequentially overlapped on the front side. Will be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of an upwardly protruding portion of the upper intermediate portion 410F, and a pinion gear is attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 protruding from the back surface of the overhanging portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper intermediate portion 410F.

The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493A that is located eccentrically from the center of rotation and projects from the back surface. The drive arm 494 has a shaft support hole 494A through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410F is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494B through which the eccentric pin 493A of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and the like. It is provided with a shaft support hole 494A and a linear drive groove 494C located at an end opposite to the side on which the sliding groove 494B is formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the sliding groove 494B of the drive arm 494 is rotated from the eccentric pin 493A of the drive gear 493. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 494A as the center of rotation, and the drive groove 494C of the drive arm 494 is displaced to the left or right.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494C of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating around the shaft support hole 494A) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494C displaced to the left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the bogie member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. The upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced to the left or right by rolling along the rolling surface.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced left and right and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is rolled on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L becomes the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. It is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the line, and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, whereby the right displacement member. The 420R can be displaced. The rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls is formed on the upper intermediate portion 410F and the upper front portion 410G.

Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to drive the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). The first aspect of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first aspect, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the retracted positions, and FIGS. 23 and 24 show the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. And corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is arranged at the overhanging position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the state of being arranged in the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged in the outermost direction (the position where they are most separated from each other in the left-right direction), and are also arranged. The protruding member 485 is arranged at the lowermost position.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, the states shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 are passed, and then the states shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 are shown. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other in the left-right direction (width direction) and the projecting member 485 is raised until the state (overhanging position in the first aspect). In the overhanging position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are formed in a united state (a state in which the sides of the three are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484C of the drive arm 484 has a sliding groove 485A of the protruding member 485. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the above, the projecting member 485 is raised (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Further, when the projecting member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linear motion) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487A to 487E) and the rack gear 488A (FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the drive pins 488B of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linear motion) along the insertion groove 410C of the base member 410 in a direction close to each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494C of the drive arm 494 is the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. It acts on 421. As a result, the bogie member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (bogie member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, whereby the right displacement member 420R is displaced. The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is smaller than the displacement amount on the upper end side (the displacement amount on the lower end side). That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488B (extended length of the insertion groove 410C) is shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the overhanging position (overhanging position) in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 20). The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to reach (see FIGS. 23 and 24) at substantially the same time. That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (trolley member 440) is faster than that on the lower end side (drive pin 488B).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotation while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the posture while rotating it in this way in the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the driving means of 1. It was possible for the first time to use the driving means of.

Further, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (bogie member 440) is different from that of the lower end side (drive pin 488B), the distance between the drive pin 488B and the bogie member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488B, it is possible to absorb a change in the distance between the two. That is, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488B may be formed to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, in addition to reducing the product cost, the reliability and durability of the operation are improved. be able to.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the opposite directions to those described above, FIGS. 21 and 22 show. After passing through the indicated states, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) to the states (retracted positions) shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 and are displaced from each other, and the protruding member 485. Is lowered.

Then, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in the non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L, A second aspect of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second aspect, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25. Note that FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the overhanging positions in the second aspect.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged in the retracted position), in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490, the left displacement member 420L rotates on the upper end side (axis center of the connecting hole 422). It is arranged in a posture that allows it to rotate as a center. That is, it is allowed that the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L slides along the drive groove 494C of the drive arm 494.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (states shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pin of the drive arm 484 is shown. When the 484C pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485A of the projecting member 485, the projecting member 485 is raised, and the drive pin 488B of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R has the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the 420R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

Then, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in a non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and A third aspect of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third aspect, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27. Note that FIGS. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the overhanging positions in the third aspect.

Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488B, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is permissible for member 420R to be lifted upwards.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged in the retracted position), the drive arm is driven as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494C of the 494 is acted on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R. In both cases, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R is displaced in a direction closer to the left displacement member 420L. (Linear motion).

That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the rotation center. Further, in the third aspect, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protruding member 485 can be maintained in the stopped state.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended to the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. Therefore, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to perform the effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, the driving motor) is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to produce a surprising effect of the player.

On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). Thereby, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and projecting member 485) can be displaced in three types (first aspect, second aspect, and third aspect). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so that the displacement mode is switched. As a result, it is possible to create a surprising effect for the player.

In particular, in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced by parallel movement (linear motion), while the second aspect. And in the third aspect (see FIGS. 19, 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion), and the motion form of the displacement is different. Can be made. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In this case, in the conventional product, there is a product in which the displacement mode is different by changing only the rotation direction while keeping the rotation center constant, but the second aspect and the third aspect in the present embodiment are , Not only the rotation direction is different in the same rotation center, but the rotation direction is different and the rotation center is also formed differently (in the second aspect, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third aspect). In the case, the lower end side is regarded as the center of rotation), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) can be made large, and it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

Further, in the first aspect, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form in which rotation and translation (linear motion) are combined, and the direction of such rotation is the third aspect. It is the same direction as the direction of rotation in. Therefore, in the initial stages of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize the displacement members so as to be displaced in a close direction, and distinguish between them. Can be difficult to attach. On the other hand, in the first aspect, the projecting member 485 is raised with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the proximity direction, whereas in the third aspect, the projecting member 485 is stopped. Can be maintained in a state. That is, in the initial stage where the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in a direction close to each other, when the projecting member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhanging position in the first aspect. You can expect the player to do that.

In the displacement unit 400, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are respectively arranged (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged on the bogie member 440. The upper end side (connecting hole 422) is rotatably connected, and the drive pin 488B of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is rotatably connected to the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

As a result, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform a linear motion (first aspect) including a rotational component and a rotational motion (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove, but in the case of sliding displacement along such a curved locus, a complicated structure is required (). That is, in the case of a curved locus, not only the mechanism for guiding the member corresponding to the trolley member 440, the member corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also each of these members 440, It will be necessary to provide the 488L and 488R with a mechanism that can continuously apply the driving force).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in a straight line direction, and therefore the bogie member 440 may be guided by a rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize the rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, in any of the first aspect, the second aspect and the third aspect, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common, and specifically, One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by the bogie member 440 rolling on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. The 488R is guided by sliding (linear motion) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms according to each aspect, and therefore it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the reliability and durability of the operation can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a front view ring-shaped base member 610, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably arranged on the base member 610, and a projection thereof. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged so as to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 to be transmitted to the projection plate member 620. It is mainly provided with a gear train (gears 662 to 664) of the above.

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and an annular front base 612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the facing surfaces of the back base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

In the area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 in the front view (hereinafter referred to as “display area”), the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player, and the area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. (That is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter, referred to as "outside the display area"), the projection plate member 620 is made invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side is transmitted to the player to visually recognize the projection plate member 620 and is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a manner of forming a pattern or a pattern, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be highlighted (displayed) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape in the front view and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

A plurality of teeth are engraved on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train is meshed with the gear member 630. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section continuous in the circumferential direction with the projection plate member 620, and is a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. By guiding C to the guide groove 641, the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610. The detailed configuration of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LED 651) for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposites the outer peripheral surface). A plurality of (5 in this embodiment) are arranged in the posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 is set to pass through the substantially center of the projection plate member 620. The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is arranged on the back surface side of the rear surface base 611, and the gear 662 at the head of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. Further, a gear member 630 arranged on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gear 662 to gear 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, the holding structure of the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a front view of the rear base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back surface base 611 has an inner standing portion and 611A erected on the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and an outer standing portion erected on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. An inner concave groove in a region surrounded by an intermediate standing portion 611B erected between the setting portion 611C, the inner standing portion 611A and the outer standing portion 611C, and the inner standing portion 611B and the inner standing portion 611A. Mainly provided with 611D, an outer recess 611E in an area surrounded by the inner standing portion 611B and the outer standing portion 611C, and a regulatory protrusion 611F projecting from an annular plate member at predetermined intervals. It is formed.

The inner standing portion 611A is erected on the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 33) from the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer standing portion 611C is erected on the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 33) from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate standing portion 611B is erected at an intermediate position between the inner standing portion 611A and the outer standing portion 611B. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611B is formed by being divided into seven parts around the axis, and each divided end portion is connected to the outer standing portion 611C.

The inner concave groove 611D is a region for arranging the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620 described later inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611A, and the intermediate standing portion 611B in three directions. Is formed.

The outer concave groove 611E is an area for arranging the irradiation unit 650 described later inside, and is formed by surrounding the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611C, and the intermediate standing portion 611B in three directions. To.

The regulation protrusion 611F is a protrusion that suppresses the collar C pivotally supported by the front base 612 from rattling on the back side, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened in the axis of the collar C. At the same time, a protrusion is formed on the front side. In this embodiment, the regulation protrusions 611F are formed at six locations with predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, the inner standing portion 611A, the intermediate standing portion 611B, the outer standing portion 611C, and the regulation protrusion 611F of the back base 611 stand inward. The erection portion 612A, the intermediate erection portion 612B, the outer erection portion 612C and the shaft portion 612F are erected. That is, in the state where the base member 610 is assembled, the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 612A to 612C of the front base 612 are overlapped with the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 611A to 611C of the back base 611. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612F is inserted through the regulation protrusion 611F.

A plurality of holding pins 612G are erected in the area on the back surface of the front base 612 between the intermediate standing portion 611B and the outer standing portion 612C. The holding pin 612G is an axial state having a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of LEDs 651 and for incident the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. Arranged. That is, the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650.

The irradiation unit 650 is the back surface of the front base 612 and is mounted in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611B and the outer standing portion 612C, and the front surface of the back base 611 is superimposed on the back surface of the front base 612. As a result, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XXXVI of FIG. 34.

As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular cutout portion 612B1 is formed in the intermediate standing portion 612B of the front base 612 on the standing tip side thereof. Similarly, a substantially semicircular notch 611B1 is formed at a position in phase with the notch 612B1 on the standing tip side of the intermediate standing portion 611B of the back base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state where the standing tip surfaces of the intermediate standing portions 611B and 612B are overlapped with each other (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), the notched portions 611B1 and 612B2 form a substantially circular opening in the front view. To. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the cutout portions 611B1 and 612B1 of the intermediate standing portions 611B and 612B, and is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Will be done. The circular opening is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37. In FIG. 38, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the regulation protrusion 611F of the back surface base 611, and is formed by cutting out a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line in a direction orthogonal to the radial direction. Will be done.

The reflection portion 622 is a portion where the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and the entire area of the projection plate member 620 in the front view is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a pattern. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is applied to the reflecting portion 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily see the diffusely reflected light and can see the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, is formed of an annular plate-like body in front view, and has an outer diameter dimension larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set to a large size and is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back surface side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 37) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is inclined toward the front side from the tooth portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, the back surface portion 632 on the side surface on the back surface side, and the end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632. The inclined surface portion 633 is provided.

As described above, the tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface to which the gear 664 is meshed, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined toward the front side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is a virtual angle in which the intersection angle Θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 extends the back surface portion 632 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle Θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (Θ1 = Θ2).

The groove-forming member 640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape in front view. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface portion 641A on one surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641B on the other surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. A front surface portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from an end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 to the back surface side are provided.

The side surface portion 641A is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the side surfaces of the projection plate member 620 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38), and has a constant facing distance around the plane and the axis of the projection plate member 620 on the front side. Formed apart.

The contact surface 641B is a surface that abuts on the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641A and the projection plate member 620 to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and its cross section is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641A. At the same time, it is formed in a circle around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641A and the contact surface 641B can be arranged on the projection plate member 620 to form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 and is inclined toward the back surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back surface is a virtual angle in which the intersection angle Θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 extends the front portion 642 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle Θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (Θ3 = Θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the color C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (A) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39 (B) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 in the XXXIXB-XXXIXB line of FIG. 39 (A). 40 (A) to 40 (C) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. It should be noted that FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C) show the transition state when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612F of the front base 612. Further, in FIGS. 39 and 40, a state in which the back base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (A) and 39 (B), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612F, the protruding portion C1 projecting radially outward thereof is the front side (FIG. 3) of the projection plate member 620. It is arranged between the side surface of 39 (B) lower side) and the side surface portion 641A of the groove forming member 640 (guide groove 641).

Further, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641A of the groove forming member 640 is from the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap, the projection plate member 620 is arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions by the gap. The contact surface 641B of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C even if the groove forming member 640 is displaced. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

Next, the attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612F of the front base 612 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C).

As shown in FIGS. 39 (A) and 40 (A), when the color C is arranged on the shaft portion 612F, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612.

Here, the arrangement of the projection plate member 620 on the front base 612 is performed by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612D of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612D is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and the projection plate is formed by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612D. The member 620 can be positioned and arranged.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612F on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612F, the color C can be arranged on the front base 612 in the state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

Next, in the arrangement of the color C on the shaft portion 612F, the axis of the color C is on the back side (upper side in FIG. 40 (A)) with respect to the axis of the shaft portion 612F on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 40 (A)). It is done in a state of being inclined to. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612F, and the protruding portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (B)) with the tip of the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis of the color C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612F.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), by displacing the collar C toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (C)), the tip surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact with each other. It is arranged at a position facing the surface. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641.

Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) in order to arrange the collars. There was a problem that the efficiency of assembly was poor because it was necessary to arrange the collar and both hands were used for the assembly.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch portion 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the collar C as described above. do not have. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

By lining the back base 611 from the back side to the projection unit 600 assembled in this way, the projection unit 600 can be assembled.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

41 (A) to 43 (B) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In addition, in FIG. 41 (B), FIG. 42 (B) and FIG. 43 (B), the cross-sectional line is not shown for the sake of easy understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 41 (B), 42 (B) and 43 (B), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is the present invention. Considering that it does not affect the invention, the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is shown in a orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (A) and 41 (B), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle Α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle A1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side of FIG. 41B).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is applied to the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced by incident on the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side surface of the projection plate member 620.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of the light transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, the projection plate is formed. The light traveling through the member 620 is also emitted from the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It can be totally reflected on the side of the back. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light incident from the edge portion of the projection plate member 620.

That is, when the light passing through the medium having a high refractive index travels to the medium having a low refractive index, it is totally reflected without being incident on the medium having a low refractive index when the incident angle is increased. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body, and light is incident from the end face (edge portion) thereof, so that the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light is not incident on the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling on the projection plate member 620.

Similarly, regarding the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air, since the refractive index of air is a value sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transmissive material (refractive index 1), it proceeds inside the projection plate member 620. The light is not incident on the air (in the atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling on the projection plate member 620.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle Β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. Will be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center side of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. ..

That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light radiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light-transmitting material amount of the projection plate member 620 is formed, so that the light-transmitting material is irradiated. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and proceed in the same manner as the light having an irradiation angle Α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle A, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle Β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate. can.

That is, not only the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the light that is reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 is emitted. The amount of light can be increased to make patterns and patterns stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is such that the groove forming member 640 is in front of the light source A in the front direction (on FIG. 42 (A)) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle of the light when irradiating the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 becomes smaller because the position is shifted in the direction). This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on the inner side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected. The above-mentioned state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle Β and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed at the same crossing angle Θ4 as the crossing angle Θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). (See), so after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end 644, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light of the irradiation angle Β can be transmitted to the projection plate member. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle Β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (A) and 43 (B), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle Γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and is advanced toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (face), the light reflected from the inside of the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light emitted to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The emitted light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and is advanced toward the axial center side of the projection plate member 620, similarly to the light at the irradiation angle A. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle A, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated to the irradiation angle Γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate.

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 can be incident not only on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. By that amount, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the amount of light that is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is emitted. Can be increased to make patterns and patterns stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the gear member 630 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance is deteriorated accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is such that the gear member 630 is in the back direction with the light source A (downward in FIG. 43 (A)) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced by the amount of the misaligned arrangement. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on the side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected and the above-mentioned state. (A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle Γ and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed at the same crossing angle Θ2 as the crossing angle Θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). (See), so after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end 634, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted to the irradiation angle Γ can be emitted. The area reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle Β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the attachment structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

44 (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44 (B) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLIVB of FIG. 44 (A). 45 (A) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLVA of FIG. 44 (A), and FIG. 45 (B) is an irradiation unit 650 in the XLVB-XLVB line of FIG. 44 (B). It is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIGS. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 is provided on a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front surface, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) first block 653 and second block 654 are provided.

The substrate member 652 is formed of an elastically deformable material in a horizontally long strip shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting means for irradiating light for incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs 651 are in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the front surface of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along (FIG. 44 (B) left-right direction).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are arranged on the longitudinal center side of the substrate member 652. At the same time, the second blocks 654 are arranged on both sides of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are less likely to be elastically deformed) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between the adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

46 (A) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46 (B) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 in the XLVIB-XLVIB line of FIG. 46 (A). 46 (C) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46 (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 in the XLVID-XLVID line of FIG. 46 (C).

The first block 653 has a front side (paper surface of FIG. 46 (A)) from a bottom wall portion 653A having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view and a side wall portion 653B erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653A toward the front side. The front side) is formed in an open box shape.

Of the four side wall portions 653B, the facing side wall portion 653B (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653A) has a fastening hole H recessed in the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that. Further, the side wall portions 653B different from the side wall portion 653B in which the fastening hole H is recessed are connected to each other by the connecting wall 653C, and the protrusion 653C1 is projected from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653C.

The second block 654 is located on the front side (front of the paper surface in FIG. 46 (C)) from the bottom wall portion 654A having a rectangular front view and the side wall portion 654B erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654A toward the front side. The side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 654A1 in front view is bored in the bottom wall portion 654A so that an electrical connection line can be inserted through the bottom wall portion 654A.

A fastening hole H is recessed in the front end surface of the side wall portion 654B erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654A among the four side wall portions 654B, so that the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653B erected from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654A are connected to each other by the connecting wall 654C, and the connecting wall 654C has a fastening hole H recessed in the end surface on the front side thereof, and the screw S1. Can be fastened.

Insertion holes 653B1 and 654B1 are bored in the first block 653 and the second block 654 at two locations of the side wall portions 653B and 654B erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653A and 654A (FIG. 45). (A) and FIG. 46 (B)). The holding pin 612G of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653B1 and 654B1. As a result, it is possible to position the arrangement positions of both blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and hold them at the arrangement positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to the first virtual plane (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes H) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46 (A)). In addition, it is formed in a shape that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 46 (A)) and is symmetrical with respect to the second virtual plane that is perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the first block 653 of 2 is arranged with respect to the substrate member 620 of 1, the first block 653 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 has neither the vertical direction nor the longitudinal direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability at the time of assembling work is improved. Can be planned.

Similarly, the second block 654 is relative to the first virtual plane (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes H) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46 (C)). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second block 654 of the second is arranged with respect to the substrate member 620 of one, the second block 654 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when the second block 654 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the second block 654 does not have a vertical direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability at the time of assembling work is improved. Can be done.

It will be described back to FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and a predetermined distance from the adjacent ones. To.

Specifically, in the first block 653 and the second block 654, the front surface thereof is overlapped with the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole H. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653C1 of the first block 653 is projected to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652.

Only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front surface of the board member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back surface of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with an open front surface, and the opened side thereof is arranged so as to overlap the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 652 and 654 have a recess on the surface on the side to be overlapped (arranged) on the substrate member 652, the electronic component or connector mounted on the substrate member 652 is provided in the recess (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and the connector can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the electronic components and the connector from being damaged by the contact with the surrounding displaced members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can.

Further, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653, 654, so that it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) due to contact with a surrounding displaced member (for example, a projection plate member 620). can. Further, the portion of the substrate member 652 where both blocks 652 and 654 are not arranged is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that is convex toward the back surface (see FIG. 34), so that the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (disconnected) even in the portion where both blocks 652 and 654 are not arranged.

A method of arranging (assembling method) the irradiation unit 650 configured in this way on the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611B and the outer standing portion 612C. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, each holding pin 612G erected from the back surface of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653B1 and 654B1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. ..

As a result, both blocks 653, 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, by superimposing the front surface of the back surface base 611 on the back surface of the front surface base 612, the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (assembled) on the base member 610.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as described above. That is, not only the circumferential distance of the LED 651 in one irradiation unit 650, but also the circumferential distance of the LED 651 between the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the other. Will be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 causes the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to be incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to dispose a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of such LEDs 651 arranged (attached), each LED 651 is arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 to a posture toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do this, which increases the time and effort of the arrangement work.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 formed so as to be elastically deformable, one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650). Is arranged (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), so that the arrangement work of a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at one time (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the labor of disposing the LED 651 by that amount.

Further, by inserting the holding pin 612G of the back base 612 into the insertion holes 653B1 and 654B1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, and the LED 651 can be held. The direction of the irradiation surface can be specified (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble a plurality of LEDs 651 to the rear base 612 while adjusting their irradiation surfaces individually, and each LED 651 can be inserted only by inserting the holding pins 612G into the insertion holes 653B1 and 654B1 of both blocks 653 and 654. Since the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), the labor of disposing (attaching) the LED 651 can be suppressed from this point as well.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back surface base 612, vibration and the like occur. By suppressing the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the external force input, or by correcting the warp or bending of the board member 652 itself, it is possible to easily define the posture of the board member 652 as a desired posture. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in the area of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the area surrounded by the four side wall portions 653B and 654B in the front view). Will be set up. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warping or bending of the board member 652 itself, so that the posture of the substrate member 652 can be changed to a desired posture. It can be easily specified. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

Further, each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface of the substrate member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction of FIGS. 44 and 45) of the substrate member 652. That is, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). The uniformity of the light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, in the second block 654, one of the fastening holes H formed at the two locations is formed in the connecting wall 654C, so that the longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 is increased accordingly. Can be shortened. Further, the second block 654 is arranged on the substrate member 652 in a posture in which the side wall portion 653B on which the fastening hole H is formed is on the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653B in which the fastening holes H are not formed are located on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652.

As a result, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 to ensure the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620 in the longitudinal direction of the irradiation unit 650 (horizontal directions of FIGS. 44 and 45). ) Can be shortened to provide a space between adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612F can be arranged by utilizing such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily brought close to each other.

On the other hand, in the first block 653, since both of the fastening holes H formed at the two locations are formed in the connecting wall 654C, the distance between the fastening hole H and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position of fastening and fixing the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, the influence of the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration can be made difficult to act on the LED 651, and the warping or bending of the board member 652 itself can be made particularly easy to correct in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, since the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the direction can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

In this case, in the first block 653, since the distance between the fastening holes H formed at the two locations becomes large, the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes H at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connecting wall 653C is provided between the side wall portions 653B where the fastening hole H is formed, and the protrusion 653C1 projecting from the connecting wall 653C is inserted into the substrate member 652. Insert it through the hole. Therefore, by engaging the protrusion 653C1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the board member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, since it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1 and the number of parts can be reduced, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost by that amount, and the direction thereof can be further increased. It can be easier to maintain.

Since both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (the outermost side in the longitudinal direction, the left end and the right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, they are not constrained by the second block 654), the longitudinal direction is such. The posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the arc center is located on the front surface side thereof. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the back surfaces of both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. Further, FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 is provided on the front base 830 having a rectangular shape in front view, the front base 820 superimposed on the front side of the back base 830, and the back side of the back base 830. A drive motor 880 to be arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820 by the drive force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. It mainly includes a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is arranged in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and is attached to the front base 820. ..

The rear base 830 projects to the respective axes of the opening 831 in which the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 is formed to a size that allows the transmission gear 861 to be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes a shaft portion 832, 833 to be formed, and a back side restricting portion 834 that is projected on the front side and extended in a curved shape.

The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the rear surface side of the rear surface base 830 is inserted through the opening 831. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the rear base 830.

Further, the opening 831 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. As a result, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the work process of replacing parts when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts for the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860, which will be described later, to be pivotally supported and rotatably held, and are formed in a columnar shape on the front side from the rear base 830.

The back side regulating portion 834 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 to be described later in the back direction (in the back direction of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the front side of the back base 830, and is a connecting member 870 described later. It is extended in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape with a slightly larger outer shape than the back base 830. The front base 820 has a shaft support portion 821 recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side of the paper surface to the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 erected on the edge portion on the back surface side, and a protrusion toward the back surface side. It mainly includes a protrusion 823 to be formed, a front side regulating portion 824 extending to the back surface side and extending in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 protruding to the back surface side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in the lower right side of the front base 820 in the front view.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap for arranging the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 described later between the back surface base 830 and the front base 820, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with dimensions larger than the dimensions. Thereby, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be arranged in a displaceable state between them.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion to which one end side (upper side of FIG. 48) of the urging spring SP, which will be described later, is engaged, and is formed in a columnar shape and is formed so as to protrude on the back surface side of the front base 820.

The front side regulating portion 824 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the direction toward the front of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the back side of the front base 820, and is along the displacement of the connecting member 870. It is extended in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall arranged laterally adjacent to the urging spring SP described later at a predetermined distance, and is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front base 820 toward the back surface side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, and by meshing with each other in series, the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is transmitted via the transmission gears 861 and 862. Is transmitted to.

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863A that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863B connected to the connecting member 870, a protrusion portion 863C projecting in an arc shape centered on the shaft, and a rotation position thereof. Mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863D for detecting.

The tooth portion 863A is a tooth mating surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, whereby the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863B is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870, and is projected in a columnar shape on the back surface side, and the shaft is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863.

The projecting portion 863C is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, is formed so as to protrude from the outer edge portion on the back surface side of the transmission gear 863, and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed by bending into a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863D is a plate that blocks the detection area of the position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and is formed by the tooth portion 863A of the transmission gear 863. It is formed so as to project radially outward on the side surface that is not.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, is formed by being curved in a substantially C shape in front view, and is formed in the front-rear direction at one end of the curved shape (upper end of FIG. 48). The gear-side connecting hole 871 formed through and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and the contact formed so as to project upward from the outside of the curved portion. A unit 873 is provided.

The gear-side connecting hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863B. As a result, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

The displacement-side connecting hole 872 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. As a result, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for regulating the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. Will be done.

Further, the width dimension of the tip of the contact portion 873 in the front-rear direction is slightly smaller than the distance dimension between the back side regulation portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back side regulating portion 834 and the front side regulating portion 824, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced is large. It can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by abutting on the front base 820 or the back base 830.

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 in between. .. Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a shaft support portion 841 recessed in a circular shape from the back surface side to the front surface side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (shaft support) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting an end portion on the front side of the pin member 890, and is a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Is formed in. As a result, since the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, it is possible to prevent the pin member 890 from falling off from the vertical displacement unit 800.

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the other end side (left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape in front view. The displacement member 850 is formed to include a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the urging spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 to transmit the driving force of the connecting member 870.

As described above, the shaft hole 851 is a through hole through which the pin member 890 is inserted, and is formed through the one end side of the displacement member in the front-rear direction, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Is also formed large. Therefore, in the displacement member 850, with the pin member 890 inserted through the shaft hole 851, the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840. The displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 so as to be rotatable about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

The protrusion 852 is a protrusion to which the other end (lower end of FIG. 50) of the urging spring SP is engaged, and is formed so as to protrude from the back surface side of the displacement member 850. Further, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position where the displacement member 850 projects from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 toward the back side when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, and the protrusion distance thereof is the front side of the back base. It is formed up to a position that almost coincides with the side surface of. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the urging spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the direction of gravity with respect to the front base 820.

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, and is below the front base 820 when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820 (FIG. 50). A protrusion is formed at the position (lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed of a metal rod-like body having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation shaft from being damaged when a force is applied to the rotation shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates, the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft support portions 821, 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since it can be divided into two parts, the resistance can be prevented from being damaged due to the increase in the resistance at one place.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. Is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is. It should be noted that FIGS. 54 to 56 show a state in which the back base 830 is removed for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is arranged upward (first position), the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is arranged upward. A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863B is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

Further, at the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863B was connected to the axis of the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. The straight line is arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, at the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the displacement member 850 and improve the durability.

From the states shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, power is supplied to the drive motor 880 to rotationally drive the drive motor 880, and when each transmission gear 861,862,863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated, the transmission gear 863 The shaft portion 863B is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863B is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

In this case, by rotating the transmission gear 863, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863B, the axis of the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side of the connecting member 870 It is assumed that the straight line connecting the connecting holes 872 has a tolerance. Therefore, the displacement member 850 can release the state (that is, the dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotation direction (rotating to the right in FIG. 54) that displaces the displacement member 850, the force of pulling the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 780 by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is applied. , The transmission gear 863 can be applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when displaced from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 and 55, power is supplied to the drive motor 880 after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state located at the dead center). I will explain when is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, in a state where the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after the displacement from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft of the transmission gear 863. At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863B and the direction connecting the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 are substantially orthogonal to each other, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP It is considered to be in a state where the force is balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off so that the displacement member 850 is centered on the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be made to perform a reciprocating displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction can be regarded as the normal projection motion of the constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the displacement is different from the above-mentioned displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). In the embodiment, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the variation of the displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, by simply turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, the variation of displacement can be increased, and the structure and control can be controlled. Since it does not need to be complicated, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is subjected to rotational displacement about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 is released from the transmission mechanism 860, and the action of the gravity of the displacement member 850 is released. When the displacement member 850 is subjected to a reciprocating displacement due to the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP, the displacement on the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the linear motion in the vertical direction. The displacement can be combined with the rotational movement centered on the shaft hole 851. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be displaced in an interesting manner.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863, and the transmission gear is rotated with the push and pull. Since the posture of the 863 is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850, and it is possible to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

Further, as described above, in a state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 Since the straight line connecting the axes and the straight line connecting the axes of the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the axes of the displacement-side connecting holes 872 are located at substantially orthogonal positions, the force in the push-pull direction is applied. The magnitude of the force component in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 is rotated is maximized at the equilibrium position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. .. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed. Can be easily continued.

From the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when electric power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861,862,863 (transmission mechanism 860) is further rotated, the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced to. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863B is further pushed downward as the shaft portion 863B is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connecting member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 to rotate the displacement member 850.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is arranged in the descending position (second position), the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is arranged downward. , The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863B is arranged below. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged downward, so that the displacement member 850 can be in a downwardly depressed posture.

Further, in the second position, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863, the axis of the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 are connected. The straight line connecting the axial centers of the holes 872 is arranged in the same straight line length.

Therefore, at the second position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, the rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and the durability can be improved.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. 57 (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57 (B) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position, FIG. 57. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the second position. In FIGS. 57 (A) to 57 (C), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 57 (A), in the first position, the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the rear base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the rear base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, it is preferable that the displacement member 850 is arranged above and the displacement member 850 is stopped in order to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. However, the resistance for driving the displacement member 850 can be increased to facilitate the maintenance of the stopped state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57B and 57C, a state in which electric power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more (the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 is second. In the state of driving the drive range Θ6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the transmission gear 863 and the rear base 830 can be increased, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced can be increased. Can be made smaller.

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace it in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time, but the resistance to displace the connecting member 870 is reduced. , The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), at the second position, the contact portion 873C of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863A of the transmission gear 863.

Here, when the displacement member that is displaced up and down is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacement member is added to the inertial force at the time of stop, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873C of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863, so that the displacement member 850 is displaced. The force for stopping the displacement is two: a force that is stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863 and a force that is stopped by stopping the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (driving the drive motor 880). It can be dispersed into one. As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (C), the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described. 58 (A) to 58 (C) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range Θ5. It should be noted that FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (C) show the transition state from the first position. Further, in FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (C), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (C), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 displaces the first drive range Θ5, it is second from the first position. As the displacement to the position, the portion where the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance that displaces the displacement member 850 can be reduced with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while being displaced to the first position of the retracted position, so that the displacement member 850 is first. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to a position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped.

That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state due to the inertial force for stopping the operation, but the resistance of the displacement member 850 at the time of stopping can be increased, so that the stopped state is quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 displaces the second drive range Θ6, the protruding portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance to displace the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range Θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the overhanging operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second drive range Θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is reciprocated with the displacement member 850 as the center of the intermediate position (balanced position), the protrusion is provided. It is possible to avoid the generation of resistance by the portion 863C and smoothly perform the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 (A) to 59 (C). 59 (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXA-LIXA line of FIG. 54, and FIG. 59 (B) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXB-LIXB line of FIG. 55. FIG. 59 (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXC-LIXC line of FIG. 56.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830. Is placed in.

That is, the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape due to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. As a result, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is restricted.

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state where the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872, the displacement member 850 is tilted in the front-rear direction by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is suppressed from being tilted in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in.

As a result, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 at the second position and the front base 820 and the back base 830 can be increased. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, the vertical displacement unit 800 is on a substantially straight line in which the contact portion 873 connects the axial center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axial center of the gear side connecting hole of the connecting member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and It is arranged on the side opposite to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 with the axis of the gear-side connecting hole of the connecting member 870 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles with respect to the front base 820 and the back base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is brought into contact with the front base 820 and the back base 830, thereby causing the shaft of the transmission gear 863. The inclination of the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the portion 863B and the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set. It is set to be the same as the outer diameter dimension of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640.

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

60 (A) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60 (B) is a projection on the LXB-LXB line of FIG. 60 (A). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640.

As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 2620. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and its outer diameter is formed to be the same as the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. Further, the projection plate member 2620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light in a part of the outer edge.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape in front view and has a U-shape whose cross section is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. The guide groove 2641 is provided. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 60B) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the hidden region side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove for guiding the collar C inward, and the recessed width is formed to be larger than the axial dimension of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide groove 2641.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. In addition, in FIG. 61 (B), FIG. 62 (B) and FIG. 63 (B), the illustration of the cross-sectional line is omitted for the sake of easy understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 61B, 62B, and 63B, the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The refraction angle at this time is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and the light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is shown in a orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by the virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle Α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 2620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axis center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle A1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge portion of the projection plate member 2620 can be arranged near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle Α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle Α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) projected on the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted by the LED 651.

As shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (B), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the irradiation that irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 62 (A)) from the guide groove 641. The light at the angle Β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center side of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, as in the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light radiated to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is emitted to the projection plate member 2620. Can be incident on.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the groove forming member 2640 on the back surface side (lower side of FIG. 62 (A)) of the guide groove 641 is irradiated. The light having the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the back surface side edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected on the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the side surface at the position where the projection plate member 2620 is adjacent (facing).

That is, by denting the guide groove 2641 on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is transmitted to the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and incident on the projection plate member 2620.

Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 by recessing it on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the color C and the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. ..

Further, as compared with the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the amount of the irradiation angle Δ added. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate. ..

Further, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light irradiating the gear member 630 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. In the first embodiment, the state in which the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are in contact with each other over the entire circumference of the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620 has been described, but the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment have been described. , A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

64 (A) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64 (B) is a projection on the LXIVB-LXIVB line of FIG. 64 (A). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640.

65 (A) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the direction of the arrow LXVA of FIG. 64 (A), and FIG. 65 (B) is a side view of FIG. 65 (A). It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the LXVB-LXVB line, and FIG. 65 (C) is the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 in the LXVC-LXVC line of FIG. And is a cross-sectional view of the groove forming member 640.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 according to the third embodiment is formed into a plate-like body having a circular front view, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are formed on the outer peripheral edge thereof on the back side and the front surface. It is arranged on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 projecting to the front side and the back side is formed on the outer edge portion thereof.

The protrusion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross section protruding toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64 (B)) or the back side (lower side in FIG. 64 (B)) toward the outer edge portion. Further, the protrusion 3623 projecting to the front side is set on the line of the virtual line F whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. Will be done. On the other hand, the protruding portion 3623 protruding to the back side is set on the line of the virtual line G whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. To.

The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate shape in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the gear member 3630 is screwed through a concave groove 3635 which is recessed on the side surface on the front side (upper side of FIG. 64 (B)) at a predetermined interval and is formed through the groove 3635 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. A stop hole 636 for use is provided.

The concave groove 3635 is a groove recessed in the radial direction, and is formed on both sides of each stop hole 636. Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64 (B)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a plate-like body having an annular shape in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed through the concave groove 3645 which is recessed on the side surface of the back surface side (lower side in FIG. 64 (B)) at a predetermined interval and through the groove 3645 which is recessed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an opening 646 for screwing.

The concave groove 3645 is a groove recessed in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the concave groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thereby, when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the surface on which the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are in contact with each other has an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is inserted. It is a surface that overlaps in the radial direction. As a result, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the holding force. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, it is possible to secure a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

66 (A) and 66 (B) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member 620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 640. In FIG. 66B, the cross-sectional line is not shown for ease of understanding.

Further, in FIG. 66B, as in the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 has an influence on the present invention. The light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown in an orthogonal manner. Further, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 as shown in FIGS. 66 (A) and 66 (B), the light having an irradiation angle Α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 3620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axis center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle A3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be easily reached to the reflecting portion 622. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened to make the pattern. And patterns can be clearly highlighted.

On the other hand, the light irradiated to the irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle A3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640, the gear member 3630, and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is first executed. It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the form.

Therefore, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620 side, and the light is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, so that the light of the light source other than the light source A is applied to the projection plate member 3620. Can be suppressed from being incident. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display applied to the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from appearing (displayed) by light other than the LED 651.

Further, as described above, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that radially overlaps the opening 646 (see FIG. 65 (C)), it is usually used. A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

Further, in this case, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction, the ground contact surface can be secured and the projection can be performed. It is possible to prevent the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from shifting with respect to the plate member 3620.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted into the axial center side of the projection plate member 3620 from the gap. There was a risk that light would leak from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light of the light source A of the LED 651 is connected to the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Further, since the protrusion 3623 makes it possible to lengthen the dimension of the side surface of the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66 (A)), the angle of the irradiation angle Α3 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate. ..

Next, the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67 (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67 (B) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. Further, FIG. 68 (A) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68 (B) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. Note that FIG. 67 (B) corresponds to FIG. 44 (B). Further, in FIG. 68, a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 by screws S2. In this case, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is placed on the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface is abutted (external), the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is set to a size that cannot be contacted with the LED 651 arranged between the two screws S2.

Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when it is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial rattling based on dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed of a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Can enhance the effect of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn, so that the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Also, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651.

As described above, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611B and 612B can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since the complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

Further, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial rattling due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of the parts can be relaxed, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

Next, the projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in the shape of a front view disk and is rotated about the center of the circle has been described. However, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is a vertically long rectangle in front view. The case where it is formed in the above direction and is slid and displaced in one direction will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of the projection unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state in which the back base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 is arranged so as to be slidably displaceable in the base member 5610 which is formed in a front view circular shape and whose central portion is open and the opening portion of the base member 5610. The projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, the drive motor 661 for sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and the drive force of the drive motor 661 are transferred to the projection plate member. It is mainly provided with a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmitting to the 5620.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape in front view, and is arranged in front of the back base 5611 having a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center thereof and the back base 5611 having substantially the same outer shape as the back base 5611. The front base 5612 is provided, and the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5665) are provided in the internal space formed between the facing surfaces of the back base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape in front view, and has an outer standing portion 612C erected on the outer edge portion on the back side and an opening in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view in the center portion. The central opening 5612H to be formed, the inner standing portion 612A erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612H, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612I protruding from the upper ends of the central opening 5612H. It is mainly provided with two shaft portions 5612K formed so as to project from between the pair of holding portions 5612I to the back surface side, and a sliding projection 5612M formed to project from below the central opening portion 5612H to the back surface side. Rectangle.

The central opening 5612H is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the central portion of the front base 5612 in front view. The player can visually recognize the pattern or the pattern of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612H.

The holding portion 5612I is a protruding portion for holding the rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) of the front base 5612 at both upper ends of the central opening portion 5612H. Further, the holding portion 5612I is formed with a concave groove 5612I1 which is recessed on the protruding surface thereof on the front side (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 71).

The concave groove 5612I1 is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape from the central portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) toward the end side, and the inner diameter of the concave groove 5612I1 is the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 described later. Is formed larger than. Further, the pair of concave grooves 5612I1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance dimension between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after the rod member 5625 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the concave groove 5612I1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is located at a position facing the concave groove 5612I1 from the back surface side (front side of the paper in FIG. 71). By disposing the holding portion cover 5628 provided with the above at both ends, the rod member 5625 can be arranged on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612K is a protrusion that serves as a rotation axis of the rotating member 5670 described later, and is arranged at a position symmetrical with respect to the vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 above the central opening portion 5612H.

The sliding protrusion 5612M is a protrusion that guides the displacement of the rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape from the lower side to the back side of the central opening portion 5612H. Further, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612M are arranged at positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is transferred to a pattern or the like. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be highlighted (displayed) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at a lower end portion, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is arranged below the opening at the center of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612H of the front base 5612), and is arranged at a position invisible from the front side of the projected unit 5600 in the assembled state. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the dimension in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72) of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627A meshed with the gear 5668 is engraved on the lower surface thereof, and a sliding groove 5627B penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion thereof.

The rack gear 5627A is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). There is, and it is formed in the entire area on the lower surface side of the rack 5627.

The sliding groove 5627B is a groove for suppressing the rack 5627 from tilting when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612M on the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the rear base 5611, the displacement direction is restricted and the rack 5627 is slid and displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the back side of the projection plate member 5620, there is a columnar rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72), and a horizontally long rectangular rod in front view at a position facing the projection plate member 5620 across the rod member 5625. A front cover 5626 having a shape is arranged.

The rod member 5625 is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620 and shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611, and the front cover 5626 and the projection plate member 5620 are formed. It is sandwiched between them and arranged on the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. The rod member 5625 is sandwiched between the member 5620 and the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is provided with a groove portion 5626A recessed in the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 72) and recessed in the left-right direction on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620. The groove portion 5626A is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged inside, and is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recessed dimension in the vertical direction and the front side is set to be larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. Will be done.

Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626A. Thereby, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed with respect to the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the axial direction of the rod member 5625.

Further, the rod member 5625 is arranged on the back side of the front cover 5626 with respect to the front side surface. That is, since the rod member 5625 can be arranged so as not to protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be arranged on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620.

Here, when the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the back surface side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits light incident inside the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and forms a groove in the projection plate member 5620. When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel and the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 decreases as the thickness dimension is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be arranged on the front cover 5626 in the state where the rod member 5625 is arranged inside without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620.

Further, as described above, both ends of the rod member 5625 are arranged so as not to fall off from the front base 5612, so that the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Be retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended and arranged on the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction. .. When the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the slide direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 arranged in front of the first block is arranged with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It is placed at the opposite position. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be incident on the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620 to make the pattern or pattern of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 stand out.

Further, on the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged, a bulging portion 5612N that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view is formed on the back side (front side of the paper in FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612N is a portion for raising the first block 653 to the back surface side, and the raising dimension thereof is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670 described later. Thereby, the rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

Further, a protrusion 612G is formed on the bulging portion 5612N. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the protrusion 612G into the insertion hole 653B1 and sandwiching it between the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent and formed in an L-shape in a front view, is arranged on the front base 5612 with the bent portion located on the center side in the left-right direction, and is an irradiation unit on one side on the longitudinal side. The second block 654 of 650 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 penetrated in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612K of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612K. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is arranged on the front base 5612, the rotating member 5670 can rotate about the shaft portion 5612K with respect to the front base 5612.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent to displace the second block 654 with respect to the first block 653.

The rotating member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction in which the tip portion on one side is displaced downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612K. It is arranged in 5612. Further, a displacement regulating projection 5612J projecting to the back surface side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612K of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is arranged.

The displacement regulating protrusion 5612J is a member that regulates the downward displacement of one end side of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip thereof is rearward (on the rear base 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 in a state where it is arranged on the front base 5612. It is positioned and formed on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670. As a result, the downward displacement of the rotating member 5670 on the one end side is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612J of the rotating member 5670, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 side is the displacement regulating projection. It is possible to suppress the interruption by 5612J.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. 73 (A) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73 (B) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 (A) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74 (B) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

75 (A) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75 (B) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76 (A) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76 (B) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. Note that FIGS. 74 and 76 show a state in which the back base 5611 is removed. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is only the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction reversed left and right, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73 (A) and 74 (A), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged at the substantially central portion on the left and right sides of the central opening portion 5612H, the rotations arranged on both sides in the left-right direction. The member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) so that one end side is displaced downward. As a result, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the light of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be incident from the left and right sides (left and right sides of FIG. 74 (A)) of the projection plate member 5620, and the light of the LED 651 can be incidented by that amount. The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73 (A) and 74 (A), a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, and the driving force is applied to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is slid and displaced to the right in the front view (see FIG. 73 and right), the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced to the right (see FIGS. 73 (B) and 74 (B)). ). As a result, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side of the front view with respect to the central opening portion 5612H.

In this case, the front cover 5626 arranged on the front side of the upper end portion of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface on the other end side of the L-shaped front view of the rotating member 5670 arranged in the slide direction. As a result, a rotational moment in the direction of pushing up one end side upward can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612K which is the axis of rotation. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 arranged on the rotating member 5670 is also displaced with respect to the first block 653 in the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) Left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to positions on substantially the same straight line.

As a result, with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

Further, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 can be measured. Can be changed. That is, the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the displacement is such that the light amount of the projection plate member is kept constant by lighting the LED arranged at another position according to the displacement. Along with this, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off, and the more complicated the displacement of the projection plate member, the more complicated the LED control becomes, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is lowered. Further, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LED is arranged at another position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced according to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since it is not necessary to control the LED to be turned on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the product cost can be suppressed from increasing.

Further, in order to irradiate the displaced object to be irradiated (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiation objects (LEDs) are arranged around the object to be irradiated, the irradiation range of each irradiation body is set. There is a problem that a part with a weak amount of light is formed between the two, and when the irradiated body is displaced, light and darkness is created, which lowers the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiating bodies, but in this case, the problem is that the product cost increases because the number of irradiating bodies to be arranged increases. There was a point.

However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of light and darkness due to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651 arranged, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can change the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 can be applied to the projection plate member 5620. It can be used for both the drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654, and it is not necessary to newly provide a drive means for displacementing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cost of the product from increasing.

Further, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 formed of an elastically deformable material and the blocks 653 and 654, it is not necessary to form the displaceable second block 654 as a separate member. Therefore, since the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit can be arranged on the front base by connecting the wiring after arranging the irradiation unit 650 on the front base 5612, the process at the time of assembling can be simplified.

On the other hand, when the second state is displaced to the first state, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612H by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced in the same manner to form the first state.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 on the side (left side in FIG. 74 (B)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is a projection plate by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612. As the member 5620 slides and displaces to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the front view L-shape of the rotating member 5670 is pushed downward and rotated around the shaft portion 5612K. Further, as described above, the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is brought into contact with the displacement regulating projection 5612J, so that the rotation range thereof is restricted.

As described above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is detailed because the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction are simply reversed left and right. The explanation is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side of the front view with respect to the central opening portion 5612H (see FIGS. 75 (B) and 76 (B)).

Next, the projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. Arranged as possible.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of the projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 is a projection plate member that is partially visibly arranged from a base member 6610 formed in a front view annular shape and an opening formed in the base member 6610. The 6620, the irradiation unit 650 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, the drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and the driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. It is mainly provided with a gear train (gears 662 to 664) for the purpose.

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and an annular front base 6612 arranged in front of the back base 611, and is formed on the facing space between the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has an opening in which a front view annular-shaped shielding member 6612R is formed on the inner edge of the annular-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment, and a part of the shielding member 6612R is opened in a fan shape in the front-rear direction. Part 6612P is formed.

The opening 6612P is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the back surface visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 formed in an annular shape in the front view. It is formed with a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference of the shielding member 6612R, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 6612 in the area between the intermediate standing portion 612B and the outer standing portion 612C at the outer edge of the opening 6612P, and is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 to the back base 611. By superimposing the front surfaces of the two bases, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in a front view annular shape, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612. Further, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, in the assembled state of the projection unit 6600, the inner edge portion of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visible to the player.

Further, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612R)). Since it is provided), it can be difficult for the player to see it, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by that amount.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface side, and is visible to the player through the opening 6612P of the front base 6612. When the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern to form a front base 6612. It is made visible to the player through the opening 6612P of. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) in the internal space of the opening 6612P of the front base 6612.

Further, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside the projection plate member 6620. The reflection portion 6622 is a portion whose inside is roughened by laser processing or the like, and a plurality of patterns, patterns, etc. are formed in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in the front view. To. In this embodiment, the shape of the pattern or pattern of the reflective portion 6622 is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and the reflection areas 6622A to 6622F such as the pattern or pattern of the six forms are formed (see FIG. 80). ..

Further, in the projection plate member 6620, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the outer peripheral edge portion on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), so that the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. 80 (A) to 80 (C) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. It should be noted that FIGS. 80 (A) to 80 (C) show the transition state of the projection plate member 6620. Further, in FIG. 80, a state in which the back surface base 611 is removed is shown. Further, the opening 6612P of the front base 6612 and the reflection portion 6622 (reflection regions 6622A to 6622F) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80 (A), when the projection plate member 6620 is arranged at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is inside the opening 6612P of the front base 6612 in the front view (viewing from the back of the paper to the front). The reflection area 6622A is arranged. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or pattern of the reflection region 6622A can be displayed inside the opening 6612P. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and patterns that emerge inside the opening 6612P.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflection areas 6622B and 6622F adjacent to the reflection area 6622A, but since the front base 6612 is arranged in front of the reflection areas 6622B and 6622F, the player reflects the light. The display of the areas 6622B and 6622F cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612P, the player does not see the display other than the display surface, and the other areas can be seen, which impairs the player's interest. Can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80B and 80C, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is projected via the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and patterns of the reflection regions 6622A to 6622F arranged inside the opening 6612P of the front base 6612 in the front view are switched. As a result, a plurality of different patterns and patterns can be displayed inside the opening 6612P.

Here, if a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiated body (projection plate member 6620) to displace the irradiated body and switch the display surface thereof, the visible region (opening portion) of the irradiated body is switched. From 6612P), the pattern or pattern of the irradiated object can be switched, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before the pattern or pattern is switched, so that the player can see the switching of the irradiated object. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

Further, even if the power of the light source (LED651) that irradiates the irradiated body with light is turned off to darken the display surface of the irradiated body, the irradiated body is affected by the light of another device or a fluorescent lamp in the store. By being irradiated, the pattern and pattern of the irradiated body could be visually recognized by the player.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 is made difficult to see and becomes transparent. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern switching of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape in the front view and is rotated around the center thereof, the projection plate member 6620 is slide-displaced as compared with the case where the projection plate member 6620 is slide-displaced. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612P of the 6612.

That is, if the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, the arrangement space in the left-right or vertical direction is limited, so that it is difficult to secure the pattern and the number of the projection plate member 6620 on the drawing side. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and patterns.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where a total of four first block 653 and second block 654 are arranged on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described, but it is not always the case. The total number of the first block 653 and the second block 654 may be 3 or less, and may be 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in the front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. It is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed of a light transmissive material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gear member is not necessarily limited to this. The 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

For example, the back surface portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of a non-transparent material, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 sides of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of the non-transparent material can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the gaming region from incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a layer of a non-transparent material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, in this case, the layer formed of the non-permeable material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or a flexible material, or is between the layer of the non-permeable material and the layer of the transparent material. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material or a flexible material having a high reflectance. As a result, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting unit 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or pattern can be clearly highlighted.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described, but this is not always the case. For example, a seal of a member having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 (for example, silver leaf or aluminum) is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectance is attached. Printing (for example, white color) may be performed.

In this case, the sticker or printing can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the game area from incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, by sealing or printing, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting unit 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or pattern can be clearly highlighted.

When a seal is attached, the seal may be attached so as to protrude toward the outer edge side from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

In the third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. It may be installed.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is surely totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance, and can be advanced from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the intensity (light amount) of the light irradiated to the irradiation angle Α3, and to strengthen the light reflected by the reflecting unit 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620. Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted.

Further, the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance can suppress the light emitted by other devices in the game region from being incident on the projection plate member 3620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when the light is not incident on the projection plate member 3620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), the light from other devices is emitted from the projection plate. It is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620 by being incident on the member 3620.

In the first embodiment, the case where the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the elastic body of the rubber-like body, the torsion spring, and the like. It may be a leaf spring. As the mounting method, a mode in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are connected and mounted, or a mode in which the protrusion 850 is mounted between the rotating shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820 is exemplified.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the displacement member. The 850 may be a slide displacement of the guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the displacement member 850 is displaced in the gravity direction as in the first embodiment. Since it can be a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion and the displacement velocity can be changed, it is possible to make the displacement member 850 perform an interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

Also in this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident from the side end faces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate is projected. A pattern or pattern can be displayed on the surface of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is not opposed to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation of the LED 651). One of the light emitted by the LED 651 by arranging the surface on the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear member 630, 3630 and the side end surface of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640). The portions may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651 while irradiating another non-irradiation member different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. A part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be made to use both the light for displaying a pattern or a pattern on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 and the light for irradiating another irradiated object.

In the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments described above, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620 and 6620 are arranged in parallel has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Specifically, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the back surface, and the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 at the arrangement position of the LED 651 is the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be a position to be irradiated on the side end face. In this case, when a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks from the inner edge of the front base 612, 6612 formed in the front view annular shape. It can be suppressed.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the front side, and the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 at the arrangement position of the LED 651 is the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It may be a position where the side end surface is irradiated.

Further, the projection surface of the LED 651 is arranged so as to be tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set to the LED 651. The position may be such that the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 is irradiated to the side end surface of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surface of the gear member 630, 3630.

In addition, the LED 651 is arranged with the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set. The light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be the position where the front portion 632 of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 or the back portion 632 of the gear member 630, 3630 is irradiated.

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620. The case of increasing the amount of emitted light has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 can be displayed on the projection plate member. The pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 may be different from the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 due to the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620.

That is, the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is formed by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the region of the reflection portion 622 (for example, dividing into three regions). The light incident from the portion is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 in the first region, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 in the second region, and is emitted from the right side surface. The incident light can be in a state of being emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the third region. As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and patterns of patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LED651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the irradiated body (projection plate member 5620), and the first to third regions are irradiated (for example, on the upper portion). The arranged light source incidents light from the upper end to irradiate the first region, the light source arranged on the left side incidents from the left end surface and irradiates the second region, and the light source arranged on the right side illuminates the right end. Although it is possible to irradiate the third region by injecting light from a surface), there is a problem that a plurality of light sources need to be arranged and the product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 due to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the second block Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, one is to irradiate the second or third region and the other is to irradiate the first region. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be arranged can be reduced by that amount, and it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be connected to the shaft portion of the newly disposed drive motor and rotated.

In this case, since the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654, the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. The amount of light emitted from the front of the can be partially increased or decreased. That is, the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620 can be displaced to change the shade of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

In the first embodiment, a projection plate member 620, a plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and a gear that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 661 are provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned unit (projection) is provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear trains (gears 662 to 664) may be arranged in such a manner that two or more are stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying the pattern or pattern on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize the display of the pattern or pattern on each projection plate member 620 in combination. As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and display patterns of the patterns, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. ..

In the third embodiment, the case where the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end portion of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is arranged has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) and the light projected on the side surface thereof may be reflected to the center side of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily collected in the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

Further, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and a portion where a pattern or a pattern is not displayed (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) is partially formed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 to form the projection plate member 3620. The display may be separated.

Further, as described above, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that radially overlaps the opening 646 (see FIG. 65 (C)), it is usually used. A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light of the LED 651 arranged on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). ..

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It may be a thing.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 123. In the first control example, an effect (variable effect) for showing a lottery result of a special symbol executed in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 and an effect for showing that a jackpot game is being executed (an effect (variable effect). The jackpot effect) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, as an effect during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, the jackpot effect (continuous jackpot effect) straddling the plurality of jackpot games is executed. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the entry information is configured to be memorable when the ball enters the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 140, and is stored when the jackpot game is executed. It is determined whether or not the ball information has the winning information for the jackpot, and when it is determined that the winning information for the jackpot exists, it is possible to straddle multiple jackpot games. A continuous jackpot production is executed.

With this configuration, the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game can suggest to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is completed. You can get interested in the jackpot production.

Further, in this control example, it is possible to change the content of the jackpot effect based on not only the entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed but also the entry information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured so that it can be done. With such a configuration, more ball entry information can be referred to, it is possible to easily execute a continuous jackpot effect, and the player can be interested in the jackpot effect.

In addition, in this control example, as a jackpot continuous effect, the content of the jackpot effect can be changed based on the number of stored ball entry information (number of reserved balls) at the time when the jackpot game is executed. ing.

Further, in this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric support), the game state (probability change state (high probability, with electric support)), and the time saving state (low probability, with electric support). )), The effect (battle effect) to show that the game state is continued is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned battle effect is divided into an effect that suggests whether or not the gaming state advantageous to the player ends (battle reach) and an effect for determining the effect mode of the battle reach (pre-battle effect). It is composed. With this configuration, when the gaming state that is actually advantageous to the player ends, for example, the battle effect is continued during the period other than the case where the normal jackpot, in which the gaming state shifts to the normal state after the end of the jackpot, is won. Because it can be executed, the player continues to have a feeling of expectation that the game state favorable to the player continues and anxiety that makes the player think that the game state advantageous to the player has ended. You can play the game while holding it.

Further, in this control example, as an effect for suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a plurality of effects having different big hit expectations are executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player's expectation for a big hit different depending on which effect is executed. Further, it is possible to display a plurality of expectation degree suggestion modes that can suggest the expectation degree of the jackpot step by step in one variation effect, and it is configured so that the expectation degree suggestion mode can be changed during one variation effect. ..

In addition, in this control example, it is configured so that the expected degree variable suggestion effect suggested to the player is executed by adding up the amounts in which a plurality of expected degree suggestion modes are changed stepwise during one variable effect. ing. With this configuration, it is possible for the player who has grasped the effect content of the expected degree variable suggestion effect to play the game while predicting which expectation degree suggestion mode is variable and how much, and the effect of the effect. Can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, as a suggestion effect suggesting the timing at which the specific effect (for example, the PUSH display effect for operating the frame button 22) executed during one variation effect is executed, the specific effect (PUSH display effect) is used. ) Is specifically notified of the timing of execution, and a precursor effect for notifying that the countdown effect is executed is configured to be executed. Then, in one variable effect, the start timing of the above-mentioned precursor effect, the execution timing of the specific effect, and the period of the countdown effect can be determined from a plurality of, and the precursor effect is performed based on the determined contents. It is configured so that the effect mode and the effect mode of the countdown effect are set.

With such a configuration, the degree of freedom in setting the suggestion effect can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced as compared with the configuration in which the suggestion effect is executed for a predetermined period of time.

First, with reference to FIG. 81, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols imitating the numbers "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after the variable display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the main display area DM, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Further, in the main display area DM, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first control example, the same combination of main symbols), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

A small display area DN1 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area DM. In this small display area DN1, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 85 (A)). That is, in this control example, the small display area DN1 is used as the guide display area DN1. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area DN1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

A small display area DN2 is formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area DM. The small display area DN2 is configured to be able to easily display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area DN2, for example, in the main display area DM, a display effect such as an effect that a predetermined character performs an action or an effect that prompts the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. If you are. While the display effect is being executed, the effect can be displayed in a larger main display area DM to provide a more understandable effect. Further, by simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol in the small display area DN2 during the execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to continue the variation display of the third symbol. Can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 81 (A), a sub display area DS is formed below the main display area DM. As shown in FIG. 81B, a reserved symbol made of a black circle is displayed in the sub-display area DS. As described above, if the ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area DS is the same as the number of reserved balls. In this first control example, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to 4, a maximum of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area DS.

In this control example, the number of reserved symbols is changed according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number.

Further, in this control example, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area DM are shown. The effect explanation mode for explaining, the frame button-related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and the hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area DS. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area DM and the sub display area DS is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area DS.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and the reserved ball exists, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 140. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball in either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 140 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entry is made. The variation display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area DS is provided horizontally below the main display area DM, and is a ball that has not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 140 (the ball that has not been changed. This is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls). Although details will be described later, this sub-display area DS is divided into a first display area DS1 and a second display area DS2 that displays game contents and effect contents to the player (FIG. 102 (FIG. 102). A) See). The reserved symbol displayed in the sub-display area DS is the reserved symbol corresponding to the next fluctuation (front view of FIG. 81 (B)) when the variable display being executed ends and the next fluctuation is started. (The reserved symbol displayed on the leftmost side) is deleted, and the remaining reserved symbols are shifted to the left and displayed.

Here, the symbol corresponding to the variable display during execution (the reserved symbol displayed on the leftmost side during the previous fluctuation) is the executing symbol display area (the area where the expected degree display mode DK1 of FIG. 102 is displayed). ) Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player which of the reserved symbols the variable display being executed corresponds to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 81B, a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area DM. In addition, at the right end and the left end (outside the effective line) of the main display area DM, three parts of the main symbol and a part of the sub symbol of the third symbol are displayed.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 140 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81, the number of entry times thereof. Is held up to 4 times each, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the sub-display area DS. In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the ball entering the second ball entry port 140 can be held up to four times, respectively, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is The number of times is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first ball entry port 64 and the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls for entering the second ball entry port 140 are not limited to the same. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64 may be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the second entry port 140, or conversely, the upper limit may be decreased. good. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area DS, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 (A) and 82 (B), the flow of each effect executed in the first control example will be roughly described. 82 (A) and 82 (B) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the effect content executed by the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 82 (A), in this control example, different effects are executed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the gaming state is "normal", that is, when the gaming state is in a normal state that is not in the jackpot state, the probabilistic state, or the time saving state, the normal effect is executed, and the gaming state is the "big hit". If it is, the jackpot medium effect is executed, and if the game state is "probability change or time reduction", that is, if the game state is the probability change state or time reduction state, the probability change is in progress (probability change state or time reduction state). Middle) The production is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the currently set gaming state only by looking at the effect being executed, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine. In this control example, each effect is configured to be executed in association with the game state, but for example, a common effect that can be executed when a plurality of game states are set may be provided. .. This makes it possible for the player to predict the currently set game state by visually recognizing the effect being executed, and the game is expected to be set in a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can make a person play a game.

Further, in FIG. 82, it is explained that the effect content (display content) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 differs depending on the game state, but the mode included in the effect content is the third symbol. The display mode is not limited to the display mode 81, and for example, the sound output mode output by the voice output device 226 and the light emission mode of the lamp executed by the lamp display device 227 are naturally included. be.

First, the effect executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. First, in this control example, the number of special symbol reserved balls at the time when the jackpot game is executed and the content of the reserved ball entry information (for example, whether or not there is the winning entry information for winning) is determined. Based on the result), the content of the effect executed during the jackpot game is set.

Specifically, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed in succession, a production (for example, 15 rounds of jackpot games) that partially informs the contents of the previous jackpot game (first jackpot game) is executed. When this is done, the number of rounds is notified for 5 rounds) in succession across multiple jackpots, so that multiple jackpot games are continuously executed. , Performs the production corresponding to each jackpot game, and before the multiple jackpot games (during the special symbol change period that is performed during the period from the end of the previous jackpot game to the execution of the next jackpot game). By continuously displaying the ending effect of the jackpot game, the jackpot medium effect 2 that produces the appearance that multiple jackpot games are continuously executed, and when the previous jackpot game is executed, the next It is configured to be configurable as a jackpot medium effect 3 that notifies that a jackpot game is executed and executes a continuous effect for a plurality of jackpot games.

Here, with reference to FIG. 83 (A), the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot medium effect 1 will be described. FIG. 83A is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot medium effect 1. As shown in FIG. 83 (A), in this jackpot medium production 1, the number of reserved balls is "3" when the jackpot game (big hit 1) is executed (a state in which a new reserved ball can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a big hit medium production that can be set when the winning ball entry information is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the jackpot medium effect 1 is set, when the previous jackpot game (big hit 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, first, a part of the number of rounds of the jackpot 1 (5 rounds (R)) is executed. )) The jackpot game effect (5R effect) indicating) is executed. After that, the 5R effect is continuously executed until the next jackpot game (big hit 2 (10 rounds (R))) is completed, and the total It is set so that the jackpot game production for 25R is executed.

That is, instead of setting the effect content (effect scenario) executed during one jackpot game as a series of effect content (effect scenario), it is configured to be set in units of a predetermined period (for example, 5 rounds). , The new production content (scenario) is configured to be set based on the ball entry information held and stored at that time.

More specifically with reference to FIG. 83 (A), when the jackpot 1 (15R) is started, the 5R effect 1 (see FIG. 85 (A)) is executed. When this 5R effect is started, an effect (notification of the number of fixed rounds) is executed to notify the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least 5 rounds. Then, when the jackpot game progresses to the 4th R, a suggestion effect (see FIG. 85 (B)) suggesting whether or not the next 5R effect is executed is executed, and at the 5Rth, the next 5R effect is executed. A notification effect (see FIG. 86 (A)) for notifying the result of whether or not the result is executed is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 83A, since the jackpot of 15 rounds is set as the first jackpot, the 5R effect is executed three times. Here, the third 5R effect (5R effect 3) is the period until the second jackpot to be executed next is started, that is, the ending period of the first jackpot and the first jackpot. It is set to be executed even during the fluctuation period of the special symbol change executed after the end (see FIGS. 87 (A) and 88 (A)). Then, with the start of the second jackpot (the start of the opening period of the second jackpot), the 5R effect 4 is executed.

As a result, when a new hold memory is generated during the jackpot game and the hold memory includes the entry information corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol, the entry information (for example, the number of rounds) is used as the basis for the entry information. It is possible to set a new effect (display of the number of additional rounds). Therefore, the effect (display of the number of additional rounds) executed during the jackpot can be easily changed as compared with the configuration in which the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot is set as a series of effect scenarios at the start of the jackpot. ..

Although FIG. 83A shows an example in which the period of 5 rounds is set as one effect unit during the jackpot game, the effect content may be set for each round. Further, the discriminant management process for discriminating the content of the ball entry information may be performed for each round, and the effect content may be set for each predetermined round (for example, every 5 rounds). In addition, when new ball entry information is generated, the content of the ball entry information is determined, and the information used when setting the effect content during the jackpot (presence or absence of jackpot, number of rounds) is stored in the storage area. It may be configured in.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing load from temporarily increasing at the timing of setting the effect content during the jackpot game (every 5 rounds in FIG. 83A).

Here, the display contents of the jackpot middle effect 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. FIG. 85 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the jackpot medium effect 1 is executed, and FIG. 85 (B) is executed in the jackpot medium effect 1. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect display for showing whether or not the 5R effect is continued, and FIG. 86 (A) is an effect display for showing that a new 5R effect is executed. FIG. 86 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example, FIG. 86 (B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen in the round immediately before the end of the jackpot 1, and FIG. 87 (A) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 87 (B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen showing that the jackpot continues during the ending period of the jackpot 1, and FIG. 87 (B) is a display showing that the jackpot ends during the ending period of the jackpot 1. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a screen, and FIG. 88 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen during a special symbol change after the end of one jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 85 (A), when the jackpot medium effect 1 is executed, the characters "big hit" indicating that the jackpot has been achieved and "777" indicating that the jackpot has been won by the lottery of the special symbol. The third symbol, which is stopped and displayed at, is displayed in the main display area DM. Then, in the small display area (guidance display area) DN1 of the main display area DM, the characters "right-handed" are displayed in order to guide the ball to be launched into the right-handed area, and the front view of the main display area DM. On the upper right side, the round number display area DM2 for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the running round number display mode DM3 indicating the number of rounds currently being executed, and it is confirmed that the game is executed. The confirmed round number display mode DM4 indicating the number of confirmed rounds is displayed.

In this control example, as the jackpot middle effect 1, a 5 round (R) effect is executed to notify the player in advance that at least 5 rounds of the jackpot game will be executed, and thus is shown in FIG. 85 (A). As described above, "5" is displayed as the fixed round number display mode DM4.

Then, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game (running round number display mode DM3) becomes "4", as shown in FIG. 85 (B), an additional effect (FIG. 5) is executed in the next round (fifth round). An effect (big hit continuation effect) suggesting the content of 86 (A) is executed. In this control example, as the jackpot continuous effect, the selected images DM5 to DM7 imitating the "treasure box" are displayed as display modes that can be selected by the player, and the selected images DM8 imitating the "arrow" are the selected images DM5 to. It is displayed corresponding to each of DM7. The player selects one of the three "treasure chests" displayed by selecting one of the selected images DM8 displayed so as to correspond to each of the selected images DM5 to DM7. Select "Treasure Chest".

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the display mode of one of the three “arrows” of the selected image DM8 is displayed so as to be regularly variable. The selected images DM5 to DM7 corresponding to the variable display mode (variable display mode DM9) became the selected images selected by the player, and the player could use any "arrow" as the variable display mode DM9. In this case, the frame button 22 is operated to select an arbitrary selected image.

The method by which the player selects an arbitrary selected image is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured so that it can be selected by touching the display area of any selected image among the selected images DM5 to DM7 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the player can make a frame. By operating the button 22, the selected image DM8 to be the variable display mode DM9 may be selected.

Further, in this control example, the same display mode is displayed as the display mode of the selected images DM5 to DM7, but a different display mode may be displayed for each selected image. In this case, when the selected image having a display mode different from the usual one is displayed, it is preferable to configure it so that the next 5R effect can be easily executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game will continue at the stage where the selected image is displayed, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

When the number of rounds of the jackpot game enters the fifth round with the selected image DM5 selected, the screen shown in FIG. 86 (A) is displayed. In FIG. 86 (A), only the "treasure box" (selected image DM5) selected in the jackpot continuous production executed in the fourth round of the jackpot game is displayed, and the number of confirmed rounds is displayed from the "treasure chest". "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode DM10 to be added to the aspect DM4, and the additional effect in which the value of the fixed round number display mode DM4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10" is displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least the next 5 rounds. Note that FIG. 86 (A) shows a display screen when “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode DM10, but the selected image selected in the jackpot continuous effect (see FIG. 85 (B)). The content of the additional round number display mode DM10 is set to be different depending on the above. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the big hit continuous production.

Further, in this control example, the fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 is displayed by a numerical value corresponding to the number of rounds, but the number of rounds to be displayed on the display screen among the remaining number of rounds of the jackpot game set internally. Any display mode may be used as long as it is variable according to the above, and a display mode using abstract expressions such as the movement, color, and size of the character may be used. By using the abstract display mode as the fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 in this way, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of having the player predict the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot game.

In addition, a player who has been playing a game for a long period of time can grasp the regularity of the display mode using an abstract expression, so that it becomes easier to grasp the content of the jackpot game than other players. You can increase your satisfaction. In addition, as the content of the jackpot game in this case, the number of rounds of each jackpot game is displayed in the jackpot medium production in which the production in which the first jackpot and the second jackpot are continuously executed is executed. It should be possible to grasp by the regularity of the aspect.

With this configuration, it is possible to predict whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the second jackpot game, based on the number of rounds of the second jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide game information that is more advantageous than other players to a player who has been playing a game for a long period of time, and it is possible to increase the motivation to play a game continuously for a long period of time.

In FIG. 86 (A), “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode DM10 to be added to the fixed round number display mode DM4 while the fifth round round game is being executed, and the fixed number of rounds is displayed. An example is shown in which the value of the display mode DM4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10", but the timing at which the additional round number display mode DM10 is displayed is a timing other than during the round game, that is, 5 rounds. The effect content may be set so that the interval period between rounds is the period between the end of the round game of the eyes and the start of the round game of the sixth round.

Further, in the jackpot continuous effect shown in FIG. 85B, a means for determining the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is provided, and the operation timing is set for a predetermined period (for example, after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). If it is within 3 seconds), the additional round number display mode DM10 is displayed during the 5th round game, and the operation timing is set for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). If it exceeds, or if it is not operated, it may be configured to display the number of rounds display mode DM10 in addition to the interval period between rounds after the end of the fifth round.

In this way, the player enthusiastically participates in the production by changing the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the timing at which the additional round number display mode DM10 is displayed based on the presence or absence of the operation. And the effect of production can be enhanced. The timing for displaying the additional round number display mode DM10 may be different depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the presence / absence of the operation. For example, a predetermined timing (fourth round round game) may be used. A discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 may be provided for a specific 1 second), and the timing of displaying the additional round number display mode DM10 may be different based on the discriminating result. .. Further, only when the operation content for the frame button 22 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated during a specific 1 second during the round game of the 4th round), the additional round number display mode DM10 The values displayed in may be configured to be different.

Next, the production content to make it appear that multiple (two) jackpot games are continuously executed, that is, the special from the end of the first jackpot game to the start of the second jackpot game. The contents of the effect during the symbol variation period will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 (B) and 87 (A).

First, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the jackpot continuous effect is executed based on the start of the round (14th round) immediately before the final round of the first jackpot game. FIG. 86 (B) shows an effect mode different from the jackpot continuous effect shown in FIG. 85 (B), and the number of selected images displayed on the display screen and the display mode are different. Specifically, the number of selected images is changed from three to two, and a display mode more luxurious than usual is set as the display mode of the selected image DM5. In this way, by making the effect mode of the jackpot continuous effect different, it is possible to show the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will continue depending on the effect mode of the jackpot continuous effect to be executed. Therefore, the player pays close attention to the content of the production, and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

FIG. 86 (B) shows a different production mode from FIG. 85 (B) in order to explain variations of the jackpot continuous production, but the jackpot continuous production (14) corresponding to the final round of the first jackpot game. The same effect mode as in FIG. 85 (B) is naturally set to be executed as the jackpot continuous effect executed in the roundth round. In this way, by using the same production mode for the jackpot continuous effect executed during the first jackpot game and the jackpot continuous effect executed at the end of the first jackpot game, the first time is performed at any timing. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the jackpot game has ended (how many rounds of jackpot the first jackpot was).

In addition to the above-mentioned method for setting the jackpot continuous effect, for example, this jackpot continuous effect is executed in the final round of the jackpot game according to the selected image (“treasure box”) selected in the jackpot continuous effect. It may be configured to suggest to the player that it is a continuous production of a big hit.

When the selected image DM5 is selected in the jackpot continuous effect shown in FIG. 86 (B) and the final round (15th round) is entered, the same display as the additional effect shown in FIG. 86 (A) is executed. As shown in FIG. 87 (A), the display is continuously displayed even during the ending period after the end of the final round. Then, when the ending period of the jackpot ends (the jackpot ends) and the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, the display screen shown in FIG. 88 (A) is displayed.

FIG. 88A is an example of a display screen during the period when the first jackpot game is completed and the special symbol is fluctuating. As shown in FIG. 88 (A), even after the first jackpot game is completed (after the change of the special symbol is started), the display of the additional effect is continuously executed. In the small display area DN2, the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Then, when the fluctuation of the special symbol that has won the big hit stops, the combination of symbols (for example, "777") for indicating that the big hit has been won is stopped and displayed in the small display area DN2, and the additional effect display is executed. The next jackpot game is started while maintaining the state.

In this control example, when the additional effect is set as the effect during the jackpot, the number of rounds set for the running jackpot and the next jackpot that becomes the pending villa (the jackpot stored on hold) ) And the number of rounds set in) can be added up to set the display mode of the additional effect, so before the next big hit that will be the pending villa is started, that is, 1 During the first jackpot, the additional round number display mode DM10 including the number of rounds set for the next jackpot can be displayed.

In the above example, the period from the final round of the jackpot to the winning of the next jackpot (the next jackpot is won, the opening period of the jackpot has elapsed, and the first round game is executed. An example of an effect that continuously displays the additional effect during the period) is shown, but other effects may be used. For example, the additional effect is completed in the final round (15th round), and the additional effect is completed during the ending period (Fig.). 87 (A)) and during the special symbol change period (see FIG. 88 (A)), a blessing effect may be performed to congratulate the addition of the number of rounds, or the final round (15). Rounds) and during the ending period (see FIG. 87 (A)), the additional effect is completed, and during the special symbol change period (see FIG. 88 (A)), the effect of congratulating the addition of the number of rounds. In the final round (15th round), the jackpot continuous effect (see FIG. 86 (B)) executed in the 14th round is continuously displayed, and during the ending period (FIG. 87). (See (A)) and during the special symbol fluctuation period (see FIG. 88 (A)), the additional effect may be executed.

When the above-mentioned blessing effect is executed, the round following the round in which the additional effect (for example, the additional effect executed in the fifth round (see FIG. 86 (A))) is executed during one jackpot (for example). For example, it is advisable to configure the same blessing effect to be executed in the sixth round). As a result, it is difficult for the player to grasp how many jackpots have been won while the extra effect is being executed, that is, the additional effect mode executed during one jackpot and 2 It is possible to make the effect mode of the additional effect executed between the two jackpots the same (the same except for an error to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify).

On the other hand, when there is no number of rounds to be added by the additional effect, "+0" is displayed as the additional round number display mode DM10 and the value of the confirmed round number display mode DM4 is "15" as shown in FIG. 87 (B). Is not variable, and the comment "Unfortunately the big hit ends" is displayed in the main display area DM, and the big hit ends.

Further, this control example is configured so that a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set as an interval period (inter-round interval period) between each round game executed during the jackpot game, but other than that. For example, even if the number of jackpot rounds is the same depending on the winning jackpot type, the period of the interval between rounds may be different. In this case, as the inter-round interval set during one jackpot, the inter-round interval before the end of rounds in multiples of 5 (for example, the inter-round interval set between 5 rounds and 6 rounds) is set to 5. A jackpot type that sets the interval between rounds to 2 seconds, and the interval between rounds two rounds before the start of a round that is a multiple of 5 (for example, the round set between 3 rounds and 4 rounds). It is preferable to provide a jackpot type in which the interval between rounds is set to 5 seconds and the interval between other rounds is set to 2 seconds.

Further, when the jackpot type with different round-to-round intervals is used as described above, it is preferable to configure the jackpot to be switched at the timing when the long-term inter-round interval is set. Further, when the effect of the big hit is executed with a predetermined period (5 rounds) as one unit as in this control example, the big hit starts (the start of the big hit opening period or the start of the first round). Since the interval until the long-term inter-round interval is set for the first time (for example, the end of the third round) is less than one unit of the effect during the big hit, the effect other than the additional effect is executed. Then it is good.

Further, in this control example, a fixed period (for example, 1 second) is set as the ending period of the jackpot regardless of the jackpot type, but the jackpot set for this ending period is also set. It may be configured to be different for each type, or it may be configured to be different for each set jackpot type for the opening period of the jackpot.

In this way, the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) is the same, but the opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the ending period set for the jackpot are different according to the set jackpot type. By setting the jackpot medium effect so as to straddle a plurality of jackpot games, how many times the jackpot was won while the player was executed one big hit medium effect. Can be made difficult to grasp.

In addition, when the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the winning of the next jackpot is different, that is, when the next jackpot is won by the special symbol change of the first rotation after the end of the previous jackpot. And, even if the special symbol fluctuation period executed during the jackpot is different between the case where the next jackpot is won by the special symbol fluctuation of the third rotation, the opening period set for the jackpot, the interval period between rounds, By configuring the ending period to be different according to the set jackpot type, it is possible to execute the jackpot middle production without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, returning to FIG. 83 (B), the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot medium effect 2 will be described. FIG. 83B is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot medium effect 2. As shown in FIG. 83 (B), in this jackpot medium production 2, the number of reserved balls is "2" when the jackpot game (big hit 1) is executed (a state in which a new reserved ball can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a big hit medium production that can be set when the winning ball entry information is not included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the jackpot medium effect 2 is set, the jackpot game effect (15R) indicating that the current jackpot is 15R when the previous jackpot game (big hit 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed). The production) is executed. Then, the ending effect displayed during the ending period set at the end of the jackpot game is the next jackpot (big hit 2 (10 rounds (R))) after the jackpot 1 is completed. Is executed continuously (extended) until is executed. Then, when the jackpot 2 is executed, the effect content is switched from the ending effect to the 10R effect.

In this jackpot middle production 2, when the newly acquired reserved ball during the jackpot game contains the entry information corresponding to the hit, a plurality of consecutive jackpot games are continuously executed. It is to produce to. In other words, the jackpot game production corresponding to the jackpot 1 is a normal jackpot game production (15R production), and it is continuous only by changing the content of the ending production based on the entry information of the reserved ball newly acquired during the jackpot game. It is possible to produce a plurality of jackpot games to be continuously executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to set an effect (continuous jackpot effect) in which a plurality of jackpot gaming machines are continuously executed based on the reserved balls acquired during the jackpot game, so that the continuous jackpot effect can be achieved. It can be made easier to execute, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, even if the normal jackpot game effect is executed, the jackpot game can be performed while expecting the player to shift to the continuous jackpot effect.

Here, the effect contents displayed between the two jackpots in the jackpot medium effect 2 (see FIG. 83 (B)) will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (B) to 89 (B). FIG. 88 (B) is a diagram schematically showing the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first jackpot, and FIG. 89 (A) shows the end of the first jackpot and the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 89 (B) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen in a state in which a jackpot of a special symbol is won.

As shown in FIG. 88 (B), in the ending display displayed during the first jackpot ending period, information for showing the number of rounds of the jackpot this time and the number of balls acquired during the jackpot in the main display area DM. (Acquired points) is displayed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the special symbol changes start, the ending display is continuously displayed as shown in FIG. 89 (A), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is suggested to the player. In the round number display area DM2 for the purpose, the running round number display mode DM3 indicating the number of currently executing rounds and the confirmed round number display mode DM4 indicating the confirmed number of rounds to be executed are big hits. It will continue to be displayed in the same way as. In addition, a small display area DN2 for displaying the variation of the third symbol, a hold execution area DN3, and a hold symbol display area DN4 are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 89 (A), in the reserved symbol display area DN4, the second reserved symbol from the left (the reserved symbol with 3 added to the circles that are variablely displayed one after another) is won as a big hit. It shows the state of being.

Then, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (when the variable display of the reserved symbol marked with 3 is stopped), as shown in FIG. 89 (B), the jackpot continues in the main display area DM (). A comment "The jackpot is still going on" is displayed to notify (that a new jackpot will start), and the number of confirmed rounds display mode DM4 so as to indicate the number of rounds "10" of the second jackpot. The value is variably displayed from "15" to "25". Further, in the small display area DN2, the combination "777" of the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed.

Although the content of the effect executed in the big hit medium effect 2 has been described above, the same effect may be used for the big hit medium effect 1. That is, in the above-mentioned jackpot medium production 1, since the production using a plurality of rounds is executed as the jackpot continuous production, for example, during the final round of the first jackpot or during the ending period after the end of the final round, the jackpot When a new reserved ball including the winning ball entry information is acquired, it is difficult to execute the big hit middle effect so as to straddle a plurality of big hits. In such a case, by executing the same effect as the above-mentioned jackpot middle effect 2, the jackpot medium effect can be smoothly executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84 (A), the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot medium effect 3 will be described. FIG. 84 (A) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot medium effect 3. As shown in FIG. 84 (A), in this jackpot medium effect 3, the number of reserved balls is "4" when the jackpot game (big hit 1) is executed (a state in which a new reserved ball cannot be acquired during the jackpot game). ), And it is a big hit middle production that can be set when the winning ball entry information is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the jackpot medium effect 3 is set, the next jackpot game (big hit 2 (10 rounds (R))) when the previous jackpot game (big hit 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed) A jackpot game production (25R production) that also integrates the game content of is executed.

This jackpot middle production 3 is a state in which a new reserved ball cannot be acquired during the jackpot game, that is, a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot 1 is continuously won at the timing when the jackpot 1 is executed. It is a production performed in. When the jackpot middle production 3 is executed, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the jackpot has been won in succession, which can give the player a sense of security and newly hold the jackpot during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting the player to continuously win the jackpot because the above-mentioned jackpot middle effect 2 is executed in a state where the ball cannot be acquired.

As described above, in this control example, when a jackpot is won consecutively within a predetermined period (in the reserved memory), a jackpot to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed. It is configured to prepare multiple medium effects and set the special symbol reserved balls at the time when the previous big hit game is executed and the big hit medium effects to be executed based on the judgment result of the reserved ball entry information. is doing.

Further, the plurality of big hit middle productions have different timings for notifying the player that the big hits have been won in succession. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game to the end while expecting to win the jackpot in succession.

This control example corresponds to the jackpot of the special symbol during the jackpot game when the jackpot game is executed in a state where there is a vacancy in the reserved storage number of the special symbol (a state in which the reserved symbol can be newly reserved and stored during the jackpot game). Even if the reserved symbol is stored on hold, it is stored on hold at the time when the jackpot game is executed because it is possible to execute the jackpot middle effect to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed. Compared with the case where the big hit middle effect is determined based on the information, the big hit middle effect for making it appear that a plurality of big hit games are continuously executed can be easily executed, and the effect of the big hit can be enhanced.

In addition, as one of the multiple jackpot productions, the number of rounds executed in the previous jackpot game can be partially notified to the player by dividing it into multiple times, so this jackpot production is one time. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the production is performed in the jackpot game or the production performed across multiple jackpot games. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the jackpot game will continue for a long time.

In this control example, during the special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot game, the small display area DN2 for displaying the fluctuation of the third symbol, the hold execution area DN3, and the like during the normal special symbol fluctuation period, Although the configuration in which the reserved symbol display area DN4 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used, other configurations may be used. For example, a condition for executing the jackpot continuous effect during the special symbol fluctuation period is satisfied. If a means for determining whether or not the game is being played is provided and it is determined that the condition for executing the jackpot continuous effect is satisfied by the means, the change display of the third symbol or the above-mentioned reserved symbol is performed even during the special symbol change period. It is preferable to execute a process of not displaying the related display, or to execute a process of displaying the content in a mode (for example, reduced display or movement of the display area) in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the content.

With this configuration, the player can grasp the end timing of the first jackpot game and the start timing of the second jackpot game based on the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It can be difficult to do.

In addition, during the interval between rounds in the first jackpot game, a pseudo ending display, a pseudo variable display that fluctuates a pseudo symbol that imitates the third symbol, and a pseudo that stops the fluctuating pseudo symbol with a combination corresponding to the jackpot. A pseudo-game execution means for executing a pseudo-big hit start display after the stop display and the pseudo-stop display is provided so that a plurality of jackpots are executed while one jackpot game is being executed. It may be configured to perform the effect. With this configuration, the special symbol (this symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when the first jackpot is won is the special symbol (this symbol) corresponding to the jackpot game of how many rounds. ) Can be made difficult for the player to grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the big hit medium effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced.

Next, another example of the jackpot medium effect 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 84 (B). FIG. 84B is a timing chart showing the contents of another example of the jackpot medium effect 1. In this alternative example, the content of the additional effect is changed from the 5R effect to the 10R effect with respect to the content shown in FIG. 83 (A), and the winning prize at the start of the big hit (winning information storage area 223A). The difference is that the presence or absence of winning information) is different.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 84 (B), the jackpot 1 (15R) is started when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is "1" and there is no winning prize. , 10R effect 1 is executed as the first additional effect. Then, while the 10R effect 1 is being executed, a new reserved ball containing the winning ball entry information is acquired (the number of reserved balls becomes "2"), and the 10R effect 1 In the jackpot continuous effect, an effect indicating that the 10R effect 2 is executed is executed using the total number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot 2.

By executing such an effect, one extra effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots (one extra effect is executed in a period from 11R of jackpot 1 to 5R of jackpot 2). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds set for one jackpot. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 84 (B), since the effect for 10R is executed as the additional effect executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots, the 10R effect 1 and the 10R effect 2 are executed. Later, the same 5R effect 5 as in FIG. 83 (A) described above can be executed, and the data used for the additional effect can be shared.

In addition, FIG. 83A or FIG. 84B shows an example of the addition effect, and is configured to execute the addition effect other than the above-exemplified contents. Specifically, the additional effects include 5R effects using a period of 5 rounds, 10R effects using a period of 10 rounds, 7R effects using a period of 7 rounds, and 8 rounds. The 8R effect using the period is configured to be feasible.

In this way, by using a plurality of effects corresponding to different numbers of rounds as additional effects, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds executed during one big hit, and to the player. While predicting how long (up to how many rounds) this jackpot will continue, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will continue for a long time.

In addition, the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot middle effect 1 executed corresponding to the single or multiple jackpots, that is, the last jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) corresponding to the jackpot medium effect 1. , Ordinary jackpot) may be configured to vary the additional effect to be executed. For example, when it is determined that the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot medium effect 1 is a probabilistic state. As an additional effect to be executed in the early stage of the big hit medium effect 1, it is easy to set an additional effect (for example, 10R effect) corresponding to a long number of rounds, or when the big hit medium effect 1 is completed. It may be configured to execute an additional effect (for example, 7R effect) that is executed only when the set game state is a probable change state.

With this configuration, it is possible to predict both the number of rounds executed during the jackpot and the gaming state set after the jackpot is completed by the additional effect executed, and the effect of the effect. Can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. In this control example, when the gaming state becomes a gaming state (probability change state or time reduction state) that is advantageous to the player, a specific effect (probability change state or time reduction medium effect) (hereinafter referred to as high accuracy medium effect) is used. )) Is executed. The period during which this high-accuracy medium effect is executed is a period during which a predetermined effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, and based on the result of the battle effect, whether or not the gaming state advantageous to the player ends. Is executed to notify the player.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97, the contents of the high-accuracy medium effect (continuous effect) will be described in detail. FIG. 90 shows the high-accuracy middle effect (continuous effect) flow that is executed when the game state is an advantageous state (probability change state or time-saving state), and is continuously executed until the jackpot is won. It is a timing chart which showed the production (continuous production). As shown in FIG. 90, the battle effect is repeatedly executed during the high accuracy medium effect (continuous effect). The battle effect is a battle reach (see FIGS. 93 to 96) in which the effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state (probability change state or time saving state) ends is executed in the period of one rotation of the special figure fluctuation. The effect for changing the display mode when the battle reach is executed is composed of the pre-battle effect (see FIGS. 91 and 92) which is executed in the period for a plurality of rotations of the special figure variation.

The details of the production will be described later, but in Battle Reach, the production (attack production) in which the character of the player and the character of the other party reduce each other's HP value (continuation value) is executed multiple times (three times), and the character of the company itself. When the HP value (continuation value) of is "0" (in the case of battle reach of the defeat pattern), the end condition of the advantageous state (winning the jackpot at the end of the advantageous state, or the number of times the special symbol changes is set is shortened. It indicates that the number of times has been reached), and when the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent's character becomes "0" (in the case of battle reach of the victory pattern), it indicates that the jackpot that the advantageous state continues has been won. If each other's HP values (continuation values) do not reach "0" (in the case of a draw pattern battle reach), it indicates that the high-accuracy middle production will continue.

Further, in the pre-battle effect, an effect of increasing or decreasing the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent character at the time when the battle reach is started is executed. This pre-battle effect is configured so that the effect mode is set based on the pre-reading result of the reserved symbol and the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set, and a plurality of special symbol changes are performed based on the effect mode. The HP management used is performed.

FIG. 91 (A) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the battle effect is started as the high accuracy medium effect (continuous effect). When the battle production is started, first, the pre-battle production, which is the first half part of the battle production, is executed. In this pre-battle effect, an effect for increasing / decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent of the battle reach, which is the latter half part of the battle effect, is executed.

As shown in FIG. 91 (A), when the pre-battle effect is executed, the boy character DM11 is displayed on the left side of the center of the main display area DM, and the opponent for selecting the opponent candidate for battle reach is displayed. The selection mode is displayed. In this opponent selection mode, selection units DM13 to DM16 corresponding to four types of characters A to D are displayed as opponent candidates to be opponents in battle reach, and one of the selection units is selected. Note that FIG. 91A shows a state in which the selection unit DM13 corresponding to the character A is selected.

Further, on the lower right side of the main display area DM, an HP display area DM17 showing a continuation value (HP value) corresponding to each of the four types of characters A to D is displayed. The HP display area DM17 is formed of a display unit that indicates an HP value with a horizontally long gauge and a display unit (DM18) that indicates a numerical value. The value (display mode) displayed in the HP display area DM17 is variably displayed so as to be variable (decreased) according to the attack on the opponent during the pre-battle effect.

In the pre-battle effect, when the opponent is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 92 (A) is displayed next, the effect of reducing the HP value of the opponent is executed, and the selection is displayed in the HP display area DM17. A display (circle mark on the character A) is made to identify the HP display corresponding to the other character. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp what the HP value of the currently selected opponent character is.

Further, during this pre-battle effect, only the effect of reducing the HP value of the opponent character is executed, and the HP value of itself (character DM11) does not decrease. As a result, until the battle reach is executed, as a result of the effect of attacking the opponent, the HP value of the player does not decrease, so it is expected that many effects of attacking the opponent will be executed. You can play games while playing. In addition, since the HP value of itself (character DM11) is not displayed on the screen during the pre-battle production, it suppresses the situation where the player feels anxious that the HP value of himself / herself decreases as a result of the performance to be executed. can do.

In addition, the production mode of the pre-battle effect is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and an effect of displaying the own HP value and reducing the own HP value may be executed, the own HP value, or the opponent. You may perform an effect of increasing the HP value of. Also, in the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, the HP value of the opponent is reduced until it becomes "0", and the jackpot (probability change state after the jackpot ends, or the probability change state after the jackpot ends) without executing the battle reach, which is the second half of the battle production. , A jackpot that is given a time saving state) may be configured to be executed.

In FIG. 92 (A), since the attack (main attack effect) for reducing the HP by "200" was performed on the character ADM13, the display unit DM18A corresponding to the character A in the HP display area DM17 is the main display area DM. It is variably displayed as "800" according to the content of the production.

On the other hand, in the display example shown in FIG. 92 (B), in addition to the effect of the attack by itself (character DM11) (main attack effect), the cat character DM20 appears and makes an additional attack (secondary attack effect). Is also executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92B, an attack that reduces the HP by "230" is performed against the character ADM13, and the display unit DM18C corresponding to the character C in the HP display area DM17 is the main display area DM. It is variably displayed in "770" according to the effect content of.

As shown in FIG. 92 (B), during this pre-battle production, the opponent may be changed in the middle, and if the opponent is changed, the current opponent can be identified. The HP display area DM18 is displayed (character A is marked with a circle).

Here, a method of setting the HP value that decreases due to the attack effect will be briefly described. In this control example, the result of the battle effect and the rough effect content (HP value) are obtained by the continuous value management means based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the pre-determination result (pre-reading result) of the ball entry information stored on hold. It is configured so that the reduction value (100's place) and the main attack effect) are determined. Then, for the purpose of diversifying the types of effects for the effect contents (decreased value of HP value and main attack effect) determined by the continuous value management means, the lottery result and the look-ahead result are obtained by the effect setting means. It is configured so that the detailed effect contents (HP value decrease value (10th place) and sub-attack effect) are determined without being affected.

Then, the continuation value (HP value) determined by the continuation value management means is stored, and the continuation value (HP value) is increased or decreased with respect to the stored continuation value (HP value) by using the continuation value management means. It is composed.

Specifically, in FIG. 92A described above, an effect (main attack effect) for reducing the continuation value (HP value) by 200 is set by the effect setting means, and the continuation value (HP value) is set by the effect setting means. A display example is shown when the content that does not increase or decrease the value is set, and the main attack effect (attack effect of the character DM11) that reduces the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character ADM13 by 200 is executed as the pre-battle effect. There is.

On the other hand, in FIG. 92 (B) described above, an effect (main attack effect) for reducing the continuation value (HP value) by 200 is set by the effect setting means, and the value of the continuation value (HP value) is set to 20 by the effect setting means. A display example is shown when a reduction effect (secondary attack effect) is set. In addition to the main attack effect (attack effect of the character DM11) that reduces the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character ADM13 by 200, the opponent character A sub-attack effect (attack effect of cat character DM20) that reduces the continuation value (HP value) of ADM13 by 30 is executed, and a total effect that reduces the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character ADM13 by 230 as a pre-battle effect. Is being executed.

With this configuration, the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased with respect to the number of effects set by the continuous value management means. In other words, it is possible to reduce the number of effects managed to continuously increase or decrease the continuous value (HP value) with respect to the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The burden of control can be reduced.

In addition, when the opponent during the one pre-battle production is changed, the HP value of the opponent character before the change is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, when the opponent is changed and the same opponent character is selected again, the effect can be continuously executed from the previous HP value. In this way, by gradually reducing the HP of the opponent character who can be the opponent of the battle reach during the pre-battle production and then executing the battle reach, the battle reach is frequently performed in the high-accuracy medium production. A series of effects can be executed without generating it.

In addition, if the HP reduction of multiple opponent candidates is biased during the pre-battle production, watch the production while expecting that the battle reach will be executed with the opponent with the lowest HP value as much as possible. be able to.

When the pre-battle production, which is the first half part of the battle production, is completed, the battle reach to battle with a specific opponent is executed next. If you win this battle reach (set your opponent's HP to "0"), you indicate that you have won a jackpot that sets a game state that is advantageous to the player, and you are defeated (your HP is "0"). In the case of (becomes), it indicates that the player has won the game when the game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set. In addition, if the battle reach is executed at a timing when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a hit, it will be a draw (HP will not be "0" for both the player and the opponent), and the high-accuracy middle production will be continued.

This battle reach is when a big hit is won during high accuracy (probability change, time reduction), or when a predetermined condition is met during high accuracy (for example, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, or a battle. It is configured to be executed when the reach production lottery is won), and if the result of the battle reach is a draw, the process shifts to the pre-battle production again. In this case, all the HP values of the opponent character are set to the initial values. In other words, since the pre-battle effect is an effect that reduces the HP value of the opponent character, for example, if the period during which the special symbol is not won is continued for a long period of time during the probable change state, the pre-battle effect is in progress. In order to prevent the HP of the opponent character from becoming "0", it is necessary to make it difficult to execute the effect of reducing the HP of the opponent character (attack effect), which may reduce the effect of the pre-battle effect. there were.

In this control example, a battle reach is generated in addition to the case where a special symbol is won, a "tie" is provided as a result of the battle reach, and when the battle reach is a "tie", the opponent character Since the HP value of is returned to the initial value and the pre-battle effect is restarted, the problem that the effect of the pre-battle effect is reduced by executing one pre-battle effect for a long period of time. Can be solved. In addition, by providing a "tie" in the result of the battle reach, the possibility of a "tie" can be left even when a production with a low expectation is executed during the battle reach.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 93 (A) to 96 (B), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during the battle reach will be described. First, FIG. 93 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after the battle reach is started. Here, the contents of the battle reach production will be explained. In the battle reach of this control example, the attack of oneself or the opponent is executed three times in total, and the effect that the result is displayed by the final HP value is executed. There are three types of attacks, "strong attack", "medium attack", and "weak attack", and the HP values to be reduced are set to be different for each.

When the battle reach is started, the characters "Battle start" and the characters "First time" indicating the number of battles of the battle reach are displayed at the upper part of the main display area DM of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Will be done. Below that, an HP gauge DM21 indicating the value of its own HP and an HP gauge DM22 indicating the value of the other party's HP are displayed. The HP gauge DM21 displays an upper limit value of "1000", and the HP gauge DM22 displays a value "500" reduced in the pre-battle effect.

The storage gauge DM23 is displayed below the HP gauge DM21. The accumulation gauge DM23 accumulates values based on being attacked by the opponent, and when the accumulated value reaches "MAX", a reversal effect is executed and an effect of winning the battle reach is executed. By making it possible to execute this reversal effect, it is possible to have expectations for a big hit until the end even if the opponent side performs a dominant effect during the battle reach where three battles are unfolded.

Then, a progress display area DM24 for showing the progress of the battle reach is formed below the main display area DM, and the history of the attack effect during the battle reach is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93 (B), the display contents when the first attack during the battle reach is itself will be described. As shown in FIG. 93 (B), the effect that the own character (boy's character) DM11 attacks (weakly attacks) the opponent's character DM15 is executed in the main display area DM, and the value of the HP gauge DM22 is ". It decreases from "500" to "300". Then, a "circle" indicating that the first battle was an attack of the player is displayed in the progress display area DM24.

When the second battle effect is executed following the first battle effect shown in FIG. 93 (B), the second battle effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 94 (A). Here, in FIG. 94A, an effect in which the opponent character DM15 attacks is executed as the second effect of the battle, and the value of the HP gauge DM21 indicating the continuation value (HP value) of the own character DM11 is “1000”. Is reduced from "" to "700", and the effect that the value of the accumulation gauge DM23 is accumulated by half (50) is displayed. Then, in the progress display area DM24, a "cross mark" indicating that the second battle was an opponent's attack is displayed.

Next, when the production of the third battle (final battle) is executed, the production of the third battle is displayed as shown in FIG. 94 (B). Here, in FIG. 94 (B), as the third effect of the battle, an effect in which the character (boy's character) DM11 attacks (medium attack) the opponent's character DM15 is executed in the main display area DM, and the HP gauge is executed. The value of DM22 is reduced from "300" to "0", and it is notified that the battle reach this time was a battle reach indicating that the player has won a big hit in which a favorable gaming state is set. Then, in the small display area DN2, "777" is displayed as a combination display of the third symbol to indicate that the lottery of the special symbol this time is a big hit.

In addition to the battle reach (winning pattern) shown in FIG. 94B, the battle reach in this control example is provided with a draw pattern and a defeat pattern as described above, and the battle reach of the draw pattern is set. If so, for example, instead of the third battle effect shown in FIG. 94 (B), the effect shown in FIG. 95 (A) is displayed. In the display example shown in FIG. 95 (A), an effect in which the opponent character DM15 attacks is executed as the effect of the third battle. In the case of a draw pattern battle reach, the HP gauge DM21 value of your character DM11 does not decrease to 0 (decreased to 500), and the battle reach ends without the continuation value (HP value) becoming 0 for you and your opponent. do. In this case, a new battle effect is executed, and the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91) is executed again.

As shown in FIG. 95 (A), even if the final attack (third attack) of the battle reach is the opponent's attack, a draw pattern is provided in which the continuation value (HP value) of the player does not decrease to 0. So, until the end of the battle reach, you can make the player have expectations. In addition, in FIG. 95 (A), the pattern in which the opponent makes the third attack as the battle reach of the draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player is defeated or the current battle reach is either defeated or drawn. The production that makes you think of a pattern is illustrated, but in addition to that, the pattern in which you make the third attack as the battle reach of the draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player wins this battle reach or A production that makes you think of one of the draw patterns is also performed. In this case, the player can be reassured because he will not be defeated in this battle reach when the third attack is made.

When the battle reach of the defeat pattern is set, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 95 (B) is displayed instead of the effect of the third battle shown in FIG. 94 (B). In the display example shown in FIG. 95 (B), an effect in which the opponent character DM15 attacks is executed as the effect of the third battle, the value of the HP gauge DM21 of the own character DM11 is reduced to 0, and the accumulation gauge DM23 is executed. The battle reach ends without the value of being accumulated up to the upper limit (MAX).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), even when the value of the HP gauge DM21 of its own character DM11 decreases to 0, when the value of the accumulation gauge DM23 reaches the upper limit (MAX), it is mainly. The character "Resurrection" is displayed in the upper center of the display area DM, its own character DM11 stands up, and as shown in FIG. 96B, a resurrection effect of defeating the opponent's character DM15 is executed.

As described above, in the battle reach effect in this control example, the effect result changes depending on the value of the accumulation gauge DM23 in addition to the decrease of the HP gauge DM21 of the own character DM11 and the HP gauge DM22 of the opponent character DM15. Because it is configured, you can expect big hits until the end of the battle reach.

Further, in the first control example, the content (effect mode) of the pre-battle effect is based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the hold storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect. It is configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area DM17 is configured to be variable.

Here, a display mode of the HP display area DM17 will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (D) show the HP display area DM17 that is variably set based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the hold storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect. It is a figure which showed the display mode.

FIG. 97A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area DM17, and is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the HP display area DM17 in a pattern in which the opponent characters are not replaced during the battle effect. Is. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), in the HP display area DM17, only the same opponent character (character ADM13) has a different continuation value (HP value) (4 stages of "700" to "1000"). It is displayed. When such an HP display area DM17 is displayed, the character ADM13 is always set as the opponent of the pre-battle effect, and the attack executed by the player in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 92 (A)). Therefore, an effect of reducing all HP values displayed in the HP display area DM17 is executed.

By using such a display mode, a plurality of HP values are reduced at one time, so that the effect to be executed can be made flashy. Further, even if the same character ADM13 is used, since the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) is different, it is expected that the character ADM13 having a low continuation value (HP value) is selected at the time of battle reach development. You can play the game while letting it play. Further, by making the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) different for the same character ADM13, it is possible to set a plurality of expectations for the jackpot for the same character ADM13, for example, the jackpot expectation. It is possible to reduce the types of image data for displaying a character as compared with the case where a different partner character is set for each time.

Next, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 97B shows a display mode in which the display order of the characters A to D is different from that of the display mode of the normal HP display area DM17 (see FIG. 91). It is a schematic diagram shown. When such a display mode is used, for example, when the degree of selection as an opponent character is configured to be different depending on the position displayed in the HP display area DM17 during the battle effect, the opponent who is likely to be selected during the battle effect. The character can be changed. Further, the display order of the characters A to D displayed in the HP display area DM17 may be changed while the battle effect is being executed.

FIG. 97C is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which an opponent character different from the display mode of the normal HP display area DM17 (see FIG. 91) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 97 (C), in this display mode in which the opponent characters E and F are displayed, the opponent character is a special opponent character whose initial value of the continuation value (HP value) is lower than that of the normal opponent characters A and B. E and F are displayed selectably. With this configuration, the player can be expected to win the battle reach in this battle production.

Further, FIG. 97 (D) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the number of selectable opponent characters is reduced with respect to the display mode of the normal HP display area DM17 (see FIG. 91). By using such a display mode, the choices of the opponent character selected in the pre-battle production are reduced, so that the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character at the time of battle reach development is reduced in advance (during the pre-battle production). Can be made easier.

As described above, in this control example, the display mode of the HP display area DM17 is determined based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the hold storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect. By configuring it to be variably set, the variation of the battle effect is increased and the effect of the effect is enhanced. For example, the display mode of the HP display area DM17 suggests the future game result to the player. It may be configured to do so.

For example, when the above-mentioned special opponent character E is selected as the opponent of the battle reach in FIG. 97 (C), it may be configured so that the battle reach of the defeat pattern is not executed. As a result, in addition to the effect of reducing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character in the pre-battle effect, the player can be interested in the opponent character selected in the battle reach. Further, when the opponent character E is set instead of the opponent character A in the display mode shown in FIG. 97 (A), the battle reach of the defeat pattern is performed during the current battle production period at the timing when the battle effect is executed. Is not executed, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, if the reserved memory information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect includes the entry information for executing the battle reach of the victory pattern, the battle reach of the victory pattern is selected by selecting it. It is also possible to display the display mode including the specific opponent character in which is executed.

Further, the display mode of the HP display area DM 17 may be variably set based on the operation result for the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. In this case, the display mode of the normal HP display area DM17 shown in FIG. 91 is displayed until the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted, and the operation effect of operating the frame button 22 is executed during the pre-battle effect, and the operation effect is performed. It is preferable to configure the display mode of the HP display area DM17 to be variable to, for example, the display mode described above in FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (D) based on the operation result.

In the above-mentioned example with reference to FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (D), the length of the HP gauge is configured to be a constant length even when different continuation values (HP values) are set. Therefore, for example, when the continuation value (HP value) is decreased by "100", the decrease rate of the HP value gauge is variably displayed so as to be different according to the set continuation value (HP value). The HP gauge may be configured to be displayed with a length corresponding to the set continuation value (HP value) without being limited to the display mode. Further, in order to easily grasp the remaining continuation value (HP value) by the length of the HP gauge, the display mode (for example, color) of the HP value gauge is configured to be variable according to the length of the HP gauge. You may.

By configuring as described above, even if the battle production is repeatedly executed for the player, the production mode can be different, and the player gets tired of the production content at an early stage. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. In this control example, the production mode of the pre-battle effect is based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the reserved storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect (when the pre-battle effect is set). Is configured to be variably set, but the effect mode may be variably set using other conditions. For example, as a game state in which a battle effect can be executed, a first game state (for example, a probability change state) may be set. ) And the second game state (for example, the time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state at the time of setting the battle effect (when setting the pre-battle effect) is the first. The effect mode may be set based on the result of determining whether the player is in the 1-game state or the second game state, or the ball entry information held and stored at the time of setting the battle effect (at the time of setting the pre-battle effect). Is determined, and as the determination result, the effect mode may be set based on the determination result of whether or not there is ball entry information indicating that the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, a suggestion effect, which is an effect executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state, will be described. This suggestion effect is a game in which a specific effect for showing a high degree of expectation of a big hit is executed in the variation effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is a production to suggest to the person in advance, and is a production consisting of a precursory production of the first half part and a countdown production of the second half part.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, the contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 98 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time when the precursor effect which is the first half part of the suggestion effect is started, and FIG. 98 (B) is a schematic diagram showing the precursor effect which is the first half part is completed. , Is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the countdown effect which is the latter half part is started, and FIG. 99 shows the display screen at the time when the suggestion effect (countdown effect) is finished and the specific effect is started. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example.

As shown in FIG. 98 (A), when the suggestion effect is started, the precursor effect is executed in the sub-display area DS. In the example shown in FIG. 98 (A), the character DC1 imitating a "car" is subjected to a dynamic effect of traveling from left to right, and the character DC1 is displayed with the character "goal" at the arrival point DC3. By arriving at, the production is executed so as to switch to the countdown production.

Then, as a movement route when the character DC1 moves to the arrival point DC3, either the first route DC2A indicating a linear route or the second route DC2B indicating a meandering route is set. In the example shown in FIG. 98 (A), the second path DC2B is selected, and a dynamic effect in which the character DC1 moves along the meandering path is executed.

Here, a detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 100, but in the first control example, the start timing of the precursory effect, which is the first half part of the suggestive effect, can be selected from a plurality of points. Since the period during which the precursor effect is executed is indefinite, the route of the character DC1 is selected according to the length of the period during which the precursor period effect is executed. This makes it possible to visually grasp the timing at which the countdown effect is started when the precursor effect is executed.

In FIG. 98 (A), as the precursor effect, an effect suggesting the timing at which the countdown effect is started is used, but other effects may be used as the precursor effect, for example, the countdown effect is executed. You may use an effect that suggests to the player, an effect that suggests the period of the countdown effect, or an effect that suggests the type of the specific effect that is the target of the countdown effect. That is, it suffices as long as it is an effect of notifying in advance information about an effect to be executed in the future as a suggestion effect.

When the precursor effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the comment "countdown start" is displayed above the main display area DM, and in the sub display area DS, the character DC1 arrives at the arrival point DC3 and counts down. The character "3" indicating that the period is 3 seconds is displayed in the countdown display area DC4. As a result, it is possible to specifically notify the player that the current countdown effect is an effect starting from "3" and the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

The example shown in FIG. 98B shows a countdown effect in which the countdown period is 3 seconds, but in the first control example, a countdown period other than that (for example, 7 seconds) is set. It also has a countdown effect, and it is set so that the longer the countdown period, the higher the expectation of a big hit. With this configuration, during the precursory effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, the countdown effect with a long countdown period is executed while predicting the timing when the countdown effect starts and the fluctuation pattern of this time. You can expect that.

When the countdown effect shown in FIG. 98 (B) is completed, as shown in FIG. 99, the character "0" indicating that the countdown period has ended is displayed in the countdown display area DC4 of the sub display area DS, and the main display is displayed. In the area DM, an operation effect in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed as a specific effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101, a flow for setting the precursor effect and the countdown effect executed as the suggestion effect of the first control example will be described. In the first control example, the suggestion effect is executed to notify the player of the timing when the specific effect is executed, and in the countdown effect executed in the latter half part of the suggestion effect, the execution timing of the target specific effect is executed. (Refer to FIG. 98 (B)) is executed, and in the precursory effect executed in the first half part, an effect that directly or indirectly suggests that a specific effect is executed is performed. (See FIG. 98 (A)) is executed.

Here, in the variable effect conventionally executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) the player that the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing is predetermined. A configuration was used that would run for a given period of time. If the period during which the suggestion effect is executed is predetermined in this way, the execution period overlaps with other effects executed in the variable effect (for example, an effect that suggests a higher hit expectation than the suggestion effect). In some cases, prohibition processing was applied to prevent the suggestion effect from being executed. Further, there is a problem that the suggestion effect cannot be executed for the specific effect executed at the timing when the period during which the suggestion effect is executed cannot be secured.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, if a plurality of suggestion effect data having different predetermined periods are prepared, the storage capacity increases, and further, the processing when setting the variable effect becomes complicated. A new problem arises.

Therefore, in this control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestion effect are set separately so that the period during which the suggestion effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestion effect (the end timing of the countdown effect which is the latter half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect which is the target of the suggestion effect, and the start timing of the suggestion effect (the precursor which is the first half part). The start timing of the production) can be set from multiple points.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect without setting the execution period in advance. In addition, since the start timing of the suggestion effect can be set from a plurality of points, for example, the period during which the suggestion effect is executed is variable based on the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, when a big hit is won). It is possible to set a longer period during which the suggestion effect is executed), or to change the start timing of the suggestion effect according to the execution timing of other effects. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when setting the suggestion effect.

FIG. 100A is a timing chart showing a flow of executing a suggestion effect in a variation effect in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (A), the timing at which the suggestion effect can be started is set 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the specific effect "PUSH effect" is executed 33 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Is set to. Then, the countdown period (30 to 33 seconds from the start of the fluctuation) is set so that the countdown effect (execution period 3 seconds) ends at the timing when the specific effect is executed (33 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). Then, since this change is a case where a big hit is won, the timing at which the suggestion effect period can be set longer (the timing 10 seconds after the start of the change) is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect from among a plurality of start timings. Set as.

As a result, in the example shown in FIG. 100 (A), after the precursor effect (effect period 20 seconds) is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the countdown effect (effect period 3 seconds) is performed. ) Is executed. Then, a specific effect (“PUSH effect”) is executed at the end timing of the effect period of the countdown effect. If the change this time is not a big hit, the timing when the suggestion effect period is shortened (the timing 20 seconds after the start of the change) is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect). ..

In this way, when the suggestion effect is executed for the specific effect executed at the specific timing of the predetermined variable effect, the start timing of the suggestion effect is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. The length of the suggestion effect period can be changed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the player can be made aware of the length of the effect period. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, even when the length of the suggestion effect period is changed, the countdown effect period, which is the latter half part of the suggestion effect, that is, the period for executing the effect of specifically (accurately) notifying the execution timing of the specific effect is , Since it is configured to be set based on the execution timing of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the effect of the suggestion effect.

That is, when the length of the suggestion effect period is variable, only the period during which the precursor effect, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is executed is configured to be variable. This precursor effect directly or indirectly suggests that the specific effect is executed as described above, and even if the length of the effect period is changed, it is executed in the latter half part of the suggestion effect. It is possible to reliably notify the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed by the countdown effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100 (B), the flow of the suggestion effect executed by the variation effect B different from the above-mentioned variation effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (A). FIG. 100B is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed by the variable effect B.

The variation effect B shown in FIG. 100 (B) is different from the above-mentioned variation effect A, and is a variation effect in which a plurality of specific effects that can be the target of the suggestion effect are set. The setting method of the variation effect executed by the variation effect B will be described focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned variation effect A. In the variation effect B, a timing at which the suggestion effect can be started 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the variation is set, and a timing at which the specific effect can be executed 26 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the variation is set.

In the variation effect B, as a specific effect that can be executed 26 seconds after the start of the variation, the boy character is displayed in a large size so as to cover the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (not shown). , "PUSH effect" (see FIG. 99) can be set as a specific effect that can be executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The jackpot expectation is set to be the same for these two specific effects, and the specific effect corresponding to the set suggestion effect is executed.

In the variable effect shown in FIG. 100 (B), similarly to the above-mentioned FIG. 100 (A), the period during which the suggestion effect is executed is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the special symbol is set. When the lottery result is a big hit, the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect, and the "PUSH effect" executed 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is easily set as the specific effect. is doing.

More specifically, in descending order of the jackpot expectation, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation, and then the timing 17 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect. A pattern that sets "PUSH effect" as a specific effect, a pattern that sets the timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation as the start timing of the suggestion effect, and a pattern that sets "cut-in effect" as a specific effect, the timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation Is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect is set according to the jackpot expectation in the order of the pattern in which the "cut-in effect" is set as the specific effect.

Further, in the variable effect B shown in FIG. 100 (B), the start timing (length of the countdown period) of the countdown effect can be changed according to the length of the set suggested effect period, which is the most. When an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit is set, the start timing of the countdown effect is set 7 seconds before the specific effect is executed, and immediately after the start of the countdown effect, the subordinate of the third symbol display device 81. Countdown effect of displaying the character "7" in the countdown display area DC4 (see FIG. 98B) of the display area DS is executed.

Further, in the first control example, the suggestion effect straddling a plurality of variable effects can be executed. The flow of the suggestion effect executed across the plurality of variable effects will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect when the suggestion effect is set across the variation effect corresponding to two consecutive special symbol fluctuations.

As shown in FIG. 101, in this control example, when a new hold memory is acquired during the execution of the variation effect, the information (hit / fail determination result, variation pattern, etc.) included in the newly acquired hold memory is determined in advance. (Look-ahead) is performed, and based on the determination result, it is possible to set the effect mode of the variation effect to be executed before the variation effect corresponding to the corresponding hold storage.

Specifically, the fluctuation of the fluctuation effect C (variation time 30 seconds) is started without the hold memory, and at the timing when 15 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation (the remaining period of the fluctuation effect C is 15 seconds), the first When a ball enters the 1st entry port 64 or the 2nd entry opening 140 and a new hold memory (hold memory corresponding to the next variable effect) is acquired, the ball is based on the information contained in the new hold memory. , Determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect.

Here, when it is determined that the next variation effect is a variation effect for executing the suggestion effect, it is determined whether the remaining period of the current variation effect is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) or more. In the example shown in FIG. 101, since the timing at which the new reserved memory is acquired is the timing when the remaining period of the variable effect C is 15 seconds, it is determined that the remaining period of the current variable effect is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, and the present The start timing of the suggestion effect is set at the predetermined timing (the timing when 20 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation) in the fluctuation effect of, and in the next variation effect (variation effect D), the specific effect (specification) executed 5 seconds after the start of the variation. A countdown effect (effect period of 3 seconds) is set for the effect C).

As described above, by setting the start timing of the suggestion effect and the end timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the specific effect) across the continuously executed variable effects (variable effects C and D), the variable effect C When 20 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the precursor effect, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is executed for a period (10 seconds) until the variation effect C ends. Then, the precursor effect is continuously executed for a period (2 seconds) from the variation start timing of the variation effect D to the execution of the countdown effect, and then the countdown effect is performed (2 seconds after the variation start of the variation effect D). After being executed for 3 seconds, the privilege effect C is executed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 101, since the suggestive effect can be executed in the variable effect executed before the variable effect in which the specific effect is executed, the early stage of the variable effect (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the variable effect). ) Can also execute a suggestion effect for a specific effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom of suggestion production can be further increased.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 101, when the timing of acquiring the new hold memory is less than the predetermined period (less than 10 seconds) of the variable effect C (for example, the timing of the additional winning B shown in FIG. 101). In the case), since it is not possible to secure a period for executing the suggestion effect for the specific effect C of the variable effect D, the suggestion effect for the specific effect C is not set.

In the above-mentioned example, it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion effect for the specific effect to be executed in the variable effect from the next time onward, based on the timing of the additional winning (the timing when the new reserved memory is acquired). Although the configuration is used, other configurations may be used. For example, based on the timing of additional winning (the timing of acquiring a new hold memory), the timing of executing the specific effect in the next and subsequent variable effects is set. It may be configured to be variable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily set a suggestion effect to be executed across a plurality of variable effects, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In addition, in FIG. 101, as an example of the suggestion effect executed across a plurality of variation effects, the flow of the suggestion effect when the start condition of the next variation effect is satisfied during the execution of the variation effect has been described. It is also possible to execute a suggestion effect that straddles a plurality of variable effects under other conditions.

For example, when the start condition of the next variation effect is satisfied and the start condition of the next variation effect is satisfied, any timing in the next variation effect is set as the execution timing of the specific effect, and the present It may be configured to set the timing for executing the suggestion effect at any timing of the remaining period of the variable effect being executed or the period during which the next variable effect is executed.

In this case, the content of the effect executed in the currently executed variable effect and the content of the effect executed during the next variable effect are determined, and the determination result and the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the next variable effect are drawn. It is preferable to set the start timing of the suggestion effect based on the result. By configuring in this way, for example, when a continuous effect is set in which the variable effect currently being changed and the next variable effect are a series of effects, a suggestive effect is provided for the next variable effect. If it is set to execute a special effect at the end timing of the variable effect currently being changed, that is, at the start timing of the next variable effect, the suggestive effect is performed within the next variable effect period. If there is no factor that prohibits the setting of the suggestion effect in the currently fluctuating fluctuation effect and the next variation effect, the remaining period of the currently fluctuating variation effect or the next variation The start timing of the suggestion effect can be set to any of the period of the effect.

In addition, when the start condition of the next (one after another) variation effect is satisfied, it is determined whether the variation effect corresponds to the jackpot winning, and the start timing of the suggestion effect is being executed based on the determination result. It may be set to either the remaining period of the variable effect of the above or the execution period of the next (next) variable effect. As a result, it is possible to easily set a suggestion effect period that is longer than one variable effect period.

In the first control example, the suggestion effect is executed for one specific effect, but the suggestion effect may be executed for a plurality of specific effects. In this case, it is preferable to set a precursor period in which a common precursor effect is executed and a countdown period in which the countdown effect is executed corresponding to each of the plurality of specific effects. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while predicting how many specific effects the suggestion effects have been executed, and it is possible to enhance the effects of the effects.

In addition, it may be configured to execute a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect while the precursor effect is being executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the suggestion effect is executed for the specific effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, an expectation degree suggestion effect, which is an effect executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state, will be described. This expectation degree suggestion effect is an expectation degree display effect that displays a plurality of expectation degree display modes that can notify the jackpot winning expectation degree step by step, and changes the display mode of the expectation degree display mode (big hit winning expectation degree). It is an effect composed of an expectation increase effect for changing the display mode to a high level).

First, with reference to FIG. 102 (A), an expectation degree display mode used for the expectation degree suggestion effect of the first control example will be described. FIG. 102 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an expectation degree display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 102 (A), in this control example, a plurality of expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3 are displayed.

The expectation degree display mode DK1 shows the jackpot expectation degree by using the execution display showing the information corresponding to the variation effect during execution, and in FIG. 102 (A), the jackpot expectation degree is shown by “LV2”. Is displayed. The expectation degree display mode DK1 will be described in detail later, but is displayed 10 seconds after the start of the variation effect, and is displayed on the display screen earliest among the plurality of expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3. To.

The expectation degree display mode DK2 shows the jackpot expectation by using a character appearing during the fluctuation effect, and in FIG. 102 (A), “LV1” indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed. The expectation degree display mode DK2 will be displayed 24 seconds after the start of the variation effect, although the details will be described later.

The expectation degree display mode DK3 shows the jackpot expectation degree by using the dialogue display showing the content and progress information of the fluctuation effect, and in FIG. 102 (A), “LV2” indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed. Has been done. The expectation degree display mode DK3 will be displayed 36 seconds after the start of the variation effect, although the details will be described later.

In addition, in FIG. 102 (A), each expectation degree display mode is shown by the LV display which shows the jackpot expectation degree stepwise, but it may be the mode which can inform the jackpot expectation degree stepwise, for example, corresponding to the jackpot expectation degree. It is also possible to use a configuration in which the color of each display mode, the speed of the dynamic effect, the output volume and the magnitude of the amount of light are changed stepwise. In addition, a configuration may be used in which the effect mode showing the growth process or the transformation process is changed stepwise toward the final mode.

Further, regarding the running display displayed in the expectation degree display mode DK1, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol display displayed in the first display area DS1 of the sub display area DS is configured to be continuously displayed. May be good. As a result, when an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol (reserved symbol advance notice effect) is executed during the display of the reserved symbol, the variable display mode of the reserved symbol can be continuously used as the running display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand the relationship between the variable display being executed and the reserved symbol display.

When the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, in addition to the expectation degree display effect in which the expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3 shown in FIG. 102 (A) are displayed, the display modes of the expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3 are variable (increased). ) Is executed (see FIG. 102 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 102 (B), when the expectation increase (addition) effect is executed, first, as the expectation setting effect, a display having selection areas DK4A to DK4C in which different increase (addition) values are displayed. The aspect (roulette) DK4 is rotated and displayed, and when the roulette DK4 is stopped, the ascending (additional) value displayed in the selection area designated by the arrow DK5 is set.

This increase (additional) value indicates a variable amount that changes the display mode of each expectation degree display mode displayed during the expectation degree suggestion effect, and when "1UP" is set as the increase (additional) value. Is to execute an effect in which the jackpot expectation is gradually changed to a display mode one higher than the currently displayed display mode for any one of the expectation display modes. Shows.

With this configuration, by executing the expectation increase (additional) effect, it is possible to notify only the variable amount of each expectation display mode displayed during the current expectation suggestion effect. .. Therefore, the player enjoys the effect of increasing the expectation level (additional) while expecting that the expectation level of the expectation level display mode in which the display mode corresponding to the high jackpot expectation level is already displayed is further variable (increased). Can be done.

In this control example, as the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase (addition) effect, each expectation degree that is variable (increased) while the current expectation degree increase (addition) effect is being executed. It is configured so that a value obtained by adding up the variable amounts of the display mode is set. As a result, for example, when "3UP" is set as the increase (additional) value, the display mode of one expectation display mode is variable by three steps, or the display mode of each of the three expectations display modes is variable by one step. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not to do so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the production result of the expectation suggestion effect at an early stage, and to enhance the effect.

next. With reference to FIG. 103 (A), the effect content when "3UP" is set as the rising (additional) value will be described. FIG. 103 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the display mode of each expectation degree display mode is variably (raised) using the set rise (addition) value.

According to the example shown in FIG. 103 (A), "3UP" is set as an increase (addition), and each of the expected degree display modes DK1 to DK3 displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is variably displayed one step at a time. Specifically, the display mode of the expectation display mode DK1 is variable from "LV2" to "LV3", the display mode of the expectation display mode DK2 is variable from "LV1" to "LV2", and the expectation display mode DK3. The display mode of is changed from "LV2" to "LV3".

In addition, although the above-mentioned FIG. 103 (A) exemplifies a pattern in which the display modes of all the expectation display modes DK1 to DK3 are changed at the same time, the display modes of the expectation display modes DK1 to DK3 are displayed at different timings. It may be configured to be variable. In this case, among the increase (addition) values set in the expectation increase (addition) effect, the increase (addition) obtained by subtracting the value corresponding to the variable amount in which the display mode of any of the expectation display modes is changed. ) The value is displayed on the display screen as a residual increase (addition). With this configuration, it is possible to specifically predict the effect result based on the residual increase (additional) value displayed on the display screen and the expected degree display mode in which the display mode is not variable. The effect can be enhanced. Further, for the same expectation degree display mode, the expectation degree increase (additional) effect may be executed so as to change the display mode a plurality of times at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

Further, in this control example, each of the plurality of expected degree display modes DK1 to DK3 displayed at different timings in one variation effect is continuously displayed, so that the display is as shown in FIG. 103 (A). Although it is configured to be displayed on the screen at the same time, it is not necessary to provide a period in which each expectation degree display mode DK1 to DK3 is displayed at the same time, and among the display timings of the plurality of expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3. , At least some display timings may be set at the same time.

Further, in the expectation increase (addition) effect, the player may be notified of the expectation display mode for which the increase (addition) value is set (see FIG. 103 (B)). In this case, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the comment "Raise the level of the boy" suggesting the target expectation degree display mode is displayed above the main display area DM. By displaying this comment, the player can grasp what the expectation degree display mode that is the target of the expectation degree suggestion production this time is, and enjoy the game while predicting the progress of the future production. It can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the flow of the expectation degree display effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 104 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the expectation degree display effect. As shown in FIG. 104, in one fluctuation pattern (super reach 60 seconds), the expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3 that stepwise indicate the expectation degree of the jackpot winning are displayed at different timings. Specifically, the expected degree display mode DK1 (expected degree 1 display) is displayed 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the expected degree display mode DK2 (expected degree 2 display) is displayed 24 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the expected degree display is performed. Aspect DK3 (expectation degree 3 display) is displayed 36 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

Then, the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) for increasing (adding) the display modes of the expected degree display modes DK1 to DK3 is displayed at any timing of 5 seconds, 17 seconds, or 29 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. .. Here, the expectation degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is configured so that the expectation degree display mode for which the expectation degree is increased differs depending on the display (execution) timing. It is configured so that the expectation degree display mode displayed after the degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is executed is targeted.

Specifically, when the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is displayed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, all of the expectation display modes DK1 to DK3 are targeted, and the expectation rises 17 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. When the effect (expectation addition display) is displayed, the expectation degree display mode DK2 and DK3 are targeted, and when the expectation degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is displayed 29 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the expectation degree is displayed. Display mode An effect targeting only the DK3 is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the production contents of the expectation increase effect, which is the same effect mode, different only by making the display timing (execution timing) different. In addition, since the expectation increase effect is executed for a plurality of expectation degree display modes, the player can determine how much the expectation degree notified by the expectation degree increase effect increases the expectation degree of which expectation degree display mode. You can play the game while expecting.

In this control example, as described above, the target of the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is the expectation display mode in which the display timing is set later, but other configurations may be used. For example, the expectation degree display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the expectation degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is executed may be targeted, or the above-mentioned expectation degree display mode may be targeted. You may target the combination of. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to predict which expectation display mode will change (whether the expectation will rise) due to the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display). , The production effect can be enhanced.

Further, in order to enhance the effect of the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display), at least one of the plurality of expectation display modes can be selected by the player, and the expectation selected by the selection means. The target determination means for determining whether the degree display mode is a target whose display mode is variable by the expectation degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display), and the expectation degree display mode selected by the selection means are the expectation degree increase effect (expectation degree increase effect). When the target discriminating means determines that the display mode is variable by the expectation addition display), a variable control means that changes the display mode by the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is provided. Is also good. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player-participation-type production, and it is possible to enthusiastically participate in the game.

In this case, for example, the suggestion notification suggesting the expectation display mode that is the target of the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is sent in a period before the period in which the player selects the expectation display mode by the selection means. It is advisable to provide a suggestion notification means to be executed. As a result, the target range to be selected by the selection means can be limited to the player, and the probability that the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display) is executed can be increased.

Further, when the target determination means determines that the expectation display mode selected by the selection means is not a target whose display mode is variable by the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display). It is preferable to provide an effect switching means for executing a different effect using the increase (additional) value set in the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display). As a result, the rising (additional) value already displayed on the display screen can be digested, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

The different effects described above include, for example, an effect for notifying the player of the contents of the winning information stored on hold in advance, and a value accumulated by the player for obtaining a privilege (for example, a game level and experience). It may be an effect that is advantageous to the player, such as an effect for increasing the value), or it is disadvantageous to the player, such as an effect that changes the effect mode so that the expectation level of the expectation level display mode is lowered (expectation level lowering effect). It may be directed.

In addition, a means is provided so as to change the display mode of the effect switched by the effect switching means in correspondence with the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase effect (expectation addition display). Is also good. Further, when the player does not select the expectation degree increase mode by the selection means, the expectation degree display mode which is not the target may be automatically selected, or the target expectation degree display mode may be selected. May be configured to be automatically selected. If the target expectation display mode is automatically selected, it is configured so that the player is more advantageous to select the non-target expectation display mode by the selection means. Then it is good. As a result, the player can be made to positively select the expectation degree display mode by the selection means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 to 125, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, the details of the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 113) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, first, with reference to FIG. 113, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type (big hit symbol) used for selection. The initial value setting of the hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern, and the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 136). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the counter values for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the second entrance 140 for winning the prize for the first entrance 64. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is provided. As described above, in this control example, up to four reserved balls are provided for each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140. For this reason, if the ball wins the first entrance 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is special. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, and when a ball wins in any of the second entrances 140, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. After that, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, the oldest counter value in time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or Various settings and control processes for variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol 2 are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is impossible, such as during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game, the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, and the prize is won. If the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball mouth is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball is acquired. It is stored in the storage area 203B. Further, when the corresponding number of reserved balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value or the like is not acquired and only the prize balls (3 prize balls in this embodiment) are obtained. Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140, but the limit is not limited to this, and the number is less than 4 (for example). It may be 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls may be different between the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 140, or the upper limit value may not be provided. Further, a reserved ball storage area may be provided only for either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 so that only one of the reserved balls can be stored.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 113. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 238) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 238 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 238) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 238, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 136).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202A (see FIG. 106 (A)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is the big hit specified in the first random number table 202A, it is determined to be a big hit of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202A will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (A). The first hit random number table 202A is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Is determined to be "7", and if it is "7", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is within the range of "5 to 9". If it is within the range of "5 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is special. It will be the one at the time of the big hit of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "7" is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202A. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 239, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/239". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are five values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "5 to 9" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202A. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 239, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 10, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1 / 47.8".

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 113. The value of the first type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, one of the big hits A to K is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202C (see FIG. 107). The jackpot type will be selected.

Here, the details of the first type selection table 202C will be described with reference to FIG. 107. As shown in FIG. 107, in the first hit type selection table 202C, the jackpot types to be selected are defined in association with each range of the values of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special diagram 1), and the value of the first type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". "Big hit A" is specified in association with each other. This "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the game state after the big hit is set to the probable change state of the special symbol regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. "Big hit A" is the most advantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probable change state which is advantageous for the player. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 are random values for which "big hit A" is selected, so if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery, "big hit A" Is selected at 10%.

Further, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special diagram 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 79" in association with "big hit B". .. This "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the big hit is set to the probable change state of the special symbol regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The number of rounds executed during the jackpot is less than that of "big hit A", but the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player, so "big hit B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. Is. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 60 are random values for which "big hit B" is selected, so if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery, "big hit B" Is selected at 30%.

The corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and "big hit C" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 114". This "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the time saving state is set 100 times as the game state after the big hit is completed, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 35 are random values for which "big hit C" is selected, so if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery, "big hit C" Is selected at 17.5%.

Further, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "115 to 164" in association with "big hit D". .. This "big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the big hit is set to the probable change state of the special symbol regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values for which "big hit D" is selected, so if a big hit is made in a special symbol lottery, "big hit D" Is selected at 25%.

Then, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special diagram 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "165 to 199" in association with "big hit E". .. This "big hit E" has 5 rounds, and when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is a low probability state and is not a time saving state (when it is a normal state), it is a normal state as a game state after the end of the big hit. Is set, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), the time saving state is set 100 times as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 35 are random values for which "big hit E" is selected, so if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery, "big hit E" Is selected at 17.5%.

Next, even when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 2 (special diagram 2), as in the case of the above-mentioned special diagram 2, "big hit F" is based on the contents specified in the first hit type selection table 202C. "-" Big hit K "is selected. Although detailed description is omitted, the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2 is the jackpot type selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1. The ratio of the jackpot (“big hit F”) having 15 rounds is set to be higher than the (first hit type) (selection ratio is 80%). As a result, if the jackpot of a special symbol is won, the jackpot that allows the player to acquire a large number of balls in one jackpot will be higher if the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. The degree of advantage of the player can be different between the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2.

On the other hand, when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2, the jackpot type (first hit type) is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1. May be selected. Specifically, when "Big hit I" to "Big hit K" are selected, 2 rounds, which is less than 5 rounds, which is the smallest number of rounds among the big hit types selected in the case of Special Figure 1, are selected. Set.

In addition, when "Big hit H", "Big hit J", and "Big hit K", which are the big hit types to which the time saving state is given, are selected as the game state after the big hit ends, the corresponding symbol type is a special figure. In the jackpot type (first hit type) selected in the case of 1, the number of times (100 times) less than the number of times (time reduction count) (100 times) set when the time reduction state is given as the game state after the jackpot ends ( 50 times or 25 times) is set.

In this way, the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed and the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 and the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 are set after the jackpot game is completed. By making the game states different, it is possible to complicate the game and prevent the player from being constantly given excessive benefits.

Furthermore, since the game state set after the end of the big hit is configured to be different based on the game state at the time when the big hit is won, be aware of the set game state in the game aiming at the big hit of the special symbol. While playing a game. Specifically, even in a gaming state in which a jackpot lottery is performed with the same probability (for example, a low probability state), the gaming state set after the jackpot ends in the case of the time saving state and the case of the normal state is Unlike this, a gaming state is set that is more advantageous to the player when the time is shortened. As a result, it is possible to play a game while strongly expecting to win a big hit of a special symbol during a specific period (during a short time).

In this control example, the rate at which the high probability state in which the jackpot probability is improved after the jackpot ends is the same between the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure 2. The first type selection table 202C is specified as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio at which the high probability state is set may be different. In addition, by selecting the jackpot type (first hit type) based on the first hit type selection table 202C and passing the ball through the specific area during the jackpot, a probability change state (high probability state) is given after the jackpot ends. In the gaming machine to be played, the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 pass the ball to the above-mentioned specific area. It may be configured to have different ease of use. As a result, the privilege given to the player can be made different depending on the special symbol won by the jackpot.

Further, as a method of differentiating the benefits given to the player depending on the special symbol won by the jackpot, for example, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 (see FIG. 2) that allow the ball to win during the jackpot game are provided and executed. The variable winning device 65 that allows the ball to win a prize during the jackpot game may be configured differently depending on the jackpot. In this case, the ease of winning a ball to a plurality of variable winning devices 65, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins, and the end condition (number of balls and time limit) for ending one opening operation. It is good to make them different. As a result, the privilege given to the player can be made different depending on the special symbol won by the jackpot.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 113. The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability time and a special symbol for low-probability time, and a range of random value values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times where the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "front-back off reach" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "front-back off reach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "front-back off reach" or "front-back off reach". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, which is a low probability state. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202D (see FIGS. 108 and 109) that stores a random number value that determines one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202D defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 108 and 109). A plurality of variation pattern tables according to the gaming state are set in the variation pattern selection table 202D, and variation pattern tables are set for each of them according to the result of the hit / fail determination. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the ball is a normal entry port (through gate) 66, 67 on either the left or right side. It is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the ordinary symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202B (see FIG. 106 (B)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202B, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202B will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (B).

FIG. 106 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202B. In this second symbol per random number table 202B, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are two random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 6". There is. Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 2, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140A attached to the second entrance 140 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 200, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2". ..

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. In, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140A attached to the second entrance 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 140A is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 140. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 140A is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The details will be described later with reference to the ordinary symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132) described later, but in this control example, the state of the ordinary symbol (low probability or high probability) at the time of lottery (at the time of winning determination) of the ordinary symbol. ), The fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is determined, and it is given when the normal symbol is won according to the state of the normal symbol (low probability or high probability) at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops. The content of the privilege, that is, the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A is determined.

That is, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started during the high probability of the normal symbol (during the time saving state), the short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol is normally changed during the short fluctuation. When the state of the symbol shifts to the low probability state (when the state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state), the electric accessory 140A is a normal symbol even if the normal symbol indicating a hit is stopped and displayed after the end of the short fluctuation. The opening operation (for example, "0.2 seconds x 1 time") is executed during the low probability of (in the normal state).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine 10 in which the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol are executed independently and independently, and is based on the game state that can be changed depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of lottery. When the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the privilege content at the time of winning are determined, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the game state at the time of the lottery of the normal symbol, and the privilege content at the time of winning the normal symbol is determined. Can be determined based on the game state when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140A is open), so that the operation content of the normal symbol and the set game state may differ. It can be suppressed from occurring.

It should be noted that the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is not limited to the content of the present control example described above, and other controls may be used as a matter of course. The privilege content (the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A) may be set. In addition, only when the normal symbol is in a high probability state (time saving state) both when the normal symbol is drawn and when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140A is opened), the privilege at the time of winning the normal symbol is obtained. You may set a privilege (for example, "1 second x 2 times") in which (the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A) is advantageous to the player, or when the normal symbol is drawn and the normal symbol is stopped changing. Only when both (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A) are in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the privilege at the time of winning the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "0.2 seconds"). × 1 time ”) may be set.

Further, it may be configured to switch and execute the plurality of setting methods described above. For example, during the probability change state, which is a high probability state of a normal symbol, a combination that is most advantageous to the player (at the time of lottery of the normal symbol). And, except when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140A is open), the normal symbol is in the low probability state (normal state), all combinations are given to the player. , During the time saving state, which is the high probability state of the normal symbol, the combination that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the probability change state (when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140A is opened) is the high probability state of the normal symbol). In this case, a combination in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given) may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to further set advantages and disadvantages in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 126). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 136).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (A). As shown in FIG. 105 (A), in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, the first random number table 202A, the second random number table 202B, and the first type selection table 202C , The variation pattern selection table 202D, the jackpot transition setting table 202E, and the state transition table 202F are stored at least.

As described above, the first random number table 202A (see FIG. 106 (A)) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter C1 is stored. The second hit random number table 202B (see FIG. 106 (B)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored, as described above. The first hit type selection table 202C (see FIG. 107) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and as described above, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot. It is specified in association with the type. Since each of these tables has already been described in detail together with the description of various counters, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The variation pattern selection table 202D is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202D will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

FIG. 108 (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202D in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 108 (A), the variation pattern selection table 202D in the first control example is the variation pattern table 202D1 for jackpot used for selecting the variation pattern when the jackpot is won regardless of the gaming state. , The game state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), and the deviation pattern table 202D2 used to select the variation pattern when the deviation is won. And, in the game state (probability change state or time saving state) other than the normal state, the deviation pattern (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202D3 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern when the loss is won, and the lottery of the special symbol. It is composed of a special variation pattern table 202D4 used for selecting a variation pattern when a special condition is satisfied regardless of the result.

First, the details of the jackpot variation pattern table 202D1 will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (B). As shown in FIG. 108 (B), the jackpot variation pattern table 202D1 defines a range of values of the variation type counter CS1 and a variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 50" in association with various normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds, and is defined as "50 to 179". Various super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds are associated with the range of, and various special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds are associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "180 to 198". ing. In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol is won as a big hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern is issued. By transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 108 (B), the fluctuation patterns (variation time) selected in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202D1 are 60 seconds (selection ratio is about 55%) and 30 seconds (selection ratio is about 25%). , 90 seconds (selection ratio is about 20%), and it is specified so that it is easy to be selected. This is related to the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol described later is out of order, and the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. By the ratio and the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation when a specific fluctuation time (variation pattern) is selected. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot is won according to the selected fluctuation time (variation pattern).

In this control example, the variable jackpot variation pattern table 202D1 is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a jackpot type indicating a probability variation jackpot and a normal jackpot. It is also possible to use different fluctuation pattern tables depending on the type of jackpot that indicates. In this case, for example, a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is selected in the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won than in the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. It is good to configure it so that it is easy to do. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player, so that the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won with a short variation time, even when the short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the details of the deviation pattern table 202D2 for deviation (normal) will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (C). As shown in FIG. 108 (C), the deviation pattern table 202D2 shows the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "complete deviation" and "common reach", and the variation pattern. Is specified in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), the stop type is "completely off", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", and the fluctuation time is short deviation of 7 seconds. It is defined in association with each other, and a long deviation of 10 seconds is specified in association with the range of "99 to 198". When "completely off" is selected as the stop type, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without being in the reach state.

Further, the stop type is "common to reach", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149" in association with various normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds, and the range is "149 to 197". Various super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds are associated with each other, and various special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds are associated with the range of "198".

Next, the details of the deviation pattern table 202D3 for deviation (probability variation) will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (D). The deviation pattern table 202D3 is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation and the gaming state is the probability variation state (time saving state). In this deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3, as in the above-mentioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202D2, the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "complete deviation" and "common reach". The range and the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), the stop type is "completely off", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190", and the variation time is an ultra-short deviation of 3 seconds. Is specified in association with each other, and a short deviation of 5 seconds is specified in association with the range of "191 to 198".

Further, the stop type is "common to reach", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 190" in association with various normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds, and the range is "191 to 198". Various types of super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are specified in association with each other. That is, when the gaming state is a probable change state (time saving state), it is stipulated that the variation time of 90 seconds is not selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. Therefore, when the game state is the probable change state (time reduction state) and the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of 90 seconds is selected, it is only when the jackpot of the special symbol is won. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 executes a privilege effect to congratulate the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied by being notified of the deviation of the special symbol after the long-time fluctuation pattern is executed during the probabilistic state (time saving state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. Can be done.

As described above, when the probabilistic state (time saving state) is set as the game state and the deviation pattern table 202D3 is used, the normal state is set as the game state and the game state is out (normal). ) Since the variation time of the special symbol is set to be shorter than when the variation pattern table 202D2 is used, the lottery of the special symbol in the probable variation state (time saving state), which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is performed. It can be done efficiently. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the probabilistic state (time saving state) is set as the game state, the stop type reaches when the special symbol comes off, compared to the case where the normal state is set. It is set so that the rate of deviation is low. Therefore, while the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (time saving state), the frequency of appearance of reach loss decreases (because it is difficult to execute the out-of-reach fluctuation with a long fluctuation time), so that the probabilistic state (because it is difficult to execute the deviation fluctuation) is advantageous to the player. The lottery of special symbols can be performed more efficiently during the time saving state).

Next, the details of the special variation pattern table 202D4 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. This special variation pattern table 202D4 is a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern for four rotations of the special figure variation when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes a probability variation state or a time saving state, and is a continuous jackpot effect described above. It is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special map variation (see FIG. 89 (A)).

As shown in FIG. 109, in the special fluctuation pattern table 202D4, the fluctuation pattern is defined in association with the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (special symbol) after the end of the jackpot, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Specifically, in the first to third special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit, the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (super short deviation). Short hit) is specified.

In the 4th special symbol change after the big hit, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, an ultra-short deviation of 0.5 seconds is specified regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a win, the ultra-short hit with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is specified in the range of "0 to 179" for the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation time is 32 in the range of "180 to 198". .A special hit of 5 seconds is specified.

With this configuration, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit is a probable change state or a time saving state, it is possible to immediately execute the fluctuation corresponding to four rotations of the special symbol. As a result, when a series of jackpot effects are executed using a plurality of jackpot games as in the continuous jackpot effect described above, the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed between the jackpot games can be shortened, and the effect can be achieved. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, although details will be described later, in this control example, in a state in which a probability change state or a time reduction state is set as a game state (during the consecutive villa mode), a jackpot in which the probability change state or the time reduction state is set again after the jackpot ends. When winning, the variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table 202D4. With this configuration, the special symbol fluctuation time for a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the end of the jackpot can be shortened only in the state where the probability change state (time saving state) is continuously executed.

As a result, for example, when the normal state is set as the game state and the jackpot (for example, jackpot A to jackpot D) in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends is won, that is, the jackpot ends. Later, in a state where the reserved memory of the special symbol 1 exists and the reserved memory of the special symbol 2 is not present, so that the symbol variation of the special symbol 1 is likely to be executed, the jackpot variation pattern table 202D1 or the deviation (probability variation) The variation pattern is set with reference to the variation pattern table 202D3.

On the other hand, when the probability change state (time reduction state) is set and the jackpot (for example, jackpot F to jackpot K) in which the probability variation state or the time reduction state is set is won after the jackpot ends, that is, after the jackpot ends. In a state where the reserved memory of the special symbol 2 exists and the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is easily executed, the special variation pattern itself is set to the ultra-short variation of 0.5 seconds.

Further, as shown in the special variation pattern table 202D4 of FIG. 109, in this control example, the variation pattern corresponding to the special hit is a part (about 10%) of the case where the player wins the fourth rotation after the big hit ends. (Variation time 32.5 seconds) is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, when a jackpot is won in a state where a fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the special fluctuation pattern table 202D4, what is a series of jackpot effects (continuous jackpot effects) that have continued from the previous jackpot game? Separately, it will be possible to perform a special production to congratulate the winning of the jackpot in a row. Therefore, it is possible to provide various jackpot effects to the player and enhance the effect.

In this control example, the special variation pattern table 202D4 is specified so that the special hit variation (32.5 seconds) is selected in a part of the fourth variation after the end of the jackpot, but this is limited to this. The special hit variation (32.5 seconds) may be selected even when the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is a part of the first to third times. Further, the special variation pattern table 202D4 is defined so that a variation pattern (for example, a variation time of 10 seconds) in which a variation time other than 0.5 seconds is set is selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. May be good. With this configuration, if a fluctuation of 0.5 seconds or more is executed before the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot reaches 4, it is possible to give the player an expectation for winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to play a game that is conscious of the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Next, the details of the jackpot migration setting table 202E will be described with reference to FIG. 110. The jackpot transition setting table 202E is a table for defining the game state set after the jackpot ends, and is the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot K) selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202C. , The state transition status (state transition 1 to state transition 9) is defined in association with the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won.

This jackpot transition setting table 202E is referred to (S1213) when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 134) described later (S1213), and the selected state transition status. Therefore, the gaming state is set according to the specified contents specified in the state transition table 202F described later.

Specifically explaining the contents of the jackpot transition setting table 202E, the jackpot type is one of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit F", "big hit G", and "big hit H". If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, and "probability change state (with high probability time reduction) (ST2)" or " In the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 2" is set as the status transition status.

When "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, the gaming state is set based on the contents specified in the state transition 1 table 202F1 of the state transition table 202F (see FIG. 111) described later, and the "state transition" is set. When "2" is set, the gaming state is set based on the contents specified in the state transition 2 table 202F2.

Next, when the jackpot type is "big hit C" and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 3" is set as the status transition status, and the "probability change state (high)" is set. In the case of "probability time reduction" (ST2) "or" time reduction state (low probability time reduction) (ST3) "," state transition 4 "is set as the status transition status, and the jackpot type is" jackpot E ". If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status, and "probability change state (with high probability time reduction) (ST2)" or "time reduction state". (With low probability time reduction) (ST3) "," state transition 4 "is set as the state transition status.

Further, when the jackpot type is "big hit H" or "big hit J" and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 6" is set as the status transition status and "state transition 6" is set. In the case of "probability change state (with high probability time reduction) (ST2)" or "time reduction state (with low probability time reduction) (ST3)", "state transition 7" is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is "big hit K". If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 8" is set as the state transition status, and "probability change state (with high probability time reduction) (ST2)", Alternatively, in the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 9" is set as the status transition status.

When any of "status transition 3" to "status transition 9" is set as the status transition status, of the status transition 3 table 202F3 to the status transition 9 table 202F9 of the status transition table 202F (see FIG. 111) described later. , The gaming state is set based on the contents specified in the corresponding table.

Here, the contents of the state transition table 202F will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 111 (A). The state transition table 202F is a table used for shifting state statuses such as a game state and a fluctuation pattern table based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and is a specified number of times counter 203J stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It transitions the state status based on the value of. This state transition table 202F is referred to when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: YES), and when the specified number of times counter 203J is acquired (S1214). When it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is 0 in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) (S409: YES), it is referred to for setting the next state status (S410).

FIG. 111A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the state transition table 202F in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 111 (A), the state transition table 202F in the first control example has the state transition status (“state transition 1” to “state transition 9”) set by using the jackpot transition setting table 202E described above. ) Corresponding to the state transition table (“state transition 1 table 202F1” to “state transition 9 table 202F9”).

First, the details of the state transition 1 table 202F1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (B). The state transition 1 table 202F1 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 1" is set as the status transition status, and the status status "ST2 (probability change state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J. ) ”Is stipulated. That is, in the state where the state transition 1 table 202F1 is used (the state in which "state transition 1" is set), the probability change state is continuously set until the next big hit is won.

Next, the details of the state transition 2 table 202F2 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (C). The state transition 2 table 202F2 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 2" is set as the status transition status. In this state transition 2 table 202F2, the state status "ST2A (probability change state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J. "ST2 (probability change state)" is specified. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST2A" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0", and then "ST2" is set as the state status.

Here, when "ST2A" is set as the state status, the special variation pattern table 202D4 of the variation pattern selection table 202D is set to be used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to preset a rule for selecting a variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202D4 only for a specific period in a state where the same gaming state (probability variation state) is continuously set. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control device 110.

FIG. 111 (D) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 3 table 202F3. The state transition 3 table 202F3 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 3" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 3 table 202F3, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "100" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J are set. "ST1 (normal state)" is specified. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 111 (E) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 4 table 202F4. The state transition 4 table 202F4 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 4" is set as the status transition status. In this state transition 4 table 202F4, the state status "ST3A (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J and the state status in which "96" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J are set. "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J are defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3A" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 96 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (100 times) is set after the end of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern can be selected by referring to the special fluctuation pattern table 202D4 only for the special symbol fluctuations for the first four times.

FIG. 111 (F) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 5 table 202F5. The state transition 5 table 202F5 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 5 table 202F5, the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is specified. That is, after the jackpot ends, the normal state is set without setting the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 112A is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 6 table 202F6. The state transition 6 table 202F6 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 6" is set as the status transition status. In this state transition 6 table 202F6, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "50" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J are set. "ST1 (normal state)" is specified. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of changes of the special symbol becomes 50 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112B is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 7 table 202F7. The state transition 7 table 202F7 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 7" is set as the status transition status. In this state transition 7 table 202F7, the state status "ST3A (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J and the state status "46" in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J are set. "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J are defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3A" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 46 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (50 times) is set after the end of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern can be selected by referring to the special fluctuation pattern table 202D4 only for the special symbol fluctuations for the first four times.

FIG. 112C is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 8 table 202F8. The state transition 8 table 202F8 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 8" is set as the status transition status. In this state transition 8 table 202F8, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "25" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J are set. "ST1 (normal state)" is specified. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of changes of the special symbol becomes 25 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112 (D) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 9 table 202F9. The state transition 9 table 202F9 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 9" is set as the status transition status. In this state transition 9 table 202F9, the state status "ST3A (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J and the state status in which "21" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J are set. "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J are defined. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST3A" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 21 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (25 times) is set after the end of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern can be selected by referring to the special fluctuation pattern table 202D4 only for the special symbol fluctuations for the first four times.

As described above, in this first control example, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot are based on. , The game state set after the end of the big hit and the variation pattern table used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot can be different. As a result, the content of the game can be made more complicated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this control example, the period for selecting the variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202D4 is set to 1 to 4 rotations of the special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example. Instead of the special symbol variation executed immediately after the end of the jackpot, the special variation pattern table 202D4 may be used at the 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the jackpot. In this configuration, the state transition table is set to the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "10" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J and "4" as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J. The set status status "ST3A (time saving state)", the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J, and "0" are set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J. It may be configured so that the above-mentioned "ST1 (normal state)" is specified. With this configuration, the variation pattern of the 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the big hit can be selected by using the special variation pattern table.

In this way, by using the configuration of the state transition table described above, the state status set starting from the end of the jackpot and the number of changes (specified number of times) of the special symbol in which the state status continues are set in association with each other. The game specifications can be easily set and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, even when the game specifications are changed, the contents of the state transition table may be changed, so that the game specifications can be easily changed.

Further, in the first control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state (when ST1 is set as the state status), "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J, and the value is always set. The same variation pattern table (big hit variation pattern table 202D1 or off (normal) variation pattern table 202D2) is configured to be referred to, but a variation pattern table that can be referred to when the gaming state is the normal state is provided. A plurality of them may be provided so as to refer to different fluctuation pattern tables according to the value of the specified number of times counter 203J. In this case, for example, when the time reduction state is set as the game state, the time reduction end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 50 times), and the game state shifts to the normal state. (When the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" in the state transition 6 table 202F6), the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is set to "10" in correspondence with the state status ST1.

When the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is larger than "0" in the state where the state status ST1 is set, the variation pattern may be selected by referring to the special variation (normal) pattern table. With this configuration, it is possible to select a variation pattern different from the usual one immediately after the gaming state shifts from the reduced working hours state to the normal state, so that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player can be obtained. You can make me think that it is still going on.

In the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the period for referring to the special variation pattern table is output from the effect mode of the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226. It is preferable to configure the sound mode and the light emitting mode output from the lamp display device 227 to be a special mode corresponding to the period. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a more special feeling to the player. Further, even if a jackpot is won during the period when the special variation pattern table is referred to, it is preferable to configure it so as to execute a special effect mode different from the effect during the normal jackpot. As a result, the player can feel that he / she has won the big hit during the special period, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this first control example, a state transition table is provided corresponding to each state transition status, but a common state transition table may be used where the setting contents of the state transition table are common. With this configuration, the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in this first control example, a configuration is used in which the fluctuation pattern table referred to by changing the state status based on the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is used, but the state status is used for other elements. May be made variable. For example, when the state status ST3 is set and the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is "40" while referring to the state transition 6 table 202F6, the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, but a small amount of privilege. When a lottery result (so-called small hit) that can give (a privilege to open the variable winning device 65 for a short period (for example, 3 seconds)) is won, the state status is changed from ST3 to ST3B, and the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is set. Is set to "4", the status status ST3B is set, and when the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is larger than "0" (in the case of "1" to "4"), the fluctuation pattern table dedicated to after a small hit Refer to. The fluctuation pattern table to be referred to may be switched. With this configuration, it is possible to select a dedicated fluctuation pattern only for a predetermined period after winning a small hit (the period until the special symbol changes four times).

When the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" while the state status ST3B is set, the state status ST3 is configured to be set again, and the state status ST3B is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J. By configuring to set "35", which is subtracted by the value counted while is set, the period during which the time saving state is set as the game state (the period until the special symbol changes 50 times) is set. Without changing, it is possible to select and execute a dedicated fluctuation pattern for a predetermined period (the period until the special symbol changes four times) based on the small hits won during the time saving state.

Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is configured to be subtracted when the special symbol is changed, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned small hit as the lottery result of the special symbol, the value of the specified number of times counter 203J may be subtracted based on the number of times the small hit is won. In this way, by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to based on the lottery result of the special symbol (based on the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result) instead of the variation number of the special symbol, the time can be shortened. Since the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to can be changed at a timing different from the transition of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the state, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (B). FIG. 105B is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 105 (B), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F, probability change flag 203G, time saving medium counter 203H, state status storage area 203I, specified number of times counter 203J, and other memory area 203Z. have.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter. The values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (4 holding areas (starting winning). Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A are executed. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to the area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired according to the starting winning prize, the original special symbol is used. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, various types obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) before the original special symbol lottery is performed. Predicting the information is described as pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol. It should be noted that the various information corresponds to whether or not the information is correct, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. Store in 223A.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, data (values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning to the second ball entry port 140 is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is used in the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203B, other The shift processing is performed to pack the winning data stored in the holding area of No. 1 into the holding area 1 smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning prize) (in the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) up to 4 times (variation display performed). The initial value of the value N1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203D is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S504 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 127).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is a variation display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the second entry port 140. ) Is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting count) up to 4 times. The value N2 of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is set to zero as an initial value like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D, and the ball enters the second entry port 140 and is special. Every time the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S510 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 127).

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E (holding number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) are reserved balls. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 127 and S505 and S511 in FIG. 130). The hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D and the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E are changed. Command.

The voice lamp control device 113 is mainly controlled by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 held in the device 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbol in the sub-display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is a reserved ball number (standby) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See S804 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 132).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, the second random number counter is used. The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C (S805 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C. (S803: NO in FIG. 133).

The probability change flag 203G is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability change flag 203G is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in the state of being on. Indicates that the special symbol is in a probabilistic state. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag 203G is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial state of the probability change flag 203G is set to off, and is set to on each time the end timing of "big hit A, B, D, F, G, I" is reached (big hit control process (see FIG. 137). ) S1212). On the other hand, the probability change flag 203G is turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or the start of the jackpot is set (S218 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127)).

When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 128) is executed by the MPU 201, the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is executed. In the special symbol change start processing, the probability variation flag 203G is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203G is off, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 128).

In this control example, while the probabilistic state is set as the game state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is also set. Therefore, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the probability variation flag 203G and the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203H are referred to to determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state. Specifically, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203H is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203G is on (if the time reduction state or the probability change state), it is determined to be the time reduction state of the normal symbol. A lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on a random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203H is 0 and the probability variation flag 203G is off (neither the time reduction state nor the probability variation state), the normal symbol is based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time. A lottery is held (see S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The time saving medium counter 203H is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203H is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203H is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203H is set to 0, the main control device 110 wins the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot (S1212 in FIG. 137). ). Specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit C", "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203H at the end of the jackpot, and when "big hit H, J", at the end of the jackpot. “50” is set as the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203H, and in the case of “big hit K”, “25” is set as the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203H at the end of the big hit.

When the jackpot type is "big hit E", the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203H set at the end of the jackpot is set to be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the value at the time of winning the jackpot is set. If the gaming state is a time saving state (with low probability time saving) or a probabilistic state (with high probability time saving), "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203H, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (with high probability time saving). If there is no low probability time reduction), the value of the time reduction medium counter 203H is not set.

After that, 1 is subtracted each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 ends until the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203H becomes 0 (S402 in FIG. 129). Further, even if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203H is 1 or more, if the jackpot is won, the value is reset to 0 (S218 in FIG. 127).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203H is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203H is 0 and the probability variation flag 203G described later is off, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time. (See S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The state status storage area 203I is a storage area for storing the information of the current state status (ST) set by the state transition table 202F. In this state status storage area 203I, when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: YES), that is, the acquired status status is stored at the end time of the jackpot. It is stored, and then, in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129), when the value of the specified number counter 203J to be subtracted each time the special symbol changes becomes 0 (S409: YES), it is newly set. Status Status is stored.

The specified number of times counter 203J is a counter for measuring that the number of times of change of the special symbol has reached the specified number of times. The specified number of times counter 203J corresponds to the acquired specified number of times when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: YES), that is, at the end of the jackpot. A value is set (S1213), and then in the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129), the value is subtracted each time the special symbol changes (S407). When the value of the specified number of times counter 203J changes from "1" to "0", a new state status is set based on the contents specified in the corresponding state transition table 202F.

The other memory area 203Z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119. FIG. 114 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 114 (A), the ROM 222 includes a variation pattern table 222A, a hold rank selection table 222B, a jackpot medium effect selection table 222C, an additional number selection table 222D, and a continuation effect mode selection table 222E. It has at least a value main selection table 222F, a continuation value sub-selection table 222G, a final mode selection table 222H, an expectation degree selection table 222I, and an expectation degree effect selection table 222J.

The variation pattern table 222A is referred to for selecting a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the mode of the rough variation effect (variation display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It's a table. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the variation pattern table 222A (see S3812 in FIG. 147).

The hold rank selection table 222B is a table for selecting a hold rank based on the hold status of the special symbol, and the effect of the jackpot is determined based on the selected hold rank. Here, the details of the reserved rank selection table 222B will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (B).

FIG. 115B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the reserved rank selection table 222B. As shown in FIG. 115 (B), the reserved rank selection table 222B has the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol) and the winning information indicating the jackpot in the reserved balls of the special symbol 2. The hold rank is defined in association with the determination result of whether or not. With this configuration, the effect executed during the jackpot can be determined based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol (special symbol 2) executed after the jackpot ends.

Here, in this control example, when both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are present, the process of preferentially digesting the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is executed (see FIG. 127). ). That is, the timing at which the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is digested is indefinite.

Therefore, in this control example, it is based on the winning information included in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 that changes preferentially after the end of the big hit (the reserved ball whose change order is fixed after the end of the big hit) and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2. The hold rank is selected so that the jackpot effect can be executed based on the change result (lottery result) of the special symbol executed after the jackpot ends.

When both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 exist, the reserved balls are reserved in the order in which they are reserved (the order in which the balls are entered in the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening 140). If the pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration that digests (so-called winning order digestion), the number of all reserved balls and the predetermined number of balls (for example, 4) in the order of digestion are used instead of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2. It may be configured to select the hold rank as the target. As a result, it is possible to execute the jackpot effect based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol executed after the jackpot ends.

When the contents of the reserved rank selection table 222B are specifically described with reference to FIG. 115 (B), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (special symbol 2) is "1 to 3", and a hit is shown in the reserved balls. If the winning information is "yes", the hold rank "3" is selected, and if there is no winning information indicating a win, the hold rank "2" is selected.

If the number of reserved special symbols (special symbol 2) is "4" and there is "winning information" indicating a win, the holding rank "4" is selected and there is no winning information indicating a winning. In the case of "", the hold rank "1" is selected. When the number of reserved symbols (special symbol 2) is "0", the reserved rank "1" is selected without using the reserved rank selection table 222B.

The hold rank selected with reference to the hold rank selection table 222B is referred to in the jackpot medium effect selection table 222C described later. Next, the jackpot medium effect selection table 222C will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (C). The jackpot middle effect selection table 222C is a table for selecting an effect to be executed during the jackpot, and receives an opening command in the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 142) (S3301: YES), and the jackpot middle effect. It is referred to when the setting process (see FIG. 143) is executed (S3406).

In the jackpot middle effect selection table 222C, the jackpot middle effect is defined in association with the hold rank selected in the hold rank selection table 222B and the first effect counter 223Y1. Specifically, "normal hit effect" is defined in the range where the hold rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is "0 to 99". This "normal hit effect" is an effect that is completed during one jackpot game (see FIG. 83 (B)), and an effect corresponding to the type of jackpot to be executed is executed.

In the range where the hold rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is "100 to 149", "additional effect" is defined. As described above in FIG. 83 (A), this "additional effect" partially displays the number of round games executed in one big hit (for example, in the case of 15 rounds, first. (Display for 5 rounds), and as the jackpot game progresses, the number of remaining rounds (the number of undisplayed rounds) is displayed.

When the "additional effect" is executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many rounds of the jackpot is currently being executed, and the effect during the jackpot game can be watched. .. Further, in the "additional effect" of the first control example, when a plurality of jackpots are won in a short period of time (the winning information (reserved symbol) acquired at the end of the previous jackpot) includes the next jackpot. In the case), the number of rounds of the next jackpot is added to the number of rounds of the previous jackpot, so that the game is executed across a plurality of jackpots.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the jackpot has been won while the "additional effect" is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while enjoying how many rounds are displayed in total by the "additional effect".

Further, in the "additional effect" of this control example, the number of rounds executed by one big hit can be divided and displayed, and the number of rounds executed by a plurality of big hits can be combined and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of jackpots won while one "additional effect" is being executed and the number of rounds executed in each jackpot. As a result, for example, when the number of rounds executed during one jackpot is 15, the pachinko machine 10 in which the probabilistic state is always set as the gaming state after the jackpot is completed has won the jackpot of 15 rounds. It is possible to make it difficult to understand and to play a game while predicting which game state will be set after the big hit.

In addition, when an effect suggesting a gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is used as the effect executed during the jackpot, it is executed during one jackpot before the result of the effect is displayed. By grasping the number of rounds, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game state set after the end of the big hit is specified and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Next, in the range where the hold rank is "2" and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is "0 to 49", "normal hit effect" is defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is set. In the range of "50 to 149", "additional effect" is defined. A "normal hit effect" is defined in the range where the hold rank is "3" and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is "0 to 49", and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is "50 to". In the range of "99", "additional effect" is defined, and in the range of the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 of "100 to 149", "continuous hit effect" is defined.

As described above in FIG. 84, this "continuous hit effect" is an effect of notifying the player that a plurality of jackpots have been won when the previous (first) jackpot game is started. (See FIG. 84). The "effect for continuous hits" executed here is, for example, a value obtained by adding up the number of rounds of the first big hit (for example, 15 rounds) and the number of rounds of the second big hit (for example, 10 rounds) (for example, 25). The effect of notifying when one jackpot game is started (the first round of the first jackpot is started) is executed.

By executing the "continuous hit effect" in this way, it is possible to notify the player at an early stage that multiple jackpots have been won, and the jackpot game can be performed with peace of mind while giving the player a sense of superiority. Can be made.

In the range where the hold rank is "4" and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is "0 to 49", "normal hit effect" is defined, and in the range of "50 to 149", the range is "50 to 149". "Direction for continuous hits" is stipulated.

As described above, in this control example, different effects (big hit middle effects) are executed during the big hit based on the selected hold rank and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223Y1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the effect performed during the jackpot.

Further, depending on the selected jackpot medium effect, the timing of notifying the player that the next jackpot is included in the hold is different. Therefore, for example, at the timing when the previous jackpot game is completed, the next Compared to the case of a pachinko machine that notifies the presence or absence of a reserved symbol (presence or absence of a reserved inner villa) that wins a jackpot, and the case of notifying the presence or absence of a reserved inner villa only at a specific timing, for the next jackpot winning It is possible to execute a jackpot game while having expectations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the contents and proportions of the jackpot medium effects selected according to the hold rank are different, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations, and the second entrance during the jackpot game. It is possible to perform an effect in which the look-ahead result of the ball winning the 140 can be taken into consideration, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, when the hold rank is "1", that is, when the number of hold symbols is the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold symbol, the hold internal ream Since the villa is never executed, it is stipulated that either the normal hit effect or the additional effect is selected, and the selection ratio is stipulated so that the normal hit effect can be easily selected. In other words, if the hold rank is "1" at the time of winning the big hit, it is a "normal hit production" that does not give the player excessive expectations for the hold inner villa, or this time. One of the "additional effects" that makes it difficult to understand how many rounds the jackpot is a jackpot is executed.

When the hold rank is "2", that is, when the number of hold symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold symbol, the hold rank is different from "1". There is a possibility of acquiring a new reserved symbol during the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the reserved inner villa is not confirmed at the time of winning the jackpot, in order to deal with the case where the reserved inner villa is confirmed during the jackpot game, the hold rank is "1" rather than "additional". The percentage of "Direction" selected is set high. As a result, when a reserved symbol that wins a jackpot is acquired during a jackpot game, the player can be notified by the "additional effect" to that effect.

When the hold rank is "3", that is, when the number of hold symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot and there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold symbol, that is, the hold symbol is not the upper limit but is in the hold. If the jackpot game is executed while the consecutive villas have been confirmed, in addition to the above-mentioned "normal hit effect" and "additional effect", it is possible to notify at an early stage that the pending consecutive villas have been confirmed. "Continuous hit effect" can be selected, and if the hold rank is "4", that is, if the hold symbol is the upper limit and there is winning information corresponding to the big hit in the hold symbol, "normal hit" It is stipulated that either "production for continuous use" or "production for continuous hitting" is selected.

That is, in the hold ranks "3" and "4" for which the hold inner consecutive villas have already been confirmed, the hold rank "3" is in a state where a new hold ball (winning information) can be acquired during the jackpot game. Therefore, by making it possible to select "additional production", it is possible to make the player think that the next jackpot has been won by the reserved ball (winning information) acquired during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the case of the hold rank "4", a new hold ball (winning information) cannot be obtained during the big hit game, and the next big hit is not won during the big hit game. "Direction" is not selected and the effect by "Continuous hit effect" is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot is the upper limit and other cases, that is, whether or not a new reserved ball can be acquired during the jackpot game. By making the choices of the effects executed during the jackpot different based on the above, it is possible to prevent the effects that are uncomfortable with the actual hold status from being executed.

In this control example, it is stipulated that the "normal hit effect" is selected regardless of which hold rank is selected, so that the "normal hit effect" is executed. Even if there is, it is possible to leave the possibility of a pending villa. Therefore, it is possible to make the player execute the big hit medium game while expecting the player to stay in the holding villa until the end.

Next, the additional number selection table 222D will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (A). The additional number selection table 222D is displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 when the "additional effect" is selected as the effect to be executed during the jackpot. It is a table for selecting a value (the number of additional rounds) to be added to (see FIG. 86 (A)).

The addition number selection table 222D is a case where a new round number command is received (S3304: YES) in the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 142), and the addition effect flag 223H is set to ON (see FIG. 142). It is referred to in a part of the process during the additional effect (see FIG. 144) executed in S3306: YES) (S3506). The selected additional number is stored in the area of the display round number storage area 223G for storing the value to be added to the fixed round number display mode DM4 (S3506).

Then, the value displayed in the running round number display mode DM3 (the number of jackpot rounds currently being executed) and the value displayed in the confirmed round number display mode DM4 (the number of rounds confirmed to be executed) are When they are the same, the additional number stored in the display round number storage area 223G is displayed in the round number display mode DM10 (see FIG. 86 (A)).

As shown in FIG. 116 (A), the additional number selection table 222D includes the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot, whether or not there is a winning prize (whether or not the pending villa is confirmed), and the second production counter 223Y2. The number of additions is specified in association with. Specifically, when the value of the number of remaining rounds is "5", "5" is selected as the additional number regardless of whether or not there is a winning prize and the value of the second effect counter 223Y2.

In this first control example, the number of all jackpot rounds (the number of jackpot rounds in which the jackpot effect is executed) is set to a multiple of 5 (5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), and the number of remaining rounds is 5. This is because in the case of a round, it is necessary to display the number of remaining rounds in the fixed number display mode DM4 at this timing.

The value of the number of remaining rounds is "10,15", the winning prize is "Yes", and the additional number "5" is "50-99" in the range where the value of the second production counter 223Y2 is "0-49". The range is defined as the additional number "10", the range of "100 to 149" is defined as the additional number "15", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10,15", the winning prize is "none", and the second The addition number "5" is in the range where the value of the effect counter 223Y2 is "0 to 49", the addition number "15" is in the range of "50 to 99", and the addition number "15" is in the range of "100 to 149". 10 ”is specified.

As described above, when the number of remaining rounds is the same (for example, "15"), it is stipulated that the ratio of the number of additional rounds selected differs depending on whether or not there is a winning prize. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to predict the presence or absence of the reserved inner villa based on the value added during the "additional effect", and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The value of the number of remaining rounds is "20 ~", the winning prize is "Yes", and the value of the second production counter 223Y2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the additional number "5" is in the range of "50 to 99". The additional number "10" is specified in the above, and the additional number "15" is specified in the range of "100 to 149". In this first control example, since the maximum value of the number of jackpot rounds executed in one jackpot game is set to "15 rounds", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20 to". The winning prize will never be "None". Therefore, if the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20 to" and the winning prize is "none", the additional number "-" is specified, and if selected, an error command is set. ..

Here, if an error command is set, that is, if the remaining number of rounds actually executed and the remaining number of rounds managed by the voice lamp control device 113 are different, the additional effect is continued. Since there is a high possibility that an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort will be executed when the player is made to do so, the execution of the additional effect is stopped, and the currently executed jackpot is based on the information received from the main control device 110. It is preferable to start the execution of the effect of displaying the number of rounds currently executed for the jackpot and the number of rounds currently being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the jackpot production that gives the player a sense of discomfort is continuously executed.

Next, the continuous effect mode selection table 222E will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (B). FIG. 116B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection table 222E. The continuous effect mode selection table 222E shows the effect mode (final mode) until the battle reach (final mode) is executed among the probabilistic changes of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example and the battle effect (see FIG. 90) executed during the time reduction. It is a table for selecting the continuous effect mode for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect), and is referred to in the continuous effect setting process (S3806) of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) (S4005 in FIG. 149). ), The continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223M (S4006). Then, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is set based on the continuation effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223M.

As shown in FIG. 116 (B), in the continuous effect mode selection table 222E, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q, which will be described later, and whether or not there is a winning prize (whether or not the pending villa is confirmed) are shown. A different continuous effect mode is defined in association with the value of the third effect counter 223Y3.

Here, the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is a counter for counting the number of times the continuous effect is set in one probability change state or the time reduction state, and the battle occurs when the probability change state or the time reduction state continues for a long period of time. It is used to determine that the effect has been executed multiple times. The detailed contents of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 (B).

To specifically explain the contents specified in the continuous effect mode selection table 222E, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is "1" and the hold information (winning information) is set to "Yes". Therefore, the continuous effect mode "1" is defined in the range where the value of the third effect counter 223Y3 is "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "2" is defined in the range of "100 to 149". There is.

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is "1" and the hold information (winning information) is "Yes", the continuous effect mode "5" is set regardless of the value of the third effect counter 223Y3. It is stipulated. The pattern corresponding to this continuous effect mode "5" is the case where the first rotation in which the battle effect is executed first after the end of the jackpot wins the jackpot, in order to provide a special feeling to the player. In, a dedicated continuous production mode is set.

Next, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is "2 to 5" and the hold information (winning information) is "none", the value of the third effect counter 223Y3 is in the range of "0 to 99". The continuous production mode "2" is defined, the continuous production mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and when the hold information (winning information) is "Yes", the third production counter 223Y3 is specified. The continuous effect mode "2" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "1" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

When the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is "6 or more" and the hold information (winning information) is "none", the value of the third effect counter 223Y3 is in the range of "0 to 99". The mode "3" is defined, the continuous production mode "4" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and when the hold information (winning information) is "Yes", the value of the third production counter 223Y3 is specified. However, the continuous effect mode "4" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

In this control example, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is set based on the continuous effect mode selected with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222E. For example, the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91). ), The type of own character, the type and order of the opponent characters that are displayed selectably, the type of opponent character that is actually selected, the HP value, and other effects related to the display mode during battle reach development. The effect mode that is not related to the display mode at the time of battle reach development, such as the type and color of the background displayed during the pre-battle effect and the attack pattern to the opponent character, is set based on the selected continuous effect mode.

For example, when the continuous effect mode "5" is selected (that is, when the first battle effect is executed and there is a winning prize in the hold), the player is notified that the jackpot will be won soon. The production mode for this is set. Specifically, the premier character that is set when there is winning information to win a big hit in the hold is set as the character of itself or the opponent, or a specific value as the initial value or the progress value of the HP value of the opponent character. (For example, "777" or "333") is displayed, or the same character is displayed as a combination of selectable opponent characters. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot will be won by using a plurality of variable periods.

Next, the contents of the continuation value main selection table 222F will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (A). FIG. 117A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuation value main selection table 222F. Here, the continuation value in this control example will be described. In this control example, when the game state is set to be advantageous to the player (probability change state or time saving state), the battle effect is executed as a continuous effect to show that the game state is continued. Will be done.

In this battle production, a battle reach (final mode) production for indicating whether or not an advantageous game state ends and a pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed are executed. If, as a result of the battle reach effect, the advantageous gaming state is not completed, the pre-battle effect is executed again.

During the pre-battle effect, the effect of reducing the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent is executed by the third symbol display device 81 as described above with reference to FIG. 92. The battle reach production mode (HP (continuation value) of the opponent at the start of the battle reach) is determined based on the continuation value reduced during the pre-battle production.

In this first control example, the continuation value reduced during this pre-battle effect is obtained by adding the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F and the value selected by the continuation value subselection table 222G. It is configured to be calculated. By setting the continuation value to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by combining a plurality of values in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when increasing the variation of the continuation value.

Returning to FIG. 117 (A), the description will be continued. In the continuous value main selection table 222F, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A, the result of determining the number of remaining fluctuations until the fluctuation of the special symbol to be won the jackpot is executed, and the current display are displayed. The continuation value to be selected is specified in association with the continuation value.

That is, in the continuation value main selection table 222F, it is stipulated that the continuation value is selected based on the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the battle reach effect is executed by taking over the HP (continuation value) of the opponent that is changed during the pre-battle effect.

Here, when the contents of the continuation value main selection table 222F are set more complicatedly in order to enrich the variation of the increase / decrease display of the continuation value executed during the pre-battle production, for example, 100 in this control example. The continuation value is managed in the unit of When the continuation value is specified in association with each other, there is a problem that the processing load for selecting the continuation value becomes high. However, in order to enhance the effect of the pre-battle effect, it was necessary to increase the variation of the continuous value increase / decrease display.

Therefore, in this control example, when the continuous value is selected in the continuous value main selection table 222F, the continuous value sub-selection table 222G, which is a table independent of the continuous value main selection table 222F, is used as the continuous value main selection table 222G. The continuation value selected in the selection table 222F is configured to be further variable. As a result, the variation of the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the first control example, the continuous value is used in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 based on the difference value of the continuous value selected by using the continuous value main selection table 222F. It is configured so that the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) that reduces (HP value) is set. Then, in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81, the continuous value selected by using the continuous value main selection table 222F and the continuous value sub-selection table 222G is displayed as the continuous value after the decrease (updated). It is configured as follows.

Then, the attack effect managed by the value (continuation value) selected by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222F, and the continuation value set by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222F and the continuation value subselection table 222G (the continuation value). The range of values selected in the continuous value subselection table 222G is set so that the difference value of (HP value) does not differ.

With this configuration, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) for reducing the continuation value (HP value) in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F. Even if it is managed only by a rough continuation value, it is possible to execute the production without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

As an attack effect set based on the difference value of the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222F, specifically, if the difference value is "0 to 200", it is a "weak attack" (FIG. 92). (See (A)), "Medium attack" if "201-400", "Strong attack" if "401 or more" (see FIG. 92 (B)) is set to be executed. To.

As a result, for example, even though the difference value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F is in the range of "medium attack" (for example, 300), the difference value of the displayed continuation value is "weak". It becomes the range of "attack" (for example, 200), and it is possible to suppress that the range of the continuation value based on the lottery of the special symbol and the range of the continuation value actually displayed are different.

As shown in FIG. 117 (A), the continuation value main selection table 222F shows the number of remaining fluctuations until the hit fluctuation and the continuation value selected last time (among the continuation values currently displayed, the continuation value main selection table 222F). The continuation value is specified in association with the value selected in. Specifically, if the value of the residual fluctuation counter 222T is "3" and the continuation value selected last time is "1000", "800" is selected, and if it is "900", "700" is selected. A value having a difference value of "200" is selected so as to be performed. Hereinafter, similarly, if the continuation value selected last time is "400" to "800", the values whose difference value is "200" are selected. If the last selected continuation value is "300", "200" is selected (difference value "100"), and if the last selected continuation value is "100" or "200", the difference value is "200". A value of "0" is selected.

Next, when the value of the residual fluctuation counter 222T is "2", if the continuation value selected last time is "300" to "700", the value whose difference value is "100" is selected, respectively, and the previous time. When the selected continuation value is "100" or "200", the value whose difference value is "0" is selected. When the value of the residual fluctuation counter 222T is "1", that is, when the next fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, when the continuation value selected last time is "300" to "700", the difference value is "200". When the value to be selected is selected and the previously selected value is "200", the value whose difference value is "0" ("200") is selected, and when the previously selected value is "100". , The value "0" at which the difference value is "100" is selected.

As described above, in this control example, the continuous values (HP values) displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 based on the continuous value main selection table 222F are roughly (HP values). Since it is configured to select a value (in hundreds) and the effect mode of the attack effect is set based on the difference value, the continuous value displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81. (HP value), that is, the value to be referred to rather than setting the effect mode of the attack effect based on the continuation value (HP value) selected using the continuation value main selection table 222F and the continuation value sub-selection table 222G. The pattern can be reduced, and the processing load when setting the effect can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222G2 used as the continuation value subselection table 222G will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 (B) and 117 (C). FIG. 117 (B) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first continuation value subselection table 222G1, and FIG. 117 (C) schematically shows the contents of the second continuation value subselection table 222G2. It is a figure.

As described above, the continuation value subselection table 222G is used to increase the variable pattern of the continuation value during the continuation effect, and is referred to after the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F. It is a table. In this control example, the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by adding the value selected in the continuation value subselection table 222G to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222F. (Continued value for production) is set.

In this control example, it is determined whether or not the continuous value selected by referring to the continuous value main selection table 222F is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, and a different continuous value subselection table 222G is used based on the determination result. When the continuation value selected by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222F is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or more, the first continuation value sub is shown in FIG. 117 (B). The selection table 222G1 is referred to, and if it is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the second continuation value sub-selection table 222G2 shown in FIG. 117 (C) is referred to.

In the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 shown in FIG. 117 (B), the continuation value is defined in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223Y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223Y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuation value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 79", the continuation value "-10" is selected. In the range of "80 to 119", the continuation value "-20" is selected, and in the range of "120 to 149", the continuation value "+20" is selected.

As a result, the continuation value selected using the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 is added to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222F, and the types of continuation values on the display are increased. Can be done. Specifically, when the continuation value is reduced (updated) from "1000" to "800" with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222F, the selected continuation value ("800") is a predetermined value ("800"). For example, since it is 200) or more, the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 is referred to. When the value of "+20" is selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222G1, "820" is displayed as the continuous value (HP value) in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 (HP value). See FIG. 92 (A). On the other hand, when the value of "-20" is selected in the first continuation value subselection table 222G1, "780" is displayed as the continuation value (HP value).

In this way, by adding the value selected in the continuation value subselection table 222G to the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F, the continuation displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The variation of the value (HP value) can be increased.

Here, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F becomes a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the continuation value on the display (for example, with reference to the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 described above). If the HP value) is set, the value of "+20" is selected in the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 while "0" is selected as the continuation value in the continuation value main selection table 222F. As an attack effect, the attack effect of setting the HP value of the opponent character to "0" is executed, but there is a problem that the continuous value (HP value) on the display becomes "20".

Therefore, in this control example, it is determined whether the continuous value selected in the continuous value main selection table 222F is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, and if it is determined that the continuous value is not more than the predetermined value, the second continuous value is determined. It is configured to refer to the subselection table 222G2. As shown in FIG. 117 (C), the second continuous value subselection table 222G2 defines a range of "-20" to "0" as the value to be selected.

In the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 shown in FIG. 117 (B), the continuation value is defined in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223Y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223Y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuation value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 99", the continuation value "-5" is selected. In the range of "100 to 149", the continuation value "-10" is selected.

Here, the difference between the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222G2 described above will be described. In the first continuation value subselection table 222G1, as possible values, a value (“+20”) to which the continuation value (for example, 500) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F is added and a value to be subtracted (“−20”). Both "10" and "-20") can be selected. On the other hand, the second continuation value subselection table 222G2 is a value (“-5”, “-10”” obtained by subtracting the continuation value (for example, 100) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F as a value that can be selected. ) Is selected.

With this configuration, if the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the range of the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set widely. If the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set within a range that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the production within a range that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition to the contents of the first control example described above, it is determined between the storage means for storing the value selected by the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 and whether the value stored in the storage means is a positive value or a negative value. A determination means for determining whether to select a value using the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 or the second continuation value subselection table 222G2 based on the determination means of the determination means. May be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the values selected by the continuous value subselection table 222G from being biased in the positive direction or the negative direction.

In the first control example, as described above, the configuration in which the mode of the attack effect is selected based on the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the continuation value (HP value) actually displayed on the display screen and the continuation value main selection table 222F. And a calculation means for calculating the difference value from the continuation value (HP value) set based on the continuation value subselection table 222G, and a selection for selecting an attack effect mode based on the difference value calculated by the calculation means. It may be configured by using means and.

In the first control example, the continuous value subselection table 222G is configured to be included in the voice lamp control device 113, but other configurations may be used. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 has a continuation value main selection table. Only 222F may be provided, and the continuation value subselection table 222G may be provided on the display control device 114 side, or the display control device 114 may be configured to perform a process of selecting an mode of attack effect. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to perform update management of the continuous value using the continuous value main selection table 222F, and the processing load can be further reduced.

In this first control example, the continuation value using the above-mentioned continuation value main selection table 222F or continuation value subselection table 222G, which is executed when there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot as the look-ahead result of the reserved symbol, is executed. In addition to the setting, that is, even when there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot as the pre-reading result of the reserved symbol, the process of changing the continuation value is executed in an effective manner. The continuous value variable processing in this effect is variable depending on the period during which the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is continuously executed and the type of the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, although detailed description is omitted. It is configured to select a later continuation value.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to frequently execute an effect of reducing the continuation value while the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the effect content. can do.

Further, in the first control example, the continuation values of four bodies (A to D) are displayed as opponent candidates that can be opposed at the time of battle reach as the continuation effect (pre-battle effect) (see FIG. 91 (A)). For example, even if the continuation value (HP) of a specific opponent is greatly reduced in the continuous production (pre-battle production), the continuous production (pre-battle production) can be continued by selecting another opponent. Can be executed.

With this configuration, when the continuous production (pre-battle production) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when the winning is not won during the probability change), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the production mode of the battle reach effect from becoming poor.

Further, in the first control example, in order to prevent the pre-battle effect from continuing for a long period of time, even if the special symbol is not won, a predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol is 10). If the pre-battle effect continues while it fluctuates more than once, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a 60-second deviation fluctuation pattern), the battle reach is configured to be executed, and the battle reach is performed. If the winning result is not won, the continuation effect (second time) is configured to be executed again, and the continuation value is initialized. As a result, when the continuous production (pre-battle production) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when the winning is not won during the probability change), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the production mode of the battle reach effect from becoming poor.

Next, the final mode selection table 222H will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (A). The final aspect selection table 222H is a table for selecting the effect mode of the battle reach executed during the above-mentioned continuous effect, and is the result of determining whether or not the special symbol change in which the battle reach is executed is appropriate and the fifth effect. A different final aspect is defined in association with the value of the counter 223Y5.

Specifically, when the winning / failing determination result of the special symbol is a big hit and a gaming state (probability change state or time saving state) advantageous to the player is given after the big hit is completed, the value of the fifth effect counter 223Y5 is set. The final mode "1" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", the final mode "2" is defined in the range of "50 to 129", and the final mode "3" is defined in the range of "130 to 149".

If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit and the gaming state advantageous to the player is not given after the big hit, the value of the fifth effect counter 223Y5 is in the range of "0 to 129" in the final mode "4". However, if the final aspect "5" is defined in the range of "130 to 149" and the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is out of order, the value of the fifth effect counter 223Y5 is in the range of "0 to 129". 6 ”, the final aspect“ 7 ”is defined in the range of“ 130 to 149 ”.

Further, in the case of a special symbol variation in which the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and the time saving end condition is satisfied, the final mode "4" is set in the range of "0 to 129" for the value of the fifth effect counter 223Y5. The final aspect "5" is defined in the range of "130 to 149".

Here, the production contents of each final aspect selected by using the final aspect selection table 222H will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (B). FIG. 118 (B) is a diagram illustrating the effect content of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222H. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96 as the final mode (battle reach) of the battle effect, an effect in which either the main character or the opponent's character attacks a total of three times is executed. A different attack pattern is selected depending on the final mode selected.

Specifically, in the final modes "1" to "3", the attack pattern in which the winning battle in which the main character wins is executed is selected, and in the case of the final mode "1", all three attack opportunities are performed. In, the attack pattern in which the main character attacks is selected, and in the final mode "2", the main character attacks at the first and third attack opportunities, and the opponent character attacks at the second attack opportunity. The attack pattern to be performed is selected. In the case of the final mode "3", the attack pattern (revival effect (see FIG. 96)) in which the main character revives and defeats the opponent character is selected after the opponent character attacks in all three attack opportunities. Will be done.

Although detailed description is omitted, the final mode selection table 222H is provided for each variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect to be executed. For example, in the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds, the final mode selection table 222H is provided three times. The final modes (final modes "1" and "2") that are completed by the attack of the above are easily selected, and the revival effect is easily selected in the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. Here, in the revival effect executed with the variation pattern of the variation time of 90 seconds, the effect data of the first three attacks is the same as the effect data of the variation pattern of the variation time of 60 seconds (final aspect "5"). Is used. As a result, the production data is shared to reduce the data capacity, and the first half of the production in which the victory battle is executed (the first half of the final mode "3") and the production in which the defeat battle is executed (final mode "5"). By executing the same effect in () and, it is possible to reliably suppress the situation in which the player is grasped the effect result in the middle of the effect.

Returning to FIG. 118, the explanation will be continued. In the final modes "4" and "5", an attack pattern in which a defeat battle in which the main character is defeated is executed is selected. In this defeat battle, as a result of the battle reach, the effect that the HP gauge DM21 indicating the continuation value (HP) of the main character finally becomes 0 is executed. In the case of the final mode "4", an attack pattern in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities is selected, and the final mode "5" is selected. In the case of, the attack pattern in which the opponent character attacks is selected in all three attack opportunities. In this way, in the attack pattern of the defeat battle set in this control example, until the last one attack (third attack) is executed, other battles (victory battle, draw battle described later) and other battles are performed. Since the same effect is executed, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the effect result in the middle of the effect.

In the final aspects "6" and "7", an attack pattern in which a draw battle is executed in which neither the HP gauge DM21 indicating the continuation value of the main character nor the HP gauge DM22 indicating the continuation value of the opponent character becomes 0 is selected. When this draw battle is executed, the battle reach ends and the next pre-battle production is executed. In the case of the final mode "6", an attack pattern in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities is selected, and the final mode "7" is selected. In the case of, the attack pattern in which the opponent character attacks is selected in all three attack opportunities. In this way, in the attack pattern of the draw battle set in this control example, the same effect as other battles (defeat battles) is executed as the attack pattern, so that not only the attack pattern but also the attack pattern is applied to the player. It is possible to pay attention to the decrease of the HP gauge, and it is possible to surely suppress the situation where the production result is grasped in the middle of the production.

In this control example, the attack pattern executed during the draw battle is configured so that the same attack pattern as the defeat battle is executed, but it is the same as other battles (victory battle). It may be configured so that the effect in which the attack pattern is executed is selected. As a result, when the third battle is executed, the battle reach this time is either a victory battle or a draw battle (that is, depending on the attack pattern executed at each attack opportunity (1st to 3rd attack opportunities)). , It is possible to make the player understand that it is a battle without defeat, and the production (battle reach) can be seen without worrying that the game state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (B). FIG. 114B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 stores the winning information storage area 223A, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223B, the fluctuation start flag 223C, the stop type selection flag 223D, the state storage area 223E, the jackpot information storage area 223F, and the number of display rounds. Area 223G, additional effect flag 223H, display extension flag 223I, fluctuation number counter 223J, elapsed time counter 223K, continuous effect mode storage area 223M, continuous value storage area 223N, duration counter 223P, and continuation. At least the effect setting counter 223Q, the continuous effect flag 223R, the precursor setting flag 223T, the effect counter group 223Y, and the other memory area 223Z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223A has one execution area, four areas corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first area to the fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the special symbol 2 (first area to the fourth area). ), And each of these areas stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140 is detected in the main control device 110, the first random number counter C1 acquired according to the start winning prize is obtained. , Various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn from each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern). ) Is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223A. More specifically, the extracted winning information corresponds to four areas (first area- Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

In this first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize is performed. Although the configuration in which the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B in the various information predicted corresponding to the start winning. Is included in the setting means for setting the winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223A when the winning information command is received, and the received winning information command. A configuration may be provided in which a determination means for determining whether or not various information (winning information) matches is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A is appropriately stored.

Further, in the first control example, when a new start winning is generated, a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the timing of starting winning, it is periodic. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, or when the jackpot game starts or ends), or when the special symbol changes start (or). At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A (so-called look-ahead effect).

In this control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A, the setting of the effect mode such as the jackpot effect, the battle effect, the expectation degree display effect, etc. is executed as the look-ahead effect. In this way, by executing various effects (look-ahead effects) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223A, the player can be asked about each reserved ball even before the variable display is started. You can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

As shown in FIG. 115 (A), the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223B counts the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 for counting the reserved ball number of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball number of the special symbol 2. It has a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223B2, and the value of each counter according to the timing when the holding ball number increases or decreases, such as when a winning information command is received or when a fluctuation pattern command is received. To update.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223B1 is a variation display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a special symbol 1 reserved in the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable effect of the above up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223B2 is a variation display of the special symbol 2 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 up to 4 times for each type of the special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and sets the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. When this is done, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D or the special symbol 2 hold ball number command from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203E is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 (see S3208 in FIG. 140). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223B2 according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main controller 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B1 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223B2. , A display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223B1 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223B2 after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B1 of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223B2 is displayed in the sub display area DS of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 is the main. The value is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved spheres on which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223C is turned on when the variation pattern command of the special symbol 1 transmitted from the main control device 110 or the variation pattern command of the special symbol 2 is received (see S3202 in FIG. 140), and the third symbol display device is displayed. It is turned off when the variation display in 81 is set (see S3802 in FIG. 147). When the variation start flag 223C is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223D is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 140), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3814 in FIG. 147). When the stop type selection flag 223D is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The jackpot information storage area 223F is an area for storing information regarding the jackpot to be executed, and is a main control device for information regarding the jackpot to be executed this time (for example, the number of rounds and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot is completed). This is an area for storing when received from 110. In this control example, the mode of the effect executed during the jackpot is set based on the information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223F.

The display round number storage area 223G is an area for storing information regarding the number of rounds displayed during the jackpot. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 85 (A), when the addition effect is executed during the jackpot, the running round number display mode DM3 indicating the number of running rounds and the DM3 internally. The fixed number display mode DM4 that partially confirms and displays the set number of rounds is the main display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information about the number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223G. It is configured to be displayed on the DM.

The display round number storage area 223G stores 0 as an initial value, receives a round number command among the related commands transmitted from the main control device 110 (S3304: YES in FIG. 142), and adds an effect flag. When 223H is set to ON (S3306: YES in FIG. 142), it is set internally with reference to the stored value (number of rounds) in the additional effect in-process (see FIG. 143). The difference between the number of rounds being made and the number of fixed rounds is calculated, and the value (number of rounds) of the number of fixed rounds newly determined based on the difference value is stored.

The number of rounds stored here is added for display so as to be displayed as the fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 when the number of rounds is a predetermined number of rounds (number of rounds N) in the additional display process (see FIG. 145). It is used when setting a display command (see S3604 in FIG. 145). Then, when the addition effect is completed, the stored value is initialized.

As described above, in this control example, when a new round is started, the additional effect processing (see FIG. 144) is executed, the number of fixed rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223G is updated, and a predetermined number is obtained. When a round (a multiple of 5 in this control example) is started, a display process for updating the display mode of the fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 is executed. Therefore, since the fixed number of rounds is constantly updated (every round), a condition for updating the display mode of the fixed round number display mode DM4 can be added, or the fixed round number display mode DM4 is displayed based on the player's operation. By selecting whether or not to update the mode, it is possible to reliably respond even if the display timing of the fixed number of rounds is different.

Further, in this control example, when the additional prize generated during the jackpot is won, the number of rounds is specified in advance based on the prize information corresponding to the additional prize, and the preliminary identification result is shown. The number of display rounds is set according to the total number of rounds including the number of rounds information.

The additional effect flag 223H is a flag for indicating that the additional effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the additional effect is selected as the jackpot medium effect. This additional effect flag 223H is set to ON when the additional effect is read out as the big hit medium effect (see S3408 in FIG. 143) in the jackpot medium effect setting process (see FIG. 143), and the hit-related command process (see FIG. 142). ) When the round number command is received (S3304 in FIG. 142), the setting state is determined (S3306 in FIG. 142). Then, in the post-big hit effect setting process (see FIG. 146), when it is determined that there is no pending villa (S3703: NO in FIG. 146), it is set to off.

The display extension flag 223I is a flag for indicating a state in which the effect during the jackpot (ending display of the jackpot) is extended and displayed even during the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot, and the effect during the jackpot (the effect during the jackpot). This is set to ON when the ending display of the jackpot) is extended and displayed. If a new jackpot is won while the display extension flag 223I is set to ON, that is, while the effect during the jackpot (the ending display of the jackpot) is being executed, information about the jackpot (acquired ball). The number and the number of rounds) are displayed in a display mode that continues from the information (the number of acquired balls and the number of rounds) regarding the previous jackpot.

This display extension flag 223I is set when the jackpot effect executed this time is a normal hit effect in the post-big hit effect setting process (see FIG. 146) and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is a probable change state or a time saving state (see FIG. 146). S3709: YES in FIG. 146), set to on (S3710 in FIG. 146). Then, when the special symbol fluctuates four times after the display extension flag 223I is set to ON (S3904: YES in FIG. 148), or when the elapsed time is 4 seconds (S5103: YES in FIG. 154). , Off (S3905 in FIG. 148, S5104 in FIG. 154).

As described above, in this control example, the display extension flag 223I is set to ON, and then the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times) or a predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses. Is configured to be turned off when is true. This is the period during which the display extension flag 223I is set to the period during which the jackpot effect is continuously executed, and if the jackpot is won during that period, the jackpot effect is displayed. This is because it is a period to continue (continue to execute the previous jackpot production).

More specifically, if the condition for setting the display extension flag 223I to off is to set only that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the special symbol is suspended at the end of the jackpot. The value of the number of balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is less than the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (4 times), and the player interrupts the launch of the balls after the jackpot ends. If this is done, the game will be interrupted without the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the predetermined number (4 times) after the end of the jackpot, and there is a risk that the production during the jackpot will continue for a long period of time. be. Furthermore, if the player stops the game in such a state, the effect of the big hit will be displayed even though no one is playing the game, so that a new player will be able to play. There is a problem that the pachinko machine 10 hesitates to play a game and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered.

Therefore, in this control example, in addition to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the passage of time (4 seconds) is also provided as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223I to off. From this, it is possible to set as a limited period a period in which the effect during the big hit is continuously displayed and the effect across a plurality of big hits can be executed. As a result, the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to win the jackpot during the limited period in which the display extension flag 223I is set to ON.

The fluctuation count counter 223J is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol during the period in which the display extension flag 223I is set to ON. The fluctuation count counter 223J executes the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) with the display extension flag 223I set to ON, and is “5” when the extension management process (see FIG. 148) is executed. The value of is set (see S3902 in FIG. 148).

The elapsed time counter 223K counts the elapsed time in the period in which the display extension flag 223I is set to ON. This elapsed time counter 223K is set to "4000 (corresponding to 4 seconds)" as a counter value when the display extension flag 223I is set to ON in the post-hit effect setting process (see FIG. 146) (FIG. 146). (See S3711) The counter value is decremented by "1" each time the effect update process (S3112) of the main process (see FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control device 113 executed every 1 millisecond is executed (FIG. 154). (See S5102).

Then, in the effect update process (see FIG. 154), when the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223K becomes “0”, the display extension flag 223I is set to off (see S5104 in FIG. 154). With this configuration, when the elapsed time after the end of the jackpot elapses for a predetermined time (4 seconds), the effect during the jackpot can be ended and the normal effect corresponding to each gaming state can be executed. , You can enthusiastically play a game to win a big hit in a limited period of time.

In this control example, "4000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223K, but the set time is not limited to this, and even if it is 3 seconds, for example. Alternatively, each time the display extension flag 223I is set to on, one of a plurality of times may be selected and the period may be set. Further, the value to be set in the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223K may be set longer than the total of the fluctuation periods for four rotations of the special symbol 2 executed after the end of the jackpot. With this configuration, the fluctuation of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 preferentially digested during the jackpot can be executed while the display extension flag 223I is set to ON.

The continuous effect mode storage area 223M is a storage area for storing the continuous effect mode selected when the continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect mode storage area 223M is executed when the display extension flag 223I is set to off in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) and it is determined that the game state is a time saving state or a probable change state. In the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), the continuous effect mode selected by the continuous effect mode selection table 222E is stored, and until the Kiyoaki mode is selected by the final mode selection table (battle reach is executed). Until then), the effect corresponding to the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223M (pre-battle effect) is executed.

The continuation value storage area 223N is a storage area for storing the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F among the continuation values (HP values) increased / decreased during the continuation effect executed in this control example. Therefore, the update (increase / decrease) process of the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation effect is executed based on the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223N.

In this control example, the continuation value (HP value) is roughly selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F, and the detailed value of the continuation value (HP value) is selected based on the continuation value subselection table 222G. By configuring in this way, the increase / decrease pattern of the continuation value displayed during the continuation effect is increased, but the management of the continuation value (HP value) in the voice lamp control device 113 is set in the continuation value main selection table 222F. Since it is configured to execute only with the continuation value selected based on, the type of continuation value (HP value) to be managed with respect to the type of continuation value (HP value) displayed during the continuation effect. Can be reduced.

The continuation period counter 223P is a counter for measuring the period in which the continuation effect flag 223R is set to ON, and is for suppressing the frequent execution of the final mode (battle reach) in the continuation effect. , The counter used.

The continuation period counter 223P continues every time the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed with the continuation effect flag 223R set to ON, that is, every time the variation of the special symbol is executed. 1 is added in the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4009 in FIG. 149). Then, when it is determined in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) that the counter value is less than "6" (S4003: NO in FIG. 149), the final mode (battle reach) is not selected. It is composed. With this configuration, the selection of the final mode (battle reach) is suppressed until the value of the duration counter is 6 or more, that is, from the execution of the pre-battle effect to the execution of the special symbol change 6 times. Will be done.

The continuous effect setting counter 223Q is a counter for measuring the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set (the number of times the continuous effect flag 223R is set to be turned on) while the game state is set to the probable change state or the time saving state. Yes, it is set so that different continuous effect modes can be easily selected based on the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q. As a result, when the continuous effect is executed for a long period of time and the battle effect is repeatedly set, it is possible to prevent the battle effect of the same mode from being frequently executed. Further, by setting the continuous effect mode to be executed only when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is a specific value (for example, 1), it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a rare value.

This continuous effect setting counter 223Q is referred to when a new continuous effect mode is selected in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4005 in FIG. 149), and 1 is added when the continuous effect mode is selected. (See S4007 in FIG. 149). Then, when the continuous effect is completed (when the gaming state shifts to the normal state or when the jackpot is won), the counter value is cleared to 0.

The continuous effect flag 223R is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect mode is selected (that the pre-battle effect is being executed) while the continuous effect is being executed, and is a flag when the continuous effect mode is selected. Set to on. While the continuous effect flag 223R is set to on, the pre-battle effect is executed in the same continuous effect mode without selecting a new continuous effect mode.

This continuous effect flag 223R is initially set to off when the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed, and is set to on when the continuous effect mode is selected (see S4008 in FIG. 149). While it is set to ON, the process for selecting the continuous effect mode is skipped (S4004: YES in FIG. 149). Then, when the final aspect is selected based on the final aspect selection table 222H (that is, when the battle reach is selected and the pre-battle effect is completed), it is set to off (see FIG. 149: S4015).

The precursor setting flag 223T is a flag used when the countdown effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations (see FIG. 101), and is set to ON when the variation display is switched during the precursor effect period. When this precursor setting flag 223T is set to ON, when a new fluctuation effect is set in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152) executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147), It is controlled so that the precursor effect of the precursory fluctuation is continuously executed from the start of the fluctuation.

This precursor setting flag 223T has a countdown effect having a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) as look-ahead information in the prize information command process (see FIG. 141) (see S3232 and S3233 in FIG. 141), and is currently being executed. When it is determined that the remaining variation period of the display is 10 seconds or more (S3234 in FIG. 141: YES), it is set to on (see S3236 in FIG. 141).

Then, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), it is referred to when setting the effect mode (see S4301 in FIG. 152), and it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233M is set to ON in the process of S4301. In the multiple variation effect setting process (see FIG. 153) executed in, the effect mode is set and then turned off (see S4405 in FIG. 153).

The effect counter group 223Y is a counter used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter group 223Y has at least the first effect counter 223Y1 to the sixth effect counter 223Y6, and each of the counters is an IC for generating random numbers electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113. A random number value in the range of 0 to 198 obtained from (not shown) is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers is an IC that can operate with an operating clock (for example, 1 MHZ) that can be updated to a different random number value for at least each of the effect counters and perform a determination. Is adopted. The value of the effect counter group 223Y is used when executing various determinations executed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed and the determination of the advance notice type of the normal pressing effect.

The memory area 223Z is provided with a flag other than the above-mentioned flag for setting an area and a state for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and temporarily sets other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is an area for memorizing. Specifically, for example, a power-off flag used for determining whether or not there is a momentary power failure is provided. This power off flag is set to on before the power off command is received from the main controller 110 and the power off process is executed. After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 138), when the power-off flag is on (2003: YES in FIG. 138), a certain period of time (100) after the power-off flag is set to on. When the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the elapse of (milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of RAM 223 is cleared (see S3009 in FIG. 138). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231A, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231A Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231A is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231A.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234A capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234A generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234A is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (DYNAMIC RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234A2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234A, a ROM controller 234B, a buffer RAM 234C, and a NOR flash memory 234D.

The NAND flash memory 234A is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234A1 to be stored and a character storage area 234A2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234A has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234A having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234A2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234A can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234A2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234A1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234B is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234A or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234B is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234A while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234B performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234A is analyzed by the ROM controller 234B and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234A. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234C is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234A. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234B has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234C. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234A (or NOR type ROM 234D) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234C. do. Then, the ROM controller 234B performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234C is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234A can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234B can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234A to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234A to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234D is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234A for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234A. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A is not stored in the NOR type ROM 234D, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234D1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234D1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234A) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234D1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231A to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231A, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234C from the NOR type ROM 234D while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234D. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234C and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234A, the NOR type ROM 234D is a boot program in which a predetermined number of instructions are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234A is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234A, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234A and set it in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234C from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234D. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D in the buffer RAM 234C. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234A). It is programmed to transfer to 233A or the data table storage area 233B. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234D1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234C, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233A.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234C as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1 is set in the buffer RAM 234C in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program of the storage area 234D1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1 to the buffer RAM 234C after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231A is transferred to the program storage area 233A. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 is transferred to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231A becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233A. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234A1 are stored in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233A and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234A1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231A is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233A and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233A. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) stored in the program storage area 233A by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234D, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (B)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND type flash memory 234A facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234A, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237A composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234A.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237A according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237A The image data stored in is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234C to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235A, the rear image area 235C, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235E and error message image area 235F, at least a variable image area 235B when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235D are provided.

The main image area 235A at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235B when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entry 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 140 is detected. This power-on image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 155).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 121. In FIG. 121, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on variable image area 235B. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235A at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 121 (A). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 22 (B). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 121 (B) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 121 (C). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235A at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235B, and the images shown in FIGS. 121 (B) and (C) are alternated. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235B at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry 1640 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. It can be displayed on 81 immediately.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235A at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. However, until the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. can.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

The rear image area 235C is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235C among the rear images thereof will be described. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 122 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 122 (B) shows the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” with respect to the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage”.

As shown in FIG. 122, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions A and C. The image between the position C and the position D and the image between the position A and the position A'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position C and the position D. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position A and the position A'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", MPU231 sets the position between the first position A and the position A'of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position C and the position D, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position A to the position A'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions A and C so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235C will be described. As shown in FIG. 122 (A), the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the positions A to D are resident. It is stored in the image area 235C. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sandy beach stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235C, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position A and the position B. It is stored in the rear image area 235C of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is the range from the position A to the position A'(or the range of FIGS. 122 (A) and 122 (B)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position A and the position B including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 122 (A) and 122 (B)) is transferred to the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235C, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position A to the position B is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position A to the position B is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position B'to the position D can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from position B'to position D can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position A to position B, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position A to position B using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position B'to position D is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

In the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236A (see FIG. 120) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions B'and B. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position B is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position B'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position C and the position D is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position A and the position A'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions A and C flows toward the left.

The third symbol area 235D is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235D, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 81 (B)) with numbers from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. To. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235D, image data corresponding to the sub-symbols without numbers are also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sub-symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235E is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "female" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235E. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235E in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235F is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235F, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235F in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236A, a first frame buffer 236B, and a second frame buffer 236C.

The image storage area 236A is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236A is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A via the buffer RAM 237A.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236C. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236B. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233A, a data table storage area 233B, a simple image display flag 233C, a display data table buffer 233D, a transfer data table buffer 233E, a pointer 233F, a drawing list area 233G, a time counting counter 233H, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233I, a drawing target buffer flag 233J, a total value storage area 233K, and a precursor effect flag 233M.

The program storage area 233A is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233A. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233B is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234A1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233B. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233B. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to the big hit medium production, round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

In this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display variation pattern command corresponding to a period for one special symbol variation (variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main control device 110) for display stop type. It is configured to output together with the command and set the effect mode corresponding to each command received by the display control device 114, but other configurations may be used, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 may be used. The display control device 114 is divided into a plurality of display variation pattern commands corresponding to a period (for example, 60 seconds) for one special symbol variation (for example, the first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half variation pattern (30 seconds). In this configuration, the game content (for example, the player's operation on the frame button 22 and a new ball entry) that occurred during the period in which the first half fluctuation pattern is executed may be configured. It is possible to set a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the latter half variation pattern based on (acquisition of information).

In addition, by using the above-mentioned configuration, when an additional display variation pattern command is received after the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period for one special symbol variation is output once, the additional display variation is added. It is not necessary to perform the process of rewriting the effect content in correspondence with the pattern command, and the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 divides the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period (for example, 60 seconds) for one special symbol variation into a plurality of (for example, the first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half). When the variation pattern (30 seconds) is output to the display control device 114, it is preferable to output the display stop type command together with the display variation pattern command that is output first.

Further, in this control example, the display effect command for executing the continuous effect (see FIG. 96) that is continuously executed when the game state is an advantageous state favorable to the player, and the continuous effect are terminated. The final mode command for display for executing the effect (battle reach) to notify whether or not it is, and various other commands for increasing the expectation that the player has won the big hit are the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to be output from, and when various commands are received, the effects corresponding to the various commands are displayed.

Further, even if the effect content is already set based on the reception of the predetermined display command, if an additional display command is received after that, the additional display command is supported. The content is configured to overwrite the production content. As a result, based on the reception of the display variation pattern command, the effect for the period corresponding to the predetermined period (special symbol variation period) is set (created) in advance, and additional effects are added during that period. When a display command (for example, an operation on the frame button 22 by the player, a display command for indicating acquisition of new ball entry information) is received, the display content of the effect can be smoothly changed.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65A, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the sub-symbols without the numbers "1" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233B, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, an A blending information, a color information, and a filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The Α blending information is information for specifying a known Α blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a young man and characters used for various effects such as images and characters of adolescents, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the A-blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the back A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "morning stage", "evening stage", or "night stage"), or the back A to Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image (special back image A to C, etc.) different from the back images A to C is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed. ..

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"START" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 75). "END" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233B, stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and the pointer 233F is initialized. Then, the pointer 233F is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the next is based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233F, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233B.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 124). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. NULL data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 124).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "START" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 124, in the example of FIG. 124). In "02F0H"), "END" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233B and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233F is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 124, when the pointer 233F becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233F is "0002H", since the FULL data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236A. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236A, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233C is a flag indicating whether or not to display an image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233C is executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235A at power-on or the variable image area 235B at power-on of the resident video RAM. It is set to on during the process (see FIG. 155) (see S6005 in FIG. 155). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process. , Off (see S8005 in FIG. 170 (B)).

This simple image display flag 233C is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 157 (B)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233C is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (B)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 157 (B)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S6309 in 157 (B)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233C is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 157 to 169) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233C is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170 (A)), and the simple image display flag 233C is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 170 (B)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233C is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233D stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233B. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233F by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233F one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the drawing instructions. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233E is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233B in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233D, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233E. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the FULL data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233E.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E while adding the pointer 233F one by one. If (that is, if the FULL data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 125) that describes the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236A.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233F is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in each buffer of the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table buffer 233E, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233F to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 167 (B). ), The pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233F is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233F is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and specifies a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 125) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236A. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233G is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 125, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (design 1, symbol). 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, Number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., Error symbol ), Which describes the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, Α blending information, color information and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233J.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, Α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233F, the MPU 231 is the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236A to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233H is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233D, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 157 (B). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233H is decremented by 1 (see S7607 in FIG. 167). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233H becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233I stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233I is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233I generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236A.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233I is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236A. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236A as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233I when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236A, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236A, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233J is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236B and second frame buffer 236C). When the drawing target buffer flag 233J is 0, the first frame buffer 236B is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236C is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233J is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233J, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 157 (B)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236C. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236B. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The total value storage area 233K is an area for storing (storing) the history displayed (displayed as the total value) as the continuous value (HP value) variably displayed in the above-mentioned continuous effect (see FIG. 91). Based on the difference between the value (total value) stored (stored) in the total value storage area 233K and the newly received continuation value (HP value), the display content in the continuation effect (for example, FIG. 92A) The display mode of the reduced value DM12 and the HP display area DM17 and the effect mode of the attack effect) are determined and displayed.

That is, in this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a means (total value storage area 233K) for storing the previously set total value on the display control device 114 side without storing the previously set total value. The display control device 114 calculates the difference between the previous total value and the current total value, and is configured to display the display mode based on the calculation result. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113.

In this control example, means for setting an effect value for increasing the display variation of the continuation value (HP value) on the voice lamp control device 113 side (continuation value subselection table 222G and S4105 to S4107 in FIG. 150). However, the display control device 114 may be provided with means for setting this effect value. With such a configuration, the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

The precursor effect flag 233M is a flag for determining whether or not the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special map fluctuations. If this precursor effect flag 233M is on, it means that the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, and if it is off, it means that the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. It means that it is not done. The precursor flag 233M is set to be turned on when the additional precursor command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7505 in FIG. 166). Further, this precursor effect flag 233M is referred to in the variation pattern command processing (see S6501 in FIG. 159), and after setting the display data table corresponding to the precursor effect executed across a plurality of special figure variations. , Off (see S6503 in FIG. 159). As a result, it is possible to execute a precursory effect across a plurality of special map fluctuations.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the precursory effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, the effect data of the precursory effect executed in the previous special figure change and the time point when the effect data has been executed. When setting the effect corresponding to the current special figure change (S6502 in FIG. 159), the effect data stored in the above-mentioned storage means is referred to in the previous time. It is configured so that the precursory effect executed in the special figure fluctuation of is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the precursory effect executed across a plurality of special map fluctuations without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this control example, the precursor effect is set based on the reception of the display variation pattern command (that is, the precursor effect is executed as a part of the variation pattern). Not limited to this, when a display command indicating that the precursor effect is executed is received, regardless of the variable display content, the precursor effect is displayed during the period indicated by the command or the precursor effect is stopped. It may be configured to display until a command is received.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 126 to 137. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 Mseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 238, 199, 99, 239, respectively, it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first The start winning process accompanying the winning (starting winning) to the entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal ball entry port 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51A, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51B for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: YES), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: NO), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E (the number of hold counts N2 of the variation display in the special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is larger than 0 (S204).

When it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is larger than 0 (S204: YES), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is subtracted by 1 (S205). A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E from the hold ball number command, and the extracted values are used in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is 0 (S204: NO), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is 0 (S209: NO), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is not 0 (S209: YES), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is subtracted by 1 (S210). , A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (S212), and the process is shifted to S213.

As described above, in this control example, when the process of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed, first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is acquired, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is obtained. When the value (N2) of the number counter is 0, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is configured to be acquired. .. With this configuration, the variation of the special symbol 2 can be preferentially executed.

The process of starting the variation of the special symbol is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may be configured to preferentially execute the variation of the special symbol 1, for example, or the special symbol 1 may be executed. And the special symbol 2 may not be prioritized, and for example, the special symbol may be changed according to the order in which the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 140. In this case, a storage area for storing the order in which the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 140 is provided, and the special symbol 1 is provided according to the order (in order of entry) stored in the storage area. It may be configured to acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, or may be configured to use the reserved ball number counter common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. ..

Further, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to fluctuate independently and simultaneously. In this case, if it is determined that one of the special symbols is in the jackpot, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is stopped (the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped until the jackpot of one is completed), or the other. It is advisable to configure it so that the fluctuation of the special symbol of is discarded (even if the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the lottery result is rewritten to be out of order and forcibly stopped). With this configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, when one becomes advantageous to the player, the game can be played without worrying about the fluctuation of the other special symbol. can.

Returning to FIG. 127, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: YES), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If has not elapsed (S214: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: YES), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 128. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. Will be. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, the type of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special). The jackpot type (big hit A to K) is determined according to the values of the symbol 2) and the first hit type counter C2.

In this control example, the winning jackpot type can be identified by making the LED lighting pattern of the first symbol display device 37 different according to the jackpot type (big hit A to K). Specifically, a plurality of lighting patterns are configured by turning on or off each of the plurality of LEDs (for example, seven) provided in the first symbol display device 37. The lighting pattern of the first symbol display device 37 may be configured so that the lighting colors are different. Further, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to notify the outside that the special symbol is changing by blinking at least one of the plurality of LEDs, and is used in this blinking display. The lighting period (lighting period for indicating the stopped state of the special symbol) displayed from the stop of the special symbol to the execution of the next change of the special symbol is longer than the lighting period of the LED. It is configured in. This makes it possible for the player to grasp whether the special symbol is in a fluctuating state or a stopped state.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of this lottery is a big hit of a special symbol (S216: YES), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65A is set based on the big hit type (S217). After that, the probability change flag 203G is reset to off, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203H is reset to 0 (S218) to set the start of the jackpot (S219). When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S219, when the jackpot control process (S1104) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed, it branches to S1201: YES and the opening command is set. Will be done. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, when the process of S219 is completed, next, a stop command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the information regarding the stop symbol is set (S220), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the lottery result of this time is out of order (S216: NO), the variation number subtraction process is executed (S221). The fluctuation number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. After that, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S220 process, and this process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol change start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 127) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203A. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform rows. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect.

In the special symbol change start processing (S213), first, the first random number counter stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A or special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203B). Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203G of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability change flag 203G is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the probability change flag 203G is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the flag 203G is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol.

When the probability change flag 203G is on (S302: YES), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first value for high probability. Based on the random number table per unit, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, five random numbers "5 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the same judgment value as a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 is used. The judgment value that becomes a big hit may be different. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the special symbol 1 is configured to be determined to be a hit in the special symbol 2, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in this control, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of judgment values, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are used. The number of judgment values that are big hits may be different. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and when the lottery is executed by the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player wins the jackpot. Can have the expectation of.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability variation flag 203G is off (S302: NO), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, so the first random number acquired in the processing of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for the low probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. Only "7" is set as the random number value that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches "7", it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: YES). ), The display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202C, and there are two types of special symbol jackpots (big hits). Among A to K), it is determined what kind of jackpot is. As described above, if the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special figure 1) and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot A (the number of rounds is). In the 15th round, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit, it is determined that the game state after the big hit is set to the probable change state of the special symbol) (see FIG. 107), and "20 to 79". If it is within the range, it is determined to be a jackpot B (a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probable change state of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot).

Further, if the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 114", the jackpot C (the number of rounds is 10 and the gaming state after the jackpot is completed regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot). If it is judged to be a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times), and if it is in the range of "115 to 164", the jackpot D (the number of rounds is 5 rounds, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot) It is determined that the game state after the end is the jackpot type) set to the probable change state of the special symbol.

Further, if the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", the jackpot E (the number of rounds is 5 and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is not a low probability state and a time saving state). In the case (when it is a normal state), the normal state is set as the game state after the big hit ends, and when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), after the big hit ends. It is determined that the game state is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times (see FIG. 107).

Further, even when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 (special diagram 2), it is based on the contents specified in the first type selection table 202C (see FIG. 107) as in the case of the above-mentioned special diagram 1. The jackpot F to the jackpot K are determined.

In this process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37A) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A to K). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A to K) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202D (see FIG. 108). When the processing of S307 is completed, the processing is transferred to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (off) (S305: NO), the display mode at the time of off is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the special symbol hold ball storage area (special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203A or special symbol 2 hold ball storage area) is set. Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of 203B), as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether it is a front-rear reach, a reach other than the front-back reach, or complete. Set whether it is off.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, the normal reach is achieved by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 with the specified content of the variation pattern selection table 202D (see FIG. 108). Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as super reach and special reach. When the processing of S309 is completed, the processing is transferred to S310.

In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (the variation pattern command is set. S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127).

Next, the fluctuation number subtraction process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation number subtraction process (S221). In this fluctuation number subtraction process (S221), the time saving medium counter 203H and the specified number of times counter 203J are subtracted based on the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

The time reduction counter 203H is a counter that measures the remaining number of times that the time reduction state is set, and the time reduction number is set when the gaming state shifts to the time reduction state after the end of the big hit. The specified number of times counter 203J is a counter for updating each scenario set in the state transition table 202F (see FIGS. 111 and 112), and is a specified number of times based on the contents of the state transition table set after the end of the jackpot. Is set.

When the process of FIG. 129 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203H is larger than 0 (S401). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203H is larger than 0 (S401: YES), that is, when the current state is the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter 203H is subtracted by 1 (S402), and the time reduction counter 203H is used. Set the remaining working hours command indicating the value of (S403). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the current gaming state, that is, the remaining time reduction number of times in the time reduction state from the remaining time reduction number command received as a part of the state command, and stores it in the state storage area 223E.

After finishing the processing of S403, next, the value of the time saving medium counter 203H is 0, that is, as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving medium counter 203H by the processing of S402, the value of the time saving medium counter 203H becomes 0. It is determined whether or not it is (S404). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203H is 0 in the processing of S404 (S404: YES), the gaming state is set to the normal state, the corresponding state command is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S404, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203H is not 0 (1 or more) (S404: NO), the process of S405 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S406. If it is determined in the processing of S401 that the value of the time saving counter 203H is not larger than 0 (0), the processing (S402 to S405) related to the time saving counter 203H is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. ..

In the process of S406, it is determined whether the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is larger than 0 (S406). In the processing of S406, if it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is larger than 0 (S406: YES), the value of the time saving medium counter 203H is subtracted by 1 (S407), and the balance indicating the value of the specified number of times counter 203J remains. Set the fluctuation count command (S408). The remaining fluctuation number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the number of remaining fluctuations of each state status, that is, the number of remaining fluctuations until the gaming state or the reference fluctuation pattern selection table is switched, from the residual fluctuation number command received as a part of the status command. , Stored in the state storage area 223E.

After finishing the processing of S408, next, the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is 0, that is, as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the specified number of times counter 203J by the processing of S407, the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes 0. It is determined whether or not it is (S409). When it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is 0 (S409: YES), the state transition is performed according to the state transition table 202F, and the corresponding status command is set (S410).

In the process of S410, for example, the state transition 4 table 202F4 is set as the state transition table 202F, and the value "4" of the specified number of times counter 203J set for the state status ST3A is subtracted to become "0". When the status changes from ST3A to ST3, the information indicating the status status ST3 and the information indicating the newly set specified number of times "96" are set as the status commands.

Then, when the processing of S410 is completed, the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is set according to the set state transition table 202F (S411), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined in the processing of S406 that the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is not larger than 0 (0) (S406: NO), the processing (S407 to S411) related to the specified number of times counter 203J is skipped. This process ends.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 140. When there is a start prize, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is added, the value of the corresponding counter is stored in each reserved ball storage area, and the value of the stored counter is used in the special symbol. A look-ahead process for determining the lottery result in advance is executed.

When the start winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (S501: YES), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than the upper limit value (4 in this first control example) (S503).

In the process of S503, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than 4 (S503: YES), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is added by 1 (S504). .. Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 136) described later. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B1 of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S505, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of the random number counter C4 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A of the RAM 203 (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S501 that the ball has not won (winning) in the first winning opening (entry opening) 64 (S501: NO), or in the processing of S503, the special symbol 1 reserved ball When it is determined that the value (N1) of the number counter 203D is not less than 4 (4) (S503: NO), the start winning process for the special symbol 1 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S507.

Next, in each of the processes of S507 to S512, the same process as that of each of the processes of S501 to S506 is executed for the winning (winning) to the second ball entry port 140. The only difference between the processes S507 to S512 is that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball opening 140 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S501 to S506. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when each process of S507 to S512 is completed, the look-ahead process is executed (S513), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the start winning process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S513). In this look-ahead processing (S513), when there is a new winning (winning) in the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 140, the lottery result of the special symbol for the winning (winning) is obtained in advance. A process of setting a command for determining (pre-reading) and outputting the pre-determining (pre-reading) result to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command (winning (winning) information command) set here, the effect on the winning (winning) information stored on hold is based on the winning (winning) information. It is possible to execute it before the special symbol change is executed.

In this look-ahead process (FIGS. 131, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning (winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (S601: NO), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (winning) in the first entry slot 64 or the second entry opening 140 (S601: YES), from the special symbol hold ball storage area (special symbol 1 hold ball). Storage area 203A, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203B) The value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to this prize, the value of the first hit type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the value of the variable type counter CS1 Get the value (S602).

Next, among the determination results specified in the first random number table 202A (see FIG. 106 (A)), the hit determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired (S603). Among the determination results specified in the first hit type selection table 202C (see FIG. 107), the hit type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired (S604).

After finishing the processing of S604, next, among the determination results specified in the stop type table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S605), and the variation pattern selection table 202D is acquired. Among the determination results specified in (see FIG. 108), the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (S606).

Then, the hit determination result information indicating the hit determination result, the hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, the stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and the variation indicating the variation type determination result acquired in the processes of S603 to S606 described above are obtained. The winning information command including the type information is set (S607), and this process is terminated.

The winning (winning) information acquired in the process of S602 described above is information for showing in advance the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed for a new winning (winning). I wish I had it. The lottery result may be selected in advance using various selection tables used for the lottery of the special symbol, or the same selection table as the above-mentioned various selection tables may be provided for the look-ahead processing.

Further, in the processing of S607, the winning (winning) information command is provided with the gaming state information for indicating the gaming state when the special symbol change based on the winning (winning) information that is the target of the pre-reading processing is executed. May be included. Here, the game state information will be described. In this control example, a normal state, a probable change state, and a time saving state can be set as the game state, and a lottery result of a special symbol (big hit determination result, big hit type, and fluctuation pattern) is configured according to each game state. ) And the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 set by the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in this control example, the gaming state is configured to shift based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Specifically, when the time saving state (100 times) is set as the gaming state, the gaming state changes from the time saving state to the normal state on condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in that state. Will be migrated.

In this control example configured in this way, it is determined whether or not the lottery of the special symbol based on the winning (winning ball) that is the target of the look-ahead processing is executed during the time saving state, and the determination result is the game state information. It is configured to be included in the winning (winning) information command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the lottery (variation) of the special symbol based on the ball that has won (winned) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 140 while the game state is shortened, the game state becomes the normal state. Even if it is executed after the transfer, it is possible to set a winning (winning) information command corresponding to the game state when the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed. Furthermore, as the winning (winning) information command, only the winning information command corresponding to the game state when the lottery (variation) of the special symbol corresponding to the winning (winning) information command is executed is set, and the voice lamp is set. Since the data can be output to the control device 113, the amount of data output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The setting method of the winning (winning) information command by the look-ahead processing is not limited to the content of this control example, and is set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the content of the received winning (winning) information command. Any configuration may be used as long as it is possible to suppress the problem that the content of the effect (look-ahead effect) to be performed is inconsistent with the lottery (variation) result of the special symbol that is changed by the transition of the gaming state.

For example, when a winning (winning) information command is set in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110, a winning (winning) information command corresponding to a plurality of gaming states can be set, and the voice lamp control device 113 can be set. The game state when the lottery (variation) of the special symbol corresponding to the winning (winning) information command is executed is determined, and the look-ahead effect is set based on the winning (winning) information corresponding to the determination result. It may be configured to do so. As a result, in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, it is not necessary to perform the process of pre-reading the gaming state, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, as the winning (winning) information command corresponding to the plurality of gaming states described above, for example, as a jackpot determination result, the first determination result of winning the jackpot in any gaming state, the gaming state is probablely changed. Set either the second judgment result in which the jackpot is won only in the case of the state, or the third judgment result in which the jackpot is not won in any game state, and the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to the game state. It may be configured so that the judgment result of the big hit can be acquired, or the information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the look-ahead process is output as it is as a winning (winning) information command, and the voice lamp control device. The 113 may be configured so that the lottery result can be determined based on the received information (information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the main control device 110 in the look-ahead process).

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 140A.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S701). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140A attached to the second entry port 140 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S701: YES), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: NO), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is 0 (S704 :). NO), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is not 0 (S704: YES), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current state is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708). Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203H of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203G is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the value of the time reduction counter 203H is 0. If the probability variation flag 203G is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state).

In the processing of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S708: YES), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second random number table 202B for high probability. Based on the above, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S709). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202B for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202B in FIG. 106 (B)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S708: NO), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second hit for the low probability time. Based on the random number table 202B, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202B for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,7 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202B in FIG. 106 (B)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S709 or S710 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S711), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S711: YES). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S712). In the process of S712, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process is shifted to S714. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S711, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S711: NO), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S714.

In the process of S714, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S714), and if it is in the normal symbol time saving state (S714: YES), the fluctuation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 3 seconds (S715), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (S714: NO), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S716), and this process is performed. To finish. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability (when the time is shortened), the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability (normal state). Therefore, the lottery frequency of ordinary symbols increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols increases, the electric accessory 140A attached to the second entrance 140 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 140. It becomes a state.

Although detailed description is omitted, the game state of the normal symbol is configured so that the normal state is set when the game is won during the big hit of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege because the game state of the normal symbol is also in the advantageous state during the jackpot that is advantageous to the player. In addition, the period in which the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (the jackpot period of the special symbol) and the period in which the electric accessory 140A is easy to open (the winning period of the normal symbol) overlap, which is the most advantageous variable winning for the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the electric accessory 140A being opened obstructs the winning of the ball to the device 65.

Explaining the above-mentioned contents in detail, when the electric accessory 140A is provided in the first flow path through which the ball flows so that the variable winning device 65 can win a prize, the electric accessory 140A is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the ball flowing down the first flow path wins the electric accessory 140A, and there is a problem that the ball cannot be sufficiently won in the variable winning device 65 during the big hit period. Therefore, for example, an electric accessory 140A is arranged at a lower position (downstream side) of the variable winning device 65, and a ball flowing down the first flow path during the jackpot period (during the period when the variable winning device 65 is open). It is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by using a configuration that makes it easy for the variable winning device 65 to win a prize, but in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is limited.

On the other hand, in this control example, since the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state (normal state) during the jackpot of the special symbol, it becomes difficult to open the electric accessory 140A during the jackpot period, and the above-mentioned problem is solved. can do.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: YES), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S717). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S715 or the process of S716 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S717 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S717: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S717, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S717: YES), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S718). In the processing of S718, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a hit and the display mode is set by the processing of S712, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S718, and then the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S712 or the process of S713.

Next, when the variation display currently being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. (S719). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of the normal symbol (S719: YES), then it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the time saving state (S720), and it is determined that the time saving state is in progress. (S720: YES) sets "1 second x 2 times" as the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 140A attached to the second entrance 140 (S722), and shifts to the processing of S723. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S720, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state) (S720: NO), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 140A attached to the second entry port 140. As a setting, "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set (S721), and the process proceeds to S723.

In the process of S723, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140A for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S721 or S722 is set (S723), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140A is set by the process of S723, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed, the electric accessory 140A The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140A is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S721 or the processing of S722 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S719, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S719: NO), the processes of S720 to S723 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S801: YES), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than the upper limit value (4 in this first control example) (S803).

Even if the ball does not pass through the normal entry port 67 (S801: NO) or the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is If it is not less than 4 (S803: NO), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S801: YES) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than 4 (S803: YES), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203F is added by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S901) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state, a weight process (1 second in this first control example) is performed. Execute (S1002). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: YES), the process shifts to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: NO), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: NO). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1012 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: YES), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: NO), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S812 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1114 in FIG. 136, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is also executed when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: NO), the power off occurrence information is stored (S1005: YES), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1004: NO). S1007: YES), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 Mseconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this first control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65A is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65A has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65A. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65A is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65A is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this first control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 140A attached to the second ball entry port 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 140A is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140A is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 140A is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S721 or the processing of S722 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the first control example, among the LEDs 37A of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turns off and turns on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4S. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) ends, the first symbol display device is used. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 128) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S715 or the process of S716 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S718 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 132), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S712 or the process of S713 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 132). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: NO), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 Msec in this first control example) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (4 M seconds in this first control example). S1109), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: YES), the process is transferred to S1101, and each process after S1101 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1109: NO), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238, 239 in the first control example), it becomes 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1108, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: YES), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 134 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1112 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1114), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S1001 in FIG. 135). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1101. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 136). Large open port) This is a process for opening or closing 65A.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, if the processing of S219 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1201, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1201: YES), the opening command is set (S1202), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when the big hit of the special symbol is not started (S1201: NO), it is determined whether the big hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1203). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1203, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1203: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S1203: YES), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1204). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1204: YES), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A is opened (S1205), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1206). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1204: NO), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A is satisfied (S1207). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A, a predetermined number of balls are played. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1207, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A is satisfied (S1207: YES), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A is closed (S1208), and this processing is completed. do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A is not satisfied (S1207: NO), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1209). Specifically, it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special game state (all round games set to the jackpot (for example, 15 rounds)) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed. To determine.

In the process of S1209, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: YES), the ending command is set (S1210), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1209, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: NO), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211), and it is not the end timing of the ending effect. If it is determined (S1211: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1211, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: YES), that is, when it is determined that it is the timing when all the big hit games are finished, it is based on the first hit type selection table 202C. Then, the contents of the probability change flag 203G and the time reduction / medium counter 203H are set (S1212). By the process of S1212, the game state after the end of the big hit corresponding to the winning big hit type (whether or not there is a probability change state, whether or not there is a time saving state, and setting of the number of times of time saving) is set.

Next, referring to the jackpot transition setting table 202E, the state transition destination is selected based on the jackpot type won this time and the game state at the time of winning (see FIG. 110), and the state transition corresponding to the selected state transition destination is selected. Based on the table 202F, the state status and the specified number of times counter 203J are acquired (S1213). For example, if "high probability time reduction (probability change state)" is set as the game state and "big hit G" is won as the big hit type, "state transition 2" is selected as the state transition destination and the state is changed. Of the transition table 202F (see FIG. 111 (A)), the state transition 2 table 202F2 (see FIG. 111 (C)) corresponding to “state transition 2” is referred to.

After that, a state specification command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the game state (high probability state (probability change state), low probability state (normal state)) of the special symbol after the jackpot is completed is set ( S1214), the end of the jackpot is set (S1215), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 154, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting accompanying the power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S3118 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 139). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (S3115: YES in FIG. 139), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S3118. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S3118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S3002: NO), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and is in S3118 in FIG. 139. It was started after the execution of the power cutoff process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. It is a thing. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAH" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAH", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAH", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: YES), the process proceeds to S3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: NO), the process proceeds to S3008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAH" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). Because), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: YES), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S3118 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAH" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: NO), and the data is transferred to the S3008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3002 that the power off processing flag is on (S3002: YES), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power of S3118 is turned off. During the execution of the process, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, "0FFH" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFH", and if it is "0FFH", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFH", then "55H", "0AAH", and "00H". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: YES), the keyword "55AAH" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAH" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: NO), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3118 of FIG. 139 is executed (see S3117 of FIG. 139). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3118 is executed, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S3118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: YES), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (S3009) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the process is shifted to S3010. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S3004 is performed via the process of S3004. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: NO), S3009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process is shifted to S3010.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S3009 is that when the processing of S3008 is reached from S3004 via the processing of S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S3004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S3010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and a time setting process for setting reference timekeeping information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time effect is executed (S3012). , Move to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 Msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous S3101 process was executed (S3101), and 1 Msec or more has elapsed. If not (S3101: NO), the process of S3102 to S3112 is not performed and the process proceeds to S3113. In the processing of S3101, whether or not 1M seconds have elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S3102 to S3112, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1M seconds). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3113 and the variation display setting process of S3114 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S3113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S3114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 Msec or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: YES), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S3105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223B2.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S3107) will be described.

In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S3107), first, it is determined whether or not the valid period flag indicating that the pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively handled is set to ON. Here, when the validity period flag is set to ON, it is next determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. When it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, the display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set, and this processing is terminated.

The above-mentioned validity period flag is provided for each effect executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22. For example, if the background of the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the validity period flag (first validity period flag) for indicating that is turned on. If it is a period during which an operation effect for changing the variation effect mode of the third symbol based on the press of the frame button 22 is executed (a period during which the press of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted in the operation effect), the operation effect is set to The validity period flag (second validity period flag) for indicating the effect is set to on.

Further, the above-mentioned plurality of validity period flags are prioritized in advance according to the privilege value given when the player presses the frame button 22, and the plurality of validity period flags are set to ON. If it is set to, the process based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the validity period flag having the higher priority among the plurality of validity period flags set to be turned on.

With this configuration, when the periods for effectively accepting the pressing of the frame button 22 overlap, for example, a period in which the background can be changed (a period in which the first effective period flag is set to ON) and an operation effect Is based on the pressing of the frame button 22 based on the second validity period flag set with a higher priority when the period (the period in which the second validity period flag is set to be turned on) overlaps. Since the processing is executed, it is possible to execute an effect having a high privilege value for the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, the effect executed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to execute the effect for indicating that the second validity period flag is set to ON. Since only the effect corresponding to the valid period for which the priority is set is high is executed, the player can operate the operation timing while watching the effect executed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81. The frame button 22 can be pressed without making a mistake. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In this control example, as a method of setting the priority for each validity period flag, a configuration in which the priority is set for each validity period flag in advance is used, but other configurations may be used, for example, a frame. In the button input monitoring / effect processing (S3107), it may be configured to determine whether the validity period flag is set to ON in order from the highest priority. As a result, even when a plurality of validity period flags are set to on at the same time, the process based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the validity period flag having a high priority, so that the player It is possible to execute a production with a high privilege value, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S3107) is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S3109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S3110 is completed, various counter update processes are executed (S3111). In this various counter update process, a process for updating the various counters used in the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. Specifically, the counter values of the first effect counter 223Y1 to the sixth effect counter 223Y6 included in the effect counter group 223Y are updated so as not to be synchronized. The first effect counter 223Y1 to the sixth effect counter 223Y6 are counters used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, respectively. The first effect counter 223Y1 to the sixth effect counter 223Y6 are composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed (1 Msec). (Every time), the update process is executed so that the values are different.

In this first control example, when a plurality of effects are selected based on the values of the effect counters, a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used. Therefore, when a plurality of effects are selected in the main process. Even if it is, the same counter value is referred to, and it is suppressed that the selected effect is biased. However, for example, a plurality of effect modes selected in different processes in one main process. If you want to synchronize, you may configure to select the effect mode using the same effect counter.

Further, in the first control example, a plurality of counters (first effect counter 223Y1 to sixth effect counter 223Y6) having different update patterns are used, but for example, a random value is used by using the update value of one effect counter. May be calculated, and each effect may be selected using the calculated value. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the updated values of the effect counter, the value of the last 1st digit, the value of the last 2nd digit, and the last 1 digit and the lower value of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the 1st digit by the value of the 2nd digit. It is advisable to calculate so that each value does not have regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

When the processing of S3111 is completed, the effect update processing (S3112) is next executed. This effect update process is a process of updating various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the elapsed period. In this effect update process (S3112), control is executed for the effect (for example, the display extension effect executed after the end of the big hit) regardless of the change of the special symbol. A detailed description of this effect update process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154.

In the process of S3113, a command determination process that performs a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S3113). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S3114). In the variation display setting process, the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is used to execute the effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (the variation effect of the third symbol and other effects) in the third symbol display device 81. The display variation pattern command is generated and set. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

When the processing of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S3115 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S3115: YES), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off process is executed. (S3118). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S3119), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: NO), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: NO), the process returns to the process of S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: YES), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and is a process for executing control according to the type of the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control unit 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S3201). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3201: YES), the variation start flag 223C provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3201: YES). S3203), the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later in order to determine a detailed display mode of the variation pattern. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S3201: NO), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3204). Then, when the stop type command is received (S3204: YES), the stop type selection flag 223D of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: NO), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3207). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S3207: YES), the reserved ball number counter of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received reserved ball number command is displayed. , Stores the value included in the received reserved ball count command (S3208), and ends this process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, from the received reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main controller 110 is used. The value (the number of holdings N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223B1 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main controller 110 (special) from the received reserved ball number command. The number of holdings N2) of the variation display in the symbol 2 is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223B2 of the voice lamp control device 113.

When any of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223B2 is changed in the process of S3208, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. The hold ball count command for display is set. Since the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this display reserved ball number command, an accurate number of reserved symbols can always be displayed in the reserved display area DN4 of the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3207, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S3207: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3209: YES), the winning information command processing is executed (S3210), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the winning information command processing (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing (S3210). This winning information command process (S3210) is a process executed when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, and the information included in the received winning information command corresponds to the winning information storage area 223A. Executes the process for storing in the area (held storage area corresponding to the winning information command).

Here, the information included in the winning information command is information targeting the winning ball, such as information on the winning / failing judgment result of the special symbol, information on the stop type, and information on the fluctuation pattern, but includes other information. It may be possible to include, for example, winning information about a ball that has already won a prize (a winning information command has been received in the past).

When the prize information command process (S3210) is executed, first, the received prize information command information (look-ahead information) is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223A (S3231). As described above, the prize information storage area 223A can store up to four prize information commands for special symbol 1 and up to four prize information commands for special symbol 2, for a total of eight prize information commands. The winning information commands are stored in a designated storage area according to the order in which the winning information commands are received.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) having a variation time of 60 seconds or more as the information (look-ahead information) included in the winning information command received this time (S3232). If it is determined in the process of S3232 that there is no variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or longer) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: NO), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is fluctuation type information (variation pattern information of reach or longer) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: YES), then the specific effect C (see FIG. 101), that is, predetermined from the start of the fluctuation. It is determined whether or not there is variable type information indicating a specific effect (for example, an effect for causing the player to operate the frame button 22) to be executed within a period (for example, within 5 seconds) (S3233).

Here, if it is determined that there is a specific effect C (S3233: YES), then it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the variation display currently being executed is 10 seconds or more (S3234). In this process of S3234, based on the time managed by the liquid crystal display effect execution management process (S3110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control device 113 (elapsed time with respect to the set fluctuation time). The remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is determined.

If it is determined in the processing of S3234 that the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds or more (S3234: YES), it means that a period during which a precursor effect can be added to the fluctuation display being executed is secured, so that the display is added. The precursor command is set (S3235), the precursor setting flag 223T is set to ON (S3236), and this process is terminated. By executing the above-mentioned processing, it is possible to execute a precursor effect straddling a plurality of variation displays as a suggestion effect targeting the specific effect C to be executed in the variation display from the next time onward. As a result, the specific effect executed at the beginning of the variation display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the variation), that is, the period during which the suggestion effect is executed with only one variation display. Since it is possible to execute a suggestion effect using a plurality of variable displays even for a specific effect that is executed at a timing that cannot be secured, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the suggestion effect and to set a range in which the specific effect can be set. It can be expanded, and the degree of freedom in the production of variable display can be increased.

In the process of S3234, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than 10 seconds (S3234: NO), that is, when the period during which the suggestion effect can be added to the fluctuation display during execution cannot be secured, the execution is in progress. This process ends without changing the display mode of the variable display. Here, if the period during which the suggestion effect can be added to the running variation display cannot be secured (S3234: NO), the variation corresponding to the prize information determined to have the countdown effect in the current prize information command processing (S3210). When setting the display, a specific effect is set within a range in which the suggestion effect can be executed with only one variation display (for example, a range in which 15 seconds or more have passed from the start of the variation), and the suggestion effect is set.

With this configuration, the timing at which the winning information is generated (the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot) with respect to the fluctuation to which the winning information is given to indicate that the countdown effect is executed. Depending on the timing at which the ball enters the 140), the production mode of the countdown effect can be different, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, the specific effect set at the beginning of the variation display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the variation) is set to another period (for example, the specific effect). It is stipulated that the effect shows that the jackpot expectation is higher than the specific effect) that is executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation. That is, it is stipulated that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is easier to select the fluctuation pattern in which the specific effect C can be executed.

As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuation displays, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player to win the jackpot in the fluctuations from the next time onward. Furthermore, it is possible to enthusiastically store the reservation of the special symbol so that the suggestion effect that straddles a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In this control example, as described above, the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing at which the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution) are used to straddle a plurality of variable displays. Is used to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, the suggestion effect is based on the timing at which the prize information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). It may be configured to execute a precursor effect as a suggestion effect and set a specific effect at the timing of starting the next variation display when it is determined whether or not to execute. , A specific effect is set based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 during the period in which the precursor effect is being executed (a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Is also good. With this configuration, the suggestion effect is produced based on the game situation (the lottery result of the next variation, the variation pattern, or the operation content to the operation means (frame button 22)) after the suggestion effect is started. Aspects can be set. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased as compared with the configuration in which the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined in advance and then executed.

Further, in this control example, as an example of executing the suggestion effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays, the fluctuation display being executed and the fluctuation display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the fluctuation display are displayed. Although the suggestion effect used is explained, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of the variable display, the suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display that is executed one after another from the variable display that is being executed, or the variable display that is executed next time is executed one after another. The suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, it is determined whether to set the timing for executing the suggestion effect to the running variable display or the next variable display based on the timing when the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). It is good to provide a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113, and for example, a holding display area in which the number of reserved balls of a special symbol is displayed. In DN4, in order to suggest a hold display (holding symbol) corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot, a holding change notice effect for changing the display mode of the holding display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous notice effect that expects a big hit as an effect of a special symbol whose fluctuation starts before.

Further, in this first control example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot is referred to, and the winning information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. It is configured to determine whether or not it is (whether or not there is a villa on hold), and to set the effect during the big hit game or after the big hit is finished based on the judgment result. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the probability change state, the effect content is selected based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223A.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, when the effect (look-ahead effect) referring to the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223A is executed, a flag indicating that fact (pre-reading effect) For example, if the look-ahead effecting flag) is set to on and the look-ahead effecting flag is set to on, when a new winning information command is received, the winning information included in the winning information command is included. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without a gap and give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, a control other than the above-mentioned contents for solving the above-mentioned problem may be used. For example, a priority rank is given to a plurality of look-ahead effects set based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A. A look-ahead effect with a high priority rank is compared with the priority rank of the look-ahead effect that is given and currently executed and the priority rank of the look-ahead effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command. May be controlled to execute. In this case, if it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead effect is higher, the look-ahead effect switching notification for notifying the player that the pre-reading effect being executed ends in the middle is executed. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the pre-reading effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the initially set end timing. You may.

In addition, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, the higher the priority rank so that the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest. It is good to set so that is high. As a result, when the pre-reading effect being executed ends in the middle, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot, and the new pre-reading effect to be executed next can be watched.

Returning to FIG. 140, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3209: NO), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S3211), and if the winning-related command has been received (S3211). S3211: YES), the hit-related command process (S3212) is executed, and after the hit-related command process is completed, this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the hit-related command processing (S3212) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command processing (S3212). In the hit-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3301). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: YES), the jackpot medium effect setting process is executed (S3302), and then the opening effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 for display. Set the opening command (S3303) and end this process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the contents of the jackpot middle effect setting process (S3302) executed when the opening command is received (S3301: YES) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot medium effect setting process (S3302). In this jackpot middle effect setting process (S3302), the holding status at the time of winning the jackpot (contents of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A and the counter value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223B2 (holding ball number)). The process for setting the effect to be executed during the jackpot is executed based on.

Specifically, the result of determining whether or not there is winning information indicating that the special symbol has won the jackpot, and the result of determining whether or not the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit (4). Based on the above, the effect to be executed during the jackpot is selected using the jackpot medium effect selection table 222C (see FIG. 115 (C)).

When the jackpot effect setting process (S3302) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is extracted (S3401), and then based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2. The current number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is extracted (S3402), and it is determined whether the extracted number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is 0 (S3403).

Here, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (S3403; NO), the extracted winning information and the reserved rank corresponding to the number of reserved balls are read from the reserved rank selection table 222B (S3404). The process proceeds to S3406, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 in the process of S3403, "1" is read as the hold rank and the process proceeds to the process of S3406.

In the hold rank selection table 222B, the hold rank is stored at the time of the jackpot winning in order to select the hold rank based on the expectation that the winning information for winning the jackpot again in the hold at the end of the jackpot (the winning information in the hold) may exist. The result of determining whether or not the jackpot winning information is included in the winning information, and whether or not new winning information may be stored during the jackpot (whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit). The hold rank is selected based on the result of determining (). Further, when the number of reserved balls is "0" at the time of winning a big hit, since there is no winning information, the reserved rank "1" is set without using the reserved rank selection table 222B.

As described above, in this control example, when selecting the effect to be executed during the jackpot, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls and the content of the winning information, that is, , The hold rank is selected based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. Based on the hold rank selected here, the effect executed during the jackpot is selected in the process of S3406 described later.

With this configuration, the production corresponding to the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls, and the content of the winning information, that is, the winning / failing judgment result is executed during the jackpot. In addition to the effect of congratulating the player on winning the jackpot, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting the content of the game after the end of the jackpot.

In this control example, the effect executed during the jackpot is configured to refer to the hold rank selected in the above-mentioned contents, but other than that, for example, the number of jackpots included in the winning information and the number of jackpots are used. , Hold rank based on information such as the type of fluctuation pattern and the transition of the game state (probability change state, time saving state, normal state) (game state that can be determined when all changes of the special symbol corresponding to the hold ball are completed). May be selected.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned hold rank, the type of jackpot executed this time, the number of times that the jackpot winning is continued within a predetermined period (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes within 50 times), and the player are advantageous. It is also possible to use the so-called number of consecutive villas, such as the number of big hits won while the game state is continuous, and the operation information indicating the operation content for the player's operation means. This makes it possible to perform more various effects during the jackpot.

Further, in this control example, the effect during the jackpot selected based on the above-mentioned hold rank is executed using the entire main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 86 (A)). The aspect is not limited to this as long as the player can grasp the contents during the jackpot, and the common jackpot middle effect is executed using the entire main display area DM, and a part of the main display area DM is executed. As a sub-effect to be executed using the above-mentioned, the effect during the jackpot selected based on the above-mentioned hold rank may be executed, or a device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub-display device, a lamp) may be executed. It may be executed by using the device, the frame of the pachinko machine 10, and the voice output device). As a result, while sharing the effect of showing that the jackpot has been won (the effect of showing that the jackpot is in progress), it is possible to suggest the game content after the jackpot to the player based on the hold rank. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot is in progress in an easy-to-understand manner, and to execute an effect that gives expectations after the jackpot ends.

Returning to FIG. 143, the description will be continued. In the process of S3406, the jackpot middle effect is read out with reference to the jackpot middle effect selection table 222C based on the read hold rank and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 (S3406). Next, it is determined whether the jackpot medium effect read out this time is an additional effect (S3407), and if it is determined to be an additional effect (S3407: YES), the additional effect flag 223H is set to ON (S3408). , The display jackpot middle effect command corresponding to the read jackpot middle effect is set (S3409), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3407, if it is determined that the jackpot medium effect read out this time is not an additional effect (S3407: NO), the process of S3408 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3409 described above.

Returning to FIG. 142, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3301, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S3301: NO), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3304). Here, when the round number command is received (S3304: YES), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3305), and then it is determined whether the additional effect flag 223H is set to ON (S3306). ).

Here, when the additional effect flag 223H is set to ON (S3306: YES), the process related to the additional effect is executed at the timing when a new round is started (that is, the timing when the round number command is received). Therefore, the process during the additional effect is executed (S3307), then the additional effect command for display is set (S3308), and the command for the number of display rounds according to the number of rounds extracted this time is set (S3309). ), End this process. The display addition effect command and the display round number command set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 136). In S3102), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the content of the additional effect processing (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional effect processing (S3307). This additional effect processing (S3307) is a process executed when the additional effect is selected as the effect during the jackpot in the above-mentioned jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 143), and the additional effect is This is a process for selecting the display mode of the round number display mode DM10 (see FIG. 86 (A)) displayed when the game is executed.

This additional effect in-process (S3307) is a process executed when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3304: YES) in the hit-related command process (see FIG. 142). That is, during the big hit, the above-mentioned additional effect during processing is executed every time a new round is started. As a result, it is possible to select the fixed number display mode DM4 already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the round number display mode DM10 corresponding to the progress of the running round number display mode DM3.

Further, in this control example, as the number of rounds to be displayed in the additional effect, the number of rounds set for the running jackpot (for example, 10 rounds) is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A. It is configured to add up the number of jackpot rounds (for example, 15 rounds). In this control example configured in this way, by executing the additional effect during production process (S3307) every time a new round is started, the winning information newly stored during the jackpot corresponds to the jackpot. Even if there is, it is possible to immediately execute an additional effect that reflects the content, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the additional production processing (S3307) is executed, first, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the jackpot information storage area 223F, that is, the number of rounds set for the currently executing jackpot is read (S3501), and then All the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read out (S3502). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is included in the winning information (S3503).

Here, if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: YES), the number of rounds read by the processing of S3501 (the number of rounds set for the currently executing jackpot) and the winning information. The summing process (S3508 to S3511) for summing up the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot included in the game is executed. The total processing will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: NO), the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223G, that is, the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81. The number of display rounds displayed as the fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 (“10” in the case of FIG. 86 (A)) is read out (S3504), and the number of hit rounds read out in the process of S3501 is read out in the process of S3506. The number of displayed rounds is subtracted (S3505). The number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds recognizable by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds determined to be executed internally by the process of S3505, that is, the player The number of unrecognized rounds (the number of remaining rounds) is calculated.

Next, the number of additional rounds is selected by referring to the number of additional rounds selection table 222D based on the number of remaining rounds calculated in the process of S3505 and the presence / absence of winning information corresponding to the jackpot, and stored in the display round number storage area 223G. (S3506), the addition display process is executed (S3507), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the big hit (S3503: YES), the total process is executed. In this total processing, first, the number of rounds corresponding to the winning prize stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read (S3508), then the number of rounds read in the processing of S3501 and the number of rounds read in the processing of S3508. The total number of rounds is calculated (S3509).

Next, the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223G, that is, the number of display rounds displayed as the fixed number display mode DM4 of the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 86 (FIG. 86). In the case of A), "10") is read (S3510), and the number of display rounds read in the process of S3510 is subtracted from the total number of rounds added in the process of S3509 (S3511). The number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds recognizable by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds determined to be executed internally by the process of S3511, that is, the player The number of unrecognized rounds (the number of remaining rounds) is calculated. Then, after executing the above-mentioned processing of S3506, the addition display processing is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Of the processes during the additional effect (S3307) described above, the processes S3501 to S3511 are processes for setting the display mode of the round number display mode DM10 during the execution of the additional effect. As described above, it is configured to be executed when a new round is started (a new round game is started) during the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to execute the process for setting the display mode of the effect regarding the number of rounds at the optimum timing.

The execution timing and processing contents of the process for setting the display mode for displaying as the round number display mode DM10 are not limited to the contents of this control example. For example, in this control example, a new round is used. By configuring the process to execute the additional effect processing when is started, the winning information determination process (S3502, S3503 process) and the display round number setting process (S3504 to S3506, SS3510 to S3506). Processing) and is configured to be executed integrally, but the above-mentioned winning information determination processing is executed in advance at the timing when the winning information command is received, the result is temporarily stored, and the stored result is used. It may be configured to execute the above-mentioned display round number setting process.

Further, in this control example, when the round number command is received (S3304: YES in FIG. 142), the process during the additional effect is executed, but the additional effect is performed during the round game (interval period). It may be configured to perform intermediate processing. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the additional production during the round game (interval period) in which the amount of processing is relatively small during the jackpot where various control processes are executed, and the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to prevent the processing load of the above from temporarily increasing.

In this case, the number of rounds to be executed next is determined based on the winning information command that has already been received, and the above-mentioned additional effect processing is executed based on the determination result. good. Further, in this control example, the additional effect processing is executed every time a new round is started, but when a specific round (for example, an even number round or a multiple of 5 rounds) is started. It may be configured to be executed only in the above, or a lottery for whether or not to execute the additional effect processing may be performed and executed based on the lottery result.

In this control example, the processes of S3501 to S3511 are executed every time a new round is started. For example, after the process of S3502, a new prize is won from the time when the previous round is started. A process for determining whether or not information has been added may be provided, and if new winning information has not been added, the processes of S3503 to S3511 may be skipped. This can reduce the processing executed every round.

Returning to FIG. 144, the explanation will be continued. When the process of S3506 is completed, next, the additional display process (S3507), which is a process for executing the effect display related to the number of display rounds set in the process of S3506, is executed, and this process is terminated. Here, the additional display process (S3507) will be described with reference to FIG. 145.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional display process (S3507). This additional display process (S3507) is a process for setting a display command for the additional effect corresponding to the number of display rounds (see S3508 in FIG. 144) determined in the process during the additional effect (see FIG. 144). In this control example, when the number of rounds in the jackpot is the predetermined number N (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5, that is, 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), the number of display rounds (determined round number display mode DM4). ) Is updated to the number of rounds immediately before the predetermined number of rounds N (number of rounds that is a multiple of 5) (that is, 4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds), and the next round (predetermined number of rounds N). ), A precursor effect (see FIG. 85 (B)) suggesting that the display round number (determined round number display mode DM4) is updated is executed.

When the additional display process (S3507) is executed, first, the number of rounds N (specifically, 5 rounds and 10 rounds) at which the number of rounds this time is the update timing of the number of rounds (timing to additionally display the number of confirmed rounds) , 15 rounds, which is a multiple of 5) is 1 less than the number of rounds N-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601). If it is determined that this time is the number of rounds N-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: YES), a precursor effect for displaying the confirmed number of rounds in the next round (Fig. 85 (B)). ) Is executed, the corresponding additional display selection command is set (S3602), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, the effect mode of the above-mentioned precursor effect (see FIG. 85B) is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223G. For example, the display round number storage is performed. When the number of display rounds stored in the area 223G is 10 or more, it is displayed in an effect mode in which the number of "treasure boxes" displayed during the precursor effect is reduced (see FIG. 86 (B)) or during the precursor effect. A production mode (see FIG. 86 (B)) is displayed, which is a luxurious display mode of the “treasure box”. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the effect content of the additional display effect at the time when the precursor effect is executed.

In this control example, the effect mode of the precursor effect is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223G, but other than that, for example, it is internally determined. It may be configured to set the effect mode of the precursory effect based on the number of rounds (when the number of consecutive villas in the hold is fixed, the number of rounds including the number of rounds set in the jackpot in the hold). As a result, the player can predict the number of rounds that are internally determined based on the effect mode of the precursor effect and the effect mode of the additional effect that adds the number of display rounds, and is executed during the jackpot. You can continue to be interested in the production.

Further, in this control example, by changing the display mode of the "treasure box (selected images DM5 to DM7)" displayed during the precursory effect, the player can develop the additional effect performed during the jackpot in the future. However, the display mode for other configurations may be changed. For example, the display of the "arrow (selected image DM8)" for selecting the "treasure box (selected images DM5 to DM7)" is used. The mode (for example, color or size) may be changed, or the lighting pattern of voice or LED may be changed. Further, it may be configured so that the period during which the precursory effect is executed is different.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3601 that the number of rounds this time is not N-1 rounds (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: NO), then the number of rounds this time is N rounds (S3601: NO). If it is determined whether it is the 5th round, 10th round, 15th round (S3603), and if it is determined to be the Nth round (5th round, 10th round, 15th round) (S3603: YES), the number of display rounds is stored. An additional display command for display corresponding to the number of display rounds stored in the area 223G is set (S3604), and this process is terminated. Further, even when it is determined in the process of S3603 that the number of rounds this time is not the Nth round (S3603: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

The additional display command for display set in the process of S3604 described above is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display additional display command, the display control device 114 displays the round number display mode DM10 corresponding to the content of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, the number of display rounds set in the process of adding to a specific round (number of rounds N) is displayed (the display mode of the fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 is changed (added)). However, it may be configured to change (add) the display mode of the fixed round number display mode DM4 at other timings, for example, to determine whether or not to add and update the fixed round number display mode DM4. The lottery means may execute the lottery every time a new round starts, and set the timing to execute the effect of adding and updating the fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 based on the lottery result. As a result, it is possible to make the timing at which the content of the fixed round number display mode DM4 is updated irregular, and it is possible to continuously play the game during the big hit while giving the player a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 142, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3306 that the additional effect flag 223H is not on (off) (S3306: NO), it is not necessary to execute the process during the additional effect (S3307), so that the processes of S3307 and S3308 are performed. The process of S3309 described above is executed by skipping, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3304, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3304: NO), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3310). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: YES), the display ending command is set (S3311), the jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3312), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the jackpot post-effect setting process (S3312) executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: YES) will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big hit post-effect setting process (S3312). In this jackpot post-effect setting process (S3312), the effect executed during the jackpot is continuously executed during the period when the jackpot ends and the special symbol is changed, and the effect is executed during the jackpot. This is a process for setting a post-hit effect corresponding to the executed effect.

When the big hit post-hit effect setting process (S3312) is executed, first, the game state after the big hit is read from the information stored in the state storage area 223E (S3701), and then the additional effect flag 223H is set to ON. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the effect executed during the current jackpot is an additional effect (S3702). If it is determined that the effect is for addition (S3702: YES), then it is determined whether or not there is prize information that has won a big hit in the prize information storage area 223A (whether or not the villa is on hold) (S3703).

In the process of S3703, if it is determined that there is winning information for winning the jackpot (S3703: YES), a command after the jackpot for display is set (S3704), and this process is terminated. That is, when it is determined in the processing of S3703 that there is winning information that has won a big hit (S3703: YES), all of the total number of rounds calculated in the processing of S3505 in the processing during the addition effect (S3307) of FIG. 144 is displayed. Since it is not displayed as the number of rounds, the additional effect continues until the next jackpot is executed (until the change of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information including the jackpot information is completed). Set the additional effect after jackpot command for display so that it is displayed.

The additional display effect jackpot command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the command after the jackpot for the additional effect for display, the display control device 114 starts the display for continuously executing the additional effect for display while executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. FIG. 88 (A)). With this configuration, even after the jackpot is finished, the effect executed during the jackpot can be continuously executed.

In this control example, the number of display rounds (determined round number display mode DM4) is partially displayed (for example, 5 rounds) even for the number of rounds set for one jackpot (for example, 15 rounds). Because of the configuration, from the effect content of the additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it may be that the additional effect is executed during one big hit, or there are multiple big hits (the first big hit). It is difficult to grasp whether it is an additional effect that is executed during the special symbol fluctuation period) that is executed from the end to the start of the second big hit. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the number of big hits won while the additional effect is continuously executed, or the number of rounds set for one big hit, in an incomprehensible manner. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to continue the additional effect for a long time (the jackpot will continue for a long time).

Returning to FIG. 146, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3703, when it is determined that there is no winning information for winning the jackpot (S3703: NO), all of the total number of rounds calculated in the process of S3505 in the process of adding effect (S3307) in FIG. 144 is the number of display rounds. The additional effect flag 223H is set to off (S3705), the display round number storage area 223G is cleared (S3706), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3702, if it is determined that the effect executed during the current jackpot is not an additional effect (S3702: NO), then the effect executed during the current jackpot is a continuous hit effect. (See FIG. 84). Here, if it is determined that the effect is for continuous hitting (S3707: YES), a command after the effect for continuous hitting for display is set (S3708), and this process is terminated.

The display continuous hit effect jackpot command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the command after the continuous hit effect jackpot for display, the display control device 114 starts the display for continuously executing the continuous hit effect while executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. do. With this configuration, even after the jackpot is finished, the effect executed during the jackpot can be continuously executed.

In the processing of S3707, if it is determined that the effect is not continuous hit (S3707: NO), that is, if the normal hit effect is executed during the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is probable or shortened. If it is determined to be present (S3709), and if it is determined to be in a probable change or time saving state (S3709: YES), the display extension flag 223I is set to ON (S3710), and "4000" is set as the value of the elapsed time counter 223K. Set (S3711) and end this process.

Here, the contents executed in the processes of S3710 and S3711 will be described. In this control example, the effect during the jackpot is selected with reference to the jackpot middle effect selection table 222C shown in FIG. 115 (C). As shown in FIG. 115 (C), the normal winning effect is the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A at the time when the holding ranks "1" to "4" are all, that is, when the big hit is won. It is configured as an effect that can be executed even if the (holding symbol) contains the information that the jackpot has been won (when holding the holding villa) or not (when not holding the holding villa). There is.

Then, when the game state after the end of the big hit in which the normal hit effect is executed is a probability change or a time saving state, the display extension flag 223I is set to ON, and the ending display displayed during the big hit is set to the predetermined value after the end of the big hit. It is displayed until the condition is satisfied (see FIG. 89 (A)). With this configuration, the special symbol is changed while the jackpot ending display is displayed, and if the jackpot is won, the ending display screen displays that the jackpot has been won (Fig. 89 (Fig. 89). B) See). As a result, even when the normal hitting effect is executed, it is possible to give expectations to the reserved inner consecutive villas and to continue and execute the effect during the big hit when the reserved inner consecutive villas are executed.

Further, in this control example, as a period for continuously executing the jackpot ending display even after the jackpot ends, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 times or 4 seconds after the jackpot ends until any of the conditions is satisfied. The period is set, and by setting the value of "4000" in the elapsed time counter 223K in the processing of S3711, the time has elapsed since the end of the jackpot (after the special symbol can be changed). I try to count.

By setting the period for executing the jackpot ending display based on the elapsed time from the end of the jackpot, for example, instead of setting it based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (for example, 4 times). Even when the change of the special symbol is not executed after the end (when there is no hold of the special symbol), the jackpot ending display can be executed only for a limited period.

In this control example, if the special symbol is not changed after the jackpot ends and the elapsed time from the jackpot end has elapsed for a predetermined period (4 seconds), the demo screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to be displayed.

In the processing of S3709, if it is determined that the game state after the big hit is not a probable change or a time saving state (S3709: NO), the effect executed during the big hit is continued during the change period of the special symbol executed after the big hit. The value of the display round number storage area 223G is cleared (S3712), and this process is terminated without executing the process of displaying.

Returning to FIG. 142, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3310 that the ending command has not been received (S3310: NO), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S3313), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. In the process of S3211, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S3211: NO), then it is determined whether the status command has been received (S3213), and it is determined that the status command has been received. (S3213: YES) extracts the current gaming state from the received command and stores it in the state storage area 223E (S3214).

In the process of S3214, when the state specification command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main control device 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 is received, the current gaming state is received. Separately, a process of storing the game state set after the end of the big hit is executed. By configuring in this way, the state command indicating the current game state and the state specification command indicating the game state (planned game state) set when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the jackpot is completed) are separated. Can be remembered. In addition, after the jackpot ends, a state command indicating the current game state will be received, and at that time, the contents of the state command indicating the current game state and the contents of the state specification command indicating the planned game state It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the commands match, and to use a configuration for determining whether or not the game state is properly set based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means. As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is illegally set to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

If it is determined in the process of S3213 that the status command has not been received (S3213: NO), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S3216), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By this process, it is possible to set a command for making various settings to the display control device 114 based on the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the variation display setting process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S3114). This variation display setting process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process (S4014), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223C provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3801). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223C is not on (that is, it is off) (S3801: NO), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S3813 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223C is on (S3801: YES), the variation start flag 223C is set to off (S3802), and then in the process of S3203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 140). , The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from RAM 223.

Next, it is determined whether the display extension flag 223I is set to ON (S3803), and if it is determined that the display extension flag 223I is set to ON (S3803: YES), the extension management process is executed (S3804), and S3811 Move to processing. The extension management process (S3804) is a process for managing the end timing of the extension display effect of continuing (extending) the ending display during the jackpot even after the end of the jackpot. A detailed description of this extended management process (S3804) will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223I is not set to on (set to off) (S3803: NO), then the game stored in the state storage area 223E. Information indicating the state is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probable change or a time saving state (S3805). If it is determined that the state is probable change or the time reduction state (S3805: YES), the continuous effect setting process is executed (S3806), and then the process proceeds to the process of S3811. The continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting an effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) (see FIG. 91) executed in a probable change or a time saving state. A detailed description of this continuous effect setting process (S3806) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a probable change or a time saving state (S3805: NO), it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for executing the expectation degree effect based on the extracted fluctuation pattern. Determine (S3807). If it is determined in the process of S3807 that it is a fluctuation pattern for executing the expectation degree effect (S3807: YES), the expectation degree effect setting process is executed (S3808), and the process proceeds to the process of S3811. The expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) is a process of setting an effect mode (see FIG. 102) for suggesting an expectation degree that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. A detailed description of this expectation effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 151.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3807, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute the expectation degree effect (S3807: NO), the current variation pattern executes the countdown effect based on the extracted variation pattern. (S3809), and if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for executing the countdown effect (S3809: YES), the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, and S3811 Move to the processing of. The countdown effect setting process (S3810) informs the player of the timing at which a specific effect is executed to indicate that the lottery result of this special symbol is highly expected to be a big hit during the variable display of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect mode of the effect (see FIG. 98). A detailed description of this countdown effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

In the processing of S3809, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern this time is a fluctuation pattern that does not execute the countdown effect (S3809: NO), or when the processing of S3804, S3806, S3808, S3810 is completed, the extracted variation Based on the pattern, the current variation display mode is determined from the variation pattern table 222A of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3811), and the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S3812).

After finishing the processing of S3812, it is next determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223D provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3813). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223D is not on (that is, it is off) (S3813: NO), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The process (S3114) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223D is on (S3813: YES), the stop type selection flag 223D is turned off (S3814), and then in the process of S3206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 140). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3815).

Next, in the process of S3815, it is determined whether the acquired stop type is a jackpot type indicating a jackpot (S3816), and if it is determined to be a jackpot type (S3816: YES), it is acquired in the jackpot information storage area 223F. The hit information (the number of rounds of the jackpot, the information regarding the game state set after the jackpot) corresponding to the jackpot type is stored (S3817), and the process proceeds to S3818. On the other hand, in the process of S3816, if it is determined that the type is not the jackpot type (S3816: NO), the process proceeds to the process of S3818 as it is.

In the process of S3818, the stop type extracted by the process of S3815 is set (S3818), and the display stop type command for transmission to the display control device 114 is set based on the set stop type (S3819). ), End this process. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, the extension management process (S3804) executed in the variable display setting process (S3114 of FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension management process (S3804). In this extension management process (S3804), among the end conditions of the jackpot ending display continuously displayed after the jackpot ends, a process of managing whether or not the end condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied is executed.

When the extension management process (S3804) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter 223J is 0 (S3901). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223J is 0 (S3901: YES), that is, when it is the timing to set the first fluctuation display after the display extension flag 223I is set to ON, the fluctuation count counter “5” is set as the display end condition (display extension end condition) of the jackpot ending display in the value of 223J (S3902), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3901 when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223J is not 0 (1 or more) (S3901: NO), that is, the second to 4th time after the display extension flag 223I is set to ON. When it is the timing to set the variation display for the second time, the value of the variation counter 223J is subtracted by 1 (S3903), and then it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223J is “1” (S3904). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223J is "1" (S3904: YES), that is, it is determined that it is the timing to set the variation display of the fifth rotation after the display extension flag 223I is set to ON. If this is the case, one of the conditions for ending the display extension, "up to 4 changes in the special symbol", is satisfied. Therefore, the display extension flag 223I is set to off (S3905), and this process is terminated. do.

In the process of S3904, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter is not "1" ("2" or more) (S3904: NO), an extension effect command for display is set (S3906), and this process is performed. finish. With this configuration, if the number of changes in the special symbol satisfies the end condition of the display extension while the ending display of the jackpot is extended and executed, the fluctuation corresponding to the next special symbol change is made. The display extension flag 223I is set to off at the timing when the display is executed, and the extension effect (ending display) can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the ending display ends during the variable display of the special symbol.

In this control example, when a probability change or a time saving state is set after the big hit ends, a dedicated fluctuation pattern table (special fluctuation pattern table 202D4) is used for a predetermined period (1 to 4 rotations after the big hit ends). , A short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (see FIG. 109). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is the upper limit (4) after the end of the big hit, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (4 rotations) is set as the end condition of the extension effect rather than the elapsed time (4 seconds). The end condition based on is satisfied first.

Therefore, during the period when the ending display of the jackpot is extended and executed, many special symbols are changed to see a special effect (see FIG. 89 (B)), and the game is always held with the reserved ball secured. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Regarding the management based on the elapsed time, which is one of the end conditions of the extended effect, the effect update process (every 1 Msecond) executed periodically (every 1 Msecond) in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 136). It is executed in S3112). The detailed description of this effect update process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154.

Next, the continuous effect setting process (S3806) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (S3806). This continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting an effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) executed during the probability change or the time saving state. Specifically, as a continuous effect (battle effect), an effect mode of the final mode effect (battle reach) for notifying whether the probability change or the time saving state ends and the final mode effect (battle reach) are executed. The effect mode of the effect up to (pre-battle effect) is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, the fluctuation pattern (variation time), and the duration of the pre-battle effect. The process of setting with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222E, the continuous value main selection table 222F, the continuous value sub-selection table 222G, and the final mode selection table 222H is executed.

This control example is configured so that the above-mentioned continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed until the probability change or the time saving state ends. With this configuration, if the probability change or time saving state continues for a long period of time, one continuous production (battle production) will be delayed and each production (for example, battle production) executed during the continuous production (battle production) will be delayed. It is possible to prevent the effect of the continuous value (HP value) from being reduced or decreased.

Further, when the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, that is, when the final mode effect (battle reach) occurs at the timing when the game state does not change from the probable change or the time saving state, the final mode effect (battle reach) occurs. "Draw" is selected as the production result of (Battle Reach), and the pre-battle production is configured to start again. In this way, in the configuration where the continuous production is repeatedly executed, one continuous production period is long. If you try to suppress the change, the final mode production (battle reach with victory or defeat) to show that the game state shifts, and the final mode production other than the final mode production (draw battle reach) are frequently executed. , There was a problem that the player got tired of the final mode production at an early stage.

On the other hand, in this control example, the elapsed period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) since the last final mode effect (draw battle reach) was executed is measured, and the measurement result is within a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol). When the number of fluctuations is less than 6 times), the final mode effect (drawing battle reach) without winning or losing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the production at an early stage because the draw battle reach is frequently executed in a short period of time.

Further, in this control example, it is configured to suggest to the player the result of the hit / fail judgment in the hold of the special symbol and the remaining period of the probability change or the time saving state depending on the effect mode of the draw battle reach. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the draw battle reach, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the entire continuous production.

In addition, in this control example, the number of times the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed is measured, and the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the measurement result. As a result, when the probabilistic change or the shortened time state continues for a long period of time and the continuous production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, the continuous production (battle production) of different production modes can be executed, and the player can perform the production at an early stage. It is possible to suppress getting bored with.

Here, to briefly explain the process executed in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) of this control example, first, in the variable display this time, the battle reach is executed as the continuous effect or before the battle. A process for determining whether to execute the effect (execution effect selection process), and a process for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect based on the determination result of the execution effect selection process (first effect mode setting process) or , The process of setting the effect mode of the battle reach (second (final) effect mode setting process) and the process of setting the effect mode are executed.

As described above, in this control example, each time the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is configured to determine whether to execute the pre-battle effect or the battle reach in the current variation display. It is possible to smoothly switch the production from the pre-battle production to the battle reach.

As shown in FIG. 149, when the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current variation display is a hit variation (a variation won by a big hit of a special symbol) (S4001). Here, if it is determined that the fluctuation is not a hit fluctuation (S4001: NO), then whether the fluctuation pattern this time is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (a fluctuation pattern in which battle reach can be executed). ) (S4002), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is 60 seconds or 90 seconds (S4002: YES), it is determined whether the value of the duration counter 223P is 6 or more (S4003).

In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the continuation period counter 223P is not 6 or more (less than 6) (S4003: NO), it is determined whether the continuation effect flag 223R is set to ON (S4004). If it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223R is not on (S4004: NO), that is, if the continuous effect is not executed, the continuous effect mode is selected based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222E (S4005). , The selected continuous effect mode is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223M (S4006), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is added by 1 (S4007), and the continuous effect flag 223R is set to ON (S4008).

When it is determined that the continuation effect flag 223R is not on in the process of S4004 described above, the first variation display is set after the probability variation or the time reduction state is set as the game state, or the previous variation display is the final. This is a mode effect (battle reach), and is a case where a new continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is set in this variable display.

In such a case, in the process of S4005, the effect mode (effect mode) of the pre-battle effect executed from the current variation display is selected based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222E. Here, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), the continuous effect mode selection table 222E shows the number of times the continuous effect is repeatedly executed (value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A. The continuous effect mode (modes 1 to 5) is set based on the information and the value of the third effect counter 223Y3, and the selected continuous effect is selected until the next final mode effect (battle reach) is executed. Pre-battle production based on the mode is executed.

In this control example, when the continuous effect flag 223R is set to off, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is pre-read, and the continuous effect mode is set based on the pre-reading result. Although the configuration is used to execute the process of setting the variation display mode based on the continuous effect mode set every time the variation of the special symbol is executed, the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223A is pre-read. However, as long as the configuration is such that the effect based on the look-ahead result is executed, the configuration other than the configuration used in this control example may be used. The stored winning information is pre-read, and the display mode of the variable display executed this time based on the pre-reading result to the display mode of the variable display corresponding to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A are set in advance. It may be configured to do so.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4004 that the continuation effect flag 223R is set to ON (S4004: YES), or when the processing of S4008 is completed, the value of the continuation period counter 223P is incremented by 1 (S4009). .. As a result, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q can be made different when the next continuous effect mode is selected, and it is possible to suppress the continuous selection of the same continuous effect mode.

In this control example, it is suppressed that the same continuous effect mode is continuously selected, and at a specific timing (timing when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is 1), a specific condition (holding hit). ) Is satisfied, in order to enable the execution of a specific effect (continuous effect mode 5), a configuration is used in which the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is added by 1, but the same continuous effect mode is continuous. Other configurations may be used to achieve the purpose of suppressing selection.

For example, the value to be added to the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q may be determined by lottery (for example, the value from -5 to 5 is drawn by lottery). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the regularity in which the continuous effect mode is selected, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q may be added based on the operation result of the frame button 22 by the player, or the number of consecutive villas of the jackpot (the game state shifts to the normal state). The value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q may be added based on the number of consecutive wins without a big hit) or the lottery result of the special symbol when the continuous effect mode is selected.

After finishing the processing of S4009, the continuation value setting processing is executed next (S4010). The details of the continuation value setting process executed in the process of S4010 will be described later with reference to FIG. 150. A display effect command corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the continuation value setting process of S4010 is set (S4011), and this process is terminated. In the process of S4011, an effect command indicating the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as the pre-battle effect among the continuous effects. Specifically, the display mode corresponding to the continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 and the display mode corresponding to the difference continuous value set in the process of S4010 are collectively set as the display effect command. ..

The display effect command set in the process of S4011 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display effect command as the variation pattern command, the display control device 114 executes the display of the pre-battle effect on the third symbol display device 81.

The processes S4001 to S4003 in the continuous effect setting process (S3806) described above correspond to the execution effect selection process, and the processes S4004 to S4011 set the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode). It corresponds to the setting process).

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the current variation is a hit variation (S4001: YES), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is reset (S4012), and the process proceeds to the process of S4013. Further, in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the duration counter is 6 or more (S4003: YES), that is, when the pre-battle effect continues for 6 or more special symbol fluctuations, the process of S4013 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S4013, the effect mode of the battle reach (final mode) is selected based on the final mode selection table 222H (S4013), and the corresponding final mode command for display is set (S4014). The final display mode command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the final display mode command, the display control device 114 uses the continuation value (HP value) displayed in the pre-battle effect on the third symbol display device 81 for battle reach (see FIG. 93 (A)). Is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the production from the pre-battle production to the battle reach without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

After finishing the processing of S4014, next, the continuation effect flag 223R is set to off (S4015), the continuation effect mode storage area 223M is cleared (S4016), and the value of the continuation period counter 223P is cleared to 0 (S4017). , End this process.

As described above, in this control example, the pre-battle effect is executed as a variation display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations executed while the probability variation or the time saving state is set as the gaming state, and one specific one. It is configured to execute the final mode effect (battle reach) for special symbol fluctuations (hit fluctuations of special symbols and deviation fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds selected), but other than that. Also, for example, it may be configured to execute the final mode effect (battle reach) by using the variation display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, each variation display of the final mode (battle reach) based on the prize information (win / fail judgment result and fluctuation pattern in the hold) stored in the prize information storage area 223A (based on the look-ahead result). It is good to configure it so that it corresponds to. As a result, the final mode effect (battle reach) that is executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations can be smoothly executed.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the final mode effect (battle reach) is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations, a plurality of display modes displayed in the final mode effect (battle reach) are targeted. It may be configured to be set in advance for each special symbol change, or only the battle reach effect content, that is, the attack pattern and the effect result may be set in advance, and the continuous value (HP value) may be increased or decreased. May be configured to be set each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the types of final mode effects (battle reach) that are preset based on the look-ahead result.

Next, the continuation value setting process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process (S4010). This continuation value setting process (S4010) is a process for setting the value of the continuation value (HP value in the battle effect) that is variably displayed during the continuation effect. In this control example, when setting the value of the continuation value (the value of the continuation value after the change), the value selected based on the lottery of the special symbol (the value of the hundreds digit of the opponent's HP) and the effect. It is set so as to add up the value selected based on the lottery for (the value of the tens place of the opponent's HP). This makes it possible to increase the variation of the displayed continuation value.

When the continuation value setting process (S4010) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the timing to change the continuation value (S4101). Although detailed description is omitted, in S4101, the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222A of the voice lamp control device 113 continues based on the rough fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110. Determine if the pattern changes the value.

In this control example, as described above, a configuration is used in which the timing for changing the continuation value (HP value) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222A of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a measuring means for measuring the number of times that the fluctuation pattern that does not change the continuous value is continuously selected is provided, and when the number of times measured by the measuring means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), it is forced. Forcible change means for changing the continuous value, or change control means for not changing the continuous value regardless of the extracted fluctuation pattern when the number of times measured by the above-mentioned measurement means is a specific number (for example, once). It may be provided. With this configuration, the continuation value (HP value) is not changed at all during the continuous production (during the pre-battle production), and the player gets tired of the production (pre-battle production), and the continuous value is frequently used. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the (HP value) is changed and the content of the production becomes difficult to understand.

Further, the continuation value change timing may be set based on the operation result for the frame button 22 of the player and the pre-reading result of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A. Further, the continuation value change timing is set based on the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the continuation value (HP value) selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F. The frequency may be changed.

If it is determined in the process of S4101 that it is not the continuation value change timing (S4101: NO), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the continuation value change timing (S4101: YES), the value in the hundreds digit of the continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F (S4102), and the selected continuation value (continuation value) is selected. The continuation value selected based on the main selection table 222F) is stored in the continuation value storage area 223N (S4103). Although a detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) executed when the continuation value is variable is the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223N, that is, the continuation value main. It is configured to refer to and set the continuation value selected based on the selection table 222F.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) selected in the process of S4102 is 200 or more (S4104), and if it is determined to be 200 or more (S4104: YES), the first step is made. When the effect value (tens digit value) is selected based on the continuation value subselection table 222G1 (see FIG. 117 (B)) (S4105) and it is determined that the value is less than 200 (S4104; NO), the second An effect value (a tens digit value) is selected based on the continuation value subselection table 222G2 (see FIG. 117 (C)) (S4106). A continuation value is calculated by adding up the value selected in the process of S4102 and the value selected in the process of S4103 (S4104).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 117 (B) and 117 (C), the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222G2 are selected effect values (values in the tens place). ) Are different, the range of the effect value that can be selected in the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 is defined as "-20 to +20", and the second continuation value subselection table 222G2 can be selected. The range of the effect value is defined as "-10 to 0". That is, in the second continuous value subselection table 222G2, a positive value (plus value) is not selected as the effect value. This is because, for example, when "0" is selected as the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) based on the continuation value main selection table 222F in the pre-battle production, internally (in the continuation value storage area 223N). Even though "0" is set as the stored value, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the effect value is not "0" (for example, "20"). ") This is a configuration for suppressing the display of the value and the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In this way, a configuration is used in which the value of the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F is discriminated, and the range of selectable effect values is changed based on the discrimination result. In normal times (continuation value is 200 or more), the continuation value (HP value) can be changed in both the plus and minus directions, increasing the variation of the production and increasing the continuation value. When it is less than 200, the value of the continuation value (HP value) is changed only in the negative direction, and the occurrence of contradiction in the production is suppressed.

Then, when the processing of S4105 or S4106 is completed, the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) selected in the processing of S4102 and the effect value (value of the tens digit) selected by either S4105 or S4106 are next. Is added up to calculate a continuation value (HP value) (S4107), a display summation command corresponding to the calculated continuation value (HP value) is set (S4108), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, variable management of the continuous value (HP value) that is variably displayed (increased / decreased) while the continuous effect is being executed is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The displayed continuation value (HP value), that is, the continuation value (hundreds digit value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F and the continuation value selected based on the continuation value subselection table 222G (the continuation value). The value of the tens digit) and the value of the continuation value (the value of the hundreds digit) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F are used instead of the sum of the values. With this configuration, the number of patterns for variable management of the continuation value (HP value) with respect to the display pattern of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced. And the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, even if the continuation value (HP value) is variably managed only by the continuation value (value of the hundreds digit) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F, the continuation value (HP value) is performed. ) And the display content of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are configured so as not to differ from each other. Can be executed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 of this control example, a continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F and the continuation value subselection table 222G, and information (command) indicating the selected continuation value is displayed. Output to 114. Then, only the continuous value selected with reference to the continuous value main selection table 222F is stored in the continuous value storage area 223N, and the increase / decrease management of the continuous value is repeatedly executed based on the stored continuous value.

A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 164, but in this control example, a display mode of the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, an attack pattern display mode to be executed. And the variable (increase / decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) are set and displayed by the display control device 114. That is, the display control device 114 has an area (total value storage area) for storing the total continuation value when the display control device 114 receives a command related to the continuation value output from the voice lamp control device 113. The difference between the total value stored in the total value storage area and the total value calculated from the command related to the continuation value received this time is calculated, and the attack pattern display mode and the attack pattern display mode based on the calculated difference value. A variable (increase / decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) is set and displayed.

With such a configuration, the continuous effect can be suitably executed while reducing the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, a continuation value subselection table 222G for selecting a continuous value for effect is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to select the continuous value for effect. However, the display control device 114 may be provided with a configuration for selecting a continuation value for effect (for example, a continuation value subselection table 222G). With such a configuration, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

Further, in this control example, when the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F, the continuation value for the effect is selected by referring to the continuation value subselection table 222G. Other configurations may be used. For example, even when the continuation value is not selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F (for example, in the case of S4104: NO in FIG. 149), the continuation value for production (for example, the continuation value for production) ( It may be configured to increase or decrease only the tens digit). As a result, the increase / decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuous effect can be set in more detail, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, as the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F, only the value smaller than the current continuation value (continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223N) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a value increased from the current continuation value may be selected. In this case, when a value increased from the current continuous value is selected, the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is not a normal attack effect but a continuous value. It is preferable to configure so that the recovery effect of recovering (HP value) is executed. In this way, by using the configuration that increases the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation effect, it is possible to increase the variation of the increase / decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation effect, and also to continue. It is possible to prevent the continuous value (HP value) from reaching the lower limit value (for example, "0") even if the value (HP value) is frequently changed (increased or decreased).

In this control example, the HP of the character is used as the continuation value that is variably displayed during the continuation effect, but in addition to that, a predetermined state (for example, an advantageous state (probability change or time saving state) advantageous to the player). ) May be configured to suggest to the player based on a value that changes whether or not it is set. For example, it is set based on the success rate (%) of the effect to be executed and the operation content for the frame button 22. The number of operations (times) to be performed may be used.

Further, in this control example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F is "0", the continuation value (HP value) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In order to prevent a value larger than "0" from being set, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), it is used for directing. It is configured so that a positive value is not selected as the continuation value, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F is "0". May be configured not to execute the selection of the continuation value for the effect (selection using the continuation value subselection table 222G).

Further, as in this control example, among the different control devices (voice lamp control device 113 and display control device 114), the first control device (voice lamp control device 113) performs a process of setting a rough effect content. In the configuration in which the predetermined effect is repeatedly displayed by executing the process of setting the display mode of the specific effect on the second control device (display control device 114), the second control device (display control) is executed. The processing result of the device 114) is output to the first control device (voice lamp control device 113), and then the first control device (voice lamp control device 113) performs a process of setting a rough effect content. When executing, it is determined whether the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is within the permissible range, and if it is within the permissible range, the next effect content is set as it is. Execute the process, and if it is out of the permissible range, correct the information about the rough effect content set at the time of the previous effect content setting, and execute the process to set the next effect content based on the correction result. If the processing result is not received from the second control device (display control device 114) at the timing of setting the next effect content, the process of postponing the timing of setting the next effect content is executed. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, the next effect can be set for the player in accordance with the effect mode already displayed by the process executed by the second control device (display control device 114). It is possible to continuously execute the production without giving a sense of discomfort. In this case, when it is determined that the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is out of the permissible range, the processing result is in a wider range than the error range set as the permissible range. If it is within the limit range, if the determination result is within the limit range, the effect can be continuously set by performing the above-mentioned correction, and if it is outside the limit range, it is described above. It is advisable to forcibly end the production without making any corrections.

Next, the expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the expectation degree effect setting process (S3808). This expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) changes the display mode of the expectation degree display mode displayed during the change effect of the special symbol, and determines whether or not the special symbol variation this time is a big hit. This is an effect suggested to the player (see FIGS. 102 and 103).

In this control example, as the expectation degree effect, three types of expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3 (see FIG. 102 (A)) are displayed corresponding to the passage of time of the special symbol fluctuation. Then, among the each expectation degree display mode, the expectation degree increase mode DK4 for changing one of the display modes to the display mode with a high expectation degree is displayed, and any of the expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3 is displayed. Performs the production so that is variable. In addition, a process of setting the display timing for setting the timing at which the expected degree increase mode DK4 is displayed is also executed.

Here, in this control example, since the timings at which the above-mentioned three types of expectation display modes DK1 to DK3 are displayed are different, the expectation level increases depending on the timing at which the expectation level increase mode DK4 is displayed. The target of the expectation degree display mode in which the display mode is variable can be changed according to the mode DK4. As a result, even when the same expectation degree increase mode DK4 is used, different effect contents can be obtained only by changing the timing of displaying the expectation degree increase mode DK4, and the storage capacity of the image data is reduced. can do.

In this case, only a still image (for example, a character image) having a small amount of image data may be configured to be displayed in correspondence with an expectation degree display mode that raises the expectation degree. This makes it possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect with a small amount of data.

Further, in this control example, the display modes that serve as the reference for the three types of expectation display modes DK1 to DK3 are predetermined according to the expectation degree effect mode level. Thereby, the display modes of the three types of expectation display modes DK1 to DK3 composed of a plurality of combinations can be set, and the processing load of the display process can be reduced. Further, since the reference display mode (reference display mode) is defined according to the expectation degree effect mode level, it is possible to prevent the degree of increase in the expectation level from being biased.

In addition, it is set according to the final display modes (display modes that can be displayed after the end of the expectation effect) of the three types of expectation display modes DK1 to DK3 that are set based on the fluctuation pattern, and the expectation degree effect mode level. Since the expectation degree increase mode DK4 is configured to be displayed when there is a difference in any of the expectation degree display modes from the standard display mode, the player is already shown a high expectation level. It is possible to execute the effect while expecting that the display mode of the expectation degree display mode is changed to the display mode showing a higher expectation level.

When the expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) is executed, first, the current degree of expectation is selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222I (S4201), and then the reference display mode is based on the expectation degree effect selection table 222J. The expected degree effect mode level for setting is selected (S4202). After selecting the expectation level, the display mode of each expectation display mode predetermined for the expectation effect level and the actual expectation display mode (each expectation display set based on the fluctuation pattern). The difference from the display mode of the mode) is extracted (S4203).

When the processing of S4203 is completed, it is determined whether there is a difference (S4204), and if it is determined that there is a difference, the difference is calculated for each expectation display mode (S4205), and based on the presence or absence of the calculated difference. The display timing of the expected degree increase mode DK4 is determined (S4206). Next, the differences for each expectation display mode are totaled (S4207), the display content (display mode, display timing) of the expectation increase mode is determined based on the total difference (S4208), and the expectation effect is displayed. The display expectation degree effect command is set (S4209), and the display good expectation degree target mode notification command for notifying the expectation degree display mode that is the target of the expectation degree increase mode is set (S4210).

To specifically explain the process of S4208 described above, first, the display mode determining process for determining the display mode (for example, “3UP”) corresponding to the difference value added by the process of S4207 is performed by the display mode determining means. Will be executed. Further, the expected degree display mode in which the difference is generated is discriminated by the difference discriminating means, and a plurality of timings in which the expected degree display mode can be set are determined based on the discriminant result, and among the determined plurality of timings. One timing is configured to be selected based on the expected degree selected with reference to the expected degree selection table 222I. As a result, among a plurality of timings in which the difference between the display content of the expectation display mode set in the process of S4202 and the display content of the expectation display mode set in the process of S4203 can be complemented by the expectation increase effect. Therefore, since one timing can be set and the expectation degree increase mode DK4 can be set, the variation of the production can be increased without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the above-mentioned example, the display mode of each expectation display mode is determined first, and the content of the expectation display mode DK4 is set based on the value corresponding to the difference. , The display mode of the expectation display mode DK4 is set based on the expectation selected by referring to the expectation selection table 222I, and the display content of each expectation display mode is determined based on the setting content. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the countdown effect setting process (S3810) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process (S3810). This countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the received variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes the countdown effect. As a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the execution timing of the specific effect executed during the variable display, the countdown effect that accurately informs the execution timing of the specific effect is performed. Execution of the process of setting the effect mode, the process of setting the effect mode of the precursor effect for suggesting that the countdown effect is executed, and the process of determining the specific effect to be the target of the countdown effect. do.

When the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the precursor setting flag 223T is set to ON (S4301). When it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223T is not set to on (set to off) (S4301: NO), the suggestion effect can be executed among the plurality of specific effects included in the current fluctuation pattern. One specific effect set for the timing is set (S4302). That is, among the specific effects (specific effects A and B (see FIG. 100 (B))) other than the specific effects (specific effects C (see FIG. 101)) that are executed at a timing when it is difficult to execute the suggestive effects. Set either.

After finishing the processing of S4302, it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a winning fluctuation pattern (S4303). If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a winning fluctuation pattern (S4303: YES), the precursor display A (timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (FIG. 100 (B)) is used as the start timing of the precursor effect. (See))) is set (S4304), and in the processing of S4303, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a non-winning (missing) fluctuation pattern (S4303: NO), it is set as the start timing of the precursor effect. The precursor display B (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100 (B))) is set (S4305). That is, in this control example, the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) that suggests the execution timing of the specific effect can be set based on the lottery result (hit / fail determination result) of the variation.

In the above-mentioned example, a configuration is used in which the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursory effect) is set based on the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the fluctuation, but based on other conditions. It may be configured to set the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect). For example, the operation result for the frame button 22 of the player and the determination of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A. It is configured to set the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) based on the result (look-ahead result), the time measurement result of the time measuring means (for example, real-time clock), and the past game history. You may.

In this way, a plurality of timings (points where the suggestion effect can be started) that can be set as the start timing of the suggestion effect (precursor effect) are prepared in one variation display (variation pattern), and the above-mentioned various conditions are satisfied. By using a configuration in which one of a plurality of suggestion effect startable points is set based on the above, the degree of freedom of the suggestion effect to be executed can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the start timing of the precursor effect (suggestion effect) is set in the process of S4304 or S4305, then the countdown period is set based on the start timing of the specific effect and the start timing of the precursor effect (suggestion effect) ( S4306).

To specifically explain this process with reference to FIG. 100 (B), in the process of S4302, the specific effect targeted for the suggestion effect in the current variation display is executed for the specific effect A (30 seconds after the start of the variation). When the precursor display A (timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100 (B))) is set as the start timing of the precursor effect in the processing of S4304, the countdown period is 7 Seconds are set, and the specific effect targeted for the suggestion effect in the current variation display in the processing of S4302 is set to the specific effect A (specific effect executed 30 seconds after the start of the variation), and the precursor effect in the processing of S4305. When the precursor display B (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100 (B))) is set as the start timing of, 3 seconds is set as the countdown period.

Next, the timing at which the countdown effect is started (the display timing of the countdown effect) is calculated based on the start timing of the specific effect and the set countdown period, and the start timing of the precursor effect and the display timing of the countdown effect are set. The interval, that is, the precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed is calculated (S4307). Next, in the process of S4307, it is determined whether the calculated interval (precursor effect period) is within 15 seconds (S4308), and if it is within 15 seconds (S4308: YES), the effect mode of the precursor effect (precursor). When a short effect mode is set as the effect mode) (S4309) and it is determined that the interval (precursor effect period) is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S4308: NO), a long effect is performed as the precursor effect mode. Aspects are set (S4310).

When the processing of S4309 or S4310 is completed, the display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode (specific effect mode, countdown effect mode, precursor effect mode) is set (S4311), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223T is set to ON (S4301: YES), that is, when the prize information command processing (see S3210 in FIG. 141) has already executed the precursor effect (plural). (When the precursor effect is executed across the variation display), the plurality of variation effect setting process (S4312) is executed, and then the above-mentioned process of S4311 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312). In this multiple variation effect setting process (S4312), a precursor effect continuous execution process for continuously executing the precursor effect executed during the previous variation display and a countdown effect for a specific effect corresponding to the precursor effect are set. The processing to be performed is executed.

When the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) is executed, first, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) is set as the specific effect (S4401), and the countdown period is set to 3 seconds (S4402). Then, a display precursor command is set (S4403). The display precursor command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display precursor command, the display control device 114 displays the precursor effect on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time as the start of the current variation (including a time difference to the extent that the player cannot identify). With this configuration, it is possible to continuously display the precursor effect from the previous fluctuation display without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Although detailed description is omitted, the display control device 114 of this control example is a means for determining whether or not the precursor effect is displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display ends (the precursor setting flag 223T is turned on from the voice lamp control device 113). When it is determined that the precursor effect is being displayed at the timing when the variation display ends, the precursor effect being executed is determined by the means for determining that a command indicating that the setting has been received) and the indicator effect. The effect data storage area that temporarily stores the data together with the time data indicating the timing when the fluctuation ends, and the precursor effect data stored in the effect data storage area when the display precursor command is received, are stored last time. It has a restart display means that restarts and displays from the time when the fluctuation display of is completed, and when a precursor effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, a series of precursor effects (for example, a car as a destination) is provided. It is possible to execute the effect of running toward (see FIG. 98 (A)) without interruption.

Further, in this control example, since it is configured to output a display precursor command as a display variation pattern command indicating a variation display of a special symbol, it straddles a plurality of variations in correspondence with the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform display processing of the effect (continuous effect) executed in. Therefore, based on the processing of the conventional display control device 114, that is, the content of the variation pattern command received each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect mode of the period until the end of the variation of the special symbol is displayed. The continuous effect can be executed by using the processing, and the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. In such a configuration, when the continuous effect of continuing the dynamic display even during the stop period of the special symbol (symbol confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds)) is executed, it is based on the variation pattern command. A continuous effect of a length obtained by adding the above-mentioned symbol fixing period to the calculated fluctuation time is set. Thereby, the continuous effect can be smoothly executed even during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, that is, during the period between the continuous fluctuation patterns.

In addition, when the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, a configuration other than this control example may be used as long as the configuration can be executed so that the series of precursor effects is not interrupted. For example, for example, Execute the precursor effect without setting the precursor effect period (end timing of the precursor effect) in the previous variation display, and set the end timing of the precursor effect based on the timing when the countdown effect is executed in the current variation display. It may be configured in.

Returning to FIG. 153, the explanation will be continued. When the processing of S4403 is completed, next, the display countdown effect command is set (S4404), the precursor setting flag 223T is set to off (S4405), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the effect update process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the effect update process (S3112). This effect update process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect.

When the effect update process (S3112) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is larger than 0 (S5101). If it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is not larger than 0 (0) (S5101: NO), that is, if the elapsed time count is not executed, the process related to the measurement of the elapsed time is performed. It skips and shifts to the process of S5108.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is larger than 0 (S5101: YES), the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is subtracted by 1 (S5102), and then the value of the elapsed time counter 223K after the subtraction is set. It is determined whether it is 0 (S5103). Here, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is not 0 (1 or more) (S5103: NO), the process proceeds to S5108 as it is.

If it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is 0 in the processing of S5103 (S5103: YES), then the display extension flag 223I is set to off (S5104), and the special symbol is currently changing. It is determined whether or not there is (S5105). In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S5105: NO), a normal display effect for notifying the display control device 114 that the extended display of the ending display of the jackpot is terminated. A command is set (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (S5105: YES), the process of S5106 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5107. With this configuration, when the extended effect (the effect of extending and displaying the ending display of the big hit) is executed after the end of the big hit, the time condition (4 seconds elapsed) which is one of the end conditions of the extended effect. ) Is established, if the special symbol has not changed, the extension effect is immediately terminated, and if the special symbol has changed, the display extension flag 223I is set to off, and the next special symbol change starts. Sometimes the extended production ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the extension effect suddenly ends during the change of the special symbol and confuses the player, and at the same time, complicated effect setting processing is performed when the extension effect ends during the change of the special symbol. Since it is not necessary to execute it, the processing load can be reduced.

In the process of S5108, the process related to the update of other effects is executed. Specifically, for example, a process related to an effect based on time information acquired from a real-time clock (RTC) is executed (S5108). After that, this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 155 to 172, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 155, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231A provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D is set in the buffer RAM 234C. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234A and set in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234C from its read, so the MPU231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234D. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately becomes the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234C, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234A capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are stored in the program storage area 233A and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233B and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D and set in the buffer RAM 234C according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234A1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233A (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231A to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233A by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231A is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231A. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233A among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233B.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231A is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 155) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) in this way, all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233A and the data table storage area 233B of the work RAM 233. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233A after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234A1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234D, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 156, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233A by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233A by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231A. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233A.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233A by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233A. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A to the instruction pointer 231A is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234D1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233A at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233A. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234D1 when the system reset is released has been described. However, all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234D1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234D1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233A, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233A is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 155. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235A at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235A at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235A.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235A when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235A is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235B when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235B, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235B when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235B when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235B is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233C Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 170 (A)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 170 (A)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233C transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (B)), a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (B)) and a simple display setting process so that the image at power-on is drawn are drawn. (See S6309 in FIG. 157 (B)) is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed, can be obtained. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 140, and the main instruction was to start the variable effect. When the control device 110 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is produced. It can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Since is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the flash memory, so that the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157 (A). FIG. 157 (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157 (B). FIG. 157 (B) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 125) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233C is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233C is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: NO), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233D, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233E.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233D. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233C is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 125 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to (off) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233C is on (S6301: YES), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 158, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: NO), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: YES), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: YES), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (A). FIG. 159 (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the precursor effect flag 233M is set to ON (S6501). Here, when it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233M is set to ON (S6501: YES), that is, when the precursor effect is continuously executed from the previous fluctuation, the precursor effect is executed from the start of the fluctuation. In order to do so, a variable display data table corresponding to the precursor effect is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S6502), and the precursor effect flag 233M is set to off (S6503).

Specifically, from the display data table set during the previous fluctuation and the time data set in the display data table, the displayed period information for indicating the period displayed during the previous fluctuation is displayed. A storage means for temporarily storing the extracted extracted information is provided, and in the processing of S6502, the continuation of the precursory effect executed during the previous special figure change is configured to be executed in the current special figure change. .. As a result, even when the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, the precursor effect can be smoothly displayed.

In this control example, the content of the precursor effect executed during the previous fluctuation is memorized, and the continuation of the memorized precursor effect is executed in this fluctuation, but other configurations are used. For example, the display data table corresponding to the precursory effect is divided into a plurality of effect blocks corresponding to the passage of time, the effect block executed during the previous change is determined, and the previous change is performed in this change. It may be configured to execute the effect block set next to the effect block executed inside. This makes it possible to simplify the management of precursory effects that are executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

Further, in this control example, as the precursor effect executed across a plurality of fluctuations, only the precursor effect for two fluctuations can be executed. Therefore, the precursor effect flag 233M is set to ON in the processing of S6501. If it is determined that this is the case, this change will be the end change of the precursor effect, so the precursor effect flag 233M is set to off in the processing of S6503. A counter (for example, a precursor effect counter) that can determine the period (number of changes of the special symbol) in which the precursor effect flag 233M is set to be on if it is configured to be executed across the above. And a storage means (for example, a means for storing the number of times the effect is continued) for storing how many fluctuations the precursor effect being executed continues, and a value of the precursor effect counter each time the variation pattern command process is executed. Is updated, it is determined whether the updated value matches the value stored in the effect continuation number storage means, and if it is determined that the updated value matches, the precursor effect flag 233M may be set to off.

When it is determined in the processing of S6501 that the precursor effect flag 233M is not on (off) (S6501: NO), or when the processing of S6503 is completed, the variation effect indicated by the display variation pattern command is next. A variation display data table corresponding to the pattern is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the variation effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D ((not shown)). S6504).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233D.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233D as in this control example, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233D is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6504 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S6505).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S6504, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S6506), and the pointer. Initialize 233F to 0 (S6507). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6508), the fluctuation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159 (A)), in the display setting processing, the pointer 233F initialized by the processing of S6507 is updated, and the display data table buffer 233D is processed by the processing of S6504. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S6505 The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E by the process of, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is obtained. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the clock counter 233H whose time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, when the precursor effect flag 233M is set to ON (S6501: YES), the variation display data table corresponding to the precursor effect and the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern command are used. Is set in the corresponding display data table buffer, and the display data corresponding to the precursor effect is preferentially displayed in the place where the display data overlaps. Specifically, when the layer in which the precursor effect is executed and displayed is provided with priority over the layer in which the normal variable effect is executed and displayed, and the display process is executed for each layer, the precursor is executed. The content displayed on the production layer becomes visible to the player.

It should be noted that the configuration corresponding to the precursory effect may be displayed with priority over the aspect corresponding to the normal effect, and as a method other than the above-mentioned example, the display data for the precursory effect and the received variation pattern command may be used. It may be configured to discriminate from the display data for normal effect set based on the above and set only the display data to be visually recognized by the player in the display data table buffer.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 158. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display variable type command (S6406: YES), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (B). FIG. 159 (B) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear off reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (B)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S6603) to end this process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235D of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disconnected. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S6406 (S6406: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display hit-related command among the unprocessed commands. This display hit-related command is a command that is referred to when a big hit is won. Specifically, a display opening command for indicating the start of a big hit, a display round number command, and a display ending. It is executed when a command etc. is received.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command processing (S6409). The hit-related command process (S6409) executes a process corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the hit-related command processing (S6409) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command (S6701), and if there is a display opening command (S6701: YES), the opening command processing is executed. (S6702), this process is terminated. A detailed description of this opening command process will be described later with reference to FIG. 161 (A). On the other hand, in the process of S6701 when it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6701: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S6703).

If it is determined in the process of S6703 that there is a display round number command (S6703: YES), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and this process is terminated. The round number command processing (S6704) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 161 (B). Then, in the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6703: NO), it is determined whether there is a display ending command (S6705), and if there is a display ending command (S6705:). YES), the ending command process is executed (S6706), and this process is terminated. A detailed description of this ending command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 162. If it is determined that there is no display ending command in the process of S6705 (S6705: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening command process (S6702) executed in the hit-related command process of FIG. 160 will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (A). FIG. 161 (A) is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening command process. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S6801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S6802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S6803), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (S6803). S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6805), the opening command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233F initialized by the processing of S6804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S6801. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233E is processed by S8702. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236A.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. As a result, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, the reading speed is slow, so that the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. After receiving the display round number command, if the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, there is a lot of waiting from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel anxious and uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation had stopped.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is set to the timing when all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for example, 15 rounds, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds). Since it is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, if the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, the round effect ends. After that, a lot of waiting time occurs from the time when the ending effect is started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation is stopped.

Therefore, in this control example, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , The transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to be completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and the round effect is all (16 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81. , Or 2 rounds), the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81, which may give the player anxiety or discomfort as to whether or not the operation has stopped. do not have. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in this control example, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the variable effect that becomes a big hit is completed. As a result, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Next, the round number command processing (S6704) will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (B). FIG. 161 (B) is a flowchart showing the contents of the round number command process. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number processing, first, the round number display data table is read from the round number production table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (S6902). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S6903), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6905), the round number command process is terminated, and this process is terminated.

Next, the ending command processing (S6706) will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending command processing (S6706). This ending command process (S6706) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing (S6706), first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is used for the ending effect of the data table storage area 233B. It is read from the table storage area (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S7001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (S7002). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S7001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S7003), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (S7003). S7004). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot of the special symbol ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made to.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 158. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display hit-related command (S6408: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S6410: YES), the rear image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process (S6411). This rear image change command process (S6411) executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process (S6411), first, the rear image change flag is set to ON (S7101). As a result, it is possible to determine the change of the rear image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171). Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear surfaces A to C and special rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the time effect), the rear surface corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is used. The image discrimination flag is turned on, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to other rear image types is set to off (S7102) to end the rear image change command process and return to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171), when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is changed after the change. Specify the back image type of. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data is stored. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. When the rear image type after the change is rear A, all the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that the image is not transferred.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back side A to C or the special back side A to C corresponding to the time effect is displayed depending on the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, From the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7102, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the range of the back image is specified. The type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the above is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, two or more rear image change commands may not be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7102, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233X corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 158. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6410: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and there is an error command. If (S6412: YES), error command processing is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 163 (B). FIG. 163 (B) is a flowchart showing error command processing (S6413). This error command processing (S6413) executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (S6413), first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to on (S7201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7202), and the error command is set. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Returning to the description of FIG. 158. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412: NO), then it is determined whether there is a continuation value related command (S6414), and if it is determined that there is a continuation value related command (S6414:). YES), the continuation value related command process (S6415) is executed, the process corresponding to S6401 and other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the continuation value-related command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the continuation value related command processing (S6415). This continuation value-related command process (S6415) executes the process corresponding to the continuation value-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the continuous value related command processing (S6415), first, the continuous value display data table corresponding to the received command is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S7301), and the total is stored in the total value storage area 233K. The value (total value set at the time of receiving the previous command) is read out (S7302), and the difference from the total value indicated by the command received this time is calculated (S7303).

Then, a display data table showing an attack pattern corresponding to the difference calculated in the process of S7303 is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7304), and the value of the command received this time is stored in the total value storage area 233K. (S7305). The total value storage area 233K is configured so that the total value indicated by the command received during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed can be stored in the order in which the command is received. Further, the difference value calculated in the process of S7303 is also memorable.

As a result, for example, when the received total value values continuously satisfy the predetermined conditions (for example, when 7 is continuously added to any of the total values), it is calculated in the processing of S7303. A special attack pattern display data table can be set when the difference values are continuously a predetermined number (for example, 300 or more).

When the processing of S7305 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (S7306). Then, based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S7301 and S7304, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S7307), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S7308). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S7309), the continuation value-related command processing is terminated, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, only the command indicating the total value of the continuous value (HP value) is output from the voice lamp control device 113, and the total value set in the previous continuous value related command processing is output. , And the value of the difference is discriminated on the display control device 114 side, and the display mode (effect mode) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed by the display control device 114 based on the discrimination result. Running. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 while diversifying the display of the continuous value (HP value) in the continuous effect (battle effect).

In this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 has a means for setting the total value, and the display control device 114 calculates the difference between the total value set last time and the total value set this time. And, the configuration has a means for setting a display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means, but the configuration can reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113. However, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 has a means for setting a first continuation value (a continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222F) in order to change the continuation value (HP value). Then, all the other means (means for setting the second continuation value (continuation value selected using the continuation value subselection table 222G) for changing the continuation value (HP value)), the sum previously set. A difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the value and the total value set this time, and a means for setting a display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means) Display control device 114 Or, among the above-mentioned means, only the attack pattern may be set by the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to the description of FIG. 158. In the process of S6414, when it is determined that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: NO), then it is determined whether there is an expected degree effect related command (S6416), and it is determined that there is an expected degree effect related command. (S6416: YES) executes the expectation degree effect related command processing (S6417), and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 165, the details of the expectation degree effect-related command processing (S6417) will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing a command process related to expectation degree effect (S6417). This expectation degree effect-related command process (S6417) executes a process corresponding to the expectation degree enshtsu-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the expectation degree effect-related command processing (S6417), first, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the received expectation degree effect-related command is set in the display data table buffer 233D (S7401). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S7402).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S7402, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S7403), and the pointer 233F is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7404) and returns to the command determination process.

In this control example, in the expectation degree effect setting process (see S3803 of FIG. 151) set and executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the display mode at the start time of the expectation degree effect (see FIG. 102 (A)). , A display mode (see FIG. 103 (A)) which is an effect result (final display mode), an expectation degree effect command for display to indicate, and an expectation degree display mode to be notified in the expectation degree effect. The display expectation target mode notification command for indicating the display mode (see FIG. 103 (B)) is set including the information indicating the display timing.

Then, in the command processing related to the expectation degree effect (S6417 in FIG. 165), the display mode corresponding to each received command is set to be displayed at the display timing corresponding to the display timing information included in each command. Specifically, the display mode (see FIG. 102 (A)) at the start time of the expectation effect is displayed corresponding to the timing at which the expectation effect is started, and then the display mode corresponding to the expectation increase effect is displayed. (See FIG. 102 (B)) is displayed. After that, if the command indicating the expected degree increase effect this time includes information for notifying the expected degree display mode to be notified, the display mode is displayed corresponding to the display timing information included in the command. Display at the timing. After that, a display mode (see FIG. 103 (A)), which is an effect result (final display mode), is displayed.

If the player can select which of the plurality of expected degree display modes to be the target of the expected degree increase effect, the selection result (correct answer or correct answer). A command for indicating an incorrect answer) is output from the voice lamp control device 113, and whether or not to display the final display mode is determined based on the content of the received command. That is, when the player's selection result is correct, each information included in the display expectation effect effect command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing) is processed by the expectation degree effect related command processing (S6417). If the player's selection result is not correct, of the information included in the display expectation effect command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing), the execution is performed as set in. The setting information related to the display of the final display mode is cleared, and the display process is executed so that the final display mode is not displayed.

Returning to FIG. 158, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no command related to the expectation degree effect (S6416: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a command related to the countdown effect (S6417). If it is determined that there is a command related to the countdown effect in the process of S6417 (S6417: YES), the command process related to the countdown effect is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the countdown effect-related command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect related command processing (S6419). This countdown effect-related command process (S6419) executes a process corresponding to the countdown effect-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the countdown effect-related command processing (S6419), first, it is determined whether there is an additional precursor command for display (S7501), and when it is determined that there is an additional precursor command for display (S7501: YES), that is, the previous change. When executing the precursor effect that continues from the display, set the additional precursor data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the additional precursor command for display in the display data table buffer (S7502), and correspond to the display data table set in S7502. The transfer data table to be transferred is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S7503).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S7503, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S7504), and the pointer 233F is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to the command determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7501 that there is no display use precursor command (S7501: NO), the countdown effect data table corresponding to the received display countdown effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer. (S7506), the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7506 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S7507).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S7507, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S7508), and the pointer 233F is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 158, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no countdown effect related command (S6418: NO), it is determined whether there is another display command, and if it is determined that there is another display command, each command is used. The corresponding process is executed (S6420). Here, as other display commands, for example, a display hold ball number command indicating an increase / decrease in the number of hold balls, and an effect targeting a specific change across a plurality of changes (so-called continuous notice) are shown. There is a continuous notice command for display and a time effect command for display indicating a time effect based on a measurement result by a time measurement means (so-called real-time clock) possessed by the voice lamp control device 113.

When the display reserved ball count command is received, the new reserved ball count flag is set to on. Then, by extracting the number of reserved balls from the received display reserved ball number command and updating the reserved ball number counter based on the extracted reserved ball number, the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be determined. Update display. When a continuous warning command for display is received, the new continuous warning command flag is set to ON. Then, the distribution between the back of the school of fish and the back of the bubbles is extracted from the continuous warning command for display. Next, the continuous notice information storage area is updated based on the extracted distribution, and the continuous notice corresponding to the updated content is displayed.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: YES). ), The processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233C is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (B)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159 (A)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 159 (B)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands. , Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159 (A)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233D, and also. Since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on fluctuation image area 235B of the resident video RAM 235, S6502 In the processing, the ULL data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233E, and the processing for clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 167, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7601), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7601: NO). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S7602 and S7603 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7604. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7601: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7602), the error occurrence flag Is on (S7603), and if the error occurrence flag is on (S7603: YES), the warning image setting process is executed based on the error determination flag (S7604).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the warning image setting process. When the warning image setting process is executed, the warning image data is expanded based on the error determination flag (S7701), the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7702), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7603: NO), the process of S7604 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7605.

In S7605 of FIG. 167, the pointer update process is executed (S7605). Here, the details of the pointer update process (S7605) will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process (S7605). This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in each buffer of the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table buffer 233E, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233F that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233F (S7801). That is, in principle, the pointer 233F is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, START information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233D, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233F by the process of S7801, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233F is END information. Is determined (S7802). As a result, if it is END information (S7782: YES), it means that the pointer 233F has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is a demo display data table (S7803), and if it is a demo display data table (S7803: YES), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233D is set in the time counter 233H (S7804), the pointer 233F is set to 1 and initialized (S7805), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is not the demo display data table (S7803: NO), the value of the pointer 233F is subtracted by 1 (S7803: NO). S7806), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the previous address in which the END information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233F is not END information (S7802: NO), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 167. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233F updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D (S7606). Here, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed by the processing of S7606 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position and the display coordinate position are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as enlargement ratio and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233H is subtracted by 1 (S7607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233H after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7608). If the value of the timekeeping counter 233H is 1 or more (S7608: NO), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233H is 0 or less (S7608: YES), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7609).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7609: NO), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, in order to set the confirmation display of the third symbol, S7610 to The process of S7615 is executed. In the process of S7610, the definite display data table is read from the definite display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S7610), and then the FULL data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233E. By doing so, the content is cleared (S7611). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233H (S7612).

When the processing of S7612 is completed, the value of the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (S7613). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7615), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing, from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S7615, and the specification is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7609, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7609: YES), the processes of S7616 to S7621 are executed in order to set the display mode of the demo effect. In the process of S7616, it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7616). If the demo display flag is off (S7616: NO), the demo display data table is read, set in the display data table buffer 233D (S7617), and then the FULL data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233E. Then, the contents are cleared (S7618). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233H (S7619).

When the processing of S7619 is completed, the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (S7620), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the on state is set to on (S7621), the main processing is completed, and the V split is performed. Return to the process.

As a result, even if a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the final display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing contents can be automatically set so that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. First, FIG. 170 (A) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233C is on (S7901). If the simple image display flag 233C is on (S7901: YES), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. (S7902) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170 (B).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233C is not on as a result of the processing of S7901, that is, if it is off (S7901: NO), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 171.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7902), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (B). FIG. 170 (B) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S8001), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S8001: YES). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S8002). In the process of S8002, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S8002 that the transfer process has not been completed (S8002: NO), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S8002: YES), the process proceeds to the process of S8003. Further, as a result of the processing of S8001, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S8001: NO), the process proceeds to the processing of S8003.

In the processing of S8003, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S8003), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S8003: NO), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S8004), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237A, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

On the other hand, if all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S8003 (S8003: YES), the simple image display flag 233C is set to off (S8005), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (B)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (B)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 157 (B)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Displays the normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) (see S7901: NO in FIG. 170 (A)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234A, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7903), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E, the pointer 233F updated by the pointer update process (S7605) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S8101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S8102), and if it is transfer data information (S8102: YES), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S8103) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S8104), and the process proceeds to S8105.

Further, in the process of S8102, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the NULL data (S8102: NO), the processes of S8103 and S8104 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S8105. In the process of S8105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S8105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S8105: YES), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S8106).

In the process of S8106, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S8106 that the transfer process has not been completed (S8106: NO), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S8106: YES), the process proceeds to the process of S8107. Further, as a result of the processing of S8105, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S8105: NO), the process proceeds to the processing of S8107.

In the process of S8107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8107), and if the transfer start flag is on (S8107: YES), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S8108), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S8103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S8113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S8107: NO), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233W is on (S8109). If the rear image change flag 233W is not on but off (S8109: NO), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233W is on (S8109: YES), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233W is set to off (S8110), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233X in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S8111). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233X in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S8112), and the process proceeds to S8113.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the processing of S8111, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of S8113, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113). The discrimination in the processing of S8113 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233I. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233I, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S8113, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113: YES), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S8113 (S8113: NO), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S8114). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S8114, the stored image data discrimination flag 233I is updated (S8115), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233I, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236A as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, it is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the jackpot effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235C can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233D in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233F of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236A so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236A without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, Α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 125 (S8201). That is, in the processing of S8201, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233J are transmitted to the image controller (S8202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233J is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233J is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236B to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236C to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237A is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233J after the processing of S8202 (S8203). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233J is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 157 (B)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236C. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236B. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the first control example, in the third symbol variation display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol to the player, a specific effect (for example, "PUSH display" for operating the frame button 22 is displayed. As a suggestion effect for notifying the timing when a specific effect occurs, a countdown effect set based on the timing at which a specific effect is set, and a period from the start of the suggestion effect to the start of the countdown effect. It is configured to execute the precursor effect set to.

Therefore, the period for executing the suggestion effect (the period for executing the precursor effect) can be freely set as compared with the case where the suggestion effect for notifying the timing when the specific effect occurs is executed for a predetermined period. ..

In the first control example, the timing at which the suggestion effect is started and the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect can be selected from a plurality of components. With this configuration, it is possible to set various periods during which the suggestion effect is executed by various combinations.

Further, it is determined whether the interval between the timing at which the suggestion effect is started and the timing at which the specific effect is executed is a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds), and based on the determination result, the mode of the precursor effect or the countdown effect is determined. It is configured to be variable. As a result, the player can play the game while predicting the effect to be executed in the future based on the content of the effect to be executed.

In addition, even based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, the mode of the precursor effect and the countdown effect is configured to be variable. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is successful, a long period (for example, 7 seconds) is easily set as the period for executing the countdown effect. As a result, depending on the mode of the countdown effect, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the variable display this time corresponds to the winning special symbol.

In addition, as an aspect of the effect set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, an aspect other than the aspect of the first control example may be used. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, the suggested effect period is long. The mode may be set. In this case, a part of the effect mode is configured to be variable according to the period in which the suggestion effect is executed (suggestion effect period), and the length of the suggestion effect period and the lottery result of the special symbol are determined for the player. It suffices to inform the correspondence in an easy-to-understand manner. For example, the color of the display mode such as the character displayed during the suggestion effect is variable according to the length of the elapsed period (blue → yellow → red → rainbow color). It may be configured to be such that, or the step index (for example, the degree of expectation) displayed during the suggestion effect may be configured to be variable according to the length of the elapsed period.

Further, the jackpot expectation may be set differently for each of the plurality of specific effects, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the target specific effect. In this case, a place where a specific effect can be executed is provided at a plurality of points during the variable display period, and a special symbol lottery is performed for the specific effect to be executed at the point targeted for the suggestion effect among the plurality of points. It may be configured to be set based on the result. As a result, the countdown effect is started, and even after the player knows at what timing (the point during the variable display period) the specific effect is executed, the countdown effect is executed as the specific effect. It is possible to make it difficult to understand which effect is executed, and it is possible to enjoy the suggestive effect until the end.

In the first control example, the effect executed as the precursor effect among the suggestion effects uses an effect mode for indicating the period of the precursor effect (an effect mode that suggests the execution timing of the countdown effect). In this way, in addition to the effect for showing the effect period to the player, for example, the effect mode for suggesting the content of the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect to the player, and the variable display of this time. In the above, the effect mode (notification mode) for notifying the player that the countdown effect is executed may be set.

Further, in the first control example, the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) and the end timing of the suggestion effect (end timing of the countdown effect) are set separately. The suggestion effect can be executed so as to straddle a plurality of variable displays. Thereby, even for the specific effect set at the initial point of the variation display (for example, 5 seconds from the start of the variation), the start timing of the suggestion effect can be set during the variation display immediately before the specific effect. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom when setting the suggestion effect.

When the above-mentioned technique is used, a suggestion effect may be set so as to straddle a plurality of variable displays based on the contents of a plurality of winning information already held and stored, or a variable display of a special symbol is executed. A means for discriminating a winning ball (a winning ball that becomes the next fluctuation) is provided while the ball is being played, and when the remaining fluctuation period is longer than a predetermined period, a suggestion effect is provided so as to straddle a plurality of fluctuation displays. It may be set. In the latter case, it is difficult to store the reserved memory (when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, or when it is difficult for the ball to enter the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 140), and the special symbol is Even when the first hold memory (hold memory used for the next change) occurs during the change, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that straddles a plurality of change displays. As a result, the chances of executing the suggestion effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol is generally configured so that a long fluctuation time is easily selected when a jackpot is won, and the longer the suggestion effect period in which the suggestion effect is executed corresponding to this, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. It is configured to be high. In the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, there is a problem that the jackpot expectation degree for the current fluctuation display is predicted depending on the timing at which the suggestion effect is started. On the other hand, in the first control example, the timing at which the suggestion effect is started and the timing at which the suggestion effect ends are provided at a plurality of points, so that the suggestion effect period cannot be predicted from the timing at which the suggestion effect is started. It is configured in. Further, even if the suggested effect period is the same, the period in which the precursor effect is executed and the period in which the countdown effect is executed are variably configured. Further, as the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect, any of the specific effects having different jackpot expectations can be selected.

In this first control example configured in this way, even after the suggestion effect is started, the suggestion effect period this time, the specific effect to be targeted, the precursor effect period, and the countdown effect period are used. Is predicted at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced.

In this first control example, as an effect mode executed during the countdown effect, a countdown display in which the numbers are regularly reduced (for example, every second) is used, but the timing at which the specific effect is executed is played. Any configuration may be used as long as it can accurately notify the person. For example, a plurality of divided areas are regularly filled (for example, every second) and a specific effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. You may. In this case, the number of divided areas is a display mode for indicating the period of the countdown effect. Further, the configuration may be other than this.

In the first control example, display data for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds) is stored in the storage area of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 as the display data displayed during the countdown effect, and is executed this time. It is configured to display the corresponding amount of display data based on the period information indicating the period of the countdown effect set in the suggestion effect. By having the display data in this way, the storage capacity can be reduced.

In the first control example, the end timing of the suggestion effect (end timing of the countdown effect) is set based on the start timing of the specific effect set for the target variable effect, but the countdown is performed. It suffices if the end timing of the effect matches the start timing of the specific effect. For example, when the specific effect is executed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the setting is made based on the end timing of the specific effect. It may be configured.

As described above, in the first control example, the end timing of the countdown effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect so that the end timing of the countdown effect executed as the suggestion effect matches the start timing of the specific effect. Then, the period (time) for executing the countdown effect is calculated back from the set end timing to set the countdown effect period. This makes it possible to easily set the countdown effect for a predetermined period in accordance with the execution timing of the specific effect.

In the first control example described above, as the period for executing the suggestion effect, the precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed and the countdown effect period in which the countdown effect is executed are set in advance before the suggestion effect is executed. However, other methods may be used, for example, the timing at which the suggestion effect starts (the timing at which the precursor effect is started) and the timing at which the suggestion effect ends (the timing at which the countdown effect ends, that is, A configuration may be used in which only the timing at which the specific effect is started) is set in advance, and the timing at which the precursor effect is switched to the countdown effect is set after the suggestion effect is executed.

In this case, for example, the display control may be executed so as to switch from the precursor effect to the countdown effect based on the execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the precursor effect. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game in order to execute the countdown effect as soon as possible. Further, based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the period during which the countdown effect can be executed is predetermined, and the countdown effect can be executed at the timing when the predetermined operation is executed for the frame button 22 during the precursory effect. It is preferable to configure so that the precursor effect is switched to the countdown effect only when the timing is set, and the operation effect of operating the frame button 22 during the precursor effect is executed at various timings. With such a configuration, the player can enthusiastically participate in the operation effect performed during the precursory effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, it may be configured to execute a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect during the precursor effect. By executing this pseudo countdown effect, it is possible to make the player think that the precursory effect has ended, and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the future development of the effect. In this way, the pseudo countdown effect can be easily executed when the jackpot is won, so that the game can be performed while expecting that the executed countdown effect is a pseudo one. Until the countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) is completed, the effect that is continuously executed can be watched.

In the first control example described above, the length of the precursory effect period executed as the suggestive effect is determined, and the effect mode of the precursory effect period is set based on the determination result. A configuration that does not determine the length to be executed may be used, and for example, the effect mode of the precursor effect may be set based on the timing at which the suggestion effect is executed. In this case, since the length of the precursory effect period is not determined, it is preferable to use an effect mode that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player at any timing as the effect mode executed as the precursor effect, for example. , It is preferable to use a dynamic display mode that is executed according to a certain rule such as an effect that a car keeps running at a constant speed on a road.

By using such an effect mode, even if the precursor effect is executed without determining the length of the precursor effect period, it is possible to smoothly switch to the countdown effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Even when such an effect mode is used, as described above, the display mode (for example, color) of a part of the effect mode (in the above example, the car) is changed according to the elapsed period of the precursor effect. Of course, it may be configured to be variable.

Further, instead of determining in advance the entire length of the precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed, it may be configured to determine only the length of a part of the period. For example, it may be divided into a first precursor effect period of the first half portion and a second precursor effect period of the second half portion, and the length of the period may be determined in advance only for the second precursor effect period. With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a specific precursor effect only during a predetermined period (second precursor effect period) retroactive from the end timing of the precursor effect (start timing of the countdown effect), and more smoothly. It is possible to switch the production from the precursor effect to the countdown effect.

As described above, in the above-mentioned first control example, the gaming state (probability change state (high probability, with electric support), which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, without electric support), It is configured to execute an effect (battle effect) to show that the time saving state (low probability, with electric support) is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned battle effect is divided into an effect that suggests whether or not the gaming state advantageous to the player ends (battle reach) and an effect for determining the effect mode of the battle reach (pre-battle effect). It is composed. With this configuration, the battle is performed during a period other than when the gaming state that is advantageous to the player actually ends (for example, when it is determined by the lottery of a special symbol that the gaming state shifts to the normal state). Since the production can be continuously executed, the player feels anxiety that the player is expected to continue the favorable gaming state and that the player is likely to have finished the favorable gaming state. You can continue to play the game while holding it in your arms.

Further, during the above-mentioned battle effect, an effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) for suggesting whether or not the gaming state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player is continuously set is executed. .. This continuation value (HP value) is configured to increase or decrease based on the currently set gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol, the remaining period in which the advantageous state is set, and the like.

Here, when the above-mentioned increase / decrease pattern of the continuation value (HP value) is increased and a variety of effects are executed, the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbol, or the advantageous state is set. It was necessary to perform complicated management in which the remaining period and the displayed continuation value (HP value) were associated with each other. Such management increases the processing load of the pachinko machine 10, and it is required to increase the variation of the effect while reducing the processing load.

Therefore, in the first control example, the above-mentioned expected value (HP value) is set based on the currently set gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol, the remaining period in which the advantageous state is set, and the like ( The sum of the main continuation value (for example, the value of the 100th place) and the value set for the purpose of increasing the effect variation (the sub-continuation value (for example, the value of the tens place)) is continued. It was configured to be displayed as a value (HP value).

In this way, by summing the values that are actually managed and set and the values that are set in an effective manner, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the first control example described above, the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuous value is displayed. By displaying this display mode, it is possible to visually notify the player of the increase / decrease in the continuous value, so that an easy-to-understand effect can be executed.

In the first control example, the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuous value is "weak attack" as the display mode corresponding to the small difference amount (for example, the range of 50 to 150), and the large difference amount (attack pattern). For example, it has "strong attack" as a display mode corresponding to (range of 350 to 550) and "medium attack" as a display mode corresponding to the difference amount between them (for example, the range of 151 to 349). , When the set display mode (attack pattern) is executed, a different effect is executed for each display mode, and then the continuation value is updated.

That is, the player roughly grasps the decrease amount (difference value) of the continuation value (HP) by grasping the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and then concretely by the updated continuation value. You will know the numerical value. By displaying in such an order, it is possible to notify the player of the information about the game step by step, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the above-mentioned first control example, when the above-mentioned display mode (attack pattern) is set in order to reduce the control load of the effect, the main continuation is not the difference value of the total continuation value (HP). It is configured to set the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the values. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the continuation value (continuation value before update, continuation value after update) or the pattern of the difference value used when setting the display mode (attack pattern).

As described above, when the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the continuation value (HP value) is set based on the difference value of the main continuation value, the continuation value (third symbol) on the display is set. The difference value of the main continuation value and the sub-continuation value displayed on the display device 81) does not match the difference value of the main continuation value, and the display mode is different from the apparent range of the difference value. There was a problem that the (attack pattern) was set.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in this first control example, when the continuous value (HP) value is continuously updated multiple times, the difference value of the continuous value (HP) on the display and the main continuous value are used. The difference value of is configured to be the same as the set display mode (attack pattern). With such a configuration, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

Further, in the first control example, a main continuation value discriminating means for discriminating the value of the set main continuation value is provided, and the sub-continuity value set for the effect is set based on the discriminating result of the main continuation value discriminating means. The selection table for selection is configured to be different. Specifically, when the value of the main continuation value is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or more, the selection table in which "-20 to +20" is defined as the range that can be selected as the sub-continuation value is referred to and predetermined. If it is less than a value (for example, 200), a selection table in which "-30 to 0" is defined as a selectable range as a sub-continuation value is referred to.

With this configuration, when the main continuation value becomes 0, it is possible to suppress the selection of a positive value as the sub-continuation value.

In the first control example, as described above, the first effect (pre-battle effect) and the second effect (battle reach) are used to indicate the period (advantageous period) in which the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. ) And the unit production (battle production) is configured to be executed. In the first effect, an effect for suggesting the effect mode of the second effect is executed, and in the second effect, an effect for notifying the player whether or not the advantageous period ends is executed.

Further, in the first control example, the unit effect described above is repeatedly executed while the advantageous period is set. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the second effect a plurality of times during the advantageous period, so that the player can play the game during the advantageous period while maintaining a sense of tension. ..

Further, by making it possible to execute the unit effect a plurality of times while the advantageous period is set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one unit effect continues for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the content of the production from being delayed.

In this first control example, as a condition for ending one unit effect (condition for executing the second effect), the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (an opportunity for the advantageous period to end). In addition to the case where the lottery result) and the case where the remaining period of the advantageous period becomes 0, the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number or more is used. As a result, the second effect is executed even when the advantageous period does not end, but the second effect is executed when other conditions are satisfied. May be good.

In addition, if the second effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous period ends is executed a plurality of times in a short period of time, the player gets tired of the second effect early, so the first control In the example, it is suppressed that the second effect (pseudo second effect) executed for the purpose of the effect is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Specifically, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the unit effect is executed is counted, and if the counter value is less than the predetermined number of times, the pseudo second effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the second effect at an early stage.

In the above-mentioned first control example, a plurality of expectation degree effect modes for gradually suggesting the expectation degree that the lottery result of the changing special symbol is a big hit are provided, and any one of them is displayed as the expectation degree effect mode. It is configured to execute a variable expectation (increasing) effect that changes the effect mode to an effect mode in which the expectation level, which is a big hit, is set higher than the effect mode.

Then, at least one of the plurality of expected degree effect modes described above is configured so that the display timing is different, and the expected degree variable (increased) effect determines which expected degree effect mode the expected degree is variable. It is executed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp.

In the first control example configured in this way, it is notified that the effect mode of any of the expectation level effect modes is variable (increased) by executing the expectation degree variable (increasing) effect. In this state, the player pays attention to the effect while expecting that the desired expectation effect mode (for example, the expectation degree effect mode that is already a big hit and the expectation degree is set high) is further variable (increased). Can be done.

In the first control example, the target expectation degree effect mode is changed by changing the timing at which the expectation degree variable (increasing) effect is executed. Specifically, it is configured so that the expectation degree effect mode displayed after the expectation degree variable (increasing) effect is executed is targeted. This makes it possible for the player to pay close attention to the timing at which the variable expectation (rising) effect is executed.

Further, in the first control example, the expected degree variable (increasing) effect is configured so that the effect mode of a plurality of expectation degree effect modes can be changed, and the variable amount to be changed for each expectation degree effect mode. It is configured to display a variable amount to indicate the total value of (steps). As a result, the expected degree variable (increasing) effect is executed, and after grasping that one of the expected degree effect modes is variable, the player can be made to grasp the amount in which the expected degree effect mode is variable in this effect. can.

Further, after the variable expectation (increasing) effect is executed, the notification mode for notifying the player of the target for increasing the expectation level in this effect is displayed, so that the player can be informed of the target expectation level effect mode. It can be easily grasped.

In the above-mentioned first control example, a plurality of expectation degree effect modes having an effect mode capable of displaying the jackpot expectation degree stepwise are provided, and each stage of the expectation degree effect degree can be displayed so as to be able to be displayed. It is configured to predict whether or not this change is a big hit by grasping the display contents of each expected degree production mode in combination.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicate the mode that suggests the jackpot expectation, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting, but on the other hand, the display content of each expectation production mode can be displayed. There is a problem that the processing load for control increases. Further, when the effect mode for increasing the expectation degree is biased, specifically, among the plurality of expectation degree effect mode, only one expectation degree effect mode is variable to the effect mode indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high. If the remaining expectation degree production mode remains the production mode indicating that the jackpot expectation is low, the player will have excessive expectations for the jackpot winning, and the production content will be distrustful. There was a problem of giving.

On the other hand, in the first control example, in a plurality of expectation degree effect modes, the expectation degree effect mode before being changed by the expectation degree variable (increasing) effect is configured to be set by a plurality of patterns, and a special symbol is provided. It is configured to change (increase) the expectation degree of the expectation degree production mode set by the pattern according to the expectation degree set based on the lottery result. With this configuration, the above-mentioned plurality of problems can be solved.

<Additional production example of the first control example>
Next, an effect addition example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 181. In this additional example, an effect (title-giving effect) that progresses based on the operation content for the frame button 22 is added to the first control example described above. This title-giving effect was operated during the period when the operation effect requiring the frame button operation was generated, the number of times the frame button 22 was operated (effective number of operations) for the operation effect, and the operation effect was not executed. It is executed so as to make the privilege (title) given to the player different based on the number of operations (number of invalid operations) of the frame button 22.

By using such an effect, it is possible to provide the enjoyment that the player not only operates the frame button 22 as instructed but also performs other operations (including non-operation), and the player can play the game early. It is possible to suppress getting bored with.

Further, in this additional example, the appearance frequency of the operation effect (for example, the effect of dropping the accessory unit (displacement member) 450) for operating the frame button 22 is variable based on the privilege (title) given to the player. It is configured to let you. As a result, the operation effect is frequently displayed for the player who is enthusiastically operating the frame button 22, and the frequency of the operation effect is displayed for the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22. It can be lowered.

Further, as compared with the case where the player selects the appearance frequency of the operation effect in advance, the appearance frequency of the operation effect can be adjusted to the player's preference based on the operation result of the operation effect executed during the game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operations performed by the player.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, the operation effect executed in this additional example will be described. FIG. 173 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a conversation effect which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, and FIG. 173 (B) is an effect when the frame button 22 is operated in the conversation effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed the contents.

As shown in FIG. 173 (A), in this additional example, the accessory unit (displacement member) 450 is provided so as to cover the upper part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2 for details). ). Then, the characters "I can talk with the button PUSH" prompting the operation of the frame button 22 are displayed in the sub-display area DS. Here, when the frame button 22 is operated, as shown in FIG. 173 (B), the characters "Hello" are displayed in the main display area DM as if the accessory unit 450 is making a comment. In this way, in this additional example, a conversation effect capable of having a conversation with the character unit 450 is executed. The accessory unit 450 can be moved to a position other than the position (initial position) shown in FIG. 173 (B) (for example, a position lowered so as to cover the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). Therefore, for example, a discriminating means for discriminating the position of the accessory and a comment display position setting means for displaying a comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory determined by the discriminating means may be provided. .. As a result, regardless of the position of the accessory, the character "hello" can be displayed in the main display area DM as if the accessory unit 450 is always commenting.

Further, as the discriminating means for discriminating the position of the accessory, a means for directly detecting the position of the accessory unit 450 using a proximity sensor may be used, or a drive motor for driving the accessory unit 450 or a drive motor may be driven. A detection means for detecting the driving state (for example, the number of steps) of the transmission means (pulley or the like) for transmitting force may be provided, and the accessory position may be determined based on the detection result of the detection means, or the accessory unit may be used. When the 450 is driven based on the operation scenario, a means for determining the accessory position based on the progress of the operation scenario may be used. When using the latter configuration, it is possible to grasp the future character position in addition to the current character position based on the content of the operation scenario, so the display position of the comment according to the character position is displayed. It can be set in advance. Further, the operation scenario of the accessory unit 450 may be configured to store information regarding the display position of the comment in advance, or a plurality of the above-mentioned means may be combined.

On the lower right side of the main display area DM, a level display area DR1 for indicating the current level (set value) and a title display area DR2 for indicating the current title are displayed. Here, the level (set value) is a value to be added (increased) based on the game history (game period, game result, production content, etc.), and in this additional example, "3rd grade" to "Sennin". Levels up to are provided in stages (see FIG. 176 (C)), and in FIG. 173 (A), the lowest level, "3rd grade", is displayed.

The title is a privilege set based on the above-mentioned level (set value) and the operation content for the frame button 22. Although a detailed description will be described later, a plurality of systems are set for this title, and one system is set according to the game content (operation content of the frame button 22). A unique privilege (title) corresponding to each level is set for each system, and "beginner" is displayed in FIG. 173 (A).

In FIG. 173 (B), a comment is displayed from the accessory unit 450 and the level displayed in the level display area DR1 increases based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the state of FIG. 173 (A). "Level 2" is displayed, and "half serving" is displayed in the title display area DR2. The comment content of the accessory unit 450 is variably set according to the level and title, and the higher the level and title, the more advantageous information for the player (for example, the expected degree of hit during fluctuation and the current game state). Information about games such as) is set to be easy to display. This makes it possible for the player to play the game enthusiastically.

Next, the content of the accessory drive effect, which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (A). FIG. 174 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory drive effect. As shown in FIG. 174 (A), when the accessory drive effect is executed, the characters "press the button and drop the accessory" are displayed in the main display area DM as an effect for prompting the operation of the frame button 22. At the same time, an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed.

Further, in the first display area DS1 of the sub-display area DS, the characters "chance if dropped" suggesting the detection result of the accessory drive effect are displayed. During the period when this accessory drive effect is being executed (during the operation valid period of the frame button 22), when the frame button 22 is operated and the accessory falls to a position covering the main display area DM, it is changing. It suggests that there is a high possibility that the special symbol has won the jackpot. In this way, in the operation effect of operating the frame button 22, by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to quickly detect that the jackpot has been won, thereby enthusiastically for the player. The frame button 22 can be operated.

In this additional example, as described above, the frame button 22 is configured to be given different benefits (titles) depending on whether the frame button 22 is enthusiastically operated or not, so that when the operation effect is executed. In addition, the player can be made to select whether or not to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this additional example, different benefits (titles) are given according to the title system set as described above, so even if the game is continuously played with one title system, the game is performed. It is structured so that all benefits (titles) cannot be obtained. This makes it difficult to acquire all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, since the title system is set according to the operation content of the frame button, it is configured so that all the benefits (titles) cannot be obtained unless the operation content of the frame button 22 is devised. This makes it difficult to acquire all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and can provide the player with various effects to be executed based on the operation content of the frame button 22. The effect can be enhanced.

Here, as described above, in order to obtain various benefits (titles), it is necessary to set different title systems, so the current title system is initialized (the history of the operation contents of the frame button 22 is initialized). However, if all the histories based on the games that have been played continuously are initialized, there is a risk that the motivation of the players will be lowered. ..

Therefore, in this additional example, the player has a change operation that allows the player to select whether to initialize all the histories or delete the histories to the stage where different title systems can be set. FIG. 174 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen during this change operation.

As shown in FIG. 174 (B), in the main display area DM, the characters "from the beginning" and a part of the history are used as the all erasure selection mode DR3 indicating the selection unit to be selected when initializing all the histories. The character "from the middle" is displayed as the partial erasure selection mode DR4 indicating the selection unit to be selected when erasing. Here, when the all erasure selection mode DR3 is selected, the level (set value) displayed in the level display area DR1 and the title displayed in the title display area DR2 are set as initial values. This all erasure selection mode DR3 is mainly selected when erasing the operation history of different players.

On the other hand, when the partial erasure selection mode DR4 is selected, the display traced back to the stage where different title systems can be set is displayed in the level display area DR1 and the title display area DR2. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, as long as the level (set value) is low, the same privilege (title) is given to any title system, and the level (set value). When becomes higher, one of the plurality of title systems is configured to further branch into a plurality of title systems.

As a result, the content displayed retroactively when the partial erasure selection mode DR4 is selected can be different depending on the level (set value) or title when the partial erasure selection mode DR4 is selected. It should be noted that a title system that is not set unless the partial erasure selection mode DR4 is selected may be provided. As a result, it is necessary not only to add (increase) the level (set value) but also to subtract (decrease) it, so that it is possible to provide a more varied game.

As described above, in the first control example, as a production during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, the jackpot effect straddling the multiple jackpot games is performed. (Continuous jackpot effect) is configured to be executed, and the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game is configured to suggest the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is completed to the player. However, if it is a gaming machine having a special gaming state other than the jackpot game, for example, a gaming machine having a small hit game in which the benefits that can be given to the player are set to be smaller than those of the jackpot game, the gaming machine has a predetermined period. When a small hit game or a big hit game (hereinafter referred to as a hit game) is executed a plurality of times, a hit effect (continuous hit effect) straddling the multiple hit games is executed. May be. As described above, in the above-mentioned first control example, the content explained for the winning of the big hit may be executed for the game result other than the big hit (for example, the small hit), and the content other than the big hit may be executed. The game results include various game results that have conventionally existed as well-known configurations.

Further, in the first control example, as a game result after the currently executed jackpot game is completed, the player is suggested to the player whether or not to win the jackpot again within a predetermined period (in the reserved memory). However, other game results may be suggested to the player by the winning effect performed during the winning game, for example, the number of winning jackpots (including small hits) in the reserved memory and the winning jackpot (including small hits). Benefits (including small hits), game status (probability change state or time saving state) after the end of the jackpot (including small hits) won in the hold memory, and multiple game results (big hits, small hits) If it is a target, it may be configured to suggest the type of the game result and the order in which it is executed.

Further, in the first control example, the content of the jackpot effect is changed based on not only the entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed but also the entry information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured so that it can be done. With such a configuration, more ball entry information can be referred to, it is possible to easily execute a continuous jackpot effect, and the player can be interested in the jackpot effect.

In addition, in this control example, as a jackpot continuous effect, the content of the jackpot effect can be changed based on the number of stored ball entry information at the time when the jackpot game is executed. Specifically, based on the number of stored ball entry information at the time when the jackpot game is executed, a plurality of timings for suggesting (notifying) that the jackpot will be won again within a predetermined period (within the reserved storage) are different. It is configured so that the jackpot production of is executed.

Among them, in the specific jackpot effect (additional effect) that can be executed when the number of reserved balls (number of entry information) of the special symbol is not the upper limit, new entry information is acquired during the jackpot game, and the entry information is obtained. When the player wins the jackpot, the content of the jackpot effect can be changed so that the player does not notice it.

In the above-mentioned specific jackpot effect, the jackpot game (multiple round games (for example, 15 rounds)) executed during one jackpot is partially notified (for example, 5 rounds of notification). Since the effect is executed, it is possible to inform the player how many rounds of the jackpot game has been executed in an incomprehensible manner while the specific jackpot effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the game state after the big hit in advance by the number of rounds set for the big hit game.

In this control example, the additional display (additional display of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game by the additional effect is configured to be executed every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). Then, the length of the inter-round interval period in the predetermined round is set to be longer than the length of the other inter-round interval period. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of inciting whether or not the jackpot ends every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). In addition, since the fluctuation of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) executed after the end of the big hit is configured to be executed in a shortened time (0.5 seconds), every predetermined round (every 5 rounds) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval period of the game and the special symbol fluctuation period between the jackpots.

In addition, it is preferable to configure so that the fluctuation period of the special symbol for a predetermined period executed after the end of the jackpot is always constant regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern table that selects the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol for 4 rotations after the end of the big hit is defined as 0.5 seconds fluctuation for the entire period if the lottery result is off, and if the lottery result is a big hit, It is preferable to specify that the 1st rotation has a 2-second variation, the 2nd rotation has a 1.5-second variation, the 3rd rotation has a 1-second variation, and the 4th rotation has a 0.5-second variation. As a result, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol for 4 rotations after the end of the jackpot, the predetermined period (the period until the special symbol fluctuates 4 times or the period until the jackpot is won) is fixed (2 seconds). be able to. In this case, by configuring the interval period for each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) to match the predetermined period (2 seconds) described above, the interval period for each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) and the jackpot interval It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the special symbol change period.

In addition, the first control example is a normal jackpot that does not suggest that the jackpot is won again within a predetermined period (in the reserved memory) during the jackpot game (during the round game) as the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot. Has a production. When this normal jackpot effect is executed, the end display mode displayed in the final period during the jackpot game (ending period after the end of the round game) is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (special symbol 4 fluctuations, or It is displayed continuously (for 4 seconds). Then, if the jackpot is won again within the period in which the end display mode is continuously displayed after the end of the jackpot, the continuous hit effect in which the jackpot effect is started again via the end display mode is executed.

With this configuration, the ball entry information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the predetermined period (4 fluctuations of the special symbol or 4 seconds) after the end of the jackpot game is acquired after the end of the jackpot game. Even if the acquired ball entry information is a big hit, the continuous hit effect can be executed. That is, since the ball entry information acquired after the end of the jackpot can be included as the execution condition of the continuous jackpot effect indicating that the jackpot is continuously executed, the rate at which the continuous jackpot effect is executed can be increased. , The production effect can be enhanced.

In this first control example, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect based on whether or not there is the entry information for winning the jackpot in the reserved memory. When there is information on the winning ball to win a big hit, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit that is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result, it is decided whether or not to execute the continuous big hit effect. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a probabilistic state) is set as the game state after the jackpot in the hold memory is executed, and the game is continuously based on the determination result. You may decide whether or not to perform the jackpot effect. Furthermore, after the game state (normal state (low probability state)) that is disadvantageous to the player is once set after the end of the jackpot executed this time, the player is given the game state after the jackpot in the hold memory is executed. It may be determined whether or not an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability variation state) is set, and whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect may be determined based on the determination result.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the added value to the player when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, and it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

Further, as in the second control example described above, in a gaming machine having a fall lottery configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state when a jackpot is won, so the fall lottery is performed using the above-mentioned continuous jackpot effect. The lottery result may be notified to the player.

Specifically, a means for determining the gaming state at the time of winning the current jackpot, a means for determining the gaming state set after the end of the current jackpot, and a fall lottery executed until the next jackpot is won. A means for discriminating the lottery result may be provided, and it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect based on the discrimination result of each discriminating means described above. The state is a low probability state of the special symbol, that is, the continuous jackpot effect is executed only when the game state of the special symbol has fallen by the fall lottery, or the special symbol is high after the end of this jackpot. Only when the probability state is set and it is determined by the fall lottery that the game state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state by the time the next jackpot is won, the continuous jackpot effect is configured or falls. The game state of the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state by the lottery, and the continuous jackpot effect is executed when the game state of winning this jackpot and the game state of winning the next jackpot are in the high probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured as follows.

In this control example, as the winning information used for determining the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game, the winning information at the time when the jackpot game is executed is used, but the time when the jackpot game is executed. Any timing may be used as long as the timing is after the jackpot game is confirmed to be executed. For example, the timing at which the symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, or the jackpot game is started. It may be a predetermined timing within the period (opening period) from the start of the big hit game to the execution of the big hit effect. Further, the timing at which the change of the special symbol won by the jackpot starts or the predetermined timing within the period in which the change is executed may be used.

Further, in this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric support), the game state (probability change state (high probability, with electric support)), and the time saving state (low probability, with electric support). )), The effect (battle effect) to show that the game state is continued is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. 175 (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 175 (A), the ROM 222 in this additional example has a partial change in the contents of the variation pattern table 222A with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114). The difference is that the title system selection table 222AA, the title selection table 222AB, and the accessory operation level selection table 222AC are added. Other configurations are the same as ROM 222 in the first control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 176 (A), the contents of the variation pattern table 222A for the accessory operation added in this additional example will be described. FIG. 176 (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table 222A (for accessories). As shown in FIG. 176 (A), the variation pattern table 222A (for accessory) includes the accessory operation level (1 to 3) selected by the accessory operation level selection table 222AC, which will be described later, and the extracted variation pattern (1 to 3). The frequency of operation of the accessory (low) to (high) and (none) are defined in association with A to Z). With this configuration, even when the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the accessory operation frequency can be changed.

Next, the contents of the title system selection table 222AA will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (B). FIG. 176 (B) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title system selection table 222AA. In this title system selection table 222AA, a plurality of title systems (1 to 3) are defined in association with the ratio of the valid operation and the invalid operation of the frame button 22 and the button operation ratio at the time of executing the operation effect.

FIG. 176 (C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title selection table 222AB. This title selection table 222AB defines the current level (set value) ("3rd grade" to "Sennin") and the title that is a privilege given to the player in association with the title system (1 to 3). There is. The title selected here is displayed in the title display area DR2 (see FIG. 173 (A)).

As shown in FIG. 176 (C), while the level (set value) is low (3rd grade to 1st grade), the same title is set regardless of which title system is set, so that the player is currently It is not possible to grasp the set title system. Therefore, the title system currently set is grasped immediately after the game is started, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the title system from being executed.

Next, the contents of the accessory operation level selection table 222AC will be described with reference to FIG. 177 (A). FIG. 177 (C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory operation level selection table 222AC. The accessory operation level set in the accessory operation level selection table 222AC is referred to when the variation pattern table 222A (for the accessory) described above is used with reference to FIG. 176 (A).

As shown in FIG. 177 (A), the accessory operation level selection table 222AC defines the accessory operation level in association with the set value (level) and the title system, and in particular, a plurality of title systems. Of these, only in the title system 3 where the set value can reach "Sennin", the accessory operation level 3 is configured to be selectable. In this way, by providing a bonus movement level that is selected only when the level (set value) is raised while a specific title system is set, the bonus movement executed during the variable effect can be achieved. It is possible to give a special feeling and enhance the effect of production.

FIG. 175 (B) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 175 (B), the RAM 223 in the present modification is different in that the effect setting group 223AA is provided for the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example described above. .. Other configurations are the same as the RAM 223 in the first control example.

Here, the contents of the effect setting group 223AA will be described with reference to FIG. 177 (B). As shown in FIG. 177 (B), the effect setting group 223AA includes an operation effect count counter 223AA1, an effective operation count counter 223AA2, an operation ratio storage area 223AA3, a title system storage area 223AA4, a set value storage area 223AA5, and an invalid operation count. The counter 223AA6, the change flag 223AA7, and the accessory operation level storage area 223AA8 are stored.

The operation effect count counter 223AA1 is a counter for counting the number of times the operation effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. When the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) determines that the operation effect count counter 223AA1 is a variation pattern for executing the operation effect (S3851: YES in FIG. 178), the operation effect count counter 223AA1 is incremented by 1 and the frame button is input. It is referred to when calculating the button operation ratio in the monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 179) (S5060 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), it is cleared when the history of the operation effect is changed (erased) (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

The effective operation count counter 223AA2 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect. In this control example, the value of the effective operation count counter 223AA2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period during the operation effect, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. (See 179), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the valid period of the operation effect, 1 is added (see S5054 in FIG. 179), which is referred to when calculating the button operation ratio (see S5060 in FIG. 179). , Also referred to when calculating the effective operation ratio (see S5061 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), it is cleared when the history of the operation effect is changed (erased) (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

In this additional example, the value of the effective operation count counter 223AA2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period during the operation effect. For example, the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit. It is determined whether or not the operation conditions such as pressing a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the case of an operation effect to be performed, and the success rate (for example, 50%) in the case of an operation effect in which the frame button 22 is operated multiple times at the right time are satisfied. Then, when the determination result satisfies the operation condition, the value of the effective operation count counter 223AA2 may be added by 1. As a result, the counter value can be fairly added regardless of the content of the operation effect to be executed.

Further, in this additional example, the value of one effective operation count counter 223AA2 is added regardless of the instruction content (pressing, repeated hitting, timing pressing, long pressing, etc.) of the operation effect for the frame button 22. However, for example, the effective operation count counter 223AA2 may be provided for each operation effect instruction content for the frame button 22, and the value of the corresponding effective operation count counter 223AA2 may be added. With this configuration, the operation history indicating the operation content of the player to the frame button 22 can be classified in more detail, so that the content and frequency of the operation effect can be changed to those more suitable for the player. Can be done.

In the operation ratio storage area 223AA3, all operations of the frame button 22 are performed based on the value of the valid operation count counter 223AA2 (value of the valid operation count) and the value of the invalid operation count counter 223AA6 (value of the invalid operation count) described later. It is an area for storing the ratio (button operation ratio) occupied by the number of effective operations among the number of times. The operation ratio storage area 223AA3 stores the button operation ratio calculated by S5060 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S4007) and the effective operation ratio calculated by the processing of S5061 (see S5062).

The title system storage area 223AA4 is an area for storing the title system selected by using the title system selection table 222AA described above.

The set value storage area 223AA5 is an area for storing the game content and the level (set value) set based on the change operation.

The invalid operation count counter 223AA6 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated at a timing other than the operation valid period (the operation valid period of the frame button 22 during the operation effect).

The change flag 223AA7 is a flag set to be turned on when the partial erasure selection mode DR4 is selected by the change operation. When this flag is set to ON, an effect suggesting to the player how to operate the frame button 22 for setting a different title system is executed.

The accessory operation level storage area 223AA8 is an area for storing the accessory operation level selected by using the above-mentioned accessory operation level selection table 222AC. With reference to the accessory operation level stored in the accessory operation level storage area 223AA8, the appearance frequency of the accessory operation effect (operation effect) is variably set by the variation pattern table 222A (for the accessory).

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described. The same elements as the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the variation display setting process 2 in this additional example will be described with reference to FIG. 178.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 in this additional example. In each of the variable display setting processes 2 of this additional example, S3801 to S3810 and S3812 to S3817, the same processes as those of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example are executed.

When the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) is executed, the same processes of S3801 to S3810 as the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example described above are executed, and then the variation pattern of this time is executed. Is determined to be a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851), and if it is determined to be a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: YES), the value of the operation effect count counter 223AA1 is added by 1 (S3852). , S3853. On the other hand, in the process of S3851, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: NO), the process of S3852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3853.

In the process of S3853, the current variation display mode is determined based on the extracted variation pattern and the accessory operation level (S3851). Specifically, a variation pattern table for accessory operation (FIG. 176 (FIG. 176)) based on the accessory operation level selected based on the accessory operation level selection table 222AC and the extracted variation patterns (AZ). A) The frequency of movement of the accessory specified in) is set, and the variation display mode (variation effect display and presence / absence of operation of the accessory) is determined. Among the variation display modes determined here, the display variation pattern command is set by the process of S3812 for the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is set by various processes of the voice lamp control device 113. Similar to the display command, the display control device 114 is notified, and the content related to the accessory operation is a command output process (see FIG. 139) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control device 113. S3102) sets a bonus operation command to be notified to the device (other device 228 (see FIG. 4)) that drives and controls the bonus unit 450. When the process of S3853 is completed, the same processes of S3812 to S3817 as those of the first control example described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S3107).

When the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051). Here, if the pressing is not detected (S5051: NO), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051: YES), then it is determined whether the current period of the operation effect is the valid period of the conversation effect (see FIG. 173) (S5052). When it is determined that the conversation effect is valid (S5052: YES), a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set (S5053), the value of the valid operation count counter is added by 1 (S5054), and S5060. Move to the processing of.

The display pressing command set in the process of S5053 is configured to set the content of the command based on the position of the accessory unit 450, the accessory operation level, and the selected title. Sets the comment display position of the conversation effect based on the result of determining the position of the character unit 450, and determines the content of the comment to be displayed based on the character operation level and the selected title. Is set. The display press command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display pressing command, the display control device 114 displays a comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 in the third symbol display device 81, so that the accessory does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to display the effect of having a conversation with the unit 450.

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the conversation valid period of the conversation effect, a display pressing command is set and a comment is displayed in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450. However, when the accessory unit 450 is configured to be movable to a plurality of positions covered by the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the accessory unit 450 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured. The display content displayed on the display screen may be discriminated, and the timing of executing the conversation effect (comment display) based on the discriminant result may be configured to be different from the pressing timing of the frame button 22. That is, the comment display area displayed corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 and the main part of the variation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a display showing the jackpot expectation degree). When it is determined that the display areas indicating the stopped symbols overlap), the above-mentioned display areas do not overlap, that is, the position of the accessory unit 450 moves. The comment display area is variable, or the variation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 progresses and the display area of the main part is variable, so that the comment is made until the timing is such that the display areas do not overlap. It may be configured to delay the display of.

With this configuration, both the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the conversation effect, which is one of the operation effects, can be suitably executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Can be done. It should be noted that, without using the above-described configuration, the comment display area displayed corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 and the main part of the variation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example,). If it is determined that the display indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit and the display area indicating the symbol to be stopped overlap with each other, the conversation effect may be stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S5052, when it is determined that the period is not the valid period of the conversation effect (S5052: NO), it is determined whether or not the present is the effective period of the accessory operation effect among the operation effects (S5055). When it is determined that the valid period of the accessory operation effect is (S5055: YES), a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set (S5056), and the value of the valid operation count counter is added by 1 (S5054). , S5060.

In the process of S5055, if it is determined that it is not the valid period of the accessory operation effect (S5055: NO), then it is determined whether it is the change valid period (S5057), and if it is the change valid period (S5057:). YES), the change process is executed (S5058), and then the process proceeds to S5060. The content of the change process (S5058) will be described later with reference to FIG. 180.

Here, in the process of S5057, if it is determined that the change is not in the valid period (S5057: NO), since the pressing operation this time is not in the valid period of the operation effect, the value of the invalid operation count counter 223AA6 is added by 1. (S5059), the process proceeds to S5060.

In the process of S5060, the button operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the operation effect count counter 223AA1 and the value of the effective operation count counter 223AA2 (S5060). Next, the effective operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the valid operation count counter 223AA2 and the value of the invalid operation count counter 223AA6 (S5061), and the calculated button operation ratio and the effective operation ratio are stored in the operation ratio storage area 223AA3. Store in (S5062). After that, the title setting process is executed (S5063), and this process is terminated.

Next, the content of the change process (S5058) will be described with reference to FIG. 180. This change process (S5058) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period of the change operation (see FIG. 174 (B)), and various information is executed based on the operation content of the player. This is a process for clearing (information on the title system, set value (level), button operation ratio referred to when selecting the title system, and information on the effective operation ratio).

When the change process (S5058) is executed, first, it is determined whether the operation content of this time is all reset (whether all erase selection mode DR3 is selected) (S5101). When it is determined that all resets are performed (S5101: YES), all the information in the set value storage area 223AA5 is cleared (S5102), and the operation effect count counter 223AA1 and the effective operation count counter 223AA2. All the values of the invalid operation count counter 223AA6 are cleared (S5103), the information of the title system storage area 223AA4 is cleared (S5104), and this process is terminated. As a result, all the information based on the operation contents of the player is cleared, the initial value "3rd grade" is displayed in the level display area DR1, and the initial value "beginner" is displayed in the title display area DR2. (See FIG. 173 (A)).

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the reset is not all (S5101: NO), it is determined whether the operation content is a partial reset (whether the partial erase selection mode DR4 is selected) (S5105). If it is determined that the reset is partially performed (S5105: YES), the change flag 223AA7 is set to ON (S5106), the information of the set value storage area 223AA5 is set in the first stage (S5107), and the process proceeds to S5103. .. If it is determined in the process of S5105 that it is not a partial reset (S5105: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the title setting process (S5063) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the title setting process (S5063). When this title setting process (S5063) is executed, first, the title system is selected based on the title system selection table 222AA (S5201). Then, the selected title system is stored in the title system storage area 223AA4 (S5202), then the set value is determined based on the value of the operation effect number counter 223AA1 and stored in the set value storage area 223AA5 (S5203).

After that, the display setting value command is set (S5204), the title is selected based on the title selection table 222AB (S5205), and the display title command is set (S5206). Next, it is determined whether the change flag 223AA7 is set to ON (S5207), and if it is determined that the change flag 223AA7 is set to ON (S5207: YES), a display operation instruction command is set (S5208), and the change flag is set. 223AA7 is set to off (S5209), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5207 that the change flag 223AA7 is not on (off) (S5207: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the above-mentioned additional example, the effect mode (for example, appearance frequency and effect content) of the operation effect, which is the effect for operating the frame button 22, is set to the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. ) Is configured to be variable. As a result, the desired effect mode is set without causing the player to feel annoyed, as compared with the case where the change operation for changing the frequency of the operation effect to the frequency desired by the player is executed separately from the game. be able to.

In the pachinko machine 10 that changes the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation history of the player, the operation effect is set in order to be able to set the effect mode of the operation effect suitable for various types of players. Although a plurality of effect modes are prepared, the same operation (for example, when the operation effect is executed, the frame button 22 is always operated more than necessary amount) is repeatedly executed for the frame button 22. However, there is a problem that only the same effect mode is set, and it is not possible to provide various operation effects to the player.

Therefore, in the above-mentioned additional example, a different privilege (title) is given to the player by accumulating the game content, and further, the type of the privilege (title) is at least the frame button 22 of the player. It is configured to be different according to the operation content (operation history) to.

With this configuration, various operations are executed on the frame button 22 in order to obtain different benefits (titles). Then, the effect mode of the operation effect is variably set based on the contents of various operations performed on the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various operation effects that can be variably set based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which different benefits (titles) are given by accumulating the game contents, the set value (for example, the level) is variably set stepwise according to the accumulation state of the game contents and set. It is common to use a configuration that grants benefits (titles) corresponding to the set value (level), but when the set value (level) reaches the upper limit, it is necessary to acquire more benefits (titles). There was a risk that the motivation to play would be reduced because it became impossible to play. Further, if the upper limit of the set value (level) is set high in order to prevent the set value (level) from reaching the upper limit, there is a problem that the storage capacity for the effect increases.

Therefore, in the above-mentioned additional example, one of a plurality of systems (title systems) having different benefits (titles) to be given is set based on the operation content (operation history) to the frame button 22. Therefore, the privilege (title) to be given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system. As a result, it is not possible to acquire all the benefits (titles) simply by accumulating the game contents, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Further, in the above-mentioned additional example, since the erasing means for erasing the past game contents is provided, the operation contents (operation history) executed in the past when setting a system different from the currently set system is provided. It is possible to suppress the setting of the system based on. In this additional example, an erasing means for erasing the past operation contents (operation history) is used in order to prevent the system from being set based on the operation contents (operation history) executed in the past. , Other configurations may be used, for example, input that a different system setting is desired (input by executing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22), and in that case, a predetermined period. It may be configured not to set a new system until (the period of the operation history referred to when setting the system) has elapsed.

Further, in the above-mentioned additional example, as the erasing means, there are a total erasing means for erasing all the past game contents and the operation contents, and a partial erasing means for erasing a part of the past game contents. The partial erasing means is used when setting a different system from the currently set system, and the different system can set the past operation contents (operation history) referred to when setting the system. It is configured to erase to the state. This eliminates the need to restart the game from the beginning when setting different systems, so that the player can enthusiastically set different systems.

In this additional example, when the partial erasing means is operated, a configuration is used in which a part of the past operation contents (operation history) is erased and the initial value is set as the set value (level). However, by operating the partial erasing means, it is sufficient that a system different from the currently set system can be easily set rather than restarting the game from the beginning (rather than operating the full erasing means), for example. The set value (level) may be continuously deleted and only a part of the past operation contents (operation history) may be deleted. Further, a system desired by the player may be specified, and a part of the past operation contents (operation history) may be deleted until the designated system can be set.

Here, even if the player operates the partial erasing means to erase a part of the past operation contents (operation history) in order to set a system different from the currently set system, the operation to be executed later is performed. If the frame button 22 is not properly operated for the effect, a different system will not be set, which may give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Specifically, if the operation effect is digested in the same operation mode as before after operating the partial erasing means, there is a possibility that the same system as the system set before operating the partial erasing means will be set. There is.

Therefore, in this additional example, after operating the partial erasing means, a guidance notification means for guiding the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player so that a different system is set is provided. By digesting the operation effect based on the content notified by this guidance notification means, it is possible to easily set different systems. In addition, since the guidance notification means is notified of operation contents different from the conventional operation contents in order to set a different system, the operation effects are produced by digesting the operation effects according to the notification contents by the guidance notification means. The contents are also variably set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an operation effect different from the conventional one, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

The content notified to the player by the guidance notification means may be simply a content that urges an operation effect different from the conventional one, or a content that indicates a specific operation content to be executed. Further, in addition to the notification by the guidance notification means, a progress notification means for notifying the player of the progress until the condition for setting a different system is satisfied may be provided. As a result, the player can easily grasp whether or not the operation effect is digested so that different systems are set.

Further, it can be set only when a predetermined erasing means is operated when the set system and the set value (level) satisfy the predetermined conditions in the system set in the above-mentioned additional example. A system may be added. By providing such a system, for example, it is possible to set a dedicated system only when the all erasing means is operated while the set value has reached the upper limit, or the set value is one lower than the upper limit. In the case of the set value of, the dedicated system may be set only when the partial erasing means is operated.

In addition, the system that can be set may be different based on the erasing timing by the erasing means. Specifically, when the erasing means is operated during a big hit game or a specific variation effect is being executed. Only a special system may be configured. In this case, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned specific variation effect to be executed only when the variation effect executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol satisfies the predetermined condition.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to set different systems depending on the timing of operating the erasing means, and it is possible to enthusiastically participate in the game.

In the above-mentioned additional example, a configuration in which a privilege (title) is set in advance corresponding to each setting value (level) of each system is used, but other configurations may be used and have already been acquired. A storage means for storing the privilege (title) may be provided, and the privilege (title) to be given may be set based on the privilege (title) stored in the storage means.

In the above-mentioned additional example, as the content (title content) of the privilege (title) given to the player, the content suggesting the setting condition of the system currently set is used. As a result, by grasping the contents of the acquired benefits (titles), it is possible to predict the conditions necessary for setting different systems.

Further, when the predetermined game conditions are satisfied, the player may be notified of the conditions necessary for setting the desired system, or the benefits already acquired among the available benefits (titles) may be notified. The number and ratio of (titles) may be notified to the player. This makes it possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in order to acquire all the benefits (titles).

As described above, one of a plurality of systems (title systems) having different benefits (titles) to be given is set based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. If the privilege (title) to be given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system, the system currently set based on the granted privilege (title). There was a problem that it became easy for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned additional example, the same privilege (title) is given until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage regardless of which system is set. It is configured as follows. As a result, until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage (unless the game is executed for a certain period after the predetermined system is set), the player can grasp which system is set. It can be difficult.

The operation content (operation history) for the frame button 22 referred to in the above-mentioned additional example includes, for example, operation effect number information for indicating the number of times the operation effect has been executed, and a frame button for the executed operation effect. Operation execution count information for indicating the presence or absence of an operation to 22, operation success count information for indicating the success count of the operation effect (the number of times when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied), and the period during which the operation effect is not executed (operation). Any information may be used as long as it is information for indicating the operation status of the player with respect to the frame button 22, such as information on the number of invalid operations for indicating the number of times the frame button 22 is operated (outside the valid period).

Further, as the content of the operation effect, in addition to the pressing effect of simply pressing the frame button 22 within a predetermined period, a timing operation effect of operating the frame button 22 at a predetermined timing and a frame button 22 being operated a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period. It is also possible to provide a continuous striking operation effect to be operated, and a long press operation effect in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period or longer. In this case, it is preferable to configure the operation contents (operation history) for the frame button 22 to be managed for each type of the executed operation effect.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine in detail whether the player dislikes simply operating the frame button 22 or dislikes a predetermined operation (continuous hit, long press, timing press) for the frame button 22. Will be possible. Therefore, when setting the operation effect corresponding to the operation content (operation history), it is possible to provide the operation effect more suitable for the player, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of operating means, each information may be configured to be managed for each operating means, or the operation contents for all the operating means can be summed up and managed. It may be configured. Further, when an operation effect for operating different operation means is executed according to the jackpot expectation degree, the number of times the operation effect is executed and the information for indicating the number of operations of the operation means are managed according to the jackpot expectation degree. Alternatively, the operation content (operation history) may be managed only for the operation effect executed when the jackpot is won.

In the above-mentioned additional example, it is referred to when determining the mode of the operation effect (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) and the privilege (title) to be given based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) for the operation effect. The system and the set value (level) are set, but in addition to the mode of operation effect (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22). , Only one of the above-mentioned system or set value (level) may be set.

In the above-mentioned additional example, the frame button 22 for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player, but other configurations are used. It may be an operating means configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or a touch that can determine that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A sensor-type operating means, a wireless-type operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used, or a plurality of the above-mentioned operating means may be provided.

As in the above-mentioned additional example, when using a configuration in which the mode of the operation effect is changed based on the operation content (operation history) of the player or a predetermined privilege (title) is given, another day is used. It is preferable to configure the game so that the game can be performed while the operation content (operation history) of the game performed in is continued. Specifically, by performing a predetermined operation (end operation) at the end of the game, the game can be performed on the day. Information on the game content and operation content is configured so that the player can acquire it (password issuance process), and the output information related to the acquired information is input to the pachinko machine 10 to continue from the acquired information. It is good to configure it so that the game of the state can be performed.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 188. In the first control example described above, when a jackpot of a special symbol is won and a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot ends, a gaming machine in which the probabilistic state continues until the next jackpot is won has been described.

On the other hand, in the second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for determining the winning or failing of the special symbol, the probability variation state (that is, the high probability state with a high jackpot probability) to the normal state (that is, the low probability state with a low jackpot probability). ) Will be transferred (falling) to the transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as a falling lottery) will be executed every time the condition for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a fall lottery function in this way, even if a probabilistic state (high probability state) is set, a period during which the high probability state surely continues is not set, so that a special symbol change is executed. It is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player each time.

Further, in the second control example, as in the first control example described above, when the probability variation state is set, the high probability state in which the jackpot probability becomes high and the time saving state in which the electric accessory 140A is easily released Even if you win the fall lottery and fall from the high probability state to the low probability state, the number of changes of the special symbol will be 100 times for a predetermined period (for example, after the big hit ends. (Until it reaches) is configured to set the time saving state. As a result, even if the player wins the fall lottery immediately after the big hit (for example, 3 rotations), the time saving state is set for a predetermined period (100 rotations), so that the fall lottery is won depending on the operating condition of the electric accessory 140A. It is possible to prevent the player from being aware of this.

In addition, although details will be described later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the special symbol jackpot lottery when the fall lottery is won is executed as a low probability state. Will be done. That is, if the fall lottery is won in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of changes of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the big hit) is exceeded, the normal state is set as the game state when the special symbol change is started. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if an effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the player has won the fall lottery is executed by using the fluctuation time of the special symbol won in the fall lottery, the player falls only by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140A. There was a problem that the success or failure of the lottery could be easily determined. Therefore, in this second control example, if the jackpot lottery is won before the fall lottery in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the jackpot ends) is exceeded, it is special. It is configured to shift the gaming state to the normal state before the fluctuation of the symbol starts.

With this configuration, the operation content of the electric accessory 140A suddenly becomes the operation content in the non-time saving state in the state where the predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the big hit) is exceeded. In that case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether he / she has won the fall lottery or the big hit lottery, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation until the change of the special symbol is completed. can.

Further, in the second control example, the continuous effect described in the first control example described above can be used to set an effect mode that can suggest the winning / failing status of the fall lottery to the player. With such a configuration, the player pays more attention to the effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the voice lamp control device 113 is provided. The contents of the ROM 222 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (A) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 182 (A), the ROM 202 in the present control example has a fall lottery table 202BA and a fall state transition table 202BB added to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and the first type selection table 202C. (See Fig. 107), the content that was defined as "probability change time reduction next time" as the game state after the big hit is defined as "probability change until the fall lottery winning, the fall lottery winning or the time reduction up to 100 times" is different. , Other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fall lottery table 202BA is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state (fall lottery) in the probable change state of the special symbol, and is a random value (random value) that is determined to fall. Counter value) is stored. In the probabilistic state of the special symbol, every time the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the fall lottery table 202BA is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to fall to the normal state. Here, the details of the fall lottery table 202BA will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (B).

FIG. 182 (B) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall lottery table 202BA. As shown in FIG. 182 (B), a random number value (counter value) determined to be a fall in the fall lottery is stored. Specifically, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, two random numbers (counter values) of "100, 101" are used as the determination values corresponding to the fall to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol). ) Is stipulated. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the value of the fall lottery counter (not shown) is compared with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202BA. , When the values match, it falls to the normal state. The fall lottery counter (not shown) is composed of a loop counter that is updated periodically (for example, every time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed) in the range of "0 to 299". Of the 300 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the fall lottery counter, two random values that are determined to be a fall are specified, so the probability that a fall will be determined in one fall lottery is 1/150. Is. The random number values (values of the first random number counter C1) determined to be big hits in the probabilistic state are five (see FIG. 106 (A)) of "5 to 9", and the big hits occur in the probabilistic state. Since the probability is 1/48, it is set so that the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than the probability of being determined to fall in the fall lottery during the probability change state. Therefore, once the player shifts to the probabilistic state, the player can be expected to win multiple big hits before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in the game during the probable change state can be improved. can.

The fall state transition table 202BB is a state transition table that is referred to when the fall lottery is won during the probable change state. The same elements as the state transition table 202F described in the first control example will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (C) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fall state transition table 202BB. As shown in FIG. 182 (C), the fall state transition table 202BB stores the fall state transition 1 table 202BB1 and the fall state transition 2 table 202BB2. Here, the contents of the fall state transition 1 table 202BB1 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (D).

FIG. 182 (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall state transition 1 table 202BB1. This fall state transition 1 table 202BB1 differs from the state transition 1 table 202F1 described in the first control example in that the state status when the fall lottery is won is added during each state status, and other than that. Are the same.

Specifically, if the status status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (maximum 100) and the fall lottery is won, the status status is set to ST3 (with low probability time reduction), which is specified. The value of the count counter continues as it is. If the status status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0 and the fall lottery is won, the status status is set to ST1 (no low probability time reduction).

That is, even if the value of the specified number of times counter is set to 100 and the fall lottery is won by the time the value of the specified number of times counter is subtracted to 0, the time is shortened until the value of the expected number of times counter is subtracted to 0. The state is given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (E), the fall state transition 2 table 202BB2 will be described. FIG. 182 (E) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall state transition 2 table 202BB2. This fall state transition 2 table 202BB2 differs from the state transition 2 table 202F2 described in the first control example in that the state status when the fall lottery is won is added during each state status, and other than that. Are the same.

Specifically, if the status status is "ST2A" and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (maximum 4) and the fall lottery is won, the status status is set to ST3A (special with low probability time reduction). The value of the specified number of times counter is continued as it is. If the status status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (maximum 96) and the fall lottery is won, the state status is set to ST3 (with low probability time reduction) and the value of the specified number of times counter. Will continue as it is. If the status status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0 and the fall lottery is won, the status status is set to ST1 (no low probability time reduction).

That is, even if the value of the specified number of times counter is set to 100 and the fall lottery is won by the time the value of the specified number of times counter is subtracted to 0, the time is shortened until the value of the expected number of times counter is subtracted to 0. The state is given.

FIG. 183 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 183 (A), the ROM 222 in the present control example is provided with the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222E instead of the continuous effect mode selection table 222E for the ROM 222 in the first control example, and the final mode selection. The difference is that the final mode selection 3 table 222H is provided in place of the table 222H, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222E will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (A). FIG. 184 (A) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222E. The continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222E corresponds to the value of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation number) stored in the remaining period storage area 223BB with respect to the continuous effect mode selection table 222E of the first control example described above. The difference is that the correspondence of the continuous effect mode is selected. In addition, if there is winning information indicating a big hit in the hold at the time of the fall winning, it is a special state that the big hit is won immediately after winning the fall lottery (big hit in a low probability state), so regardless of the remaining period. Instead, the special mode B can be selected to give the player a privilege effect.

Next, the contents of the final mode selection 3 table 222H will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (B). FIG. 184 (B) is. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the final aspect selection 3 table 222H. The final aspect selection 3 table 222H is different from the final aspect selection table 222H used in the first control example described above in that the final aspect is different depending on the setting status of the fall flag 222BA, and the other aspects are different. The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 184 (B), even if the winning / failing determination result is wrong, if there is winning information indicating a big hit winning in the hold, it can be suggested in the final aspect of this time.

Returning to FIG. 183 (B), the description will be continued. FIG. 183 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 183 (B), the RAM 223 in the second control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a fall flag 223BA and a remaining period storage area 223BB are provided, and the other points are the same. be. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fall flag 223BA is a flag for indicating that the fall lottery has been won, and is set to ON when a state command indicating that the fall lottery has been won is received from the main control device 110.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, the special symbol variation start process 3 (S213) is used instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example described above, and the other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special variation start process 3 (S213) is executed, first, the processes of S301 and S302 are executed in the same manner as the special variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, and then the value of the fall lottery counter is used. , Compare with the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202BA (S351), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random number value corresponding to the fall (lottery result corresponding to the fall). (S352).

In the process of S352, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained (S352: YES), the game state is dropped to the normal state by setting the probability change flag 203G to off (S353), and the player has fallen (S353). A state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game state has been changed to the normal state) is set (S354).

Then, similarly to the special fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, after executing the processing of S303 to S307, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is won after the time saving period (S355). Here, if the winner is won after the time reduction period (S355: YES), the time reduction medium counter 203H is reset (S356), and then S310 and S311 are the same as in the special fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 128) of the first control example. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this second control example, when an advantageous state (probability change state) advantageous to the player is set and the change start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, a special symbol lottery (big hit) is made. Before the lottery) is executed, it is configured to execute a fall lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state from the advantageous state to the normal state (the gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state).

Further, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit in the state where the electric accessory 140A is easily opened (probability change state or time saving state (hereinafter referred to as high probability state of normal symbol)). It is configured to shift the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state before starting the fluctuation of the target special symbol.

According to the control process of the main control device 110 in the second control example described above, it has two end conditions for terminating the high probability state of the normal symbol. Specifically, the first end condition is that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time reduction state reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of time reductions given to the set state), and the game state is probabilistically changed. The second end condition is that the player wins the fall lottery when the state is set, and the high probability state of the normal symbol ends when both of the above two end conditions are satisfied. .. Regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned two end conditions are satisfied, if the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the end condition of the time saving condition is satisfied.

That is, for example, if a jackpot is won in which the game state is probable (next time) after the jackpot ends and the time reduction number of times is set to 100 times, the special symbol has changed 100 times. It is a condition, and winning the fall lottery is the second end condition mentioned above. Specifically, in the above-mentioned example, if the fall lottery is won at the 10th rotation of the special symbol change after the end of the big hit, the second end condition is satisfied at that time, but the first end condition is Since it is not satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is continued until the first end condition is satisfied (the special symbol changes 100 times) (until the two end conditions are satisfied together). Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the two end conditions are satisfied together, and the normal symbol shifts from the high-probability state to the low-probability state.

On the other hand, in the state where the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit exceeds 100 times (the state where the first end condition is satisfied), the fall lottery is not won (the second end condition is satisfied). If not), the high probability state of the normal symbol will be continued until the fall lottery is won. Then, when the fall lottery is won (when the second end condition is satisfied), the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In this way, by providing a plurality (two) of conditions necessary for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state, it is possible to diversify the state transition timing of the normal symbol. In addition, when only the second end condition described above is not satisfied (in the above example, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in the state where the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 100 times). Since it is difficult for the player to know when the normal symbol will be transferred to the low probability state (whether the fall lottery will be won), the normal symbol will be in the high probability state for the player for as long as possible. You can play the game while expecting it to be.

In this second control example, the number of special symbol changes of 100 is set as one of the conditions for shifting the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol to the low probability state (normal state). However, a plurality of times may be set according to the jackpot type, and for example, a plurality of times may be set in stages such as "1 time", "25 times", and "50 times". With this configuration, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings at which the high-probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends, in addition to whether or not the fall lottery is won. Specifically, if the fall lottery is won before the number of special symbol changes after the end of the big hit reaches a predetermined number (for example, 25, 50, 100 times), the number of special symbol changes is the predetermined number (for example). For example, when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends when the number reaches 1, 25, 50, 100 times) and, for example, 25 times is set as the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit. When the number of times the special symbol changes exceeds 25 times, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is immediately terminated when the fall lottery is won.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high-probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends.

Further, in the second control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is used as one of the conditions for ending the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, but other termination conditions may be provided. For example, the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (so-called small hit winning) in which the game of opening the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time is executed (the number of times the variable winning device 65 operates). Or, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is measured separately for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol 1 reaches 10 times, or the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reaches 100 times. You may set what you have done as an end condition.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 186) is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 140) for the first control example described above, and the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 186). The difference is that a state determination process (see FIG. 187) is added as a sub process, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 186. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example described above.

When the processing of S3214 is completed, the state determination processing (S3251) is then executed, then the processing of S3215 is executed, and this processing is terminated. Here, the details of the state determination process (S3251) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 187. In this state determination process (S3251), various processes on the voice lamp control device 113 side when the fall lottery is won are executed.

When the state determination process (S3251) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a command indicating a fall has been received (S3252). This command indicating a fall is set when the fall lottery is won by the special symbol change start process 3 (see FIG. 185) of the main control device 110 (S352: YES in FIG. 185) (see S354 in FIG. 185). If the command indicating a fall has not been received in the process of S3252 (S3252: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when a command indicating a fall is received (S3252: YES), it is determined whether or not the current time is shortened (S3253). Here, if it is determined that the working hours are being shortened (S3253: YES), then the fall flag 223BA is set to ON (S3254), and the number of remaining working hours is calculated (S3255). Then, the calculated number of remaining time reductions is stored in the remaining period storage area 223BB (S3256).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information that has won a big hit in the hold (S3257), and if it is determined that there is (S3257: YES), the special condition establishment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223BB (S3258). Here, when the special condition establishment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223BB, the special mode B is selected when the continuous effect mode is set using the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222E (see FIG. 184).

When the processing of S3258 is completed, it is next determined whether or not a command indicating that the gaming state is in the normal state has been received (S3260), and if it is determined that a command indicating the normal state has been received (S3260), the player falls. It is determined whether the flag 223BA is set to ON (S3261). When it is determined in the process of S3261 that the fall flag 223BA is set to ON (S3261: YES), that is, it is the timing when the gaming state shifts from the reduced working hours state to the normal state in the state where the fall lottery is won. If it is determined, the fall flag 223BA is set to off (S3262), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3260 that the command indicating the normal state has not been received (S3260: NO), or in the processing of S3261, the fall flag 223BA is not set to on (set to off). ), This process ends as it is (S3261: NO).

As described above, in this second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct, the probability change state (that is, the high probability state with a high jackpot probability) is changed to the low probability state with a low jackpot probability. And transition (fall) transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as fall lottery). Will be described with respect to the gaming machine that is executed every time the condition for determining the validity of the special symbol is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a fall lottery function in this way, even if a probabilistic state (high probability state) is set, a period during which the high probability state surely continues is not set, so that a special symbol change is executed. It is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player each time.

Further, in the second control example, as in the first control example described above, when the probability variation state is set, the high probability state in which the jackpot probability becomes high and the time saving state in which the electric accessory 140A is easily released Even if the player wins the fall lottery and the high-probability state falls to the low-probability state, the number of changes in the special symbol is 100 times for a predetermined period (for example, after the jackpot ends). (Until it reaches) is configured to set the time saving state. As a result, even if the player wins the fall lottery immediately after the big hit (for example, 3 rotations), the time saving state is set for a predetermined period, so that the player wins the fall lottery depending on the operating condition of the electric accessory 140A. It can be suppressed from being grasped.

In addition, although details will be described later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the special symbol jackpot lottery when the fall lottery is won is executed as a low probability state. Will be done. That is, if the fall lottery is won in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of changes of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the big hit) is exceeded, the normal state is set as the game state when the special symbol change is started. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if an effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the player has won the fall lottery is executed by using the fluctuation time of the special symbol won in the fall lottery, the player falls only by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140A. There was a problem that the success or failure of the lottery could be easily determined. Therefore, in this second control example, if the jackpot lottery is won before the fall lottery in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the jackpot ends) is exceeded, it is special. It is configured to shift the gaming state to the normal state before the fluctuation of the symbol starts.

With this configuration, the operation content of the electric accessory 140A suddenly becomes the operation content in the non-time saving state in the state where the predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the big hit) is exceeded. In that case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether he / she has won the fall lottery or the big hit lottery, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation until the change of the special symbol is completed. can.

Further, in the second control example, the above-mentioned continuous effect can be used to set an effect mode that can suggest the winning / failing status of the fall lottery to the player. With such a configuration, the player pays more attention to the effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the second control example described above, if the fall lottery is won during the probable change state and the fall timing is during the time reduction period, the fluctuation pattern table used during the time reduction is continuously used even after the fall. Although it was difficult for the player to know whether or not the player won the fall lottery by using the configuration to select the fluctuation pattern, other configurations may be used, for example, as shown in FIG. 188. In addition, another example may be used in which a fluctuation pattern is selected using a special fluctuation pattern table when the fall lottery is won.

Here, the contents of the above-mentioned alternative example will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 (A) is a block diagram schematically showing the variation pattern selection table 202D provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 when the above-mentioned alternative example is used. As shown in FIG. 188 (A), in the above-mentioned alternative example, the post-fall variation pattern table 202D5 is added.

The contents of the post-fall variation pattern table 202D5 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (B). FIG. 188 (B) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the post-fall variation pattern table 202D5. As shown in FIG. 188 (B), the post-fall variation pattern table 202D5 is a variation pattern table used for four rotations of the special symbol after winning the fall lottery during the time saving period. The post-fall variation pattern table 202D5 is configured so that a variation pattern of 60 seconds can be easily selected even in the case of deviation. Therefore, immediately after winning the fall lottery, battle reach is likely to occur. As a result, each time a battle reach occurs, the player can be made to watch the production while giving a feeling of tension.

In this case, depending on the effect mode of the battle reach, it may be configured to notify the player of the effect of not winning the fall lottery at a predetermined ratio. Specifically, the opponent (opposite character) of the selected battle reach may indicate whether or not the fall lottery has been won, and the effect (attack pattern) executed during the battle reach may indicate whether or not the fall lottery has been won. Whether or not a player has won may be suggested, or whether or not a fall lottery has been won may be suggested depending on the result of the battle reach (the value of the remaining HP at the time of the draw battle reach). As a result, as the end of the battle reach, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won, whether or not the fall lottery is won is also a concern, and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, if a big hit is won during the period when the post-fall variation pattern table is used, it is preferable to configure the special effect mode to be executed as a special hit. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the jackpot has been won in a low probability state immediately after winning the fall lottery by seeing the effect mode executed as a special hit. In this case, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special hit may be set to the fluctuation time that cannot be set in other fluctuation pattern tables. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the immediate hit after the fall due to the discomfort caused by the difference in the fluctuation time.

<Explanation of another example of the suggestion effect explained in the first control example>
Next, another example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described above will be described. In the first control example described above, the effect mode of the suggestion effect composed of the precursor effect and the countdown effect is the variation display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the timing when the special figure variation is started. The configuration set in the countdown effect setting process (S3810 in FIG. 152), which is a partial process, was used. On the other hand, in this alternative example, only the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) is set in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started. It is configured to set a specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect this time based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the precursor effect.

With this configuration, the start timing of the precursor effect that triggers the start of the suggestion effect is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor effect is being executed (while the suggestion effect is being executed). In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect. Therefore, as compared with the case where the suggestion effect is executed for a predetermined specific effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be freely set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as in the case of the first control example described above, as the suggestion effect, a precursor effect that roughly notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed and a countdown effect that specifically informs the timing at which the specific effect is executed are provided. Since it is configured to be feasible, even if a specific effect is set after the suggestion effect is executed (during the precursor effect is being executed), the suggestion effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in another example of the suggestion effect>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the present alternative example will be described. In this alternative example, the countdown effect setting process 3 (FIG. 189) is used instead of the countdown setting process (see FIG. 152) for the first control example described above, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 152). The difference is that the processing content executed in S3107) of 139 is changed to the processing content of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 190). The other elements are the same as those of the first control example described above, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in this another example will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810). As shown in FIG. 189, when the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4305 as in the first control example described above are executed, and then the variation pattern is set to this time. Based on the fluctuation time and the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect), the effect mode of the precursor effect is set (S4351), the precursor effect start command for display is set (S4352), and this process is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the precursor setting flag 223T is on (S4301: YES), a plurality of variation effect setting process is executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above (S4321), and then this process is performed. finish.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the variation display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the suggestion effect is performed. The start timing of the precursory effect that triggers the start is set. As a result, the precursor effect is set without setting the specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect.

In this additional example, the trigger for the start of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the precursory effect) is changed according to whether or not the change in the special figure this time is a variation pattern in which the jackpot is won. You may set the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) using other conditions. For example, the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) according to the length of the fluctuation pattern to be executed. ) May be set, or a plurality of suggestion effect start triggers (precursor effect start timing) that can be set for one variation pattern are provided, and the plurality of suggestion effect start triggers (precursor effect start timing) are provided. A lottery means for performing a lottery for determining the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursory effect) of 1 may be provided and set based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Further, a trigger for starting the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) may be set based on the operation content in which the player operates the frame button 22 before the change of the special symbol this time is started.

Further, the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) may be changed based on the currently set gaming state. Specifically, for example, when the currently set gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probabilistic state), the precursor A (for example, in order to facilitate the execution of a long suggestion effect as a result). It is preferable to set a point where the period from the start of fluctuation is short (see the precursor pattern A shown in FIG. 100 (A)). As a result, the player is interested in the suggested effect to be executed because the currently set gaming state can be suggested to the player in addition to the lottery result of the fluctuation depending on the effect mode of the suggested effect. Can be made. Further, as in the second control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 having a transition (fall) means for shifting (falling) from a probabilistic state in which the gaming state is most advantageous to the player to a time-saving state without the player noticing it. In, since it is an effect for suggesting the game state, it is possible to make the player more interested.

In addition, as a method of setting the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect), when a variation pattern corresponding to super reach or special reach is set as the variation pattern, a predetermined timing from the start of the variation (for example). It may be configured so that the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursory effect) is set at any timing of 5 seconds and 10 seconds later).

As in this additional example, when the suggestion effect is started in a state where the end trigger of the suggestion effect (end timing of the countdown effect), that is, the start trigger (start timing) of the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is not set. Is a state in which the effect period of the suggestion effect is not set, so that there is a problem that the effect mode of the precursor effect cannot be set based on the set effect period as in the first control example described above. be.

On the other hand, in this additional example, in the process of S4351, the effect mode of the precursor effect is set based on the variation time of the variation pattern executed this time and the start trigger of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect). It is configured to do. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of this time is 60 seconds or more and the trigger for starting the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect) is precursor A, the precursor effect is a long-term precursor. A long effect mode (second path DC2B in FIG. 98 (A)) corresponding to the effect is set, and in other cases, a short effect mode (first in FIG. 98 (A)) corresponding to a short-term precursor effect is set. Path DC1A) is set.

In this way, it is set later by roughly setting the effect mode of the precursor effect based on the period in which the suggestion effect can be executed (the effect enablement period based on the start trigger of the suggestion effect and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation). It is possible to set an effect mode that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player for a specific effect (effect period of the suggestion effect).

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S3107) executed in the present alternative example will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S3107), the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined based on the pressing operation on the frame button 22 executed while the precursor effect set in the process of FIG. 189 is being executed. The process of setting is performed.

As shown in FIG. 190, when the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S5051), and if it is not pressed (S5051: NO). ), This process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed in the process of S5051 (S5051; YES), then it is determined whether or not the present is in the precursory effect period (S5071).

In the process of S5071, if it is determined that the current state is not during the precursory effect period (S5071: NO), other processes related to the frame button operation are executed (S5078), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5071 when it is determined that the present is in the precursory effect period (S5071: YES), next, a specific effect corresponding to the pressed content of the frame button 22 is set (S5072).

Here, the processing of S5072 will be specifically described. In this additional example, when the precursor effect is executed (that is, when the display of FIG. 98 (A) is displayed), the frame button 22 is displayed to the player in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81. The operation effect to be operated is executed. In this operation effect, an effect of changing the movement mode (movement speed and movement position) of the character DC1 imitating a car displayed in the sub-display area DS as a precursor effect is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22. .. Then, in the sub-display area DS that scrolls in response to the movement of the character DC1, a specific effect suggestion mode for indicating the type of the specific effect set in the present suggestion effect is displayed, and the specific effect suggestion acquired by the character DC1 is displayed. A specific effect corresponding to the embodiment is set.

Here, the specific effect suggestion mode displayed on the sub-display area DS during the precursory effect is an aspect in which the player can grasp the content of the corresponding specific effect (for example, PUSH effect) (for example, the character "PUSH" is attached. It is displayed in the above-mentioned mode). Then, this specific effect display mode is set based on the specific effect (specific effect corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol) that can be set in the special figure fluctuation pattern, and specifically, FIG. 100 (B). ), A specific effect display mode corresponding to the "cut-in effect" executed 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and the "PUSH display effect" executed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is displayed. Will be done.

In this additional example, the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed are associated with each other, but the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be set separately. It may be configured in. With this configuration, the game determines which specific effect mode should be acquired to set the period of the suggestion effect longer among the plurality of specific effect display modes displayed in the operation effect executed during the precursor effect. It is possible to prevent people from being grasped. Therefore, even after the operation effect is completed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the entire suggestion effect, and the player can continue to enjoy the suggestion effect.

Further, even if it is configured to set the execution timing of the specific effect corresponding to the specific effect display mode acquired during the operation effect, based on the content of the variation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result). good. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to select a specific effect desired by the player, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game. Even when such a configuration is used, the timing at which the specific effect selected by the player is executed is based on the content of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result) as described above. By setting it, it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the effect performed during the change of the special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of S5072, the period from the present time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated (S5073). In the processing of S5073, the start timing of the countdown effect (3 seconds in this additional example) is calculated by back calculation from the execution timing of the specific effect set in the process of S5072, and the period from the present time to the start timing of the countdown effect is set. calculate. That is, by operating the frame button 22 as soon as possible during the operation effect executed during the precursor effect, the period calculated in the processing of S5073 can be lengthened.

Next, if it is determined whether the interval calculated in the process of S5073 is within 15 seconds (S5074), and if it is determined that the interval is within 15 seconds (S5074: YES), the effect of the precursor effect currently being executed is performed. When the mode is set to the short effect mode (S5075) and it is determined that the mode is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S5074: NO), the effect mode of the precursory effect currently being executed is set to the long effect. It is set in the embodiment (S5076).

That is, in this additional example, at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, first, based on the content of the current fluctuation pattern (variation time, jackpot lottery result), the production mode of the precursory effect is roughly set (S4351 in FIG. 189). ), The precursory effect is executed according to the set effect mode. Then, while the precursor effect is being executed, at the time when the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is set, the precursor effect is performed based on the remaining period of the suggestion effect (remaining period of the precursor effect). It is configured to change the production mode.

With this configuration, the suggestive effect can be displayed without discomfort toward the specific effect executed during the variable display. Further, since the display mode of the precursor effect can be changed based on the operation content during the operation effect, for example, it is easy to intentionally set the short effect mode as the precursor effect mode (the remaining period of the precursor effect is short). ) Operation that is the timing Operate the frame button 22 at the end of the production to enjoy whether or not the long production mode is set (whether or not the fluctuation pattern this time is a long fluctuation time), or conversely. , The frame button 22 is operated at the beginning of the operation effect, which is the timing at which the long effect mode is intentionally set as the precursor effect mode (the remaining period of the precursor effect is long), and the precursor effect is executed in the long effect mode. You can enjoy and perform the production according to the player's request.

After setting the precursor effect mode in the process of S5075 or S5076, a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set effect mode is set (S5077), the process of S5078 described above is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, the start timing of the suggestion effect (start timing of the precursor effect). Only is set, and the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect this time is set based on the operation to the frame button 22 executed during the precursor effect.

With this configuration, the start timing of the precursor effect that triggers the start of the suggestion effect is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor effect is being executed (while the suggestion effect is being executed). In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect. Therefore, as compared with the case where the suggestion effect is executed for a predetermined specific effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be freely set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as in the case of the first control example described above, as the suggestion effect, a precursor effect that roughly notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed and a countdown effect that specifically informs the timing at which the specific effect is executed are provided. Since it is configured to be feasible, even if a specific effect is set after the suggestion effect is executed (during the precursor effect is being executed), the suggestion effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in this additional example, since it is possible to gradually variably set the effect mode of the precursor effect, which is a partial effect of the suggestion effect (the effect executed in the first half), the effect mode of the entire suggestion effect is set. It can be set without any discomfort. In this additional example, the production mode of the countdown effect executed as a partial effect of the suggestion effect (effect executed in the latter half) is fixed (countdown display for 3 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this. The interval until the specific effect is executed at the timing when the specific effect to be executed this time is set (see S5073 in FIG. 190) is determined (see S5074 in FIG. 190), and the countdown effect is produced based on the determination result. It may be configured to set the period (for example, 3 seconds or 7 seconds).

Each of the configurations and technical ideas described in the above-mentioned first control example may be added to the above-described additional example, and the contents of the above-mentioned first control example and the contents of the present additional example. A pachinko machine 10 may be provided.

<Explanation when various effects described in the first control example are used in the second control example>
Next, the contents when the contents of the first control example and the contents of the second control example are combined will be described. Specifically, the first control described above is based on the lottery result of the fall lottery or the pre-determination result of the fall lottery preliminarily determined based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A. The contents when setting the production mode of various effects described in the example will be described.

In the first control example described above, in the jackpot medium effect setting process (see S3302 in FIG. 143) for setting the effect during the jackpot, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the entry information for winning the jackpot in the reserved balls. Based on the determination result of whether or not there is, the continuous jackpot effect can be set by referring to the jackpot medium effect selection table 222C. Alternatively, it may be configured to set the jackpot middle effect with reference to the pre-determination result of the fall lottery pre-determined based on the information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A.

Specifically, a second pre-determination means that can discriminate between the winning information that wins the jackpot as the look-ahead information and the winning information that wins the fall lottery in the order in which the special symbol change is executed is provided. As a judgment result, if it is determined that the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information that wins the jackpot is executed and then the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information that wins the fall lottery is executed, the continuous jackpot effect is set. It is good to configure it so that it does not. As a result, when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, the winning information held and stored at that time does not include the winning information for winning the fall lottery, so that it is added when the continuous jackpot effect is executed. You can increase the value.

In addition, when it is determined by the second pre-determination means that the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information won in the fall lottery is executed and then the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information won in the jackpot is executed, it is continuous. It may be configured to set a jackpot effect. As a result, it is possible to execute the jackpot continuous effect without executing the fall suggestion effect that suggests that the player has won the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving anxiety due to the execution of the fall suggestion effect.

In addition, if it is determined that among the look-ahead information at the time of winning the big hit, the winning information corresponding to the first rotation after the big hit contains information indicating that the player will win the fall lottery, the information indicating that the lottery will be won is included in the big hit. As an effect, it is preferable not to execute an effect that suggests that a game state (probability change state) advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big hit. That is, if the fall lottery is won at the start timing of the first rotation special symbol change after the end of the big hit, the big hit lottery of the special symbol is never received in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player. In such a state, if an effect suggesting that a game state (probability change state) advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big hit is executed during the big hit, the player is given an excessive sense of expectation. It will be. When the above-mentioned configuration is used, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player.

Next, in the first control example described above, a continuous effect (battle effect) for notifying a period in which a game state (probability change state or time saving state) advantageous to the player is continuously set can be executed. , The production mode of the continuous production (the production mode of the pre-battle production and the production mode of the battle reach), the lottery result of this special symbol, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223A (look-ahead information), and The display mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed during one advantageous state (during the probability change state or the time saving state). In a gaming machine having a fall lottery configuration, refer to the lottery result of the fall lottery or the pre-determination result of the fall lottery preliminarily determined based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A. It is preferable to configure it so as to set the effect mode of the continuous effect.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the variation pattern (variation effect) is set at the timing when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. That is, the setting of the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A is also configured to be executed at the variation start timing of the special symbol. In this case, since the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E) is subtracted by 1 in order to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the prize is won. There is a problem that the fluctuation pattern (variation effect) cannot be set when the information (look-ahead information) stored in the information storage area 223A has reached the upper limit number.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, as a configuration for setting a fluctuation pattern (variation effect) by the voice lamp control device 113, it is executed in common regardless of the information (look-ahead information) stored in the prize information storage area 223A. The first variation pattern setting means for setting the first variation pattern (for example, the effect of varying the third symbol) and the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A are executed. It is preferable to have a second fluctuation pattern setting means for setting two fluctuation patterns (for example, a suggestion effect suggesting that there is a hit in the hold), and to use the fluctuation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the above-mentioned first variation pattern is set.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A by the second variation pattern setting means is used. ) Is set, and the variation effect in which the information indicating the second variation pattern is added is executed for the variation effect executed in the first variation pattern. With this configuration, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

Therefore, it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation effect) based on the look-ahead information while the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A has reached the upper limit, and the effect based on the look-ahead information (look-ahead information). Look-ahead effect) can be easily executed.

Even if the timing for executing the process for setting the second fluctuation pattern by the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern setting means is set after a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Alternatively, the setting timing of the second fluctuation pattern may be different according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the first fluctuation pattern setting means. With this configuration, the timing for setting the look-ahead effect can be different depending on the fluctuation pattern to be executed, so that the player can enthusiastically store the reserved ball.

Here, as the execution timing set corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern selected by the first fluctuation pattern setting means, for example, a relatively long fluctuation time (variation time of 60 seconds or more) as the first fluctuation pattern is used. If set, the setting timing of the second fluctuation pattern is set 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and if a relatively short fluctuation time (fluctuation time of 30 seconds) is set as the first fluctuation pattern, the second fluctuation is performed. It is advisable to set the pattern setting timing 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

In addition, if the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting means is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second fluctuation pattern setting means may not be executed. With this configuration, when a fluctuation time that makes it difficult to execute the look-ahead effect is set, the look-ahead effect is not added during the change, and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Can be suppressed.

Further, as the second variation pattern (look-ahead effect) that can be set by the second variation pattern setting means, a short effect (for example, a comment display notice) executed in a short period (for example, 2 seconds) and a long period (for example, for example). Even if the long effect (for example, the chance eye stop notice) executed in 20 seconds) is configured to be configurable, the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting means. Is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), by configuring the second variation pattern setting means not to be executed, the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is set for a predetermined period. In the case of (for example, 10 seconds) or more, the second variation pattern (look-ahead effect) can be easily executed by the second variation pattern setting means.

As described above, when the second fluctuation pattern setting means is not executed according to the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting means, the winning information storage area 223A is used. Among the stored prize information, the prize information for which the determination of whether or not to set the second fluctuation pattern by the second fluctuation pattern setting means has already been executed and the prize information that has not been executed are stored in a distinguishable manner. When the second variation pattern setting means is executed, whether or not to set the second variation pattern by the second variation pattern setting means among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A. It is preferable to exclude the winning information from which the determination is executed and to execute the setting determination of the second fluctuation pattern.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned example, the display control device 114 issues a look-ahead effect execution command indicating that the second variation pattern (look-ahead effect) set by the second variation pattern setting means has been executed by the display control device 114. When the output to the control device 113 is configured and the voice lamp control device 113 cannot receive the look-ahead effect execution command even though the second variation pattern (look-ahead effect) is set (the look-ahead effect is not executed). In the case), it is preferable to configure the second variation pattern setting means to be executed again for the same winning information in the next variation.

A storage means capable of storing (holding storage) a plurality of starting prizes (first ball opening 64 or second ball opening 140) of a special symbol, and a special symbol based on the information (winning information) stored in the storage means. Before the lottery (variation) is executed (before the lottery condition of the special symbol based on the winning information stored in the storage means is satisfied), the content of the winning information stored in the storage means is stored. In a gaming machine having a pre-discrimination means (pre-reading means) for pre-determining, when a variation effect (pre-reading effect) based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is executed, the special symbol changes in advance at the start of the change. There is a configuration in which the effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the special symbol variation this time is provided based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the determination result of the prior determination means as an effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. It is possible to suggest both the lottery result of the special symbol and the determination result of the winning information stored in the storage means, and it is possible to execute an effect that interests the player. However, since the effect mode is determined based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination result at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect mode is set in a state where the number of winning information stored in the storage means has not reached the upper limit. There was the problem of having to. That is, the timing for setting the effect mode is the timing (stored in the storage means) for executing the change of the special symbol using the oldest prize information (winning information used for the next special symbol change) stored in the storage means. Since it is the timing when the winning information is reduced by one), it is not possible to set the effect mode when the number of winning information stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit, and the pre-determination means. There is a problem that the execution frequency of the variable effect (look-ahead effect) based on the determination result of is reduced.

Further, in the above-described configuration, at the timing when the change of the special symbol is started, the process of determining the content of the winning information stored in the storage means and the process of setting the effect mode corresponding to the change of the special symbol are performed. There is a problem that it is necessary to execute it, the processing is concentrated in a short period of time, and the processing load increases.

Further, as a configuration for executing the variation effect (look-ahead effect) based on the determination result of the advance determination means, in addition to the above-mentioned configuration, the above-mentioned advance determination means based on the fact that new winning information is stored in the storage means. There is also a gaming machine that executes discrimination by, and based on the discrimination result, executes an effect (look-ahead effect) for showing a pre-discrimination result different from the variable display of a special symbol.

In such a configuration, since the pre-reading effect can be executed at the timing when the new winning information is stored in the storage means, the effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means can be smoothly performed. However, since the effect to be executed is an effect for showing the determination result of the pre-discrimination means, the effect showing the determination result of the special symbol currently being executed and the display content overlap with each other, and the player can see the effect. There was a problem that the display was difficult to understand. Further, since the control is performed to execute the look-ahead effect at the timing when the new winning information is stored in the storage means, there is a problem that the processing load is temporarily increased.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, as a configuration for setting a fluctuation pattern (variation effect) by the voice lamp control device 113, it is executed in common regardless of the information (look-ahead information) stored in the prize information storage area 223A. The first variation pattern setting means for setting the first variation pattern (for example, the effect of varying the third symbol) and the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A are executed. It is preferable to have a second fluctuation pattern setting means for setting two fluctuation patterns (for example, a suggestion effect suggesting that there is a hit in the hold), and to use the fluctuation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the above-mentioned first variation pattern is set.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A by the second variation pattern setting means is used. ) Is set, and the variation effect in which the information indicating the second variation pattern is added is executed for the variation effect executed in the first variation pattern. With this configuration, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (look-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

<Third control example>
Next, another control example of the continuous effect described in the first control example described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, the first control example described above is configured so that the battle effect (pre-battle effect and battle reach) is repeatedly executed during high accuracy (during the probability change state or the time saving state). .. In the control content of the first control example described above, a fluctuation pattern in which battle reach can be executed (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) or a fluctuation pattern in which battle reach cannot be executed depends on the lottery result of the special symbol. (Variation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds) may be continuously selected. In the first control example described above, in order to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player's production, the fluctuation pattern that can execute the battle reach (the deviation fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) is within a predetermined period. If multiple selections are made (for example, within the interval in which the special symbol changes 6 times), the battle reach will be executed unnecessarily by configuring not to execute the battle reach for the latter fluctuation pattern. It is configured to solve the problem of reducing the effect of the effect, but the fluctuation pattern that can execute the battle reach and the fluctuation pattern that cannot execute the battle reach are randomly selected based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In the first control example selected for, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds) that cannot execute the battle reach is continuously selected, and the pre-battle effect is produced. Remained the problem of continuing for a long time.

Therefore, in the third control example, the continuous effect (battle effect) is configured to be executed during the probability change state as the game state, and the special symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the probability change state is shown. As the fluctuation pattern table used when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern table in which the pre-battle effect is executed (easily) and a fluctuation pattern table in which the battle reach is executed (easily) are predetermined. It is configured to be used according to the rules (variable scenarios).

With this configuration, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation, if the number of special symbol fluctuations is the predetermined number of times (for example, the 14th rotation from the end of the jackpot), the battle reach must be executed. And can solve the above-mentioned problems. Further, in the third control example, the variation scenario used while the probability variation state is set is configured to be selected and used from a plurality of variation scenarios having different contents. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage even when a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern is selected according to a predetermined fluctuation scenario is used.

Further, in the third control example, a plurality of types of jackpot types are prepared for jackpots that provide the same value (contents of the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot ends), and the selected jackpot types are selected. It is configured to select the fluctuation pattern to be executed after the end of the jackpot based on the fluctuation scenario corresponding to. As a result, it is possible to set a fluctuation scenario to be executed after the end of the jackpot according to the type of the jackpot, so that the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation scenario is surely selected from the special symbol fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot. be able to.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 191 to 202, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the voice lamp control is performed. The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the contents of the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 are partially changed. Are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 191 (A) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 191 (A), the ROM 202 in this control example has a variation scenario setting table 202CA added to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and the contents of the first type selection table 202C are partially changed. The difference is that the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202D are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first type selection table 202C in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202C in the third control example. The detailed description of the same elements as the first type selection table 202C used in the first control example described above will be omitted.

In the first hit type selection table 202C in the third control example, the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot K) corresponding to the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed is further added. The subdivided jackpot types (big hits AA to AJ) are specified. Specifically, among the values "0 to 19" of the first hit type counter C2 to which "big hit A" is associated, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0,1". Is defined in association with "big hit AA", "big hit AB" is associated with the range of "2, 3", and "big hit AB" is specified in the range of "4,5". "AC" is associated and specified, "Big hit AD" is associated and specified in the range of "6,7", and "Big hit AE" corresponds to the range of "8,9". It is specified with the addition, "Big hit AF" is specified in association with the range of "10, 11", and "Big hit AG" is specified in association with the range of "12, 13". In the range of "14,15", "big hit AH" is associated and defined, and in the range of "16,17", "big hit AI" is associated and defined. In the range of "18, 19", "big hit AJ" is defined in association with each other.

That is, in the third control example, of the 200 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first type counter C2, 10 types are used for 20 random values for which "big hit A" is selected. It is stipulated that the jackpot types (big hit AA to jackpot AJ) are evenly distributed, and the ratio of selecting each jackpot type (big hit AA to jackpot AJ) is 1%.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this third control example, when any one of "big hit AA" to "big hit AJ" is selected, the big hit game (15 rounds) specified in "big hit A" is selected. The game) is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the game state specified in "Big hit A" is set. Then, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol executed after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be different depending on the selected jackpot type (big hit AA to jackpot AJ). ..

With this configuration, when a specific jackpot game is set, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot game ends can be different. Therefore, for example, the jackpot type is "big hit AA". When "Big hit AJ" is selected, it is easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time as a fluctuation pattern of special symbol fluctuation executed after the end of the jackpot game. That is, even if the jackpot type is set to have the same game state with the same jackpot game content, the number of fluctuations per unit time in the special symbol change after the jackpot game is completed can be different depending on the jackpot type. It is possible to give the player who wants to win the next jackpot as soon as possible to have a sense of expectation for the winning jackpot type until the timing when the special symbol change is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Similar to the above-mentioned "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit G", "big hit I" defined in the first hit type selection table 202C, that is, high probability after the big hit game is completed. It is stipulated that "A to J", which are sub-categories of each jackpot type, are evenly allocated to the jackpot types to which the state and the time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as the probabilistic state) are given. On the other hand, "big hit C", "big hit H", "big hit J", "big hit K", that is, a high probability state and a time saving state are not given after the big hit game ends (a low probability state and a time saving state are given. ) For the jackpot type, the sub-classification (A to J) of the jackpot type is not specified, and a common variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202D in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (A). FIG. 193 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202D in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 193 (A), in the third control example, the special variation pattern table 202D4 is deleted from the first control example, and the jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC1 and the first deviation are used. The difference is that the (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC2, the second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC3, and the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC4 are added.

Here, the jackpot (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC1 will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (B). FIG. 193 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC1. The jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC1 is a variation pattern table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 193 (B), the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is configured to be selected. Specifically, in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 179", a fluctuation pattern (various types of super reach) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with each other, and is defined as "180 to 198". The range is defined by associating a fluctuation pattern (various types of special reach) with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. In this third control example, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected, a battle reach (victory battle) in which three attacks are unfolded by the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (see FIG. 94). When the fluctuation pattern of 90 seconds is selected, a battle reach (victory battle) in which a resurrection effect is performed after three attacks are unfolded is executed (see FIG. 96).

Next, with reference to FIG. 193 (C), the first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2 will be described. FIG. 193 (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first deviation pattern table 202DC2. The first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC2 is a variation pattern table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. There is one.

As shown in FIG. 193 (C), in the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC2, the variation pattern with a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds and 5 seconds) has a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds). It is configured to be easier to select than the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149", a fluctuation pattern (short deviation A) with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with it, and is defined as "150 to 197". A fluctuation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds (short deviation B) is associated with the range, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation A) is associated with "198". Has been done.

That is, in the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC2, among the 199 counter values (random values) that the variation type counter C1 can take, 198 random values (range of "0 to 197") Therefore, a short deviation (short deviation A, short deviation B), which is a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, is defined, and a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is defined for the remaining one random value (“198”). Since the deviation (long deviation A) is specified, the fluctuation time is short in most cases (about 99.5%) when the fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2. A variation pattern is selected.

In the third control example, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds (short deviation A) or a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds (short deviation B) is selected, the pre-battle effect is produced by the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 91, see FIG. 92), and when "short miss B" is selected, an attack effect (see FIG. 92) that increases or decreases the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent is executed. When "Short deviation A" is selected, for example, an effect in which the character of oneself and the character of the other party have a conversation or an effect of the other party is performed without executing an effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the other party. The effect of switching the character of is executed. In addition, when "long off A" is selected, a battle reach (drawing battle) in which three attacks are unfolded is executed (see FIG. 94).

Next, the contents of the second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC3 will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (D). FIG. 193 (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second deviation pattern table 202DC3. The second deviation pattern table 202DC3 is a variation pattern table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is in the probability variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is out. As shown in FIG. 193 (D), one of them is configured so that any fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected.

Specifically, in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 197", a fluctuation pattern (long deviation A) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with it, and "198" is defined as A fluctuation pattern (long deviation B) with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is defined in association with each other.

FIG. 193 (E) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC4. This special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC4 is a variation pattern table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the jackpot gaming state is the probability variation state, and the variation time is irrespective of the lottery result of the special symbol. The variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is configured to be selected. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation pattern (ultra-short deviation) with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds corresponds to the entire range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"). If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern (ultra-short hit) with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is applied to the entire range of the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"). Is specified in association with each other.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 191 (A). The variation scenario setting table 202CA is a variation scenario in which the variation pattern selection table 202D (see FIG. 193 (A)) referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is defined according to the number of variations of the special symbol. It is defined in association with the jackpot type. When the variable scenario setting table 202CA determines in the jackpot control process (see S1104 in FIG. 137) executed by the main control device 110 that it is the end timing of the ending effect, that is, the end timing of the jackpot game (FIG. 137). S1211: YES), the variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is referred to, and the variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read out and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203CA.

Here, the contents of the fluctuation scenario defined in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202CA will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. 194 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario setting table 202CA. As shown in FIG. 194 (A), the fluctuation scenario setting table 202CA shows each fluctuation scenario (variation) in association with the jackpot type (small classification of jackpot type (A to J)) and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Scenario 1 to variable scenario 11) are specified.

That is, in the third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol change executed after the end of the jackpot (special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot) according to the winning jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot is won. The range in which the fluctuation pattern of is selected) can be different. Therefore, when a big hit is won, the content (number of rounds) of the big hit game, the game state set after the big hit game, and the fluctuation pattern set after the big hit game can be made different. You can improve your interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 194 (A), the fluctuation scenario set after the end of the big hit is configured to be different depending on the game state when the big hit is won. Specifically, if the game state when the big hit is won is a state without time reduction (common to the high probability state and the low probability state of the special symbol), which big hit type (small classification of big hit type (A to J)) Even if is set, if a common fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) is set and the game state when the jackpot is won is a state with a short time (common to the high probability state and low probability state of the special symbol), , It is configured to set the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 2 to 11) corresponding to the set jackpot type (small classification of jackpot type (A to J)).

With this configuration, the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is larger when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won than when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won without the time reduction. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more aware of the game state when the jackpot is won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this third control example, when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won in the time reduction state, rather than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won in the state without time reduction. Each fluctuation scenario is configured so that the set fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 2 to fluctuation scenario 11) has a larger number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time, but the variation scenario is not limited to this, and for example, there is no time reduction. Each fluctuation scenario may be configured so that the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time increases when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won in the state. With this configuration, for example, the privilege video can be executed for a long time in the effect mode that can be set only when the probability variation jackpot is won in the state with time reduction.

In addition, among the fluctuation scenarios (variation scenario 2 to variation scenario 11) set when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won in the state with time reduction, some fluctuation scenarios are changed to the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) in the state without time reduction. It may be set so that the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is smaller than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when winning, or when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won without shortening the time. , A plurality of fluctuation scenarios may be set based on the jackpot type (subclassification of jackpot type (A to J)).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 194 (B) to 196 (D), the contents of each fluctuation scenario defined in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202CA will be described. FIG. 194 (B) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 1. First, the contents specified in the fluctuation scenario will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (B). The variation scenario is referred to when selecting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game (that is, one special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game is the number of fluctuations 1) and the variation pattern of the variation. The fluctuation pattern table to be used is specified in association with each other.

Further, in the third control example, as described above, when the jackpot type in which the probability variation state is set as the gaming state is won after the jackpot game ends, the corresponding variation scenario is set by the variation scenario setting table 202CA, and the variation scenario is set. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the contents specified in.

As shown in FIG. 194 (B), in the fluctuation scenario 1, table A (special (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202DC4) is defined as a fluctuation pattern table referred to when the number of fluctuations is “1 to 4”, and the number of fluctuations is specified. Table B (displacement (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3) is defined as the variation pattern referred to when is "5 to".

As shown in FIG. 194 (A), this fluctuation scenario 1 is set when all the jackpots to which the jackpot type (small classification) is given are won in the state where the time saving state is not given as the gaming state. Will be done. When the variation scenario 1 is set, the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC4 (table A) (see FIG. 193 (E)) is used during the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the jackpot ends, and the special symbol is used. A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result.

Then, after the fifth rotation of the special symbol fluctuation after the end of the big hit, the deviation pattern table 202D3 (table B) (see FIG. 108 (D)) is used, and the fluctuation time is 7 to 90 seconds. The variation pattern is selected based on the acquisition value of the variation type CS1. Since the fluctuation scenario 1 is a scenario set when the gaming state is a probable change state, if the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the state where the fluctuation scenario 1 is set, as described above, the jackpot is used. (Probability variation) The variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table 202DC1.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (C). As shown in FIG. 194 (C), in the fluctuation scenario 2, the number of fluctuations is in the range of "1 to 4", and the table A (special (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC4) is associated with the fluctuation scenario 1 described above. Table C (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC2) is specified in the range of "5 to 13", and table D (second deviation (second deviation)) is specified when the number of variation is "14". Probability) Fluctuation pattern table 202DC3) is specified.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "199", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations of 9, and the table D (second) is defined for each number of fluctuations. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC3) is defined in association with each other. That is, during the period when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is "5 to 199", the variation pattern is selected using the table C after executing the special symbol variation 9 times, and then the variation pattern is changed using the table D. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

With this configuration, in the battle effect executed during the period when the probabilistic state is set as the game state, the special symbol variation (short deviation (short deviation A) in which the pre-battle effect is executed is executed using the table C). , Special symbol variation in which short deviation B) is selected) and special symbol variation in which battle reach is executed (special symbol variation in which long deviation (long deviation A, long deviation B) is selected using table D). , Can be set in advance, so that the production mode of the pre-battle effect can be changed toward the special symbol change in which the battle reach is executed.

Further, in the third control example, when the variation pattern is selected using the table C, the long deviation A (the deviation variation of 60 seconds) is selected, albeit slightly. As a result, when a variable scenario is set in advance, the battle reach can be executed at an unexpected timing. As a result, when the battle reach is executed at an unexpected timing (that is, when the fluctuation time in which the battle reach can be executed (the fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more) is selected), the player is given a big hit. You can play the game while expecting to win.

As described above, by setting a variable scenario and making it possible to set in advance the period during which the pre-battle effect and the battle reach are executed, it is possible to hold the player for a long period of time (for example, hold) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to set the production mode of the pre-battle effect during the period when the number of special symbol changes exceeding the upper limit of memory is executed), but each time the battle effect is executed, the same variation scenario is used. There was a problem that the player got tired of the battle production itself when the production based on it was executed.

In order to solve such a problem, in the third control example, the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot ends are the same jackpot type (for example, "big hit A"). On the other hand, a plurality of jackpot types (for example, "big hit AA" to "big hit AJ") in which different fluctuation scenarios are specified are provided so that the player cannot easily grasp the contents of the fluctuation scenario during the battle production. It is composed.

As a result, while having the merit of creating a scenario of the fluctuation pattern (providing a long-term effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort), the disadvantage of creating a scenario (monotonic effect) can be suppressed. In addition, since the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot ends are configured in a plurality of variable scenarios for the same jackpot type (for example, "big hit A"). Even if the player grasps the game content of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot ends, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp in which fluctuation scenario the special figure fluctuation is executed after the jackpot ends. .. Therefore, when the battle reach is executed, it is difficult to understand whether it is a predetermined battle reach (draw battle) based on a variable scenario or a battle reach (win or defeat battle) based on winning a big hit. It is possible to enhance the effect of production.

In this control example, the jackpot type to which "A to J" is given is specified for all of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit G", and "big hit I". However, the jackpot type specified for each jackpot may be different. For example, when the jackpot game corresponding to "big hit A" is executed, a specific variable scenario (for example, a variable scenario) is executed. It may be configured so that only 2) can be set. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing a game for a long period of time to understand the relationship between the game content of the jackpot and the fluctuation scenario. Therefore, when the battle reach is executed at a timing different from usual after the end of a specific jackpot game (for example, the jackpot game corresponding to "big hit A"), the expectation for the jackpot can be increased.

Then, the table B (displacement (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3) is defined in association with the range in which the number of variations of the special symbol is "200 to". With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 where the probability change state continues until the next big hit as in this control example, it is not necessary to create an infinite number of fluctuation scenarios, so the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Can be done. In this third control example, the fluctuation reached when a lottery of 4 times or more of the jackpot probability (about 1/48 (see FIG. 106 (A)) of the special symbol in the probabilistic state is executed is executed. When the number of fluctuations exceeds "200", the table B (displacement (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202D3) is configured to be executed, but when the number of fluctuations exceeds that, table B (disengagement (probability variation) variation) is executed. ) Fluctuation pattern table 202D3) may be configured to be executed. For example, when the number of fluctuations "500" reached when a lottery of 10 times or more of the jackpot probability is executed, the table B is used. It may be configured so that the selection of the fluctuation pattern that has been performed is executed.

Further, in the third control example, when the number of fluctuations "200", which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is exceeded, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is executed, but other than that. A table may be used, for example, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table A may be executed until the next big hit is won, or the fluctuation may occur from the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario "200". During the period of the number of times "399", the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table A is executed, and when the number of fluctuations exceeds "400", the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is executed until the next big hit is won. It may be configured as follows.

As described above, in the third control example, the battle effect is configured to be executed based on the fluctuation scenario for the special symbol fluctuation within the range of the number of lottery that can normally be won as a big hit. However, when the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario (variation number of times "200") is exceeded, it is preferable to configure the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect other than the battle effect. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that a privilege effect such that video or audio that cannot be normally seen by the player is provided or points collected by the player are given is executed. This makes it possible to give special benefits to players who have not been able to win the jackpot for a long period of time. In addition, in the third control example, the above-mentioned privilege effect is executed using a variation pattern different from the variation pattern corresponding to the variation scenario set in order to smoothly execute the battle effect executed in the probabilistic state. Because it is possible to do so, the degree of freedom of privilege production can be increased.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (D). FIG. 194 (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation scenario 3. The fluctuation scenario 3 is configured so that the period during which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C and the table D is different from that of the fluctuation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194 (C)) described above. Specifically, in the fluctuation scenario 3, the number of fluctuations is defined in the range of "1 to 4" in association with the table A (special (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202DC4) as in the above-mentioned fluctuation scenario 2, and the number of fluctuations is defined. Table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in the range of "5 to 9", and table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table) when the number of fluctuations is "10". 202DC3) is specified.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "190", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations of 5, and the table D (second) is defined for each number of fluctuations. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC3) is defined in association with each other. That is, during the period when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is "5 to 190", the variation pattern is selected using the table C after executing the special symbol variation 5 times, and then the variation pattern is generated using the table D. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

With this configuration, the timing at which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the variable scenario is executed can be different depending on the type of variable scenario to be set, so the battle reach based on winning the jackpot ( It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a victory or a defeat battle), and it is possible to enhance the effect of the production.

Then, as in the above-mentioned fluctuation scenario 2, when the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in the range of the fluctuation count of "190 to 198" and the fluctuation count is "199". Table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC3) is defined, and table B (disengagement (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3) is defined in the range where the number of fluctuations is "200 to".

In this way, the period of pre-battle production (the period when the number of fluctuations is "190 to 198") corresponding to the final battle reach (the battle reach executed when the number of fluctuations is "199") is irrespective of the jackpot type. By unifying, it is possible to easily unify the contents of the effect to be executed regardless of which jackpot type is set. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a production that suggests to the player that the battle production will end (a production that makes the pre-battle production and the production mode of the battle reach different from the usual ones) for each jackpot type, so that the capacity of the production data can be increased. Can be reduced.

For all jackpot types, it is not necessary to unify the effects that suggest the end of the battle effect to the player (the effect that makes the pre-battle effect and the effect of the battle reach different from the usual ones), and at least 2 Configure the variable scenario so that the production that suggests to the player that the battle production will end for one jackpot type (the production that makes the pre-battle production and the production mode of the battle reach different from the usual) is unified. For example, the capacity of the production data can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (A). FIG. 195 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 4. This fluctuation scenario 4 has the same contents as the above-mentioned fluctuation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194 (C)) in the period when the number of fluctuations is "1 to 14", and the contents specified after that. Is configured to be different from the fluctuation scenario 2. In this way, by defining the same content for a predetermined period from the end of the jackpot and making the content different after the lapse of the predetermined period, a plurality of fluctuation scenarios are set this time for the player. It can make it more difficult to understand what the fluctuation scenario is.

FIG. 195 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 5. Unlike the fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, this fluctuation scenario 5 is a special symbol variation in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table D after the number of fluctuations “1 to 4” in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table A. Is executed. That is, the battle reach (draw battle) is executed without executing the pre-battle effect. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a great sense of discomfort with respect to the battle effect as compared with the case where other variable scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation of a big hit for the battle reach executed immediately after the start of the battle production. Since other contents are the same as the above-mentioned fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 195 (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 6. As shown in FIG. 195 (C), this variation scenario 6 does not have a period in which the variation pattern is selected using the table A, and the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table D. Is different from other fluctuation scenarios in that is set continuously. Since other elements are the same as the fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, also for the above-mentioned fluctuation scenario 6, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the fluctuation scenario, the fluctuation pattern table defined in the fluctuation scenario is made the same and associated with each fluctuation pattern table. A fluctuation scenario 7 (see FIG. 195 (D)) in which only the number of fluctuations is different is provided. As a result, even when the variation pattern is selected using the table C after the end of the jackpot (that is, when the battle effect is started immediately after the end of the jackpot), the variation set this time for the player. It can make it difficult to understand what the scenario is.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 8 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (A). FIG. 196 (A) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 8. As shown in FIG. 196 (A), the variation scenario 8 differs from the above-mentioned variation scenarios 1 to 7 in that the period during which the variation pattern is selected is set longer using the table A. .. Specifically, the table A is defined by associating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit in the range of "1 to 10". With this configuration, it is possible to lengthen the period for selecting a variation pattern using the table A in which the variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. Can provide big hits in a short period of time.

Further, during the period in which the table A is associated and specified, the display similar to the extension display of the first control example described above, that is, the ending screen indicating the end of the jackpot game, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed. As a result, a series of jackpot effects can be executed for a plurality of jackpot games.

Next, the fluctuation scenario 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (B). FIG. 196 (B) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 9. As shown in FIG. 196 (B), this fluctuation scenario 9 is different from other fluctuation scenarios in that the fluctuation pattern table first defined after the end of the jackpot is replaced with table A and table B. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the probability change state is not set as the game state after the end of the big hit. After that, when the period specified by the table B in association with each other (the period of the number of fluctuations "1 to 4") elapses, the fluctuation pattern using the table C and the table D is selected as in the other fluctuation scenarios. Since the battle effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the selected fluctuation pattern, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

FIG. 196 (C) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 10. As shown in FIG. 196 (C), the variation scenario 10 differs from the other variation scenarios in that the period for selecting the variation pattern using the table D is not set. That is, in this fluctuation scenario 10, since the fluctuation pattern is not selected using the table D during the period when the battle effect is executed, a predetermined battle reach (draw battle) is executed based on the fluctuation scenario. It will never be done.

In this fluctuation scenario 10, when the acquisition value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when selecting the fluctuation pattern using the table C is "198", and the fluctuation pattern (long deviation A) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected. Or, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected using the jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC1, battle reach is executed. .. Therefore, when the present fluctuation scenario 10 is set, the probability of winning the jackpot can be increased when the battle reach is executed, as compared with the case where other fluctuation scenarios are set.

Further, in the third control example, as in the first control example described above, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the probabilistic jackpot is given a probabilistic state as the game state after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot. It has a normal jackpot that is given a normal state as the game state after the end, and in the battle reach executed during the battle production, a victory battle is executed when the probability change jackpot is won, and the normal jackpot is won. It is configured so that a defeat battle is executed in the case, and a draw battle is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order.

That is, when the present fluctuation scenario 10 is set, the frequency of executing the draw battle can be reduced as compared with the case where another fluctuation scenario is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the content of the effect when the battle reach is executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. In addition, when the fluctuation scenario is set without using the table D as in the fluctuation scenario 10, since the pre-battle effect may be executed for a long period of time, for example, the fluctuation pattern that can be selected by using the table C (for example) It is preferable to use a table (table C2) in which a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds to 1 second) can be selected than a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds to 5 seconds. .. This makes it possible to shorten the period during which the pre-battle effect is continuously executed.

Next, the fluctuation scenario 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (D). FIG. 196 (D) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation scenario 11. In this fluctuation scenario 11, as shown in FIG. 196 (D), the fluctuation pattern table first defined after the end of the jackpot is set as table C, and after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the jackpot (the special symbol changes 249 times). It differs from other fluctuation scenarios in that the table A is specified in) and the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario is set to "400".

According to the fluctuation scenario 11, since the fluctuation pattern is not selected using the table D as in the fluctuation scenario 10 described above, there is a possibility that the jackpot is won when the battle reach is executed. (The possibility that a victory or defeat battle will be executed) can be increased, and the player can pay attention to the production content of the battle reach.

In addition, since the table A in which the number of fluctuations per unit time is the highest when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot exceeds a predetermined number (399 times), the probability change state is set as the gaming state. Dissatisfaction felt by the player when the period during which the jackpot is not won continues for a long period of time (for example, the period during which the special symbol change is executed 10 times the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability). The feeling can be suppressed.

As described above, in this third control example, multiple (10 types) fluctuation scenarios can be set for the jackpot types in which the same jackpot is executed, and battle reach (draw) based on the fluctuation scenarios is configured. (Battle) and battle reach (win or defeat battle) based on winning a special symbol jackpot are difficult to understand, but the types of variable scenarios are not limited to this, and more types A variable scenario may be configured to be configurable.

Further, in the third control example, a variable scenario is set for all the periods during which the battle effect is executed, and the contents of the battle effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) can be discriminated in advance. Only for a part of the period when the battle effect is performed (for example, the period from the end of the big hit until the special symbol change is executed 50 times, or the period for 10 special symbol changes calculated back from the timing when the battle effect ends). It may be configured to define a fluctuation scenario.

In this third control example, a configuration is used in which a fluctuation scenario of special symbol fluctuation is set based on the winning jackpot type, but other elements for setting (variable) the fluctuation scenario may be used, for example. Although the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the question, even if it is configured to set (variable) a variable scenario when the lottery result (so-called small hit) that gives the player a smaller amount of privilege than the big hit is obtained. Alternatively, the fall lottery means used in the second control example described above may be configured to set (variable) a variable scenario when a fall is won. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol change reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a means for performing a lottery to change the fluctuation scenario is provided, and the fluctuation scenario is set (variable) based on the lottery result. It may be configured to do so.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 used in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 191 (B). FIG. 191 (B) is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 191 (B), the RAM 203 of the third control example is different from the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that the variation scenario storage area 203CA is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation scenario storage area 203CA is an area for storing the variation scenario set by using the variation scenario setting table 202CA. In the third control example, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the fluctuation scenario stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 203CA. When the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the variation scenario storage area 203CA stores the variation scenario corresponding to the winning jackpot type, and the variation number subtraction process 4 (executed every time the special symbol is changed) ( (See FIG. 204) (see S452 in FIG. 204). In this way, from winning the jackpot (after executing the process of starting the variation of the special symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won) to executing the fluctuation of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. Since the fluctuation scenario is stored in between, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol executed after the jackpot ends can be reliably selected based on the fluctuation scenario stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 203CA.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 197 (A), the ROM 222 of the third control example deletes the continuation value main selection table 222F and the continuation value sub-selection table 222G with respect to the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. The points, the variable scenario storage area 222CA, the first continuous value main selection table 222CB, the second continuous value main selection table 222CC, the third continuous value main selection table 222CD, and the continuous effect mode selection 2 table 222CE. It differs in that it has been added. Since this third control example shows a modification of the continuation effect (battle effect) of the first control example described above, it is continued among the elements provided in the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. The description of the elements not related to the effect is omitted, and the other elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation scenario storage area 222CA is an area in which information for indicating the contents of a plurality of variation scenarios defined in the variation scenario setting table 202CA of the main controller 110 is stored, and is output from the main controller 110. The fluctuation scenario is updated on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the command for indicating the setting status of the fluctuation scenario (for example, the command for indicating the jackpot type or the command for indicating the set fluctuation scenario). Information used for management is stored.

When it is determined in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) of the voice lamp control device 113 that the change scenario storage area 222CA has received the state command including the related information related to the variation scenario (S3271: YES in FIG. 205). ), The variation scenario corresponding to the received command is read and set in the variation scenario update area 223CA (see S3272 in FIG. 205).

With this configuration, the fluctuation scenario set by the main control device 110 and the fluctuation scenario managed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be synchronized, so that the fluctuation pattern selected in the future by the main control device 110 can be synchronized. (Variation pattern selected based on the set variation scenario) can be grasped in advance on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a long-term effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the contents of a plurality of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A are discriminated, and based on the discriminating result, specific winning information (for example, the third prize information). For the winning information in which the special symbol change is executed), a long-term change period is used for the special symbol change (the first and second special symbol changes executed in the winning information) that are executed before that. However, for example, when a plurality of prize information is not stored in the prize information storage area 223A, it becomes difficult to execute a long-term effect. At the same time, the maximum value in the range in which long-term production can be performed is the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the maximum number of prize information that can be stored in the prize information storage area 223A, so that the production period is limited. was there.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol can be managed in a scenario, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be executed in the future can be easily determined. Therefore, the degree of freedom can be increased for long-term production.

Further, in the third control example, since the voice lamp control device 113 has the fluctuation scenario storage area 222CA, it is not necessary to output all the contents of the fluctuation scenario in which the main control device 110 is set, and the setting is made. Since it suffices to output information for indicating the fluctuation scenario (for example, information indicating the winning jackpot type or identification information that allows the set fluctuation scenario to be specified from a plurality of fluctuation scenarios), the main control device 110 may output the information. The amount of information to be output can be reduced.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the third control example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (when a power failure occurs), the main control device 110 is restored when the power supply is restored. To the voice lamp control device 113, a recovery process for outputting the game state stored just before the power supply is cut off (or from the time when the power supply is cut off until the processing of the main control device 110 is stopped) is executed. In the information for indicating the game state output in the recovery process, at least the jackpot type currently won and the current setting are set as the information for indicating the currently set fluctuation scenario. Includes information to indicate any of the fluctuation scenarios, the update status of the currently set fluctuation scenario, and information to indicate any of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed since the end of the previous jackpot. It is configured to be. As a result, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the game, the updated content of the fluctuation scenario set in the main control device 110 after the restoration and the fluctuation managed by the voice lamp control device 113 You can easily synchronize with the updated contents of the scenario.

In this case, the change scenario update management process by the voice lamp control device 113 is changed for a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol is changed a plurality of times (5 times)) after the change management process by the voice lamp control device 113 is restored based on the information output from the main control device 110 as the recovery process. The update content of the fluctuation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 manage the period until the fluctuation pattern is switched and the fluctuation pattern table specified in the fluctuation scenario is switched. It is good to use it as a confirmation period to determine whether the updated contents of the fluctuation scenario are updated correctly. As a result, the update management process of the fluctuation scenario can be restored more accurately. It should be noted that during the above-mentioned confirmation period, the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the restoration is in progress, without being based on the variation scenario. It is good to configure so that the recovery display of is executed. As a result, the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

The first continuous value main selection table 222CB is a table to be referred to when the continuous value (HP value) is updated when the continuous effect (battle effect) is executed, and until the battle reach is executed. It is a table to be referred to when the period (remaining period) of is not less than a predetermined period (for example, when the number of times of special symbol change until the special symbol change corresponding to the battle reach is executed is 4 times or more).

Here, the method of setting the continuation value in the third control example will be described focusing on the differences from the first control example described above. In the first control example described above, the main continuation value for updating and managing the continuation value in the voice lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The sub-continuation value of is set by referring to the corresponding table, the total value of the set main continuation value and the sub-continuation value is calculated, and the information command for indicating the total value is displayed. In contrast to the output to 114, in this third control example, only the value of the main continuation value is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the main continuation value set by the voice lamp control device 113 is shown. An information command including information for the purpose is output to the display control device 114, a sub-continuation value is set based on the information command received on the display control device 114 side, and the total value is calculated.

That is, in the third control example, when the continuation value is repeatedly increased or decreased, only the main continuation value, which is a value managed in order to correspond to the lottery result of the special symbol or the fluctuation scenario, is selected by the voice lamp control device 113. , It is configured to be stored, and all other processes are configured to be executed by the display control device 114. As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be greatly reduced.

Here, the contents of the first continuation value main selection table 222CB will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first continuation value main selection table 222CB. In the first continuation value main selection table 222CB, the ratio of the selected selection value (main continuation value) to the value (main continuation value) stored in the current continuation value (continuation value storage area 223N) is different. It is stipulated to be.

The selection ratio is set by allocating each value to a range (for example, 0 to 199) in which the value of the dedicated effect counter (not shown) can be taken. Further, in the first continuous value main selection table 222CB, the lower limit of selectable selection values is defined as "400". This is because, as described above, the first continuous value main selection table 222CB has a special symbol at least four times when the value of the remaining number counter is 4 or more, that is, before the battle reach determined by the fluctuation scenario is executed. This is because the table is used when it is necessary to make fluctuations, so that unnecessarily low selection values are set, and the progress of the continuous value increase / decrease effect is suppressed from being delayed. As a result, when the value of the remaining number counter 223CB becomes 3 or less, that is, when the battle reach is started soon, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuous value can be executed without discomfort.

Explaining the contents shown in FIG. 198, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223N is "1000", the ratio at which "1000" is selected as the selection value (main continuation value) to be selected. 5%, "900" selected 50%, "800" selected 30%, "700" selected 10%, "600" selected 3% %, The ratio at which "500" is selected is specified as 2%.

Here, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the increase / decrease in the continuation value (main continuation value) will be described. In the third control example, the effect corresponding to the increase / decrease of the total value obtained by adding the main continuation value selected by the voice lamp control device 113 and the sub-continuation value selected by the display control device 114 is executed. .. Since the effect to be executed is configured so that the sub-continuation value is selected so that the increase / decrease range of the main continuation value and the increase / decrease range of the total value are the same as in the first control example described above. Substantially, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the selection value (main continuation value) selected using the first continuation value main selection table 222CB.

Specifically, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selection value is "1000", the "control" effect is executed, and the effect that the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen does not increase or decrease is executed. Will be done. When a selection value that does not decrease the main continuation value is selected in the first continuation value main selection table 222CB, a command indicating that effect is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, a command to that effect is output. The display control device 114 is configured so that the sub-continuation value is not selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the sub-continuation value is selected even though the main continuation value does not decrease, and the continuation value (HP value) on the display increases or decreases.

Next, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selection value is "900" to "500", an "attack" effect that reduces the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent is executed. The detailed effect mode of this "attack" effect is set by the difference value between the current main continuation value and the selected value. When the difference value is 100, it is "weak attack", and when it is 200, it is "medium attack". In the case of 300, "strong attack" is set, in the case of 400, "strong attack" is set, and in the case of 500, "strongest attack" is set. With this configuration, the reduction range of the continuation value (HP value) can be predicted from the effect content executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the effect content can be applied to the player. You can be interested.

Similarly, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223N is "900", the ratio of selecting "900" as the selected selection value (main continuation value) is 10%, "800". Is specified in 50%, "700" is selected in 30%, "600" is selected in 5%, and "500" is selected in 5%. When the value stored in the storage area 223N is "800", the ratio of selecting "800" as the selected selection value (main continuation value) is 20%, and the ratio of selecting "700" is 20%. Is specified as 50%, the ratio of selecting "600" is specified as 20%, and the ratio of selecting "500" is specified as 10%.

Further, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223N is "700", the ratio of selecting "900" as the selected selection value (main continuation value) is 10%, and "700" is The selected ratio is 30%, the selected ratio of "600" is 40%, the selected ratio of "500" is 20%, and the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223N is "600". In the case of, the ratio of selecting "800" is 10%, the ratio of selecting "600" is 40%, the ratio of selecting "500" is 40%, and the continuous value storage area 223N is used. When the stored value is "500", the ratio of selecting "900" is 10%, the ratio of selecting "700" is 10%, and the ratio of selecting "500" is 80%. When the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223N is "400", the ratio of selecting "900" is 30%, the ratio of selecting "700" is 20%, and "500" is selected. The percentage selected is 10%, and the percentage selected from "400" is 40%.

As described above, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223N is "700" to "400", the selected value may be higher than the current continuous value. In this case, as an effect executed on the display screen, a "recovery" effect in which the continuation value (HP value) of the other party rises is executed. By executing this recovery effect, when the continuation value (HP value) unexpectedly decreases, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) can be continuously executed again.

As described above, in the first continuation value main selection table 222CB used when the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is 4 or more, the ratio at which the effect (weak attack) that gradually reduces the main continuation value is selected. Is set higher than the ratio at which other effects are selected. As a result, even if the pre-battle effect is executed for a long period of time, the continuous value increase / decrease effect can be advanced. Further, even if the rate at which "weak attack" is selected is set high, the effect mode executed on the display screen is changed according to the selected sub-continuation value, as in the first control example described above. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various production modes, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Returning to FIG. 197, the explanation will be continued. The second continuous value main selection table 222CC is used when selecting the production mode of the pre-battle effect when the hold internal hit flag 223CC is set to on, that is, when the special symbol changes several times and then becomes a big hit. The table used. Next, the contents of the second continuation value main selection table 222CC will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second continuation value main selection table 222CC. As shown in FIG. 199, the second continuation value main selection table 222CC has "777", "333" as selectable values for the first continuation value main selection table 222CB described with reference to FIG. 198. There is a big difference in that "300" to "0" are added. Hereinafter, the differences from the first continuation value main selection table 222CB will be mainly described. Of the contents specified in the second continuous value main selection table 222CC, detailed description will be omitted for the elements that are the same as the first continuous value main selection table 222CB or that have different selection ratios. ..

The second continuation value main selection table 222CC is configured so that "777" and "333" can be selected as the main continuation value values in order to notify in advance that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot exists in the hold. There is. When "777" or "333" is selected as the selection value, a dedicated command indicating that effect is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, the display control device 114 sub-continues. It is configured so that no value is selected. As a result, even though the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won is selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222CC, the sub-continuation value is selected, and the continuation value (HP) on the display is selected. It is possible to suppress the situation where the value) increases or decreases.

In this third control example, when the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won is selected, the main continuation value is prohibited for the player from selecting the value as the sub-continuation value. The value of the value ("777", "333") is configured to be able to be notified, but other configurations may be used, and when a command regarding the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won is received. In addition, when the display control device 114 is configured to select a sub-continuation value using a dedicated selection table and the value (sub-continuation value) selected using the dedicated selection table is "0". Only, "777" and "333" may be configured to be displayed as the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen. In this case, as the values that can be taken by the dedicated selection table described above, for example, if the main continuation value is "777", the value to add "23" and "13", or "7" and "17". It is preferable to configure the value to be subtracted from to be selectable. With this configuration, when a value other than "0" is selected as the sub-continuation value, the value of the last digit of the continuation value (HP value) can be set to "0". It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know that "777" has been selected as the continuation value, and the added value that the continuation value (HP value) for indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed on the display screen. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the second continuous value main selection table 222CC, unlike the first continuous value main selection table 222CB, "300" to "0" can be selected as the selection value. As a result, when the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen in the pre-battle effect becomes less than "300", the player can predict that the battle reach will be executed soon. .. Although the details will be described later, even in the third continuous value main selection table 222CD (a table used when the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is 3 or less), "300" to "0" are used as the selection values. It is configured so that it can be selected with a selection ratio lower than that of the continuous value main selection table 222CC. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation for a big hit can be further increased.

In addition, in FIG. 199, a plurality of values such as "1000 to 800" are collectively described as the current continuation value and the selection value, but in reality, the contents are independent of "1000", "900", and "800". Is specified, and since the contents specified for each are the same, a plurality of values are described together.

Further, in the second continuation value main selection table 222CC, when the revival effect is executed, a value of "1000 to 800" is selected as the selected value regardless of the value of the main continuation value currently set. The ratio is set high. This is because the second continuation value main selection table 222CC is configured so that "777" and "333" can be selected as the main continuation value to indicate that the jackpot is won, and the continuation value (HP value) is restored. In the pre-battle production after the game, by increasing the continuation value (HP value) to the range where the main continuation value to show that the jackpot is won can be selected, the player can win the jackpot again. In order to show, the game can be played while expecting that the main continuation value is selected.

Returning to FIG. 197, the explanation will be continued. The third continuous value main selection table 222CD shows the case where the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is 3 or less, that is, the remaining number of fluctuations until the battle reach set based on the fluctuation scenario is executed is 3 or less. It is a table used when selecting the production mode of the pre-battle production. Next, the third continuation value main selection table 222CD will be described with reference to FIG. 200. FIG. 200 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the third continuation value main selection table 222CD.

As shown in FIG. 200, the third continuous value main selection table 222CD has similar contents to the second continuous value main selection table 222CC shown in FIG. 199. The point that the ratio of selecting the main continuation value ("777", "333") for indicating is set to "0", the point that the ratio of selecting "0" as the selection value is set to "0", and the whole. The difference is that the ratio of low values (“300” to “0”) selected as the selection value is lowered, and the other contents are the same to some extent with a slight difference in the selection ratio.

Returning to FIG. 197, the explanation will be continued. The continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222CE is a table for selecting the effect mode (effect mode) of the pre-battle effect in the continuous effect. Here, the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222CE will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222CE. When the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222CE reaches the upper limit of the variation scenario with respect to the continuous effect mode selection table 222E of the first control example described above (the number of changes of the special symbol is 200 in the state where the probability variation state is set). The difference is that a dedicated effect (mode 6) is selected for (when the number of times is exceeded). The other elements are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the third control example, a fluctuation scenario is set for the special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set using the fluctuation pattern table specified in the set fluctuation scenario. It is configured to be selected. Then, in consideration of the data capacity of the main control device 110, the fluctuation scenario is set up to a range in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of a numerical value obtained by multiplying the numerical value of the denominator of the jackpot probability by 5), and thereafter. Is configured to select a variation pattern using a specific variation putter table (Table B) until the next jackpot is won (see FIG. 194).

In the third control example configured in this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds the above-mentioned predetermined number of times, it becomes difficult to execute the continuous effect using the variation scenario, so that the special effect mode is used. "Mode 6" is selected as. When "mode 6" is selected, the battle effect is completed, and the specification corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 108 (D)) specified in the deviation pattern table 202D3 (table B) is specified. The production is executed. As this specific effect, for example, an effect that cannot normally be seen is executed, such as an effect in which a party is held by reconciling with an opponent who has not been settled during the battle effect.

In this third control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is set to "200" or "400", and only when the period during which the jackpot is not won is long in the probable change state. It is configured to execute the above-mentioned specific effect and give a feeling of satisfaction to the player, but in addition to that, for example, it is set when a jackpot is won in a specific jackpot type (for example, sub-category "K"). Only in the specific fluctuation scenario to be performed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, may be set to "20" so that the above-mentioned privilege effect can be easily seen. As a result, when a plurality of jackpot types (minor classifications "A" to "K") are provided for a jackpot (for example, a major classification "big hit A") in which the same jackpot game is executed, the game is played for each minor classification. It is possible to make different benefits (easiness to execute a specific effect) given to a person, and even after winning a big hit, it is possible to make an interest in the winning big hit type.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (B). FIG. 197 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the third control example has a continuation period counter 223P deleted from the RAM 223 of the first control example, a variation scenario update area 223CA, a remaining number of times counter 223CB, a hold internal hit flag 223CC, and a continuation setting flag 223CD. It differs in that it is added. In this third control example, another control example relating to the continuous effect of the first control example described above is described. Therefore, among the elements defined in the RAM 223, the elements that are not involved in the continuous effect are the elements. The description is omitted.

The variation scenario update area 223CA is an area where the variation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the update status of the variation scenario are updated and managed so that the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the update status. When it is determined in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) that the variation scenario update area 223CA has received the variation scenario-related information for indicating the variation scenario set in the main control device 110 (FIG. 205: S3271). : YES), The variation scenario corresponding to the received variation scenario related information is selected from the plurality of variation scenarios stored in the variation scenario storage area 222CA, the selected variation scenario is set, and the variation display setting process ( Each time (see FIG. 147) is executed, the progress of the fluctuation scenario is updated. Based on the update status of the variation scenario set in the variation scenario update area 223CA, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is set in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207). Then, when the jackpot is won, the set fluctuation scenario is cleared (not shown).

The remaining number counter 223CB is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the fluctuation scenario, and when the set value becomes 0, the battle reach is reached. Is configured to run. The remaining number counter 223CB calculates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the information of the fluctuation scenario update area 223CA in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207), and calculates the number of fluctuations. The value is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223CB (S4052 in FIG. 207).

The value set in the remaining number counter 223CB is decremented by 1 each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed (see S4057 in FIG. 207), and the battle reach is executed as the continuous effect or the pre-battle effect is performed. It is referred to when determining whether to execute. Further, in the winning information command processing (see FIG. 206), when it is determined that there is a winning prize in the hold (S3251: YES in FIG. 206), the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is referred to, and the winning prize in the hold is dealt with. The special symbol variation to be executed and the special symbol variation corresponding to the battle reach executed when the value of the remaining count counter 223CB becomes 0, and the special symbol variation to be executed first are determined (). S3253 in FIG. 206). Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value is set (cleared) to 0 (S4060 in FIG. 207).

The hold internal hit flag 223CC is a flag for indicating whether or not the winning information for winning a big hit exists in the winning information storage area 223A, and when it is set to ON, the winning information storage area 223A. It shows that there is prize information that wins the jackpot.

This hold internal hit flag 223CC is not always set to be turned on when the winning information for winning the jackpot exists in the winning information storage area 223A, and the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot changes. , When it is determined that the execution is performed before the value of the remaining number counter 223CB becomes "0" (S3253: YES in FIG. 206), the value is set to ON. In the continuation value setting process 4 (see FIG. 208), it is determined whether or not the hold internal hit flag 223CC is set to on (see S4151 in FIG. 208), and when it is determined that it is set to on (see FIG. 208). S4151: YES), the hundreds digit of the continuation value is executed based on the second continuation value main selection table 222CC.

The continuation setting flag 223CD is a flag for determining whether or not the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is set in the probability change state, and when it is set to ON, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is set. It shows that it is.

When the continuation setting flag 223CD is determined in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) that the setting status is determined (see S4051 in FIG. 207) and is not set to on (set to off). (S4051: NO in FIG. 207), after the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is set, it is set to ON (S4053 in FIG. 207). On the other hand, in the process of S4051 of FIG. 207, when it is determined that the value is set to ON (S4051: YES in FIG. 207), the process of setting the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is skipped. Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is cleared to 0 (see S4060 in FIG. 207).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the remaining number counter 223CB from being reset in the state where the value is already set in the remaining number counter 223CB. As a result, after the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is set, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is decremented by 1 each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed (see S4057 of FIG. 207). It is possible to easily synchronize the update status of the fluctuation scenario set in the main control device 110 with the update status of the fluctuation scenario managed by the voice lamp control device 113 simply by executing.

Further, a value that does not correspond to the fluctuation scenario in the processing of S3254 executed in the winning information command processing 4 (see FIG. 206), that is, a value indicating the number of special symbol fluctuations until the winning information for winning the jackpot is executed. When the remaining number counter is set to 223CB, the subtraction based on the value can be surely executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the details of the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration provided in the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 202, the display control device 114 of the third control example adds a continuous value storage area 233CA to the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 with respect to the display control device 114 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the first continuation value subselection table 234A3 and the second continuation value subselection table 234A4 are added to the NAND type flash memory 234A.

The continuous value storage area 233CA is an area for storing the continuous value calculated based on the continuous value command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113, and in the continuous value related command process 4 (see FIG. 210), the continuous value storage area 233CA is used. The calculated continuation value is stored (see S7305 in FIG. 210). Then, in the final mode command processing (see FIG. 211), when it is determined that the final mode executed this time is not a winning battle (S8305: NO in FIG. 211), the stored value is referred to (FIG. 211). S8306).

The first continuation value subselection table 234A3 and the second continuation value subselection table 234A4 are the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above (FIG. 117B). The fourth effect is the same as that of the second continuous value subselection table 222G2 (see FIG. 117 (C)) and is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. The difference is that an effect counter (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is used instead of the counter 223Y4.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204, the control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 203) is used instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127) for the first control example described above, and the number of fluctuation subtraction processing (FIG. 129). The difference is that the variation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of (see FIG. 204), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special symbol variation processing 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 4 (S104). In this special symbol variation processing 4, the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S214: YES) with respect to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127) of the first control example described above, and the lottery result this time is a big hit. The contents of the processing executed when the determination is made (S216: YES) are partially different, and the same processing is executed for the other elements. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 4 is executed, first, the same processes of S201 to S216 as the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) are executed. Then, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S216: YES), then, the big hit type selected by referring to the first hit type selection table 202C (see FIG. 192) is selected. Based on this, set the opening scenario of the specific winning opening. Specifically, the game content of the jackpot to be executed this time (for example, 15 rounds), the opening period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, the interval period between each round, and the last round (for example). , 15th round), including the ending period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot, a scenario is set in which the specific winning opening is opened in this jackpot.

When the processing of S217 is completed, next, the probability change flag 203G and the time saving / medium counter 203H are reset (S218), the start of the jackpot is set (S219), and the state command based on the jackpot type is set (S251). Then, the same processing of S220 as in the first control example described above is executed to end this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S216, even when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (out of order) (S216: NO), the same process of S221 as the above-mentioned first control example is executed, and the process of S220 is executed. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S251 described above, a state command including at least information for indicating the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time is set. The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts information on the jackpot type from the status command, and responds from the fluctuation scenario stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 222CA of the ROM 222 based on the extracted information. A variation scenario is selected and the selected variation scenario is stored in the variation scenario update area 223CA.

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp which variation scenario is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol at the timing when the jackpot game starts and after the jackpot ends. .. As a result, for example, the fluctuation is more reliable than the case where the information command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the command for indicating the fluctuation scenario set this time are output at the same time when the jackpot ends and the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. It is possible to set the production corresponding to the scenario.

Further, in this third control example, since the state command set at the timing when the big hit game is started includes information for indicating the fluctuation scenario set after the big hit ends, the content of the state command is supported. You can also set the production during the big hit. Therefore, since it is possible to suggest a variable scenario set after the end of the jackpot to the player by the effect executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect executed during the jackpot. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the fluctuation number subtraction process 4 executed in the third control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation number subtraction process 4. The variation number subtraction process 4 is a process (S451, S452) for updating the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario update area 223CA with respect to the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above. The differences are in the additions, and the others are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the variation number subtraction process 4 is executed, the same processes of S3709 processes 401 to S411 as the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above are executed. Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation scenario is stored in the fluctuation scenario update area 223CA (S451), and if it is determined that the fluctuation scenario is stored (S451: YES), the stored fluctuation scenario is updated (S451). S452), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S451 that the fluctuation scenario is not stored (S451: NO), this process is terminated without executing the process of S452.

Here, the update contents of the fluctuation scenario executed in the process of S452 will be described in detail. First, the variation number subtraction process 4 (see S204) is executed as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process (see S203). As a result, the fluctuation scenario can be reliably updated when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special symbol starts.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 to 208, the control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, for the first control example described above, the command determination process 4 (S205) is used instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), and the winning information command process (see S141) is replaced. , The difference is that the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 203) is used, and the variation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129). Are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the process of FIG. 205 is executed, the same processes of S3201 to S3214 as those of the first control example described above are executed. Then, when the processing of S3214 is completed, it is next determined whether the received state command contains the related information for setting the fluctuation scenario (S3271), and the related information for setting the fluctuation scenario is included. If it is determined to be (S3271: YES), the variation scenario corresponding to the variation scenario-related information included in the received status command is selected from the variation scenario storage area 222CA and stored in the variation scenario update area 223CA (S3272). .. Then, the display status command is set (S3215), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing of S3271 does not include the related information for setting the fluctuation scenario (S3271: NO), the processing of S3272 is skipped, the processing of S3215 is executed, and this processing is performed. finish.

Next, the winning information command processing 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 4.

When the winning information command process 4 is executed, first, the received winning command information is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area (S3231), and is the winning command received this time containing the information corresponding to the jackpot? Whether it is a winning prize) is determined (S3251). If it is determined in the processing of S3251 that it is a winning prize (S3251: YES), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information received this time is based on the place where the winning information received this time is stored in the winning information storage area. Is executed (S3252).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is larger than the fluctuation order calculated in the process of S3252 (S3253), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is larger (S3253: YES). , The value set in the remaining number counter 223CB, that is, the value indicating the remaining number of times (the number of special symbol fluctuations) until the battle reach is executed based on the content of the set fluctuation scenario, was won as a big hit. Is variably set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the battle reach is executed based on (S3254).

This makes it possible to flexibly set and determine the period until the actual battle reach is executed, so during the battle production, the pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed. The content (contents of increase / decrease in continuous value) can be set based on the remaining period until the next battle reach is executed. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

When the processing of S3254 is completed, the pending internal hit flag 223CC is set to ON (S3255), other look-ahead processing is executed (S3256), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3251, if it is determined that the winning command received this time is not a winning prize (S3251: NO), the processing of S3252 to S3255 is skipped, the processing of S3256 is executed, and this processing is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4. The continuous effect setting process 4 (S3806 in FIG. 207) is for setting the effect mode of a plurality of effects executed during the continuous effect. When the continuation effect setting process 4 is executed, it is first determined whether or not the continuation setting flag 223CD is set to ON (S4051). If it is determined that the continuation setting flag 223CD is not set to on (set to off) (S4051: YES), then the remaining count counter is based on the information stored in the variable scenario update area 223CA. The value of 223CB is set (S4052).

Here, the processing of S4052 will be described. The fluctuation scenario update area 223CA stores (synchronized) fluctuation scenarios corresponding to the fluctuation scenarios set by the main control device 110. Then, using the table D, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected is executed is calculated, and the calculated number of times is set in the remaining number counter 223CB. As a result, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the fluctuation scenario.

In the third control example, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is discriminated, and the table for setting the continuation value is changed based on the discriminating result. As a result, the continuation value set corresponding to the period until the next battle reach is executed (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the continuation value is greatly reduced even though the battle reach is not executed for the time being (the situation where the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is large).

In addition, in a situation where the battle reach will be executed soon (a situation where the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is small), the continuation value may be greatly reduced in order to expect the player to execute a winning battle in the battle reach. can.

Further, in the third control example, the number of changes of the special symbol up to the special symbol change in which the battle reach is executed is determined in advance based on the information (variation pattern information) defined in the fluctuation scenario. Therefore, it is possible to determine the fluctuation of the special symbol on which the battle reach is executed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the content of the winning information stored on hold. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a natural effect.

Although the details will be described later, the fluctuations occur in the special symbol fluctuations that are executed before the battle reach (drawing battle), which is determined in advance using the fluctuation scenario, is executed in the fluctuation patterns stored on hold. Fluctuation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in 60 seconds (variation pattern selected when the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired in the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table (table C). ) Or, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and it is determined that the special symbol is executed more than a predetermined number of times (twice) before the special symbol change is executed, the special symbol is executed. The value corresponding to the number of times of special symbol change until is changed is set to the value of the remaining number of times counter 223CB. As a result, even if the battle reach is executed without being based on the fluctuation scenario, that is, even if the battle reach is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, in the special symbol fluctuation executed by the battle reach (battle). (In the previous production), the continuation value can be increased or decreased appropriately.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. After finishing the processing of S4052, next, the continuation setting flag 223CD is set to ON (S4053). As described above, while the continuation setting flag 223CD is set to ON, the process of S4052 is configured not to be executed by the determination process of S4051. As a result, it is prohibited that the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is set again in the state where the value is already set in the remaining number counter 223CB. Therefore, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB that is not based on the fluctuation scenario (when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB set corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation that becomes the big hit) is set. Even if it is, the value can be continuously maintained.

After finishing the processing of S4053, it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is a hit fluctuation corresponding to a big hit (S4054), and if it is determined to be a hit fluctuation (S4054: YES), a battle. In order to set the production mode of battle reach, which is the final mode of the production, the process proceeds to S4013, which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation is not a hit variation (a deviation variation) (S4054: NO), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is 0 (S4055).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is 0 (S4055: YES), that is, the special symbol variation this time is the special symbol variation in which the battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario (table D). If it is a special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected by using it, the process proceeds to S4013, which will be described later, and it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is not 0 (1 or more) (S4055: NO). ) Next determines whether the fluctuation pattern this time is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (S4056).

In the processing of S4056, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern (long deviation A) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected by using the first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table (table C), and the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected. If it is determined to be (S4056: YES), the process proceeds to the process of S4013 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not 60 seconds (long deviation A) (S4056: NO), the process proceeds to S4057.

That is, in the above-mentioned discrimination process of S4054 to S4056, whether the pre-battle effect is set as the variation effect (the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81) set in response to the special symbol variation this time, or the battle reach is determined. It is determined whether to set, in S4054, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and in S4055, it is determined whether or not the battle reach is set based on the fluctuation scenario of the special symbol. However, in S4056, in the lottery of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the result of the special lottery is a specific lottery result, although the winner is a winner.

When the variation effect executed in response to the special symbol variation this time is the pre-battle effect, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is subtracted by 1 (S4057), and then S4004 is performed in the same manner as the first control example described above. ~ S4008 processing is executed, then the continuation value setting processing 2 is executed (S4058), and this processing is terminated. The contents of the continuous value setting process 2 (S4058) will be described later with reference to FIG. 208.

On the other hand, when the variation effect executed in response to the special symbol variation this time is battle reach (when YES is determined in any of S4054, S4055, and S4056), the final mode is selected based on the final mode selection table 222H. Select the mode (S4013), set the corresponding final mode command for display (S4014), set the continuation effect flag 223R, the continuation setting flag 223CD, and the hold internal hit flag 223CC to off (S4059), and set the remaining count counter 223CB. The value of is set to 0 (S4060), the contents stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223M are cleared (process 4016 of S3709), and this process is terminated.

Next, the continuous value setting process 4 (S4058) executed in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see S3806 in FIG. 207) will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058). In this continuation value setting process 4 (S4058), a process of determining a selection table for selecting a continuation value according to the value of the remaining number counter 223CB and the setting status of the pending internal hit flag 223CC is executed. In this way, by making the selection range of the continuation value set as the effect mode of the pre-battle effect different according to the game situation, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be compared. It can make the player interested.

When the continuous value setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the continuous value fluctuation timing. In the third control example, when the short deviation B having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected in the first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2 (table C), it is determined that the continuous value fluctuation timing is reached. .. In the third control example, as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern determined to be the continuous value fluctuation timing (short deviation B) and the fluctuation pattern determined not to be the continuous value fluctuation timing (short deviation A). ), But not limited to this, when the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a lottery means for drawing whether or not to change the continuation value, and the continuation value is changed with respect to the same fluctuation pattern. It may be configured so that the case where it is not allowed and the case where it is not set can be set. Further, when it is determined that the player has performed a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (operation means), it may be configured to determine that it is the continuous value fluctuation timing. With this configuration, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

In the process of S4101, when it is determined that it is the continuation value change timing (S4101: YES), in order to execute the process for setting the effect mode for increasing / decreasing (variable) the continuation value in the current variation effect, the process of S4151 is executed. Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the continuous value change timing (S4101: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4151, it is determined whether the pending internal hit flag 223CC is set to ON (S4151). Here, if it is determined that the hold internal hit flag 223CC is set to ON (S4151: YES), that is, if the winning information corresponding to the special symbol that wins the big hit exists in the hold, the second The value of the main continuation value (the hundreds digit of HP) is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222CC (S4157), and the value of the selected main continuation value is a specific value (“333” or “777”). It is determined whether or not there is (S4158).

In the process of S4158, when it is determined that the value of the selected main continuation value is a specific value (S4158: YES), the display control is performed in order to display the selected value as it is on the third symbol display device 81. The device 114 sets a display specific continuation value command in which the continuation value (sub-continuation value) for effect is not added (S4159), and ends this process. As described above using FIG. 206, even if there is a special symbol that wins a big hit in the hold of the special symbol, it is based on the variation scenario until the variation of the corresponding special symbol is executed. When the battle reach (draw battle) is executed, the pending internal hit flag 223CC is not set to ON, so that the main continuation value is not selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222CC. As a result, the battle reach (victory or defeat battle) can be executed immediately after the battle reach (draw battle) based on the variable scenario is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that is unexpected to the player.

As described above, in this third control example, the specific symbol is based on the order of change between the special symbol that has won the jackpot existing in the hold and the special symbol in which the battle reach (draw battle) is executed based on the fluctuation scenario. In the end, it is configured so that the value of the main continuation value is selected according to the content corresponding to the special symbol change executed earlier, but other configurations may be used, for example, it exists in the hold. The type of jackpot to be played is discriminated in advance, and the discriminant result is a predetermined discriminant result (for example, a discriminant result corresponding to a probable variable jackpot in which a winning battle is executed) and a predetermined discriminant result (for example, a defeat battle). The selection table for selecting the value of the main continuation value may be different from the case where the determination result corresponds to the normal hit to be executed).

Specifically, for example, when the change of the special symbol in which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the fluctuation scenario is executed is executed earlier than the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot existing in the hold. Newly sets the number of fluctuations until the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is executed to the value of the remaining number counter 223CB, and is a fluctuation scenario rather than the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the normal hit existing in the hold. If the change in the special symbol on which the battle reach (drawing battle) is executed based on the above is executed first, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB that has already been set is not changed. In this way, by differentiating the value of the main continuation value that can be selected until the battle reach is executed, based on the type of jackpot to be executed (probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot), the pre-battle effect is produced. It is possible to predict the type of jackpot depending on the effect mode of, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the continuation value finally displayed in the battle reach, which is a draw battle, may be inherited as it is, and the production mode of the next battle effect may be set. As a result, it is possible to make the battle effect that is repeatedly executed a plurality of times relevant, and to make the player interested in the effect that is executed over a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the process of S4151 when it is determined that the hold internal hit flag 223CC is not set to on (set to off) (S4151: NO), then the value of the remaining count counter 223CB is 4 or more. (S4152), and if it is determined to be 4 or more (S4152: YES), the value of the main continuation value (hundreds digit of HP) is selected based on the first continuation value main selection table 222CB. (S4153), the process proceeds to S4154.

Further, in the processing of S4152, when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is not 4 or more (3 or less) (S4152: NO), the main continuation value of the main continuation value is based on the third continuation value main selection table 222CD. Select the value (hundreds digit of HP) (S4156), move to the processing of S4154, set the display continuation value command corresponding to the value of the main continuation value selected this time (S4154), and proceed to the processing of S4155. Transition.

In the process of S4155, the value of the main continuation value selected in the process of S4153, S4156, S4159 described above is stored in the continuation value storage area 223N. As a result, at the timing of setting the continuation value next time, the value of the main continuation value selected this time can be read out and a new continuation value can be selected. When the processing of S4155 is completed, the main processing is completed.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device 114 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 211, the control process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) is used instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 158) for the first control example described above, and the continuous value related command process (see FIG. 164). ), The continuation value-related command process 4 (see FIG. 210) is used, and the final mode command process (see FIG. 211) is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the third control example, the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) with respect to the first control example described above. Is different in that it is configured to be set by the display control device 114. In this way, by setting the value of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen by the display control device 114, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. As described above, the lottery result of the special symbol and the main continuation value set based on the fluctuation scenario are set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the command for indicating the set main continuation value is displayed and controlled. Since it is configured to output to the device 114, more information than necessary for the display control device 114 (for example, information for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and for showing the update status of the fluctuation scenario). There is no need to output a command to indicate information). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of the processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 (the processing for setting the continuation value, the processing for setting the command to be output to the display control device 114).

First, the contents of the command determination process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4. In this command determination process 4, whether or not there is a process executed when there is a continuation value-related command and a final mode command for display with respect to the command determination process (see FIG. 158) of the first control example described above. The difference is that a process for determining is added.

When the command determination process 4 is executed, the same processes of S6401 to S6414 as the command determination process (see FIG. 158) of the first control example described above are executed, and it is determined that there is a continuation value related command in the process of S6414. If this is the case (S6414: YES), the continuation value-related command process 4 is executed (S6451), and the process proceeds to the process of S6401. The continuation value-related command process 4 executed in the process of S6451 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 210.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no continuation value related command in the processing of S6414 (S6414: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a display final mode command (S6452), and it is determined that there is a display final mode command. In the case (S6452: YES), the final mode command process for display is executed (S6453), and then the process proceeds to S6401.

The final display mode command process executed in the process of S6453 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 211. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no final display mode command in the processing of S6452 (S6452: NO), after executing the same processing of S6420 as the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see FIG. 158), The process proceeds to process 6401 of S3709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of the continuation value-related command process 4 (S6451) executed in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) described above will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous value related command process 4. In this continuation value-related command process 4, a process for setting and displaying a continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while the continuation effect is being executed, and a continuation effect. Processing for displaying the effect to be executed inside is executed.

When the continuation value-related command process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time has a display specific continuation value command (S7351). This display specific continuation value command is a specific value ("333") for indicating that the jackpot is won as the main continuation value in the continuation value setting process 4 (see S4058 in FIG. 208) executed by the voice lamp control device 113. , "777") is selected. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this process, when it is determined that there is a specific continuation value command for display, the main continuation value output from the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be displayed as it is on the display screen. is doing. As a result, when a specific value (“333”, “777”) indicating that the jackpot is won is selected as the main continuation value, the display control device 114 sets the sub-continuation value and the main continuation value. To prevent the situation where the continuation value obtained by adding the sub-continuation value and the sub-continuation value is displayed on the display screen and the specific value ("333", "777") for indicating that the jackpot is won cannot be notified to the player. Can be done.

In the processing of S7351, if it is determined that there is no specific continuation value command for display (S7351: NO), that is, if a continuation value command for display is received, the continuation value corresponding to the command received this time (main continuation value). ) Is calculated (S7352), and it is determined whether the calculated continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353). When it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is not 0 (100 or more) in the processing of S7353, the sub-continuation value is selected based on the first continuation value sub-selection table 234A3, and the process of S7356 is performed. Transition. Since each sub-continuation value specified in the first continuation value sub-selection table 234A3 is the same as the first continuation value sub-selection table 222G1 (see FIG. 117 (B)) of the above-mentioned first control example. , The explanation is omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S7353, when it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353: YES), the sub-continuation value is selected based on the second continuation value sub-selection table 234A4, and the process of S7356 is performed. Move to. Since each sub-continuation value specified in the second continuation value sub-selection table 234A4 is the same as the second continuation value sub-selection table 222G2 (see FIG. 117 (C)) of the first control example described above. , The explanation is omitted.

Then, in the process of S7356, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command and the sub-continuation value selected by the process of S7354 or S7355 are added up (S7356). As described above, when the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command is 0, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is larger than 0. Since it is configured to use the second continuation value subselection table 234A4 in which the subcontinuity value that cannot be a value (that is, a positive value cannot be selected as the subcontinuation value) is specified, the voice lamp control device. For the content indicated by the continuation value (main continuation value) selected in 113 (content indicating that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) is set to "0" and the probability change jackpot is won in this battle production) , It is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is inconsistent (a value other than "0" is displayed).

After finishing the processing of S7356, next, the total value stored in the total value storage area 233K is read (S7357), and the total value calculated by the processing of S7356 and the total value read by the processing of S7357 are used. Calculate the difference (S7358). Then, the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), the total value calculated this time is stored in the total value storage area 233K (S7360), and the processing of S7365 is performed. Move to.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7351 that there is a specific continuation value command for display (S7351: YES), then the total value is read out from the total value storage area 233K (S7361), and the continuation calculated in the processing of S7352 is performed. The difference between the value and the total value read in the processing of S7361 was calculated (S7362), the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference was determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), and this time it was calculated. The continuation value is stored in the total value storage area 233K (S7360), and the process proceeds to S7365.

After the processing of S7360 or S7364 described above is completed, the continuation value calculated in the processing of S7352 is stored in the continuation value storage area 233CA (S7365), and then the continuation value related to the first control example described above. The command processing (see FIG. 164) and the same processing of S7306 to S7309 are executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the contents of the final mode command process (S6453) executed in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) described above will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final mode command processing. In this final mode command process, the process of setting the battle reach effect mode (display mode of the continuation value (HP value)) for showing the result of the continuous effect (battle effect) and the set effect mode are displayed on the display screen. The process for displaying and is executed.

When the final mode command process (S6453) is executed, first, the final mode data table corresponding to the received command is determined (S8301). The received command indicates the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222H (see FIG. 118 (A)) in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) executed by the voice lamp control device 113. Information is included, and the final mode data table corresponding to the information is read from the character ROM 234 and determined.

Next, the total value stored in the total value storage area 233K, that is, the continuation value (HP value) currently displayed on the display screen is read out (S8302), and the initial stage of the final mode data table determined in the processing of S8301. It is set as value data (S8303). In this way, data on the continuation value (HP value) that can set various values is additionally set for the production data corresponding to the production mode (attack pattern mode) of the battle reach of the predetermined number of patterns. By making it possible, it is possible to reduce the amount of data regarding the production mode of battle reach.

After finishing the process of S8303, the final result information included in the received command is read (process 8304 of S3709), and it is determined whether the read final result is the information indicating victory (S8305). Here, as the final result information included in the received command, the information for indicating the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222H (see FIG. 118 (A)) is used to determine the final result. Alternatively, the final mode command processing for display may be executed including the dedicated information for showing the final result of the battle.

If it is determined in the processing of S8305 that the final result is not a win (defeat or draw) (S8305: NO), the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 233CA and the total value storage area are stored. The difference from the added total value is calculated (S8306), and the subtraction value of the first own attack effect data among the effect data of the determined final mode data table is changed to the subtraction value obtained by adding the calculated difference. Then (S8307), the process proceeds to S8308.

Here, the processing contents of S8306 and S8307 described above will be described. In the third control example, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set as the main continuation value set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the lottery result of the special symbol. , It is configured to be created by adding up the sub-continuation values set for the effect by the display control device 114. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen while reducing the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. However, in the battle reach that displays the result of the continuous effect (battle effect), the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen may be as close to "0" as possible.

In such a case, for example, in the voice lamp control device 113, even if the main continuation value in which the continuation value (HP value) of the other party does not become "0" is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the display control device 114 There is a possibility that the continuation value (HP value) of the other party displayed on the display screen may become "0" due to the sub-continuation value for the effect set in. That is, while the displayed continuation value (HP value) is large, there is an error between the main continuation value set and managed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. Even if there is, there is no adverse effect on the production, and rather it has a positive effect of increasing the variation of the production, whereas when the displayed continuation value (HP value) becomes small, the voice lamp control device The error between the main continuation value set and managed in 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen causes a contradiction in the production result, and the production that gives the player a sense of distrust is executed. There was a problem that there was a risk of doing so.

Therefore, in the third control example, when setting the final aspect (battle reach) of the continuous effect (battle effect), the final result of the continuous effect (battle effect) of this time is determined, and the determination result is obtained. In cases other than victory, that is, when the opponent's continuation value (HP value) does not become "0", the error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is the attack during battle reach. I try to solve it by directing.

As a result, the above-mentioned problem caused by displaying the result of the continuation effect (battle effect) while leaving an error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen can be suppressed. Can be done. In this third control example, the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP) displayed on the display screen in the first own attack pattern set as the final mode (battle reach) of the continuation effect (battle effect). Since it is configured to eliminate the error with the value), it is possible to standardize the production mode of the remaining own attack patterns (for example, the second and third times).

In addition, when the production mode in which the attack pattern is 0 is set as the production mode of the final mode (battle reach) selected this time, the continuation value of the opponent does not decrease during the battle reach. Because it is an aspect, even if the error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is not eliminated, the error between the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is produced. Since there is no problem of causing a contradiction in the result, the process of S8307 is configured so that the process of changing the attack effect data is not executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8305, if it is determined that the final result is a victory (S8305: YES), the processes of S8306 and S8307 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S8308.

In the process of S8038, the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read from the countdown effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S8308). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8308 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S8309).

Then, based on the attack pattern display data table included in the final mode data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S8309, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S8310), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233F to 0 (S8311). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S8312), the final mode command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

<About another control example of the third control example>
Next, another control example of the above-mentioned third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. In the above-mentioned third control example, the fluctuation scenario is set based on the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the set fluctuation scenario, so that the pre-battle effect and the effect are performed during the period when the continuous effect is executed. , Battle reach and was configured to be able to be executed effectively. In addition, in order to prevent the player from getting bored of the continuous production executed according to the predetermined fluctuation scenario at an early stage, a plurality of fluctuation scenarios are prepared and differ according to the jackpot type. It was configured to select a variable scenario.

The third control example configured in this way has a configuration capable of enhancing the effect of continuous production, but is set in correspondence with a storage capacity for storing a plurality of fluctuation scenarios and a plurality of fluctuation scenarios. There is a problem that the storage capacity for storing a plurality of jackpot types increases. In particular, since the main control device 110 needs to perform various processes related to the game and store data within the limited storage capacity, the increase in the storage capacity causes other processes and data storage amount to be stored. As a result, there was a risk that the interest of the game would be reduced.

On the other hand, in another control example of the third control example, even if the number of fluctuation scenarios is reduced, in order to be able to provide a continuous effect with abundant variations, the jackpot type is the same as in the third control example described above. In addition to the fluctuation scenario set in response to, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result, the fluctuation using different fluctuation scenarios for a predetermined period (for example, 10 rotations of the special symbol fluctuation). It was configured so that pattern selection was performed.

With this configuration, even if one variable scenario is set, the content of the continuous production to be executed can be different depending on the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. can. Further, since the effect mode during the continuous effect is set by the combination of a plurality of variable scenarios, it is possible to execute a continuous effect with abundant variations even if the number of stored variable scenarios is reduced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in another control example of the third control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214, the electrical configuration in this separate control example will be described. This separate control example differs from the above-mentioned third control example in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are partially changed and the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. is doing. The other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 212 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in another control example of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212 (A), in this control example, the small hit type selection table 202DA is added to the above-mentioned third control example, and the contents of the first random number table 202A are partially changed. The difference is that the contents of the fluctuation scenario setting table 202CA have been partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first random number table 202A in the control example according to the present invention is provided with a range for determining "small hit" in a part of the case where the random number table 202A is out of order as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. The first random number table 202A in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 213 (A). FIG. 213 (A) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202A in the control example according to the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 213 (A), in the above-mentioned third control example, the range of the random number counter value C1 per first (“5 to A "small hit" is specified for the range of "295 to 299" which is a part of "299"). When a "small hit" is won as a result of a lottery of a special symbol, a privilege that is less than the above-mentioned big hit but is advantageous to the player is given.

Specifically, a control is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a short period of time so that the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65A. As described above, since the "small hit" can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 when the "small hit" is won. It is possible to eliminate the state from being set.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202DA will be described with reference to FIG. 213 (B). FIG. 213 (B) shows the contents of the small hit type selection table 202DA. As shown in FIG. 213 (B), in another control example of the third control example, the small hit type is set from a plurality. Specifically, out of a total of 100 counter values of "0" to "99", the acquisition value of the small hit type counter value C5 that can acquire any value is in the range of "0 to 49". , "Small hit A" is associated and defined, and "small hit B" is associated and defined in the range of "50 to 99".

Then, when the "small hit A" is won, a fluctuation scenario for executing a specific fluctuation pattern is additionally set, and when the "small hit B" is won, a specific fluctuation pattern is executed. It is configured so that the fluctuation scenario of is not additionally set.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202CA in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 (A) and 214 (B). FIG. 214 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fluctuation scenario A1 stored in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202CA, and FIG. 214 (B) is a schematic diagram in the fluctuation scenario setting table 202CA. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the stored small hit post-variation scenario.

Only the above-mentioned two fluctuation scenarios are stored in the variation scenario setting table 202CA in this control example, and if a probability variation jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the variation scenario A1 is set after the jackpot ends. , It is configured to be stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 203CA. Further, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2 executed in the probable change state, the variable scenario after the small hit is set and is configured to be stored in the variable scenario storage area 203CA. Then, after the end of the small hit, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the number of special symbol fluctuations specified in the small hit post-variation scenario and the content specified in the small hit post-variation scenario. There is.

Although detailed description will be omitted, also in this control example, the variation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is executed as in the third control example described above, and each time the special symbol variation is executed (see FIG. 204). In the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 203), the variation scenario set in the variation scenario storage area 203CA is updated every time it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed). ..

The fluctuation scenario storage area 203CA is configured so that both the fluctuation scenario A1 and the post-small hit fluctuation scenario can be stored. If a small hit is won during the probability change state, both fluctuation scenarios are subjected to the fluctuation count subtraction process 4. (See FIG. 204). Therefore, the fluctuation scenario A1 can be updated regardless of the number of small hit wins in the probability change state, and the table B can be set when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit reaches 200 times. ..

As shown in FIG. 214 (A), in the fluctuation scenario A1, the above-mentioned table A (special (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202DC4) is defined in association with the fluctuation count in the range of “1 to 4”, and the fluctuation count is defined. Table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in the range of "5 to 13", and table D (second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC3) is defined in the range of "14". Is stipulated.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "195", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations of 9, and the table D (second) is defined for each number of fluctuations. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC3) is defined in association with each other. That is, during the period when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is "5 to 195", the variation pattern is selected using the table C after executing the special symbol variation 9 times, and then the variation pattern is generated using the table D. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

Then, the table C (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations in the range of "195 to 198", and the table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations of "199". The pattern table 202DC3) is specified. Then, in the range where the number of fluctuations is "200 to", the table B is associated and defined as in the above-described third control example.

As shown in FIG. 214 (B), in the small hit post-variation scenario, the above-mentioned table A (special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC4) is defined in association with the range of the number of variations of "1 to 9". Table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC3) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations in the range of "5 to 13", and table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations of "10". 202DC3) is specified. Then, the fluctuation scenario is configured to end when the number of fluctuations exceeds 10. When the fluctuation scenario after the small hit is completed, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is continuously selected according to the contents specified in the fluctuation scenario A1 in which the fluctuation scenario is updated at the same time.

As described above, in another control example of the third control example, when a small hit is won as a result of lottery of a special symbol, different fluctuation scenarios are generated for a predetermined period (for example, 10 fluctuations of the special symbol). Since it is configured to be set, the variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol can be different depending on the timing of winning the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to provide continuous effects of various patterns without preparing a plurality of fluctuation scenarios in advance as in the third control example described above.

In addition, since the fluctuation pattern table (table D) in which the battle reach is executed (easily) is defined at the end of the fluctuation scenario used when the small hit is won, the small hit is won. It is possible to prevent the situation where the battle reach is not executed for a long period of time.

In this control example, a configuration having one fluctuation scenario (variation scenario A1) is used as the fluctuation scenario set after the end of the probability variation jackpot, but it has a plurality of fluctuation scenarios as in the above-mentioned third control example. The configuration may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a continuous effect of more patterns. In addition, in this control example, when a small hit is won, the small hit type (small hit A) that sets a different fluctuation scenario and the small hit type (small hit B) that does not set a different fluctuation scenario are the same. Although it is configured to be the ratio of (50%), the distribution ratio of each small hit type may be set appropriately, the probability of winning a small hit, and the battle reach in the variable scenario A1. The variation pattern table (table D) to be executed (easily) may be set based on the specified interval and the content of the privilege (prize ball) provided at the time of winning the small hit.

Further, in this control example, the same variable winning device (variable winning device 65) is opened depending on whether the special symbol is won as a big hit or a small hit, but the pachinko machine is used. The machine 10 may be provided with a second variable winning device that is opened only when a small hit is won. In this case, it is preferable to configure the second variable winning device to be opened so that it is harder to grasp than the variable winning device 65 is opened. With such a configuration, a small hit was won during the continuous production. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp this, it is possible to provide the player with a continuous production of various patterns without discomfort. In addition, in this case, the display of the third symbol for indicating that the small hit has been won is also a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp, for example, the third symbol may be reduced or displayed at the third symbol stop timing. 3 It is preferable to display a lively effect that is more conspicuous than the third symbol in the main display area DM of the symbol display device 81.

In this control example, the first hit random number table 202A is configured so that only the special symbol 2 wins a small hit, but the special symbol 1 may also be configured to win a small hit. In this case, the probability of winning a small hit may be different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

In another control example of the third control example described above, as a condition for setting a fluctuation scenario (variation scenario after small hit) different from the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario A1) predetermined based on the lottery result of the special symbol. , The case where the special symbol is won in a small hit is shown, but it may be configured to set a different fluctuation scenario when other conditions are satisfied. For example, in the second control example described above. It may be configured to set a different fluctuation scenario when the used fall lottery is won.

<About another control example of the suggestion effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, another control example of the suggestion effect (see FIG. 100) described in the first control example described above will be described. In the first control example described above, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestion effect are set separately so that the period during which the suggestion effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestion effect (the end timing of the countdown effect which is the latter half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect which is the target of the suggestion effect, and the start timing of the suggestion effect (the precursor which is the first half part). The start timing of the effect) can be set from a plurality of points, and the suggestion effect is executed without setting the execution period in advance, thereby increasing the degree of freedom when setting the suggestion effect. In the suggestion effect of the first control example described above, the timing at which the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is executed is set from a plurality of timings, and the end timing of the suggestion effect (countdown effect) is set based on the execution timing of the suggestion effect. By setting the end timing) and setting the execution period of the suggestion effect, it was possible to execute various combinations of the suggestion effect.

On the other hand, in this control example, the suggestion effect is executed without setting the end timing of the suggestion effect, and a predetermined condition (operation content to the frame button 22) that is satisfied during the period in which the suggestion effect is executed is executed. Based on the above, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is determined, and the countdown effect is executed toward the determined specific effect. With this configuration, the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be changed according to the operation content of the player to the frame button 22 during the suggestion effect execution, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. Can be done.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of the suggestion effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the effect mode of the suggestion effect is changed depending on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the suggestion effect execution. The same elements as those of the timing chart (see FIG. 100) showing the flow of the suggestion effect in the above-mentioned first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 215, when the change of the special symbol capable of executing the suggestion effect is started, the precursor display (see FIG. 98 (A)), which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is executed for 13 seconds 10 seconds after the start of the change. Will be done. A button operation valid period for effectively determining the pressing operation to the frame button 22 is set for the latter 8 seconds of the display period in which the precursor is displayed, and the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period is set. Depending on the content of the operation to, the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect, which is the latter half part of the suggestion effect, is determined.

Specifically, during the button operation valid period, the comment "Press the button at the right time" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 for the display. The timing is discriminated by the operation timing discriminating means. The operation timing determination means is configured to be able to determine the operation timing of the player with respect to the frame button 22 in a plurality of stages, and the frame button 22 has the best timing (for example, within 0.2 seconds before and after the specified timing). When the operation (hereinafter referred to as button operation B) is performed, and the range deviated from the specified timing from the button operation B (for example, the range of 1 second before and after the specified timing, excluding the range of the button operation B). When the frame button 22 is operated (hereinafter referred to as button operation A) in the range), the frame button 22 is operated at other timings, or the frame button 22 is not operated (hereinafter, no button operation). It can be distinguished at least from the case (referred to as).

Here, if the operation timing determination means determines that the button operation A is performed, that is, if the button operation is performed during the button operation valid period but the operation timing is slightly different, the operation is executed during the current variation effect. Of the specific effects to be performed, a countdown effect is set for the specific effect B (cut-in display executed 26 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Specifically, a countdown display for 3 seconds is executed as a countdown effect (values displayed in the second display area of the display screen of FIG. 98 (B) are "3", "2", "1", " The effect of counting down in the order of "0" is executed). Then, the cut-in display, which is the specific effect B, is displayed at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes “0”.

Next, when the button operation B is determined by the operation timing determination means, that is, when the button is operated at the right timing during the button operation valid period, the specific effect executed during the current variation effect is specified. A countdown effect is set for effect A (PUSH display (see FIG. 99) executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Specifically, a 7-second countdown display is executed as a countdown effect. Then, the PUSH display, which is the specific effect A, is displayed at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes “0”.

In addition, if it is determined by the operation timing determination means that there is no button operation, that is, if the button operation is not performed during the button operation valid period, or if the button is operated at a timing that is significantly deviated, a countdown effect is executed. Without doing anything, the suggestion effect ends at the timing when the precursor effect ends (Gase suggestion effect).

As described above, in the present-specific control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestion effect are set at different timings (conditions) as in the first control example described above, and further, among the suggestion effects, , The specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect being executed is determined based on the predetermined condition (result of determining the operation content to the frame button 22) that is established during the precursor effect execution period, which is the first half part, and the second half part of the suggestion effect. It is configured to set the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

Further, in this control example, the later the timing at which the specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B) executed at a plurality of timings is executed, the higher the expectation that the special symbol change this time is won as a big hit. It is configured to be high. Therefore, if the button operation is performed at the right time during the button operation valid period, the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect having a high expectation of big hit, so that the player can be relieved.

That is, although FIG. 215 shows an example of a variation pattern in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B are executed, only the specific effect B is executed among the plurality of variation patterns set in the pachinko machine 10. Since there is also an out-of-order variation pattern, when the button operation A is performed in the variation pattern shown in FIG. 215, the target of the suggestion effect is the specific effect B, and the player is asked. , It is not possible to notify in advance whether or not the fluctuation pattern of this time is a fluctuation pattern in which both the specific effect A and the specific effect B are executed, and the effect proceeds with the player feeling uneasy. Become.

However, if the frame button 22 is operated at the right time during the button operation valid period, the countdown effect targeting the specific effect A is executed, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind without giving anxiety. Can be made. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically participate in the game of operating the frame button 22.

In this separate control example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B are executed as one variation pattern, a predetermined condition (a predetermined condition) in which the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is satisfied after the suggestion effect is executed ( Although it is configured to be determined based on the operation content of the frame button 22), it may be configured not to display a specific effect that was not the target of the suggestion effect. Further, in the fluctuation pattern in which only the specific effect A is executed as one variation pattern, the timing at which the specific effect A, which is the target of the suggestion effect, is executed is determined based on a predetermined condition established after the suggestion effect is executed. It may be configured to do so. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 cannot be operated at the right time, it is difficult to predict the content of the suggestion effect to be executed when the frame button 22 can be operated at the right time, so that the player is ambitious. Can operate the frame button 22.

In another control example described above, as the operation content of the frame button 22 after the suggestion effect is started, an operation effect for operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner during the precursory effect, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is executed. Then, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is determined based on the timing when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect, and the effect mode of the countdown effect corresponding to the determined specific effect is set. ing.

In this case, as an operation effect, the characters "press the button at the right time" are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device as a display mode indicating the content of the operation effect, and an index display for indicating the designated timing of the operation effect is displayed. It is preferable to display the mode and the movement display mode that moves with the passage of time, and to indicate to the player that the timing at which the movement display mode overlaps with the index display mode is the best timing. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the content of the operation effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, as a result of the operation of the frame button 22 for the operation effect, the movement display mode is stopped and displayed at the timing when the frame button 22 is actually operated, and the error from the index display mode is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. It is preferable to display the characters "excellent" and "good" for notifying whether or not the error range is within the permissible range (whether it corresponds to button operation A or button operation B). This makes it possible to inform the player of the result of the operation effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the example described above, in order to change the effect mode of the suggestion effect based on the operation content of the frame button 22, the error between the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the designated timing specified in advance is determined. However, other configurations may be used as long as the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be changed based on the predetermined specified conditions and the actual operation content. For example, within the period during which the operation effect is executed. The number of times the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) may be determined, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect may be changed based on the determination result. An operation means other than 22 may be provided to determine whether or not a specific operation means has been operated among the plurality of operation means, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect may be changed based on the determination result.

In another control example shown in FIG. 215, it is configured to set the effect mode of the suggestion effect (the effect mode of the countdown effect which is the latter half part of the suggestion effect) based on the operation content for the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period. However, in order to obtain the same effect, it may be configured to set the effect mode of the suggestion effect based on the timing at which the pressing operation is executed during the button operation valid period. Here, a detailed description will be given with reference to FIG. 216.

FIG. 216 (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the effect mode of the suggestion effect is changed depending on the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during the suggestion effect execution. The same elements as those of the timing chart (see FIG. 100 or FIG. 215) showing the flow of the suggestion effect in the first control example and another control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 216, in this separate control example, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) set during the precursor effect period, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is discriminated into the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds). It is divided as possible. Here, the effect mode of the suggestion effect set based on the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 (B) to 216 (D).

FIG. 216 (B) is a timing chart showing an effect mode of the suggestion effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period, and is a timing chart of FIG. 216 (C). ) Is a timing chart showing an effect mode of the suggestion effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period, and FIG. 216 (D) is a button. It is a timing chart which showed the effect mode of the suggestion effect when the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed) during the operation valid period.

First, as shown in FIG. 216 (B), when it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestion effect is specified effect A. Then, the period from the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period to 1 second later is set as the precursor period (8 seconds), and the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period is started. It is set as the execution period (12 seconds) of the countdown effect from 1 second to the timing when the specific effect A is started.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first half (2 seconds) with respect to the switching timing of the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds) defined in the button operation valid period (8 seconds). By configuring the timing to switch the effect mode of the suggestion effect (switching from the precursor effect to the countdown effect) by 1 second, it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated just before the end of the first half (2 seconds). Even if there is, it is possible to smoothly execute the process of switching the effect by using the period (1 second) until the effect is switched.

In this case, the button operation valid period change process for invalidating the operation of the frame button 22 is executed for the latter half (6 seconds) of the preset button operation valid period (8 seconds). As a result, even if the countdown effect is executed during the period in which the button operation valid period is set in advance, the operation to the frame button 22 during that period can be invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (C), when it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestion effect is specified. Set to B, and set as the execution period (3 seconds) of the countdown effect from the timing when the button operation valid period ends to the timing when the specific effect B starts. If there is no operation on the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 216 (D), the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is not set, and the button operation is valid during the button operation valid period. The precursor effect (13 seconds) is executed, and then the suggestion effect is ended without performing the countdown effect (Gase suggestion effect).

As described above, as described with reference to FIG. 216, even if the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect is set based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period, the above-mentioned description is performed. The same effect as in FIG. 215 can be obtained.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 216, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (first half and the second half), and different times (first half (first half (first half)) for each divided period. It is configured to set 2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds)), but it may be configured so that the operation timing to the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period can be identified. For example, the button operation is valid. The period may be divided into two or more periods (for example, divided into three), or the same time may be set for the divided periods. Further, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (for example, period A (1 second) and period B (1 second)), and the period A and the period B are set alternately. You may. As a result, a different suggestive effect is executed even if the timing at which the button operation is performed on the frame button 22 is slightly deviated, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in another control example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, the player's operation mode with respect to the frame button 22 is set as a predetermined condition established during the execution of the suggestion effect. Whether or not there is an operation, the operation content, and the operation timing) are set, but other conditions may be set. For example, a prize generated during the execution of the suggestion effect (first ball entrance 64, second ball) Even if the timing of the ball entering the mouth 140, the ball entering the general winning opening 63, the occurrence timing of the ball entering (passing) the through gate 67, and the content of the occurrence are set as predetermined conditions. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the firing of the ball during the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Further, another control example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216 shows an example in which the suggestion effect is completed during one special symbol change, for example. As shown in FIG. 101 of the first control example described above, the suggestion effect may be executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in another control example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this separate control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. In this separate control example, the countdown effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) is provided instead of the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152) for the first control example described above, and the frame button input monitoring / effect is provided. The difference is that the process 5 (see FIG. 218) is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5. When the countdown effect setting process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a hit (S4303), and if it is determined to be a hit (S4303: YES), it is specified 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. After 30 seconds, the effect B (cut-in) is set to the specific effect A (PUSH) (S4371), and the process proceeds to the process of S4373.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4303, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a hit (S4303: NO), the specific effect B (cut-in) is set 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (S4372), and the process proceeds to S4373. Transition.

In the processing of S4373, the button operation valid period is set in the period of 15 to 23 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (S4373), the precursor effect corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is set (S4374), and the precursor effect command for display is set. (S4375), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5. When the frame button input monitoring / effect process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5051: NO), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been detected (S5051: YES), it is determined whether the present is in the valid period of the first precursor effect (S5081), and if it is determined that it is in the valid period of the first precursor effect. (S5081: YES), when the processing (S5082 to S5088) related to the frame button operation during the first precursor effect is executed and it is determined that the first precursor effect is not in the valid period (S5081: NO), the second If it is determined whether or not it is in the valid period during the precursory effect (S5089), and if it is determined that it is in the valid period of the second precursory effect (S5089: YES), the processing related to the frame button operation during the second precursory effect is performed. Is executed (S5090). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the valid period during the second precursor effect (S5089: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing related to the frame button operation (S5082 to S5088) during the first precursor effect will be described. First, an error between the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated and the designated timing set for the precursor effect is calculated (S5082), and it is determined whether the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083). If the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083: YES), the specific effect A is set as the effect target (S5084), and the period from the start of fluctuation to 23 seconds to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5085). ), A display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode is set (S5077), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error is not within 0.1 seconds (S5083: NO), then it is determined whether the error is within 0.5 seconds (S5086), and it is determined that the error is within 0.5 seconds. If it is determined (S5086: YES), the specific effect B is set as the effect mode (S5087), the period from the start of fluctuation to 23 seconds to 26 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5088), and the above-mentioned processing of S5077 is performed. And ends this process. If it is determined that the time is not within 0.5 seconds in the processing of S5086 (S5086: NO), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned processing of S5077 as it is, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the second precursor effect setting process executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 5 (see FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second precursor effect setting process. When the second precursor effect setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is the first half period, that is, whether the period in which the frame button 22 is operated is the first half period (S5091). In the process of S5091, if it is determined that it is the first half period (S5091: YES), the specific effect A is set as the effect target (S5092), the precursor effect period is set to 8 seconds (S5093), and 18 from the start of fluctuation. The period from seconds to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5094), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the first half period (S5091: NO), then it is determined whether the present is the second half period, that is, the period in which the frame button 22 is operated is the second half period (S5095). If it is determined that it is the latter half period (S5095: YES), the specific effect B is set as the effect target (S5096), the precursor effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5097), and 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. The period up to is set as the countdown effect period (S5098), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5095 that it is not the latter half period (S5095: NO), the precursor effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5099), and this process is terminated.

<About another example of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the extended display described in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, another example of the extended display process (the process of extending and displaying the ending display of the jackpot even during the special symbol change period after the end of the jackpot) will be described. In the first control example described above, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the extension display is executed, or a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed since the extension display is executed. If the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied before the end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the third symbol is used. The demo display was performed on the display device 81, and the demo display was continued until the special symbol variation in which the variation time for a short period (0.5 seconds) was set was completed.

On the other hand, in this alternative example, the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied before the end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the change for a short period (0.5 seconds) after the extension display is completed. When the special symbol variation for which the time is set is executed, the variation effect is set based on the remaining number of variations of the special symbol variation for which the variation time for a short period (0.5 seconds) is set. There is.

Specifically, a specific period effect is set in which the variation effect is executed for a period longer than the actual special symbol variation period (0.5 seconds). For example, the remaining number of variation of the special symbol is 2 times (this variation). (Including), a 2-second variation effect is set, and if the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 (including this variation), a 3-second variation effect is set, and the remaining variation of the special symbol is set. If the number of times is 4 (including this fluctuation), a fluctuation effect of 4 seconds is set.

Then, if the next special symbol variation is executed while the variation effect, which is a specific period effect, is executed, the remaining period of the variation effect that has already been executed is newly executed. It is set so that the variable effect is rewritten so as to be.

With this configuration, when the extended display is executed after the jackpot ends and the special symbol variation executed during the predetermined period (4 special symbol fluctuations or 4 seconds) after the jackpot ends wins the jackpot. On the other hand, in order to continue the production during the jackpot without discomfort, when a short period (0.5 seconds) fluctuation time is set for the special symbol fluctuation for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot ends. Even if the special symbol variation is not executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) within the predetermined period (4 seconds), it is possible to execute the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Here, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present alternative example will be described with reference to FIG. 220 about the difference from the first control example described above. In this alternative example, the content of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) is partially changed from the first control example described above, and the other processes are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 6 in this alternative example. When the variation display setting process 6 is executed, first, the same processes of S3801 to S3804 as the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223I is not on (off) (S3803: NO), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223J is 1 or more (S3871). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed between the time when the extension display is executed after the end of the big hit and the time when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (4 times).

When it is determined in the process of S3871 that the value of the variation counter 223J is not 1 or more (0), the same as the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above, S3811 to S3817. Execute the process and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S3871 when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223J is 1 or more (S3871: YES), then the specific period effect corresponding to the value of the fluctuation count counter 223J is determined (S3872). , A specific period effect command for display is set (S3873), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223J is subtracted by 1 (S3874), and the same as the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above, S3812 to S3817. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this alternative example, a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed between the execution of the extended display after the end of the jackpot and the change of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (4 times). , When the special symbol change is started, it is configured to execute the specific period effect corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol changes (value of the change count counter), so that the predetermined period (4) after the end of the jackpot is completed. Even if the special symbol variation is not executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) within (seconds), it is possible to execute the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, when the configuration of another example described above is used, the period for executing the extension display (the number of special symbol fluctuations) may be longer than the holding upper limit number (4) of the special symbol 2, for example, extension. The maximum number of special symbol fluctuations (for example, 0.5 second fluctuation 8 times) that can be executed before the elapsed period (4 seconds), which is one of the display end conditions, is set as the extended display end condition. You may. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of continuing the production during the big hit, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, it is executed in a state where a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed between the execution of the extension display after the end of the jackpot and the change of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (4 times). If the jackpot is won by the special symbol fluctuation, the jackpot game is started after the special symbol fluctuation of 0.5 second fluctuation is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, 0.5. In addition to the special symbol variation period of seconds, it may be configured to execute a variation effect using the opening period of the jackpot game. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the variable effect using a period of 0.5 seconds or more, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<About another control example of the expectation suggestion effect explained in the first control example>
Next, another control example of the expectation degree suggestion effect of the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225. In this separate control example, as in the first control example described above, the expected degree 1 display DK1 to the expected degree 3 display DK3, which are the expected degree display modes displayed in one variation effect, can be displayed respectively. And the period during which the expected degree increase mode DK4, which is the sum of the variable amounts in which each expected degree display mode is changed during the variable effect, can be displayed, are set in one variable effect (see FIG. 221), and each effect period is set. The operation validity period for enabling the operation of the frame button 22 can be set.

Further, when the effect mode that does not display the three expectation degree display modes is selected when setting the variable effect, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed by using the points acquired by the expectation degree increase mode DK4. It is composed. With this configuration, the points earned by the expected degree increase mode DK4 can be used for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol change during execution, so that the player can be enthusiastic. You can participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, the contents of the effect in the control example according to the present invention will be described. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the flow of the expectation degree suggestion effect in the control example according to the present invention. The description of the same elements as the expected degree suggestion effect of the first control example described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 221 The variable degree suggestion effect is executed (see FIG. 102 (B)). Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (B), the display screen shown in FIG. 222 (A) is displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 222 (A), the display contents displayed during the expectation degree suggestion effect will be described.

FIG. 222 (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display example in the period from the notification of the expectation degree increase mode DK4 to the execution of the expectation degree increase effect. As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the value (“3UP” in this figure) acquired as the expected degree increase mode DK4 is displayed in the second sub-display area DS2. The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 221. After that, when 33 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the expectation increase effect in which the first operation valid period of 5 seconds is set is executed (FIG. 221 (C). In this state, FIG. 222 (B) shows. The indicated display screen is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the first operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), the display mode of the expectation degree 1 display DK1 is changed, and the expectation degree increase mode DK4 The value is displayed as a subtraction. By operating the frame button 22 during each operation valid period in this way, the display mode of the corresponding expectation display can be changed, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22. It will be possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 221, since the expectation degree 1 display is displayed over a plurality of operation valid periods, the frame button 22 may be operated in any operation valid period. , The display mode may be variable. As a result, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first operation valid period, the display mode of the expectation degree 1 display DK1 is not variable, or the variable amount is small, that is, the intermediate stage of the variable effect (first). During one operation valid period), it is possible to prevent the player from losing his expectation for a big hit at an early stage.

Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in another control example of the expectation degree suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of the expectation degree effect setting process 7. When the expectation degree effect setting process 7 is executed, first, the expectation degree is selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222I as in the first control example described above (S4251). Then, the points to be given in the expectation degree increase mode DK4 are set based on the selected expectation degree (S4252), and the effect executed in each of the first period, the second period, and the third period based on the expectation degree. Aspects are set (S4253).

When the processing of S4253 is completed, it is determined whether there is a period (vacant period) in which the effect mode is not set in each period (first period, second period, third period) (S4254), and the effect mode is set. If there is a non-existing period (vacant period) (S4254: YES), then it is determined whether or not there is winning information indicating a hit in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A (S4255). Here, if it is determined that there is winning information indicating a win (S4255: YES), a reserved symbol variable effect mode for changing the reserved symbol is set during the period (vacant period) in which the effect mode is not set. (S4256), the process proceeds to S4257. On the other hand, in the processing of S4254, when there is no period in which the effect mode is not set (S4254: NO), or in the processing of S4255, when it is determined that there is no winning information indicating a hit (S4255: NO), S4257 as it is. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S4257, the operation valid period (first operation valid period, second operation valid period, third operation valid period) for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set for each period in which the effect mode is set. Set (S4257), set the display expectation degree effect command (S4258), and end this process.

As described above, in the expectation degree effect setting process 7 (S3808), the degree of expectation selected based on the degree of expectation selection table 222I is used to determine the points to be given and the points to be given in the current variable effect. It is configured to set the effect mode used. Then, in the effect mode using the given points, whether or not there is a selected setting for each of the plurality of periods (first period to third period) defined in association with the variation pattern of the variation effect executed this time. (Whether or not to set the effect mode) and the content of the effect mode (type of expected degree display mode to be set, display mode) are set in the effect mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which effect mode is executed in which period (first period to third period). Further, since the number of display modes in which the display mode can be changed by using the value acquired as the expectation increase mode DK4 during the expectation variable suggestion effect period is also indefinite, it is acquired as the expectation increase mode DK4. Even if the value is small (for example, 2UP), if the number of display of the expected degree display mode to be executed is small, the value acquired as the expected degree increase mode DK4 is used for the expected degree display mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's motivation to play is lowered due to the effect result during the expected degree variable suggestion effect period.

In another control example of the expected degree suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 221, a configuration in which the expected degree variable suggestion effect period is executed once in the early stage of the variable effect is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided in the middle of the variable effect (for example, between the second operation valid period (see FIG. 221 (D)) and the third operation valid period (see FIG. 221 (E))). With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the period targeted for the production using the value acquired as the expectation increase mode DK4 during the expectation variable suggestion effect, so that a large value as the expectation increase mode DK4 ( For example, when 3) is won, the degree of expectation for a big hit can be further increased. Further, the expected degree variable suggestion effect may be executed a plurality of times (for example, twice) during one variable effect.

Further, in another control example of this expectation degree suggestion effect, when the effect mode using the given points is not set for a plurality of periods in which the operation valid period can be set, the display mode of the reserved symbol as an additional effect. Although a configuration is used in which an effect of varying the above is used, other contents may be used as an additional effect, for example, a value collected by the player (for example, in another example of the first control example described above). It may be configured to add an effect for adding the accumulated value (see FIG. 176 (C)) described above and an effect for suggesting the current gaming state.

In addition, even when the effect mode using the given points is set for all of the plurality of periods for which the operation validity period can be set, the effect selection means that allows the player to select the effect to be executed. (For example, a means for displaying a selection screen for selecting an effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and selecting an effect to be executed by an operation means operable by the player) Based on this, the effect to be executed may be changed.

In the expected effect setting process 7 described with reference to FIG. 224, the expected degree variable suggestion effect period is for display specified as a fixed period of the variable effect (a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of the variation shown in FIG. 221). It is configured so that the expectation degree effect command is set, but as another configuration, for example, based on the determination result of the determination means for determining the selected expectation degree by referring to the expectation degree selection table 222I. The period for executing the expected variable suggestion effect is a plurality of periods (for example, a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 221 and a period after the first period shown in FIG. 221 (40 seconds to the start of the fluctuation). A means for setting the expected degree variable suggestion effect period may be provided to set any of the periods of 50 seconds)). As a result, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the expected variable suggestion effect is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, it is configured to set the period during which the expectation variable suggestion effect is executed by the above-mentioned expectation variable suggestion effect period setting means based on the elements other than the expectation selected by referring to the expectation degree selection table 222I. Alternatively, for example, a period during which the expected degree variable suggestion effect is executed may be set based on the operation content in which the player operates the operating means, or the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A may be set. It may be configured to set the period in which the expected degree variable suggestion effect is executed based on the information contained in the information.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7. When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 is executed, it is first determined whether the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051), and if it is detected (S5051: YES), then the hold variable effect setting. It is determined whether it is in the period (S5901), and if it is determined that it is in the hold variable effect setting period (S5901: YES), a variable display command for changing the hold symbol is set (S5902), and subtraction is performed. A display command indicating a later grant point is set (S5903), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901 when it is determined that the hold variable effect setting period is not in progress (S5901: NO), it is determined whether it is the first operation valid period (S5904), and it is determined that it is the first operation valid period. If this is the case (S5904: YES), a variable display command for changing the first expectation degree display (expectation degree 1 display) DK1 is set (S5905), and a display command indicating the added points after subtraction is set. (S5903), this process is terminated.

In the process of S5904, if it is determined that it is not the first operation valid period (S5904: NO), it is determined whether it is the second operation valid period (S5906), and if it is determined that it is the second operation valid period, it is determined. (S5906: YES), the second expectation degree display (expectation degree 2 display), a display variable command for changing the DK2 is set (S5907), and a display command indicating the added points after subtraction is set (S5903). , End this process.

In the process of S5906, if it is determined that it is not the second operation valid period (S5906: NO), it is determined whether it is the third operation valid period (S5908), and if it is determined that it is the third operation valid period, it is determined. (S5908: YES), the third expectation degree display (expectation degree 3 display), a display variable command for changing the DK3 is set (S5909), and a display command indicating the added points after subtraction is set (S5903). , End this process.

As described above, in this separate control example, as in the first control example described above, the expectation degree 1 display DK1 to the expectation degree 3 display, which is the expectation degree display mode displayed in one variation effect, is displayed. An effect period in which the DK 3 can be displayed and a period in which the expectation increase mode DK4, which is the sum of the variable amounts in which each expectation display mode is variable during the variable effect, can be displayed, are set in one variable effect ( (See FIG. 221), the operation valid period for enabling the operation of the frame button 22 can be set for each effect period.

Further, when the effect mode that does not display the three expectation degree display modes is selected when setting the variable effect, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed by using the points acquired by the expectation degree increase mode DK4. It is composed. With this configuration, the points earned by the expected degree increase mode DK4 can be used for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol change during execution, so that the player can be enthusiastic. You can participate in the game.

The points given in this control example are set so that they can be used when the frame button 22 is operated during all the operation valid periods, and the amount of the frame button 22 not operated is changed. It may be configured so that time remains, and the content of the title-giving effect described above may be changed with respect to the remaining grant points at the end of the fluctuation.

<First A1 Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the A1 embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. The same configuration as described in each of the above-described examples and control examples will be described again for convenience. First, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 296, an embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 as the A1 embodiment will be described. 226 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment, FIG. 227 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment, and FIG. 228 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment. It is a rear view.

As shown in FIG. 226, the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment is formed into an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 226) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 227) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112A (see FIG. 229) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112A to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 226) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14C having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 226), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112A (see FIG. 229) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14C. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking of the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 226) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 227) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14C. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51A for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112A, a launch stop switch 51B for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51A is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51A and the firing stop switch 51B are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 227, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a wind turbine (movable member 310 are shown, and others are shown). In addition to the rails 61 and 62 (not shown), the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), the normal symbol start opening (not shown). The through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 226). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 penetrate through the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14C (see FIG. 226) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 227.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 226) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112A (see FIG. 229) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 227) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part of FIG. 227) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 227) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 229), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

The first winning opening 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 to the left and right, and the left side of the variable display unit 80 is the left flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the variable display unit 80 is the game. A right flow path through which the sphere can flow is formed. The game ball that has flowed down the left channel is configured so as not to flow down the right channel. The first winning opening 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball flowing down the left channel and the game ball flowing down the right channel can enter.

The second winning opening 640 is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the right flow path is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the left flow path. The second winning opening 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, and a flow path through which the game ball can flow down is formed in the opening, and the ball enters the opening. A photo sensor for detecting a game ball is provided. An electric accessory 640A is attached to the front side of the opening as a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate capable of closing the opening, and the variable opening / closing plate is used as an axis to drive the opening / closing to the front side. It is equipped with an open port solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning opening 640 is normally closed so that the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. When the normal symbol (second symbol) hits, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640A downward in the front, and the open state where the ball can easily win the opening of the second winning opening 640 is temporarily held. It operates so as to repeat the open state and the normally closed state a predetermined number of times determined by the gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, the 5R time reduction (95 times) jackpot (big hit A) and 5R time reduction set corresponding to the first special symbol that is variablely displayed when the first winning opening 64 is won. (3 times) Big hit (big hit B), 15R normal big hit (big hit C) are prepared. In addition, a 15R time saving (95 times) jackpot (big hit D) set corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed when a prize is won in the second winning opening 640 is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, "5R time reduction (95 times) jackpot (big hit A)" means that the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 95 times after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, and is 95. During the period until the second fluctuation is stopped, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to the high probability state, and a time-saving gaming state in which the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected is set. It's a big hit. "5R time reduction (3 times) jackpot (big hit B)" means that the special symbol (1st special symbol or 2nd special symbol) is changed 3 times after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, and the 3rd change. A big hit in which the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to the high probability state and the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is easily selected in the short game state until the stop. Is. Further, the "15R normal jackpot (big hit C)" is a jackpot in which a low probability state is set and a time-saving game state is not set after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.

During the reduced working hours (during the reduced working hours game state), not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, compared to the normal time. A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640A is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640A is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640A per hit. You may make a change to increase the number of times that is opened more than usual. Further, during the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time when the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640A is opened per hit. One may be changed. In addition, during the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640A per hit are not performed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol is calculated. , May be changed so that it is up compared to normal.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the variation of the third symbol is synchronized with the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The second symbol is variablely displayed triggered by the passage of a ball of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for displaying and a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. Further, in the variable display unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the time reduction, the winning lottery (the number of variation display of the second symbol) can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640A of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. When a ball enters the second winning opening 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper plate 17, so that the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640. , It is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by the player, and it is possible to hold the lottery of special symbols during a short period of time while suppressing the investment for renting additional balls. ..

It should be noted that the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 during the time saving by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640A per hit by increasing the hit probability. In the case of, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, and the electric function for one hit may be set. The opening time and the number of opening times of the object 640A may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the area of the left flow path of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down on the left side of the game board is It is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of passages of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a total of 4 times, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol reservation lamp. It is also lit and displayed (not shown). Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 229), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. In the present embodiment, the prize ball is not paid out when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, but the prize ball is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of balls such as one ball is used. It may be configured to pay out the prize ball.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640A is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640A is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640A is in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory The 640A is in an open state, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so that the symbol "○" in the variation display of the second symbol is displayed. Is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640A is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640A is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, if the ball wins the second prize opening 640 as the type of jackpot selected when it becomes a jackpot (it becomes a jackpot in the lottery corresponding to the second special symbol), 15R at a rate of 100%. If a short-time (95 times) big hit (big hit D) is selected and a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 (a big hit in the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol), a short-time game state is given. The jackpot is a jackpot of up to 5R (61% ratio when it becomes a jackpot), and the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 is selected. Has been done. With this configuration, in the normal gaming state (a state in which the time reduction is not given in the low probability gaming state), the ball is easier to win in the first winning opening 64 than in the second winning opening 640. 1 By making a game ball win in the winning opening 64, the ratio of selecting the jackpot (big hit A or jackpot B) to which the time reduction is given is set low, and the time saving is given and the ball is given to the second winning opening 640. When it becomes easy to win a prize, it is possible to easily make a big hit with the second special symbol, and it can be configured so that the time saving state can be easily continued. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of being given a time saving.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, on the right side of the variable display unit 80, a V winning door 600 capable of guiding the ball to the V entry port 600A of the V winning device 620 is arranged. The V winning door 600 stands upright and does not enter the V entrance 600A when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit B or a small hit. The ball can enter the V entry port 600A by changing from an upright closed state to an open state rotated about 90 degrees to the right.

In the case of a small hit, a 1R (round) small hit game is executed in which the V winning door 600 is opened for 1.2 seconds or until the ball wins 10 balls and the V winning opening 600A. On the other hand, in the case of the big hit B, the V winning door is opened up to the 1st round, and the variable winning device 65 is changed to the open state from the 2nd round. Here, from the 2nd round, the V winning door arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65A is set in advance as 1R (round) until the ball wins 10 balls in the specific winning opening 65A for 30 seconds. Round games are repeatedly executed up to the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type.

With this configuration, whether it is a small hit or a big hit B, the third symbol display device 81 or the like does not notify whether it is a small hit or a big hit B, and it is a small hit. By configuring the game to shift to a game or a jackpot game, the game ball is similarly entered into the V winning device 620, and the game is expected to enter the V winning opening 624, which will be described later. It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 of the V winning device 620 described later, so that the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. .. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened from the 1st round of the big hit, which is started when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the small hit game.

In the case of the jackpot game in the jackpot B, the winning control is executed so that when the game ball enters the V winning device 620, the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the jackpot game of the first R. It is configured in. As a result, even in the case of the jackpot game in the jackpot B, by winning the V winning opening 624, it is possible to make the variable winning device 65 seem to be opened after that (actually, 2R in the jackpot game). Eyes are running). When a ball wins in the V entry port 600A and the specific winning opening 65A, 15 balls are paid out to the player as prize balls for each ball. In the big hit game other than the big hit B, since the variable winning device 65 is configured to be open from the 1R (round) th, the content of the big hit game is that the big hit game is started instead of the small hit. It is also configured so that it can be identified.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol (for example, a doublet symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the big hit lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a small hit, the small hit is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol (for example, a doublet symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the hit is a small hit or a big hit B, the third symbol is similarly displayed in the reach display mode (the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same) in the third symbol display device 81. The chance symbol symbol consisting of a combination of three symbols (display mode in which the structure is stopped) is displayed as a stop, the middle symbol is displayed as a chance symbol (the third symbol with the letters "CHANCE") is displayed as a stop, and the chance symbol symbol is displayed as a stop. It will be notified by being done. As a result, the player can at least execute a game (corresponding to a small hit game or a big hit game) in which the V winning door 600 of 1R is opened by displaying the third symbol stopped at the chance symbol. It is possible to recognize that and expect the ball to enter the V winning opening 624. In addition, when a specific symbol (for example, 777 doublet symbol) is stopped and displayed in the third symbol, the specific symbol is set to notify that the jackpot game is executed. Is displayed, the player may be configured to recognize at an early stage that a high-value-added jackpot game will be executed.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65A, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65A is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of jackpot B, from the 2nd round, in the case of other than jackpot B, from the 1st round, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward in the front, and the ball is in an open state where it is easy to win the specific winning opening 65A. Is temporarily formed, and it operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normally closed state.

Next, the V winning device 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231. The V winning device 620 is arranged in the variable display unit 80, and is attached to a position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIGS. 229 and 231, the V winning device 620 includes a movable guide member 622, a rotary distribution member 621, a V winning port 624, a left discharge path 623A, a right discharge path 623B, a first retention member 622D, and a flow path switching. It is composed of a member 622E.

Normally, the rotary distribution member 621 of the V winning device 620 is configured to be visible to the player, and the rotary distribution member 621 is always rotated in the left-right direction at a constant cycle when the power is turned on. It is configured to. When the V winning door 600 is opened at the start of the small hit game or the big hit game, the game ball can flow into the V entry port 600A of the V winning device 620. A V entry port 600A into which a game ball can enter is formed at the abutting portion between the V winning door 600 and the V winning device 620, and the game ball enters the V winning device 620 from the V entry port 600A. A taxiway is formed to guide the. A photo sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is arranged in the V entry port 600A, and is configured to be able to count the number of winnings to the V winning device 620 (V entry port 600A). The prize balls (3 balls) are paid out to the player based on the detection of the balls by the photo sensor.

Here, with reference to FIG. 253, the V winning device 620 will be described in detail according to the timing chart of the operation control of the V winning device 620 in the small hit game. When the small hit game is started, after the opening period (T1: 0.1 seconds) has elapsed, the V winning opening solenoid operates (operates to ON) during the opening period (T2: 1.2 seconds) to win a V prize. The door 600 is variable to the open state. When the game ball enters the V entrance 600A in the open state and the game ball flows down the taxiway, the game ball is configured so that the flow of the ball is restricted by the first retention member 622D shown in FIG. 231 and stays. The first retention member 622D is configured such that the retention 1 solenoid operates (operates ON) for 4 seconds so as to project to the front side so as to retain the ball at the upper part based on the start of the small hit game. .. When one ball is retained in the first retention member 622D, the game ball that flows down thereafter collides with the retained ball and is discharged to either the left or right side. After 1.2 seconds of the opening period of the V winning door 600 elapses, 2.7 seconds after the V winning opening solenoid is activated and the V winning door 600 is changed from the open state to the closed state, The stay 1 solenoid 209A is turned off, the first stay member 622D is retracted toward the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10, and the ball staying at the upper part is configured to flow downward. Below the first retention member 622D, a flow path switching member 622E that always operates in the left-right direction is arranged.

The flow path switching member 622E is configured to operate left and right by being turned on and off at intervals of 0.4S by the flow path solenoid 209B. When it is turned off, it moves to a position where it closes the inflow port of the movable guide member 622, and is configured to prevent the ball from entering the movable guide member 622. In the off state, the ball flowing down from the upstream is guided to the right side by the inclined portion formed on the upper part of the flow path switching member 622E and is discharged to the outside of the V winning device. On the other hand, when the flow path solenoid is on and the flow path switching member is retracted to the left side of the inflow port, the ball can flow into the movable guide member 622. It is configured.

The flow path switching member 622E is in an open state (a state in which the flow path solenoid is turned on and the flow path switching member is retracted to the left) at the timing when the first retention member 622D is retracted and the retained game ball flows down. Then, the ball flows into the movable guide member 622. As shown in FIG. 231, the movable guide member 622 is configured in a tubular shape capable of allowing one ball to flow down, an inflow port into which the ball flows is formed on one end side, and the ball is discharged on the other end side. The outlet 622A is formed. A recess 622C for holding one ball is formed in front of (upstream side) the discharge port 622A, and a second retention member for preventing the ball entering the recess 622C from flowing down on the downstream side of the recess 622C. 622B is arranged. The second retention member 622B is in a regulated state in which the retention 2 solenoid 612 is activated (turned on) to project upward to prevent the ball that has entered the recess 622C from flowing down, and the retention 2 solenoid 612 is turned off to prevent the second retention member. The 622B is rotated to the left and is changed to a release state that allows the ball entering the recess 622C to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 253, the second staying member 622B is in a state of being changed to the regulated state by operating (on) the staying 2 solenoid 612 for 2 seconds (T6) 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game. , The ball that has entered the recess 622C is restricted from flowing down. The movable guide member 622 is rotated to the left by the staying 2 movable motor 610A 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game (T4) so that the inflow port side rises as shown in FIG. 231 (B). After that, for 1.5 seconds (T5), the residence 2 movable motor 610A is operated to raise the movable guide member 622 and control it to move to the maximum movable position (see FIG. 231 (B)). As described above, the residence 2 solenoid 612 is controlled to be turned off at a timing 6 seconds after the start of the small hit game, so that the second retention member 622B is released while the movable guide member 622 is rising. When the movable guide member 622 is tilted downward to the left and the tilt angle is further increased, the ball entering the recess 622C can easily flow down to the lower left.

As shown in FIG. 229 (A), when the ball that has entered the recess 622C starts to flow down, the ball that has entered the recess 622C is discharged from the discharge port 622A to the rotary distribution member 621. The discharged ball rolls on the rotary distribution member 621 and is discharged downstream. The rotary distribution member 621 is rotated left and right at regular intervals after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and the V winning opening 624 and the rotary distribution member 621 arranged downstream of the rotary distribution member 621 When the ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621A at the timing when the downstream discharge port 621A coincides with the downstream discharge port 621A in parallel, the ball can easily enter the V winning port 624. On the other hand, when the ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621A in a state where the downstream discharge port 621A and the V winning port do not match in parallel, the V winning device 620 is discharged by the left discharge path 623A or the right discharge path 623B arranged on the left and right. It is configured to be discharged to the outside.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253, the V validity period for determining that the ball has entered the V winning opening 624 for 2 seconds (T7) from 5 seconds after the start of the small hit is set. It is configured. It is configured to enable the winning detection only when the photo sensor detects that the ball has entered the V winning opening 624 during this V valid period, and to invalidate it when winning in other periods. is doing. With this configuration, it is possible to determine only the period during which the V winning opening 624 can be won, and damage caused by fraud such as when the ball is operated with a magnet or the like to illegally win the V winning opening 624. Can be reduced. In the present embodiment, when the winning of the V winning opening 624 is detected during the V valid period, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game. The big hit game given when the ball normally passes through the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is the type of the executed small hit game (small hit A or small hit B (FIGS. 244 (B) to (C)). See))) is configured to set the jackpot type.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 254 is shown for the case where the ball does not pass through V in the small hit. In the example shown in FIG. 254, when the flow path switching member 622E is in the closed state, the game ball is not guided to the movable guide member 622 due to the release of the first retention member 622D, resulting in a V prize. Here is an example of what I didn't do. Similarly, FIG. 254 is an example of a timing chart for winning the V winning opening 624 when the jackpot is B, and FIG. 255 is a timing chart for not winning the V winning opening 624 when the jackpot is B. This is just an example. Further, FIG. 252 is a game flow showing a game state set when a big hit or a small hit is made in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 244 (B), when the small hit A in the special figure 1 is executed, a 5R (time reduction 95 times) big hit is set, and when the small hit B is executed, 10R normal ( No time reduction) A big hit is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 244 (C), when the small hit C in the special figure 2 is executed, a 15R (time reduction 95 times) big hit is set, and when the small hit D is executed, 5R ( (Time reduction 95 times) is set, and when the small hit E is executed, 5R (no time reduction) big hit is set. In addition, the time reduction of each jackpot name described above indicates that the time reduction game state is set, and the number of times display after that indicates the number of changes of the special symbol as the period in which the time reduction game state is set. Normal means that it is a big hit in which the time saving game state is not set.

In the present embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is executed by winning the V winning opening 624, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V winning opening 624 is not limited to this. A counter value (for example, a first type counter value C2) may be acquired at the timing of winning a prize, and may be configured to be selected from a predetermined selection table. As the predetermined selection table, a different selection table may be set for each game state (normal game state, time-saving game state), a different selection table may be set depending on the type of the special symbol, or the executed small size. A different selection table may be set depending on the hit type.

Here, if the variation display when the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are determined to be a small hit or a big hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit type is displayed. , The LED of the first symbol display device 37A is lit and displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to the jackpot type. Since it is a display mode in which a plurality of LEDs are combined and displayed, even if the player visually recognizes the first symbol display device 37A, the details of the small hit type and the large hit type are configured so as to be difficult to identify at first glance. Has been done. Further, in the case of a big hit, the LED of the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be displayed corresponding to the number of rounds corresponding to the big hit type. As for the notification of the number of rounds, the number of rounds is not notified by characters or the like, but is displayed together with the lighting of the LED indicating the jackpot type, so that it is more difficult for the player to identify. As a result, even if the player is notified of the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the number of rounds of the jackpot by the first symbol display device 37 so as to maintain the fairness of the game, the notification is difficult for the player to understand. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the small hit game and the big hit game before the execution, and the player can make the small hit type, the big hit type, etc. even during the small hit game and the big hit game in the big hit B. It is configured so that you can play while making predictions. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, the type of the big hit game given when winning the V winning opening 624 differs depending on the small hit type, so that the big hit is disadvantageous to the player. When the small hit game corresponding to the small hit type to which the type is given is executed, the launch of the game ball is stopped and the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the V entrance 600A. There is a risk that the disadvantage on the game store side will increase, but in the configuration of this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, etc. are configured in a notification mode in which the type of small hit is difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the way of playing the game that suffers the above-mentioned disadvantages.

Further, 0.1 seconds after the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be a small hit is stopped and displayed, the V winning door 600 is opened and the open state is maintained for 1.2 seconds. Even if the player is able to analyze and identify the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, even if the player operates the launch of the game ball after the identification, the V entry port 600A is reached. It is configured so that it is difficult to fire the game ball so that it can reach it. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since it is configured to fire 100 game balls per minute at equal intervals regardless of the firing intensity, it is configured to fire one shot every 0.6 seconds. It takes about 2 seconds for the game ball to reach the V entry port 600A after being launched from the launcher. Therefore, if the game ball is not continuously launched to the right area, the V entry port 600A It becomes difficult to enter the ball into the V entrance 600A, and if the control is made not to enter the V entry port 600A at the time of a small hit, the game ball is entered into the V entry port 600A for the small hit game corresponding to any small hit type. Will not be able to enter the ball. Therefore, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed and a right-handed notification (a notification mode for notifying the player to launch the game ball to the right-hand area) is given, the player promptly starts right-handed. You can make the game play like you do.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 226).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65A, 600A, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. The out port 66 is arranged below the variable winning device 65.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the front view of the game board 13, and is shown in FIG. 227.

As shown in FIG. 228, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 229). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 229). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is used as a trigger on the first symbol display device 37. Fluctuation display is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It should be noted that the third symbol is commonly displayed in a variable manner with respect to the variable display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol, and is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variablely displayed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variablely displayed at the same time. It may be a possible configuration. With this configuration, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the games can be improved.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are formed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of numbers from "0" to "9".

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display is displayed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol string having three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. The symbol column is displayed as a left symbol column displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol column displayed on the right side of the left symbol column, and a right symbol column displayed on the right side of the middle symbol column.

In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle part of the third symbol is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row → the right symbol row → the middle symbol row in each game. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. One identification symbol (reserved symbol) of the "round symbol" is displayed for each reserved ball, and the player is notified. The player can determine the current number of reserved balls from the number of reserved symbols. The maximum number of reserved balls is set to 4 for each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and each reserved ball is a reserved ball between the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a distinctly different color (for example, black for the first winning opening 64 and red for the second winning opening 640).

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the reserved symbol, character symbols, characters, and the like are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Will be done. If the game is not played for a predetermined period, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 or a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the balls entered into the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are each reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area DS1, the reserved ball number is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first random number table 202A, a first hit type selection table 202B, a normal symbol per random number table 202C, a variation pattern table 202D, a small hit type selection table 202E, a big hit scenario table 202AA, and a small hit. The scenario table 202AB is set respectively. Although data and the like necessary for other games are also stored, they are not necessary in the description of the invention in the present embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The first hit random number table 202A, the first hit type selection table 202B, the normal symbol hit random number table 202C, the variation pattern table 202D, and the small hit type selection table 202E will be described in detail later with reference to the figures.

The jackpot scenario table 202AA is a data table in which a jackpot scenario in which the operation contents during the jackpot game are set is specified, and the opening period of the jackpot game (the first round game is executed after the jackpot game is started). (Period until), round period (maximum period in which one round game is set), interval period between rounds (period from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game) Correspondingly specified, it corresponds to the value of the scenario counter 203AA, which is set when the jackpot game is started and the value is incremented by 1 periodically (every time the main process of the main control device 110 is executed). Operation control is executed.

The jackpot scenario table 202AA defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning jackpot types. Here, the detailed contents of the jackpot scenario table 202AA will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (A). FIG. 248 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot scenario table 202AA. As shown in FIG. 248 (A), the jackpot scenario table 202AA defines different scenarios corresponding to the jackpot types (big hit A to jackpot D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), the jackpot scenario A202AA1 corresponding to the jackpot game for 5R is executed for the jackpot types A and C in which the jackpot game that opens the specific winning opening 65A is executed. The jackpot scenario 202AA6 corresponding to the jackpot game for 15R is defined in D.

Further, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), as a scenario corresponding to the first round of the jackpot game for the jackpot type B in which the V winning opening 624 or the specific winning opening 65A is opened according to the number of rounds during the jackpot game. Hit scenario A202AA2 showing the operation contents of the first half of the first round, hit scenario B202AA3 showing the operation contents of the second half of the first round, hit scenario C202AA4, and the operation contents of the round game from the second round to the fifth round. The jackpot scenario B202AA5 showing the above is specified.

As for the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255, the content of the round game of the first round is the same as the game content of the small hit game (error that is difficult for the player to identify). When the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B is started, the V winning door 600 is opened and the round game (V challenge) aiming at the V winning opening 624 is executed. Will be done.

Further, by opening the V winning door 600 during this V challenge, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the V entry port 600A, and the game ball entering the V entry port 600A becomes a flow path switching member. Based on the detection result of the second retention sensor (not shown) whether or not the game ball has been retained by the second retention member 622B of the movable guide member 622 after passing through 622E (see FIG. 231 (A)). Based on the discrimination result, the operation content of the latter half of the first round game is configured to be different.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 241, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 274). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and a second winning opening 640 corresponding to winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B corresponding to winning a prize is provided in each of these areas, and in each of these areas, the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is set according to the timing of entering the ball. Each value of the random number counter C1 per unit, the type counter C2 per first, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal start ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 240. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table (see FIGS. 242 (A) to (C)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number is set. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Here, in the first random number table 202A1, a special symbol 1 random number table 202A1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202A2 corresponding to the second special symbol are set respectively.

Here, the first random number table 202A will be described. The first hit random number table 202A is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 242 (B), in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and "0 to 3". If it is any of 3 ”, it is determined that it is a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is other than "0 to 3" (that is, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is out of order), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "4". If it is "4", it is determined to be a small hit. Here, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order.

As shown in FIG. 242 (C), in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the same manner as the first special symbol is "0 to 3", and " If it is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is other than "0 to 3" (that is, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is out of order), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "4 to 997". If it is any of "4 to 997", it is determined that it is a small hit. Here, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order.

In this way, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be the same, but with respect to the small hit probability, the second special symbol has a smaller hit probability than the first special symbol. Is set high. As a result, in the time-saving game state where it is easy to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640, the lottery is easily executed with the second special symbol, so that the probability of a small hit is high and the V winning opening 624 is won. Opportunities that can be made can be increased. Therefore, since it is possible to set the time-saving game state to be more advantageous to the player, it is expected that the jackpot game to which the time-saving game state is given will be executed even when the normal game state is set. It is possible to play the game, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the special symbol becomes a jackpot, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). ) Are added one by one in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203A, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is not a random number that becomes a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. Become.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that are big hits for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are random numbers per special symbol as described above. It is stored in the table 202A1 and the random number table 202A2 per special symbol 2. As described above, since the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 1000, the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/250".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a jackpot, the first hit type selection table 202B (see FIG. 241 (A)) for determining the type of the jackpot to be executed is used. It is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 243 (A), the first hit type selection table 202B includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202B1 which is a data table for determining the type of the jackpot game for the first special symbol, and a second special. A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202B2, which is a data table for determining the type of the jackpot game for the symbol, is set respectively.

FIG. 243 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202B1. As the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned three types from jackpot A to jackpot C are set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of "0 to 44", the jackpot type is "big hit A (5R time reduction 95 times jackpot)". That is, the value of "0 to 44" of the first type counter C2 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of "45 to 60", the jackpot type is "big hit B (5R reduced working hours 3 times jackpot)". That is, the value of "45 to 60" of the first type counter C2 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of "61 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R time saving no jackpot)". That is, the value of "61 to 99" of the first type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

In this way, in the normal game state, the game is mainly played by winning the game ball into the first winning opening 64, but the time-saving game state is 61% of the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is a big hit (big hit A and big hit B) to be given. Therefore, even if the first special symbol is a big hit, the time-saving game state is not necessarily given, so the player is interested in whether the time-saving game is a big hit type even if the big hit is given. You can have it and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 243 (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202B2. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, one type of the jackpot D described above is set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of "0 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit D (15R time reduction 95 times jackpot)". That is, the value of "0 to 99" of the first type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

In this way, when a big hit is made for the second special symbol (by the big hit judgment for the winning of the second winning opening 640), the big hit that the time-saving game is given is always given. There is. Furthermore, the number of time reductions is set to 95, which is more advantageous than the jackpot B, and the number of rounds to be executed is also set to 15R, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpots A to C. It is configured. As a result, when a big hit is obtained mainly by the lottery of the second special symbol which is easy to be executed in the time saving game state, the big hit game which is more advantageous than the first special symbol is executed, and the time saving is shortened. It is configured to be of high value when the gaming state is executed.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0 to 0). In 99), 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203A, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640.

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the big hit lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type selection table 202E for determining the type of the small hit to be executed (see FIG. 244 (A)). Is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 244 (A), the small hit type selection table 202E includes a special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202E1 which is a data table for determining the type of the small hit game for the first special symbol, and a second. A special figure 2 small hit type selection table 202E2, which is a data table for determining the type of the small hit game for the special symbol, is set respectively.

FIG. 244 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202B1. As the small hit type of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned two types of small hit A and small hit B are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 64", the small hit type is "small hit A (5R time reduction 95 times big hit when passing V)". Will be. That is, the value of "0 to 64" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "65 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit B (10R time saving no big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "65 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small hit A and the small hit B, the type of the big hit game to be executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is set. In the case of the small hit A, the 5R time saving 95 times big hit is set, and after the small hit A is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then 95 as the time saving game state. It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period until the special symbol is executed 95 times and stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the small hit B, the 10R time saving no big hit is set, and after the small hit B is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10R open state is executed, but after the big hit game Is configured so that the time-saving gaming state is not set and the normal gaming state is set. In this way, the small hit B has a large number of rounds executed in the big hit game and is set to be more advantageous than the small hit A. It is difficult to execute the lottery with the second special symbol that is advantageous, and overall, it is set so that the small hit A is more advantageous to the player when the V winning opening 624 is won than the small hit B. Has been done.

FIG. 244 (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit type selection table 202B2. As the small hit type of the second special symbol, the above-mentioned three types of small hit C to small hit D are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 49", the small hit type is "small hit C (15R time reduction when passing V, 95 times big hit)". Will be. That is, the value of "0 to 49" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "50 to 79", the small hit type is "small hit D (5R time saving 95 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "50 to 79" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "80 to 99", the small hit type is "small hit E (5R time saving no big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "80 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in each of the small hit C to the small hit E, the type of the big hit game to be executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is set. In the case of the small hit C, the 15R time saving 95 times big hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then 95 as the time saving game state. It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period until the special symbol is executed 95 times and stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the small hit D, the 5R time reduction 95 times big hit is set, and after the small hit D is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the variable winning is executed. A jackpot in which the device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then 95 times of time-saving games (a period until the special symbol change is executed 95 times and stopped is displayed) are set as the time-saving game state. It is configured. Further, in the case of the small hit E, the 5R time saving no big hit is set, and after the small hit E is executed, the big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, but after the big hit game Is configured so that the time-saving gaming state is not set and the normal gaming state is set.

In this way, regarding the small hit type for the second special symbol, when the V winning opening 624 is won more than the small hit type for the first special symbol, the small hit in which the time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is set. The rate at which the type is selected is set high. As a result, when the time saving game state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and the probability of being determined as a small hit is higher than that of the lottery of the first special symbol. By determining that it is a small hit and winning a prize in the V winning opening 624, it is possible to easily execute the big hit game in which the time saving game state is set again. As a result, the jackpot game can be given to the player while the time-saving game state is continued, and the value of the time-saving game state can be further increased.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits and the variable display is stopped, the LED corresponding to the small hit type of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed. It is configured to be. Therefore, when the player is in the time-saving game, he / she wants to play the game so that the more advantageous jackpot game (big hit game in which the time-saving game state is set) is executed by effectively using the remaining time-saving number of times. .. Then, the small hit game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and only when the small hit type is not given the time-saving game state, the launch of the game ball is stopped and the V entry port 600A is reached. There is a risk that a game method that is disadvantageous to the game store side, in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter, is executed. However, in the present embodiment, the V winning door 600 is set to the open state for 1.6 seconds 0.1 seconds after the variation display determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the configuration of the present embodiment, which is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds and takes 2 seconds to reach the V entry port 600A, the game ball is fired after confirming the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the ball into the V entry port 600A, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits, the fluctuation stops, and the right-handed notification is the third symbol display device 81. It seems that it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V entrance 600A in the small hit game in all the small hit types unless the game ball is immediately launched to the right side area and the game is performed. It is configured in. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game method, which is significantly disadvantageous to the game store side.

Here, with reference to FIG. 247, each hit type and the operation of the hit game will be described. For the jackpot A and the jackpot C, a round game in which 1R is continuously executed for 10 balls in the variable winning device 65 until the game ball is won or the open state is continued for 29 seconds is repeatedly executed for 5R.

In the jackpot B, in the 1R round game, the V winning door 600 is opened and the V entrance 600A is opened for 1.2 seconds. If 10 balls are won in the 1st round, the game will be closed before 1.2 seconds have passed, but in 1.2 seconds, it is impossible to actually enter 10 balls. It has become. In the 2nd to 5th round round games, a round game that continues until 10 balls and a game ball are won in the variable winning device 65 or until the open state is continued for 29 seconds is executed.

As for the jackpot D, 10 rounds of 1R are repeatedly executed for 15R until the variable winning device 65 wins a game ball or until the open state is continued for 29 seconds.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. Depending on the variable type counter CS1 and the lottery result (missing, big hit type, small hit), so-called short miss (7 seconds), missed miss (30 seconds), various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), special reach Rough display modes of various types (90 seconds), pseudo-development no production (30 seconds), pseudo-development 1-time production (34 seconds), pseudo-development 2 times production (38 seconds), pseudo-development 3 times production (42 seconds) Fluctuation time) is determined. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 274) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 245 (A)) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 245 (A), the variation pattern table 202D includes the normal variation pattern table 202D1 used in the normal gaming state and the time saving variation pattern table 202D2 used in the time saving gaming state. Are set respectively.

FIG. 245 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202D1 for normal use. In the normal variation pattern table 202D1, short deviation (7 seconds), loss deviation (30 seconds), and various normal reach (normal reach) are selected as variation patterns selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of order. 30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and various special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuations are compared with the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value and the set judgment value. The pattern is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139", a short deviation (7 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "140 to 149", a gap deviation (30 seconds) is selected. If it is "150 to 179", various normal reach (30 seconds) is selected, and if it is "180 to 194", various super reach (60 seconds) is selected, which is "195 to 198". In this case, the determination value is set so that various special reach (90 seconds) are selected.

Various normal reach (30 seconds) as a variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot A, C to D (that is, other than jackpot B). , Various super reach (60 seconds) and various special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by collating the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value with the set judgment value. Will be done. Here, it is configured so that the player is notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by displaying the third symbol as a doublet (signs aligned jackpot) when the fluctuation is stopped. Note that the "777" doublet is displayed only when the jackpot type is such that the time saving game state is set after the jackpot game. In addition, in the case of a jackpot type in which a time-saving game state is set after a jackpot game, it is configured so that doublets other than "777" are also determined by a lottery for determining the stop symbol of the third symbol. It is also configured so that it is not known whether the time-saving game will be given until after the big hit game.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 40", various normal reach (30 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "41 to 179", various super reach (60 seconds) is selected. When it is selected and is "180 to 198", the determination value is set so that various special reach (90 seconds) are selected.

In addition, each fluctuation pattern selected in the case of a big hit is composed of the same fluctuation time as each fluctuation pattern selected in the case of a miss, and is finally a stop symbol (doublet) indicating a jackpot. It is configured to differ depending on whether it is displayed or not. As a result, even if the judgment result is wrong, the player can have an expectation for the big hit by selecting the same fluctuation pattern (variation pattern that becomes the reach) that is selected even in the case of the big hit. can.

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit B, the variation pattern selected is pseudo-development no production (30 seconds), pseudo-development once production. (34 seconds), pseudo-development 2 times effect (38 seconds), and pseudo-development 3 times effect (42 seconds) are set respectively, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 and the set judgment value are set. The matching variation pattern is selected. Here, when the fluctuation is stopped, the chance eye (see FIG. 238) is stopped and displayed, so that the player is notified that at least a small hit has been won. As a result, even if it is a big hit B, it is displayed with the same stop symbol as the small hit, so that the player can play the game with the expectation that the V winning opening 624 will win the game ball in the small hit game. can.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49", the pseudo-development no effect (30 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "50 to 99", the pseudo-development once effect (1 time effect). 34 seconds) is selected, and if it is "100 to 149", the pseudo-development 2 times production (38 seconds) is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the pseudo-development 3 times production (38 seconds) is selected. Judgment values are set so that they are selected.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 232 to 236, the third symbol display device 81 in the disengagement (30 seconds), the pseudo-development no effect (30 seconds), and the pseudo-development one-time effect (34 seconds) in the present embodiment. The displayed effect mode will be described. FIGS. 232 to 233 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation mode of the third symbol in the case of the disengagement (30 seconds). When the change start trigger of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be out of alignment, each third symbol (left, middle, The right symbol) starts scrolling vertically. Further, in the lower right area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the fourth symbol is a "round symbol" in a display area smaller than the area where the third symbol is displayed (the area where each third symbol is displayed). "And" x symbol "are alternately displayed in two columns on the left and right as a variable display. The fourth symbol is configured to be variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display period of the special symbol displayed by the first symbol display device 37, and the display mode corresponding to the determination result at the end timing of the variable period. (Outside: Round symbol in the left column, x symbol combination in the right column, jackpot: round symbol in the left column, round symbol combination in the right column, small hit: x symbol in the left column, x symbol combination in the right column) It is configured to be stopped and displayed at. As shown in FIGS. 232 (A) to 232 (B), the state in which the three lines are drawn on the fourth symbol indicates that the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the case of out of the gap (30 seconds), 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the third symbol that was temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 233 is fixedly stopped (stopped from the shaking fluctuation), and the fourth symbol is synchronized with it. Is also configured to be stopped and displayed.

In the pseudo-development no production (30 seconds), the left and right symbols are in the reach display mode as shown in FIG. The difference is that the chance symbol with the characters "CHANGE" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 234 to 236 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation mode of the third symbol in the pseudo-development one-time effect (34 seconds). When it is determined to be a small hit or a big hit B and the pseudo-development one-time effect is selected, FIG. As shown in A), each third symbol (left, middle, right symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is started to be scrolled in the vertical direction. Then, after being displayed in a high-speed scroll display (speed or mode in which the type of the third symbol is difficult to identify), the chance symbol symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, stopped by a combination of "354" as shown in FIG. 232 (B)). After displaying, each third symbol is shaken up and down).

After that, in the pseudo-development one-time production, as shown in FIG. 234 (A), the "5" symbol of the middle symbol and the "4" symbol of the right symbol are variably displayed so as to be interchanged. Here, in the present embodiment, when the third symbol is displayed as a temporary stop in the combination of "345", it is set as a combination symbol that notifies the player that the re-variation is executed. As shown in FIG. 234 (B), by moving to and displaying the combination of "345", the scroll display is started again in the vertical direction. After that, through the high-speed scroll display, the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 237 (A), and is configured to be stopped and displayed at the timing when 34 seconds of the fluctuation time (variation period) has elapsed. Here, in the case of the pseudo-development 2 times production (38 seconds) and the pseudo-development 3 times production (42 seconds), after the temporary stop, if the pseudo-development 2 times production is performed, the change is made again. In the case of the pseudo-development three-time effect, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the effect in which the re-variation is executed twice is executed. By executing the pseudo-variation a plurality of times in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the small hit game or the big hit B starts.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 to 236, the SW (switch) effect in the disengagement, pseudo-development 1-time effect, pseudo-development 2 times effect, and pseudo-development 3 times effect will be described. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, an effect using the frame button 22 is set as one of the effects selected according to the fluctuation pattern command. The voice lamp control device 113 selects the detailed effect contents by lottery based on the variation pattern command indicating the disengagement, the pseudo-development 1-time effect, the pseudo-development 2 times effect, and the pseudo-development 3 times effect. As one of the effects, when the temporary stop is displayed, as shown in FIG. 235 (A), the symbol indicating the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 22 is pressed. An effect that encourages the player is executed.

When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 235 (B), if any of the pseudo-development 1-time effect, the pseudo-development 2-time effect, and the pseudo-development 3-time effect is selected, it is re-variable. The symbol of "345" suggesting that is displayed and the re-variation is executed. On the other hand, when the disengagement is selected, the symbol that has been temporarily stopped does not change as shown in FIG. 236, and is configured to be stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation period has elapsed. ..

In the present embodiment, the "CHANGE" symbol of the chance eye is displayed as the final stop symbol that has changed again, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "CHANGE" symbol and other symbols (for example, the middle symbol) are displayed. The "4" symbol) may be alternated, or both symbols may be displayed and scrolled to display an effect as to whether the "CHANGE" symbol is displayed up to the stop display position. In this case, if the "CHANGE" symbol does not stop at the middle symbol, it may be changed again when it is changed again from the stopped symbol. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to discriminate each fluctuation pattern before the player is fixedly stopped, and it is possible to make it difficult to understand the start timing of the small hit game and the big hit B. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that the small hit and the big hit are displayed in a mode in which the small hit and the big hit can be identified in the fourth symbol, the attention to the fourth symbol can be reduced by the effect of the third symbol, and the small hit game can be started. Can be difficult to identify. Further, since the fourth symbol is configured so that the type of the small hit cannot be identified, the first symbol display device 37 must be confirmed, and the launch of the game ball in the specific small hit game is stopped, etc. It is possible to suppress the special game method (strategy) of.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 238, an effect mode (variation pattern) in the third symbol display device 81 until the fixed stop symbol in the small hit or the big hit B is described will be described. As explained earlier in Pseudo-development no production, Pseudo-development 1 time production, Pseudo-development 2 times production, Pseudo-development 3 times production, when the chance symbol indicating the final stop symbol temporarily stops, the chance symbol fluctuates. In this state, the words "Preparing to aim to the right" are displayed at the top of the chance pattern. Further, the outline of the right-handed notification symbol N for notifying the operator to operate the firing handle with the firing intensity for firing the game ball to the right side region is displayed lightly on the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. When the fluctuation time elapses and 2 seconds before the fluctuation time elapses, the characters "Now, aim to the right" are displayed, and the density of the outline of the right-handed notification symbol N is displayed darkly (FIG. 237). (B)). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 238, the right-handed notification symbol N is displayed not only in the outline but also in color to the inside, and the character "right-handed" is displayed on the left side thereof.

In this way, by notifying the right-handed notification step by step from before the fixed stop, the game ball is fired in the right area at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the V winning door 600 is opened. It is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is not launched in time during the period.

In the present embodiment, when the re-variation is executed a predetermined number of times and then the confirmed symbol is displayed, the right-handed notification symbol is displayed in stages, but the present invention is not limited to this and temporarily stops. When the step display of the right-handed notification symbol N is started every time at the timing and the display mode is changed to the confirmed right-handed notification symbol N (see FIG. 238), the right-handed notification symbol N is displayed. May be hidden and the third symbol may be revariable again. In this case, the "CHANGE" symbol is displayed on the middle symbol at each temporary stop, and if it is changed again, it is not fixedly displayed, but it is scrolled again, and if it is off, another number is displayed. It may be a fixed stop symbol that is replaced with the three symbols and is fixedly stopped (for example, stopped by scrolling (shifting) one frame) to notify the deviation. With this configuration, it is more difficult to understand the start time of the small hit, and each time the temporary stop is made, the player is made to prepare for a right-handed hit, and a special game such as not firing in a specific small hit type is performed. Can be suppressed.

Next, the time saving variation pattern table 202D2 will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202D2. The time-saving variation pattern table 202D2 is a data table used to select a variation pattern of a special symbol when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving variation pattern table 202D2, as the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time-saving gaming state is out of order, short-out (2 seconds) and short-out pseudo-one time ( 6 seconds) and short deviation pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by collating the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 value with the set determination value.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 90", a short deviation (2 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "91 to 189", a short deviation pseudo once (6 seconds) is selected. ) Is selected, and when it is "190 to 198", the determination value is set so that the short deviation pseudo twice (9 seconds) is selected.

Short deviation (2 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds, and after a high-speed fluctuation of 1 second from the start of the fluctuation, it shakes at the chance eye (the middle symbol is "CHANGE" symbol greatly shakes and fluctuates). After fluctuating and temporarily stopping for 1 second, a variable effect is executed in which the symbol is switched to the out-of-order symbol (the middle symbol is scrolled (sliding) one frame downward from the "CHANGE" symbol) and is fixedly stopped to notify that it is out. It is a fluctuation pattern to be performed. It should be noted that the medium symbol during temporary stop shakes greatly, and the "CHANGE" symbol and the symbol "for example," 1 "symbol" arranged one frame next to it are alternately displayed at the stop display position. , It is configured so that the player does not misunderstand that it is a lottery result such as a small hit.

The fluctuation pattern of the short deviation pseudo 1 time (6 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 6 seconds, and the symbol is fast again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short deviation (2 seconds) temporary stop for 1 second. After starting the fluctuation and re-changing, temporarily stop for 2 seconds at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short deviation (2 seconds)), and then scroll down one frame from the deviation symbol (middle symbol is "CHANGE" symbol). It is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation effect is executed in which the (sliding) symbol) is switched to (sliding) and the fixed stop is performed to notify that the symbol is out of alignment.

The fluctuation pattern of the short deviation pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 9 seconds, and the symbol fluctuates again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short deviation pseudo 1 time temporary stop for 2 seconds. After starting and re-changing, temporarily stop for 1 second at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short deviation (2 seconds)), and then scroll down one frame from the "CHANCE" symbol (middle symbol is "CHANGE" symbol). It is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed in which the pattern (sliding) is switched to (sliding) and the confirmation is stopped to notify that the pattern is out of alignment.

In the time saving variation pattern table 202D2, as the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time saving gaming state is a small hit, the short small hit (2 seconds) and the short small hit pseudo once. (6 seconds), short and small hit pseudo 2 times (9 seconds), short and small hit pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) are set, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is collated with the set judgment value. The corresponding variation pattern is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 67", the short / small hit (2 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "68 to 136", the short / small hit is pseudo once (6 seconds). ) Is selected, and if it is "137 to 167", the short and small hit pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is selected, and if it is "168 to 198", the short and small hit pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) is selected. Judgment values are set so as to be.

The short and small hit (2 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds, and after a high-speed fluctuation of 1 second from the start of the fluctuation, it shakes at the chance (the middle symbol is "CHANGE" symbol greatly shakes and fluctuates). It is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation effect is executed in which a fluctuation is temporarily stopped for 1 second, and then a fixed stop is performed to notify that a small hit is made. The middle symbol during temporary stop shakes greatly, and the "CHANGE" symbol and the symbol "for example," 1 "symbol" arranged one frame next to it are alternately displayed at the stop display position.

The short-small hit pseudo-one-time (6 seconds) fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 6 seconds, and the symbol is fast again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short-small hit (2 seconds) temporary stop for 1 second. After starting the fluctuation and re-changing, a temporary stop for 2 seconds at the chance (a temporary stop mode similar to the short small hit (2 seconds)) and then a definite stop is performed to notify that the small hit is a small hit. The variation pattern to be executed.

The fluctuation pattern of the short and small hit pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 9 seconds, and the symbol fluctuates again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short and small hit pseudo 1 time temporary stop for 2 seconds. After starting and re-changing, a temporary stop for 1 second (a temporary stop mode similar to a short small hit (2 seconds)) is made at the chance, and then a fixed stop is performed to notify that the small hit is executed. It is a fluctuation pattern to be performed.

The fluctuation pattern of the short and small hit pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds, and the symbol fluctuates again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short and small hit pseudo 2 times 1 second temporary stop. After starting and re-changing, a temporary stop for 1 second (a temporary stop mode similar to a short small hit (2 seconds)) is made at the chance, and then a fixed stop is performed to notify that the small hit is executed. It is a fluctuation pattern to be performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, during the time-saving game, the lottery result is configured to have the same fluctuation time depending on whether the lottery result is out of order or a small hit, and the fluctuation timing is the same (the elapsed timing of the fluctuation time). The third symbol is configured to be temporarily stopped at the chance. As a result, even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to make the player feel as if it is a variable small hit, and the player can be prepared for a right-handed hit in preparation for the start of the small hit game. Further, the first symbol display device 37 confirms whether it is a specific small hit type (for example, small hit E, which is a small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player among the small hit types), and launches the game ball. It is possible to suppress a problem that a special game method is used to prevent the game ball from entering the V entrance 600A by stopping the ball.

It should be noted that the stepwise notification of the right-handed notification symbol in the normal game state may be configured to be executed for each temporary stop even during the time-saving game. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that even if the fluctuation is more out of the way, it will be a small hit.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the ball passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. It is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 242 (D)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202C, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202C is used for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

FIG. 242 (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the above-mentioned second random number table 202C. In this second hit random number table 202C, there are 24 random number values that can be hit by a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the normal start port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the ball passes through the normal start port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol changes in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the first winning opening 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time is And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 262). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 240, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 240, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 274) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 273) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (B), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D. Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F, time saving medium counter 203G, big hit start flag 203H, big hit medium flag 203I, small hit start flag 203J, small hit medium flag 203K, V passing place big hit type value It has 203M, V flag 203N, and other memory area 203Z.

As shown in FIG. 240, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A has one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has. , Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired based on winning the first winning opening 64 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second winning opening 640 are stored. Since the configurations of the above are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203B. ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203A, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is a variable display (third) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display (variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S304 in FIG. 266). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 263).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203D (the number of reserved balls N in the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command (S211 in FIG. 263, FIG. 266). See S305). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the number of balls held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls displayed. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D in that the number of reserved balls is stored in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F sets the maximum number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. .. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, the second random number counter C4 The value of is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C.

The time-saving medium counter 203G is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. A counter value corresponding to the number of time reductions is set in the time reduction medium counter 203G, and by subtracting 1 at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, the time reduction until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol set in the time reduction game state ends. It is configured to set the game state.

The jackpot start flag 203H is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203H is set to ON (see FIG. 263: S219). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203H is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached, it is set to off. The jackpot start flag 203H is set to off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and the state immediately before the power cut is maintained when a power cut or the like occurs.

The jackpot middle flag 203I is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (FIG. 263: S219). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is configured to be set to off. This jackpot middle flag 203I is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to.

The small hit start flag 203J is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped. When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203J is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off. This small hit start flag 203J is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203K is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is configured to be set to off. This small hit medium flag 203K is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up and held. It is configured to be.

The jackpot type value 203M when passing through V is a memory for storing data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball wins in the V winning opening 624 within the V valid period when the small hit game is executed. It is an area. The jackpot type value 203M at the time of passing V stores the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined jackpot type when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit is stopped. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, the V flag 203N corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the jackpot type value 203M at the time of passing V is set to ON. ing. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the big hit type value 203M when passing through V is configured to be cleared. This V-passing jackpot type value 203M is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to be held by.

The V flag 203N is set to turn on the flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the type of the small hit game being executed when the ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period in the small hit game. The flag. By determining whether or not this V flag 203N is on at the end of the small hit game, it is identified that there was a prize in the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, and the flag set to on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. This V flag 203N is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured as follows.

In the other memory area 203Z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The scenario counter 203AA is a counter for advancing various scenarios (big hit scenario, hit scenario) that define the operation control contents of the big hit game or the small hit game, and when the big hit game or the small hit game is started. The counter value is set to "1", and then the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275) or the small hit control process (see FIG. 275) executed in the main process (see FIG. 274) of the main controller 110. Each time (see S1005 of 278) is executed, the value is added by "1". Then, when various scenarios (big hit scenario, hit scenario) are added up to the end value, "0" is reset as a counter value.

The specific controlled jack 203AB is a flag for indicating that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) executed when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type is completed, and is set to ON. This indicates that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) has been completed.

The specific controlled flag 203AB is set to on when the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) is completed (see S1212 in FIG. 276), and the flag setting status is the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275). ) (See S1118 in FIG. 275). Here, when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 203AB is set to ON (S1118: YES), when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, the first round in which the special round game is executed is It is determined that the game has been completed, and a normal round game (a round game that opens the specific winning opening 65A) for the second and subsequent rounds is executed. Then, it is set to off when the jackpot game ends (see S1307 in FIG. 277).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 239. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65A. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 272) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112A so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112A includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51A that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51B for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 251 (A), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores the variation pattern selection table 222A and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222A, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (B). As shown in FIG. 251 (B), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223A, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C, and a fluctuation start flag 223D. At least a stop type selection flag 223E, an effect counter 223F, a SW effective time counter 223G, and other memory areas 223Z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223A has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223A, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved spheres corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved sphere number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B displays the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. Special symbol 1 Stored in the reserved ball number counter 223B. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203D.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B, and the stored special symbol 1 hold ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223B, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbol is displayed in the small area DS1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved spheres on which the variable display is suspended.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 223C stores the number of reserved spheres corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 223B based on the reserved sphere command output from the main controller 110. Since it is different only in that it is done, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223D is turned on when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation start flag 223D is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2002) of the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223E is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2105 in FIG. 282), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2226 in FIG. 284). When the stop type selection flag 223E is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223F is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lottery. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time.

The SW effective time counter 223G is a storage area in which the period for which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (FIRST IN FIRST OUT) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 282) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 228). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the A1 control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 261. FIG. 257 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231A, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231A Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231A is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231A.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234A capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (DYNAMIC RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234A2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234A, a ROM controller 234B, a buffer RAM 234C, and a NOR flash memory 234D.

The NAND flash memory 234A is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234A1 to be stored and a character storage area 234A2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234A having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234A2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234A can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234A2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234A1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234B is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234A or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234B is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234A while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234B performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234A is analyzed by the ROM controller 234B and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234A. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234C is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234A. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234B has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234C. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234A (or NOR flash 234D) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234C. do. Then, the ROM controller 234B performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234C is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234A can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234B can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234A to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234A to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234D is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234A for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234A. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A is not stored in the NOR type ROM 234D, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234D1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234D1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234A) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234D1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231A to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231A, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234C from the NOR type ROM 234D while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234D. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234C and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234A, the NOR type ROM 234D is a boot program in which a predetermined number of instructions are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234A is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234A, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234A and set it in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234C from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234D. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D in the buffer RAM 234C. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234A). It is programmed to transfer to 233A or the data table storage area 233B. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234D1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234C, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233A.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234C as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1 is set in the buffer RAM 234C in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program of the storage area 234D1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1 to the buffer RAM 234C after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231A is transferred to the program storage area 233A. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 is transferred to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231A becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233A. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234A1 are stored in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233A and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234A1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231A is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233A and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233A. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed after the boot process (see S3001 in FIG. 286) stored in the program storage area 233A by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234D, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (B)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234A, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237A composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234A.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237A according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237A The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234C to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235A, the rear image area 235C, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235E and error message image area 235F, at least a variable image area 235B when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235D are provided.

The main image area 235A at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235B when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the variable image at the time of turning on the power, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3003 and S3004 in FIG. 286).

An image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on variable image area 235B. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235A to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235A at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the variable image area at power-on From the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the 235B and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed against. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235B at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235D is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235D, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball has entered the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

The character symbol area 235E is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235E to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235E of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235F is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235F, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235F in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236A, a first frame buffer 236B, and a second frame buffer 236C.

The image storage area 236A is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236A is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A via the buffer RAM 237A.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236C. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236B. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233A, a data table storage area 233B, a simple image display flag 233C, a display data table buffer 233D, a transfer data table buffer 233E, a pointer 233F, a drawing list area 233G, a time counting counter 233H, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233J and a drawing target buffer flag 233K.

The program storage area 233A is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233A. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233B is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234, according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233B. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233B. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is a big hit. The stop symbol according to the jackpot type is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of the normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the through gate 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be performed more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will also increase. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and it becomes easier for the special symbol to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the reduced working hours of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can use the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233B, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, an A blending information, a color information, and a filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The Α blending information is information for specifying a known Α blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the A-blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. For this back type, display one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"START" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 259). "END" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233B, stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and the pointer 233F is initialized. Then, the pointer 233F is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the next is based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233F, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 260. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233B.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 260). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. The NULL data meaning that is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 260).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "START" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 260, in the example of FIG. 260). In "02F0H"), "END" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233B and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233F is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 260, when the pointer 233F becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233F is "0002H", since the FULL data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236A. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236A, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233C is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233C is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235A or the power-on variable image area 235B of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 286) (see S3005 in FIG. 286). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S3305 in FIG. 288 (B)).

This simple image display flag 233C is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3301 in FIG. 288), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233C is on, a simple command determination process (see S3308 in FIG. 288 (B)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 288 (B)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S3309 of 288 (B)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233C is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 289 to 296) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233C is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170 (A)), and the simple image display flag 233C is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 170 (B)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233C is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233D stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233B. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233F by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233F one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later, which describes the contents of drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233E is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233B in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233D, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233E. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the FULL data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233E.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E while adding the pointer 233F one by one. If (that is, if the FULL data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 261) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236A.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233F is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in each buffer of the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table buffer 233E, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233F to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 288 (B). ), The pointer update process (see S7605 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233F is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233F is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and specifies a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 261) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236A. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233G is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 261, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, Α blending information, color information and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233K.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, Α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233F, the MPU 231 is the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236A to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233H is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233D, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 288 (B). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233H is decremented by 1 (see S3307 in FIG. 288 (B)). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233H becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233J stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233J is generated by the initial setting process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233J generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236A.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233J is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236A. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236A as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233J when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 235 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236A, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236A, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233K is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236B and second frame buffer 236C). When the drawing target buffer flag 233K is 0, the first frame buffer 236B is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236C is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233K is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233K, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 288 (B)) is executed, it is performed (see S8202 of FIG. 172).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236C. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236B. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the A1 control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 262 to 279. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 Mseconds in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 999, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 263 to 267.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 268. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). The details of the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

After executing the through gate passing process, the V inlet passing process is executed (S108), and then the V passing process (S109) is executed. Here, the details of the V inlet passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271.

After the V-passing process (S109) is executed, the launch control process is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51A detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51B for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol are displayed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and special. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: YES), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: NO), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E (the number of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is not 0 (S204: YES), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E from the hold ball number command, and the extracted values are used in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 264.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is 0 (S204: NO), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is 0 (S209: NO), that is, if there is no reserved ball for newly starting the special symbol variation, the book is used as it is. End the process.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is not 0 (S209: YES), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is subtracted (S210), and the process of S210 is performed. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: YES), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: NO), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: YES), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 264. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. Will be. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is used. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, one of the small hits A to E is determined according to the value of the small hit type counter C5.

In this embodiment, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is configured to notify the player of the lottery result (determination result of each type of counter) of the special symbol this time. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on and the case is off. The red LED and the green LED are turned on.

When the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot A is determined, the blue LED is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to indicate the jackpot A (for example, the alphabet "A"). When the jackpot B is determined, the lamp is lit in an aspect indicating the jackpot B (for example, an embodiment imitating the alphabet "B"), and when the jackpot C is determined, the jackpot is lit. It is lit in a mode indicating C (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "C"), and when the jackpot D is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating the jackpot D (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "D"). Let me.

Further, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the red LED is lit in a manner corresponding to each small hit type (small hit A to small hit E) as in the case of winning the big hit described above. Let me. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, a mode (color corresponding to the lottery result of a special symbol) showing the content of each hit type so that the player can grasp each hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. , The mode formed from the lighting mode corresponding to each hit type) is configured to light the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, but other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery result or Even when the determined hit types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Further, in the present embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol this time and the determined winning type. However, other configurations may be used, and for example, it may be configured to display that the lottery results of the special symbols are different in a lighting mode divided to the extent that the player can discriminate. ..

After the processing of S215 is completed, it is determined whether the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is a big hit of the special symbol (this lottery result). S216). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S216: YES), a V prize will be awarded in order to allow the ball to win a prize in the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65A, V winning opening 624) based on the big hit type. An opening scenario for opening and closing the door 600 is set (S217), and then the start setting of the jackpot (setting of the jackpot such as 15 rounds) is executed according to the jackpot type determined in this jackpot (S218). ).

After finishing the processing of S218, next, the jackpot start flag 203H and the jackpot medium flag 203I are set to on (S219), the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is set to 0 (S220), and the stop command is set (S225). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: NO), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S221), and it is a small hit. If it is determined that (S221: YES), the small hit start setting process (S222) is executed, and then the above-mentioned S225 process is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the small hit start setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 265.

In the process of S221, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (out of order) (S221: NO), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203G is 1 or more (S223). .. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203G is not 1 or more (0) (S223: NO), the above-mentioned processing of S225 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203G is 1 or more (S223: YES), that is, when the time saving state is currently in progress, the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is subtracted by 1 (S224), and the time saving medium counter 203G is subtracted by 1 (S224). Execute the process and end this process.

Next, the special symbol change start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 263) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, a lottery for "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol miss" ( This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 while performing the hit / fail determination).

In the special symbol change start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203B). , The first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S231). Next, the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number table 202A1, special symbol 2 random number table 202A2) corresponding to the special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). (S232), the process proceeds to S233.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is set to the special symbol 1 random number table 202A1 (see FIG. 242 (B)). Compare each with the four random numbers set in. As described above, four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random number values that are the jackpots of the first special symbol, and the acquired values of the random number counter C1 per first hit and the random numbers that are the jackpots. If it matches the numerical value, it is judged to be a big hit of a special symbol. Similarly, when the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value “4” which is a small hit set in the special symbol 1 random number table 202A1 (see FIG. 242 (B)) match, Judged as a small hit of a special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined to be small hits is different. With this configuration, the probability that the lottery result will be a small hit can be different depending on the type of special symbol, and the player is motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with the higher small hit probability. It is possible to play a game in a targeted manner.

In this embodiment, the random number table 202A for the first hit is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win the small hit, but only one of the special symbols is a small hit. The first random number table 202A may be set so as to win. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202A1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random number value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and is special only to the special symbol 2 random number table 202A2 corresponding to the second special symbol. It is advisable to set a random number value that is a small hit of the symbol. With this configuration, the benefits (small hit games) that can be given to the player can be different depending on the type of the special symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot of the special symbol is made to correspond to the predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and the type of the special symbol is set within the other range (4 to 999). However, as other configurations, for example, a part of the range (for example, 0 to 2) that is a big hit in the first special symbol is set to a small hit in the second special symbol. It may be set as a hit range.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202A are used to draw a special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss). As a configuration other than the above, a lottery of special symbols may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. For example, whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit using the first random number table. Is configured to determine whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit using the second random number table when the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit. You may. By performing the lottery of the special symbol using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the lottery result of the special symbol can be set more randomly, and the fraudulent act of manipulating the lottery result of the special symbol can be suppressed. ..

In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is used when the lottery of the special symbol is performed, but other configurations may be used, for example, the value of a plurality of random number counters and the first hit. A special symbol lottery may be performed using the random number table 202A. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter, and the lottery result of the special symbol is small based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

Returning to FIG. 264, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S232 is a big hit of the special symbol (S233). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S233: YES), the jackpot type is acquired based on the jackpot type selection table corresponding to the special symbol type corresponding to this special symbol lottery (S234). The display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (S235), the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S236), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined this time is determined. A command is set (S243), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S233: NO), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S237), and it is a small hit. (S237: YES), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table according to the type of the special symbol corresponding to this special symbol lottery (S238), and the special symbol and the small hit type are acquired. The display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the above is set, the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter, and the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the small hit fluctuation pattern determined this time is set (S243). This process ends.

Further, in the processing of S237, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S237: NO), that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order, the outlier corresponding to the type of the special symbol. The time display mode is set (S241), the variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S242), and the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of disconnection determined this time is set (S243). This process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, whereas the special symbol is determined. If the lottery result is out of the question, the fluctuation pattern is configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the easier it is to determine the variation pattern with a short variation time. As a result, the period until the lottery result of the special symbol does not give the player a privilege and the lottery result (missing) is displayed can be shortened as the number of reserved balls increases, so that it is executed per unit time. In order to increase the number of lottery of special symbols to be performed, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen the time for changing one special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the special symbol does not change during the game. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to be different based on the number of reserved balls at the timing when the process of the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, but other than that, for example, a special symbol is used. It may be configured to shorten the fluctuation time set in the running fluctuation pattern on condition that the number of reserved balls becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more during the fluctuation. .. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is different based on the number of reserved balls only when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the reserved balls are held. The fluctuation pattern may be different based on the number, or the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time may be easily determined as the number of reserved balls increases. Further, the number of reserved balls referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern may be a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the first. Of the two special symbols, only the value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol on which the special symbol variation start processing is preferentially executed may be used, or the special symbol on the side subject to the special symbol variation start processing executed this time may be used. Only the value of the number of reserved balls of the symbol may be used.

Next, the small hit start setting process (S222) will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S222). In this small hit start setting process, a solenoid (V inlet solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 600 when a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery, and a ball passing through the opened V winning door 600 are V. The first staying member 622D (see FIG. 231), the movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231), the second staying member 622B (see FIG. 231), and the rotary distribution member provided in the flow path flowing down toward the winning opening 624. A process of setting a scenario for driving a solenoid for operating each of 621 (see FIG. 231) is executed.

In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, a scenario (hit scenario A) corresponding to the set small hit type is set based on the small hit scenario table 202AB (see FIG. 248 (B)) (S241). .. Next, the small hit type corresponding to the small hit type determined as the big hit type value at the time of passing V is set (S242), the start of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S243), and the small hit start flag 203J is set. , The small hit medium flag 203K is set to ON (S244), and this process is terminated.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing a start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) in the present embodiment. This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the starting winning is won. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a value.

When the start winning process (FIGS. 266, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S301: YES), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S302). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S303).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S301: NO), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than 4. If not (S303: NO), the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S301: YES) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203D is less than 4 (S303: YES), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203D is added by 1 (S304). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D changed by the calculation is set (S305).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S305, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of is stored in the first area of the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A of the RAM 203 (S306). In the process of S306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes of S307 to S312, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 for the processing of S301 to S306. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S307 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S307: NO), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S312 (S313). After that, this process ends.

Next, the look-ahead process (S313) will be described with reference to FIG. 267. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S313). When the look-ahead process (S313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new prize (S321). If there is no new prize (S321: NO), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize (S321: YES), then it is determined whether or not the prize is a prize of the first special symbol (S322).

If it is determined in the process of S322 that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322: YES), it is based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table, and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table. As a result of the lottery, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S323), and the process proceeds to S325.

On the other hand, in the process of S322, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S322: NO), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table are displayed. Based on the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S324), and the process proceeds to S325. In the process of S325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the above-mentioned S323 or S324 process is set ( S325). Then, this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 268. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and displays the variation of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory 640A, and the like. This is a process for controlling.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S401). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the process of displaying the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the process of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640A. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S401: YES), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S401: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S402: NO), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S403). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is larger than 0 (S404), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is 0 (S404 :). NO), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is not 0 (S404: YES), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is subtracted by 1 (S405).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C is shifted (S406). In the process of S406, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C is acquired (S407).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203G of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S408). The time-saving / medium-time counter 203G is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203G is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time reduction counter 203G is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time reduction counter 203G is 1 or more (S408: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S409). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S409: YES), the process proceeds to S411.

In the processing of S409, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S409: NO), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S410). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 8 (B)).

In the process of S408, when the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203G is 0 (S408: NO), the process proceeds to the process of S411. In the processing of S411, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S407 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S411). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,29 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 8 (B)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S410 or S411 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S412), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S412: YES). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S413). In the process of S413, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is 1 or more (S414), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is 1 or more (S414: YES), the special symbol is currently being a big hit. Whether or not it is determined (S415). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S415: YES), the process proceeds to S417.

In the processing of S415, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S415: NO), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period is set to 1 second, the number of opening times is set to 2 (S416), and the process proceeds to S419. In the process of S414, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203G is 0 (S414: NO), the process proceeds to the process of S417. In the processing of S417, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640A is set to 0.2 seconds, and the pachinko machine 10 is set to 0.2 seconds. The number of times of opening is set to 1 (S417), and the process proceeds to S419.

In the process of S412, when it is determined that the symbol is out of place (S412: NO), the display mode at the time of out of place is set (S418). In the process of S418, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S419.

In the process of S419, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is 1 or more (S419), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is 1 or more (S419: YES), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S420), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203G is 0 (S419: NO), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S421), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640A is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: YES), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S422). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S420 or the process of S421 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S422, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S422: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S422, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S422: YES), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S423). In the processing of S423, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a hit and the display mode is set by the processing of S413, the "○" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit up). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S418, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S423, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S413 or the process of S418.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S424). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S424: YES), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640A is set (S425), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640A is set by the process of S425, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed, the electric accessory 640A The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S416 or the process of S417 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S424, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S424: NO), the process of S425 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 269. This through gate passing process determines whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and when the sphere has passed, the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 is acquired and held. It is a process for.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S431). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S431: YES), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S433).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S431: NO), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S433: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F is less than 4 (S433: YES), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F The value (M) of is added by 1 (S434). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S435), and this process is terminated.

When storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty hold area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F is referred to, and the value is used. If it is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the V inlet passing process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

In the V inlet passage process (S108), it is first determined whether the first retention sensor 622F is on (S501), and if it is not on (S501: NO), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first retention sensor 622F is on (S501: YES), then, during the V winning opening opening period, that is, the first round of the jackpot game in which the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type. Whether or not the player is in the round game or the small hit game is determined based on whether the set scenario is the hit scenario A202AA2 (S502). In the process of S502, if it is determined that the V winning opening opening period is in progress (S502: YES), a V entrance passage command is set (S503), and this process is terminated. If it is not in the small hit (S502: NO), it means that the game ball has entered the V winning device 620 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set (S504) and this process is performed. finish.

The V inlet passage command set in the process of S503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing the effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the V winning device 620.

Next, the V-passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing a V-passing process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

When the V-passing process (S109) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V-passing has occurred, that is, whether the game ball has won the V winning opening 624 (S601), and if it is determined that the winning has been won (S601: YES). ), Then it is determined whether the present is in the V valid period (S602). In the process of S602, when the value of the scenario counter 203AA for counting the progress of the scenario (hit scenario B222AA3) set in the small hit game or the big hit type B is "1" to "501", It is determined that the V valid period is in effect, and in other cases, it is determined that the V valid period is not in effect.

In the process of S602, if it is determined that the V valid period is in progress (S602: YES), then it is determined whether or not the current small hit game is in progress (S603), and if it is in the small hit game (S603). : YES), acquire the V-passing jackpot type value corresponding to the small hit type of this small hit game (S604), set the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (S605), and set the time reduction / medium counter to 0. (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

That is, in the processes of S604 to S606, the process for executing the big hit game is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins the V winning opening 624 during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the process of S603, if it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (the big hit game corresponding to the big hit type B is in progress) (S603: NO), it is necessary to perform a new process for executing the big hit game. Since there is no such thing, the processing of S604 to S606 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S607.

In the process of S607, a V-pass command is set (S607), and this process is terminated. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control process of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V passage command, for example, when the V passage command is received during the small hit game, the V challenge executed during the small hit game is successful, and the small hit game is followed. , Perform an effect to show that the jackpot game is executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when the V passing command is received during the small hit game is executed.

On the other hand, if the V-passing command is not received at the predetermined timing during the small hit game, a disappointing effect is executed to indicate that the V-challenge has failed, and the V-passing command is received at the predetermined timing during the big hit game. If not, the revival effect from the unfortunate effect is executed, and the player is notified that the jackpot game will be continuously executed.

In the present embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that the game ball has won a prize is set in the V winning opening 624, but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening 624. It may be configured to set a command for indicating that (for example, a V non-passing command). In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, the only game ball that can be entered in the V winning opening 624 is the game ball (for example, one) that is retained by the second retention member 622B, so that the second retention member 622B The game ball passes through the left discharge path 623A and the right discharge path 623B (see FIG. 229) where the game balls that have flowed down from the rotary distribution member 621 can flow down, as well as a number measuring means that measures the number of game balls that are stagnant. The above-mentioned V non-passing command may be set when the number of game balls measured by the number measuring means is detected by the detecting means. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game ball is clogged in the V winning device 620.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if it is determined that the current period is not in the V valid period (S602: NO), an error command is set (S607), and this process is terminated. By processing S607, a state in which the game ball has won the V winning opening 624 outside the V valid period, that is, when a game in which the game ball is illegally won in the V winning opening 624 is performed, or the V winning opening is performed. It is possible to promptly notify the outside when a defect of the member attached to the mouth 624 (for example, the second staying member 622B) has occurred.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S801). That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: YES), the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side is used. A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: NO), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: NO). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, in this case as well, the payout initialization device 111, which is the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, is initialized. Send a command (S912).

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: YES), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: NO), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. The payout initialization command is transmitted (S912). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner (S914). In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, the power off occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S907: YES), the data is backed up to the RAM 203. Clear the power failure occurrence information while retaining the data (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909). Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Then, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S910), and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S911). Next, the interrupt is permitted and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 Mseconds, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 274), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 263), start winning processing (see FIG. 266), V entrance passage processing (see FIG. 270), and V passage processing (see FIG. 271) can be input to the voice lamp control device. Send to 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and various commands set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 278) described later are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. .. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65A is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65A has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65A. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65A is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65A is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

Next, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed. The small hit control process (S1005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 278. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S425 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S416 or the processing of S417 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S236, the process of S240, or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. It starts in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4S. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S236, the process of S240, or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264) is completed, the first symbol display update process is performed. 1 Stop symbol (first symbol) in the display mode set by the processing of S235, S239, S241 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 264) after ending the variation display executed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. ) Is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S420 or the process of S421 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S423 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the processing of S413 or the processing of S418 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 268). )do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: NO), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 Msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: YES), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010: NO), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1009, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: YES), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer has a predetermined value (in the process of initial setting). By setting the initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot can be executed and the variable winning device 65 can be executed. This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65A.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 263) or the processing of S1406 of the small hit ending control processing (see FIG. 279) described later is executed, and it is determined whether or not the big hit scenario is set. do. That is, the result of the lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit, and the big hit scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big hit scenario is based on passing through a specific area (V winning opening 624) during the small hit game. Determine if it has been set. If it is determined in the process of S1101 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1101: YES), the jackpot start flag 203H is set to off, and then the set scenario is that of jackpot B. Whether or not it is determined (S1102).

If it is determined in the process of S1102 that the jackpot scenario of jackpot B is set (S1102: YES), it is determined whether or not the specific controlled flag 203AB is on (S1117).

If it is determined in the process of S1117 that the specific controlled flag 203AB is off (S1117: NO), the process of the specific jackpot control process (S1118) is executed and the jackpot control process is terminated. The processing of this specific jackpot control processing (S1118) will be described later with reference to FIG. 276.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a jackpot scenario other than the jackpot B is set in the processing of S1102 (S1102: NO), or when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 233AB is turned on in the processing of S1117 (S1117: YES) adds 1 to the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA (S1103), and determines whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is the timing of the opening start of the jackpot scenario (S1104). For example, when the jackpot scenario A is set (not shown), the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is 1. Determine.

In the process of S1104, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is the value corresponding to the opening start (in the case of the jackpot scenario A, the counter value is 1) (S1104: YES), the jackpot opening command is issued. Set (S1105) and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the opening start (S1104: NO), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the round start (if the jackpot scenario A). , It is determined whether the counter value is 1251) (S1106).

If it is determined in the processing of S1106 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: YES), the specific winning opening 65A is set to be opened in the processing of S1107 (specific winning). The specific winning opening solenoid is set to be turned on so that the opening / closing door 65B of the opening 65A is opened), then a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1108), and this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: NO), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65A is satisfied. (S1109). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening 65A in the present embodiment, 29 seconds have passed since the specific winning opening 65A was opened, or after the specific winning opening 65A was opened, a predetermined number of balls ( For example, when 10 pieces) are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65A is satisfied (S1109: YES), the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is set to the counter value corresponding to the end of the round currently being executed. It is updated to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from (S1110), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next and subsequent jackpot control processes. ..

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls in the specific winning opening 65A, that is, the specific winning opening 65A is closed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (counter value update). If this is the case, the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is configured to be updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed (the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process). It is configured as follows).

By doing so, the operation control executed by a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) (for example, the operation control that closes the specific winning opening when a predetermined number of balls win a prize) becomes a big hit scenario. It is possible to execute based on. Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65A, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario when the predetermined time elapses, and when the predetermined number of winnings are received, the operation is not based on the jackpot scenario. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as executing motion control, which has the effect of facilitating the design and preventing the situation where both motion controls are mixed.

If it is determined in the processing of S1109 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65A is not satisfied (S1109: NO), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the end of the round (whether it is the jackpot scenario A). For example, it is determined whether the counter value is 8750) (S1111).

If it is determined in the processing of S1111 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: YES), the specific winning opening 65A is set to be closed in the processing of S1112 (specific winning). The specific winning opening solenoid 65F2 is set to off so that the opening / closing door 65B of the opening 65A is closed), and this process is terminated. The discrimination process from S1106 to S1111 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1111, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: NO), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the value corresponding to the start of the interval (big hit). In the case of scenario A, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1113). If it is determined in the process of S1113 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1113: YES), an interval command is set (S1114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1113, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1113: NO), the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is executed next. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period in the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the change of the special symbol. ..

The contents of this jackpot ending control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 277. When the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is completed, an operation process based on another scenario is executed (S1116), and this process is terminated. Here, as the processing of S1116, for example, when the V distribution motor 620A for driving the rotary distribution member 621 is driven and controlled based on the jackpot scenario, the operation processing of the motor is executed.

Next, the specific jackpot control process (S1118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 276. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing this specific jackpot control process (S1118). This specific jackpot control process (S1118) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and is a process executed when the jackpot type B is set as the jackpot type.

In the specific jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the set scenario is the hit scenario A (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the hit scenario A is set (S1201: YES), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203AA (S1202), and the operation corresponding to the value of the added scenario counter 203AA is performed. Execute (S1203).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203AA, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning scenario A (S1204). If it is determined in the process of S1204 that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario A (S1204: NO), the process returns to the jackpot control process as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the hit scenario A (S1204: YES), the value of the scenario counter 203AA is set to 0 (S1205), and the value stays in the second retention member 622B. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (retained ball) that is playing (S1206).

If it is determined in the process of S1206 that there is a stagnant ball in the first stagnant member 622D, a hit scenario B is set (S1207), and the process proceeds to the process of S1209. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no stagnation ball in the first stagnation member 622D, the hit scenario C is set (S1208), and the process proceeds to S1209. Thereby, at the end timing of the hit scenario A, the type of the hit scenario set thereafter can be changed depending on whether or not the second stay member 622B has a stay ball.

In the process of S1209, an operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203AA is executed (S1209), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning scenario B or C (S1210).

In the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the hit scenario B or C (S1210: YES), the jackpot scenario B is set (S1211), and the specific controlled flag 233AB is set to ON (S1211). S1212), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario B or C (S1210: NO), the processes of S1211 and S1212 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the hit scenario A is not set (S1201: NO), then it is determined whether or not the hit scenario B or C is set (S1213). If it is determined in the process of S1213 that there is a setting of the winning scenario B or C (S1213: YES), the process proceeds to the process of S1209. As a result, when the winning scenario A is set, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is executed, and when the winning scenario B or C is set thereafter, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is skipped and the processing of S1209 is performed. You can do the following:

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1213 that neither of the winning scenarios B and C is set (S1213: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 277. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1115). This jackpot ending control process (S1115) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the ending start (counter value is 40751 in the case of the jackpot scenario A) (S1301). If it is determined in the process of S1301 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1301: YES), the jackpot ending command is set (S1302), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the ending start (S1301: NO), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the ending end (if the jackpot scenario A). , It is determined whether the counter value is 42000) (S1303). If it is determined in the process of S1303 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1303: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the ending end (S1303: YES), the jackpot scenario setting is cleared (S1304), and then the scenario counter. Reset 203AA to 0 (S1305). That is, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is terminated.

Next, the jackpot middle flag 203I is set to off (S1306), and the specific controlled flag 203AB is set to off (S1307). Then, the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203G corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S1308), the jackpot end command is set (S1309), and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 278. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1005). This small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), and the setting of a command for executing various effects according to the small hit on the voice lamp control device 113 and the V entry ball. This is a process for controlling the operation of the V-winning solenoid for opening and closing the V-winning door 600 attached to the mouth 600A and the flow path solenoid 209B. In this embodiment, since the scenario set during the small hit game is the same as the specific big hit control process (S1118) described above with reference to FIG. 276, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the hit scenario A is set (S1401). In the process of S1401, when it is determined that the hit scenario A is set (S1401: YES), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203AA (S1402), and the operation corresponding to the value of the added scenario counter 203AA is performed. Execute (S1403).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203AA, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning scenario A (S1404). If it is determined in the process of S1404 that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario A (S1404: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the hit scenario A (S1404: YES), the value of the scenario counter 203AA is set to 0 (S1405), and the value stays in the second retention member 622B. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (retained ball) that is playing (S1406).

If it is determined in the process of S1406 that there is a stagnant ball in the second stagnant member 622B, a hit scenario B is set (S1407), and the process proceeds to the process of S1409. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no stagnation ball in the second stagnation member 622B, the hit scenario C is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. As a result, at the end timing of the hit scenario A, it is possible to set an effect according to whether or not there is a stagnant ball in the second stagnant member 622B.

In the process of S1409, the operation according to the value of the scenario counter 203AA is executed (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning scenario B or C (S1410).

If it is determined in the process of S1410 that it is the end timing of the hit scenario B or C (S1410: YES), the small hit ending control process is executed (S1411), and this process is terminated. The details of this small hit ending control process (S1411) will be described later with reference to FIG. 279.

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario B or C (S1410: NO), the process of S1411 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S1401, when it is determined that the hit scenario A is not set (S1401: NO), then it is determined whether or not the hit scenario B or C is set (S1412). If it is determined in the process of S1412 that there is a setting of the winning scenario B or C (S1412: YES), the process proceeds to the process of S1409. As a result, when the winning scenario A is set, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is executed, and when the winning scenario B or C is set thereafter, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is skipped and the processing of S1409 is performed. You can do the following:

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412 that neither of the winning scenarios B and C is set (S1412: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the small hit ending control process (S1411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 279. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing this small hit ending control process (S1411). This small hit ending control process (S1411) is a process executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 278).

In the small hit ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the ending start (the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is 751) (S1501). If it is determined in the process of S1501 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1501: YES), the small hit end command is set (S1502), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the ending start (S1501: NO), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the ending end (if the scenario counter 203AA). , It is determined whether the counter value is 1500) (S1503). If it is determined in the process of S1503 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1503: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1503: YES), the setting of the small hit scenario is cleared and the scenario counter 203AA is reset to 0 (S1504). Then, the process proceeds to S1505.

In S1505, it is determined whether the V flag 203N is set to ON (S1505). If it is determined in the process of S1505 that the V flag 203N is not set to ON (S1505: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203N is set to ON (S1505: YES), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203N set in S705 of FIG. 30 is performed. Set (S1506). Then, the jackpot start flag 203H and the jackpot medium flag 203I are set to on (S1507), the V flag 203N is set to off (S1508), and this process is terminated.

Since all the small hit games are set as one round game in this embodiment, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds and the interval period (round). Although it does not have a scenario corresponding to the interval period), when a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-mentioned big hit game may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit scenario is set for the period during which the small hit game is executed. For example, after the small hit game is completed, until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. You may set a small hit scenario for the interval. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V-passing valid period until 1 second has elapsed after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period set across different gaming states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game, the big hit game corresponding to the preset big hit type corresponding to the small hit is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 may be acquired based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening 624 to determine the jackpot type.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the A1 embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 280 to 285, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 280. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S2018 (see FIG. 281) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 281, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2015 in FIG. 281), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2018. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S2018 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1402: NO), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1514 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAH" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAH", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAH", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: YES), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: NO), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAH" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: YES), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1516 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAH" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: NO), and the data shifts to S1408.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: YES), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S2018. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, "0FFH" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFH", and if it is "0FFH", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFH", then "55H", "0AAH", and "00H". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: YES), the keyword "55AAH" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAH" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: NO), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S2017 in FIG. 281). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2018 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: YES), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1411) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1408 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S1408 is performed via the processing of S1404 to S1406. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: NO), S1409, which is the clear processing of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the processing is shifted to S1410, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S1410), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S1409 is that when the processing of S1408 is reached from S1404 via the processing of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 Msecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2001 this time was executed (S2001), and 1 Msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2001: NO), the process proceeds to S2013 without performing the processes of S2002 to S2012. In the processing of S2001, whether or not 1M seconds have elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S2002 to S2012, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1M seconds). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S2014 and the command determination process of S2013 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2014 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 Msec or more has elapsed in the process of S2001 (S2001: YES), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2003 to S2012 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2002). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2008 described later (S2003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2004). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the processing of S2005 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2007). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 285, but it monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player to enhance the effect is pressed, and the frame button 22 It is a process to set to perform the corresponding effect when the input of is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 285.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2008), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2009, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the various counter update processes of S2011, the various counters used in the control process of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are updated. In the effect update process of S2012, an update process such as an effect is executed.

After the effect update process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2013). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 282.

Next, the process proceeds to S2014. In the process of S2014, the variable display setting process is executed (S2014). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 284.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: YES), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2017), and the power-off process is executed (S2018). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S2019), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: NO), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2016: NO), the process returns to S2001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2016: YES), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2013). This command determination process (S2013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process (FIG. 280, S2013), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2101). When the variation pattern command is received (S2101: YES), the variation start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2102), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2103). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S2101: NO), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2104). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2104: YES), the stop type selection flag 223E of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2105), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2106), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2104: NO), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2107). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S2107: YES), the reserved ball numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball is extracted. It is stored in the number counter 223B and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C, respectively. When the process of S2108 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2107, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S2107: NO), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2109). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2109: YES), the winning information corresponding to the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223A (S2110). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2109: NO), it is determined whether or not a winning-related command regarding a big hit, a small hit, or the like has been received (S2111). When it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S211: YES), the hit-related process is executed (S2112). The hit-related process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 283, but the process based on each command output from the main control device 110 is executed in the big hit or the small hit. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S2111, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S211: NO), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2115), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed by the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it can be sent to.

Next, the hit-related processing (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 283. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this hit-related process (S2112). This hit-related process (S2112) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 282) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hit-related process (S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S2201). When the jackpot start command is received, the jackpot start command for display is set (S2202). Although omitted, when the voice lamp control device 113 also receives the jackpot start command, the necessary processing for starting the jackpot of various lamps, voices, and the like is executed. After that, this process ends.

If it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2201: NO), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2203). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2203: YES), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the received command (S2204). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2203: NO), it is determined whether the jackpot end command has been received (S2205). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S2205: YES), the jackpot end command for display indicating that the jackpot end timing is set is set (S2206). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S2205: NO), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S2207). When it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S2207: YES), the small hit start command for display indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game is set (S2208). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S2207: NO), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S2209). When it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S2209: YES), the small hit end command for display indicating that it is the end timing of the small hit game is set (S2210). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2209: NO), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211). When it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211: YES), a display V entrance passage command indicating that the first retention sensor is on is set (S2212). After that, this process ends. The fact that the first retention sensor is on indicates that the game ball has entered the V entry port 600A.

When it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S2211: NO), it is determined whether the V passage command has been received (S2213). When it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2213: YES), the game ball passes through the V winning opening 624 and the V effect (the effect of displaying a character such as "V" on the third symbol display device 81). A display V effect command indicating that it is time to execute is set (S2214). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the variation display setting process (S2014) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2014). This variation display setting process (S2014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2221). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is not on (that is, it is off) (S2221: NO), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the process of S2226 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223D is on (S2221: YES), the variation start flag 223D is turned off (S2222), and then the variation pattern is processed in S2003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM223 (S2223).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2224). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the process of S2225, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223E provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2225). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is not on (that is, it is off) (S2225: NO), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, and this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is on (S2225: YES), the stop type selection flag 223E is turned off (S2226), and then in the process of S2006 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2227). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2228), and the process proceeds to S2229. In the process of S2229, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2229). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2007) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2007). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2007) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, in order to enhance the effect on the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute the effect according to the operation of the player.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIGS. 285 and S2007), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is larger than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time (SW effective time counter 223G> 0) is set (S2301). .. As for the selected fluctuation pattern, the SW effective time is automatically set at the timing corresponding to the case where the effect of the fluctuation pattern using the frame button 22 is selected, as shown in FIG. 235. Set. When it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S2301: YES), the value of the SW effective time counter 223G is subtracted from the value corresponding to the passage and updated (S2302). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S2303). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S2303; YES), a display chance eye command is set based on the set fluctuation pattern and the pressing timing. By this display chance eye command, a re-variation (see FIG. 235) is executed on the third symbol display device 81, or a temporary stop display of the shaking fluctuation is executed again without re-variation. The SW effective time counter 223G is reset (set to 0) (S2305). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223G is 0 in the processing of S2301 (S2301: NO), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the processing of S2303 (S2301: NO). ), The process of S2306 is executed. In the process of S2306, other processes related to the SW effect (background change, etc.) are executed.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 286 to 296, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 286, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231A provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D is set in the buffer RAM 234C. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234A and set in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234C from its read, so the MPU231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234D, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately becomes the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234C, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 287. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234A capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234A has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234A. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are stored in the program storage area 233A and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233B and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D and set in the buffer RAM 234C according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234A1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233A (S3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A (S3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A by the processing of S3101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231A to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233A by the processing of S3102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231A is set by the process of S3102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231A. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233A among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B in predetermined amounts (S3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233B.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3104), the instruction pointer 231A is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, after the boot processing (see S3001 in FIG. 286) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) (S3105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S3001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233A and the data table storage area 233B. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233A after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234A1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234D, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 287, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233A by the process of S3101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233A by the processing of S3101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S3102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231A. Then, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233A.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233A by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233A. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A to the instruction pointer 231A is performed in S3101. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the process of S3102, the process of S3103 to S3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234D1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233A at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233A. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234D1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234D1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234D1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3103 to S3105 without performing the processes of S3101 and S3102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233A, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233A is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 286. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 (S3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process (S3002), after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is displayed so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Instructs the execution of image drawing and display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235A at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235A at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235A.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235A when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235A is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235B when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S3004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235B, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235B when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235B when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235B is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3004, then the simple image display flag 233C Is turned on (S3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, in the transfer setting process described later (see S3305 in FIG. 288 (B)), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer to the RAM 235 is executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233C transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (B)), a simple command determination process (FIG. (See S3308 in 288 (B)) and the simple display setting process (see S3309 in FIG. 288 (B)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed, can be obtained. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and a voice lamp control device was instructed by the main control device 110 to start the variation effect. When the variation pattern command for display is received, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at the time of turning on the power can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Since is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the flash memory, so that the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S3005, the interrupt permission is set (S3006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 288 (A). FIG. 288 (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 288 (B). FIG. 288 (B) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 261) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 288 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233C is on (S3301), and the simple image display flag 233C is not on, that is, If it is off (S3301: NO), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S3302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233D, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233E.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296.

In the display setting process (S3303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the command determination process (S3302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233D. Since the details of this display setting process are the same as the display setting process (see FIGS. 167 to 168) of the first control example, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the display setting process (S3303) is executed, the task process is then executed (S3304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3303) or the simple display setting process (S3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233C is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. Since the details of the transfer setting process are the same as the transfer setting process (see FIGS. 170 and 171) of the first control example, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S3306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3305), which are determined in the task process (S3304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 261 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Since the details of the drawing process are the same as the drawing process of the first control example (see FIG. 172), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process (S3302), the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to D, front / rear out reach, front / rear out reach, complete out of order). The stop type table corresponding to (chance) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the simple image display flag 233C is ON (S3301: YES), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3309) is executed to shift to the process of S3304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 289, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3401: NO), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: YES), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S3403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3404: YES), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3405), the process returns to the process of S3401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (A). FIG. 290 (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233B to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233D (S3501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233D.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233D as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233D is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S3503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S3504), and the pointer. Initialize 233F to 0 (S3505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233F initialized by the process of S3505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of S3501. , The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233E is processed by S3502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236A of.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the clock counter 233H whose time data is set by the process of S3504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 289. In the processing of S3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3404: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3406). If there is a stop type command for display (S3406: YES), the stop type command process is executed (S3407), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (B). FIG. 290 (B) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A to D, front / rear off reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. The third symbol display device 81 is determined (S3601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (B)) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed in is finally set (S3602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S3603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235D of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, but before the drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transmitted from the character ROM 234. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234A, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, the display stop type command for two or more is not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S3602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 289. In the processing of S3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3406: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3408), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S3408: YES), the rear image change command process is executed (S3409), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 291 (A). FIG. 291 (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (see FIG. 171). S3701). Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other rear images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3702. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing (S3304), when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S3702 is specified. From, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 289. In the processing of S3408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S3408: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3410), and there is an error command. If (S3410: YES), error command processing is executed (S3411), and the process returns to S3401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S3411) will be described with reference to FIG. 291 (B). FIG. 291 (B) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3802). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3802, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 289. In the processing of S3410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3410: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3412), and there is a hit-related command. If (S3412: YES), the hit-related command process is executed (S3413), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, the details of the hit-related command processing (S3413) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing this hit-related command processing.

In this hit-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 292, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command among the hit-related commands (S3901), and if there is a display jackpot start command, there is one. (S3901: YES), the jackpot start command process is executed (S3902), and the process proceeds to the process of S3903.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S3902) will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (A). FIG. 293 (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing. This jackpot start command process executes the process corresponding to the display jackpot start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot start command processing, first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the received jackpot start command for display is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S3921). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table set in S3921 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3922).

Then, based on the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3921, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S3923), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3924). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3925), the jackpot start command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this jackpot start command process, in the display setting process, the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of S3921 while updating the pointer 233F initialized by the process of S3924. Extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F from, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer is processed by S3922. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted from the transfer data table set in 233E, and the sprite image data required in the set jackpot start display data table is normally used in advance from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236A of the video RAM 236.

Further, when this jackpot start command process is executed, the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. As a result, the image data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the jackpot start effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (big hit start effect, round effect, big hit end effect) is caused by the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the effect to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the jackpot start effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends, so that the first round is set. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, it is often from the end of the jackpot start effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation has stopped due to the waiting time.

Further, the display jackpot end command for instructing the start of the jackpot end effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed, so that the display jackpot ends. If the image data required for the jackpot end effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the end command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the jackpot end effect. There is a risk that the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display jackpot start command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is started from there, and the variable display of the jackpot ends on the third symbol display device 81. By then, the transfer of data required for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is controlled to be completed. As a result, when the jackpot start effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81. Further, when all the round effects are completed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot end effect can be started immediately on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player may be worried that the operation has not stopped. It does not make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the jackpot end effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the jackpot start effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes the jackpot. As a result, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the big hit start effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is asked whether the operation is stopped. It does not cause anxiety or discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3901, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S3901: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the hit-related commands (S3903), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S3903: YES), the round number command process is executed (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3906.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3904) will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (B). FIG. 293 (B) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233B, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233D (S3931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3932).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S3933), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3934). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3935), the round number command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3903: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot end command among the hit-related commands (S3905), and the display is performed. If there is a jackpot end command (S3905: YES), the jackpot end command process is executed (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3907.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S3906) will be described with reference to FIG. 294 (A). FIG. 294 (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command process. This jackpot end command process executes the process corresponding to the display jackpot end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot end command processing, first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot end effect indicated by the jackpot end command for display is determined, and the determined jackpot end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233B. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233D (S3941). Next, the contents are cleared by writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3942). The jackpot end display data table set by the process of S3941 may be discriminated. Specifically, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the jackpot end display data table set by the process of S3941 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other jackpot end display data table is set to off. Thereby, by referring to this data table discrimination flag, the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D in the process such as the display setting process corresponds to the display mode of which jackpot end effect. Can be easily determined.

Next, based on the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3941, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S3943), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3944). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3945), the jackpot end command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3905, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command (S3905: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command among the hit-related commands (S3907). If there is a small hit start command for display (S3907: YES), the small hit start command process is executed (S3908), and then the process proceeds to S3909.

Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S3908) will be described with reference to FIG. 294 (B). FIG. 294 (B) is a flowchart showing the small hit start command process. This small hit start command process executes the process corresponding to the display small hit start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit start command processing, first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received small hit start command for display is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S3951). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the small hit start display data table set in S3951 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3952).

Then, based on the small hit start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S3953), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3954). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3955), the small hit start command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this small hit start command process, the display setting process updates the pointer 233F initialized by the process of S3954, and displays the small hit start set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of S3951. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted from the data table, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data is transferred by the processing of S3952. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table buffer 233E, and the sprite image data required in the set small hit start display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, when this small hit start command process is executed, the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the small hit end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the small hit start effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, the small hit effect (small hit start effect, round effect, small hit) is caused by the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the effect to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the small hit start effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends, so that it is the first round. After receiving the display round number command indicating, the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, from the end of the small hit start effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that a lot of waiting time would occur, which would make the player feel uncomfortable and anxious about whether the operation was stopped.

Further, the display small hit end command for instructing the start of the small hit end effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed, so that the display is displayed. If the image data required for the small hit end effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the small hit end command, from the end of the round effect to the start of the small hit end effect. There was a risk that a lot of waiting time would occur, causing the player to feel anxious and uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation was stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the small hit start command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the small hit end effect is started from there, and the variable display of the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled so that the transfer of data required for the round effect and the small hit end effect is completed by the end of. As a result, when the small hit start effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are completed in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since the small hit end effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the big hit stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the small hit end effect is started from there. Then, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the small hit start effect is completed by the time the variable effect that becomes the big hit is completed. As a result, when the variation effect that becomes a small hit is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the small hit start effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation is not stopped by the player. There is no anxiety or discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3907, if it is determined that there is no small hit start command for display (S3907: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a small hit end command for display among the hit related commands (S3909). If there is a small hit end command for display (S3909: YES), the small hit end command process is executed (S3910), and then the process proceeds to S3911.

Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S3910) will be described with reference to FIG. 295 (A). FIG. 295 (A) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command process. This small hit end command process executes the process corresponding to the display small hit end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit end command processing, first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the small hit end effect indicated by the small hit end command for display is determined, and the determined small hit end display data table is used as a data table. It is read from the storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S3961). Next, the contents are cleared by writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3962). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each small hit end display data table corresponding to the display mode of each small hit end effect, the data table discrimination corresponding to the small hit end display data table set by the processing of S3961 is performed. Turn on the flag and turn off the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other small hit end display data tables. In the display setting process, the small hit end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D corresponds to which small hit end effect display mode by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2703. It can be easily determined whether it is a thing.

Next, based on the small hit end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3961, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S3963), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3964). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3965), the small hit end command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3909, if it is determined that there is no display small hit end command (S3909: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command among the hit related commands (S3911). If there is a V entrance passage command for display (S3911: YES), the V entrance passage command process is executed (S3912), and then the process proceeds to S3913.

Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S3912) will be described with reference to FIG. 295 (B). FIG. 295 (B) is a flowchart showing V entrance passage command processing. This V-entrance passage command process executes the process corresponding to the display V-entrance pass command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V entrance passage command processing, first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect indicated by the display V entrance passage command is determined, and the determined V entrance passage display data table is used as a data table. It is read from the storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S3971). Next, the contents are cleared by writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3972). It should be noted that the display mode of the V entrance passage effect may be discriminated. Specifically, a data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect is provided, a data table discrimination flag corresponding to the V entrance passage display data table set by the process of S3971 is turned on, and other Vs are turned on. Set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the entrance passage display data table to off. As a result, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2703, the V inlet passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D in the process such as the display setting process is the V inlet passage end effect. It can be easily determined whether or not it corresponds to the display mode of.

Next, based on the V inlet passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3971, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S3973), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3974). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3975), the V entrance passage command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 292. In the process of S3911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passage command (S3911: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the hit-related commands (S3913). If there is a display V effect command (S3913: YES), the V effect command process is executed (S3914), and then the hit-related command process is terminated.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S3914) will be described with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing V effect command processing. This V effect command process executes the process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233B. , Set to the display data table buffer 233D (S3981). Next, the contents are cleared by writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3982).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3981, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S3983), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3984). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3985), the V effect command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 289. In the process of S3412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S3412: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display chance eye command (S3414), and if there is a display chance eye command (S3414). : YES), the chance eye command process is executed (S3415), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

Here, the details of the chance eye command processing (S3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 291 (C). FIG. 291 (C) is a flowchart showing the chance eye command processing. This chance-eye command process executes the process corresponding to the display chance-eye command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the chance eye command processing, first, the chance eye display data table corresponding to the chance eye display mode indicated by the display chance eye command is determined, and the determined chance eye display data table is read from the data table storage area 233B. , Set to the display data table buffer 233D (S3851). Next, the contents are cleared by writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3852).

Next, based on the chance eye display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3851, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (S3853), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3854). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3855), the chance eye command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 289. When it is determined that there is no chance-eye command in the process of S3414 (S3414: NO), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3416), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

In the processing of S3401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: YES). ), The processing of S3402 to S3416 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3401 to S3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233C is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (B)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Extract only the stop type command, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 290 (A)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 290 (B)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 290 (A)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233D in the process of S3501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on required in that case are stored in the main image area 235A at power-on and the variable image area 235B at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3502, a process of writing FULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

<A2nd Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299. FIG. 297 is a front view of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 297, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A2 embodiment has a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed region) as compared with the above-described A1 embodiment. It differs in that the composition of is different. Specifically, the distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed area, and among the game balls flowing down the right-handed area, the game balls flowing down the first flow path B701A and flowing into the distribution device B700 are flown into two flow paths ( It has a configuration for distributing to the second flow path B701B and the third flow path B701C).

Next, the distribution device B700 provided in the right-handed region of the game board 13 of the present A2 embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299.

FIG. 298 is an enlarged schematic view of the right-handed area of the game board 13. The ball launched into the right-handed region and flowing down the first flow path B701A passes through the distribution device B700 and is distributed to the second flow path B701B or the third flow path B701C. The detailed configuration of the distribution device B700 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 described later, but the sphere flowing down the first flow path B701A is divided into the second flow path B701B and the third flow path B701C 3: It is configured to be distributed at a ratio of 1. With this configuration, it is necessary to launch a plurality of game balls in order to reliably enter the game balls into the V entry port 600A during the period when the V winning door 600 is open. , The game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot can be suppressed, and the operation of the game can be improved. Further, since at least one of the balls flowing into the distribution device B700 can flow down the third flow path 701C, when a normal game of continuously launching a plurality of game balls is performed. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the V entry port 600A while the V winning door 600 is open.

The second flow path B701B is configured so that the flowing ball flows down to a region where the flowing ball can pass through the through gate 67, and the third flow path B701C allows the flowing ball to enter the V entry port 600A. When the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out from the second flow path B701B passes through the open V winning door 600 and enters the V entry port 600A. Inflow (enter) into. On the other hand, when the V winning door 600 is closed, it is configured to flow down to an area where the through gate 67 can pass.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out from the third flow path B701C is configured to always enter the V entry port 600A, but other than that. A configuration may be used. For example, a distribution member (nail, distribution device, etc.) for distributing the flow direction of the sphere is provided between the outlet of the third flow path B701C and the V winning door 600, and the V winning door 600 is provided. May be configured so that only a part of the ball flowing out from the third flow path B701C enters the V entry port 600A when is open.

With this configuration, among the game balls regularly distributed by the distribution device B700 (at a ratio of 3: 1), the game balls flowing into the V entry port 600A are irregularly generated. Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter the V entry port 600A while the V winning door 600 is open, the game ball can be fired more enthusiastically and continuously.

Next, the structure of the distribution device B700 that distributes the inflowing spheres into the two flow paths will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 (A) to 299 (D). 299 (A) and (B) are schematic views schematically showing the configuration of the distribution device B700, and FIGS. 114 (C) and 114 (D) show the ball flow and distribution of the first flow path B701A. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship with the apparatus B700 schematically.

As shown in FIG. 299 (A), the distribution device B700 is a rotating body rotatably configured around the axis, and is in four directions (four directions at 90 degree intervals) of the rotating body. A blade member (first blade member B700A, second blade member B700B) that can come into contact with the ball is provided. The first blade member B700A is configured to have a flat shape so that the sphere that has flowed down to the distribution device B700 flows down to the third flow path B701C (so that it flows down in the lateral direction of the rotating body of the distribution device B700). In the second blade member B700B, the sphere that has flowed down to the distribution device 700 flows down to the second flow path B701B (so that it flows down directly below the rotating body of the distribution device B700). It is composed of a flat plate shape.

In the present embodiment, as the distribution device B700, a rotating body having one first blade member B700A and three second blade members B700B is used, so that the number of balls distributed to the second flow path B701B and the third flow The number of balls distributed to the road B701C is configured to be 3: 1. Further, a metal piece B700C is embedded in the side surface of the rotating body of the sorting device B700, and a detection sensor (not shown) is configured to be able to determine whether or not the rotating body is rotating. As a result, the sorting device B700 is illegally modified so that the ball flowing into the flow path unit B720 is allowed to flow down to only one flow path (second flow path B701B or third flow path B701C). Can be easily identified.

Next, the arrangement relationship between the first flow path B701A and the distribution device B700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 (C) and 299 (D). FIG. 299 (C) is a schematic view showing a state in which the second blade member B700B is located in the flow path. When a sphere flows down the first flow path B701A in this state, the sphere comes into contact with the second blade member B700B and is distributed to the third flow path B701C. Then, the second blade member B700B in contact with the sphere rotates 90 degrees (rotates 90 degrees downward) along the flow direction of the sphere (downward in FIG. 299 (C)), and the first blade member B700A flows through the flow path. It will be located inside.

When two balls pass through the distribution device B700 from the state shown in FIG. 299 (C), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 299 (D) (the state in which the first blade member B700A is located in the flow path). do.

By bringing the sphere flowing down the distribution device B700 into contact with the blade member provided on the rotating body in this way, the flowing direction of the sphere is changed and the sphere is used to rotate the rotating body. Since the blade member that can come into contact with the sphere can be changed by rotating the rotating body each time the ball passes through, the sphere can be reliably distributed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed region, and the flow path (third flow path 701C) capable of entering the V entry port 600A and the V entry port 600A. Since the game ball is distributed to the flow path (second flow path 701B) where it is impossible (difficult) to enter the ball, the V entry port is open during the period when the V winning door 600 is open. Since it is necessary to launch a plurality of game balls in order to reliably insert the game balls into the 600A, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game balls are fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game. ..

Further, since at least one of the balls flowing into the distribution device B700 can flow down the third flow path 701C, when a normal game of continuously launching a plurality of game balls is performed. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the V entry port 600A while the V winning door 600 is open.

In the second embodiment described above, a configuration having a distribution device B700 is used in order to suppress a game in which a game ball is fired in a single shot, but other configurations may be used, for example, a game ball. A delay means for making the flow period of the game ball irregular is provided in the right-handed area so that the period from launching the ball to reaching the V entrance 600A is irregular, and the game ball is fired. By making it difficult to easily grasp the period from when the ball reaches the V entrance 600A, a configuration may be used in which the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot is suppressed, or a plurality of game balls are continuously fired. When a retention means for retaining the game ball for a predetermined period is provided in the right-handed area so that the game ball does not reach the V entry port 600A unless it flows down, and the game ball is retained in the retention means. , The subsequent game ball may be configured to flow into the flow path where the ball can enter the V entry port 600A by colliding with the stagnant game ball.

In the present embodiment, the distribution device B700 is configured to distribute to the third flow path 701 at a ratio of 1 ball to 4 balls, but the configuration is not limited to this, and other ratios may be used for distribution. The dividing device B700 may be configured to be configured by a wind turbine or the like and distributed at a random ratio.

<Third A3 embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 300 to 301. FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A3 embodiment has a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed region) as compared with the above-described A1 embodiment. It differs in that the composition of is different. Specifically, the difference is that a crune member 1700 for delaying the flow of the game ball is provided above the V winning door 600 in the right-handed region, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, by providing the croon member 1700, the flow of the game ball is delayed by flowing down the inside of the crune member 1700 as a path of the game ball flowing down the right-handed region, and the flow of the game ball is delayed to the V winning door 600. It has a delay path that flows down and a normal path that flows down the outside (right side) of the crune member 1700 and flows down to the V winning door 600.

With this configuration, even after the player stops launching the game ball, the game ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600.

Here, for example, when the player determines the small hit type and a small hit of the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player occurs, the player refrains from firing the game ball so as not to flow down to the V winning door 600. A game is conceivable. In this case, the damage to the game store becomes large because the V prize due to the small hit game, which is disadvantageous to the player, does not occur.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned configuration, even if the player stops launching the game ball after determining the small hit type, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the crune member 1700 (delay path) is the V winning door 600. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a V prize is not generated due to a small hit game, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether it flows down the delayed path or the normal path. Therefore, in order to ensure that the game ball enters the V entry port 600A during the period when the V winning door 600 is open (that is, even if the game ball flows down the delayed path), the ball is entered. It is necessary to launch the game ball before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Here, the details of the Kroon member 1700 will be described with reference to FIG. 301. The crune member 1700 has a conical shape, and has a ball entry portion 1710A at the upper part into which a game ball flowing down a right-handed region enters. The ball entry portion 1710A is an opening slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, a diameter of 12MM).

Inside the crune member 1700, a spiral flow path 1710D is formed in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710A flows down spirally along the inner wall of the crune member 1700, and is formed at the end of the spiral flow path 1710D. Is formed with a bottom surface portion 1710C that is gently inclined toward the center in a mortar shape. The spiral flow path 1710D is configured so that the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710A flows down to the outer end portion of the bottom surface portion 1710C, and the game ball spirally flows down along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom surface portion 1710C. There is. The bottom surface portion 1710C has the same shape as the bottom surface of the already known croon, and gradually guides the game ball to the central portion while making the game ball make a circular motion along the inner circumference of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom surface portion 1710C, a ball outlet 1710B slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, a diameter of 12MM) is configured to project downward in a cylindrical shape. Further, inside the ball outlet 1710B, a flow path is spirally formed by a 0.5MM protruding flow path wall, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 1710B to the outside of the ball outlet 1710B. It is configured to be ejected.

In the present embodiment, the spiral flow path 1710D is formed inside the crune member 1710, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the spiral flow path 1710D is not provided may be used, or the bottom surface of the crune shape may be provided. May be formed only by the spiral flow path 1710D without forming the above. Further, instead of the spiral flow path 1710D, a deceleration portion made of a material having a high friction coefficient for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball may be formed. If it delays the flow of the game ball, it may be appropriately selected.

As a result, the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710A of the crune member 1700 slowly rolls along the inner peripheral wall of the crune member 1700 in the spiral flow path 1710D and is guided to the bottom surface portion 1710C. The game ball guided to the bottom surface portion 1710C is gradually guided to the ball outlet 1710B while making a circular motion from the outer peripheral side to the center on the bottom surface portion 1710C. Further, the diameter of the ball outlet 1710B is slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 1710B protruding downward due to the spiral flow path formed inside. While doing so, it is discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 1710B. With this configuration, the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710A of the crune member 1700 is configured to take about 6 seconds to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710B.

Here, in the present embodiment, the time from the display of the small hit type to the opening of the V winning door 600 is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if a new game ball is refrained from being launched after the small hit type is displayed, the game ball that is delayed and flowing down inside the crune member 1700 flows down to the V winning door 600. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal game in which the player refrains from launching the game ball after determining the small hit type and prevents the player from generating a V prize due to the small hit game, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the small hit is configured so that the variation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crune member 1700 (delay path) is selected more frequently. There is. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entry portion 1710A of the crune member 1700 before (or during the variation effect) the small hit variation effect ends the small hit variation effect, and the V winning door 600 is opened. At the timing, it becomes easier to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710B. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of the game ball into the V entry port 600A and suppresses illegal games, and at the same time, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the V entry port 600A in a normal game. , Can improve the interest of the player. Of course, it may be difficult to select a variation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crune member 1700 (delay path).

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times (2 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, 12 seconds) are selected as the fluctuation time of the small hit. Therefore, it becomes difficult to launch the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened and to allow the game ball to enter the V entry port 600A. In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball reaches the V entry port 600A changes greatly depending on whether the game ball flowing down the right-handed region flows down the delayed path or the normal path. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to launch the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

The fluctuation time of the small hit is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be only a fluctuation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crune member 1700, or may be only a long fluctuation time. Naturally good.

Further, in the present embodiment, by providing two routes, a delayed route and a normal route, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the game ball arrives at the V entry port 600A, but a route having a different flow speed is used. Of course, it is also possible to provide three or more routes.

As described above, in the present A3 embodiment, by providing the crune member 1700 on the upper part of the V winning door 600 (V entry port 600A), the game ball flowing down the right-handed area is the V entry opening 600A. As a route to enter the ball, a delayed route having a different flow time and a normal route are provided.

Due to this delay path, even after the player stops launching the game ball, the game ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600. That is, even if the player stops launching the game ball after determining the small hit type, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the crune member 1700 (delay path) enters the V entry port 600A. become. As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal game in which the player determines the small hit type and prevents the game ball from entering the V entrance 600A at the time of the small hit game which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether the game ball flows down the delayed path or the normal path. Therefore, in order to ensure that the game ball enters the V entry port 600A during the period when the V winning door 600 is open (that is, even if the game ball flows down the delayed path), the ball is entered. It is necessary to launch the game ball before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time for the game ball to flow down the crune member 1700 (delayed path) is longer than the time from the display of the small hit type to the opening of the V winning door 600. is doing. Therefore, even if the launch of a new game ball is stopped after the small hit type is displayed, the game ball that is delayed and flowing down inside the crune member 1700 flows down to the V winning door 600. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal game in which the player stops firing the game ball after determining the small hit type and prevents the V prize from being generated by the small hit game, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the small hit is configured so that the variation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crune member 1700 (delay path) is selected more frequently. There is. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entry portion 1710A of the crune member 1700 before (or during the variation effect) the small hit variation effect ends the small hit variation effect, and the V winning door 600 is opened. At the timing, it becomes easier to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710B. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of the game ball into the V entry port 600A and suppresses illegal games, and at the same time, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the V entry port 600A in a normal game. , Can improve the interest of the player.

<A4th Embodiment>
Next, the A4 embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 319. In the A4th embodiment, the distribution device 720 for distributing the game balls is arranged in the right side passage of the variable display unit 80 with respect to the A1th embodiment, and the balls flowing down the right side passage are alternately distributed. After the change of the special symbol determined to be a small hit or a big hit is stopped and displayed in one of the passages to be distributed, a gate to start the small hit or a big hit game is arranged and the ball is placed in the right flow path. The difference is that by continuing to fire, the ball can be entered into the V winning device 620 at the start of a small hit or a big hit. Since the other configurations are the same, other configurations will be omitted.

The configuration of the game board 13 in the A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 and 303. In the A4th embodiment, the distribution device 720 is arranged in the right side region of the variable display unit 80 at a position upstream of the V winning door 600. In the distribution device 720, the ball entry port 720C through which the ball flowing down the right flow path can enter is formed at the upper portion with a width that allows one game ball to pass through, and the ball that has passed through the ball entry port 720C is formed. When it flows down, it is configured to distribute the spheres that rotate left and right and flow down alternately into the left side flow path 720D and the right side flow path 720E. At the lower end of the right flow path 720E, a start gate 720A composed of a photo sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is arranged. When the ball passes through the start gate 720A, the start of the small hit game or the big hit game is set. As described above, in the second embodiment, even when the fluctuation of the special symbol for which the small hit or the big hit is determined is stopped, the ball moves through the start gate 720A without shifting to the small hit game or the big hit game. The game is in a state of waiting for the execution of the small hit game or the big hit game until it passes.

The distribution rotation member 720B receives the entered game ball in the left accommodating portion or the right accommodating portion arranged on the left and right. When the game ball is received in the left accommodating portion, the distribution rotation member 720B rotates counterclockwise in the front view due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the left flow path 720D. Here, the distribution rotating member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around each of the left and right sides, and a magnet is provided on the boundary wall between the left accommodating portion and the right accommodating portion.

On the base body provided on the back surface side of the distribution device 720, the magnet on the distribution rotation member 720B is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet of the distribution rotating member 720B and the magnet on the base side are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip portion. The base side magnet is arranged and fixed so that the tip portion thereof faces the distribution rotation member 720B side.

Like the base side magnet, the magnet is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the distribution rotating member 720B so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet side. The base is at a position where the distribution rotation member 720B rotates and the boundary wall between the left accommodating portion and the right accommodating portion is directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball at the passing port can enter about one ball). The side magnet and the magnet of the distribution rotating member are in the closest position (the tips face each other). Here, since the magnets of each other are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), the magnets are repulsed and stopped at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution rotating member faces directly upward. It will be maintained in the position where it is rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet is located on the center line of the passage port (upper position), the distribution rotating member repels the magnet and the base side magnet, so that the distribution rotating member 720B is left or right. The magnet rotates so that either the left accommodating portion or the right accommodating portion faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the gaming ball entering the distribution device 720. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entered game ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the left accommodating portion and the right accommodating portion and causing ball clogging.

Further, when the magnet and the magnet on the base side repel each other, for example, the left accommodating portion receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the left flow path 720D, and then distributes the rotation. It is possible to prevent the member 720B from rotating clockwise (the left accommodating portion faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the left flow path 720D, the right accommodating portion is in a state of facing upward, and then the game ball that has entered the distribution device 720 is received by the right accommodating portion and is a game ball. The distribution rotation member 720B rotates about 180 degrees to the right due to the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the right flow path 720E. In this way, the distribution rotation member 720B can alternately guide the game ball entering the distribution device 720 to the left side flow path 720D and the right side flow path 720E. Therefore, the game ball can be evenly distributed and guided to the left side flow path 720D and the right side flow path 720E.

After being distributed to the right side flow path 720E by the distribution rotation member 720B, the ball that has passed through the entry port 720C is transferred to the left side flow path 720D by the distribution rotation member 720B rotating to the left. It is sorted. When it is distributed to the left flow path 720D, it is guided to a flow path capable of entering the V entry port 600A. When the ball passes through the start gate 720A, the small hit or big hit game is started, and the V winning door 600 is changed to the open state. It becomes possible to enter the ball. Here, the V winning door 600 is opened for 3 seconds 1 second after the start timing of the big hit game in the small hit or the big hit B (the timing when the ball passes through the start gate 720A). Here, since the ball is fired by the launching device at the same interval of 100 shots per minute, it is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds per shot. Therefore, when the ball is continuously fired in the right side region, the game ball is discharged from the left side flow path 720D about 0.6 seconds after passing through the start gate 720A (distribution device). The flow path is formed so that the spheres of the left side flow path 720D and the right side flow path 720E of the 720 flow down at the same time).

Since the flow time from the lower end of the left flow path 720D to the V entry port 600A is about 0.1 seconds, the ball will flow down before the V winning door 600 is opened, and then the ball will flow down. , The ball discharged from the left channel 720D (1.2 seconds after being ejected from the left channel 720D first) can win the V entry port 600A because the V winning door 600 is in the open state. Become. Then, up to the ball discharged from the left side flow path 720D, the V entry port 600A can be won.

In this way, after the ball is passed through the start gate 720A, the launch of the ball is stopped, the small hit type is confirmed by the first symbol display device 37, and the big hit type with a small number of time reductions is selected. Even if you try to avoid winning the V winning opening 624 in, the number of balls that can be won is limited to two even if they are fired continuously, and even if they are fired after confirmation, the V winning opening 600A should be awarded. It is difficult.

In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the left flow path 720D can enter the V entry port 600A, but the game ball that has passed through the right side flow path 720E can enter the ball. Alternatively, among the game balls flowing down the right flow path, the game balls that did not enter the distribution device 720 may be configured to be able to enter.

Further, although the distribution device 720 in the present embodiment is configured to alternately distribute the entered game balls, the distribution rotation member 720B may be configured to be configured to be randomly distributed to the left and right by being configured by a wind turbine or the like. ..

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the A4 embodiment>
The present A4 embodiment differs from the A1 embodiment in that the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed. Since other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 307 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the A4 embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the A4 control is different in that the condition device flag 203AC is added to the A1 embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The condition device flag AC is a flag indicating that the start gate 720A has passed. This is a flag for determining whether or not the power has passed through the start gate 720A with reference to the case where the power is restored when the power is cut off or the like. Set off based on the end of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 304 to 306 and 308 to 309, an effect mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined to be a small hit or a big hit B in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 308 (A) is a diagram showing the contents controlled by the main control device 110 when passing through the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game and the timing chart of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Is.

When the hit / fail judgment is executed from the state where the special symbol is stopped and the small hit is determined, the variation display of the third symbol (special symbol) is started on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. Will be done. At the start of fluctuation, the characters "start of roulette chance" are displayed as shown in FIG. 304 (A). Three seconds later, as shown in FIG. 304 (B), the third symbol is reduced to the upper right and displayed, and the roulette display is started. In the roulette display, the arrow symbol is displayed on the left side, and the "V" symbol indicating that the winning / failing judgment result (big hit, miss, small hit) and the V winning opening 624 has been won by the roulette symbol stopped at the arrow position. And, although the player did not win the V winning opening 624, a "BIG" symbol indicating that the jackpot game has started and a "skull" symbol indicating that the game is out of order are arranged. After that, during the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the roulette display is displayed at high speed rotation as shown in FIG. 305 (A). After that, as shown in FIG. 305 (B), when the fluctuation period elapses and the fluctuation of the third symbol stops, the scroll (rotation display) of the roulette display is slow-displayed, and the right-handed notification symbol is displayed in the upper left. It is displayed and the player is notified that it is a right-handed period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (A), when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624, the position of the “V” symbol on the roulette display is stopped and displayed at a position corresponding to the arrow symbol. Further, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624 and the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect at the timing when the V valid period has elapsed, the “skull” symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 306 (B). The stop is displayed at the position where the position matches the arrow symbol. Although not shown, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624 and the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit (big hit B), the position of the "BIG" symbol stops at the position corresponding to the arrow symbol. It is displayed that the game that is actually being executed is notified that it is a jackpot game.

With this configuration, whether the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit or a small hit is composed of a series of effects until the period during which the ball can enter the V winning opening 624 elapses, and the period until the V winning. You can improve the fun of the game by using.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 310 to 311. In the first A1 embodiment, if the hit / fail determination result is a big hit after the fluctuation period of the special symbol has elapsed, the big hit game is started 0.1 seconds later, but in the present embodiment, the game ball is at the start gate 720A. The difference is that the jackpot game is started by passing. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

The special symbol variation processing 2 (S140) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 310. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S140). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (S140), the processes S217 to S220 are deleted from the special symbol variation processing (S104: see FIG. 263) in the A1 embodiment, and the condition device determination process (S250) is added. It differs in that it is. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The condition device determination process (S250) in the present A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of this condition device determination process (S250). In the condition device determination process (S250), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate 720A (S251). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the start gate 720A (S251: YES), the opening scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S252). The jackpot start flag 203J, the jackpot medium flag 203K, and the condition device flag 203AC are set to ON (S254). The time reduction counter 203G is set to 0 (S255), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the start gate 720A (S251: NO), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the jackpot game is configured to start by passing through the start gate 720A, the jackpot game can be started by the player's intention.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the start of the big hit game is configured to start by passing through the start gate 720A, but the small hit game may also be configured to start by passing through the start gate 720A. .. With this configuration, the game ball that has passed through the start gate 720A can be easily won in the V entry port 600A, and the game ball is prevented from entering a specific small hit game type so that the game ball does not enter. It can be difficult to fire.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start gate 720A is provided in the left side flow path 720E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the start gate 720A may be arranged in the right side flow path 720D. In this configuration, the period from the passage of the game ball through the start gate 720A until the V winning door 600 is opened can be entered into the V entry port 600A from the passage of the start gate 720A. It may be configured to have a period of. With such a configuration, in the small hit game, the game ball can be entered into the V entrance 600A, and the game method of avoiding winning the game ball in a specific small hit type can be suppressed.

<A5th Embodiment>
Next, the present A5 embodiment and a modification thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 314. In the first A1 embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 in the V winning device 620 is always constant, but in the present embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed when the jackpot B is obtained. It differs in that.

In FIG. 312 (A), the jackpot B in the A5 embodiment is executed, the game ball enters the V entry port 600A, and the game ball is guided to the rotation distribution member 621 by the movable guide member 622. It is a figure which showed the case. At the timing when the movable guide member 622 starts to rise, the rotary distribution member 621 is configured to stop at the center position (the position where the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 624).

Further, FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 3 (S1118) in the A5 embodiment. The difference is that the processes of S1281 to S1282 are added to the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1203, the process of S1281 is executed after the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter is executed. In the process of S1281, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to turn off the V winning opening solenoid (solenoid that opens and closes the V winning door 600) (S1281). When it is determined that it is the timing when the V winning solenoid is turned off (S1281: YES), the data for stopping the V distribution motor at the center position for 3.7 seconds is set in the winning scenario A (S1282). After that, the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to turn off the V winning opening solenoid, the process proceeds to S1204.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit B, the rotary distribution member is configured to stop at the center position in accordance with the V winning timing, so that the game is considered to be a small hit game. It is possible to produce a fresh effect for a person. Furthermore, since the V winning opening 624 can always win a prize with the jackpot B, winning the V winning opening 624 makes it seem as if the 2nd round has started.

Next, a modified example of the A5 embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 312 (B). In the A5 embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed when the jackpot B is used, but the control is not limited to this, and the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is not changed and the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed when the jackpot B is used. The fixed flow path 660 newly protrudes and the movable guide member 622 releases the staying 2 solenoid at an intermediate position, the game ball is dropped on the movable guide member 622, and the fixed flow path 660 is played to the V winning opening 624. The difference is that it is configured to guide the sphere. The fixed flow path 660 is configured to be projected by a motor, and is configured to guide the game ball to the V winning opening 624 with high probability or 100%.

FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 4 (S1118) in the modified example of the present A5 embodiment. The difference is that the process of S1283 is added to the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1207, when the hit scenario B is set, that is, when the movable guiding member 622 starts to rise, the fixed flow path is operated by the motor for 2 seconds, protrudes forward, and falls from the movable guiding member 622. The game ball is changed to a position where it can be received on the upper surface (S1283). After that, the process of S1209 is executed. Although not shown, the movable guide member 622 is also set so that the stay 2 solenoid is turned off at an intermediate position.

As a result, in the case of the big hit B, it is possible to win a prize in the V winning opening 624 via a taxiway different from the case of the small hit. As a result, it is possible to switch the winning control to the V winning opening between the case of a small hit and the case of a big hit B, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The wording "at the start (at the time of execution) of the jackpot (big hit game)" used in explaining each control example and each embodiment described above means that the jackpot game is started by winning the jackpot lottery of a special symbol. Is used as a concept to indicate the timing when the special symbol is confirmed. Specifically, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by a combination of symbols to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. It is a concept that includes the timing, the timing when the opening period of the jackpot starts, the timing when the round game of the jackpot starts, and the like.

The wording "at the end of the jackpot (big hit game)" used in explaining each control example and each embodiment described above is used as a concept indicating the timing at which the jackpot game ends, and is specifically used. Is a concept that includes the timing when the final round of the jackpot ends, the timing when the ending period of the jackpot ends, the timing when the first special symbol lottery is performed after the end of the jackpot, and the like.

When a specific timing is not specified in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment for each wording used in such a concept, any of the above-mentioned timings is appropriately adopted. May be.

The configurations of the pachinko machines 10 described in the above-mentioned control examples and the respective embodiments may be combined as appropriate, and for example, a fall lottery means for executing the fall lottery used in the second control example described above may be used. The pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a small hit lottery means for executing the small hit lottery used in the above-mentioned third control example.

Further, the fall lottery means used in the second control example described above executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the jackpot probability of the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state, but other than that. It may be used to shift (fall) the contents set for the element of, for example, shift (fall) the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) from the high probability state to the low probability state. It may be configured to execute a lottery for the purpose and a lottery for shifting (falling) the time saving state to the normal state.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the frame button 22 that can be pressed and operated by the player is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, but a configuration different from that of the frame button 22 may be provided as the operation means, for example. Shooting results of a lever-shaped operating means that the player can operate in the front-back direction, a touch sensor-type operating means that detects that the player has touched (or is close to), and a shooting means that captures the movement of the player. A camera-type operating means or the like for determining the above may be provided. Further, the number of operating means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a configuration is used in which various effects to be executed are executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided and a plurality of display means are provided. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the various effects described above using the above-mentioned machines, or at least two or more of the various effects described in the above-mentioned control examples may be executed in the pachinko machine 10. , The player may be able to select the effect that is actually executed from the two or more effects that can be executed.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. In addition, each control example described above and the same element as each embodiment will be repeatedly described for convenience of explanation. Similar to the above-described A1 embodiment (see FIG. 226), the gaming machine of the fifth control example is a jackpot by a special symbol lottery as an opportunity to execute a privileged game (big hit game) in which the player is advantageous. The game ball is in a specific area (during the small hit game) when the big hit game (design big hit game) is executed (first opportunity) and the small hit is won by lottery of the special symbol. An opportunity (second opportunity) for a jackpot game (V jackpot game) to be executed based on passing through a V region (not shown) provided in the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 315) that is opened to the player. ) And.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot game at various occasions, so that it is possible to provide a game with improved game playability. Further, in the fifth control example, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured so as to be easier to win a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Then, during the time saving state, which is a game state that can be set after the end of the big hit game, the lottery of the special figure 2 is easily executed. As a result, when the time saving state is set, the jackpot game can be more easily executed than when the normal state is set. That is, the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly executed in the normal state, whereas the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed in the time saving state, so that the above-mentioned second opportunity can be easily established. .. Therefore, since the time saving state can be set to the gaming state which is advantageous to the player, the player can be enthusiastically played with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, in the fifth control example, in the state where the normal state is set, the period in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is likely to be executed can be temporarily displayed. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 315, but when a specific hit (long open hit) is won by a normal symbol lottery in a normal state, the electric accessory 640A is used for a long period of time (1.5 seconds). It is configured to be open and to set a period during which the ball can easily enter the second entry opening (winning opening) 640, which is the trigger for executing the special drawing 2 lottery. As a result, the player who is playing the game in the normal state can also execute the special figure 2 lottery, so that the game can be played without executing the special figure 2 lottery (without shifting to the time saving state). It is possible to suppress getting bored with.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the continuation condition (end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game, at least the first condition (for example, the special figure 2 variation is executed 5 times during the time saving state, or the small hit game is performed. End) and the second condition (for example, the cumulative total of special figure 1 fluctuation and special figure 2 fluctuation) during the time saving state, which is easier to continue (difficult to end) than the first condition. It is configured so that it can be set to execute once or end the small hit game). Then, there are cases where the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the normal state and cases where the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the time saving state. The setting ratio of the continuation condition (end condition) of the state is different. Specifically, after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is more than after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. , It is configured so that the continuation condition (end condition) that the time saving state can easily continue (difficult to end) can be easily set.

With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol) but also in the game state when the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the fifth control example, as described above, a gaming state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state is set, as compared to the case where the gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. Is configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state that is easier to continue after the end of the V jackpot game. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically played the game regardless of whether the normal state is set or the time saving state is set.

In addition, in the fifth control example, a maximum of four prize information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be stored and stored, and the lottery result of the final change of the special figure 2 in the time saving state is shown. It is configured to notify the player of the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 which is held and stored by using the variation effect. That is, as a result of the effect of the variation effect executed during the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure variation, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state (to the normal state). It is configured to notify the result of the lottery for the winning information of the special figure 2 which is held and stored at the time of the transition. With this configuration, if the effect result of the variable effect is an effect result indicating that a hit (for example, a small hit) has been won, whether the small hit winner this time was won in a short time state or a normal state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not he has won.

Further, as described above, in the fifth control example, the big hit game (V big hit game) executed via the small hit game in the case where the small hit is won in the time saving state and the case where the small hit is won in the normal state. The ease of continuing the time saving state set after the end of) is different. Specifically, the special figure in the normal state is better when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. 2 It is configured so that the continuation condition (end condition) that the time saving state is easy to continue (difficult to end) is easier to set than the case of winning a small hit in the lottery, and further, after shifting to the normal state. When the pre-reading result corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery to be executed is the determination result that the small hit in which the time saving state is easy to continue is won, in the variation effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final change in the time saving state. , The look-ahead result (the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state) is configured to be notified.

With this configuration, when it is notified that a small hit has been won by the fluctuation effect executed during the time saving state, the ratio of the winning small hit is the small hit that the time saving state is likely to continue. Can be enhanced. Here, in recent gaming machines (for example, pachinko machine 10), a ratio in which a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a time saving state or a probable change state) is set after the jackpot game is completed in order to improve the soundness of the game. By setting the (so-called continuation rate) low (for example, 65% or less), the gambling of the game may be suppressed. In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a hit (for example, a big hit or a small hit) is won in a state where an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is again set after the winning game is completed. Since the set ratio is suppressed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to give a sense of expectation to the hit notification effect during the advantageous gaming state.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, in the hit notification effect (variable effect) executed during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state), the winning (small hit) is won during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state). In addition to the notification of, in the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after shifting from the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) to the disadvantageous gaming state (normal state), if the small hit that the time saving state is easy to continue is won in advance. It is also configured to notify when it is determined. As a result, it is possible to increase the winning ratio of small hits in which the time saving state is likely to continue when the hit notification effect is executed during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state), and the player's expectation for the hit notification effect during the advantageous gaming state. You can enhance the feeling.

Further, in the fifth control example, the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) or the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) (residual feature existing at the time of transition to the normal state). It is configured to execute a variation effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand which of the special figure 2 variations corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2) was won. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the fifth control example, in addition to the lottery result of the fluctuation, after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) by the fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the final fluctuation period of the time saving state. It is configured to notify the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold that exists at the time of transition to the normal state), and after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state). The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed (the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of transition to the normal state) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the short-time fluctuation ends. Up to, it is configured to display the effect result of the variation effect executed corresponding to the final variation period in the time saving state. In this way, the final change in the time saving state and the special figure 2 change executed after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) (the special figure 2 change corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of the transition to the normal state). By executing a series of effects using the period during which, and displaying the effect results of the series of effects across multiple variations, this series of effects corresponds to which special figure variation. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the result of the special drawing lottery is notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 315 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 315, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is the variable display unit 80 with respect to the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 227) of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment. The game area (left game area) formed on the left side is also provided with a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 that triggers a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), and is formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The point that the V winning opening 600A, the V winning door 600, and the flow path through which the ball entering the V winning opening 600A flows down, which are provided in the gaming area (right side gaming area), are deleted, and the special drawing lottery is successful ( The difference is that the variable winning device 65 and the V winning device 650, which are opened when a big hit or a small hit) is won, are arranged on the downstream side of the right gaming area. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the left game area of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described focusing on the differences from the above-described A1 embodiment. As described above, in the fifth control example, a through gate 67 through which the ball can pass is formed in the middle stream portion (left side of the variable display unit 80) in the left game area. As a result, the lottery of the normal symbol (normal diagram) is executed even while the player is performing the game (left-handed game) in which the ball is made to flow down to the left game area. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, if a specific normal symbol is won while the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state, It is configured so that a game per game in which a ball can be easily entered into the second winning opening 640 is executed.

In this way, by configuring the period (state) in which the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the normal state can be provided, the special figure 2 lottery is used without shifting the gaming state to the time saving state. It is possible to provide a player with a game property, that is, a game property in which a big hit game is executed based on a small hit winning. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing a game in a normal state for a long time from getting tired of the game without experiencing the game performance using the special figure 2 lottery.

In addition, as a game in the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit in a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed based on the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64, and a ball to the through gate 67. Since it is possible to simultaneously execute a game aiming for a big hit by a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) based on the passage of the above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, as in the above-described A1 embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the special figure 2 lottery is easily executed (the second prize that triggers the special figure 2 lottery). (Because it becomes easier for the ball to win a prize in the mouth 640), a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right game area in which the second winning mouth 640 is arranged is performed.

In the fifth control example, a through gate 67, a second winning opening 640 (electric accessory 640A), a variable winning device 65, and a V winning device 650 are arranged in the right game area, and a lottery of ordinary symbols (normal figures) is provided. The game of performing the game, the game of drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the game of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) can be executed by the right-handed game. There is. This eliminates the need for the player to change the firing direction of the ball (direction of the left game area, direction of the right game area) during the period in which the game in the time-saving state, the small hit game, and the big hit game are repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complicated change of the firing direction of the ball and to comfortably play the game. Further, in the fifth control example, when a gaming state (time saving state, small hit gaming state, big hit gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set as the gaming state is set. In addition, since it is configured to perform a right-handed game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in an advantageous state during the right-handed game.

The V winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a small hit game is executed, and can be changed into an open state in which a ball can win in the V winning opening 650A and a closed state in which it is difficult to win. It has a winning door 650B. The V winning door 650B is configured so that a ball flow path is formed on the upper surface of the V winning door 650B when it is located in the closed state, and is fired by a right-handed game while the V winning device 650 is in the closed state. The ball is configured to flow down the upper surface of the V winning door 650B toward the variable winning device 65. In addition, a specific area (V area) (not shown) is provided inside the V winning opening 650A, and the ball winning the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game (including the ball handling period after the small hit game is completed). Is configured to execute a jackpot game when the player passes through a specific area (V area).

Since the configuration of the specific region (V region) provided in the V winning device 650 is a well-known and general technique in the art, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, a plurality of flow paths through which balls can pass may be provided in the V winning device 650 so that only the balls that have passed through the specific flow path can pass through the specific region (V region). A distribution member that distributes the flow direction of a ball flowing down in the V winning device 650, for example, a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, or a distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule, or a distribution member that is constantly driven after the jackpot game is started. A distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule, a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule after a specific number of round games of a jackpot game are started, and the like are provided and sorted by the distribution member. The jackpot game may be executed when the ball passes through a specific area (V area).

Further, a plurality of types of small hit games to be executed when a small hit is won are provided. For example, a small hit game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game. A small hit type to be executed and a small hit type in which a small hit game in which a ball is difficult to pass through a specific area (V area) may be executed may be configured to be configurable. In this case, if the opening pattern of the V winning door 650B is different depending on the type of the winning small hit, and the small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V area) is executed, the V winning opening 650A The opening pattern of the V winning door 650B, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter, is set, or the ball is distributed to other than the specific area (V area) by the distribution member provided in the V winning device 650. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650B may be set so that the ball reaches the distribution member at the timing. In addition, as a small hit game executed based on the small hit winning, a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened to operate instead of the V winning device 650 is configured to be configurable, and the small hit game is executed. In that case, it may be configured so that the sphere cannot physically pass through the specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650.

The variable winning device 65 is a winning device that is opened during a big hit game, and has a variable winning door 65B in an open state in which a ball is easy to win in the specific winning opening 65A and a closed state in which it is difficult to win. Have. The winning door 65B is configured so that a ball flow path is formed on the upper surface of the winning door 65B when the winning door 65B is in the closed state, and a ball fired by a right-handed game while the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state. Is configured to flow down the upper surface of the winning door 65B toward the out port 66.

<About the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 316 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game of the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 316, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol) are the gaming states. It is configured so that one of the high-probability states of ordinary symbols) is set.

Then, if a left-handed game is performed during the normal state and a big hit is won (big hit probability 1/250) in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the time saving state is always set after the big hit game is completed. Here, the setting contents of the time saving state set when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the normal state will be described. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 335, but if the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the normal state, one of the three jackpot types is set, and each jackpot type is set. Different time saving end conditions are specified. The time reduction end condition is a condition for ending the time reduction state, and when the time reduction end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts from the time reduction state to the normal state.

When the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal state, the number of changes of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 99 times as shown in FIG. 316. The jackpot type (big hit AA) for which the time saving end condition is satisfied is set at a rate of 1%, and the time saving ending condition is set when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 5 times. The jackpot type (big hit AB) that holds is set at a rate of 15%, and the jackpot type (big hit AC) that satisfies the time saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches one. It is configured to be set at a rate of 84%. In other words, if the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the normal state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, but it is easy to continue the time saving state according to the set jackpot type (time saving end). Conditions) are different.

Although the details will be described later, in this fifth control example, since it is configured so that a maximum of four winning information of the special figure 2 can be held and stored, one time saving is set as a time saving end condition. Even if this is the case, the time saving state is set while the first special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed (until the first special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped), and the electric accessory 640A is easy to open. Since it is in a state, it is possible to easily store the winning information of the special figure 2 on hold. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition of one time reduction is set, the winning information of the special figure 2 (holding of the special figure 2) is stored in the hold during the period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state is executed once. By performing the game to make the game, the special figure 2 fluctuation after the transition from the reduced working hours state to the normal state can be executed up to four times. With such a configuration, when a big hit is won, a large number of special figure 2 lottery can be executed, so that the player can easily experience the big hit game via the small hit winning.

On the other hand, if a special small hit is won (small hit probability 1/500) in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state, the ball is executed by passing through a specific area (V area) during the small hit game. After the jackpot game is over, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, the small hit type () in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times. The small hit type (small hit AB) is set at a rate of 10%, and the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 5 times. The small hit type (small hit AC) that satisfies the time saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches one is set at a ratio of 50%. It is configured in.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the jackpot is won (when the symbol jackpot is won) by the special figure 1 lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set, the small hit is won. The end of the big hit game regardless of whether the ball passes through a specific area and the big hit game is executed (V big hit) or the big hit game is executed during the small hit game. It is configured so that the time saving state is set later, and even if it is a big hit game executed based on the special figure 1 lottery, the ease of continuing the time saving state is made different depending on the execution opportunity of the big hit game. There is. As described above, among the execution opportunities of the big hit game, in the case of the execution opportunity that is easy to be established (the big hit winning by the special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is 2.58 times. In the case of an execution opportunity that is difficult to be established (small hit winning by special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is 12.4 times.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of execution triggers for the jackpot game, by associating the ease of establishing the execution trigger with the ease of continuing the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that can be set after the establishment. Even if the jackpot game is executed by the execution opportunity of, the player can have a sense of expectation.

In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 315, the lottery of the normal symbol (normal figure) is executed even while the left-handed game in the normal state is being executed. , It is configured so that there is a 1/10 chance of winning a prize. Then, a game per game (game per long opening) that opens the electric accessory 640A for a long period of time (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 1/100 of the case where the player wins the game is configured to be executed. There is. That is, a state (game per long opening) in which the special figure 2 lottery can be executed is set with a probability of about 1/1000 of the normal figure lottery executed while the normal state is set.

When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening, the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is executed. Here, the flow of the game when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 316. In the fifth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same (1/250) in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. If the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the time is shortened when the number of changes in the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes in the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times. Any of the jackpot types (big hit AD to AF) for which the end condition is satisfied is set (see FIG. 335). That is, in the normal state, of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery having the same jackpot probability, it is difficult to establish the execution opportunity of the special figure lottery (it is difficult to win the ball in the corresponding start winning opening). Is configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state in which it is difficult to satisfy the time saving end condition after the end of the big hit game. With this configuration, when a winning game is won by the regular drawing lottery and the long open winning game is executed (1/1000), the player can be enthusiastically executed the special drawing 2 lottery. can.

Next, the flow of the game when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be described. In this control example, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery (about 1 / 7.1) is higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery (1/500). It is configured (see FIG. 334). Then, after the end of the big hit game executed by the ball passing through the specific area (V area) during the small hit game, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, the small hit type () in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times. The small hit AD) is set at a rate of 40%, and the small hit type (small hit AE) that satisfies the time saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 5 is 60%. It is configured to be set at the ratio of. That is, in the normal state, the average number of continuations in the time-saving state set via the small hit of the special figure 2 lottery is 42.6 times, and the big hit game is executed via the small hit of the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state. It becomes easier to set a time saving state in which the time saving end condition is hard to be satisfied (easy to continue).

In this way, in the game in the normal state, although there is a low probability, if the game is won by the regular drawing lottery and the long open winning game is executed (1/1000), the big hit is won by the special drawing lottery. By configuring it so that it is easy to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, the player who is playing in the normal state is allowed to play a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. With the winning of the drawing lottery as an opportunity, it is possible to play a game aiming at a big hit or a small winning in the special drawing 2 lottery.

Further, as shown in FIG. 315, a position where a ball launched into the game area (a ball flowing down the left game area) can pass when a left-handed game is performed in order to win a ball in the first winning opening 64. Since the through gate 67 is arranged in the above, a game in which the special figure 1 lottery is performed and a game in which the normal figure lottery is performed without changing the firing direction of the ball for the player who is playing in the normal state. Can be done in parallel.

In this control example, the more the jackpot game is executed at the opportunity that is difficult to be established, the easier it is to set the time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player when the big hit game is executed in, or a specific predetermined opportunity (for example, a small hit winning in the special figure 1 lottery) may be set. ) May be configured so that when the jackpot game is executed, it is easy to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player.

When the ball does not pass through the specific area (V area) during the above-mentioned small hit game (small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery or the special figure 2 lottery). (In the case of non-V winning), the normal state is set after the small hit game is completed (corresponding to the flow shown by the dotted line in FIG. 315). As a result, it is possible to suppress that an excessive privilege is given to a player who plays an illegal game in which the ball is not intentionally entered into a specific area (V area) while the small hit game is being executed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the flow of the game when the time saving state is set will be described. In this control example, when the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640A is easily released, and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, a right-handed game in which the special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed is executed. To.

This time saving state is configured to continue until a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, and to shift to a normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied. This time saving end condition is configured so that different conditions are set according to the big hit type set for the big hit won in the special drawing lottery or the small hit type set for the winning small hit. There is. Specifically, regardless of which hit type (big hit type, small hit type) is set, the common time-saving end condition set as a common condition and the different condition are set according to the hit type. The time saving end condition is stipulated, and the common time saving end condition includes the first end condition that is satisfied at the time of winning the big hit (at the start of the big hit game), the second end condition that is satisfied at the end of the small hit game, and the time saving. The third end condition that is satisfied when the number of special symbol (special figure) changes executed during the state (cumulative number of special figure 1 changes and special figure 2 changes) reaches 99 is set. The response time reduction end condition includes a short end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 that is executed during the time reduction state is one, and a middle end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is five. Conditions are set according to the hit type.

As described above, the corresponding time saving end condition exists, for example, when the time saving state is set because the ending condition is set based on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 mainly changed during the time saving state. Even if the special figure 1 change is executed during the time saving state based on the hold storage of the special figure 1 change, the corresponding time saving end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending without executing the special figure 2 lottery even though the time saving state advantageous to the player is set. Further, since the response time reduction end condition is satisfied based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the time reduction state can be easily specified, and the player can play. It is possible to suppress the provision of excessive benefits (special figure 2 lottery).

In the fifth control example, the common time saving end condition and the corresponding time saving end condition can be set as the time saving end condition with the above-mentioned contents, but the setting contents are not limited to the present control example. For example, in the fifth control example, as the end condition for the small hit game defined in the common time reduction end condition, the end condition is set when the number of times the small hit game is executed reaches a specific number of times (for example, three times). It may be configured to be satisfied, or the end condition related to the small hit game may be set as the corresponding time-saving end condition, and the number of executions of the small hit game in which the end condition related to the small hit game is satisfied may be different depending on the hit type. It may be configured. Further, in this control example, regardless of the small hit type set at the time of winning the small hit, the second end condition is satisfied when the small hit game is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second end condition may be satisfied when the small hit game corresponding to a specific small hit type is executed. Further, in this control example, the second end condition is satisfied when the small hit game ends, but the second end condition is not limited to this, and the second end condition is satisfied at the start of the small hit game (when the small hit is won). May be configured so that is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the small hit winning in the time saving state, so that the player can feel nervous about how long the time saving state will continue. You can play a game.

Returning to FIG. 316, the flow of the game during the time saving state will be described. If a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, the number of changes of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are the same as in the normal state. One of the jackpot types (big hit AD to AF) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number reaches 99 times is set (see FIG. 335). That is, only the common time-saving end condition is set as the time-saving end condition.

On the other hand, if a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, after the big hit game executed via the small hit winning is completed, in addition to the above-mentioned common time saving end condition, the small hit type is selected. The time saving state in which the corresponding time saving end condition is set is set. Specifically, a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and after the big hit game executed via the small hit winning is completed, the special figure 2 changes as a response time saving end condition at a rate of 10%. The number of times is set to 5 times, and the response time reduction end condition is not set at a rate of 90% (actually 99 times are set).

As described above, in the fifth control example, the setting ratio of the end condition (time reduction end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 2 lottery is set to the game state at the time of the small hit winning. It is more difficult to establish the time saving end condition when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state than when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state. (The time saving end condition is not set) It is configured so that the time saving state can be easily set.

With this configuration, for example, a small hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery that is stored on hold when the time saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state that makes it easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery, ends and the normal state is entered. By doing so, it becomes easy to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire a large amount of the reserved memory of the special figure 2 until just before the time saving state ends.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the variation effect (final variation effect) executed in response to the final variation in the time reduction state (special figure 2 variation in which the corresponding time reduction end condition is satisfied) is used. In addition to the variable lottery result, the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 stored on hold is also notified. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery up to 5 times as the effect result of the final variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that the winning (small hit winning, big hit winning) is notified as the effect result of the final variable effect higher than the variable effect that notifies only the lottery result of one special figure 2 lottery. This makes it possible for the player to pay close attention to the content of the production.

In addition, since the lottery results (including the look-ahead result) of the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state and the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state are notified at once, the winning is won by this final fluctuation production. When is notified, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the winning special figure 2 lottery is the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state or the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state. With this configuration, as in this control example, when the time saving end condition is set at a different rate according to the game state at the time of the small hit winning, the big hit executed based on the current small hit winning. It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping what kind of time-saving end condition the time-saving state is set after the end of the game, depending on the effect mode (effect timing) of the variable effect.

In addition, in this control example, a short-time (0.5 second) fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the transition from the time-saving state to the normal state. As the variation effect of the short-time variation, the effect result of the final variation effect described above is displayed. As a result, even if the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation in the time-saving state is configured to notify the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special figure 2 stored on hold, the pre-reading result is the target. The final variation effect can be continuously displayed until the variation of the special figure 2 is completed. Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 remaining hold after the end of the time saving state (the special figure 2 change in the normal state) is completed (when the special figure 2 hold storage number becomes 0), the special figure 1 lottery is performed. A left-handed game aimed at execution is performed.

As described above, in the fifth control example, even when the normal state is set, the predetermined condition is satisfied (by winning the long opening in the general drawing lottery). The special figure 2 lottery is configured to be able to be executed, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery. As a result, in the normal state, it is possible to have the player perform a game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed in parallel with the game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed by aiming at the first winning opening 64. Can be improved.

<About the flow of production in the 5th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 317 to 331, the characteristic effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, when the normal state is set, the variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. If a long open hit is won in the pachinko lottery during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the pachinko variation effect is displayed so as to interrupt the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation. Has been done.

Here, in the Fuzu fluctuation production, a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 after a game per Fuzu (opening of the electric accessory 640A) from the start timing of the Fuzu fluctuation, and the winning ball corresponds to the winning ball. Special Figure 2 A small hit is won due to fluctuations, and it is executed as part of a series of productions using the period until the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning.

Here, in recent years, the electric accessory 640A is opened for a long period of time (for example, for 1.5 seconds) during a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol). There is a method in which the lottery contents of the general drawing lottery are set so that the winner can be won, and the special drawing lottery (for example, the special drawing 2 lottery) which is temporarily advantageous in the normal state is executed. In such a gaming machine, a player who has been playing a game in a normal state for a long period of time can be made to execute an advantageous special drawing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in such a gaming machine, the result of the normal map lottery is executed by the time when the normal map fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is executed and the winning game per long opening is executed for the player. An effect capable of providing the enjoyment of predicting the There is also.

However, in recent gaming machines that perform only the normal map variation effect that can notify the player that the winning game per long opening is executed, the variation effect of the special figure 2 lottery acquired by the winning game and the above-mentioned The special figure 2 lottery was executed because the privilege given to the player by the winning game per long opening, that is, the winning game per long opening was executed, which is not related to the normal figure fluctuation effect. There was a problem that it was not possible to inform the fact in an easy-to-understand manner, and it was not possible to enhance the effect of the fluctuation effect of the pachinko machine.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 after a game per game (opening of the electric accessory 640A) from the start timing of the fluctuation of the normal figure, and the winning ball is used. It is configured to execute a series of effects by using the period until the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning by the corresponding special figure 2 fluctuation. As a result, by executing a series of effects, it is possible to inform the player of the flow of the game until the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the general drawing lottery in an easy-to-understand manner, and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. can.

Here, in the case of executing the above-mentioned series of effects, when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the hit game per long opening of the normal figure, that is, while the electric accessory 640A is open for a long period of time. In addition, there arises a problem that the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the prize is started differs greatly depending on the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 fluctuation. Specifically, for example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is 120 seconds at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640. , The period (waiting period) from when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 to when the special figure 2 fluctuation is started is 120 seconds. If a series of productions are continuously executed in such a situation, there is a problem that the production mode of the series of productions is delayed and the player gets tired of the productions.

In response to such a problem, in the fifth control example, when the above-mentioned waiting period is 60 seconds or more, the series of effects is simulatedly terminated and then the series of effects is simulated again. It is configured so that the aspect is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production mode of a series of productions is delayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317, the flow of the variation effect related to the special map variation and the variation effect related to the normal map variation executed in the normal state will be described. FIG. 317 (A) shows the flow of the effect executed when the waiting period from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 to when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts is less than a predetermined period (less than 60 seconds). In FIG. 317 (B), the waiting period from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 to when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts is a predetermined period or more (60 seconds or more). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect executed in the case.

As shown in FIG. 317 (A), the main display area DM of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed until the variation corresponding to the long opening of the normal map (long opening variation) is executed by the fluctuation of the normal map. A variation effect (special 1 effect) corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is executed using the entire surface of. Here, with reference to FIG. 319 (A), the display screen of the variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 will be described. FIG. 319 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variation effect). As shown in FIG. 319 (A), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is vertically partitioned between the main display area DM and the sub display area DS, and is located in the upper right of the front view in the main display area DM. Small display areas DM1 and DM2 are formed (on the upper right side when viewed from the center of the main display area DM). The small display areas DM1 and DM2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area DM1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area DM2.

By providing the small display areas DM1 and DM2 in this way, the lottery status of the special symbol can be displayed. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in the small display areas DM1 and DM2 (FIG. 319). In (A), it is displayed by a downward arrow) to indicate the situation where the special symbol is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas DM1 and DM2 (see FIG. 322 (A)). ), It is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but the figure is not limited to this, and for example, the figure can be displayed by using a display mode imitating the figure as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing a plurality of colors. It is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by showing that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode to be deformed or the display mode to change the color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific symbol or color. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 319 (A), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas DM1 and DM2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the fourth symbol display area on the upper right side of the area DM is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area DM. You may make it different.

Specifically, in the variation effect executed using the entire surface of the main display area DM, it is possible to understand whether the variation effect being executed corresponds to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation. When the effect mode for making it difficult is set, it is preferable to change the fourth symbol display area (small display areas DM1 and DM2) so as to make it difficult for the player to see. Further, for example, by switching the position of the display area of the fourth symbol corresponding to each special symbol or displaying only one of the display areas, the player sees the display mode of the fourth symbol display area. It may be configured so that the type of the special symbol being executed cannot be easily determined only by itself. With this configuration, the type of special symbol currently being executed is grasped by the display mode of the fourth symbol display area, and the effect of the variable effect executed in the main display area DM is reduced. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

As described above, it is notified that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode of the fourth symbol display area corresponding to the period in which the special symbol (special symbol) is fluctuating, but the fluctuating special symbol is used. When the variable display is configured so that the type is difficult to determine, the result of the corresponding special figure fluctuation (lottery) and the special figure type can be notified by the stop display mode after the variation display is completed. For example, when the red stop display mode is displayed as the display mode (stop display mode) of the fourth symbol displayed as a stop display, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 (special 1 fourth). When the blue stop display mode is displayed in the symbol), it may be configured to notify that it is the fourth symbol (special 2 fourth symbol) corresponding to the special figure 2.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area and the effect of the effect is reduced. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

Further, a small display area DM1A is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area DM1, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 is displayed. Further, a small display area DM2A is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area DM2, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 319 (A) described later, in the reserved number display area (small display areas DM1A, DM1B), the number of reserved balls of each special figure is displayed in a numerical display mode. Although it is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a display mode using a color or a symbol so that the number of reserved balls in the acquired figure can be identified.

A small display area DM4 is formed in the upper left of the front view (from the center of the main display area DM to the upper left) in the main display area DM. In this small display area DM4, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 320 (B)).

In the fifth control example, the small display area DM4 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board 13 the ball should be fired only by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area DM4. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area DM4), a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a left-handed game to be performed by the player are performed. The display mode of "left-handed" for guiding that is displayed, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the time saving state, the big hit game, and the small hit game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. ing. Further, even when it is detected that the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state, the "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is configured so that the display mode is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 319 (A), the explanation will be continued. Although detailed description will be omitted, the above-mentioned small display areas DM1A and DM2A are the results of preliminarily determining the winning information stored in the hold in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol (pre-reading result). ) Is configured to display a display mode capable of suggesting and notifying the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold).

Further, a small display area DM3 is formed below the small display areas DM1 and DM2. This small display area DM3 is an area in which identification information for showing the lottery status (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) of the normal symbol (normal figure) is displayed, and is normal. The fourth symbol (the fourth symbol of the ordinary figure) for showing the lottery status of the symbol (the ordinary figure) is configured to be displayed in the small display area DM3.

In addition, a small display area DM3A is formed in the vicinity of the small display area DM3, and the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is displayed. In the small display area DM3A described above, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding normal symbol, the result (look-ahead result) of preliminarily determining the reserved winning information can be suggested to the player. It is configured to display various display modes. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the normal symbol stored in the hold).

Further, a sub-display area DS is formed below the main display area DM. As shown in FIG. 319 (B), the sub-display area DS is configured to display a comment on the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub-display area DS may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas DM1A and DM2A may be displayed in the sub-display area DS. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, the sub-display area DS may be configured to display a hold display mode (for example, a hold symbol display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable to configure the player so that the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol can be grasped by the number of displayed holding display modes. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, the game is played with the expectation that a big hit will be won in the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is changed among the reserved symbols that may exist in a plurality. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the reserved symbols corresponding to the individual reserved memory numbers, the display mode for showing the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable reserved symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area DM are displayed. The effect explanation mode for explaining, the frame button-related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and the hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area DS. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area DM and the sub display area DS is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area DS.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbol displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the deviation and the holding ball exists, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out. After that, the confirmation is displayed, and then the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. Even though the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is no winning (ball winning) in either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. In rare cases where the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player has quit the game and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. Due to that.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new winning is executed. Will be done.

In FIG. 319 (A), for convenience of explanation, the small display area (guidance display area) DM4 is shown to be displayed in the main display area DM, but the game method (direction) is shown to the player. When the display mode to be guided is not displayed, the small display area DM4 itself is not displayed. In this way, in a state where it is not necessary to guide the game method (direction), by deleting the display area in which the guidance display area is displayed, an area for displaying another display mode (for example, a variable effect display mode) can be displayed. Since it can be widened, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 317 (A), the explanation will be continued. When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the normal long open variation is executed while the special figure 1 variation is being executed, a part of the main display area DM of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. (See point A in FIG. 317 (A)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point A in FIG. 317 (A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 319 (B).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal map long open fluctuation elapses for a predetermined time, the special figure fluctuation effect displayed in the main display area DM of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the display area of the normal map variation effect The process of switching the size is executed, the normal map variation effect is executed using the entire surface of the main display area DM, and the special figure variation effect is executed in a part of the main display area DM (FIG. 317 (A)). See point B). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point B in FIG. 317 (A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320 (A).

In this control example, the timing for switching the size of the display area between the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect is set to be 10 seconds after the start of the normal map variation effect. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this control example, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set in a part of the case where the result of the normal drawing lottery is out of order, and the 10-second normal drawing is set. Even when the deviation variation is set, the normal map variation effect (see FIG. 319 (B)) is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, when the normal map fluctuation effect is executed based on the normal map variation effect (10 seconds), the display area between the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect is not switched, and the normal map variation effect is not switched. The effect that the variable effect ends is executed. Therefore, after the normal map variation effect is executed, the display area between the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect is switched and displayed (see FIG. 320 (A)), so that the normal map variation effect being executed is normal. Figure It is possible to increase the degree of expectation, which is a long open fluctuation.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal map long open fluctuation elapses, the game per normal map (long open game) is executed, and the display screen during the game per normal map is displayed (see point C in FIG. 317 (A)). .. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point C in FIG. 317 (A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320 (B).

Here, the display contents of the normal map fluctuation effect executed based on the normal map variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 319 (B) to 320 (B). FIG. 319 (B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content displayed immediately after the start of the normal map variation effect (see the point A in FIG. 317 (A)). As shown in FIG. 319 (B), when the normal map variation effect is executed, the small display area DM5 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area DM (in the lower right direction when viewed from the center of the main display area DM). , The normal map fluctuation production is started.

That is, the small display area DM5 is a normal map variation effect display area on which the normal map variation effect is executed. Then, as a normal figure fluctuation effect, the character 851 finds the treasure box 852 and approaches the treasure box 852. In the state shown in FIG. 319 (B), since the special figure 1 fluctuation and the normal figure fluctuation are being executed, the display mode (FIG.) showing that the special figure 1 is variablely displayed in the small display area DM1. In 319 (B), "displayed by a downward arrow") is displayed, and in a display mode indicating that the normal map is variablely displayed in the small display area DM3 (in FIG. 319 (B), "downward" is displayed. Displayed by "arrow") is displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area DS, the characters "Treasure chest found !! Chance when you reach it !!" are displayed as a comment to indicate that the normal map fluctuation effect has been executed and the content of the normal map variation effect. .. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner what kind of effect the normal map variation effect executed in a part of the main display area DM should be developed in the future.

After that, when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the normal map fluctuation effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 320 (A) is displayed. FIG. 320 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content displayed immediately after the display area of the normal map variation effect is switched (see point B in FIG. 317 (A)). As shown in FIG. 320 (A), when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the normal map variation effect, the normal map variation effect is executed using the entire main display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the first The variable display effect of the special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small area DM6 formed in a part (lower left part) of the main display area DM. Then, in the sub-display area DS, a comment of "great chance" indicating that the normal map fluctuation effect has progressed (indicating that the result of the normal map lottery was not an out-of-normal fluctuation) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 319 (B) and 320 (A), a variable effect (special figure variable effect, general figure variable effect) for showing the lottery results of a plurality of symbol lottery (special figure lottery, general figure lottery). By varying the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed according to the suggestion status of the lottery result of each symbol lottery, a lottery of a plurality of symbol lottery is performed for the player. It is possible to notify that the variation effects for showing the result are being executed at the same time, and to inform in an easy-to-understand manner which variation effect should be watched depending on the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed. can.

Although not shown, when the executed normal-figure fluctuation effect is a non-normal-figure fluctuation (10 seconds), the small display area DM5 gradually becomes smaller from the display screen of FIG. 319 (B), and finally. The effect that the small display area DM5 is not displayed is executed, and the player is notified that the lottery result of the normal map lottery corresponding to the current normal map fluctuation effect is out of order. In this way, when the normal map fluctuation effect is executed based on the normal map deviation variation, only the normal map variation effect using a display area smaller than the special map variation display effect is executed, so that the normal map variation effect is executed. The figure variation effect does not interfere with the special figure variation effect.

That is, according to the above-mentioned example, the deviation (the deviation from the normal map (10 seconds)) is selected as the effect result of the normal map fluctuation effect (the result of the normal map lottery that triggered the execution of the normal map fluctuation effect). During the possible period, that is, the period from the start of the normal map variation effect to the elapse of 10 seconds, the special map variation effect and the normal map variation effect can be obtained by executing the display mode shown in FIG. 319 (B). The player is notified that the variation effect is being executed at the same time, and when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the variation effect, the effect result of the variation effect (the usual opportunity to execute the variation effect). Since there is no possibility that an outlier (variation out of the ordinary figure (10 seconds)) is selected as the result of the figure lottery), the possibility that the current drawing lottery is a win is high, so FIG. 320 (A). As shown in the above, a display mode in which the display area of the normal map variation effect is large (larger than the display area in which the special map variation effect is executed) is executed.

As a result, there is a high possibility that the lottery result that is advantageous to the player as the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation effect, that is, the lottery result in which the game is executed when the electric accessory 640A is opened for a long time is increased. Since the display area in which the effect is executed can be enlarged, it is possible to make the player appropriately pay attention to the normal figure variation effect. Further, for example, when the normal map fluctuation effect is executed based on the normal map deviation variation (10 seconds), the normal map variation is executed in a display area smaller than the special map variation effect (see FIG. 319 (B)). Since it ends only with the production, it does not interfere with the visibility of the special figure fluctuation production. In addition, regardless of the lottery result of the Fuzu lottery, the size of the display area at the start of the Fuzu variation effect is unified, so the lottery of the Fuzu lottery depends on the display mode immediately after the Fuzu variation effect is started. It is possible to prevent the result from being predicted by the player.

In the fifth control example, as shown in FIGS. 319 (B) and 320 (A), the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is larger than the display area in which the special figure variation effect is executed. A small display area (small display area DM5 (see FIG. 319 (B))) and a display area larger than the display area (small display area DM6 (see FIG. 320 (A)) on which the special figure variation effect is executed (FIG. 320). (See (A)) and two sizes are provided, but the size is not limited to this, and three or more sizes of the display area for the normal map variation effect may be provided. For example, the special figure variation effect may be provided. A display area as large as the display area in which is executed may be used.

Further, in the fifth control example, the display area in which the normal map fluctuation effect is executed is configured to gradually increase as the normal map variation effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display area in which the variation effect is executed may be reduced from the initial range (see FIG. 319 (B)) and then varied to the size of the final range (see FIG. 320 (A)). .. With this configuration, it is possible to continue the normal map fluctuation effect while making the player think that the normal map variation effect will end, so that it is possible to provide an unexpected effect. can.

Further, in the fifth control example, when the special figure variation effect and the normal figure variation effect are executed at the same time, the player pays attention by changing the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed. Although it is configured to indicate a power variation effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the mode of the display area in which each variation effect is executed (for example, the color of the outer shell of the display area or the background color of the display area). Variable mode) and audio output mode corresponding to each variation effect (for example, output only the sound corresponding to one variation effect, or change the output level (volume) of the sound corresponding to each variation effect). By setting the output mode), one of a plurality of variable effects may be configured to be watched by the player.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the range of the display area in which the normal map fluctuation effect is executed is changed according to the progress status (elapsed time) of the normal map variation effect. Without limitation, for example, the range of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is changed based on the operation content for the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, and the normal map variation is performed. It may be configured to set a variable range of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed based on the progress status (elapsed time) of the effect and the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the normal map lottery. ..

With this configuration, for a player who wants to quickly grasp the lottery result of the normal map lottery during the normal map fluctuation production, the normal map lottery is based on the range of the display area that can be changed based on the operation of the operating means. The display area where the normal map fluctuation effect is executed by not operating the operation means for the player who wants to grasp the lottery result of It is possible to execute a normal map fluctuation effect without changing the range of.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the regular opening fluctuation has elapsed and it is displayed that the lottery result of the regular drawing lottery is a long opening hit, then the long opening hit is executed, and it is shown in FIG. 320 (B). The display screen is displayed. FIG. 320 (B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the game is won per long opening and the game is executed per long opening.

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), when the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 in the main display area DM when the normal figure long opening is won, the character 851 is selected from the treasure box 852 to show that the normal figure long opening is won. The effect that the capsule 853 of the above appears is executed. Then, a display mode (indicated by "three circles" in the figure) for indicating that the result of the normal drawing lottery is a long open hit is displayed in the small display area DM3, and the small display area DM4 is displayed. , "Right-handed" is displayed in order to make the second winning opening 640 perform a game (right-handed game) to win a ball, and in the small display area DM5, the position where the ball is won by the right-handed game is visually displayed. As a guide display mode for notifying, a guide map schematically showing a part of the right game area (near the second winning opening 640) of the game board 13 is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 320 (B), since the special figure 1 change is being executed even while the normal figure long open per game is being executed, the special figure 1 is changing in the small display area DM1. The special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the display mode indicating that the special figure variation effect is reduced in the small display area DM6 formed on the lower left side of the main display area DM (display of FIG. 320 (A)). It is displayed smaller than the screen). In this way, even if the size of the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed is not changed, the display area in which the special map variation effect is executed is executed by reducing the display area in which the special figure variation effect is executed. On the other hand, since the display area in which the normal map variation effect is executed can be made relatively large, it is possible to make the effect content of the normal map variation effect more conspicuous for the player.

Then, a comment of "Challenge GET" is displayed in the sub-display area DS to notify the player that the normal map fluctuation effect is further developed. Here, in the fifth control example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the Fuzu lottery is a hit, the fluctuation time is the same as the fluctuation time (60 seconds) set at the time of winning per the Fuzu long opening. It is configured so that the short opening fluctuation (60 seconds) is set. When the normal map fluctuation effect is executed in response to this normal map short opening fluctuation, the normal map variation effect proceeds until the same display mode as the display screen shown in FIG. 320 (B) is displayed, and the treasure box An effect is executed in which the out-of-order mode for showing that the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is out of 852 is displayed.

That is, when a winner is won in the regular drawing lottery and the short opening operation is executed as a winning game, the electric accessory 640A is configured to be opened to the extent that the ball cannot win the second winning opening 640. ing. In this case, even if the right-handed game is executed, the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 (it is difficult), so that the comment of "right-handed" is not displayed in the small display area DM4. ..

In this control example, as a winning game (a game in which the electric accessory 640A is opened) that is executed when a winning game is won in the regular drawing lottery, a long opening winning game in which a ball can be won in the second winning opening 640. It is configured to be able to execute two types of hit games, a short open hit game that makes it difficult to win a ball in the second winning opening 640, but it is not limited to this, and three or more types of hit games can be executed. For example, as a long opening game in which a ball can be won in the second winning opening 640, a winning game in which the opening timing and opening time of the electric accessory 640A are different can be executed. good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the electric accessory 640A during the long open game, so that the ball is fired only at a predetermined timing during the hit game. 2 It is possible to suppress the game of winning a ball in the winning opening 640. Further, in order to achieve the same effect, for example, the execution timing of the normal map variation effect (the timing of displaying the display mode for notifying that the game per normal map is started) may be configured to be different. .. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the second winning opening 640 to grasp the ball launch timing that can be won based on the effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 317 (A), the flow of the production will be described. When a right-handed game is performed and the ball wins the second winning opening 640 (see point C in FIG. 317 (A)), the display mode indicating that is the third. It is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point C in FIG. 317 (A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 321 (A).

Here, in the fifth control example, the special figure 1 change for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 change for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery are simultaneously (in parallel). ) It cannot be executed, and it is configured to preferentially execute the special figure 2 change over the special figure 1 change.

Therefore, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure, the winning information of the special figure 2 is reserved and stored, and the special figure 1 being executed is executed. During the period until the fluctuation ends (waiting period), the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation is waited for. After that, when the execution of the special figure 1 change is completed, the special figure 2 change based on the winning information stored on hold is preferentially executed, and the special figure 2 which has advanced the above-mentioned normal figure change effect effect mode. The variation effect is executed (see point D in FIG. 317 (A)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point D in FIG. 317 (A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 321 (B).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is completed and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit winning (see the point E in FIG. 317 (A)), the special drawing 2 for showing the small hit winning is shown. Fluctuation production is executed. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point E in FIG. 317 (A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 322 (A). Then, when the ball passes through a specific region (V gate (V region)) provided in the V winning device 650 while the small hit game is being executed (see point F in FIG. 317 (A)), the small hit game is executed. A display mode indicating that the jackpot game is executed after the hit game is completed is displayed (see FIG. 322 (B)).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 321 (A) to 322 (B), the third symbol is executed until the normal figure long open hit game is executed during the normal state and the big hit game is executed based on the hit game. The contents of the effect executed on the display screen of the display device 81 will be described.

In this fifth control example, a series of games (normal figure fluctuation, normal figure hit, special figure 2 fluctuation, special figure 2 small hit) from the execution of the normal figure long open fluctuation to the execution of the big hit game (normal figure fluctuation, normal figure hit, special figure 2 small hit). , A game that is executed in the flow of a big hit), it is configured to execute a series of productions with a story. Specifically, the player is informed that the production content of the normal map variation effect described with reference to FIGS. 319 (B) to 320 (B) progresses, and the jackpot game is executed depending on the progress status of the production. It is possible to suggest.

With this configuration, a series of effects are used to determine whether or not an execution trigger that is more complicated than the execution trigger that is established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol (special symbol) as the execution trigger of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In FIG. 321 (A), the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 in the state shown in FIG. 320 (B), that is, in the state in which the game per long opening executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the display screen for demonstrating that. As shown in FIG. 321 (A), when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening, the capsule 853 is broken, suggesting the content of the game to be executed from the capsule 853 in the future. A ticket 854 with a "challenge game" as an aspect is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area DS, a comment of "challenge game GET" notifying that the challenge game will be executed in the future is displayed.

Here, according to the example shown in FIG. 321 (A), since the special figure 1 change is being executed, the special figure 2 change is immediately executed based on the fact that the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. The winning information of the special figure 2 will be put on hold and stored without being performed. Therefore, in the small display area DM2A, "1" indicating that one prize information of the special figure 2 has been acquired is displayed. Then, when the special figure 1 change executed in the state of FIG. 321 (A) is completed, the special figure 2 change is started, and the challenge game is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 321 (B)).

FIG. 321 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen during a challenge game. As shown in FIG. 321 (B), when the special figure 2 variation is executed during the execution of the series of effects, the challenge game is started. This challenge game is an effect executed in the main display area DM of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as shown in FIG. 321 (A), a plurality of result display modes 861A for showing the effect result. ~ 861E rotate in order, and the result display modes 861A to 861E, which are stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, are executed as the effect of this time.

In the fifth control example, the result display mode is the result display mode 861A with a “cross” to indicate that the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is “off”, and “small hit”. The result display mode 861D with a "V" to indicate that, the result display mode 861C with a "777" to indicate that it is a "big hit", and the lottery result of the special figure 2 are not notified. It has a result display mode 861B with a “?” And a result display mode 861E with a “NEXT” indicating that the challenge game is executed again.

Here, in the result display mode 861B in which "?" Is added as the production result of the challenge game, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is any of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". In the challenge game, the effect of not notifying the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Even when the result display mode 861B is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, "right-handed" is displayed in the small area DM4.

With this configuration, when the result display mode 861B is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect result of the challenge game, the right-handed game is performed without grasping the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. Therefore, whether the ball launched by the right-handed game wins the V winning device 650 which is opened during the small hit game, or the variable winning device 65 which is opened during the big hit game. Do you win the second winning opening 640 that is open during the game, or you have not won the special drawing (big hit, small hit) and the regular drawing, and you do not win any winning opening. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the game is flowing while observing the actual flow behavior of the ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the fifth control example, when the result display mode 861B is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the player cannot grasp the effect result of the challenge game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the result display mode 861B is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the display mode of the result display mode 861B is changed to notify the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery as the effect result of the challenge game. You may be able to do it.

With this configuration, during the execution of the challenge game, it is possible to inform the game which special figure 2 lottery result corresponds to the result display mode 861B in an incomprehensible manner, and the challenge game ends. Then, the effect result of this challenge game, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 can be notified to the player.

Further, the result display mode 861E (“NEXT display”) shown in FIG. 321 (B) is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 when the challenge game is executed again. In this fifth control example, when a plurality of winning information of special figure 2 is acquired during a game per long opening, the lottery of special figure 2 continues until a big hit or a small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2. Is executed. In this case, for example, if the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is out of order, the second special figure 2 lottery is continuously executed, so that the challenge is executed in response to the change of the first special figure 2. As a result of the game effect, the result display mode 861E is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, and the second special figure 2 variation is started. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is a hit (big hit, small hit), any one of the result display modes 861B to 861D for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. To.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a production (challenge game) corresponding to the number of winning information of the special figure 2 acquired during the game per long opening without discomfort. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the variable time set in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is the variable time corresponding to one challenge game (10 seconds) and the variable time corresponding to two times (20 seconds). ) And are configurable, and when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is out of order, the fluctuation time of 20 seconds is more difficult to be selected than the fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

As a result, if the challenge game is executed twice with one special figure 2 fluctuation effect, it is possible to set a high possibility of winning (big hit, small hit) in the special figure 2 lottery. .. Further, when the result display mode 861E to which "NEXT" is added by the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 and the challenge game is executed again, the second challenge game is one special figure 2. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the execution was performed within the fluctuation time or across the two special figure 2 fluctuations.

Since the state shown in FIG. 321 is a state in which the change in special figure 2 is being executed, the change in special figure 1 that has changed at the time shown in FIG. 321 (A) is out of the small display area DM1. The display mode "451" is stopped and displayed, and in the small display area DM2, the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the display mode (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed. It is displayed. Further, since the special figure 2 variation was executed using the prize information of the special figure 2 which was reserved and stored at the time shown in FIG. 321 (A), “0” is displayed as the value displayed in the small display area DM2A. It is displayed.

Then, as a series of effects, the special figure 2 variation effect is executed using the display area in which the normal figure variation effect was executed, so that the special figure variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) is executed in FIG. 321 (A). The small display area DM6 that has been set is deleted from the main display area DM. Further, in the small display area DM4, the character of "right-handed" for letting the player perform a right-handed game is continuously displayed, and in the sub-display area DS, in order to fuel the production of this challenge game. The comment "What will come out?" Is displayed.

According to the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 321 (B), the small display areas DM1 to DM3 and DM1A to DM3A are displayed in a visible size in order to explain the current gaming situation. In reality, it is displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect mode (challenge game) executed in the continuous main display area DM.

Further, as described above, the state shown in FIG. 321 (B) is a state in which the game per long opening of the normal figure is completed and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed, so that the state is provided in the right game area at that timing. None of the winning openings (second winning opening 640, specific winning opening 65A, V winning opening 650A) is in a state where it is not easy to win a ball. However, until just before the state shown in FIG. 321 (B), it is easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 by the normal long open hit game. If you win, or if you win a big hit, it will be easy for the ball to win in the V winning opening 650A or the specific winning opening 65A.

In this way, even if the right-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down to the right-handed game area is not a favorable game method for the player, the right-handed game is continuously performed. By displaying the characters "right-handed" in the small display area DM4, the troublesomeness of the player frequently switching between the right-handed game and the left-handed game is eliminated, and the switching operation of the game method is delayed, for example. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the right-handed game cannot be performed in the state where the small hit game is executed, and the ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game.

In this control example, for the reason described above, when the right-handed game can be executed at a predetermined interval (the period during which the variation in Special Figure 2 is executed), the small display area DM4 is continuously maintained during the predetermined interval. It is configured to display the character "right-handed" in the small display area DM4 only when the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player. It may be configured to be displayed, or a state in which the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player (normal figure long open hit period, small hit game period) and a period between the states (special figure 2 variation). The characters "right-handed" may be displayed in the small display area DM4 in different display modes.

With this configuration, players who are not accustomed to the game can continuously play right-handed games, and the game situation is disadvantageous to the player (during the small hit game, the ball is placed in the V winning opening 650A. (Situations in which a prize cannot be won) is unlikely to occur, and a skilled player can be made to select a game method according to the display mode of "right-handed" displayed in the small display area DM4. Therefore, it is possible to play a game according to the skill of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with respect to the display content displayed when the result display mode 861D with "V" as the effect result of the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, that is, when the small hit is won, FIG. 322 ( A) will be described with reference to. FIG. 322 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hit winning is notified in a challenge game.

As shown in FIG. 322 (A), when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a small hit, the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the display mode “341” indicating the small hit winning in the small display area DM2. Is displayed, and the result display mode 861D is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. Then, a comment of "small hit GET !!" indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed in the sub display area DS, and the player aims at the small display area DM7 of the main display area DM during the small hit game. As a guidance display mode for visually guiding the V winning device 650, a schematic diagram in which the vicinity of the V winning device 650 is enlarged and displayed is displayed.

Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game, it is notified that the right to execute the big hit game is acquired after the end of the small hit game. The display screen shown in FIG. 322 (B) is displayed as the display screen of. FIG. 322 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right of the big hit game is acquired during the small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 322 (B), the character "777" indicating that the jackpot game is executed is displayed in the main display area DM, and the sub-display area DS congratulates the player with "big hit !! Congratulations!" ! ”Comment is displayed.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the normal symbol variation effect (see FIG. 319 (B)) is executed when the fluctuation per long opening of the normal symbol (normal diagram) is started in the normal state. , The game effect per game performed during the game per game in which the electric accessory 640A is opened (see FIG. 320 (B)). The special figure 2 hold acquisition effect (see FIG. 321 (A)) executed when the prize information of the special figure 2 is acquired, and the special figure 2 variation effect executed when the special figure 2 variation (lottery) is started. (See Fig. 321 (B)), Small hit winning effect (see Fig. 322 (A)) indicating that a small hit was won in the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery), and the right to the big hit game was acquired during the small hit game. Since the small hit in-game effect (see FIG. 322 (B)) to be executed in the case is configured to be executed as a series of effects with a story, the big hit is established when a plurality of conditions are satisfied. In the pachinko machine 10 having an opportunity to execute a game, the game performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Returning to FIG. 317, the explanation will be continued. As described above, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. 317 (A), it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game by executing a series of effects. Among them, depending on the game state when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, it may not be possible to inform the player of the progress of the game in an easy-to-understand manner in the above-mentioned production mode of the series of effects.

Specifically, at the timing of the point C in FIG. 317 (A), since the special figure 1 change is being executed, the start timing of the special figure 2 change is a predetermined period (the remaining period of the special figure 1 change during execution). A series of production modes in which a display screen (see FIG. 321 (A)) is displayed when the player is on standby is used. When the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, the special figure 2 fluctuation is immediately started. Therefore, when the effect mode of the series of effects described above is used, the display screen of FIG. 320 (B) is directly transferred to the display screen of FIG. 321 (B), and each of the effects executed as a series of effects is executed. There was a problem that the relevance of the production was weakened.

Therefore, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period when the series of effects is being executed, and the determination result is used. Based on this, it is configured to change the effect mode after acquiring the winning information of the special figure 2. Here, the content of the effect when the change in the special figure 1 is not executed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of effects is being executed will be described with reference to FIG. 323.

FIG. 323 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the non-variation of the special figure 1, and FIG. 323 (B) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning information acquired in FIG. 323 (A) is a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 323 (A), when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 in the state where the special figure 1 change is not executed, the special figure 2 change starts immediately, so that FIG. 320 (B) is shown. By the effect shown in the above, the effect that the character 851 destroys the capsule 853 appearing from the treasure box 852 by using the hammer 851AA is executed. Then, when the timing at which the fluctuation of the special figure 2 stops is reached, the display screen shown in FIG. 323 (B) is displayed. FIG. 323 (B) is an example of a display screen displayed when the special figure 2 fluctuation executed based on the fact that the ball wins the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 fluctuation is non-variable. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically.

As shown in FIG. 323 (B), when the variation of the special figure 2 is stopped, an effect is executed in which the result display mode 855 showing the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2 appears from the capsule 853. In the example shown in FIG. 323 (B), since the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the result display mode 855 with “V” indicating the small hit winning is displayed. The display mode of the result display mode 855 is configured to be variable according to the lottery result of the variation of the special figure 2, and specifically, the effect result of the challenge game shown in FIG. 321 (B) is shown. Since it is the same as the display mode shown, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, during a series of productions, if a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the production in which the capsule 853 appears from the treasure box 852 corresponds to the normal period (first stage). (Direction), and the production to acquire the ticket 854 from the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 hold acquisition period (remaining fluctuation period of special figure 1) (second stage production), and the challenge game production changes to special figure 2. While the production mode is set to correspond to the period (third stage production), if the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the non-variable special figure 1, the capsule 853 from the treasure box 852 The effect mode is set so that the effect in which the capsule 853 appears corresponds to the period per normal figure (first stage effect), and the effect of destroying the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 variable period (second stage effect). It is composed.

In this way, by configuring it so that different production modes can be set depending on the game situation during the series of production, depending on whether the waiting period of special figure 2 fluctuation occurs or not, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to execute an easy-to-understand series of effects without any problems.

Returning to FIG. 317, the flow of the production will be continued. In the series of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 319 to 323, the contents of the effects that can be displayed when a normal game is executed while the series of effects are being executed have been described. Specifically, about the production content when the ball normally wins the second prize opening 640 during the normal long opening game, and the production content when the ball wins the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game. I explained.

Here, the content of the effect to be executed when the normal game is not executed in the state where the series of effect is executed will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 324, the contents of the effect when the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 during the game for the long opening of the normal figure will be described. FIG. 324 (A) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won a prize in the second winning opening 640 when one second has elapsed from the start of the game per long opening. FIG. 324 (B) is a schematic diagram shown, which is displayed when the game for the long opening of the normal figure is completed without the ball winning the second winning opening 640 during the game for the long opening of the normal figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display screen schematically.

As shown in FIG. 324 (A), in the main display area DM, the capsule 853 rolls away from the character 851 until the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the long opening game. At the same time as the execution, the comment "Hurry !!, Hurry !!" is displayed in the sub-display area DS to alert the second winning opening 640 to hurry to win the ball. In addition, it is possible that the player is not playing the right-handed game as a factor that causes the ball not to win the second winning opening 640 even after the game has passed for a predetermined period. The "right-handed" guidance display mode displayed in the small display area DM4 is displayed in a display mode that is emphasized more than usual (in FIG. 324 (A), the outer shell of the small display area DM4 is displayed by a double line). Will be done. In addition, the voice output device 226 also outputs a voice for notifying that the right-handed game is to be performed.

In this fifth control example, as a game per long opening, the electric accessory 640A is opened for 1 second, and then the electric accessory 640A is opened again for 0.5 seconds after a closing period of 1.5 seconds. It is configured so that a winning game (opening operation) is executed. Therefore, when one second has passed from the start of the game per the long opening of the normal figure, the caution screen shown in FIG. 324 (A) is displayed, and if the player who notices the display plays the right-handed game, the latter half of the game is performed. It is configured so that the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 during the opening period (0.5 seconds). As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity for a player who has played a right-handed game after visually recognizing the display content of the alert screen to win a ball in the second winning opening 640.

After that, when the game time (3 seconds) per the long opening of the normal figure elapses without the ball winning in the second winning opening 640, the series of production is completed as shown in FIG. 324 (B). An effect indicating that is executed. As shown in FIG. 324 (B), the character 851, which cannot acquire the capsule 853 and is regrettable, is displayed in the main display area DM, and "end" indicating that the series of effects has been completed in the sub display area DS. Comment is displayed. Further, in the small display area DM4, the character of "left-handed" for executing a normal game for executing the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state is displayed. With this configuration, if a normal game (a game that causes the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal long opening) is not executed in the middle of the series of production, the series of production will be performed. Since the effect to be completed is executed, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations due to the progress of the series of effect to the end without acquiring the winning information of the special figure 2. ..

Next, as the content of the effect to be executed when the normal game is not executed in the state where the continuous effect is executed, when the ball does not win the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game, or is specified. The contents of the effect when the area (V gate (V area)) is not passed will be described with reference to FIG. 325. FIG. 325 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won the V winning opening 650A when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game. FIG. 325 (B) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when the small hit game is completed without the ball winning the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 325 (A), if a ball has not won a prize in the V winning opening 650A when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game, a small formed in a part of the main display area DM. In the display area DM8, the characters "Last 5 seconds !!" are displayed as the remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the small hit game, and a countdown display is executed in which the value decreases with the passage of time. Then, in the main display area DM, a situation is displayed in which the display mode for showing the game result of the small hit game is wrapped in smoke. Further, as in FIG. 324 (A) described above, the highlighting mode in which the guidance of the right-handed game is emphasized is displayed in the small display area DM4, and the sub-display area DS is currently in the small hit game. , The comment "Small hit !! Hurry !!" is displayed to indicate that the game is to be played in a hurry.

Then, when the small hit game is completed without winning the ball in the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game, a screen is displayed in which the same series of effects as in FIG. 324 (B) described above is completed (FIG. 325 (FIG. 325). B) See). As described above, when the situation where the series of effects is completed occurs at each time point of the series of effects, the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by using the same image data. In addition, since it cannot be displayed when a normal game is played, it is unlikely that the same image data is reused for the player even if the same image data is used. It is a thing.

Returning to FIG. 317, the explanation will be continued. Depending on the fluctuation status of the special figure 1 during the series of production, a state in which the waiting period for the fluctuation in the special figure 2 is set and a state in which the waiting period is not set occur. FIG. 2 A new problem arose even when the waiting period for fluctuation was set.

That is, the waiting period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution, and the winning timing of the ball to the second winning opening 640 is the special figure. It is set regardless of the fluctuation timing of 1. Further, since the length of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 varies, for example, there is a possibility that the waiting period of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during a series of productions exceeds 100 seconds. In such a situation, if the display screen (see FIG. 321 (A)) showing the waiting period for the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is continuously displayed, the same display mode is continuously displayed for 100 seconds. There is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable and the series of productions is delayed and the production effect is reduced.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the series of production, the presence or absence of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation are determined. FIG. 1 When the remaining fluctuation time of fluctuation is a predetermined time (60 seconds) or more, a special series of effects is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317 (B), the flow of the game when the special series of effects is executed will be described. In FIG. 317 (B), the period from when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per chart to when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed (the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 during execution) is 60 seconds. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect (special series effect) executed in the above case. The detailed description of the same elements as the flow shown in FIG. 317 (A) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 317 (B), when a series of effects (general map fluctuation effect) is executed based on the normal map long open variation, the special figure 1 variation (indicated as special 1 variation in the figure) is shown in the special figure 1. The long deviation fluctuation (special 1 long fluctuation (disengagement)) is executed, and when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal long opening, the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed When it is determined that is 60 seconds or more, the series of effects being executed is pseudo-disengaged and ends with the effect (see point G in FIG. 317 (B)). After that, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 long deviation fluctuation during execution reaches 10 seconds, a pseudo series of effects is executed, and a challenge game is executed according to the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation (see FIG. 321 (B)). Is set (see point H in FIG. 317 (B)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 326, the production contents of the above-mentioned special series of effects will be described. FIG. 326 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the point G of FIG. 317 (B). As shown in FIG. 317 (B), when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 is 60 seconds or more, the small display area DM2A is used. Despite the state in which "1" indicating that one prize information of Special Figure 2 is reserved and stored is displayed, the end screen indicating that the series of effects has been completed is displayed in the main display area DM. To.

After that, as a special series of effects, once the series of effects is completed, the special figure variation effect corresponding to the execution of the special figure 1 variation is executed until the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds. Then, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches 10 seconds (when the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 10 seconds later), the display mode shown in FIG. 326 (B) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the contents of the effect executed in the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 318 schematically shows the flow of the effect executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (once) is set after the jackpot game is completed. FIG. 318 (B) is a timing chart, in which a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and the time saving state (5 times) is set after the end of the big hit game executed based on the small hit. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the case of.

As shown in FIG. 318 (A), there is a special figure 1 hold (hereinafter, also referred to as a special 1 hold) at the time when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the special figure 2 hold (hereinafter, both the special 2 hold). If there is no such thing, that is, if the jackpot is won by the game that executes the special figure 1 lottery (left-handed game), the special figure 2 lottery is executed by performing the right-handed game during the time saving state. Also, before, all the special figure 1 lottery stored on hold is configured to be executed.

Specifically, it is executed in a state where the time saving state is set rather than the normal figure fluctuation time (the normal figure fluctuation time set in the high probability state of the normal symbol) which is executed in the state where the time saving state is set. The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is configured to be shorter. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game in the time-saving state while holding the special figure 1 hold. Therefore, while various effects are being executed in the time-saving state, the special figure 1 variation, which is more difficult to win a small hit than the special figure 2 variation, is executed, and the effect balance of the various effects is lost. It can be suppressed.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, when the special figure 1 lottery is executed during the time saving state, 0.2 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery. It is configured so that the fluctuation time is set. Then, the jackpot game end screen indicating the end of the jackpot game is configured to be displayed until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses from the end of the jackpot game or until the special figure 2 variation is executed. ing.

Therefore, after the end of the big hit game, the period during which the special figure change (special figure 1 change) based on the special figure 1 hold already acquired at the start of the big hit game is executed (when the number of special figure 1 hold is 4, about 1). Seconds), a display mode indicating the end of the jackpot game is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to digest the special figure 1 hold without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in the above-mentioned special figure 1 change (special figure 1 change executed immediately after the end of the big hit game), if the big hit is won or the small hit that can pass V is won, the big hit game is played again from the big hit game end screen. The display screen inside is configured to be displayed, and the game information indicating the contents of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds information indicating the number of rounds executed during one jackpot game, or acquired during one jackpot game). Game information showing the cumulative value with the game information of the previous jackpot game is set as the acquired ball number information indicating the number of balls played, and the display mode corresponding to the set game information is displayed. ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the multiple jackpot games are as if they were one jackpot game, so that the second jackpot game (the period during which the jackpot game end screen is displayed) The variation display mode (short time (0.2 seconds) variation) that makes it difficult for the player to identify the special map variation (special map 1 variation) corresponding to the newly executed jackpot game), and the variation of the third symbol. Even if it is executed with (no display), it does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, since the upper limit of the value that can be displayed as the game information of one big hit game can be increased, the player can have a stronger expectation for the big hit winning. Further, in this fifth control example, since the right-handed game is configured to be an appropriate game for both the big hit game and the game in the time saving state, the big hit game is internally completed and the time saving state is set. During the special figure 1 variable period (during the special figure 1 variable period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed), the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the small display area DM4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the current game is a big hit game or a time saving state depending on the display mode of the small display area DM4 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured so that the special figure 2 hold is given priority over the special figure 2 hold. Therefore, in the state where the time saving state is set, for example, even if the player makes a mistake in the game operation and acquires the special figure 1 hold in the state where the special figure 2 hold is present, the special figure 1 is held until the special figure 2 hold disappears. The special figure change (special figure 1 change) based on the hold is not executed. And, as long as the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, the special figure 2 hold is configured so as not to disappear. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 1 fluctuation from being unnecessarily executed during the time saving state.

Further, in the fifth control example, the end condition that is satisfied based on the number of executions of the variation in Special Figure 2 is set as the corresponding time reduction end condition that is a part of the time reduction end condition for ending the time reduction state. , Even if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed a predetermined number of times (up to 4 times) after the jackpot game ends, the game status until the response time reduction end condition is satisfied is updated based on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 fluctuation. There is no such thing.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the special figure 2 fluctuation is configured to be executed in preference to the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in the state where the time saving state is set. It is configured so that the special figure 1 fluctuation is changed for a short time during the period when the special figure 1 is not held, so that the special figure 1 hold is eliminated during the time saving state. FIG. 2 It may be configured to be executed with priority over the fluctuation.

When "Special Figure 2 fluctuation once" is set as the response time reduction end condition after the end of the jackpot game, the special Figure 2 fluctuation change period executed during the time reduction state is used. The time saving final variation effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 327 to 331, the contents of the effect executed during the time saving state in the fifth control example will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, as the effect during the time reduction state, the first time reduction variation effect set in response to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure final variation in the time reduction state and the special effect. It is configured to execute the second time-saving fluctuation effect set in response to the special figure 2 fluctuation, which is the final fluctuation in the figure.

Then, in the first time reduction effect, a variation effect for showing the lottery result of the variation is executed, and in the second time reduction effect, the lottery result of the variation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are shown. Fluctuation production is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 327 (A), the display contents of the first time reduction effect will be described. FIG. 327 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents in the variation effect during the time saving state. The display content shown in FIG. 327 (A) is a display screen when the first special figure 2 variation is executed in the time saving state in which the time saving number “5 times” is set.

As shown in FIG. 327 (A), in the main display area DM of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the characters of "time reduction mode" for indicating that the current time reduction state is displayed are displayed, and the rabbit is displayed. While the imitated character 851 is running, an effect of obtaining any of the lottery result modes 871A to 871C indicating the result of the special drawing lottery is executed. In the fifth control example, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 340, the character 851 tries to obtain the lottery result modes 871A to 871C according to the fluctuation time set during the time reduction state (excluding the time reduction final variation). The get effect is configured to be executed multiple times during one variable period, and as the number of get effects executed during one variable period increases, the lottery result of this special figure variation is the player. It is configured so that the probability that it is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is high. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the effect result of each get effect but also to the number of times the get effect is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the small display area DM4, the character "right-handed" for guiding the game method during the time saving state is displayed, and in the sho display area DM20, the "last 4" indicating the period until the time saving state ends. The characters "Times" are displayed. That is, it is notified that the time saving state will end when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed four times later. In the fifth control example, a plurality of time saving end conditions that are satisfied based on the number of times the special figure changes can be set. However, among the plurality of time saving ending conditions, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured. , It is configured to display the remaining period until the time saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied is satisfied.

With this configuration, all of the multiple time-saving end conditions that exist are displayed, and the period until all the displayed time-saving end conditions are satisfied (remaining period) is displayed most. It is possible to inform the player of the easy time-saving end condition in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, when the easiness of satisfying the time saving end condition overlaps, it may be configured to display all the overlapping time saving end conditions, or only one of the overlapping time saving end conditions is displayed. It may be configured to do so.

In this control example, in FIG. 327 (A), as the lottery result modes 871A to 871C, the first lottery result mode 871A with "777" indicating a big hit winning and the "V" indicating a small winning winning are shown. The attached second lottery result aspect 871B and the third lottery result aspect 871C with a “cross mark” indicating the deviation are displayed, and each time the get effect is executed, the character 851 is selected by one of the lottery. An action is performed in which the result aspects 871A to 871C are acquired but cannot be acquired, and an effect of finally acquiring any of the lottery result aspects 871A to 871C and notifying the lottery result of the variation is executed. However, the lottery result suggestion mode is not limited to this, and for example, a lottery result suggestion mode with a “chance” indicating that the expectation of acquiring the lottery result modes 871A and 871B showing the lottery result that is advantageous to the player in the get effect is high. Or, the effect number suggestion mode with "next" indicating the remaining number of times the get effect is executed is displayed, and the character 851 executes the get effect to acquire the lottery result suggestion mode and the effect count suggestion mode. It may be configured.

With this configuration, the character 851 can execute the action of acquiring one of the display modes a plurality of times during one variable display effect, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the effect. be able to. In addition, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of this special figure change in the middle of the special figure change period, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the production and improve the interest of the game.

Further, on the display screen shown in FIG. 327 (A), a display mode for showing the remaining number of executions of the variation in the special figure 2 as the remaining period in which the time saving state is set is displayed in the small display area DM20. Not limited to, for example, a display mode for showing the remaining time in which the time reduction state is set based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or the get effect executed during the time reduction state of this time may be displayed. The display mode for showing the remaining number of times may be displayed. Further, the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation at the time when the time reduction state is set, that is, the time reduction end condition (special figure 2 fluctuation number) set in the time reduction state this time, and the special figure executed during the time reduction state. 2 The display mode indicating the number of fluctuations may be configured to be displayed on the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 327 (B), the display contents of the time saving final variation effect (second time saving variation effect) executed in the final variation of the time saving state will be described. FIG. 327 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed in the first half period of the time saving final fluctuation effect. In the fifth control example, as a variation effect on the time saving final fluctuation, a hold ball acquisition effect for causing the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold ball, a lottery result of the change, a look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold, and so on. The second time-saving fluctuation effect for notifying the player of the game and the time-saving final variation effect are enabled, and the hold ball acquisition effect is executed during the first half period (for example, 5 seconds) of the time-saving final variation effect, and the second half period (for example, for example). , 25 seconds) is configured to execute the second time reduction effect.

When the reserved ball acquisition effect is executed in the first half of the time saving final fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 327 (B), "Gather the characters!" Explaining the playability of the first half period in the sub-display area DS! Is displayed, and an effect of gathering ally characters around the character 851 is executed in the main display area DM. In FIG. 327 (B), a state in which the ally character 851A imitating a “turtle” and the ally character 851B imitating an “elephant” are gathered is displayed. Then, in the small display area DM20, the character "last" is displayed in order to notify the player that the special figure change this time is the final change in the time saving state.

This ally character 851 is variably displayed in association with the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls, and since "2" is displayed in the small display area DM2A, in FIG. 327 (B), it is displayed. Since it shows a state in which two special figure 2 holds have been acquired, it means that two ally characters 851 are gathered. Then, in the small display area DM7, a set history display displayed in the order in which the gathered ally characters 851 are gathered is displayed, and "turtle" is displayed as the first history 872A and "elephant" is displayed as the second history 872B. ..

In this small display area DM7, the set history display is displayed, and the display order here is associated with the digestion order of the special figure 2 hold, and the ally character used in the second time reduction effect described later. Based on the type of 851 and the display order of the set history display, for example, in the case of winning, it is possible to suggest which special figure 2 hold is won.

Then, when the number of special 2 hold balls reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces) during the execution of the hold ball acquisition effect, it is shown that the number of special figure 2 hold balls has reached 4 as shown in FIG. 328 (A). The production mode is displayed. Specifically, around the character 851, a new ally character 851C imitating a "snake" and an ally character 851D imitating a "lion" have increased, and a total of four ally characters 851A to 851D have been added. The gathered production is displayed. Further, in the small display area DM21, "snake" is displayed in the third history 872C and "lion" is displayed in the fourth history 872D, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit in the sub-display area DS. The comment "All-Member Assembly !!" is displayed. As described above, during the execution of the reserved ball acquisition effect, the number of set of ally characters 851 is associated with the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2, so that the small display area DM2A has the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. "4" indicating that it is the upper limit value (4 pieces) is displayed.

After that, the first half period of the time reduction final variation effect elapses, and when the second half period is reached, the second time reduction variation effect shown in FIG. 328 (B) is started. FIG. 328 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content (second time reduction effect) displayed when the latter half period of the time reduction final variation effect is started. As shown in FIG. 328 (B), in the second time reduction effect, one of the ally characters acquired in the first half of the time reduction final variation effect challenges the mission, notifies the winning of the winning mission, and fails the mission. The effect of notifying the non-winning is executed. The production result of the second time reduction variation effect is configured to reflect the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired when the first half period of the time reduction final variation effect has elapsed. ..

According to the example shown in FIG. 328 (B), the mission effect using the ally character 851A imitating the "turtle" is executed as the mission effect executed as the second time reduction effect. Here, the content of the mission effect to be executed (“tolerate falling rocks” in FIG. 328 (B)) is configured so that a plurality of patterns can be set, and the content of the mission effect and the type of the selected ally character 851. And, depending on, the degree of expectation of mission success is different. With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in the effect result of the second time reduction effect but also in the effect process until the effect result is displayed.

Then, when the mission production is successful, the mission success production is executed as shown in FIG. 329 (A). In the example shown in FIG. 329 (A), the first special figure 2 hold (the next special figure 2 hold), that is, the change in the first special figure 2 after the transition to the normal state. Since winning a small hit is pre-read and the pre-reading result is used as the production result of the second time-saving fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. 329 (A), the mission succeeds as the production result of the second time-saving fluctuation production. At the fluctuation stop timing of the time reduction final fluctuation displayed, the display mode of "351" indicating that the result of the special figure 2 lottery this time is out of order is displayed in the small display area DM2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 329 (B), there is a change in the special figure 2 in which the small hit is won while the pseudo symbol "VVV" for notifying that the winner is won in the main display area DM is oscillated. Until the end, a notification screen for notifying the player of the effect result of the second time reduction effect is displayed. At the time of FIG. 329 (B), the normal state is set as the game state, and since the special figure 2 is changing (during non-big hit game, non-small hit game), the right-handed game is actually performed. Is in a state where it is not possible to play a game that is advantageous to the player, but since the small hit game is executed immediately after that, the "right-handed" that continuously guides the right-handed game from the time-saving state. The display is displayed in the small display area DM4. As a result, it is possible to perform a smooth game without causing the player to perform an act of changing the firing direction of the ball.

Then, when the special figure 2 change based on the winning information stored in the first special figure 2 hold at the time when the second time saving fluctuation effect is executed is stopped and displayed, it is shown in FIG. 330 (A). As you can see, the display mode for displaying the small hit winning to the player is displayed, and in the main display area DM, the third symbol is "777" for indicating the small hit type set in this small hit winning. It is displayed in the display mode.

On the other hand, when the failure effect is set as the effect result of the mission effect described above with reference to FIG. ), The mission failure effect shown in FIG. 330 (B) is displayed, and then the time saving state end screen shown in FIG. 331 is displayed until the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold is completed in the normal state. Is displayed.

Although the details will be described later, at the timing when the first half period of the final reduction of working hours has ended, the special figure 2 hold has not reached the upper limit and the second reduction of working hours has started (the second reduction of working hours). (After the effect result of the variation effect is set), if the special figure 2 hold is newly acquired, the newly acquired special figure 2 will be acquired at the first special figure 2 variation start timing in the normal state after the end of the final reduction of working hours. When the look-ahead process is executed for the hold in FIG. 2 (the hold in special figure 2 which is not reflected in the effect result of the second time reduction effect) and the result of the look-ahead process is a winning, the display of FIG. 331 is performed. An effect is executed in which the small hit winning screen (see FIG. 330 (A)) is suddenly displayed from the screen.

Next, the configuration of the counter buffer in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 332. FIG. 332 is a diagram schematically showing the configurations of various counters in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 332, in the fifth control example, the second hit type counter C6 and the second variable type counter CS2 are added to the counter buffer (see FIG. 240) in the fourth control example described above. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B are provided with a variable type counter storage area for storing the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C. A second hit type counter storage area for storing the value of the second hit type counter C6 and a second variation type counter storage area for storing the value of the second variation type counter CS2 are provided in each. The difference is that the configurations of the special symbol hold ball execution area and the normal symbol hold ball execution area are changed according to the counter value stored in the hold ball storage area. Since the other elements are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process of the main control device), and the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203 at the same timing. The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is defined in the random number 5 table 202EC (see FIG. 334 (D)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. When the value of the second hit random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that is the normal symbol specified in the random number 5 table 202EC per normal symbol, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol.

Here, the random number 5 table 202EC per ordinary symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 334 (D). The random number 5 table 202EC per ordinary symbol is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each game state (high probability state of ordinary symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) is set in the lottery of ordinary symbol. Is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 334 (D), when the gaming state is the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the lottery of the normal symbol. Is within the range of "5 to 28", and if it is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a normal figure. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204" in the lottery of the normal symbol. If it is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal figure.

That is, in the fifth control example, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the winning is won with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the probability is 5/6. It is configured to win the prize. Then, as will be described in detail later, during the normal state, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as a game per normal symbol with a probability of 1/100 when the normal symbol hit (per normal symbol) is won. It is configured so that an easy long open hit game is executed. In addition, during the time saving state, the long open hit game is always executed when the player wins the game.

With this configuration, even in the normal state, it is possible to execute a winning game in which the ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 with a probability of 1/1000, so that the normal state can be executed. To have the player who is playing the game execute the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery (a game aiming at a specific winning in the general drawing lottery) at the same time. Can be done.

The second variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 999, reach the maximum value (that is, 999), and then return to 0. The second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation pattern of 1 from the set variation pattern selection table 202EF. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this normal map fluctuation pattern, and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 136) of the main controller 110 described above is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. .. The normal diagram variation pattern selection table 202EF (see FIG. 338), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the second variation type counter CS2, is the main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202 of.

Returning to FIG. 332, the description will be continued. In the fifth control example, the variable type counter storage area is provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, and the winning information stored in the reserved memory is stored in advance (special symbol changes). By discriminating (before), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) that is actually executed is configured to be pre-readable. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the timing at which the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information of the special symbol stored on hold is executed.

Further, in the fifth control example, the winning information of the ordinary symbol, that is, the first random number counter used for the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol as the type of each counter value acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is used when setting the C2, the second fluctuation type counter CS2 used when determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and the type of the winning game per normal symbol.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 333 (A), the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 333 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified adoption of the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 333 (A), for the above-mentioned A1 control example, the first random number table 202A (FIG. 242 (A)) is replaced with the first random number 5 table C202EA for the first hit type selection. A first hit type selection 5 table 202EB is provided instead of the table 202B, a random number 5 table 202EC per normal symbol is replaced with the normal symbol per random table 202C, and a variable pattern 5 table 202EE is replaced with the variable pattern table 202D. The small hit type selection 5 table 202EG was replaced with the type selection table 202E, the big hit scenario 5 table 202EH was replaced with the big hit scenario table 202AA, and the small hit scenario 5 table 202EI was provided instead of the small hit scenario table 202AB. The difference is that a new type selection table 202ED per map and a variation pattern selection table 202EF are newly provided.

The first random number 5 table 202EA is different from the above-mentioned first random number table 202A (see FIG. 242) in that the specified value determined to be a big hit is different, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 334, the contents specified in the first random number 5 table 202EA will be described. FIG. 334 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 5 table 202EA. As shown in FIG. 334 (A), the first random number 5 table 202EA is the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 referred to at the time of the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2 referred to when the winning lottery of (Special Figure 2) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334 (B), the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 will be described. FIG. 334 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1. As shown in FIG. 334 (B), "big hit" is defined in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and "small hit" is defined in "10, 11". That is, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of FIG. 1 is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small hit is 1/500.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334 (C), the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2 will be described. FIG. 334 (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2. As shown in FIG. 334 (C), "big hit" is defined in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and "small hit" is defined in "10 to 149". That is, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of FIG. 2 is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1 / 7.1.

That is, in the fifth control example, the same big hit probability is set in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, and the small hit probability is configured to be higher in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, in the fifth control example, since the small hit winning is configured to be a trigger for executing the big hit game, the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute the big hit game than the special figure 1 lottery. It will be a figure lottery.

In the fifth control example, as described above, the same jackpot probability is set for the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, but the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 are not limited to this. You may set a different jackpot probability from the lottery. In addition, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are set to constant values regardless of the gaming state, but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the jackpot or the small hit increases depending on the gaming state (high probability state). It may be configured to set a high probability state of a special symbol) and a low probability state of a low probability state (low probability state of a special symbol).

The first hit type selection 5 table 202EB is different from the above-mentioned first hit type selection table 202B (see FIG. 243) in that the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is different. Everything else is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 335 (A), the contents of the first type selection 5 table 202EB will be described. FIG. 335 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection 5 table 202EB. As shown in FIG. 335 (A), the first hit type selection 5 table 202EB includes the special figure 1 big hit type selection 5 table 202EB and the special figure 2 lottery, which are referred to when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery. It has a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB2, which is referred to when a jackpot is won in.

Here, with reference to FIG. 335 (B), the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB1 will be described. FIG. 335 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, when a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, three types from big hit AA to big hit AC are set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is defined as "0", "big hit AA (15R time reduction 99 times jackpot)" is defined as the jackpot type, and "big hit AB" is defined in the range of "1 to 15". (7R time reduction 5 times big hit) "is specified, and" big hit AC (7R time reduction 1 time big hit) "is specified in the range of" 16 to 99 ".

That is, in the normal state where the left-handed game is performed and the special figure 1 lottery is executed, if the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the time saving state is always set (granted) after the big hit game is completed. There is. Then, it is configured so that the end condition of the time saving state is set differently according to the set jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot AA is set as the jackpot type, only the above-mentioned common time-saving end conditions are set, so the winner (big hit or small hit) is won in the special map lottery, or the special map changes. The reduced working hours will continue until (the sum of the fluctuations in Special Figure 1 and the fluctuations in Special Figure 2) reaches 99 times. In the fifth control example, a right-handed game in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed is performed during the time saving state, and in the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning the big hit is 1/250 and the probability of winning the small hit is 1 /. Since it is set to 7.1, for example, when the time saving state based on the jackpot AA is set, the special figure fluctuation becomes a predetermined number of times (99 times) without winning in the special figure 2 lottery. The probability of reaching is 0.01% or less. Therefore, when the jackpot AA is selected, the game state is substantially set to the reduced working hours until the next jackpot game is executed.

Next, when the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the above-mentioned common time-saving end condition, "the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 5 times" is set as the corresponding time-saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (5 times) without winning in the special figure 2 lottery (the probability that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is about 46%. .. That is, when the jackpot AB is set, that is, when the special figure 2 variation number of times 5 times is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning (continuous chan probability) by the time the time saving ending condition is satisfied is It will be about 54%.

When the jackpot AC is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the above-mentioned common time-saving end condition, "special figure 2 fluctuation number of times is 1" is set as the corresponding time-saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (once) without winning in the special figure 2 lottery (the probability that the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is 85%. That is, when the jackpot AC is set, that is, when the special figure 2 variation number of times is set once as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning (continuous chan probability) by the time the time saving ending condition is satisfied is It will be about 15%.

As described above, the degree of advantage (probability of consecutive chan) of the set time saving state is configured to be different according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 1, and the jackpot AA. Is the most advantageous jackpot type, then the jackpot AB is the advantageous jackpot type, and the jackpot AC is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

In addition, the number of round games executed as jackpot games is also specified to be different depending on the jackpot type, so that the jackpot AA is "15R", the jackpot AB, and AC are "7R" round games. It is stipulated in. As the number of round games increases in one jackpot game, the number of balls (prize balls) that can be acquired by the player increases. Therefore, in terms of the jackpot games to be executed, the jackpot AA is the most player. It will be an advantageous jackpot type.

In the fifth control example, the jackpot type (big hit AA) having the highest probability of consecutive chan is configured to execute the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds (15R), but the present invention is not limited to this. The jackpot type with the highest probability of consecutive chans and the jackpot type in which the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds is executed may be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the most advantageous gaming state different according to the gaming situation. For example, if a jackpot is won just before the amusement park is closed, a jackpot type that can win more prize balls in one jackpot game than a jackpot type that is given (set) a time saving state with a high probability of consecutive chans. Is a more advantageous jackpot type, and if the pachinko machine 10 has a limit value for the number of times the time saving state is set across the jackpot game, one jackpot game in the jackpot winning just before reaching the limit. The jackpot type that can win many prize balls is the more advantageous jackpot type. On the other hand, for example, when the number of consecutive chans (the number of times a jackpot game is executed without shifting to the normal state even once) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), a privilege (for example, valuable) is given to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 to which the image) can be given, if the player is trying to acquire the privilege, the jackpot type to which the time saving state with a high probability of consecutive chan is given (set) is the more advantageous jackpot type.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned consecutive-chan probability indicates the probability of winning based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, but in this fifth control example, the special figure 2 lottery is performed in a predetermined number. It is configured so that it can be stored on hold up to (4 pieces). Therefore, even after the time saving end condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the normal state, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed by the number of special figure 2 hold (remaining special figure 2 hold number) stored in the hold. Special figure 2 It is configured so that it is possible to aim for a small hit by lottery. As described above, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning a small hit by the special figure 2 lottery is set to a high probability of about 1 / 7.1, so that the remaining special figure 2 hold number (maximum 4) is set. By the special figure 2 lottery of the corresponding number of times, it becomes possible to sufficiently aim at the small hit winning.

Specifically, when the number of remaining special figures 2 held is 1, the probability of winning a small hit (pull-back probability) in the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 hold is about 14%, and the remaining special figure 2 is held. 2 When the number of holdings is 2, the pullback probability is about 28.5%, and when the number of remaining special figures 2 is 3, the pullback probability is about 39.6%, and the number of remaining special figures 2 holding balls. When there are four, the pullback probability is about 49%.

In this way, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be memorable on hold, and the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 hold is executed even after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state. Regardless of the result of the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire the special figure 2 hold until the end of the time saving state. Therefore, the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, once the time saving state is set, the game period during the time saving state (continuous chan period) described above and the period during which the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 hold in the normal state is executed (pull back). Since it is possible to aim for a small hit win in the special figure 2 lottery in the two periods (period) and, even though the time saving state is set, the special figure game is never executed. It is possible to reduce the probability of shifting to a normal state aiming at one lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the fifth control example, the small hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and the big hit game (ream-chan big hit game) is executed based on the small hit winning during the normal state. Special Figure 2 It is configured so that it is easier to set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player when a small hit is won in a lottery and a big hit game (pull-back big hit game) is executed based on the small hit winning. .. As a result, even if the consecutive chan period has passed, the player can be made to play the game while expecting to win a small hit during the pullback period, so that the player is prevented from getting bored with the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335 (C), the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB2 will be described. FIG. 335 (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB2. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, three types from big hit AD to big hit AF are set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 19", and "big hit AD (15R time reduction 99 times big hit)" is defined as the jackpot type, and the range is "20 to 69". "Big hit AE (12R time reduction 99 times big hit)" is specified, and "Big hit AF (7R time reduction 99 times big hit)" is specified in the range of "70 to 99".

That is, when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 lottery, an advantageous gaming state is set in which the reduced working hours continue until the special figure fluctuation reaches 99 times after the end of the big hit game. This is advantageous for the player when the special figure 2 lottery, which is executed less frequently than the special figure 1 lottery, wins the big hit, which is set to have a probability three times or more lower than the probability of winning the small hit. It is possible to reliably provide a gaming state. Therefore, for a player who has a special experience of winning a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, a game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a setting of one time reduction) is set, and the player's motivation to play is motivated. It is possible to suppress a significant decrease.

It should be noted that each jackpot type specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB2 is also executed during one jackpot game according to the jackpot type, as in the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB1. The number of round games is different, and it is stipulated that the round games of "15R" for jackpot AD, "12R" for jackpot AE, and "7R" for jackpot AF are executed. The larger the number of round games in one jackpot game, the larger the number of balls (prize balls) that the player can acquire. Therefore, the jackpot AD is most advantageous to the player in terms of the jackpot game to be executed. It will be a big hit type.

The random number 5 table 202EC per ordinary symbol changes the value of the second random number counter C4 defined corresponding to the ordinary symbol with respect to the above-mentioned random number table 202C per ordinary symbol (see FIG. 242 (D)). It differs in that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted. Here, with reference to FIG. 334 (D), the contents of the random number 5 table 202EC per ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 334 (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the random number 5 table 202EC per ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 334 (D), in the random number 5 table 202EC per ordinary symbol, the values referred to when the lottery per ordinary symbol is executed in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the normal in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. The value to be referred to when executing the lottery per figure is specified. Specifically, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 28". "Hit" is defined, and in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "hit" is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "5 to 204".

The normal symbol per type selection 5 table 202ED is a data table for selecting the normal symbol per type, and when the normal symbol (general map) lottery is executed with reference to the random number 5 table 202EC per normal symbol and the winning is won. It is referred to in. In the fifth control example, the electric accessory 640A is used so that the ball can win the second winning opening 640 as a game per normal figure executed when the normal symbol is won in a low probability state. A long open hit game that is opened and a short open hit game that opens the electric accessory 640A so that the ball is more difficult to win in the second winning opening 640 than the long open hit game are configured to be executable. Therefore, different winning games are executed according to the type of the winning game selected at the time of winning the winning game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 336, the contents specified in the type selection 5 table 202ED per drawing will be described. FIG. 336 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the type selection 5 table 202ED per drawing. As shown in FIG. 336 (A), the normal symbol type selection 5 table 202ED has two types of normal symbol per type (2 types) according to the probability state of the normal symbol and the acquired value of the second hit type counter C6. It is configured so that A per normal figure and B) per normal figure are selected.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal symbol is the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "A per normal figure" is defined. "B per normal figure" is specified in the range of "1 to 99". Further, the probability state of the normal symbol is the high probability state (high probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "A per normal figure" in the range of "0,1". "B per normal figure" is specified in the range of "2 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the type per map selected in the table 202ED and the game state at the time when the game per map is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 336 (B). do. FIG. 336 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of normal drawing and the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640A based on the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, a lottery for hitting a normal symbol (normal figure) is executed according to a game state set at a timing (timing for starting fluctuation of the normal figure), and a winning lottery is executed. If the game is won, the game content per game is set according to the game state set at the timing of executing the game per game (timing to stop the fluctuation of the game). That is, since the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured to shift the gaming state according to the lottery status and the fluctuation status of the special symbol (special symbol), it is independent of the special symbol lottery game. In the executed Fuzu lottery game, different game states are set depending on the timing of executing the Fuzu lottery and the timing of executing the Fuzu per game that is executed when the player wins the game. There is a case.

For example, if the normal figure lottery is executed during the special figure change (time reduction final change) in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol of the random number 5 table 202EC per normal symbol (normal figure height). The winning lottery is executed using the judgment value specified in (Probability). Then, in the case of winning, the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped after a predetermined fluctuation time of the normal map (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, and then the game per normal map is executed. Here, when the final variation of the reduced working hours ends during the variation of the normal drawing and the gaming state shifts from the reduced working hours state to the normal state, the normal state is set as the gaming state at the timing when the game per normal drawing is executed. It will be.

In such a case, if the game mode of the game per normal figure is set according to the game state set at the time when the normal state is executed, the normal state is set, but the normal state is set. There is a problem that the game per game (game per long open) that is executed during the time saving state is executed as the game per game, and the player is provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery). there were.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, the game state set at the timing of executing the game per normal figure is determined, and the content of the game per normal figure is set based on the determination result. As in the above-mentioned example, when the gaming state shifts to the normal state during the fluctuation of the normal map, the game per normal map corresponding to the low probability state of the normal symbol can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery).

Specifically, when A per normal figure is selected (set) as the type per normal figure, the game state set at the execution timing of the game per normal figure (when the electric accessory 640A is open). Regardless of this, the game is executed per the long opening of the Fuzu. On the other hand, when B per normal figure is selected (set) as the type per normal figure, the game state set at the execution timing of the game per normal figure (when the electric accessory 640A is opened) is a normal symbol. In the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure), the game per short open of the normal figure is executed, and in the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability of the normal figure), the game per long open of the normal figure is executed. Is stipulated as.

Here, the contents of the winning game, which is the game per game, the game per game with the long opening of the game and the game with the game short with the game short, will be described. The game per normal figure long opening is a game per game in which the electric accessory 640A is opened (positioned in the open state) for a long period of time so that the ball can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640, and is 0.1. After a second closed state (opening period), the electric accessory 640A is opened for 1 second (first opening period), and then after a 1.5 second closed state (standby period), it is opened again for 0.5 seconds. (Second opening period) A game is executed per normal figure. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a scenario per map (not shown), and when the game per map is executed, the scenario per map corresponding to the type and game state of the map is set and the main control is performed. By periodically updating the normal figure hitting scenario in the main process of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A is executed in accordance with the above-mentioned flow of the normal figure hitting game.

In the fifth control example, when the game per long opening is executed, two opening periods are set so as to secure a period for the ball to win in the second winning opening 640. is doing. Then, of the two opening periods, when the first opening period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640, and the determination result is that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640. In the case of determining that, a caution screen (see FIG. 324 (A)) for alerting the player to play a game in which the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 is configured to be displayed. There is.

With this configuration, a player who is unaware that the game per long open (right-handed game) has been executed in the state where the normal state is set (the state in which the left-handed game is being performed). On the other hand, it is possible to notify the player to execute the right-handed game again, and it is possible to prevent the player from having an unfavorable game result. Further, in the fifth control example, the second opening operation (0.5 seconds) is performed after a waiting period of a predetermined period (1.5 seconds) after the caution screen (see FIG. 324 (A)) is displayed. It is configured to be executed.

This waiting period (1.5 seconds) is set to be longer than the time (about 0.5 seconds) for the ball launched by the player to perform a right-handed game to reach the second winning opening 640. Has been done. As a result, it is possible for the player who has executed the right-handed game after seeing the display of the caution screen (see FIG. 324 (A)) to easily make the second winning opening 640 win the ball.

Further, in the fifth control example, the game per game is terminated when the scenario per game is updated with the passage of time and the scenario indicating the end is reached, and the second prize is won during the game per game. Two types of end conditions for each normal figure are set, in which the game is terminated when the number of balls won in the mouth 640 reaches a predetermined number (for example, one).

Then, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the second opening period, the ball wins the second winning opening 640. It is configured so that the notification mode for showing that it has been done is different. Specifically, if the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the second opening period, there is a high possibility that the proper game (right-handed game) has not been executed from the start stage of the game per normal figure. , It is configured to display the game explanation (comment such as "Be sure to hit right during the game per the long open game of the game") so that the game can be played properly at the next game of the game. This makes it possible to inform the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the above-mentioned game explanation is not notified to the player who has won the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period, the player repeatedly notifies the game content that has been grasped, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation.

On the other hand, in the game per opening of the short-circuited normal figure, the game per game in which the electric accessory 640A is opened for 0.1 seconds is executed after the closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a scenario per map (not shown), and when the game per map is executed, the scenario per map corresponding to the type and game state of the map is set and the main control is performed. By periodically updating the normal figure hitting scenario in the main process of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A is executed in accordance with the above-mentioned flow of the normal figure hitting game.

Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640A is as short as 0.1 seconds, the above-mentioned game per opening of the normal figure is a game per game in which the ball cannot be substantially made to win the second winning opening 640. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 336 (B), this game per normal figure short opening is a game per game that is executed only in the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure) of the normal symbol, and is described above. As you can see, the game per Fuzu short is executed 0.2 seconds after the game is started, so the game per game is executed while the player is executing the left-handed game. Even if the right-handed game is played, the game per hit is completed by the time the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (0.5 seconds). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the game per open short.

It should be noted that the electric accessory 640A may be configured so that the ball cannot win the second winning opening 640 during the game per open short of the normal figure. For example, the electric accessory 640A may be configured by the electric accessory 640A. In the open state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A is configured so that the ball can flow down from one end side to the other end side, and only the ball flowing out from the other end side of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A can win a prize. It is preferable to arrange the second winning opening 640 at the position so that the period during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A is at least 0.5 seconds. With this configuration, when the game is executed per the short opening of the normal figure, the ball that flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A during the period (0.1 seconds) in which the electric accessory 640A is in the open state. Cannot reach the other end side, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the winning game content of the normal drawing game is set according to the game state set at the timing when the normal drawing game is executed. Therefore, for example, if you win a game in a short time (high probability state), you will win a game with a high probability, and the game per game based on the winning game will be in a normal state (low probability). Even if it is executed in the state), it is possible to make it difficult for the game to be executed per the long opening of the normal figure.

As shown in FIG. 336 (A), in the fifth control example, the ratio at which the normal figure per type (A per normal figure) in which the game is executed per the normal figure long open is selected regardless of the gaming state. Is different between the low probability state of the normal symbol (low probability of the normal symbol) and the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability of the normal symbol). At the time of probability, it is configured to be selected with a probability of 2%. With this configuration, the player wins the game when the game is low, and wins the game when the game is high, rather than when the game is played when the game is low. It is possible to increase the probability that the game per long open of the normal figure will be executed when the game is executed per the normal figure when the accuracy of the figure is low. Therefore, even if a configuration is used in which the game content of the game per game is set according to the game state at the timing when the game per game is executed, the game is executed when the time saving state is changed to the normal state. It is possible to increase the probability that the game per game becomes a game per long open game, and it is possible to make the player pay close attention to which game content the game per game is executed.

The variation pattern 5 table 202EE is a data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, and is a value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, a special symbol type, and a special symbol lottery ( Various fluctuation patterns (variation time) are selected based on the lottery result of the special drawing lottery) and the set game state. Since the basic technical concept of the variation pattern 5 table 202EE is the same as the above-mentioned control examples or various variation patterns used in each embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The explanation will be continued focusing on the characteristic contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202EE used in the control example.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202EE will be described with reference to FIG. 339 (A). FIG. 339 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern 5 table 202EE. As shown in FIG. 339 (A), the variation pattern 5 table 202EE is referred to with the normal variation pattern 5 table 202EE1 which is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and when the gaming state is the time saving state. It has a time-saving variation pattern 5 table 202EE2, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected using the data table corresponding to the gaming state set when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Next, the contents of the normal variation pattern 5 table 202EE1 included in the variation pattern 5 table 202EE will be described with reference to FIG. 339 (B). FIG. 339 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal variation pattern 5 table 202EE1. As shown in FIG. 339 (B), the variation pattern 5 table 202EE has the symbol type of the special symbol, the number of times the special symbol has changed since the normal state was set, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the acquired variation type counter. Different fluctuation patterns are defined depending on the value of CS1.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the game in which the special figure 1 lottery is mainly executed is configured to be performed, and the second special symbol (2nd special symbol ( As a pattern in which the lottery of the special figure 2) is executed, a pattern in which the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold stored at the end of the time saving state is executed and a long opening hit in the normal figure lottery. There is a pattern in which a special figure 2 lottery is executed based on a ball winning in the second winning opening 640 during a game per long opening.

Further, in the fifth control example, as the variation effect corresponding to the final variation in the time-saving state, the time-saving final variation effect capable of notifying the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold stored at the start of the time-saving final variation is executed. It is configured in. Then, the effect result of the time reduction final variation effect is continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation executed (in the normal state) after the time reduction state ends.

The variation pattern 5 table 202EE corresponds to the special figure 2 lottery executed during the number of special symbol variations 1 to 4 as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation executed in the normal state. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be a special fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, if the first special symbol change after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 change, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is "off", the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 "Short miss A (0.5 seconds)" is selected regardless of the value of, and in the case of "hit (big hit, small hit)", "short hit A (2 seconds)" is selected. In addition, if the second special symbol change after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 change, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is "off", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is used. Regardless, "Short off A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "Hit", "Short hit B (1.5 seconds)" is selected, and the special symbol change after the normal state is set. If the third time is a special figure 2 fluctuation, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is "off", "short deviation A (0.5 seconds)" regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected, and in the case of "hit", "short hit C (1 second)" is selected. Then, if the fourth special symbol change after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 change, and if the lottery result of the special figure 2 change is "off", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is used. Regardless, "short hit A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "hits", "short hit D (0.5 seconds)" is selected.

With this configuration, if the number of special figure 2 holds is the maximum number (4) at the end of the time saving state, the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold will be won (small hit). , The period until the prize is won (the period during which the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the hit) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold are all. It is possible to unify the period until it comes off to 2 seconds.

Therefore, for example, regardless of whether there is winning information in the special figure 2 hold or not, simply controlling the result display for 2 seconds after the end of the time saving final fluctuation makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state without giving. In addition, it is possible to unify the timing at which the identification information indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (2 seconds after the normal state is set), regardless of the number of winnings in the special figure 2 hold. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many special figures 2 are held to win the prize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 339 (B), when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "5 times or more" as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, the number of special figure 2 holdings at the end of the time saving state. Since it is a special figure 2 lottery that is executed based on the fact that the game is executed in the normal state and the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, the above-mentioned series of productions is performed. A variation pattern (variation (10 seconds)) for properly executing the above is selected, and based on the selected variation pattern, a display mode for indicating that the present is the special figure 2 variation period during a series of productions (display mode (variation). The effect mode) is set.

Next, the contents of the time saving variation pattern 5 table 222EE2 referred to when the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 340 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern of the special drawing lottery executed when the time saving state is set.

In the fifth control example, when the time saving state is set, the special drawing 2 lottery, which tends to give a lottery result advantageous to the player with respect to the special drawing 1 lottery, is more likely to be executed than the normal state, so that the time saving state is set. When set, a right-handed game for executing the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 315, the game board 13 is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win the first winning opening 64, which is the trigger for executing the special figure 1 lottery, when the right-handed game is performed. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state in which the right-handed game is executed is executed based on the special drawing 1 hold already acquired at the end timing of the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set. It will be one lottery.

Specifically, in the state where the jackpot is won in the state where the normal state is set and the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (the time saving initial setting state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. If the special figure 2 hold cannot be obtained because the easy game is not performed and the special figure 1 hold is held at that time, the special figure 1 lottery will be executed.

In this case, as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the time reduction initial setting state, the fluctuation time for a long time (for example, 60 seconds) is used. If it is set, there is a problem that the special figure 2 change cannot be executed until the special figure 1 change is completed, and the game in the time saving state cannot be smoothly performed.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, a short time (0.2 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed during the time saving state. As a result, even if the time saving state is set while the maximum number (4) of the special figure 1 hold is secured, the special figure 1 change can be executed without disturbing the special figure 2 change.

Further, in the fifth control example, the end screen of the jackpot game is configured to be continuously displayed even after the jackpot game ends until the special figure 2 variation is executed. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand that the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 fluctuates in a short time during the time saving state. Further, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state is a big hit, the end screen of the big hit game that is continuously displayed is configured to shift to the big hit game screen.

The normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202EF is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a normal symbol variation (normal map variation), and is a game state at the time of executing the normal map variation and a game state. It is configured so that a different fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Here, the contents of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202EF will be described with reference to FIG. 338. FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202EF. As shown in FIG. 338, in the fifth control example, as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation, a short fluctuation (2 seconds) in which a short fluctuation time is set and a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time longer than the short fluctuation is set are set. (30 seconds to 60 seconds) and is configured to be selected.

Then, when the long fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation, the normal map fluctuation effect is executed. In addition, in this fifth control example, only during the period when the normal state which is difficult to win in the long opening of the normal map is set, the fluctuation effect of the normal map to suggest that the winning is won in the long opening of the normal map is executed. Therefore, long fluctuations (30 seconds to 60 seconds) are specified only in the data table referenced during the normal state.

Specifically, if the game state at the time when the normal figure change is executed is the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) and the lottery result of the normal figure change is "A per normal figure", the acquisition is obtained. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is "Public map long fluctuation A (30 seconds)" in the range of "0 to 499", and "Public map long fluctuation B (60 seconds)" in the range of "500 to 999". However, if the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is "B per normal map", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 999". A (2 seconds) "is specified. In addition, when the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is "off", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 996", and the "normal map short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is set to ". "997,998" defines "Fuzu long fluctuation A (30 seconds)", and "999" defines "Fuzu long fluctuation B (60 seconds)". On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time when the normal figure change is executed is the reduced working hours state (high probability state of the normal symbol), regardless of the lottery result of the normal figure change and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. "Public figure short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is specified.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is "A per normal map", that is, when the normal map long opening hit, the normal map long fluctuation is used as the normal map fluctuation time. It is configured to be easy to select. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to win the Fuzu long opening by executing the Fuzu fluctuation effect. Further, it is configured so that a different fluctuation time (30 seconds or 60 seconds) can be selected as the long fluctuation in which the normal map fluctuation effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period from the execution of the normal map fluctuation effect to the start of the game per long open of the normal map. Therefore, for example, when the normal map variation effect is started. It is possible to make it difficult for the game of stopping the firing of the ball, waiting for the lapse of a specific period (for example, 60 seconds), and then firing the ball again.

In addition, although it is slight, even if the lottery result of the normal map fluctuation is out of order, the normal map long fluctuation is selected, so even if the normal map fluctuation effect is executed, it is normal. Figure It is possible to leave the possibility of not winning in the long opening. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the effect of changing the normal figure to the end.

In this fifth control example, the long fluctuation (30 seconds or 60 seconds) is always selected when the "A per normal figure", which is the long opening of the normal figure, is won. Not limited to this, for example, "short fluctuation" or "middle fluctuation" (10 to 15) that is longer than "short fluctuation" and shorter than "long fluctuation" in some cases when "A per normal figure" is won. Seconds) may also be configured to be selectable. If a variation pattern other than "long variation" is selected, it is preferable to configure it so that the normal map variation effect is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the game per long opening of the game without executing the fluctuation effect of the game, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is unexpected. It is possible to predict the execution timing of the game per the long opening of the normal figure and make it difficult to perform the game of firing the ball according to the predicted timing.

Further, in the fifth control example, when the lottery result of the normal figure fluctuation is "B per normal figure" in which the "game per normal figure short" is executed as the game per normal figure, "long fluctuation" is selected. It is configured not to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "long fluctuation" may be selected.

The small hit type selection 5 table 202EG is a data table referred to when selecting a small hit type set when a small hit is won in a special drawing lottery. The small hit type selection 5 table 202EG differs from the small hit type selection table 202E (see FIG. 244) of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment in that the content of the specified small hit type is changed. Everything else is the same. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 337, the small hit type selection 5 table 202EG will be described. FIG. 337 (A) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202EG, and FIG. 337 (B) is a schematic diagram of the contents specified in the special figure 1 small hit type selection 5 table 202EG1. FIG. 337 (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 small hit type selection 5 table 202EG2.

The jackpot scenario 5 table 202EH and the jackpot scenario 5 table 202EI have the contents specified in each scenario for the jackpot scenario table 202AA and the jackpot scenario table 202AB of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment. The only difference is that it corresponds to the content of the big hit game or the small hit game executed in the control example, and the other points are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 333 (B). The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fifth control example deletes the scenario counter 203AA and the specific control flag 203AB with respect to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment (see FIG. 241 (B)). , Special figure 2 The difference is that the fluctuation number counter 203EA is added, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203EA is a counter for measuring the fluctuation number of the second special symbol, and a specific counter value is set when the time saving state is set. Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted, and when the counter value after subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends. That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203EA is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and constitutes a part of the time saving ending condition set in plurality.

In the fifth control example, the counter value set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203EA is configured to be different depending on the winning jackpot type. This makes it possible to make the ease of ending the time-saving state different depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the jackpot is won, but also in the set jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 341 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 341 (A), the ROM 222 in this control example is a variation pattern selection 5 table instead of the variation pattern selection table 222A with respect to the ROM 222 of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment (see FIG. 251 (A)). It differs in that 222EA is provided. Here, the differences from the above-mentioned variation pattern selection table 222A will be mainly described, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA will be described with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA, and FIG. 342 (B) is a variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA having a time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content specified in 222EA3.

As shown in FIG. 342 (A), the variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA has three variation pattern selection tables in association with the gaming state and the variation state. Specifically, the gaming state is in the normal state. The normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA1 referred to in some cases, the time reduction variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA2 referred to in the time saving state, and the time saving final use referred to in the case of the final variation in the time saving state. It has a variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA3 and.

The above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 222EA1 for normal use and the variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA2 for time saving have the same technical concept as the fluctuation pattern selection table described in each control example described above or each embodiment. It is a data table in which a display variation pattern (effect mode) corresponding to a variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is selected. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA3 is referred to when selecting the final variation in the time saving state, that is, the effect mode of the variation effect for the special figure variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied by executing the variation. In addition to the symbol type and lottery result of the fluctuation, the special figure 2 holding ball number (value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223C) and the presence / absence of a hold inside (winning information storage area 223A) It is configured so that a different variation pattern (effect mode) is selected based on the determination result of whether or not the winning information indicating the winning is included in the winning information stored in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 342 (B), when the time reduction final variation is the special figure 1, that is, among the time reduction end conditions, one of the common time reduction end conditions is "99 special figure fluctuations". If the special figure change when "" is established is the special figure 1 change, "the final time saving for special figure 1" is selected as the change pattern regardless of the lottery result of the change and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. Will be done.

Next, when the time saving final change is the special figure 2, the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the change is "hit", and the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0", the time saving final is set as the fluctuation pattern. When "A" is selected, the number of balls held in Special Figure 2 is "1, 2", and the winning information indicating a hit is included in the holding of Special Figure 2, "Final A in a short time" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. If the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final B" is selected as a fluctuation pattern.

Then, if the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the change is "win", the number of balls held in special figure 2 is "3", and the winning information indicating the hit is included in the hold of special figure 2, the change occurs. If "time saving final C" is selected as the pattern and the winning information indicating a hit is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final D" is selected as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, when the time saving final change is in special figure 2, the lottery result (hit / fail judgment result) of the change is "missing", and the special figure 2 holding ball number is "0", the change pattern is "time saving final E". Is selected, the number of balls held in Special Figure 2 is "1, 2", and if the winning information indicating a hit is included in the reserved ball in Special Figure 2, "Time saving final B" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. If the winning information indicating a hit is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final F" is selected as a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, if the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the change is "missing", the number of balls held in special figure 2 is "3", and the winning information indicating a hit is included in the holding of special figure 2, it changes. If "time saving final D" is selected as the pattern and the winning information indicating a hit is not included in the special figure 2 hold, "time saving final E" is selected as a variation pattern.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 341 (B). FIG. 341 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 341 (B), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example has a state storage area 223EA with respect to the RAM 223 of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment (see FIG. 251 (B)). Series production flag 223EB, pseudo series production flag 223EC, time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED, small hit caution flag 223EE, non-variation time winning flag 223EF, special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG, normal figure fluctuation time counter 223EJ, continuous series production flag 223EJ, The difference is that a series of production counters 223EK have been added.

The state storage area 223EA is a storage area for temporarily storing the current gaming state, and stores information included in the state command output from the main control device 110. In this control example, in the state storage area 223EA, information indicating a game state (normal state, time saving state), information indicating a time saving end condition in the time saving state, and a winning type (big hit type, set when a big hit is won). It is configured to store information indicating the small hit type). Then, the effect mode is variably set based on various information stored in the state storage area 223EA.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the state storage area 223EA is configured to temporarily store the game state set in the past in addition to the information indicating the current game state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a change based on the transition state of the gaming state (which gaming state has transitioned to which gaming state).

The series effect flag 223EB is a flag for indicating that the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied, and is set to be turned on when the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied. Here, in this control example, in the normal state, when a series of effects is set as a variation pattern of the winning special figure lottery, or when a long variation of a normal symbol is executed, the execution condition of the series of effects is executed. Is configured to hold.

The series effect flag 223EB is used when a series effect is set (see C4207 in FIG. 371) or in a hit variation effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 373) in the normal figure effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 371). When a series of effects is set (C4402 in FIG. 373: YES), it is set to ON (C4208 in FIG. 371, C4403 in FIG. 373), and in the small hit related command processing (see C3504 in FIG. 366 (A)). , C3701 in FIG. 366 (A), which is referred to when setting the effect mode during the small hit game. Further, it is referred to when determining whether or not a new series of effects can be executed in the variable effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 370) and the effect setting process for general drawing (see C4117 in FIG. 371). Then, in the series effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375), it is set to off when it is determined that the continuous execution condition of the series effect is not satisfied (see C4613 in FIG. 375).

As described above, in this control example, a series of effects are executed by a plurality of triggers (special drawing lottery, general drawing lottery). Even in such a configuration, by using the series effect flag 223EB, it is possible to prevent the series effect from being set (executed) in duplicate.

The pseudo series effect flag 223EC is a flag for indicating that the lottery result of the special figure variation is out of order and the execution condition of the series effect is satisfied, and the series effect is set as the variation effect of the special figure out-of-figure variation. It is set to on if. This pseudo-series effect flag 223EC has a lower priority than the above-mentioned series-effect flag 223EB, and when the same series-effect is being executed, the series-effect flag 223EB is set to ON. , The pseudo series effect flag 223EC is configured to be executed differently depending on the case where the effect setting flag 223EC is set to ON.

Specifically, when the series effect flag 223EB is set to ON in the effect setting process for normal drawing (see C4117 in FIG. 371) (for example, the series effect is executed as the hit variation effect of the special figure variation). (Case) is configured so that a new series of effects is not executed even if the fluctuation of the normal map satisfies the execution conditions of the series of effects, whereas the pseudo series of effects flag 223EC is set to ON. If it is (for example, when a series of effects is executed as an out-of-order variation effect of the special figure variation), the normal map variation satisfies the execution condition of the series effect, and the special condition is satisfied. In this case, a new series of effects (special series of effects) can be executed (see C4211 in FIG. 371).

In this way, in a state where the same series of effects is being executed, a process of executing a new series of effects based on the execution trigger of the series of effects being executed (a process of replacing the effect mode of the series of effects being executed). Since it is possible to change whether or not to perform it, it is possible to diversify the production contents of the series of productions. Further, since the effect mode of the series of effects is replaced only when the effect result that is more advantageous to the player than the effect result of the series of effects being executed can be displayed, the effect mode of the series of effects being executed is performed. It is possible to make the player watch a series of productions while expecting that the speed is variable.

The time-saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is a flag for indicating that the current special map fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the time-saving state, and is set to ON when the current special map fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the time-saving state. .. By setting the time reduction final variation flag 223ED to ON, it is possible to set the effect mode for the time reduction final variation.

The small hit caution flag 223EE is a flag indicating that the ball has not passed through a specific area even after a predetermined period has elapsed during the small hit game, and is a predetermined period (1 second) after the small hit game is started. Is set to on when the sphere has not passed through a specific area even after the passage of time. Then, when the small hit caution flag 223EE is set to ON, the guidance display mode (see FIG. 325 (A)) for causing the right-handed game to be performed during the small hit game is displayed. Then, it is set to off at the timing when the small hit game ends.

The non-variable winning flag 223EF is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the normal state, and is a flag when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Special figure 1 Set to ON when the fluctuation is not executed. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to perform a left-handed game in a normal state, to win a ball in the first winning opening 64, and to execute a special drawing 1 lottery. Then, a fuzu lottery is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area, and when the lottery result of the fuzu lottery is a fuzu long opening, the electric accessory 640A Since the game per long opening is executed, a right-handed game is performed in order to make the second winning opening 640 win the ball.

That is, when the game is normally performed, the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the ball is passed through the through gate 67. On the other hand, for example, in a state where the normal state is set, when a game is performed in which the ball is passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area of the game board 13, the ball is passed through the through gate 67. It means that the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the timing of making it. Here, as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth control example, the ball fired by the left-handed game is fired by the right-handed game rather than the ratio of passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area. The ratio of the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area is higher.

In this way, in the case of performing a right-handed game and performing a malicious game that attempts to execute only the Fuzu lottery in the normal state, even if the player wins the long opening by the Fuzu lottery, the Fuzu It is configured so that the fluctuation effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who plays a right-handed game in a normal state to understand the timing at which the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure.

The special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG and the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223EH are counters for measuring each symbol fluctuation time, and when the symbol fluctuation is executed, a value corresponding to the current fluctuation time is set. To. Then, the value is periodically subtracted in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. By using the values of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG and the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223EH, it is possible to determine the remaining time of each symbol fluctuation time during the symbol fluctuation.

The continuous continuous effect flag 223EJ is executed when the waiting period of the change in Special Figure 2 is a predetermined period (30 seconds) or more during the period during which the continuous effect is being executed (see FIG. 317 (B)). ) Is set, and is set to ON when a continuous series of effects is executed.

The series effect counter 223EK is a counter for updating the effect scenario of the series effect, and when the series effect is set, a value corresponding to the effect period of the series effect executed this time is set, and the value is set. , It is updated by the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) that is periodically executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the series of effect counter 223EK is set with a value for indicating the period until the series of effect is completed (the effect in which the jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 322 (B)) is executed). It is configured, and the effect mode is set according to the updated counter value. Then, during the execution of the series of effects, the effect end condition (for example, the condition that is satisfied when the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure and the special figure 2 hold cannot be obtained) is satisfied. However, when the series of effects is terminated, the effect mode for indicating the end of the series of effects is set, and the value of the series of effects counter 223EK is reset to 0.

The re-read-ahead flag 223EM is a flag for indicating that the pre-reading process needs to be executed again for the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A, and it is necessary to execute the pre-reading process again. If set to on. In the fifth control example, as the variation effect corresponding to the final special figure variation in the time saving state, the variation effect (time saving final variation effect) in which the effect mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold is set is executed. Therefore, the look-ahead process is executed for the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the specific timing of the final special figure change period, and the effect mode corresponding to the look-ahead result is set.

The above-mentioned re-read-ahead flag 223EM is set to on and turned on when the final special figure change is being executed and a new special figure 2 hold is acquired after the lapse of a specific timing of the final special figure change period. In this case, the look-ahead process for the special figure 2 hold is executed again at the execution timing of the special figure 2 change in the first rotation after the end of the time saving state, and the change effect based on the result of the look-ahead process is executed.

The holding upper limit flag 223EN is a flag for determining whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit value (4), and is when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit value (4). Set to on. Then, it is referred to when setting the effect mode of the time saving final variation effect. Specifically, in the fifth control example, as a fluctuation effect corresponding to the final special figure fluctuation in the time saving state, the holding ball for acquiring the special figure 2 hold during the first period of the final special figure fluctuation period. The acquisition effect can be executed, and the time-saving final variation effect for showing the lottery result of the change and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold can be executed during the second period after the first period. When the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON at the start of the first period, the time saving final variation effect is executed using the first period and the second period. ..

With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect (holding ball acquisition effect) for a player who has already acquired the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. A game that can be suppressed and that keeps holding the special figure 2 hold close to the upper limit value, that is, a player who continuously executes a right-handed game, has a longer execution period of the time-saving final variation effect. Can be set. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game continuously, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The executed flag 223EQ is a flag for indicating that the time-saving final variation effect is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the final special figure variation, and is usually executed from the second period of the time-saving final variation period. The time saving final variation effect is set to be turned on when it is executed from the first period set before the second period. That is, at the start of the first period of the time-saving final fluctuation period, the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 has reached the upper limit, and the time-saving final fluctuation effect (effect using the first period and the second period) during the first period. Is set to on when it is determined to execute, and it is determined whether the executed flag 223EQ is set to on at the start of the second period, and when it is determined to be set to on, the second Since the effect mode to be executed during the period is set, the process of setting a new effect mode is skipped. Then, it is set to off when a stop command corresponding to the time saving final fluctuation is received.

The special 2 winning flag 223ER is a flag for indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A), and is during the game per normal figure (during the game per normal figure). This is set to ON when a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640) during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A. This special 2 winning flag 223ER is set when it is determined in the in-game update process (see FIG. 376 (A)) that a ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 (C4701 in FIG. 376 (A)). YES), set to on (see C4705 in FIG. 376), and referenced in the series effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375) to determine whether to continue the series of effects (FIG. 375). 375 C4608). If it is determined in the processing of C4608 that it is not set to on (set to off) (C4608: NO in FIG. 375), the special figure 2 variation is not executed, and the end condition of the series of effects is satisfied. Therefore, the process (C4612) for terminating the series of effects is executed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 343 to 359. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 Mseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process 5 and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the operation is started. The processing and the main processing will be described. In the fifth control example, the above-mentioned control examples and the contents described in each embodiment are also described in duplicate with different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as those described in each control example and each embodiment, the above-mentioned control examples and the contents described in each embodiment are applied. Is. Further, the technical idea described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment is naturally applied to the fifth control example, and has been described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment. Of course, the modified example and the additional example are also applied to the fifth control example.

FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process 5 is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process 5, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (C101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 are updated (C103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 are each added by 1. At the same time, when those counter values reach the maximum values (999,99,239,239,99,99, respectively in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C6 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process 5 for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (C104). .. After that, the start winning process 5 accompanying the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (C105). The details of the special symbol variation process 5 and the start winning process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 344 to 349.

After executing the start winning process 5 (C105), the normal symbol variation process 5 which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device is executed (C106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. 350. After the normal symbol variation process 5 is executed, the through gate passage process 5 accompanying the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (C107). The details of the through gate passing process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 351 and 352.

After executing the through gate passing process 5, the V inlet passing process 5 is executed (C108), and then the V passing process 5 (C109) is executed. Here, the details of the V inlet passing process 5 and the V passing process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 353 and 354.

After executing the V-passing process 5 (C109), the launch control process is executed (C110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (C111), and the timer interrupt process 5 is terminated. .. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51A detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51B for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 5 (C104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 344. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 5 (C104). This special symbol variation process 5 (C104) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the first symbol are displayed. 3 This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed by the symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 5, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (C201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and special. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (C201: YES), the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) cannot be executed, and the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (C201: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (during the special symbol changing) (C202), and the first symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the devices 37A and 37B is not changing (during special symbol change) (C202: NO), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203E (number of pending times of variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired ( C203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is larger than 0 (C204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is not 0 (C204: YES), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is subtracted by 1 (C205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E is set (C206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E from the hold ball number command, and the extracted values are used in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of C206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute the special symbol variation start process 5 for starting the variation display (C213). The special symbol change start process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. 345.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is 0 (C204: NO), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is determined. The value is acquired (C208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is larger than 0 (C209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is 0 (C209: NO), that is, when there is no reserved ball for newly starting the special symbol variation, this process is performed as it is. To finish.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is not 0 (C209: YES), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is subtracted (C210), and the process of C210 is performed. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D is set (C211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of C211th, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (C212). After that, the process of C213 is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the new special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is executed, the special symbol 2 is preceded by the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (N1). Special symbol 2 When it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter (N2) is larger than 0, the value of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined. It is configured to execute the process for starting the special symbol change (special symbol change) (special symbol change start process 5 (see C213)). As a result, the second special symbol can be changed with priority over the first special symbol.

Further, in the process of C202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (C202: YES), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (C214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (C214: NO), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (C214: YES), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (C215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) described later with reference to FIG. 345. When this special symbol change start process 5 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. Will be done. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is used. Depending on the jackpot AA, jackpot AB, jackpot AC, jackpot AD, jackpot AE, or jackpot AF, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit is based on the value of the small hit type counter C5. One of AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit AD, small hit AE, and small hit E is determined.

In this embodiment, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is configured to notify the player of the lottery result (determination result of each type of counter) of the special symbol this time. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on and the case is off. The red LED and the green LED are turned on.

When the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot AA is determined, a blue LED is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to indicate the jackpot AA (for example, the alphabet "A"). When the jackpot AB is determined, the lamp is lit in a mode indicating the jackpot AB (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "B"), and when the jackpot AC is determined, the jackpot AC is determined. It is lit in a mode indicating AC (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "C"), and when a jackpot AD is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating a jackpot AD (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "D"). Let me.

Further, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the red LED is used for each small hit type (small hit AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit) as in the case of winning the above-mentioned big hit. It is turned on in an manner corresponding to AD, small hit AE, and small hit E). The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, a mode (color corresponding to the lottery result of a special symbol) showing the content of each hit type so that the player can grasp each hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. , The mode formed from the lighting mode corresponding to each hit type) is configured to light the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, but other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery result or Even when the determined hit types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Further, in the present embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol this time and the determined winning type. However, other configurations may be used, and for example, it may be configured to display that the lottery results of the special symbols are different in a lighting mode divided to the extent that the player can discriminate. ..

After the processing of C215 is completed, it is determined whether the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is a big hit of the special symbol (this lottery result). C216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (C216: YES), a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type (C217), and then the jackpot type determined in this jackpot is corresponded to the jackpot. The start setting (big hit setting such as 15 rounds) is executed (C218).

When the jackpot scenario is set in the process of C217, the jackpot scenario table corresponding to the current jackpot is set among the jackpot scenario tables specified in the jackpot scenario table 202EH. Since the method of updating the jackpot scenario table is the same as the above-mentioned contents with reference to FIG. 248 of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After finishing the processing of C218, next, the big hit start flag 203H and the big hit medium flag 203I are set to on (C219), the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is set to 0 (C220), and the stop command is set (C225). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C216, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (C216: NO), the time saving update process is executed (C221). The details of this time saving update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, but when the time saving state is set, various parameters for satisfying the time saving end condition (second special symbol (special drawing 2)). The process of updating the number of fluctuations and the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is executed. After executing the processing of C221, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a small hit (C222), and if it is determined to be a small hit (C222: YES), the small hit start setting process 5 (C223) is executed. Then, the above-mentioned C225 process is executed later, and this process is terminated. The details of the small hit start setting process 5 (C223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 347.

On the other hand, in the process of C222, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit (out of place) (C222: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the time saving update process is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol variation ends (the timing when the special symbol variation time has elapsed). With this configuration, for example, when "Special Figure 2 variation number 1 time" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition that is a part of the time saving end condition, the time saving state is set and the special figure 2 variation is executed. Even if it is done, the period until the fluctuation of the special figure 2 stops can be shortened, so that the period for acquiring the special figure 2 hold can be secured.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the fifth control example, and the time saving update process may be executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. In this case, the period for one change of the special figure 2 is secured as the time saving state. In order to do so, it may be configured to set "Special Figure 2 Number of fluctuations 2 times" as the response time reduction end condition.

Next, the special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 345. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing 5 (C213). This special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344) of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344). "Special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area of 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. This is a process for performing a lottery (hit / fail determination) and determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing 5, first, the first random number counter stored in the common execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203B). Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 is acquired (C231). Next, the lottery result of the special symbol is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1, special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2) corresponding to the special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). Acquire (C232) and move to the process of C233.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is used as the value of the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 (FIG. It is compared with each of the four random number values set in 334 (B)) one by one. As described above, four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random number values that are the jackpots of the first special symbol, and the acquired values of the random number counter C1 per first hit and the random numbers that are the jackpots. If it matches the numerical value, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol. Similarly, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the random number value "10, 11" which is a small hit set in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 (see FIG. 334 (B)) are two. If they match, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and it is determined that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined to be small hits is different. With this configuration, the probability that the lottery result will be a small hit can be different depending on the type of special symbol, and the player is motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with the higher small hit probability. It is possible to play a game in a targeted manner.

In this control example, the random number 5 table 202EA per first is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a small hit, but only one of the special symbols is a small hit. The first random number 5 table 202EA may be set so as to win the prize. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random number value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2 corresponding to the second special symbol is set. Only it is good to set a random number value that is a small hit of a special symbol. With this configuration, the benefits (small hit games) that can be given to the player can be different depending on the type of the special symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the jackpot of the special symbol is associated with the predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and the type of the special symbol is within the other range (4 to 999). However, as other configurations, for example, a part of the range (for example, 0 to 2) that is a big hit in the first special symbol is set to a small hit in the second special symbol. It may be set as a hit range.

Further, in this control example, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number 5 table 202EA are used to draw a special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss). As another configuration, a lottery of special symbols may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. For example, whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit using the first random number table. If the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit, the second random number table is used to determine whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. It may be configured. By performing the lottery of the special symbol using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the lottery result of the special symbol can be set more randomly, and the fraudulent act of manipulating the lottery result of the special symbol can be suppressed. ..

In this control example, the value of the first random number counter C1 is used when the lottery of the special symbol is performed, but other configurations may be used, for example, the value of a plurality of random number counters and the first hit. A special symbol may be drawn using the random number 5 table 202EA. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter, and the lottery result of the special symbol is small based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

Returning to FIG. 345, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of C233, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of C232 is a big hit of the special symbol (C233). If it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol (C233: YES), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 5 table 202EB corresponding to the special symbol type corresponding to this special symbol lottery (C233: YES). C234), the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (C235), the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C236), and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined this time is used. The corresponding fluctuation pattern command is set (C243), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (C233: NO), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (C237), and it is a small hit. If it is determined (C237: YES), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 5 table 202EG according to the special symbol type corresponding to this special symbol lottery (C238), and the special symbol and small are obtained. The display mode for small hits corresponding to the hit type is set (C239), the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C240), and the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit fluctuation pattern determined this time is determined. A pattern command is set (C243), and this process ends.

Further, in the processing of C237, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (C237: NO), that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order, the outlier corresponding to the type of the special symbol. The time display mode is set (C241), the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined based on the number of reserved balls (C242), and the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation determined this time is set (C243). This process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, whereas the special symbol is determined. If the lottery result is out of the question, the fluctuation pattern is configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is executed, the easier it is to determine the variation pattern with a short variation time. As a result, the period until the lottery result of the special symbol does not give the player a privilege and the lottery result (missing) is displayed can be shortened as the number of reserved balls increases, so that it is executed per unit time. In order to increase the number of lottery of special symbols to be performed, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen the time for changing one special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the special symbol does not change during the game. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced.

In this control example, the variation pattern is configured to be different based on the number of reserved balls at the timing when the process of the special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is executed, but other than that, for example, the special symbol is configured. Even if it is configured to shorten the fluctuation time set in the running fluctuation pattern on the condition that the number of reserved balls becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more while the fluctuation is in progress. good. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in this control example, the fluctuation pattern is different based on the number of reserved balls only when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the reserved balls The fluctuation pattern may be different based on the number, or the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time may be easily determined as the number of reserved balls increases. Further, the number of reserved balls referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern may be a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the first. Of the two special symbols, only the value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol on which the special symbol variation start processing is preferentially executed may be used, or the special symbol on the side subject to the special symbol variation start processing executed this time may be used. Only the value of the number of reserved balls of the symbol may be used.

Next, the time saving update process (C221) will be described with reference to FIG. 346. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (C221).

In the time saving update process (C221), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203G of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C251). The time saving / medium counter 203G is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving / medium counter 203G is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 has the high probability of the normal symbol. It indicates that it is in a probability state, and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203G is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal symbol. In the fifth control example, two gaming states can be set. Specifically, two gaming states can be set: a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol). It is configured in. That is, in this control example, the probability state of the special symbol is always constant, and only the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set. Therefore, a time-saving state may be used as a term indicating a high-probability state of a normal symbol, and a normal state may be used as a term indicating a low-probability state of a normal symbol.

If the value of the time reduction counter 203G is 0 (C251: NO), the time reduction state is not set, and the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter 203G is 1 or more (C251: YES), that is, when it is determined that the current state is in the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter 203G is subtracted by 1 (C252). Next, it is determined whether or not the change in the special figure this time is a change in the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C253). If the current special figure fluctuation is the fluctuation of special figure 2 (C253: YES), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 203EA is subtracted by 1 (C254), and the remaining time reduction command indicating the values of various counters is set. Then (C255), the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C255, the remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction medium counter 203G and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203EA is set. The remaining time reduction command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 as a part of the state command indicating the game state by the external output process (see C1001 in FIG. 357) of the main process (see FIG. 357) described later. It is output. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when it is determined that the status command (remaining time reduction command) has been received by the command determination process 5 (see C3113 in FIG. 360), it is included in the received command (C3212 in FIG. 360). Information is extracted and the current game state (remaining time reduction number) is stored in the state storage area 223EA. As a result, the remaining period of the time saving state currently set by the voice lamp control device 113 can be predicted (determined), and the effect mode according to the remaining period of the time saving state can be set.

In this control example, each time the time saving update process (see C221 in FIG. 346) is executed, the main control device 110 is configured to output the remaining time saving number command to indicate the remaining time saving number. , Not limited to this, for example, to output a time saving end condition command to indicate the time saving end condition set at the time when the time saving state is set (when the jackpot game ends) to the voice lamp control device 113. The number of times a command (variation pattern command) indicating a special figure variation output from the main controller 110 side is received after extracting the time reduction end condition from the time reduction end condition command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. May be accumulated, and it may be configured to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the accumulated value. With such a configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 side can be reduced.

In the processing of C253, if the variation of the special figure this time is not the variation of the special figure 2 (C253: NO), the processing of C254 and C255 is not performed, and the process shifts to the processing of C256.

In the process of C256, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203G is 0 (C256). When the value of the time reduction counter 203G is 0 (C256: YES), it means that the time reduction end condition (common time reduction end condition) is satisfied. Therefore, it is determined whether the corresponding time reduction end condition is satisfied among the time reduction end conditions. The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 203EA for the purpose is reset to 0 (C257), and the process proceeds to the process of C260.

In the process of C256, if the value of the time reduction counter 203G is not 0 (C256: NO), then it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203EA is 0 (C258). Special figure 2 When the value of the fluctuation count counter 203EA is 0 (C258: YES), it means that the time saving end condition (corresponding time saving end condition) is satisfied. The value of the time saving counter 203G for determining is reset to 0 (C259), and then the process proceeds to C260. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 203EA is not 0 in the processing of C258 (C258: NO), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of C260, the game state is set to the normal state (C260), the state command indicating the normal state is set (C261), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, the time saving update process (C221 in FIG. 346) is a plurality of time saving end conditions (part of the common time saving end condition and a part of the common time saving end condition) that can be satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol among the time saving end conditions. It is configured so that the establishment status of the corresponding time saving end condition) can be discriminated, and when any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the value of the parameter for satisfying the other time saving end condition is also reset. As a result, no matter which parameter value the time saving end condition is satisfied with, the state after the time saving state is ended can be unified.

In this control example, as the time saving end condition, the common time saving end condition (first end condition, small hit that is satisfied when the big hit is won) is set in common regardless of the time saving state set based on any big hit type. It is set according to the second end condition that is satisfied after the game ends, the third end condition that is established when the number of special figure fluctuations (cumulative of special figure 1 and special figure 2) reaches 99 times, and the jackpot type. It is configured to set the corresponding time saving end condition (special figure 2 condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number), but the condition for ending the time saving state is not limited to this. For example, a small hit end condition that is satisfied when the number of small hit winnings reaches a predetermined number of times or when the number of times a specific small hit type is selected reaches a predetermined number of times may be set. In this case, the small hit end condition may be set as the common time reduction end condition, or may be set as the corresponding time reduction end condition. In addition, when an end lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to end the time saving state based on the execution of the special symbol change (special figure change) is provided, and the lottery result of the end lottery means is the lottery result for ending the time saving state. In addition, it may be configured to end the time saving state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends, so that the player can be made to execute the game in the time saving state while giving a feeling of excitement. .. In addition, when a predetermined continuation condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a lottery result indicating a specific deviation is obtained as a lottery result of a special symbol) is satisfied during the time reduction state, various parameters related to the time reduction end condition are set for a predetermined period. It may be configured not to be updated. Furthermore, only in the time saving state set when a specific jackpot type is selected, until a predetermined period elapses after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of special map fluctuations reaches 30 times). It may be configured so that various parameters related to the time saving end condition are not updated. With such a configuration, it is possible to surely set a period in which the time saving state continues, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, a discriminating means capable of discriminating that the ball did not win in the V winning opening 650A was provided even though the small hit game was executed, and the ball did not win in the V winning opening 650A by the discriminating means. It may be configured to set the time saving forced end condition that is satisfied when it is determined that the case has occurred as the common time saving end condition. With this configuration, the small hit type set when the small hit is won is discriminated, and the discriminant result is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a ball in a specific area in the V winning opening 650A). When it is determined that the game is a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player when passing through (a jackpot game with a small number of rounds or a jackpot game in which a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is not set after the end). It is possible to impose a penalty on a player who performs an illegal game such as aiming for the next small hit winning without firing a ball during the small hit game.

Next, the small hit start setting process 5 (C223) will be described with reference to FIG. 347. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process 5 (C223). In this small hit start setting process 5 (C223), a scenario for opening and closing a solenoid (V inlet solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 650B when a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery is set. The process is executed.

In the small hit start setting process 5 (C223), first, a scenario (hit scenario) corresponding to the set small hit type is set based on the small hit scenario 5 table 202EI (C291). Next, the small hit type corresponding to the small hit type determined as the big hit type value at the time of passing V is set (C292), the start of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (C293), and the small hit medium flag 203K. Is set to on (C294), and this process ends. Since the detailed update method of the small hit scenario (hit scenario) in this process is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the start winning process 5 (C105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 348. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 5 (C105) executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343) in the present embodiment. This start winning process 5 (C105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 or the second winning opening (winning opening) 640 is won. It is a process for determining the presence or absence of (starting prize), acquiring various random number counters when there is a starting winning, and executing the hold processing of the value.

When the start winning process 5 (see C105 in FIG. 348) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first entry (winning opening) 64 (starting winning) (C301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port (winning opening) 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 (C301: YES), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N1) is set. Acquire (C302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (C303).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 (C301: NO), or even if there is a winning in the first ball opening (winning opening) 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter. If the value (N1) of 203D is not less than 4 (C303: NO), the process proceeds to C307. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening (winning opening) 64 (C301: YES) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than 4 (C303: YES). The value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is added by 1 (C304). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D changed by the calculation is set (C305).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223B of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of C305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated by C103 of the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343) described above. , The second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 are set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203A of the RAM 203. Store in the first area (C306). In the process of C306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes of C307 to C312, the same process is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640 for the processes of C301 to C306. The only difference is that the hold processing for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed for the winning of the second ball opening (winning opening) 640, and the other processing is the same. The explanation is omitted. Then, when it is determined in the processing of C307 that the ball has not won the second entry opening (winning opening) 640 (C307: NO), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is less than 4. If not (C309: NO), the look-ahead process 5 is executed after the process of C312 (C313). After that, this process ends.

Next, the look-ahead process 5 (C313) will be described with reference to FIG. 349. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process 5 (C313). When the look-ahead process 5 (C313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new prize (C321). If there is no new prize (C321: NO), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize (C321: YES), then it is determined whether or not the prize is a prize of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (C322).

In the processing of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) (C322: YES), the processing of C306 or C312 of the starting winning processing 5 (see C105 of FIG. 348) is performed. Using the acquired various counter values, special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 (see FIG. 334 (B)), special figure 1 big hit type selection 5 table 202EB1 (see FIG. 335 (B)), and special figure 1 small hit type selection. 5 The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired based on the table 202EG1 (see FIG. 337 (B)) (C323), and the process proceeds to C325.

On the other hand, in the processing of C322, if it is determined that the prize is the prize of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C322: NO), the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2 (see FIG. 334 (C)), the special symbol. The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired based on FIG. 2 big hit type selection 5 table 202EB2 (see FIG. 335 (C)) and special figure 2 small hit type selection 5 table 202EG2 (see FIG. 337 (C)). (C324), the process proceeds to C325. In the process of C325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the above-mentioned C323 or C324 process is set ( C325). Then, this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the look-ahead process 5 (see C313 in FIG. 349) in the fifth control example, when the special figure change based on the corresponding winning information is executed in addition to the above-mentioned look-ahead result. The set fluctuation pattern (variation time) is also configured so that it can be discriminated in advance. Specifically, it is configured to acquire the value of the variation type counter CS1 by the process of C306 or C312 of the start winning process 5 (see C105 of FIG. 348), and C323 of the look-ahead process 5 (see C313 of FIG. 349). Alternatively, in the processing of C324, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in advance based on the variation pattern 5 table 202EE (see FIG. 339), and the determination result is included in the winning information in the processing of C325. There is. This makes it possible to predict at what timing (after how many seconds) the special figure change corresponding to the winning information stored on hold will be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing 5 (C106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 350. FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 5 (C106). This normal symbol variation process 5 (C106) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time of the electric accessory 640A are executed. It is a process for controlling such things.

In the normal symbol variation processing 5, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (C601). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the process in which the display indicating the hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 and the process in which the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640A is performed. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (C6011: YES), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (C601: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (C602: NO), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (C603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is larger than 0 (C604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is 0 (C604 :). NO), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is not 0 (C604: YES), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is subtracted by 1 (C605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C is shifted (C606). In the processing of C606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C is acquired (C607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203G of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C608). The time-saving / medium-time counter 203G is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203G is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time reduction counter 203G is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time reduction counter 203G is 1 or more (C608: YES), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number 5 table 202EC (see FIG. 334 (D)) for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (C609). ). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number 5 table 202EC per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 334 (D)).

In the processing of C608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203G is 0 (C608: NO), the process proceeds to the processing of C610. In the processing of C610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of C607 is low. Based on the random number 5 table 202EC (see FIG. 334 (D)) for random numbers per normal symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (C610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number 5 table 202EC per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,29 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 334 (D)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of C609 or C610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (C611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (C611: YES). Next, the type per normal figure (A per normal figure, B per normal figure) is set using the table 202ED for selecting the type per normal figure (C612). Specifically, the value of the second hit type counter C6 is compared with the random number value stored in the type selection 5 table 202ED per normal figure. As described above, when the current gaming state is the reduced working hours state (high probability state of the normal figure), if the value of the second hit type counter C6 is in the range of "0,1", it is A per normal figure. If it is in the range of "2 to 99", it is determined that the value is B per normal figure (see FIG. 336 (A)). Alternatively, when the current gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of the normal figure), if the value of the second hit type counter C6 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the game is A per normal figure, and " If it is in the range of "1 to 99", it is determined that the value is B per normal figure (see FIG. 336 (A)).

Next, the display mode at the time of hitting based on the setting result of C612 is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C615. In the process of C613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). On the other hand, in the processing of C611, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not a hit (C611: NO), it is the case that the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) this time is out, so the display mode at the time of the out is set. (C614), the process proceeds to C615.

In the processing of C615, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is 1 or more (C615), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is 1 or more (C615: YES), the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202EF is used. Of these, the normal map fluctuation time (2 seconds) is set using the specified content corresponding to the time saving state (normal map high accuracy) (C617), and then this process is terminated. In the processing of C615, when the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203G is 0 (C615: NO), the specified contents corresponding to the normal state (low accuracy of the normal map) in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202EF are used. The figure fluctuation time (2 to 60 seconds) is set (C616), and then various contents set in this process (value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203F, the lottery result of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol). ) Is set (C623), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602: YES), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (C618). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of C618, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (C618: NO), the process proceeds to C623 and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C618, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (C618: YES), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (C619). In the processing of C619, a lottery of ordinary symbols is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the processing of C613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of C614, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of C619, and then the second symbol display update process (see C1008) of the main process (see FIG. 357) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of C613 or the process of C614.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process 5 is a hit of the ordinary symbol. (C620). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (C620: YES), an opening pattern of the electric accessory is set according to the type of the normal symbol and the game state (C621), and the opening / closing control process of the electric accessory is set. (C622), then the process proceeds to C623, a command for indicating the content of the game per game set by the process of C621 is set, and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640A is set by the process of C621, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see C1006) of the main process (see FIG. 357) is executed, the electric accessory 640A The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time set in the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of C620, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (C620: NO), the processing of C621 and C622 is skipped, the process shifts to the processing of C623, and the out-of-ordinary fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. Set the command indicating, and end this process.

Next, the through gate passing process 5 (C107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 351. The through gate passing process 5 (C107) determines whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and when the sphere has passed, the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 is used. This is a process for acquiring and holding.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (C431). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (C431: YES), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (C432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (C433).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (C431: NO), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F If the value (M) is not less than 4 (C433: NO), the process proceeds to C437. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F is less than 4 (C433: YES), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F The value (M) of (M) is added by 1 (C434), and the normal figure reserved ball number command is set (C435). Then, the second random number counter C4 updated by C103 of the timer interrupt processing 5 described above, the value of the second hit type counter C6, and the second updated by the processing of C1002 of the main processing (see FIG. 357) described later. The value of the variation type counter CS2 is stored in the first area (C436) of the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203, and the process proceeds to C437. ..

When storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty hold area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F is referred to, and the value is used. If it is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of C437, the normal map look-ahead process is executed (C437), and then the present process is terminated. The details of this normal symbol look-ahead processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 352, but it is based on each counter value stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C corresponding to the acquired normal figure hold in the C436 process. Then, by the time the normal symbol change (normal figure change) is executed, the process of determining the lottery result and the change pattern of the normal symbol hold is executed in advance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 352, the normal map look-ahead process (C437) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing a normal map look-ahead process (C437) executed in the through gate passage process 5 (see FIG. 351).

In the normal map look-ahead processing (C437), first, the random number 5 table 202EC per normal symbol (see FIG. 334 (D)), the type selection 5 table 202ED per normal symbol (see FIG. 336 (A)), and the normal map fluctuation pattern. The lottery result is acquired based on the selection table (C451), the winning information command for indicating each lottery result is set (C452), and then this process is terminated. The winning information command set here (the winning information command indicating the look-ahead result of the general drawing) is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as the main process described later (see FIG. 357). ) In the external output process (C1001), the information is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether the received prize information command is a prize information command related to special figure fluctuation or a prize information command related to normal figure fluctuation, and stores the corresponding prize information storage area 223A. .. The prize information stored here is the lottery result of the symbol change at the timing before the symbol change (special figure change or normal figure change) corresponding to the prize information command is actually executed. Refer to when setting the suggestion effect.

Next, the V inlet passage process 5 (C108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 353. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the V inlet passing process 5 (C108) executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343). Since the V inlet passing process 5 (C108) has the same processing content as the V inlet passing process (see S108 of FIG. 270) of the above-described A1 embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the V entrance passing process 5 (C108), it is first determined whether or not the current is a hit game (small hit game) (C501), and if the current is not a hit game (small hit game) (C501). : NO), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current is a hit game (small hit game) (C501: YES), then it is determined whether or not the V winning opening is open, that is, whether or not the small hit game is in progress. (C502). In the process of C502, if it is determined that the V winning opening opening period is in progress (C502: YES), a V entrance passage command is set (C503), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the game is not in the small hit game (C502: NO), the ball wins in the V winning opening 650A of the V winning device 650 even though the game is not a small hit game, so an error command is set. (C504), and this process is terminated.

The V inlet passage command set in the process of C503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing the effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the winning of the V winning device 650.

Next, the V-passing process 5 (C109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 354. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process 5 (C109) executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343). Since the V-passing process 5 (C109) has the same technical concept as the V-passing process (see S109 in FIG. 271) of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the V-passing process 5 (C109) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is V-passing, that is, whether or not the ball has won a prize in a specific region (V gate (V region)) in the V winning opening 650A (C601). If it is determined that the prize has not been won (C6011: NO), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize has been won (C601: YES), then it is determined whether or not the current V valid period is in effect (C602). In the processing of C602, when the progress of the small hit scenario set during the small hit game is within a specific period, it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, and in other cases, it is not in the V valid period. To determine.

In the processing of C602, if it is determined that the V valid period is in progress (C602: YES), then it is determined whether or not the current small hit game is in progress (C603), and if it is in the small hit game (C603). : YES), acquire the V-passing jackpot type value corresponding to the small hit type of this small hit game (C604), set the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (C605), and set the time saving medium counter 203G. It is set to 0 (C606), the variation counter 203EA of the special figure 2 is set to 0 (C607), and the process proceeds to C608.

That is, in the processes of C604 to C607, the process for executing the big hit game is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the processing of C603, if it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (C603: NO), it is not necessary to perform a new processing for executing the big hit game, so the processing of C604 to C607 is skipped. , C608 shifts to processing.

In the process of C608, a V-pass command is set (C608), and this process is terminated. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control process of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V passage command, for example, when the V passage command is received during the small hit game, the V challenge executed during the small hit game is successful, and the small hit game is followed. , Perform an effect to show that the jackpot game is executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when the V passing command is received during the small hit game is executed. On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small hit game, a disappointing effect indicating that the ball did not pass through the specific area during the small hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that the ball has won (passed) a specific area in the V winning opening 650A is set, but the V winning opening 650A is used for a game. It may be configured to set a command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating that the ball has not won a prize. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game ball is clogged in the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if it is determined that the current period is not in the V valid period (C602: NO), an error command is set (C609), and this process is terminated. By processing C609, the game ball wins the V winning opening 650A outside the V valid period, that is, the game in which the game ball is illegally won the V winning opening 650A is performed, or the V winning opening is performed. It is possible to promptly notify the outside when a defect (ball jam, etc.) occurs in the ball flow path in the mouth 650A.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the contents of the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C801). That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 356. FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (C901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (C902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (C903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (C904), and if it is turned on (C904: YES), the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side is used. A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (C912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (C904: NO), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905), and if it is not stored (C905: NO). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, in this case as well, the payout initialization device 111, which is the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, is initialized. Send a command (C912).

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905: YES), the RAM determination value is calculated (C906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (C907: NO), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. A payout initialization command is sent (C912). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (C913), sets an initial value, and can start payout control of the game ball. Will be. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the initialization process of the RAM 203 is similarly executed (C914). After that, the process proceeds to C910. In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, the power off occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (C907: YES), the data is backed up to the RAM 203. Clear the power outage occurrence information while retaining the data (C908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (C909). Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Then, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (C910), and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (C911). Next, the interrupt is permitted and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of C1001 to C1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 Mseconds, and the counter update process of C1011 and C1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 357), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) of is executed (C1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of C101 in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is calculated for the payout control device 111. Send the corresponding prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344), the start winning process 5 (see FIG. 348), the V entrance passage process 5 (see FIG. 353), and the V pass process 5 (see FIG. 354) are executed. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command set in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 358), and various commands set in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 359) described later are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the values of the variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2 are updated (C1002). Specifically, various variable type counters (variable type counter CS1 and second variable type counter CS2) are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the various variation type counters are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used when referring to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation), and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is used. The value is usually used when referring to the fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation (normal chart fluctuation). Then, the special map fluctuation and the normal map fluctuation are configured to be executed by the establishment of a separate and independent opportunity. As a result, even if the timing to update the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the contents to be updated are synchronized, the counter values used when actually executing each symbol variation are synchronized. No. Therefore, the processing content in the main control device 110 can be simplified without affecting the game.

Not limited to this, the process of updating the values of various variable type counters may be configured so as not to be synchronized. For example, the value of one variable type counter may be executed every time the main process is executed a predetermined number of times. Only may be updated, and only the value of the other variable type counter may be updated every time the execution is performed a specific number of times different from the predetermined number of times described above. By making the update contents of the various variable type counters different in this way, it is possible to suppress that the value of the other variable type counter is determined based on the acquired value of one variable type counter.

Further, in the fifth control example, the fluctuation type counter CS1 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special map fluctuation and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation are used. It is provided separately and is configured to update each counter value periodically, but the variation pattern is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, for example, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. May be configured to select.

When the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (C1003), and then when the special symbol is in the jackpot state. , Execution of the jackpot effect, and execution of the jackpot control process 5 for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A of the variable winning device 65 (C1004). In the jackpot control process 5, the winning door 65B is opened for each round in the jackpot state to open the specific winning opening 65A, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65A has elapsed, or a ball is placed in the specific winning opening 65A. Determine if you have won the specified number. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65A is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65A is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343). The details of the jackpot control process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. 358.

Next, the small hit control process 5 (C1005) is executed. The small hit control process 5 (C1005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 359. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second ball entry port (winning opening) 640 is executed (C1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of C622 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of C616 or the processing of C617 in the normal symbol variation processing 5 are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (C1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of C236, the processing of C240, or the processing of C242 of the special symbol variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 345), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed. , The first symbol display device 37A, 37B starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4S. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the C236 process, the C240 process, or the C242 process of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 345) ends, the variation time is completed. The change display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the stop symbol (the first) is set in the display mode set by the processes of C235, C239 and C241 of the special symbol change start process 5 (see FIG. 345). 1 symbol) is displayed as a stop display (lighting display) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (C1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of C616 or the process of C617 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of C619 of the normal symbol change process 5 (see FIG. 350), it is executed in the second symbol display device. The variation display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of C613 or the processing of C619 of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 350). indicate.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: NO), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 Msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (C1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (C1010: YES), the process is shifted to C1001, and each process after C1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (C1010: NO), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (C1011, C1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the processing of C1002 (C1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of C1001 to C1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, various variable type counters can be updated at random.

In a configuration in which the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are updated as in the fifth control example, in order to make the update timings of the various variation type counters different, for example, in the main process C1002. In the process, any variation type counter may be updated, and in the process of C1012, only one variation type counter (for example, the variation type counter CS1) may be updated.

Further, in the processing of C1009, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: YES), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after C1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (C1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (C1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (C1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (C1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of C1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in C1001 to C1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of C1011 and C1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of C1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of C1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer has a predetermined value (in the process of initial setting). By setting the initial value), it is possible to start from the process of C1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 358. FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 5 (C1004). This jackpot control process 5 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the variable winning device is used. This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65A of 65. In the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the same control process as the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275) in the above-described A1 embodiment is executed. There is. Therefore, the contents described in the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and the details of the modified examples and additional examples will be omitted, but the contents described in each of the above-mentioned control examples or each embodiment will be described. Of course also applies.

In the jackpot control process 5 (C1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203H is on (C1201). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203H is on (C1201: YES), the opening command is set (C1202), the jackpot medium flag 203I is set to on, and the jackpot start flag 203H is set to off (C1203). After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203H is off (C1201: NO), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203I is on (C1204).

If it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 203I is off in the processing of C1204 (C1204: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203I is on (C1204: YES), it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1215). If it is determined in the processing of C1205 that the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1205: YES), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to be opened (C1206) (opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65A). The specific winning opening solenoid is set to be turned on so that the door 65B is in the open state), then a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (C1207), and then this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the number of rounds executed during the plurality of jackpot games is accumulated. The cumulative number of rounds is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, this cumulative number of rounds determines whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied when a command indicating that the jackpot game has started (winning the jackpot) is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is continuous. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the value of the cumulative rounds counter is updated based on the newly received rounds command without clearing the value of the cumulative rounds counter that accumulates the received rounds commands. However, the cumulative number of rounds is displayed in a display mode showing the update result.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot games executed consecutively are one jackpot game, so that the player is set with one jackpot game. You can show a lot of maximum number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of expectation for the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls) provided by one big hit game.

In this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied and the process of accumulating the number of rounds, but the cumulative rounds are not limited to this. A part of the process for executing the number display may be configured to be executed on the main control device 110 side. For example, as a continuous condition for executing the cumulative round number display, it is executed after the jackpot game is completed. A continuous condition is set that is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed within a predetermined number of times of the special figure fluctuation (for example, 5 times of the special figure 2 fluctuation), and the cumulative number of rounds of the jackpot game is measured on the main control device 110 side. A cumulative round count counter is provided, and a command indicating the value of the cumulative round count counter is set as a round count command. Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed five times after the jackpot game is completed, the value of the cumulative round number counter is cleared.

With this configuration, if the continuous condition is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed, the value obtained by accumulating the number of rounds of the previous jackpot game is set as the value of the cumulative round number counter. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the round number display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the round number (cumulative round number) information included in the command. Only by itself, the cumulative number of rounds can be notified to the player.

In addition, other conditions may be set as continuous conditions for cumulatively displaying the number of rounds executed in a plurality of jackpot games. For example, even after the jackpot game ends, a predetermined period (for example, special figure 2 variation) may be set. (Period until 10 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot game) When the jackpot game is executed during the period when the jackpot game end screen that is continuously displayed is displayed ( For example, the jackpot game is executed during the period that is satisfied (when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery) or the specific gaming state (for example, the time saving state) is set as the gaming state. It may be configured to set the condition that is satisfied when it is done. In addition, both the value of the above-mentioned cumulative round number counter (cumulative number of rounds) and the number of rounds of the current jackpot game (number of single rounds) are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured.

In the process of C1205, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of a new round (C1205: NO), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208). When it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208: YES), the specific winning opening is closed (the special winning opening solenoid 65F2 is turned off so that the opening / closing door 65B of the specific winning opening 65A is closed. (C1209), and then the process is terminated. In the process of C1208, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is not satisfied (C1208: NO), then it is determined whether or not the present is the start timing of the ending effect (C1210). If it is determined that the current timing is the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: YES), the ending command is set (C1211), and then this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of C1208 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next and subsequent jackpot control processes.

On the other hand, in the process of C1210, when it is determined that the present is not the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: NO), it is determined whether or not the present is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212). If it is determined that the current time is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: YES), the time saving end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the time saving medium counter 203G and the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203EA (C1213), and the jackpot is hit. A state command corresponding to the later game state is set (C1214), the end of the jackpot is set (C1215), and then this process is ended.

Here, the values set in the values of the counters in the processing of C1213 are different depending on the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed (see FIGS. 335 and 337), and the jackpot type AA and the jackpot are different. When the types AD to AF are set, "99" is set in the time saving / medium-time counter 203G, and "-" indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203EA is not set is set. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type AA, the corresponding time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is not set as the time-saving end condition, and the common time-saving end condition (big hit winning, small hit game) is not set. End, the number of special map fluctuations reaches 99 times) will be set.

When the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, "99" is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203G, "5" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency counter 203EA, and when the jackpot AC is set, the time reduction / medium counter. "99" is set in 203G, and "1" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation count counter 203EA.

Further, when the big hit game is executed based on the small hit winning, the value of the big hit type corresponding to the set small hit type is referred to, and as shown in FIG. 337, the small hit is configured. At the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning with the types AA and AE set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203G and "5" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203EA, and the small hit types AB and AD are set. At the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning in which is set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203G, and "-" indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203EA is not set is set. On the other hand, at the end of the big hit game based on the small hit winning in which the small hit type AC is set, "0" is set in the time saving medium counter 203G and "0" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203EA.

On the other hand, in the process of C1212, if it is determined that the current timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the small hit control process 5 (C1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 359. FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 5 (C1005). This small hit control process 5 (C1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), and a command setting for executing various effects according to the small hit on the voice lamp control device 113 and a V prize are won. This is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600B attached to the mouth 650A.

In the small hit control process 5 (C1005), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301). In the process of C1301, it is determined whether the small hit scenario set in the process of C291 of the small hit start setting process 5 (see C223 in FIG. 347) is the content indicating the start of the small hit game. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: YES), the small hit opening command is set (C1302), the small hit medium flag 203K is set to ON (C1303), and the small hit operation is performed. Set the start of the scenario (C1304), and then end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1301, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: NO), then it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203K is on (C1305). If it is determined that the small hit middle flag 203K is off (C1305: NO), it means that the small hit game is not currently in progress, so this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203K is on in the processing of C1305 (C1305: YES), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the small hit game (C1306). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit game (C1306), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of C1306, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (C1306: YES), the small hit medium flag 203K is set to off (C1307), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is reset to 0. (C1308), and it is determined whether the V flag 203N is set to ON (C1309). As described above, in the fifth control example, "0" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203G after the end of the small hit game regardless of whether or not the ball has passed the specific area during the small hit game. It is configured as follows.

By this process of C1308, one condition of the time saving end condition (common time saving end condition) is set. That is, when the small hit game is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state ends at the same time as the end of the small hit game. Therefore, for example, the running small hit game is disadvantageous to the player during the time saving state. During the small hit game, the big hit game based on the running small hit game is not executed when it is determined that the small hit type (for example, the small hit type in which the big hit game that is disadvantageous to the player can be executed) is determined. It is possible to suppress a game in which the ball is not fired (the ball is not passed through a specific area).

In the fifth control example, the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203G is always set (reset) to "0" when the small hit game is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. When a small hit game based on a specific small hit type is executed, the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203G may be set (reset) to "0" after the small hit game is completed.

If it is determined that the V flag 203N is off in the processing of C1309 (C1309: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203N is on (C1309: YES), then the start of the jackpot corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area is set (C1310), and the V flag 203N is set to off. (C1311), and then this process is terminated.

In this control example, all the small hit games are set as one round game, so unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds and the interval period (round). Although it does not have a scenario corresponding to the interval period), when a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-mentioned big hit game may be set.

Further, in this control example, the small hit scenario is set for the period during which the small hit game is executed. For example, after the small hit game is completed, until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. You may set a small hit scenario for the interval. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V-passing valid period until 1 second has elapsed after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period set across different gaming states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In this control example, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 650A in the small hit game, the big hit game corresponding to the preset big hit type corresponding to the small hit is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player may be configured to acquire the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening 650A and determine the jackpot type.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 360 to 375, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Of the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example, the details of the above-mentioned control examples or the parts where the same processes as those of the respective embodiments are executed are described in detail. Explanation and illustration are omitted.

In the fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 317, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol variation effect according to the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) and the normal symbol variation (normal symbol variation) are performed. ) Is configured to be feasible.

Then, the normal map fluctuation effect is configured to be executed as a series of effects in which a series of effects are executed across the normal map fluctuation period, the normal map per game period, the special figure 2 variable period, and the small hit game period. There is. With this configuration, the game when a specific Fuzu hit (per Fuzu long opening) is won by the Fuzu lottery, that is, the ball wins the second prize opening 640 during the game per Fuzu long opening. A special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning is won, and the big hit game is executed by the ball passing through a specific area in the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game. The flow can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner depending on the production mode of the series of effects.

In addition, since the execution period of the above-mentioned series of effects greatly differs depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in Special Figure 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the Fuzu, the Fuzu It is configured to set different production modes according to the game situation (presence or absence of change in Special Figure 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the long opening game. That is, if the special figure 1 change is executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the normal figure long opening, the special figure 2 change is completed after the running special figure 1 change is completed. Is executed, so that the effect mode is set according to the length of the residual fluctuation period (waiting period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation. Specifically, when the waiting period is less than the predetermined period, the effect mode corresponding to the normal series of effects is set, and when the wait period is longer than the predetermined period, the series of effects is pseudo-finished and being executed. When the residual fluctuation period (waiting period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches a specific period, a continuous series of effects is set to execute the series of effects in a pseudo manner again. In this way, by configuring the effect mode of the series of effects to be variable according to the length of the waiting period, it is possible to provide a series of effects that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game because the execution period of the production becomes unnecessarily long.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per Fuzu long opening, the special figure 2 immediately after the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. Since the variation is executed, a shortened series of effects shorter than the normal series of effects is set.

That is, the fifth control example is configured so that when the normal state is set as the game state, the game for executing the special figure 1 lottery is performed by the left-handed game, and the above-mentioned series of effects is It is executed when the lottery result of the normal drawing lottery (the lottery executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67) is a specific lottery result (per the normal drawing long opening). Therefore, while the series of effects is being executed, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variation is being executed. Therefore, in the normal series of effects, the normal figure fluctuation period, the game period per normal figure, the waiting period (the period of waiting until the end of the execution of the special figure 1 change), the special figure 2 change period, and the small hit game period are included. It is executed across straddling, and it is configured to change the production content according to the stage of transitioning each period.

Here, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal long opening, the waiting period is out of each period in which the above-mentioned series of effects is executed. Since this does not occur, the special figure 2 variable period will be set after the game period per normal figure has elapsed. While such a state can occur, the same production mode is used regardless of the game situation (whether or not there is a change in Special Figure 1) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening. If it is set, an unnecessary effect (for example, an effect indicating that the waiting period is in progress even though the waiting period is not set) is executed, which may lead to a decrease in the effect. ..

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening of the normal figure, the above-mentioned waiting period is performed. It is configured so that a series of productions in which the productions are skipped are executed. In addition, when skipping from the normal game period to the special figure 2 variable period so that the effect is not reduced even if the effect of the waiting period is skipped, the effect mode does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Is configured to be set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner the normal map variation effect (series effect) executed based on the lottery result of the general map lottery.

Further, in the fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 318, as a variable effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state, the first suggestion effect of suggesting and notifying only the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. In addition to the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, the second is to notify the suggestion including the determination result of the preliminary determination which determines the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the winning information included in the special figure 2 hold. It is configured to be feasible with suggestive effects.

Specifically, it is determined whether the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state in the time saving state, and the determination result is not the final variation (time saving final variation). If it is determined that the above-mentioned first suggestion effect (see FIG. 327 (A)) is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation, and if it is determined that the final variation is a reduced working hours, the special figure 2 is executed. The above-mentioned second suggestive effect (see FIGS. 327 (B) to 329 (A)) described above is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the variation.

With this configuration, in the variation effect corresponding to the time saving final fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state and the special figure 2 lottery executed after the end of the time saving state (after the transition to the normal state) Since the second suggestion effect based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of, is executed, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the time saving state ends for the player is executed as if during the time saving state. Since the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery can be reminded, the winning probability (big hit probability, small hit probability) in the time saving state can be reminded to be higher than the actual set value.

In addition, it is easy to set an effect mode (successful effect mode shown in FIG. 329 (A)) indicating winning in a dedicated effect (for example, the mission effect shown in FIG. 328 (B)) executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the dedicated production.

Further, in the fifth control example, the fluctuation time (normal state) of the special figure 2 variation (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold stored at the end of the time reduction state) executed after the time reduction state ends). It is configured so that a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the fluctuation period, and the time reduction final fluctuation is supported during the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation. It is configured so that the effect result of the second suggestion effect to be executed is displayed. With this configuration, when the success effect is executed based on the fact that the winning information indicating the winning (small hit) winning is included in the special figure 2 hold as the second suggestion effect, the small hit is won. FIG. 2 The second suggestion effect can be continuously executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player until the fluctuation is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the effect period of the variation effect executed in response to the time saving final variation is divided into a plurality of effect periods, and each effect period is configured to be used for different purposes. Specifically, during the first period from the execution of the final time-saving fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), a large number of special figure 2 hold is acquired by the player by the end of the fluctuation. It is configured to execute the effect (hold acquisition effect) for making the effect, and to execute the above-mentioned second suggestion effect during the second period set after the first period.

Then, the effect mode of the second suggestion effect executed during the second period of the time reduction final variation is the special figure 2 at a specific timing (for example, the end timing of the first period) before the second period is set. It is configured to be set based on the number of holds and the result of prior determination.

With this configuration, even if the time saving state ends (when the lottery result of the time saving final fluctuation is out of order), the special figure 2 lottery can be executed a maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the hold acquisition effect and the second suggestion effect are executed in the time saving final variation. This executes the hold acquisition effect during the special figure 2 change executed before the time reduction final change, and acquires the upper limit number (4) of the special figure 2 hold while the hold acquisition effect is being executed. Even so, when the special figure 2 change is executed as the time saving final change, the special figure 2 hold is subtracted, so that the player is allowed to execute the special figure 2 lottery a maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. This is to solve the problem of not being able to do it.

In the fifth control example, as the second suggestion effect executed in the time saving final variation, a plurality of special figure 2 lottery (special figure 2 lottery and special figure 2 hold of the time saving final variation) to be the target of the effect are supported. The lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery) is configured to set an effect mode for suggesting to the player whether or not the winning is included, but the effect is not limited to this. The effect mode may be set so as to suggest and notify the player of the number of winning lottery results included in the plurality of special figure 2 lottery. In this case, for example, as an effect mode of the second suggestion effect, it is a normal effect mode of the second suggestion effect that at least one winning prize is included in the plurality of special figure 2 lottery to be produced. It is also possible to set a special effect mode that can notify the player earlier than that, and to execute the hit number suggestion effect that suggests and notifies the player of the winning number in the special effect mode. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by promptly notifying the player that the winning is included, and to entertain the production that suggests how many winnings are included. can.

First, the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 360. FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 5 (C3113). This command determination process 5 (C3113) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example, is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and is executed in the main control device 110. This is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from.

In the command determination process 5, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the winning information command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (C3201). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (C3201: YES), the winning information command processing 5 is executed (C3202), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the winning information command processing 5 (C3202) will be described with reference to FIG. 361. FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 5 (C3202). The prize information command process 5 (C3202) is a process executed when a prize information command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, a process for storing the information included in the received prize information command in the corresponding area (reserved storage area corresponding to the prize information command) in the prize information storage area 223A provided in the RAM 223 is executed.

The information included in the winning information command includes information on the winning / failing judgment result, information on the stop type, information on the fluctuation pattern, and the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) to which the current winning information corresponds. The information is for the winning ball, but other information may be included. For example, the winning information about the ball that has already won the prize (the winning information command was received in the past) may be included. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, the main control device 110 is configured to set a winning information command for indicating a look-ahead result of a normal symbol (see FIG. 352). In the prize information storage area 223A, in addition to the area for storing the prize information of the special symbol, the prize information storage area of the ordinary symbol is also formed.

When the prize information command process 5 (C3202) is executed, first, the received prize information command information (look-ahead information) is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223A (C3401), and the prize status determination process (C3402) is performed. Execute. As described above, the prize information storage area 223A has a maximum of four prize information commands for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a maximum of four prize information commands for the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured to store up to 4 prize-winning commands for ordinary symbols, for a total of 12 prize-winning information commands, and the prize-winning information commands are stored in a designated storage area according to the order in which the prize-winning information commands are received. ..

Here, the winning status determination process (C3402) will be described with reference to FIG. 362. FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning status determination process (C3402). This winning status determination process (C3402) is a process executed in the winning information command process 5 (C3202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the winning information of the normal symbol (normal figure). It is determined that the game state at the time when the command is received is determined, a process for setting a different effect mode based on the determination result, and an appropriate game (left-handed game) is performed in the normal state. Is executed.

In the winning status determination process (C3402), first, it is determined whether or not there is a prize for the Fuzu (whether the winning information command received this time is a command corresponding to the Fuzu) (C3451). If it is determined that the prize is not a regular prize (C3451: NO), the process proceeds to the process of C3458 described later. If it is determined that the prize is a normal figure (C3451: YES), then the current gaming state is read from the state storage area 223EA provided in the RAM 223 (C3452), and it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state. (C3453). When it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal state (C3453: NO), that is, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the winning information command process 5.

On the other hand, in the process of C3453, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C3453: YES), then it is determined whether or not the first special symbol (special figure 1) is currently changing (C3454). ). Here, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation is currently in progress by determining whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation is larger than 0. When it is determined that the current is not during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (C3454: NO), the normal figure change is executed while the special figure 1 change is not executed during the normal state, so that the RAM 223 is used. The provided non-variable winning flag 223EF is set to ON (C3455), and the process proceeds to C3458.

By setting the non-variable winning flag 223EF to ON in the processing of C3455, it is possible to memorize that the winning information command of the normal figure was received during the normal state and during the special figure 1 non-variable state. By determining the setting status of the non-variable winning flag 223EF when the normal map fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the winning information command of the normal map is received, the special figure 1 at the time of winning the regular map (passing through the gate 67) It is possible to set different variation effect modes according to the variation situation.

In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 360, a process to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process 5 (C3113) of the voice lamp control device 113 (C3203 in FIG. 360). It is configured to execute the process (C3201, C3202 in FIG. 360) to be executed when the winning information command is received with priority over C3204).

Here, in the external output process (C1001 of FIG. 357) of the main process (see FIG. 357) of the main control device 110, the prize information command for the general figure prize and the variation pattern command for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). And, even if they are output in the same process, specifically, if a general map prize is generated while the normal map fluctuation is not executed, the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 (Fig.) The winning information command is set in the processing of C105 (see 343), and the variation pattern command is set in the processing of C104 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 343) executed next (after 2 milliseconds). .. Then, in the process (external output process) of C1001 of the main process (see FIG. 357) of the main control device 110 executed every 4 milliseconds, a command that can be output to the voice lamp control device 113 is output. Therefore, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt process and the execution timing of the main process, the winning information command for the general drawing prize and the fluctuation pattern command are output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same processing. There is.

In such a case, in the fifth control example, in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see C3113 in FIG. 360), the winning information command process 5 (C3202 in FIG. 361) and the variation pattern command process 5 (FIG. 361). Since the processing is executed in the order of C3204) of 363, even if the winning information command and the fluctuation pattern command are output at the same time from the main control unit 110, when the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation is set, it is non-variable. It can be used for discrimination without missing the setting status of the winning flag 223EF.

In the process of C3454, if it is determined that the current fluctuation of the special figure 1 is in progress (C3454: YES), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456). .. If it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not 30 seconds or more (C3456: NO), the process proceeds to C3458 processing.

In the process of C3456, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456: YES), a display command indicating a look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information is set (C3457), and then C3458. Move to the processing of.

When the process shifts to the processing of C3458, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is the winning information command corresponding to the first special symbol (special drawing 1) (C3458), and it is determined that it is the winning information command of special drawing 1. If it is (C3458: YES), then it is determined whether the non-variable winning flag 223EF is set to ON (C3459), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (C3459: YES), it is not. The variable time winning flag 223EF is set to off (C3460), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C3458, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information command of FIG. 1 (C3458: NO), it is determined whether the information indicating that the left-handed game is being performed is received. Determine (C3461). In the process of C3461, for example, it is determined whether or not the winning information indicating the winning of the ball to each winning opening (general winning opening 63) provided in the left gaming area of the game board 13 is received.

When it is determined that the left-handed game is detected in the processing of C3461 (C3461: YES), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned processing of C3459, and when it is determined that the left-handed game is not detected (C3461: NO), This process ends as it is.

As described above, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed at the time when the normal figure winning (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the non-variable winning flag 223EF is set to turn on to indicate that fact. In addition, when the non-variable winning flag 223EF is set to ON and information indicating that the special figure 1 winning or the left-handed game is being performed is received, the non-variable winning flag 223EF is set to off. It is configured to do.

And, although the details will be described later, when the normal figure long fluctuation is executed with the non-variable winning flag 223EF set to ON, the fluctuation effect (series effect) corresponding to the normal figure long variation is performed. It is configured not to be executed.

With this configuration, the game situation in which the normal state is set and the normal map fluctuation is executed without performing the left-handed game (through gate provided in the right-handed game area by the right-handed game). It is possible to determine the game situation in which the ball is passed through the 67, and in that case, it is possible not to execute the variation effect corresponding to the long variation of the normal map (the effect suggesting that the game is executed per the normal map). ..

Further, in the fifth control example, even when the left-handed game is properly executed, depending on the winning condition of the ball to the first winning opening 64, the special figure 1 is performed at the timing when the normal drawing prize is generated. Since the fluctuation may not be executed, the non-variable winning flag 223EF, which is set to be on at the time of winning a regular figure, can be set to off by a left-handed game. As a result, for example, the left-handed game is executed within a predetermined period from the winning of the Fuzu to the start of the Fuzu fluctuation, so that the variation effect corresponding to the Fuzu long fluctuation (the game per Fuzu is executed). It is possible to normally execute the effect) that suggests that it will be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the setting of an effect mode that is disadvantageous to the player who is performing an appropriate game.

As long as it is possible to determine that an appropriate game (left-handed game in a normal state) is being performed, the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the fifth control example described above, and for example, the rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is performed. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether the left-handed game is executed based on the resistance value (launch intensity) of the variable resistor that detects the amount or the rotation operation amount by the change of the electric resistance, or the game board 13 A detection means for detecting the passage of a ball is provided in a part of the left game area (upstream area where most of the balls flowing down the left game area pass), and the left-handed game is executed based on the detection result in the detection means. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not it is.

Further, in the fifth control example described above, a configuration for determining whether or not a left-handed game is being executed is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration for determining whether or not a right-handed game is being executed is used. When a predetermined normal map fluctuation (normal map long fluctuation) is executed while it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, a variation effect corresponding to the normal map long fluctuation (game per normal map) is executed. May be configured to limit the execution of the effect) that suggests that is executed. In this case, as a configuration for determining that the right-handed game is being executed, when it is detected that the ball has passed through a predetermined area (for example, through gate 67) provided in the right-handed game area. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a configuration that determines that a right-handed game is being executed, a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, or a rotation operation amount (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not the right-handed game is executed based on the resistance value (launch intensity).

Further, in the fifth control example, it is configured to determine whether or not the player is performing an appropriate game during the period from the winning of the normal map to the start of the fluctuation of the normal map. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a long period (discrimination target period) used for determining whether or not an appropriate game is being executed may be set. In this case, for example, a game status storage means capable of temporarily storing the game status is provided, and the game status (past history) of whether or not the player is performing a left-handed game is stored in the game status storage means. It is preferable to configure it so that at the timing of winning the Fuzu, it is determined whether or not the Fuzu is won during an appropriate game based on the game situation stored in the game situation storage means.

Further, as a winning information command (Fu-zu winning information command) set when a Fu-zu winning is won, a winning information command (left Fu-zu) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the left game area. The voice lamp control device 113 distinguishes between the winning information command) and the Fuzu winning information command (right Fuzu winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the right game area. It is possible to configure it, and based on the type of the received Fuzu winning information command and the game situation, the execution restriction of the variation effect (the effect that suggests that the game per Fuzu is executed) corresponding to the Fuzu long variation. May be configured to be variable.

Returning to FIG. 361, the explanation will be continued. It is determined whether or not there is special 2 hit information as the information (look-ahead information) included in the winning information command received this time (C3403). If it is determined that there is no special 2 hit information in the processing of C3403 (C3403: NO), the process proceeds to the processing of C3406. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is special 2 hit information (C3403: YES), then it is determined whether or not the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3404). If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is off (C3404: NO), the processing of C3405 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C3406.

If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is on in the processing of C3404 (C3404: YES), the information indicating the notification is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223A (C3405), and then the process proceeds to C3406. do.

In the process of C3406, an effect mode related to other winning information is set (C3406), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C3407), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process 5.

In this control example, the specific effect set at the beginning of the variation display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the variation) is set to another period (for example, the specific effect). It is stipulated that the effect shows that the jackpot expectation is higher than the specific effect) that is executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation. That is, it is stipulated that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is easier to select the fluctuation pattern in which the specific effect C can be executed.

As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuation displays, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player to win the jackpot in the fluctuations from the next time onward. Furthermore, it is possible to enthusiastically store the reservation of the special symbol so that the suggestion effect that straddles a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In this control example, as described above, the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing at which the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution) are used to straddle a plurality of variable displays. Is used to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, the suggestion effect is based on the timing at which the prize information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). It may be configured to execute a precursor effect as a suggestion effect and set a specific effect at the timing of starting the next variation display when it is determined whether or not to execute. , A specific effect is set based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 during the period in which the precursor effect is being executed (a specific effect that is the target of the suggestion effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Is also good. With this configuration, the suggestion effect is produced based on the game situation (the lottery result of the next variation, the variation pattern, or the operation content to the operation means (frame button 22)) after the suggestion effect is started. Aspects can be set. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased as compared with the configuration in which the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined in advance and then executed.

Further, in this control example, as an example of executing the suggestion effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays, the fluctuation display being executed and the fluctuation display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the fluctuation display are displayed. Although the suggestion effect used is explained, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of the variable display, the suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display that is executed one after another from the variable display that is being executed, or the variable display that is executed next time is executed one after another. The suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, it is determined whether to set the timing for executing the suggestion effect to the running variable display or the next variable display based on the timing when the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). It is good to provide a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113, and for example, a holding display area in which the number of reserved balls of a special symbol is displayed. In DN4, in order to suggest a hold display (holding symbol) corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot, a holding change notice effect for changing the display mode of the holding display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating the jackpot is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous notice effect that expects a big hit as an effect of a special symbol whose fluctuation starts before.

Further, in the fifth control example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot is referred to, and the winning information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. It is configured to determine whether or not it is (whether or not there is a villa on hold), and to set the effect during the big hit game or after the big hit is finished based on the judgment result. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the probability change state, the effect content is selected based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223A.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, when the effect (look-ahead effect) referring to the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223A is executed, a flag indicating that fact (pre-reading effect) For example, if the look-ahead effecting flag) is set to on and the look-ahead effecting flag is set to on, when a new winning information command is received, the winning information included in the winning information command is included. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without a gap and give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, a control other than the above-mentioned contents for solving the above-mentioned problem may be used. For example, a priority rank is given to a plurality of look-ahead effects set based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A. A look-ahead effect with a high priority rank is compared with the priority rank of the look-ahead effect that is given and currently executed and the priority rank of the look-ahead effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command. May be controlled to execute. In this case, if it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead effect is higher, the look-ahead effect switching notification for notifying the player that the pre-reading effect being executed ends in the middle is executed. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the pre-reading effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the initially set end timing. You may.

In addition, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, the higher the priority rank so that the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest. It is good to set so that is high. As a result, when the pre-reading effect being executed ends in the middle, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot, and the new pre-reading effect to be executed next can be watched.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of C3201 that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: NO), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3203). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (C3203: YES), the variation pattern command process 5 is executed (C3204), and then the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted in the variation pattern command process 5 is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to in the variation display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) described later in order to determine a detailed display mode of the variation pattern. .. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Further, in the fifth control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set a fluctuation pattern for a special symbol (special symbol) and a fluctuation pattern for a normal symbol (normal symbol). It is determined whether the received fluctuation pattern command is for a special figure or a normal figure, and processing based on the determination result is also executed.

Here, the variation pattern command process 5 (C3204) will be described with reference to FIG. 363. FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern command process 5 (C3204). This variation pattern command process 5 (C3204) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Is.

In the variation pattern command process 5 (C3204), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is not the special figure variation pattern command (C3301: NO), the processing of C3302 and C3303 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of C3304. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is the special figure fluctuation pattern command (C3301: YES), the fluctuation start flag 223D for the special figure provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3301: YES). C3302), the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command for special figure (C3303), and then the process proceeds to C3304.

In the process of C3304, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is a variation pattern command for normal drawing (C3304). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is not a variation pattern command for normal drawing (C3304: NO), the processes of C3305 and C3306 are skipped, and the process returns to the command determination process 5.

On the other hand, in the process of C3304, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a fluctuation pattern command for normal drawing (C3304: YES), the fluctuation start flag 223D for normal drawing provided in RAM 223 is provided. Is set to on (C3305), a variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command for normal drawing (C3306), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process 5.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3203, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (C3203: NO), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3205). Then, when the stop type command is received (C3205: YES), the stop type selection flag 223E of the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3206), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (C3207), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C3205 that the stop type command has not been received (C3205: NO), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3208). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (C3208: YES), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is extracted. The value included in the hold ball number command received from the special symbol hold ball number counter or the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F of the normal symbol is stored (C3209), and then the process returns to the main process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, from the received reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main controller 110 is used. The value (the number of holdings N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223B provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main controller 110 (special) from the received reserved ball number command. The number of holdings N2) of the variation display in the symbol 2 is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223C provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of C3208, if it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (C3208: NO), then it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received (C3210), and if a hit-related command has been received, it is determined. (C3210: YES), the hit-related command process 5 (C3211) is executed, and after the hit-related command process 5 (C3211) is completed, this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the hit-related command process 5 (C3211) will be described with reference to FIG. 364. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command process 5 (C3211). The hit-related command process 5 (C3211) is a process executed in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the hit-related command process 5, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3501). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (C3501: YES), the jackpot-related command process is executed (C3502), and then the process proceeds to C3503.

Here, the contents of the jackpot-related command processing (C3502) will be described with reference to FIG. 365. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command processing (C3502). The jackpot-related command process (C3502) is a process executed in the hit-related command process 5 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the jackpot-related command processing (C3502), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3601). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (C3601: YES), the opening command processing for display is executed (C3602), and then the process proceeds to the processing of C3608.

The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of C3601, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C3601: NO), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (C3603). Here, when the round number command is received (C3603: YES), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (C3604), and then the display round number command according to the round number extracted this time is set. (C3605), and then the process proceeds to C3608. The display round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, when the jackpot game is executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the round game executed in the previous jackpot game is performed. The number is configured to accumulate and display the number of round games of the jackpot game executed this time. Specifically, a period flag is set for a period in which the time saving state is set and a period in which the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed after the time saving state is changed to the normal state. Then, when the jackpot game is started, it is determined whether the period flag is set to on, and if it is determined that the period flag is set to on, the number of round games executed in the previous jackpot game is determined. The number of rounds of this jackpot game is cumulatively displayed in (number of rounds).

On the other hand, in the process of C3603, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (C3603: NO), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3606). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (C3606: YES), the display ending command is set (C3607), and then the process proceeds to C3608. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the processing of C3606 (C3606: NO), the process proceeds to the processing of C3608. In the processing of C3608, processing corresponding to other commands is executed (C3608), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing 5.

Returning to FIG. 364, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3501, when it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3501: NO), then it is determined whether or not the small hit related command has been received from the main controller 110. (C3503). Then, when it is determined that the small hit related command has been received (C3503: YES), the small hit related command process is executed (C3504), and then the process proceeds to the C3505 process.

Here, the contents of the small hit-related command processing (C3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 366 (A). FIG. 366 (A) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504). The small hit-related command process (C3504) is a process executed in the hit-related command process 5 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the small hit-related command processing (C3504), first, it is determined whether or not the series production flag 223EB provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3701). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is off (not on) (C3701: NO), the normal small hit process is executed (C3702), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the hit-related command process 5. ..

As described above, in the fifth control example, the effect mode when the small hit game is executed is configured to be variably set according to whether or not the small hit game execution timing is in a series of effects. .. That is, when the small hit game is executed during the series of effects, the small hit game effect (see FIG. 324) is configured to be executed as a part of the series of effects. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Here, the contents of the normal small hit process (C3702) will be described with reference to FIG. 366 (B). FIG. 366 (B) is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal small hit process (C3702). The normal small hit process (C3702) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the normal small hit process (C3702), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3801). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (C3801: YES), the small hit start command for display is set (C3802), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

If it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received in the processing of C3801 (C3801: NO), then it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3803). .. When it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (C3803: YES), the small hit end command for display is set (C3804), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

In the process of C3803, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (C3803: NO), then it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3805). When it is determined that the V-pass command has been received (C3805: YES), the display V-pass command is set (C3806), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit-related command process.

Returning to FIG. 366 (A), the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of C3701 that the series effect flag 223EB is on (C3701: YES), the small hit game this time is a small hit game executed during the series effect, so the small hit process for the series effect is performed. It is executed (C3703), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the hit-related command process 5.

Here, the contents of the series of small hit processing for production (C3703) will be described with reference to FIG. 367. FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series of small hit processing for production (C3703). The small hit process for a series of effects (C3703) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the small hit process for a series of effects (C3703), first, it is determined whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3901). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (C3901: YES), the series production hit start command is set (C3902), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

In the process of C3901 when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (C3901: NO), it is then determined whether or not the V passage command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3903). When it is determined that the V-pass command has been received (C3903: YES), then it is determined whether or not the small hit caution flag 223EE provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3904). If it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223EE is off (C3904: NO), a V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3905), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

Here, the small hit caution flag 223EE allows the ball to pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A even after a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed even though the small hit game is being executed. A flag that is set on if it is not present. In this fifth control example, since the game board 13 is configured so that the period required for the ball fired by performing the right-handed game to reach the V winning device 650 is about 1 second, a small hit. When a right-handed game is performed based on the fact that the game has been executed, the small hit caution flag 223EE is configured not to be set to ON.

On the other hand, if the player is playing a left-handed game without noticing that the small hit game is being executed, or if the number of balls to be fired during the small hit game is intentionally reduced (including 0), an inappropriate game is performed. If so, the small hit caution flag 223EE may be turned on because the ball may not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A 3 seconds after the start of the small hit game. It will be easier to set. When this small hit caution flag 223EE is set to ON, the highlight guidance display (see FIG. 325 (A)) for causing the player to perform a right-handed game is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Will be done. Further, even when the ball passes through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A, different display modes are set depending on whether the small hit caution flag 223EE is set to on or off. For example, if a V-pass command is received while the small hit caution flag 223EE is set to ON, a guidance effect is provided to promptly perform a right-handed game in the next small hit game. Is executed.

If it is determined in the processing of C3904 that the small hit caution flag 223EE is on (C3904: YES), a special V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3906), and then this process is terminated and the small hit is completed. Return to related command processing. The special V effect command for displaying a series of effects set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the special V effect command for displaying a series of effects, the display control device 114 indicates that the timing at which the ball passed V in this small hit game was delayed as part of the series of effects in the third symbol display device 81. The V effect including the effect mode (for example, the comment "Let's hit right from earlier next time") is started.

On the other hand, in the process of C3903, when it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (C3903: NO), then it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3907). ). If it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (C3907: YES), then it is determined whether or not there is a V passage (C3908), and if it is determined that there is a V passage (C3908: YES), a series of effects is produced. The small hit end command for display is set (C3909), then the small hit caution flag 223EE is set to off (C3912), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the small hit related command processing.

On the other hand, in the process of C3908, when it is determined that there is no V passage (C3908: NO), a display command indicating the end of the series effect is set (C3910), and the series effect flag 223EB is set to off (C3911). The small hit caution flag 223EE is set to off (C3912), and then this processing is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command processing.

That is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area in the small hit game during the series of effects, the effect result indicating the occurrence of the big hit game cannot be displayed as the effect result of the series of effects, so that the series of effects ends ( An effect mode (see FIG. 325 (B)) indicating failure) is set. Further, even when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received in the processing of C3907 (C3907: NO), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 364, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3503, if it is determined that the small hit-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3503: NO), then whether or not the command related to the normal figure has been received from the main controller 110 is determined. Determine (C3505). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the normal figure has been received (C3505: YES), the display command corresponding to the command related to the normal figure is set (C3506), and then this process is terminated and the command is determined. Return to process 5.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. In the process of C3210, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3210: NO), then it is determined whether the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3212). If it is determined that a status command has been received (C3212: YES), the current game status is extracted from the received command and stored in the status storage area 223EA (C3213), and a status command for display is set (C3214). After that, this process is terminated.

In the process of C3213, when the state specification command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the above-mentioned main control device 110 with reference to FIG. 137 in the above-mentioned first control example is received. Is executed separately from the current game state to store the game state set after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, the state command indicating the current game state and the state specification command indicating the game state (planned game state) set when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the jackpot is completed) are separated. Can be remembered. In addition, after the jackpot ends, a state command indicating the current game state will be received, and at that time, the contents of the state command indicating the current game state and the contents of the state specification command indicating the planned game state It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the commands match, and to use a configuration for discriminating whether or not the game state is properly set based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means. As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is illegally set to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In the processing of C3212, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (C3212: NO), then it is determined whether the stop command has been received (C3215), and if the stop command has been received (C3215: YES). ), The stop command process 5 (C3216) is executed, and after the stop command process 5 is completed, this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the stop command process 5 (C3216) will be described with reference to FIG. 368. FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 5 (C3216). The stop command process 5 (C3216) is a process executed in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In the stop command processing 5, it is first determined whether or not the special figure stop command has been received (C3951), and if it is determined that the special figure stop command has been received (C3951: YES), then the special figure fluctuation time counter. The value of 223EG is reset to 0 (C3952), and it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is set to ON (C3953).

If it is determined in the processing of C3953 that the pseudo-series effect flag 223EC is set to ON (C3953: YES), the stop command received this time executes a series of effects as a variation effect of the out-of-specification fluctuation. Since it is a fluctuation, the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is set to off (C3954), and the process proceeds to S3955. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C3953 that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is not set to ON (C3953: NO), the processing of C3954 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C3955.

In the processing of C3955, it is determined whether the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is set to ON (C3955), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (C3955: YES), the read-ahead flag is set to ON (C3956). ), Set the time saving final fluctuation flag to off (C3957), and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of C3955, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is not set to ON (C3955: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of C3215 that the stop command has not been received from the main control device 110 (C3215: NO), the processing corresponding to the received command is executed (C3217), and this processing is terminated. .. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By this process, it is possible to set a command for making various settings to the display control device 114 based on the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, the variation display setting process 5 (C3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 369. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 5 (C3114). This variation display setting process 5 (C3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example, and the variation effect is produced in the third symbol display device 81. Is generated and set as a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

The variation display setting process 5 (C3114) of the fifth control example sets a variation pattern command for displaying a normal symbol for each control example described above or the variation display setting process used in each embodiment. There is a big difference between the point configured as described above and the point that the content of the set variable effect is changed, and the other elements (technical ideas) are the same. The detailed description of the same element (technical idea) as the variable display setting process used in each of the above-mentioned control examples or each embodiment will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 5 (C3114), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4001). In the processing of C4001, either the variation start flag 223D for special figures or the variation start flag 223D for normal drawings in the processing of C3302 and C3305 of the variation pattern command process 5 (see C3204 in FIG. 363) described above. Determines if is set to on.

Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is not on (that is, the fluctuation start flag 223D for the special figure and the fluctuation start flag 223D for the normal figure are both off), the main control is performed (C4001: NO). Since the variation pattern command has not been received from the device 110, the process proceeds to C4006. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223D is on (C4001: YES), the corresponding variation start flag 223D is set to off (C4002), and then C3303 of the variation pattern command process 5 (see FIG. 363). And in the process of C3306, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4003), and the variation effect setting process is executed (C4004). The details of the variable effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 370.

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type and the variation pattern set in the variation effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 370), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is generated. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (C4005). After that, the process proceeds to C4006. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

In the process of C4006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223E provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4006). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is not on (that is, it is off) (C4006: NO), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. End the setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is on (C4006: YES), the corresponding stop type selection flag 223E is turned off (C4007), and then in the command determination process 5 (C3207 in FIG. 360). , The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (C4009), and the process proceeds to C4010. In the process of C4010, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (C4010). After that, this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 370, the variation effect setting process (C4004) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing this variation effect setting process (C4004). This variation effect setting process (C4004) is a process executed in the variation display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a variation effect mode of the special symbol. Alternatively, a process for setting a variation effect mode of a normal symbol is executed.

In the variation effect setting process (C4004), first, it is determined whether or not the variation effect setting process of this time sets the variation effect of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) (C4101). In the processing of C4101, when it is determined in the processing of C4001 of the variation display setting process 5 (see C3114 of FIG. 369) that the variation start flag 223D for special figures is set to ON, the variation effect setting process of this time is performed. Is determined to set the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation. Here, if it is determined that the special map variation effect is not set (the normal map variation effect is set) (C4101: NO), the normal map effect setting process is executed (C4117), and then this process is terminated. .. The details of the effect setting process for the normal figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 371, but the normal figure change executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. The process for setting the effect mode of the variation effect based on the above is executed.

In the process of C4101, when it is determined that the special figure variation effect is set (C4101: YES), the information indicating the game state stored in the state storage area 223EA is read out (C4102), and the current game state is the normal state. It is determined whether or not there is (C4103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (time saving state) (C4103: NO), the time saving effect setting process is executed (C4104), and then the process proceeds to C4116. The time saving effect setting process (C4104) is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the time saving state. The time saving effect setting process (C4104) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 372.

On the other hand, in the process of C4103, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C4103: YES), it is determined whether the read-ahead flag 223EM is set to ON (C4105), and the read-ahead flag 223EM is turned on. When it is determined that the setting is made (C4105: YES), that is, the variation effect this time is a variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation of the first rotation after the time reduction state ends, and the time reduction state is in progress. If there is a special figure 2 hold for which the look-ahead result is not reflected in the time-saving final change effect executed in the time-saving final change, the prize is stored in the prize information storage area 223A. From the information (winning information corresponding to special figure 2), the winning information (winning information corresponding to special drawing 2) for which the look-ahead processing has not been executed is extracted (C4106), and the winning information is included in the extracted winning information. It is determined whether or not there is winning information including (C4107).

In the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is winning information including winning information (C4107: YES), a display command for replacing the result display mode of the time saving variation effect with the revival winning display mode is set (C4108). , The re-read-ahead flag 223EM is set to off (C4109), and the process proceeds to C4110. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C4105 that the read-ahead flag 223EM is not set to ON (C4105: NO), the current variation effect setting process is executed at the timing of changing the result display mode of the time reduction effect. Since the processing is not performed, the processing of C4106 to C4109 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of C4110. Further, in the processing of C4107, if it is determined that there is no winning information including the winning information in the extracted winning information (C4107: NO), the current variation effect setting process changes the result display mode of the time saving effect. Although it is the timing to make it, since the condition for changing the result display mode (including the hit of the new look-ahead result) is not satisfied, the processing of C4108 is skipped, the processing of C4109 is executed, and the processing of C4110 is executed. Move to.

In the processing of C4110, it is determined whether or not the present is within the extended display period of the time saving variation effect executed during the time saving state (C4110), and the game result within the extended display period, that is, during the time saving state is displayed. If it is determined that the end screen (see FIG. 331) is displayed (C4110: YES), the present process is terminated without setting the variation effect corresponding to the variation. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the extended display period (C4110: NO), then, based on the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of C4003 in FIG. 369, is the current fluctuation pattern a hit fluctuation pattern? Is determined (C4111).

In the process of C4111, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a hit variation pattern (C4111: YES), the hit variation effect setting process is executed (C4112), and then the process proceeds to the C4116 process. In this hit variation effect setting process (C4112), a process of determining whether or not to execute a series of effects as the special figure variation effect this time, and a series of effects when the series effect is executed as a normal figure variation effect, the series of effects The production result is replaced and the process is executed. The hit variation effect setting process (C4112) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 373.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4111, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a hit variation pattern (C4111: NO), then it is determined whether or not the series production flag 223EB is on (C4113). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is on (C4113: YES), the process proceeds to C4116.

In the process of C4113, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is off (C4113: NO), it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series effect based on the extracted variation pattern (C4113: NO). C4114). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the series of effects (C4114: NO), the process proceeds to C4116.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4114, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of this time is the fluctuation pattern of the series of effects (C4114: YES), the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is set to ON (C4115), and then the process of C4116 is performed. Transition.

In the process of C4116, the special figure variation time counter 223EG is set (C4116), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the variation display setting process 5.

Next, with reference to FIG. 371, the effect setting process (C4117) for normal drawing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 371 is a flowchart showing this effect setting process for normal drawing (C4117). This effect setting process for normal drawing (C4117) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect based on the variation of the normal map is executed. The process for setting (series of effects) is executed.

In the effect setting process for normal drawing (C4117), first, the current game state is read from the state storage area 223EA provided in the RAM 223 (C4201), and it is determined whether or not the read current game information is the normal state. (C4202). If it is determined that the current game information is not in the normal state (C4202: NO), this process is then terminated.

In the process of C4202, if it is determined that the current game information is in the normal state (C4202: YES), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (C4203: NO), the present process is terminated thereafter. If it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203: YES), then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223EB is on (C4204).

If it is determined in the process of C4204 that the series effect flag 223EB is on (C4204: YES), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the series production flag 223EB is off (C4204: NO), then it is determined whether or not the non-variable winning flag 223EF is on (C4205), and the non-variable winning flag 223EF is determined. When it is determined that is off (C4205: NO), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is on (C4206). When it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is off (C4206: NO), the series effect is set (C4207), the series effect flag 223EB is set on (C4208), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of C4206, when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is on (C4206: YES), a normal map variation pattern corresponding to the remaining period of the special map variation time is set (C4209), and then this process is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, in the process of C4205, when it is determined that the non-variable winning flag 223EF is on (C4205: YES), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure variation time counter 223EG is larger than 0 (C4210). ), When it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is not larger than 0 (0) (C4210: NO), when the normal figure fluctuation is executed while the special figure fluctuation is not executed. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is without setting the normal map fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal map variation.

In the fifth control example, the normal map fluctuation effect is not set when the special map variation is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the normal map variation effect is defined as normal. May be configured to execute the normal map fluctuation effect to be executed at different timings, and based on the executed normal map fluctuation effect, the electric accessory 640A is opened for a long time according to the lottery result of this normal map lottery. The timing may be configured so that it is difficult for the player to easily determine the timing.

In the processing of C4210, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is larger than 0 (C4210: YES), a special series effect is set (C4211), and the series effect flag 223EB is set to ON (C4212). ), After that, this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the fluctuation time of the normal map is a predetermined time (30 seconds) or more, it is based on the execution status of the series of effects and the status of the special map fluctuation during execution. It is configured to set the normal map fluctuation effect (normal map effect). With this configuration, when an effect that makes it easy to notify the lottery result that is advantageous to the player is executed as a special figure variation effect for displaying the lottery result of the special figure variation, the normal figure effect is the effect. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the special figure fluctuation effect is hindered, and it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 372, a time saving effect setting process (C4104) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing this time saving effect setting process (C4104). This time saving effect setting process (C4104) is executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the time saving effect setting process (C4104), first, it is determined whether or not the current special figure change is the change of the special figure 2 (C4301). If it is determined that the change in the special figure this time is not the change in the special figure 2 (C4301: NO), the present process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the current special figure change is the change of the special figure 2 (C4301: YES), then it is determined whether or not the current special figure change is the short-time final change (C4302). If it is determined that the special figure change this time is not the final change in time reduction (C4302: NO), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure change this time is the time saving final change (C4302: YES), the time saving final change flag 223ED is set to ON (C4303), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read out. (C4304), a variation pattern of the final variation is set based on the lottery result of the variation and the lottery result included in the winning information (C4305), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373, the hit variation effect setting process (C4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing this hit variation effect setting process (C4112). This hit variation effect setting process (C4112) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hit variation effect setting process (C4112), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223EB is on (C4401). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is off (C4401: NO), then it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series effect (C4402). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the series of effects (C4402: NO), the present process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4402: YES), the series effect flag 223EB is set to ON (C4403), and then this process is set.

On the other hand, in the process of C4401, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is on (C4401: YES), the fluctuation stop timing and the series effect branch timing are analyzed (C4404), and then the result can be replaced. It is determined whether or not there is (C4405). If it is determined that the result cannot be replaced (C4405: NO), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the result can be replaced (C4405: YES), a display replacement command indicating a variation pattern for replacing the effect result of the series of effects is set (C4406), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the effect update process 5 (C3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 374. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 5 (C3112). This effect update process 5 (C3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example, and the elapsed time regardless of the change of the special symbol. It is a process for setting an effect controlled based on.

When the effect update process 5 (C3112) is executed, first, the values of various fluctuation time counters are updated (C4501), and then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223EB is on (C4502). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is off (C4502: NO), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is on (C4504). If it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is off (C4504: NO), the process proceeds to C4505.

In the process of C4502, when it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is on (C4502: YES), and in the process of C4504, when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is on (C4504: YES), a series is performed. The effect update process is executed (C4503), and then the process proceeds to the C4505 process. Further, the details of the series of effect update processing will be described later with reference to the processing of FIG. 375.

In the processing of C4505, it is determined whether or not the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is on (C4505). If it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is on (C4505: YES), the final variation effect update process is executed (C4506), and the process proceeds to the process of C4507.

On the other hand, in the process of C4505, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is on (C4505: YES), another effect update process is executed (C4507), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 375, a series of effect update processes (C4503) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 375 is a flowchart showing this series of effect update processing (C4503). This series of effect update process (C4503) is executed in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 374) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the series effect update process (C4503), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: NO), the value of the series effect counter is updated (C4603), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0. (C4604). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: NO), the process proceeds to C4605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4604: YES), the series effect flag 223EB is set to ON (C4612), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4601, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601: YES), a value corresponding to the current series effect is set in the series effect counter (C4602), and the process of C4605 is started. Transition.

In the process of C4605, it is determined whether or not the game is currently being played per normal figure (C4605). If it is determined that the current game is being played per game (C4605: YES), the update process during the game per game is executed (C4606), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4605, if it is determined that the game is not currently being played per game (C4605: NO), then it is determined whether or not the game per game is completed (C4607). It is determined whether or not the game is completed per normal figure (C4607). If it is determined that the game per normal figure has not been completed (C4607: NO), the process proceeds to C4609. When it is determined that the game per normal figure is completed (C4607: YES), then it is determined whether or not the special 2 winning flag is on (C4608). If it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is off (C4608: NO), the series production flag 223EB is set to on (C4612), and then this process is terminated. If it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is on in the processing of C4608 (C4608: YES), the process proceeds to the processing of C4609.

In the process of C4609, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in a small hit (C4609). If it is determined that the current small hit game is in progress (C4609: YES), the small hit in-game update process is executed (C4610), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4609, if it is determined that the current small hit game is not in progress (C4609: NO), a display command corresponding to the value of the series production counter is set (C4611), and then this processing is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 376, the contents of the game-per-game update process (C4606) executed in the series of effect update processes (see C4503 in FIG. 375) will be described. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of the in-game update process (C4606) per normal map. In this game-per-game update process (C4606), the player is alerted when the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 for a predetermined period even though the game is being played per game. The process to do is executed.

When the in-game update process (C4606) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 (C4701), and it is determined that the ball has not won in the second winning opening 640. If this is the case (C4701: NO), then it is determined whether or not one second has passed from the start of the game per normal figure (C4702). Here, if it is determined that 1 second has elapsed (C4702: YES), a display alert command is set (C4703), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4702, if it is determined that it is not the timing when one second has elapsed from the start of the game per game (C4702: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, when the display alert command is set in the process of C4703, the alert screen for making the second winning opening 640 win the ball by the end of the game per normal figure (see FIG. 324 (A)). ) Is displayed. In this control example, as a game per game, when the game per game long opening is executed, the electric accessory 640A is opened for 1 second, and after a closing period of 1.5 seconds, it is 0.5 again. It is configured so that a game per game that opens the electric accessory 640A for a second is executed. Then, the caution screen shown in FIG. 324 (A) is displayed one second after the start of the game per normal figure. With this configuration, when a player who sees the alert screen plays a right-handed game, the ball fired by the right-handed game can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

On the other hand, in the process of C4701 when it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 (C4701: YES), a display command for indicating the special 2 winning is set (C4701: YES). C4704), the special 2 winning flag 223ER is set to ON (C4705), and this process is terminated. Here, when a display command is set in the process of C4704, a display mode for notifying the special 2 prize is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the special 2 prize has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the contents of the small hit in-game update process (C4610) will be described with reference to FIG. 376 (B). FIG. 376 (B) is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (C4610) during the small hit game. In this small hit game renewal process (C4610), it is determined whether the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game, and a predetermined period (3 seconds) has been set since the small hit game was started. When the ball has not passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A even though the lapse has passed, a process for alerting the player is executed.

When the small hit game update process (C4610) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit caution flag 223EE is set to ON (C4751), and it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223EE is not set to ON. If so (C4751: NO), then it is determined whether 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game (C4752). If it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the small hit game (C4752: YES), it is determined whether the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning opening 650A (C4753), and the ball has not passed. When it is determined that (C4753: NO), the small hit caution flag 223EE is set to ON (C4754), a display alert command is set (C4755), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223EE is already set to ON in the processing of C4751 (C4751: YES), it is determined that 3 seconds have not passed from the start of the small hit game in the processing of C4752. If it is determined that the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning opening 650A in the processing of C4753 (C4752: NO) (C4753: YES), the processing of C4754 and C4755 is skipped and this processing is performed. finish.

Next, the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506) will be described with reference to FIG. 377. FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506). In this final variation effect update process (C4506), a process for setting a variation effect corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state is executed. As described above, in this control example, as the variation effect during the time saving state, in addition to the first suggestion effect that suggests only the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, and the special figure. The second suggestion effect that suggests the pre-reading result of the two hold is configured to be feasible, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executed in the final change in the time saving state.

Further, in the final fluctuation of the time saving state in this control example, there is also a hold acquisition effect for encouraging the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit value (4 pieces) during the period when the time saving state is set. It is configured to be feasible, and the hold acquisition effect is executed in the first half period of the change period of the final change, and the second suggestion effect (time saving final change effect) is executed in the second half period. Then, the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired at the end timing of the first half period is reflected in the effect result of the second suggestion effect.

With this configuration, after the player has acquired many special figure 2 holds, the second suggestion effect (time saving final variation effect) that reflects the pre-reading result for the acquired special figure 2 hold is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily set an effect mode indicating winning as an effect mode of the time-saving final variation effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, if the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit (4) at the timing until the hold acquisition effect is executed (the start timing of the first half period), the hold acquisition effect is executed. It is configured to execute the second suggestion effect from the first half period without letting it. As a result, a useless effect for the player, that is, a hold acquisition effect for acquiring the special figure 2 hold even though the number of special figure 2 hold balls has already reached the upper limit is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the production. Further, by executing the second suggestion effect from the first half period, the effect period of the second suggestion effect can be lengthened, so that the second suggestion effect more interesting can be executed. Then, since the player can be enthusiastically played a game (right-handed game) in order to execute the second suggestion effect rich in interest, the operation of the game can be improved.

The final variation effect update process (C4506 in FIG. 377) described with reference to FIG. 377 corresponds to the final variation in the time-saving state updated by the process of C4501 in the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374). The elapsed period of the final variation effect (special figure 2 variation elapsed period) to be executed is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed. When executed in the final variation effect update process (C4506), first, it is determined whether the current timing is the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined to be the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: YES). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C) is the upper limit value "4" (C4802).

In the processing of C4802, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "4" (C4802: YES), the holding upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON (C4803), and this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of C4802, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not "4", that is, "3" or less (C4802: NO), the holding upper limit flag 223EN is not set to ON. This process ends.

In the processing of C4801, if it is determined that the current time is not the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: NO), then it is determined whether the current time is the first period start timing (C4804), and the first period start timing is used. When it is determined that there is (C4804: YES), it is determined whether the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON (C4805), and when it is determined that it is set to ON, that is, at the start timing of the first period. Special Figure 2 When it is determined that the predetermined number (4) of the reserved balls is secured (C4805: YES), the time reduction effect using the first period and the second period as the time reduction final variation effect. (C4806), the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to off, the executed flag 223EQ is set to on (C4808), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C4805 that the hold upper limit flag 223EN is not set to ON (C4805: NO), a hold ball number acquisition effect for acquiring the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit value (4) is performed. The display effect command to be shown is set (C4809), and this process is terminated as it is. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode of the effect executed during the first period according to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the time when the waiting period elapses, and to provide the player with various effects. can do.

In the processing of C4804, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the first period (C4804: NO), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the second period (C4810), and the second period is started. When it is determined that it is the start timing (C4810: YES), it is determined whether the executed flag 223EQ is set to ON (C4811).

Here, when it is determined that the executed flag 223EQ is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the second period is set at the start timing of the first period. (C4811: YES), since it is not necessary to newly set the effect mode, the executed flag 223EQ is set to off (C4812), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C4811 that the executed flag 223EQ is not set to ON (C4811: NO), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read out (C4813), and the change is made. A display effect command indicating a time saving effect effect based on the lottery result (hit determination result), the pre-reading result (preliminary determination result) included in the read winning information, and the display effect command (C4814) are set, and this process is terminated.

In this way, the effect mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold is not the execution timing of the time reduction final variation but the timing after the lapse of a predetermined time after the execution of the time reduction final variation (the timing when the second period is set). By setting, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C) subtracted when executing the fluctuation is re-added to the look-ahead result of special figure 2 hold. Based on the effect mode can be set. Therefore, since the number of pre-reading special figure 2 hold can be increased, it is possible to easily display the effect result indicating a hit in the effect (time saving final variation effect) executed during the second period. The production effect can be enhanced.

In the process of C4810, when it is determined that the present is not the start timing of the second period (C4810: NO), then it is determined whether the present is the end timing of the second period (C4815). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4815: YES), it is determined whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4816), and whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired is determined. If it is determined (C4816: YES), the read-ahead flag 223EM is set to ON (C4817), and this process is terminated.

Here, to explain the content of the process executed by C4816, a storage area corresponding to each symbol hold is formed in the winning information storage area 223A, and in this control example, the first special symbol (special symbol) is formed. The number of the storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the storage area for the normal symbol (normal figure) correspond to the upper limit reserved storage number (4 pieces) of each symbol. It is formed. Then, each storage area has been referenced to indicate whether or not the look-ahead information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 and the look-ahead result have been referred to when various effects are set by the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the processing of C4816, whether or not a new special 2 holding is stored in the winning information storage area 223A in addition to the special figure 2 holding (special 2 holding) referred to by the processing of C4806 or C4814 is stored in each storage area. It is determined based on the presence or absence of the stored referenced information, and the look-ahead information is described and referenced in the storage areas (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special 2 hold) of the prize information storage area 223A. When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-look-ahead flag 223EM to ON in the processing of C4817, the special figure 2 is held again as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure change (the first special figure change after the end of the reduced working hours). The variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4816, when it is determined that there is no new special 2 hold (C4816: NO), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 hold is pre-read, and the second effect mode is based on the pre-read result. Since this is the case when the time reduction final variation effect is being executed during the period, a display effect result command indicating the result of the time reduction variation effect is set (C4818), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of C4815 that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4815: NO), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4819), and this process is terminated. In the processing of C4819, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation. The update setting of the above, the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player during the final change, and the like are executed.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 378 to 385. In the fifth control example described above, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored up to four, and the special figure 2 hold is stored when the time saving state ends and the normal state is entered. For (maximum 4 pieces), the special figure 2 lottery was configured to be executed with the lottery probability in the normal state.

Further, the above-mentioned fifth control example is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is more likely to have a lottery result advantageous to the player than the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. At the end of the game, the game was enthusiastically played in an attempt to obtain many special figure 2 holds.

In the above-mentioned fifth control example, the maximum number of special figure 2 holds can be easily obtained only by continuously performing the right-handed game during the final fluctuation of the time saving state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. However, it was not possible to make a difference in the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed after the end of the time saving state, and further technical improvement was required.

On the other hand, in the sixth control example, the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set to "1", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state is short. The period in which the time can be easily selected can be set according to the type of the time saving state and the number of special map fluctuations during the time saving state, and further, the winning game period is set as the game per normal figure executed during the time saving state. It is configured so that multiple types of long open games can be set. Further, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the end of the time saving state, a state in which a short-time fluctuation (0.1 second fluctuation) can be easily set can be set.

With this configuration, the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed after the end of the time saving state (after the normal state is set) can be made different depending on how various game conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player what kind of game condition is satisfied at the end of the time saving state.

First, with reference to FIG. 378, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 378 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example is different from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above in that the configuration of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed. Is different, and the others are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 378, in the sixth control example, the second winning opening 640 is in a closed state where it is difficult for the ball to win (indicated by the solid line in FIG. 378) and an open state in which it is easy to win (indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 378). And, a variable electric accessory 640A is provided. The electric accessory 640A facilitates winning a plurality of balls into the second winning opening 640 when the electric accessory 640A (see FIG. 315) of the fifth control example described above is in the open state. It is configured in. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the period from passing through the electric accessory 640A in the open state to winning the prize in the second winning opening 640 is configured to be different depending on the flow condition of the ball. For example, a ball that flows down along a structure having a second winning opening 640 and reaches the vicinity of the base of the electric accessory 640A (the structure side having the second winning opening 640), and a tip portion of the electric accessory 640A (second). A ball that has reached the vicinity of the structure having the winning opening 640), and the ball flowing period required from being located in a flowing position where the second winning opening 640 can be won to winning the second winning opening 640. The difference between the two is larger than 0.1 seconds.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the ball win the second winning opening 640 by providing a time difference of 0.1 seconds or more during the game per game in which the electric accessory 640A is positioned in the open state. can. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation when the normal state is set as the gaming state is configured so that the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds at the shortest is set. There is.

That is, in this control example, the special figure 2 variation can be executed in a shorter variation time than the generation time lag of the plurality of winning balls during one game per normal map. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during one game per game, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the special drawing 2 lottery for the number of times according to the number of winnings.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 378, a time lag of a winning ball is generated depending on which part of the electric accessory 640A the ball reaches with respect to the electric accessory 640A located in the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of openings (first opening, second opening) communicating with the second winning opening 640 are provided, and the ball flowing into each opening is the second winning opening 640. It is configured so that the period until reaching is different by at least 0.1 seconds or more, and further, it is configured to execute a game per game that opens each opening in one game per game. Is also good.

With this configuration, the period until the ball that has passed through the first opening and the ball that has passed through the second opening reach the second winning opening 640 during the game per game at approximately the same timing. Since it is possible to make the numbers different, it is possible to more reliably execute the special figure 2 lottery for the number of times according to the number of winnings.

Further, in this case, an electric accessory 640A may be provided for each opening, or one electric accessory 640A may be configured to shift a plurality of openings to an open state and a closed state. ..

<Regarding the content of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example>
Next, the display contents of the display screen in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 379. In this control example, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied at the end timing of the time reduction state, a state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed is set for a predetermined period even after the end of the time reduction state. Therefore, in the final variation of the time reduction state (time reduction final variation effect), a suggestion effect suggesting that the support state is set after the end of the time reduction is executed.

FIG. 379 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed in the time saving final fluctuation effect during the final change in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 379 (A), in the sixth control example, unlike the fifth control example described above, a variation effect (first suggestion) for showing the lottery result of the variation even in the final variation in the time saving state. Since the effect) is executed, the same effect screen as the variation effect (see FIG. 327 (A)) executed in response to the non-final variation in the time saving state of the fifth control example described above is displayed. The same elements as the display screen of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 327 (A)) are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth control example, it is suggested that the support state is set after the end of the reduced working hours in addition to the lottery result modes 871A to 871C for the display screen (see FIG. 327 (A)) of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the state suggestion mode 871D with the word "support" is displayed. This state suggestion mode 871D is configured to be easily displayed each time the end of the time reduction state approaches, and when the lottery result of the time reduction final variation is out of order and the support state is set after the end of the time reduction state, the state suggestion mode 871D is configured. An effect mode is set in which the character 851 gets the state suggestion mode 871D. If the lottery result of the final variation in time reduction is a hit, an effect mode for obtaining the lottery result modes 871A to 871B indicating the win is set.

When the support state is set after the time saving state ends, the display screen shown in FIG. 379 (B) is displayed. FIG. 379 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed during the support state. The details will be described later, but in this control example, the game per normal figure won during the time saving state is the game per long opening, and the game per long opening is continuously executed even after the end of the time saving state, and during the normal state. The support state is set when the ball can win the second winning opening 640.

During this support state, although it is a normal state, "right-handed" is highlighted in the small display area DM4 because the ball can win the second winning opening 640. Then, the small display area DM31 displays a guidance display mode for visually informing the player that the game of winning the ball in the second winning opening 640 is performed, and the support state is set in the sub-display area DS. A "Support time rush" comment is displayed to indicate that it has been done.

Further, in the small display area DM6, the third symbol corresponding to the change in the special figure 2 being executed is displayed in a variable manner, and the information indicating the number of changes in the special figure 2 executed during the current support state is displayed in the small display area DM30. Is displayed as "Support count". In the example shown in FIG. 379 (B), since the first special figure 2 variation is executed after the support state is set, “support count × 1” is displayed. In the main display area DM, an effect that the character 851 tries to stand up is executed, and a comment of "Ganbare" is displayed. During this support state, a short variation (0.1 second variation) can be executed as a special figure 2 variation, and in some cases, a large number of special figure 2 variations are executed. If a winner is won in the special figure 2 fluctuation during the support state, the effect that the character 851 stands up is executed.

<About the electrical configuration of the 6th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 380 to 383. In this control example, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, and the upper limit of the number of reservations in FIG. 2 is set to 1. Due to the change, the configuration of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203E of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed, and the other points are the same. Is. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the detailed description of the difference between the RAM 203 and the RAM 203 will be omitted.

FIG. 380 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 380, for the above-mentioned fifth control example, the random number 5 table 202ED per normal figure is replaced with 6 tables 202FD per normal figure, and the variation pattern 5 table 202EE is replaced with the variation pattern 6 table 202FE. It differs in that the general map variation pattern selection 6 table 202FF is provided in place of the normal map variation pattern selection table 202EF, and is the same except for the above. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 381 (A), the contents of the type selection 6 table 202FD per drawing will be described. FIG. 381 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection 6 table 202FD per drawing. In the sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 381 (A), the above-mentioned type per normal figure is provided in that A per normal figure, B1 per normal figure, and B2 per normal figure are provided. It is different from the selection 5 table 202ED.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal symbol is the low probability state (low probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "A per normal figure" is defined. "B1 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "1 to 50", and "B2 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "51 to 99". Further, the probability state of the normal symbol is the high probability state (high probability of the normal figure), and the value of the acquired second hit type counter C6 is defined as "A per normal figure" in the range of "0,1". "B1 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "2 to 50", and "B2 per normal figure" is defined in the range of "51 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the type per map selected in the table 202FD and the game state at the time when the game per map is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 381 (B). do. FIG. 381 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of normal drawing and the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640A based on the game state.

In the sixth control example, "B1 per normal figure" and "B2 per normal figure" are provided in place of "B per normal figure" as the type per normal figure for the fifth control example described above. Although it is different, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640A with respect to "B1 per normal figure" in this control example is the same as the opening operation content of "B per normal figure" in the fifth control example described above. The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If the type per normal figure is "B2 per normal figure" and the game state at the time when the game per normal figure is released is the reduced working hours state (high accuracy of the normal figure), the game per normal figure is "long". The opening operation of "opening B" is executed. When this "long opening B" is set, a game per game is executed in which the electric accessory 640A is opened for 1.5 seconds after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a scenario per map (not shown), and when the game per map is executed, the scenario per map corresponding to the type and game state of the map is set and the main control is performed. By periodically updating the normal figure hitting scenario in the main process of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A is executed in accordance with the above-mentioned flow of the normal figure hitting game.

That is, in the sixth control example, if the player wins the game during the time saving state, one of the "long open A" and "long open B" games is executed as the game per long open game. To. Regardless of which game per game is executed, the period during which the electric accessory 640A is open is the same as 1.5 seconds, and if the game per game is executed during the time saving state, any game is executed. Even if the game is executed per second, it is configured so that the player can be provided with the same privilege.

However, in "long open A" and "long open B", the period during which the electric accessory 640A is in an open state (a state in which it is easy to win a ball in the second winning opening 640) after the game is started. Is different, and when "Long Open A" is set, 2.6 seconds (including the opening period of 0.1 seconds) to 3.1 seconds after the start of the game per normal figure. It is configured to open the electric accessory 640A in the open state during the period of.

Therefore, if the opening operation of "long opening A" is executed just before the end of the time saving state, the opening operation of "long opening B" is executed at the same timing. It is possible to make it easier for the electric accessory 640A to be in the open state after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, as compared with the case of winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 382, the contents of the normal variation pattern 6 table 202FE1 included in the variation pattern 6 table 202FE will be described. FIG. 382 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal variation pattern 6 table 202FE1, and is a schematic diagram showing the conventional variation pattern 5 table 202EE1 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 339 (B)). ), The content selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

In this sixth control example, according to the type of the time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set after the big hit ends, the special figure is executed until the number of times the special figure changes after the big hit ends reaches a predetermined number of times. 2 The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation is configured to be different.

Specifically, when the time reduction A (time reduction 1 time or time reduction 99 times) is set as the time reduction state, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the normal state within the range of "1st to 99th times". When the special figure 2 fluctuation in the above figure 2 is executed, the "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the "100th to 151st times" In the range, regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "off", "ultra-short miss (0.1 seconds)" is "hit (big hit, small hit)". Is set to "long hit (20 seconds)", and in the range of "152nd and subsequent times", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery. It is stipulated to be done.

Here, in the sixth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions (common time saving end condition, corresponding time saving end condition) are set as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state. For example, even in the time saving state in which 99 times of time saving is set (the time saving state in which the corresponding time saving end condition established when the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation reaches 99 times is set). , When the small hit game is executed, the ball does not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game, and the big hit game is not executed, the common time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends. It is configured to do. Therefore, even if the time reduction of 99 times is set, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be executed when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit shifts to the second time.

As shown in FIG. 382, when the time reduction A is set, the fluctuation time of 0.1 second is 0.1 seconds when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is “100 to 151st”. Is configured to be set. In other words, if the time reduction state is set and the race is completed 99 times without winning, a variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time for the special figure 2 hold stored at that time. Will be done. In addition, when the game is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the normal state, and the special figure 2 fluctuates with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. Is executed, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, the special figure 2 variation of the number of times according to the number of winnings is easily executed. ..

On the other hand, when the time reduction state of one time reduction is set, the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set as the special figure 2 variation even when the game per normal figure is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time reduction state. Because it is set, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed only the number of times up to the memory number of the special figure 2 hold. is doing.

In addition, when the time reduction B (time reduction state in which the time reduction 5 times is set) is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state is within the range of "1st to 5th times" after the jackpot game is completed. When is executed, "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the fluctuation type is set in the range of "6th to 20th". Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "off", it is "ultra-short off (0.1 seconds)", and if it is "hit (big hit, small hit)", it is "long hit (long hit). "20 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "21st and subsequent times", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Has been done.

As described above, in this control example, of the three time reduction states (1 time reduction, 5 time reductions, 99 time reductions) in which different time reduction end conditions are set, the time reduction state in which 5 time reductions are set is set. When the time saving state ends and the normal state is set by reaching the specified number of times of special figure fluctuation in the two types of time saving states, that is, the time saving state in which 99 times of time saving is set. The special figure 2 fluctuation of 1 second is configured to be feasible.

Then, as described above, the 0.1 second set as the special figure 2 variation is from the continuous opening period (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640A in the game per long opening of the normal figure. Because it is short, it is possible to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations by making a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 in one game per normal figure long opening.

Therefore, the ease of executing the special figure 2 lottery after the end of the time reduction state can be made different depending on the set time reduction state and the established time reduction end condition. Therefore, the time reduction state is given to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play when the game is completed.

In addition, in this control example, when the time saving state of one time saving is set, the special figure 2 change is executed within the period in which the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game becomes "100 to 151". In that case, that is, when the time saving state of one time saving is completed and then the left-handed game in the normal state is being executed, the player wins the regular long opening and the special figure 2 lottery is executed. When the number of changes in the special figure after the end of the jackpot game is "100 to 151", a short change of 0.1 seconds is executed if the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation multiple times at the time of winning the normal figure long opening.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a period during which the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed not only after the end of the time saving state but also when the normal state is won by the long opening of the normal figure. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in a normal state while being aware of the number of fluctuations in the special figure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, a player who has been playing for a long period of time can grasp the contents of the previous time reduction state (number of time reductions), and further, the special figure 2 lottery is advantageous in winning the normal state long opening. Since it is possible to predict the number of special map fluctuations that can be executed (the number of special map fluctuations after the end of the big hit game) and it is possible to play the game more advantageously than other players, the willingness to continue playing the game. Can be enhanced.

In the sixth control example, when a specific time saving state is set and the time saving state is terminated by the satisfaction of the specific time saving end condition, the fluctuation time of the variation in Special Figure 2 is short (0. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of 1 second) is selected, but it is not limited to this, and it is a short time (0.1 second) depending on the timing of winning the normal long opening of the normal figure. A range in which the fluctuation pattern is selected may be separately provided. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed when the player wins the long opening of the Fuzu, so that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, in this control example, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation is configured to be selected based on the type of the time saving state and the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit game, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation may be selected based on the type of the time reduction state and the number of variations of the special figure after the time reduction state ends. With this configuration, regardless of which time-saving end condition the time-saving state ends, it becomes possible to select the same fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation after the end of the time-saving state, which is safe for the player. You can play the game with your heart.

Further, when the same type of time saving state is set, different fluctuation patterns may be selected. For example, a plurality of time saving types in which 5 times of time saving are set as the time saving state are provided, and a plurality of them. Of the time saving types in the above, the special figure 2 variation for a short time (0.1 seconds) may be executed only when a specific time saving type is set. As a result, when the time saving state is set (when the remaining time saving number is grasped), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game content after the time saving state ends.

In addition, in this control example, the variable time of 0.1 seconds is set as the state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time shorter than the opening time of the accessory 640A is set, and a plurality of types of fluctuation times (for example, 0.2 seconds and 0.3 seconds in addition to 0.1 seconds) may be set. It may be configured so that one fluctuation time is selected from among them. With this configuration, the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed during the support state depends on the length of the special figure 2 fluctuation time set in the state where the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed (support state). Is variable, so that the player can pay attention to the content of the game during the support state.

Next, the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 6 table 202FF will be described with reference to FIG. 383. FIG. 383 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 6 table 202FF, and FIG. 383 (B) is a normal diagram for time saving A possessed by the normal map variation pattern selection 6 table 202FF. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern table 202FF2, and FIG. 383 (C) is defined in the variation pattern table 202FE3 for time saving B possessed by the variation pattern selection 6 table 202FF. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 383 (A), the normal map variation pattern selection 6 table 202FF is the normal map variation pattern table 202FF1 referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the time saving state is "type". It has a time saving A normal map fluctuation pattern table 202FF2 that is referred to when "time saving A" is set, and a time saving B normal map fluctuation pattern table 202FE3 that is referred to when "time saving B" is set. is doing.

Since the content specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202FF1 is the same as the content referred to in the normal state (normal map low accuracy) of the normal map variation pattern selection table 202EF in the above-mentioned fifth control example. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the normal map fluctuation pattern table referred to in the time saving state (high accuracy of the normal map) is set with respect to the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202EF of the fifth control example described above, and the type of the time saving state and the jackpot. The difference is that the normal map fluctuation patterns selected based on the number of special map fluctuations after the end are configured to be different.

Here, with reference to FIG. 383 (B), the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202FF2 for the time saving A will be described. The time saving A normal map fluctuation pattern table 202FF2 is a data table referred to when the time saving state is set to "time saving A", that is, once or 99 times, and is a data table of FIG. 383. As shown in (B), various normal map fluctuation patterns (variation times) are defined based on the number of special map fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 98 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", that is, "short fluctuations (short fluctuations). "2 seconds)" is specified in the range of "630 to 999", and "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified, and the number of special figure fluctuations is "99 times", and the acquired second "Ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS2 "0 to 709", and "medium fluctuation (10 seconds)" is specified in the range of "710 to 989". In the range of "990 to 999", "short fluctuation (2 seconds)" is defined.

That is, in the time reduction final fluctuation when the time reduction of 1 time is set, 63% is configured to select 2 seconds and 37% selects 0.1 seconds as the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the time reduction of 99 times is set. In the case, the time saving final variation is configured to select 71% for 0.1 seconds, 28% for 10 seconds, and 1% for 2 seconds as the normal map variation pattern. Here, the shorter the fluctuation time is set as the normal map fluctuation pattern, the easier it is for the game per normal map to be executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time reduction state. In the time saving state in which the time saving 99 times is set, it is possible to easily set the state (support state) in which the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640 after the time saving state ends.

On the other hand, when the number of special map fluctuations is "99", the normal map fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected with a probability of 28%, and the 10-second normal map fluctuation time is selected. In that case, it becomes difficult to execute the game per normal figure so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. Further, in this control example, when the time reduction end condition is set to 99 times, the normal map fluctuation time during execution of the special figure variation (99th special map variation) in which the time reduction end condition is satisfied is set as another. Since it is configured so that the normal map fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is easier to select than the period of, the normal map fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is continuously executed without executing the final fluctuation in the time saving state. By making it possible, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which an excessive privilege (a prize ball paid out by winning a ball in the second winning opening 640) is performed.

In addition, the game board 13 is set so that the special figure change set as the time saving final change and the normal figure change are set at different moments, and one of the execution moments can be established by the ball launched by the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game in which the normal map change (variation per normal figure) is executed according to the end timing of the special figure change.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383 (C), the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202FE3 for time saving B will be described. The normal map fluctuation pattern table 202FE3 for time saving B is a data table referred to when “time saving B”, that is, 5 times of time saving is set as the type of time saving state, and is shown in FIG. 383 (C). As mentioned above, various normal map fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined based on the number of special map fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 4 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", that is, "short fluctuations (short fluctuations). "2 seconds)" is specified in the range of "630 to 999", and "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified. 2 “Ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 second)” is specified regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2. Since the time saving state is set to 5 times at the maximum, the value corresponding to the 6th and subsequent times of the special figure fluctuation is not set.

As described above, when the time reduction state of 5 times is set, the normal map fluctuation is always executed with the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds during the time reduction final fluctuation. Therefore, it becomes easy to execute the game per normal figure so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state.

As described above, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol can be set differently according to the type of the time reduction state (time reduction A, B) set. The time saving type (time saving B) in which 5 times of time saving is set makes it easy to set the state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is most easily executed after the time saving state ends, and then 99 times of time saving and 1 time of time saving. It is configured in the order of.

As a result, when the condition for executing the jackpot game is not satisfied during the time saving state, a privilege (support state) can be given to the player, and further, the privilege is given according to the type of the set time saving state. By making the grant probability different, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this control example, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation number after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be referred to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to select each fluctuation pattern by referring only to the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or to refer to the number of fluctuations of the normal map fluctuation. You may. Further, it may be configured to select each fluctuation pattern by referring to the condition in which the set time saving end condition is satisfied.

Further, in this control example, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal map fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation number after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be referred to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variation pattern table used when selecting each variation pattern may be changed based on the small hit type won during the time saving state, or after the small hit game is completed. It may be configured to select each fluctuation pattern based on the number of fluctuations in the special map and the number of fluctuations in the normal map.

<Control processing in the sixth control example>
Next, the contents of the control process in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 384 and 385. In this control example, the normal symbol variation process 6 (see C136 in FIG. 384) is executed instead of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see C106 in FIG. 350) for the fifth control example described above, and the main control. The contents of the data table referred to in the various discrimination processes in the apparatus 110 (see FIGS. 380 to 383) are different, and the other points are the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the points where the contents of the referenced data table have been changed and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the changes in the contents of the referenced data table, the numerical values have simply been changed, which is technically ideological. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 6 (C136) will be described with reference to FIG. 384. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 6 (C136). When the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136) is executed, the same processes of C601 to C611 as those of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see C106 of FIG. 350) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and in the process of C611, If it is determined that the lottery for the normal symbol this time is a win (C611: YES), set the type per normal symbol this time by referring to the 6 table 202FD for selecting the type per normal figure (C641), and hit the time (normal). The display mode (at the time of hitting the figure) is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C642. On the other hand, in the process of C611, if it is determined that the winning lottery of the normal symbol this time is out of order (C611: NO), the display mode at the time of out of order is set (C614), and the process proceeds to C642.

In the processing of C642, the current normal map fluctuation pattern is set based on the normal map fluctuation pattern selection 6 table (C642), and the command corresponding to each setting content (winning lottery winning / fail judgment, normal map fluctuation pattern) is set. (C623), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C602, when it is determined that the current figure is currently changing (C602: YES), C618 to the same as the normal symbol change process 5 (see C106 of FIG. 350) of the above-mentioned fifth control example. The process of C623 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 385. The control processing content of the voice lamp control device 113 of this control example replaces the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fifth control example described above with the effect setting process for normal drawing (see C4117 in FIG. 371). The difference is that the effect setting process 6 for normal drawing (see C4167 in FIG. 385) is configured to be executed. The other control processes are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 6 (C4167) for normal drawing. As shown in FIG. 385, in the normal drawing effect setting process 6 (C4167), the above-mentioned normal drawing effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371) is executed during the special figure final fluctuation period in the time saving state. The difference is that the processing for setting the effect mode is added, and the other parts are the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal drawing effect setting process 6 (C4167) is executed, the same processing of C4201 to C4212 as the normal drawing effect setting process (see C4117 of FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and this process is executed. To finish. Further, in the processing of C4202, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (C4202: NO), then it is determined whether the current state is in the final change of the time saving state (C4251), and the final change. If it is determined that there is no inside (C4251: NO), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of C4251 when it is determined that the current time-saving state is in the final fluctuation (C4251: YES), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is acquired, and the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation being executed is determined. Extract (C4252).

Then, if it is determined whether the end timing of the special figure change during execution is during the game per normal figure long (C4253), and if it is determined that the game is in progress per the normal long open opening (C4253: YES), the time is shortened this time. Since the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed to straddle the state end timing, a display command is set to suggest that the special figure 2 fluctuation zone (support state) is set after the end of the time reduction (C4254). , End this process. When the display command is set by the process of C4254, the display command is output to the display control device 114 in the same process as the other display commands, and the effect screen shown in FIG. 379 (A) is the third symbol. It is displayed on the display screen of the display device 81.

In the process of C4253, if it is determined that the long release is not performed at the end time reduction timing (C4253: NO), the present process is terminated as it is. In this control example, it is configured to end the main process as it is when it is determined that the long release is not performed at the time saving end timing in the process of C4253 (C4253: NO). The time saving state was the time saving state (for example, time saving B) where it was easy to set the support state, but the support state was not set because the execution timing of the special map fluctuation and the normal map fluctuation was bad, in the first place. It may be configured to provide a means for determining whether or not a time saving state (for example, a time saving A) that is difficult to set is set, and to display a display mode capable of notifying (suggesting) the determination result to the player. .. In addition, a means for determining whether or not the final change in the time-saving state has ended at the end timing of the current normal map change and the end timing of the game per game executed based on the current normal map change. If it is determined that the final change in the time-saving state has not ended at the end timing of the current normal map change and the end timing of the game per game executed based on the current normal map change, that is the case. It may be configured to suggest (notify) the discrimination result.

As described above, the sixth control example is the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) rather than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery), as in the fifth control example described above. It is set so that it is easier to win a small hit, and when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state, It is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed as compared with the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. Then, a ball is won in the V winning opening 650A which is in an open state during the small hit game, and when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate), the execution opportunity of the big hit game is established. ..

Then, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the first ending condition (condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in the special figure (number of fluctuations in the special figure 2) reaches the specified number of times (for example, 5 times)) and When the first end condition is satisfied by having at least the second end condition (a condition that is satisfied when a specified number of small hits (for example, once) is won by a special drawing lottery during the reduced working hours state). It is configured so that it is possible to give a favorable state to the player. Specifically, during the special map fluctuation in which the first end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely short (normal map fluctuation time 0.1 seconds), and many during one special map fluctuation period. It is configured so that the fluctuation of the normal map can be executed.

As a result, when the time saving state ends based on the satisfaction of the first end condition, the fluctuation period of the normal map fluctuation to be executed is shortened by the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure final change). be able to. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the game per long opening of the Fuzu during the final change of the time saving state (final change of the special figure), and by extension, the time saving state ends during the execution of the game per long opening of the Fuzu, which is normal. Even after the state is set, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game per long opening.

That is, in this control example, the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the time saving state (1 time, 5 times, 99 times) is set, and the first privilege (small hit winning (small hit winning probability about 1 /). 7)) In the case where a predetermined number of special figure 2 lottery is executed without winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state while playing a game aiming to be granted. It is configured so that a second privilege (a period during which a short fluctuation is executed as a normal fluctuation) different from the first privilege is given. With this configuration, the player can be given a privilege that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the small hit is won or not as the game result (special figure 2 lottery result) during the time saving state. Can improve the motivation to play.

Further, in this control example, the period during which the short variation is executed as the normal map variation is set during the execution period of the special map final variation in a specific time saving state (for example, 5 times of time reduction). At the end of the time saving state, it is possible to easily acquire the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol (special figure 2) up to the upper limit (4). Furthermore, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map, it is possible to increase the ratio of the period during which the electric accessory 1640A is open per unit time, so that the game per normal map is being executed (electric role). The normal state can be easily set in the state where the object 1640A is open or the state where the electric accessory 1640A is left open).

As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 1640 even after the normal state is set. Therefore, when the second privilege is given, it is better than when the second privilege is not given. Many special figure 2 lottery can be executed, and the player can enthusiastically play the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example, the ball enters from the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter during the specific game (for example, the small hit game). A specific ball entry means (V winning opening 650A) that can be changed to a second state (open state) that is easy to play is provided, and a ball that has entered the specific entry means (V winning opening 650A) is a specific area (V gate). It is configured so that the big hit game is executed based on the passing of the ball, but the ball enters the V winning opening 650A which is opened when the small hit game is executed. In this case, the technique described in this control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is given the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. Even in this case, the special figure 2 lottery is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery, which is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned second privilege is given. It is possible to provide a gaming state.

Further, in the sixth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 383, the period in which the above-mentioned second privilege is granted is the period in which the final change in the time reduction state is executed (the specific time reduction end condition is set. However, the period is not limited to this, and for example, when the time reduction state is set to 99 times, the number of special map fluctuations immediately after the time reduction state is set (for example, the number of special figure fluctuations after the time reduction state is set) is set. The second benefit is given during the period (1 to 5 times) or after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time reduction state was set (for example, the period in which the number of special map fluctuations after the time reduction state was set is 45 to 50 times). As given, the contents specified in the general map variation pattern 6 table 202FE may be configured. Further, for the time reduction state in which the same time reduction end condition is set, a plurality of time reduction types may be provided, and the period for which the second benefit is granted may be different depending on the set time reduction type. good.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the second privilege is granted when the time saving state is set, so it is expected that the second privilege will be granted. It is possible to play a game in a short time state while letting it play.

<About a modified example of the sixth control example>
Next, a modification of the sixth control example described above will be described. In the sixth control example described above, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the time saving state, that is, when a specific time saving state (time saving state of 5 times shortening) is set, the fifth special figure change is executed. , The advantageous game in which a short-time (0.1 second) fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal figure) is configured to be executed, and the time-saving state is about to end or immediately after the time-saving state ends. In, the ball was configured to be easy to win in the second winning opening 640. Then, in the above-mentioned sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 378, when the second winning opening 640 to which the electric accessory 640A is attached is provided in the right game area of the game board 13, the right-handed game is executed. The two winning openings 640 can be won, but the first winning opening 64 is configured so that the ball cannot be won.

On the other hand, in this modification, when the lower position of the second winning opening 640 provided in the right game area, specifically, the electric accessory 640A is in the closed state, the ball fired by the right-handed game. Is possible to win a prize, and when the electric accessory 640A is in the open state, the game board 13 in which the first winning opening 64 is arranged is used at a position where the ball fired by the right-handed game becomes difficult to win. ing. Since the other configurations of the game board 13 are the same as those of the sixth control example described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this modification, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) change in the order in which the acquired information is acquired (the order in which the ball wins in the corresponding winning opening). It is different from the above-mentioned sixth control example in that it is configured so that (lottery) is executed and that the configuration for holding and storing the acquired information in the special figure 2 is deleted. Since the other contents are the same as those of the above-described sixth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example configured in this way, the second privilege (a game period in which a short time (0.1 second) is easily set as the normal figure fluctuation time) is given during the time saving state, and it is normal during the game per normal figure. When the state is set, the ball fired by the right-handed game can easily win the second winning opening 640, and it can be difficult to win the first winning opening 64. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation during the normal state. On the other hand, when the normal state is set at a timing other than during the normal game, the ball fired by the right-handed game is likely to win the first winning opening 64. Further, since it does not have a configuration for storing the hold of the special figure 2, even if the ball wins the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 change is being executed, the special figure 2 change occurs. It is configured not to be executed.

That is, in this modification, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A serves as a guiding means for guiding the ball to the second winning opening 640 and a limiting means for limiting the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64. It is configured to work. With this configuration, the second privilege is given to the player when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set depending on whether the second privilege is given or not. The benefits can be greatly different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the second privilege is given.

<7th control example>
Next, a seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 to 397. In the fifth control example described above, a series of effects can be executed as a variable effect executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the lottery result of the normal symbol, and the series of effects is executed. In that case, it is difficult to understand whether the execution opportunity of this series of productions is a special drawing lottery or a general drawing lottery, and it is configured to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the production result (lottery result). (See FIG. 317).

However, the notification mode (small display area DM4 of the main display area DM) for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game depending on the hit game to be executed (normal figure hit game, small hit game, big hit game). Depending on the timing at which the display mode) is displayed, there is a risk that it may be determined which symbol lottery is based on this series of effects.

On the other hand, in the 7th control example, any of the symbol lottery is performed by the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) or the normal symbol lottery (general symbol lottery). However, the notification mode (display mode of the small display area DM4 of the main display area DM) for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game at the same timing can be displayed. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the seventh control example and the control contents will be described. The details of the same contents as those of the above-mentioned fifth control example will be omitted.

<Regarding the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the 7th control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388. The game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example has a different structure of the right game area from the structure of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 315). , Other than that, it is the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 386 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example. In this seventh control example, each winning opening in which a ball flowing down the right-handed game area by a player performing a right-handed game can win a prize by each hit game (a normal hit game, a small hit game, a big hit game). The time to reach (2nd winning opening 640, V winning opening 650A, specific winning opening 65A) is configured to be different. Specifically, the ball launched by the right-handed game is the 2nd winning opening 640. It is configured so that the time to reach the special winning opening 650A is about 4 seconds, the time to reach the V winning opening 650A is about 2 seconds, and the time to reach the specific winning opening 65A is about 6 seconds.

Here, the configuration of the right game area of this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388. As shown in FIG. 386, a distribution means 700 capable of distributing a ball to a plurality of ball paths is provided above the right game area, and the ball distributed by the distribution means 700 is the first path 701. And the second path 702 are configured to be alternately distributed.

The first path 701 is formed by a meandering ball passage, and is configured to take about 3 seconds for the ball to pass through the first path 701. Then, the ball that has passed through the first path 701 reaches the upper surface of the flow path unit provided with the variable winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640A. The flow path unit is configured so that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the out port 66, and as a part of the flow path formed on the upper surface thereof, an electric accessory 640A and a winning door 65B are provided. It is provided. When both the electric accessory 640A and the winning door 65B are closed, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the flow path unit flows out from the lowermost end (the end on the out port 66 side) of the upper surface of the flow path unit and is out. It is configured to flow into the mouth 66.

It is configured so that the time required for the ball passing through the first path 701 to reach the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A is about 1 second, and further, the ball flow on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A (ball flow on the upper surface of the flow path unit). A delay member for delaying the flow of the sphere is provided on the surface forming the path) so that the time required for the sphere to flow down on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A is about 2 seconds. It is composed. Here, in the seventh control example, a meandering flow path in which the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A meanders in the depth direction so that the sphere does not flow down in a straight line is configured on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A. This makes it possible to delay the flow of the sphere.

On the other hand, the sphere distributed to the second path 702 by the distribution means 700 flows into the opening 704A of the passage channel on a straight line formed in the depth direction of the first path, and is provided near the exit of the passage channel. It is configured to flow down toward the V winning opening 650A, and the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650A in about 2 seconds.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, each winning opening (No. 1) in which the ball fired by the right-handed game can be won by each hit game (normal figure hit game, small hit game, big hit game). 2 The time to reach the winning opening 640, the V winning opening 650A, and the specific winning opening 65A) is configured to be different. Specifically, the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640. It is configured so that the time to reach the V winning opening 650A is about 2 seconds, and the time to reach the specific winning opening 65A is about 6 seconds.

With this configuration, it is possible to confirm in order which winning opening the ball fired by the right-handed game wins, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. Further, although the details will be described later, in this control example, the special figure fluctuation time is set to be different between the case where the small hit is won and the case where the big hit is won, and each winning game is executed. Immediately after that, in order to hit the ball and win a prize in the winning opening opened by the game, it is configured to give a notification to guide the right-handed game during the special figure fluctuation time. Then, regardless of whether the small hit is won or the big hit is won, the set effect is executed after the special figure fluctuation is started, and the notification for guiding the right-handed game is performed at the same timing when a specific time has passed. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player determines the result of the lottery this time depending on the timing at which the notification for guiding the right-handed game is performed.

In addition, in this control example, when the player wins the long opening of the game by the lottery, the execution timing of the set effect is set so as to notify the right-handed game at a specific timing of the set effect. It is composed. With this configuration, even if the set effect is executed and the notification to guide the right-handed game is given, it is difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this set effect indicates. It is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 389, a series of effects used as variable effects of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) in the seventh control example, and right-handed to guide the right-handed game. The relationship with the display timing of the notification will be explained. FIG. 389 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the execution effect (notification) in each symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 389, in this control example, the effect (series effect) is executed for a predetermined period (54 seconds) after the symbol change is started, and then the guidance notification for guiding the right-handed game to the player is performed. (Right-handed notification) is executed. Then, when the player executes the right-handed game based on the execution of the guidance notification, the balls launched by the right-handed game are opened according to the lottery result of the symbol change executed this time. It is configured to win a prize in the winning opening (second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650A, specific winning opening 65A).

Specifically, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (60 seconds) in which the jackpot is won, right-handed 54 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation). Notification is executed. Then, the big hit game is started at the timing when the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the specific winning opening 65A (6 seconds after the right-handed game is performed).

In addition, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (58 seconds) in which the small hit is won, right-handed notification is given 54 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation). Is executed. Then, the small hit game is started at the timing when the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650A (4 seconds after the right-handed game is performed). In this control example, when the ball wins the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game, the ball always passes through the V gate, and the ball wins the V winning opening 650A during the small hit game. If so, the big hit game is configured to start 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game. As a result, depending on whether the big hit is won in the special figure 1 fluctuation or the small hit is won, the production mode of the fluctuation effect (series effect) executed from the start of the change, and the guidance notification for guiding the right-handed game. In addition to the execution timing of, it is possible to make the same from the start of fluctuation to the timing of starting the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this variable effect (set effect) indicates to the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Furthermore, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the winning normal map fluctuation (54 seconds), a right-handed notification is executed 54 seconds after the fluctuation starts (when the normal map fluctuation stops). Will be done. Then, at the timing when the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (two seconds after the right-handed game is performed), the normal game is started. In addition, even when a series of effects are executed based on this fluctuation of the normal map, the start timing of the big hit game via the normal map game is determined by the case where the big hit is won in the above-mentioned special figure 1 lottery and the case where the small hit is won. It is configured so that it can be the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this variable effect (set effect) indicates to the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, in this control example, at multiple timings during the period from the execution of the guidance notification (right-handed notification) for guiding the right-handed game to the start of the jackpot game (right-handed ball flow period), this time. It is configured to be able to execute a failure effect for notifying that the effect result of is a failure (the jackpot game is not executed). Specifically, the failure notification timing is set 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds after the right-handed notification is executed.

That is, although detailed description and illustration are omitted, in a part of the case where the result of the special figure 1 lottery is out of order, the fluctuation pattern is configured to set the fluctuation time of 56 seconds, 58 seconds, and 60 seconds. , When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the same fluctuation effect as the above-mentioned content is executed, and the failure notification is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time has elapsed. The failure notification timing described above is based on the timing at which it is determined that the ball could not be won in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, and the ball is made to win in the second winning opening 640. It is configured to coincide with the timing at which the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation to be executed is notified, or the timing at which the small hit is won as a result of the special figure 2 lottery and the small hit game ends.

With this configuration, the production mode of the series of out-of-order effects that is executed when the result of the special figure 1 lottery is out of order, and the series of effects that are executed based on the winning of the per-figure, are per-figure. In the game process after the game, it is possible to make the effect mode set when the jackpot game is not executed the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the effect result of this variable effect (set effect) indicates to the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, in this control example, for example, even if a jackpot is won by the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure fluctuation of 60 seconds is executed, the above-mentioned failure notification is executed or not. It is configured to perform the fanning effect of. In this case, since the special figure 1 big hit is internally won, as a result of the fanning effect, a success effect mode for notifying the player that the player does not fail is set and executed as the effect.

In this way, by executing the fanning effect, it is possible to reduce the difference in the effect mode between the series of effects in which the failure notification is actually executed and the series of effects in which the failure notification is not executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which hit game the production result of) indicates, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. In addition, since it is possible to make the player watch the effect (effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81), this effect is based on the ball flow situation in the right game area. It can be difficult to determine in advance what the result is.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 390 to 392. This control example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Other than that, they are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 390 (A), the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 390 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the seventh control example. In this control example, the variation pattern 7 table 202GE is provided in place of the variation pattern 5 table 202EE, and the variation pattern selection table 202GF is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 202EF for the fifth control example described above. They differ in that they are the same, otherwise they are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202GE will be described with reference to FIG. 391. FIG. 391 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202GE. As shown in FIG. 391 (A), the variation pattern 7 table 202GE has a variation pattern 7 table 202GE1 for normal use and a variation pattern 5 table 202EE2 for time saving, and is usually compared to the fifth control example described above. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table referenced when the state is set are different.

Here, the contents of the normal variation pattern 7 table 202GE1 will be described with reference to FIG. 391 (B). FIG. 391 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202GE1 for normal use. As shown in FIG. 391 (B), the normal fluctuation pattern 7 table 202GE1 has a first special symbol (see FIG. 339 (B)) with respect to the normal fluctuation pattern 5 table 202EE1 of the fifth control example described above. The contents specified in the data table referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1) are different, and the data referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The contents specified in the table are the same. The detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the normal fluctuation pattern 7 table 202GE1, regardless of whether the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit", a dedicated fluctuation pattern (variable time) for executing the set effect. ) Is selected. Specifically, when the lottery result in Special Figure 1 is "out of order", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "short" in the range of "0 to 139". "Out of line (7 seconds)" is in the range of "140 to 179", "Out of line (30 seconds)" is in the range of "180 to 189", and "Short set production (30 seconds)" is in the range of "190 to 194". "Various super reach (60 seconds)" is specified in the range, and "set effect (60 seconds)" is specified in the range of "195 to 198".

When the lottery result of Special Figure 1 is "big hit", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and "various normal reach (30 seconds)" is in the range of "30 to 39". "Short set effect (30 seconds)" is specified in the range of "40 to 179", "Various super reach (60 seconds)" is specified in the range of "40 to 179", and "Set effect (60 seconds)" is specified in the range of "180 to 198". , When the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99", "various super reach (60 seconds)", and in the range of "100 to 198", "small". "Hit set production (56 seconds)" is specified.

As described above, in this control example, the fluctuation pattern for executing the set effect is selected at a predetermined ratio regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1. Then, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set as the set effect differs between the time of winning the small hit and the time of winning the big hit. Specifically, when the big hit is won, the variable time of 60 seconds can be selected as the set effect, and when the small hit is won, the variable time of 56 seconds can be selected as the set effect. That is, the fluctuation time of the set effect at the time of winning the small hit is set to be 4 seconds shorter than the fluctuation time of the set effect at the time of winning the big hit.

Here, as described later with reference to FIG. 386, in the game board 13 of this control example, when the right-handed game is executed, the ball reaches the V winning opening 650A which is in the open state during the small hit game. The time required for the ball to reach the specific winning opening 65A (about 6 seconds), which is open during the jackpot game, is set to be 4 seconds longer than the time required for the game (about 2 seconds). .. Then, as will be described later, in this control example, when the set effect (60 seconds) is executed, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, regardless of the set variation time (special figure variation time). It is configured to execute a notification for guiding a right-handed game (right-handed notification).

With this configuration, the timing from the execution of the set effect to the execution of the right-handed notification can be the same for both the big hit win and the small hit win, so the player can be informed of the effect result of the set effect. It can be confusing. Furthermore, a right-handed notification is given 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the special figure lottery result that triggers the execution of the set effect this time. Whichever (big hit, small hit) is, the ball fired by the right-handed game can be won in any of the winning openings in the open state.

Next, the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 7 table 202GF will be described with reference to FIG. 392. FIG. 392 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal map variation pattern selection 7 table 202GF. As shown in FIG. 392, in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202GF, the normal map variation pattern selection table 202EF (see FIG. 338) of the fifth control example described above defines the normal map long variation B (60 seconds). The difference is that the long fluctuation C (58 seconds) of the normal figure is specified in the above range, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202GF, the game state is the normal state (the normal figure low probability), the result of the normal figure lottery is A per the normal figure, and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "500". The value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 fluctuates in the range of "800 to 999" because the result of the ordinary map lottery is out of the range of "~ 999" and the game state is the normal state (low accuracy of the normal map). As a pattern, "Fuzu long fluctuation C (58 seconds)" is specified.

Then, when the normal figure long variation C is selected, the set effect can be executed. That is, even when the set effect is executed based on the long variation C of the normal figure, the right-handed notification is executed 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. Then, when the player performs a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the fired ball is configured to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

By configuring in this way, the timing from the execution of the set effect to the execution of the right-handed notification can be made the same for the big hit win, the small hit win, and the normal figure win, so that the set effect can be given to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the production result of. Furthermore, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed, a right-handed notification is given, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the symbol lottery result that triggers the execution of this set effect is obtained. Whichever (big hit, small hit, normal hit), any of the winning openings (specific winning opening 65A, V winning opening 650A, second winning opening) that opens the ball fired by the right-handed game You can win a prize in 640).

Further, in this control example, the special figure hold and the normal figure hold are pre-read, and the start timing of the special figure change is a predetermined period (for example, 70 seconds) when the special figure lottery does not win the prize. When it is determined that the winning is won by the regular drawing lottery after a predetermined range period (for example, 58 seconds to 62 seconds later) from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and it is the timing to execute the winning long open winning game. It is configured to execute the set effect from the start timing of the special figure change, and 54 seconds after the set effect executed from the start timing of the special figure change is started, the right-handed notification corresponding to the game per long open of the normal figure Is configured to run.

In this way, the set effect can be executed by pre-reading the content of the special figure change and the content of the normal figure change and determining that the set effect can be executed at any of the symbol change start timings. The frequency with which the effect is executed can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the effect result of the set effect executed at the start timing of the special figure change can indicate the winning of the normal figure long opening, it is possible to make the player play a game having a character other than that.

The relationship between the start timing of the set effect and the execution timing of the right-handed notification may not deviate significantly. For example, the execution timing of the right-handed notification executed 54 seconds after the normal set effect is executed may be set. It may be shifted to around a few seconds (2 seconds), and in reality, 58 seconds after the execution of the set effect is executed, the ball fired by the right-handed game will be the timing to win the prize opening, but the set effect is Right-handed notification may be executed 54 seconds after the execution. By allowing a slight deviation in this way and making it possible to execute the set effect, it becomes easier to establish the conditions under which the set effect can be executed, and the effect of the set can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, the set effect is configured to be executed at the start timing of the symbol variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the above-mentioned set effect execution condition is satisfied, for example, a special figure. It may be configured to execute the set effect while the fluctuation is being executed. In this case, it is preferable to display a pseudo stop display mode for making the player think that the special figure variation has ended before the set effect is executed. As a result, the player can execute the set effect that is started from the middle of the execution of the special figure variation without any discomfort.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 390 (B). This control example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that the effect prohibition flag 223GA is added, and is the same except for the addition. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect prohibition flag 223GA is a flag for prohibiting the setting of a new set effect, and is set to be turned on when the setting of the new set effect is prohibited. In this control example, in addition to the period during which the set effect is executed, the set effect is not executed even during the period during which a specific super reach effect (including deviation) is executed based on the fluctuation of the special figure. , The effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON even during the period when a specific super reach effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced because the effect being executed (particularly, the effect having a high expectation of hitting) is switched to the set effect in the middle.

<Control processing in the 7th control example>
Next, the control processing contents in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 393 to 397. In the seventh control example, with respect to the control processing contents in the fifth control example described above, the main control device 110 has various discrimination processes (hit discrimination process, etc.) and various selection processes (hit type selection process, variation pattern selection process, etc.). Because the data table referred to in) is different, the processing results are different, and the specific processing to be executed based on the processing results (processing to set commands, processing to store processing results, etc.) Although the contents are different, the technical idea is the same, so the detailed explanation is omitted.

Further, in the control process of the voice lamp control device 113, the stop command process 7 (see C3246 in FIG. 393) is replaced with the stop command process 5 (see C3216 in FIG. 368), and the variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) is used. ), The variable display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394) is replaced with the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374), and the effect update process 7 (see C3142 in FIG. 397) is executed. is doing. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the stop command process 7 (C3246) will be described with reference to FIG. 393. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 7 (C3246). As shown in FIG. 393, the stop command process 7 (C3246) differs from the above-mentioned stop command process 5 (see C3216 in FIG. 368) in that the effect prohibition flag 223GA setting process is added, and other than that. Are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the stop command process 7 (C3246) is executed, first, the same processes of C3951 to C3956 as the above-mentioned stop command process 5 (see C3216 in FIG. 368) are executed, and then the stop command this time is the effect prohibition flag. When it is determined whether the target fluctuation is stopped when 223GA is set to on (C3971), and when it is determined to indicate the stop of the target fluctuation (C3971: YES), the effect prohibition flag 223GA is turned off. Set (C3972) and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C3971 that it does not indicate the stop of the target fluctuation (C3972: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) will be described with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (C3144). As shown in FIG. 394, the variation display setting process 7 (C3144) adds a process for setting the effect mode of the set effect to the variation display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) described above. The difference is that the process of setting the effect prohibition flag 223GA to ON when the acquired fluctuation pattern is super reach is added, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 7 (C3144) is executed, the same processes of C4001 to C4004 as those of the variation display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) are executed, and then the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed. Execute. This set effect setting process (C4041) will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, but it is determined whether the current variation display setting process is executed based on the special map variation or the normal map variation. Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the set effect is satisfied, and when the execution condition of the set effect is satisfied, the process for setting the effect mode of the set effect is performed. Will be executed.

Returning to FIG. 394, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of C4041, it is next determined whether the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is super reach (C4042), and if it is determined to be super reach (CS24042: YES), the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON. (C4043), a display variation pattern command is set (C4044), and the same processes of C4006 to C4010 as in the above-mentioned variation display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) are executed to end this process. On the other hand, in the processing of C4042, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is not super reach (C4042: NO), the processing of C4043 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C4044.

Next, the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041) will be described with reference to FIG. 395. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041). In the set effect setting process (C4041), a process for setting a set effect is executed at the start timing of the special figure change or the normal figure change.

When the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (C4901), and when it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (time saving state), it is determined (C4901). , Since it is not in the game state to execute the set effect, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is normal (C4901: YES), the current variation display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394) sets the variation display of the special figure variation (sets the effect). If it is determined whether it is a process (C4902) and it is determined that the process is to set the variation display of the special figure variation (C4902: YES), the process of C4003 of the variation display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern acquired in is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set effect (C4903).

If it is determined in the processing of C4903 that the fluctuation pattern does not correspond to the set effect (C4903: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the set effect (CS24903: YES), then it is determined whether the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON (C4904), and it is determined that the effect is not set to ON. If so (C4904: NO), it is determined whether or not the current time is a long fluctuation per normal figure (C4905).

In the processing of C4905, when it is determined that the current is long fluctuation per normal figure (C4905: YES), the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223EH is compared with the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG (C4905: YES). C4906), it is determined whether the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation is shorter than the current special map fluctuation time (C4907). Then, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is longer (C4907: NO), the prize information of the normal symbol stored in the prize information storage area 223A is read (C4908), and the read prize information is included. If it is determined whether there is winning information corresponding to the long fluctuation of the normal figure (C4909) and if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the long fluctuation of the normal figure (C4909: YES), the set production according to the current fluctuation pattern is performed. Is set (C4910), the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON (C4911), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4909, if it is determined that there is no long fluctuation in the normal figure in the winning information read in the processing of C4908 (C4909: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. Further, in the processing of C4907, when it is determined that the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation is longer (C4907: YES), a set effect is set according to the normal map fluctuation stop timing (C4912), and the effect prohibition flag 223GA is turned on. (C4920), and this process ends.

It should be noted that, in the processing of C4905, the state in which it is determined that the long fluctuation per normal figure is in progress, that is, the long fluctuation per normal figure is determined even though it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223GA is not set to ON in the processing of C4904. The middle case is, for example, a case where the super reach effect is executed as the variation effect of the special map variation at the start timing of the long variation per normal map being executed.

As described above, in this control example, the processing of C4909 is provided, and when there is a long fluctuation in the winning information, the set effect is set. With this configuration, if it is determined that there is a long variation in the normal map in the winning information, the long variation in the normal map is executed during the execution of the set effect based on the special map variation, so the set effect is executed. In the meantime, the fluctuation of the normal map is executed multiple times in a short time. For example, by executing the game per short of the normal map, the set effect of this time is the set effect executed based on the change of the special figure. It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the information. Although the processing of C4909 is provided in this control example, the processing is not limited to this, and a set effect may be set.

Further, in the set effect set in the processing of C4912, the set effect is executed not at the start timing of the special figure change but at the timing according to the normal figure change stop timing, so that the normal figure long opening is performed as the effect result of the set effect. You will be notified of the hit. If the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation at the start of the special map fluctuation is shorter than the period (15 seconds) in which the effect mode of the set effect can be executed, the set effect is not set and the normal map long opening is performed. It is preferable to configure it so that a dedicated production mode indicating a hit is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player that he / she has won the long opening of the Fuzu.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4904, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON (C4904: YES), or in the processing of C4905, it is determined that the long fluctuation per figure is not in progress (C4905: NO) acquires the lottery result of the currently executed Fuzu lottery (C4913), determines whether or not the Fuzu hit (Fuzu long open hit) is won (C4914), and Fuzu hit (Fuzu). If it is determined that the player has not won (per long opening) (or the general drawing lottery has not been executed) (C4914: NO), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned C4910 process.

In the processing of C4914, if it is determined that the winning is won per normal figure (C4914: YES), then it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation this time is a hit fluctuation (C4915), and it is determined that it is a hit fluctuation. If this is the case (C4915: YES), the value of the normal map fluctuation time counter 223EH and the value of the special map fluctuation time counter 223EG are compared (C4916), and the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation is from the current special map fluctuation time. Is also short (C4917). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special map fluctuation is shorter than the remaining period of the normal map fluctuation during execution (C4917: YES), the set effect executed for the normal map fluctuation is performed this time. It is set to the set effect showing the lottery result of the special figure change (C4918), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4915, when it is determined that the current special map fluctuation is not a hit fluctuation (C4915), or in the processing of C4917, the fluctuation of the current special map fluctuation rather than the remaining period of the running normal map fluctuation. If it is determined that the time is longer (C4917: YES), this process is terminated without setting the set effect corresponding to the current special figure change.

Further, in the processing of C4902, if it is determined that the current variation display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394) is the process of setting the variation display of the normal symbol (C4902: NO), the normal figure set effect setting. The process is executed (C4919), and the present process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the normal figure set effect setting process (C4919) will be described with reference to FIG. 396. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal figure set effect setting process (C4919). When the normal figure set effect setting process (C4919) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a set effect (C5001), and if it is determined to be a set effect (C5001: YES), the next In addition, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON (C5002).

If it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223GA is not set to ON in the processing of C5002 (C5002: NO), a set effect according to the current fluctuation pattern is set (C5003), and the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON. (C5004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of C5002, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON (C5002: YES), it is determined whether the current normal map fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (long open per fluctuation) (C5002: YES). In C5005), if it is determined that the fluctuation is per long opening (C5005: YES), the result of the special drawing lottery being executed is acquired (C5006), and it is determined whether the variation is per special figure (C5007). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON based on the variation outside the special figure.

In the processing of C5007, when it is determined that it is not a special figure hit (C5007: NO), then the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223EH and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG are compared (C5008). If it is determined whether the current normal map fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining time of the special map fluctuation during execution (C5009), and if it is determined that the current normal map fluctuation time is shorter (C5009: YES), it is being executed. A replacement effect (set effect) for notifying the normal figure lottery result (per long opening) is set by the special figure effect (set effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation) (C5010), and this process is completed. do. On the other hand, in the processing of C5007, when it is determined that the special map fluctuation during execution is a hit variation (C5007: YES), or in the processing of C5009, the current normal map variation time remains the remaining special map variation during execution. If it is determined that the time is longer than the time (C5009: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the effect update process 7 (C3142) will be described with reference to FIG. 397. FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 7 (C3142). As shown in FIG. 397, the effect update process 7 (C3142) is a right-handed notification process when a set effect is executed for the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) of the fifth control example described above. It differs in that it is added. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the effect update process 7 (C3142) is executed, first, the same processes of C4501 to C4506 as the effect update process 5 (see C3112 of FIG. 374) of the fifth control example described above are executed. Then, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is not set to ON in the processing of C4505 (C4505: NO), or when the final variation effect update process (C4506) is completed, the set effect is executed. (C4541). In the process of C4541, when the set effect is executed, the determination is performed by referring to the value of the effect time measurement counter (not shown) set to measure the effect time.

If it is determined in the processing of C4541 that the set effect is being executed (measurement of the effect time measurement counter is being performed) (C4541: YES), is it the timing when 54 seconds have elapsed since the set effect was started? (C4542), if it is determined that the timing has passed 54 seconds (C4542: YES), a display guidance command indicating a right-handed game is set (C4543), and the process proceeds to C4507. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C4541, when it is determined that the set effect is not being executed (C4541: NO), or in the processing of C4542, when it is determined that the timing does not elapse 54 seconds (C4542: NO). , The process proceeds to the process of C4507 without performing the process of C4543, and then the present process is terminated.

In the effect update process 7 (C3142) shown in FIG. 397, the right-handed game is configured to show the right-handed game at the elapsed timing of 54 seconds from the start of the effect only when it is determined that the set effect is being executed. However, in reality, it is configured to set a display guidance command to indicate a right-handed game even at other timings. Although specific illustration is omitted, for example, as shown in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202GE1 of FIG. 391 (B), when the set effect of 30 seconds is set, the set effect is executed. A display guidance command for indicating a right-handed game is set at the timing when 24 seconds have elapsed from. Further, when the effect result of the set effect being executed is replaced in the middle, a display guide command for indicating the right-handed game may be set at a further different timing. As a result, the right-handed game is notified at a timing different from the usual timing, so that it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

<8th control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 398 to 410. The eighth control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that the method of setting the effect mode of the series of effects is different. First, a method of setting a series of effects in the above-mentioned fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 398. FIG. 398 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of a series of effect settings in the above-mentioned fifth control example.

As shown in FIG. 398, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, the case where the winning is won in the normal figure hit (the normal figure long open hit) and the case where the big hit or the small hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery. A series of effects can be set, and the effect data of the series of effects is divided into a plurality of scenario types and stored.

Specifically, scenario 1 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIGS. 319 (B) and 320 (A)) executed during the fluctuation of the normal map and the effect mode (FIG. 320) executed during the game per normal map. Scenario 2 corresponding to (B)), and scenario 3 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 323 (A)) executed when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per game. It is executed when the period (waiting period) from when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure until the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning ball is executed is 10 to 30 seconds. Scenario 3-1 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 321 (A)), scenario 4 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 321 (B)) executed during the variation of the special figure 2, and the small hit game. In scenario 5 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 322 (B)) executed in the above, and the effect mode (see FIGS. 324 (B) and 325 (B)) executed when the series of effects ends in the middle. The corresponding scenario 7 and is stored.

Then, when a big hit or a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a series of effects using a plurality of effect data are collectively set in correspondence with the corresponding variation pattern command of the special figure 1 fluctuation. There is. Specifically, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a variable effect (series effect) in which the above-mentioned effect data from scenario 1 to scenario 5 are set collectively is executed, and a small hit is performed in the special figure 1 lottery. If you win, it is configured to execute a variable effect (series effect) in which the effect data from scenario 1 to scenario 4 described above are collectively set.

On the other hand, in the series of effects set based on the winning of the general figure, each scenario that constitutes the series of effects is set individually, and the next scenario is set for one scenario based on the establishment of the scenario transition condition. It is configured in. Specifically, in the case where the Fuzu long opening hit is won by the Fuzu lottery, if the execution condition of the series production is satisfied, the scenario 1 indicating the start of the series production is set, and the Fuzu long opening hit is set. When the indicated stop command is received, scenario 2 is then set. In addition, in the fifth control example, there is a case where the scenario 1 is set (so-called ghost effect) in a state where the winning is not won in the long opening of the normal figure, and in that case, the elapsed time of the scenario 1 ends and the elapsed time of the scenario 1 ends. , The series of production ends.

Next, when the production mode corresponding to scenario 2 is executed during the game per game for the long opening of the normal figure and the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the special figure 2 (special 2) winning command indicating that fact is issued. A notification mode indicating that the sphere has won the second winning opening 640 is displayed on a layer different from the display layer output from the main control device 110 and executing the series of effects (sub-display area of FIG. 321 (A)). See DS). Then, when the special figure 2 winning command is received, the scenario 3 is set. If the ball does not win the second winning opening 640 during the period in which scenario 2 is set, scenario 7 is set in order to end the series of effects, and the end screen for the predetermined period (3 seconds) is displayed. Is displayed.

In the above-mentioned fifth control example, the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the transition to the scenario 3, that is, during the game per game (waiting period). However, it is determined based on the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and different scenarios are set according to the length of the waiting period. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than 10 seconds, scenario 3 (see FIG. 323 (A)) is set, and if the waiting period is 4 to 30 seconds, scenario 3-1 (FIG. 321 (A)) is set. See) is set. Here, if the waiting period is 30 seconds or more, a special series of effects (continuous series of effects) in which the series of effects being executed is pseudo-terminated (scenario 7 is set) and the series of effects is started again after a predetermined period has elapsed. Is executed (see FIG. 326). Further, when the scenario 3-1 is set, the effect mode corresponding to the scenario 3-1 is continuously displayed until the scenario transition condition is satisfied.

Next, when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received with scenario 3 or scenario 3-1 set, the transition condition to the next scenario is satisfied, and scenario 4 is set. Scenario 4 is set until a special figure 2 stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation is received, and an effect mode having the same length as the fluctuation time (15 seconds) of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. .. Then, when the special figure 2 stop command is received, if the change in the special figure 2 indicates a hit, the process proceeds to scenario 5. On the other hand, if the change in the special figure indicates an deviation, the process proceeds to scenario 7 and the series of processes is terminated.

Here, in this control example, the same fluctuation time is set regardless of whether the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is a small hit or a big hit in the state where the scenario 4 is set, and the transition to the scenario 5 is performed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when a big hit is won by the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, the small hit fluctuation time (15 seconds) and the small hit game time (10 seconds) are the fluctuation times. ) And the total of 25 seconds of fluctuation time is set, and scenario 4 is shifted to scenario 5 during the jackpot fluctuation of special figure 2, and the jackpot is matched with the stop timing of the jackpot fluctuation of special figure 2. It may be configured so that the game is executed.

If scenario 5 is set when the variation in the special figure 2 is a small hit, the production mode corresponding to the scenario 5 is executed until the V passage command is received during the small hit game or until the small hit game is completed. When the V passage command is received, the notification mode indicating that effect is displayed on a layer different from the display layer on which the series of effects is executed, and the game shifts to the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the V-passing command has not been received after the small hit game period (10 seconds) has elapsed, the process proceeds to scenario 7 in order to end the series of effects.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when executing a series of effects based on the fluctuation of the special figure 1, a series of effect scenarios are collectively set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern of the variation of the special figure 1 and are usually used. When executing a series of effects based on the fluctuation of the figure, the effect mode of the series of effects is updated according to the degree of establishment of the transition condition according to each scenario. Therefore, in the case of executing a series of effects in the same effect mode, if the update of the effect mode is confirmed, the process of setting the series effect can be simplified, and the update content of the effect mode changes depending on the game situation. In that case, the production mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation.

In the fifth control example, when the series of effects is executed based on the drawing lottery, the scenario of the series of effects is set individually, but the scenario is not limited to this, for example, the drawing. Of the series of effects executed based on the lottery, the portion where the update of the effect mode is confirmed may be configured to collectively set a plurality of scenarios. This makes it possible to simplify the process of setting a series of effects.

In the method of setting the series of effects in the fifth control example described above with reference to FIG. 398, when the series of effects is executed in the same effect mode, the series of effects is set when the update of the effect mode is confirmed. In addition to simplifying the processing, when the updated content of the effect mode is variable depending on the game situation, the effect mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation, but the length of the waiting period is increased. Since the only effect mode that can be variably set according to the situation is the effect mode corresponding to scenario 3, the player feels uncomfortable as compared with the effect mode based on other scenarios of the series of effects executed in a predetermined period. There was a problem.

Here, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the eighth control example, when the normal figure change is executed, the change state of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the game per normal figure is predicted. Based on the prediction result, it is configured to set the production mode of a series of effects corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal map. That is, when the normal map fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation executed this time, the normal map lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal map are calculated and used as the calculation result. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 change currently being executed ends during the game per normal figure, and based on the determination result, a series of production modes corresponding to the normal figure change are set. is doing.

With this configuration, for example, the change end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is later than the period during which the ball can win the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period per normal figure (maximum period). In this case, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) at which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed at the time when the normal figure fluctuation is executed. Thereby, as various effect modes executed during the waiting period, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the waiting period. Therefore, with respect to the above-mentioned fifth control example, since the period that can be variably set can be lengthened among the production modes of the series of effects according to the length of the waiting period, the series according to the length of the series of effects. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the production.

<About the electrical configuration in the 8th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400. The eighth control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that a partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a partial configuration of the RAM 223 are changed. Specifically, it differs in that a series of effect scenario table 222HA is added to ROM 222 and a medium flag 223HA, an effect scenario storage area 223HB, and a constant monitoring flag 223HC are added to RAM 223. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 399 (A). FIG. 399 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 399 (A), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example is different from the fifth control example in that a series of effect scenario table 222HA is added.

The series of effect scenario table 222HA is a data table in which the effect mode of the series of effect to be executed corresponding to the progressing game situation is defined. Here, of the series of effect scenario table 222HA with reference to FIG. 400, the contents of the normal figure scenario table 222HA1 in which the effect scenario of the series of effect set based on the variation of the normal map is defined will be described.

FIG. 400 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the series of effect scenario table 222HA. In addition, in FIG. 400, among the contents specified in the series production scenario table 222HA, only the characteristic contents of the eighth control example (the production scenario of the series production set based on the fluctuation of the normal map) are shown. Therefore, the description and description of the same contents as the above-mentioned fifth control example, that is, the contents of the effect mode of the series of effects set corresponding to the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 400, in the eighth control example, when setting the production mode of a series of effects based on the fluctuation of the normal figure, it is possible to set a plurality of scenarios per normal figure (scenarios 1 to 4 per normal figure). It is configured to set different per-figure scenarios based on the results of the first prediction (prediction about the length of the waiting period that can occur during the execution of a series of effects) that is executed when the per-figure changes. It is composed.

Specifically, when it is determined whether or not the first special symbol (special figure 1) is changing at the start of the change of the normal figure, which is won per long opening of the normal figure, and it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing. In addition, the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is determined. Next, the game period of the game per Fuzu long opening executed based on the current Fuzu variation is compared with the remaining period of the executing Tokuzu 1 variation, and the end timing of the executing Tokuzu 1 variation is determined. It is determined whether it is later than the end time of the game per Fuzu long opening executed based on the current fluctuation of the Fuzu, and if it is determined to be later, it is special from the end time of the game per Fuzu long opening. FIG. 1 The waiting period until the fluctuation is completed (special figure 2 the period until the fluctuation can be executed) is determined. Then, it is configured to set a scenario per drawing corresponding to the length of the waiting period determined by the above-mentioned processing.

With this configuration, it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation will not be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, so it depends on the length of the waiting period. It is possible to execute a series of productions in a different production mode.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first prediction, when the special figure 1 change is not being executed at the start timing of the normal figure change, or the end timing of the special figure 1 change being executed is longer than the game period per the normal figure long. If it is before, since the waiting period cannot be predicted in advance, only the production mode of the series of effects corresponding to the normal map fluctuation time is set at the start of the normal map fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 400, the series of effect scenario table 222HA defines a plurality of scenarios per normal map set based on the prediction result of the first prediction executed at the start of the normal map fluctuation, and the first prediction. As a prediction result of, if the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is "less than 2 seconds", "scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, and if it is "more than 2 seconds and less than 30 seconds", It is stipulated that "scenario per normal figure 2" is set, and "scenario 3 per normal figure" is set when it is "30 seconds or more". Further, when the prediction result of the first prediction is "unpredictable", it is stipulated that "scenario 4 per normal figure" is set.

Here, the contents of each scenario will be explained. When "Scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During the change of the normal figure", "Scenario 2" is set to "During the game per game", and "Variation of the special figure 2" is set as the production mode of the series of effects. The content of the scenario is defined so that the production mode corresponding to "Scenario 3" is set in "Medium". That is, when "Scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period is short, the effect mode indicating the game per normal figure is shown without setting the effect mode dedicated to the special figure 2 waiting period. A series of effects is executed, which shifts from the above to the effect mode showing the variation of the special figure 2.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand by setting the effect mode indicating the special figure 2 waiting period for a short period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Can be done. In this control example, when the scenario 1 per the normal figure is set, the special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds occurs when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long open of the normal figure. It is configured so that the effect mode that can be set during the game per normal figure is continuously set, but the effect is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 changes during the special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds. It may be configured to set the effect mode which can be set in.

When "Scenario 2 per normal figure" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During the change of the normal figure", "Scenario 2" is set to "During the game per game", and "Variation of the special figure 2" is set as the production mode of the series of effects. The content of the scenario is defined so that the production mode corresponding to "Scenario 3" is set in "Waiting" and "Scenario 4" is set in "Special figure 2 changing". That is, when the "scenario 2 per normal figure" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period exists for a predetermined period, the effect mode dedicated to the special figure 2 waiting period is set.

With this configuration, when the special figure 2 waiting period occurs for a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a series of effects that do not give the player a sense of discomfort (a feeling of delay). Further, in this control example, when "scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, "scenario 3" set to "during special figure 2 fluctuation" is set, and when "scenario 2 per normal figure" is set. Is configured to correspond to "Special Figure 2 Standby". With this configuration, it is possible to set an effect mode for transitioning from "scenario 2" to "scenario 3" as a series of effects regardless of the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of effects that do not give a feeling of strangeness to the player.

Next, when "Scenario 3 per Fuzu" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During the change of the Fuzu", "Scenario 2" is set to "During the game per Fuzu", and "Special" as the production mode of the series of effects. The contents of the scenario are defined so that the production mode corresponding to "Scenario 2", "Scenario 3", and "Special Figure 2 in the process of changing" is set in "Waiting for change". That is, when the "scenario 3 per normal figure" is set, that is, when the waiting period for the special figure 2 is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the period during which the corresponding "scenario 2" is set during the game per normal figure is set. It is configured to be longer than other per-figure scenarios.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that even if the special figure 2 waiting period is long, that one period is during the game per normal figure. Therefore, it is difficult to think that the special figure 2 waiting period is long. In addition, since the effect mode (scenario 2) corresponding to the game per game is displayed for a long period of time, the game per game is executed for a long time instead of the special figure 2 waiting period for the player. You can make me think that it has been done.

In addition, when "Public map per scenario 4" is set, it is a case where the fluctuation status of the special figure 1 fluctuation during the game per normal map long opening cannot be predicted at the start of the normal map fluctuation, so "Public map per scenario 4" is set. Only "Scenario 1" corresponding to "Figure is changing" is set, and this process is terminated. When "Scenario 4 per normal figure" is set, it is determined whether the scenario transition condition is satisfied at the scenario switching timing as in the above-mentioned fifth control example, and the scenario based on the determination result is set. It is configured as follows.

Further, even if a different scenario for hitting a normal figure is set as a scenario for hitting a normal figure, the same effect mode is set during the small hit game and the big hit game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402, a flow in the case where the scenario 2 per normal figure is set as a series of effects of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 401 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the scenario 2 per normal figure is set as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 401, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed at the time when the fluctuation of the normal map is executed. Then, when the waiting period "20 seconds" is determined as the processing result of the first prediction processing, the production data corresponding to the "normal map per scenario 2" defined in the series production scenario table 222HA at the start of the normal map fluctuation. Is set and stored in the effect scenario storage area 223HB described later. Then, based on the passage of time, a series of effects are executed in an effect mode corresponding to the effect data stored in the effect scenario storage area 223HB.

In this way, if the future game content can be predicted at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, a plurality of production data (scenarios) can be set together to set the production mode of the series of productions. Processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 402, a flow in the case where the scenario 4 per normal figure is set as a series of effects will be described. FIG. 402 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the scenario 4 per normal figure is set as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 402, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed at the time when the fluctuation of the normal map is executed. Then, when it is determined that the stop timing of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 being executed as the processing result of the first prediction process is before the stop timing of the fluctuation per normal figure, the length of the waiting period can be predicted. Since it is impossible, the processing result of the first prediction process is determined to be "unpredictable", and at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, the production data corresponding to the "scenario 4 per normal map" specified in the series of production scenario table 222HA. Is set.

That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 402, a new period from when the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped until the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening of the normal figure. Special Figure 1 Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the fluctuation will be executed, it is not possible to predict the length of the waiting period. In such a case, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, only the production mode (scenario 1) during the period corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal map is set as the production mode of the series of effects, and when the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped (at the start of the normal map hit). ), The second prediction process is executed.

The second prediction process is for determining the length of the waiting period again when the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped (at the start of hitting the normal map), and the length of the waiting period cannot be determined in the first prediction process. This is the process that is executed when In this second prediction process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed when the normal map fluctuation is stopped (at the start of the normal map), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is in progress, the executing feature is executed. FIG. 1 The length of the waiting period is determined by comparing the remaining period of the fluctuation with the game period of the game per long opening of the normal figure. Then, based on the determination result, the effect mode of the series effect is set based on the contents specified in the series effect scenario table 222HA.

As shown in FIG. 402, if the waiting period cannot be predicted even in the second prediction process (when the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the timing when the second prediction process is executed), Even at this point in time, since the waiting period cannot be determined, the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation or the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation during the game per normal figure (game per game long open of the normal figure) is constantly monitored. The constant monitoring process for this is executed. Then, if it is determined by the constant monitoring process that the special figure 2 change is executed before the new special figure 1 change is executed, the special figure 2 change corresponds to the start of the special figure 2 change. The effect mode (scenario 3) corresponding to the fluctuation is set.

As described above, in the eighth control example, when setting the production mode of the series of effects executed based on the fluctuation of the normal map, the waiting period in which the irregular period is set according to the game situation is set. It is configured to predict the length and execute a series of effects according to the prediction result. With this configuration, even if a long waiting period is set during the period in which the series of effects is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a series of effects that does not give a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the eighth control example, since the waiting period is predicted at the timing when the series of effects is executed, the series of effects executed before the time when the waiting period is actually set is set. The effect mode can be variably set according to the length of the waiting period. Therefore, among the production modes of the series of productions, it is possible to execute a series of productions without a sense of incongruity as compared with the case where only the production mode set corresponding to the waiting period is changed according to the length of the waiting period. ..

Further, in the eighth control example, in the state where the waiting period is set, it is possible to set an effect mode indicating that the period is other than the waiting period (for example, the game period per normal figure). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a long waiting period is set. In the 8th control example, as in the 5th control example described above, since the right-handed game is configured to be performed during the series of productions, whether or not the present is the waiting period depends on the game method. It can be difficult for the player to discriminate.

In addition, in this eighth control example, when it is difficult (impossible) to predict the length of the waiting period at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, the waiting period is again at a different timing (game start timing per normal map). It is configured to execute a process for predicting the length of the (second prediction process). In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for predicting the length of the waiting period in the period until the waiting period is set, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy for the length of the waiting period.

In addition, in the process of predicting the waiting period, only when the waiting period cannot be predicted, it is configured to constantly monitor the game status during the game per normal figure, and the waiting period is supported based on the result of the constant monitoring. Since it is configured to set the effect mode to be performed, it is possible to simplify the process for setting the effect mode of the series of effects.

In this eighth control example, in the processing for predicting the waiting period (first prediction processing, second prediction processing), the length of the waiting period is determined by using the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution. It is configured to predict (discriminate), but is not limited to this, for example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is pre-read, and the next is based on the pre-reading result. The length of the waiting period may be predicted by using the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed in 1.

With this configuration, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 402, when the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is before the start timing of the game per normal figure, that is, during execution. If the start condition of the special figure 2 change (the winning of the ball to the second winning opening 640) cannot be satisfied at the end of the special figure 1 change, the change time of the special figure 1 change to be executed next is set. It is possible to look ahead and predict the length of the waiting period based on the look-ahead result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy for the length of the waiting period.

Further, in the eighth control example, similarly to the fifth control example described above, the special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed in preference to the special figure 1 variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation may be configured to be executed according to the winning order of the balls to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the special figure 2 variation may be prioritized. Then, the special figure 1 variation may be configured to be executed.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 403 to 410. In this control example, the winning information command processing 8 (see FIG. 403) is executed instead of the winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361) for the fifth control example described above, and a series of effect discrimination processing (see FIG. 403). (See 404), the hit-related command process 8 (see FIG. 405) instead of the hit-related command process 5 (see FIG. 364), and the hit-related command process (see FIG. 406). The point to be executed, the point to execute the variation effect setting process 8 (see FIG. 407) instead of the variation effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 369), and the point to execute the effect setting process during constant monitoring (see FIG. 408). And, a point to execute the normal drawing effect setting process 8 (see FIG. 409) instead of the normal drawing effect setting process (see FIG. 371), and a point to execute a series of effect prediction setting process (see FIG. 410). , And are the same otherwise. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the points where the contents of the referenced data table have been changed and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the changes in the contents of the referenced data table, the numerical values have simply been changed, which is technically ideological. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the winning information command processing 8 (C3242) will be described with reference to FIG. 403. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 8 (C3242) executed in the eighth control example. In this prize information command process 8 (C3242), a process (series effect determination process (series effect determination process)) is executed when a prize information command is received during a series of effect execution for the above-mentioned prize information command process 5 (see FIG. 361). The difference is that C3441))) is added in FIG. 404, and the other points are the same. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning information command processing 8 (C3242) is executed, the same processing of C3401 to C3405 as the winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and then the special processing of C3403 is performed. If it is determined that there is no 2 hit information (C3403: NO), the process of C3441 is executed. In the process of C3441, a series of effect determination processes are executed (C3441). The details of this series of effect determination processing (C3441) will be described later with reference to FIG. 404.

After executing the process of C3441, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and then the present process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the series of effect discrimination processing (C3441) will be described with reference to FIG. 404. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the contents of a series of effect determination processes (C3441) executed in the winning information command process 8 (FIG. 403) in the eighth control example. In this series of effect determination process (C3441), it is determined whether or not the series of effects is currently being executed, and when it is determined that the series of effects is being executed, the type of the winning command received this time (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 1). 2. The process corresponding to the general figure) is executed.

When the series effect determination process (C3441) is executed, first, the value of the series effect counter 223EK is acquired (C5101), and then it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223EK is 0 (C5102). The series of effect counter 223EK acquired in the process of C4101 is set with a value corresponding to the effect period when the series of effect is executed, and is subtracted (updated) in the effect update process executed periodically, and the counter value. Is configured to end the series of effects when becomes "0". That is, in the process of C5102, it is determined whether or not a series of effects is being executed.

In the processing of C5102, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223EK is not larger than 0 (0) (C5102: NO), since the series effect is not currently being performed, various display modes during the series effect execution. The process of C5103 to C5110 for setting is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of C5111.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series production counter 223EK is larger than 0 (C5102: YES), the series production is being executed, so that the prize information command received this time is the special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize). It is determined whether the command is related to (C5103), and if it is determined that the special 2 prize is won (C5103: YES), the information of the production scenario storage area 223HB is read (C5104), and then the constant monitoring flag 223HC is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (C5105). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223HC is off (C5105: NO), the process proceeds to C5108.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223HC is on (C5105: YES), that is, in the production period in which the series of productions of this time is executed, the waiting period in which the execution of the variation in FIG. If the situation is unpredictable, the waiting period is calculated (C5106).

Here, the calculation contents executed in the process of C5106 will be described. Since the processing of C5106 is the processing executed when the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning (special 2 winning) is received, the present time is the second winning opening 640 (the starting winning opening of the special drawing 2 variation). The ball wins a prize, and the condition that is a part of the execution opportunity of the special figure 2 fluctuation is satisfied. In this control example, the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change are not executed at the same time (overlapping), and the special figure 2 change has priority over the special figure 1 change. Is configured to be executed.

That is, when the special figure 1 change is executed at the present time, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the winning information command received this time is executed after the execution of the special figure 1 change is completed. Therefore, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation currently being executed is extracted using the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG, and the extraction result is calculated as a waiting period. If the special figure 1 change is not executed at this time, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the winning information command received this time will be executed immediately, so "0" is set as the waiting period. ..

In this control example, the number of balls to be won in the second winning opening 640 is set to one during the execution of one series of effects (during the game per one Fuzu long open). Therefore, when a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize) is received in the process of C5103, the process for calculating the waiting period is always executed. Without limitation, for example, in the case of configuring so that two or more balls can be won in the second winning opening 640 (during a game per one Fuzu long opening) during one series of productions. Is set to turn on a flag (calculated flag) indicating that the waiting period has been calculated in the processing of C5106, and after determining that the constant monitoring flag 223HC is on in the processing of C5105 (C5105: YES). , It is configured to determine whether the calculated flag described above is set to ON, and if the calculated flag is set to ON, the processing of C5106 and C5107 is skipped and the process proceeds to C5108. It is good to configure it like this.

With this configuration, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 and receive the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning multiple times while the series of effects is being executed. Since the waiting period can be calculated only based on the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize received first, it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary processing. That is, in this control example, the period from the timing when the special figure 2 is first won during the execution of the series of effects to the execution of the change in the special figure 2 is set as the waiting period, and the effect mode according to the length of the waiting period. By setting, even if the period (waiting period) in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed is long even though the special figure 2 is won, the effect (during the waiting period) is executed in the middle of the series of effects. Since it is configured to prevent the effect to be executed from being delayed and the effect of the effect from being reduced, a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 while the series of effects is being executed. However, even if the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received multiple times, the process of calculating the length of the waiting period based on the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize received from the second time onward is unnecessary. Processing.

In addition, as in this control example, in the case of configuring to calculate the waiting period every time the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received during the period in which the series of effects is being executed, the special feature is first. Fig. 2 When a prize information command indicating a prize is received, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the variation in Special Figure 1 is executed, and if it is being executed, the remaining period, and calculate the waiting period. When a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize is received, it is determined whether the special figure change during execution is a special figure 1 change or a special figure 2 change, and if the special figure 1 change is being executed, it is determined. , The waiting period may be calculated based on the remaining period of the change in the special figure 1 being executed and the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 winning previously received.

In this case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning received earlier is pre-read, and if the pre-reading result is incorrect, the winning indicating the special figure 2 winning received this time is obtained. The waiting period is the remaining period until the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the information command is executed, that is, the total period of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation to be executed next. It is good to configure it to be set as. With this configuration, it is possible to set the period during which the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed as the waiting period, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the deviation is won in the special figure 2 lottery. can.

Returning to FIG. 404, the description will be continued. In the process of C5108, a display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning is set (C5108), and the process proceeds to the process of C5109. In the process of C5108, a display command indicating that the special figure 2 has won is set. The display commands set here include, for example, a direct display mode for directly displaying that the special figure 2 has been won, and a display indicating the remaining period until the special figure change corresponding to the winning is executed. A mode, that is, an indirect display mode that indirectly displays that a prize has been won in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In this control example, the above-mentioned direct display mode and indirect display mode can be set by using the display command corresponding to the special figure 2 prize, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , The effect mode may be set based on the lottery result of the variation, or may be configured based on the length of the waiting period of the series of effects. In addition, during the series of productions, the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 first and the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 after the second time are different. Is also good.

Next, in the process of C5109, it is determined whether the ball that has won the V winning opening 650A has passed through the specific region (V region) (whether there was a V winning) (C5109). If it is determined that the ball that has won the V winning opening 650A has passed the specific area (V area) (C5109: YES), a display command corresponding to the V winning is set (C5110), and the process proceeds to C5111. .. If it is determined that the ball that has won the V winning opening 650A has not passed through the specific region (V region) (C5109: NO), the process proceeds to C5111.

In the process of C5111, another effect mode related to winning information is set (C5111), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C51112), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the hit-related command process 8 (C3261) will be described with reference to FIG. 405. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command process 8 (C3261) executed in the eighth control example. In this hit-related command process 8 (C3261), the effect mode in each period of the series of effects is set based on the execution of the game per game during the period in which the series of effects is being executed.

When the hit-related command process 8 (C3261) is executed, the same processes of C3501 to C3504 as the hit-related command process 5 (see FIG. 364) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and the main control is performed in the process of C3505. If it is determined that the command related to the normal figure is received from the device 110 (C3505: YES), the command process related to the normal figure is executed (C3551), and then this process is terminated. The details of this per-figure related command processing (C3551) will be described later with reference to FIG. 406.

Next, with reference to FIG. 406, the contents of the command processing (C3551) related to the normal drawing will be described. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing the contents of the per-figure related command processing (C3551) executed in the eighth control example. This hit-related command process (C3551) is executed when a hit-related command related to a normal figure is received (C3505: YES in FIG. 405), and the start timing and end of the game per normal figure. At the timing, various processes for setting the effect mode of the series of effects are executed.

In the command processing related to the normal figure (C3551), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (C5201). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (C5201: YES), it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223EK is larger than 0, that is, whether the series effect is currently being executed (C5202). .. If it is determined that the value of the series production counter 223EK is not larger than 0 (C5202: NO), the opening command processing for display is executed (C5203), the middle flag 223HA per normal figure is set to ON, and the C5215 Move to processing.

The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is a command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the fifth control example. Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of C5202, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223EK is larger than 0 (C5202: YES), the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223HB is read out (C5205), and then the effect scenario. It is determined whether or not the information stored in the storage area 223HB is scenario 4 per normal figure (C5206).

Here, in the effect scenario storage area 223HB, information indicating the normal map hit scenario set in the series of effect prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 410) performed when the normal map fluctuation (normal map lottery) is executed is stored. In the processing of C5206, when it is determined that the game is "Scenario 4 per game (see FIG. 400)", which is a scenario per game in which the effect mode corresponding to the period during the game per game is not set. , A process for setting an effect mode during a game per normal figure in a series of effects is executed.

In the processing of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223HB is not scenario 4 per normal figure (scenarios 1 to 3 per normal figure) (C5206: NO), the normal figure has already been made. Since the effect mode during the winning game is set, that is, in the series of effect prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 410) performed when the normal map fluctuation (normal map lottery) is executed, the normal map per game is being played in advance. Since it is the case that the effect mode corresponding to the period of is set, the process of C5207 to C5210 is skipped without setting the effect mode corresponding to the period during the game per normal figure in this process. ) Move to the processing of C5204.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5206, when it is determined that the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223HB is scenario 4 per normal figure (C5206: YES), the special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter). The value of 223EG is compared with the game period per normal figure (C5207). Explaining the processing contents of C5207 in detail, first, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is calculated by using the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG. For example, when the special figure 1 fluctuation of 60 seconds is executed, the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of 60 seconds at the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation (in this control example, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is , Since it is configured to subtract 1 in the effect update process 7 (see C3142 in FIG. 397) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 281), the value corresponds to 60 seconds. "60,000") is set. When this process is executed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is "30000". Therefore, "30 seconds" is calculated as the residual fluctuation time of the fluctuation in Special Figure 1. Next, it is calculated based on the type of the game per game executed this time. In this control example, since the opening command output from the main control device 110 includes information indicating the type of the game per game to be executed this time, the game period per game is calculated based on the information. Here, as the game period per normal figure, the time specified as the end condition that is established based on the passage of time is calculated.

Specifically, the game per game ends when 3 seconds have passed since the game per game was started, or when the number of winning balls to the second winning opening 640 reaches 10. If the end condition is set in advance, "3 seconds", which is the maximum time during which the game per game can be continued, is set as the game period per game. As a result, in the process of predicting the waiting period (the period from winning the special figure 2 to the execution of the change in the special figure 2) in advance in order to set the effect mode of the series of effects, the normal figure used for the prediction is hit. Since it is possible to prevent a situation in which the actual game period per game is longer than the game period, the period predicted as the period during which the ball can win the second prize opening 640. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640 after the lapse of time and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. Therefore, even when the effect mode is set in advance based on the prediction result, it is possible to make it difficult for the actual game content and the effect content to be executed to deviate from each other, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the game period per game is calculated as described above, the game per game is completed in a shorter period than the calculated game period per game, that is, the predetermined number (1) within the game period per game. The game may end when the ball (10) wins in the second winning opening 640. In this case, the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, and when the game per game ends, it corresponds to the production corresponding to the waiting period or the special figure 2 fluctuation period. Since the production is performed, it is configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Return to FIG. 406 to continue the explanation. After finishing the processing of C5207, then, based on the comparison result of C5207, the remaining period of the special figure 1 (the remaining period of the variation of the special figure 1) is larger (longer) than the game period per normal figure, that is, the feature being executed. FIG. 1 It is determined whether or not the timing at which the fluctuation ends is later than the end timing of the game per normal map to be executed this time (C5208). In the processing of C5208, if it is determined that the remaining period of the special figure 1 is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: NO), the special figure is obtained when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per normal figure. Since there is a possibility that 1 fluctuation has not been executed, the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to ON (C5209), and the process proceeds to C5210.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5208, when it is determined that the remaining period of the special figure 1 is longer than the game period per normal figure, that is, the variation of the special figure 1 being executed does not end during the game per normal figure executed this time (C5208). : YES), skip the process of setting the constant monitoring flag 223HC (C5209) because it is confirmed that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game. Then, the process proceeds to C5210.

In the process of C5210, a series of production scenarios during the game per corresponding normal figure is set (C5210), and then the process proceeds to the process of C5204. In the processing of C5204, the flag for hitting the normal figure is set to ON (C5204), and then the process proceeds to the processing of C5215. Here, to explain in detail the processing content of C5210 described above, in the processing of C5208, when it is determined that the remaining period of Special Figure 1 is longer than the game period per normal figure (C5208: YES), the difference period, that is, , Calculate the period from the end of the game per normal figure to the end of the remaining fluctuation of Special Figure 1. Then, using the calculation result as the special figure 2 waiting period, the scenario per normal figure to which the special figure 2 waiting period corresponds is selected from the scenario table per normal figure specified in the series of production scenario table 222HA, and the effect is produced. Set the aspect.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5208, if it is determined that the remaining period of the special figure 1 is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: NO), the effect mode (series effect) is performed at the timing when the ball actually wins the second winning opening 640. Since the effect mode) according to the waiting period in the above-described fifth control example is set, the same effect mode as the above-mentioned fifth control example is set.

Next, in the process of C5201 when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C5201: NO), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (C5211). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (C5211: YES), the middle flag 223HA is set to off (C5212), the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to off (C5213), and the ending for display is set. A command is set (C5214), and then the process proceeds to C5215. The display ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is a command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the fifth control example. Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the processing of C5211 (C5211: NO), the process proceeds to the processing of C5215. In the process of C5215, the process corresponding to the other command is executed (C5215), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the variation effect setting process 8 (C4044) will be described with reference to FIG. 407. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process 8 (C4044) executed in the eighth control example. In this variable effect setting process 8 (C4044), when the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to ON (during a game per game executed during a series of effects, the length of the waiting period is not set. In the case), the process for setting the variable effect to be executed is added, and the content of the process for setting the variable effect of the normal symbol is changed. It is different from the process 5 (see FIG. 370), and is the same except for the process 5. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variation effect setting process 8 (C4044) is executed, the same process of C4101 as the variation effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 370) of the above-mentioned fifth control example is executed, and the special figure variation effect is not set (normal). If it is determined (C4101: NO), the normal drawing effect setting process 8 is executed (C4167), and then this process is terminated. The details of the effect setting process 8 (C4167) for normal drawing will be described later with reference to FIG. 409.

On the other hand, in the process of C4101, when it is determined that the special figure variation effect is set (C4101: YES), then it is determined whether or not the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to ON (C4151). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223HC is on (C4151: YES), the continuous monitoring effect setting process is executed (C4152), and the process proceeds to the process of C4102. The details of this constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223HC is not set to ON in the processing of C4151, the processing of C4152 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C4102. After executing the process of C4152, the same processes of C4102 to C4116 as the variation effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 370) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 408, the contents of the effect setting process (C4152) during constant monitoring will be described. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the contents of the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) executed in the eighth control example. This constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is executed in the variation effect setting process 8 (see C4044 in FIG. 407), and is executed when a variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation is received. It is a thing.

In the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation is received (whether the special 1 fluctuation is started) (C5301), and the special figure 1 fluctuation is dealt with. When it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (special 1 variation has started) (C5301: YES), the variation pattern extracted by the processing of C3303 of the variation pattern command process 5 (see C3204 in FIG. 363) is used. Based on this, the fluctuation time of the current special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation time) is extracted (C5302). Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is larger (longer) than the period per normal figure (C5303).

In the processing of C5303, the special figure 1 fluctuation time extracted in the processing of C5302 is compared with the remaining period of the game per normal figure (period per normal figure) during execution, and the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is set. Determine if it is later than the end timing of the per-figure period. In this control example, since the constantly monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is configured to be executed when the constantly monitoring flag 223HC is set to ON, that is, at least during the game per game, C5303 The process of is executed during the game per game, but if the process of C5303 is configured to be executable in a state where the game per game is not executed, the game per game is executed. As a non-existent state, the special figure 1 fluctuation time and the normal figure per period may be compared by using the normal figure per period "0".

In the processing of C5303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: YES). Since the special figure 1 fluctuation does not end during the game per game, the effect mode (a series of effect scenarios) during the game per game is set based on the determination result of C5303 (C5304) and constantly monitored. The flag 223HC is set to off (C5305), and the process proceeds to C5306.

Here, the processing of C5304 will be described in detail. First, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: YES), the difference. The period, that is, the period from the end of the game per normal figure to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is calculated, and the calculated period is the waiting period for the second special symbol (special figure 2) change (special figure 2 standby). Period), and among the scenarios 1 to 3 per figure specified in the series of production scenario table 222HA, the effect mode is set based on the scenario per normal figure corresponding to the special figure 2 waiting period calculated this time. On the other hand, in the processing of C5303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is not longer than the normal figure per period (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is earlier than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303). : NO), even if the current special figure 1 change is executed, the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, that is, the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during this special figure 1 change. If not, since the game per normal figure is still being executed even after the special figure 1 change to be executed this time is completed, whether the special figure 1 change is executed during the remaining games per normal figure or not. FIG. 2 Since it is not possible to predict whether the fluctuation will be executed, the processing of C5304 and C5305 is skipped, and the process shifts to the processing of C5306. In this case, since the constant monitoring flag 223HC is not set to off, the continuous monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is continuously executed.

In the eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402, a period effect (series) in which the period from the execution of the normal map fluctuation to the execution of the jackpot game is used to have a relationship. When executing the effect), the previous game content (length of the special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted at multiple timings (normal map fluctuation start timing, game start timing per normal map), and the effect is produced based on the prediction result. It is configured to set the aspect. Then, at each prediction timing, only when it is determined that the prediction is unpredictable, the continuous monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is executed, and it is always monitored whether the special figure change is executed during the game per normal figure. It is configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to collectively set the production mode of a series of effects for the range in which the previous game content (length of the waiting period in Special Figure 2) can be predicted in advance. It is possible to simplify the process for setting the effect mode. In addition, since the process for predicting the content of the previous game can be executed at a plurality of timings, the prediction accuracy can be improved. Further, when the previous game content cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the production mode of the series production is executed based on the actual game content, so that the production of the series production is performed. The aspect can be set reliably.

Returning to FIG. 408, the description will be continued. In the processing of C5301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation has not been received (it is not the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301: NO), then the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 variation. When it is determined whether the pattern command has been received (whether it is the start of the special 2 fluctuation) (C5306) and when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation has been received (it is the start of the special 2 fluctuation). (C5306: YES) Since the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the game per normal figure, as described above with reference to FIG. 402, even during the game per normal figure during the special figure 2 change period. Scenario 3 is set as the corresponding production mode of the series of effects (C5307), the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to off (C5308), the special 2 variation command for display is set (C5309), and then the process proceeds to C5310. do.

The above-mentioned processing of C5307 is a case where a series of effects are executed based on the fluctuation of the normal map, and is executed at the first prediction process executed at the start timing of the fluctuation of the normal map and the game start timing per normal map. In any of the second prediction processes, the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the period during which the effect setting process is being constantly monitored during the game per normal figure. It is done when That is, it is a case where the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed without predicting the special figure 2 waiting period. In this way, when the special figure 2 variation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, the effect mode corresponding to the special figure 2 variation period is set in the processing of C5307. Therefore, even if it is not possible to predict the previous game content at a plurality of prediction timings, the production mode of the series production is executed based on the actual game content. The effect mode can be set reliably.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C5306 that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 has not started (C5306: NO), the process proceeds to the processing of C5310. In the processing of C5310, processing corresponding to other commands is executed (C5310), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 409, the contents of the effect setting process 8 (C4167) for normal drawing will be described. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 8 (C4167) for normal drawing executed in the eighth control example. The effect setting process 8 (C4167) for the normal map is a series of effect prediction setting process for predicting the content of the subsequent game and setting the series of effects when the condition for executing the series of effects of the normal map variation is satisfied. It differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example of the effect setting process for normal drawing (see FIG. 371) in that (first prediction process) is executed. Since the other contents are the same as the above-mentioned effect setting process for normal drawing (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the normal drawing effect setting process 8 (C4167), first, the same processing of C4201 to C4206 as the normal drawing effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and in the processing of C4206, a pseudo is executed. If it is determined that the series effect flag 223EC is off (C4206: NO), the series effect prediction setting process is executed (C4251), and then the process proceeds to the process of C4208. The details of this series of effect prediction setting processing (C4251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 410. Next, after executing the same processing of C4208 to C4212 as the effect setting processing for normal drawing (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above, the non-variable winning flag 223EF is set to off (C4252), and then this End the process.

Next, the contents of the series of effect prediction setting processing (C4251) will be described with reference to FIG. 410. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the contents of a series of effect prediction setting processes (C4251) executed in the eighth control example. In this series of effect prediction setting process (C4251), the future game content (special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted (first prediction) at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, and a series is performed based on the prediction result (first prediction result). The process for setting the effect mode during the period in which the effect is executed is executed, and there are cases where the length of the special figure 2 waiting period is predicted as the first prediction result and cases where it cannot be predicted. , Of the periods in which the series of effects are executed, the process for setting the effect mode is executed for different periods.

In the series of effect prediction setting processing (C4251), first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation of the normal map is a hit fluctuation (C5401). If it is determined that the current fluctuation in the normal map is not a hit fluctuation (C5401: NO), the condition for executing the series of effects is not satisfied, and the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal map this time is a hit fluctuation (C5401: YES), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter) 223EG is read out (C5402), and the special figure fluctuation time counter is read. It is determined whether the value of 223EG is larger than 0 (C5403).

In the process of C5403, when it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is 0, that is, it is determined that the current state is not during the special figure 1 fluctuation (C5403: NO), the present process is terminated as it is. That is, in this control example, the condition for executing the series of effects when the fluctuation per normal figure is executed, specifically, as shown in FIG. 409, the game state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol). , Normal symbol low probability state), this time the normal figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more, the series production counter 223GA is set to off, the non-variable winning flag 223EF is set to off, and the pseudo series Even if the effect flag 223EC is set to off and, as shown in FIG. 410, the condition that is satisfied when the current fluctuation of the normal map is a fluctuation per normal map is satisfied. If the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time when this process is executed, the series of effects is not executed (set).

With this configuration, the presence or absence of execution of a series of effects that can be executed based on the fluctuation per normal figure can be set according to the execution status of the special symbol change (special figure 1 change), so that it is in the normal state. In, it is possible to prevent a player who is performing a game in which a right-handed game is executed and only a fluctuation of a normal figure is executed, from executing a series of effects.

In the processing of C5403, when it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is larger than 0 (C5403: YES), that is, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is in progress, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is determined. The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated based on (C5404), and the current normal map fluctuation time and the game time per normal map executed after the end of the current normal map fluctuation are extracted and added up (C5405). In this C5405 process, by adding up the normal map fluctuation time and the normal map game period, the period from the current time (the start point of the normal map change) to the end of the normal map game (end period per normal map). Is executed.

Then, the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time calculated in the processing of C5404 and the total time (total time per normal figure) calculated in the processing of C5405 are compared (C5406), and the comparison result is the special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is larger (longer) than the total time per map (C5407). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is larger (longer) than the total time per normal figure (C5407: YES), the game per normal figure is completed by the time the change of the special figure 1 being executed is completed. Therefore, it is possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the game per game. Therefore, with reference to the series of production scenario table 223HA, a scenario per normal figure is set based on the difference time (waiting period of special figure 2) between the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 and the total time per normal figure (C5408), and then the book. End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5407, if it is determined that the residual fluctuation time of Special Figure 1 is shorter than the total time per normal figure (C5407: NO), the presence or absence of the waiting period of Special Figure 2 and the length are predicted at the present time. Since this is not possible, scenario 4 per drawing is set (C5409), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the eighth control example, when the normal map change is executed, the change state of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the game per normal map is predicted, and based on the prediction result. It is configured to set the production mode of a series of productions corresponding to the fluctuation of the general map. That is, when the normal map fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation executed this time, the normal map lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal map are calculated and used as the calculation result. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 change currently being executed ends during the game per normal figure, and the effect mode of a series of effects corresponding to the normal figure change is set based on the determination result. is doing.

With this configuration, for example, the change end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is later than the period during which the ball can win the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period per normal figure (maximum period). In this case, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) at which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed at the time when the normal figure fluctuation is executed. Thereby, as various effect modes executed during the waiting period, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the waiting period. Therefore, with respect to the above-mentioned fifth control example, since the period that can be variably set can be lengthened among the production modes of the series of effects according to the length of the waiting period, the series according to the length of the series of effects. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the production.

In the above-mentioned eighth control example, similarly to the above-mentioned fifth control example, as a game per normal figure, a game per short opening (closing period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, opening period is 0.1 seconds. ) And the game per long opening (closing period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, first opening period is 1 second, closing period (waiting period) is 1.5 seconds, second opening period is 0.5 seconds) And, because it is configured to be feasible, in the first prediction process (series effect prediction setting process (see C4251 in FIG. 410)) executed at the time of the change in the normal map, the winner was won in this change in the normal map. The hit type per normal figure may be discriminated, and the prediction range of the first prediction (the period during which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640) may be set based on the discriminating result. In addition, the mode of the prediction range corresponding to the type per map determined this time (the length and timing of the period during which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640), that is, the mode of the game per map to be executed. Based on this, it is determined how easy it is to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 during a game per game, and in the first prediction process, the waiting period (after the ball wins in the second winning opening 640) is determined. If it is not possible to predict the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the winning is executed), the winning difficulty determination means for determining the ease of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640. Based on the determination result of, the effect mode during the fluctuation period of the normal map may be set.

Specifically, a game per game (for example, a game per game that is determined by the winning difficulty determination means to have a low winning difficulty (a ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 by performing a normal game)). When the type per normal figure (for example, A per normal figure (see FIG. 336 (B))) corresponding to the game per long open of the normal figure is set, it is set as an effect mode set during the fluctuation period of the normal figure. , It is difficult to win a prize by setting an effect mode that makes it easy to move to the next effect mode that is set as a series of effects (even if a normal game is played, it is difficult to make the second winning opening 640 win a ball). When the type per normal figure (for example, B per normal figure (see FIG. 336 (B))) corresponding to the game per normal figure determined to be (for example, the game per game with the short open of the normal figure) is set, the normal game is set. Figure As an effect mode set during the fluctuation period, it is preferable to set an effect mode that suggests that a series of effects is completed (an effect mode that makes it difficult to shift to the next effect mode set as a series effect). .. In this way, when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing when the first prediction process is executed, the effect mode of the effect executed during the normal map fluctuation period is changed based on the type of the game per normal map to be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot game is likely to be executed with this change in the normal map at the time when the change in the normal map is started. Therefore, the first prediction process is executed. It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect to be executed when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing of the operation.

In addition, it corresponds to a game per game (for example, a game per game with a short opening) that is judged to have a high degree of difficulty in winning (it is difficult to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 even if a normal game is played). When the type per normal figure (for example, B per normal figure (see FIG. 336 (B))) is set, the effect mode corresponding to the series of effects may not be set. With this configuration, it is not possible to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 during a normal game, and the game is aimed at a big hit game (special figure 2 fluctuation, small hit winning, small hit game). It is possible to suppress the execution of a series of effects when it is difficult to progress. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 during the game per game, which has a high degree of difficulty in winning, it may be configured to execute a series of effects from the winning timing. 2 When the length of the waiting period (the period until the change in Special Figure 2 based on this prize is executed) at the time when the ball wins the prize opening 640 is a predetermined period or more (for example, 30 seconds or more). , It is preferable to use a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the time when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 to set the effect mode that is usually set during the normal drawing fluctuation period.

In this way, when a game per game with a high degree of difficulty in winning is executed, the start timing of the series of effects is not the timing of the start of the fluctuation of the normal map, but the timing when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. It is possible to suppress the frequency with which the series of effects ends in the middle of the series of effects even though the series of effects has been executed.

Further, in this control example, an example is shown in which one type of per-figure corresponding to a game per per-figure having a low difficulty of winning is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game per per-figure having a low difficulty of winning is supported. Multiple types of per-figure can be set, and the game mode of the per-figure game executed corresponding to each type of per-figure may be different. A game mode of a game per game (game Α per game) corresponding to the type Α per game, which is configured so that at least the type Α per game and the type Β per game can be set as the type per game. As a game mode with a closing period of 0.1 seconds and an opening period of 3 seconds, as a game mode of a game per game (game Β per game) corresponding to the type Β per game, the closing period is 0.1 seconds. , The game mode of the first opening period 0.1 seconds, the closing period (waiting period) 3 seconds, and the second opening period (2.9 seconds) may be set.

In this case, when the game per game with a low winning difficulty is executed, the period during which the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 differs depending on the set type of the game, so that the game starts to fluctuate. In the first prediction process executed at the timing, the period during which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 is determined based on the type per drawing, and the first prediction process is executed based on the determination result of the determination means. It is good to configure it so that the range of prediction to be made is different. Specifically, when the above-mentioned game per game A is executed, the range of prediction to be executed in the first prediction process is in the range of 0.1 seconds to 3.1 seconds from the start of the game per game (1). If the game is set based on the opening period) and the game Β per game is executed, the range of prediction to be executed in the first prediction process is set from 3.3 seconds to 6.1 from the start of the game per game. It may be configured to be set based on the range of seconds (range of the second opening period).

In this way, the prediction to be executed in the first prediction process is performed by setting the prediction range in association with each other based on the game mode (winning difficulty, setting timing of the winning period) of the game per game to be executed. It is possible to narrow the range of. This makes it easier to predict the waiting period in the first prediction process. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a series of effects and enhance the effect of the effects.

In addition, it is possible to set the type Γ per map as the type per map that corresponds to the game per game with low winning difficulty, and the game per game (game per game Γ) corresponding to the type Γ per map. When configured to set a game mode of a closing period of 0.1 seconds, a first opening period of 1.5 seconds, a closing period (waiting period) of 3 seconds, and a second opening period (1.5 seconds). That is, when a game per game in which a plurality of open periods in which a ball can win is set in the second winning opening 640, the first prediction process first corresponds to the second opening period set later. By comparing the range to be performed and the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution, it is determined whether the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the second opening period. If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the second opening period, the special figure being executed from the end timing of the second opening period. 1 It is configured to set the waiting period up to the end timing of the fluctuation, while it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation is before the end timing of the second opening period. In that case, next, the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the range corresponding to the first opening period are compared.

Then, when it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first opening period is earlier than the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure being executed from the end timing of the first opening period is executed. 1 It is configured to set the waiting period up to the end timing of the fluctuation, while it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first opening period is later than the elapsed timing of the first opening period, that is, the first. If the special figure 1 fluctuation that is being executed is stopped and displayed by the time the 1 opening period elapses, it is assumed that the waiting period could not be predicted in the first prediction process, and the second prediction process described above is executed. It is good to configure it like this.

<9th control example>
Next, a ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 to 420. The ninth control example is different from the fifth control example described above in that the control process for the final variation effect executed in the final variation in the time saving state is different.

In the above-mentioned fifth control example, the lottery result of the variation and the special figure 2 variation executed after the variation (normally when the time saving state is completed) are used by using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state. It was configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 variation) executed in the state where the state is set. With this configuration, when a hit (big hit, small hit) is won by the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the time saving state ends, it is possible to suggest that fact in the final fluctuation effect.

The ninth control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that the process for setting the effect mode of the final variation effect is described in detail. Specifically, when the final change in the time saving state is executed, the effect of the final change effect is produced based on the lottery result of the change and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C). It is configured to set the aspect.

Further, when the final fluctuation in the time saving state is a deviation fluctuation, the effect period of the final variation effect is set based on the special figure 2 reserved ball number (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C). There is. That is, when the final fluctuation in the time-saving state is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, the next special Figure 2 fluctuation (special Figure 2 fluctuation executed during the normal state), which is the suggestion target of the final fluctuation effect, is executed after the fluctuation is completed. Therefore, if the final fluctuation in the time-saving state is an out-of-time fluctuation, the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the already acquired special figure 2 hold is made in advance at the start timing of the final fluctuation in the time-saving state. It is configured to set the effect mode (final variation effect).

<About the electrical configuration of the 9th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 to 415. The ninth control example is different from the fifth control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the other parts are the same. Is. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 411 (A). FIG. 411 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 411 (A), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example has the final variation effect table 222IA and the final variation effect table 222IA with respect to the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the final effect variable setting table 222IB is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The final variation effect table 222IA is a data table referred to when setting the effect mode of the final variation effect, and is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is received. Is to be done. Here, the contents of the final variation effect table 222IA will be described with reference to FIGS. 412 and 413.

FIG. 412 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect table 222IA. As shown in FIG. 412 (A), the final variation effect table 222IA is referred to when the lottery result of the variation is a hit and the final table 222IA1 for winning is referred to when the lottery result of the variation is a hit. It has a final table 222IA2 for disengagement.

Here, the production period in the final fluctuation production will be described. In the ninth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, a "waiting period", a "first period", a "second period", and a "third period" are formed as the effect period of the final variation effect. It is configured so that the effect mode can be set for each period. In the fifth control example described above, regardless of the lottery result of the variation (time saving final variation), an effect mode (standby effect) for notifying that the final variation effect starts is set in the "waiting period", and the "waiting effect" is set. In the "first period", an effect mode (acquisition effect) for acquiring a large number of special figure 2 hold is set, and in the "second period", the lottery result of the change and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are suggested. The effect mode (result effect) for showing the effect result of the mission effect is set in the "third period".

Further, based on the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 when the "waiting period" has elapsed, it is configured to determine whether to execute the acquisition effect or the mission effect as the effect to be executed during the "first period". However, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 after the "waiting period" has elapsed is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (if the upper limit number (4)), the mission effect is executed in the "first period". rice field.

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the effect mode of the final variation effect is set based on the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the timing when the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed. It is different from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that. Further, it differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that the effect mode of the final variation effect set at the timing when the time-saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed is different based on the lottery result of the variation. is doing. Further, it is different from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that a plurality of timings for setting the effect mode of the final variation effect are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 412 (B), the contents specified in the winning final table 222IA1 possessed by the final variation effect table 222IA will be described. FIG. 412 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the final table 222IA1 for hitting. As shown in FIG. 412 (B), in the winning final table 222IA1, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C (special figure 2 reserved ball number) and the acquired effect counter 223F are used. The effect mode set for each effect period of the final variable effect is defined.

Specifically, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C is "0" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is set as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 189", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect, and in the range of "190 to 198", the effect pattern C is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. ing. Further, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C is "1, 2" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 198", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. Further, in the range where the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C is "3" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is "0 to 109", the effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "110 to 198", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect.

Here, the detailed contents of various production patterns defined in the winning final table 222IA1 will be described. The effect pattern A is such that the same final variation effect as the fifth control example described above is executed, and as described above with reference to FIG. 318, the effect pattern A is set first in the effect period in which the final variation effect is executed. In the waiting period (0th period) to be performed, a "waiting effect (effect A)", which is an effect mode for indicating that the final variation effect is executed, is set, and in the first period after the waiting period has elapsed. , The "acquisition effect (effect B)", which is an effect mode for guiding the player to the game method of performing the later game in an advantageous manner (acquiring the special figure 2 hold), is set, and the first period In the second period after the lapse of time, the lottery result of the symbol to be the target of the final fluctuation effect (the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation which is the time saving final fluctuation, the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold currently acquired) is The "mission effect (effect C)", which is an effect mode for suggesting, is set, and the "mission effect (effect C)" executed during the second period in the third period after the second period has elapsed. The "result effect (effect D)", which is an effect mode for showing the effect result (lottery result), is set.

The effect pattern B is an effect pattern set when the time-saving final variation is won (big hit, small hit), and is an effect for notifying the player that the player has won the hit as the final variation effect. The mode "special effect 1 (effect E)" is set.

The effect pattern C is an effect mode set when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 when setting the final variation effect is a predetermined number or less (0), and is a waiting period (a standby period) in the effect period of the final variation effect. "Standby effect (A)" is set in the 0th period). When this effect pattern C is set, in order to set the effect mode of the final variation effect (the effect mode executed in each of the first period to the third period) again after the end of the waiting period (0th period). (Final effect variable processing) is configured to be executed.

The detailed contents of this final effect variable process will be described later, but in the final effect variable process, the number of special figures 2 held during the waiting period (0th period) and at the end of the waiting period (0th period). Special figure 2 A process for setting different production modes according to the number of reservations in each of the first period to the third period is executed.

As described above, in the ninth control example, the final variation effect is set at the time of setting the final variation effect (at the start of the time-saving final variation) with respect to the setting method of the final variation effect in the fifth control example described above. The point that is configured to set the effect mode and the lottery result (look-ahead result) that is the target of the final variation effect are the lottery result of the variation and the time when the final variation effect is set (at the start of the time saving final variation). ) Is different from the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired in) in that it is limited to.

With this configuration, the production mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed can be changed, so that the time reduction final variation is executed. It is possible to give diversity to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold to be executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. As in this control example, when the effect mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed is changed, the time reduction final variation is executed. It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain point in time is a specific number (for example, the upper limit number 3). With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 becomes a specific number (for example, the upper limit of 3) at the time when the time saving final fluctuation is executed. Can be done.

Since the above-mentioned winning final table 222IA1 is a data table that is referred to when the variation (time saving final variation) is won, execution of the final variation effect set with reference to the winning final table 222IA1. The period is a period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the time-saving final fluctuation. That is, after the final variation effect set with reference to the winning final table 222IA1 is completed, the winning game corresponding to the lottery result of the variation is executed. In this way, when the time-saving final fluctuation is won, the final fluctuation corresponds to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation without considering the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed based on the special figure 2 hold. Since the effect mode of the effect can be set collectively, the process for setting the effect mode can be simplified.

As described above, in the winning final table 222IA1 used in the ninth control example, the smaller the number of special figure 2 hold (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C), the easier it is to select the effect pattern C. It is stipulated. That is, the smaller the number of special figure 2 holdings at the time when the time reduction final fluctuation is executed, the more the number of special figure 2 holdings that can be acquired during the waiting period (0th period) can be increased, so that the waiting period (0th period) can be increased. ) Is configured so that the effect pattern C, which can variably set the effect mode according to the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired in), is easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to execute different final variation effects when the time-saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is small.

Further, it is stipulated that the larger the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C), the easier it is to select the effect pattern B as the final variation effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special effect 1 indicating that the winner is won when the time saving final variation is executed in the state where the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is large. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically make the player play a game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold number, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 413, the contents of the final table for disengagement 222IA2 possessed by the final variation effect table 222IA will be described. FIG. 413 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final table 222IA2 for disengagement. The final table 222IA2 for deviation is a data table that is referred to when the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation, which is the time-saving final fluctuation, is out of order, and is reserved and stored during the fluctuation period of the fluctuation. Special Figure 2 Corresponding to Hold It is used to set the effect mode of the final variation effect with the period including the variation time of the variation as the effect period.

In the ninth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, the lottery result of the variation and the execution after the variation are executed by using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation). It is configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation executed in the state where the time saving state is finished and the normal state is set). Then, if the lottery result of the time saving final change is won (big hit, small hit), the winning game is executed after the end of the change, so that the final change effect is performed in the period corresponding to the change period of the change. It is configured to be executed.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the final change in time reduction is out of order, the special figure 2 change corresponding to the special figure 2 hold stored after the end of the change is executed. In this control example, the final variation effect is executed including the variation period of the special figure 2 variation that is held and stored at the time when the time saving final variation is completed.

As shown in FIG. 413, the final table 222IA2 for disconnection includes the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C), the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold, and the acquired effect counter 223F value. The production mode of the final variation effect is defined according to. In addition, as the effect period in which the final variation effect is executed, the variation period of the time-saving final variation and the time-saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) are terminated, and the normal state (low probability of the special symbol) is completed. The fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) executed in the state (low probability state of the normal symbol) is specified.

Then, at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation, the effect mode of the final variation effect is set even for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation executed in response to the already acquired special figure 2 hold number. is doing. With this configuration, it is possible to collectively set the effect mode (final variation effect) of the effect (final variation effect) that is executed across a plurality of special figure variations (special figure 2 variation), so that each special figure variation can be set. It is possible to simplify the process for setting the effect mode as compared with the case where the effect mode of the final variation effect is set each time.

Further, in this control example, when there is winning information indicating a winning in the special figure 2 hold acquired at the time of setting the effect mode of the final variation effect (when the pre-reading result is a winning), the winning information is obtained. When there is no winning information indicating winning (when the look-ahead result is out of order), the execution content (whether or not to execute, the period of execution) of the acquisition effect executed during the final variation effect is configured to be different. If there is winning information indicating winning in the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired (when the pre-reading result is a winning), it is more difficult to execute the acquisition effect than in other cases. Alternatively, even if it is executed, the execution period is configured to be short.

With this configuration, the player can predict the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold according to the effect mode of the variation effect executed as the final variation effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the time when the time saving state can be terminated, that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the time saving final change is an out-of-time change and the time saving final change is executed is Other than that, the effect mode (acquisition effect (effect B)) for increasing the number of executions of the advantageous game (special figure 2 lottery in the normal state) executed after the time saving state ends in the out-of-time state. It is possible to emphasize compared to the case of. Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of executions of the advantageous game executed after the time saving state is completed.

Here, when the contents specified in the final table 222IA2 for disconnection are specifically described with reference to FIG. 413, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C) is 0. When the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 159", "effect A" is set in the waiting period, "effect B" is set in the first period, and "effect C" is set in the second period. The production data is specified. Further, when the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C) is 0 and the acquired effect counter 223F value is in the range of "160 to 179", the waiting period and the first The effect data in which "effect B" is set in one period and "effect C" is set in the second period is defined. Further, when the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "180 to 198", the effect data in which "effect A" is set in the standby period is defined.

In addition, in the final table 222IA2 for the main deviation, the effect mode to be executed in the final effect period of the final variation effect at the present time is not set (in FIG. 413, "○" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the setting is not set). It is configured in. In other words, if the special figure lottery result (look-ahead result) that can be grasped at the execution timing of the time reduction final change does not include a hit, the special figure 2 corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired after the execution timing of the time reduction final change The fluctuation may be executed after the special figure 2 fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead processing at the execution timing of the time-saving final fluctuation.

In this way, when it is necessary to change the effect result (effect mode) of the final variation effect according to the lottery result of the special figure variation that can be executed in the period from the execution of the final variation effect to the end of the final variation effect. Is configured so that the effect mode of the final variation effect can be variably set at a timing other than the execution timing of the time-saving final variation. Therefore, the final variation effect can be executed in various effect modes.

Returning to FIG. 413, the description will be continued. When the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C) is 1, the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 hold, and it is "there is a hold inside hit", that is, , The special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds variation, and the special figure 2 variation executed next (the special figure 2 variation executed first after the normal state is set). ) Is a hit fluctuation, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F (corresponding to the entire range from 0 to 198), "effect A" is displayed in the waiting period and "effect B" is displayed in the first period. , "Direction C" in the second period, in the third period, and in the fluctuation period (through 1) of the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set. The effect data for which "effect D" is set is specified.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C) is 1, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold, and it is "no hold inside hit". In other words, the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation executed next (the special figure 2 fluctuation executed first after the normal state is set). If the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 189", "effect A" is set in the waiting period and "effect B" is set in the first period. , "Direction C" is set in the second period, and "Continuous production (Production F)" is set as a display mode for delaying the display of the production result of "Production C (Mission production)" in the third period. The production data to be performed is specified.

Here, the above-mentioned "continuous effect" is an effect mode displayed after the mission effect (see FIG. 328 (B)) is executed, and is an effect mode showing the effect result of the mission effect (FIG. 329 (FIG. 329). A)), that is, an effect mode executed when the period until the result effect (effect D) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is extended.

The detailed display contents will be omitted, but for example, when the effect mode shown in FIG. 328 (B) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a mission effect, the falling rock 873 falls. By reducing the speed, the period until the effect result (success or failure) of the mission effect being executed is displayed can be extended, or the mission effect can be continued as the effect result of the mission effect being executed (success or failure). It is configured to display a display mode (for example, the characters "continue!") To indicate that the second mission effect is executed), and multiple mission effects can be performed in one final variable effect. As the effect result of the mission effect, an effect mode is set such as executing a pseudo result display effect that temporarily displays a display mode suggesting an effect result different from the actual effect result.

In this way, by configuring to execute the "continuous effect" as the final variation effect, for example, after the final variation effect is executed, the special figure 2 hold is acquired and the execution period of the running final variation effect is executed. In the case of extending, the effect period of the final variation effect can be extended without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 hold (“Yes” in the hold). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and the special figure fluctuation corresponding to at least one of the two acquired special figure 2 reservations is In the case of a hit fluctuation, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F (corresponding to the entire range from 0 to 198), "effect A" is set in the waiting period, and "directed B" is set in the first period. In the 2nd period, "Direction C" is the 3rd period, and the fluctuation period of the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as the normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set (through 1), 2 Of the fluctuation period (through 2) of the second special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 2), the production data in which "effect D" is set is defined in the period until the hit variation ends. ing.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold, and it is "no hold inside hit". In other words, the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation executed next (the special figure 2 fluctuation executed first after the normal state is set). If the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 189", "effect A" is set in the waiting period and "effect B" is set in the first period. , "Direction C" is set in the second period, and "Continuous production (Production F)" is set as a display mode for delaying the display of the production result of "Production C (Mission production)" in the third period. The production data to be performed is specified.

Next, the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 hold (“Yes” in the hold). In other words, the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and the special figure fluctuation corresponding to at least one of the three acquired special figure 2 holdings is In the case of a hit fluctuation, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F (corresponding to the entire range from 0 to 198), "effect A" is set in the waiting period, and "directed B" is set in the first period. "Direction C" is set in the 2nd period, and "Direction D" is set in the 3rd period, and in the period until the winning fluctuation ends, out of the 1st variable period, the 2nd variable period, and the 3rd variable period. The data is specified.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number (value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223C) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 hold (“none” in the hold). That is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation executed this time (the last special figure 2 change in the time saving state) is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and all the special figure 2 fluctuations corresponding to the three acquired special figure 2 hold are out-of-bounds fluctuations. Regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), the effect data in which "effect A" is set in the standby period is defined.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 411 (A). The final effect variable setting table 222IB is a data table used for selecting the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state, and the effect mode of the final variation effect is described. When setting using the final variation effect table 222IA, if there is an effect period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set, the effect mode is set for the unset period during the execution of the final variation effect. Is used for. Specifically, in the final variable effect update process 9 (C4566 in FIG. 420), it is determined that the waiting period (0th period) has ended (C4863: YES in FIG. 420), and the effect variable flag 223IC is set to ON. It is referred to when it is determined to be (C4864 in FIG. 420: YES), that is, when there is an effect period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set (see C4865 in FIG. 420).

Here, the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222IB will be described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415. FIG. 414 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222IB. As shown in FIG. 414 (A), the final effect variable setting table 222IB is the hit setting table 222IB1 that is referred to when the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) during execution is a hit variation, and is being executed. It has a setting table 222IB2 for deviation, which is referred to when the variation of special figure 2 (final variation of time reduction) is an deviation variation, and according to the lottery result of the variation of special figure 2 (final variation of time reduction) being executed. , It is configured so that different production modes are set. Further, although a detailed explanation will be described later, if the elements referred to when setting the production mode are different depending on whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) being executed is a hit or a miss. I'm letting you.

With this configuration, the effect mode set as the final variation effect can be set according to the actual game content (special figure lottery result and the increase in the number of reserved balls). It is possible to be interested in the production content of the final variation production that is executed for.

Next, the contents of the hit setting table 222IB1 will be described with reference to FIG. 414 (B). FIG. 414 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit setting table 222IB1. As shown in FIG. 414 (B), the winning setting table 222IB1 has the value of the hold number increase counter 223IA, that is, during the period from the execution of the final fluctuation effect to the end of the waiting period (0th period). Different production modes are defined based on the acquired number of reserved special figures 2 and the acquired value of the effect counter 223F.

Specifically, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223IA is "0,1" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 198", "effect B" in the first period. It is stipulated that "effect C" is set in the second period and "effect D" is set in the third period. It should be noted that an unset period in which the effect mode is not set at the time of executing the final variation effect without setting a new effect mode for the period in which the effect mode is already set at the time of executing the final variation effect (Fig. The effect mode is set with reference to this table only for the period indicated by “◯” in 412 (B).

Next, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223IA is "2" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 149", "effect B" is set in the first period and "effect B" is set in the second period. It is stipulated that "effect C" and "effect D" are set in the third period, and if it is in the range of "150 to 198", it is being executed in the first period, the second period, and the third period. "Special effect 2 (effect G)" is set, which is a high expectation notification mode to show that the effect result of the final variation effect is likely to be an effect result indicating winning of a special symbol (special figure 2). It is stipulated to do.

The above-mentioned "special effect 2 (effect G)" is an effect mode in which an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 328 (B)) normally executed as the final variable effect is executed, and is described in detail. Will be described later, but the selection ratio is specified so that the effect result of the final variation effect of this time is more likely to be the effect result indicating winning than the mission effect is executed.

The detailed display contents of this "special effect 2" will be omitted, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes dark, and the effect result indicating winning is obtained. A certain hit display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") and a miss display mode (display mode imitating a "cross mark"), which is an effect result indicating a missed win, are displayed and are displayed until the end. An effect is executed in which the display mode is the effect result of the final variation effect. In this way, by notifying the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an unusual effect will be executed immediately after the waiting period ends, the player is expected to win the effect. You can watch it.

The production content of the "special production 2" is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and for example, according to the example shown in FIG. 328 (A), as a type of ally characters (851A to 851D) used for the mission production. , A character that is not displayed in the small display area DM21 (for example, a character that imitates a whale) may be set so that a mission effect different from the usual one is executed, or the same ally character (851A to 851D) may be used to perform an effect in which a special mission is executed.

With this configuration, the image data used in a normal mission effect can be diverted as a part of the image data of the effect executed as the "special effect 2", so that the image data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 Can be reduced.

Next, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223IA is "3" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 119", "effect B" is set in the first period and "effect B" is set in the second period. It is stipulated that "Direction C" and "Direction D" are set in the third period, and if it is in the range of "120 to 198", "Direction G" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third period. Is specified to be set.

Finally, when the value of the hold number increase counter 223IA is "4" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 149", "in the first period, the second period, and the third period". It is stipulated to set "effect G", and if it is in the range of "150 to 198", the effect result of the final variable effect being executed is a special symbol (in the first period, the second period, and the third period). It is stipulated to set "special effect 3 (effect H)" which is a definite notification mode for notifying that the effect result indicating the winning of the special figure 2) is obtained.

The above-mentioned "special effect 3 (effect H)" is an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 328 (B)) that is normally executed as the final variation effect, and is a time-saving final variation (see FIG. 328 (B)). It is executed only when the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation) is a hit. The detailed display contents of this "special effect 3" will be omitted, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes dark, and the effect result indicating winning is obtained. An effect of displaying a certain hit display mode (display mode imitating the character "V") is executed. In this way, immediately after the waiting period for the final variation effect is completed, the player can be made to prepare his / her mind for the winning game by notifying the player of the winning. Further, by making the display mode at the start of the special effect 2 and the display mode at the start of the special effect 3 the same (a mode in which the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is darkened (blacked out)), the player On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance that the final variation effect this time is the special effect 2 or the special effect 3. As a result, the player pays close attention to the final variable effect while expecting that the special effect 3 is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the ninth control example, as a privilege given to the player when the effect corresponding to the special effect 3 is executed, the effect result of the final variation effect is notified before the end of the final variation effect. Although it is configured to give a privilege, it may be configured to give a privilege other than that, for example, based on the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold acquired at the timing when the special effect 3 is set. It may be configured to give a privilege of notifying the player of the number of times of winning. Specifically, when there are two special figure 2 hold in which the look-ahead result is won out of the four special figure 2 hold, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used as the effect mode of the special effect 3. Is darkened, and an effect of displaying a plurality of hit display modes (display modes imitating the character "V"), which is an effect result indicating winning, is executed, and finally, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The number of displayed winning display modes may be configured to indicate the number of times a winning is won. In this way, as a special effect (special effect 3) that is executed when the special effect condition is satisfied, the player is given the first privilege (notification of winning) based on the execution of the special effect. However, even after the first privilege is granted, the second privilege (notification of the number of winnings) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege can be granted after the first privilege is granted. It is possible to make the player interested in the production content of the special production (special production 3) executed for the player, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Next, see FIG. 415. The contents of the setting table 222IB2 for disconnection will be described. FIG. 415 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment setting table 222IB2. This disengagement setting table 222IB2 is used when the disengagement final table 222IA2 is used when setting the final variation effect to be executed in response to the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state (see C4364 in FIG. 419). ), Which is a data table used for setting the effect mode for the unset period (the period indicated by “◯” in FIG. 413) in which the effect mode is not set, and is the final variation effect update process 9 (FIG. 420). (Refer to C4566), it is referred to when it is determined that it is the end timing of the waiting period (0th period) (C4863: YES in FIG. 420) (see C4865 in FIG. 420).

As shown in FIG. 415, the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA (the number of special figure 2 holds acquired during the waiting period) and the presence / absence of additional hits (acquired during the waiting period) are shown in the disconnection setting table 222IB2. Special figure 2 Whether or not there is a win based on the pre-reading result of hold), the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223EN, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F, it is set for each effect period of the final variable effect. The production mode is specified.

When the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation (variation in Special Figure 2) in the time-saving state is set using the final table 222IA2 for disengagement (see C4364 in FIG. 419), the effect mode has already been set. It is configured so that the effect mode is set by referring to the disengagement setting table 222IB2 only for the unset period without setting a new effect mode for the effect period.

Next, the contents specified in the disconnection setting table 222IB2 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 415. First, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "0", that is, when a new special figure 2 hold is not acquired during the waiting period, the presence / absence of an additional hit and the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223EN Regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F, various effect modes are set such that "effect B" is set in the first period, "effect C" is set in the second period, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. Is stipulated. That is, since there is no change between the time when the final variation effect is started and the number of holdings in the special figure 2, the effect indicating the deviation is shown as the final result effect (effect D) without setting a dedicated effect mode. The result is set.

Next, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "1", the additional hit is "Yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. When the number of holds is 3 and the look-ahead results of the acquired special figure 2 hold (3 pieces) are all out of order, and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period is a hit. In the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is "0 to 169", various effects are set so that "effect C" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. Aspects are defined. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect B) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done. With this configuration, a useless effect (acquisition effect that causes the player to play a game in which the special figure 2 hold is acquired even though the number of special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit) can be achieved. It can be suppressed that it is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust in the content of the effect to be executed and reducing the effect of the effect. Further, in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is "170 to 198", various effect modes are defined so that "effect G" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. ing.

When the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "1" and the additional hit is "none", the first is regardless of the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223EN and the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F. Various production modes are defined so that "effect B" is set in the period, "effect C" is set in the second period, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, one new special figure 2 hold is acquired at the time when the final variation effect is started, and if the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold is out of order, a dedicated effect mode is set. As the final result effect (effect D), an effect result indicating a deviation is set.

Next, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "2", the additional hit is "Yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. In a state where the number of holds is 2 and the look-ahead results of the acquired special figure 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, at least as the look-ahead result of the two special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period. If the look-ahead result of any of the special figures 2 hold is a hit, "Direction C" is used in the first and second periods, and "Direction C" is used in the third to fourth periods, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F. Various production modes are specified so as to set "D". That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect B) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

With this configuration, a useless effect (acquisition effect that causes the player to play a game in which the special figure 2 hold is acquired even though the number of special figure 2 hold has reached the upper limit) can be achieved. It can be suppressed that it is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust in the content of the effect to be executed and reducing the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 hold at the start of the final fluctuation effect. In a state where the number is 2 and the pre-reading results of the acquired special figure 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, the look-ahead results of the two newly acquired special figure 2 hold are also out of order during the waiting period. In this case, various production modes are specified so that "effect C" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F. There is. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect B) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Further, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final fluctuation effect. In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, the look-ahead results of the two special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period are also out of order, and further, the current special figure 2 hold is out of order. If the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F, "effect B" in the first period, "effect C" in the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various production modes are specified so as to set "effect D". That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to off when the waiting period ends, the acquisition effect for having the player newly acquire the special figure 2 hold using the first period (effect B). Is configured to run.

Next, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "3", the additional hit is "Yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is "0 to". In the range of "109", various production modes are defined so that "effect C" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, the acquisition effect (effect B) is executed even though the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON. In this way, when the effect result indicating winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variation effect, the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, that is, a new special figure 2 hold is acquired. Even in a state where it cannot be performed, by intentionally configuring the acquisition effect to be executed, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed.

Further, in the ninth control example, the above-mentioned effect (even though the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, the acquisition effect (acquisition effect) is performed only when the effect result of the final variation effect is the effect result indicating winning. Since the effect B) is configured to be executed, the effect with a difference between the actual number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed is executed. , It is possible to notify that the effect result of the final variation effect is the effect result indicating the winning. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the effect content to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "3", the additional hit is "Yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is "110 to 198". In the range of "", various production modes are defined so that "effect C" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect B) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Next, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "3", the additional hit is "Yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to off, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F, Various production modes are defined so that "effect C" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, the acquisition effect (effect B) is not executed even though the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to off. In this way, when the effect result indicating winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variation effect, the state in which the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to off, that is, a new special figure 2 hold can be acquired. Even in a state where it is possible, by configuring so that the acquisition effect is not intentionally executed, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed.

Even in this case as well, the effect of having a difference between the actual number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed is executed, so that the effect result of the final variation effect becomes the effect result indicating the winning. It is possible to notify that. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the effect content to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 hold number at the start of the final variation effect is In 2, when the look-ahead results of the two special figure 2 hold (2 pieces) that have already been acquired are out of order, and the look-ahead results of the two special figure 2 hold that have been newly acquired during the waiting period are also out of order. Regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F, various effect modes are defined so that "effect C" is set in the first period and the second period, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect B) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Further, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final fluctuation effect. In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. 2 hold (2 pieces) are both out of order, the look-ahead results of the two special figure 2 hold newly acquired during the waiting period are also out of order, and further, the current special figure 2 hold is out of order. If the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F, "effect B" in the first period, "effect C" in the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various production modes are specified so as to set "effect D". That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to off when the waiting period ends, the acquisition effect for having the player newly acquire the special figure 2 hold using the first period (effect B). Is configured to run.

Finally, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223IA is "4", that is, the special figure 2 hold number at the time when the final fluctuation effect is executed is "0", and four special figures 2 are held during the waiting period. When a new hold is acquired, the value of the effect counter 223F acquired with "Yes" as an additional hit is in the range of "0 to 99", and "1st period, 2nd period, 3rd to 4th period" Various production modes are defined so as to set "Production G", and various production modes are set in the range of "100 to 198" so that "Production H" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. The production mode is specified. When the additional hit is "None", "Direction C" is set in the first period and the second period, and "Production D" is set in the third to fourth periods regardless of the acquired value of the effect counter 223F. Various production modes are specified as described above. That is, since the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to on at the end of the waiting period, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (effect B) for causing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 hold. Has been done.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 411 (B). The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example has the hold number increase counter 223IA, the variable period storage area 223IB, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above. It differs from the effect variable flag 223IC in that it is added, and is the same except for that. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The holding number increase counter 223IA is acquired within a specific period (a waiting period set as a part of the effect period of the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation in the time saving state, and the first period). It is a counter for measuring the number of holds, and the value of the counter is added by 1 every time a new special figure 2 hold is acquired within a specific period. The hold number increase counter 223IA received the winning information command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning in the final winning processing (see C3461 in FIG. 418) executed in the winning information command processing 9 (see C3262 in FIG. 417). (C5501: YES), and when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is set to ON (C5502: YES), that is, the special acquired during the waiting period in order to set the effect mode of the final variation effect. FIG. 2 When it is necessary to count the number of holds, the counter value is incremented by 1 (see C5503 in FIG. 418).

Then, in the final effect variable effect update process 9 (see C4566 in FIG. 420), when it is determined that the waiting period has ended (C4863: YES in FIG. 420), the effect mode corresponding to the counter value is the final effect variable setting table 222IB. (See C4865 in FIG. 420). Further, when it is determined that the first period has ended (C4866: YES in the figure), the effect extension process is executed in which the variation period of the special figure 2 hold acquired during the final variation effect is set as the effect period of the final variation effect. Therefore, the counter value is referred to (C4868), and then the counter value is reset to the initial value (0).

In this way, by providing a configuration for counting the number of specific reserved memories (for example, special figure 2 reserved) acquired during the specific period (for example, during the waiting period), the specific reserved storage at the end of the specific period is provided. Since it is possible to set the effect mode after the specific period based on not only the number but also the specific number of reserved storages acquired during the specific period, it is possible to set a wide variety of effect modes. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with a new playability of acquiring a large amount of reserved memory within a predetermined period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this control example, a dedicated counter (holding number increase counter 223IA) is configured to count the number of specific holding storages (for example, holding in FIG. 2) acquired during a specific period (for example, during the waiting period). However, the method is not limited to this, and for example, a storage means for temporarily storing the reserved storage number at the start of a specific period is provided, and the reserved storage number at the end of the specific period is stored in the storage means. It may be configured to calculate the number of reserved storages acquired during a specific period by comparing with the number of reserved storages.

Further, in this control example, a specific period (for example, a waiting period) for measuring the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) is set within one special figure fluctuation period (for example, special figure 2 change). Since it is set to (within a period), the number of reserved memories does not decrease within a specific period, and the configuration is simply to add the number of acquired reserved memories. As a specific period for measuring the number of acquisitions, a period during which the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory can be reduced (for example, a period set across a plurality of fluctuations in Special Figure 2) may be set. In this case, as a configuration for counting the number of specific hold storage (for example, special figure 2 hold), a counter value is added by 1 each time a specific hold memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) is acquired, and a specific hold memory is added. It may be configured to subtract 1 from the counter value every time the hold storage decreases (for example, every time the special figure 2 fluctuation using the special figure 2 hold is executed). In addition, in this case, the number of specific reserved storages may be smaller at the end of the specific period than at the start of the specific period. As a configuration for counting the number, it is preferable to set a value larger than the upper limit number that can store a specific reserved memory as the initial value of the counter. With such a configuration, when the counter value is increased or decreased in correspondence with the increase or decrease of the specific reserved storage during the specific period, it is possible to surely prevent the counter value from becoming smaller than 0.

Further, as a specific period for measuring the acquisition number of the specific reserved memory, a period during which the acquisition number of the specific reserved memory can be reduced (for example, a period set across a plurality of special figure 2 fluctuations) is set. In the case of the above-mentioned configuration, the number of specific reserved memories newly acquired within a specific period is simply added, instead of counting the number of specific reserved memories actually increased within a specific period. The configuration may be used.

Further, in the ninth control example, the effect mode after the elapse of the specific period is set based on the increase number of the specific reserved storage (holding in FIG. 2) within the predetermined specific period (within the waiting period). However, the specific period is not limited to this, depending on the game content (lottery result of each symbol, game state, etc.) and the operation content of the player's operation means (for example, frame button 22). It may be configured to be variable, for example, a plurality of non-consecutive periods may be set as a specific period, or the length of one specific period may be variable. In this case, by configuring the player so as not to notify the player of the timing at which the specific period is set, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the reserved value is counted. Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

In addition, the specific period should not be set based on the condition that a predetermined deletion condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the player performs an operation indicating that the specific period is not set by using the operation means) is satisfied. It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the effect in a manner suitable for each player.

The variable period storage area 223IB is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation (time saving final variation) in the time saving state. In this variable period storage area 223IB, a waiting period (0th period), a 1st period, a 2nd period, and a 3rd period associated with the final variable period of the time saving state are set, and after the time saving state ends (normal state setting). The first special figure 2 change after the normal state is set, which corresponds to the special figure 2 change (the special figure 2 change based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) executed later). Period), 2 periods (2nd special figure 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), 3 periods (3rd special figure 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), 4 periods (normal) A storage area corresponding to each period is formed in order to store the effect mode set for each period of the fourth special figure 2 variable period after the state is set.

Then, the information indicating the effect mode of the final variation effect set in the time saving effect setting process 9 (see C4164 in FIG. 419) is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4365 in FIG. 419), and the final variation effect update process is performed. In (see C4566 in FIG. 420), when it is determined to be the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: YES in FIG. 420), when it is determined to be the set effect mode (C4865) or the end timing of the first period. (C4866: YES in FIG. 420), the set effect mode is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4869 in FIG. 420). Then, although not shown, when the final variation effect is completed, the information indicating the effect mode stored in each storage area is cleared.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect mode of the period effect executed using the predetermined period can be set at a plurality of timings (timing at which the period effect is started, predetermined timing during the execution of the period effect), the period effect is used. By providing a storage area for storing the set effect mode each time the effect mode is set, it is possible to set a later effect mode based on the content of the previously set effect mode. Become. Therefore, when the effect mode set at a plurality of timings is used to execute the effect effect for one period, it is possible to set the effect mode without a sense of discomfort.

The effect variable flag 223IC is a flag for indicating that there is a period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set as the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation in the time reduction state (time reduction final variation). It is set to ON when it is determined that there is an unset period. Specifically, in the time saving effect setting process 9 (see C4164 in FIG. 419), the effect mode of the final variation effect is set (see C4362 and C4364 in FIG. 419), and the effect mode is not set. If it is determined that there is (C4366: YES in FIG. 419), it is set to ON (see C4637 in FIG. 419).

Then, in the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566 in FIG. 420), it is the timing when the waiting period ends (C4863: YES in FIG. 420) and the timing when the first period ends (C4866: YES in FIG. 420). That is, when it is determined that it is possible to set the effect mode of the final variation effect, the setting status is determined (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 420), and it is determined that the effect is set to ON. , A new effect mode is set for the unset period (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 420). Then, after setting the effect mode for the unset period, it is set to off (see C4871 in FIG. 420).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 416 to 420. In this control example, the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 416) is executed instead of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 360) for the fifth control example described above, and the winning information command process 5 (FIG. 361). The point of executing the prize information command process 9 (see FIG. 417) instead of (see FIG. 417), the point of executing the final prize process (see FIG. 418), and the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) instead of the time saving. The difference is that the effect setting process 9 (see FIG. 419) is executed and the final variation effect update process 9 (see FIG. 420) is executed instead of the final variation effect update process (see FIG. 377). Other than that, it is the same. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the points where the contents of the referenced data table have been changed and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the changes in the contents of the referenced data table, the numerical values have simply been changed, which is technically ideological. Are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 9 (C3163) will be described with reference to FIG. 416. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 9 (C3163) executed in the ninth control example.

When the command determination process 9 (C3163) is executed, the same processes of C3201 to C3209 as the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 360) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and then the special 2 hold number (special figure 2) is executed. It is determined whether the number of holds) is the upper limit (C3261). Here, in the process of C3261, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C is "4" which is the upper limit value.

If it is determined that the special 2 hold number (special figure 2 hold number) is the upper limit in the processing of C3261 (C3261: YES), the hold upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON (C3262), and then this processing is terminated. If it is determined that the special 2 hold number (special figure 2 hold number) is not the upper limit (C3261: NO), the process of C3262 is not executed and the present process is terminated.

Further, after executing the same processes of C3210 to C3217 as the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 360) of the fifth control example described above, this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the winning information command processing 9 (C3262) will be described with reference to FIG. 417. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command processing 9 (C3262) executed in the ninth control example. In the prize information command process 9 (C3262), the content of the process executed when it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is set to the above-mentioned prize information command process 5 (see FIG. 361). It is different in that it is changed.

When the winning information command processing 9 (C3262) is executed, the same processing of C3401 to C3402 as the winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and then the processing of C3403 is executed. Instead, if it is determined in the processing of C3404 that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is on (C3404: YES), the final winning processing is executed (C3461), and the process proceeds to the processing of C3406. The details of this final winning process (C3461) will be described later with reference to FIG. 418.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C3404 that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is off (C3404: NO), the processing of C3461 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C3406. After that, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the final winning process (C3461) will be described with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final winning process (C3461) executed in the ninth control example. In this final winning process (C3461), a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 640 while the final fluctuation in the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation) is being executed, and a new special drawing 2 hold (winning information) is held. The process for setting the effect mode when the winning information command indicating that the winning information has been received is received is executed.

When the final winning process (C3461) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is a winning information command indicating that the ball has won a prize in the second winning opening 640 (whether there was a special figure 2 winning). (C5501), If it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 has not been received (not the special figure 2 winning) (C5501: NO), this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 has been received (special figure 2 winning) (C5501: YES), then the effect variable flag 223IC is turned on. (C5502). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is on (C5502: YES), 1 is added to the value of the hold number increase counter 223IA (C5503), and the process proceeds to C5504. If it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is off (C5502: NO), the process of C5503 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C5504.

In the process of C5504, the information of the variable period storage area 223IB is read out (C5504), and then it is determined whether or not the current acquisition effect is in progress (C5505). If it is determined that the current acquisition effect is in progress (C5505: YES), a display command indicating the pending acquisition during the acquisition effect is set (C5506), and then this process is terminated. In the process of C5505, if it is determined that the current acquisition effect is not in progress (C5505: NO), a display command indicating hold acquisition is set (C5507), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the final variation effect can be executed in response to the final variation in the time-saving state (special figure 2 variation), and a new special figure 2 hold is set as a part of the final variation effect. It is configured to execute an acquisition effect (see FIG. 327 (B)) for the player to acquire. Then, when the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 hold (the timing of receiving the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning) is executing the acquisition effect, the dedicated effect is executed. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a relationship between the content of the effect being executed and the actual game situation, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In this control example, it is determined that the special figure 2 hold is acquired based on the effect content being executed at the timing when the new special figure 2 hold is acquired (the timing when the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received). Although it is configured to have a different effect mode to be shown, other configurations may be used. ) And may be configured to set the effect mode. In this case, for example, a prize determination means indicating that a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize has been received, and a remaining time determination for determining the remaining time in a time-reduced state at the time when the prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize is received. A means and a means are provided, and the remaining period of the time saving state at the time when it is determined that the prize information command indicating the special figure 2 prize is received (there was a special figure 2 prize) by the prize determination means, that is, the special figure 2 hold is set. When the remaining period that can be easily obtained is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more, a display mode (for example, "plus 1") indicating that the number of special figure 2 holds has increased due to the special figure 2 winning. ) Is displayed, and if it is less than the predetermined period, in addition to the display mode indicating that the number of special figure 2 hold has increased due to the special figure 2 prize (for example, the comment of "plus 1"), special figure 2 hold It is preferable to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "barely safe") indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 has increased while the remaining period during which the above can be easily obtained is small.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 hold is a timing with a margin, so that it can be used as a reference for future games. Can be done. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the player so as not to notify the player of the remaining period in the time-saving state, that is, the remaining period in which the special figure 2 hold can be easily acquired. As a result, the player determines the remaining period of the time saving state based on the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, so that the display displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired is obtained. The aspect can be watched. In addition, the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired may be configured to be different according to the number of the special figure 2 hold. For example, the number of the acquired special figure 2 hold may be predetermined. When a prize information command indicating a special figure 2 prize is received in a state of a number or less (for example, "2" or less), the remaining period in a time-saving state, that is, the remaining period in which the special figure 2 hold can be easily obtained is predetermined. If it is less than the period (for example, 3 seconds), in addition to the display mode (for example, the comment of "plus 1") indicating that the number of special figure 2 hold has increased due to the special figure 2 prize, the special figure 2 hold It may be configured to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "may be severe") suggesting that it is difficult to limit the number of.

In addition, as a method of determining the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the period until the final special figure change in the time saving state is completed) is set as the remaining period of the time saving state. Alternatively, the period until the end of the last game per game executed in the time-saving state may be set as the remaining period in the time-saving state.

That is, in this control example, the time saving state ends when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is 1 time and 5 times) during the time saving state. It is configured to do. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the remaining period until the end of the time saving state based on the number of fluctuations and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the state where the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640. It is structured so that it is easy to win. In addition, the normal symbol is configured so that the game mode is set according to the game state at the time when the lottery is executed and the game state at the time when the game per normal figure is executed. If the time saving state is set when the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) is executed, the normal symbol lottery and the normal symbol fluctuation time are set as the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the game per normal symbol is executed. If the time saving state is set when is executed, the game is configured to be executed as a high-probability state of a normal symbol. Therefore, even if a player wins a game by a lottery executed during the time saving state, it is normal if the normal state is set at the time when the game per game based on the game is executed. The game is executed as a low-probability state of the symbol.

In this control example configured in this way, depending on the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the fluctuation timing of the normal symbol, it is before the final special symbol variation (special diagram 2 variation) executed during the time saving state ends. In some cases, the state in which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 ends. In this case, if the period until the end of the last special figure change (special figure 2 change) executed during the time saving state is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state, the second prize is won within the remaining period. The mouth 640 includes a period in which the ball is not in a state where it is easy to win a prize, which causes a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

Therefore, when determining the remaining period of the time-reduced state, the period until the state in which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 ends, that is, the period during which the game per game can be executed during the time-reduced state is determined. It is good to configure it like this. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the period advantageous to the player (the period in which the state in which the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640 is easily set) as the remaining period in the time saving state. Therefore, when performing an effect of notifying the remaining period of the time saving state, the accuracy of the notification content can be improved. Further, when determining the remaining period of the time saving state in this way, even after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, a period advantageous to the player (the ball is placed in the second winning opening 640). If the period in which it is easy to set a winning state) continues, it is preferable to configure it so that the period until the end of the period is determined as the remaining period in the time-saving state. That is, when the game per normal figure (game per game per long opening of the normal figure) executed during the reduced working hours state is executed across the time saving state and the normal state, the game per game per normal figure (game per long opening of the normal figure). It is preferable to configure so that the period until the end of the game) is determined as the remaining period in the reduced working hours state. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine the period advantageous to the player (the period in which the state in which the ball is likely to be easily won in the second winning opening 640 is easily set). When it is executed, the accuracy of the notification content can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 419, the contents of the time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) will be described. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) executed in the ninth control example. This time-saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) is an effect mode in which the special figure 2 variation is executed as the time-saving final variation with respect to the time-saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the process for setting has been changed.

When the time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) is executed, the same processing of C4301 and C4302 as the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) of the above-mentioned fifth control example is executed, and then in the processing of C4302, When it is determined that the current special figure variation is the time-saving final variation (C4302: YES), it is determined whether the current special figure 2 variation (time-saving final variation) is a hit variation (C4361). When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) of this time is a hit variation (C4361: YES), the effect mode is set by referring to the hit final table 222IA1 possessed by the final variation effect table 222IA (C4362). ), Move to the processing of C4365. Further, in the processing of C4301 when it is determined that the current special figure change is not the special figure 2 change (C4301: NO), or in the processing of C4302, the current special figure change is not the final change in the time saving state. If it is determined (C4302: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) is not a hit fluctuation (a deviation fluctuation) (C4361: NO), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A (second). The winning information regarding the special symbol (special figure 2) is read out (C4363), the effect mode is set with reference to the final table 222IA2 for deviation possessed by the final variation effect table 222IA (C4364), and the process proceeds to C4365.

In the process of C4365, the effect content (effect mode) set by the above-mentioned process of C4362 and the process of C4364 is stored in the corresponding variable period storage area 223IB (C4365), and then whether or not there is an effect unset period. (C4366). If it is determined that there is an effect unset period (C4366: YES), the effect variable flag 223IC is set to ON (C4637), and then this process is terminated. If it is determined that there is no effect unset period (C4366: NO), the process of C4637 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the contents of the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) will be described with reference to FIG. 420. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) executed in the ninth control example. In the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566), the final variation executed in response to the final variation in the time-saving state updated by the process of C4501 in the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) in the fifth control example. The elapsed period of the effect (elapsed period of the change in Special Figure 2) is determined, and the process based on the determination result is executed.

When the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) is executed, first, the information of the variation period storage area 223IB is read (C4861), and the read information of the variation period storage area 223IB (the set effect period) and the special figure. The current production status is extracted based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223EG (value indicating the fluctuation time of fluctuation in FIG. 2) (C4862), and then it is determined whether or not the current timing is the end timing of the waiting period. Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: YES), it is then determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223IC is on (C4864). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is on (C4864: YES), the effect mode is set using the final effect variable setting table corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not the change is true (C4865), and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is off (C4864: NO), the processing of C4865 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of C4863, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: NO), then it is determined whether the present is the end timing of the first period (C4866), and the end timing of the first period is used. If it is determined to be present (C4866: YES), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223IC is on (C4867). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is on (C4867: YES), then it is determined whether or not the value of the hold number increase counter 223IA is larger than 0 (C4868). When it is determined that the value of the hold number increase counter 223IA is larger than 0 (C4868: YES), the effect period corresponding to the increase is stored in the variable period storage area 223IB (C4869), and the process proceeds to C4870. If it is determined that the value of the hold number increase counter 223IA is 0 in the processing of C4868 (C4868: NO), the processing of C4869 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of C4870.

In the process of C4870, the effect mode of the final period of the effect is set (C4870), the effect variable flag 223IC is set to off (C4871), and the process proceeds to the process of C4872. Further, when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is off (C4867: NO), the process proceeds to C4872. In the process of C4872, the value of the hold number increase counter 223IA is cleared (C4872), and then the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4866, when it is determined that the present is not the end timing of the first period (C4866: NO), then it is determined whether or not the present is the end timing of the second period (C4873). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4873: YES), it is determined whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4874), and it is determined whether a new special 2 hold has been acquired. If this is the case (C4874: YES), the read-ahead flag 223EM is set to ON (C4875), and this process ends.

Here, to explain the content of the process executed by C4874, a storage area corresponding to each symbol hold is formed in the winning information storage area 223A, and in this control example, the first special symbol (special symbol) is formed. The number of the storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the storage area for the normal symbol (normal figure) correspond to the upper limit reserved storage number (4 pieces) of each symbol. It is formed. Then, each storage area has been referenced to indicate whether or not the look-ahead information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 and the look-ahead result have been referred to when various effects are set by the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the processing of C4874, whether or not a new special 2 holding is stored in the winning information storage area 223A in addition to the special drawing 2 holding (special 2 holding) referred to by the processing of C4806 or C4814 is stored in each storage area. It is determined based on the presence or absence of the stored referenced information, and the look-ahead information is described and referenced in the storage areas (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special 2 hold) of the prize information storage area 223A. When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-look-ahead flag 223EM to ON in the processing of C4875, the special figure 2 is held again as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure change (the first special figure change after the end of the reduced working hours). The variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4874, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 hold (C4874: NO), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 hold is pre-read, and the second effect mode is based on the pre-read result. Since this is the case when the time reduction final variation effect is being executed during the period, a display effect result command indicating the result of the time reduction variation effect is set (C4876), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C4873 that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4873: NO), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4877), and this process is terminated. In the processing of C4877, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation. The update setting of the above, the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player during the final change, and the like are executed.

As described above, in the ninth control example, the effect mode of the final variation effect is set at the time of setting the final variation effect (at the start of the time-saving final variation), and the final variation. The lottery result (pre-reading result) that is the target of the production is limited to the lottery result of the fluctuation and the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the time of setting the final fluctuation production (at the start of the time-saving final fluctuation). It differs in that it does.

With this configuration, the production mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed can be changed, so that the time reduction final variation is executed. It is possible to give diversity to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold to be executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. As in this control example, when the effect mode of the final variation effect executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time reduction final variation is executed is changed, the time reduction final variation is executed. It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain point in time is a specific number (for example, the upper limit number 3). With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 becomes a specific number (for example, the upper limit of 3) at the time when the time saving final fluctuation is executed. Can be done.

In the ninth control example, the above-mentioned final variation effect is started from the timing when the final variation in the time saving state is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining period in the time saving state is a predetermined period. In the case of, for example, the final variation effect may be executed when the number of remaining time reductions is two. Further, in the ninth control example, a configuration for executing the final variation effect using a period for one special map fluctuation in the time saving state and a period for several special map fluctuations in the normal state will be described. As for the increase / decrease status of the special figure 2 hold number while the final fluctuation effect is being executed, the special figure 2 hold number increases until the special figure change in the time saving state ends, and the special figure 2 hold state is in the normal state. After the start of the figure fluctuation, only the pattern in which the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 decreases has been explained, but as other patterns, for example, the time is shortened during the execution of the game per long open of the normal figure executed during the time saving state. After the state ends (the final change in the time saving state (special figure 2 change) stops) and the special figure change in the normal state (special figure 2 change) starts, the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. There are cases. In such a case, for example, at the timing of executing the final variation effect, the lottery status of the normal symbol (the result of the winning / failing of the running normal drawing lottery, the type of the winning game to be executed, and the reserved normal symbol) The figure information (win / fail result, winning game type) is configured to be discriminating, and based on the discriminating result, it is determined whether or not the ball can win the second winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state, and the determination is made. It may be configured to change the effect mode of the final variation effect based on the result. For example, when it is determined that the ball can (easily) win the second winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state. Uses a production mode that makes it easy to reflect the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning of the second winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state and the fluctuation period in the final fluctuation production (still image that makes it easy to extend the production period). It may be configured to set an effect mode that has been used or an effect mode in which the effect result can be suddenly changed).

Further, when the final variation effect is executed using a plurality of special figure 2 fluctuation periods in the time saving state, the number of remaining time reductions when executing the final variation effect (the number of remaining special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the time reduction state). ), And based on the discrimination result, the maximum number of special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the final variation effect may be calculated, and the effect mode may be set based on the calculation result. .. In this case, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations actually executed during the final fluctuation effect may not be larger than the calculated maximum number, but may be less (for example, the game is stopped during the final variation effect). When the special figure 2 hold becomes 0). Therefore, as the effect mode based on the above-mentioned calculation result, it is preferable to set the effect mode in which the effect of the effect does not decrease even if the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 suddenly decreases.

Further, if the special figure 1 change is executed while the final change effect is executed for the special figure 2 change, the final change effect is continued even for the change period of the special figure 1 change. It may be executed, or it may be configured to suspend the final variation effect and execute the effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation during the interruption period.

<10th control example>
Next, a tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 421 and 422. In the fifth control example described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 315, the game (left-handed game) in the case where the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the game state. ) Is configured to enable the Fuzu lottery, and a suggestion effect (series effect) that suggests that a specific hit (Fuzu long open hit) was won in the Fuzu lottery executed during the normal state is executed. It was configured to do.

Then, a guidance display mode (right-handed display) for allowing the player to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 provided in the right game area according to the execution timing of the game per long opening of the normal figure is displayed (series). (Displayed during the execution of the production) was configured so that the player could easily win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game per long opening. Furthermore, while an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game during a normal state) is being performed by the player, if the player wins the normal long opening, the above-mentioned suggestion effect and guidance display mode are displayed. Instead, it was configured to make it difficult for the player to win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the game per the long opening of the Fuzu.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, the ball launched by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left game area) is also on the right while the game is being performed per game per the long opening of the game by the lottery. A point in which the electric accessory 1640A, which is opened during the game, and the second winning opening 1640 are arranged at positions where the ball fired by the hitting game (the ball flowing down the right game area) can also win. Is different.

Furthermore, the proportion of the balls launched by the left-handed game that reach the electric accessory 1640A and the proportion of the balls launched by the right-handed game that reach the electric accessory 1640A are different, and the right The hitting game is configured so that the ball reaches the electric accessory 1640A at a higher rate than the left-handing game.

In addition, in the tenth control example, in a part of the case where the player wins the game in the normal state, the game is performed in the game in which the player wins the game in the long game. Notification that can be notified to the player before (for example, during the fluctuation of the winning normal map or the period from the acquisition of the winning information of the winning normal symbol (general map) to the execution of the fluctuation of the normal map). It is configured to perform the production.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the ease of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640 different depending on whether or not the notification effect is executed when the player wins the long opening of the normal figure. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect to be performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, since the second winning opening 1640 is arranged at a position where the ball fired by the left-handed game can also win, the ball is won in the second winning opening 1640 even when the notification effect is not executed. It becomes possible. Therefore, even when the notification effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an extremely disadvantageous game.

<About the configuration of the pachinko machine in the 10th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 421, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 421 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. In the tenth control example, the positions of the configurations arranged in the right game area are different from those of the fifth control example described above. Specifically, the through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640A, and the first control example. 2 The arrangement positions of the winning openings 1640 are different.

As shown in FIG. 421, in the game board 13 of the tenth control example, a second winning opening 1640 with an electric accessory 1640A is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a left-handed game is performed by a left-handed game. Both the ball that has flowed down the area and the ball that has flowed down the right-handed game area by the right-handed game are configured to reach the second winning opening 1640.

Specifically, a restricting member (nail) is formed in the area between the first winning opening 64 and the left end side (left side in FIG. 421 front view) of the electric accessory 1640A in the open state (shown in black in FIG. 421). Is planted so that it is difficult for the ball to pass through the area. As a result, among the balls that have flowed down the left game area, only the balls that are guided by the nails planted in the game board 13 and pass through the area above the first winning opening 64 reach the second winning opening 1640. It is composed. In the tenth control example, the game board 13 is configured so that the ratio of the balls that reach the second winning opening 1640 among the balls that flow down the left game area is about 10%.

On the other hand, the ball launched by the right-handed game and flowing down the right game area is a ball flow formed on the upper surfaces of the V winning door 650B located in the closed state and the winning door 65B located in the closed state. The game board 13 is configured so that most of them (about 100%) flow down the road and reach the second winning opening 1640.

With this configuration, during the game per long opening, that is, when the ball can win the second winning opening 1640, the ball flowing down the right game area is more than the ball flowing down the left game area. It is easier to make the second winning opening 1640 win a prize. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select whether to perform a left-handed game or a right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 421, in this control example, in the normal state, the winning opening where the ball flowing down the right game area can win a prize (the winning opening where the player can be given a privilege (prize ball)) It is configured so that the number of winning openings (winning openings that can give a privilege (prize ball, lottery) to a player) that can be won by a ball flowing down the left game area is larger. Specifically, the ball flowing down the right game area can win (pass) through the through gate 67 or the second winning opening 1640, while the ball flowing down the left game area can win (pass) through the gate 67. , The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 1640, and the general winning opening 63 are configured to be able to win (pass).

With this configuration, in a right-handed game in which the ball is fired toward the right game area in the normal state except for the period when the ball can win in the second winning opening 1640 (the game period per the long opening of the normal figure). However, the left-handed game in which the ball is fired toward the left game area is a more advantageous game method for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuously performing the right-handed game and to perform the left-handed game in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting when to perform the right-handed game during the normal state.

Further, in the tenth control example, the time required for the ball launched by the left-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640 (left-handed arrival time) is the time required for the ball launched by the right-handed game to win the second prize. It is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the mouth 1640 (right-handed arrival time). Specifically, the left-handed arrival time is about 4 seconds, while the right-handed arrival time is about 3 seconds.

With this configuration, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game executed after the left-handed game (for example, one second after the previously executed left-handed game). It is possible to reach the second winning opening 1640 at the same timing as the ball fired by the executed right-handed game).

Therefore, when the game per Fuzu long open is executed, the ball wins the second winning opening 1640 during the game per Fuzu long open depending on the timing of switching the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game. Since the ease of play can be made different, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the tenth control example, the winning game period of the game per long opening of the normal figure is 3 seconds (opening period 1 second, closing period 1.5) as in the above-mentioned fifth control example. Seconds, opening period 0.5 seconds). In other words, if the right-handed game is executed after the normal game is executed, it is difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win the second winning opening 1640, that is, the second winning opening 1640. It is configured so that the game may have ended when the ball reaches the center of the game.

As a result, the ball is not fired until the game per Fuzu long open is executed, and a privilege (second prize opening) is given to the player who plays the ball right-handed after the game per Fuzu long open is started. Since it is possible to make it difficult to give the privilege (prize ball, special figure 2 lottery) given by winning the ball to 1640, the player can continuously shoot the ball, and the game can be played. Operation can be improved.

As described above, in the tenth control example, even if the winning game period of the game per long opening of the Fuzu is set to 3 seconds and the right-handed game is executed after the game of the long opening of the Fuzu is started, the game is executed. It is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 1640, but it is not limited to this, and the winning game period of the game per long opening of the normal figure is set to the right-handed arrival time (ball fired by the right-handed game). May be configured to be longer than the time required to reach the second winning opening 1640 (for example, 5 seconds (opening period 1 second, closing period 1 second, opening period 3 seconds)). As a result, it is possible for the player to play the game during the game per the long opening of the normal figure with peace of mind.

<Regarding the production content in the 10th control example>
Next, the content of the characteristic effect executed in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 422. In the tenth control example using the configuration of the game board 13 described with reference to FIG. 421, it is easy to make the ball win the second winning opening 1640 while the game is being executed per the long opening of the normal figure. Therefore, it is configured to be able to execute a guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) for guiding the game method to the player, and the player can easily identify the game method as the notification mode of the guidance notification. A first guidance notification mode and a second guidance notification mode in which it is more difficult for the player to identify the game method than the first guidance notification mode can be set.

With this configuration, depending on whether the executed guidance notification mode is the first guidance notification mode or the second guidance notification mode, the ball is placed in the second winning opening during the game per long opening. It is possible to set a state in which it is easy to win a prize in 1640 and a state in which it is difficult to win a prize.

The first guidance notification mode is a notification mode set as a part of the special map fluctuation effect executed in response to the special map fluctuation, and is in the normal map fluctuation that is won for the normal map long opening. It is set when the special figure fluctuation is executed in a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 90 seconds or more is set), and is set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the variation effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern described above is executed, the player can use a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the small display area DM4 of the main display area DM). A guidance display mode for guiding the game method (for example, a “right-handed” comment) is displayed (see FIG. 320 (B)).

Further, in the tenth control example, the normal map fluctuation ends before the game per normal map long opening is executed (for example, during the normal map fluctuation period in which the normal map long opening is won. During the period when the symbol is stopped (confirmed display), or after receiving the winning information command to win the winning information command for the normal symbol long opening, until the game is executed. (During the period of) The first guidance notification mode can be displayed. With this configuration, even if the game is executed according to the display content (for example, "right-handed") of the first guidance notification mode after recognizing that the first guidance notification mode is displayed. It is possible to easily reach the second winning opening 1640, which is in an open state in which the ball is easily won by the game per long opening.

On the other hand, the second guidance notification mode is always displayed when the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed, and is displayed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guidance notification mode described above. It is a thing. Specifically, a guidance display mode (for example, "right-handed") for guiding the game method to the end of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which is smaller than the first guidance notification mode displayed in the small display area DM4. Icon) is displayed.

As described above, in the tenth control example, the game board 13 is formed so that the period required for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640 is about 3 seconds. If a game method (for example, a right-handed game) is performed according to the content of the notification after recognizing the content of the notification in the second guidance notification mode, depending on the flow condition of the ball, the ball may be thrown during the game during the long opening of the normal figure. 2 A state occurs in which the winning opening 1640 cannot be reached.

Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically allow the player to play the game in order to win the normal figure long opening in a state where the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied. In the tenth control example, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied and the winning is won, the game is executed based on the winning. The first guidance notification mode is displayed 3 seconds before, and the second guidance notification mode is displayed when the game per long opening of the normal figure is executed. With this configuration, even if the first guidance notification mode is displayed before the game for the long opening of the normal figure is actually executed, the game for the long opening of the normal figure is being executed. It is possible to notify the player in the second guidance notification mode.

In the tenth control example, it is set as the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode that the special symbol variation is executed in the variation pattern in which the variation time of 90 seconds or more is set. Without limitation, for example, it may be set as a notification condition that a predetermined operation has been performed on an operation means (for example, a frame button 22) that can be operated by a player, or a transition status of a game state, Specifically, it may be set as a notification condition that the time saving state has ended and the state has shifted to the normal state.

In addition, a flag indicating that the notification condition is satisfied (notification condition establishment flag) is provided, the notification condition establishment flag is set to on when the notification condition is satisfied, and the notification condition establishment flag is set to on during the period. Is configured to be able to display the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above, and is configured to display only the second guidance notification mode when the notification condition establishment flag is set to off. Is also good. In this case, it is preferable to set the notification end condition for setting the notification condition establishment flag set to on to off, and set the notification condition establishment flag to off when the notification end condition is satisfied. ..

Specifically, a predetermined period (the number of times the special figure changes reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, reaches 10 times, or the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes))) after the notification condition establishment flag is set to ON. It may be set so that the notification end condition is satisfied when the notification has elapsed, or the lottery is executed when a predetermined execution opportunity (for example, execution of a special figure lottery, winning of a ball to each winning opening) is satisfied. May be configured so that the notification end condition is satisfied when the predetermined lottery result is obtained.

Furthermore, a plurality of types (for example, A per Fuzu long and B per Fuzu long) are provided for each Fuzu long opening, and notification conditions and notification end conditions are set according to the type of winning Fuzu long opening. By making them different, it may be possible to set a normal map long open hit where the first guidance notification mode is easy to display and a normal map long open hit where it is difficult to display.

Further, the notification condition may be changed based on the game situation of the player. For example, the elapsed period (number of special figure fluctuations, elapsed time) from the previous big hit game (small hit game) satisfies the predetermined condition. In the case (for example, when the number of fluctuations in the special figure reaches the number corresponding to the reciprocal of the jackpot probability), the first guidance notification mode may be displayed without fail when winning the long opening of the normal figure. ..

In addition, a predetermined period after the player shifts from an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game performed when a normal state is set (a game state in which a right-handed game is performed (time saving state)) to a normal state. (Excluding))) is being performed, a warning display for modifying the game method to the player (for example, left-handed in the small display area DM4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). If it is determined that the inappropriate game is continued even after the comment "Please return" is displayed), the notification condition may not be satisfied.

The technique for displaying the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above is not limited to the tenth control example, but is applied to each of the above-described embodiments and control examples. Also, for example, as in the fifth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is formed so that the ball cannot be won in the second winning opening 640 unless the right-handed game is executed. May be applied. In this case, the privilege given to the player differs greatly depending on whether or not the first guidance notification mode is displayed. Therefore, the game for satisfying the notification condition is enthusiastically performed for the player. Can be made.

Further, a notification means for notifying the player of the game method for establishing the notification condition may be provided, for example, in order to establish the notification condition in the sub-display area DS of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to configure it to display the necessary necessary information (for example, give a super reach). Further, it is preferable to share the presence / absence of the display of the necessary information as the suggestion information for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, when the game according to the display content displayed as necessary information is executed, the notification condition for displaying the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, or the lottery result of the special symbol is determined. Since it is possible to inform the player whether or not the predetermined lottery result (for example, the lottery result indicating the big hit winning) has been obtained in an incomprehensible manner, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, a notification means capable of notifying the player that the first guidance notification mode can be notified (a state in which the notification condition is satisfied) may be provided. As a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the tenth control example, as a guidance notification mode suggesting that the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure, the player determines the notification content from the first guidance notification mode and the first guidance notification mode. The second guidance notification mode, which is difficult to perform, is configured to be configurable, but in a state where the first guidance notification mode can be notified, a special operation to a further special execution condition (for example, an operation means (frame button 22)) is performed. When the condition) that is satisfied when the above is satisfied, a special guidance notification mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first guidance notification mode may be set.

Here, the special guidance notification mode is a guidance notification mode that notifies the player of the timing of executing a game method (for example, a right-handed game) according to the notification content, and is guided by the guidance notification mode. By executing the game method according to the content of the notification at the same timing, it is possible to make the player play a game in which advantageous benefits are easily given. As described above, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example is configured so that both the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game can reach the second winning opening 1640. It takes about 4 seconds for the ball launched by the left-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640, and the period required for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the second winning opening 1640. Is configured to be about 3 seconds. Then, by operating the operation handle 51, 100 balls can be fired per minute.

Therefore, by changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game according to the execution timing of the game per long open, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game. Is configured so that the second winning opening 640 can be reached at substantially the same timing. The above-mentioned special guidance notification mode is based on the timing at which the game is executed per the long opening of the normal figure, from the game method currently being executed to the player (for example, a left-handed game) to the game method according to the notification content (for example). , Right-handed game) and the timing at which multiple balls can reach the second winning opening 640 at the same time as the ball launch timing of the running game method (for example, left-handed game). The notification mode for notifying the user is set.

With such a configuration, the player will enthusiastically play the game so that a more advantageous guidance / notification mode is displayed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In the above-mentioned example, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, the above-mentioned special guidance notification mode can be set, but the first guidance notification mode is not limited to this. Even when the notification condition of is not satisfied, it may be configured so that a special execution condition for setting the special guidance notification mode can be satisfied, and the special execution condition is the first guidance notification. It may be configured so that the notification condition of the mode is satisfied more easily than the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied.

In addition, a plurality of conditions are set as notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes, and when a predetermined number (for example, two) of the conditions are satisfied, the corresponding guidance notification mode is provided. May be configured to set. Further, the ease of establishing the notification condition (execution condition) for setting various guidance notification modes based on the operation result for the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be different. Each time a person performs a specific operation on the operation means, each notification condition (execution condition) is variably set so that the notification condition (execution condition) for setting various guidance notification modes can be easily satisfied. It may be configured as. As a result, the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

As described above, in the 7th control example, the game per game is executed, that is, the game per game (game per long opening of the game) that allows the ball to be won in the second winning opening 1640. It is configured to execute a guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) for notifying the player during the execution of the normal figure fluctuation which is the lottery result to be executed, and the game per normal figure is started. At the time before (before the fluctuation of the normal map is stopped and displayed), the game method executed by the player is configured to be changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the game per normal figure is started. The game ball fired by the right-handed game before the game is configured to win a prize in the second winning opening 1640 during the game per opening of the Fuzu long, but it is not limited to this, for example, the Fuzu long. A predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) is set as the opening period of the open game, and the above-mentioned guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) is applied to the opening period of the game per long open game (after the game per game is started). , The period until the electric accessory 1640A is opened) may be configured to be executed.

With this configuration, the guidance notification (right-handed notification) can be executed after the winning normal map fluctuation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so that the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is not executed per normal figure. In this case as well, as in the tenth control example, it is determined whether the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, and the first guidance notification mode is set only when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied. It is preferable to configure it to execute guidance notification. In addition, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, the effect for showing the lottery result of the normal map lottery is performed by using the normal map fluctuation period and the opening period of the game per normal map. Is executed, and the display mode indicating that the player has won the game as a result of the effect is displayed at the end timing of the opening period of the game per game (the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 640A).

As a result, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, it is notified that the player has won the game at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A is executed as a game per game. Therefore, even if the player who has identified that he / she has won the prize by the notification plays the right-handed game, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win the second winning opening 1640. In the above-mentioned example, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, the player wins the game at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 1640A is executed as a game per game. An example of notifying this is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the opening period of the game per normal figure, when the remaining period of the opening period is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the normal figure is used. It may be configured to notify that the winner has been won. In other words, even if a player who recognizes that he / she has won a hit in a normal figure plays a right-handed game, it is difficult to win a ball in the second winning opening 1640 during the right-handed game, for example, due to a right-handed game. Rather than the period required for the fired ball to reach the 2nd winning opening 1640, the game per normal drawing ends after notifying that the ball has won the 2nd winning opening 1640 (the ball can be won in the 2nd winning opening 1640). It is advisable to configure it so that the period until the end of the period) is shortened.

Further, based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, if the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, until the game per normal figure is executed. In the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation in the period, the effect suggesting that the player wins the game is executed, and the effect in which the first guidance notification mode is set is executed in the opening period of the game per game. By fusing the production mode of the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation and the production mode of the opening effect of the game per normal figure, the player is notified of the timing to perform the right-handed game. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the first notification for showing the lottery result of the special figure lottery is executed by the special figure effect executed based on the special figure change, and the normal figure lottery is executed by the normal figure effect executed based on the normal figure change. By executing the second notification for showing the lottery result, and further executing the first notification and the second notification in a related manner (continuously or duplicately), the general figure is used. The third notification for indicating the right-handed timing at which the right-handed game is executed to the player may be executed for the hit game.

In addition, the length of the set opening period is different depending on the type of the game per game to be executed, and the game per game in which a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more is set as the opening period. , The ease of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the game per game is different from that of the game per game in which a period less than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the opening period. Alternatively, when the type of the set guidance notification mode (first guidance notification mode) and the type of the game per game to be executed satisfy a predetermined combination condition, the combination condition is not satisfied. , The guidance notification for facilitating the winning of the ball in the second winning opening 640 may be executed during the game per game. As a result, different benefits for the player (to the second winning opening 640) depending on the type of the game per game to be executed, the type of the set guidance notification mode, and whether or not the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied. Ease of winning a ball) can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the sixth control example, the method of setting the guidance notification mode for facilitating the winning of the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the game per game has been described, but a specific game (for example, the game per game) From a game in which a ball is launched with a single firing intensity (for example, a left-handed game) to a game in which a ball is launched with a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity (for example, right-handed). Anything that makes it easier to win a ball to a specific winning opening (for example, the second winning opening 640) by changing it to a game), for example, a small hit by a special drawing lottery executed during a left-handed game. As a small hit game executed when a winner is won, a winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) that is opened during the small hit game at a position where a ball fired by a right-handed game can win a prize (for example, the right game area). If the configuration is provided with 650A), the guidance notification mode of the same idea as this control example may be set by using the special figure fluctuation period and the opening period of the small hit game.

<About a modified example of the 7th control example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 423 and 424. FIG. 423 is a front view schematically showing the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the seventh control example. The board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modification is different from the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above in that the configuration of the right gaming area is changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 423, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modification, the flow speed of the sphere is reduced in the flow path of the first flow path 701 (the time required for the sphere to pass through the first flow path 701 is delayed). ), And the delay members 701Y and 701Z are arranged so that the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 (ball passing time) is about 4 seconds. An operation gate 670 is provided at the lower end of the flow of the first flow path 701.

Here, the operating gate 670 will be described. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, when a jackpot is won by lottery of a special symbol, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating the jackpot winning after a special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined time. Then, the jackpot game is configured to be executed. On the other hand, in this modification, the jackpot game is executed when it is determined that the ball has passed the operation gate 670 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the display mode indicating the jackpot winning. It is configured to be. That is, the actuating gate 670 is used as an execution means for executing the jackpot game when the jackpot execution condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot winning).

With this configuration, not only the lottery result of the special symbol but also the player can actually execute the jackpot game by firing the ball toward the predetermined area (operation gate 670). Can be enthusiastically played. The operating gate 670 used in this modification is one of the execution conditions for executing the jackpot game only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot for the start gate 720A of the above-mentioned A4 embodiment. (The start gate 720A is provided as an execution condition in both the small hit game and the big hit game), and the other configurations (gate structure and main control device 110) are different. Since the processing contents (condition device determination processing (see S250 in FIG. 311)) are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, this modification is different from the above-mentioned seventh control example in that the arrangement position of the electric accessory 640A and the V winning device 650 is changed. Further, the difference is that the configuration of the second winning opening 640 is changed to a gate shape through which a ball can pass. Since the other configurations of the game board 13 are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification is configured so that the variation time of the selected special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol are different from those of the pachinko machine of the seventh control example described above. Specifically, as a variation pattern that can be selected when a big hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in a normal state, or when a small hit is won, a special special figure with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds. As a variation pattern that can be selected when one variation pattern is selectable and a small hit is won in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery in the normal state, the special special figure 2 variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is used. It can be selected, and a special normal map fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds can be selected as a normal map fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a normal symbol is won for a long opening.

Then, as the end condition of the small hit game, the first end condition that is established when the number of winning balls reaches one, and the period in which the V winning opening 650A is open in the small hit game is 1.5 seconds. The second termination condition, which is satisfied when the above is reached, is stipulated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example configured in this way, when the special figure fluctuation in which the special special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is set is stopped and displayed, or when the special figure fluctuation pattern is set in the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. When the stop display is displayed, it is configured to execute a guidance notification (see FIG. 320 (B)) for causing the player to perform a right-handed game as a game method.

Here, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the jackpot winning, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701 and passes through the operating gate 670, so that the jackpot is hit. The game is started. As described above, since it takes about 5 seconds for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the operating gate 670, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. become.

Further, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the small hit winning, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows down the second flow path 702 and wins the V winning opening 650A. The jackpot game is started. As described above, it takes about 4 seconds for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the V winning opening 650A, and the small hit game ends when one ball wins during the small hit game. Moreover, when a ball wins in the V winning opening 650A, the winning ball is configured to always pass through the V gate (V area), so that about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. The jackpot game will be started.

Further, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the winning of the normal drawing, the ball launched by the right-handed game flows into the second flow path 702 and passes through the second winning opening 640. If the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the passage is a small hit, the small hit game is executed after a variation time of 1 second. Since the second flow path 702 is formed so that the time for the ball passing through the second winning opening 640 to reach the V winning opening 650A is about 2 seconds, a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. If so, the ball that has passed through the second winning opening 640 will win the V winning opening 650A. Therefore, the big hit game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed.

That is, in this modification, the same fluctuation time is set for the case where the big hit is won and the case where the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol) in the normal state, and the fluctuation time has elapsed. When a guidance notification (right-handed notification) for changing the game method is executed at the timing, the player can perform a right-handed game based on the guidance notification, so that the jackpot game can be executed at the same timing. It is configured in.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the big hit game is executed based on the big hit winning or the small hit winning. can. Further, as in the control example described above, the big hit game executed when the big hit winning of the special symbol is won and the big hit game (V big hit game) executed via the small hit winning are performed by the player. If the size of the benefits given (the number of prize balls during the jackpot game, the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) set after the jackpot is over) is different, what triggered the jackpot game to be executed? By making it difficult to understand, it is possible to play the game while having expectations for the game state set during the big hit game or after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in this modification, as described above, even if a specific hit (a long open hit of a normal figure) is won in a lottery of a normal symbol, a big hit game is started after the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. It is configured so that the period until the winning is the same as when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is won. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the execution opportunity of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this modification, when the lottery result (special figure lottery result, normal figure lottery result) in which the jackpot game can be executed is obtained, the same fluctuation time (50 seconds) is selected. Therefore, it is possible to set a special variation effect using the same effect mode as the effect using the variation time. This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the special variation effect being executed is a special variation effect based on the special map variation or a special variation effect based on the normal map variation even while the special variation effect is being executed. be able to.

In the above-mentioned example, the case where the special variation effect is set for the special variation pattern in which the variation time of 50 seconds is set has been described, but the variation time is not limited to this, for example, the variation time of 50 seconds or more. Of the variation effects corresponding to the set variation patterns, the above-mentioned special variation effect may be executed when the remaining variation time of the variation time is 50 seconds. Furthermore, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a special out-of-order variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds can be set, and as a result of the special variation effect, the guidance of the right-handed game after the variation time elapses. An effect pattern (failure effect) in which notification is not executed may be configured to be executable. With this configuration, even when the special variation effect is executed, it is possible to provide a pattern (gase pattern) in which the right-handed game is not guided, so that the player pays attention to the content of the special variation effect. be able to.

In addition, as described above in each control example, a specific hit (a long open hit of a normal figure) is won by a lottery of a normal symbol, a guidance notification for guiding a right-handed game is executed, and a second prize is won by the right-handed game. If the special figure 1 change is being executed when the mouth 640 is won (passed), the special figure 2 change is not immediately executed, that is, the special figure 1 change is not executed until the execution of the special figure 1 change is completed. 2 The waiting period during which the fluctuation is not executed will be set. In this case, it is preferable to execute the failure effect as a failure pattern in which the jackpot game is not executed even though the guidance notification is executed. In addition, when the ball is won (passed) in the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game and the special figure 2 lottery is executed immediately, the above-mentioned failure effect is also obtained even if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is out of order. It is good to configure it to execute.

With this configuration, it is possible to set the same production mode when the special figure 2 lottery is won out of the game and when the waiting period for the special figure 2 lottery is set. If the waiting period is within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the waiting period has elapsed is a small hit winning, the small winning is won from the above-mentioned failure effect. It is preferable to configure so that the effect (revival effect) of switching to the effect mode indicating that the effect has been performed is executed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that can make the player have expectations until the end.

The waiting period of the special figure 2 lottery may be calculated and predicted using various techniques used in each of the above-mentioned control examples, and various techniques used in each control example may be appropriately combined. Further, in the case of performing a right-handed game based on the winning of a normal figure, or in the case of performing a small hit game based on a small hit winning, the ball is a specific winning opening as in each control example described above. (2nd winning opening 640, V winning opening 650A) may not be won (passed). Also in this case, the effect mode described in the fifth control example described above (see, for example, FIG. 324 (B)) may be displayed. Further, even when a big hit is won in the special drawing lottery, a predetermined timing, for example, a timing at which a ball launched by a right-handed game can pass near the second winning opening 640 (after the guidance notification mode is displayed). It may be configured to execute a pseudo failure effect at a timing (about 1 second later) or at a timing when the ball can reach the V winning opening 650A (about 4 seconds after the guidance notification mode is displayed).

In the above-mentioned modification, the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the jackpot game by a plurality of triggers notifies the player that the condition for executing the jackpot game is satisfied (“right-handed notification” in this modification). By making the period from that time until the jackpot game is actually executed the same regardless of the trigger until the jackpot game is executed, the player is informed in advance that the jackpot game will be executed. Since it is configured to make it difficult to understand at which moment the jackpot game is executed while notifying, which game mode the jackpot game is actually executed or the game state after the jackpot game is completed. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict which game state is set.

The notification mode for notifying that the condition for executing the jackpot game is satisfied is not limited to the configuration of this modification, and for example, the production mode of the variation effect executed in response to each symbol variation can be used. It may be set to an effect mode indicating that the condition for executing the jackpot game is satisfied, and the period from the execution of the notification based on the notification mode to the actual execution of the jackpot game should be unified. If it is possible, the notification timing and notification mode may be appropriately set.

Further, in the case of using the opportunity to execute the big hit game through the small hit game, no matter when the ball wins the V winning opening 650A at any timing during the small hit game, it is determined in advance after the small hit game is started. It is advisable to configure the jackpot game to be executed after a certain amount of time has passed. As a result, it is possible to further unify the period from the execution of the notification based on the notification mode to the actual execution of the jackpot game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration in which the type (big hit type) of the big hit game to be executed later is set when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) during the small hit game, the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit game. A plurality of specific areas (V gates) are provided in the V winning opening 650A where balls can win, and the balls winning in the V winning opening 650A are distributed to any of the plurality of specific areas (V gates) on the upstream side thereof. By providing a distribution movable member and configuring the distribution movable member to move according to the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, the swing in the V winning opening 650A after the small hit game is started. The sphere is configured to pass through a specific region (V gate) that differs depending on the time until the sphere reaches the movable member. Then, by configuring the jackpot type in which the jackpot game in which a different opening period is set when passing through each specific region (V gate) is set, each specific region (V gate) is sphered. Even when the configuration in which the jackpot game is executed based on the passage of the game is used, the timing at which the specific winning opening 65 is opened may be unified in the jackpot game.

<About the production correspondence example at the time of power failure of each control example>
Next, among the various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a plurality of periods in which different game controls (special figure variable game, normal figure variable game, small hit game, big hit game) are performed by the main control device 110. The control processing content of the voice lamp control device 113 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of the period effect (series effect, final variation effect) executed straddling the above description will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of each control example, the control processing content (various information stored in the RAM 203) of the main control device 110 is the same even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. While the information can be temporarily retained (backed up), the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for the control processing contents (various information stored in the RAM 223) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to be erased in case.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the above-mentioned period effect is being executed based on the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 (power cut state). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed (at the time of power recovery), it becomes impossible to read what period the production was performed immediately before the power failure state. There was a problem that the period production could not be resumed.

Therefore, in this corresponding example, the return command indicating the game status at the time of power recovery is configured to be set in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 356) (set after C910 in FIG. 356). As the return command, the remaining period until the game state shifts, such as whether or not there is a change in the special map, whether or not there is a change in the normal map, whether or not there is a current game state, whether or not there is a big hit game, whether or not there is a small hit game, and whether or not there is a right-handed notification. It is configured to set a command including each information of the information, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the above-mentioned recovery command, the current state (during power recovery) can execute the period effect (power interruption). It is configured to be able to execute the discrimination process (pre-disruption effect discrimination process) for determining whether or not the period effect has been executed immediately before).

Then, in the pre-electric power effect determination process, if it is determined that the current period effect cannot be executed (for example, during a big hit game), the effect corresponding to the command output from the main control device 110 is executed. If it is determined in the pre-disruption effect determination process that the current state is in a state where the period effect can be executed, the period effect is to be restarted later based on the command output from the main control device 110. The preparation processing state is set, and a comment indicating that the production may be restarted is displayed to the player.

Then, in a state where the preparation processing state is set, a command including information on the small hit type indicating the small hit winning (game for long open hit in the normal figure) in which a series of effects are executed as a hit-related command from the main control device 110 is issued. When it is determined that the output has been made, the period production is restarted from the start of the small hit game. With this configuration, a period effect is executed over a plurality of periods in which different game controls (special figure variable game, normal figure variable game, small hit game, big hit game) are performed by the main control device 110. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of (series of effects, final variation effect), it is possible to prevent all of the effects during that period from being discarded.

Further, in this corresponding example, even if the execution condition of the new effect (period effect) is satisfied while the preparation processing state is set, there is a limiting means for restricting the execution of the new effect (period effect). is doing. That is, the process of resuming the effect (period effect) that was executed before the power failure is configured to be executed with priority over the process of newly executing the effect (period effect) after the power is restored. With this configuration, it is possible to give priority to the effect (period effect) that has already been provided (partially provided) to the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with a natural effect. .. In addition, when the effect mode of the effect (period effect) being executed before the power failure and the effect mode of the effect (period effect) newly set regardless of the effect (period effect) are combined, the game is played. It is possible to surely prevent the production result from being advantageous to the person.

Further, in the state where the preparation processing state is set, there is a possibility that the effect (period effect) was executed immediately before the power failure each time various commands received from the main control device 110 are received. If it is configured to repeatedly execute the discrimination process for determining the presence or absence, and based on the discrimination result, it is determined that the effect (period effect) cannot be executed immediately before the power failure. The comment indicating that the effect (period effect) may be restarted to the player is deleted, and the control process of the normal voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

Further, if the state in which the preparation processing state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of commands received from the main control device 110 reaches 10, 20 seconds after the power is restored), the power is transmitted. A display mode (for example) indicating that the effect (period effect) that may have been executed before the power failure cannot be restarted, and the player cannot resume the effect (period effect) before the power failure. , The comment) "All the production contents before the power failure have been invalidated" is displayed, and the control process of the normal voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

With this configuration, even if the effect (period effect) that was being executed before the power failure cannot be resumed, it is possible to notify the player that the effect could not be resumed, for example. , A mission effect such as "If a reach of 3 occurs within 10 rotations, a big hit!" Is executed before the power cut, and after the power is restored, "3 reach" is executed regardless of the effect content that was executed before the power cut. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by executing "." Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the predetermined period after the power is restored (for example, the maximum period in which the mission effect can be set (the number of special map fluctuations is 30 times, etc.)) may overlap with the effect result in the mission effect. It may be configured so that the effect mode is not set. Specifically, in a game in which a mission for establishing any of a specific reach mode (for example, reach of "3", "5", "7") can be set as a mission effect, a predetermined value after power recovery In the period, if the result of the special drawing lottery is out of order, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is not set, and if the result of the special drawing lottery is a hit, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the effect within the limited range even within a predetermined period after the power is restored. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a hit, a specific reach mode can be set, so a mission effect (for example, generate a reach of "3") is executed before the power failure. Even if "3 reach" occurs by chance within a predetermined period after the power is restored, the lottery result will be a hit, so that the player will not feel uncomfortable.

As described above, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an opportunity to execute a privilege game (big hit game) in which the player has an advantage, a big hit game is won by a special symbol lottery (design big hit game). Is executed (first opportunity) and a small hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, and the game ball is opened in a specific area (during the small hit game) during the small hit game. A gaming machine having two triggers: a trigger (second trigger) for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on passing through a V region (not shown) provided in (see 315). However, the game is not limited to this, and as an opportunity to execute a privileged game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, a big hit game (design big hit game) is executed by winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery. The technique of each control example described above may be diverted to the gaming machine having only the opportunity (first opportunity) to be performed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol). However, it is not limited to this, and it is possible to set a high probability state of a special symbol with a high probability of winning a special symbol after the end of the big hit game, and a probability change state (high of the special symbol). It may be configured so that a probability state (high probability state of a normal symbol) and a latent state (high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set.

Then, when a specific gaming state (latent state) is set as the gaming state, it is easier to execute a specific special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) than when another gaming state is set (special drawing 2 lottery). Fig. 2 Make it easier to win the ball to the starting opening that triggers the execution of the lottery, or shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery), and frequently show the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 2 lottery. The game to be played may be configured to be feasible. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play a game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained without winning a big hit in the special drawing lottery, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the fifth control example to the tenth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot execution triggers for executing the jackpot game is used, and specifically, the first special symbol is used. The first jackpot execution opportunity triggered by winning the jackpot by the lottery of (Special Figure 1) and the small hit by the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) are won and executed based on the small hit winning. It has a second big hit execution opportunity triggered by winning a ball in the V winning opening 650A (see FIG. 315) which is open to the small hit game. In addition, as a special figure change execution opportunity for executing the lottery of the special symbol, the first special figure change execution opportunity triggered by having the ball win in the first winning opening 64 and the ball passing through the through gate 67. A ball is executed at the second winning opening 640 (see Fig. 315), which is opened by the game per game that is executed when a lottery of a normal symbol (normal figure) is executed and the winning is won in the normal pattern lottery. It has the second special figure change execution opportunity, which is triggered by winning a prize. Then, the jackpot game is configured to be executed through various game processes according to the establishment condition of each jackpot execution trigger and each special figure fluctuation execution trigger. With such a configuration, the player can be made to execute the jackpot game through various game processes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the fifth control example described above, from one game state (time saving state) in which it is easy to obtain a specific lottery right (a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 lottery), the one game. When the transition condition for transitioning to another gaming state (normal state) where it is more difficult to obtain a specific lottery right than the state is satisfied, the acquisition guidance notification for acquiring a specific lottery right during one gaming state is executed. However, by configuring it so that it is easy to execute a specific lottery after shifting to another gaming state, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game until just before the end of one gaming state. However, not limited to this, for example, if it is easier to acquire a specific lottery right during the jackpot game than the game state set after the jackpot game ends, the acquisition guidance notification is given during the jackpot game. May be configured so that a specific lottery can be easily executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right may be different by changing the ease of winning a ball in the winning opening (starting winning opening) which is a specific lottery right, or the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right may be different. By making the length of the set period different, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right during the game state may be made different.

Further, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right differs between one gaming state and another gaming state, but the privilege given to the player It suffices as long as it is possible to change the game content in another game state based on the privilege acquired in one game state by varying the degree, and for example, the ball can be stored (retained) in a predetermined area of the game board 13. A storage member (retention member) is provided so that the ball is more easily stored in the storage member when one game state is set than when the other game states are set. Then, in other gaming states, it is configured to be more advantageous to the player to play the game with the balls stored in the storage member than to play the game with the balls not stored in the storage member. Is also good.

<11th control example>
Next, the eleventh control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 425 to 505. It should be noted that the eleventh control example is for explaining the control example by changing a part of the configuration for each of the above-described embodiments, and the detailed description of the same configuration as each of the above-described embodiments will be described. Is omitted.

FIG. 425 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 425, the game board 13 in the eleventh control example has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, and a rail 76. , 77, general ball entry port 63, second ball entry port 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, distribution device 700, etc. It is attached to the back side of (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen by the player from the front side thereof. The general entry port 63, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the opening 710A of the distribution device 700 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. Further, as will be described in detail later, inside the distribution device 700, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter and a right second ball entry port 640R are provided. The ball that has entered the opening 710A is distributed by the distribution device 700 to either the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640R (see FIG. 426).

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5C (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 425.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112A (see FIG. 436) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion of FIG. 425) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part of FIG. 425) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 425) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 436), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the eleventh control example, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B determine whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, or the right second ball entry port 640R. It is configured to be used properly according to the situation. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the ball is the second ball opening 640 or the right second ball opening. When a prize is won in 640R, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable variable jackpot (big hit A, C), a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot (big hit B), or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right second ball entry port 640R has won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R time saving 100 times jackpot (big hit A), 16R probability variable odd symbol jackpot (big hit B1), 16R probability variable even symbol jackpot (big hit B2), and 2R probability variation jackpot (big hit C) are prepared. ing. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, "16R time reduction 100 times jackpot" (big hit A) means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 after being notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by stopping and displaying the same even-numbered symbols. After the round jackpot game, it is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state and is in a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). "16R probability variation odd jackpot" (big hit B1) is notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by finally stopping and displaying the same odd symbol, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after a jackpot and is in an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "16R probability variation even symbol jackpot" (big hit B2) is notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by finally stopping and displaying the same even symbol, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed) and becomes an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "2R probability variation jackpot" (big hit C) means that the third symbol is finally displayed as a combination of specific symbols (chance eye), and then the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpot. It is a probabilistic jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed). In the case of jackpot C, the electric support state is not set after the jackpot game.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. Further, the "electric support state" in the "high probability state" means a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is also set short. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the time-saving state (during the time-saving) in the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol increases and the second entry port It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the electric support during the probability change (during the electric support game state) and during the time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. It will be changed and a longer time will be set compared to normal. When the electric accessory 640A is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640A is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that the opening time of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entry port 640 is not changed during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change, or in addition to changing the opening time, 1 The change may be made to increase the number of times that the electric accessory 640A is opened at each time than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entrance 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640A is opened and the electric accessory 640A is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times to do may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entry port 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640A per time are not performed, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general entry openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) of any one of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right second ball entry port 640R, and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 projects toward the front surface side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 436), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 456), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights the “◯” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (see FIG. 425)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display to be made. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol of “◯” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entry port 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640A of the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize at the second entry port 640 during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change.

It should be noted that the second method during the probabilistic change or the time reduction can be performed by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640A per hit by increasing the hit probability during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the ball entry port 640, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640A may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls that flow down the game board 13 can pass through the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins (wins) through the opening 710A with respect to this distribution device 700, the ball that has entered is alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640R. Be done. When the ball wins (balls) in the first ball slot 64, the first ball slot switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball slot switch is turned on. As a result, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 436), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. Further, when the ball wins the right second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on as in the case of the right second entrance 640R. Then, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 456) due to the turning on of the second entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

On the other hand, a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win is arranged below the front view of the sorting device 700. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 456), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B. This second entry port 640 does not allow the game ball to enter (it is difficult) by restricting the entry of the game ball in a state where the left and right electric accessory 640A, which is normally formed in the shape of a blade, is upright. ) The electric accessory 640A rotates about 45 degrees outward as an opening operation in a certain operation pattern when it hits a normal symbol, which will be described later. The game ball is guided to the 2 entry port 640 so that the game ball can easily enter the 2nd entry port 640.

In addition, 5 balls are paid out as prize balls in each of the 1st entrance 64 and the right 2nd entrance 640R, and 2 balls are awarded in the 2nd entrance 640. It is also one of the winning openings paid out as a ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640, and the right number. 2 The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the entry port 640R is configured to be different, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the right second entrance 640R may be configured as the same number.

An electric accessory 640A is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640A is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640A is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640A is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than during the normal period, so that the variation of the second symbol is short. The symbol "○" is easily displayed on the display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640A is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640A is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second entry port 640 as compared with the normal time.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball basically reaches the opening 710A. A big hit lottery is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640R.

On the other hand, during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change, the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, and the second entry is made. Since it is easy to win a prize in the ball opening 640, in addition to the ball entering the opening 710A being distributed to the first entry opening 64 or the right second entry opening 640R, the second entry ball is entered. The big hit lottery that accompanies entering the ball into the mouth 640 is also easy to be executed. Therefore, since there are more chances of big hit lottery than during normal times, it is advantageous for the player as compared with normal times.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is for the player depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the electric support during the probability change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). , You can change the way the ball is fired. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower side of the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any of the first entry slot 64, the second entry slot 640, and the right second entry slot 640R becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (varies). After the lapse of time), the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The occurrence of a jackpot is shown. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65A, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65A is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65A is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65A can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65A, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65A is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65A, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so that the state and the state are repeated alternately.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65A is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65A is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65A is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65A while the specific winning opening 65A is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65A is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the front view of the distribution device 700. For example, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win a prize in any of the entry ports 63, 64, 65A, 640, 640R is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. The out port 66 is arranged below the distribution device 700.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 456). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 456). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 436. FIG. 436 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 473) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (FIG. 472) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 471) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65A. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112A so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112A includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51B for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a touch sensor 290, a setting switch 291, RTC292, a firing sensor 293, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. There is.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 456). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 426. FIG. 426 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. As shown in FIG. 426, the distribution device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13. The through hole formed in the game board 13 accommodates a flow path portion through which the game ball entering the opening 710A flows down and a flow path portion through which the game ball entering the second entry port 640 flows down. It is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side by the base member of the distribution device 700.

The winning member 730 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned opening 710A located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640A located below the opening 710A, and the electric accessory 640A thereof. A through hole (not shown) that is located on both sides in the left-right direction and is formed through in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole (not shown) that is located below the through-hole and is formed through in the front-rear direction. Formed mainly in preparation.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and is formed in a box-like body having an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction in the front view, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The distribution member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction in the front view toward both left and right sides, a distribution member 762 arranged at the center of the inclined surfaces 761 of each other, and a distribution member 762. It is formed mainly with a throwing port formed above the.

The distribution member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and is inserted into the inside of the annular shape with three protrusions 762A projecting outward at a distance of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof. It is formed with a shaft portion 762B.

The shaft portion 762B is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around the axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inside of the annulus of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762B is sandwiched between the intermediate member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is rotatably arranged around the shaft portion 762B.

The protrusion 762A is a protrusion for alternately distributing the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball passing through the opening 710A is thrown, and is in the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762A in the central portion is located. The ball is thrown to the opposite side in the left-right direction. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710A can be thrown in the left-right direction by the protrusion 762A in the central portion. The protrusions 762A projecting from both ends regulate the displacement of the distribution member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762A in the center is located due to the weight applied when the sphere passes (distribution member 762). The rotation of the distribution member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762A and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the sphere is guided by the protrusion 762A in the center of the protrusion 762A that is not in contact with the inclined surface, the guided sphere collides with the protrusion 762A and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762A on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762A displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface to regulate the displacement.

The inclined surface is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as "third throwing path KR3") in which a ball distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 described above is rolled and thrown, and is a rolling surface of the distribution member 760. It is formed by inclining downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the ball distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 is rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown (rolled) to the lower end of the inclined surface 761.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so as to be inclined in a direction closer to the interposing member so that the side surface on the back surface side increases in thickness forward toward the end. As a result, the ball thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761 is rolled to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640R of the interposition member arranged in front of the distribution member 760. Can be thrown to. More specifically, a ball that is distributed to the left side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolls on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first ball entry port 64. On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the right second entry port 640R.

The interposition member is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 in the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view, the first ball opening 64 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side, and the right side. It is mainly provided with a right second entry port 640R penetrating in the front-rear direction and these first entry openings 64.

The first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640R are each formed on the front side of the left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640R. Therefore, a path for passing a ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above to the through hole of the winning member 730 through the first entry port 64 and a right second entry port 640R. Can form a path for throwing a ball into the through hole of the winning member 730.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710A is thrown to the sorting member 760 and is thrown to the third throwing path KR3 in either the left-right direction by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the ball is inside the first entry port 64 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4. Here, the game ball that has entered the first entry port 64 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the first entry port 64.

On the other hand, when the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the right second entry port 640R of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4 inside. Here, the game ball that has entered the second entry port 640 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second entry port 640R.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the opening 710A is alternately distributed to the first entry port 64 and the right second entry opening 640 by the distribution member 762, so that the game ball is evenly distributed to the first entry port 64. It is possible to uniformly generate a reserved ball by inserting a game ball into the right second entry port 640R. As a result, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be generated evenly, the number of reserved balls on one side becomes an upper limit, and overflow that is not stored as a reserved ball can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to change at the same time, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to change at the same time. With such a configuration, a lottery for more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the games can be played more time-efficiently.

The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 456) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B1", one of the main symbols of the odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" is doublet and stopped and displayed. Variable display is performed. Further, in the case of "big hit A" or "big hit B2", variable display is performed in which any one of the main symbols of even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" is aligned. Further, in the case of the jackpot C, the chance eyes composed of the combination of "341" are displayed. It should be noted that this combination of chances is not selected when the lottery result is out of order. In the present embodiment, the chance eye is configured to be displayed by a combination of a specific third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol (for example, a golden fish symbol) different from the normal third symbol from 0 to 9 is displayed. ) May be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or characters such as "chance" may be displayed for notification.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 427 to 435, an effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 427 (A), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area DM for variablely displaying the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area DS that displays a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area DM is divided into three display areas DM1 to DM3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas DM1 to DM3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The substantially center of this main display area DM is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area DS is provided horizontally below the main display area DM, and is further divided into two small areas DS1 to DS2 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area DS1 is an execution display area in which the hold symbol on which the change is executed is moved and displayed when the hold ball held in the main display area DM is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). be. The reserved symbol moved to the execution display area is displayed with a symbol larger than the reserved symbol so that it can be identified that the corresponding special symbol change is in progress. When the fluctuation is executed, the color of the symbol is changed or the pattern of the symbol is changed to suggest the lottery result of the fluctuating special symbol.

The small area DS2 is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, the right second entry opening 640R, and the second entry opening 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and the preview effect image. In the small area DS2, a character display area C in which a notice effect image of the character is displayed when the number of reserved balls becomes a predetermined number or more is set.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 427 (B), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area DM. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after it are visually displayed, so a total of 9 main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area DS, the small area DS1 displays the executing pedestal symbol M0 indicating that the reserved ball corresponding to the executing special symbol is an area to be moved and displayed. As shown in A), when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed, a round symbol is displayed. Of the reserved symbols (circular symbols) displayed in the small area DS2, the round symbol displayed on the leftmost side indicating that the most reserved order is first is hidden, and then the small area is displayed. A round symbol having a diameter larger than that of the reserved symbol is displayed on the DS1. In this case, the reserved symbol displayed in the small area DS2 is displayed by moving the reserved symbol displayed side by side to the position where the hidden leftmost reserved symbol was displayed. Will be done. When the reserved symbol moves to the small area DS1 and is displayed as a symbol being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol that starts to change, the selected variation pattern, and the like. Then, the color and the symbol of the running symbol are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed and the selected fluctuation pattern from the running symbol displayed in the small area DS1, and the game can be played. Can improve the interest of. The pattern being executed displayed in the small area DS1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, the pattern, etc. at the start of the change, but also the effect of changing the special symbol within the period of change. For example, the timing at which the third symbol switches from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation and the reach display mode (display mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed in a scroll manner). It is executed at the timing or at the timing when a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 427 (B), in the small area DS2, a first reserved symbol pedestal M1 indicating that the reserved symbol indicating that the variable order is the first reserved symbol is displayed is an area. It is displayed on the far left. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal M1, the second reserved symbol pedestal M2 indicating that the reserved order is the second, the third reserved symbol pedestal M3 indicating that the reserved order is the third, and the reserved order. The 4th reserved symbol pedestal M4 indicating that is the 4th, the 5th reserved symbol pedestal M5 indicating that the reserved order is the 5th, and the 6th reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the reserved order is the 6th. M6, the 7th reserved symbol pedestal M7 indicating that the reserved order is the 7th, and the 8th reserved symbol pedestal M8 indicating that the reserved order is the 8th are in a state where the reserved symbols are not displayed. Is also displayed.

When the predetermined number or more of the reserved symbols are not displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal M5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal M8, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed respectively. The reserved number suggestion symbol P is configured in a variable lid shape in which the character "5" indicating that the reserved order is the fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal M5. Similarly, the character "6" indicating that the holding order is the sixth is displayed on the upper part of the sixth reserved symbol pedestal M6, and the holding order is 7 on the upper part of the seventh reserved symbol pedestal M7. A variable lid shape in which the character "7" indicating that it is the second is displayed, and the character "8" indicating that the holding order is the eighth is displayed at the upper part of the pedestal M8 for the eighth reserved symbol. It is composed of the symbols of.

As shown in FIG. 427 (B), when the number of reserved symbols is 0, the reserved number suggestion symbol P straddles the area from the 5th reserved symbol pedestal M5 to the 8th reserved symbol pedestal M8. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the maximum number of reserved symbols is eight in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, a maximum of 4 is set for the first special symbol and a maximum of 4 is set for the second special symbol. Further, in this control example, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the maximum number is set by adding the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

On the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal M8, a character display pedestal C1 indicating that the area is for displaying the advance notice character is displayed. With this configuration, even when the advance notice character is not displayed, the player can confirm the area in which the character is displayed in advance, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 428 (A), when the third symbol (special symbol) is variablely displayed in the main area DM (when the special symbol is variablely displayed), the first ball entrance 64 or the right When a game ball enters the 2nd entrance 640R and the 2nd entrance 640, if the number of holdings corresponding to the special symbols that have entered is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the holding order. The pending symbol is displayed in. FIG. 428 (A) shows the display of the reserved symbols when the number of reserved symbols is three.

As shown in FIG. 428 (A), until the number of reserved balls is 3, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed in the display area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 428 (B), when the number of holdings is 4, the variable lid symbol in which the 5th holding of the holding number suggestion symbol P is displayed is hidden and variably displayed. .. With this configuration, when the reserved symbol is displayed near the variable lid symbol, it is hidden, and the player misunderstands the variable lid symbol as the reserved symbol and suppresses the problem of misunderstanding the actual number of reserved balls. can. Further, as shown in FIG. 428 (B), when the number of reserved balls is 4, not only the variable lid symbol in the display area of the 5th reserved balls is hidden, but also the girl's character display area C is covered with the variable lid symbol. It is configured to display a character symbol.

The character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment display suggesting the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by a balloon, up to the maximum number of reserved balls for the player. The remaining number of can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 7, the character "1 more" is displayed in the comment display, and when 1 more reserved ball is stored, the maximum number of reserved balls is stored. It is suggested that the eight reserved balls are in the memorized state. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the number up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, and with the number of reserved balls up to the upper limit, the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, right. By entering the ball into any of the second entry ports 640R (the entry opening corresponding to the special symbol that is not the hold upper limit), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow that is not held and stored.

In this control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710A of the distribution device 700, the poor game ball is alternately placed in the first ball entry port 64 (first ball slot 64) by the distribution member 762 of the distribution device 700. It is divided into 1 special symbol) and the right second entrance 640R (corresponding to the 2nd special symbol). As a result, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be alternately and evenly stored. As a result, the player can play the game to the opening 710A without worrying about overflow even when the total number of reserved balls (the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined) is seven. The game can be continued as if the ball were to enter.

Further, when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is reached, the character "MAX" indicating that the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit is displayed, and the player even though the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit. Can suppress the problem that the reserved ball overflows due to the continuous firing of the game ball.

In FIG. 429 (A), the fourth reserved ball is stored, and the hold ball is determined by the look-ahead process (Z320: see FIG. 467) in the start winning process (Z105) of FIG. Information with the selected variation pattern type is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning command, and based on the information, for example, when it is determined that there are various types of jackpot or missed super reach, the player The display mode of the holding ball is changed (for example, the white holding symbol is changed to red) and displayed as an effect to give the expectation to the big hit, and the fifth variable lid symbol of the holding number suggestion symbol P is also not. Display as it is without displaying it. Further, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, the character "as is" is displayed, and an effect suggesting that the number of reserved items is not increased any more is executed. Here, when the fifth reserved ball is stored, as shown in FIG. 429 (B), the character "OVER" is displayed in a balloon from the girl in the character display area C, so that the character does not overflow. Anyway, you will be notified as if it overflowed. As a result, the player can have an expectation that the fourth reserved ball will be displayed in a variable manner, and even though the reserved ball with a high expectation for a big hit is stored, the holding ball ( It is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily firing and consuming the game ball).

As shown in FIG. 430 (A), when the number of 0 reserved balls is stored up to 4 in a short period (for example, 5 seconds), at the timing when the 4th reserved ball is stored. Variable lid of the number of pending symbols P The 5th and 6th symbols P are hidden, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the word "early" is displayed, and the pending period is set. Due to the short length, the notification suggesting that the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed in a specially variable manner is executed. Here, normally, when there are four holding balls, the fifth holding ball of the variable lid symbol of the holding number suggestion symbol P is hidden, but within 5 seconds, 0 holding balls are hidden. By increasing the number to 4, it is a special display rule that the 5th and 6th variable lid symbols are displayed as hidden. With this configuration, the effect to be executed can be changed according to the increase period of the number of reserved balls or the interval at which the reserved balls are stored, and the player can determine that a predetermined number or more of the reserved balls are generated in a short period of time. Can be easily recognized. Further, in this control example, the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is configured to be different from the usual one, but the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is not changed and the display mode of the reserved symbol (for example, for example) is not changed. The color, pattern, and shape of the reserved symbol may be changed).

Next, a variable display example of the variable lid symbol P in the time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 430 (B). In the time-saving gaming state (the probability of winning / failing the normal symbol is high), unlike the normal gaming state (the probability of winning / failing the normal symbol is low), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, FIG. 430 (B). As shown in, the fifth (M5) and sixth (M6) variable lid symbols P are hidden. Then, the character of the girl is displayed, and a character that informs the player to memorize the sixth reserved ball, such as "Put up to 6", is displayed by a balloon. In the time-saving game state, the probability of hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is set to a high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also set to a short time, so that the normal electric accessory (electric support) 640A can be easily set to the open state. It becomes easier for a game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640R. Therefore, the overflow of the reserved ball is likely to occur during the time-saving game. Therefore, unlike the normal game, the variable lid symbol P is hidden a lot during the time-saving game, which is the upper limit of the reserved ball. By encouraging the player to play so that the number of balls is six, which is less than the number of balls, it is possible to play the game so as to prevent the reserved spheres from being stored up to the upper limit and becoming prone to overflow. can. In the time-saving game state, when the reserved ball becomes the 5th, the 7th (M7) variable lid symbol P is hidden, and when the reserved ball becomes the 7th, the 8th (M8) variable lid symbol is hidden. P is hidden.

In this control example, the 7th variable lid symbol P is hidden when the 5th holding ball is reached during the time-saving game, but the limitation is limited to 7 holding balls up to 6 holding balls. The eyes and the eighth variable lid symbol P may be configured to be maintained in the displayed state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in an attempt to generate six or more reserved balls.

When the 4th reserved ball is stored, the 6th and 7th variable lid symbols are hidden by the content of the winning command, and the girl is encouraged to increase the number of reserved balls to the 6th. It may be configured so that the character "Put up to 6" suggesting is displayed. In this way, by notifying the player in advance whether it is a type of big hit game (probability change hit or normal hit) as a privilege by entering up to 6, the player is motivated to save reserved balls. Can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 431 (A) to 431 (B), it is configured to be variable depending on the look-ahead result (information indicated by the winning command) of the reserved ball in which the type of the girl displayed in the character display area C is stored. Has been done. In the example shown in FIG. 432 (A), a girl character that is normally displayed when the number of reserved balls is four is displayed, and in the example shown in FIG. 431 (B), four are displayed. An example is shown in which a special girl character different from the normal time is selected and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the look-ahead result is a specific result when the reserved ball of the eye is memorized. There is. Here, the specific result is the result of winning a lottery to determine the type of girl different from the normal time, and when the look-ahead result is a big hit or a missed super reach, the winning probability is set high. .. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the character type of the girl displayed to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, with reference to FIGS. 432 (A) to 432 (B), a display mode when the number of reserved pieces reaches the maximum value and then an over prize is won will be described. FIG. 432 (A) shows "MAX" indicating that when the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit value, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C has the reserved number as the upper limit value by a balloon comment. Character is displayed. After that, when a game ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is changed to the character J2. Is displayed, and the characters "Overflow" are displayed to indicate that the overflow has occurred. In this way, in the case of overflow, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of overflow by notifying the player that the overflow has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in this control example, the character type is variably displayed for the purpose of suppressing overflow, but when the purpose is to increase the profit of the game store side, the displayed character is displayed by generating an overflow. Depending on the type of game and the content of the comment, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol displayed in a variable manner, the pre-reading result of the stored reserved ball (win / fail judgment result, etc.), and the current game state (normal game state or probable change game state). ) May be configured to notify the type. With this configuration, the player can enjoy various effects by playing the game while generating the overflow, and the overflow that is disadvantageous to the player can be generated while being enjoyed.

With reference to FIGS. 433 (A) to 433 (B), a display mode when the hold effect during reach is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 433 (A), when the variation of the variation pattern (various types of normal reach, various types of super reach) that is the reach display mode is executed, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 480) is executed, and the lottery is performed. When it is determined that the special hold effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 433, the display mode of the reach hold effect is set when the reach display mode is reached. When the hold effect during reach is executed, the 5th and 6th variable lid symbols P are hidden, the girl character J1 is displayed, and "save up to 6" by a balloon comment, regardless of the number of balls on hold. A character suggesting the player to accumulate 6 reserved balls during the reach fluctuation is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 433 (B), when up to 6 reserved balls are actually stored during the reach display, the reach symbol of the even symbol "6" becomes the odd symbol "7" which is a symbol type advantageous to the player. It is variable and displayed. Further, the character "well done" is displayed in a balloon from the girl character J1, and the color of the sixth reserved symbol is changed (for example, from blue to red) and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the game ball and playing the game even during the reach, and it is possible to increase the profit on the side of the game store.

In this control example, an example is shown in which the reach symbol is changed when the number of reserved balls becomes a specified number (6), but the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, and the hit type corresponding to the even symbol is used. In some cases, instead of changing the reach pattern to an odd number, the main display area DM is displayed to swim from right to left, and the expectation of a big hit is determined by the number and color of the fish. It is configured to notify and display a notice such as "Congratulations" to suggest a result of a pass / fail judgment.

With reference to FIGS. 434 (A) to (B), a display mode in the lucky hold effect will be described. When a specific fluctuation (the fluctuation that won the advance notice lottery to execute the lucky hold effect) is executed When the previous big hit, the number of reserved balls when the reserved ball corresponding to the fluctuation is stored is stored. , The mark symbol N6 as shown in FIG. 434 (A) is displayed on the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the number of reserved balls, and corresponds to the mark symbol N6 "Aim for 6" from the girl character J1 in the character display area C. A notification is executed to urge the player to accumulate the reserved balls up to the reserved number. As shown in FIG. 434 (B), when up to 6 hold balls are stored during the lucky hold effect, the characters "well done" are displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22, the main display area DM is displayed. A character (notice display mode) indicating that a probability change jackpot is given in the changing special symbol "probability change confirmation" is displayed.

In this way, it is configured to notify up to the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game. In this control example, this effect is configured to be executed when the jackpot is a big hit, but the jackpot is not limited to that, and even if the hit is off, the jackpot if the jackpot is hit, depending on the judgment value of the acquired jackpot type. The type may be determined, the type may be notified, and a jackpot may be expected.

In the lucky hold effect, when the hold balls stored in the variable lid symbol P (hold 5 to 8) are hit, the number of hold balls is stored, and when the next jackpot fluctuation is executed, the lucky hold effect is executed. It is configured to be displayed as a hold number. By configuring in this way, the player can be made aware of how many holdings were stored when the previous jackpot occurred, and the number of holdings can be saved as much as possible to make a lucky hold. It is possible to make the game play so that the production can be easily executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 434 (A), the reserved symbols are numbers corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total value of the reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (number of reserved symbols at the time of winning: FIG. The number indicated by I shown in 434) is added and displayed. This number of holdings at the time of winning is moved (variable) by sliding to the holding symbol display area where the order of change is one younger when the holding symbol is digested (the change of the special symbol corresponding to the holding symbol is started). Even if it is displayed, it will be displayed with the same number. With this configuration, even when the fluctuation starts, it is possible to confirm the number of holdings at the time of winning in the fluctuation.

In the case of a big hit, the number of holdings at the time of winning the big hit game executed in the production during the big hit game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect, etc.) is displayed by numbers or symbols to notify the player. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 435 (A) to (B), a long-time hit (the electric accessory 640A is open for a longer period than the normal hit, which is one of the hit types of the normal symbol, is a hit game. ), The display mode of the hold effect when the long open effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 435 (A), when a player wins a long-time hit of a normal symbol and a long-time hit game is started, a comment "Opening" is displayed in the main display area DM. By this display, the player is notified that the long-time hit game is being executed, and the first ball opening 64 or the right second ball is entered without firing the game ball during the long-time hit game, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball misses the opportunity to enter the ball mouth 640R. In addition, when a game ball enters the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640R during this long-time hit game, the reserved symbol corresponding to the entry is black, which is different from the normal time. It is displayed as a pending symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the reserved balls stored during the game for a long time and the reserved balls stored during other periods.

As shown in FIG. 435 (B), when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol stored during the long-time game is started, the scroll display of the third symbol is started in synchronization with the start. , The treasure chest symbol is displayed in the main display area DM, the characters "Great chance when the treasure chest opens !!" are displayed, and the treasure chest opens while the third symbol is changing. It is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol of is highly expected to be a big hit.

With this configuration, when a normal symbol is hit for a long time, the effect of the reserved ball is changed, and the special effect is executed even during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. By executing the hit for a long time, the production of the game can be greatly changed, and the game with a fresh taste can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 425, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 variablely displays whether or not the lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the fluctuation is completed. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit is displayed. Will be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640A is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640R. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the ball at the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, as in the case of the 1st ball entry port 64 and the right 2nd ball entry port 640R. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

A distribution device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80, and inside the distribution device 700, game balls that have entered the opening 710A are alternately distributed by the distribution member 762. A first ball entry port 64 and a right second ball entry port 640R are provided. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the right second entry opening 640R, the first entry opening switch and the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 are turned on. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is the first. 1 It is indicated by LED 37A of the symbol display device 37. Further, the first entry slot 64 and the right second entry slot 640R are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when the ball is entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 is the same, but the number of prize balls is not limited to the same, and the number of different prize balls may be different. good. For example, when a ball enters the first entry port 64, a prize is given to the right second entry opening 640R as three prize balls, and when a ball enters the right second entry opening 640R, a prize is given to the right second entry opening 640R as four prize balls. The number of balls may be set to be larger than the number of prize balls for the first entry port 64.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37A of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65A, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65A is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65A is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65A can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds in the case of the jackpot A) set for the type of the jackpot game to be executed. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65A, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65A is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65A, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so that the state and the state are repeated alternately.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65A is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37A corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65A is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65A is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65A while the opening 65A is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65A is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 436). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 436). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 436. FIG. 436 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 437, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach hit type, non-reach deviation (disengagement length A, deviation short A), reach deviation type), variation pattern selection The variation type counter CS1 used for the above and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 are used. Further, the normal hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 473). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A composed of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) for storing the holding ball of the first special symbol, and a holding ball of the second special symbol. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203B consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) is provided for each, and a common special symbol holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variable type counter are set according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the right second ball entry port 640R.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 957), reaches the maximum value (for example, 957 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 957), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 473).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640R. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A (see FIG. 439 (A)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is the value of the special hit random number counter C1. However, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202A is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. What is the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A for high probability of special symbol (see FIG. 439 (A)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A for low probability of special symbol (see FIG. 439 (A))? , Is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640R. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out of order. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. .. In this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as "big hit A", "big hit B1", "big hit B2", and "big hit C", and "big hit A" and "big hit A" are set by the special hit type counter C2. One of "big hit B1", "big hit B2", and "big hit C" is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values "0 to 2" are the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored in 202A. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 958, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "3/958".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 27 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 26" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A for the high probability. .. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers is 27 while the total number of random numbers is 958, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "27/958".

In this embodiment, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the big hits are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a big hit regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside and the big hit may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes a big hit is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 440 (A), the jackpot type selection table 202D for determining the jackpot type includes the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202D1 and the first, which are referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special symbol. 2 Special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202D2, which is referred to corresponding to the lottery of special symbols, is set respectively.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202D1 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the lottery result in the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the lottery result is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 440 (B) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202D1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202D1, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot types when the values were "40 to 75" were "big hit B1", and the jackpot types when the values were "76 to 79" were "big hit B2" and "80 to 99". As the jackpot type in the case, "big hit C" is set respectively.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Has been done.

Further, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202D2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the fluctuation is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 440 (C) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202D2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202D2, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot types when the values were "40 to 87" were "big hit B1", and the jackpot types when the values were "88 to 91" were "big hit B2" and "92 to 99". As the jackpot type in the case, "big hit C" is set respectively.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Has been done. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the determination result is a jackpot is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player is given the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You can be interested in which of the lottery is being executed. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given is the same (60%) for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the probability variation ratio differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress problems in which the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. Further, since the selection ratio of the jackpot C in the second special symbol is set low, the probability that the 16R probability variation jackpot is selected is set higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is configured to be advantageous to the player. There is.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 described above determine a rough display mode such as so-called short-time off, long-time off, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The reach type and details of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 based on the fluctuation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 473) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202B (see FIG. 438B) that stores the random value that determines the variation time of the symbol variation from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 439 (B), the variation pattern selection table 202B includes the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1 used for the gaming state (normal gaming state) when the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is low. , The time-saving variation pattern table 202B2 used for the gaming state (high-probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state) when the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high, respectively, is set. Although it will be described in more detail in the description of the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 described later, in the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the content of the rough variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and the variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202B used when the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 441 to 442. FIG. 441 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter are set for each of the variation patterns. The value with CS1 is assigned. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation pattern corresponds to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202D according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). Is set. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, a fluctuation pattern is set for the number of reserved balls (either 1 to 4 or 5 to 8) at the start of fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 441, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 50", the normal reach jackpot A (variation) is obtained with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. NO1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "51 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation NO2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100" and fluctuates. Super reach jackpot B (variable NO3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variable NO4) is selected for the value of the variable type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit B1" or "big hit B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). In the case of any of "60", the normal reach jackpot A (variation NO1) is selected with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "61 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation NO2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100" and fluctuates. Super reach jackpot B (variable NO3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variable NO4) is selected for the value of the variable type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). In the case of, super reach jackpot D (variation NO5) is selected for the value "0 to 100" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and super reach for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "101 to 198". Jackpot E (variable NO6) is selected.

As described above, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time such as normal reach or super reach is selected regardless of the number of reserved pieces. Therefore, by executing the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, it is possible to expect the player to be a big hit in the winning / failing determination result.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of reserved balls of 1 to 4, the variable type counter. When the deviation length A (variation NO7) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 239”, the variation type counter CS1 When the value out of normal reach A (variation NO8) is selected for the value of "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. When the super reach deviation A (variation NO9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ". Super reach out-of-B (variation No. 10) is selected for "0 to 198".

Further, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of reserved balls of 5 to 8, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the short deviation A (variation No. 11) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the normal reach deviation A (variation NO8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super relative to "0 to 198". When out of reach A (variation NO9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" and super reach. Off B (variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, a fluctuation pattern with a small number of reserved balls (when the number is 1 to 4) and a long fluctuation time is easily selected. By inserting a game ball into the 1 entry slot 64 or the right 2nd entry slot 640R, a reserved ball is likely to occur, and a period in which the change of the special symbol is stopped occurs (lottery game is not performed). It is configured so that the problem that the player gets tired of the game due to the occurrence of the period) can be suppressed. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is large, the selection rate of normal reach and super reach is set low, so that the normal reach and super reach are changed when there are many reserved balls, and the result of the hit / fail judgment is made to the player. Can be expected to be a hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 442, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202B2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202B2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set for each of the variation patterns. The value of is assigned. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation pattern corresponds to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202D according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). Is set. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, a fluctuation pattern is set for each of the number of reserved balls (either 1 to 2 or 3 to 8) at the start of fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 442, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 90", the normal reach jackpot A (variation) is obtained with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. NO1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "91 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation NO2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100" and fluctuates. Super reach jackpot B (variable NO3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variable NO4) is selected for the value of the variable type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit B1" or "big hit B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). When it is any of "100", the normal reach jackpot A (variation NO1) is selected with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "101 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation NO2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the fluctuation is made. Super reach jackpot B (variable NO3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variable NO4) is selected for the value of the variable type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). In the case of, super reach jackpot D (variation NO5) is selected for the value "0 to 100" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and super reach for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "101 to 198". Jackpot E (variable NO6) is selected.

As described above, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time such as normal reach or super reach is selected regardless of the number of reserved pieces. Therefore, by executing the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, it is possible to expect the player to be a big hit in the winning / failing determination result.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of reserved balls of 1 to 2, and the variable type counter. When the deviation length A (variation NO7) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 229”, the variation type counter CS1 When the value out of normal reach A (variation NO8) is selected for the value of "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. When the super reach deviation A (variation NO9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ". Super reach out-of-B (variation No. 10) is selected for "0 to 198".

Further, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 199" for the number of reserved balls of 3 to 8, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the short deviation B (variation No. 12) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the normal reach deviation A (variation NO8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super for "0 to 198". When out of reach A (variation NO9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" and super reach. Off B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the fluctuation time (variation period) in the fluctuation pattern of the short deviation B is configured to be 2000 MS (2 seconds), which is shorter than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202B1. There is. As a result, when the hit / fail judgment result is out of order and the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the out-of-order short B is selected with high probability, so that the special symbol can be changed a lot in a short time. , The period until it is determined to be a big hit (the period between big hits) can be easily shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be measured.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439 (C)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the normal hit random number table 202C, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439 (C)) has a probability of hitting a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, the hit type of the normal symbol is set to normal hit and long-time hit, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability gaming state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640A in the open state is executed once with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. It is a hit to be done. Further, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640A in the open state with the opening time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a hit in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 640A in the open state with an open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A, which is executed in the probable variation period during the time reduction in the normal hit, and the opening operation in the long-time hit are set to be the same, but the opening operation is not limited to this, and the long-time hit is different. It may be an opening operation of. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640R at the time of a long hit, and the variation in the second special symbol during the normal game. The display can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the change of the game effect by the variable display of the second special symbol in which the fresh notice display and the like are displayed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 439 (C), if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 6 in the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is hit normally. Is determined to be. Further, if it is any of 7 to 8, it is determined that the normal symbol is a long-time hit. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit. In addition, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the long-time hit of the normal symbol is not set, but when the normal symbol has a high probability, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A is the same as the long-time hit, so that it is normal. The hit is virtually the same as the long-time hit.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640A is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640R can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game ball by the player and increase the profit on the side of the game store. On the other hand, during the time reduction and the probability change period, which have a high probability, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640A to operate can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", and the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port can be given. It is possible to increase the chance of entering the 640R. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball of the player and set the game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the game with a high probability, and can play the game for a longer time.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", the electric accessory 640A is opened (opened) only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640A is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is released. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Further, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the right second entry port 640R is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" as a long-time hit.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439 (C)) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640A is released "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the right second entrance 640R Since the opening period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640R. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the right second entrance 640R is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 461). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 473).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 436, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 437, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 473) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 472) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 471) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 438 (A), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A (see FIG. 439) and the variation pattern selection table 202B (see FIG. 439 (B)) described above. In addition to the normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439 (C)) and the jackpot type selection table 202D (see FIGS. 440 (A) to (C)), a winning command table 202E is set. Further, although omitted in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, various data and programs necessary for the game are stored in the ROM 202.

FIG. 443 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202E. In the winning command table 202E, in the look-ahead process (Z320: FIG. 467) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the determination result such as the variation pattern in which the stored reserved ball is selected at the start of the variation is determined, and the determination is made. It is a table for determining the winning command corresponding to the result. As shown in FIG. 443, when the lottery result in the look-ahead is a jackpot, a winning command corresponding to the determined jackpot type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. As a result, not only the fluctuation pattern type and the winning / failing determination result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. If the lottery result is out of order, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. It should be noted that the same winning command "C100" is set in the winning command table 202E as the variation pattern types are all out of the deviation length A, the deviation short A, and the deviation short B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 438 (B), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C. , Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F, open number counter 203G, long-time open flag 203I, time saving medium counter 203J, variable execution It has a flag 203K, a probability variation flag 203M, a jackpot medium flag 203N, a variation order storage area 203P, and another memory area 203Z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a reserved ball storage area 203A. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203C has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A. A random number counter C4 is normally stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203A, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift processing is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variation display performed by the display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see Z305 in FIG. 466). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see Z206 in FIG. 462).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see Z207 in FIG. 462 and Z306 in FIG. 466). .. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning the right second entry slot 640R, and is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D in other configurations. Therefore, the detailed explanation is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area DS1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. See Z504 in FIG. 470). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Z406 in FIG. 468).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203F (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C (Z505 in FIG. 470). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C (Fig.). 470 Z503: NO).

The opening number counter 203G is a counter for counting the opening times of the electric accessory 64C. The opening time counter 203H is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64C.

The long-time open flag 203I is a flag indicating that the product has been hit for a long time. This long-time open flag 203I is set to ON in the process of Z429 in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 469) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the processing of Z403 in the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: FIG. 468), when the variation of the normal symbol is newly started (after the game per long time is executed, the variation of the next normal symbol is started. If) is set to off.

The time saving medium counter 203J is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203J is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203J is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203J is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203J.

The variation execution flag 203K is a flag for identifying whether to execute the variation of the first special symbol or the variation of the second special symbol. In this control example, the variation is started according to the order in which the ball is entered into the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640R (the order in which the ball is reserved and stored). Here, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, the variation execution determination process (Z204: FIG. 463) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed. Based on the order data of the hold storage stored in the change order storage area 203P described later, it is determined whether the change stored next is the hold data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the corresponding variation execution flag 203K is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 463).

The probability variation flag 203M is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This probability variation flag 203M is when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than the jackpot A in the process of Z1113 in the jackpot control process (Z1104: FIG. 474) executed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110 (Z1104: FIG. 474). Z1111: NO) is set to on. Further, in the processing of Z220 in the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 462) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to off when the variation display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit is stopped.

The jackpot flag 203N is a flag indicating that the gaming state is in the jackpot game. The jackpot middle flag 203N is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the processing of Z221 of the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 462) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the process of Z1114 of the jackpot control process (Z256: FIG. 474) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to off when the end timing of the jackpot game is reached.

The variable order storage area 203P is an area in which when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640R and is stored as a hold ball, the hold order is stored. In this control example, the fluctuations of the special symbols are configured to be executed in the order in which they are reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not preferentially executed. Further, in this control example, since the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640R, the fluctuations are started in the order in which they are reserved and stored. As a result, even when the special symbol changes, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed alternately, and only one of the reserved balls is digested, so that the reserved ball of the special symbol is released. It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

Others In the memory area 203Z, flags, counters, stored data, etc. necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details thereof will be omitted.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65A. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 471) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112A so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112A includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51B for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 444 (A), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a variation pattern selection table 222A, a hold change selection table 222B, a hold effect mode selection table 222C, a hold lid range selection table 222D, and a hold lid command selection. Table 222E, Hold lid color change selection table 222F, Lucky hold command table 222G, Background mode selection table 222H, Hold character selection table 222I, Hold character change table 222J, Blowout selection table 222K, Reaching production lottery table 222M, Reach start time The calculation table 222N and the lucky hold lottery table 222P are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222A is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the fluctuation pattern type, and a counter value for selection (not shown) is acquired to determine one fluctuation pattern.

The hold change selection table 222B determines whether or not to display the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable manner based on the received winning command, and is necessary for the effect to be executed according to the change content. It is a selection table for acquiring the pending change value.

FIG. 445 (A) schematically shows the contents of the pending change selection table 222B. In the hold change selection table 222B, the value of the effect counter 223H is distributed according to the type of the received winning command, and the hold symbol of the sub-display area DS is changed with respect to the value (range) of the effect counter 223H. A mode (see FIG. 429 (A)) and a pending change value are set. The details of the acquired hold change value will be described in the hold effect mode selection table 222C described later.

Specifically, when the winning command type is out of order and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 180", the display mode of the reserved symbol shall not be changed from the normal reserved symbol. Is determined and the pending change value gets 0. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "181 to 198", the display mode of the reserved symbol is variable from the white circle symbol (normal reserved symbol display mode) to the blue circle symbol (change A). It is decided to make it, and the pending change value gets 1.

When the winning command type is out of the normal reach, and when the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 50", no change is determined and the pending change value is 0. If it is any of "51 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. In the case of any of "101 to 198", it is determined that the white circle symbol is variably displayed in the green circle symbol, and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is out of super reach, and when the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 30", it is determined that there is no change, and the pending change value is 0. If it is any of "31 to 90", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "91 to 198", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is a normal reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 20", no change is determined, and the pending change value is 0. If it is any of "21 to 90", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "91 to 198", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is a super reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 10", no change is determined, and the pending change value is 0. If it is any of "11 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "101 to 189", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2. In the case of any of "190 to 198", it is determined that the white circle symbol is variably displayed as the red circle symbol, and the pending change value is acquired by 3.

In this way, by receiving the winning command, the color of the reserved symbol is changed and displayed according to the content, so it is reserved and stored not only from the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner but also from the displayed reserved symbol. It is possible to predict the result of the pass / fail judgment corresponding to the pending symbol. Further, since it is possible to notify the player in advance that the reach display mode will be obtained when the change B is variably displayed, the hold storage should be performed even in the state before the special symbol changes. For example, the player can be expected to start the fluctuation, and even if the fluctuation of the special symbol that is out of alignment is executed during that time, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting a hold change value for each reach type, it is possible to develop a reach effect via different execution effects even if the hold change is the same, and the player can be surprised by the effect. It is possible to attract.

The hold effect mode selection table 222C is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared according to the hold change displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 445 (B) schematically shows the contents of the hold effect mode selection table 222C. In the hold effect mode selection table 222C, the hold effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired in the hold change selection table 222B (see Z2404 in FIG. 484). Specifically, when the hold change value is "0", the normal mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. In the normal mode, when all the reserved symbols being displayed have not been changed (state) and the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the distance between the reserved symbols and the variable lid symbol P display range is one. This mode is displayed in a variable manner (see FIG. 428 (B)).

When the hold change value is any of "1 to 2", the notice A mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. The notice A mode is a hold (state) in which any change (any of change A to change C) is set in the hold symbol being displayed, and is held when the number of hold balls is 4 or more. This is a hold effect mode in which the symbol and the variable lid symbol P are displayed without a gap in the display range (see FIG. 429 (A)). Strictly speaking, FIG. 429 (A) is not a display mode showing the notice A mode, but an example of a display mode of the hold effect mode of the notice B mode, which will be described later. In the notice A mode, the content of the comment displayed in the state of FIG. 429 (A) is different. In the notice A mode, when a holding ball is generated after the holding symbol whose color is variable and the holding symbol is displayed, one variable lid symbol P is also hidden accordingly (for example, the state of FIG. 429 (A)). By increasing (generating) one reserved ball from, the variable lid symbol P with the letter 5 will be hidden), and a comment indicating the degree of expectation for a jackpot for the reserved symbol with a variable color. The display is performed by a balloon. In this way, in the notice A mode, after the color of the reserved symbol is changed, the game is performed so as to generate the reserved ball. It is configured to notify the degree of expectation of.

When the hold change value is "3", the notice B mode is determined as the hold effect mode. The notice B mode is a case where there is a change in the reserved symbol being displayed, and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, either change (change A) is made to the reserved symbol being displayed as in the notice A mode. , Change B, Change C) is set (state), and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the reserved symbol and the variable lid symbol P are displayed without a gap in the display range. (See FIG. 429 (A)), or the mode in which the reserved symbol is displayed on the display range of the variable lid symbol P (see FIG. 429 (B)).

With this configuration, not only the color of the reserved symbol can be changed, but also the display range of the variable lid symbol P can be changed in various ways by increasing or decreasing the number of reserved balls. It is possible to expand the enjoyment of playing and attract players. Also, unlike the notice A mode, it is a hold effect that allows the player to play the game so that the hold ball is not generated anymore, and the player is interrupted from the game (the operation of launching the game ball), and the color is variable. Expectations can be raised by concentrating on the start of fluctuations (dynamic display) of special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

The holding lid range selection table 222D has a plurality of data tables for acquiring the holding lid range value required for setting the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third symbol display device 81. It is set.

Here, the special production performed during the normal mode will be described. As special effects, the normal mode has a short-term winning effect, a hold effect during reach, and a lucky hold effect.

The short-term winning effect is an effect that is executed when the time required from the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 to the time when the number of reserved balls is stored and becomes 4 is less than 5 seconds, and is normal. In the mode, the distance between the holding lid symbol P and the holding symbol is set to be one holding ball (the holding lid symbol P is variably displayed), but in the short-term winning effect, FIG. 430 (A). The number of the holding lid symbol P is variably displayed so that the space between the holding lid symbol P and the holding symbol P is two, and the girl character J0 indicating that it is a short-term winning effect is displayed. It is a production that the comment "It's early" is displayed. In the short-term winning effect, when the game state is the normal state, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls is 0 to 1 or more. In this case, the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 1 when the number of reserved balls becomes 4 before the short-term winning timer 223Q for measuring the elapsed time elapses for 5 seconds (see Z2425 in FIG. 485). ) To start execution (see FIG. 430 (A)), and when the short-term winning timer 223Q has passed 5 seconds, set 0 in the special effect status storage area (see Z2606 in FIG. 488) and end the execution. Is.

The on-reach hold effect is an effect of setting a notice display mode for urging the player to play a game so as to store up to a predetermined number (for example, 6 in FIG. 433 (A)) during the reach fluctuation. .. When the variable type is reach, whether or not the execution is possible is drawn based on the reach-in-reach effect lottery table 222M, and when the execution is possible, the reach start time is calculated, which will be described later. The value of the hold effect start timer 223R set by the table 222N based on the variation type becomes 0 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and another special effect is executed at the timing when the reach effect starts. If not (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), the execution is started by setting the special effect status storage area to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 480) (see FIG. 433 (A)). It is a production that ends at the end of the fluctuation.

The lucky hold effect is to store the number of holds when the hold ball (hold symbol) is stored (displayed), and when a big hit (specific judgment result) is obtained, the hold ball that became the big hit is stored. A predetermined mark symbol (see FIG. 434 (A)) is displayed in the reserved symbol display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls stored at the time of entering the ball entrance, and the reserved balls are stored up to the mark symbol. It is an effect of displaying a notice display mode that encourages the player to play a game. When the reserved symbols are stored up to the mark symbol, as shown in FIG. 434 (B), by pressing the frame button 22, the current gaming state (probability changing gaming state (special gaming state) or low probability gaming state) is achieved. An effect of notifying the state (normal game state) is executed. In the lucky hold effect, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls when a big hit is obtained in the winning / failing judgment result of the start winning in the past. When the lucky hold storage value 223P, which is stored when is 5 or more, is stored, and whether or not the execution is possible is drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222P described later, and the execution becomes possible. , The special effect status storage area 223N is set to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 479) to start the execution (see FIG. 434 (A)), and the effect ends when the next fluctuation starts.

In this way, even in the normal mode where there is no hold change, the hold effect related to the hold symbol can be determined by the time interval of the start prize, the number of hold balls during the reach fluctuation, and the result of the winning / failing judgment based on the past start prize. Depending on the contents of the memory, various effects can be provided and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

FIG. 446 (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the holding lid range selection table 222D. The holding lid range selection table 222D includes a normal holding lid range selection table 222D1, a notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222D2, a notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222D3, a short-term winning holding lid range selection table 222D4, and a reach effect. A holding lid range selection table 222D5 and a time saving holding lid range selection table 222D6 are provided.

The normal holding lid range selection table 222D1 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the normal mode. FIG. 446 (B) schematically shows the contents of the normal holding lid range selection table 222D1. In the normal holding lid range selection table 222D1, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls. Further, in the case of the normal mode, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability gaming state (big hit probability is low probability and non-time saving). (Game state)) to acquire the hold lid range value (see Z2354 in FIG. 481) and when the lucky hold effect is in progress (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3), the hold cover range value is acquired (FIG. 481). (See Z2346) in some cases.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 3 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value.

The notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222D2 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the notice A mode. FIG. 446 (C) schematically shows the contents of the notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222D2. In the notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222D2, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2351 in FIG. 481).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved lid range value of 3 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value.

The notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222D3 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the notice B mode.

FIG. 446 (D) schematically shows the contents of the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222D3. In the notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222D3, the hold cover range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of hold balls and the value (range) of the hold notice counter (see Z2349 in FIG. 481).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 4", the holding lid range value of 4 is acquired when the value of the holding notice counter is "0 to 4". When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5 to 8", when the value of the hold notice counter is "1 to 4", the hold lid range value of 4 is acquired, and the value of the hold notice counter is "5". In the case of, when the hold lid range value is 3 and the hold notice counter value is "6", the hold cover range value is 2 and the hold notice counter value is "7". 1 is acquired as the holding lid range value, and 0 is acquired as the holding lid range value when the value of the holding notice counter is "8".

The short-term winning hold lid range selection table 222D4 (FIG. 447 (A)) is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when executing the short-term winning effect. FIG. 447 (A) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid range selection table 222D4 at the time of short-term winning. In the short-term winning holding lid range selection table 222D4, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2342 in FIG. 481).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6 to 8", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

The holding lid range selection table 222D5 during reach effect is a table used to acquire the hold lid range value in the case of hold effect during reach effect. FIG. 447 (B) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid range selection table 222D5 during the reach effect. In the holding lid range selection table 222D5 during the reach effect, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2344 in FIG. 481).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 8", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired.

In the time saving hold lid range selection table 222D6, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time reduction state (the value of the time reduction medium counter is other than 0). ) Is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value.

FIG. 447 (C) schematically shows the contents of the time saving holding lid range selection table 222D6. In the time saving holding lid range selection table 222D6, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2353 in FIG. 481).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 6", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value.

With this configuration, the display range of the variable lid symbol P to be displayed can be changed in various ways according to the winning / failing judgment at the start winning and the hold effect switched according to the variation type. It is possible to express a directing effect that enhances participation.

The holding lid command selection table 222E sets the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 from the holding lid range value acquired in the holding lid range selection table 222D. A table used to select commands for.

FIG. 448 (A) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid command selection table 222E. The holding lid command selection table 222E sets a holding lid command to be transmitted to the display control device for the holding lid range value (range) acquired by the holding lid range selection table 222D.

Specifically, when the holding lid range value is "0", BF00 is determined for the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is the shortest display (see FIG. 432 (A)). When the holding lid range value is "1", BF01 is determined for the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 1 (only the area of holding 8). When the holding lid range value is "2", BF02 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 2 (the area from holding 7 to 8 (see FIG. 430 (A))). When the holding lid range value is "3", BF03 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 3 (the area from holding 6 to 8 (see FIG. 431 (A))). When the holding lid range value is "4", BF04 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 4 (the area from holding 5 to 8 (see FIG. 429 (A))).

The hold lid command is set in the hold lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the winning command reception process (Z2209) at the start winning, and is executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) at the start of variation. This is performed in the holding lid setting process (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid symbol P can be changed by setting a display holding lid command (see Z2355 in FIG. 481) based on the holding lid range value every time the number of holding balls changes.

The holding lid color change selection table 222F has an instructed number (in the example shown in FIG. 429 (A), when the advance notice effect suggesting not to increase the holding number shown in FIG. 429 (A) is executed. It is a data table for discriminating the holding lid symbol P corresponding to the area where the holding symbol is displayed when the holding ball occurs more than 4). The holding lid symbol P determined by the holding lid color change selection table 222F is usually (normally, it is a black frame and the inside is transparent white, and a number indicating the number of holdings corresponding to the holding display area is displayed inside. It is displayed in a variable manner with a specific color (internal color is transparent green) different from the display mode (display mode). In the hold lid color change selection table 222F, the sub-display of the third symbol display device 81 is based on the hold notice counter 223G for recognizing the display position of the hold symbol whose color has been changed, which will be described later, and the current number of hold balls. This is a table for selecting a command for setting the range of color change of the holding lid symbol P displayed in the area DS.

FIG. 448 (B) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding lid color change selection table 222F. In the hold lid color change selection table 222F, when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode, the color change range is specified for the value (range) of the hold notice counter 223G and the value (range) of the number of hold balls. A hold lid command for changing the display range of the variable lid symbol P from the normal white display mode to green (see (B) in FIG. 429) is set according to the change range (see Z2348 in FIG. 481). do.

Specifically, when the value of the hold notice counter 223G is any of "0 to 4", and when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4", the hold lid command is issued. Not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF10 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", BF11 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF12 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF13 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223G is "5", when the value of the number of hold balls is "5", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF20 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6.

When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", BF21 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF22 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223G is "6", when the value of the number of hold balls is "6", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF30 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF31 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223G is "7", when the value of the number of hold balls is "7", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF40 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223G is "8", when the value of the number of hold balls is "8", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

In this way, it is possible to further increase the attention of the player by changing the display mode in a region different from the reserved symbol, which is changed by the determination of the winning / failing determination result (look-ahead determination) in the previous winning. At the same time, the player can freely determine the degree to which the number of reserved balls is increased depending on whether or not the launch is stopped, so that it is possible to widely enjoy the mode of the reserved symbol and the later change notice effect.

The lucky hold command table 222G is a table for selecting a command for changing the display mode of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of hold balls to be held.

FIG. 449 schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold command table 222G. In the lucky hold command table 222G, when the lucky hold effect is being performed, the area of the number of reserved balls to be held is stored by the lucky hold storage value 223P, and the display hold lid command is set based on the value (FIG. 479). See Z2306).

Specifically, when the lucky hold storage value 223P is 5, the hold cover command FB50 is determined, and the area of 5 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223P is 6, the hold cover command FB51 is determined, and the area 6 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle (see FIG. 434 (A)). When the lucky hold storage value 223P is 7, the hold cover command FB52 is determined, and the area 7 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223P is 8, the hold cover command FB53 is determined, and the area 8 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle.

In this way, by notifying the number of reserved balls for which the winning / failing judgment result is a big hit in the previous start winning, the interest of the game is enhanced, and at the same time, when the number of reserved balls is small (less than 5), the player is notified. On the other hand, it is possible to encourage them to win a prize, and it is possible to realize a production that improves the operation.

The background mode selection table 222H is a table for selecting the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223I. FIG. 450A schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222H. In the background mode selection table 222H, the background mode is selected with respect to the value of the background mode storage area 223I.

Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223I is 0, the background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223I is 1, the background B (mountain background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223I is 2, the background C (river background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223I is 3, the background D (city background) is determined. ..

The hold character selection table 222I determines the content (type) of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the hold effect mode, and the effect counter 223H. It is a table for selecting (deciding).

FIG. 450B schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222I. The hold character selection table 222I has a hold character for the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223I, the hold effect mode stored in the hold effect mode storage area 223M, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223H. The content of is set (see Z2363 in FIG. 482). As for the reserved characters, J0 is a girl with short hair (see FIG. 428 (B)), J1 is a girl with hair tied (see FIG. 431 (A)), and J2 is a girl with long hair (see FIG. 431 (B)). ), J3 is prepared with an image that can be easily identified by the player, such as a blonde girl with long hair (not shown).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and when the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 150", J0 (see FIG. 428 (B)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 431 (A)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 431 (B)) is determined as the reserved character. When the hold effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the hold character. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character.

When the background mode is any of "background B", "background C", and "background D", and when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", the value of the effect counter 223H is "0 to 150". If either is the case, J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the hold effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the hold character. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character.

In this way, by determining the reserved characters with high expectations according to the difference between the reserved effects mode and the background that have changed from the start prize, the display mode of the reserved effects with high expectations can be obtained without damaging the atmosphere of the background effects. It will be possible. In addition, the player can recognize the notice with a high degree of expectation by combining the change contents of the reserved symbol and the change of the reserved character.

In addition, the number of fluctuations executed as the game is played, the number of big hits, the number of times the super reach is executed, and the symbol or character with the points displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game production are acquired. The history information such as the number of points obtained by the above may be stored, and the selected character may be changed in consideration of the history information. With this configuration, the more the game is played, the more the selected character can be changed, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, an RTC (real-time clock) may be provided and the character selected may be variable depending on the date and time information or the like. With this configuration, the selected character can be changed according to the passage of time since the pachinko machine 10 was introduced, and it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game.

The hold character change table 222J displays the contents of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 in the background, the hold effect mode, the current hold character, and the effect counter 223H. It is a table for selecting based on.

FIG. 451 schematically shows the contents of the reserved character change table 222J. The reserved character selection table 222I has a background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223I, a reserved effect mode stored in the reserved effect mode storage area 223M, the current reserved character in the display mode, and a value of the effect counter 223H. The content of the pending character to be changed is set for (range). The change of the reserved character is selected when the starting prize is won when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit and the over prize is obtained (Z2366: YES), and the display character command is set (see Z2267 in FIG. 482). .. Also, if the selected character is different from the currently displayed reserved character, the character will be changed (variable), and if the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the reserved character will be changed. It is a mode that does not (variable).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223H is "". If it is any of "0 to 180", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "181 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 432 (B)) is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 190", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "191 to 189", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2" and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the hold effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223H is either "0 to 80". J0 is determined as a reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "81 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "91 to 199", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2" and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

When the background mode is any of "background B", "background C", and "background D", the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and the current hold character is "J0". When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "151 to 199", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 170", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "171 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3" and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the hold effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223H is either "0 to 50". J0 is determined as a reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "51 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 70", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "71 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3" and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

In this way, by changing the reserved character due to the over winning, the player can have a means to confirm the winning / failing result within the current number of reserved balls by the over winning, and it is possible to raise the interest in the game. can. In addition, as the reserved character to be changed, a character with a higher expectation after the change is set than before the change, and when the reserved effect mode is other than the normal mode, the change ratio of the reserved character is set high. Therefore, when there is a change in the hold effect mode, the player can have a means to know the result of the pass / fail judgment through a means of intentionally generating an over prize, and it is possible to provide a playability that enhances the operation. Will be.

In the balloon selection table 222K, a plurality of data tables for setting the balloon (comment) contents (see FIG. 429 (A)) displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 are set.

FIG. 452 (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the balloon selection table 222K. The balloon selection table 222K includes a normal balloon selection table 222K1, a notice A balloon selection table 222K2, a notice B balloon selection table 222K3, a short-term winning balloon selection table 222K4, a reach production balloon selection table 222K5, and a lucky hold balloon selection table 222K6. A balloon selection table 222K7 for shortening the working hours is provided. Further, the balloon content to be set is the content of the comment display issued by the reserved character in the character display area C.

In the normal balloon selection table 222K1, when the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 428 (B)), and the game state is the normal state. , It is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon.

FIG. 452 (B) schematically shows the contents of the normal balloon selection table 222K1. In the normal balloon selection table 222K1, the balloon contents are acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2393 in FIG. 483).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 4", the balloon content is not acquired (see FIG. 428 (B)), and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5". In that case, YES is acquired for the balloon content, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", two more balloon contents are acquired and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", MAX (see FIG. 432 (A)) is acquired as the balloon content.

The notice A balloon selection table 222K2 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the hold effect mode is the notice A mode (see FIG. 429 (A)).

FIG. 452 (C) schematically shows the contents of the notice A balloon selection table 222K2. In the notice A balloon selection table 222K2, the balloon contents are acquired (see Z2390 in FIG. 483) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the winning / failing determination result of the winning information command.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 3", the balloon content is not acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the hit / fail determination result is In the case of a hit, the content of the balloon is throbbing, and in the case of a miss, the content of the balloon is throbbing. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the balloon content is expected to be acquired, and if it is not, the expected balloon is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected to be 70%? Is acquired, and if it is out of order, the content of the balloon is expected to be 60%? Is obtained. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected to be 80%? Is acquired, and if it is out of order, the content of the balloon is expected to be 70%? Is obtained. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is extremely hot! Is acquired, and if it is off, what happens to the contents of the balloon! Is obtained.

Although configured in this way, the notice A balloon selection table 222K2 refers to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls, the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information command, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223H to display the content of the balloon. Further, it may be provided as a production to express various expectations.

The notice B balloon selection table 222K3 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 429 (B)).

FIG. 452 (D) schematically shows the contents of the notice B balloon selection table 222K3. In the notice B balloon selection table 222K3, the balloon contents are acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the reserved effect counter (see Z2388 in FIG. 483).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 4", the content of the blowout is acquired as it is (see FIG. 429 (A)), and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5". In the case of, if the value of the hold effect counter is any of "0 to 4", OVER (see FIG. 429 (B)) is acquired as the content of the blowout, and the value of the hold effect counter is "5". In that case, STOP is acquired for the content of the blowout, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the value of the hold effect counter is any of "0 to 5", the content of the blowout is OVER. When the value of the hold effect counter is "6", the STOP is acquired for the content of the blowout, and when the value of the number of hold balls is "7", the value of the hold effect counter is "0 to 6". In any of the cases, OVER is acquired for the blowout content, STOP is determined for the blowout content when the value of the hold effect counter is "7", and the value of the number of hold balls is "8". The MAX is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the winning when a change of the reserved symbol with high expectation occurs by the contents of the balloon, and the number of reserved balls can be increased by continuing to launch more than the current value of the number of reserved balls. It is possible to notify the player of the judgment as to whether or not to increase the number, suppress the occurrence of unnecessary launches, and enable the game to be played efficiently. Further, even when a change in the reserved symbol with a high degree of expectation occurs, the setting of the balloon content may be changed so that the launch can be continued.

The balloon selection table 222K4 at the time of short-term winning is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon at the time of short-term winning (see FIG. 430 (A)).

FIG. 453 (A) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning balloon selection table 222K4. In the short-term winning balloon selection table 222K4, the balloon content is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2382 in FIG. 483).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the content of the balloon is fast! When (see FIG. 430 (A)) is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the content of the balloon is very fast! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the content of the balloon is super fast! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the content of the balloon is the speed of sound! !! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the balloon content is fast! !! !! Is obtained.

With this configuration, the interval between starting prizes is short, and the degree to which the number of reserved balls has increased can be recognized by the player by the balloon of the reserved character, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The balloon selection table 222K5 during the reach effect is a table used to acquire the content of the balloon during the reach effect (see FIG. 433 (A)).

FIG. 453 (B) schematically shows the contents of the balloon selection table 222K5 during the reach effect. In the reach effect during balloon selection table 222K5, the balloon contents are acquired (Z2384 in FIG. 483) with respect to the value (range) of the hold effect counter and the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the value of the hold effect counter is "0", and when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4", the contents of the balloons are stored up to 6! (See FIG. 433 (A)) is acquired, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is OK, and "7-8". In any case, OVER is acquired for the content of the balloon, and when the value of the hold effect counter 223H is "other than 0", the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4". , Save up to 6 balloon contents! Is acquired, in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is well done (see FIG. 433 (B)), and "7" is acquired. In any case of "~ 8", OVER is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, by changing the balloon of the reserved character during the reach effect, it is possible to prompt the launch when the number of reserved balls is small, and in the reach effect during the hold effect, the balloon is generated. You can change it and play the game without getting bored.

The lucky hold balloon selection table 222K6 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the lucky hold effect is being produced (see FIG. 434 (A)).

FIG. 454 (A) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold balloon selection table 222K6. In the lucky hold balloon selection table 222K6, when the winning / failing judgment result of winning in the past becomes a big hit, the value corresponding to the hold ball value is set as the number of lucky hold balls (see Z2444 of Z268). The contents of the balloon are acquired (Z2386 in FIG. 483) with respect to the value of, the value (range) of the number of reserved balls, and the value (range) of the reserved change value.

Specifically, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223P is "5", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4", the hold change value is "0 to 3". In any case, the target of the balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", when the pending change value is "0", the balloon content is acquired as OK. When the hold change value is any one of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired for the balloon content, and when the hold change value is "3", the balloon content is well acquired but the number of reserved balls is acquired. When the value of is any of "6 to 8", and when the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223P is "6", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 5", and when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3" , Aiming at 6 as the content of the blowout (see FIG. 434 (A)) is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", when the change value of the hold is "0", the content of the blowout is OK. If it is acquired and the pending change value is any one of "1 to 2", GOOD is determined for the content of the balloon, and if the value of the pending change is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired although it was done well. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "7 to 8", and when the value of the reserved change is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the blowout.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223P is "7", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 6", and when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3" , The aim of the balloon content is 7 and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", when the hold change value is "0", the balloon content is OK and the hold change value is " In any case of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired for the balloon content, and when the hold change value is "3", the balloon content is well acquired but the value of the number of reserved balls is "8". In the case of "," if the pending change value is any one of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223P is "8", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 7", and when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3", , The aim of the balloon content is 8 and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", when the hold change value is "0", the balloon content is OK and the hold change value is " In any case of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired as the content of the balloon, and when the pending change value is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired although it is well done.

In this way, by changing the content of the balloon depending on the difference in the number of lucky reserved balls, the player can enjoy the game aiming at the number of reserved balls to be won. If the lottery result is a big hit within the range of 5 to 8 holds, the display mode of the lucky hold can be updated without getting bored. You can continue the game.

In the time-saving balloon selection table 222K6, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving medium counter is other than 0). It is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon.

FIG. 454 (B) schematically shows a time-saving balloon selection table 222K7. In the time-saving balloon selection table 222K7, the balloon content is acquired (Z2392 in FIG. 483) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is any one of "0 to 5", the balloon content is entered up to 6 (see FIG. 430 (B)) and the reserved balls are acquired, and the number of reserved balls is "6 to 7". In any of the cases, the contents of the balloon are OK.

With this configuration, the optimum number of reserved balls can be notified in a short time, and the player can grasp the transition status of the number of reserved balls according to the notification mode. If the situation of the optimum number of reserved balls can be maintained, it is possible to avoid the situation where the fluctuation is interrupted and the player is in a standby state, which is inefficient in time, and the over-winning that starts and wins when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is exceeded can be avoided. It can be used as a criterion for efficiently playing a game.

The reach effect lottery table 222M is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the hold display effect during reach (see FIG. 433 (A)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 455 (A) schematically shows the contents of the effect lottery table 222M during reach. In the reach effect lottery table 222M, whether or not the reach hold effect can be executed is determined with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223H. (Refer to Z2324 in FIG. 480) Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 3" and the value of the effect counter 223H is "0 to 99", the reach is in progress. The hold effect is not displayed, and in the case of "100 to 199", the hold effect during reach can be displayed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "4 to 5" and the value of the effect counter 223H is "0 to 140", the hold effect during reach is not displayed and "141 to 199". In the case of ", it is possible to display the hold effect during reach. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "6 to 8" and the value of the effect counter 223H is "0 to 199", the hold effect during reach is not displayed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of displaying the hold effect during reach when the number of reserved balls is small, the effect of urging the player to save the hold is executed when the hold is small.

The reach start time calculation table 222N is a reach in a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the reach display mode (display mode in which the symbols in the left and right symbol rows are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the same third symbol). It is a data table for determining the start time (start period) to start the hold effect during reach in the time (period) which becomes the display mode. In the reach start time calculation table 222N, the hold effect start timer is selected based on whether or not the reach hold effect (see FIG. 433 (A)) acquired by the reach effect lottery table 222M can be executed and the variation type.

FIG. 455 (B) schematically shows the contents of the reach start time calculation table 222N. The reach start time calculation table 222N is set by the hold effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the reach hold effect acquired by the reach effect lottery table 222M can be executed (FIG. 480). See Z2326).

Specifically, when the variation type is the normal reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 MS, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 MS. When the variation type is super reach jackpot B, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 MS, and when the variation type is super reach jackpot C, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 MS, and the variation type is super. When the reach jackpot D is set, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 MS, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot E, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 20000 MS, and the variation type is the normal reach out of A. In that case, 10000 MS is determined for the hold effect start timer, and 10000 MS is determined for the hold effect start timer when the variation type is out of normal reach B. When the variation type is out of normal reach C, the hold effect is determined. The start timer is determined to be 10000 MS.

The lucky hold lottery table 222P acquires whether or not the lucky hold effect (see FIG. 434 (A)) can be executed based on the number of reserved balls and the effect counter 223H. FIG. 455 (C) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold lottery table 222P. In the lucky hold lottery table 222P, whether or not the lucky hold effect can be executed is acquired with respect to the value of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223H (see Z2304 in FIG. 479).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 2" and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 99", the lucky hold effect is executed. Is not performed, and if it is any of "100 to 199", the lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "3 to 4", and when the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 189", the lucky hold effect is not executed and " If it is any of "190 to 199", the lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "5 to 8" and the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 199", the lucky hold effect is not executed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of performing the lucky hold effect when the number of reserved balls is small, the effect of urging the player to save the hold is executed when the hold is small.

Further, as shown in FIG. 444, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223A, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223B, a fluctuation start flag 223D, and a stop type selection flag 223E. , Winning information storage area 223F, hold notice counter 223G, effect counter 223H, background mode storage area 223I, SW valid time counter 223K, hold effect mode storage area 223M, special effect status storage area 223N, lucky hold storage value 223P, short-term winning At least a timer 223Q, a hold effect start timer 223R, a sensor effective time counter 223S, a touch counter 223T, and other memory areas 223Z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223A is a variation display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first reserved ball number counter in the main control device 110. A counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waits) for the special symbol variation effect up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. Update according to the timing of increase / decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B is a variation display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A. , When a winning information command is received, a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the second special symbol fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. It is updated according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and sets the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. When this is done, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D or the special symbol 2 hold ball number command from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203E is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B (see Z2207 in FIG. 477). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223A and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223B according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main controller 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223A or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223B. , A display hold ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223A or the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223B after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223A of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223B is displayed in the sub display area DS of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B is the main. The value is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved spheres on which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223D is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2221 of FIG. 478), and the variation start flag 223D is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display is set in the display device 81 (see Z2502 in FIG. 487). When the variation start flag 223D is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (Z2102) of the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223E is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 4770), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See Z2506 in FIG. 487). When the stop type selection flag 223E is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The prize information storage area 223F has one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special symbol (first area to the fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the second special symbol (first area to the first area). It has 4 areas), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 is detected in the main control device 110, the special hit random number counter C1 acquired according to the start winning prize, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223F. More specifically, the extracted winning information corresponds to four areas (first area- Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

In this eleventh control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize is performed. Although the configuration in which the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B in the various information predicted corresponding to the start winning. Is included in the setting means for setting the winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223F when the winning information command is received, and the received winning information command. A configuration may be provided in which a determination means for determining whether or not various information (winning information) matches is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223F is appropriately stored.

Further, in the eleventh control example, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 when a new start winning is generated. However, the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the timing of starting winning, it is periodically performed. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, or when the jackpot game starts or ends), or when the special symbol changes start (or). At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223F.

In this control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223F, as a look-ahead effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing the display color of the reserved symbol is executed. In this way, by executing various effects (look-ahead effects) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223F, the player can be asked about each reserved ball before the variable display is started. You can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

When the hold notice counter 223G changes the hold color of the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of holds changes (the display position of the hold symbol whose hold ball is digested and the hold color changes). Even if it changes), it is a counter for determining the position of the reserved symbol whose display color is variable. The hold notice counter 223G has a value of 0 on the hold notice counter 223G in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 484) executed when the winning command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In a certain case (Z2403: YES), the hold change value acquired from the variation type of the winning command of the received special symbol is other than 0 (Z2405: NO), and there is a change in the hold symbol (see FIG. 429 (A)). ), The reserved ball value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 484). For example, as shown in FIG. 429 (A), when the value of the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the start is 4, the hold notice counter 223G is set to 4. The set hold notice counter 223G was decremented by 1 each time the special symbol fluctuated in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 478) executed at the start of the fluctuation, and the subtracted value was 0. In the case (Z2225: YES), the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area (Z2226).

The effect counter 223H is a counter used for selecting various effects. Every time the main process is executed, 1 is added in the range of 0 to 198 and the update is repeated. Specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223H include a hold change selection table 222B, a hold character selection table 222I (hold character), a hold character change table 222J (hold character), and reach. There is an effect lottery table 222M (whether or not the hold effect during reach can be executed) and a lucky hold lottery table 222P (whether or not the lucky hold effect can be executed), and various effects are selected according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223H.

Further, when making these selections, the update range is set to a prime number (199) in order to prevent the update cycle of the effect counter 223H from synchronizing with other counters and timer values, and the selection result is a part. I try not to be biased toward the selection result.

The background mode storage area 223I is a storage area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for storing numerical values necessary for determining the background mode. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), it is determined whether the demo screen is displayed in the standby state (Z2801), and when it is determined to be in the standby state (Z2801: YES). When it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2802) and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2802: YES), the content of the background mode storage area 223I is set by adding 1 (Z2804). Then, when the display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804) and the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. As the background image, different background images that can be recognized by the player are prepared, for example, the background A is the sea, the background B is the mountain, the background C is the river, and the background D is the city.

The SW effective time counter 223K is a counter for counting the effective time (valid period) during which the operation is possible in the effect accompanied by pressing the frame button 22 performed during the change of the special symbol or the like. The SW effective time counter 223K has a fluctuation pattern accompanied by pressing the frame button 22 when the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is 0 (Z2801: NO) in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). When set (Z2803: YES), the SW effective time is set (Z2804) based on the set fluctuation pattern. When the set SW effective time counter 223K is not 0 (Z2801: YES), the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is subtracted (Z2802), and when the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: YES), the SW is set. If the value of the valid time counter 223K is not 0 (Z2806: YES), if the notice is being produced (Z2809: YES), the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is reset (0 is set), and the notice display command for display is used. Is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

The hold effect mode storage area 223M contains information for determining a plurality of hold notice modes prepared according to the hold change when executing the notice effect regarding the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is remembered.

In the hold effect mode storage area 223M, the hold notice counter 223G is set to 0 in the prize command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 484) executed when the prize command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In the case (Z2403: YES), the hold effect mode is set (Z2404) according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired for the change type of the winning command of the received special symbol. As described above, if the hold change value is "0", the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode, if the hold change value is "1 to 2", the notice A mode is set, and if the hold change value is "3". If so, the notice B mode is set.

The content of the hold effect mode storage area 223M is the value of the hold notice counter 223G which is decremented by 1 each time the change of the special symbol starts in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 of FIG. 478) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. When becomes 0 (Z2225: YES), the hold effect mode is changed to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area 223M (Z2226).

The special effect status storage area 223N stores information for determining the content of the special effect to be executed when the hold effect mode is the normal mode. As described above, the special effects include a short-term winning effect (see FIG. 430 (A)), a hold effect during reach (see FIG. 433 (A)), and a lucky hold effect (see FIG. 434 (A)). Yes, the special effect is executed according to the change in the special effect status storage area 223N. The special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of the pending effect being executed.

In the short-term winning effect, the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 when the game state is the normal state (Z2421: YES) in the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed when the winning command is received. Yes (Z2422: YES), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 4 (Z2423: YES), and the short-term winning timer that counts the time (5 seconds) that has occurred since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0. When the value of is other than 0 (Z2424: YES), 1 is set in the special effect status storage area 223N (Z2425), and the short-term winning effect starts to be executed. On the other hand, during the short-term winning effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 (Z2604: YES) and the short-term winning timer is 0 (Z2605: YES) in the short-term winning management process (Z2111). , The special effect status storage area 223N is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning effect ends.

In the reach hold effect, the change type of the special symbol is reach variation in the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. If (Z2321: YES), the hold effect mode is in the normal mode (Z2322: YES), and the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2233: YES), the effect during reach lottery table 222M is used. When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2325: YES), the hold effect start timer 223R is set (Z2326) based on the variation type, and the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 2 (Z2327). When the hold effect start timer 223R becomes 0 (Z2704: YES) in the reach effect hold effect management process (Z2112) after a lapse of time, a notice display command for performing the reach effect hold effect is set (Z2706). By doing so, the hold effect during reach starts execution. During the reach hold effect, the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 0 (Z2708) at the timing of the end of the change of the special symbol (Z2707: YES), and the reach hold effect ends.

The lucky hold effect is in the normal mode (Z2301: YES) when the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2301: YES) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227), and the lucky hold storage value. Is 0 (Z2303: YES), and when the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222P is accepted (Z2305: YES), 3 is set in the special effect status storage area 223N. (Z2307), and the lucky hold effect starts execution. During the execution of the lucky hold effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2308: YES) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next fluctuation when the effect is started. The special effect status storage area 223N is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky hold effect ends.

The lucky hold storage value 223P is the winning time corresponding to the holding ball determined to be the jackpot when the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information command output at the start winning timing is determined to be a jackpot (look-ahead determination). It is a storage area in which the value of the number of reserved balls of is stored. The lucky hold storage value 223P is a case where the lottery result of the winning is a big hit in the lucky holding storage process (Z2408) executed in the winning command receiving process (Z2209) executed at the start winning (Z2442: YES). ), If the value of the number of reserved balls is 5 or more (Z2443: YES), the value of the number of reserved balls is set in the lucky hold storage value 223P (Z2444). Further, as described above, when the hold effect mode is the lucky hold effect, the display hold lid command is set (see Z2306 in FIG. 479) based on the lucky hold storage value 223P, and the lucky hold effect is displayed. (See FIG. 434 (A)).

The short-term winning timer 223Q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the value of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 to 1 or more to 4 or more. In the short-term winning timer 223Q, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z2601: YES), 5 seconds is set as the timer value, and when it is other than 0 (Z2601: NO), it is short-term until it becomes 0. The winning timer 223Q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). As described above, when the hold effect mode is set to the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 430 (A)), the short-term winning effect is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223Q becomes 0. In this way, by performing the short-term winning effect with the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223Q, the shorter (earlier) the period until four prizes are won, the longer the execution period of the short-term winning effect becomes, and the player It is possible to recognize the speed of the period required to win four prizes.

The short-term winning effect may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after winning 4 pieces. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that four prizes have been won within 5 seconds.

The hold effect start timer 223R is a timer for counting the timing at which the hold effect during reach (see FIG. 433 (A)), which is an effect related to the hold symbol, is executed during the reach fluctuation of the special symbol.

The hold effect start timer 223R is in the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the variation type of the special symbol is the reach variation. In a certain case (Z2321: YES), the hold effect mode is the normal mode (Z2322: YES), and when the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2233: YES), the effect during reach lottery table 222M When it is possible to enable or reject the execution effect acquired from (Z2325: YES), the timer value is set (Z2326) by the reach start time calculation table 222N.

When the timer value is set in the hold effect start timer 223R, the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 2 until the reach hold effect is started to be executed in the reach hold effect management process (Z2112). If the hold effect start timer 223R is not 0 (Z2702: NO) in Z2701: YES), 1 is subtracted. Further, as described above, when the value of the timer after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2704: YES), no other special effect is performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2705: YES). ), The notice display command for performing the reach hold effect is set (Z2706), so that the reach hold effect starts to be executed.

The sensor effective time counter 223S is a counter that counts the time during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is effective. The sensor effective time counter 223S gives a notice when the sensor effective time counter 223S is 0 (Z2821: NO) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107). When the effect display is set (Z2822: YES), the sensor effective time set in the advance notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223S (Z2823). If the set sensor valid time counter 223S is not 0, it is subtracted (Z2824), and the touch sensor detection becomes valid during that time. Further, when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223S is not 0 (Z2821: YES), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: YES), and the value obtained by adding 1 to the touch counter 223T (Z2826) reaches the upper limit value. It is reset (Z2809) to (Z2828: YES).

The touch counter 223T is a counter for counting the number of times that the detection of the touch sensor 290 is turned on during the period during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. The touch counter 223T has a touch sensor 290 when the sensor valid time counter 223S is not 0 (Z2821: YES) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107). When it is on (Z2825: YES), 1 addition (Z2826) is performed, and when the added value is the upper limit value (Z2828: YES), it is reset (Z2829).

The other memory area 223Z is an area in which various data, flags, counters, and the like in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (FIRST IN FIRST OUT) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 477) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 456.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 471).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 456. FIG. 456 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231A, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231A Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231A is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231A.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234A capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (DYNAMIC RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234A2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234A, a ROM controller 234B, a buffer RAM 234C, and a NOR flash memory 234D.

The NAND flash memory 234A is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234A1 to be stored and a character storage area 234A2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234A having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234A2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234A can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234A2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234A1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234B is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234A or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234B is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234A while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234B performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234A is analyzed by the ROM controller 234B and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234A. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234C is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234A. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234B has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234C. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234A (or NOR type ROM 234D) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234C. do. Then, the ROM controller 234B performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234C is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234A can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234B can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234A to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234A to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234D is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234A for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234A. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234D is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234D1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234D1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234A) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234D1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231A to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231A, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234C from the NOR type ROM 234D while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234D. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234C and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234A, the NOR type ROM 234D is a boot program in which a predetermined number of instructions are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234A is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234A, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234A and set it in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234C from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234D. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D in the buffer RAM 234C. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234A). It is programmed to transfer to 233A or the data table storage area 233B. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234D1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234C, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233A.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234C as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1 is set in the buffer RAM 234C in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234D1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program of the storage area 234D1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234D1 to the buffer RAM 234C after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231A is transferred to the program storage area 233A. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 is transferred to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231A becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233A. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234A1 are stored in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233A and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234A1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231A is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233A and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233A. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 492) executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 493) stored in the program storage area 233A by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234D, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 460) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 494 (B)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234A, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237A composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234A.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237A according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237A The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234C to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235A, the rear image area 235C, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235E and error message image area 235F, at least a variable image area 235B when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235D are provided.

The main image area 235A at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235B when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 492).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on variable image area 235B. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235A to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 457). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the variation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235A at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the first ball-entry port 64, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on is obtained. The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235B, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235B at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 456, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235C is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235D is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235D, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 427) with numbers from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable effect after the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640R, or the second ball entry port 640. However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235E is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235E. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235E in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235F is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235F, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235F in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236A, a first frame buffer 236B, and a second frame buffer 236C.

The image storage area 236A is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236A is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A via the buffer RAM 237A.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236C. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236B. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233A, a data table storage area 233B, a simple image display flag 233C, a display data table buffer 233D, a transfer data table buffer 233E, a pointer 233F, a drawing list area 233G, a time counting counter 233H, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233I and a drawing target buffer flag 233J.

The program storage area 233A is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233A. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233B is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234A1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233B. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233B. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second entry. The easier it is to enter the ball mouth 640, the more prize balls will be. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233B, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 458. FIG. 458 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, an A blending information, a color information, and a filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The Α blending information is information for specifying a known Α blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the A-blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified over time.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"START" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 458). "END" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233B, stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and the pointer 233F is initialized. Then, the pointer 233F is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the next is based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F. The image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 460) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233F, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 459. FIG. 459 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233B.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 459). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. The NULL data meaning that is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 459).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "START" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 459, in the example of FIG. 459). In "02F0H"), "END" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233B and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233F is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and a drawing list (see FIG. 461) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 461, when the pointer 233F becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233F is "0002H", since the FULL data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236A. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236A, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233C is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 457 on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233C is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235A or the power-on variable image area 235B of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 set to on in the main process (see FIG. 492) (see Z3005 in FIG. 492). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see Z4705 in FIG. 503 (B)).

This simple image display flag 233C is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 494 (B)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233C is on, a simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 494 (B)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 494 (B)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See Z3309 in 494 (B)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233C is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 495 to 500) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 501 to 502 (B)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233C is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 503 (A)), and the simple image display flag 233C is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 503 (B)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233C is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 504) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233D stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233B. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233F by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 460), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233F one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 460) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233E is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233B in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233D, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233E. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the FULL data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233E.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E while adding the pointer 233F one by one. If (that is, if the FULL data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 460) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236A.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233F is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in each buffer of the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table buffer 233E, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233F to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (Z3303 in FIG. 501). (See), the pointer update process (see Z4305 in FIG. 502 (B)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233F is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233F is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and specifies a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 460) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236A. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233G is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 460. FIG. 460 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 460, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, Α blending information, color information and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233J.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233F and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, Α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233F, the MPU 231 is the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236A to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233H is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233D, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 494 (B). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233H is decremented by 1 (see Z4307 in FIG. 501). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233H becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233I stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233I is generated by the initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 492) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233I generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236A.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233I is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 504) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236A. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236A as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233I when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 504). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236A, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 504). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236A, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233J is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236B and second frame buffer 236C). When the drawing target buffer flag 233J is 0, the first frame buffer 236B is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236C is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 505).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233J is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233J, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 494 (B)) is executed, it is performed (see Z4902 of FIG. 505).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236C. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236B. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 461 to 474. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 Mseconds in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (299, respectively in the present embodiment). , 99, 239), clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (Z104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 462 to 474.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470. After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (Z109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 290, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51B for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 462. FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (Z104). This special symbol variation processing (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 461), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (Z201). Here, it is determined whether the jackpot middle flag 203N is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the jackpot is in progress. As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: YES), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (Z201: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: NO), the value (Z203) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203D (the number of reserved balls in the special symbol N1) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203E is acquired (Z203). .. After acquiring the value of each counter, the variation execution determination process is executed (Z204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 463, but in this variation execution determination process (Z204), a process of determining a special symbol in the next variation order is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined by the variation execution determination process (Z204) is the special figure 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and the variation execution in the special figure 1 (first special symbol). If so, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203D is subtracted by 1 (Z206), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203D changed by the calculation is set (Z206). Z207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 476) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223A of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (Z208). In the processing of Z208, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol 1 variation start process for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z209). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 464. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209), processing such as selection of a fluctuation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed.

When it is determined in the processing of Z205 that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (Z205: NO), the special figure 2 (second special). It is determined whether or not the variation is executed in the symbol) (Z210). If it is not the variable execution of the special figure 2 (Z210: NO), that is, the reserved ball is not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation is executed in the special figure 2 (Z210: YES), the same processing as that for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 described above is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2.

Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203E (N2) is subtracted by 1 (Z211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203E changed by the calculation. Set a number command (Z212). By the reserved ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 476) described later. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223B of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203B is shifted (Z213). In the processing of Z213, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203B is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z214). The special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 465.

In the processing of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: YES), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If has not elapsed (Z215: NO), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z215, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z215: YES), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 464 or the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. 465. When this special symbol change start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area commonly provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. , A special design lottery will be held. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of the first special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot A, a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C. If it is a jackpot of the second special symbol, it will be a jackpot A according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. When the jackpot C is reached, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of Z217 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (Z218). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (Z218: YES), the jackpot start is set (Z219), the probability variation flag 203M is turned off, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203J is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203N is set to ON (Z221), the stop command is set (Z224), and this process is terminated. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability gaming state is set, the electric support gaming state (short-time gaming state) is also canceled, and the non-electric support gaming state is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (Z218: NO), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203J is 1 or more (Z222), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203J. If is 1 or more (Z222: YES), the value of the time saving counter 203J is subtracted by 1 (Z223), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203J is 0 (Z222: NO), the processing of Z223 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 463, the variation execution determination process (Z204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (Z204). This variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 462) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), and is a process executed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203B. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

In the variation execution determination process, first, by setting the variation execution flag 203K to off (“0” as a value), initialization is performed (Z241), and the data of the variation order storage area 203P stored in the RAM 203 is acquired. (Z242). Next, the data in the variable order storage area 203P is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244: YES), the variable execution flag 203K is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (Z245), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z244, if the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 1 (Z244: NO), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246), and the special figure 2 shows. If the variable execution is (Z246: YES), the variable execution flag 203K is set to the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z247), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the processing of Z246 that the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246: NO), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 464. FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 462) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), and is a process of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail determination) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is acquired. (Z251). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (Z252). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203M is on. This probability variation flag 203M is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the pachinko machine is in the probable change state (Z252: YES), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the Z253 process. In the processing of Z253, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A (see FIG. 439 (A)). Acquire (Z253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A one by one. As described above, 27 random numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state (special gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these random numbers. If it matches the random number value that is the hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z255 processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state of the special symbol (Z252: NO), the processing of Z254 is executed. In the processing of Z254, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 978 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A one by one. Three random number values of "0 to 2" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these hits. If it matches the numerical value, it is judged to be a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z255 processing.

In the processing of Z255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z253 or Z254 is the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A are displayed. (Z255), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (Z255: YES), the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z251. Based on the above, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202D1, and the jackpots (big hits) of four types of special symbols are compared. A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times of time reduction), and if it is in the range of "40 to 75". , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variation odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "76 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variation even symbol jackpot), and it is in the range of "80 to 99". If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot C (see FIG. 440 (B)).

In this Z256 process, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37A) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jacket A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202B1 for normal use (Z257). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of Z257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. ing. As the fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of Z255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (Z255: NO), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (Z258). In the processing of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach.

When the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is set (Z260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the Z275 process or the Z259 process is set (Z261). When the processing of Z261 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (Z104).

Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 465. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214). This special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 462) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), and is a process of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail determination) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214), as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B acquired by the process of Z271 is specially stored in the execution area. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z271).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in the probabilistic change period (high probability gaming state) (Z272). If it is determined that the gaming state is in the probabilistic change period (Z272: YES), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol. Since it is in a probabilistic state, the process shifts to Z273 processing. In the processing of Z273, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A one by one. As described above, 27 random numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. In some cases, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z275.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z272, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probable change state (Z272: NO), the processing of Z274 is executed. In the processing of Z274, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 978 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A one by one. Three random numbers "0 to 2" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match, the special symbol is set. It is determined that it is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z275.

In the processing of Z275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z273 or Z274 is a jackpot of the special symbol (Z275), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (Z275: YES), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202D2, and the jackpots (big hits) of four types of special symbols are compared. A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times of time reduction), and if it is in the range of "40 to 87". , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variation odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variation even symbol jackpot) and it is in the range of "92 to 99". If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot C (see FIG. 440 (C)).

In this Z276 process, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37A) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jacket A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202B1 for normal use (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. ing. As the fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the processing of Z275, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (Z275: NO), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (Z278). In the processing of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach.

When the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z281). When the processing of Z281 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 466. FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (Z105). This start winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process (Z105: see FIG. 466) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (Z301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (Z301: YES), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (number of reserved balls N1 for variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (Z302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z303).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z301: NO), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is 4. If it is not less than (Z303: NO), the over winning information command is set (Z304), and the process proceeds to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z301: YES) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203D is less than 4 (Z303: YES), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203D is added by 1 (Z305). Then, a hold ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 473) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223A of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated by Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first free holding area (holding area 1 to holding area 4) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A of the RAM 203 (Z307). In the processing of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold area 2 is set, if the value is 2, the hold area 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the hold area 4 is set as the first area. Next, special figure 1 is set at the lowest position of the variable order storage area 203P (Z308), and the look-ahead process (Z320) is executed. The look-ahead process (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG. 467.

Next, with respect to Z309 to Z316, for each of the processes of Z301 to Z320 described above, the process for winning the first ball opening 64 won the right second ball opening 640R or the second ball opening 640. Since the same process is executed only by changing the process to the above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball wins in the right second entrance 640R or the second entrance 640, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are also stored as reserved balls. It is acquired and stored in the empty hold area of the corresponding special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203B.

In this way, the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter similar to the first special symbol are also applied to the second special symbol based on the entry into the right second entry port 640R or the second entry opening 640. By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type selection counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The hit probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the processing of Z308 or the processing of Z316, the look-ahead processing (Z320) is executed. The details of the look-ahead process (Z320) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 467 as described above, but to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640R and the second entry opening 640. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the incoming ball, the process of determining in advance the result of each lottery executed at the start of the fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game can be stored. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 467, a look-ahead process (Z320), which is a process in the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (Z320).

In the look-ahead process (Z320), first, the hit / fail determination at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (Z351). In this pass / fail determination, the same processing as the Z255 processing in the above-mentioned special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 464) and the Z275 processing in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 465) is executed. .. It should be noted that this hit / fail judgment is the hit / fail judgment (discrimination) at the start of the fluctuation (Z255 processing in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 464), Z275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 465). It corresponds to the pre-judgment (pre-judgment) that is executed before the process). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of Z351 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (Z352). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (Z352: YES), the variation pattern type is acquired (discrimination) from the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. (Z353). Next, the winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202E based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type (Z354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z352 that the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect (Z352: NO), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202B1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1. Acquire the type (Z355). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, the winning information command is set from the winning command table 202E (Z356), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the start of fluctuation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. It is possible to recognize the result of the hit / fail judgment and the type of hit in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the color of the reserved symbol to a color for notifying the hit / fail determination result of the reserved ball in advance, based on the winning command. It is possible to execute an effect (such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the reserved ball). Further, as the winning command, one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 468. FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (Z106). This normal symbol variation process (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640A.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (Z401). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entry port 640 is performed. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (Z401: YES), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z401: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (Z402: NO), the long-time open flag 203I is set to off (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203F (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M). (Z404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is larger than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is 0 (Z405:). NO), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is not 0 (Z405: YES), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is subtracted by 1 (Z406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C is shifted (Z407). In the processing of Z407, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203C is acquired (Z408).

Next, the normal symbol change start process is executed (Z409), and this process is terminated. The normal symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 469, but the normal symbol (second symbol) is determined to be correct or not, and the fluctuation period (variable time or time) of the ordinary symbol is based on the result of the determination. (Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, a process of setting the opening operation (movement pattern of the game per normal figure) of the electric accessory 640A corresponding to the hit type is performed. Execute.

In the process of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: YES), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z410). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of Z437 or the processing of Z438 in FIG. 469 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Z410: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z410: YES), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the processing of Z411, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of Z427 or the processing of Z431 in FIG. 469, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed as the second symbol. The device 83 is set to display a stop display (lighting display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of Z435 in FIG. 469, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the processing of Z411, and then the second symbol display update processing (see Z1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 473) is executed, the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the Z427 process, the Z431 process, or the Z435 process of FIG. 469. In this control example, the "○" symbol is lit and displayed even when it is a long-time hit or a normal hit, but it is not limited to this, and a symbol corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is lit and displayed (for example). , If it is a long-time hit, it may be configured as "◎", and if it is a normal hit, it may be configured as "○").

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? (Z412). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (Z412: YES), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entry port 640 is set (Z413), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640A is set by the processing of the Z412, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 473) is executed, the electric accessory 640A The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640A is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of Z430 or the process of Z434 of FIG. 469 are completed. Since the opening operation data of the electric accessory 640A corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol fluctuation start process (Z408: see FIG. 469) described later, the hit type of the normal symbol is set in Z413. It is configured to set the open / close control corresponding to. On the other hand, in the processing of Z412, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (Z412: NO), the processing of Z413 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 469. FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change start processing (Z408). This normal symbol change start process (Z408) sets the setting at the start of change of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 469) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461). It is a process to execute.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (Z421). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z421: YES), the process proceeds to Z424. In the processing of Z421, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z421: NO), it is determined whether or not it is in the probability change or the time reduction (Z422). If it is neither probable nor time-saving (Z422: NO), the process proceeds to Z424.

If the probability change or the time reduction is in progress (Z422: YES), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439 (C)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (Z423). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439 (C)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 439 (C)).

In the processing of Z424, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. , Based on the normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439 (C)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (Z424). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439 (C)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,7 to 239". , It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 439 (C)).

In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65A, so that the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entry opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65A from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65A is provided immediately below the second entry opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second entry opening 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, the second entry opening 65A is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of Z423 or Z424 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (Z425), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (Z425: YES). , It is determined whether the type of hit of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (Z426). The hit type of the normal symbol is determined by collating the value of the normal hit type counter acquired when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) with the preset determination value. In this control example, the value of the ordinary hit type counter is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 at the timing synchronized with the other special hit type counter C2, and the acquired value of the ordinary hit type counter is used. If it is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a long-time hit, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined to be a normal hit.

When the type of hit of the normal symbol is determined to be a long-time hit (Z426: YES), the display mode for the long-time hit is set (Z427). In this Z427 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time hit start command is set (Z428), and the long-time release flag 203I is turned on (Z429). Then, it shifts to the processing of Z430.

When it is determined in the processing of Z426 that the type of hit of the normal symbol is normal hit (Z426: NO), the display mode at the time of normal hit is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change or the time reduction is in progress (Z432). Then, if it is a probability change or a time saving (Z432: YES), it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of a special symbol (Z433). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z433: YES), the process proceeds to Z434 processing. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entry port 640 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory 640A is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of Z433, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z433: NO), the opening period of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times. Set (Z430) and move to Z436 processing. In the processing of Z430, 2 is set in the opening number counter 203G, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203H.

In the processing of Z432, if there is neither a probability change nor a time saving (Z432: NO), the process proceeds to the processing of Z434. In the processing of Z432, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entrance 640 is set. It is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the processing of Z434, 1 is set in the opening number counter 203G, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203H.

On the other hand, in the process of Z425, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary symbol (Z425: NO), the display mode at the time of the out of place is set (Z435). In this Z435 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to Z436 processing.

In the processing of Z436, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (Z436), and if the probability change is in progress (Z436: YES), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437). , End this process. On the other hand, if the process of Z436 is not probable (Z436: NO), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In this embodiment, the opening time and the number of opening times per long time are set to the same operation as the case where the normal symbol is hit in the probable change state and the time saving state, but the operation is not limited to this, and the opening time and the number of opening times are different. It may be configured to be set.

Next, the through-gate passage process (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 470. FIG. 470 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (Z107). This through gate passage process (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), determines whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and if the sphere has passed, a normal hit random number. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: YES), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (Z502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z503).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: NO), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is not less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z503). : NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (Z501: YES) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F is less than 4 (Z503: YES), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F The value (M) is added by 1 (Z504). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated by the timer interrupt process Z103 described above is the first of the empty hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4 area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (Z505), and this process ends. In the processing of Z505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 471 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (Z801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 472, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (Z902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 426) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: YES), the process shifts to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: NO), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if it is not stored (Z905: NO). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also transferred to Z913 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: YES), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Z907: NO), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to Z913. As will be described later in the process of Z1014 in FIG. 473, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (Z913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. Further, the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is also executed when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the Z911 process.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: NO), the power off occurrence information is stored (Z905: YES), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (Z904: NO). Z907: YES), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203I (Z908). Next, while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of Z911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process proceeds to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 473, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 Mseconds, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 461), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (Z1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information detected by the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), and if there is prize detection information, it corresponds to the number of acquired balls for the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 462) and the start winning process (see FIG. 466) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 467) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). The details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 474.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640A is set by the processing of Z412 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 468), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640A is started.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, the change is caused by the Z257 process or the Z259 process of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 464), or the Z277 process or the Z279 process of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 465). When the pattern is set, the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37A of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4S. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the Z257 process or the Z259 process of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 464), or the Z277 process of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 465) or When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the processing of Z279 ends, the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and Z256 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 464) is terminated. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of Z258, the processing of Z258, the processing of Z276 of the special symbol 2 variation start processing (see FIG. 465), or the processing of Z278. Stop display (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process (Z1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z437 or the process of Z438 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 469), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of Z410 in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 468), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the Z427 process or the Z431 process of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 469). (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: NO), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 Msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: YES), the process is shifted to Z1001 and each process after Z1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009: NO), in the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, in the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as that of the Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). (Initial value of, initial value of random number counter C4 per normal) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of Z1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: YES), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 471 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And send (Z1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (Z1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The Z1008 process is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state changes of the games performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the Z1010 and Z1011 processes performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the processing of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (Z901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of Z1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 474. FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control process (Z1004) is executed in the main process (FIG. 473), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (big hit) is executed. Opening port) This is a process for releasing or closing 65A.

In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 474), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (Z1101). The Z219 process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 462) is executed, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, and when the special symbol jackpot starts (Z1101: YES), the opening command is set (Z1101: YES). Z1115), this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, when the big hit of the special symbol is not started (Z1101: NO), it is determined whether the big hit of the special symbol is in progress (Z1102). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the processing of Z1102, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z1102: NO), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1102, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z1102: YES), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103: YES), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (Z1105). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1103, if it is not the timing to start a new number of rounds (Z1103: NO), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A is satisfied (Z1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A, a predetermined number of balls are played. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of Z1106, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A is satisfied (Z1106: YES), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A is closed (Z1107), and this processing is completed. do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65A is not satisfied (Z1106: NO), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when the special gaming state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the processing of Z1108, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108: YES), the ending command is set (Z1109), and this processing is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223F of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: NO), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing at which a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (Z1110: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1110, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (Z1110: YES), in the processing of Z1111, it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A (Z1111). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot A (Z1111: YES), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203J is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203N is set to off (Z1114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type this time is not jackpot A (Z1111: NO), the probability variation flag 203M is set to on (Z1113), then the jackpot medium flag 203N is set to off (Z1114). End the process.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 475 to 491, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 475. FIG. 475 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of the Z2118 is due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this startup process (see FIG. 476). ) Is started in the middle of execution (Z2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 476, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 476), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of Z2118. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of Z2118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power-off process flag is off (Z2002: NO), this startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the Z2118 was turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAH" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAH", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAH", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: YES), the process proceeds to Z2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: NO), the process proceeds to the Z2008 process.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAH" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003: YES), and the process proceeds to Z2004. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of Z2118 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAH" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: NO), and the process proceeds to the Z2208 process.

If the power-off processing flag is on (Z2002: YES), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of Z1318, the voice lamp control device 113 MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to Z2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of Z2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). As a check method, first, "0FFH" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFH", and if it is "0FFH", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFH", then "55H", "0AAH", and "00H". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: YES), the keyword "55AAH" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (Z2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAH" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: NO), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of Z2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 476). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z2118 is executed, the process of Z2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the Z2118 is started in a state where the execution of the power cutoff process is completed even after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: YES), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (Z2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z2010), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (Z2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of Z2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of Z2008 via the processing of Z2004 to Z2006 is started. This is the case where the process is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: NO), Z2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to Z2010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (Z2010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (Z2011), the process shifts to the main process. After that, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (Z2012). It should be noted that this state command indicates whether or not the normal symbol is hit for a long time based on the long-time open flag 203I in the Z908 process of the start-up process (see FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It is a command. If it is determined in the Z2012 process that a status command has been received (Z2012: YES), the long-time release flag 203I is set based on the received status command, and this process ends (Z2013). .. Here, the long-time open flag 203I is turned on when it indicates that the received state command is hit for a long time, and the long-time open flag 203I is set when it indicates that it is not a long-time hit. Set to off.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol has been hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also determines the state. Can be done.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of Z2009 is that when the processing of Z2008 is reached from Z2004 via the processing of Z2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of Z2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 476, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 Msecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the Z2101 process this time was executed (Z2101), and 1 Msec or more has elapsed. If not (Z2101: NO), the process of Z2113 to Z2112 is not performed and the process proceeds to Z2113. In the processing of Z2101, whether or not 1M seconds have elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) of Z2102 to Z2112, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1M seconds). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of Z2113, the variation display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the processing of Z2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of Z2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 Msec or more has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: YES), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process shifts to the Z2105 process without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of Z2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223B.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 490.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (Z2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of Z2109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management processing is executed (Z2110), and the process shifts to the processing of Z2111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of the Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of Z2110 is completed, the short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). The details of this short-term winning management process (Z2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 488, but a specific effect (notice effect) is achieved by measuring the period during which a predetermined number of reserved balls are generated and within the predetermined period. ) Is executed.

After executing the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the process of the reach pending effect management process (Z2112) is executed. The details of the reach hold effect management process (Z2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 489, but a predetermined number of hold balls are held during the period when the variation mode of the third symbol (special symbol) is the reach display mode. A process of setting a specific effect (notice effect) for notifying the player that the game is to be accumulated is executed.

When the processing of Z2112 is completed, the command determination processing is executed (Z2113). The details of this command determination process (Z2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 477. After the command determination process (Z2113) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (Z2114). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 487.

When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z2115 process (Z2115: YES), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off process is executed (Z2118). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z2119), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the Z2115 process (Z2115: NO), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116) based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223, and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z2116: NO), the process returns to Z2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116: YES), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 477. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 477), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is used. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When the variation pattern command is received (Z2201: YES), the variation pattern reception process is executed (Z2202), and this process is terminated. The details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 478.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (Z2201: NO), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (Z2203). When the stop type command is received (Z2203: YES), the stop type selection flag 223E provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this process is terminated. ..

If the stop type command is not received in the process of Z2203 (Z2203: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command is received (Z2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (Z2206: YES), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (Z2207). After that, this process ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B. Stored.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2206, when the reserved ball number command is not received (Z2206: NO), it is determined whether or not the special symbol winning command is received (Z2208). When the winning command of the special symbol is received (Z2208: YES), the winning command receiving process is started (Z2209), and this process is terminated. The details of the winning command receiving process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 484. The pre-determination for determining is executed, and the setting process for executing each hold effect determined to be executed based on the pre-determination result is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2208, if the winning command of the special symbol is not received (Z2208: NO), the processing corresponding to the other commands is executed (Z2661), and this processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 478, the details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202), which is one of the processes in the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 477), will be described. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (Z2113), a variation pattern (effect mode) of a detailed special symbol, a notice display mode, a hold notice display mode, and the like are set based on the received fluctuation pattern command.

In the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 478), first, the variation start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). After that, a display notice display command is set for the fluctuation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the hold notice counter 223G provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z2224). Here, the display notice display command is a command for instructing to display various notice effects (for example, a comment notice suggesting a hit / miss determination result, a mini character notice, etc.) determined based on the fluctuation pattern.

When the processing of Z2224 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold notice counter 223G is 0 (Z2225). When it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223G is 0 (Z2225), the hold change value is set to 0 and the hold effect mode storage area 223M is cleared (Z2226). If the value of the hold notice counter 223G is 1 or more (Z2225: NO), the processing of Z2226 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2227. Next, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 431 (B), even when the effect of changing the color of the reserved ball based on the look-ahead determination result is performed, the value of the reserved ball is determined by the value of the reserved ball. The display position is changed according to the digestion, and after the change of the special symbol corresponding to the hold ball whose color of the hold ball is changed is started, it is hidden because the change is stopped, and the hold change value. Can also be set to 0, which is the initial value. Therefore, even when the color of the reserved ball is changed, the player can be correctly notified of the order in which the variable display of the reserved ball is started.

Here, with reference to FIG. 479, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) executed in the variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). In this lucky display determination process (Z2227), a process of determining the number of reserved balls at the time of winning a prize in the past and setting a mark symbol (holding effect) to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the reserved balls is performed. Execute.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 479), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223N provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a normal state in which a special hold effect is not executed. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2301: YES), it is determined whether the mode is in the normal mode (Z2302). If it is not in the normal mode (Z2302: NO), this process ends. In the process of Z2302, when it is determined that the mode is in the normal mode (Z2302: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky hold storage value 223P provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky hold storage value 223P is 0 (Z2303: YES), this process is terminated as it is. Here, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223P is 0, it means that the number of hold balls at the time of winning the special symbol determined to be a big hit is not stored.

When it is determined that the value of the lucky hold storage value 223P is 1 or more (Z2303), whether or not the effect can be produced is determined based on the lucky hold lottery table 222P (see FIG. 455 (C)) provided in the ROM 222. Acquire (Z2304). Here, in the lucky hold lottery table 222P, a process of acquiring the value of the effect counter 223H and determining whether to execute the lucky hold effect based on the determination value of the effect counter 223H set corresponding to the current number of reserved balls. Is executed.

Based on the processing of Z2304, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect (execution effect) is feasible (Z2305). If it is not possible (Z2305: NO), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: YES), the display hold lid command is set from the lucky hold command table 222G (FIG. 449) based on the value of the lucky hold storage value 223P (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 3 (Z2307), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2301, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 0 (Z2301: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2308). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky hold effect has been executed due to the previous fluctuation. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2308: YES), the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is cleared (0 is set as the initial value) (Z2309), and this processing is performed. To finish. If it is determined in the processing of Z2309 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 3, (Z2308: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. In this way, the lucky hold effect is set at the start of the variation and ends when the special effect status is set to the initial value at the start of the next variation. In this control example, the lucky hold effect is an effect that is executed during the period in which the special symbol is changed once, but the effect is not limited to this, and is configured to be executed in the period in which the change is executed a plurality of times. You may. The number of changes in the special symbol to be executed at the start of the lucky hold effect may be determined and ended when the change in the number of times is executed, or a lottery to decide whether to end the each variable lucky hold effect. May be set to end when the end lottery is won, when all the reserved balls are exhausted, or when the demo display is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 478, the explanation will be continued. After the lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed, the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) is executed. In the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 480), when a change of a special symbol to be a reach display mode is executed, a game is performed so as to store a hold ball in the reach display mode. Executes the process for executing the effect (one of the special hold effects).

Here, with reference to FIG. 480, the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing the pending effect setting process (Z2228) during reach.

In the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 480), first, it is determined whether the reach is changing (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not changing (Z2321: NO), this process ends. If the reach is changing (Z2321: YES), it is determined whether the change is in the normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not normal (Z2322: NO), this process is terminated as it is. When the fluctuation is in the normal mode (Z2232: YES), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2223). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a normal state in which a special hold effect is not executed. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 or more (Z2233: NO), this process ends. Here, when the special effect status is 1 or more, it means that another special hold effect is being executed. Therefore, the determination of Z2323 is executed in order to prevent the hold effects from being duplicated. .. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2233: YES), it is executed by the effect lottery table 222M during reach (see FIG. 455 (A)) based on the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect counter 223H. Acquires the propriety of the production (Z2324). Here, in the reach effect lottery table 222M, a determination value of the effect counter 223H is set for the current number of reserved balls, and whether or not the reach hold effect can be executed is determined based on the determination value.

It is determined whether the hold effect during reach (execution effect) can be executed by the process of Z2324 (Z2325). If it is determined that the execution effect is not feasible (Z2325: NO), this process ends. When it is determined that the execution effect can be executed (Z2325: YES), the hold effect is obtained from the reach start time calculation table 222N (FIG. 455 (B)) based on the variation pattern type (variation type) of the special symbol. The value of the start timer 223R is set (Z2326), the data indicating the special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status storage area 223N (Z2327), and this process is terminated.

In this way, according to the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) to be the reach display mode is determined, and no other special hold effect is executed. If so, a lottery for executing the reach hold effect is executed, and the timing for starting the execution of the reach hold effect is set by winning the lottery, so that the special symbol in the reach display mode changes. When it is started, the hold effect during reach is set to be executed more frequently as the current number of hold balls is smaller, and it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the game ball during reach, and the game store side. Profit can be increased. In addition, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Next, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 478. After executing the hold effect setting process (Z2228) during reach, the hold lid setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this holding lid setting process (Z2229), a process necessary for displaying the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area DS is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 481, the holding lid setting process (Z2229) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing this holding lid setting process (Z2229).

In the holding lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 481), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether or not a short-term winning effect (short-term winning effect), which is one of the special reserved effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 (Z2341: YES), it is held at the time of short-term winning in the holding lid range selection table 222D (see FIG. 446 (A)) provided in ROM 222. The holding lid range value is acquired based on the lid range selection table 222D4 (see FIG. 447 (A)) (Z2342). The display holding lid command is set based on the value of the holding lid range value acquired in the processing of Z2342 (Z2355), and this processing is terminated. In this way, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 430 (A)) is set, the display range of the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the current reserved ball is set. By selecting and setting the value (display mode) from the short-term winning hold lid range selection table 222D4 (see FIG. 447 (A)), the display mode of the variable lid symbol P different from the normal time (normally held). It is possible to set a display mode in which a rule for displaying a symbol and a rule for displaying one reserved symbol at intervals is displayed with a rule for displaying two reserved symbols.

As a result, when the period required for storing 1 to 4 reserved balls is within a predetermined period, the variable lid symbol P is displayed according to a rule different from the normal time, so that the variable lid symbol is displayed. From the display mode of P, it can be recognized that the period required for the reserved ball to be stored is a short period. Therefore, it is possible to induce the player to play the game so that the reserved ball is memorized earlier, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. In addition, the fun of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2341 when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 1 (Z2341: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold effect during reach is set. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is determined to be 2 (Z2343: YES), the hold lid range selection table 222D5 (see FIG. 446) in the hold lid range selection table 222D (see FIG. 446) during the reach effect. (See FIG. 447 (B)) to acquire the holding lid range value (Z2344). Based on the holding lid range value acquired in the processing of Z2344, the holding lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this processing is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display hold lid command indicating the hold lid range value acquired in the reach hold cover range selection table 222D5, the reach indicating that it is the timing to execute the reach hold hold effect. By receiving the notice display command for performing the middle hold notice effect, the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the display hold lid command.

In this way, when the execution of the hold effect during reach is determined, the mode in which the display of the variable lid symbol P is changed is set, and the display mode is set according to the execution timing of the hold effect during reach. Since the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed in, it can be determined that the variable lid symbol P has executed a special hold effect different from the normal time.

On the other hand, in the treatment of Z2343, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 2 (Z2343: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2345). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the lucky hold effect, which is one of the special hold effects, is set. If it is determined in the processing of Z2345 that the value of the special effect status is 3 (Z2345: YES), the normal holding lid range selection table 222D1 (see FIG. 446) in the holding lid range selection table 222D (see FIG. 446) is used. Based on (see 446 (B)), the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2344). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated. In this way, when the execution of the lucky hold effect (see FIGS. 434 (A) to (B)) is set, the display mode (displayed) of the variable lid symbol P is the same as the execution of the hold effect in the normal state. A display mode in which one reserved symbol is vacated from the last reserved symbol is set).

On the other hand, in the process of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 3, (Z2345: NO), it is determined whether the mode is the notice B mode (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 429 (A) to 4B, it is suggested to the player not to let the reserved ball enter any more in the state where the number of reserved balls is 4 or more and the color of the reserved symbol is variable. Determine if the hold effect is being executed. In the case of the advance notice B mode (Z2347: YES), a display showing the color change of the variable lid symbol P based on the hold lid color change selection table 222F (see FIG. 448 (B)) provided in the ROM 222. Set the hold lid command for (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 429 (B), the reserved symbol is displayed in a variable color, and the notice B for notifying the player that the game is to be performed so as to restrict the further increase of the reserved balls. When the game of the mode (the number of reserved balls is 4 or more) is being performed and more reserved balls are stored, the variable lid symbol at the position where the variable lid symbol P and the displayed reserved symbol overlap is performed. A setting is executed in which the display color of P is variably displayed in a color different from the normal color (for example, green or the like). As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the game has been played contrary to the notification mode in which the player is notified to play the game so as not to memorize the reserved ball.

After executing the processing of Z2348, the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2349) based on the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222D3 (see FIG. 446 (D)), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed. End the process. According to the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222D3 (see FIG. 446 (D)), if there is a holding effect in the normal mode as in the case where there are four holding balls as shown in FIG. 429 (A), the holding ball 5 The variable lid symbol P corresponding to the position of the item is hidden, but can be configured to be displayed according to a special rule such that it is displayed. As a result, in the notice B mode in which the hold effect is performed to instruct not to increase the number of hold balls, the variable lid symbol P is used to make the player think that the four hold balls are the upper limit. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit value of the reserved sphere is variable depending on the display mode of the variable lid symbol P.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2347, if it is determined that the mode is not the notice B mode (Z2347: NO), it is determined whether the mode is the notice A mode (Z2350). That is, there are four or more reserved balls, the color of the reserved symbol is changed or set, and the variable lid symbol P is different from the normal mode (normal state) with the reserved symbol. It is determined whether or not the hold effect to be displayed without an interval is being executed.

When it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2351: YES), the hold lid range value is acquired based on the notice A mode hold lid range selection table 222D2 (see FIG. 446 (C)) (see FIG. 446 (C)). Z2351). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed to end this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2350, when it is determined that the mode is not the notice A mode (Z2350), it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (Z2352). Here, the determination as to whether or not the time is being shortened is determined by the game state data attached to the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In addition to the fluctuation type (out of reach, hit) data, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 includes whether the current gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state (electric support gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state (high). It is also output with data indicating whether it is a gaming state with stochastic electric support) or a normal gaming state (gaming state without low probabilistic electric support).

When it is determined that the player is in the middle of working hours (the state in which the reduced working hours game state or the probabilistic game state is set) (Z2352: YES), it is based on the time saving holding lid range selection table 222D6 (see FIG. 447 (C)). Then, the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2353). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated. It should be noted that, unlike the normal game state, the variable lid symbol P is the 7th and 8th reserved balls in the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 6 during the time reduction (the state where the electric support is present). Is displayed only at the position where is displayed, and the number of reserved balls is 7, so that the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the 7th reserved symbol is displayed is hidden, and the number of reserved balls is 8. As a result, the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved symbol is displayed is set to be hidden. As a result, the variable lid symbol P is configured to be displayed less than in the normal gaming state during the time reduction with the electric support in which the electric accessory 640A is likely to be in the open state, and in a state where a large number of reserved balls are frequently generated. , The load of the display control of the variable lid symbol P is suppressed from increasing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2352 that the time is not shortened (Z2352: NO), that is, when it is determined that the hold effect in the normal mode is in progress, the normal hold lid range selection table 222D1 (FIG. (See 446 (B)), the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2354), the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 478, the explanation will be continued. After executing the hold lid setting process (Z2229), the hold character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this reserved character setting process (Z2230), a process of determining a girl character or the like to be displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area DS is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 482, the reserved character setting process (Z2230) executed in the variable pattern reception process (Z2202; FIG. 478) executed by the MPU221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing this reserved character setting process (Z2230).

In the hold character setting process (Z2230), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal mode, which is the normal state, is set as the state of the hold effect. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, when the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4, even if one reserved ball is digested by newly starting the fluctuation, the first ball entry port 64, which is the starting port, is used. , The number of reserved balls was 3 by entering either the right second entry port 640R or the second entry opening 640 (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter). From the state (the total of the values with 223B is 3), the number of reserved balls is 4 (the total of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B is 4). It is a state that is changing to a state.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: YES), the contents of the background mode storage area 223I provided in the RAM 223 and the set reserved effect mode. And the effect counter 223H, the reserved character is selected from the reserved character selection table 222I (see FIG. 450 (B)), the display character command is set (Z2363), and this process is terminated. In this way, when there are four reserved balls, the character type of the girl is determined and set by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the set reserved effect mode. .. As a result, the characters displayed depending on the background type and the hold effect mode can be different, and the hold effect can be diversified. Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the type of the character to be determined may be varied depending on the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol being changed and the variation pattern type (for example, super reach). By configuring in this way, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, it is preliminarily judged as a hit while it is on hold or a special symbol that is changing depending on the character type. The player can recognize that the reserved ball being held is stored. In addition, if a character with a high selection rate is set when it is displayed in super reach depending on the character type, that character is displayed, and super reach, which is a fluctuation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, is executed. You can expect that early.

Further, also in this control example, the notice A mode and the notice B mode are set when the fluctuation pattern type (for example, super reach type) with a high expectation of a big hit by the look-ahead judgment or the advance hit / fail judgment result big hit. Since it is easy, by displaying the character of J2 and the character of J3, it is possible to expect the player to execute the super reach type and to expect the hit / fail determination result to be a big hit.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has not changed from 3 to 4, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364: YES), a display character command for clearing the reserved characters is set (Z2365), and this process is terminated. In this way, since the character is set to be hidden when the number of reserved balls becomes less than 4, it is possible to inform the player of the decrease in the number of reserved balls in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the process of Z2364, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2364: NO), it is determined whether or not an over-winning state has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether or not the over-winning has occurred is executed by determining whether or not the over-winning information command output when the start winning is exceeded from the main control device 110 and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is received. To. If it is determined that an over-winning has occurred (Z2366: YES), the character is changed by the hold character change table 222J based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223I, the hold effect mode, and the effect counter 223H. Select the reserved character, set the display character command (Z2267), and end this process. If it is determined that the over-winning has not occurred in Z2366 (Z2366: NO), the present process is terminated as it is. As described above, in this control example, when the over-winning occurs, the character displayed in the character display area C is changed. As is clear from the reserved character change table 222J (see FIG. 451), the change of the character is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. When the character of J3, which is easy to be set when the judgment result is a big hit (hit) or the expectation of the big hit is high in the fluctuation pattern type, is selected while the notice A mode or the notice B mode is decided. Is configured so that characters other than J3 are not selected. If the character of J2 is selected, or if the character of J0 or J1 that is difficult to select is selected in the notice A mode or the notice B mode, the character of J2 or J3 is selected. It is configured to be easy. That is, it is configured to be able to step up to J3, which is set to a high degree of expectation that a jackpot or a fluctuation pattern type with a high degree of expectation is selected, and the player enjoys the hold effect by generating an over prize. It is configured to be able to. Changing this character is a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

Returning to FIG. 478, the explanation will be continued. After executing the hold character setting process (Z2230), the balloon setting process (Z2231) is executed to end this process. In this balloon setting process (Z2231), a process of selecting the content of the comment displayed in the balloon from the character displayed in the character display area C is executed.

Next, the balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 483. FIG. 483 is a flowchart showing this balloon setting process (Z2231).

In the balloon setting process (Z2231), it is first determined whether 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223N (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize holding effect is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 (Z2381: YES), the balloon is selected at the time of short-term winning in the balloon selection table 222K (see FIG. 452 (A)) provided in the ROM 222. The contents of the balloon are acquired (Z2382) based on the table 222K4 (see FIG. 453 (A)). A display balloon command is set (Z2394) based on the balloon content acquired after executing the processing of Z2382, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2381 when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 1 (Z2381: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2383). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold effect during reach is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2383: YES), the balloon content is acquired based on the balloon selection table 222K5 (see FIG. 453 (B)) during the reach effect (Z2384), and the above-mentioned Z2394 Execute the process and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2383, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 2 (Z2383: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2385). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky hold effect is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2385: YES), the balloon contents are acquired based on the lucky hold balloon selection table 222K6 (see FIG. 454 (A)) (Z2386), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2394 is performed. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2387, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 3 (Z2385: NO), it is determined whether the notice B mode is set (Z2387). When it is determined that the notice B mode is set (Z2387: YES), the contents of the balloon are acquired based on the notice B balloon selection table 222K3 (see FIG. 452 (D)) (Z2388), and the above-mentioned Z2394 is obtained. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Z2387 that the notice B mode is not set (Z2387: NO), it is determined whether the notice A mode is set (Z2389). When it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2389: YES), the contents of the balloon are acquired based on the notice A balloon selection table 222K2 (see FIG. 452 (C)) (Z2390), and the above-mentioned Z2394 is obtained. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2389, when it is determined that the notice A mode is not set (Z2389: NO), it is determined whether or not the time saving medium (time saving gaming state or probabilistic gaming state) is set (Z2391). When it is determined that the time reduction is set (Z2391), the balloon content is acquired based on the time reduction balloon selection table 222K7 (see FIG. 454 (B)) (Z2392), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2394 is performed. Execute and end this process.

When it is determined in the processing of Z2391 that the time reduction is not set (Z2391: NO), the balloon contents are acquired based on the normal balloon selection table 222K1 (see FIG. 452 (B)) (Z2393). The above-mentioned Z2394 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, since the comment of the corresponding content is controlled to be selected for each hold effect mode, the comment content corresponding to the hold effect mode can be displayed to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 484, a winning command receiving process (Z2209), which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: see FIG. 477) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 484 is a flowchart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). This winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 477) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the winning command receiving process (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223F provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, the hold change value is acquired from the hold change selection table 222B (FIG. 445 (A)) provided in the ROM 222 based on the change type of the received command and the value of the acquired effect counter 223H (Z2402). ..

Next, it is determined whether the value of the hold notice counter 223G provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether the notice A mode or the notice B mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is changed is set. If the value of the hold notice counter 223G is not 0 (Z2403: NO), the processing of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223G is 0 (Z2403: YES), the hold effect mode is selected from the hold effect mode selection table 222C (see FIG. 445 (B)) based on the hold change value. Is set (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: YES), the processing of Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold change value is not 0 (Z2405: NO), the hold notice counter 223G has the current hold ball value (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223A and special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223B). (Total value of) is set (Z2406).

When the processing of Z2406 is completed, the short-term winning determination processing is executed (Z2407). The details of the short-term prize determination process (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 485, but if it is the timing to execute the short-term prize hold effect, it is determined (the condition to execute is satisfied). (If so) The process of setting the execution of the short-term winning hold effect is executed. Next, the lucky hold process is executed (Z2408). The details of the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 486, but if it is the execution timing, it is determined whether it is the timing (whether the condition is satisfied) to execute the lucky hold effect. Set the execution of the lucky hold effect. Next, the above-mentioned hold lid setting process (Z2409), hold character setting process (Z2410), and balloon setting process (Z2411) are executed to end this process. Since the holding lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 481, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the balloon setting process (Z2411) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 483, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 485. FIG. 485 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning determination process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 484) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (Z2421). If it is determined that the game is in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (during the time reduction) (Z2421: YES), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (Z2421: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 0 (Z2422: NO), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2422: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is four (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not four (Z2423: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the short-term winning timer 223Q is 0 (Z2424). If it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223Q is 0 (Z2424: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223Q is not 0 (Z2424: YES), the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 1 (Z2425), and this process is terminated. As described above, when the period required for the four reserved balls to be established is less than 5 seconds, the special effect status 1 indicating that the execution of the short-term prize holding effect is set is set.

Next, the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 486. FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing this lucky hold storage process (Z2408). This lucky hold storage process (Z2408) is executed in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 484) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the lucky hold storage process (Z2408), first, the lottery result of the prize is acquired from the contents of the prize information storage area 223F provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the process of Z2441, it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442). If it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big hit (2442: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442: YES), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2443: NO). If it is determined that the number is four or more (Z2443: YES), the value of the current number of reserved balls is set in the lucky hold storage value 223P (Z2444), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current value of the number of reserved balls is 4 or less (Z2443: NO), this process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 487, the variation display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (Z2114). This variation display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 487), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2501). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2501: NO), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223D is on (Z2501: YES), the variation start flag 223D is turned off (Z2502), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (Z2503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223F is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223F is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process shifts to Z2505 processing.

In the process of Z2505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223E provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2505). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2505: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is on (Z2505: YES), the stop type selection flag 223E is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

In the process of Z2509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2509). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 488, a short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning management process (Z2111). In this short-term winning management process (Z2111), a process of measuring the period until four reserved balls necessary for determining whether or not to execute the short-term winning holding effect is executed is executed.

In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether or not the current number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (Z2601: NO), the value of the short-term winning timer 223Q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601: YES), the value of the short-term winning timer 223Q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the process proceeds to Z2604.

In the processing of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize holding effect has already been set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 1, (Z2604: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 (Z2604: YES), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605: YES), the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 0 (Z2605), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2604, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 1 (Z2604: NO), or in the processing of Z2605, it is determined that the number of reserved balls is more than 4. In that case (Z2605: NO), the process of Z2606 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In this way, when the short-term prize holding effect is already set, the special effect status is set to 0 and set to the initial value based on the fact that the number of reserved balls is less than 4. Not limited to that, the special effect status should be set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term prize hold effect is completed (the timing when the hold balls enter up to 4 balls in less than 5 seconds and the remaining period has elapsed). It may be configured in.

Next, with reference to FIG. 489, the reach hold effect management process (Z2112), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 489 is a flowchart showing the pending effect start processing (Z2112) during reach. In this reach hold effect management process (Z2112), a process for determining the execution timing of the reach hold effect and setting the display mode of the reach hold effect at the execution timing is executed.

In the reach pending effect management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 2, (Z2701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2701: YES), it is determined whether the value of the hold effect start timer 223R provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702). ). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223R is 1 or more (Z2702: NO), the value of the hold effect start timer 223R is subtracted by 1 (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold effect start timer 223R calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). If it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223R after the calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223R after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: YES), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 2, (Z2705: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2705: YES), a notice display command indicating that the hold effect during reach is executed is set (Z2706). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223R is 0 in the processing of Z2702 (Z2702: YES), the timing at which the variable time (variable period) of the special symbol being changed ends (the variable period has elapsed). (Z2707). When it is determined that it is the variation end timing (Z2707: YES), 0 is set in the special effect status storage area 223N (Z2708), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2707, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: NO), this processing is terminated. As described above, in the hold effect during reach, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the change time of the special symbol, which is the reach variation mode, elapses, and the hold effect is initially set to the normal mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 490, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 490 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of the advance notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107: see FIG. 490), first, it is determined whether or not a value larger than 0 is set in the SW valid time counter 223K as the SW (switch) valid time (valid period) (Z2801). ). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is 0 (Z2801: NO), and when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2801: NO). YES), it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the SW effective time counter 223K (Z2802). After that, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) (Z2805). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: YES), it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is larger than 0 (Z2806). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is 0 (Z2806: NO), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223I provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the process of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. This sensor input process (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG. 491.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is larger than 0 (Z2806: YES), it is determined whether the advance notice effect is being executed (during the advance notice effect). (Z2809). If it is determined that the advance notice effect is in progress (Z2809: YES), the value of the SW valid time counter 223K provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and a notice for display indicating the advance notice effect determined by the lottery. Set the command (Z2811). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the sensor input process (Z2813) will be described with reference to FIG. 491. FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (Z2813), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z1307: FIG. 490) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and execution of various effects and the like is set based on the operation.

In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 491), first, it is determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223S is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is in an effective period. When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223S is 0 (Z2821: NO), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2282). When it is determined that the advance notice effect display is set (Z2822: YES), the sensor effective time set in the advance notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223S (Z2823), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2822 that the advance notice effect display is not set (Z2822: NO), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2821, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223S has a value larger than 0 (Z2821: YES), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223S is subtracted and updated by the elapsed time (Z2824). ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player operates the touch sensor 290 with his or her hand close to it (Z2825). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: YES), the value of the touch counter 223T is added by 1 and updated (Z2826), and the notice for display corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223T is provided. Set the display command (Z2827). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223T is the upper limit value set in the selected touch notice effect display (Z2828). When it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223T is the upper limit value (Z2828: YES), the value of the touch counter 223T is reset to the initial value 0 (Z2829). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223T is not the upper limit value (Z2828: NO), this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 490. In the processing of Z2801, when it is not in standby mode (Z2801: NO), or in the processing of Z2802, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (Z2802: NO), the SW valid time counter 223K. It is determined whether the value of is 1 or more (Z2805). When the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is 1 or more (Z2805: YES), the SW effective time counter 223K is subtracted (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2807). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2807: YES), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is being executed (during the advance notice effect) (Z2808). If it is determined that the advance notice effect is in progress (Z2808: YES), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223S provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and a notice for display indicating the advance notice effect determined by lottery. Set the command (Z2810). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. Since the sensor input process (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 491, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2808 that the advance notice is not being produced (Z2808: NO), the processing of Z2803 and Z2804 already described is executed, and then this processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the processing of Z2807 (Z2807: NO), the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 is skipped, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. Is executed to end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2805, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is 0 (Z2805: NO), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is set (Z2811). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811: YES), the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223K (Z2812) based on the set fluctuation pattern, and the sensor input process (Z2813) is performed. Execute and end this process. If the fluctuation pattern is not set in the processing of Z2811 (Z2811: NO), the processing of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing is terminated. Here, there are some fluctuation patterns in which the effect using the frame button 22 is set and some in which the effect using the frame button 22 is not set. If not, "0" is set in the SW effective time counter 223K. Will be done.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 492 to 505, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 492, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231A provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D is set in the buffer RAM 234C. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234A and set in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234C from its read, so the MPU231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234D, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately becomes the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234C, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (Z3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 493. FIG. 493 is a flowchart showing a boot process (Z3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234A capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are stored in the program storage area 233A and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233B and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D and set in the buffer RAM 234C according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234A1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233A (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A by the processing of the Z3101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231A to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233A by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231A is set by the processing of Z3102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231A. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233A among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B in predetermined amounts (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233B.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231A is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, after the boot processing (see Z3001 in FIG. 493) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 492) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (Z3001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233A and the data table storage area 233B. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233A after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234A1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234D, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 493, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233A by the process of Z3101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233A by the processing of Z3101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of Z3102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231A. Then, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233A.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of Z3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233A by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233A. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A to the instruction pointer 231A is performed in Z3101. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of Z3102, the processing of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234D1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233A at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233A. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234D1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234D1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234D1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 without performing the processes of Z3101 and Z3102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233A, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233A is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 492. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235A at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235A at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235A.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235A when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235A is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235B when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (Z3004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235B, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235B when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235B when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235B is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, then the simple image display flag 233C Is turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 503 (A)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see Z4602 in FIG. 503 (A)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233C transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 494 (B)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 457 is drawn. The determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 494 (B)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 494 (B)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed, can be obtained. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) at the first entry port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the variation pattern command for display is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Since is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the flash memory, so that the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of Z3005, the interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of Z3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 494 (A). FIG. 494 (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 494 (B). FIG. 494 (B) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 460) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 494 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233C is on (Z3301), and the simple image display flag 233C is not on, that is, If it is off (Z3301: NO), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then the display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (Z3302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233D, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233E.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 495.

In the display setting process (Z3303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the command determination process (Z3302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233D. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 501 to 502.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (Z3304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (Z3303) or the simple display setting process (Z3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233C is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 503 and 504.

Next, the drawing process is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), which are determined by the task process (Z3304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 460 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 505.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the processing of Z3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. It is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3301 that the simple image display flag 233C is ON (Z3301: YES), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (FIG. 457) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed to process the Z3304. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 495 to 500, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (Z3302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 495), as shown in FIG. 495, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (Z3401: NO), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: YES), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (Z3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z3402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (Z3403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: YES), the variation pattern is determined. The command process is executed (Z3405), and the process returns to the Z3401 process.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (Z3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 496 (A). FIG. 496 (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing (Z3405: FIG. 496 (A)), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table. Read from area 233B and set in display data table buffer 233D (Z3501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of Z3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233D.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233D as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233D is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of Z3503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of Z3501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (Z3504), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233F to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (Z3506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233F initialized by the process of Z3505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of Z3501. , The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233E is processed by Z3502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236A of.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the clock counter 233H whose time data is set by the process of Z3504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 495. In the processing of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (Z3406). If there is a display variable type command (Z3406: YES), stop type command processing is executed (Z3407), and the process returns to Z3401 processing.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (Z3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 496 (B). FIG. 496 (B) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (Z3407: FIG. 496 (B)), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (Z3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 494 (B)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variable effect to be performed is finally set (Z3602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (Z3603). After that, the process returns to the process of Z3401 in FIG. 495.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of Z3602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235D of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 495, the description will be continued. In the processing of Z3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (Z3406: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). If it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (Z3408: YES), the notice effect display process is executed (Z3409). The details of the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 497 (A), but the degree of expectation for the jackpot to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol. And the setting of the notice display mode for notifying the player of the fact that it is a big hit is executed.

Here, the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 497 (A). FIG. 497 (A) is a flowchart showing this notice effect display process (Z3409).

In the notice effect display process (FIG. 497 (A), Z3409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). Determine the transfer data table corresponding to the set advance notice display data table to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the notice display indicated by the received notice display command, and set it in the transfer data table buffer 233E. (Z3702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D, the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured by the timekeeping counter. It is set to 233H (Z3704) and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

In this way, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be set to be overwritten by setting the advance notice display. good.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495. When it is determined that there is no display notice display command in the processing of Z3408 (Z3408: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: YES), the mode switching process is executed (Z3411). The mode switching process (Z3411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 497 (B), but a process of switching to a display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22.

Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 497 (B) (Z3411). FIG. 497 (B) is a flowchart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223I (Z3801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (Z3802). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z3802: YES), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is actively set (Z3803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (Z3802: NO), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

In this way, if the special symbol is changing, the display mode of the change pattern corresponding to the background mode is switched. On the other hand, if the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display mode of the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

The process of changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

Set the rear image change flag to turn on the rear image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command. Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other rear images are turned on. Set the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type to off, end this back image change command processing, and return to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set rear image change flag is turned on, the changed rear image type is specified from the set rear image discrimination flag. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the set back image discrimination flag is used at that time. The type of back image to be displayed is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. If it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command may be turned on, or later. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the received rear image command may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495. When it is determined that there is no display switching command in the processing of Z3410 (Z3410: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a display holding lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a hold cover command for display (Z3412: YES), the hold cover command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, the holding lid command processing (Z3413) will be described with reference to FIG. 498. FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing this hold lid command process (Z3413).

In the holding lid command processing (Z3413: FIG. 498), first, the display data table for the holding lid of the display effect corresponding to the received display holding lid command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z3901). Here, the display data table is additionally set in addition to the display data table set corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233D currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in Z3901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z3902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag is turned on. Set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for other holding lids on (Z3903).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of Z3901, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (Z3904). ), Initializes the pointer 233F to 0, and returns to (Z3905) command determination processing.

When the hold lid command is received, the display mode of the change pattern set according to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold cover command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. And set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set to correspond to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is configured to be added to the set display data table and set, but it may be configured to newly set the display data table.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495. When it is determined that there is no display hold lid command in the processing of Z3412 (Z3412: NO), it is determined whether there is a display hold character command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a hold character command for display (Z3412: YES), the hold character command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, the reserved character command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 498 (B). FIG. 498 (B) is a flowchart showing this reserved character command processing (Z3415).

In the hold character command process (Z3413: FIG. 498), first, the display data table for the hold character of the display effect corresponding to the received display hold character command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z4001). Here, the display data table is additionally set in addition to the display data table set corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233D currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in Z4001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set by the processing of Z4001 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag is turned on. Set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for other reserved characters to off (Z4003).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of Z4001, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (Z4004). ), Initializes the pointer 233F to 0 (Z4005), and returns to the command determination process.

When a hold character command is received, the display mode of the change pattern set according to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold character command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. And set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set to correspond to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is configured to be added to the set display data table and set, but it may be configured to newly set the display data table.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 495. When it is determined that there is no display pending character command in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a display balloon command (Z3416: YES), the balloon command process is executed (Z3417).

Here, the balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described with reference to FIG. 499. FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing this balloon command processing (Z3417).

In the balloon command processing (Z3417: FIG. 499), first, the display data table for the balloon of the display effect corresponding to the received display balloon command is determined and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. And set (Z4101). Here, the display data table is additionally set in addition to the display data table set corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233D currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for blowout set in Z4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z4102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for blowout set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and other The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the balloon of is set to off (Z4103).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for blowout set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of Z4101, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233H (Z4104). , The pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a balloon command is received, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the balloon command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. , Set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set to correspond to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is configured to be added to the set display data table and set, but it may be configured to newly set the display data table.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 495. In the processing of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414), and there is an error command. If (Z3414: YES), error command processing is executed (Z3415), and the process returns to Z3415 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 500. FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (Z3415: FIG. 500), first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (Z4202), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the Z4201 process, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the Z4202 process is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the Z4202 is set to turn on the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands in the processing. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 495. When it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: NO), the processing corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and the process returns to the processing of Z3401.

In the Z3401 processing that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: YES). ), The processing of Z3402 to Z3416 is executed again. Then, the processes of Z3401 to Z3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the Z3416 process that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (Z3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233C is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 494 (B)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 457 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Extract only the type commands, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 496 (A)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 496 (B)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and perform other processes. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 496 (A)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233D in the processing of Z3501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on required in that case are stored in the main image area 235A at power-on and the variable image area 235B at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of Z3502, the processing of writing the FULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 501 to 502, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (Z3303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 501, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (Z4301: NO). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of Z4302 to Z4304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (Z4302), Z4303 to Z4304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the processing of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303: YES), the warning image setting process is executed (Z4304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 502 (A). FIG. 502 (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (Z4401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the Z4401 process, the error occurrence flag is set to off (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 501. After the warning image setting process (Z4304) or in the process of Z4303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (Z4303: NO), the process proceeds to the process of Z4305.

In Z4305, the pointer update process is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 502 (B). FIG. 502 (B) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in each buffer of the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table buffer 233E, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233F that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233F (Z4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233F is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, START information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233D, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233F by the processing of Z4501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233F is END information. (Z4502). As a result, if it is END information (Z4502: YES), it means that the pointer 233F has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is a demo display data table (Z4503), and if it is a demo display data table (Z4503: YES), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233D is set in the time counting counter 233H (Z4504), the pointer 233F is set to 1 and initialized (Z4505), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is not the demo display data table (Z4503: NO), the value of the pointer 233F is subtracted by 1 (Z4503: NO). Z4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the previous address in which the END information is described is set. Since the drawing content of is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233F is not END information (Z4502: NO), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the display setting processing.

Here, the explanation is continued by returning to FIG. 502. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233F updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D (Z4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed by the Z4306 processing together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233H is subtracted by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233H after the subtraction is 0 or less (Z4308). If the value of the timekeeping counter 233H is 1 or more (Z4308: NO), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233H is 0 or less (Z4308: YES), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (Z4309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (Z4309: NO), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. It is set (Z4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233H (Z4312), and the value of the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (Z4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Z4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (Z3304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the Z4315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4309, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of off (Z4309: YES), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (Z4316). If the demo display flag is off (Z4316: NO), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233H has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233D (Z4317) and then writing the NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233H (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (Z4321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the processing of Z4316, if the demo display flag is on (Z4316: YES), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (Z3309) executed when the simple image display flag 233C is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 494 (B)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to stop and display the image (FIG. 457) in the display data table buffer 233D is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 503 and 504, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 503 (A) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233C is on (Z4601). If the simple image display flag 233C is on (Z4601: YES), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (Z4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 503 (B).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233C is not on as a result of the processing of Z4601, that is, if it is off (Z4601: NO), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 504.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 503 (B). FIG. 503 (B) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (Z4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (Z4701: YES). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4702). In this Z4702 process, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. If it is determined by the processing of Z4702 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Z4702: NO), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Z4702: YES), the process proceeds to the Z4703 process. Further, as a result of the processing of Z4701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (Z4701: NO), the process proceeds to the processing of Z4703.

In the processing of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Z4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (Z4703: NO), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237A, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the Z4703 process (Z4703: YES), the simple image display flag 233C is set to off (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 494 (B)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 494 (B)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 494 (B)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 495 to 500) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 501 to 502 (B)) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device is set. An image at normal time is displayed in 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 504) (see Z4601: NO in FIG. 503 (A)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234A, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 504, a normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E, the pointer 233F updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the display setting process (Z3303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described at the indicated address (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (Z4802), and if it is transfer data information (Z4802: YES), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Z4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4804), and the process proceeds to Z4805.

Further, in the process of Z4802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the NULL data (Z4802: NO), the processes of Z4803 and Z4804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of Z4805. In the Z4805 process, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (Z4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (Z4805: YES), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4806).

In this Z4806 process, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing of Z4806 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Z4806: NO), the image transfer processing is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that this normal image transfer setting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Z4806: YES), the process proceeds to the Z4807 process. Further, as a result of the Z4805 process, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (Z4805: NO), the process proceeds to the Z4807 process.

In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (Z4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (Z4807: YES), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (Z4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of Z3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: NO), this process ends.

In the process of Z4809, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The discrimination in the processing of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233I. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233I, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of Z4809, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: YES), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: NO), the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set (Z4810). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of Z4810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233I is updated (Z4811), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233I, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236A as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235C can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233D in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233F of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236A so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236A without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 505, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (Z3306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined by the task process (Z3304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, Α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 460 is generated (Z4901). That is, in the processing of Z4901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (Z3304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233J are transmitted to the image controller (Z4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233J is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233J is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236B to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236C to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237A is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233J after the Z4902 process (Z4903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233J is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 494 (B)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236C. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236B. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Further, in the above control example, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and used resident from the state of the signal. You may check whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can be used. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scan is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is a transfer data that is not FULL data at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. If the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. Thereby, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer processing can be executed by utilizing the time when the important processing in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process, and the MPU231 is the image data. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 is not used to manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the address is used. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234A is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in the above control example, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above control example, a case where the NOR type ROM 234D is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234D1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234A, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234D, a FERAM (FERROELECTRIC RAM), an MRAM (MAGNETORESISTIVE RAM), a PRAM (PHASE CHANGE RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. It may contain a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above control example, the first program storage area 234D1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234D connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234A. A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234D, a FERAM (FERROELECTRIC RAM), an MRAM (MAGNETORESISTIVE RAM), a PRAM (PHASE CHANGE RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240). You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234B detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 is set in the buffer RAM 234C. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234C and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234B detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234B sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 in the buffer RAM 234C, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234C. When the ROM controller 234B detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234C and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 already set in the buffer RAM 234C? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (command code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234B detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234D1, the ROM controller 234B detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234D1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234D1 in the buffer RAM 234C may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is configured even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above control example, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited to this. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above control example, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from. good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is transmitted to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237A. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read out). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237 while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237A. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237A. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power-on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234A having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237A is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237A may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above control example, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237A is one block of the NAND flash memory 234A has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237A may be such that the transfer of image data can be completed from the RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237A is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be configured to be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235A at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, the main image area 235A at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are input. Although the case of transferring to the 235B has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237A has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237A. When the power is turned on, the image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235A. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237A. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237A.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transmitted from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237A to the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235B has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235A at power-on and the variable image area 235B at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237A. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237A. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237A.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235C.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is used. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be used as the main control device 110. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error command. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 501). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 502 (A)), the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the intentional entry of the ball into the entry port due to the change in the flow of the ball due to the magnetic field such as a magnet. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main control device 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235F of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. Upon receiving an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, it is determined that the display control device 114 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, and the display control device 114 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234A, the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235F of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player acts illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone in the time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured in.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data size of the display data table.

In the above control example, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the load of processing required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table is prepared for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the fluctuation effect can be, for example. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the specified paper for the variation effect are combined into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In the above control example, a case where the common pointer 233F is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233F has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above control example, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above control example, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233D, by the time the definite display effect is completed, the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233D. As described above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233D again. Further, in this case, the definite display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233D each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above control example, the case where the demo effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235A at power on and the power on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235B, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235A at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235B. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235B, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235B. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235B immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 FPS, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, the stored image data discrimination flag 233I is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236A may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236A stored in the work RAM 233 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236A, and if it is not stored, a transfer instruction for image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236A may be deleted.

In the above control example, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233I. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233I is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is used in the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, a case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear image is resident in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach that appears frequently or is expected to be high in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233F, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data specified in 1 to the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

In the above control example, in the back surface C which is the back image of the “island stage”, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. good. Further, as a rear image, not only an object that scrolls or changes in color tone with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning to be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the main control device 110 is used as a hold ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

In the above control example, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, the case where one first ball entry port 64, in which the lottery for the big hit of the special symbol is started when the ball enters, is arranged in the game board 13 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the reserved ball number counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above control example, the hold ball number command is mainly used every time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to 4 times. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertical. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Here, the outline of the eleventh control example will be described. The game board 13 is provided with a first ball entry port 64, a right second ball entry port 640R, and a second ball entry port 640 as starting ports (ball entry means, starting means), and the game ball is a starting port. By entering one of the balls, a winning lottery (judgment) is executed with a predetermined lottery probability. When the lottery result (determination result) is a win (specific determination result), a jackpot game (a privilege game that is advantageous to the player) is executed. A plurality of types of the jackpot game are set, and the benefits given to the player are set to be different depending on the type. For example, the difference in the number of jackpot rounds, the hit type in which a high-probability gaming state (first special gaming state) is set after the jackpot game, and the player's profit is smaller than the time-saving gaming state (first special gaming state) after the jackpot game. The second special game state) is set, and the hit type and the like are set.

The hit / fail determination result is the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37. After the variable display (dynamic display) is performed in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the player is notified of the judgment result by stopping and displaying in a display mode for showing the hit / fail judgment result (judgment result). .. When a game ball enters the starting opening during the variable display period, the right to be drawn as a reserved ball is stored in the lottery for the entry. Up to 4 reserved balls can be entered into the first entrance 64 (lottery of the first special symbol), and up to four balls can be entered into the right second entrance 640R and the second entrance 640 (second special). Up to 4 balls are stored as upper limit values for the lottery of symbols).

When the reserved ball is stored, one reserved symbol (identification symbol, identification information) is displayed for each reserved ball. For the reserved ball, the hit / fail judgment result (judgment result) determined at the start of the fluctuation and the variable display mode of the special symbol before the special symbol indicating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball is variablely displayed. Pre-discrimination is executed in which (variation pattern type) is pre-determined. When the pre-discrimination result is a specific discrimination result (for example, a hit or a super reach type is determined), the color of the reserved symbol is variably displayed (variable to a specific display mode). When the color of the reserved symbol is variably displayed, a special type of reserved effect is set according to the set color or the like. As one of the special hold effects, when the color of the hold symbol is changed, the hold ball is generated further, or the overflow prize is generated so that the starting port is filled with more than the maximum number of hold balls. A comment display (notice display mode, suggestion mode) suggesting the degree of expectation of hitting the sphere, the type of fluctuation pattern to be executed, and the like is displayed (notice A mode). As a result, the player can be made to win more game balls at the starting port, and the profit of the game store can be increased. In addition, by inserting the game ball into the starting port, a comment display is displayed, and the result of the hit / fail judgment, the type of variation, etc. can be determined from the content of the comment. It can be granted and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as one of the special hold effects, a hold effect (notice B mode) is set, which is executed so that the game is performed so that the hold ball is not generated from the state where the color of the hold ball is changed. In this hold effect, the variable lid symbol P is displayed in the display area where the hold symbol is displayed, and the position of the hold symbol displayed when the variable lid symbol P is won next to the hold symbol whose color is variable. Is displayed on the screen to notify the player that the game is to be played so that the reserved ball does not occur. In addition, the comment display also displays content suggesting that the number of reserved balls will not be increased.

Further, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four, and up to eight reserved symbols in total are the third symbol display device 81 (display area of the display means). The area where the reserved symbol is displayed is reserved and set in advance. In the area where the reserved symbol is displayed, the pedestal symbol is displayed at the position where the reserved symbol is displayed, and even if the reserved symbol is not displayed in the area where the reserved symbol is displayed. It is configured to be identifiable. In the area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed, 4 variable lid symbols P are displayed corresponding to the positions where the reserved symbols are displayed even in normal times, and each variable lid is displayed. On the symbol P, a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

By displaying the variable lid symbol P in this way, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is eight even when the reserved symbol is not displayed based on the numerical information of the variable lid symbol P. can do. Further, when the reserved ball is generated and the reserved symbol is displayed, the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is also changed. In the hold effect which is the normal mode in the normal mode, the variable lid symbol P changes to hide the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the fifth hold symbol is displayed when the number of hold balls is three. Then, similarly, the 6th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 4 reserved balls, the 7th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 5 reserved balls, and the 8th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 6 reserved balls. The variable lid symbol P is variably displayed so as to be hidden, that is, the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed so that two reserved symbols are vacant for the reserved symbols for three or more reserved balls. The closure. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player that the display area of the reserved symbol is variable depending on the number of reserved balls.

Further, it is configured to execute a special holding effect in which the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P is changed depending on the period in which the holding ball is generated, or the variable rule is changed according to the variable type displayed in a variable manner. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that a special hold effect is being executed by the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P. Further, since the special hold effect is set depending on the hold / fail judgment result of the prior judgment, the variation type, the pass / fail judgment result of the special symbol displayed in the variation, and the variation type being executed. By changing the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P, it is possible to expect a hit or predict the variable type.

In this control example, even if the game ball is fired on the left side or the right side of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640R, and the second ball entry port 640 (electric combination). It was configured to enter the ball in the same way (the object 640A is in the open state), but it is not limited to that, and it enters the route that is easy to enter the second entry port 640, the first entry opening 64 or the right second entry opening 640R. The arrangement of the nails and the like may be set so as to form a flow path that is easy to ball. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery using only the second special symbol, or to play a game so that the game ball does not enter the second entry port 640. Further, as an effect, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the player to enter the ball into the second entrance.

<12th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 506 to 542. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are configured to be alternately changed, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example, the first special symbol has priority. It differs from the eleventh control example in that the fluctuating state and the first special symbol and the first special symbol change their order depending on the gaming state and fluctuate. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 506. FIG. 506 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example. In the eleventh control example, a first ball entry port 64 and a second ball entry port 640 are installed inside the distribution device 700, and when a ball enters through the opening 710A, the first ball entry port is used by the distribution device 700. Although the ball is configured to be distributed to the mouth 64 and the second ball entry port 640, in this twelfth control example, the distribution device 700 is not installed, and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are used as they are. It differs in that it is configured to be installed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 507 to 511, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device in the twelfth control example will be described. In the twelfth control example, the effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is partially changed from the eleventh control example described above, and the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The difference is that the changed point and the content of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 507 to 509. In the eleventh control example, the special symbol in which the variation start is executed is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately performed, but in the twelfth control example, the variation is given priority over the second special symbol. The difference is that it has been changed to be executed.

FIGS. 507 (A) and 507 (B) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of special symbol variation and continuous effect in the twelfth control example. In the twelfth control example, as shown in FIG. 509 (A), when the special symbol variation continues to be executed in the first special symbol, the effect display is continuously produced as shown in FIG. 509 (B). To execute. The continuous effect is a set period for a plurality of fluctuations. Further, this continuous effect can be extended based on the winning prize during the continuous effect.

FIG. 509 (A) is a diagram showing how the third symbol fluctuates during the continuous production. As shown in FIG. 509 (A), in the twelfth control example, the running pedestal symbol M0 is displayed in the small area DS1 of the sub-display area DS provided under the third symbol display device 81, and is small. In the area DS2, the first reserved symbol pedestal M1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal M8 and the reserved symbol are displayed. In addition, characters G1 to G3 and the like are displayed in the corners of the display area DM. By executing a story-like effect on the characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that the continuous effect is being executed. Further, even during the continuous production period, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22. A detailed description of the background mode change during the continuous effect period will be described later with reference to FIGS. 508 and 510.

Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol change is executed during the continuous effect will be described. FIGS. 509 (C) and 509 (D) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect. In the twelfth control example, as shown in FIG. 507 (C), when the second special symbol change is executed during the execution of the first special symbol change, the first special symbol is used as shown in FIG. 507 (D). The continuous production period of is interrupted, and during the suspension period, a special production with the second special symbol variation is performed. Next, when the special effect period ends, the continuous effect period with the first special symbol is resumed.

FIG. 509 (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the continuous effect period is interrupted and the third symbol is changed during the special effect period. During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 509 (B), the reserved ball is variably displayed in red. Further, the shell K1, the shell K2, and the shell K3 are displayed in the display area DM, and are displayed in a display mode having a story. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the special effect execution period is in effect. Further, a white reserved symbol is displayed on the third reserved symbol pedestal M3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal M5, and the white reserved symbol of the third reserved symbol pedestal M3 moves to the small area DS and is being executed. When displayed as, the continuous production period interrupted by the special production period is resumed.

Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect period will be described with reference to FIGS. 507 (C) and 507 (D). In the twelfth control example, even during the variation execution in the first special symbol, if the ball enters the second entry port 640, the variation execution in the second special symbol is preferentially performed. As shown in FIG. 507 (C), if there is a variation execution in the special figure 2 while the continuous effect in the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol is executed as shown in FIG. 507 (D). The continuous effect during the variation execution of is interrupted, and the special effect is executed during the variation execution in the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 509 (B), when there is a variation execution in the second special symbol and the special effect is started, the number of reserved balls is configured to change the color only during the special effect period. There is. In addition, characters K1 to K3 like shellfish are displayed in the corners of the display area DM, and a story-like effect is executed. With this configuration, it is easy to understand that the player has entered the special production period from the continuous production period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the continuous effect of the first special symbol that has been executed is interrupted at the same time as the start period of the special effect of the second special symbol, and is resumed as soon as the special effect period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls of the third reserved symbol pedestal M3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal M5 are waiting to execute the interrupted continuous effect period. The variable execution of the running pedestal symbol M0 to the second reserved symbol M2, which is the special effect period, is completed, and the reserved ball of the third symbol reserved symbol M3 moves to the execution pedestal M0, depending on the special effect period. The suspended continuous production period is resumed.

The relationship between the continuous effect and the background display will be described with reference to FIG. 508. FIGS. 508 (A) to 508 (C) are diagrams showing the effect display mode during the special symbol change and the flow of the background display at that time. As described above, the player can change the background by operating the frame button 22 even during the continuous production period. In the twelfth control example, when changing from the background mode in which the continuous effect is executed to another background mode, the normal effect for the changed background mode is displayed.

FIG. 510 is a diagram showing a display mode when the background is changed during the continuous effect period. As shown in FIG. 510, the display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 during the fluctuation of the third symbol is set to the mountain mode as the background mode from the sea mode, which was the period of continuous production. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal effect of the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous effect, but when the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed to the sea mode again, the continuous effect for the sea is restored. .. In the twelfth control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous production period, the display area DMB displays "Continuous production is being executed in the sea mode !!", and the player is in the continuous production period. It is configured so that it can be easily recognized. In addition, the display area DMA displays "The background changes with the button PUSH", so that the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third symbol is changing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the 12th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 511. In the twelfth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned eleventh control example are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 511 (A). FIG. 511 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example. The twelfth control example differs from the eleventh control example described above in that the continuous effect execution selection table 222AA is added.

The continuous effect execution selection table 222AA is a data table for determining (determining) whether or not to perform continuous effect (FIG. 509 (A)). In the prize information related processing (see Z2255 in FIG. 518), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is 2 or more (Z5003: YES in FIG. 518), and the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to off. When (Z5004: NO in FIG. 518), it is read out (Z5005 in FIG. 518) and used to determine the execution of the continuous effect (Z5006 in FIG. 518).

In this continuous effect execution selection table 222AA, the value of one effect counter possessed by the effect counter group 223AA, the current number of reserved balls, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time correspond to each other. Whether or not to execute continuous production is specified. Specifically, the larger the number of currently reserved balls, the easier it is to execute continuous production, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time is the lottery result indicating a big hit, the lottery result is out of order. It is stipulated that the continuous effect is easier to be executed than in the case of indicating.

With this configuration, it becomes easier to execute a continuous effect with a long execution period (the number of times the special symbol changes to be executed), and when the continuous effect is executed, the player has a feeling of expectation for a big hit. Can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can play the game for a long time with a high expectation for the big hit, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the continuous effect ends, that is, when the variable effect corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous effect ends (Z5102: YES in FIG. 519), the special symbol 1 reserved ball When the value of the number counter 223A is read (Z5104 in FIG. 519) and it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105: YES in FIG. 519), it is configured to determine whether to execute the continuous effect again. Even in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect by referring to the continuous effect execution selection table 222AA (Z5109 in FIG. 519).

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the continuous effect even for the game ball newly won during the execution of the continuous effect, so that the frequency of executing the continuous effect can be increased. In addition, since it is possible to make the period during which the continuous effect is executed longer than the maximum number of reserved symbols (4), it is possible for the player to know which reserved symbol the continuous effect is executed for. It can be difficult to grasp, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game.

In this control example, the continuous effect execution selection table 222AA referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect is defined in the above-mentioned contents, but other contents may be specified. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a time measuring means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) for measuring the current time, and the rate at which the continuous effect is executed is changed according to the time measuring content of the time measuring means. It may be specified in.

In this case, during a predetermined period (for example, one hour from 10:00 am), the continuous effect may be executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. With this configuration, even if the same continuous effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the jackpot changes depending on the timing (time) when the continuous effect is executed, so that the player can play the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress getting bored with. Further, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, the guidance notification means for notifying the player that the continuous effect is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the remaining period (or the elapsed period) of the above-mentioned predetermined period. It is advisable to provide a period notification means for notifying. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to perform the continuous production.

Further, a means for discriminating the operation content to the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player and a discriminating means for discriminating the launch status (or the ball entry status) of the game ball are provided, and these discriminating means are provided. It may be specified that the ratio at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in association with the determination result of the above, or the above-mentioned plurality of contents may be appropriately combined or each may be used individually.

Further, in this control example, a stop command process (see FIG. 519) is performed using the continuous effect execution selection table 222AA referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect in the prize information related process (see FIG. 518). However, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect, but when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect by the prize information related processing (see FIG. 518) and the stop command process (see FIG. 519). The selection table referred to in may be configured to be different. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command processing (see FIG. 519) is a big hit of the special symbol when the continuous effect is executed than the selection table referred to in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 518). It is advisable to specify the contents of the selection table so that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, the longer the period in which the continuous production is continuously executed, the higher the expectation of the big hit, and the more the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 511 (B). FIG. 511 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the twelfth control example. In the twelfth control example, the effect counter group 223AA, the continuous effect flag 223AB, the continuous effect in progress flag 223AC, the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD, the continuous effect update area 223AE, and the continuous effect update area 223AE are used for the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that the effect count counter 223AF, the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG, the setting prohibition release flag 223AH, the time reduction counter 223AI, the fluctuation number counter 223J, the operation invalid flag 223AK, and the state storage area 223AZ are added. ing.

The effect counter group 223AA is composed of a plurality of counter means for effect. The effect counter group 223AA is a plurality of counters used for selecting an effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), selecting various advance notice effects, and the like. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223AA are in the range of 0 to 198 acquired from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113. Random number value is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers is an IC that can operate with an operating clock (for example, 1 MHZ) that can be updated to a different random number value for at least each of the effect counters and perform a determination. Is adopted.

The values of the plurality of counters possessed by the effect counter group 223AA are executed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as the effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), whether or not the continuous effect can be executed, and the determination of various advance notice effect types. It is used when executing various determinations to be performed, and is updated so that the counter values are not synchronized. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223AA are composed of 1-byte loop counters updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process 2 (see FIG. 516) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. In (every 1M seconds), the update process is executed so that the values are different.

In this control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the values of the effect counters, since a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used, a plurality of effects are selected in one main process. Even in the case, the same counter value is referred to, and the selected effect is suppressed from being biased. However, for example, a plurality of effects selected in different processes in one main process. If it is desired to synchronize the modes, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

Further, in this control example, a plurality of counters having different counter value update patterns are used. For example, a random value is calculated using the update value of one effect counter, and each effect is calculated using the calculated value. May be configured to select. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the updated values of the effect counter, the value of the last 1st digit, the value of the last 2nd digit, and the last 1 digit and the lower value of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the 1st digit by the value of the 2nd digit. It is advisable to calculate so that each value does not have regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

The continuous effect flag 223AB is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied. Specifically, when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information-related processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 518) (Z5007: YES in FIG. 518), the stop command processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 518). In FIG. 519), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5110: YES in FIG. 519), it is set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 518), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 521) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521). When the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 523) is executed in Z5204 of 522), it is set to off (see Z5401 in FIG. 523).

That is, does this continuous effect flag 223AB execute continuous effect based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main control device 110 when a new game ball enters the first entry port 64? Is determined, and the fact that the determination result is to execute the continuous effect is retained until the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the next variation of the special symbol 1.

In this control example, in the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 518), it is determined that the continuous effect is executed (Z5007: YES in FIG. 518), and the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to ON (Z5008 in FIG. 518). ), It is configured to execute the continuous effect when the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521) is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, the continuous effect flag 223AB is turned on. When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521) is executed in the set state, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to start the continuous effect in the current variable display, and the continuous effect is based on the lottery result. May be configured to determine the variable display that initiates. With this configuration, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first entry port 64 and the timing at which the continuous production is started are different (the game ball enters the first entry port 64). After that, the continuous effect can be started with a variable display that does not execute the continuous effect), and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous effect.

Further, in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 518), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous effect. With this configuration, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first entry port 64 and the timing at which the continuous production starts can be brought close to each other. It can be easily grasped by the player. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous effect, the game ball can be enthusiastically entered into the first entry port 64 while the special symbol is changing (during the change display execution), and the operation of the game can be enhanced. ..

In addition, when changing the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution to the continuous effect, the display content or the elapsed period of the variable display during execution is determined, and the condition in which the effect can be changed (for example, the third symbol display device). Only when the variable display displayed in 81 is in a display mode (during high-speed fluctuation) that is difficult for the player to see), the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed to a continuous effect. It is good to configure it like this. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to a sudden change in the effect being executed.

Further, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution to the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be added and displayed to the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution. In this case, it is advisable to provide a display area dedicated to continuous production. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even if the continuous production is suddenly executed.

The continuous effect in progress flag 223AC is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 522) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 522) is executed, and the continuous effect command for display is set. If so (Z5406 in FIG. 523), it is set to ON (Z5408 in FIG. 523).

Then, it is referred to in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 522) for setting the effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol (Z5505 in FIG. 524), and further in the stop command process (see FIG. 519). When it is determined that the continuous effect does not continue (Z5106: NO in FIG. 519 or Z5110: NO), it is set to off (see Z5116 in FIG. 519).

The continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is interrupted. Here, an event in which the continuous production is interrupted will be briefly described. In this control example, continuous production is performed based on the winning information regarding the first special symbol (special diagram 1), which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed in the normal state (a state that is not a probable change state or a time-saving state). It is configured to run. Further, in this control example, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be preferentially digested over the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the game is played at the second entrance 640A. It is configured so that the playability (type of special symbol change to be executed) is different between the probable change state and the time saving state where the ball is easy to enter and the normal state.

In addition, in this control example, in order to temporarily facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) even when the game state is the normal state, a part of the case where the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit. The electric accessory 640A, which is attached to the second entry port 640A and regulates the entry of the game ball into the second entry port 640A, opens for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds). It is configured to perform a winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, a game ball enters the second entrance 640A while performing continuous production using a plurality of prize information related to the first special symbol. In some cases, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol was executed with priority over the first special symbol. If such a situation occurs, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol will be executed even though the continuous production executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol is executed. However, there is a problem that the content of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different from each other, giving the player a sense of distrust.

Therefore, in this control example, if the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted and the first special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. It is configured to restart the continuous effect that was interrupted when the fluctuation of the special figure 1) is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the content of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted.

When the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to ON in the special effect setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 522) for setting the effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. When determined (Z5505 in FIG. 524: YES), it is set to ON (Z5507 in FIG. 524). Then, when the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to ON, a "waiting" display for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted on the third symbol display device 81 (interruption display mode of FIG. 509 (B)). Set the display interruption command to execute (see MA) (Z5508 in FIG. 524). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 522), when the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) (Z5301: YES in FIG. 522), it is set to off (Z5304 in FIG. 522). ).

With this configuration, during the execution of the continuous effect set for the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the fluctuation (lottery) has priority over the first special symbol (special figure 1). ) Is performed, the continuous production is interrupted when the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started, and the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (special figure 2). Since the continuous production that had been interrupted can be resumed at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 2) is completed, the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not related to the change status of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is possible to execute continuous production in correspondence with.

In addition, when the continuous production is interrupted based on the change of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) during the continuous production execution, it means that the continuous production is interrupted for the player. Because it is configured to notify the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable if the continuous production is suddenly ended, and to play the game while expecting that the continuous production will be resumed. be able to.

In the continuous effect update area 223AE, when the continuous effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect execution period, that is, the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous effect execution period, and the background of the display screen is set to "sea background". This is an area for storing data for internally updating the continuous effect when the background is changed from "" to another background ("mountain background", "river background").

As described above with reference to FIG. 560 (A), in this control example, the continuous effect is performed only when "sea background (sea mode)" is selected as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to run. The background of this display screen can be variably set by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, a state in which the special symbol change is not executed (standby state) or immediately after the start of the special symbol change (standby state). When the player operates the frame button 22 during high-speed fluctuation), the background of the display screen becomes "sea background (sea mode)", "mountain background (mountain mode)" (see FIG. 560), and "river background (see FIG. 560). It is configured to switch in the order of "river mode)".

Then, as the variation effect corresponding to the set background, the variation effect dedicated to each background and the variation effect common to a plurality of backgrounds are executed. With this configuration, the player can make different production modes of the variation effect for showing the variation (lottery) result of the special symbol based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. It is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the background of the display screen is variably set while the fluctuation effect (for example, continuous notice) dedicated to the sea mode is being executed in the state where the sea mode is set. In addition, a process of rewriting the display data related to the variable effect is executed so that the variable effect corresponding to the background after the variable setting is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, if the player accidentally operates the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous effect and the background of the display screen is switched from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode", the display data related to the continuous effect is deleted. Even if the frame button 22 is operated again to switch the display screen to the "sea mode", the continuous effect is not executed and the effect of the effect is reduced.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, a continuous effect update area 223AE is provided, and even when the background of the display screen is switched to other than the "sea mode" during the execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is produced. The execution data of is configured to be temporarily stored in the continuous effect update area 223AE, and after switching the background of the display screen to other than "sea mode" during the execution of continuous effect, the background of the display screen is changed to "sea" again. When the mode is switched to, the rest of the continuous production can be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous production disappears due to an erroneous operation by the player.

In the continuous effect update area 223AE, after determining the effect mode of the continuous effect in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 523) (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 523), it is determined that the background mode is not the "sea mode". In some cases (Z5405: NO in FIG. 523), display data relating to the determined effect mode is stored (see Z5409 in FIG. 523).

Then, when the background mode is switched to the "sea mode" in the effect return process (see FIG. 526) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 525), it is stored (Z2871: YES in FIG. 526). Information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 526). After that, when the continuous effect is completed, the information (display data indicating the effect mode) stored in the area is deleted (see Z5310 in FIG. 522).

The effect count counter 223AF is a counter for indicating the period during which the continuous effect is executed (the number of fluctuations in the special figure). This effect count counter 223AF determines that continuous effect is to be executed in the prize information-related process (see FIG. 518) (Z5007: YES in FIG. 518), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223A corresponding to the received prize command. The value of is set (Z5010 in FIG. 518). Then, when it is determined in the effect setting process (see FIG. 522) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521) that the value of the counter is larger than 0 (Z5305: YES in FIG. 522), the continuous effect is set. (Z5306 in FIG. 522) is executed.

The effect count counter 223AF is decremented by 1 each time the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 523) is executed (Z5407 in FIG. 523). With this configuration, the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed by the prize information related processing (see FIG. 518), that is, the continuous effect flag 223AB is turned on. It is possible to execute the continuous effect using the period from the variation display executed in the set state until the variation display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed.

In this control example, the continuous effect is executed using the above-mentioned period, but other periods may be set as the period for executing the continuous effect, for example, the continuous effect. The continuous effect may be started by changing the effect mode of the variable display being executed at the timing determined to be executed, or the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to ON. ) May be executed continuously when the number of fluctuations is two. Further, when the display mode of the new variation display is set (when the variation display setting process 2 is executed) in the state where the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to ON, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect. The execution discriminating means may be provided, and the continuous effect may be executed when the execution discriminating means determines that the continuous effect is to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous production is started, and it is possible to provide an unexpected production.

The effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is a flag for preventing a new continuous effect from being set during the execution of the continuous effect, and is set to be turned on during the period during which the continuous effect is being executed. This effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to on (Z5011 in FIG. 518) when it is determined that continuous effect is to be executed in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 518). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to on, the process of determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect (processes of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 518) is skipped in the prize information-related process (see FIG. 518). This makes it possible to prevent a new continuous effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied by starting a new continuous production while the player is paying close attention to the progress of the continuous production. Then, when it is determined in the stop command processing (see FIG. 519) that the continuous effect has ended (the setting prohibition release flag 223AH is set to ON) (Z5102 in FIG. 519: YES), it is set to OFF. (Z5103 in FIG. 519).

In this control example, the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous effect is performed in addition to the timing when a new winning command is received, that is, the timing when the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 518) is executed. Even when it is determined that the setting prohibition release flag 223AH is set to ON at the timing when the stop command is received at the time of termination, that is, in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 519) (Z5102: YES in FIG. 519). It is configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command process (see FIG. 519), it is set to ON even when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5111 in FIG. 519).

The time saving counter 223AI is a counter for grasping the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the time saving state is set when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. The time reduction counter 223AI is set with a value (100 in this control example) corresponding to the set number of time reductions when a state command indicating that the gaming state has shifted to the time reduction state is received from the main control device 110. , Every time the stop command processing (see FIG. 519) is executed when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (Z5101: YES in FIG. 519). It is subtracted by 1 (see Z5151 in FIG. 520).

Then, in the time saving middle processing (see FIG. 520), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 223AI is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 520), and when it is determined to be 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 520: YES), it varies. 5 is set in the value of the count counter 223AJ.

The fluctuation count counter 223AJ is a counter for grasping the fluctuation count of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, when the game state is the normal state and the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the special effect (see FIG. 509 (B)) is executed. ing. This is because the game ball entered the second entry port 640 in the normal state where it was difficult for the game ball to enter the second entry port 640, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuated. It is intended to be given as a privilege. However, when the game state is a reduced working hours state, that is, a state in which the game ball easily enters the second entry port 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640A is easy to open), the hold of the special figure 2 is acquired, and the holding thereof is obtained. The change of the second special symbol corresponding to the hold (hold of special figure 2) may be executed in the normal state after the end of working hours. Even in such a case, if the special effect is executed, the special effect becomes frequent after the end of working hours, and there is a problem that it becomes difficult to give the player a special feeling of the special effect.

In response to the above-mentioned problem, in this control example, the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol which is executed within a predetermined period after the end of the reduced working hours. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the time reduction has reached a predetermined number of times (5 times in this control example), and the predetermined number of times (5 times) has not been reached. If it is determined that, the special effect is not set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which special effects frequently occur after the end of working hours.

In this control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the reduced working hours is 5 times, that is, a value larger than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a predetermined number of times. Therefore, even if the time saving state ends with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being the upper limit, the special effect is executed by the holding ball of the special figure 2 acquired during the time saving state. However, a condition other than the above-mentioned control example may be set as a condition that the special effect is not executed. For example, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) may be set. A value smaller than the upper limit (4) (for example, 3) may be set as a predetermined number of times. With this configuration, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit at the end of the reduced working hours, a special effect will be executed. Therefore, the player is enthusiastically assigned the reserved balls in Special Figure 2. It can be saved and the operation of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, a condition using the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set as a condition for not setting the special effect, but other conditions may be set, for example, after the time saving state is completed. A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time of the above may be provided, and the fact that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means has not passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set as a condition for not setting the special effect. By setting the conditions based on the elapsed time in this way, for example, when the game is ended immediately after the time saving state ends (the game is played without changing the special symbol after the time saving state ends and the normal state is reached. It is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being restricted for the game performed by the next player.

In addition, a game state determination means for determining the game state at the timing when the game ball enters the second entry port 640 is provided, and the game ball enters the second entry port 640 during the time saving state by the game state determination means. If it is determined that the ball has been hit, the special effect may be restricted (prohibited) from being executed as a variable display for the ball.

When the value of the time saving counter 223AI is determined to be 0 (Z5152: YES in FIG. 520), the fluctuation number counter 223AJ restricts (prohibits) the execution of the special effect in the time saving middle processing (see FIG. 520). A value indicating the number of fluctuations of the symbol (5 in this control example) is set (Z5153 in FIG. 520), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process for setting the special effect (see FIG. 524), when the value of the fluctuation count counter 223AJ is referred to and it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502: NO in FIG. 530). , The effect mode of the normal effect is set without setting the effect mode of the special effect (Z5510 in FIG. 530).

The operation invalid flag 223AK is a flag for indicating a period for disabling the operation for switching the background of the display screen, and is set to ON during the period for disabling the operation for switching the background of the display screen. In this control example, as described above, the special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the background of the display screen can be switched during the period when this special effect is executed. It is configured so that there is no such thing. With this configuration, the player mistakenly operates the frame button 22 during the period in which the effect (special effect) that is difficult to execute is being executed. It is possible to prevent the background of the display screen from switching while the special effect is being executed.

This operation invalid flag 223AK is set to ON when the effect mode of the special effect is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 524) (Z5504 in FIG. 524), and the first special symbol is set in the effect setting process (FIG. 522). When setting the variation effect of (Special FIG. 1) (Z5301 in FIG. 522: YES), it is set to off (Z5302 in FIG. 522). Then, while this operation invalid flag 223AK is set to ON, the process of changing the background of the display screen (processes of Z2803 to Z2852 of FIG. 525) in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 525) is performed. It will be skipped.

The state storage area 223AZ is an area for storing state information for indicating the current gaming state based on the state command output from the main control device 110. Specifically, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 517), when it is determined that the status command has been received (Z2256 in FIG. 517: YES), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 517). In this control example, each information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. In No. 10, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the state command for indicating the current gaming state is output from the main control device 110, so that when the power is turned off (power failure). Etc.), the gaming state can be appropriately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

<Control processing by the main control device in the 12th control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 512 to 515. In the twelfth control example, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 462) is the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 512), and the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 464) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 465) are special. The point that the symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 513), the start winning process (FIG. 466) is changed to the start winning process 2 (FIG. 514), and the look-ahead process (FIG. 467) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 515). The main difference.

The special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 512. FIG. 512 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 513) in the twelfth control example, the processing of Z203 to Z214 is the processing of Z330 to Z340 with respect to the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 462) in the eleventh control example. It differs in that it has been changed. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (Z201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: YES), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z201: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: NO), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is acquired (Z330).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is 1 or more (Z331). When it is determined that the value is 1 or more (Z331: YES), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203E is subtracted by 1 (Z332), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value (N2) of 203E is set (Z333). By the reserved ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 476) described later. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203E from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223B of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203A is shifted (Z265). In the processing of Z265, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 2 for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z340).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z331 that the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is 0 (Z3311: NO), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D. (Z335).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is 1 or more (Z336). When it is determined to be 1 or more (Z336: YES), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is subtracted by 1 (Z337), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D changed by calculation is performed. A hold ball count command indicating a value is set (Z338). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223A of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (Z339). In the processing of Z339, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203A is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 2 for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z340). The special symbol change start processing 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 513. On the other hand, in the processing of Z336, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is 0 (Z336: NO), this processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 513, the special symbol change start processing 2 (Z340: FIG. 513) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twelfth control example will be described. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 513) in the twelfth control example, the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: FIG. 464) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (214: FIG. 465) in the eleventh control example. It is different to perform the processing of. Since the processing content is the same as that of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 514) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 514. In the start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 514) in the twelfth control example, the processes of Z308 and Z316 are not executed for the start winning process (Z105: FIG. 466) in the eleventh control example, and the Z320 The difference is that the processes are collectively executed by the Z360 process. Since the processing content is the same as that of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 515, a look-ahead process 2 (Z360), which is a process in the start winning process 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead process 2 (Z360).

In the look-ahead process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether or not there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new winning information (Z361: NO), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: YES), the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type corresponding to this winning from the special symbol holding ball storage area. Acquire each value of the counter CS1 (Z362). Next, among the determination results specified in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A, the hit determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is acquired (Z363). Next, among the determination results specified in the jackpot type selection table 202D, the hit type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z364).

Next, among the determination results specified in the stop type selection table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (Z365). Next, among the determination results specified in the variation pattern selection table 202B, the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (Z366). Next, the winning information including the hit judgment result information showing the acquired hit judgment result, the hit type information showing the hit type judgment result, the stop type information showing the stop type judgment result, and the variation type information for showing the fluctuation type judgment result. Set a command (Z367) and end this process.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the 12th control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 516 to 526. In the twelfth control example, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, is performed for the frame button input monitoring / effect for the eleventh control example. The main point is that the command determination process (Z2113) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z2152) and the variation display setting process (Z2114) is changed to the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the process 2 (Z2151). It's a difference.

The command determination process 2 (Z2152) in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 517. FIG. 517 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Z2152).

In the command determination process 2 (Z2152), first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When it is determined that the command has been received (Z2201: YES), the fluctuation start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and the present process is terminated. do. Since the processes of Z2203 to Z2207 are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the processing of Z2206 (Z2206: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning command information has been received (Z2253). When the winning information command is received (Z2253: YES), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223F (Z2254). Next, the winning information-related process (Z2255) is executed to end this process. Details of the winning information-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 518.

When it is determined in the process of Z2253 that the winning information command has not been received (Z2253: NO), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (Z2256). When it is determined that the state command has been received (Z2256: YES), the state information indicating the game state corresponding to the received state command is stored in the state storage area 223AZ (Z2257), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z2256, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (Z2256: NO), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2258), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2258: YES), the stop command has been received. Command processing (Z2259) is executed. The details of the stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. 519. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2258, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: NO), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 518, the winning information-related processing (Z2255), which is one of the processing in the command determination processing 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 518 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (Z2255).

The prize information-related process (Z2255) first stores the received information of the prize information command in the corresponding prize information storage area 223F (Z5001). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is read out (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is 2 or more (Z5003). If it is not 2 or more (Z5003: NO), this process is terminated.

In the process of Z5003, when the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is 2 or more (Z5003: YES), it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is on (Z5004). When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is on (Z5004: YES), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222AA is read (Z5505), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether to execute the continuous effect (Z5007). When the continuous effect is not executed (Z5007: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the continuous effect is executed (Z5007: YES), the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is read (Z5009), and the read counter value is set. It is set as the value of the effect count counter 223AF (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to ON (Z5011), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 519, a stop command process (Z2259), which is a process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 519 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command processing (Z2259).

In the stop command process (Z2259), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the time saving (Z5101). When it is determined that the time saving is in progress (Z5101: YES), the time saving middle processing (Z5115) is executed, and this processing is terminated. The details of the time saving medium processing (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. 520. On the other hand, in the process of Z5101, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z5101: NO), it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223AH provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z5102). When the setting prohibition release flag 223AH is off (Z5102: NO), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the effect prohibition release flag AH is on (Z5102: YES), the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG and the setting prohibition release flag AH are set to off (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223A. Is read out (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not 2 or more (Z5105: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z5105 that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: YES), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A being 2 or more is obtained. Reading from the storage area 223F is executed (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether or not there is jackpot winning information (Z5107). When it is determined that there is no big hit prize (Z5107: NO), the continuous production flag 223AC is set to off (Z5116), and this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot winning information is available (Z5107: YES), the continuous effect execution selection table 222AA provided in the ROM 222 is read out (Z5108), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5109). After executing the process of Z5109, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: NO), the above-mentioned Z5116 process is executed, and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: YES), the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is read out (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A corresponding to the big hit prize is set as the value of the effect count counter 223AF (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to ON (Z5114), and this processing is performed. finish.

With reference to FIG. 520, a time saving medium processing (Z5115), which is one processing in the stop command processing (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 520 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time saving and medium processing (Z5115).

In the time saving middle processing (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223AI provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). When it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: YES), the value of the fluctuation count counter AJ is set to 5 (Z5153), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223AI is larger than 0 in the processing of Z5152 (Z5153: NO), the processing of Z5153 is skipped and the present processing is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 521, the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one of the processes in the main process 2 (FIG. 516) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 521 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). The variation display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the twelfth control example is different from the variation display setting process (Z2114) in the eleventh control example in that the processes of Z5204 to Z5208 are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired by the processing of Z5202 (Z5203). Next, the effect setting process (Z5204) is executed. The details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 522.

Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223F is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223AJ is larger than 1 (Z5207). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223AJ is larger than 1 (Z5207: YES), the value of the fluctuation count counter 223AJ is subtracted by 1 (Z5208). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223AJ is 0 in the processing of Z5207 (Z5207: NO), the processing of Z5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z5209.

With reference to FIG. 522, the effect setting process (Z5204), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 522 is a flowchart showing the contents of this effect setting process (Z5204).

In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current variation is the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If the variation is in the first special symbol (Z5301: YES), the operation invalid flag 223AK provided in the RAM 223 is set to off (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to ON (Z5303). When it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to on (Z5303: YES), the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to off (Z5304). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z5303 that the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to off (Z5303: YES), the processing of Z5304 described above is skipped.

After executing the process of Z5304, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223AF is larger than 0 (Z5305). If it is determined that it is larger than 0 (Z5305: YES), the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 523.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5305, when the value of the effect count counter 223AF is 0 (Z5305: NO), the variation pattern of the mode without continuous effect is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to ON (Z5308). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to off (Z5308: NO), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to ON (Z5308: YES), the setting prohibition release flag 223AH is set to ON (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223AE is cleared (Z5310), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z5301 when it is determined that the change this time is not the change in the first special symbol (Z5301: NO), the special effect setting process (Z5311) is executed. Details of the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 524.

With reference to FIG. 523, a continuous effect setting process (Z5306), which is one process in the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 523 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

In the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to off (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect count counter 223AF is 1 (Z5402). When it is determined that the value of the effect count counter 223AF is 1 (Z5402: YES), the final mode of continuous effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, when the value of the effect count counter 223AF is other than 1 (Z5402: NO), the continuous effect continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the background mode is currently set to the sea mode (Z5405). When it is determined that the setting is the sea mode (Z5405: YES), a continuous display command for displaying the determined effect mode is set (Z5406). Next, the value of the effect count counter 223AF is subtracted by 1 (Z5407). ), Set the continuous effect in progress flag 223AC to ON (Z5408), and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: NO), the determined effect mode is stored in the continuous effect update area 223AE (Z5409), and a display notification command indicating that the continuous effect is waiting is issued. Set (Z5410). After that, the above-mentioned processes of Z5407 to Z5408 are executed, and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 524, a special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the time saving (Z5501). When it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z5501: NO), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223AJ is 0 (Z5502). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223AJ is 0 (Z5502: YES), the effect mode of the special effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223AK is set to ON. (Z5504).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous production flag 223AC is set to ON (Z5505). If it is set to on (Z5505: YES), then it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to on (Z5506). When it is set to off (Z5506: NO), the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to on (Z5507), and the display interruption command is set (Z5508). Next, a display effect command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (Z5509), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is being shortened in the processing of Z5501 (Z5501: YES), or when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223AJ is not 0 in the processing of Z5502 (Z5502: NO). The effect mode of the normal effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5510), the above-mentioned process of Z5509 is executed, and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the continuous effect in-progress flag 223AC is off in the processing of Z5555 (Z5505: NO), or when it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to on in the process of Z5506 (Z5506: YES), the process of Z5507 to Z5508 described above is skipped, the process of Z5509 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 525, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Z2151). The twelfth control example is different in that the Z2851 process and the Z2852 process are added to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107) of the eleventh control example. Since other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The processing of Z2851 determines whether the operation invalid flag 223AK is set to ON (Z2851). When it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223AK is off (Z2851: NO), the same processing as Z2803 to Z2804 of the eleventh control example is executed, and then the effect return processing (Z2852) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 526, the effect return process (Z2852), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example. Will be explained. FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect return process (Z2852).

In the effect return process (Z2852), first, it is determined whether the set background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z2871: NO), this process ends. When it is determined that the background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871: YES), the effect mode stored in the continuous effect update area 223AE is read out (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether or not there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: NO), this process ends. When it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: YES), a display effect command corresponding to the stored effect mode is set (Z2874), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 525, the explanation will be continued. The effect return process (Z2852) is executed, then the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223AK is set to ON (Z2851: YES), the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed and the present process is terminated.

<13th control example>
Next, the above-mentioned thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 527 to 530. In the thirteenth control example described above, when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted and the change of the special figure 2 is performed. A configuration was used in which the continuous effect that had been interrupted at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol after the end of was resumed. As a result, the continuous production can be executed in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the continuous production can be enjoyed to the end.

However, in the configuration of the twelfth control example described above, when the continuous effect is interrupted, the continuous effect is always restarted after the lapse of a predetermined period (after the end of the change in Special Figure 2), so whether or not the continuous effect is restarted. Since it is not possible to make the player excited, it has been required to further enhance the effect of the production. On the other hand, in the thirteenth control example, the interruption is based on the game content (the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2) when the continuous production is interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous production. It is configured to determine whether or not to restart the continuous effect inside, and to restart the continuous effect based on the determination result. With this configuration, when the continuous production is interrupted, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous production will be resumed while enjoying the special production executed as the variable production of the special figure 2. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the thirteenth control example, the continuous effect is easily restarted when the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous effect is a big hit. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the continuous production to be resumed. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the smaller the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 (the number of times the special effect is executed) executed while the continuous effect is interrupted, the easier it is to restart the continuous effect. As a result, when the period from the interruption of the continuous production to the resumption is short, the continuous production can be easily restarted, and it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, if a long period of time has passed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player does not have a useless expectation for the big hit. In order to make it so, it is configured so that it is difficult to restart the continuous production.

<About the electrical configuration in the 13th control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 527. FIG. 527 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification. The thirteenth control example differs in that the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223BA is added in addition to the RAM 223 of the twelfth control example described above. The other elements are the same as those in the twelfth control example, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223BA is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and when the special effect setting process 2 (FIG. 530) sets the effect mode of the special effect, the value of the counter is set. 1 is added (Z5551 in FIG. 530), and the value of the counter is referred to in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 529) in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 528) (Z5602 in FIG. 529). In the process of Z5602, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223BA is smaller than 3 (Z5602: YES in FIG. 529), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223BA is set to 0 (FIG. 529). Z5603). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223BA is 3 or more (Z5602: NO in FIG. 529), that is, the second special symbol fluctuation is executed three times or more while the continuous production is interrupted. If so, it is determined whether or not there is a winning information indicating a big hit in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in FIG. 529), and if it is determined that there is no winning information (Z5605 in FIG. 529: YES). , The value of the effect count counter 223AF is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 529), and the above-mentioned Z5603 process is executed.

That is, in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 529), when the interrupted continuous effect is restored, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the continuous effect interruption is a predetermined number (3 times) or more. , Judgment as to whether or not to restart the continuous production is executed based on the lottery result included in the winning information of the special figure 1 at that time, and if the production result of the continuous production is out of order, the continuous production is restarted. However, since it only disappoints the player, the value of the effect count counter 223AF is set to 0 so that the continuous effect is not restarted. As a result, if a long period of time has passed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player is given a useless expectation for the big hit. In addition to being able to suppress this, it is possible to have expectations for the jackpot when the continuous production is resumed, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 528 to 530, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. In the thirteenth control example, the content of the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 522), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153: FIG. 521), is partially changed from the twelfth control example. Mainly different. The other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 528, the effect setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of the variation display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example, will be described. The effect setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 528) in the thirteenth control example does not execute the Z5310 process with respect to the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 522) in the twelfth control example, and the special effect process (Z5311). ) Is changed and the continuous effect return process (Z5351) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the twelfth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The continuous effect return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. 529. FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect return process (Z5351).

In the continuous effect return processing (Z5351), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223BA is read out (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special figure 2 fluctuation counter is less than 3 (Z5602). If it is determined to be larger than 3 (Z5602: YES), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223BA is set to 0 (Z5603), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223BA is less than 3 (Z5602: NO), the prize information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the prize information storage area 223F is read out. (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the read prize information (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning prize (Z5605: NO), the value of the effect count counter 223AF is set to 0 (Z5606), and then the above-mentioned Z5603 process is executed to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z5605, if it is determined that there is a winning prize (Z5605: YES), the process of Z5603 is executed and the present process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 530, the special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: FIG. 530) in the thirteenth control example executes the process of Z5504 for the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the twelfth control example, and then the special effect counter 223BA. The difference is that a process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the twelfth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<14th control example>
Next, a 14th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 531 to 542. The 14th control example is different from each of the above-mentioned control examples in that the player has an adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

First, the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 531. FIG. 531 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 531 and the above-mentioned 11th control example, the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th control example is provided with a volume button 23 (left volume button 23A, right volume button 23B) for adjusting the volume. They differ and the other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, a real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The RTC292 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and is composed of a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. The RTC292 has an input / output port, a device control unit, and a register. Further, an RTC power supply is connected to the RTC292. This RTC power supply is a power supply dedicated to the RTC292, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC292 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As the RTC power supply 353, for example, a button type battery is used, and is configured to be able to supply electric power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

An input / output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC292. The input / output port is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to be able to communicate with each other. The device control unit controls registers to perform various controls such as measuring the current time and writing data.

A register is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored or an operation can be performed on the stored data. The register is provided with at least a timekeeping register and a time information storage area.

The timekeeping register is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the timekeeping information measured in this timekeeping register, it is determined whether or not it is the execution period of the time effect.

In this embodiment, based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on, the value of the timekeeping register (timekeeping information corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC292) is used for the ON time storage area of the RAM 223. ) Is stored or the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area is stored. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the time information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the on time storage area. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the timekeeping register (timekeeping information corresponding to the current time measured by RTC292) is stored in the input time storage area. ..

As a result, the hall clerk turns on the power all at once without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 at the opening time of the hall, etc., so that the elapsed time from the power-on grasped by each pachinko machine 10 Can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution period of the time effect can be matched. On the other hand, when the power of some pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the business hours of the hall (for example, when canceling an error), the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on again. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the input time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from which the power supply is cut off and the other pachinko machine 10 from shifting the execution timing of the time effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 532 and 533, a display screen related to volume adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 532 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 532 (B) is a schematic diagram in which a game is not performed. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state, and in FIG. 533 (A), a special symbol change is executed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram showing the customer waiting screen in the state where the pachinko machine is not displayed, and FIG. 533 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the first special symbol change after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 532 (A), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the return processing of the control devices such as the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 ends on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The comment "Please wait for a while" notifying the period until is displayed as the returning display mode S1, and the volume gauge S2 for indicating the currently set volume is displayed. The volume gauge S2 is formed by a horizontally long gauge that visually displays the current volume and a set value display that indicates the current volume numerically on the right side of the gauge. 1 ”is displayed, and a shaded area corresponding to the set value“ 1 ”is displayed on the gauge. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the setting value "1" is set as the initial value of the volume setting value when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 532 (B), when the left volume button 23A or the right volume button 23B is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, the volume gauge S2 and the volume switching display S3 are displayed. To. The volume switching display S3 has a "switching" display for indicating that the volume can be switched, a volume reduction display mode S3A indicating that the volume is lowered when the left volume button 23A is pressed, and a right volume button 23B when the volume button 23B is pressed. It is formed from the volume increase display mode S3B indicating that the volume is increased. While the volume switching display S3 is displayed, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23A and the right volume button 23B.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the pachinko machine 10 is illegally acted (for example, the control content of the main control device 110 is illegally operated to aim for a big hit), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily turned on. Some turn it off and cheat. In order to make it easier to detect such fraudulent activities, there are measures taken so that a loud noise is emitted when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

However, in recent years, many pachinko machines 10 temporarily emit a loud sound as a method for enhancing the effect of production, and in a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are operating, a loud volume emitted when the power is turned on. There was a problem that the clerk of the amusement park missed the question. On the other hand, in the 14th control example, from the minimum value of the volume setting range that can be variably set by the player from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the end of the first special symbol change. Is configured to output a small sound. With this configuration, in a gaming machine that normally emits a loud sound during a game, it is possible to create a state of discomfort compared to the surrounding gaming machines by emitting an unnecessarily quiet sound. It can be easily found by the clerk of the amusement park.

Further, in this control example, since the player is configured so that the volume cannot be adjusted from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the end of the first special symbol change, it is illegal. It is possible to prevent the player who has performed the action from operating the volume button 23 after turning on the power to adjust the volume of the pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding pachinko machines 10.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 533 (A), the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. 532 (B) described above is displayed on the customer waiting screen after the power is turned on, and the volume switching display S3 is not displayed. It is configured in. In this way, although the volume is internally output lower than the volume setting value "1", it is illegal by displaying the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the setting value "1" on the display screen. It is possible to prevent the player who performs the act from being aware that the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine 10 for which fraud countermeasures have been taken by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 533 (B), it is assumed that the volume button 23 is pressed while the special symbol is fluctuating in the first rotation after the power is turned on (a state in which a volume smaller than the set value "1" is output). However, the volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume button 23 cannot be operated to change the volume setting value.

<About the electrical configuration in the 14th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 534 to 536. The same elements as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 534. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th control example. The control examples described above are different in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23A, right volume button 23B) are provided, and are the same except for the provision.

Next, with reference to FIG. 535 (A), the contents of ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the 14th control example will be described. FIG. 535 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 14th control example is significantly different from the ROM of each of the above-mentioned control examples in that the volume table 222CA is provided. The other elements are the same.

The volume table 222CA is a data table in which the set value of the volume that can be set by operating the volume button 23 is specified. Here, the contents of the volume table 222CA will be described with reference to FIG. 536. FIG. 536 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the volume table 222CA. As shown in FIG. 536, in the volume table 222CA, in addition to the set values (set values "1" to "4") that can be set by operating the volume button 23, predetermined conditions after the power is turned on are satisfied. The set value (set value "A") to be set when the item is set is specified, and a predetermined set value is set according to the state.

Specifically, the set value "A" is set until the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) in the first rotation is completed after the power is turned on. When the set value "A" is set, a sound having a volume of 15 DB (decibel) is output. Further, when the volume button 23 is operated and the set value "1" is set, a sound having a size of 30 DB (decibel) is output, and when the set value "2" is set, a sound having a size of 75 DB (decibel) is output. When the sound is output and the setting value "3" is set, a sound with a size of 85DB (decibel) is output, and when the setting value "4" is set, a sound with a size of 95DB (decibel) is output. Sound is output.

In this control example, the set value "1" is set as the initial value after the power is turned on, but the initial value of the volume is set according to various conditions. For example, a flag that is set to be turned on only when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for the first time after shipment is provided, and if the flag is set to on, the set value "3" is set as the initial value. Or it may be configured to determine the time when the power is turned on and set a different set value as the initial value based on the determination result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 535 (B). In the thirteenth control example, a set volume storage area 223CA, a volume operation invalid flag 223CB, and a volume change standby flag 223CC are added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned twelfth control example. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The set volume storage area 223CA is an area for storing (storing) the currently set set volume, and is set in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 538) of the startup process 4 (see FIG. 537). The installed value is stored (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 538). Further, the set value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 540) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 539) of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 540).

The volume operation invalid flag 223CB is a flag for indicating a period for invalidating the volume change (setting value change) based on the operation of the volume button 23, and the volume change (setting value) based on the volume button 23 operation. Is set to on during the period when (change) is invalid. This volume operation invalid flag 223CB determines in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 538) that the time counting time of the RTC is during business hours (for example, from 10 am to 10 pm) (Z6002 in FIG. 538: YES), it is set to on (Z6005 in FIG. 538) and referenced in the volume setting process (see FIG. 540) (Z6107 in FIG. 540). If it is determined by the processing of Z6107 that it is set to ON (see Z6107 in FIG. 540), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 532 (A)) is not displayed without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 532 (B)). ) Is set for displaying only (Z6110 in FIG. 540). Then, it is set to off in the volume-related processing (see FIG. 542) executed in the stop command processing 4 (FIG. 541) (Z5122 in FIG. 542). That is, when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to on, it is set to off.

The volume change standby flag 223CC is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to ON when the volume can be adjusted. It is a thing. In the thirteenth control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to first press the volume button 23 to display the volume switching display S3 on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (left volume button 23A or right volume button 23B) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed when the volume button 23 is accidentally pressed during the game.

If the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation while the RAM clear switch 122 is operated (pressed) when the power is turned on, the maximum operation setting is made. It may be configured to output a sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared at a volume higher than the volume or the maximum volume set for operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud such as illegally executing RAM clear and aiming at a hit random value.

Further, in this control example, the game sound is output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by the operation until one fluctuation at the time of turning on the power is completed. Operation When the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a volume lower than the set minimum volume, the voice such as BGM and the sound effect (directing voice) are output, and the volume is set in the third symbol display device 81. May be configured to display a display indicating that the volume is maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23. With this configuration, when the game starts when the game store opens after the power is turned on, the sound is output according to the previous player's volume setting (volume setting on the previous day), resulting in a loud volume. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player is surprised by the output in. Furthermore, by setting the volume to be lower than the minimum volume, it is possible to make the player aware that the volume is low while suppressing harm to the player, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. You can notice that it is configured. It should be noted that the volume setting screen may be displayed by switching the volume to a volume lower than the minimum by switching to the demo screen regardless of when the power is turned on. Further, after the game is started (the change of the special symbol starts), the volume button 23 is not operated and the setting of the volume lower than the minimum volume is continued during the period when the special symbol is changed. The display color (volume symbol and volume button (volume up by right operation, volume down by left operation)) can be changed depending on the winning lottery result and the lottery result (pre-reading result), which is stored on hold. It may be configured to notify the degree of expectation of a hit. With this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game at a quiet volume and raise the volume at the timing when the expectation is high, until the fluctuation with high expectation or the holding memory is performed.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 537 to Z324, the control process in which the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example is executed will be described. In the 14th control example, the initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added to the start-up process, the volume setting process (Z2171), and the sound editing / output process (Z2109) are added to the main process for the 11th control example. The main difference is that the processing is added and the volume-related processing (Z5120) is added to the stop command processing which is one of the processing in the command determination processing.

With reference to FIG. 537, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 537) in the 14th control example differs from the start-up process (FIG. 493) in the 11th control example in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 538, the initial volume setting (Z2051), which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 537) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example, will be described. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the contents of this initial volume setting (Z2051).

In the initial volume setting, first, the RTC calculation time is read out (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether the present is during business hours (Z6002). When it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: NO), the set value 2 is read from the volume table 222CA provided in the ROM 222 and stored in the set volume storage area 223CA provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the set value 1 is read from the volume table 222CA, stored in the set volume storage area 223CA (Z6004), and then the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to ON. (Z6005), this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 539, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example will be described. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 4. The main process (FIG. 539) in the 14th control example differs from the main process (FIG. 476) in the 12th control example in that a volume setting process (Z2171) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the twelfth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 540, the volume setting process (Z2171), which is one process of the main process 4 (FIG. 539) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example, will be described. FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing the contents of this volume setting process (Z2171).

In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether the volume button has been operated (Z6101). When it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this process ends. When the volume button is operated (Z6101: YES), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223CC provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z6102). When it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223CC is set to ON (Z6102: YES), the set value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222CA (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying the volume gauge corresponding to the read set value is set (Z6104). Next, a voice setting command for indicating the read setting value is set (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the setting volume storage area 223CA (Z6106), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6102, when it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223CC is set to off (Z6102: NO), it is determined whether the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to on (Z6107). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to off (Z6107: NO), a display volume change command for indicating the volume gauge and the adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223CC is set to ON (Z6109), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6107, when the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to ON (Z6107: YES), the display volume command for indicating the volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this processing is terminated.

The stop command process 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 541. FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 4 (Z2259). The stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the 14th control example is different from the stop command process (FIG. 519) in the 12th control example in that a volume-related process (Z5120) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the twelfth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 542, a volume-related process (Z5120), which is one process in the stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the 14th control example, will be described. FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing the contents of the volume-related processing (Z5120).

In the volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether the volume operation invalid flag 223CB provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z5152). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to on (Z5121: YES), the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to off (Z5122), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z5121 that the volume operation invalid flag is off (Z5121: NO), the processing of Z5122 is not executed and the present processing is terminated.

<About the 15th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 543 to 563. In the fifteenth control example, a control process relating to the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 707) provided in the operation device 300 (see FIG. 707) will be described. Only the differences will be described with respect to the eleventh control example, and the description thereof will be omitted for the same configuration.

In the fifteenth control example, mainly when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, error processing during the initial operation and initial operation of the tilting device 310, and control processing and error in the operation of the tilting device 310 during a normal game. The processing will be described.

With reference to FIGS. 543 (A) to (B), a display mode of the abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In FIG. 543 (A), in the initial operation at the time of turning on the power (tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 560) executed by MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 110), the tilt operation timer 223DB described later by the tilt device 310 is 0 ( The display mode (error) of the abnormality notification displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 when it is not detected at the origin position even if the initial operation period elapses to reach the origin position after the initial operation is reached). It is a figure which showed display).

As shown in FIG. 543 (A), based on the fact that the origin sensor of the operating device 300 does not detect that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position even after the operation period in which the initial operation of the tilting device 310 ends has elapsed. The text "Button return error A, please call the staff" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the employees of the hall that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. .. In this control example, if the tilting device 310 is not moved to the origin position at the timing when the initial operation period ends during the initial operation, an error display as shown in FIG. 543 (A) is configured. There is. Further, although the details will be described later, a normal game in which the player may not be able to perform the normal operation predetermined by the production or the like by hindering the operation of the tilting device 310 by holding the operation of the tilting device 310 by hand or the like. Even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, no error is displayed immediately, and the tilting device 310 is operated four times for each of three fluctuations of a predetermined specific condition (for example, a special symbol). When an abnormality is detected continuously until the abnormality is detected by the operation of the tilting device 310, etc.), the error is notified so that the progress of the game is not a mechanical abnormality. Regardless, it is configured to suppress problems that hinder it.

It should be noted that the error display at the time of initial operation is a mechanical (including a control abnormality) abnormality by displaying an identifiable display as "button return error A" as shown in FIG. 543 (A). It is configured so that it can be easily identified.

As shown in FIG. 543 (B), after operating the tilting device 310 in the production of the game during the normal game (during the game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position. If the origin sensor does not detect the movement (movement) to the origin position even during the period when the movement to the origin position is completed, an error is not immediately displayed and an internal abnormality occurs. The status indicates the state in which The text "Button return error B Please call the staff" is displayed in the main display area DM of 81, and an error display is executed to notify the player, hall employee, etc. that an abnormality has occurred in the tilting device 310. Will be done.

Here, by displaying a character called "button return error B" different from that at the time of the initial operation, it is configured so that it can be easily identified as an abnormality during the normal game. As described above, in this control example, the error display is displayed by executing the error display in consideration of the fact that the player is playing a game that hinders the operation of the tilting motion 310 during the normal game. It is configured to suppress frequently executed problems. Further, when an error display is executed during a normal game and it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the tilting device 310, the player is performing a gaming method that hinders the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the error operation of the tilting device 310 at an early stage by confirming the game method by the hall employee or the like.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 544 to 546, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the touch sensor effect will be described. FIG. 544 shows a period (origin) during which the operation effect of the tilting device 310 is executed and the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position when the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A is executed as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (third symbol). It is a timing chart in the example in which the origin sensor does not detect even if the return is completed).

When the fluctuation display of the normal reach deviation A (variation time (variation period) 30000MS) is determined, the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired, and the determination value "0 to 149" set in the operation effect selection table 222DA described later is obtained. If it is collated with any of the above and matches the value of the acquired effect counter 223H, the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1 (see FIG. 551 (A)), which will be described later, is determined. In the tilting motion scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 551 (A)), the tilting device 310 is raised to the highest position (see FIG. 734), and then the tilting device 310 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. 735 as a tilting motion. After the operation of repeating the ascending position (see FIG. 734) at intervals of 0.5 seconds is executed, the operation of descending to the position shown in FIG. 724, which is the origin position, is executed (set).

When the normal reach deviation A is executed, the third symbol is the reach display mode (the third symbol of the left symbol row and the right symbol row is the same type of symbol 18 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (T1). It will be temporarily stopped (stopped). In the reach display mode, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 for suggesting that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Here, it will be described later that the tilting operation 320 is pressed and the frame button 22 is pressed for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of the change of the special symbol. When the detection sensor 324 detects the detection, the operation validity period (T5) for determining that the detection is valid is set.

As shown in FIGS. 544 and 551 (A), the drive motor 342 is 210 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 724) 18 seconds (18000 MS) after the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A is started (T1). By step rotation, the disk cam 344 is rotated 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in FIG. 724) and moved to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 732 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 551 (A)). ). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 MS) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 551 (A))). After a stop period of 3 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 732), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 20 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and is in the unlocked position. It is moved to (see FIG. 734) (see operation pointer 3 (FIG. 551) (A)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengaging position to the locking disengaging position, as already described in the eighteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 733, the release member 346 moves downward (counterclockwise). By being rotated, the rotary claw member 347 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is subjected to the torsion spring 315. Raised by the force of. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven to provide an assist in the front-rear direction to the tilting device 320, so that the ascending force is increased and the ascending speed is improved. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited for (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 551 (A))). After that, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 734), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 50 degrees counterclockwise and moves downward 50 degrees from the highest position (see FIG. 734). It is moved to the rotated fanning descent position (see FIG. 735) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 551 (A))). Then, 0.5 seconds later, the drive motor 342 is driven again in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 735) by 50 steps, so that the disk cam 344 is rotated 50 degrees in the clockwise direction, and the tilting device 320 is again tilted. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 734) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 551 (A))).

Then, again, 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is driven from the highest rising position to the lowering position (operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 551 (A))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is moved to the highest position from the lowering position. The tilting device 320 is driven to the ascending position (operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 551 (A))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 1 second (operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 551 (A))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1 is completed, the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 558) is executed, and the driving is performed based on the origin detection operation A table 222D3 (see FIG. 552 (A)) described later. When the motor 342 is driven in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 734), the disk cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise, and the tilting device 320 is driven in the direction of descending to the origin position. Is transmitted.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 544, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed so as not to be lowered by the player at the highest position. In such a case, as already described in the eighteenth embodiment, the movable clutch 343C is separated from the transmission gear 343B, and the transmission gear 343B is idled so that the drive motor 342 is being driven. Also, the disk cam 344 is configured so as not to rotate.

Here, the detection sensor 324 detects that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilting operation timer 223DB (1900MS) set in the origin detection operation A table 222DB3 (see FIG. 552 (A)) has elapsed. If not, the tilting operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an abnormality of the tilting device 310, which is an internal (abnormal state that is not a state of notifying to the outside) described later.

In this way, even if there is a possibility that the tilting device 320 cannot be returned from the highest position to the origin position due to being held by the player or the like, the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343B) can be driven by the configuration of the movable clutch 343C. It can be idled to prevent damage to the drive motor 342, the transmission gear 343B, and the like. Further, by configuring so that it can be determined from the tilting operation status that the origin return operation has an abnormality, it is configured so that it can be internally identified as an abnormal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 545, when the effect of raising the tilting device 310 (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 544) is executed, the origin sensor is executed even after the origin detection operation period (for example, 1900MS) has elapsed. The control executed after the tilting motion status is set to "4" without turning on will be described. In FIG. 545, when the tilting operation status is set to “4”, a retry operation for returning the tilting device 310 to the origin position is executed every time three fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure) are executed. It is a timing chart in the case where it is done.

When the tilting operation status is set to "4", as shown in FIG. 545, a retry operation is executed in which the drive motor 342 is operated so as to move the tilting device 310 to the origin position every 3 fluctuations of the special symbol. Will be done. In this case, the origin sensor must be turned on by the retry operation four times in a row (retry operation for every three fluctuations is four times) while maintaining "4" as the value of the tilting operation status until the origin sensor is detected. , The error display shown in FIG. 543 (B) is executed.

As a result, the effect of raising the tilting device 310 is executed, and even if the origin detection operation of the tilting device 310 is executed, the player plays a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to hinder the operation to perform the origin position. Even if an error occurs that does not move to, the retry operation is performed every time the special symbol change is executed a specified number of times (3 times) without immediately notifying the error as in the case of the initial operation error. If it is determined that the game has not been able to move to the origin position continuously, an error message will be displayed, and the error message will be displayed frequently due to mischief by the player. It is possible to suppress problems that make you busy.

Next, with reference to FIG. 546, when the tilting operation status is set to "4" and the advance notice effect using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. The control when the origin detection operation (retry operation) is executed based on the timing of the change will be described. FIG. 546 is a timing chart showing the operation of the tilting device 310 to be executed when the effect using the touch sensor 290 is executed. The fluctuation of the special symbol starts, the advance notice effect that the operation of the touch sensor 290 becomes effective is selected, the validity period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 290. The operation is executed, and the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven at the timing when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 has detected the on, and the origin detection operation is executed. FIG. 546 shows a case where the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on and the tilting operation status is set to “0”. On the other hand, if the origin sensor does not turn on even after the origin detection period (for example, 3600MS) has elapsed, the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped and the tilting operation status is maintained at "4". .. As a result, the retry operation is continuously executed every three fluctuations, and control for eliminating the abnormality of the tilting device 310 can be executed.

The player usually operates the firing handle with his right hand, and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with his left hand. When the player is playing the game while holding the tilting device 310 so as not to return to the origin position, it is possible that the tilting device 310 is held by the left hand, so that the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on. By operating the tilting device 310 to detect the origin, the origin detecting operation is executed in a state where the holding of the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is configured to be executed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, but only when the touch sensor 290 is turned on while the touch sensor of the firing handle is turned on. It may be configured to execute the origin detection operation so that the origin detection operation is performed in a state where the player's holding is released more reliably. Further, the touch sensor 290 is not limited to the frame button 290, and the third symbol display device 81 may be used to perform a warning effect using both hands (for example, character display such as "raise both hands"). , A mobile phone or the like may be used to perform an effect of reading a three-dimensional code or the like, and the origin detection operation may be executed during that period. Of course, it may be a production that notifies the user to use both hands by voice.

<About the electrical configuration in the 15th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 547 to 552. FIG. 547 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example. In the fifteenth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the eleventh control example, respectively. Since other configurations are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The detailed configuration of the tilting device 310 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 707 to 746.

The drive motor 342 is composed of a stepping motor, and when the tilting device 310 is in the lower limit position, the tilting device 310 is driven so as to be released from being locked so as to prevent the tilting device 310 from ascending at the lower limit position. When the locking is released, the vibration force in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 of the voice coil motor 352, which is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, is assisted and rises to the highest position by the urging force of the spring. ..

On the other hand, in the state where the tilting member 310 is located at the highest position, the tilting device 310 is moved downward and moved to the origin position by rotating in the opposite direction to the case where the drive motor 342 is raised. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate portion 311A is locked by the rotary claw member 347 (see FIG. 724), and the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising.

The detection sensor 324 is composed of the transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. 715, and is composed of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 724 is in the lower limit position. In the state regulated by, the left side detection sensor 324L detects the left side detection piece 311GL (ON state), and the right side detection sensor 324R does not detect the right side detection piece 311GR (OFF state). Therefore, it is possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is further pressed by the player at the lower limit position, the right side detection sensor 324R detects the right side detection piece 311GR (ON state), and both the left side detection sensor 324L and the left side detection sensor 324L are turned ON. , The tilting device 310 can be determined to be operated by the player at the lower limit position.

As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect of being pressed (operated) by the player not only when it is moved to the highest position but also when it is restricted at the lower limit position. It can be used for various productions. For example, if the tilting device 310 is set to have a high probability of being executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol for which the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the tilting device 310 can determine the expectation of the hit / fail judgment result. Can be represented.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged on the back side of the tilting device 310, and by driving the voice coil motor 352, it repeatedly vibrates from the back side direction to the front side side of the tilting device 310, causing the tilting device 310 to vibrate. , The purpose is to perform an effect in which the player can feel the vibration when the tilting device 310 is touched. Further, when the tilting device 310 rises, it rises due to the urging force of the spring against gravity, but the rising force weakens due to the own weight of the tilting device 310, but by driving the voice coil motor 352 when it rises. , The rising force is applied by the vibration from the voice coil motor 352, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the rising force is weakened by its own weight.

<About the electrical configuration in the 15th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 548. In the fifteenth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-described eleventh control example are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 548 (A). FIG. 548 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example. This 15th control example differs from the 11th control example described above in that the operation effect selection table 222DA, the tilting operation scenario table DB, the origin detection operation A table 222DCC, the origin detection operation B table 222DD, and the tilting initial operation table 222DE are added. is doing.

The operation effect selection table 222DA is a table for selecting operation data (operation content) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 550 (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect selection table 222DA. In the operation effect selection table 222DA, the determination value of the effect counter 223H that determines whether or not to execute the operation effect using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability is set according to the variation type of the special symbol. The type of tilting motion scenario is set for the judgment value for executing the operation effect. In the tilting motion scenario, the operation effect start time (operation effect start period), which is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the operation effect of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 with the lapse of the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Operation valid start time (operation valid), which is a timer value of the tilt operation timer 223DB for setting the operation time (operation period) of the tilt device 310 and a timer value for determining the start time (start period) in which the tilt device 310 operation is valid. The start period) and the operation valid end time (operation valid end period), which is a timer value for determining that the period during which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid, are set. That is, depending on the operation data selected from the operation effect selection table 222DA, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if it is executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 are played. The setting of the valid period (T5) for effectively determining the operation when the person presses the button is executed.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is "normal reach jackpot A" or "normal reach out of A", the operation is determined whether to acquire the value of the effect counter 223H and execute the operation effect. When it is executed from the effect selection table 222DA and it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the acquired effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 149"), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is set. The tilting operation scenario A table 222BD1 to be described later is selected, 8800MS is set in the tilting operation timer 223DB (T2) (Z2923 in FIG. 559), 18000MS is set in the operation effect start time (T1), and the operation effective start time (T3) is set. ) Is set to 23300MS, and 26800MS is set to the operation valid end time (T4).

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is "super reach jackpot A" or "super reach out of A", the operation effect is determined by acquiring the value of the effect counter 223H and executing the operation effect. If it is executed from the selection table 222DA and it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the acquired effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 149"), the tilting device will be described later as an operation scenario. Operation scenario B Table 222BD2 is selected, 7900MS is set in the tilting operation timer 223DB (T2) (Z2923 in FIG. 559), 38000MS is set in the operation effect start time (T1), and 41500MS is set in the operation effective start time (T3). Is set, and 45900MS is set for the operation valid end time (T4). In this way, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is effective are set in advance according to the variation type of the special symbol, and the operation is performed with the passage of time.

The tilting operation scenario table 222DB sets the origin detection operation tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the tilting operation scenario type and the tilting operation scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222DA. The data table for this is set.

FIG. 550 (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting operation scenario table 222DB. The tilting operation scenario table 222DB is provided with a tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1, a tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2, an origin detection operation A table 222DB3, and an origin detection operation B table 222DB4.

The tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1 is a table in which the operation contents in the tilting operation scenario A are defined, and can be selected when the fluctuation pattern type is out of normal reach A or per normal reach A, and the tilting device 310 is movable. Operation data is stored. As described above, the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222DA at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 551 (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1. After the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1 is started when the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222DA is triggered.

In the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1, the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointers are read out in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223DB (Z2953 in FIG. 561). ), The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "10" (the tilt operation timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (18000 MS) after the special symbol change is started, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (210 steps in the backward rotation direction during 2100 MS) (Movable to) is executed, and the cam removal operation (the release member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retracting portion 344C4 of the disk cam 344, and the second overhanging portion 344C3 is the upper portion of the release member 34 (see FIG. 732). (That is, the operation of moving the second overhanging portion 344C3 to the upper part of the release member 34 (see FIG. 732) without operating the rotary claw member 347)), and the cam is removed. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data (stopped during 3000 MS) whose operation pointer is "2". The operation data with the operation pointer set to "3" (moving 20 steps in the forward rotation direction during 200 MS) is executed, and the unlocking operation (the second overhanging portion 344C3 rotates the release member 346 downward). The disk cam 344 is moved to the unlocked position by rotating the rotary claw member 347 to release the locking with the tilting device 320, and the tilting device 320 starts to rise.

Next, the operation data whose operation pointer is "4" (stopped during 500 MS) is executed, waits for ascending, and the operation data whose operation pointer is "5" (50 steps can be moved forward in the forward rotation direction during 500 MS). ) Is executed to be the position of FIG. 735, the operation data whose operation pointer is "6" (movable in the backflip direction in 50 steps during 500 MS) is executed, and the fanning operation to be the position of FIG. 734 is executed. The operation data with the operation pointer "7" (moving 50 steps in the forward rotation direction during 500 MS) is executed, the position is again in FIG. 735, and the operation data with the operation pointer "8" (50 steps during 500 MS) is executed. (Movable in the backward rotation direction) is executed, and the position is again shown in FIG. Stops), stops at the position shown in FIG. 734, the operation pointer becomes "10", and the operation ends.

As described above, in the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1, the tilting device 320 is moved from the state where the tilting device 320 is in the origin position to the highest position, and then the tilting device 320 is in the highest position. After executing the fanning operation, the operation of returning to the origin position is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 544, when the tilting device 320 is pressed and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts ascending, the detection is considered to be effective. After being determined, a specific advance notice effect (for example, an effect of notifying the expected degree of hit) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 27 also display a sound effect according to the advance notice effect. And the lamp lighting mode are lit. When the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player after the tilting device 320 starts ascending and before 3.5 seconds of the operation valid period (T5) elapses, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. When the tilting device 320 is locked by the rotary claw member 347 and held at the origin position by moving to the origin position by the pressing operation before the return operation by the operation A table 222DB3 is executed, the origin is detected. The operation based on the operation A table 222DB3 is executed, and the disk cam 344 is moved to the initial position (origin position).

When the transmission gear 343B is held by the player at the raised position of the tilting device 320 and the transmission gear 343B spins idle, it is determined that the left side detection sensor 353L is ON and the position is the initial position, and the position of the disk cam 344 is determined. Is executed to return to the origin position.

The tilting motion scenario B table 222DB2 is a table in which the motion content in the tilting motion scenario B is defined, and stores motion data when the tilting device 310 is movable when the variation pattern type is super reach A. As described above, the tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222DA at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 551 (B) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2. After the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2 is started when the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222DA is triggered.

The tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2 reads out the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223DB (Z2953 in FIG. 561). , The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "11" (the tilt operation timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (38000MS) after the special symbol change is started, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (50 steps in the forward rotation direction during 500MS) (Movable to) is executed, the lock is released, the operation data with the operation pointer "2" (stopped during 3000 MS) is executed, the standby is performed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "3" (during 200 MS) is executed. The operation data (moving 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed, the operation data with the operation pointer "4" (movable 20 steps in the backward rotation direction during 200MS) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "5" (movable in the backward rotation direction) is executed. During 200MS, 20 steps are movable in the forward rotation direction), operation data with an operation pointer of "6" (20 steps are movable in the backward rotation direction during 200MS) is executed, and the operation pointer is "7". Operation data (20 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 200MS) is executed, and operation data with an operation pointer of "8" (20 steps can be moved in the backward rotation direction during 200MS) is executed, and this operation is executed. The operation data in which the operation pointer is "9" (120 steps can be moved forward in the forward rotation direction during 1200 MS) is executed by using the repeated operation of the pointers "3" to "8" three times as a fanning operation, and the position shown in FIG. 740. The operation data is executed with the operation pointer set to "10" (stopped during 2000 MS), the operation is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 740, the operation pointer becomes "11", and the operation ends.

With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs a fanning motion during the reach effect, prompting the player to operate the tilting device 310, and changing the fanning motion according to the variation type while the operation effect is being executed. In addition, by stopping the rising height (length) at different places, interest in operation is generated, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In this control example, the types of tilting motion scenarios are set according to the types of fluctuation patterns, but the tilting motion scenarios A and B are not limited to this, and the hit / fail judgment results are hit and miss, respectively. May be configured so that the selection rate is changed and set according to the result of the hit / miss judgment by dividing and setting the judgment value of the effect counter 223H. With this configuration, for example, a tilting motion scenario in which the probability of being selected is higher when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit than in the case of a miss is executed, so that the player can make a hit / fail judgment result. Can be expected to be a hit.

In addition, as in the tilting motion scenario B table 222DB2, a tilting motion scenario type is set so as to move the tilting motion to the origin position without raising the motion to the highest position after the fanning motion is performed at the start of the motion. May be good. By configuring in this way, for example, the tilting motion scenario B is set so that it can be easily selected when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, and when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, the tilting motion scenario of only the fanning motion is created. By setting it so that it is easy to select, it is possible to raise expectations for a big hit by making it a fan.

The origin detection operation A table 222DB3 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario A. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 552 (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222DB3. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 1900MS) is executed, the operation pointer becomes "2", and the operation ends.

In the origin detection operation A table 222DB3, when the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the valid operation period, and the tilting operation flag is ON (Z2957: YES). Or, when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2961: NO), 1900MS is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB and 3 is set in the tilting operation status 223DA based on the origin detection operation A table 222DB3. By performing (Z2959), the origin detection operation A table 222DB3 is read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223DB becomes 0 in the effect backtracking operation process (FIG. 562, Z2911), and the origin detection is performed. The homing operation is performed until there is (Z2971: YES) or the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO).

The origin detection operation B table 222DB4 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario B. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 552 (B) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222DB4. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 1900MS) is executed, the operation pointer becomes "2", and the operation ends.

In the origin detection operation B table 222DB4, when the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the valid operation period, and the tilting operation flag is ON (Z2957: YES). , Or when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2961: NO). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222DB4, 1900MS is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB, and 3 is set for the tilting operation status 223DA (Z2959). The operation content of the origin detection operation B table 222DB3 is read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223DB becomes 0, and the origin is detected (Z2971: YES) or the tilt operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO). ), The origin return operation is performed.

The retry operation table 222DC stores operation data for repeatedly performing origin detection when the origin is not detected even though the origin detection operation is performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting operation scenario. There is.

FIG. 552 (C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the retry operation table 222DC. In the retry operation table 222DC, the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilt operation timer 223DB becomes 0) in order from the operation data whose operation pointer is "1", as in the operation of the tilt operation scenario table described above. It is performed until the origin is detected (Z2899: YES).

Specifically, the retry operation table 222DC ends when the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO) in the above-mentioned origin detection operation, and 4 is set for the tilting operation status 223DA (Z2975). In the retry operation process (Z2913) executed by setting 3 to the detection fluctuation counter 223DC (Z2976) and setting 4 to the detection check counter 223DD (Z2977), the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: YES) of the special symbol is set. When the detection check counter 223DD is 1 or more (Z2982: YES), 1 is subtracted (Z2983), and when the detection fluctuation counter 223DC is 0 (Z2984: NO), retries are made based on the contents of the retry operation table. If the operation time (900MS) is set in the tilting operation timer 223DB (Z2985), the detection check counter 223DD is subtracted by 1 (Z2986), and the value after subtraction is 1 or more (Z2987: YES), the detection fluctuation counter 223DC is set. Set to 3 (Z2988). Then, when the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z2989: NO) and the tilting operation timer 223DB is not 0 (Z2990: YES), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed by the tilting operation timer. It is performed until the 223DB becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 becomes the origin position (Z2899: YES). As shown in FIG. 545, the above operation is set once every three times of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and if the origin detection is not performed, the above operation is performed up to four times.

The tilt initial operation table 222DD stores operation data for setting the initial operation of the tilt device 310 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 552 (D) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilt initial operation table 222DD. In the tilting initial operation table 222DD, the operation pointer becomes "2" in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1", and the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2931: YES), as in the operation of the tilting operation scenario table described above. Or until there is origin detection (Z2933: YES).

Specifically, when the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: YES) in the start-up process (FIG. 553) executed when the power is turned on, the operation time (7200MS) is based on the tilt initial operation table 222DD. ) Is set in the tilting operation timer 223DB (Z2061), and the tilting operation status is set to 1 (Z2062) to start the operation.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 549. FIG. 549 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth control example. In the twelfth control example, the tilting operation status 223DA, the tilting operation timer 223DB, the detection fluctuation counter 223DC, the detection check counter 223DD, the tilting operation flag 223DE, and the pressing notice are valid for the eleventh control example described above. It differs from the timer 223DF in that it is added.

The tilting operation status 223DA stores information for determining the operating state of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation status 223DA is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation setting of the tilting device 310 is performed in the start-up process (FIG. 553) executed when the power is turned on, and is in the initial operation state.

The tilting operation status 223DA is determined by the tilting device control process (Z2891), which is executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161), according to the value of the tilting operation status 223DA. .. Specifically, when the value of the tilting operation status 223D is "0" (Z2904: YES), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilting operation is in a standby state waiting for the start of operation. When the value of the tilting operation status 223D is "1" (Z2906: YES), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilting operation is executing the initial operation after the power is turned on. When the value of the tilting operation status 223D is "2" (Z2908: YES), the operation effect during operation process (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting operation is a state during the operation effect during the special symbol change. When the value of the tilting operation status 223D is "3" (Z2910: YES), the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the return operation after the scenario operation.

When the value of the tilting operation status 223D is "4" (Z2912: YES), the retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and the tilting operation is executing the retry operation for detecting the origin. When the value of the tilting operation status 223D is other than that (Z2912: NO), the execution in this process is terminated when the value of the tilting operation status 223D is "5", but the above-mentioned initial operation and return operation are performed. It is an error state when the origin cannot be detected, but if the error state occurs, there is no change in the tilting operation until the power is turned on again.

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 559), as described above, when the operation effect start time is triggered after the special symbol change is started (Z2921: YES), the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 2. It is set (Z2922), and the tilting motion is in the state of the operation effect during the variable motion of the special symbol.

In the tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 560), 0 is set when the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2933: YES) and the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2933: YES). Then, the tilting operation becomes a standby state, and when the origin detection of the detection sensor 324 is not performed (Z2933: NO), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

In the operation effect processing (Z2909: FIG. 561), when the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2951: NO) and the tilting operation flag is off (Z2957: NO), the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2957: NO). In Z2961: YES), 0 is set in the tilting operation status 223DA (Z2962), and the tilting operation is in the standby state.

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 562), when the origin is detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: YES), 0 is set in the tilt operation status 223DA (Z2972), and the tilt operation is in a standby state, and this process. To finish.

When the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: NO) and the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO), 4 is set in the tilting operation status 223DA, and the tilting operation is executing the retry operation. Will be.

In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 563), if the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2899: YES) after the special symbol change starts (Z2981: NO), 0 is set in the tilt operation status 223DA (Z2972). ), The tilting operation is in the standby state, and when the origin detection of the detection sensor 324 is not performed (Z2989: NO) and the detection check counter 223DD is 0 (Z2992: YES), the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 5 (5). Z2994), and the tilting operation becomes an error state.

The tilting operation timer 223DB is a timer for counting the operation of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation timer 223DB is set with an initial operating time (Z2061) when the power is turned on, and is repeatedly updated by adding one each time the main process (FIG. 554) is executed.

In the standby state when the value of the tilting operation status is "0", the operation time according to the tilting operation scenario table is set (Z2923). When the value of the tilting operation status is "2", the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2951: NO) in the state during the operation effect, and the origin when the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: YES). The time of the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. When the value of the tilting operation status is "4", the retry operation time is set (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table 222DC during the retry operation execution.

The detection fluctuation counter 223DC is a counter that counts the number of fluctuations while the tilting device 310 executes the retry operation performed when the origin is not detected in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection fluctuation counter 223DC tilts when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: NO) in the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the tilting operation status value 223DA is "3". When the operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is during the retry operation.

During the retry operation, if the detection check counter 223DD is not 0 (Z2982: YES) at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2981: YES), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following determination process is performed. conduct. First, the detection fluctuation counter 223DC is subtracted by 1 (Z2983), and when the subtraction result is 0 (Z2984: NO), it is determined that the fluctuation is to perform a retry operation, and the tilting operation timer is determined based on the contents of the retry operation table. If the result of subtracting 1 from the detection check counter 223DD (Z2896) after the setting (Z2985) is not 0 (Z2987: YES), it is assumed that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (maximum 4 times). , The detection variation counter 223DC is set to 3 (Z2988).

The detection check counter 223DD is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the origin is not detected in the return operation of the tilting device 310 after the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223DD tilts when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: NO) in the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the value of the tilt operation status 223DA is "3". When the operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO), 4 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is during the retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times if the origin is not detected.

When the tilting operation scenario A or the tilting operation scenario B is executed, the tilting operation flag 223DE is moved to the origin position by being pressed by the player during the operation valid period, and the rotating claw member. It is a flag indicating that it has been locked by 347. The tilt operation flag 223DE is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilt device 320 is pressed during the operation valid period by the process of Z2956 of the operation effect during operation process (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. If so, it will be set to on. On the other hand, after the tilt operation flag 223DE is determined to be on by the processing of Z2957, the tilt operation status is set to 3, and after the origin return operation is executed, it is set to off (see Z2960).

The pressing notice valid timer 223DF detects that the tilting device 320 is pressed as a switch for directing when the tilting device 320 is not raised (that is, held by the rotary claw member 347 at the origin position). It is a timer for determining the valid period for validly discriminating the detection of the switch 324. This press warning valid timer 223DF is based on the start timing of the valid period when the warning effect of using the tilting device 320 as a switch for the effect is determined as the warning effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined. Data corresponding to the specified validity period is stored. When the data corresponding to the valid period is set in the press warning valid timer 223DF (Z2877: see FIG. 555), the cam removal operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to have an expectation that the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1 will be executed due to the operation sound of the cam removal being executed, the vibration transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the player, and the like. Further, the press warning valid timer 223DF is decremented by 1 by the press Z2873 (see FIG. 555) and updated.

<Control processing by the main control device in the 15th control example>
Next, the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 553 to 345. In the fifteenth control example, a start-up process (FIG. 553) and a part of the main process (FIG. 554) are added to the eleventh control example, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107: FIG. 490) was changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 555), sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 491) was changed to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 556), and retry processing during touch input (Z2860). : FIG. 557), tilting device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 558), operation effect setting processing (FIG. 559), tilting initial operation processing (Z2907: FIG. The difference is that the process (Z2911: FIG. 562) and the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 563) are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 553, the start-up process (FIG. 553) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 553) in the fifteenth control example is different from the start-up process (FIG. 475) in the eleventh control example in that the processes of Z2061 to Z2062 are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the start-up process (FIG. 553) in the fifteenth control example, after the Z2012 process or the Z2013 process is executed, the tilt initial operation table 222DE provided in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 552 (D)) is used. Based on this, the tilting operation timer 223DB provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223DA provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and the main process (FIG. 554) described later is executed.

In this way, since the tilting operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 320 is executed by the tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 560) described later when the power is turned on. Therefore, the initial operation can be executed when the power is turned on, and the game can be started in a state of being moved to the origin position. Further, although not shown, the step counter and the like are set to the initial values based on the fact that the disc cam 344 is operated by the initial operation and the left side detection sensor 353L is turned on, so that the drive motor 342 Control can be performed stably.

The main process (FIG. 554) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 554. In the main process (FIG. 554) in the fifteenth control example, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (Z2161) with respect to the main process (FIG. 476) in the eleventh control example. ) Is different. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 555, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (Z2161: FIG. 555), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 554) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example. explain. FIG. 555 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 555), first, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is currently changing the special symbol for which the execution of the push notification is determined (during the setting of the push notice). (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pressing notice is decided. When it is determined that the pressing notice is being set (Z2881: YES), it is determined whether the pressing advance notice is in the valid period (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether the press advance notice is being executed, and whether the press advance notice valid timer 223DF has a value larger than 0. When it is determined that the press advance notice valid period is in progress (Z2882: YES), the press notice valid timer 223DF provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2883). Next, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player, and it is determined whether or not the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). When it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: YES), a display pressing notice mode command is set (Z2885), and the process proceeds to Z2890. In the processing of Z2881, when the pressing notice is not being executed (Z2881: NO), or in the processing of Z2884, when it is determined that the button is not pressed by the player (Z2884: NO). , Other processing is skipped, and the process proceeds to Z2890 processing.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2882, when it is determined that the press advance notice is not in the valid period (Z2882: NO), it is determined whether the press advance notice is the start timing of the start timing for executing the press advance notice (Z2882: NO) (Z2882: NO). Z2886). The start timing of the pressing notice is determined by a start timer (not shown) is set at the start of the change of the special symbol and the value of the start timer (when updated to a specific value "0").

When it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period (Z2886: YES), the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) defined as the value of the press warning valid timer 223DF is set, and the cam removal operation is 2100 MS. The backflip operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z2887). With this configuration, the cam removal operation is always performed even if the tilting device 320 is not pushed up, so that the player can expect the ascending effect to be executed.

If it is not the start timing of the pressing notice valid period (Z2886: NO), the processing of Z2888 is skipped and the processing of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing notice valid period (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the press advance notice valid period timer 223DF is 0. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the press advance notice valid period (Z2888: YES), the value of the press notice valid timer 223DF is reset, and the 1500MS backflip operation is set as the origin return operation (Z2889). On the other hand, in the processing of Z2888, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the valid period (Z2888: NO), the processing of Z2888 is skipped and the processing of the sensor input processing 2 (Z2890) is executed.

The details of this sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. 556. Next, the tilting device control process (Z2891) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG. 558.

The sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 556) in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 556. In the sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 556) in the fifteenth control example, the processes of Z2826 to Z2829 are not executed for the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 491) in the eleventh control example, and the retry is performed during touch input. The difference is that processing (Z2860) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 557, the retry process during touch input (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry process (Z2860) during touch input.

In the retry process during touch input (Z2860: FIG. 557), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 4, (Z2861: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 4 (Z2861: YES), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB provided in the RAM 223 is larger than 0 (Z2862). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2862: YES), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2862: YES), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin detection (Z2863). If the detection sensor determines that the origin is not detected (Z2863: NO), the drive motor is set in the backflip direction by one step (Z2864), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection sensor determines that the origin is detected (Z2863: YES), the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 0 (Z2865), and this process is terminated.

The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 558. FIG. 558 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

In the tilting device control process (Z2891: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2901). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2901: YES), the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 in the processing of Z2901 (Z2901: NO), the processing of Z2902 is skipped and the processing of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 0 (Z2904), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the tilting operation status indicating the origin return abnormality of the tilting device 320 is "4" at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the origin return retry operation is executed, so that the player can perform the origin return operation. To make it easier to return the tilting device 320 to the origin by performing a retry operation to return to the origin at a timing with a high probability of using both hands (one hand operates the firing handle and the other hand operates the touch sensor 290). Can be done.

Here, the operation effect setting process (Z2905), which is one of the tilting device control processes (Z2891: FIG. 558), will be described with reference to FIG. 559. FIG. 559 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether or not the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation time effect start time has not been reached (Z2921: NO), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921: YES), the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is set (Z2923), the tilting operation flag 223DE is set to off (Z2924) based on the tilting operation scenario table 222DB provided in the ROM 222, and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 558, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2904 that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 0 (Z2904: YES), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 1 (Z2906). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 1 (Z2906: YES), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and this process is terminated.

The tilting initial operation process (Z2907), which is one of the tilting device control processes (Z2891: FIG. 558), will be described with reference to FIG. 560. FIG. 560 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilt initial operation process (Z2907).

In the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2931). When it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2391: YES), the operation content of the tilt initial operation table 222DE is read (Z2932: YES), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2931 when it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2931: NO), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2933). When the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2933: YES), the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 0 (Z2934), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: NO), the tilting operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, the tilt error A command is set as the display error command (Z2936), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the case of an abnormality at the time of returning to the origin in the initial operation executed when the power is turned on, it is possible to detect the defect of the tilting device 320 at an early stage by displaying an error (abnormal processing) immediately unlike during the game. can.

Returning to FIG. 558, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2906, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 1 (Z2906: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 2 (Z2908). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 2 (Z2908: YES), the operation effect in progress process (Z2909) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 561, the operation during operation effect process (Z2909), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 558), will be described. FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect in-process (Z2909).

In the operation effect processing (Z2909), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2951). When it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2951: YES), it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223DE provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2952: YES), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223DE is not set to ON (Z2952: NO), the operation content corresponding to the tilt operation scenario table 222DB is read (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period (Z2954: NO), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation is in the valid period (Z2954: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a press detection (Z2955). If it is determined that there is no press detection (Z2955), this process ends. When it is determined that the press is detected (Z2955: YES), the tilt operation flag 223DE is set to ON (Z2956), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2951 when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2951: NO), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223DE is set to ON (Z2957). When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223DE is set to ON (Z2957: YES), the value of the tilt operation timer 223DB is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222DD provided in the ROM 222 (Z2957: YES). Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223DE is set to off (Z2960), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2957, when it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223DE is not set to ON (Z2957: NO), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: NO), the above-mentioned processes of Z2958 to Z2960 are executed, and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2861: YES), the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 0 (Z2962), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 558, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2908, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 2 (Z2908: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 3 (Z2910). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 3 (Z2910: YES), the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 562, an effect return operation process (Z2911), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 558), will be described. FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911).

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911), first, the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2971). When the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2971: YES), the tilting operation status 223DA value is set to 0 (Z2972), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2971 when it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2973). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2973: YES), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222DD is read out (Z2974), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2973, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2973: NO), 4 is set in the tilting operation status 223DA (Z2975). Next, 3 is set in the detection fluctuation counter 223DC provided in the RAM 223 (Z2976), 4 is set in the detection check counter 223DD (Z2977), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 558, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2910, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 3 (Z2910: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 4 (Z2912). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 4 (Z2912: YES), the retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2912 that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 4, (Z2912), this processing is terminated as it is.

A retry operation process (Z2913), which is a process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 558), will be described with reference to FIG. 563. FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry operation process (Z2913).

In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981). When it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: YES), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223DD is larger than 0 (Z2982). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223DD is 0 (Z2982: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223DD is larger than 0 (Z2982: YES), the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223DC is subtracted by 1 (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223DC changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2984). If it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223DC is larger than 0 (Z2984: YES), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223DC is 0 (Z2984: NO), the tilting operation timer 223DB is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222DC provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985), the value of the detection check counter 223DD is decremented by 1 (Z2986). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223DD changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2987). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223DD is 0 (Z2987: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223DD sets the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223DC to 3, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2981, when it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: NO), it is determined whether the detection sensor is the origin position (Z2989). When it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2899: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2990). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (Z2990: YES), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222DC is read out (Z2991), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in Z2990, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2990: NO), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223DD is larger than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223DD is larger than 0 (Z2992: YES), this process ends. When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223DD is 0 (Z2992: NO), the tilt error B command is set as the display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 5 (Z2994), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position in the processing of Z2899 (Z2989: YES), the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is cleared (Z2995), and this processing is terminated.

In the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or presses the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, the rotating claw member 347 immediately performs the unlocking operation. This causes a problem that the tilting device 320 is locked and cannot be raised. As such a countermeasure, the unlocking operation is performed by setting the number of movable steps to 10 (forward rotation; required time 100MS) as the operation data of the operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 551 (A)), which is the unlocking operation. Is configured to be maintained at the position shown in FIG. 733 and not to be fanned, so that the tilting device 320 can be configured to rise at the timing when the hand is released.

Further, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is executed or the unlocking operation is executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the detection switch 324, or the tilting device 320 is placed on the upper surface of the tilting device 320. Place a touch sensor to determine if the touch sensor is ringing on, and if it is on (if pressed), wait without unlocking and wait until it is off. Then, it may be configured to execute the unlocking operation at the timing when it is turned off. Further, when the tilting device 320 is pressed or it is determined that the player is touching the tilting device 320, the player should take his / her hand off the tilting device 320 (remove the obstruction of the ascending operation by the player) by means of display notification, voice, or the like. It may be configured to notify the user.

<16th control example>
Next, a 16th control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 564 to 588. In the eleventh control example, when the jackpot A in which the probability of winning / failing is set to a low probability (the electric support is given up to 100 times) is executed after the jackpot game, it is displayed as an even-numbered doublet. Although it was notified that the jackpot A is, in the 23rd embodiment, when the jackpot A is executed, if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored in the reserved ball, the jackpot that is executed first is executed. The stop symbol of A and the effect during the jackpot are shown as if it is the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2, and the effect is as if the high probability game state (probability change game state) is set even after the jackpot game. It differs from the eleventh control example in that it is executed. Further, in the 16th control example, even when the third symbol of the even number symbol indicating the jackpot A is displayed, it is actually a jackpot type in which the probability variation game state of the jackpot B1 or B2 is set during the jackpot game. A plurality of promotion effects for notifying the above are set, the type of the promotion effect is determined by lottery at the start of the jackpot game, and the promotion to be executed thereafter depends on the execution content of the promotion effect (for example, whether or not there is promotion). It differs from the eleventh control example in that the type of effect is switched and set. The same points as in the eleventh control example will be omitted in detail.

With reference to FIG. 564, an example of a stop display mode of the special symbol of the hit / fail determination result which is the jackpot A in this control example will be described. In FIG. 564 (A), the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the reserved symbol H1 stored as the first reserved ball is the jackpot A, and the reserved symbol H2 of the reserved ball displayed in the third is This is an example showing the case where the look-ahead result is also a jackpot A. In this case, when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol H1 is changed, it is normally displayed as even-numbered doublets, but when the change starts, the odd-numbered doublets are stopped and displayed. It is displayed by switching to. That is, the same stop symbol as when the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot B1 is executed is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 564 (B), it is suggested that the jackpot game will be executed in a short period of time, such as "Super jackpot !! Expect the next one !!", and the probability change game state is set. Notification as if it is a big hit is executed. As a result, in reality, the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored even when the jackpot A is executed, so that the effect as if the jackpot B1 is executed is executed even when the jackpot A is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the rate at which the jackpot B1 is executed is higher than the design value, and to improve the interest of the game.

With reference to FIG. 565 (A), an effect mode in which the change of the special symbol in the time-saving game state (game state with low probability electric support) after the big hit game in the example shown in FIG. 564 is executed will be described. FIG. 565 (A) shows the third state in which the time saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in the state where the reserved ball to be the jackpot A is stored (reserved symbol H2). It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the symbol display apparatus 81.

As shown in FIG. 565 (A), the character "during super time" displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 when the game is in the probabilistic game state even though the game is in the time-saving game state. Is displayed, and the character "Big hit expectation is UP" is displayed, and a display mode suggesting that the hit / fail determination probability is not actually set high and the expectation is high is displayed. As a result, it is configured to suppress a defect that significantly impairs the trust of the player by giving the player a false notification different from the actual one. In this way, the notification that substantially approximates the probabilistic gaming state can also be referred to as a pseudo notification mode.

FIG. 565 (B) is an example showing a stop display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol H2 reserved in FIG. 565 (A). The reserved symbol H2 is the result of determining whether or not the jackpot A is correct, and the reserved ball that is the jackpot (either the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, or the jackpot C) is not stored in the reserved ball. In the same manner as in the above, the stop display is made in the even-numbered doublet, and the notification indicating that the jackpot A is executed is executed.

FIG. 566 (A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving game state set after the jackpot game of jackpot A in the example shown in FIG. 565 (B) is executed is set. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode. As a display mode indicating the time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 566 (A), the time saving until the character "chance (100 times)" is displayed and the change of the special symbol is changed 100 times and stopped. It is notified that the game is being set. In addition, the number (number of times) is subtracted by 1 each time the change of the special symbol is completed and displayed.

FIG. 566 (B) is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot game in the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2 is executed. The characters "during super time (during probability change)" are displayed as a display mode suggesting that the probability change game state is set, and the player is notified that the game state is the probability change game state.

In this embodiment, only a part of the display mode is different between the case where the time-saving gaming state is set in the state where the reserved ball which is the big hit is stored and the case where the probabilistic gaming state is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same characters (for example, only during super time) may be displayed. In addition, the game state is set to be notified by the background color without displaying characters, and the time-saving game state is set with the probabilistic game state and the reserved ball that becomes a big hit stored. , It may be configured to display in an approximate color (for example, a red background color (probability changing game state), a pink background color (a time-saving game state in a state where a holding ball to be a big hit is stored)). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the time-saving gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 567 to 568, a promotion effect performed during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 567 (A) is an example of a display mode of the opening effect executed when the jackpot game is started. When the jackpot game is started, the characters "Big hit !! Start !!" are displayed until the specific winning opening 65A is opened, and the player is notified that the jackpot game has started.

FIG. 567 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the over-winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. Over-winning promotion production is a condition for ending one round by winning 10 balls in the specific winning opening 65A in one round, but based on the fact that 10 game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65A. Based on the fact that the game ball has further won a prize in the specific winning opening 65A during the period until the opening / closing door 65B is changed to the closed state, the promotion effect in which the information regarding the jackpot type is notified is executed.

In the over-win promotion production, the characters "Put the ball in the attacker and get the key !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game ball is put in the specific winning opening 65A (equivalent to the attacker). There is a display suggesting that the symbol is displayed (given to the player). Furthermore, by displaying the characters "Treasure chest chance when 11 keys are accumulated !!", the promotion effect (over prize promotion effect) indicated by "Treasure box chance !!" is executed when 11 keys are accumulated. Is notified to the player. Since one key is configured to be displayed for each winning in the specific winning opening 65A, one over winning is generated at the timing when 11 keys are displayed. Therefore, when an over-winning occurs, "Treasure chest chance !!" will be executed. Here, when the treasure box is vacant and the treasure is displayed in the "treasure box chance !!", the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned reserved ball that is the jackpot is stored. It is notified that it is a jackpot A (promoted) in the state of being. If the treasure is not displayed in the treasure box, the type of the jackpot game being executed is not notified. If the reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is not stored and the type of the jackpot game being executed is jackpot A, the effect of notifying that the player has been promoted is not executed. However, based on the fact that the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored during the big hit game, the display mode (the effect that the treasure is displayed in the treasure box) for notifying the promotion is configured to be displayed. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 568, an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the promotion effect during the round, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. In FIG. 568 (A), when the promotion effect is selected during the round, when the specific round (fifth round in this control example) is reached, the “promotion chance !! By displaying the comment "!!", the promotion effect during the round is executed, and by pressing the frame button 22, it is suggested (notified) that the information regarding the jackpot game type is notified. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 568 (B), the jackpot in a state where the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned reserved ball that is the jackpot is stored is stored. If it is A, the display mode in which the school of fish swims from the right direction to the left direction of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that the high probability game state of "probability change GET !!" is set after the big hit game. Will be done. In addition, in the case of the jackpot A in the state where the above-mentioned reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored, the character "probability change GET !!" is displayed as a notification as if the player is set in the probability change game state. Is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 569, an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 568 (A) is executed at the end of the jackpot game (after the 16th round of jackpot rounds is completed (the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65A in the 16th round (10-ball winning or 30 seconds have elapsed) are satisfied)). This is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect indicating the end of a big hit game.

On the other hand, FIG. 569 (B) is an example of a display mode in the ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion effect is selected, the jackpot game ends (the 16th round of jackpot rounds ends (the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65A in the 16th round (10-ball winning or 30 seconds have passed))). Later, during the period when the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is being executed, the characters "LUCY !! Super chance time !!" are displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed from the left to the right. A special display mode (a different production mode from the normal time) in which a school of fish (fish school) swims is displayed, and a time-saving game state is stored in a probabilistic game state after a big hit game or a reserved ball that becomes a big hit described above. A display mode suggesting that is set is displayed.

<About the electrical configuration in the 16th control example>
Next, the control process by the main control device 110 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 570 to 571.

The ROM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 570 (A). The 16th control example is different from the 11th control example in that the promotion lottery table 222DF is added to the 11th control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the promotion lottery table 222DF will be described with reference to FIG. 570 (B). FIG. 570 (B) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the promotion lottery table 222DF. The promotion lottery table 222DF determines whether or not to notify that the player has been promoted as an over-winning promotion effect based on the value of the effect counter 223H acquired based on the occurrence of an over-winning to the specific winning opening 65A during the round. It is a lottery table for. Specifically, when the type of jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2, or when the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM indicating that the execution of jackpot A is suggested to the player as if jackpot B2 was executed is on. If the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 59", the promotion effect indicating that the player has been promoted (in this control example, the effect of displaying the treasure in the treasure box) is executed.

Next, the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 571. FIG. 571 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example. In the 16th control example, the hit changing flag 223DG, the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH, the big prize counter 223DI, the promoted flag 223DJ, the promotion production type storage area 223DK, and the pseudo probability change flag 223DM are set for the 11th control example, respectively. It differs in that it has been added. The same configuration as the eleventh control example will be omitted in detail.

The hit-changing flag 223DG is a flag for determining that the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is executed in a state where the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored. If the change display of the special symbol can be replaced at the timing when the reserved ball that becomes a big hit by the winning command is newly stored when the hit fluctuation flag 223DG is on, the odd-numbered symbols are doublet. The process of switching to a symbol is executed. As a result, even if the special symbol is changed to be the jackpot A, the player can be made to think that it is the jackpot B1.

The stop symbol replacement flag 223DH wins the replacement lottery executed with a predetermined probability if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is already stored when the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started. This is a flag for instructing to switch the stop symbol to an odd number of doublet symbols. Based on the fact that the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH is on, the odd-numbered symbols are switched and set at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

The big winning counter 223DJ is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the specific winning opening 65A during one round in the big hit game.

The promoted flag 223DJ is a flag indicating that the promoted effect (the effect of displaying the treasure from the treasure box) has been executed in the over-winning promotion effect executed during the jackpot game. With this flag, it is possible to suppress a problem that the promotion effect is executed again even after the promoted effect is executed.

The promotion effect type storage area 223DK is a storage area in which when a jackpot game is executed, the type of promotion effect to be executed during the jackpot game is determined, and the determined type data of the promotion effect is stored.

The pseudo-probability flag 223DM stops the stop symbol of the special symbol in odd-numbered doublets when the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started and the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is already stored. It is a flag indicating that the lottery has been lost in the replacement lottery that is controlled to be displayed. The promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, or the effect as if the time-saving gaming state set after the jackpot game is set to the probability variation game state (see FIG. 565 (A)) is executed.

<Control processing by the main control device in the 16th control example>
With reference to FIG. 572, the control process by the main control device in the 16th control example will be described. The 16th control example differs from the 11th control example in that the jackpot control process (Z1004: FIG. 474) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 572). Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 572) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 572. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in the 16th control example differs from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 474) in the 11th control example in that the processes of Z1120 and Z1121 are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z1110, if it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (Z1110: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the big winning opening (Z1120). If there is a ball entry (Z1120: YES), a ball entry command is set (Z1121), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of Z1120 that there is no ball entering (Z1120: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. With this ball entry command, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65A during the round, and can also determine the over winning.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example>
The control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 572 to 584. In the 16th control example, for the 11th control example, the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 477) is performed by the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 574), and the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 478) is performed by the variation pattern reception process. Process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 573), winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 484), winning command receiving processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 576), variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 487), variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) : FIG. 583), the point that the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 490) was changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 584), and the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 575). Stop symbol change processing (Z2460: Fig. 577), jackpot related command reception processing (Z2280: Fig. 577), opening processing (Z2282: Fig. 578), big prize winning ball processing (Z2284: Fig. 580), round processing (Z2286: Fig. It differs in that 581) and the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 582) are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 573. FIG. 572 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Z2113). The command determination process 3 (Z2113) in the 16th control example adds the processes of Z2279 and Z2280 to the command determination process (Z2113) in the 11th control example, and changes the processes of Z2240 and Z2270. Is different.

In the processing of Z2208, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: NO), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: NO). Z2279). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: YES), the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 578. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (Z2279: NO), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 573, the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 573), which is one of the commands in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 572) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the 16th control example differs from the variation pattern reception process in the 11th control example in that the processes of Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added. Since other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of Z2226, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430). Here, the gaming state is configured to be attached to a variation pattern command and issued from the main control device 110. As the gaming state, a low-probability electric support-less gaming state (normal gaming state), a probabilistic variable gaming state (with electric support), and a time-saving gaming state (low-probability electric support-based gaming state) are set. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430: YES), the corresponding gaming state is set in the background mode storage area 223I, the display status command is set (Z2431), and the Z2227 process is executed. .. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2430, if there is no change in the gaming state (Z2430: NO), the processing of Z2431 described above is not executed, and the processing proceeds to Z2227 as it is.

With reference to FIG. 575, the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 575), which is one of the processes in the variation pattern reception process 2 (FIG. 574) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example. explain. FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 575), first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that the jackpot A does not fluctuate (Z2451: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change this time is the change of the jackpot A (Z2451: YES), it is determined whether there is another hit in the winning information storage area 223F (Z2452). When it is determined that there is another hit (Z2452: YES), the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired and the replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

After executing the processing of Z2453, it is determined whether or not the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454). When it is determined that the replacement lottery has not been won (Z2454: NO), the pseudo probability change flag 223DM provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454: YES), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2452, if it is determined that there is no other hit in the winning information storage area 223F (Z2452: NO), the hit-changing flag 223DG is set to ON (Z2457), and this processing is terminated. ..

In this way, if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started, the lottery (discrimination) for replacing the stopped symbol is executed, and if it is replaced, the lottery (determination) is executed. If it is determined), the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH indicating that the symbol replacement is executed is set to ON. On the other hand, if the player loses the lottery, the game is stopped and displayed evenly, and the jackpot game is started to execute the promotion effect during the jackpot game. Special notification such as is given.

The winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 576) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 576. The winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270) in the 16th control example is different from the winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 484) in the 11th control example in that a stop symbol changing process (Z2460) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 577, a stop symbol change process (Z2470), which is one process in the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 575) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example, will be described. do. FIG. 577 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol change process (Z2470).

The stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 577) first determines whether the hit-changing flag 223DG provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2461). If it is determined that the hit-changing flag 223DG is not on (that is, is off) (Z2461: NO), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit-changing flag 223DG is set to ON (Z2461: YES), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a big hit (Z2642: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462: YES), the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to ON (Z2463). After executing the processing of Z2463, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that the period is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: YES), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2464, if it is determined that the period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: NO), the processing of Z2465 is not executed and the main processing is terminated as it is.

In this way, at the time when the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A starts to fluctuate, even if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored, the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is newly added during the subsequent fluctuation (during the fluctuation). If it is stored in, the stop symbol is replaced (replacement to odd-numbered doublets) if the special symbol is in the high-speed fluctuation period. In this way, since it is limited to the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to perform the replacement without a sense of discomfort.

Even when the high-speed fluctuation period has expired, it may be controlled to replace the stop symbol by performing an effect such as slipping.

With reference to FIG. 578, a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 578), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 574) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example. ) Will be explained. FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280).

In the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 578), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (Z2281: YES), the opening process (Z2282) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG. 578.

Here, with reference to FIG. 579, an opening process (Z2282: FIG. 1), which is one process in the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 578) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example. 579) will be described. FIG. 579 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 579), first, the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223H acquired in the process of Z2291, the promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222DF provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, the opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect set in the Z2293 process is set (Z2294), and the process proceeds to the Z2295 process.

After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether the pseudo probability change flag 223DM is set to ON (Z2295). When it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to ON (Z2295: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223F (Z2296). When it is determined that there is a big hit (Z2296: YES), the game state is set to the big hit (Z2297), the display state command is set (Z2300), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that Z2295 is off in the processing of Z2295 (Z2295: NO), the processing of Z2296 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z2297. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2296, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the winning information storage area 223F (Z2296: NO), the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to off (Z2298), and the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM sets the gaming state. It is set during the jackpot game in the off state (Z2299), the above-mentioned Z2300 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 578, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2281, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: NO), it is determined whether or not the entry command has been received (Z2283). If it is determined that the ball entry command has been received (Z2283: YES), the large winning ball entry process (Z2284) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 580, a big prize winning ball processing (Z2280: FIG. 578), which is one of the big hit related command receiving processes (Z2280: FIG. 578) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example. Z2284) will be described. FIG. 580 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large winning ball winning process (Z2284).

In the big prize winning process (Z2284: FIG. 580), first, the value of the big prize counter 223DI provided in the RAM 223 is added by 1 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the promotion production type is an over prize (Z2312). If it is determined that the promotion effect type is not an over-winning (Z2312: NO), a display-based grand prize command indicating the value of the grand prize counter 223DI is set (Z2313), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312: YES), it is determined whether the value of the large winning counter 223DI is larger than 10 (Z2314). When it is determined that the value of the large prize counter 223DI is smaller than 10 (Z2314: NO), a large prize command for display indicating the value of the corresponding large prize counter 223DI is set during the over prize production (Z2315). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the big prize counter 223DI is larger than 10 (Z2314: YES), the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired, and the promotion lottery table 222DF is obtained based on the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM or the big hit type. A more promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

After executing the processing of Z2316, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect has been won (Z2317). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: YES), a display large prize command indicating the value of the large prize counter 223DI and the promotion effect has been won is set (Z2318), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: NO), a large prize command for display indicating a deviation between the value of the large prize counter 223DI and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this process is performed. finish.

Returning to FIG. 578, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2283, when it is determined that the ball entry command has not been received (Z2283: NO), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z2285: YES), the round process (Z2286) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 581, regarding the round process (Z2286) which is one process in the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 578) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example. explain. FIG. 581 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process (Z2286).

In the round process (Z2286: FIG. 581), first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect type is an over prize (Z2331). If it is determined that the promotion effect type is not an over prize (Z2331: NO), it is determined whether the promotion effect type is the ending (Z2332). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the ending (Z2332: NO), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). If it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: YES), a display round command corresponding to the jackpot type or pseudo-probability change flag 223DM is set (Z2334), and the SW valid time counter 223K corresponding to the round effect is set. The value corresponding to (Z2335) is set, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning in the processing of Z2331 (Z2331: YES), or when it is determined that the promotion effect type is ending in the processing of Z2332 (Z2332). : YES) Or, if it is determined that the number of rounds is not 12R in the processing of Z2333 (Z2333: NO), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this processing is terminated. ..

Returning to FIG. 578, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of Z2285, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: NO), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (Z2287). When the ending command is received (Z2288: YES), the ending process (Z2288) is executed and the present process is terminated. The details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. 582. On the other hand, in the process of Z2287, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: NO), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2289), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 582, regarding the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 582), which is one of the processes in the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 578) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example. explain. FIG. 582 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 582), first, it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is ending (Z2371). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the ending (Z2371: NO), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223DJ provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2372). When it is determined that the promoted flag 223DJ is set to off (Z2372: NO), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot B2 (Z2373: YES), a display ending command indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, in the processing of Z2373, when it is determined that the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B2 (Z2373: NO), it is determined whether the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to ON (Z2374). When the pseudo probability change flag 223DM is set to off (Z2374: NO), the display ending command corresponding to the current jackpot type is set (Z2376). If it is determined in the Z2372 process that the promoted flag 223DJ is set to ON (Z2372: YES), the above-mentioned Z2376 process is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2374 that the pseudo probability change flag 223DM is set to ON (Z2374: YES), the processing of Z2375 described above is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or the processing of Z2376, the game state is set at the end of the jackpot (Z2377), the display state command is set (Z2378), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the type of promotion effect is determined at the execution timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the over-winning promotion effect is determined, it is determined whether or not the content promoted by the over-winning promotion effect is notified during the jackpot game, and if it is not executed, the ending promotion effect or the promotion effect during the round is executed. The process of switching to is executed.

As a result, even if the over-winning promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect can be executed by switching to a different promotion effect even when the ball entry frequency is low to the specific winning opening 65A.

With reference to FIG. 583, the variation display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example will be described. FIG. 583 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). In the variation display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the 16th control example, the processes of Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed for the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 487) in the 11th control example, and the processes of Z2511 to Z2515 are performed. The difference is that Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH is set to ON (Z2511). If it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH is set to off (Z2511: NO), the extracted stop type is set as it is (Z2512), and the display stop type command is set (Z2513). This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2511, when it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH is set to ON (Z2511: YES), the stop type in which the odd-numbered jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol is set (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH is set to off (Z2515), the above-mentioned Z2513 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 584, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 584) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example will be described. FIG. 584 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (Z2107) in the 16th control example does not execute the processes of Z2808 to Z2810 for the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107: FIG. 490) in the 11th control example. , Z2830, Z2831, Z2840 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z2807, when it is determined that the frame button is pressed (Z2807: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect is being set (Z2830). If it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: YES), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and the sensor input process is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input process, another SW process is executed (Z2840), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the Z2830 process that the effect is not being set (Z2830: NO), the above-mentioned Z2803 to 2804 processes are executed, and the sensor input process (Z2813) and other SW processes (Z2840) are executed. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Control processing by the display control device in the 16th control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 585 to 588. The 16th control example differs from the 11th control example in that the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 495) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 585). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 585) will be described with reference to FIG. 585. FIG. 585 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Z3302). The command determination process 2 (Z3302) in the 16th control example is different from the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 495) in the 11th control example in that the processes of Z3430 to Z3435 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no display notice display command (Z3408: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430). If it is determined that there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430: YES), the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) is executed.

Here, the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. 586 (A). FIG. 586 (A) is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431).

In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the odd-numbered jackpot symbol is replaced with the stop type table (Z3441). Next, the stop symbol is set by comparing the stop type table with the stop symbol counter (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to ON (Z3443), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 585, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z3430, when it is determined that there is no display symbol replacement command (Z3430: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a display status command (Z3432). If it is determined that there is a display status command (Z3432: YES), the game status setting process (Z3433) is executed.

Here, the game state setting process (Z3433) will be described with reference to FIG. 586 (B). FIG. 586 (B) is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state setting process (Z3433).

In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223I (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the gaming state set in the background mode storage area 223I is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 585, the explanation will be continued. When it is determined that there is no display status command in the processing of Z3432 (Z3432: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434). If it is determined that there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434: YES), the jackpot related display process (Z3435) is executed.

Here, the jackpot-related display process (Z3435) will be described with reference to FIG. 587. FIG. 587 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related display process (Z3435).

In the jackpot-related display process (Z3435), first, it is determined whether or not the display opening command has been received (Z3461). If it is determined that the display opening command has been received (Z3461: YES), the display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display grand prize command has not been received (Z3461: NO), it is determined whether the display grand prize command has been received (Z3463). If it is determined that the display grand prize command has been received (Z3463: YES), the grand prize process (Z3464) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the grand prize processing (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG. 587.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3463, when it is determined that the display grand prize command has not been received (Z3463: NO), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z3465). When it is determined that the number of rounds command has been received (Z3465: YES), the display data table of the round display corresponding to the number of rounds of the command is set, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3465, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: NO), it is determined whether the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467). When it is determined that the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467: YES), the display data table of the promotion round effect of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3467, when it is determined that the promotion round command for display has not been received (Z3467: NO), it is determined whether the ending command for display has been received (Z3469). If it is determined that the display ending command has been received (Z3469: YES), the display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3469, if it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: NO), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z3471), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 588, a big prize processing (Z3464: FIG. 588), which is one of the big hit related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 587), will be described. FIG. 588 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large prize processing (Z3464).

In the big prize processing (Z3464), first, in the processing of Z3463 of the big hit related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 587), it is determined whether or not the received display big prize command has won the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: YES), the number of winnings indicated by the received command and the display data table corresponding to the winning effect are set (Z3481), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: NO), it is determined whether the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482). If it is determined that the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482: YES), the display data table of the number of winnings indicated by the command and the over-winning corresponding to the out-of-order effect is set (Z3483), and this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3482, when it is determined that the received command is not out of the promotion effect (Z3482: NO), it is determined whether the received command corresponds to the over-winning effect (Z3484). If it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: YES), the over-winning display data table corresponding to the number of winnings indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3484, if it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: NO), it is determined whether the number of winning commands indicated by the number of received commands is greater than 10. Z3486: NO). If it is determined that the number of winnings is larger than 10 (Z3486: YES), a display data table corresponding to the normal over-winning effect is set (Z3487), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3486, when it is determined that the number of winnings indicated by the number of received commands is less than 10 (Z3486), this processing is terminated as it is.

<17th control example>
Next, a 17th control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 589 to 597. In the eleventh control example, the winning opening that triggers the lottery (variation) based on the first special symbol, and the lottery based on the second special symbol whose lottery result is more likely to be more favorable to the player than the first special symbol. In addition to the winning slot that triggers (variation) and the distribution device 700 that alternately wins balls, as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol normal symbol, the electric accessory 640A is used when winning for a long time. It was opened for a long period of time (2 seconds) so that the ball could easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Then, when the player wins a normal symbol for a long time, the player is made to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 by displaying the effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It was configured to play the game enthusiastically (see FIG. 425).

Further, in the twelfth control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640A is configured to be controlled so that the ball is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, and the normal state is in progress. When the change of the second special symbol is started, a special effect (see FIG. 509 (B)) is executed to provide a special feeling to the player. Further, in the twelfth control example, the special effect is not executed even when the normal state is set as the game state for a predetermined period (five fluctuations of the special symbol) after the time saving state ends. Was configured in. As a result, it is executed when a predetermined number (up to 4) of reserved balls of the second special symbol is secured (with the reserved second special symbol held during the time saving state left) and the time saving state is completed. It is configured so that the above-mentioned special effect is not executed in the second special symbol change to be performed. As a result, the special feeling of the special production can be maintained.

On the other hand, in the 17th control example, when the result of the lottery of the normal symbol is won for a long time, the game is played by using the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result. It differs from the eleventh control example in that it is configured to execute an effect (long-time open effect) that suggests that the person has won the prize for a long time in a lottery of ordinary symbols.

Further, as a result of the lottery of ordinary symbols, it is different from the eleventh control example in that it is configured so that the effect mode of the long-time open effect is different depending on the timing of winning for a long time. The details of the same points as those of the above-mentioned control examples will be omitted.

The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 589. FIG. 589 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 589, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example causes the ball to flow down to the left side region (left side region) of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the 11th control example described above. A character imitating a "fish" forms the surface of the game board 13 (or the surface of the game board 13) as a guide display mode ZR1 that serves as a guideline for the position where the ball is to be fired when the game (left-handed game) is performed. When the member is made of highly permeable acrylic resin, it is decorated (arranged) inside the game board 13) so that the player can easily see the guidance display mode ZR1.

Further, when performing a game (right-handed game) for causing the ball to flow down to the right area (right area) of the variable display device unit 80, "turtle" is used as a guide display mode ZR2 as a guideline for the position where the ball is launched. The character imitating the above is decorated (arranged) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 when the member forming the surface of the game board 13 is a highly transparent acrylic resin). Is configured so that the guide display mode ZR1 can be easily visually recognized.

With this configuration, the player can easily grasp where on the game board 13 the ball is aimed at to execute the right-handed game or the left-handed game. Further, by decorating the surface of the game board 13 with characters (fish, turtle) for guiding the right-handed game and the left-handed game, the player is directed to the game on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the case of executing an effect (guidance effect) for guiding (right-handed game or left-handed game), it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to visually and easily grasp.

Further, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th control example is a region (electric accessory) in which the second winning opening 640 can be won when a left-handed game is performed with respect to the 11th control example described above. When the 640A is in the opening operation, the regulation nail ZK1 is planted so that the ratio of the ball flowing down the second winning opening 640) is low. On the other hand, when the right-handed game is performed, the nails are planted so that the ratio of the ball passing through the opening 710 of the distribution device 700 is low. With this configuration, aiming at the distribution device 700, aiming at the left-handed game (first game) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed (lottery), and the second winning opening 640, the first 2 It is possible to provide a player with a right-handed game (second game) in which only a special symbol is changed (lottery).

As in the eleventh control example described above, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is difficult to open, so that the player is inevitable. When the left-handed game is performed and the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640A is in a state where it is easy to open, so that the player inevitably plays the right-handed game. In addition, for example, even when the time saving state is set as the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit (4 pieces), the right-handed game is further performed. Even if it is not possible to acquire the hold of the special symbol (the right to draw (change) the special symbol), it is also possible to perform a left-handed game and a game of acquiring the reserved ball of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 590 (A), in the 17th control example, an effect mode displayed during the fluctuation of the normal symbol when the normal symbol is won for a long time will be described. FIG. 590 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (long opening effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during a normal symbol variation that is won per long time. The same elements as those of the eleventh control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 590 (A), in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81, "Open soon" as an effect (long open effect) suggesting that the normal symbol has been won for a long time. Characters are displayed, and the opening target mode ZA2 imitating the electric accessory 640A to be opened and the guidance display mode ZA1 imitating the "turtle" indicating the game direction instructed to the player are displayed. As a result, since the electric accessory 640A is opened to the player, it is possible to easily visually grasp that the right-handed game is to be performed.

Further, when the long opening effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed on the reduced display area ZA3. In the 17th control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is configured to be displayed in the reduced display area ZA3. However, instead of this configuration, for example, it is currently being executed. Based on the discriminating means for discriminating whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation is a lottery result advantageous to the player (big hit, small hit, etc.) and the discriminating result of the discriminating means, the long opening effect and the third symbol A priority display discriminating means for discriminating which of the variable effects is preferentially displayed, and a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on the discriminating result of the priority display discriminating means. It may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to display of an effect display for showing a game result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the above example, the effect determined to be displayed preferentially (priority effect) is displayed in the central portion of the main display area DM, and the effect determined not to be displayed preferentially (non-priority effect) is displayed. It may be displayed in the reduced display area ZA3, but in addition to that, for example, a plurality of different areas of the reduced display area are prepared, and the non-priority effect is determined according to the game result indicated by the effect. It may be configured to change the size of the area for displaying the effect. Further, the effect display on the side determined to be the non-priority effect may be configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, a configuration is shown in which the display area of each effect (variable effect, long open effect) is changed based on the lottery result of the changing special symbol and the lottery result of the changing ordinary symbol. In addition to that, for example, a holding ball number determining means for determining whether the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more is provided, and based on the determination result of the holding ball number determining means. The display area of the long open effect may be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 590 (B), an effect mode during a long-time hit game (during long opening) of a normal symbol will be described. FIG. 590 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (effect during long opening) of the third symbol display device 81 during a long period of time. The same elements as those of the eleventh control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 590 (B), the character "OPEN" indicating that the long opening is currently being performed is displayed in the center of the main display area DM, and the opening target imitates the electric accessory 640A during the opening operation. Aspect ZA2 is displayed in a display mode indicating an open state. Further, similarly to FIG. 590 (A), the guidance display mode ZA1 imitating the “turtle” indicating the game direction instructed to the player is displayed, and the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area ZA3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 591, a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long opening effect is restricted will be described. FIG. 591 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where the long opening effect is restricted among the display modes of the third symbol display device 81 during a long period of time. The same elements as those of the eleventh control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the 17th control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the long opening effect described above is executed with reference to FIG. 590 (A), and the normal state (the first). 2 In a state where it is difficult to win a ball in the winning opening 640), when it becomes easy for the ball to win in the second winning opening 640 (when winning a long time hit of a normal symbol), a state advantageous to the player (first). It is configured to reliably notify the player of the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery that is more favorable to the player than the special symbol.

In this configuration, in the normal state immediately after the time saving state ends, for example, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit number (4), the normal symbol Even if the player wins for a long time, the above-mentioned long opening effect will be executed. In this way, in the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit, even if the electric accessory 640A is opened for a long time and a plurality of balls are won in the second entrance 640, a new reserved ball is acquired. There was a problem that it was not possible to provide the player with a special feeling of long open production.

Therefore, in the 17th control example, the predetermined period (the period until the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times) after the time saving state ends is described above even if the normal symbol is won for a long time. It is configured so that the long open effect is not executed (the effect under the long open effect regulation is executed). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the long opening effect has been executed.

As shown in FIG. 591, in the state where the long opening effect is restricted, the long opening effect shown in FIG. 590 (A) is not executed, and the variation effect of the third symbol is generated in the central portion of the main display area DM. Is displayed. Then, as the game direction instructed to the player, the guidance display mode ZA1 imitating a "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed. In this way, even if a normal symbol is won for a long time in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the timing is a predetermined period (the special symbol changes 5 times after the time reduction state ends). If it is within the period until it is executed), by preventing the long opening effect from being executed, it is possible to surely suppress the provision of a meaningless long opening effect to the player. can. In addition, immediately after finishing the time saving state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is the main, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is excessively executed by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol again. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

In this control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long opening effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), the period (regulation period) for restricting the long opening effect is set. , The period from the end of the time saving state until the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times, but other than that, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state. It may be the period until the time required to execute 5 times elapses. Further, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less) during the above-mentioned regulation period, the above-mentioned regulation period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. It may be configured in.

Further, in this control example, the long opening effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the end of the reduced working hours, but the long opening effect may be regulated by other conditions, for example. When the special symbol fluctuation being executed is won as a big hit, when the continuous effect is set to straddle multiple special symbol fluctuations, or when the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) When it is determined that the reserved ball of the above contains the winning information of winning a big hit, the long opening effect may be regulated.

<About the electrical configuration in the 17th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 592, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 17th control example will be described. The 17th control example differs from the 12th control example in that the long open effect flag 223E1 is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the twelfth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the configurations of ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the 17th control example are the same, various control processes related to the ejection of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example are described in the 11th control example described above. Is the same as. On the other hand, various control processes (control example of the voice lamp control device 113) related to the effect of the 17th control example are the same as those of the 12th control example except for the above points. Therefore, the same parts as the 11th control example are assigned the same reference numerals to the various control processes related to the ball ejection, and the description thereof is omitted, and the same parts as the 12th control example are the same for the various control processes related to the effect. The description thereof will be omitted by adding a reference numeral.

Since the fluctuation number counter 223AJ is described in the twelfth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but a predetermined value (5) is set when the time saving state ends, and the fluctuation display of the third symbol is displayed. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 when it is set (when a special symbol is changed). In the 17th control example, the long opening effect is not executed until the value of the fluctuation number counter 223AJ becomes 0.

The long opening effect flag 223E1 is a flag for indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the long opening effect is being executed. This long release effect flag 223E1 is when a long-time hit release command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received and when it is determined that the fluctuation count counter 223AJ is not 0 (Z2904: NO in FIG. 595). , On (see Z2907 in FIG. 595) and off when a long-time end command for a normal symbol is received (Z2911 in FIG. 595).

<Control processing by the main control device in the 17th control example>
Next, the control process by the main control device in the 17th control example will be described. The 17th control example differs from the 11th control example in that the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 468) is changed to the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171: see FIG. 593). Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 593, the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 17th control example will be described. The ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) in the 17th control example differs from the ordinary symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 468) in the 11th control example in that the processes of Z451 to Z453 are added. .. Since the other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 593, when the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processing of Z401 and Z402 as in the eleventh control example is executed, and it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing in the processing of Z402. If so (Z402: NO), it is determined whether the long-time open flag 203I is set to ON (Z451). As described above in the eleventh control example, this long-time open flag 203I is set when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start processing (Z408: FIG. 469) that the normal symbol has been won for a long time (Z426: YES). , A flag set to on (Z428).

If it is determined in the processing of Z451 that the long-time open flag 203I is set to on (Z451: YES), the long-time open flag 203I is set to off (Z403), and the long-time open end command is set. (Z452), shift to the processing of Z404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long-time open flag 203I is not on (off) in the processing of Z451 (Z4511: NO), the processing of Z403 and Z452 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to Z404 processing. Then, the same processes of Z404 to Z409 as in the eleventh control example described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

That is, as described above, the long-time open flag 203I is a flag that is set to be on from the timing when the fluctuation of the winning normal symbol is started to the end of the long-time hit.

In the processing of Z402, if it is determined that the current symbol is currently changing (Z402: YES), the processing of Z410 to Z413 at the same position as the 11th control example described above is executed, and then the processing for a long time is performed. Set the middle command (Z453) and end this process. The long-time hit command set in Z453 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 473) of the main control device 110. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the long-time hit command creates a display command for indicating to the player that the current time is long-time hit (long open), and transmits the display command to the display control device 114. do. Then, the display control device 114 displays an effect display indicating that the long opening is in progress on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 590 (B)).

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the 17th control example>
With reference to FIGS. 594 and 595, the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the 17th control example will be described. In the 17th control example, the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 517) is changed to the command determination process 4 (Z2181: FIG. 594) with respect to the 12th control example, and the long open effect process (Z2272) is performed. It differs in that it is added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the twelfth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 17th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 594. FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (Z2181). The command determination process 4 (Z2181) in the 17th control example is different from the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 517) in the 12th control example in that the processes of Z2271 to Z2277 are added.

Here, when the command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes of Z2201 to Z2209 as the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 517) of the twelfth control example described above are executed. When it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received in the processing of Z2208 (Z2208: NO), then it is determined whether the related command has been received for a long time (Z2271), and it is determined that the command has been received. (Z2208: YES) executes a long opening effect process described later (Z2272), and ends this process. In this long opening effect processing (Z2272), a process for setting a display mode of the effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol is won for a long time is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2271, when it is determined that the related command is not received for a long time (Z2271: NO), it is referred to as Z2256 to Z2260 of the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 517) of the twelfth control example described above. The same processes of Z2273 to Z2277 are executed, and this process is terminated. That is, in this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, and a predetermined command (winning in the lottery of the normal symbol for a long time). When the command) shown) is received, it is configured so that an effect for notifying the player to that effect can be set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Next, the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272) will be described with reference to FIG. 595. FIG. 595 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272). This long open effect process (Z2272) executes a process for setting the effect mode of the long open effect when the normal symbol is won for a long time, and is the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state). Alternatively, the effect mode is set according to the operating state (during fluctuation, during the winning game) of the normal symbol (within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving state).

When the long open effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the long-time hit-related command received this time is the long-time hit open command (Z2901). This long-time hit release command is a command set when the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 469) of the main control device 110 is won for a long-time hit of the normal symbol. If it is determined in the processing of Z2901 that the command is open for a long time (Z2901: YES), then the current gaming state is extracted from the state storage area 223AZ (Z2902). Then, if it is determined whether the extracted game state is in the time reduction (the time reduction state is set) (Z2903), and if it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (Z2903: YES), the target for executing the long open effect is executed. Since it is not a period, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2903, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (in the normal state) (Z2903: NO), then it is determined whether the fluctuation count counter 223AJ is larger than 0 (1 or more) (1 or more). Z2904). Since the detailed explanation is given in the twelfth control example described above, the explanation will be briefly described. However, this fluctuation number counter 223AJ has a predetermined number (5) when the final fluctuation in which the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed. ) Is set, and the value is decremented by 1 each time the variation display setting process is executed. The period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of the variation of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (5 times). It is a counter referred to for determining.

In the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223AJ is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2904: NO), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed at least 5 times after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that the state is set, a long open effect command for display is set because it is a period during which the long open effect can be executed while the normal state is set as the game state (Z2906). , The long open effect flag 223E1 is set to ON (Z2907), and this process is terminated.

Here, the set display long effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 476) of the main process (see FIG. 476) of the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating the long open effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 590 (A)).

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223AJ is larger than 0 (Z2904: YES), that is, in a state where the fluctuation of the special symbol is not executed five times after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that there is, since it is a period in which the long open effect cannot be executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the left-handed long effect command for display is set (Z2905). End the process.

Here, the set left-handed long effect command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 476) of the main process (see FIG. 476) of the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating that the long open effect is being regulated on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 591).

In the processing of Z2901, if it is determined that the long-time hit-related command received this time is not a long-time hit open command (Z2901: NO), then it is determined whether the long-time hit medium command is received (Z2908). .. This long-time hit command is set after setting the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory in the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: FIG. 593) of the main control device 110, and is set during the long-time hit game. This is a command that indicates that there is.

In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the command has been received for a long time (Z2908: YES), then it is determined whether the long open effect flag 223E1 is set to ON (Z2909), and the long open effect flag is set. If it is determined that 223E1 is set to ON (Z2909: YES), a long release command for display is set (Z2910), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2909, if it is determined that the long open effect flag 223E1 is not set to on (set to off) (Z2909: NO), the processing of Z2910 is skipped and the present processing is terminated. ..

Here, the processing of Z2909 will be described. In the 17th control example, as in the 11th control example described above, the winning lottery is performed at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started (the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation start processing is executed), and the electric accessory 640A at the time of winning. It is configured to determine the operation mode (whether or not it is a long open), and is configured to set a long-time hit open command at that timing. Then, after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (minimum 3 seconds, maximum 30 seconds) has elapsed after setting the open command for a long time, the stop display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set, and then the electric motor is used. It is configured to start the operation control of the accessory 640A.

Therefore, a time lag of 3 seconds at the shortest and 30 seconds at the longest occurs between receiving the long-time hit open command and the long-time hit medium command. When the value of 223AJ is larger than 0, the long-time hit open command is set, and then there is a possibility that the long-time hit middle command is received at the timing when the value of the fluctuation count counter 223AJ is 0.

In the 17th control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in accordance with the long opening operation of the electric accessory 640A in such a state, the processing when the long opening command is received is long. When the open effect flag 223E1 is not set to ON, the long open command for display is not set even if the command is received for a long time. With this configuration, for example, the effect of the display mode based on the left-handed long effect command for display (see FIG. 591) suddenly becomes the effect of the display mode based on the long open command for display (FIG. 590 (B)). It is possible to prevent the player from switching to (see) and giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Returning to FIG. 595, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the command during long-time hitting has not been received (Z2908: NO), then it is determined whether or not the long-time hit end command has been received (Z2911), and the long-time hit end command has been received. (Z2911: YES), the long open effect flag 223E1 is set to off (Z1912), the long open end command for display is set (Z1913), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z2208, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: NO), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: NO). Z2279). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: YES), the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 578. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (Z2279: NO), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing by the display control device in the 17th control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in the 17th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 596 and 597. The 17th control example differs from the 16th control example in that the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 585) is changed to the command determination process 3 (Z3321: FIG. 596). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 3 (Z3321: FIG. 596) will be described with reference to FIG. 596. FIG. 596 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Z3321). The command determination process 3 (Z3321) in the 17th control example is different from the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 585) in the 16th control example in that the processes of Z3441 to Z3442 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined that there is no display notice display command in the processing of Z3408 (Z3408: NO), the processing of Z3441 is executed. If it is determined that there is no display long release related command in the processing of Z3441 (Z3441: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a display status command (Z3432). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a long release related command for display (Z3441: YES), the long open related process (Z3442) is executed.

In the long opening related processing (FIG. 597, Z3442), first, the display data table for the long opening effect corresponding to the received long opening effect command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long open effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z6202).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and the time data representing the fluctuation time is generated based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233D. The timekeeping counter 233H is set (Z6204), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

As described above, in the 17th control example, when the normal state (the state in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) is set as the game state, the normal symbol is hit for a long time. If you win, it is configured to execute a long open effect during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric accessory 640A is open to the player for a long time, and the game in which the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 can be reliably performed.

Further, in the 17th control example, even if the normal state is set as the gaming state, there is a high possibility that a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol have been acquired in the normal state, and the predetermined period after the end of the time saving is completed. If it is inside, it is configured to regulate the execution of the above-mentioned long open effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the quality of the privilege (the privilege of easily securing the reserved ball of the second special symbol) given to the player when the long opening effect is executed.

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), the period (regulation period) for restricting the long opening effect is set. , The period from the end of the time saving state until the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times, but other than that, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state. It may be the period until the time required to execute 5 times elapses. Further, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less) during the above-mentioned regulation period, the above-mentioned regulation period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. It may be configured in.

Further, in this control example, the long opening effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the end of the reduced working hours, but the long opening effect may be regulated by other conditions, for example. When the special symbol fluctuation being executed is won as a big hit, when the continuous effect is set to straddle multiple special symbol fluctuations, or when the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) When it is determined that the reserved ball of the above contains the winning information of winning a big hit, the long opening effect may be regulated.

Specifically, for example, in the Z2903 process of the long open effect process (see FIG. 595), after determining Z2903: NO, a process of determining whether the continuous effect in-progress flag 223AC is set is provided and continuous. If it is determined that the effect during effect flag 223AC is set to ON, it may be configured to end this process as it is so as not to execute the long open effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without breaking the priority with the effect to be executed.

Further, in the 17th control example, different game methods are displayed on the display screen depending on whether the long opening effect is restricted or the long opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the long opening effect is executed, a right-handed game is performed in order to make the second winning device 640 win a ball, and when the long opening effect is regulated, the distribution device 700 is performed. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set so that a left-handed game is performed in order to win a prize. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (large), the first winning opening 64 and the right second winning opening 640 are aimed at by the left-handed game, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small. Can play a game aimed at the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game.

In this 17th control example, the game board 13 is set so that the ease of flowing the ball to the distribution device 700 and the second winning opening 640 is different depending on the right-handed game and the left-handed game. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, for example, by firing a ball weakly in a left-handed game, the ball can easily reach the second winning opening 640, and a strong left-handed game is performed. Therefore, the game board 13 may be configured so that the ball can easily reach the distribution device 700. As a result, the game result can be greatly different by slightly changing the operation of the launching device, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, although the 17th control example describes the configuration based on the control content of the main control device 110 in the 11th control example described above, the control of the main control device 110 used in the 11th control example described above is described. Not limited to the content, it may be used for the control content of the main control device 110 of the twelfth control example, that is, a gaming machine of a type that executes a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol in preference to the first special symbol. good.

At the end of the game state with electric support (low probability electric support game state (time saving game state) or high probability electric support (probability variation game state)), a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of reserved balls are present. On condition that it is memorized for the second special symbol, the effect of hitting the normal symbol for a long time is prohibited (not executed), or the effect of urging the game ball to enter the first entry port 64. It may be configured to switch to and execute. With this configuration, even when the game is switched to the normal game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small, it is possible to configure the normal symbol to perform a long-time effect, and the player can perform the second special symbol. 2 It is possible to suppress the problem of depriving the chance of winning a prize in a special symbol.

Further, in this control example, when the game is switched to the normal gaming state, the normal symbol is not produced for a long time or is different from the normal time until the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (5 times in this embodiment). Is configured to switch to a different effect, but not limited to that, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) regardless of the game state, the normal symbol is for a long time. It may be configured not to produce a hit effect or to switch to an effect different from the normal effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play an advantageous game according to the state of the game. Further, as a condition for not producing the effect of the normal symbol for a long time or switching to the effect different from the normal time, when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (for example). , The fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, or the fluctuation pattern of the super reach) may be set. Further, the time information from the RTC may be acquired and set as a condition for switching if the store is about to close at a specific time (for example, 5 minutes before). The conditions for switching may be set in combination with the conditions given in this control example.

<18th control example>
Next, the 18th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 598 to 638. In the 18th control example, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (see FIG. 457) and the operation of the frame button 22A are based on the 11th control example described above. The control of the voice lamp control device 113 executed when the background mode is changed, and the effect content executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches a specific number (upper limit of 8). The difference is that a detailed explanation is added about the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 regarding the frame button 22 and the function of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 598, the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example has a plurality of operating means (frame button 22A, left button 22B, right) as operating means that can be operated by the player. Since the button 22C) is provided, the configuration shown as the frame button 22 in the above-mentioned eleventh control example is referred to as the frame button 22A, but since the meaning is the same, the frame in the present control example. The detailed description of the button 22A will be omitted. Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the various technical ideas described by using the frame button 22 are also applied to the frame button 22A of this control example.

In the eleventh control example described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 starts up (see FIG. 472), the voice lamp control device 113 starts up (see FIG. 475), and so on. Is executed and each startup process is being executed (power-on period), as described above with reference to FIG. 457, a dedicated display screen (power-on screen) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition to displaying, the voice output device 226 is used to perform a notification (notification during the power-on period) to indicate that the power is currently being turned on (each startup process based on the power-on is being executed). It was composed.

In the eleventh control example configured in this way, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (turned off) during the variable display of the special symbol and then turned on (turned on), the main control device 110 Based on the information stored (backed up) in the RAM 202, the special symbol fluctuation is restarted from the state immediately before the power is turned off, but it is output from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the audio output device 226. Since it is configured to emphasize to the player that the notification sound is being turned on, it is difficult for the player to notice that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and it is executed before the power is turned off. There was a problem that it made me think that the special symbol fluctuation that had been used was erased.

On the other hand, in the 18th control example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is being executed when the power is turned off, that is, when the power is turned off. When the executed special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is restarted after the power is turned on, BGM (special symbol fluctuation sound effect) indicating that the special symbol is fluctuating during the power-on period is output. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily make the player know that the special map fluctuation that was executed when the power was turned off has been restarted. Further, rather than creating the data of the display image (variable image of the third symbol) corresponding to the special symbol variation to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the audio data output from the audio output device 226 is created. Since the amount of data processed is smaller, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing immediately after the power is turned on. The details of the audio output control at the time of turning on the power will be described later with reference to FIG. 601.

Further, in the 18th control example, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22A even while the special symbol is changing. In addition, the timing for changing the background mode is changed according to the fluctuation speed of the special symbol (third symbol) at the time when the player operates the frame button 22A to change the background mode. .. More specifically, in this control example, in order to show the lottery result of the special symbol, the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variable display period of the special symbol It is configured so that the fluctuation display speed can be changed, and if the frame button 22A is operated during high-speed fluctuation where the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is fast, the background mode is immediately changed and the fluctuation of the third symbol is changed. If the frame button 22A is operated during a low-speed fluctuation whose speed is slower than the high-speed fluctuation, the background mode is set after the change of the special symbol is completed (after the special symbol stop display or when the next special symbol change starts). It is configured to change.

Generally, the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed by the pachinko machine 10 is configured to fluctuate at high speed for a predetermined period (first half period) after the start of fluctuation, and then fluctuate at low speed (second half period). It is configured to execute a suggestion effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by using the period in which the three symbols are variablely displayed at a low speed. Therefore, by configuring the frame button 22A so that the background mode is not changed even if the frame button 22A is operated during the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol as in the 18th control example, a dedicated effect corresponding to the currently set background mode is produced. While the (suggestion effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol) is being executed, the background mode is changed, and the player cannot see the effect content (effect result) of the suggestion effect. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since it has a fluctuation notification means for notifying the player whether the fluctuation display of the third symbol being executed is a high-speed fluctuation or a low-speed fluctuation, in order to shift the background mode at this stage. It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner at what timing the background mode is switched when the operation of is performed. In this control example, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is configured to be able to be notified to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, whether or not the present is a period in which the background mode can be immediately shifted is determined. It may be configured to notify the player.

Further, the variation notification means for notifying the player whether the variation display of the third symbol being executed is high-speed variation or low-speed variation is during the execution period of the effect (operation effect) using the operation means. It is also configured to execute a notification for the player to know whether or not there is a game. As a result, when the operation valid period, which is the period during which the operation means can be operated, is set, whether the operation valid period is the operation valid period set by executing the operation effect, the background mode is changed. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the operation is valid for the operation to be performed. Therefore, when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an unintended display mode.

In the 18th control example, the above-mentioned fluctuation notification means is provided in the operation means (frame button 22A) operated by the player when the background mode is changed (provided in the vicinity of the operation means). Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22A to shift to the background mode, the notification mode of the fluctuation notification means can be easily confirmed.

Further, in the 18th control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes a specific number (for example, 8 which is the upper limit number), it corresponds to the winning information (reserved symbol) of the specific number stored in the reserve. It is configured to execute a specific period effect (8 hold effect) using the fluctuation time of the special symbol to be performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a period effect that uses a longer period than the effect that is executed corresponding to one special symbol variation display period, so that various effects can be executed. It becomes possible and the effect of production can be enhanced. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is set to a specific number, and the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the effect is executed for a specific period.

Here, in the case of being configured to execute the period effect within a predetermined range (within the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the specific number of winning information stored on hold) as in the 18th control example. , As described with reference to FIG. 427 (B) in the eleventh control example described above, the third symbol display is used to notify the player of the number of reserved balls (upper limit number: 8) of the current special symbol. The first reserved symbol pedestal M1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal M8 are formed in the small area DS2 of the sub-display area DS of the device 81, and the first reserved symbol pedestal M1 is formed in order according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. If the configuration for displaying the reserved symbol (see FIG. 428 (A)) is used, the reserved symbol corresponding to the newly acquired winning information during the period effect execution is displayed in the small area DS2, so which reserved symbol is used. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the period is the target of the period production, and the player is provided with the production that is difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the 18th control example, when the period effect is not executed, the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed in the small area DS2 as in the 11th control example described above, and the period is displayed. When the effect is executed, only the number of reserved balls that are the target of the period effect is displayed in the small area DS2 as the effect hold symbol. With this configuration, even if new prize information is acquired during the period effect, the effect hold symbol displayed on the small area DS2 does not increase, so the reserved symbol that is the target of the period effect is given to the player. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. The detailed contents of the period effect in the 18th control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 607 to 609.

Further, a display area (light emitting area) different from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used so that the player can be notified of the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the current number of reserved balls even while the period effect is being executed.

In addition, the 18th control example is configured so that when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22A, the operated (pressed) frame button 22A vibrates. It is configured so that the amount of vibration can be changed. By configuring the frame button 22A to vibrate in this way, when the player presses the frame button 22A, the vibration can be transmitted to the player who pressed the frame button 22A, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Can be done. Further, it is configured to execute an effect for suggesting the vibration amount (vibration level) of the vibration executed when the frame button 22A is pressed.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 that can provide a player with an unexpected effect by vibrating the frame button 22A when the player presses the frame button 22A. In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, the player cannot predict whether or not vibration will be applied when the frame button 22A is pressed until the player presses the frame button 22A, and the game There is a problem that the frame button 22A cannot be positively operated (pressed) by a person.

On the other hand, in the 18th control example, whether or not vibration is applied to the player when the frame button 22A is operated (pressed) before the frame button 22A is operated (pressed), and vibration. It is configured to be able to suggest the vibration level when doing so. With this configuration, the frame button 22A can be operated in a state in which the player is made to predict the vibration mode when the frame button 22A is operated (pressed), so that the player can be positively operated. Can operate (press) the frame button 22A.

Further, since the vibration level of the frame button 22A is variably configured, even if a predetermined level of vibration is applied when the player presses the frame button 22A, the frame button 22A is subsequently operated (pressed). By doing so, it becomes possible to vibrate the frame button 22A at a vibration level equal to or higher than a predetermined level. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22A a plurality of times, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the 18th control example, similarly to the 11th control example described above, a plurality of background modes can be displayed, and when a predetermined transition condition (for example, pressing the frame button 22A) is satisfied. , The background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be variable. Then, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 (an operation of holding his / her hand within the detection area of the touch sensor 2900), the currently set background mode is configured to be notified.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 that changes the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, pressing the frame button 22A). In this case, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the background mode is variable, but the background mode set by the variable background displayed on the display screen (background mode after transition). ) Has a problem that it is difficult to inform the player of which background mode is in an easy-to-understand manner.

In order to solve this problem, for example, a technique of configuring the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to always display the background mode currently set can be considered. In this case, the third symbol display device Since a part of the limited area of the display screen is used only for notifying the background mode, the area used for various effects performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced. There was a problem that the effect of the production was reduced. In addition, the background mode is being executed while a specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a big hit) is being executed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Was displayed, and there was a problem that the effect was reduced.

On the other hand, in the 18th control example, the background mode can be notified only for an arbitrary period desired by the player by operating the operating means (touch sensor 2900). 3 It is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect of various effects executed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 is reduced. Further, in the 18th control example, since the current background mode is notified by using a display means (light emitting means) different from that of the third symbol display device 81, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The limited area of the screen can be effectively used for various productions.

Further, in the 18th control example, an effect (operation effect) using the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is configured to be executable, and the touch sensor 2900 plays a role as an operation means for notifying the background mode and an operation. It is configured to play both a role as an operation means for executing the production (participating in the operation production). In other words, the role of the touch sensor 2900 is changed according to the situation. Then, for example, even while the operation effect using the touch sensor 2900 is being executed, the operation can be performed by executing a special operation (operate the touch sensor 2900 while pressing the left button 22B and the right button 22C). It is configured so that the background mode can be notified without operating the touch sensor 2900 for the effect. Therefore, even if the operation means (touch sensor 2900) is used for a plurality of purposes, the player can operate the operation means in an operation mode suitable for the purpose desired by the player.

<About the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 598. FIG. 598 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example. As shown in FIG. 598, the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example is the pachinko machine 10 in the 11th control example described above (see FIG. 1). ), The difference is that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been changed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above is provided with a frame button 22 as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example is shown in FIG. 598. As shown above, a frame button 22A, a left button 22B, and a right button 22C are provided as operating means. The frame button 22A is an operation means used for the same purpose as the frame button 22 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above. It is an operation means used for making it variable or when shifting to a background mode. Since the specific content of the frame button 22A is the same as that of the frame button 22 in the eleventh control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Therefore, the frame button 22A is also configured so that its mode can be changed by driving the tilting device 310 in the same manner as the frame button 22 of the eleventh control example described above, but it is the same as the frame button 22 described above. Since it is a content, detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

The left button 22B and the right button 22C are operating means provided on the left side of the frame button 22A, and are mainly used as adjusting means for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 450 of the pachinko machine 10. In the 18th control example, the left button 22B and the right button are displayed during the period in which the third symbol is not variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is changing at high speed. By operating 22C, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted. Since the detailed contents regarding the volume adjustment are the same as those of the above-mentioned 14th control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this control example, by operating the left button 22B and the right button 22C during the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, the operation with respect to the other operating means (touch sensor 2900) can be partially invalidated. It is configured as follows. In this way, among the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the operation is performed only when a specific condition is satisfied (a state in which the third symbol does not change or a state in which the third symbol fluctuates at high speed). By configuring the operation means for executing the control (volume control) based on the above to be used for another purpose when the operation means is operated in a state where a specific condition is not satisfied, one operation means can be used for a plurality of uses. Since it can be used, the number of operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 599, the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example will be described. FIG. 599 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example. As shown in FIG. 599, the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example is held at a lower position of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 11th control example described above. The difference is that the LED 900 is provided, the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D are provided in the variable display device unit 80, and the touch sensor 2900 is provided at a position facing the display screen of the third symbol display device. , Other than that, it is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The holding LED 900 is used to indicate the number of holding balls of a special symbol, and is composed of eight LEDs. These eight LEDs are configured to light up in order from the left, and a hold ball number command indicating that the number of hold balls of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 increases, or a decrease. Based on the fact that the voice lamp control device 113 receives the indicated number of reserved balls command, the lighting is controlled according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol after the increase and the decrease.

By providing an area for notifying the number of reserved balls of the special symbol outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in this way, the reserved symbol display displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 600). (Refer to (B)) can be reliably notified of the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol even if it is temporarily erased or used for another purpose. Although detailed description will be omitted, this hold LED 900 uses a full-color LED and is configured to be capable of exhibiting light emission modes of at least three colors, and is a hold ball of FIG. And the holding ball of the special figure 2 are controlled to be lit so as to be distinguishable. As a result, even when a plurality of special symbol types are provided, the player can be made to recognize the number of reserved balls corresponding to each symbol type.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect executed based on the result of the pre-determination (look-ahead) executed for the winning information stored on hold, when the color of the hold symbol is changed, an LED is displayed at the corresponding position of the hold LED 900. Is controlled to emit light in a color different from the normal time. Further, the display mode (light emitting mode) of the hold LED 900 is configured to be less conspicuous than the hold symbol display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In the 18th control example, a display area (lighting area) indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is provided at a position below the third symbol display device 81, which is outside the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting area may be provided anywhere as long as it can be visually recognized by the player, and may be provided, for example, in the lower right area of the game board 13. Further, in the 18th control example, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is configured to be stored up to eight, the holding LED 900 has the same eight LEDs as the upper limit of the holding storage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and four LEDs may be configured to notify the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Further, in the 18th control example, the holding LED 900 is always controlled to display the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but other than that, for example, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the displayed reserved symbol is deleted or used for another effect, that is, the player cannot easily grasp the number of reserved balls of the special symbol only by the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When becomes, the lighting control for the holding LED 900 may be executed.

The mode lamps 1910A to 1910D are light emitting means composed of four LEDs, and are used as a notification means for notifying the player of the currently set background mode. In this control example, the background mode for executing the variation effect (variation effect of the third symbol) for showing the result of the special figure lottery is configured to be set from a plurality of modes. Specifically, the "sea mode" in which a display mode imitating the sea (for example, a display mode imitating coral) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device, and the display of the third symbol display device 81. The player can select one of the "mountain mode" in which a display mode imitating a mountain (for example, a display mode imitating a tree) is displayed as the background of the screen.

The mode lamps 1910A to 1910D are configured to be capable of emitting light in a light emitting mode capable of notifying the player of the currently set background mode. As a result, for example, even if the variation effect of the third symbol using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed and the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is grasped. Even if the current background mode cannot be grasped, the player can easily grasp the current background mode based on the light emitting mode of the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D.

Although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, in the first half stage of the special figure change (the third symbol is changing at high speed), the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D emit light in a light emitting mode for notifying the current background mode. , In the latter half stage of the special figure change (the period from the end of the high-speed change of the third symbol to the stop display), the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D are not in the current background mode, but in a suggestion mode suggesting the lottery result. It is configured to emit light. Then, even in the latter half of the special figure variation, when the player executes a specific operation on the operating means (frame button 22), the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D emit light in a notification mode for notifying the current background mode. It is configured to do.

With this configuration, it is possible to control the light emission of the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D in accordance with the information desired by the player (current background mode, special figure lottery result), which is useful information for the player. Can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner. The mode lamps 1910A to 1910D are controlled to emit light based on the processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

The touch sensor 2900 is a non-contact type detecting means (operating means) having a predetermined detection range, and indicates that the player's hand has invaded (arranged) within the predetermined detection range for a predetermined period. When it is detected, it is determined that the operation by the player has been performed. Although the player cannot directly see the detection range of the touch sensor 2900, a frame line indicating the detection range of the touch sensor 2900 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 located on the back side of the touch sensor 2900. By displaying the display, the player can easily operate the touch sensor 2900 (easily put his / her hand within the detection range of the touch sensor 2900).

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the touch sensor 2900 of this control example is configured to be capable of discriminating the movement (direction) of a hand that has entered (arranged) within the detection range, and is, for example, a hand. By moving from right to left or from bottom to top, the effect display corresponding to the movement of the hand is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect operation corresponding to the operation operation of the player's operation means (touch sensor 2900), so that the player can play the game while being interested in it.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the 18th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 600. FIGS. 600 (A) and 600 (B) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. The display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the 18th control example is variablely displayed with respect to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh control example described above in synchronization with the third symbol (special symbol). The scroll direction of the decorative symbol is changed from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (from right to left), and the number of effective lines for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is one (see FIG. 427 (A)). ) To 5 (see FIG. 600 (A)) and the difference in the notification mode of the information related to the game. Further, there are some elements that are the same as (similar to) the eleventh control example but have different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 600 (A)). The third symbol (decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area DM, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in the left-right direction to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 are configured such that the symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol sequence Z3 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 600 (A), the main display area DM has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in the diagonal direction. If each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol is stopped together with the combination of jackpot symbols on the effective line (in this control example, the combination of the same main symbols), the third symbol is stopped. The jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 600 (A), in this control example, since each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbol display device. Until all of the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the main display area DM of 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area DM until the last symbol string (in this control example, the middle symbol string V2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 600 (B). As shown in FIG. 600B, a small display area DM1 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area DM, and a small display area DM2 is formed in the upper right of the front view. The small display areas DM1 and DM2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area DM1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area DM2.

By providing the small display areas DM1 and DM2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle mark and a cross mark, and the fourth symbol is shown in the small display areas DM1 and DM2. Is displayed in a variable manner (see the small display area DM1 in FIG. 600 (B)) to indicate a situation in which the special symbol is fluctuating, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas DM1 and DM2 (FIG. (Refer to the small display area DM2 of 600 (B)), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol and a plurality of colors. The lottery result of the special symbol is shown by indicating that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode in which the numbers and colors are changed by using the display mode indicating It may be configured to indicate.

Further, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 600 (B), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas DM1 and DM2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the area DM on the upper left side and the upper right side is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined by the effect of the variation effect executed in the central part of the main display area DM. It may be different depending on the embodiment.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area and the effect of the effect is reduced. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

Since the display contents displayed in the sub-display area DS are substantially the same as those in the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in the eleventh control example, as shown in FIG. 427 (B), the sub-display area DS Is divided into two small areas DS1 and DS2 in the left-right direction, but in this 18th control example, the display area of the sub-display area DS is only the small area DS1, and the executing area DS1A is contained in the small area DS1. And the standby area DS1B are configured to form. Since the display content of the executing area DS1A is the same as that of the small area DS1 of the eleventh control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the standby area DS1B will be described. In this control example, eight pedestals M1 to M8 are displayed in the standby area DS1B, and normally, the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed as in the eleventh control example described above. is doing. On the other hand, in the 18th control example, when the reserved symbols are displayed on the pedestal M8, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit value (8), the eight reserved symbols stored in the reservation are stored. It is configured to execute a dedicated effect (period effect) using the above (see FIG. 607). While this period effect is being executed, the waiting area DS1B is not a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but a period during which the period effect is executed (a reserved symbol that is the target of the period effect). It is configured so that a reserved symbol for effect indicating only is displayed.

With this configuration, even if a new reserved ball is acquired during the period production, the new reserved symbol will not be displayed in the waiting area DS1B, so the player can be informed of how long the period production will continue. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although not shown in FIG. 600, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 also displays a display mode showing the following display contents. Specifically, it is configured to display a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction). With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the gaming board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area, a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a guide for guiding the player to perform a left-handed game. The display mode of "left-handed" is configured to display, and the display mode of "right-handed" is in a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. Further, it is displayed during the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. Further, even when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Is configured to be displayed.

<Regarding the production content in the 18th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 601 to 610, characteristic production contents among the various effects executed in the 18th control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 601 and 602, the contents of the effect when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 601 is a timing chart showing the flow of the sound effect when the power is turned off (power cut off) while the special symbol is fluctuating in the fluctuation pattern A and then the power is turned on.

In this control example, when a power failure occurs during a special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) and then the power is turned on, while the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are started up. (During the return processing period), a display mode indicating that the power is on is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 602 (A)). When the special symbol change is executed during the return processing period, the voice output device 226 is configured to output the BGM during the special symbol change. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure change is being executed during the return processing period.

To explain in detail, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a storage area (backup area) for temporarily storing various setting information even if the power is cut off. It is configured to execute a power failure process for storing the previous game information (variation pattern for production, BGM information, background mode, remaining fluctuation time, etc.). Since the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has sufficient internal power (capacitor) to store various information in the above-mentioned storage area after the power supply from the outside is cut off. It is configured to store game information in the storage area only when a power failure occurs. Then, the BGM part (“B” in FIG. 601) that was output when the power failure occurred is stored, and the BGM part (“B”) that was output when the power failure occurred during the recovery processing period after the power was turned on. ) Is configured to output audio.

In the example shown in FIG. 601, the progress of the BGM output at the time of the power failure is memorized, and the flow of playing the BGM from the place where the power is cut off is shown, but the flow is not limited to this. It may be configured to play from the start position of the BGM part that was output at the time of disconnection. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the storage process in the storage area when a power failure occurs.

Further, in this control example, the return command indicating that the start-up process of the main control device 110 is completed (initial setting is completed) is the game information (selected variation pattern) related to the special figure variation executed before the power failure. , Residual fluctuation time, lottery result) are included and output to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, when the startup process is completed (when the command indicating the completion of the initial setting is output), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed from the initial screen (see FIG. 602 (A)) to the normal screen. It is possible to shift the display mode to (see FIG. 602 (B)). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special map fluctuation that had been executed before the power failure has resumed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 602, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 602 (A) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents immediately after the power is turned on, and FIG. 602 (B) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents after the initial setting is completed. Since the content shown in FIG. 602 (A) is the same as the display content shown in FIG. 457 (B) of the above-mentioned control example, a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but in the 18th control example, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the special figure fluctuation is executed while the screen during the initial setting is displayed, the BGM (variable voice) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output from the continuation at the time of power interruption (see FIG. 601). ).

Then, when the initial setting is completed, as shown in FIG. 601 (B), a variation pattern dedicated to return based on the remaining period of the special map variation during execution is executed. In this control example, the first determination for determining whether the remaining fluctuation time at the completion of the initial setting is less than 2 seconds, the second determination for determining whether the time is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds, and 5 seconds or more. It is configured to execute the third determination for determining whether or not.

Here, if it is determined by the first determination that it is less than 2 seconds, the initial variation time is not set until the remaining variation time elapses (until the execution of the special figure variation is completed) without setting the variation pattern dedicated to the return. The setting screen (see FIG. 602 (A)) is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a short-time variable display that is difficult to identify.

When the remaining fluctuation time is between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, the reach state (the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 stop at the same symbol on the effective line, and only the symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner. The return-only reach effect is executed, in which the variable display is executed from the state). This return-only reach effect is an effect using fluctuation data of a fluctuation pattern in which the ratio of the largest hit is set to be the smallest among the normal reach, that is, the fluctuation pattern in the reach state among the normal fluctuation patterns.

Then, the fluctuation data for the time corresponding to the length of the remaining fluctuation time is reproduced. With this configuration, when the special figure fluctuation during execution when the power is turned on is a big hit, it is possible to notify the jackpot winning with a fluctuation pattern that is normally difficult to encounter, thus providing added value to the player. be able to. Further, among the image data stored in advance, the image data can be effectively utilized by using the image data that is rarely actually used (the image data showing the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit in the normal reach).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 603 to 604, the contents of the operation for changing the background mode during the change of the special figure will be described. FIG. 603 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of background change (background change) according to the background change operation timing during the change of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 603, in the 18th control example, in the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation speed is configured to be variable. Specifically, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is configured to gradually decrease in the order of "high speed, medium speed, low speed". As a result, the player can be made to play the game while predicting the timing at which the third symbol stops. In the 18th control example, as in the 11th control example described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the lottery result is out of order. Since it is configured, the lottery result (length of fluctuation time) of this special symbol can be predicted based on the transition of the fluctuation speed of the third symbol.

In this control example, the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed (background can be changed) by the player operating the frame button 22A during the variable display of the special symbol. The timing of changing the background is different depending on the timing at which the person operates the frame button 22A.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 603, when the background change operation (pressing the frame button 22) is performed when the fluctuation state of the special figure (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) is high, the background is changed. The background change is executed immediately after the operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 603 (A), when the current background mode is "sea" and the fluctuation state of the special figure is high-speed fluctuation, if the background change operation is performed, the background is changed immediately after that. Is executed, and the background mode shifts to the "mountain mode" (see FIG. 604 (B)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 603 (B), when the background change operation is performed when the fluctuation state of the special map is not high-speed fluctuation (medium-speed fluctuation, low-speed fluctuation, stop), the fluctuation of the special map is concerned. The background change is not performed until the end of, and the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure change starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 604 (A), the "sea mode" indicating the current background mode is displayed in the mode display area DM1A provided in the information of the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81, and the mode is displayed. In the comment display area DM2A provided to the right of the display area DM1A, the characters "background change at the next change" are displayed to indicate that the background change operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the background change operation has been performed during the special figure change (that the pachinko machine 10 has officially accepted the background change operation), so that the background change is not executed immediately after the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the background change operation from being repeatedly executed.

As described above, in the 18th control example, the timing of performing the background change is different depending on the fluctuation state of the special figure (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) for the background change operation during the change of the special figure. It is configured to allow. As a result, for example, while suppressing the background change during the execution of the production (for example, the reach production) in which the lottery result of this special symbol is likely to be a hit, this time. During the period (high-speed fluctuation period) where it is difficult to execute the effect that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol, the background can be changed immediately, so that the player can experience various effects (background). be able to.

In the background change flow described with reference to FIG. 603, the next special figure change is started when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure. An example of executing the background change at the timing is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the stop display is performed in a stop display mode (combination of three third symbols) for the third symbol to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol. The background change may be executed at the timing (the timing when the effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure is completed).

Further, in the 18th control example, when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure, the background is at least until after the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Although it is configured not to execute the change, it may be configured so as to prevent the effect suggesting the result of the special figure lottery from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the background change. It may be configured to delay the execution of the background change until a predetermined timing. Specifically, when the background change operation is executed when the fluctuation state of the special map is medium speed fluctuation, it is preferable to configure the background change to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation state of the special map switches to low speed fluctuation. ..

In addition, when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure, the timing at which the background change is executed is switched based on the result of this special figure lottery. For example, when the special map fluctuation during the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, the predetermined timing during the fluctuation period (for example, the timing of switching to the low speed fluctuation) is higher than the case where the special chart fluctuation is an out-of-bounds fluctuation. It is good to configure it so that it is easy to execute the background change. Further, even when the background change operation is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the special figure, the timing for executing the background change may be switched based on the result of the special figure lottery this time.

As a result, by performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with a new effect using a new effect (background), and at the same time, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation. ..

In FIG. 603, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol (special figure) being executed is used as an element for determining the execution timing of the background change when the background change operation is executed, but the variation speed is not limited to this. For example, the effect display process executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the special figure change is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, 5 stages), and the effect display process at the time of the background change operation is divided. It may be configured to determine the execution timing of the background change.

Specifically, the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is sequentially displayed as "variation start period", "reach establishment period", "reach effect period", "development effect period", and "effect result". Separated from the "notification period", for example, the "variation start period" and "reach establishment period" correspond to the fluctuation state "high-speed fluctuation" in the special figure of this 18th control example, and the "reach production period" and "development production period" , "Effect result notification period" may be configured to correspond to the fluctuation states "medium speed fluctuation", "low speed fluctuation", and "stop" in the special figure of the 18th control example.

In this way, even if the timing of the background change executed after the background change operation is changed according to the progress of the effect display instead of the fluctuation speed of the third symbol (special figure), the control example and the present control example are used. A similar effect can be achieved.

Further, in the 18th control example, when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure, the background change is executed after the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, the lottery result of the next special figure change (the next special figure change of the special figure change that executed the background change operation), and the next and subsequent special figure changes. Based on the lottery result (preliminary determination (pre-reading) result for the winning information stored on hold), the presence / absence of execution of the background change and the transition destination (background mode) of the background change may be changed. ..

With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation in order to grasp the lottery result of the special figure in advance. Then, by enthusiastically executing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606, the contents of the variable effect (touch effect) for varying the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol will be described. FIG. 605 is a timing chart showing the fluctuation speed of the third symbol and the flow of the touch effect. As shown in FIG. 605, in this control example, the third symbol is configured to be variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while varying its fluctuation speed in accordance with the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation. is doing. Then, the touch effect (see FIG. 606 (A)) is configured to be executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol.

When the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the period during which this touch effect is being executed (during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol), the player moves his / her hand within the detection area of the touch sensor 2900 for a predetermined time. (When intruded), a fluctuation effect (reach effect) in which the third symbol changes at a low speed is executed (see FIG. 606 (B)).

That is, in this control example, the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect so that the fluctuation speed of the third symbol can be forcibly switched to the low speed fluctuation. With this configuration, the execution period of the variable effect (effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the low-speed fluctuation can be lengthened. You can be interested.

Further, since the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, for example, the frame button 22A is operated during the period when the touch effect is executed to shift the background mode. Is configured to be possible. Since this touch effect is configured to be continuously executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol and the player understands that the reach effect is executed by the fluctuation, the frame is set so as to be the background mode desired by the player. By operating the button 22A and then the touch sensor 2900, the player can easily experience the reach effect in the background mode desired by the player.

Here, an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the touch effect described above will be described with reference to FIG. 606. FIG. 606 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after the touch effect is executed (timing of FIG. 605 (A)), and FIG. 606 (B) shows a touch sensor in the touch effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen after operating 2900 (the timing of FIG. 605 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 606 (A), in the state where the touch effect is executed, the third symbol is variablely displayed at a high speed on the display screen of the third symbol display device (in the figure, it is represented by an arrow in the left direction). ), In the small area DM3 on the left side of the fluctuation display area during the high-speed fluctuation (about 1/3 on the left side of the main display area DM), the touch effect is being executed so as to cover the fluctuation display of the third symbol. The indicated touch display is executed. Specifically, a touch location guidance display mode DM31 for guiding the location where the player holds his hand and a period display mode DM32 for indicating the effect period (operation valid period) of the touch effect are displayed. , A "touch" comment urging the player to operate (touch) the touch sensor 2900 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 606, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, each third symbol fluctuates at a speed that is difficult for the player to see, so that a part of the variation display area is covered. Even if the touch display is executed, the effect that is difficult for the player to understand (the effect that the third symbol in the variable display cannot be grasped) is not executed.

Then, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the effect period of the touch effect indicated by the period display mode DM32, the touch effect ends as shown in FIG. 606 (B), and the main of the third symbol display device 81 is A reach effect (low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol) using the entire display area DM is executed.

As described above, in the 18th control example, the player operates the operating means (touch sensor 2900) during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol to forcibly change the fluctuation speed of the third symbol at a low speed. It is configured so that it can be switched to. With this configuration, the execution period of the variable effect (effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the low-speed fluctuation can be lengthened. You can be interested.

Further, since the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, for example, the frame button 22A is operated during the period when the touch effect is executed to shift the background mode. Is configured to be possible. Since this touch effect is configured to be continuously executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol and the player understands that the reach effect can be executed by the fluctuation, the background mode desired by the player is set. By operating the frame button 22A and then the touch sensor 2900, the player can easily experience the reach effect in the desired background mode, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 607 to 609, the contents of the treasure chest effect (8 hold effect) will be described. In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is eight, which is the upper limit, the eight-held effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using eight holds, is executed. is doing. This eight-piece hold effect is a dedicated effect using eight hold symbols, and as an effect hold symbol corresponding to each hold symbol, an effect hold symbol in a display mode imitating a treasure box is placed in the waiting area DS1B. It is displayed (see FIG. 607 (A)).

Then, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol to be the target of the eight reserved effects is executed, the first reserved symbol TB0 for the effect is displayed in the executing area DS1A as shown in FIG. 607 (B). Then, the contents TB10 of the treasure box showing the lottery result of the fluctuation is displayed. The details will be described later, but the content TB10 is configured so that different colors are displayed according to the lottery result of the special drawing.

After that, when new winning information is reserved and stored during the period when the eight holding effects are being executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is as shown in FIGS. 608 (A) and 608 (B). In the waiting area DS1B of the above, the new reserved symbol 900Z is displayed only by the reserved lamp 900 without displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner up to which reserved symbol the period (effect period) during which the eight hold effects are continuously executed is.

Then, when the final special figure change that is the target of the eight hold effects is executed, as shown in FIG. 609, the hold symbol TB7 for effect is displayed in the executing area DS1A, and the current state DS1B is displayed in the waiting area DS1B. The pending symbols corresponding to the number of pending storages are displayed. That is, when there are no more reserved symbols that are the targets of the eight reserved effects, the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls currently stored and stored are displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is confused because the number of reserved balls currently acquired is not known at the end of the eight-held effect.

In this control example, the eight hold effects shown with reference to FIGS. 607 to 609 are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, eight hold effects are in progress for the effect. Even during the period in which the reserved symbol is displayed in the waiting area DS1B, when the player performs a specific operation on the operating means, the pending symbol is not the reserved symbol for production in the waiting area DS1B, but the current one. It may be configured to display a hold symbol indicating the number of hold balls. In addition, when it is determined that there is winning information that wins a big hit in the pre-discrimination process executed during the eight-piece holding effect, the eight-piece holding effect is continued until the special figure change corresponding to the winning information is executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in this control example, the lottery result corresponding to the special figure variation to be executed in the period effect (8 hold effect) in which a series of variation effects are executed across a plurality of special figure variations (holding symbols). It is configured to set the production mode (TB10 inside the treasure box) based on Whether or not it is determined in advance (pre-reading) before the special figure lottery based on the reserved symbol is executed, and the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the pre-determination result (pre-reading result). You may. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the expectation of winning the jackpot to be set in a plurality of stages, and to set an effect mode in which the expectation of winning the jackpot does not decrease during the period production. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation for the big hit as the period production progresses, and it is possible to pay attention to the period production until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 610, the display contents during the production using the touch sensor 2900 in the 18th control example will be described. FIG. 610 (A) is a display screen showing a display example when the touch sensor 2900 is operated during the touch effect executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during reach display) of the third symbol, and is the display screen of FIG. 610 (B). ) Is a display screen showing a display example when a special operation is performed during the touch effect executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during the reach display) of the third symbol.

As shown in FIG. 610 (A), when the touch effect is executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during the reach display) of the third symbol, the main display area is the same as the touch effect described in FIG. 606 (A). A small area DM3 is formed on about 1/3 of the left side of the DM, and touch display is executed. In the state of FIG. 610 (A), since the third symbol is changing at a low speed (during reach display), the reach display mode is visible to the player only in the display area of the main display area DM not covered by the small area DM3. The display is reduced in a possible state, and the touch location guidance display mode DM31 is displayed in a mode indicating that the touch sensor 2900 has been operated (indicated by diagonal lines in the figure).

Then, in the comment display area DM2A, the comment of "great chance" which is the effect result of the touch effect is displayed. In this control example, the touch effect can be executed during the reach display of the third symbol, and by operating the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect, is the lottery result of the special figure change during execution a big hit? Since it is configured to execute an effect (comment display) that suggests whether or not it is possible, the touch sensor 2900 is operated while expecting that a comment (for example, a big chance) that is likely to be a big hit is displayed. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the operation production.

If the player wants to detect the lottery result of the special symbol as soon as possible, the touch sensor 2900 is positively operated by executing the above-mentioned touch effect, and the touch effect is displayed on the comment display area DM2A. I try to actively display the comment that is the production result, but on the other hand, I want to enjoy the production mode of the variable production of the third symbol (until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested. Even if the touch effect is executed, the player who thinks that he / she does not want to execute other effects should not display the comment suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the comment display area DM2A without operating the touch sensor 2900. It is conceivable to play a game.

In this case, while the touch effect is being executed (during the operation valid period of the operation means (touch sensor 2900) set during the touch effect), the touch sensor 2900 cannot be operated to grasp the current background mode. There was a problem. Therefore, in the 18th control example, the touch sensor 2900 is operated while pressing the left button 22B and the right button 22C (see FIG. 598) arranged on the left side of the frame button 22A, so that the touch effect is being performed. Even if there is, it is configured so that the current background mode can be notified. With this configuration, even if the operation control using one operation means (touch sensor 2900) is duplicated, the player can easily perform only the desired operation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 610 (B), when the left button 22B and the right button 22C are pressed while the touch effect is being executed during the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol (during the reach display) (FIG. FIG. In the lower frame line of 610 (B), the display mode imitating the left button 22B and the right button 22C is filled in), and the comment "Attention to the mode lamp" is displayed in the comment display area DM2A. As a result, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated at this stage, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the current background mode is notified instead of displaying the effect result of the touch effect. can. Then, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated in that state, the background mode currently set among the mode lamps 1910 for notifying the background mode is used instead of the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation during execution. The corresponding mode lamp 1910A is lit and displayed.

In this control example, when the left button 22B and the right button 22C are pressed while the touch effect is being executed during the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol (during the reach display), the touch is performed during the pressing period. It is configured so that the effect result of the touch effect is not displayed even if the sensor 2900 is operated, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, by pressing the left button 22B and the right button 22C during the touch effect. It may be configured to forcibly end the touch effect. That is, the operation effect being executed may be canceled by executing a special operation on the operation means.

<About the electrical configuration in the 18th control example>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 611. FIG. 611 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th control example, and FIG. 611 (B) is a schematic diagram of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 schematically. In the 18th control example, 8 holding lottery tables 222FA, a special effect selection table 222FB, and a vibe pattern data 222FC are added to the ROM 222, and the next background change flag 223FA and the holding are added to the RAM 223 for the 11th control example described above. The difference is that the effect executing flag 223FB and the hold effect counter 2223FC are added. The other elements are the same as those in the eleventh control example, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The 8-piece hold lottery table 222FA is a data table used when performing a lottery (determination) as to whether or not to execute the 8-piece hold effect (treasure box effect), and is a hold number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 621). The upper limit is the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223A and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223B (hereinafter referred to as the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter). 8 ”(Z2473 in FIG. 621: YES), it is referred to for determining whether or not to execute the eight hold effect (Z2475 in FIG. 621). When the execution of the eight-piece hold effect is determined, the above-mentioned eight-piece hold effect is executed with reference to FIGS. 607 to 609.

Here, the contents of the eight-piece hold lottery table 222FA will be described with reference to FIG. 612 (C). FIG. 612 (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the eight-piece hold lottery table 222FA. As shown in FIG. 612 (C), the eight-piece hold lottery table 222FA is a prize that shows the lottery result (winning) that is advantageous to the player in the hold of the special figure (in the hold used for the eight-piece hold effect). It is configured to determine whether or not the information is included, and to change the execution probability of the eight hold effects based on the determination result.

Specifically, when there is winning information indicating winning in the hold of the special figure (when the judgment result in the hold is "hit"), the value of the acquired hold effect counter 223FC is "0 to 140". It is stipulated that the eight-piece hold effect is executed in the case and the eight-piece hold effect is not executed in the case of "141 to 198". On the other hand, when the determination result in the hold is "only out of place", when the value of the acquired hold effect counter 223FC is "0 to 90", eight hold effects are executed, and when the value is "91 to 198". It is stipulated not to execute 8 hold effects.

That is, in this control example, the case where the winning information indicating the lottery result (winning) which is advantageous to the player is included in the hold which is the target of the eight hold effect is more than the case where the winning information is not included. It is configured so that the eight-piece hold effect can be easily executed. As a result, by executing the eight-piece hold effect, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot will be won soon, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is eight, which is the upper limit, whether or not to execute the eight-held effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using eight holds. Although it is configured to perform the lottery, whether or not to execute the continuous effect (period effect) when the number of reserved balls reaches the predetermined number (for example, 7), not when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit. May be configured to perform a lottery. In this case, for example, the execution probability of the 8 hold effect may be varied depending on whether the number of hold balls corresponding to one of the special symbol types is 3 or 4 out of the 7 hold.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types, a big hit (number of prize balls, game state set after the big hit game) given to the player in the big hit game executed when the big hit is won is large. The pre-discrimination result of the special symbol type (advantageous special symbol) on the side where the game is easily executed and the other special symbol type (disadvantageous special symbol) are divided and set so that the execution probabilities of the eight hold effects are different. Also, in this case, when there is prize information indicating a big hit winning in the hold of the advantageous special symbol, it is preferable to configure it so that the hold effect of 8 pieces is easier to be executed than other conditions. As a result, the player's expectation for the eight-piece hold effect can be further increased.

The special effect selection table 222FB is a data table referred to when setting the vibration amount of the frame button 22 at the time of operating the frame button 22 according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and is a lottery result (preliminary determination) in the hold. A different vibration amount is set based on the result).

Here, the contents of the special effect selection table 222FB will be described with reference to FIG. 612 (A). FIG. 612 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special effect selection table 222FB, and FIG. 612 (B) is a vibration amount scenario defined in the special effect selection table 222FB. It is a figure which showed the content of the vibe pattern data 222FC which has (vibe type).

In the 18th control example, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate when the player operates the frame button 22, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 can also be changed in three stages. Has been done. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol or the pre-discrimination result of the special symbol is advantageous to the player, the frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger vibration amount. In addition, the vibration means (SW motor) for vibrating the frame button 22 is controlled by the vibration control means (SW motor control device) so as to drive the frame button 22 when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. It is configured.

Therefore, the player cannot recognize whether or not the frame button 22 vibrates unless the frame button 22 is pressed, and the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 vibrates. Therefore, the player is enthusiastically pressed the frame button 22. be able to. Further, this control example is configured so that the vibration amount corresponding to a plurality of frame button presses is specified as one vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed increases. The frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger vibration amount. As a result, the player can enthusiastically press the frame button 22 a plurality of times.

In the eighteenth control example, when the voice lamp control device 113 sets a variation pattern for variation display based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 624), the frame button 22 is operated. It is configured to set the presence or absence of an effect (operation effect) and the type of operation effect. Then, when a special effect (a part of the operation effect) that vibrates the frame button 22 is set, a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) is set based on the special effect selection table 222FB when the frame button 22 is pressed. The vibration operation of the frame button 22 according to the set vibe type is executed.

As shown in FIG. 612 (A), the special effect selection table 222FB is a case where a hit is included in the hold of the special figure, and the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 79", which is a vibration amount scenario. "Vibrator A" is specified as (vibe type), "vibe B" is specified as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) in the range of "80 to 139", and vibration amount scenario is specified in the range of "140 to 175". "Vibrator C" is defined as (vibe type), and "vibe D" is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) in the range of "176 to 198".

In addition, in the case where the hit is not included in the hold of the special figure (only the off), and the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "vibe B" is set as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type). In the range of "50 to 90", "vibe C" is specified as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and in the range of "91 to 198", "vibe D" is specified as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type). It is stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 612 (B), the detailed contents of each vibe type (vibration amount scenario) defined in the special effect selection table 222FB will be described. As shown in FIG. 612 (B), in this 18th control example, four types of vibration types (vibes A to D) can be set, and the number of operations of the frame button 22 (number of times of PUSH) is set for each vibration type. ) Corresponds to the amount of vibration specified.

Specifically, "Vibrator A" of the vibe type defines "None (does not vibrate)" for the first PUSH count, "Strong" for the second to fourth times, and "Vibrator B" defines PUSH. "Weak" is specified for the first time, "Medium" for the second time, and "Strong" for the third and fourth times. "Weak", "Medium" for the 3rd time, "Strong" for the 4th time, and "Weak" for the 1st PUSH frequency and "Medium" for the 2nd to 4th times are specified for "Vibrator D". ing.

In this way, the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 is operated is made different according to the set vibe type, and the presence / absence of variable vibration amount is made different according to the number of times of PUSH. Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed, it is possible to entertain at what vibration amount the frame button 22 vibrates. Therefore, the player actively participates in the operation production, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In this 18th control example, the vibration amount specified for each vibe type is configured to increase (not decrease) as the number of PUSH increases, but it is not limited to this. , It may be configured so that the vibration amount becomes small. In this case, if the special figure fluctuation during execution is a big hit fluctuation, or if there is winning information indicating a big hit winning in the special figure hold, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 tends to be small in the middle of the special effect. It is good to configure it so that it becomes. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a special feeling when the vibration amount is reduced.

Further, in the 18th control example, the vibration amount is set for a specific number of times of PUSH (4 times) regardless of which type of vibration is set, but the vibration amount is limited to this. The number of PUSHs for which the vibration amount is set may be different depending on the type of vibration.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the 18th control example, the same operation effect as the normal operation effect (the effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times according to the process of the variation display (reach variation)) is performed. It is configured to be displayed by the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, the frame button operation can be performed a specified number of times (4 times) simply by operating the frame button 22 in accordance with the variable display effect (operation effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81. Can be executed.

In addition, the 18th control example also has a display effect dedicated to the special effect. In the display effect dedicated to this special effect, the display mode is stepwise (up to 4 stages) during a specific period within the special figure change period (for example, 10 seconds from 2 to 12 seconds after the start of the special figure change). An effect that can be stepped up is executed. This effect is configured in an effect mode that can suggest that the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is variable (increased) by pressing the frame button 22.

By using such a dedicated effect, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 while expecting that the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased. Further, even though the vibration amount scenario (vibration type) in which the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased is set, the frame button 22 is vibrated with the maximum vibration amount specified in the set vibration type. It is possible to prevent the special production from ending without causing it to occur.

In this case, the effect mode of the display effect dedicated to the special effect described above is configured to be set based not only on the set vibe type but also on the lottery result of the fluctuation, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is increased. An effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode is stepped up even though the display mode is not variable.

Here, the definition of the vibration amount of the frame button 22 will be described. In this control example, the vibration amount is defined as "frequency (frequency) indicating the number of vibrations per unit time", which is a definition indicating the strength of vibration. , "Amplitude indicating the vibration width" and "Indicating the time required for one unit of vibration (period)", the magnitude of the vibration amount is defined based on the magnitude of the amplitude. Therefore, since the vibration width felt when the frame button 22 is pressed differs depending on the magnitude of the vibration amount, the player can easily identify the variable state of the vibration amount.

In the special effect described above, the frame button 22 may be configured so that the player can feel different vibrations when the frame button 22 is pressed a plurality of times. Anything can be used as long as the period from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the start of vibration) can be changed, and each may be used in combination. Further, vibration that vibrates the frame button 22 by providing a plurality of vibration means (motors or the like) capable of applying vibration to one operation means (frame button 22) and performing drive control to the plurality of vibration means. The position of the source may be changed, or the vibration mode felt by the player may be changed by changing the drive start timing of each vibration means. Further, the player may be able to select the variable content of the vibration mode.

Further, in the 18th control example, the frame button 22 is configured not to vibrate unless the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the special effect is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the frame button 22 may be configured to vibrate with a vibration amount smaller than the vibration amount of the frame button 22 set by the special effect. By lightly vibrating the frame button 22 in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the special effect is currently being performed in an easy-to-understand manner.

The vibe pattern data 222FC is a data table in which the contents of each of the vibe types (vibes A to D) defined in the special effect selection table 222FB are stored. The content thereof will be omitted because it has been described above in the description of the special effect selection table 222FB.

Next, with reference to FIG. 611 (B), the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 18th control example will be described focusing on the differences from the 11th control example described above. .. As described above, the RAM 223 of the 18th control example has the following background change flag 223FA, the hold effect execution flag 223FB, the hold effect counter 2223FC, and the SW special effect counter 223FD added to the RAM 223 of the 11th control example. Is different.

The next background change flag 223FA is a flag for indicating that the background change condition for changing the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied, and the background change condition is satisfied. If so, it is set to on. In this control example, even when the background change operation is executed to change the background mode, the timing of changing the background differs depending on the timing of executing the background change operation. In such a case, there will be a time lag between the timing when the background change condition is satisfied by performing the background change operation and the timing when the background (background mode) is actually changed (shifted). Therefore, in order to temporarily store that the background change condition is satisfied, the next background change flag 223FA is set to on.

Specifically, in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 629), the change state of the special figure (speed of change display of the third symbol) at the time when the background change operation (operation to the frame button 22) is executed. When it is determined that the vehicle is not in high-speed fluctuation (Z2964 in FIG. 629: NO), it is set to ON (see Z2965 in FIG. 629). Then, when it is determined that the next background change flag 223FA is set to ON in the fluctuation stop processing 8 (see Z2242 in FIG. 620) executed when the stop command indicating the stop of the special figure fluctuation is received (see Z2242 in FIG. 620). Z2266: YES in FIG. 620 then determines whether or not the special figure is on hold (Z2267 in FIG. 620), and if it is determined that there is no hold (Z2267 in FIG. 620), the special figure change is stopped. The background change is executed at the timing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure is on hold (Z2267: YES in FIG. 620), the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure change is started (see Z2258 in FIG. 619).

The hold effect executing flag 223FB is a flag for indicating that eight hold effects (see FIG. 607) are being executed, and is set to be turned on when eight hold effects are executed. .. Then, when the eight hold effects are completed, the effect is set to off (see Z2534 in FIG. 624). Although detailed illustration is omitted, while the holding effect executing flag 223FB is set to on, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223A and the special symbol). Even if the upper limit number (8) is reached (the value obtained by adding the values of the two hold ball counters 223B), the lottery for executing a new eight hold effect is not executed.

Specifically, when it is determined in the hold ball number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 621) that the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter is 8 (Z2473: YES in FIG. 621), then the hold effect is produced. It is configured to determine whether the running flag 223FB is set to on, and to execute the processes of Z2474 and Z2475 of FIG. 621 when it is determined that the running flag 223FB is not set to on (off). ..

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the eight-piece hold effect from continuing for an unnecessarily long time, so that the value of the eight-piece hold effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of this control example, if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter reaches the upper limit number (8) again during the 8 hold effect, a new 8 hold effect is executed. It may be configured to execute a lottery. In this case, as a lottery for whether or not to execute a new eight-piece hold effect, it is preferable to execute a lottery different from the lottery for whether or not to execute the first eight-piece hold effect. Specifically, the new eight-piece hold effect may be configured to be easier to execute when a jackpot is included in the target hold than the initial eight-piece hold effect. As a result, when the eight-piece hold effect is executed for more than eight special figure fluctuations, the expectation for the big hit can be further increased. In addition, even during the eight-piece hold effect, the game can be enthusiastically played in order to accumulate the hold balls up to the maximum number again.

The hold effect counter 223FC is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and every time the main process (see FIG. 617) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond). In), the update process is executed so that the values are different. The value of the hold effect counter 223FC is acquired when a lottery is performed with reference to the eight hold effect lottery table 222FA as to whether or not to execute the eight hold effect in the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 621). (See Z2474 in FIG. 621).

The SW special effect counter 223FD is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the special effect is set, and the special effect is set in the SW effect process (see Z2841 in FIG. 628). In this case (see Z2944), a value corresponding to the set special effect is set (see Z2945 in FIG. 628). Here, in this control example, no matter what type of special effect is set, the special effect for four frame button operations is set, so that the value of 4 is set in the SW special effect counter 223FD.

Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the special effect, the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is subtracted by 1 (see Z2948 in FIG. 628), and corresponds to the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD after the subtraction. SW motor data is set to perform the effect (see Z2847 in FIG. 628).

The return state storage area 223FE stores the remaining time information of the return change (special figure change in which the power is cut off during execution) included in the return command received from the main control device 110 when returning from the power failure state. Storage area for. Specifically, in the fluctuation return processing (Z2252 in FIG. 622), it is used in the processing (Z2281 in FIG. 622) for storing the remaining fluctuation time information included in the received return command.

In this control example, the display mode (variation display mode) after the return processing is completed is set based on the residual fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation stored in the return state storage area 223FE after the power is restored. A detailed explanation will be given later, but if the residual fluctuation time after the return processing is completed is longer than the predetermined time (2 seconds), the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the residual fluctuation time is executed and the predetermined time (2). Seconds) If it is less than or equal to, the return processing screen is configured to be displayed continuously. This makes it possible for the player to easily display the fluctuation of the special figure after the power is restored.

The return fluctuation flag 223FF is a flag for indicating that the special figure fluctuation interrupted when the power is turned off is fluctuating (return fluctuation) after the power is restored, and is set to ON when the return fluctuation is in progress. It is a thing. This return-changing flag 223FF is set to ON (see Z2284 in FIG. 622) when a value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is set in the change-back process (see FIG. 622). After the display command corresponding to the return fluctuation is set, it is set to off (Z2296 in FIG. 623).

The remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is a counter for counting the remaining time of the fluctuation of the third symbol. The value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern acquired in the fluctuation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 624) (Z2511 in FIG. 624), and the counter update processing (see FIG. 633). When it is determined that the value set in is 0 or more (Z2861: YES), 1 is subtracted.

The high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is a flag for indicating whether the fluctuation of the third symbol is in the high-speed fluctuation period, and is set to ON when the fluctuation is in high-speed fluctuation. This high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is set to ON when the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG indicates a high-speed fluctuation period in the counter update process (see Z2176 in FIG. 633), and the high-speed fluctuation is performed. If no period is indicated, it is set to off (Z2865 in FIG. 633). Further, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 630) executed by the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 626), the touch sensor 2900 is operated (determined to be on) (FIG. 630). Z2825: YES), it is also set to off when the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is switched to a low speed (Z2833 of Z549). Further, the setting status of the high-speed changing flag 223FH is referred to when determining the timing for shifting the background mode in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 629) (see Z2964 in FIG. 630).

The special operation flag 223FI is a flag for indicating that the player has performed a special operation on the operation means (left button 22B, right button 22C), and is turned on when the player performs the special operation. Is set to. Specifically, when the left button 22B and the right button 22C are pressed in the left / right button input process (see Z2843 in FIG. 627) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 626). (Z2851: YES in FIG. 627), which is set to on (Z2855 in FIG. 627) when the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is off during the fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2853: NO in FIG. 627).

Then, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 630), the setting status is determined (see Z2831 in FIG. 630), and when it is set to ON (Z2831: YES in FIG. 630), the process related to the touch effect is performed. The mode identification process (Z2868 in FIG. 630) is executed without being executed. In this control example, the special operation flag 223FI is set to be turned on while the player continuously operates (presses) the left button 22B and the right button 22C, and the left button 22B and the right button 22C are set to be turned on. When the operation of is stopped, the special operation flag 223FI is set to off (see Z2857 in FIG. 627). That is, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated with the left button 22B and the right button 22C pressed, the effect mode of the touch effect does not change based on the operation result, and the currently set background mode is used. Notification is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as described with reference to FIG. 598, the left button 22B and the right button 22C are arranged at a distance (about 3 cm) so that the player can operate them simultaneously with one hand. Has been done. Therefore, the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with the other hand while the left button 22B and the right button 22C are operated with one hand. The arrangement relationship of each operating means is not limited to the arrangement relationship of this control example. For example, the left button 22B, the right button 22C, and the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with one hand at the same time. Alternatively, the left button 22B and the right button 22C may be configured so that they can be operated by one hand operating the operation handle and the touch sensor 2900 can be operated by the other hand. ..

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in this 18th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 613 and 614, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the 18th control example will be described. In the 18th control example, the content specified in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 and the content specified in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234 are different from the 11th control example described above. Other than that, they are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 613 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the 18th control example. As shown in FIG. 613, the work RAM 233 of the 18th control example has eight display setting flags 233FA, eight display effect counters 233FB, a display reserved ball number storage area 233FC, and a display effect counter 233FD. It is different from the eleventh control example described above.

The eight-piece display setting flag 233FA is a flag for indicating that the eight-piece hold effect is being executed, and is set to be turned on when the eight-piece hold effect is executed. While the eight display setting flags 233FA are set to ON, the special symbol is displayed in the standby area DS1B (see FIG. 602 (B)) of the sub-display area DS of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the number of reserved balls, the remaining number of reserved symbols (reserved symbols for effect) that are the targets of the eight reserved effects are displayed (see FIG. 609). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the execution period of the eight hold effects, which is a continuous effect (period effect) executed so as to straddle a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

In the 18th control example, the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the target of the 8 reserved effects and the number of reserved symbols for the effect are configured to be displayed in synchronization, but the 8 reserved effects are displayed. It suffices to display the number of reserved symbols for effect so that the player can be informed of the execution period of the game in an easy-to-understand manner. The number of reserved symbols for production may be set, or one production reserved symbol may be set for two or more special symbol fluctuations. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the progress of the eight hold effects (how many hold symbols are currently being displayed in a variable manner).

The eight display counters 233FB are the number of display hold symbols to be displayed in the standby area DS1B (see FIG. 602 (B)) of the sub-display area DS of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the hold effect. It is a counter for measuring. In this control example, since the number of reserved symbols for effect is changed according to the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the target of the eight hold effect, eight display effect from the voice lamp control device 113. In the eight display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 636) executed when the hold command is received, the value of the counter is set to 8 (see Z5707 in FIG. 636).

Then, in the variation pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 635) executed when the variation pattern command for display is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the counter is subtracted (Z3522 in FIG. 635), and after the subtraction. It is determined whether the value of the counter of is 0 (Z3524 in FIG. 635). When the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB becomes 0, it means that all the reserved symbols that are the target of the 8 hold effect are used, so the 8 display setting flag 233FA is set to end the display of the effect hold symbol. It is set to off (see Z3525 in FIG. 635), and in the hold display process (see Z3495 in FIG. 637), the hold symbol is displayed in the waiting area DS1B (see FIG. 609). As a result, when the last special figure change that is the target of the eight-piece hold effect is executed, the hold symbol indicating the number of hold balls of the special figure is displayed in the waiting area DS1B, so that the eight-piece hold effect ends. At that time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how much the number of reserved balls of the special figure is accumulated.

The display reserved ball number storage area 233FC is a storage area for storing the current special figure reserved ball number on the display control device 114 side, and receives a display reserved ball number command output from the voice lamp control device 113. If so, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the received command is stored.

The display effect counter 233FD is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and has a different value each time the display control device 114 command determination process (see Z3302 in FIG. 634) is executed. The update process is executed so as to be. The value of the display effect counter 233FD is acquired when a lottery is performed with reference to the eight hold lottery table 222FA as to whether or not to execute the eight hold effect in the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 621). (See Z2474 in FIG. 621).

Next, the contents of the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234 of the 18th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 613, the NAND flash memory 234A of the 18th control example differs from the NAND flash memory 234A of the 11th control example described above in that eight effect scenario selection tables 234A3 are added. ing.

The 8 effect scenario selection table 234A3 is a data table for selecting the effect result of the 8 hold effect, and is based on the remaining number of reserved symbols to be the target of the 8 hold effect and the lottery result of the special symbol. It is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the eight-piece hold effect.

Here, the detailed contents of the eight effect scenario selection table 234A3 will be described with reference to FIG. 614. FIG. 614 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the eight effect scenario selection table 234A3. As described above with reference to FIGS. 607 to 609, in the 18th control example, the treasure box displaying the executing area DS1A is open at the time when the special figure fluctuation is started when the eight hold effects are executed. It is configured to display the suggestion mode for showing the lottery result of the variation, and the suggestion mode is configured to be selected with reference to the eight effect scenario selection table 234A3.

In the 8 effect scenario selection table 234A3, the fluctuation result (lottery result of the special figure variation executed this time) is a hit (big hit), and the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB is "7 to 4". In that case, that is, when 4 to 7 reserved symbols for effect imitating a treasure box are displayed in the standby area DS1B, the value of the display effect counter 233FD is suggested in the range of "0 to 50". Is defined, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "51 to 90", the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "91 to 150", and "white" is defined in the range of "151 to 198". It is stipulated.

Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 display hold symbols imitating a treasure box are displayed in the standby area DS1B, the display effect counter. The suggestion mode "Rainbow" is defined in the range of "0 to 89" for the value of 233FD, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "90 to 149", and the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "150 to 179". Is specified, and "white" is specified in the range of "180 to 198".

On the other hand, when the fluctuation result (the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation executed this time) is out of order and the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB is "7 to 4", that is, the treasure box is imitated in the standby area DS1B. When 4 to 7 reserved symbols for effect are displayed, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the display effect counter 233FD, and is in the range of "40 to 149". The suggestion mode "blue" is defined, and "white" is defined in the range of "150 to 198". Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 display hold symbols imitating a treasure box are displayed in the standby area DS1B, the display effect counter. The suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 233FD, the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "60 to 159", and "white" is defined in the range of "160 to 198". It is stipulated.

As described above, in the 18th control example, as the suggestion mode displayed as the eight hold effect, the hit suggestion mode "Rainbow" that can be selected when the lottery result is a hit is provided. When the suggestion mode "Rainbow" is displayed, the lottery result advantageous to the player is notified at the timing when the special figure change is started, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, the smaller the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB, that is, the more the 8 hold effect progresses, the easier it is to display various colors as the suggestion mode of the 8 hold effect. It is possible to entertain the production without getting tired of the eight-piece hold production, which is a continuous production performed over the fluctuation of the special figure.

In the 18th control example, when eight hold effects are executed, a hold symbol (treasure box) for effect for showing the target special figure change is displayed in the waiting area DS1B, and the target of the effect is When the special figure change is executed, the treasure box displayed in the executing area DS1A is open, and the suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the change is displayed. Not limited to, for example, when displaying a reserved symbol (treasure box) for production in the waiting area DS1B, the color of the displayed treasure box is set based on the pre-determination result for each reserved symbol. Is also good.

Specifically, it is possible to set multiple treasure chest colors that are easier to select when the winning information corresponding to each reserved symbol contains information indicating a jackpot than when the information indicating a jackpot is not included. Good to configure. With this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the special map fluctuation executed during the eight-piece hold effect from the stage before the special map variation is executed.

In addition, an effect (look-ahead effect) that changes the mode (color of the treasure box) of the effect reserved symbol displayed in the standby area DS1B and an effect that changes the display mode of the contents of the treasure box displayed in the running area DS1A. When (the variable effect) and (the variable effect) are executed in combination, it is preferable to set a variable mode so that the player pays attention to the variable effect executed after the pre-reading effect executed earlier. In this case, when setting the effect mode (color of the treasure box) of the look-ahead effect, the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the effect mode is set may also be set in advance. When selecting the variation effect, the variation effect may be selected based on the effect mode of the look-ahead effect set for the reserved symbol corresponding to the variation effect this time. As a result, one reserved symbol (winning information) can be related to the production mode of a plurality of effects (look-ahead effect, the variable effect) executed at different timings, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to perform continuous production without giving.

<Control processing by the main control device in the 18th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 615, the start-up process 8 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 in the 18th control example will be described. FIG. 615 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 8. The start-up process 8 in the 18th control example sets a change return command indicating the remaining time of the special figure change during execution after the Z910 process is executed for the start-up process in the 11th control example. (Z951) The difference is that processing is added. In the 18th control example, a command indicating the remaining time of the return fluctuation is set. Since the other processes are the same as the start-up processes in the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 616 to 633, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th control example will be described. In the eighteenth control example, the start-up process (see FIG. 475) is the start-up process 8 (see FIG. 615), and the main process (see FIG. 476) is the main process 8 (see FIG. 617) with respect to the eleventh control example described above. (See), the command determination process (2113 in FIG. 477) is the command determination process 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 618), the variation pattern reception process (Z2202 in FIG. 478) is the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 619), and the variation display setting. Process (Z2114 in FIG. 487) is variable display setting process 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 624), hold quantity display update process (Z2106 in FIG. 476) is hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171 in FIG. 625), frame button input monitoring. The effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 490) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 626), and the fluctuation recovery process (Z2252 in FIG. 622) and the display rise process (Z2245 in FIG. , Left and right button input processing (Z2843 in FIG. 627), SW effect processing (Z2841 in FIG. 628), background change processing (Z2949 in FIG. 629), mode identification processing (Z296 in FIG. 631), lamp setting processing (Z2173 in FIG. 632). ), The counter update process (Z2176 in FIG. 633) is added, which is the main difference. The other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 616, the start-up process (see FIG. 616) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th control example will be described. This start-up process differs from the start-up process (see FIG. 475) of the eleventh control example described above in that the process (Z2012, Z2013 in FIG. 475) when a state command is received is deleted. .. Further, the difference is that the content of the process executed in the initial setting (Z2001) is changed. Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the start-up process (see FIG. 616) is executed, the processes of Z2001 to Z2011 are executed in the same manner as in the eleventh control example described above, and this process is terminated. Here, the initial setting (see Z2001) in the 18th control example will be described with respect to the difference from the 11th control example described above. In the 18th control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 601, if the special figure change is executed during the period when the initial setting is executed, the BGM of the special figure change is output. It is configured in. That is, in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 616), the process of reading the game information at the time of turning off the power is executed, and the game information at the time of turning off the power read by the process is changing in the special figure. If it is determined that there is, a change command for voice is set to output the BGM of the special figure change from the voice output device 226.

Although the details will be described later, in the 18th control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the power is supplied from the internal power supply provided inside the voice lamp control device 113, and the power is supplied. The game information (whether or not there is a change in the special figure, the lottery result of the change, the BGM for change, the remaining change time, etc.) at the time of disconnection is temporarily stored in the display storage area. This makes it possible to read the game information stored in the display storage area in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 616).

Next, with reference to FIG. 617, the contents of the main process 8 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 18th control example will be described. FIG. 617 is a schematic diagram showing the main process 8 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 18th control example.

The main process 8 of the 18th control example replaces the hold quantity display update process (Z2106 of FIG. 476) with respect to the main process (see FIG. 476) of the 11th control example described above, and the hold quantity update process 8 (FIG. 476). 625 Z2171) is replaced with frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 476), and frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 625) is replaced with command determination processing (Z2113 in FIG. 476). The command determination process 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 618) is replaced with the variable display setting process (Z2114 in FIG. 476) by providing the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 624), and the short-term winning management process (FIG. 476). Z2111), the hold effect management process during reach (Z2112 in FIG. 475) is deleted, and the lamp setting process (see Z2173 in FIG. 617) is added. The other processes are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main process 8 (see FIG. 617) is executed, first, the same processes of Z2101 to Z2105 as the main process (see FIG. 476) of the eleventh control example described above are executed. Then, when the processing of Z2105 is completed, the pending quantity display update processing 8 is next executed (Z2171). The detailed contents of the reserved quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described later with reference to FIG. 625. After finishing the processing of Z2171, the processing of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 is executed (Z2172). The detailed contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described later with reference to FIG. 626.

When the processing of Z2172 is completed, the same processing of Z2108 to Z2110 as the main processing (see FIG. 476) of the eleventh control example described above is executed, and then the lamp setting processing is executed (Z2173). This lamp setting process (Z2173) is a process for setting the light emitting mode of the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D provided on the upper side of the variable display device unit 80. The detailed contents of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 632. After finishing the processing of Z2173, the counter update processing (Z2176) is then executed. The detailed contents of the counter update process (Z2176) will be described later with reference to FIG. 633.

Then, when the processing of Z2176 is completed, or when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: NO), the command determination processing 8 is executed (Z2174), and then the variable display is performed. The setting process 8 is executed (Z2175). Then, the same processing of Z2115 to Z2119 as in the eleventh control example described above is executed. The detailed contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described later with reference to FIG. 618, and the detailed contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described later with reference to FIG. 624.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described with reference to FIG. 618. FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174). The command determination process 8 (Z2174) receives the variation pattern command and the hold ball count command output from the main control device 110 for the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 477) of the eleventh control example described above. The point that the content of the process to be executed in the case is different, the point that the process to be executed when the stop command output from the main control device 110 is received (variable stop process 8) is added, and the output from the display control device 114. There is a difference between the point that the process to be executed when the display rise command is received is added and the point that the process to be executed is added when the variable recovery command is received. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process of the eleventh control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 477), the process (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 477) executed when the stopped type command shown in the figure is received is described in the 18th. The same process is executed in the control example, but for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the process is executed according to other commands (Z2661 in FIG. 618).

When the command determination process 8 (Z2174) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that the command determination process 8 (Z2174) has been received (Z2201: YES), then the variation pattern reception process 8 Is executed (Z2241), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described later with reference to FIG. 619, but at the start of variation with respect to the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 478) of the eleventh control example described above. It differs in that it is configured to execute the process for the background change in.

Returning to FIG. 618, the explanation will be continued. When it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: NO), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: YES). ), The fluctuation stop process 8 is executed (Z2242), and this process is terminated. The fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) performs a process of setting a stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and a process of executing a background change when the special symbol is stopped. The details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 620.

In the processing of Z2203, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2203: NO), then it is determined whether the reserved ball count command has been received (Z2205), and it is determined that the reserved ball count command has been received. If this is the case (Z2205: YES), the hold number control process is executed (Z2243), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this hold number control process (Z2243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 621.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the process of 2205 (Z2205: NO), the Z2207 and Z2208 which are the same as the command determination process of the eleventh control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 477). The process is executed, then it is determined whether or not the variable return command has been received (Z2251), and if it is determined that the variable return command has been received (Z2251: YES), the variable return process is executed (Z2252), and this process is performed. To finish. The detailed contents of this fluctuation return processing (Z2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 622.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2251 that the fluctuation return command has not been received (Z2251: NO), then it is determined whether or not the display rise command has been received (Z2244). This display rise command is set when the display control device 114 finishes the initial setting process after the power is turned on, and the display control device 114 is set by the command output process (not shown) executed by the display control device 114. Is output to the voice lamp control device 113.

When it is determined that the display rise command has been received in the processing of Z2244, that is, the initial setting processing of the display control device 114 is completed, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113. When it becomes possible to display arbitrary image data on the display screen of (Z2244: YES), the display rising process is executed (Z2245), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this display rising process (Z2245) will be described later with reference to FIG. 623.

In this Z2245 process, a process for reading the game information (voice data) stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off and outputting the voice data to the voice output device 226 is executed. As a result, as described above with reference to FIG. 601, the audio output device 226 coincides with the timing at which the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 switches from the initial screen to the normal screen. It is possible to output the sound based on the sound data stored in the display storage area from.

In this control example, as game information stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off, information indicating whether or not the special figure is changing (information during the special figure change) is executed during the special figure change. Information indicating the type of voice (BGM) (BGM type information) can be stored, and when setting voice data in the processing of Z2245, the special figure changing information and BGM type information are read out and used as the read information. Based on this, the rising voice data is set.

In the processing of Z2244, if it is determined that the display rise command has not been received (Z2244: NO), the processing corresponding to other commands (including the processing when the stop type command is received) is executed (Z2261). , End this process.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described with reference to FIG. 619. FIG. 619 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241). The variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) deletes the processes of Z2225 to Z2231 with respect to the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 of FIG. 478) of the eleventh control example described above, and processes the background change at the start of the variation. It differs in that it is added. Since the other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 619) is executed, the same processes of Z2221 to Z2224 as the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 478) of the eleventh control example described above are executed, and then the next process is performed. It is determined whether the background change flag 223FA is set to ON (Z2256). Here, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223FA is set to ON (Z2256: YES), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223I (Z2257), and the set background mode is set. A display switching command to the corresponding fluctuation pattern is set (Z2258), the next background change flag 223FA is set to off (Z2259), and this process is terminated.

That is, the background change operation is executed outside the third symbol high-speed change period during the special figure change, and the change pattern reception process 8 (see Z2241 in FIG. 619) is executed with the next background change flag 223FA set to ON. Then, the background mode is switched based on the background change operation executed during the previous special figure change. On the other hand, in the process of Z2256, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223FA is not set to on (set to off) (Z2256: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242) will be described with reference to FIG. 620. FIG. 620 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242). When the variable stop process 8 (Z2242) is executed, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265).

Next, it is determined whether the next background change flag 223FA is set to ON (Z2266), and if it is determined that the next background change flag 223FA is set to ON (Z2266: YES), it is determined whether the special figure is on hold (Z2266: YES). Z2267). In this process, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B are read out for determination. If it is determined in the processing of Z2267 that there is no reservation for the special figure (Z2267: NO), the next special figure change will occur even though the condition for executing the background change in the next special figure change is satisfied. Since it is not executed, in order to execute the background change when the special figure change is stopped this time, the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223I (Z2268), and the set background mode is set. A display switching command to the corresponding fluctuation pattern is set (Z2269), the next background change flag 223FA is set to off (Z2270), and the process proceeds to Z2271.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2266 that the next background change flag 223FA is not set to ON (Z2266: NO), or when it is determined in the processing of Z2267 that there is a hold of the special figure (Z2267: YES). ) Does not execute the background change at the timing of executing this process (the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special figure), so that the process of Z2268 to Z2270 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of Z2271.

In the processing of Z2271, it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223FF is ON (Z2271), that is, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a return fluctuation. When it is determined that the return-changing flag is on (Z2271: YES), the return-changing flag 223FF is set to off (Z2272), and the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is cleared to 0 (Z2273). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return variation flag 223FF is not on (Z2271: NO), since the current variation is not the return variation, the processes of Z2272 and Z2273 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, when the condition for executing the next special figure change is not satisfied while the next background change flag 223FA is on (the special figure is suspended at the timing when the current special figure change is stopped). (If there is no), the background change is executed at the stop timing of the special figure change this time, so the player who wants the background change should be provided with the background mode after switching at an early stage. Can be done.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the present control example described above, and for example, the next background change flag 223FA may be kept on until the next special figure change is executed. In this case, a predetermined valid period (for example, 1 minute) is set as the period until the next special figure change is started, and if the next special figure change is not executed within the predetermined valid period, the following background It is preferable to configure the change flag 223FA to be set to off.

With this configuration, for example, even if the previous player executes the background change operation and ends the game with the next background change flag 223FA set to ON, the next player starts the game. It is possible to prevent the background change from being executed immediately afterwards.

Next, the contents of the hold number control process (Z2243) will be described with reference to FIG. 621. FIG. 621 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold number control process (Z2243). In this hold number control process (Z2243), a process for managing the number of reserved balls on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the information included in the hold ball number command received from the main control device 110, and a special figure. The execution process of the effect (8 hold effect) on the condition that the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number is performed.

In the hold number control process (Z2243), first, the hold ball number of the special symbol is extracted from the received hold ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol hold number counter (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223A, special symbol 2 hold ball number counter). (Z2471) is stored in the number counter 223B), and a display holding ball number command corresponding to the value of the special symbol holding number counter stored in the processing of Z2471 is set (Z2472). Then, whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter (the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223A and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223B) is 8 which is the upper limit value. Determine (Z2473).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2473 that the value of the counter (number of reserved balls in the special figure) is 8 (Z2473: YES), the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired (Z2474), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223H is used. Based on this, a lottery result is acquired from the eight-piece hold lottery table 222FA (Z2475), and it is determined whether the lottery result is a lottery result indicating that the eight-piece hold effect is executed (Z2476).

If it is determined that the result is a lottery indicating that the eight hold effect is to be executed (Z2476: YES), the corresponding eight hold effect is set (Z2477), and the display eight hold effect command is set (Z2478). ), The hold effect execution flag 223FB is set to ON (Z2479), the value of the hold effect counter 223FC is set to 8, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2476 that it is a lottery result indicating that the eight holding effect is not executed (Z2476: NO), the processing of Z2477 to Z2480 is skipped because the eight holding effect is not executed. This process ends.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation return processing (Z2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 622. FIG. 622 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation return processing (Z2252). This fluctuation return processing (Z2252) executes a processing for updating the remaining time of the return variation based on the return variation command received from the main control device 110.

In the fluctuation return processing (Z2252), first, the residual fluctuation time information included in the fluctuation recovery command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the recovery state storage area 223FE (Z2281). Next, it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time is 0, that is, whether or not the return fluctuation is in progress (Z2282). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not 0 (Z2282: NO), the value corresponding to the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is set (Z2283), and the return changing flag 223FF is set to ON (Z2284). Next, BGM information indicating the reproduction position of the special figure change BGM at the time when the power supply is cut off is read from the backup area of the RAM 223 (Z2285), and the BGM of the special figure change is read from the reproduction position indicated by the read BGM information. Is set to start (Z2286), and this process ends. On the other hand, the residual fluctuation time is 0 in the processing of Z2282. That is, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the return fluctuation (Z2282: YES), the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this fluctuation return processing (see FIG. 622), when the fluctuation display is being executed when the power is restored, the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is restarted from the reproduction position of the BGM at the time when the power is cut off. be able to. As a result, when the power is momentarily cut off during the execution of the special figure change (so-called momentary power failure, etc.), the BGM after the power is restored will change the BGM from the continuation of the BGM when the power is cut off. Can be output. Therefore, even after the power is cut off, the player can easily understand that the lottery status at the time of power cutoff is maintained as it is. Therefore, even if the power supply is momentarily (temporarily) cut off during the special figure change, the special figure change that is being executed may be discarded for the player. Since it is possible to suppress the suspicion that there is no such thing, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

In the 18th control example, the progress of the BGM output at the time of power failure is backed up by the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the main control device 110, the variation return command may include at least information on the variation type (variation time) in addition to the information on the residual variation time of the special figure variation being executed. Then, from the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation during execution and the remaining fluctuation time information, the period during which the BGM has been regenerated (the fluctuation time elapsed before the occurrence of the power failure) is calculated, and the total reproduction time of the BGM is calculated. By back-calculating the reproduction position of the BGM at the time when the power is cut off from the difference between the two, the reproduction position of the BGM at the time of returning the power may be specified. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to provide a backup means in the voice lamp control device 113, so that the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified. Therefore, since the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the display rising process (Z2245) will be described with reference to FIG. 623. FIG. 623 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display rise processing (Z2245). In this display rise processing (Z2245), when a display rise command is received from the display control device 114, that is, when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, the remaining fluctuation time is dealt with based on the value of the residual fluctuation time counter. Executes the process of setting the display variation pattern command.

In the display rise processing (Z2245), first, it is determined whether or not the return-changing flag 223FF is on, that is, whether or not the return-changing flag is in progress (Z2291). If it is determined that the return-changing flag 223FF is not on (Z2291: NO), the return-changing flag is not in progress, and the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return-changing flag 223FF is on (Z2291: YES), the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is read out (Z2292), and the process proceeds to Z2293.

After executing the process of Z2292, it is then determined whether or not the residual variation time read by the process of Z2292 is 5 seconds or more (Z2293). When it is determined that the remaining variation time is 5 seconds or more (Z2293: YES), the display variation pattern command corresponding to the residual variation time is executed by using various display variation patterns possessed by the variation pattern selection table 222A. Set (Z2294), start up and set the set audio data (Z2295). Next, the return-changing flag 223FF is set to off (Z2296), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2293, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is not 5 seconds or more (Z2293: NO), it is determined whether the residual fluctuation time is 2 seconds or more (Z2297). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds or more (Z2297: YES), the display fluctuation pattern for normal reach is made to correspond to the remaining fluctuation time, and the display fluctuation pattern command is set (Z2298). Then, the process of Z2296 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2297, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not 2 seconds or more (Z2297: NO), a display command for displaying the returning screen is set until the remaining fluctuation time elapses (Z2299). ), Z2296 processing is executed, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the 18th control example, the variation pattern command for displaying the return variation is set according to the remaining variation time, and the voice data is set to notify the player of the result of the return variation without discomfort. can do. In this 18th control example, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set by using the fluctuation pattern table specified even at the time of the return fluctuation. However, the fluctuation pattern table for the return fluctuation is provided, and the fluctuation pattern table is provided at the time of the return fluctuation. The display variation pattern command may be set using the return variation pattern table. With such a configuration, more fluctuation patterns can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described with reference to FIG. 624. FIG. 624 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175). The variation display setting process 8 (Z2175) is a control process related to the hold effect (8 hold effects) and a remaining variation time counter 223FG with respect to the variation display setting process (see Z2114 in FIG. 487) of the eleventh control example described above. It differs in that it adds the process of setting, and is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 8 (Z2175) is executed, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223D is set to ON (Z2501), and if it is determined that the variation start flag 223D is not set to ON. (Z2501: NO), skip to the process of Z2505 as in the eleventh control example. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is set to ON (Z2501: YES), then it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223FC is larger than 0 (Z2531), and is larger than 0. (Z2531: YES), the value of the hold effect counter 223FC is subtracted by 1 (Z2532), and it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223FC after the subtraction is 0 (Z2533).

When it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223FC is 0 in the processing of Z2533 (Z2533: YES), since it is the end timing of the eight hold effects, the hold effect execution flag 223FB is set to off (Z2534). ), The process proceeds to the same Z2502 process as in the eleventh control example described above.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2531, if it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223FC is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2531: NO), it means that 8 pieces are not currently in hold effect, so Z2532. -The process of Z2534 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of Z2502.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2533 that the value of the hold effect counter 223FC is not 0 (Z2533: NO), the eight hold effects are being executed and the end timing of the eight hold effects is not reached. Therefore, the process of Z2534 is skipped and the process shifts to Z2502. When the process shifts to the Z2502 process, the same Z2502 to Z2504 processes as the variation display setting process of the eleventh control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 487) are executed, and the value corresponding to the variation time of the acquired variation pattern remains. It is set in the fluctuation time counter 223FF (Z2511). Then, the same processing of Z2502 to Z2504 as the variation display setting processing (see Z2114 of FIG. 487) of the eleventh control example described above is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Further, in the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 624) in the 18th control example, when the process of Z2511 is completed, the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2535), and the process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the reserved quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described with reference to FIG. 625. FIG. 625 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171). In the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171), a process for controlling the lighting of the hold LED 900 provided on the game board 13 in a lighting mode for indicating the number of hold balls of the special symbol is performed.

When the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) is executed, first, the number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball count counter (special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223A, special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223B) is executed. The hold LED 900 is set to light up (Z2631), and then the display hold ball count command corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball count counter (special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223A, special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223B) is issued. Set (Z2632) and end this process.

In this control example, in the process of Z2631, the holding LED 900 is lit in the same manner corresponding to the total value of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. Although it is configured to be set, the holding LED 900 is not limited to this, and for example, the holding LED 900 can be identified between the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. The lighting may be set so as to light, or the lighting is set so as to light the holding LED 900 according to only the number of holding balls of one of the special figures according to the current gaming state. You may.

Further, in this control example, the holding LED 900 is configured to always execute the lighting setting indicating the special figure holding ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which a specific game condition is satisfied (for example,). The period during which the eight hold effects are being executed, the period during which the movable member (accessory) for effect is movable so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to see, and the display of the third symbol display device 81. The holding LED 900 is configured to be turned on only during the period when it is difficult to visually recognize the number of reserved balls of the special figure on the third symbol display device 81, such as the period during which the variable display is executed using the entire screen. May be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 626, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described. FIG. 626 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172). This frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is pressed with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107 in FIG. 490) of the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that the content is changed, the processing content that is executed when the touch sensor 2900 is operated is changed, and the processing that is executed when the left and right buttons are input is added. Everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) is executed, the same processing of Z2801 to Z2805 as the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 490) of the eleventh control example described above is executed, and Z2805 is executed. If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of (Z2805: NO), the process related to various effects executed when the frame button 22 is pressed is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2843. In the processing of Z2843, the processing for the operation of the left button 22B or the right button 22C (hereinafter, left / right button 22) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the Z2805 process (Z2805: YES), the SW effect process is executed (Z2841), and then the process proceeds to Z2842. Here, in Z2805, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed when the switch that comes into contact with the frame button 22 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). That is, in this control example, after the frame button 22 is physically pressed and the switch is turned on (after the frame button 22 moves to the pressed position), the frame button 22 returns to the initial position. It is configured to require a recovery period of at least 0.2 seconds, and the frame button 22 is positioned at the position where the switch is turned on for 0.15 seconds of the recovery operation. It is composed.

With this configuration, when the switch is turned on based on the physical movement of the frame button 22, the switch is turned on continuously for at least 0.15 seconds, so that the on state is set. When the detection is continued for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds), it can be determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. Therefore, for example, when an output indicating an on state for a short period (for example, 0.01 seconds) is generated due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being erroneously determined to have been pressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 627, the contents of the left / right button input process (Z2843), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172), will be described. FIG. 627 is a flowchart showing the contents of the left / right button input process (Z2843). In this left / right button input process (Z2843), it is determined whether the special symbol has high-speed fluctuation or low-speed fluctuation, and a process of switching the operation mode of the left / right button 22 is executed.

In the left / right button input process (Z2843), first, it is determined whether or not the left button 22B or the right button 22C has been operated (Z2851). When it is determined that the left / right button 22 has been operated (Z2851: YES), it is determined whether the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is 0 or more, that is, whether the special symbol is being changed (Z2852). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z2852: YES), it is determined whether or not the high-speed changing flag 223FH is ON (Z2853). When it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is on (Z2853: YES), the volume level according to the operation result of the left and right buttons 22 is set (Z2854), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is off in the processing of Z2853 (Z2853: NO), the special operation flag 223FI is set to ON (Z2855), and this processing is terminated. By configuring in this way, the operation mode of the left and right buttons 22 can be changed according to the fluctuation state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2851 when it is determined that the left and right buttons 22 are not operated (Z2851: NO), it is determined whether or not the special operation flag 223FI is ON (Z2856). If it is determined that the special operation flag 223FI is on (Z2856: YES), the special operation flag 223FI is set to off (Z2857), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special operation flag 223FI is off in the processing of Z2856 (Z2856: NO), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841) executed by the processing of Z2841 in FIG. 626 will be described with reference to FIG. 628. FIG. 628 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841). In this SW effect processing (Z2841), the control process related to the special effect of vibrating the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the background change process of changing the background mode by pressing the frame button 22 are described above. The same processing as the partial processing in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 490) of the eleventh control example is executed. Note that the same processing as the partial processing in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 490) of the eleventh control example described above is designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing (Z2841) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a special effect is set as the SW effect (Z2941). Here, at present, when the display variation pattern command is set in the Z2504 process of the variation display setting process (see Z2175 in FIG. 624), the variation pattern including the special effect is set as the SW effect, and the variation pattern is set. In the Z2804 process of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 626), it is determined whether or not the SW effective time corresponding to the special effect is set.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2941 that it is a special effect (Z2941: YES), the operation to the frame button 22 this time is an operation to the frame button 22 during the special effect, so that the control process for the special effect is performed. (Z2942 to Z2947) is executed. First, in Z2942, it is determined whether the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is larger than 0 (Z2942).

The value of this SW special effect counter 223FD is set when the special effect is executed, and the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is 0 at the time of the first frame button operation after the special effect is set. Is. When it is determined in the processing of Z2942 that the value of the counter is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2942: NO), the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired (Z2943), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223H is obtained. The special effect is set from the special effect selection table 222FB (Z2944). Then, the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set based on the set special effect (Z2945).

In this control example, regardless of which special effect is selected, the number of operations of the frame button 22 corresponding to the special effect is four times. Therefore, in the processing of Z2945, the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set to 4. To.

Next, a display special effect command corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set (Z2946), SW motor data corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set (Z2947), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2942, when the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the special effect has already been executed (Z2942: YES), the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set to 1. Subtraction (Z2948) is performed, and the processing of Z2946 and Z2497 is executed in correspondence with the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD after the subtraction, and this processing is terminated.

Here, the above-mentioned processing of the special effect will be specifically described when the type of the special effect (vibe type C) is selected with reference to FIG. 612 (B). First, the first frame button 22 operation is performed in a state where the special effect is included in the current variation pattern, and the type of the special effect (vibe type C) is selected by the processing of Z2944. Then, 4 is set in the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD in the processing of Z2945, and the vibration amount (none) corresponding to the first frame button operation of the vibration type C is set in the processing of Z2447 (FIG. 612 (FIG. 612). B) See).

At the same time, in the processing of Z2946, an operation suggestion display mode for prompting the player to operate the next frame button (for example, a button display mode imitating the frame button 22 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the button thereof. The pressing suggestion display mode) for executing the action of pressing the display mode is displayed. Here, the operation suggestion display mode described above is configured to be variably set according to the lottery result corresponding to the current special figure change and the type of the selected special effect. For example, the following frame button. During operation, if a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated during the operation of the frame button this time is applied, a large vibration is applied if a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated during the operation of the frame button this time is applied. It is configured so that the display mode in which the operation suggestion is emphasized is more easily displayed than in the case where it is not given.

With this configuration, it is possible to facilitate the player to perform the next frame button operation. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery this time is a big hit, it is configured so that the display mode emphasizing the operation suggestion is easier to be displayed than when the lottery result is not a big hit (off). When the next frame button operation is applied with a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated at the current frame button operation, and the special figure lottery result is a big hit, the next frame button operation is the most. It is configured so that the emphasized display mode can be easily displayed.

As a result, the result of the special drawing lottery can be predicted based on both the operation suggestion mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the vibration amount generated when the frame button 22 is pressed. can. Furthermore, in order to emphasize the operation suggestion when the amount of vibration generated at the time of the next frame button operation becomes larger than the magnitude of the vibration generated at the time of the current frame button operation, the player forgets to press the frame button 22. It can be suppressed and the set effect can be fully enjoyed.

Next, when the frame button operation is performed for the second time during the special effect, it is determined that the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is larger than 0 (3) in the processing of Z2942 (Z2942; YES), and the SW special effect is produced. The value of the counter 223FD is subtracted by 1. Then, the vibration amount (weak) when the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is 2 is set in the SW motor data. After that, the same process is repeated until the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD becomes 0. Then, when the processing of Z2946 and Z2497 is completed with the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD being 0, the setting of the special effect is cleared.

That is, in this control example, in the state where the special effect is set, the special effect is executed until the frame button operation is performed a predetermined number of times (value set in the SW special effect counter 223FD). It is configured in. In this control example, since the variation pattern is configured to correspond to the setting and the special effect can be set as the SW effect, the execution period of the special effect is configured to be within one special figure variation period. However, it may be configured to set a special effect regardless of the setting of the fluctuation pattern (regardless of the special figure fluctuation period). For example, the special effect is set at the start of the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute and set a special effect based on the determination result. Further, the special effect may be set when the player performs a special operation on the operation means (frame button 22).

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a special effect regardless of the fluctuation time of the set special figure. In addition, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 in this case may be configured to be variable according to the result of the special drawing lottery during fluctuation, the winning information in the hold, and the set gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 628, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of Z2941 that the set SW effect is not a special effect (SW effect is not set) (Z2941: NO), then the frame button input monitoring of the eleventh control example described above is performed. -The same process as Z2806, Z2809, Z2810, Z2811 of the effect process (see Z2107 in FIG. 490) is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when it is determined that the current time is the timing when the SW effect is not set. (Z2806: NO) Since the frame button 22 this time is a background change operation for changing the background mode, the background change process is executed (Z2949), and this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the background change process (Z2949) will be described with reference to FIG. 629. FIG. 629 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process (Z2949). This background change process (Z2949) is executed when a background change operation (operation to the frame button 22 for changing the background mode) is performed, and the background change is performed based on the operation timing of the background change operation. The process for changing the timing of executing is executed.

In the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 629), first, whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is greater than 0 at the timing when the background change operation is executed, that is, the fluctuation period of the special figure (special symbol). (Z2963), and if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is a value larger than 0 (Z2963: YES), then whether the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is on. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a high-speed fluctuation period (a period in which the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is high) (Z2964). Here, if it is determined that the period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (medium speed, low speed period, or stop period) (Z2964: NO), the background mode cannot be changed immediately, so the next background change flag. 223FA is set to ON (Z2965), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2963, when it is determined that the value of the residual fluctuation time counter is not 0 or more (Z2963: NO), the present is not the fluctuation period of the special figure (for example, the customer waiting period) (Z2963: NO). ) Or, in the process of Z2964, when it is determined that the current period is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2964: YES), the background mode can be changed immediately. Therefore, the background mode is added by 1 to the background mode. It is set in the storage area 223I (Z2966), a display switching command to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2967), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172) of FIG. 626 will be described with reference to FIG. 630. FIG. 630 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842). In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), various control processes are executed when the player operates the touch sensor 2900.

In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), the special operation flag 223FI is turned off with respect to the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 491) of the eleventh control example described above, and the value of the sensor valid time counter 223S is 0. The difference is that the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed when the advance notice effect display is not set, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the eleventh control example described above, the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is effectively determined only when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223S is larger than 0. However, in this control example, the touch is performed. The difference is that the sensor valid time counter 223S is used to measure the valid period corresponding to the effect set based on the fluctuation pattern among the periods during which the operation to the sensor 2900 can be effectively discriminated. Therefore, even when the sensor effective time counter 223S is 0, the operation on the touch sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. Further, also in the 18th control example, a period counter (not shown) is provided, and a period in which the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is not effectively determined is provided as in the 11th control example described above, but the description thereof will be omitted.

When the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special operation flag 223FI is on (Z2831), and when it is determined that the special operation flag 223FI is not on (Z2831: YES). , The same processing of Z2821 to Z2829 as the sensor input processing (Z2813 in FIG. 491) of the eleventh control example described above is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special operation flag 223FI is on (Z2831: YES) in the processing of Z2831 or the warning effect display is not set in the processing of Z2822 (Z2822: NO), the mode identification processing is performed. Is executed (Z2968), and this process is terminated. In this mode identification process (Z2968), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 631, a process for displaying the current background mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223S is 0 in the processing of Z2821, the value of the sensor effective time counter 223S is subtracted (Z2824) to determine whether the touch sensor is on (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor is not on (Z2825: NO), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch sensor is on (Z2825: YES), a command is set in which the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is low-speed fluctuation (Z2832), and the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is set to off (Z2832). Z2833). Next, the touch sensor effective time is reset (Z2829), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968) will be described with reference to FIG. 631. FIG. 631 is a flowchart showing the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968). When the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed, first, it is determined whether the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2769), and if it is determined to be on (Z2769: YES), the current background mode is supported. Set the mode display command (Z2970) and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the touch sensor 2900 is not operated in the processing of the Z2769 (Z2769: NO), the processing of the Z2970 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

That is, in the 18th control example, the current background mode can be notified to the player only by operating the touch sensor 2900. With this configuration, it is not necessary to always display the current background mode in the limited space of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be used. It is possible to secure a wide area used for producing a variable display.

In the 18th control example, when the current background mode is displayed based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900, the background mode is displayed in the mode display area DM1A (see FIG. 604 (A)). However, not limited to this, the effect mode of the variable display effect being executed at the timing of displaying the current background mode is determined based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900, and the display mode of the effect is determined based on the determination result. The display area where is not displayed may be determined, and the background mode may be displayed in the display area. As a result, the background mode can be displayed without interfering with the variable display effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173) will be described with reference to FIG. 632. FIG. 632 is a flowchart showing the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173). In this lamp setting process (Z2173), control is executed to change the lighting mode of the frame lamp (the lamp that lights the frame button 22) and the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D (see FIG. 599) according to the gaming situation.

When the lamp setting process (Z2173) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (Z2131), and if it is determined that the special figure is not changing (Z2131: NO), the frame lamp is turned on. Set the frame lighting command to light green (Z2135), then set the mode lighting command to light the mode lamps 1910A-1910D to notify the currently set background mode (Z2134), and perform this process. To finish.

Here, the lighting contents of the frame lamp will be described. In this control example, a frame lamp (LED) which is a light emitting means is embedded in the frame button 22, and the surface of the frame button 22 can be made to emit light in an arbitrary color by lighting the light emitting means. ing. Then, various information is notified to the player depending on the lighting color of the frame lamp.

Specifically, green is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure fluctuation is not executed, and blue is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The red color is specified as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is undergoing fluctuations other than high-speed fluctuations. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the current special figure fluctuation state (variation speed of the third symbol) by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Further, since the surface of the frame button 22 (the surface that the player contacts) to be operated when the background change operation is executed is made to emit light by the frame lamp, the player who intends to execute the background change operation is asked. Since the current special figure change state (variation speed of the third symbol) can be easily grasped, the timing of executing the background change is changed according to the special figure change state when the background change operation is executed. Even if the control is performed, it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the 18th control example, the timing of executing the background change is different according to the fluctuation speed of the third symbol, and which speed is the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed on the display screen. There was a problem that it was difficult for the player to identify the above-mentioned problem, but the above-mentioned problem should be solved by changing the lighting mode of the frame lamp according to the special figure fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol). Can be done.

In this control example, the frame lamp is configured to directly emit light on the surface of the frame button 22, but the arrangement position of the frame lamp is not limited to this, and it enters the viewpoint of the player who performs the background changing operation. Any position is sufficient. For example, a frame lamp may be provided in the vicinity of the frame button 22.

Returning to FIG. 632, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of Z2131, if it is determined that the special figure is fluctuating (Z2131: YES), then it is determined whether the high-speed fluctuating flag 223FH is on (Z2132), and the high-speed fluctuating flag 223FH is turned on. If it is determined to be (Z2132: YES), the frame lamp is turned on in blue (Z2133), the process proceeds to Z2134 processing, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2132, if it is determined that the special figure is not in high-speed fluctuation (Z2131: NO), the frame lamp is set to red (Z2136), and then a lighting command for turning on all the mode lamps. Is set, and this process ends.

Next, the counter update process (Z2176), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 617), will be described with reference to FIG. 633. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter update process (Z2176). In this counter update process (Z2176), a process of updating the values of various counters is executed.

In the counter update process (Z2176), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is 0 or more (Z2861). When the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is 0 or more (Z2861: YES), the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is subtracted by 1 (Z2862), and the process proceeds to Z2863. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is not 0 or more, that is, when it is determined to be 0 (Z2861: NO), the processing of Z2862 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2863.

In the processing of Z2863, it is determined whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG read in the processing of Z2861 is a value indicating the high-speed fluctuation period of the special figure (third symbol) (Z2863). If it is determined that the period is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2863: YES), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is set to ON (Z2864), other counter values are updated (Z2866), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is not the high-speed fluctuation period of the special figure (third symbol) (Z2863: NO), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is set to off (Z2865), and the above is described. The processing of Z2866 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device 114 in the 18th control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 of the 18th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 634 to 638. In the 18th control example, for the 11th control example described above, the command determination process 8 (see Z3302 in FIG. 634) is replaced with the command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 495), and the variable pattern command process (see FIG. 496) is performed. The variable pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 635) is replaced with the resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 503 (B)) instead of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (see Z4631 in FIG. 638). (See) is executed, and eight display setting processes (see Z3493 in FIG. 636) and hold display setting processes (see Z3495 in FIG. 637) are added. The other control contents are the same, and the same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 634. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z3302). In this command determination process 8 (Z3302), when the above-mentioned command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 495) is looped with a process executed when eight display hold commands are received and this process. The processing to update the value of the display effect counter, the content of the processing to be executed when the variable pattern command for display is received, and the content of the processing to be executed when the reserved ball count command is received. , Is different in that it is changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed, the same Z3401 to Z3404 processes as the command determination process of the eleventh control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 495) are executed, and the display variation pattern is executed in the Z3404 process. When it is determined that the command has been received (Z3404: YES), the variation pattern command process 8 is executed (Z3491), and then the process proceeds to the Z3496 process. The detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described later with reference to FIG. 635.

In the process of Z3496, the process of updating the value of the display effect counter is executed. In the 18th control example, the value of the display effect counter is updated every time the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed once. The command determination process 8 (Z3302) is configured to execute various processes according to the type of the command (display command) received by the display control device 114. Therefore, the timing at which the Z3496 process is executed can always be irregular. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the value of the display effect counter will be updated. Then, when the processing of Z3494 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of Z3401, and the command determination processing 8 is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received in the Z3404 process (Z3404: NO), the same Z3406 to Z3411 process as the command determination process described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 495) is executed. , The process proceeds to the above-mentioned Z3496 process. In the processing of Z3410, if it is determined that the display switching command has not been received (Z3410: NO), then it is determined whether or not the eight display hold command has been received (Z3492), and it is determined that the command has been received. If this is the case (Z3492: YES), the eight display setting process is executed (Z3493), and then the process proceeds to the Z3496 process.

This eight-piece display setting process (Z3493) is a process for creating image data related to the eight-piece hold effect (see FIG. 607), and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 636. In the processing of Z3492, if it is determined that the eight display hold command has not been received (Z3492: NO), then it is determined whether the hold ball count command has been received (Z3414), and the hold ball count command is executed. If it is determined that the command has been received (Z3414: YES), the hold display process is executed (Z3495), and the process proceeds to the Z3494 process. This hold display process (Z3495) executes a process for setting a display mode to be displayed in the standby area DS1B of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the detailed contents thereof are described in FIG. 637. Will be described later with reference to.

When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: NO), the processing of Z3418 to Z3420 which is the same as the command determination processing of the eleventh control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 495). Is executed, and then the process proceeds to Z3496 processing.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described with reference to FIG. 635. FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491). This variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) differs from the above-mentioned variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 496) in that a control process is added when eight hold effects are executed. The elements other than are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) is executed, first, the same processes of Z3501 to Z3506 as the above-mentioned variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 496) are executed, and then the eight display setting flags 233FA are set. Determine if it is set to on (Z3521). Then, when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the eight hold effects are not being executed (Z3521: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the 8 display setting flag 233FA is set to ON (Z3521: YES), the value of the 8 display effect counter 233FB is subtracted by 1 (Z3522), and the 8 display display after subtraction is produced. The effect mode (contents of the treasure box) is selected using the eight effect scenario selection table 234A3 with reference to the counter (Z3524). Then, it is determined whether the value of the eight display production counter 233FB is 0 (Z3525), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z3525: YES), the eight display setting flag 233FA is set to off (Z3526). , End this process. Further, in the processing of Z3525, even if the value of the display eight effect counter 233FB is not 0, that is, the eight hold effect is continued even in the next and subsequent special figure fluctuations (Z3525: NO), this processing is performed as it is. finish.

Next, the contents of the eight display setting process (Z3493) will be described with reference to FIG. 636. FIG. 636 is a flowchart showing the contents of the eight display setting process (Z3493). When the 8 display setting process (Z3493) is executed, the 8 display setting flag 233FA is set to ON (Z5701), the 8 effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined, and the 8 display setting data table is set in the display data table buffer. (Z5702).

Then, the set data table for displaying the eight effects is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (Z5703). Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z5704), the time data is set to the timekeeping counter based on the data table (Z5705), the pointer is initialized (Z5706), and 8 is set to the display 8 effect counter. , End this process.

Next, the contents of the hold display process (Z3495) will be described with reference to FIG. 637. FIG. 637 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold display process (Z3495). When the hold display process (Z3495) is executed, first, the hold ball number is set in the display hold ball number storage area 233FC based on the information included in the hold ball number command received this time (Z5801).

Then, it is determined whether the eight display setting flag 233FA is set to ON (Z5802), and if it is determined that the eight display setting flag 233FA is set to ON (Z5802: YES), the eight display setting flag 233FA is currently on hold. Display 8 Pointers corresponding to the values of the effect counter 233FB are set (Z5803), and this processing is terminated. That is, while the eight hold effects are being executed, the number of display hold symbols (treasure boxes) corresponding to the value of the display eight effect counter 233FB in the standby area DS1B of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5802 that the eight display setting flag 233FA is not set to ON (Z5802: NO), a pointer corresponding to the value of the display reserved ball number storage area 233FC is set (Z5804). , End this process. That is, while the eight hold effects are not being executed, the hold symbols (circles) corresponding to the number of hold balls of the special figure are displayed in the waiting area DS1B on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) will be described with reference to FIG. 638. FIG. 638 is a flowchart showing the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631). In this resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631), the resident image transfer setting process of the eleventh control example described above is set in that a command (display rising command) for indicating that all the resident target image data has been transferred is set. Is different from. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) is executed, the same Z4701 to Z4705 processes as the above-mentioned resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 503 (B)) are executed, and the Z4705 process is completed. , Set the display rise command (Z4721), and end this process. In this way, a command (display) for indicating that the transfer processing of various image data executed after the initial setting processing (see Z3002 in FIG. 492) in the main processing of the display control device 114 (see FIG. 492) has been completed. By configuring the rise command) to be output to the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the display control device 114 can normally operate on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Further, in the 18th control example, the initial setting of the display control device 114 is configured to take the longest time among other various devices (main control device 110, voice lamp control device 113, voice output device 226). Therefore, by outputting the display rise command from the display control device 114, it is possible to execute the instruction to display the normal screen after the power is turned on and the instruction to output various voices (BGM) in synchronization.

In the 18th control example, a period (period) in which the period effect is executed for the waiting area DS1B while the dedicated effect (period effect) using the eight reserved symbols stored in the hold is executed. It was configured so that the reserved symbol for production showing only the reserved symbol that is the target of the production) is displayed. That is, during the execution of the period effect, even if a new start winning is detected, the new reserved symbol is not displayed in the waiting area DS1B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the look-ahead result based on the new start prize is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into super reach, a big hit lottery result, etc.), a hold indicating the start prize corresponding to the specific lottery result. The display range of the reserved symbol for effect may be expanded to the symbol (or the display range may be expanded at a high rate). With this configuration, when the display range of the reserved symbol for production is expanded, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved ball corresponding to the specific lottery result is included. It is possible to further improve the player's expectation for a big hit. In addition, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a hold corresponding to a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into super reach, a lottery result of a big hit, etc.) in the hold symbol that is the target of the period production. Even if a new start prize is detected while the symbol is included, the display range of the reserved symbol for production is expanded (or the display range is expanded) to the reserved symbol corresponding to the new start prize. It may be configured (so that the ratio is high). With this configuration, even if the display range is expanded, it is possible to have a specific lottery result within the range at the beginning of the period production, so that the variable display corresponding to the specific lottery result can be displayed at any time. It is possible to realize playability that is not known to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 18th control example, even when the operation effect using the touch sensor 2900 is being executed, the special operation (the touch sensor 2900 is operated while pressing the left button 22B and the right button 22C) is executed. Was configured to be treated as an operation for notifying the background mode, not as an operation of the touch sensor 2900 for the operation effect, but in addition to this, the operation effect is performed when a special operation is mistaken. It may be configured so as not to be handled (difficult to handle) as an operation of the touch sensor 2900. More specifically, for example, when an operation on the touch sensor 2900 is detected while either the left button 22B or the right button 22C is pressed during the execution period of the operation effect, the touch sensor 2900 is used. It may be configured not to be treated as an operation (not treated as a touch operation in the touch effect). In this configuration, even if the left button 22B and only the touch sensor 2900 or only the right button 22C and the touch sensor 2900 are mistakenly operated in an attempt to perform a special operation, the player does not wish to do so. 3 It will develop into a reach effect (low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol) using the entire main display area DM of the symbol display device 81 (the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is determined to be an operation for the touch effect). It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the execution of the effect mode contrary to the player's intention. Further, the player who has made an erroneous operation with the intention of performing a special operation can easily notice the erroneous operation because the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D does not change. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, even if the player who tries to operate the touch sensor 2900 as an operation for the touch effect mistakenly operates either the left button 22B or the right button 22C together with the touch sensor 2900. It is possible to avoid displaying the background mode according to the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D against the intention of the player. Therefore, the player who accidentally operates the left button 22B or the right button 22C together with the touch sensor 2900 while trying to participate in the touch effect feels uncomfortable due to the display contents contrary to his / her intention. It is possible to prevent it from being forced. Further, since the display mode is not changed by the erroneous operation, the player can easily notice the erroneous operation. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the 18th control example, in a special effect involving vibration of the frame button 22A, the mode of vibration (vibe type) generated each time the frame button 22A is pressed is determined by lottery, and a big hit is placed in the hold. The configuration is such that the existence is confirmed (vibe type) and the expectation of a big hit is high, but the vibe type in the special effect may be notified to the player other than the vibration. That is, for example, if the player continuously operates the frame button 22A at short intervals in a special effect, it may be difficult for the player to perceive the correspondence between the number of presses and the vibration mode. There is. In this case, for example, it is misunderstood that the special effect of the mode (vibe A) in which the jackpot is confirmed is executed even though the special effect of the mode (vibe C) that is relatively unlikely to be a big hit is executed. In some cases, it may cause the player to feel distrust. This problem can be solved by providing a means for notifying the type of vibration executed in the special effect, in addition to the mode of vibration transmitted to the finger of the player who has pressed the frame button 22A. More specifically, for example, the correspondence relationship (vibe history) between the number of times the frame button 22A is pressed in one special effect and the type of vibration executed based on the pressing is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured. With this configuration, even if the player cannot identify the vibration mode or misidentifies it, it is easy to check the history of the vibration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to identify the type of vibration this time. Therefore, it is possible to realize a production that is easier for the player to understand. Further, instead of the history display, for example, the change with time of the vibration intensity may be displayed by a graph. With such a configuration, the transition of the vibration intensity can be easily understood by the player, so that a more easy-to-understand production mode can be realized. The history or graph of the third symbol display device 81 may be displayed each time a special effect is executed, and the player's operation interval is equal to or less than a predetermined interval (for example, it is difficult to identify the vibration intensity). It may be configured to be executed only in the case of 0.5 second interval or less). Further, for example, even after the specified number of presses (4 times) in the special effect is completed, the vibe pattern is set again from the beginning every time the frame button 22A is pressed (the vibe pattern is repeated every time the frame button 22A is pressed). After the specified number of presses (4 times) is completed, the frame button 22A is maintained in the pressed state (so-called long press) during the long press. It may be configured so that the vibe pattern is repeated. In other words, even after the execution of the vibration mode (vibe type) corresponding to the operation on the frame button 22A is completed, the vibration mode (vibe type) is reconfirmed by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22A. May be configured as possible. With this configuration, the player who could not identify the vibe type can easily reconfirm the vibe type, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. ..

In this 18th control example, when the background change operation is performed in the high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode is changed immediately, while the background change operation is performed during the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period. , The background mode is changed at the start of the next variable display, but it is not limited to this. For example, under specific conditions, the background mode may be changed immediately when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation display mode in which the high-speed fluctuation is executed again is executed after the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period is once reached (for example, the normal reach occurs and the medium-speed fluctuation occurs. After the period is reached, if it develops into super reach and returns to high-speed fluctuation again, etc.), the background mode is changed immediately according to the background change operation until the high-speed fluctuation period when developing into super reach. It may be configured. With this configuration, whether or not it develops into a super reach effect by confirming whether or not the background mode change is immediately executed by the background change operation in the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period can be determined. It is possible to realize a novel playability that can be known in advance. Therefore, since the player can be made to positively perform the background change operation in the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this 18th control example, when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, the background mode is only changed at the start of the next fluctuation display, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, the background mode change is not carried over until the start of the next fluctuation display, but a predetermined notification is performed at a predetermined ratio. May be. By configuring in this way, the change of the background mode is carried over to the next change, and it is suppressed that it takes time to change to the background mode in which the game is desired, which causes stress to the player. can do. In this case, the notification content includes, for example, the jackpot expectation in the running fluctuation display, the expectation that develops into super reach, and the expectation that the jackpot (or the fluctuation display corresponding to super reach) is included in the hold. , The degree of expectation for the so-called latent probability change state may be notified. With this configuration, by intentionally performing the background change operation during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, it is possible to realize a game playability different from the usual one, which improves the player's interest in the game. Can be made to.

In the 18th control example, the configuration is such that three types of periods in which the speeds of the fluctuation display of the third symbol are different are provided, but even if the speed of the fluctuation display of the first symbol is synchronized with the speed of the fluctuation display of the third symbol. good. On the contrary, the speed of the fluctuation display of the first symbol is set to at least a high-speed fluctuation period, a medium-speed fluctuation period, and a low-speed fluctuation period, and the speed of the fluctuation display of the third symbol is set to the fluctuation display of the first symbol. It may be configured to synchronize with the speed.

In the 18th control example, the configuration is such that a specific period effect is executed based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol being the upper limit (8 pieces), but the execution condition of the period effect is not necessarily the upper limit of the reserved balls. It is not limited to the number, but can be determined arbitrarily. As the number of reserved balls, which is the execution condition, is reduced, the chances of executing the period effect can be increased, so that the player's interest can be further improved. Further, as the number of reserved balls, which is the execution condition, is increased, the execution period of the period effect tends to be longer, so that the player's interest in the period effect can be further improved. Further, similarly, the end condition of the period effect is not limited to the case where all the reserved balls at the start time of the period effect are digested, and may be arbitrarily set.

<19th control example>
Next, a 19th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 639 to 647. The pachinko machine 10 of the 19th control example is a volume button 23 (left volume button 23A, right volume button 23B) for adjusting the volume used in the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 532) of the 14th control example described above. , And the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the control content are different from the above-mentioned 18th control example, and other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned 18th control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background mode (background change operation), the timing for changing the background mode according to the operation timing (background change is executed). By configuring the timing) to be variable, for example, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the background mode is switched while an effect dedicated to a specific background mode is being executed. Therefore, the player can be made to execute the background change operation with peace of mind, and the background change operation can be positively performed.

However, in the technique of the 18th control example described above, the timing of the background change executed based on the background change operation is only different, and the execution mode is the same, so that the background change operation is executed. There was a problem that the player got tired of the production (background change production).

On the other hand, in the 19th control example, the background advance notice effect suggesting the background mode after the transition is executed between the time when the background change operation is executed and the time when the background change is actually executed. Moreover, it is configured to change the effect mode of the background notice effect according to the timing of executing the background change operation (for example, the timing during non-change of special figure, the timing during change of special figure). With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with different production modes depending on the timing of executing the background change operation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the performance to be executed at an early stage. ..

Further, in the 19th control example, the effect mode of the background notice effect is changed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation in order to see the background notice effect.

Further, in the 19th control example, similarly to the 14th control example described above, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted during the period when the special figure fluctuation is not executed (during the customer waiting period). There is. Here, the conventional pachinko machine has a gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation is easily executed (for example, a time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, a high probability state of the normal symbol)) and a gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation is difficult to be executed. (For example, a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol)) can be set, and if a time saving state is set, a normal state is set. It was configured so that a shorter fluctuation time could be easily set as the special figure fluctuation time.

That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if a period in which the special figure change is not executed occurs during the time saving state, a new special figure change is likely to be started immediately, and a period in which the special figure change is not executed in the normal state. When the above occurs, it becomes more difficult to start a new special map change than during the time saving state.

In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, the display for waiting for customers during the period (customer waiting period) during which the special figure change is not executed without considering the set gaming state (for example, the name of the gaming machine). If the function (for example, volume control function, light intensity control function) is executed during the customer waiting period, the display content of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is unnecessarily switched during the time saving state. There was a problem that it provided a display that was difficult to understand for the player. Further, the process for creating each image data displayed on the display screen is complicatedly executed, and there is a problem that the control load of the pachinko machine 10 is increased. Furthermore, during the time saving state, it is possible to efficiently execute the special figure fluctuation by continuously firing the ball, so for example, the function during the customer waiting period (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function) can be used. Even if it is temporarily enabled, there is a problem that a new special figure change is started by the time the adjustment operation using the function is completed, which causes discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, for example, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the special figure change is stopped and the new special figure change is not executed, the above-mentioned function during the customer waiting period is enabled. Although it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems by configuring, the player needs to stop the game for a predetermined period when the player who is playing the normal state tries to adjust the volume or the amount of light. In addition to making people feel annoyed, there was a new problem that the operation of the game was reduced.

In order to solve the various problems described above, in this 19th control example, the period from when the special figure change is not executed according to the set gaming state until the function can be executed during the customer waiting period is different. It is configured to allow. As a result, for example, during a high probability state (time saving state, probabilistic change state) of a normal symbol in which the special figure change is likely to be executed, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the special figure change is not executed, and then the customer waits. It is possible to execute the function during the period, and during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol where it is difficult to execute the special figure change, it is possible to execute the function during the customer waiting period immediately after the special figure change is not executed. can.

<Regarding the production content of the 19th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 641, the background advance notice effect among the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th control example will be described. FIG. 641 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the background mode shifts to the sea mode, and FIG. 641 (B) shows a display in a state where the background mode shifts due to the next fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a screen. Of the elements of the display screen, the same elements as those of the above-mentioned 18th control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the 19th control example, when the background change operation is executed, the advance notice effect suggesting the background mode of the transition destination is executed before the background mode is switched. To specifically explain the display mode of this notice effect, "mode display", which is a display mode in which the background mode of the transition destination is indicated by a comment immediately before the transition of the background mode, and the transition destination immediately before the transition of the background mode. "Silhouette display", which is a display mode in which the background mode is suggested by the silhouette of the character, is configured to be displayable.

Then, when the timing for executing the background change operation is outside the special figure change period (for example, during the customer waiting period), only "mode display" is selected, and when the special figure change period is in progress, "mode display" is selected. And "Silhouette display" are configured to be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect (background notice effect) to be executed different according to the timing of executing the background change operation, so that the player is made to perform the background change operation at various timings. be able to.

Further, in the 19th control example, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure change period, the selection ratio between the "mode display" and the "silhouette display" is different depending on the lottery result of the special figure change. I'm letting you. In addition, if the display mode of the pattern that is different from the background mode suggested by the background notice effect and the background mode that is the actual transition destination is selected, there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won. (To be higher than the display mode of other background notice effects). Therefore, it is possible to have the player positively perform the background change operation in order to predict the lottery result of the special figure. In addition, by actively performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with an effect corresponding to various background modes, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. ..

On the display screen shown in FIG. 641 (A), the background mode shifts to the sea mode by the background change operation, and the silhouette K100 imitating a fish suggesting the sea mode is displayed as a background notice effect. As described above, in this control example, the display mode displayed in the background notice effect is continuously displayed on the display screen even after the transition to the background mode, so that the player can display the display in the background notice effect. It is configured so that the aspect and the actually shifted background mode can be visually compared.

Next, on the display screen shown in FIG. 641 (B), the comment "background change at the next change" indicating that the background mode is changed when the background change operation is executed and the next special figure change starts is the comment display area DM2A. It is displayed in. Then, as a background notice effect, a silhouette K100 imitating a tree suggesting a mountain mode is displayed. That is, the state shown in FIG. 641 (B) is a state in which the current state is the "mountain mode" and the background mode shifts (shifts to the sea mode) due to the next fluctuation, and the background suggesting the background mode after the shift. The silhouette K100, which suggests a mountain mode, is displayed as a warning effect. In this way, if there is a contradiction between the actual background mode transition destination and the suggestion display mode of the background notice effect, there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won due to the change.

<About the electrical configuration in the 19th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the 19th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 639 and 640. FIG. 639 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 19th control example, and FIG. 639 (B) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and FIG. 639 (B) is the 19th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 639 (A), the ROM 222 of the 19th control example is different from the ROM 222 of the 18th control example described above in that the vibe pattern data 222FC is deleted and the background notice selection table 222GA is added. However, the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The background notice selection table 222GA is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the background notice effect when the background change operation is executed. Here, the contents of the background notice selection table 222GA will be described with reference to FIG. 640. FIG. 640 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the background notice selection table 222GA.

As shown in FIG. 640, the background notice selection table 222GA shows the hit / fail determination result (the lottery result of the special figure change being executed at the time when the background change operation is executed), the acquired value of the effect counter 223H, and the value after the transition. It is configured so that the background mode and the background notice of different display modes can be selected according to the background mode.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 69", "silhouette A" is "70 to 159". "Silhouette B" is specified in the range of "", "Mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "160 to 169", and "Sea mode display" is specified in the range of "170 to 198". In the "mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 69", "Silhouette B", in the range of "70 to 159", "Silhouette A", and in the range of "160 to 169". "Sea mode display" is specified in, and "mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "170 to 198".

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 119", "silhouette B" is in the range of "120 to 198". When the background mode after the transition is "mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 119", and "silhouette A" is set to "120 to". "Mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "198". Further, when the background change operation is executed during the customer waiting period, and the background mode after the transition is the "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 198". When the background mode after the transition of "sea mode display" is "mountain mode", "mountain mode display" is defined in the range where the value of the effect counter 223H is "0 to 198".

Here, each display mode selected as the display mode of the background notice effect will be described. In this control example, as the display mode of the background notice effect, "silhouette display" that displays the silhouette of the character suggesting the background mode after the transition, and "mode display" that displays the character indicating the background mode after the transition. Is configured to be configurable.

In the "silhouette display", "silhouette A" is a silhouette of a character imitating a tree suggesting a mountain mode shown in FIG. 641 (B), and "silhouette B" is shown in FIG. 641 (A). It is a silhouette of a character that imitates a fish that suggests the sea mode shown. In this control example, the silhouette display is configured to display a display mode formed by a still image, but the display mode dynamically changes as long as the display mode suggests the background mode after the transition to the player. The display mode may be used. For example, immediately after the suggestion display mode is displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand which background mode is suggested, and the passage of time or the operation means by the player ( The background mode of the transition destination may be gradually changed to a display mode that is easy to grasp based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the touch sensor 2900). With such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the effect in order to quickly determine the effect result of the background notice effect.

As described above, in this control example, "silhouette display" and "mode display" can be displayed as the display mode of the background notice effect, and the background is in the period when the special figure does not change. When the change operation is executed, only "mode display" is selected, and when the background change operation is executed during the period when the special figure is changing, "silhouette display" can be selected. .. As a result, by executing the background change operation during the change of the special figure, a special effect mode (silhouette display) can be displayed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, as a background notice effect, a display mode suggesting a background mode different from the background mode of the transition destination can be set, and the display mode is selected only when the hit / fail determination result is correct. It is configured to be done. Therefore, it is possible to notify (suggest) the lottery result advantageous to the player in advance by giving a sense of discomfort between the content of the background notice effect and the actual background mode transition situation, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, an example using two background modes (sea mode and mountain mode) is shown, but the type of background mode may be three or more, and the background mode to be changed by the background change operation can be selected. It may be set randomly. Further, as a result of performing the background change operation, it may be configured to shift to the same background mode as before the shift. With this configuration, the display mode of the background notice effect this time and the background after the transition are based on the suggestion content of the background mode before the transition and the background mode after the transition displayed in the background notice effect. It can provide the fun of predicting whether or not the mode matches.

In addition, in the 19th control example, the period from the execution of the background change operation to the transition to the background mode is different depending on the timing of the execution of the background change operation, as in the 18th control example described above. It is configured as follows. The background notice effect described above is configured to be displayed based on the execution of the background change operation. Therefore, the display period in which only the background notice effect is displayed can be changed according to the timing when the background change operation is executed.

In the 19th control example, when selecting the display mode of the background notice effect, the display mode is selected based on the lottery result of the special figure change during execution, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, the display mode may be selected based on the result of preliminarily determining the winning information included in the special drawing reservation. In this case, for example, if the background mode can be changed (changed) during the special figure change in which the background change operation is executed, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result of the change, and the background change operation is performed. When the background mode is changed (changed) in the next special figure change of the executed special figure change, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of the next special figure change. It is good to configure it like this.

Returning to FIG. 639 (B), the explanation will be continued. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 19th control example is different from the RAM 223 of the 18th control example described above in that a customer waiting flag 223GA and a delay counter 223GB are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The customer waiting flag 223GA is a flag for indicating that the current customer waiting period is set, and is set to be turned on when the customer waiting period is reached. The customer waiting flag 223GA is executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 645) when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol). It is set to ON in the setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 646) (see Z2734 in FIG. 646). In addition, when the gaming state is a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) or probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), waiting for customers. In the effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 647), the delay counter is set to ON when the value of the delay counter 223GB becomes 0 (see Z2761 in FIG. 647). Then, it is set to off when the special figure fluctuation is started.

In this 19th control example, during the period when the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be adjustable, and the player is informed that the volume is in an adjustable state. The notification display to be notified is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the customer waiting flag 223GA is also a flag for indicating a period in which the volume can be adjusted. Further, although a detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to be turned on is different depending on the set gaming state, and the gaming state is the normal state. It is configured so that the customer waiting flag 223GA is less likely to be set to ON in the case of the time saving state or the probable change state than in the case of the time saving state or the probable change state.

With this configuration, it is difficult to display the notification display for notifying the player that the volume has become adjustable during the probability change state or the time saving state on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can. That is, the time saving state and the probable change state are configured so that a shorter special map fluctuation time can be easily set as compared with the normal state, and a period during which the special map fluctuation is not executed may be set temporarily. However, since the time saving state and the probabilistic change state are also gaming states in which a new special figure change is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, the period in which the special figure change is not executed is likely to end in a short period of time. In such a state, if the customer waiting flag 223GA is frequently set to ON, the display content of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be complicatedly switched, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. was there.

On the other hand, in the 19th control example, the customer waiting flag 223GA is not set to be turned on unless a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses during the time saving state or the probable change state. Therefore, the above-mentioned problem can be solved. The predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) required to turn on the customer waiting flag 223GA during the time saving state or the probability change state is, for example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (electric) executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is preferable to set a longer period than the period until the accessory 640A opens and the ball enters the second entry port 640). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the customer waiting flag 223GA from being set to ON simply by continuously playing the game during the probable change state and the time saving state.

The delay counter 223GB is a counter for measuring the period from the end of the special figure fluctuation until the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON, and the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. This is to delay the timing of the operation.

The delay counter 223GB is in a probable change state in the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 646) executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 645) executed when the special figure variation is stopped. Alternatively, a predetermined period (5 seconds), which is a delay period, is set when the time is shortened (Z2733 in FIG. 646). Then, each time the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181 in FIG. 647) is executed, the value is subtracted (Z2759 in FIG. 647), and when the counter value becomes 0, the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON (FIG. FIG. 647 Z2761). As a result, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to be on in the probable change state or the time saving state can be delayed from the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to be on in the normal state.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the 19th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 642 to 647, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 19th control example will be described. In the 19th control example, for the 18th control example described above, the customer waiting effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 647) is performed instead of the customer waiting effect processing executed in the main process 9 (see FIG. 642). , The difference is that the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 9 is executed instead of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 and the command determination process 9 (Z2174 in FIG. 643) is executed instead of the command determination process 8. It is the same. The same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 9 of the 19th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 642. FIG. 642 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 9. As shown in FIG. 642, the main process 9 has a customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181), a frame button input monitoring / effect process 9 (Z2182), and a command determination process 9 (see FIG. 617). It differs in that Z2183) is executed, and is otherwise the same.

Regarding the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 9 (Z2182), the background change process (FIG. 629) is performed with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 626) of the 18th control example described above. Since the difference is only in that the background change process 9 (see Z2541 in FIG. 644) is executed instead of Z2949), only the background change process 9 which is a subroutine of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 9 (Z2182) is executed. It will be described with reference to FIG. 644, and the illustration of other control contents (the same control contents as those of the 18th control example) will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 9 (Z2174) will be described with reference to FIG. 643. FIG. 643 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 9 (Z2174). This command determination process 9 (Z2174) adds a process of setting the customer waiting flag to off when a variation pattern command is received, in addition to the command determination process (see Z2113 of FIG. 477) of the above-mentioned 18th control example. The difference is that the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242 in FIG. 620) is changed to the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651 in FIG. 643). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process of the eleventh control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 477), the process (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 477) executed when the stopped type command shown in the figure is received is described in the 18th. The same process is executed in the control example, but for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the process is executed according to other commands (Z2261 in FIG. 643).

When the command determination process 9 (Z2174) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that the command determination process 9 (Z2174) has been received (Z2201: YES), the customer waiting flag 223GA is on. Whether or not (Z2253). When it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223GA is on (Z2254: YES), the fluctuation pattern command is received, and since it is the timing of the end of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to off (Z2254). The value of the delay counter 223GB is set to 0 (Z2255), the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) described above is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2253, when it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223GA is not on (Z2253: NO), the processing of Z2254 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2255 processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: NO), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (Z2203). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: YES), the variable stop process 9 (Z2651) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described later with reference to FIG. 645.

Returning to FIG. 643, the explanation will be continued. When it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: NO), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: YES). ), The fluctuation stop process 8 is executed (Z2242), and this process is terminated. The fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) is a process for setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a process for executing a background change when the special symbol is stopped, and a customer. The process for setting the waiting effect is performed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 645.

If it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the processing of Z2203 (Z2203: NO), the same Z2207 to Z2261 as the command determination processing (Z2174 of FIG. 618) of the above-mentioned 18th control example is executed, and this is performed. End the process.

Next, the contents of the background change process 9 (Z2541) will be described with reference to FIG. 644. FIG. 644 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process 9 (Z2541). This background change process 9 (Z2541) is relative to the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 629) of the 18th control example described above. The difference is that a process for setting the display mode of the background notice effect has been added.

When the background change process 9 (Z2541) is executed, the same processes of Z2963 to Z2967 as the above-mentioned background change process (see Z2949 of FIG. 629) are executed, and then the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired (Z2978). , The effect mode of the background advance notice effect is selected using the background advance notice selection table 222GA based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223H (Z2979). Then, a display background notice command indicating the effect mode selected in the Z2979 process is set, and this process ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, the display switching command set in the Z2967 process and the display background notice command set in the Z2980 process are set in the same process. It is output to the display control device 114 at the same timing, but the display control device 114 first executes the display using the image data based on the display background notice command, and then 0.5 seconds later. It is configured to execute the display using the image data based on the display switching command at intervals. As a result, the background notice effect can be executed before the background transition.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described with reference to FIG. 645. FIG. 645 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651). The fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) is the customer waiting setting processing (Z2652) after finishing the processing of Z2266, Z2264, and Z2270 with respect to the fluctuation stop processing (see Z2242 in FIG. 620) of the 18th control example described above. Is different in that it is executed, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) will be described with reference to FIG. 646. FIG. 646 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652). In this customer waiting setting process (Z2652), a process for setting a customer waiting period is executed after the special figure fluctuation is stopped.

When the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold exists (Z2731). In this Z2731 process, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B are both 0.

If it is determined that a special figure hold exists in the process of Z2731 (Z2731: YES), the next special figure change is immediately executed, so the process for setting the customer waiting period is skipped. Then, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Z2731 when it is determined that the special figure hold does not exist (Z2731: NO), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the reduced working hours state or the probable change state (Z2732). When it is determined that the time is not shortened or the probabilistic state is not (normal state) (Z2732: NO), the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON (Z2734), and the display customer waiting command is set (Z2735). This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2732 that the current state is a time saving state or a probable change state (Z2732: YES), then a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the delay counter 223GB (Z2733), and this processing is terminated. do. The value of the delay counter 223GB set here is subtracted in the main process executed every 1 millisecond.

Next, the contents of the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181) will be described with reference to FIG. 647. FIG. 647 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181). In this customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), the value of the delay counter 223GB set in the customer waiting setting processing (see Z2652 in FIG. 646) is subtracted, and the value of the delay counter 223GB becomes 0. The process of setting the customer waiting flag 223GA to ON and the volume adjusting process when the volume button is operated while the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON are executed.

In the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), first, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON (Z2751), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2751: YES), the volume button is pressed. Among them, it is determined whether the right button (up button) for raising the volume is operated (pressed) (Z2764). If it is determined that the right button has been pressed (Z2764: YES), then the volume level is set so that the volume level is increased by 1 (Z2753), and the display command indicating the set volume is set (Z2754). , End this process.

If it is determined in the Z2764 process that the right button is not pressed (Z2764: NO), it is determined whether the left button (lower button) that lowers the volume is operated (pressed) among the volume buttons (Z2764: NO). Z2765). If it is determined that the left button has been pressed (Z2765: YES), then the volume level is set so that the volume level is lowered by 1 (Z2756), and the display command indicating the set volume is set (Z2757). , End this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223GA is not set to ON in the processing of Z2751 (Z2751: NO), it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223GB is larger than 0 (1 or more) (1 or more). Z2758), if it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2758: NO), since the special map fluctuation is not currently stopped, this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2758 that the value of the delay counter 223GB is larger than 0 (Z2758: YES), then the value of the delay counter 223GB is subtracted by 1 (Z2759), and the value of the delay counter 223GB after the subtraction is subtracted. Is 0 (Z2760). When it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223GB after subtraction is not 0, that is, the game state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and 5 seconds have not elapsed since the previous special figure change stopped. If is (Z2760: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223GB is 0 in the processing of Z2760 (Z2760: YES), the gaming state is in the probable change state or the time saving state, and 5 seconds after the previous special figure change is stopped. Is the elapsed timing, so the customer wait flag 223GA is set to ON (Z2761), the display customer wait command is set (Z2762), and then it is determined whether the left or right button is pressed (Z2763). If it is determined that the left or right button has been pressed (Z2763: YES), the above-mentioned Z2764 process is executed. On the other hand, in the process of Z2763, if it is determined that the left or right button is not pressed (Z2763: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

<20th control example>
Next, a 20th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 648 to 659. In the 20th control example, the operation effect (cracking effect) for changing the effect mode based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 is executed for the 19th control example described above, and the third control example. The third symbol (variably displayed in synchronization with the fluctuation of the special symbol (special symbol)) that is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 is displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner according to the stop display mode. The difference is that the effect of shifting (changing) the background mode (background change effect) is executed based on the stop display mode of the decorative pattern), and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the production content of the 20th control example>
Here, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th control example, the contents of the characteristic effects will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th control example, unlike each of the above-mentioned control examples, a crack cracking effect and a background change effect based on the display mode of the stop symbol are executed.

First, the cracking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 648 to 650. The cracking effect is an operation in which the player operates the operating means (frame button 22A) a plurality of times within a predetermined effect period to gradually change the display mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is a production. In the 20th control example, the effect mode after the effect period is set based on the display mode on the display screen at the end of the effect period. With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means in order to execute the production in various production modes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 648, the flow of the cracking effect in the 20th control example will be described. FIG. 648 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the cracking effect. In this control example, the crack 820, which is a variable display mode, is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the operating means during the predetermined effect period, and the operation means within the effect period. A cracking effect is executed in which the number of cracks 820 is variable (increased) based on the operation content (number of operations). The variable display mode can be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) and the number of operations during the above-mentioned effect period.

Specifically, among the fluctuation patterns of 60 seconds, the operation valid period (button effect period) in which the operation to the frame button 22A, which is the operation means, is effectively determined for 15 seconds after 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. ) Is set. Then, when the button effect period is reached, the crack effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 649 (A)).

Then, as the button effect period in which the cracking effect is executed, a first period, which is the first half period, and a second period, which is the second half period after the first period, are set, and the first button effect period is set. By operating the frame button 22A during the period, one crack 820 is displayed on the display screen (see FIG. 649 (B)), and the remaining period of the first period is variably set to the second period. With this configuration, the period in which the second period is set can be lengthened by operating the frame button 22A immediately after the first period is set.

In addition, by pressing the frame button 22A during the first period, the condition for displaying the crack 820 of the second transition during the second period based on the pressing timing, that is, the crack displayed as a variable display mode. The number of operations to the frame button 22A for varying the number of 820s is configured to be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an effect based on both the operation timing to the operation means and the number of operations, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by operating the frame button 22A immediately after the first period is set, even if the second period is set longer, the condition (frame) that the second and subsequent cracks 820 are displayed based on the operation timing. Since the condition that the number of operations is large may be set as the number of operations to the button 22A), operating the frame button 22A immediately after the first period is set causes more cracks 820 to be displayed. There is no direct connection to that.

Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to participate in the operation effect while entertaining the player at which timing during the first period the frame button 22A is operated. In the 20th control example, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the first frame button operation executed during the cracking effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to select a variable pattern of the variable display mode after the second time according to the timing of the frame button operation. Further, in this control example, the fully variable pattern (variable scenario) of the variable display mode during the effect period is selected according to the timing of one frame button operation (first frame button operation). It may be configured to be partially selected.

Then, when the second period is set, a display screen for urging the player to execute the operation of the frame button 22A a plurality of times is displayed (see FIG. 649 (B)), and the first period ends. When the display condition set at the time (condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks 820) is satisfied, the number of cracks 820 displayed on the display screen is variably displayed, and after the second period elapses (20 from the start of fluctuation). An effect based on the number of cracks 820 displayed after the lapse of seconds) is displayed (see FIG. 650 (A)).

In the cracking effect of this control example, when the first frame button operation that causes the selection of the display condition (variable scenario) for increasing (variable) the number of cracks 820 (variable display mode) is executed. , No matter when the frame button operation is executed, one crack 820 (the same variable display mode) is displayed. That is, in the cracking effect of this control example, the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the cracking effect has been executed by the first frame button operation, and based on the first frame button operation. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the variable scenario of the selected variable display mode.

This makes it possible to play the game while paying close attention to how the cracking effect progresses. In addition, the cracking effect of this control example makes the ratio of selecting the variable scenario of the variable display mode different based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the cracking effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the cracking effect of this control example, the button effect period during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22A) (the operation to the operation means is effectively determined) is the first period (5 seconds). And the second period (10 seconds) after the lapse of the first period, and the operation for selecting the variable scenario of the variable display mode (the number of cracks 820) during the first period (first time). By executing the frame button operation), the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected. Therefore, if the frame button operation is not executed during the first period, the cracking effect is terminated at that point (clear the setting of the operation valid period during the second period and switch to an effect other than the operation effect). (See FIG. 648 (B)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22A from being notified of the effect of urging the operation of the frame button 22A for a long time.

Here, the flow of the effect when the frame button 22A is not operated during the first period of the button effect period will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 648 (B). ) Elapses, a display screen (see FIG. 649 (A)) prompting the operation to the frame button 22A is displayed, the operation valid period is cleared at the end of the first period, and the frame button 22A is displayed after the end of the first period. A display mode (sorry display) indicating that the button has not been pressed even once is displayed until a predetermined second period (10 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 650 (B)). After that, the effect corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (zero cracks) is executed.

In this control example, the display mode (sorry display) indicating that the frame button 22A has not been pressed even once is configured to be displayed until the second period (10 seconds) elapses. Not limited to this, for example, a display mode (sorry display) indicating that the frame button 22A has never been pressed is displayed only for the start 2 seconds of the predetermined second period (10 seconds), and then. , The effect corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (zero cracks) may be executed. With this configuration, the period during which the disappointment display is displayed can be shortened, and therefore, if the player intentionally does not operate the frame button 22A during the first period, the player feels uncomfortable. Can be difficult to give.

In addition, when the frame button operation (first frame button operation) is executed during the first period, the second and subsequent frame button operations are accepted immediately after that (even during the remaining period of the first production period). It is configured. As a result, it is possible to give continuity to the plurality of frame button operations executed during the cracking effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

Next, an example of the display content displayed during the cracking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 649 and 650. FIG. 649 (A) is a display screen showing an example of the display content displayed immediately after the cracking effect is started, and FIG. 649 (B) shows the frame button 22A during the first period of the cracking effect. This is a display screen showing an example of the display contents displayed when the operation is performed. Further, FIG. 650 (A) is a display screen showing an example of the effect content executed after the button effect period ends with three cracks 820 displayed, and FIG. 650 (B) shows the crack effect effect. This is a display screen showing an example of display contents displayed when the first period ends without operating the frame button 22A during the first period.

When the cracking effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 649 (A), the effect executed this time is an operation effect (an effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means (frame button 22A)). In order to notify the player that this is the case, on the right side of the main display area DM, a button display mode DM5A imitating the frame button 22A and the remaining period (4) of the first period (5 seconds) of the button effect period. The remaining period display mode DM5B for notifying the second) is displayed.

Here, the button display mode DM5A is displayed in a display mode (represented by two arrows in the figure) for encouraging the frame button 22A to be pressed (repeatedly hit) a plurality of times instead of being pressed only once. Further, in the remaining period display mode DM5B, the remaining period (represented by diagonal lines in the figure) is dynamically displayed with respect to the indicator indicating the length of the first period (5 seconds).

Then, in the comment display area DM2A, the comment "Crush the screen by repeatedly pressing the button" is displayed. As a result, by operating the frame button 22A a plurality of times during the current operation effect, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect that destroys the display screen is executed. Further, a small display area DM4 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area DM so that the progress of the cracking effect (the number of cracks) of this time is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. In addition, in FIG. 649 (A), since the crack cracking effect has just been executed and the frame button 22A has never been operated, the small display area DM4 is set to the progress status display mode DM4A. 0 "is displayed.

Then, when the frame button 22A is operated during the first period of the crack cracking effect, one crack 820 is displayed in the main display area DM and the progress of the small display area DM4 as shown in FIG. 649 (B). "1" is displayed as the display mode DM4A. Further, since the first period ends and the second period is set due to the operation of the frame button 22A during the first period, the remaining period display mode DM5B for indicating the remaining period of the first period is replaced. Then, the remaining period display mode DM5C for indicating the remaining period of the second period is displayed. In addition, a comment of "more repeated hits" is displayed in the comment display area DM2A.

With the display screen of FIG. 649 (B) displayed, when the frame button 22A is operated multiple times (continuous striking operation) and the display condition for increasing the number of cracks 820 is satisfied, the number corresponding to the display condition is satisfied. The crack 820 is displayed on the display screen. When the number of cracks 820 is 3 at the end of the second period of the button effect period, as shown in FIG. 650 (A), the central portion of the main display area DM is destroyed and the fish is fished from the back. An effect in which a large number of characters 822 imitating the above appears is executed, and a "fish school reach" indicating the effect mode executed this time is displayed in the comment display area DM2A. In this control example, the progress status display mode DM4A is displayed in the small display area DM4 even after the button effect period ends, and the button effect period is displayed with three cracks 820 displayed. A value of "3" indicating that is finished is displayed. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand what was the production result of the cracking effect corresponding to the "fish school reach" executed this time.

As described above, based on the effect result of the first effect (cracking effect), it is possible to set the effect mode of the second effect to be executed after the first effect, and when the second effect is executed. In addition, when the configuration for displaying the effect result of the first effect is used, for example, the effect result display of the first effect is configured so that the effect result different from the actual effect result of the first effect can be displayed. May be. In this case, when the lottery result of the special figure variation is a big hit, it is preferable to display an effect result different from the actual effect result of the first effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an uncomfortable effect, and it is possible to easily win a big hit when the uncomfortable effect is executed, so that a novel effect can be provided.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22A is not operated during the first period of the button effect period of the crack effect, the small display area DM4 is displayed at the end of the first period as shown in FIG. 650 (B). "0" is displayed as the progress display mode DM4A, the button display mode DM5A that does not prompt the operation to the frame button 22A is displayed, and the display mode with the remaining period of 0 is displayed as the remaining period display mode DM5B. Then, the comment "Sorry, end" is displayed in the comment display area DM2A, and a display screen for notifying the player that the cracking effect has ended at the end of the first period is displayed.

In this control example, when the frame button 22A is not operated during the first period, even if a player who does not like the operation of the frame button 22A is playing the game, he / she does not feel uncomfortable. The display screen shown in FIG. 650 (B) is displayed at the end of the first period, and the button effect period (operation valid period) is terminated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first period. At the end of one period, the number of cracks 820 may be determined by lottery, and the determined number of cracks 820 may be displayed on the display screen. As a result, even for a player who does not operate the frame button 22A, it is possible to provide an effect corresponding to various numbers of cracks 820. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the number of cracks 820 (for example, 0.5) that is difficult to be displayed when the player operates the operating means a plurality of times during the first period can be displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think whether or not to operate the frame button 22A during the first period in order to experience various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. be able to.

Next, the background change effect is an effect of changing the background mode when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a specific combination. In this control example, when the display control device 114 receives the stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (combination of stop symbols). Is configured to determine.

Therefore, the background change symbol type command for indicating the stop mode determined by the display control device 114 is configured to be received by the voice lamp control device 113, and when the background change symbol type command is received, it is included in the command. It is configured to determine whether or not to change the background mode based on the stopped symbol information. With this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special figure is out of order, the player can be interested in which stop mode the outlier is displayed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81. You can enjoy the production performed on the display screen of.

Further, it is the first to determine in advance whether or not to change the background mode, and to notify the player that the background will be changed based on the determination result that the determination results in changing the background mode. 3 Unlike the conventional pachinko machine that stops and displays the symbol (background change notification symbol is stopped and displayed), it is determined whether to execute the background change according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed. That is, the stop mode of the third symbol is configured to trigger the background change lottery. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily control the ease of changing the background or the destination of changing the background based on the stop mode of the third symbol and the set gaming state. ..

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine the stop mode of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the special figure lottery is missed, the player By operating the operating means, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be variably selected. With this configuration, the stopping mode can be changed based on the operation result of the player, so that the motivation to participate in the game can be increased. Further, in this case, it is better to make it easier to change the background when the player operates the operating means than when the player does not operate the operating means at all. For example, the background is changed only when the operating means is operated. It is preferable to configure so that the stop mode of the third symbol to be executed is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to participate in the production more enthusiastically.

<About the electrical configuration of the 20th control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the 20th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 651 and 653. FIG. 651 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 20th control example, and FIG. 651 (B) is a schematic view of the 20th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 651 (A), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the 20th control example is used when selecting an effect mode of cracking effect with respect to the ROM 222 of the 19th control example described above. The difference is that the cracking effect selection table 222HA is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The crack effect selection table 222HA is used when selecting an effect mode (display condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks), which is one of the operation effects for executing the operation to the operation means (frame button 22A). In the SW effect process 10 (see Z2897 in FIG. 658) executed when the frame button 22A is pressed in the data table referred to in the above, it is determined that the SW (switch) effect being executed is a crack effect. (Z7101 in FIG. 658: YES) and referenced (Z7105 in FIG. 658).

Here, the contents of the cracking effect selection table 222HA will be described with reference to FIG. 653. FIG. 653 is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the cracking effect selection table 222HA. As shown in FIG. 653, on the cracking effect selection table 222HA, the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special figure variation in which the cracking effect is executed and the first frame button operation during the SW valid period of the cracking effect. Depending on the operation (pressing) timing of the operation (pressing) and the acquired value of the SW special effect counter 223HA, different production modes of the cracking effect (the number of times the frame button is operated to increase the number of cracks) are defined.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223HA corresponds to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter HA is. The effect type A is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the effect B is specified in the range of "40 to 89", and the effect C is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, the specific contents of each effect type defined in the crack effect effect selection table 222HA will be described. For the effect type A, the number of frame button operations required for the second crack is set to "5", and the number of frame button operations required for the third (MAX) crack is set to "10". In this scenario, the number of frame button operations required to crack the second production type B is set to "7", and the number of frame button operations required to crack the third (MAX) is set to "15". In the scenario shown, the effect type C requires "10" for the number of frame button operations required for the second crack to occur, and "25" for the number of frame button operations required for the third (MAX) crack. This is the scenario set to.

That is, the number of times the number of cracks is changed is changed by the second and subsequent frame button operations according to the effect mode of the crack cracking effect set based on the timing of the first frame button operation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how much the frame button operation is performed to change the crack, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

The crack cracking effect selection table 222HA shown in FIG. 653 shows only the effect type in which the third crack is always displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 the required number of times. No matter how many times the frame button 22 is operated, the effect type in which the second crack is not displayed and the effect type in which the third crack is not displayed are also specified. In this way, by defining the production type in which the cracks are difficult to change and the production type in which the cracks are not variable, even if the production type in which the cracks are not variable is set, the frame button operation can be expected until the end. Can be done.

A description will be given by returning to FIG. 653. The hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit), and the value of the SW special effect counter 223HA corresponds to a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 second to 3 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds). In this case, the effect type A is specified in the range of "0 to 19", the effect B is specified in the range of "20 to 79", and the value of the SW special effect counter HA is specified in the range of "80 to 99". , Direction C is specified.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect and the value of the SW special effect counter 223HA corresponds to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter HA is "0 to 29". The effect type A is defined in the range, the effect B is specified in the range of "30 to 89", and the effect D is specified in the range of "90 to 99". Then, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect and the value of the SW special effect counter 223HA corresponds to a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 second to 3 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds). In, the effect type A is specified in the range of "0 to 4" for the value of the SW special effect counter HA, the effect B is specified in the range of "5 to 79", and the effect B is specified in the range of "80 to 99". Direction D is specified.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 20th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 652. As shown in FIG. 652, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 20th control example has a SW effect counter 223HA, a button pressing counter 223HB, and crack information storage for the RAM 223 of the 19th control example described above. The difference is that area 223HC is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect counter 223HA is a counter used for selecting a crack effect, and is repeatedly added by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 each time the voice lamp control device 113 main process (see FIG. 654) is executed. Will be updated. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned effect counter 223H, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The button pressing counter 223HB is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the frame button 22 is operated. In the cracking effect executed in the 20th control example, the effect mode (variable display of the number of cracks) corresponding to the set effect type is executed based on the value of the button pressing counter 223HB.

The crack information storage area 223HC is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect type selected by using the crack effect selection table 222HA.

<Regarding the control content of the audio lamp control device in the 20th control example>
Next, the control contents of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 20th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 654 to 658. The same control contents as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 10 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the 20th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 654. FIG. 654 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 10. As shown in FIG. 654, in the main process 10, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 10 with respect to the main process 8 of the 18th control example described above, and a command. The difference is that the determination process 8 is changed to the command determination process 10, and the other points are the same.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 655. FIG. 655 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 10. The command determination process 10 is different from the above-mentioned command determination process 8 in that a control process for receiving a display background change symbol command is added, and the other steps are the same. The details of this display background change symbol command will be described later, but this command is a command output from the display control device 114, and is a stop mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Information for indicating (combination position of each third symbol at the time of stop) is included.

When the command determination process 10 is executed, the same processes of Z2201 to Z2208 as those of the command determination process 8 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the display background change symbol command has been received (Z7201). When it is determined that the display background change symbol command has been received in the processing of Z7201 (Z7201: YES), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223I (Z7202), and the set background mode is supported. A display switching command for a variation pattern is set (Z7203), and this process ends.

That is, in the 20th control example, the process of changing the background mode is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the stop mode of the third symbol set by the display control device 114. In this way, by determining whether or not to switch the background mode according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed, even if the result of the special figure lottery is wrong, which It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stopped mode.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 656. FIG. 656 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 differs from the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 in that the SW special process executed is changed to the SW effect process 10, and is the same except for the above. be. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the crack cracking effect end process (Z2896) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 657. FIG. 657 is a flowchart showing the contents of the cracking effect end processing (Z2896). In this cracking effect end process (Z2896), when a specific period has elapsed in the cracking effect, a process for setting a subsequent effect mode is executed.

When the cracking effect end process (Z2896) is executed, first, the value of the SW effective time counter is acquired, and whether 5 seconds have passed from the start of the cracking effect (whether the elapsed time has reached 5 seconds) is determined. It is determined (Z7002), if it is determined that it is not 5 seconds (Z7002: NO), and then it is determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed (whether the elapsed time has reached 15 seconds) (Z7006). Here, if it is determined that 15 seconds have not elapsed (Z7006: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z7002 that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (Z7002: YES), it is determined whether the value of the button press counter 223HB is larger than 0 (Z7003), and it is not larger than 0. If it is determined (Z7003: NO), a display effect command indicating the end of the crack effect is set (Z7004), and the values of the SW effective time counter 223K and the button press counter 223HB are cleared (set to 0). End the process.

If it is determined in the processing of Z7003 that the value of the button pressing counter 223B is larger than 0 (Z7003: YES), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that 15 seconds have passed in the processing of Z7006 (Z7006: YES), a display switching command corresponding to the value of the button pressing counter 223HB is set (Z7007), and the value of the button pressing counter 223HB is cleared. (Z7008), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 658. FIG. 658 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing 10. The SW effect processing 10 is different from the SW effect process described above in that a process related to the cracking effect is added. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing 10 is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101), and if it is determined that the SW effect is not a crack effect (Z7101: NO), the above is described. The same control as the SW effect processing of the 18th control example is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z7101 that the set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101: YES), then the information indicating the effect mode of the crack effect in the crack information storage area 223HC (Z7101: YES). It is determined whether the data) is stored (Z7102).

In the processing of Z7102, if it is determined that the information (data) indicating the effect mode of the cracking effect is already stored in the cracking information storage area 223HC, the value of the button pressing counter 223HB is added by 1. (Z7106), the cracking effect type set in the cracking information storage area 223HC is read (Z7107), and the effecting mode corresponding to the read effect type and the value of the button press counter 223HB (variable number of cracks). Set a display effect command to indicate the fan effect), and end this process.

If it is determined that there is no data in the processing of Z7102 (Z7102: NO), then the value of the SW effect counter 223HA is acquired, the cracking effect selection table 222HA is read out (Z7104), and the SW when the button is pressed. Based on the value of the effective time counter and the acquired value of the SW effect counter 223HA, the corresponding crack effect type is determined, set in the crack information storage area (Z7105), and the corresponding display effect command is set (Z7108). , End this process.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the 20th control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 of the 20th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 659. The control content of the display control device 114 of this control example differs from the control content of the 18th control example described above in that the stop type command process 8 is changed to the stop type command process 10, and the rest is the same. Is. The same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 659 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command process 10 (Z3496). In the stop type command process 10 (Z3496), a command (display background change symbol command) for outputting information related to the stop symbol set in the voice lamp control device 113 is set.

When the stop type command process 10 (Z3496) is executed, first, the same Z3601 and Z3602 processes as the stop type command process 8 described above are executed, and then the stop symbol set in the Z3602 process changes the background. It is determined whether it is a stop symbol indicating (Z8001). If it is determined in the Z8001 process that the symbol is not a stop symbol for executing a background change, the stop symbol determination flag is set to ON, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8001 that the stopped symbol indicates a background change, the display background change symbol command is set (Z8002), the stop symbol discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3603), and this processing is performed. To finish.

<21st control example>
Next, the 21st control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 660 to 673. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as a liquid crystal display using the third symbol display device 81 and an accessory effect using a movable accessory (for example, a tilting device 310) for moving the frame button 22. , Was configured to perform a suggestive effect to suggest to the player.

Specifically, when the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command including information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is used. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the liquid crystal effect and the effect mode of the accessory effect based on the information indicating the lottery result of the special figure included.

The liquid crystal display set here is output to the display control device 114 as an effect command for display, and various image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are created by the display control device 114. On the other hand, as for the accessory effect, a drive scenario for driving the movable accessory in a predetermined operation is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the movable accessory (for example, the tilting device 310) is set based on the set drive scenario. ) Is moved, drive control is executed for the drive means (for example, the voice coil motor 352).

In this way, based on one piece of information (variation pattern command), data for liquid crystal effect and data for accessory effect are created, respectively, and a plurality of effect devices (first) are created based on the created data. When performing an effect on the 3 symbol display device 81, movable accessory), it is possible to execute a more interesting effect by synchronizing the effects executed by each effect device. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, since the voice lamp control device 113 outputs data related to the effect to each effect device (display control device 114 and tilt device 310), the effect content executed by each effect device. There was a problem that it was difficult to synchronize.

In particular, in a character effect that moves a movable character that is configured to be movable between an initial position and a movable position, such as the tilting device 310, in order to perform a specific character effect, the movable character is used. Since it is necessary to perform a preparatory operation for moving from the initial position to the production start position and an end operation for moving the movable character to the initial position after the character production is completed, one information (variation pattern command) is used. When executing an effect for a plurality of effect devices based on the above, if the effect is executed without considering the position of the movable accessory at the time when the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command is executed, the liquid crystal display effect and There was a problem that it deviated from the character production.

Therefore, in the 21st control example, the content (effect mode) of the composite effect to be executed by combining the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the accessory effect (drive effect) is the movable accessory at the execution timing of the composite effect. It is configured to be set based on the operating status of. Specifically, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the composite effect is configured to be executed only when the movable accessory is located at a predetermined position (initial position). With this configuration, even if the control instruction related to the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the control instruction related to the accessory effect (movable effect) are executed separately, the display effect and the accessory effect are different from each other as a composite effect. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is lost, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Further, in the 21st control example, the movable accessory is not located at the initial position at the execution timing of the composite effect, that is, the movable accessory driven by the previously executed accessory effect is moved to the initial position. When the execution timing of the composite effect arrives in a situation where the compound effect has not returned, the display effect showing the effect result equivalent to the effect result of the compound effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the game is continued without the player recognizing the effect result to be notified to the player even by using the compound effect.

Here, in the 21st control example, the above-mentioned composite effect is configured to be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. The details of the production will be described later, but by executing the compound production (last production) during the ending period, the next jackpot will be won immediately after the jackpot game ends (there is a high possibility of winning). Is configured to suggest (notify) to the player.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned composite effect (last effect) during the jackpot game, the accessory effect for driving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed, for example. A role of notifying whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player or a normal state (time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probable change state. It is configured so that the object production (probability change promotion production) is executed. In addition, the tilting device 310 can be driven as a decorative effect to liven up the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be movable in various operation patterns (operation scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable accessory (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for a plurality of purposes during the jackpot game, one movable accessory can be used for a plurality of purposes. , The effect of production can be enhanced efficiently.

However, as described above, the more efficiently the effect is configured, the easier it is to set another character effect during the period in which the movable accessory is being driven (the execution period of the character effect is longer). It becomes easy to overlap), and there is a problem that the production that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, if the execution period of a plurality of character effects is fixed in advance so that the character effects using movable characters are not executed in duplicate, the character effects become monotonous. There was a problem that the effect was reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution periods of the character effects overlap, one of the character effects is switched to another effect (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). It is configured. As a result, even if the effect contents can be set so that the execution periods of the character effects can be overlapped, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect, and further, it is possible to execute various character effects. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 660, the flow of setting the composite effect in the 21st control example will be described. FIG. 660 is a timing chart showing the flow of the display effect and the accessory effect (operation effect) during the jackpot game. Of the flow of effects shown in FIG. 660, the contents of the OP effect displayed during the opening period of the jackpot game, the round effect displayed during the normal round game period, and the interval effect displayed during the interval period. Since the contents are the same as those described in the above-mentioned control examples, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 660, in this control example, a plurality of character effects (operation effects) are configured to be executed during the jackpot game. Specifically, during a specific round (any of 1, 8 and 16) of the jackpot game, an operation of opening (raising) the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 707) attached to the frame button 22A is executed. When the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised), the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 707) attached to the frame button 22A is opened during the first operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 and the ending period of the jackpot game. When the (ascending) operation is executed and the tilting device 310 is completely opened (ascended), the second operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed.

Here, the first operation effect is a probabilistic promotion effect, which is an effect of giving an effect result for notifying the player whether or not the game state set after the jackpot game is in the probable change state. The operation effect is to notify the player whether or not there is winning information indicating that the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot (big hit B1 or jackpot B2 (see FIG. 440)) in the reserved memory of the special symbol. The hold continuous effect, which is an effect to which the effect result of the above is given, is configured to be executed.

For example, according to the flow shown in FIG. 660 (A), the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round (final round) of the jackpot game. Here, the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is the first effect period (about 6 seconds) and the first effect period, which encourages whether or not the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 707) is completely opened (raised). The tilting device 310 is completely opened (ascended) during the second effect period (about 2 seconds) in which the player can press the frame button 22, and the player presses the frame button 22 during the second effect period. This is formed by a third effect period (about 2 seconds) for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position when the second effect period has elapsed.

On the other hand, the round game during the big hit game is configured to end when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 balls have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65A. Therefore, depending on the winning condition during the round game, as shown in FIG. 660 (A), when the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is not completed at the end of the 16th round (final round) (tilting device 310). Is not in the initial position). Further, for example, when the end condition of the 16th round (final round) is satisfied, even if it is in the middle stage or if it is configured to forcibly end the first operation effect, it is in a state of being forcibly ended. Since a period for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position is required, the tilting device 310 cannot be positioned at the initial position at the end of the 16th round (final round).

In this way, when the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to be the target of the operation effect is not located at the initial position at the end of the 16th round (final round) or at the start of the ending period, the ending period Even if the condition for executing the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is the second operation effect, is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 is used without executing the operation effect using the tilting device 310. It is configured to execute the last effect only by the display effect.

As a result, the operation effect corresponding to the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) has not been completely completed (the movable accessory (tilting device 310) driven by the first operation effect is not located at the initial position). Therefore, even if the execution timing of the hold continuous effect (last effect) is reached, the last effect can be executed using only the display effect, so that the player can experience the hold continuous effect.

Further, in this control example, an effect that the second operation effect executed later can be an effect result in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given is executed than the first operation effect executed first. It is configured to be. Therefore, by configuring as in this control example, a second operation effect that can be more advantageous to the player than the first operation effect is executed depending on the execution status of the first operation effect to be executed first. It is also possible to suppress the problem that the effect is lost or the effect of the second operation is different from that of the display and the effect of the second operation is reduced.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, the execution conditions of each effect are set so that the hold continuous effect is more difficult to execute than the probabilistic promotion effect during the jackpot game. Therefore, by configuring as in the present control example, it is possible to suppress the problem that the execution of the difficult-to-execute effect is hindered by the easy-to-execute effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 660 (B), when the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the first round of the jackpot game, the probability change promotion effect is executed using a predetermined period from the first round. After that, since the 16 rounds (final round) can be completed with the tilting device 310 positioned at the initial position, the hold continuous effect (last effect) executed during the ending period can be performed by the movable accessory (last effect). The second operation effect using the tilting device 310) and the display effect using the third symbol display device 81 can be executed in synchronization with each other.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 661 to 663, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the operation effects (first operation effect, second operation effect) during the jackpot game described above are executed will be described. do. In an example described with reference to FIGS. 661 to 663, a display example during a jackpot game based on a jackpot B2 (a jackpot of an even number symbol (666) with a probability variation of 16 rounds) is shown. It should be noted that FIGS. 661 to 663 show an example of the display screen during the jackpot, and only the characteristic display mode in this control example is described, and the display during the jackpot game described in each of the above-mentioned control examples is described. Each element displayed on the screen (for example, the number of prize balls during the jackpot, the element indicating the cumulative number of times the jackpot was won during the probability change state, or the time saving state (number of consecutive chans)) has the same contents. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 661 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the first effect period of the probability variation promotion effect, and FIG. 661 (B) is a probability variation promotion effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example which is displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 during the 2nd effect period of. FIG. 662 is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22A during the second effect period of the probabilistic promotion effect.

First, when the probabilistic promotion effect (first operation effect) is executed, the comment "chance if the button pops out" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in the frame line, the tilting device 310 is swung in small steps in the opening direction (upward direction) and the closing direction (downward direction) (in the frame line of FIG. 661 (A), the explanation will be given. For the sake of convenience, the state in which the frame button 22A swings in small steps in the vertical direction is described).

Then, when the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) from the state of FIG. 661 (A), as shown in FIG. 661 (B), the frame button 22A raised on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The button display mode shown is displayed, and a "press" comment urging the frame button 22A to be pressed is displayed. In the frame line of FIG. 661 (B), the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) by describing the state in which the frame button 22A is completely projected for convenience of explanation, and the player presses the frame button 22A. It indicates that it is in a pressable state.

When the player presses the frame button 22A in the state shown in FIG. 661 (B), the third symbol display "666" at the time of the jackpot is displayed as a probability variation promotion mode for indicating that the jackpot this time was a probability variation jackpot. The characters "super" are displayed in the vicinity until the end of the jackpot game. Then, the character "lucky" is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 662). Then, when the frame button 22A in the protruding state is pressed, the frame button 22A is located in the initial state (lowering state) as shown in the frame line of FIG. 662. In this way, by constantly displaying the probabilistic promotion mode (“super”) on the display screen, the probabilistic promotion effect is completed so that the probabilistic state is set for the player after the end of this jackpot game. Even after that, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, a display mode in which the character "super" is added is used as the probabilistic promotion mode, but the display color is not limited to this, and for example, the display color of the third symbol "666" is in a probable change state after the jackpot game is completed. Is variable to a display color (for example, rainbow color) indicating that is set, or a display mode (for example, rainbow color) indicating that a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game ends on the display screen. It may be configured to display a character). Further, in this control example, by configuring so as to attach a probabilistic promotion mode without changing the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot, it is possible to play a game in which third symbol display mode is used to win the jackpot. It is configured to be easy for the person to understand, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot can be changed to a display mode (for example, "777") indicating that the jackpot is a probable change jackpot. It may be configured to make it.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this control example, even if the jackpot this time is jackpot A (16 rounds, time reduction 100 times), the above-mentioned probability variation promotion effect is executed. In this case, since the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game ends, when the player presses the frame button 22A in the state of FIG. 661 (B), the display screen shown in FIG. 662 is replaced. , The word "Sorry" is displayed to indicate that the probabilistic promotion effect has failed. Even in a part of the case of jackpot B2 (big hit of even symbol (666) with 16 rounds probability variation), even if it is configured to display the character "sorry" indicating that the probability variation promotion effect has failed. good. As a result, even if the probabilistic promotion effect fails, the probabilistic state may be set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the jackpot game ends. ..

Further, in this control example, as a failure pattern of the probabilistic promotion effect, the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 707) is executed during the first effect period (about 6 seconds) for inciting whether or not the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 707) is completely opened (raised). It is configured to execute only the effect, and then execute the fanning effect of moving (retracting) the tilting device 310 to the initial position. And, this fanning effect is an effect condition other than the execution condition of the probabilistic promotion effect (for example, when the effect lottery executed at the start timing of the round game is won, or during the round game, a predetermined number or more is set in the specific winning opening 65A. It is configured to be executed even when the ball wins a prize or when the condition that is satisfied when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22A during the jackpot game is satisfied.

With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the probabilistic promotion effect has been executed, and at the time when the fanning effect is executed, the tilting device 310 is completely opened (ascended). , Can give the player expectations. In addition, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the fanning effect is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In this case, the effect fusion pattern for executing the display mode (fanning effect display) shown in FIG. 661 (A) during the first effect period of the probabilistic promotion effect, that is, during the fanning effect, and the movable accessory (tilting device). It is preferable to configure the character effect pattern that causes the fanning effect to be executed only in 310) so that it can be executed. As a result, whether this fanning effect is part of the probabilistic promotion effect, or if the effect conditions other than the execution condition of the probabilistic promotion effect (for example, if the effect lottery executed at the start timing of the round game is won, or the round game) It is executed when a predetermined number of balls or more are won in the specific winning opening 65A, or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22A during the jackpot game). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a fanning effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 663, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the hold continuous production will be described. FIG. 663 (A) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed when the tilting device 310 is in a state of being completely opened (raised) during the hold continuous production, and is a schematic diagram of FIG. 663 (B). Is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the frame button 22A is pressed in the state of FIG. 663 (A).

In this control example, at the timing when the ending period of the jackpot starts, the winning information stored on hold is analyzed (discriminated), and as the result of the analysis (discrimination), the information indicating that the probabilistic jackpot is won is stored on hold. It is configured to execute the hold continuous effect when it is included in the winning information. When this hold continuous effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 663 (A), the tilting device 310 (frame button 22A) is completely opened (raised) during the ending period (see the frame line in FIG. 663). In the display screen, a button display mode indicating the completely raised frame button 22A and the character "press" for prompting the player to press the frame button 22A are displayed. In FIG. 663 (A), the character "ending" indicating that the state during the jackpot game is the ending period is displayed in the upper left of the display screen.

Then, when the frame button 22A is pressed in the state of FIG. 663 (A), the characters "super lucky" indicating that the hold continuous production is successful are displayed, and a character imitating many fish appears on the display screen. A video that crosses the screen is played. In addition, the edge of the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the big hit is changed to a success display mode indicating the success of the hold continuous production. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hold continuous production is successful (there is a probable change jackpot in the hold memory).

In this control example, it is set as an execution condition of the hold continuous effect that it is determined that there is a probability change jackpot in the hold memory, and it does not matter whether or not the jackpot game being executed is a probability change jackpot. Hold continuous production is feasible. As a result, for example, even if the probabilistic promotion effect is executed and fails during the jackpot game (even if it is highly possible that the jackpot this time is not the probabilistic jackpot), there is a possibility that the hold continuous effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with expectations until the end. In addition, if the probability change promotion effect executed during the jackpot game is successful, the probability variation state in which the jackpot probability is high after the jackpot game is set is set, so that the winning information for winning the probability variation jackpot is stored in the hold memory. It becomes easy to be included. Therefore, the player who succeeds in the probabilistic promotion effect during the big hit game can play the game until the end of the big hit game while increasing the expectation that the hold continuous effect is executed.

In this control example, it is a condition for executing the hold continuous production that there is a probability change jackpot in the hold memory at the start of the ending period, but the execution condition is not limited to this, for example, at the start of the jackpot game or a specific round game. It is a hold continuous production that there is a probability change jackpot in the hold memory that is held and stored at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game such as when it starts or ends, or at the timing when the special figure change that won the jackpot stops. It may be set as an execution condition. Further, when there are a plurality of winning information indicating a big hit in the hold memory, the hold continuous effect may be executed even if the big hit is not a probable change big hit, or the effect mode of the hold continuous effect may be set. , May be configured to be variably set according to the number of winning information indicating the jackpot included in the hold storage.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 21st control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 664 to 668, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 21st control example will be described. In the 21st control example, with respect to the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 15th control example described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are used. , Are different in that they are changed, and otherwise they are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 664, the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 211 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 21st control example will be described. FIG. 664 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 664, the ROM 222 of the 21st control example has the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222IA and the special prize middle tilt operation scenario table 222IB with respect to the ROM 222 of the 15th control example (see FIG. 548). , Is different from the operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC in that. Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize is a data table used when selecting whether or not to execute the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) during the jackpot game and selecting the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed. In this control example, whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect during the jackpot game, and the effect mode of the probabilistic promotion effect (the effect mode that progresses to a state where the frame button 22A can be pressed, or the frame button 22A cannot be pressed. It is referred to when selecting the end fanning effect mode).

Here, the contents of the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize will be described with reference to FIG. 666 (A). FIG. 666 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize. As shown in FIG. 666 (A), the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222IA defines different tilting motion scenarios based on the winning jackpot type and the acquired effect counter 223H value. ..

Specifically, the jackpot type is "big hit A (16 rounds, time saving hit)", and "tilting operation scenario B" is defined in the range where the acquired effect counter 223H value is "0-9", and "10-". "Tilt motion scenario C" is defined in the range of "99". The range of "100 to 199" is defined so as not to set a tilting motion scenario.

Here, to briefly explain the tilting motion scenario defined in the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize, this tilting motion scenario defines an motion scenario for driving the tilting device 310 which is a movable accessory. The operation effect start time (operation effect start period) T1 which is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the drive of the tilt device 310 after the tilt operation scenario is set, and the operation time of the tilt device 310 (operation period). ) Is set as the timer value T2 of the tilting operation timer 223DB. That is, depending on the operation data (scenario) selected from the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if it is executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310. , Operation effect contents and are set.

Although the details will be described later, each tilting operation scenario has information in which the operation mode of the tilting device 310 is different, and the tilting device has various operation modes based on the progress of the timer value T2 described above. The 310 is configured to be operable.

Returning to FIG. 666, the description will be continued. It is stipulated that the jackpot type is "big hit B1 (16 rounds, probability variation, odd symbol jackpot)" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223H is not set in the range of "0 to 199". That is, in this control example, the probabilistic promotion effect (see FIGS. 661 and 662) is configured to be executable as the operation effect executed during the jackpot game, and this probabilistic promotion effect is the probabilistic change after the jackpot game ends. It is an effect to suggest (notify) to the player that the state is a big hit for which the state is set.

That is, in the "big hit B1" which is stopped and displayed with an odd number symbol which is a display mode indicating that the third symbol is a probabilistic jackpot at the time of a big hit (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot). Even if a probabilistic promotion effect is executed during a jackpot game, it only provides a meaningless effect to the player and may reduce the motivation for the game. It is configured so that the tilting motion scenario) is not selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing by performing a meaningless effect on the player.

Next, the jackpot type is "big hit B2 (16 rounds, probability variation, even symbol jackpot)", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223H is defined in the range of "0 to 49", and "tilting operation scenario B" is defined, and "50". "Tilt motion scenario C" is defined in the range of "~ 149". The range of "150 to 199" is defined so as not to set a tilting motion scenario. In addition, although the jackpot type is "big hit C (2 rounds, probability variation)", the value of the acquired effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 199", that is, "no tilting operation scenario is set" is specified in the entire range. ing. This "big hit C" is set to have a smaller number of round games (2 rounds) executed during the big hit game than other big hit games, and in this control example, the number of rounds (2 rounds) is set. After the jackpot game is executed, the probability change state is always set.

Therefore, the "big hit C" is a special prize because it is a clear jackpot that the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed by grasping the game mode of the big hit game as in the above-mentioned "big hit B1". The operation effect (tilted operation scenario) is not selected by using the middle operation effect selection table 222IA. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing by performing a meaningless effect on the player. Further, by executing the operation effect within a small number of rounds, it is possible to prevent the effect mode during the big hit game from becoming complicated.

Here, the contents of the tilting motion scenario type specified in the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize will be briefly described. Of the contents of the tilting operation scenario, the same parts as the above-mentioned 15th control example will be omitted in detail. In this control example, the tilting motion scenario B and the tilting motion scenario C are included as the tilting motion scenario types defined in the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222IA. The tilting operation scenario B is to move the tilting device 310 in the same operation as the tilting operation scenario B used in the 15th control example control example described above, and executes a preparatory drive for moving the tilting device 310. During the preparation period, the tilting device 310 is repeatedly moved in the vertical direction (opening / closing direction) three times, and the tilting drive is executed. A scenario for moving the tilting device 310 so that the period is set is defined.

On the other hand, the tilting motion scenario C defines an motion scenario in which only a part of the tilting motion scenario B described above is executed, and the tilting device 310 is moved up and down during the preparation period for executing the preparatory drive for moving the tilting device 310. A scenario is defined in which the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position after a fanning effect period for executing a fanning drive that is repeatedly moved in the direction (opening / closing direction) three times is set. That is, when the tilting motion scenario B is set, the probabilistic promotion effect (see FIG. 661 (B)) that causes the player to press the frame button 22A is executed during the jackpot game, and the tilting motion scenario C is set. In this case, it is configured to execute a fanning effect (see FIG. 661 (A)) in which the frame button 22A is not pressed during the jackpot game.

Then, as described above, the preparatory drive (preparation period) and the fanning drive (fanning effect period) for the tilting device 310 executed when the tilting operation scenario C is set have the same contents as the tilting operation scenario B. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the frame button 22A can be pressed after the fanning drive (fanning effect) of the tilting device 310 (frame button 22A) is executed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the probabilistic promotion production in the journey in which the fanning production is executed.

Further, in the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize, the operation effect start time (operation effect start period) T1 and the inclination are set for each tilting operation scenario, as in the operation effect selection table 222DA of the 15th control example described above. The tilting operation timer 223DB timer value T2 for setting the operating time (operating period) of the device 310 is defined. In the tilting operation scenario B, the operation effect start time TI is 1000 milliseconds (1 second), and the timer. The value T2 is defined as 7900 milliseconds (7.9 seconds), and in the tilting operation scenario C, the operation effect start time TI is 1000 milliseconds (1 second), and the timer value T2 is 5200 milliseconds (5.2 seconds). It is stipulated. That is, it is specified that the period set as the operation effect start time TI is shorter than each tilting operation scenario defined in the operation effect selection table 222DA of the fifteenth control example described above.

That is, the effect using the movable accessory based on the tilting motion scenario selected with reference to the operation effect selection table 222IA described above is executed during the special figure change, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Since it is necessary to move the movable accessory in accordance with the variable display executed on the screen, it was necessary to provide a predetermined grace period for the operation effect start time TI. Since the effect using the movable accessory based on the tilting motion scenario selected by reference is executed during the jackpot game (during the round game), the player feels uncomfortable even if it is executed immediately after the start of the round game. This is because it does not give. With this configuration, it is possible to perform an effect of moving the movable accessory immediately after the start of the round game, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by executing the effect of moving the movable accessory at an early stage, it is possible to easily end the effect of using the movable accessory within a specific period (round game period).

As described above, in this control example, the rate at which the tilting motion scenario B is selected as the tilting motion scenario selected using the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize is the jackpot type "big hit A". It is designed so that the case of "big hit B2" is higher than the case. Specifically, it is configured so that the selection ratio is 5 times higher. With this configuration, when the tilting motion scenario B is set and the frame button 22A is provided in a state in which it can be pressed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot.

Therefore, when the fanning effect is executed during the jackpot game, the fanning effect (see FIG. 661 (A)) progresses, and the frame button 22A shifts to the pressable state (see FIG. 661 (B)). It is possible to make the player play the game during the big hit while expecting the player. Further, when the frame button 22A can be pressed, the probability change promotion effect can be succeeded with a high probability, so that the frame button 22A can be pressed enthusiastically, and the player's willingness to participate in the effect is motivated. Can be enhanced.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when a specific effect condition is satisfied other than selecting the tilting operation scenario C with reference to the above-mentioned special prize operation effect selection table 222IA (for example,). When the production lottery executed at the start timing of the round game is won, when a predetermined number of balls or more are won in the specific winning opening 65A during the round game, or when the player hits the frame button 22A during the jackpot game. The tilting motion scenario C can be set when a specific operation is performed, etc.). As a result, even when the probabilistic promotion effect is set (when the tilting motion scenario is selected by the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize), it is possible to execute the fanning effect, so that the probabilistic promotion effect is the fanning effect. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the game ended with or whether the fanning effect other than the probabilistic promotion effect was executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the production in which the probabilistic promotion effect is successful is executed until the end of the jackpot game.

The special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222IB is a data table in which the operation contents for the tilting device 310 executed during the jackpot game are stored. Regarding the specific contents, the same parts as the above-mentioned 15th control example will be omitted in detail, but the tilting operation selected in the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222IB and the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222IA. A data table for setting the origin detection operation table B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the scenario type and the tilting operation scenario is set.

Here, the contents of the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222IB will be described with reference to FIG. 666 (B). FIG. 666 (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222IB. As shown in FIG. 666 (B), the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222IB has a tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2, a tilting operation scenario C table 222IB1, an origin detection operation B table 222DB4, and an ending scenario table 222IB2. There is. Of these, the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222IB and the origin detection operation B table 222DB4 have the same contents as the above-mentioned 15th control example, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The tilting operation scenario C table 222IB1 defines an operation scenario in which the tilting device 310 (frame button 22A) moves to the initial position after performing a tilting effect in which the tilting device 310 (frame button 22A) swings in small steps in the vertical direction. This is a partial diversion of the operation scenario specified in the tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2 of the fifteenth control example described above.

Here, the contents specified in the tilting operation scenario C table 222IB1 will be described with reference to FIG. 667 (A). FIG. 667 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the tilting operation scenario C table 222IB1. This tilting motion scenario C table 222IB1 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize at the start of the jackpot game. Then, when the operation effect start time set in the special prize operation effect selection table 222IA elapses after the tilting operation scenario C is set, the operation of the tilting operation scenario C table 222IB1 is started.

The tilting operation scenario C table 222IB1 reads out the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223DB (see Z2953 in FIG. 561). Then, the defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "10" (the tilt operation timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time (1000 milliseconds) has elapsed, the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" (50 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 500 MS) is executed, and the lock is released. , The operation data whose operation pointer is "2" (stopped during 3000 MS) is executed, and the operation data whose operation pointer is "3" (movable 20 steps in the forward rotation direction during 200 MS) is executed. The operation data with the operation pointer "4" (moving 20 steps in the backward rotation direction during 200MS) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "5" (20 steps in the forward rotation direction during 200MS) is executed. (Movable) is executed, the operation data with the operation pointer "6" (movable in the backward rotation direction in 20 steps during 200MS) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "7" (20 steps during 200MS) is executed. (Movable in the forward rotation direction) is executed, and the operation data whose operation pointer is "8" (movable in the backward rotation direction in 20 steps during 200MS) is executed, and the operation pointers "3" to "8" are executed three times. The motion data with the motion pointer "9" (moving 50 steps in the backward rotation direction during 500 MS) is executed, and the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position. The operation pointer becomes "10" and the operation ends.

With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs a fanning motion (fanning effect) during the jackpot game (during a round game) (see FIG. 661 (A)), and the tilting device 310 is subsequently directed to the player. Can be suggested to be completely open (rised), and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In this control example, only a specific fanning motion (movements from the motion pointers "3" to "8") is specified as a fanning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of repetitive motions and the repetitive motion. It may be configured to execute a plurality of fanning effects with different positions (open state of the tilting device 310). In this case, among the probabilistic promotion effects, a fanning effect (successful effect mode) that is easily executed as a probabilistic promotion effect (see FIG. 662) is executed, for example, a fanning effect in which the number of repeated operations is 7 times. By configuring to set the effect mode of the above, the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the fanning effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, the content defined in the tilting operation scenario C table 222IB1 is the same as the content defined in the tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2 up to the first half (the part where the fanning effect ends). It is configured so that the definition contents after that are different. Specifically, it is defined that the tilting device 310 is positioned at the initial position as it is after the fanning effect is completed.

With this configuration, it is expected that the fanning effect this time will be a probabilistic promotion effect (a probabilistic promotion effect that allows the frame button 22A to be pressed) until the fanning effect is being executed. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the probabilistic promotion effect has a low degree (probability change promotion effect in which the frame button 22A cannot be pressed), the player can grasp the effect result first. By suppressing it, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, unlike the tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2, the tilting device 310 (frame button 22A) stands by at a specific position (the most open (elevated) position) corresponding to the period for causing the player to press the frame button 22A. Since it is not necessary to set the tilting device 310 (frame button 22A) in the tilting motion scenario C table 222IB1, it is possible to define an motion for returning the tilting device 310 (frame button 22A) to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to execute the movable accessory (tilting device 310) from the start to the end of the operation based on a series of operation scenarios, and the accessory operation can be smoothly executed. In this control example, the tilting device 310 (frame button 22A) is configured to be returned to the initial position in the tilting operation scenario C table 222IB1, but the tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2 is used without limitation. Similar to the operation of the accessory, an operation scenario for returning to the initial position (origin position) may be separately provided.

Returning to FIG. 666 (B), the explanation will be continued. The ending scenario table 222IB2 is a scenario table that defines the operation content of the tilting device 310 for the operation effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game. If (the holding memory contains the winning information indicating the probability change jackpot, and the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is located at the initial position), the setting is made.

Unlike the various tables of the tilting operation scenario described above, the ending scenario table 222IB2 does not set the operation effect start time T1. Therefore, when the ending scenario table is set (Z8514 in FIG. 673), the tilting operation timer 223DB The value corresponding to is set, and the operation of the tilting operation scenario C table 222IB1 is started (see Z2992 in FIG. 670).

The ending scenario table 222IB2 reads out the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223DB (see Z2953 in FIG. 561). , The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "6" (the tilt operation timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, the same contents as the partial operation contents of the tilting operation scenario A222DB1 of the fifteenth control example described above are defined, and when the ending scenario is set, the drive motor 342 moves in the backward rotation direction (right in FIG. 724). By rotating 210 steps in the (rotational direction), the disk cam 344 is rotated 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in FIG. 724) and moved to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 732 (operation pointer 1 (FIG. 667). (B))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds (500 MS) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 667 (A))). After a stop period of 0.5 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 732), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 20 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and locks. It is moved to the removed position (see FIG. 734) (operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 667 (B)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengagement position to the locking disengagement position, as shown in FIG. 733 described above, the release member 346 is rotated downward (counterclockwise direction), whereby the rotary claw is rotated. The member 347 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven to provide an assist in the front-rear direction to the tilting device 310, so that the ascending force is increased and the ascending speed is improved. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited for (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 667 (B))).

After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 667 (A))), and the tilting device 310 stands by at the highest position. After that, the drive motor 342 rotates 190 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 732) for 1.9 seconds, so that the tilting device 310 moves (descends) to the initial position (origin position). And the driving force is transmitted.

As described above, in this control example, as in the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1 of the 15th control example described above, the ascending speed of the tilting device 310 can be improved, so that the movable accessory executed during the ending period can be improved. The character production using (tilting device 310) can be a powerful production. Further, since the movable accessory (tilting device 310) can be quickly moved (ascended) to the highest ascending position within the limited period of the ending period, it is executed after moving to the highest ascending position. The period of production can be lengthened, and various productions can be performed.

In this control example, the ending scenario is set after the ending period is started, but the ending scenario is not limited to this, and for example, the ending scenario is set before the ending period is set. It may be set so that the operation of the operation pointer 2 of the ending scenario is completed at the start of the ending period. With this configuration, the period from the start of the ending period to the movement of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to the highest position can be further shortened.

Further, in the 21st control example, by setting the ending scenario table 222IB2, the operation start (operation from the initial position (origin position)) of the tilting device 310 to the end of the operation (initial position (origin position)). It is configured to execute a series of operations up to (operation of It may be provided separately from the scenario table for termination.

Further, in the 21st control example, the tilting device 310 is configured to set the operation valid period in which the frame button 22A can be pressed for 3 seconds in which the tilting device 310 stands by at the highest position, and the operation thereof. When the player presses the frame button 22A during the valid period, the operation valid period is cleared, and the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB corresponding to the ending scenario table 222IB2 is subtracted to the value at which the waiting state for 3 seconds ends. It is configured to do. With this configuration, the operation valid period ends when the frame button 22A is pressed during the operation valid period, and the operation valid period depends on the passage of time without pressing the frame button 22A during the operation valid period. It is possible to execute the end operation of the movable accessory by using a common scenario.

Returning to FIG. 664, the explanation will be continued. The operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC is a data table for determining at which timing (round game) the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed during the jackpot game, and is referred to at the start of the jackpot game ( (See Z8301 in FIG. 671), the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect is selected. The execution timing selected here is stored in the motion information storage area 223IB during the special prize, and when the jackpot game progresses and the round game set as the execution timing is reached, the probabilistic promotion effect is executed.

Here, the contents of the operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC will be described with reference to FIG. 668. FIG. 668 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC. As shown in FIG. 668, the operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC defines different execution timings corresponding to the jackpot type and the value of the effect timing counter 223IA.

Specifically, the jackpot type is "big hit A", the value of the effect timing counter 223IA is in the range of "0 to 39", and the execution timing is in the range of "40 to 109". Is defined as the "8th round" as the execution timing, and the "16th round" is defined as the execution timing in the range of "110 to 199". That is, when the jackpot type is "big hit A" and the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed, the rate is 20% in the first round, and the rate of 35% is the eighth round, 45%. It is stipulated that the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round at the rate of.

With this configuration, the probability change promotion effect is easily executed at the end of the jackpot game (16th round), so the failure effect is executed as the probability change promotion effect in the first half of the jackpot game. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play during the remaining period of the jackpot game. Further, since the timing at which the probabilistic promotion effect is executed can be set over the entire jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the probabilistic promotion effect will be executed.

In this control example, the probability variation promotion effect is configured to be executed only once during the jackpot game, but the operation effect execution timing is not limited to this so that the probability variation promotion effect can be executed multiple times. The selection table 222IC may be configured to specify a plurality of execution timings. In this case, for example, in the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize, a plurality of effect modes of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected, and the effect mode of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected. It is good to configure it so that it is different. As a result, a wider variety of probabilistic promotion effects can be executed at various timings, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the jackpot game at an early stage.

Further, in this control example, the start timing of any round game is set as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period set between the round games is set. When the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65A in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or during the jackpot game, the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22A. In some cases, or when a ball is inserted into the general entrance 63 during a big hit game, it may be configured so that it can be set as one of the start timings. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player execute the probabilistic promotion effect at a timing that is more difficult to predict, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 668, the explanation will be continued. When the jackpot type is "big hit B1", it is specified that the value of the acquired effect timing counter 223IA is not set in the range of "0 to 199", that is, the execution timing is not set in the entire range. .. That is, in this control example, in the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize, when the jackpot type is "big hit B1", the operation effect (probability variation promotion effect) is not selected. The selection table 222IC is also configured so that the execution timing is not selected. By configuring in this way, even if the probabilistic promotion effect is selected even though it is a "big hit B1", it is possible to reliably prevent the probabilistic promotion effect from being executed. can.

Next, the jackpot type is "big hit B2", the value of the effect timing counter 223IA is in the range of "0 to 19", the execution timing is "first round", and the execution timing is in the range of "20 to 99". The "8th round" is defined as the execution timing, and the "16th round" is defined as the execution timing in the range of "100 to 199". That is, when the jackpot type is "big hit B2" and the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed, the rate is 10% in the first round, and the rate of 40% is 50% in the eighth round. It is stipulated that the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round at the rate of.

That is, in the "big hit B2" in which the success effect is executed in the probability change promotion effect, the probability change promotion effect is more easily executed as the jackpot game progresses than in the above-mentioned "big hit A". Therefore, the later the timing at which the probabilistic promotion effect is executed, the more the expectation that the current jackpot will be the probabilistic jackpot (“big hit B2”) can be expected.

In this control example, the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect based on "big hit A" (1,8,16 rounds) and the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect based on "big hit B2" (1,8,16 rounds). , Is configured to select the execution timing from the same number of rounds, but the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can be executed only for the probabilistic promotion effect based on "big hit B2" is not limited to this. It may be configured to be set. With this configuration, the player can pay close attention to the timing at which the probabilistic promotion effect is executed. Further, when "big hit C" is set as the big hit type, the execution timing is not set as in the above-mentioned "big hit B1".

Next, with reference to FIG. 665, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 21st control example will be described. FIG. 665 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 665, the RAM 223 in the 21st control example is different from the RAM 223 (FIG. 549) in the 15th control example described above in that an effect timing counter 223IA and a prize-winning operation information storage area 223IB are added. However, everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect timing counter 223IA is formed by the same loop counter as the effect counter 223H described above, and its value is updated every time the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond). It is a thing. The effect timing counter 223IA acquires the value of the effect timing counter 223IA in the opening process 11 (Z8301 in FIG. 671) executed at the start of the jackpot game (Z8314 in FIG. 671), and the value of the effect timing counter 223IA is obtained according to the acquired value. The execution timing of the operation effect during the jackpot game is selected based on the operation effect execution timing selection table.

The effect timing counter 223IA and the effect counter 223H are both formed by a loop counter that updates the range of "0 to 199" every 1 millisecond, but it is difficult to obtain the same value. As you can see, the updated contents are different. Specifically, the values added by one update are configured to be different prime numbers. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the effect timing counter 223IA and the value of the effect counter 223H from being updated in synchronization with each other.

The operation information storage area 223IB during the special prize sets the production mode of the probability variation promotion effect set at the start of the jackpot game and the execution timing of the probability variation promotion effect as the operation effect (probability variation promotion effect) executed during the jackpot game. It is a storage area for temporary storage. Specifically, the tilting motion scenario (see Z8312 in FIG. 671) selected by the opening process 11 (see Z8301 in FIG. 671) and the execution timing of the selected tilting motion (see Z8315 in FIG. 671) are stored. (See Z8316 in FIG. 671).

Then, it is read out by the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 672) executed during the jackpot game (see Z8411 in FIG. 672), and when it is determined whether or not the current round game is the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect. (See Z8412 in FIG. 672), and when it is determined that the execution timing is reached, the operation based on the effect mode (operation scenario) stored in the operation information storage area 223IB during the special prize is started.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the 21st control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 669 to 673, the content of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In the 21st control example, the operation effect of the tilting device control process (see Z2891 in FIG. 558) executed by the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (Z2161 in FIG. 555) is being performed for the 15th control example described above. There is a difference between the change in the content of the process (see Z2905 in FIG. 559) and the change in the process content executed when a jackpot-related command is received in the command determination process (Z2113 in FIG. 553). ing. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 669, the contents of the operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989) will be described. FIG. 669 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989). This operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989) is executed when the tilting operation status is set to 2. The difference is that the processing during the operation effect (Z2905) of the fifteenth control example described above is added with the processing during the ending that is executed when the ending of the jackpot is in progress.

When the operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2951), and it is determined that the value is larger than 0. (Z2951: YES), then determines whether the current time is in the ending period of the jackpot game (Z2991), and if it is determined that the ending period is in progress (Z2991: YES), the ending processing is executed. (Z2922), the process proceeds to Z2952. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2991 that it is not during the ending period (Z2991: NO), the processing of Z2992 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z2952.

The details of the ending process executed in the process of Z2992 will be described later with reference to FIG. 670. In this ending process, the frame button 22A is pressed during the operation of the tilting device 310 executed during the ending period. If so, the processing is executed.

Returning to FIG. 669, the explanation will be continued. When the processing of Z2991 and Z2992 is completed, the processing of Z2952 to Z2956, which is the same as the processing during operation effect (Z2905) of the above-mentioned 15th control example, is executed, and then the display command corresponding to the operation executed this time is set. (Z2993), and this process is terminated. In the processing of Z2993, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the highest position (the most open position) by the operation based on the set tilting operation scenario table, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display command for displaying a display mode (see FIG. 661 (B)) for indicating that the frame button 22A can be pressed is set, and the tilting device 310 is in a fanning operation. In this case, a display command for displaying the button display mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be set in a display mode corresponding to the operation content.

In this way, by setting the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (setting the display command) based on the actual operation content of the tilting device 310, the movable accessory (tilting device). The operation mode of 310) and the display mode of the effect display can be easily synchronized, and an effect with a high effect can be executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2951 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2951: NO), it is the same as the processing during operation effect (Z2905) of the 15th control example described above. Z2957 to Z2961 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the ending processing (Z2992) will be described with reference to FIG. 670. FIG. 670 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending processing (Z2992). When the ending processing (Z2992) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 3190 (Z8201), and when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 3190 (Z8201 :. YES), the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is set to 3000 (Z8202), and the process proceeds to Z8202.

That is, when the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB reaches "3190" while the ending scenario (see FIG. 667 (B)) is set, the tilting device 310 is in the cause state for 3 seconds, and the frame button during that time. The operation validity period during which the operation of 22A is valid is set. In this way, by setting the operation valid period of the frame button 22A according to the progress of the operation scenario of the tilting device 310, the operation valid period can be easily set according to the timing when the tilting device 310 is positioned at the highest position. Can be set.

In this control example, the operation status of the tilting device 310 is managed based on the progress status of the operation scenario (although it is configured to be discriminated based on the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB). ), Not limited to this, when the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes a value that shifts to the next operation pointer, the detection means that can detect whether the operation content based on the current operation pointer is normally executed ( For example, a movable accessory position detection sensor) may be provided, and the detecting means may be configured to manage the operating status of the tilting device 310 based on the detection of the normal operation of the movable accessory.

With this configuration, for example, a state in which the period required for the tilting device 310 to move to the highest position (0.5 seconds corresponding to the operation pointer 4 in the ending scenario of this control example) has elapsed. When it is determined that the tilting device 310 has not completed the movement to the highest position, the update of the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB can be stopped and a retry period for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) can be set. can. Then, when the tilting device 310 has been moved to the highest position during the retry period, the update of the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB can be restarted, and the operation valid period for the frame button 22A can be set. ..

As a result, for example, while the tilting device 310 is performing an ascending operation (opening operation using an elastic member), the player applies a force to resist the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 (for example, on the tilting device 310). Even if the tilting device 310 cannot move to the highest climbing position within a specific period (within 0.5 seconds), the tilting device 310 will rise to the maximum within the subsequent predetermined period (1 second). When the player moves to the position, the operation valid period can be set according to the timing, and the player can perform an appropriate effect. In addition, if the tilting device 310 does not move to the highest position even after the above-mentioned predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed, another effect (press the frame button 22A) without setting the operation valid period. It is also possible to switch to a production that does not let you.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8201 that the value of the current tilting operation timer 223DB is not 3190 (Z8201: NO), the processing of Z8202 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z8203.

Next, in the processing of Z8203, it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223DE is set to ON (Z8203), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z8203: YES), the value of the tilt operation timer 223DB is set. Reset to "190" (Z8204), set the value of the SW valid time counter 223K to "0" (Z8205), and end this process.

That is, when the frame button 22A is pressed and the tilt operation flag 223DE is turned on during the operation valid period set in this operation effect (during the period when the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is larger than 0). , The value of the tilting operation counter 223DB is changed from the standby state of the ending scenario, that is, the state of the operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 667 (B)) to the value immediately shifting to the operation pointer 6, and the operation valid period. The value of the SW effective time counter 223K is changed to "0" in order to terminate. As a result, no matter when the player presses the frame button 22A during the operation valid period, the period (3 seconds) in which the tilting device 310 waits at the highest position can be skipped. In addition, even if the operation valid period ends by pressing the frame button 22A or the operation valid period ends due to the passage of time, the ending scenario can be executed to the end without any problem.

In this control example, when the frame button 22A is pressed during the operation valid period, the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is changed so as to shift the operation pointer of the ending scenario from "5" to "6". After pressing the frame button 22A, the tilting device 310 is configured to perform an operation for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position (origin position), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the frame button 22A is pressed. Therefore, when using a configuration in which the tilting device 310 moves to the initial position (origin position), the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB may be changed to "0". As a result, unnecessary operation processing can be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223DE is not set to ON in the processing of Z8203 (Z8203: NO), then the currently set operation scenario setting table (ending scenario table 222IB2) is supported. Read the operation content to be performed (Z8206), then determine whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is larger than 0 (Z8207), and if it is determined to be larger than 0 (Z8207: YES), then the frame button. It is determined whether 22A is pressed (Z8208).

If it is determined that the frame button 22A has been pressed in the processing of Z8208 (Z8208: YES), it means that the frame button 22A has been pressed during the operation valid period in which the ending scenario is set, so that a super lucky display is displayed. A display command indicating (see FIG. 663 (B)) is set (Z8209), the tilt operation flag 223DE is set to ON (Z8210), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is not larger than 0 (0) in the processing of Z8207 (Z8207: NO), or the frame button 22A is not pressed in the processing of Z8208. If it is determined (Z8208: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the process of the opening process 11 (Z8301) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 671. FIG. 671 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process 11 (Z8301). This opening process 11 (Z8301) is a process executed when the opening command of the jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 477), and in this control example, the third operation is performed during the opening period. In addition to the process of setting the opening command for display indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, whether or not to execute the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) during this jackpot game, and the probability change promotion effect. Is executed, a process for determining the effect mode is executed.

When the opening process 11 (Z8301) is executed, first, the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired (Z8311), and the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222IA is acquired based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223H and the current jackpot type. A more tilted motion scenario is selected (execution / non-execution and scenario type are selected) (Z8312). Then, it is determined whether or not the tilting operation scenario is selected in the processing of Z8312 (Z8313), and if it is determined that it is selected (Z8313: YES), then the value of the effect timing counter 223IA is acquired (Z8314) and acquired. Based on the value of the effect timing counter 223IA and the current jackpot type, the execution timing of the tilting operation (probability change promotion effect) is selected from the operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC (Z8315).

After finishing the processing of Z8315, next, information for showing the type of the tilting motion scenario selected in the processing of Z8312 and the execution timing of the tilting motion (probability change promotion effect) selected in the processing of Z8315 are shown. The information and the information are stored in the operation information storage area 223IB during the special prize (Z8316), the opening command for display is set (Z8317), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8313, if it is determined that the tilting operation scenario is not selected as a result of the processing of Z8312 (Z8313: NO), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the round process 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 672. FIG. 672 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process 11. This round process 11 is a process executed when a round command indicating that a new round of the jackpot game is started is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 477), and is executed in this control example. , In addition to the process of setting the display command corresponding to the number of rounds, the process of determining whether or not to execute the tilting operation (probability change promotion effect) is executed.

When the round process 11 (Z8302) is executed, first, the information stored in the operation information storage area 223IB during the special prize (information for indicating the type of the tilting operation scenario and information for indicating the execution timing) is displayed. Read (Z8411), determine whether the round game this time is a round for executing a tilting motion (probability change promotion effect) (Z8412), and if it is determined to be an execution timing (Z8412: YES), it is stored. A tilting motion scenario corresponding to the type of tilting motion scenario is set (Z8413), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds this time is set (Z8414), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8412, if it is determined that the current round game is not the execution timing of the tilting operation (probability change promotion effect) (Z8412: NO), the processing of Z8413 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z8414.

Next, with reference to FIG. 673, the contents of the ending process 11 (Z8303) will be described. FIG. 673 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 11 (Z8303). This ending process 11 (Z8303) is a process executed when the ending command of the jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 477), and in this control example, the third is executed during the ending period. In addition to the process of setting the ending command for display indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, the process of determining whether or not to execute the operation effect (holding continuous effect) during the ending period is executed. Will be done.

When the ending process 11 (Z8303) is executed, first, the winning information (winning information stored on hold) stored in the winning information storage area 223F is read (Z8511), and then in the read winning information. It is determined whether or not the winning information indicating the probability change jackpot is included (Z8512). Here, if it is determined that the winning information indicating the probability variation jackpot is included (Z8512: YES), then it is determined whether the tilting device 310 is located at the initial position (origin position) (Z8513). If it is determined that the position is located at the origin position (Z8513: YES), an ending scenario for moving the tilting device 310 is set (Z8514).

Then, "2" is set for the tilting operation status (Z8515), a display command corresponding to the current determination result is set (Z2952 process 8516), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8513, when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not located at the origin position (Z8513: NO), a display ending command indicating that there is a probable change jackpot in the hold is set (Z8517). , End this process. Further, even when it is determined in the processing of Z8512 that there is no winning information indicating a probable change jackpot in the winning information (Z8512: NO), this processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, in this control example, the content (effect mode) of the composite effect to be executed by combining the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the accessory effect (drive effect) is set in the execution timing of the compound effect. It is configured to be set based on the operating status of the movable accessory. Specifically, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the composite effect is configured to be executed only when the movable accessory is located at a predetermined position (initial position). With this configuration, even if the control instruction related to the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the control instruction related to the accessory effect (movable effect) are executed separately, the display effect and the accessory effect are different from each other as a composite effect. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is lost, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Further, at the execution timing of the compound effect, the movable accessory is not located at the initial position, that is, the movable accessory driven by the previously executed accessory effect has not returned to the initial position. When the execution timing of the effect arrives, the display effect showing the effect result equivalent to the effect result of the composite effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the game is continued without the player recognizing the effect result to be notified to the player even by using the compound effect.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned composite effect (last effect) during the jackpot game, the accessory effect for driving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed, for example. A role of notifying whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player or a normal state (time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probable change state. It is configured so that the object production (probability change promotion production) is executed. In addition, the tilting device 310 can be driven as a decorative effect to liven up the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be movable in various operation patterns (operation scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable accessory (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for a plurality of purposes during the jackpot game, one movable accessory can be used for a plurality of purposes. , The effect of production can be enhanced efficiently.

However, as described above, the more efficiently the effect is configured, the easier it is to set another character effect during the period in which the movable accessory is being driven (the execution period of the character effect is longer). It becomes easy to overlap), and there is a problem that the production that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, if the execution period of a plurality of character effects is fixed in advance so that the character effects using movable characters are not executed in duplicate, the character effects become monotonous. There was a problem that the effect was reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution periods of the character effects overlap, one of the character effects is switched to another effect (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). It is configured. As a result, even if the effect contents can be set so that the execution periods of the character effects can be overlapped, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect, and further, it is possible to execute various character effects. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this control example, the probability variation promotion effect is configured to be executed only once during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation promotion effect may be executed multiple times. .. In this case, for example, in the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize, a plurality of effect modes of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected, and the effect mode of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected. It is good to configure it so that it is different. As a result, a wider variety of probabilistic promotion effects can be executed at various timings, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the jackpot game at an early stage.

Further, in this control example, the start timing of any round game is set as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period set between the round games is set. When the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65A in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or during the jackpot game, the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22A. In some cases, or when a ball is inserted into the general entrance 63 during a big hit game, it may be configured so that it can be set as one of the start timings. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player execute the probabilistic promotion effect at a timing that is more difficult to predict, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, the start timing of any round game is set as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period set between the round games is set. When the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65A in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or during the jackpot game, the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22A. In some cases, or when a ball is inserted into the general entrance 63 during a big hit game, it may be configured so that it can be set as one of the start timings. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player execute the probabilistic promotion effect at a timing that is more difficult to predict, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the content of the effect (composite effect) to be executed by combining the liquid crystal effect and the accessory effect is set differently according to the position of the movable accessory, for example, the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position. If it is determined that the display is performed, a predetermined compound effect (for example, a compound effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is executed, and the movable accessory can be moved to the initial position within 1 second. When it is determined that the position (state) is correct, a predetermined composite effect (composite effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is executed with a delay of 1 second, and the movable accessory is within 1 second. If it is determined that the position (state) is such that the movable accessory can be moved to the initial position, various effects may be set so that the suggestive effect of only the liquid crystal effect is executed without moving the movable accessory. This makes it possible to perform various effects without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, as the accessory effect for moving the movable accessory, the first accessory effect executed with the predetermined first position as the initial position and the second position different from the first position as the end position, and the above-mentioned first accessory effect. If it is a pachinko machine that can at least execute the first position and the second character effect executed with the third position different from the second position as the initial position and the above-mentioned second position as the end position, the combined effect. It may be configured to determine whether to execute the first accessory effect or the second accessory effect based on the position of the movable accessory at the timing of setting the contents of.

Further, in this case, regardless of the fluctuation of the special figure, it is preferable to configure the movable accessory so as to be able to execute the fanning effect of bringing the movable accessory closer to the first position or the third position based on the operation of the frame button 22. This allows the player to select the position of the movable accessory when the composite effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the composite effect desired by the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In this control example, an example of setting the content of the suggestion effect for suggesting the winning jackpot type during the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery result of a special symbol is shown. The technical idea used in this control example may be applied to the effect for suggesting (variable effect) and the effect for suggesting the lottery result of a normal symbol (normal figure variable effect). Further, in this control example, the tilting device 310 arranged in the vicinity of the frame button 22A as a movable accessory is used as an example, but at least the predetermined first position (initial position) is different from the first position. Any movable accessory (movable member) configured to be movable between the second position (movable position) may be used, for example, a decorative movable accessory (movable member) arranged in the variable display unit 80. Alternatively, it may be a movable accessory (movable member) for decoration attached to the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in this control example, as a condition for operating the movable member (tilting device 310), a first operation condition that can be satisfied during the jackpot game and a second operation condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery result of the special symbol are set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a third operating condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time is reached, a fourth operating condition that is established when the player presses the frame button 22A, and a hold. A fifth operating condition or the like that is established based on the fact that the number of stored items is a predetermined number (for example, eight) may be set as a condition for operating the movable member (tilting device 310). By setting a plurality of operating conditions of the movable member (tilting device 310) in this way, the movable member can be moved at various timings, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to this control example, even if the opportunity to move the movable member (tilting device 310) independently of the effect display is increased for the purpose of enhancing the effect of the effect, the accessory using the movable member is used. It is possible to provide the player with a composite effect that combines the effect and the display effect using the third symbol display device 81 without discomfort.

Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the movable accessory can be moved by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22) during a specific period (for example, during a big hit game) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. An effect (fanning effect) may be provided so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means. In this case, since the position of the movable member becomes indefinite when the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed, a situation in which the movable member is not located at the initial position (origin position) at the start of the ending period is likely to occur. However, by using the technical idea of this control example, it is possible to execute a compound production (holding continuous production) during the ending period without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the promotion effect in which the operation means is notified whether or not the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed is a probabilistic jackpot. It is configured to determine whether or not the hold continuous effect (last effect) is executed, and when it is determined that the hold continuous effect (last effect) is executed, execute the hold continuous effect suggestion to that effect. You may. As a result, when the hold continuous suggestion effect is executed, even if the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, the hold using the movable member is held without operating the operating means (so that the movable member does not move). It is possible to facilitate continuous production. In this way, by executing the hold ream suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being intentionally moved in one effect (promotion effect), and to make it easier to move the movable member in another effect (hold ream effect). Is possible. Therefore, by giving the player the option of not moving the movable member, the effect to be executed can be made more diverse, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<22nd control example>
Next, the 22nd control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 674 to 684. In the 21st control example described above, when the effect (composite effect) to be executed by combining the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the accessory effect is executed, the movable member used for the accessory effect at the start timing of the composite effect (the movable member). When it is determined whether the tilting device 310) is located at the initial position, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310) is located at the initial position, it is configured to execute the composite effect and it is determined that the tilting device 310) is not located at the initial position. Was configured not to perform compound effects. As a result, when the combined effect is executed, the control means (voice lamp control device 113) that controls the effect has the control means (display control device 114) that controls the display effect and the drive means (driving means) that operates the movable accessory. Even if commands (commands) related to the combined effect are output independently to the drive motor) and (hereinafter referred to as each device), the effect executed by each device can be easily synchronized, and the effect of the effect. Was able to be enhanced.

However, in the technique used in the 21st control example described above, in order to output a command for simultaneously executing the composite effect to each device, for example, the movable member is moved to the initial position corresponding to the compound effect. The operation (preparation operation) for making the compound effect is executed after receiving the command (command) for executing the compound effect. That is, when the composite effect is executed using a plurality of devices (movable member, liquid crystal display, etc.), the preparatory operation for making the composite effect feasible is completed in each device (preparation). It is necessary to configure the period) to be included in the first half period of the compound production.

When such a technical idea is used, it is possible to execute a composite effect in which the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the character effect are synchronized, but it is necessary to provide a long preparation period and within a limited time. There is a problem that the effect period in which the actual compound effect (the effect executed after the preparation period has elapsed) can be set is shortened when the compound effect is executed. Further, there is a problem that the player is aware of the effect content of the compound effect executed by the movement status (preparation operation) of the movable accessory during the preparation period, which is the stage before the compound effect is performed.

In particular, as a composite effect, the first compound effect is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the first position, and the accessory effect is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the second position. If the pachinko machine has a second compound effect and is configured to have a different selection ratio between the first compound effect and the second compound effect according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it can be moved during the preparation period. Since the player can easily determine whether the character moves to the first position or the second position, it becomes easier for the player to determine even the lottery result of the special symbol, which is an effect (directing effect). There was a problem that the effect of the composite effect) was reduced.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, at a time point before the setting of the compound effect (a time point before the determination of whether or not the compound effect is executed is executed). , It is configured to execute the control to execute the preparatory operation for moving the movable accessory to the first position or the second position.

In this way, by configuring the preparation operation to be set separately from the setting of the compound effect, the compound effect (character effect) is performed when the preparation operation of the movable character is executed for the player. You can make me think that it will be executed later. In addition, since the preparatory movement is executed regardless of whether or not the compound effect (feature effect) is executed, the presence or absence of the compound effect and the lottery result of the special symbol are determined according to the movable status of the movable accessory during the preparation period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is discriminated.

Further, in the 21st control example described above, since the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the control for the display control device 114 and the movable member (tilting device 310), for example, a predetermined effect period (big hit). For a display effect in which the effect is continuously executed during the round period (variation period of the special symbol), a display command (for example, a display round) indicating the effect mode of the display effect to be executed within the effect period. The command and the variable pattern command for display) are output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period, and within the predetermined effect period (big hit round period, change period of special symbol). For a character effect in which the effect is executed only for a specific period (for example, a period of 5 to 10 seconds from the start of the effect period), for a movable member (tilting device 310) after 3 seconds have passed from the start of the effect period. Therefore, it is necessary to output a command to perform the preparation operation (for example, the preparation period is 2 seconds). In this case, a measuring means (timer or the like) for measuring the timing of outputting a command to the movable member is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side, but in order to enhance the effect of the effect, the effect period is set. In the case of configuring the accessory effect using the movable member at a plurality of timings, it is necessary to design the measuring means so that the measuring means can be measured for a plurality of periods, and the processing of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased. There was a problem of doing it.

On the other hand, in the 22nd control example, the accessory control device 229 for executing the motion control for the movable member is provided, and the movable member (for example, the tilting device 310) is provided from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229. ) Is configured to output a command to move it. Then, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period is a command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory operation (the accessory). It is configured to include information indicating the timing to output the command).

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 simply outputs a display command corresponding to a predetermined effect period to the display control device 114 at the start of the effect period, and prepares the movable member at an appropriate timing. The operation can be performed. Further, even if a plurality of compound effect execution timings can be set and the timing for executing the preparatory operation is different according to the set compound effect execution timing, the display command to be output to the display control device 114 is displayed. Since it is only necessary to variably set the timing for outputting the command for the accessory included in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a measuring means (timer) for measuring a plurality of periods in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 674, the electrical configuration in the 22nd control example will be described. FIG. 674 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example. As shown in FIG. 674, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example, the accessory control device 229 for executing the operation control of the movable accessory is added to the pachinko machine 10 of the 21st control example described above. The difference is that the operation command (command) can be output from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229 and the voice output device 226, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the block diagram of FIG. 674, for convenience of explanation, only the characteristic configuration of this control example is described among the electrical configurations of the entire pachinko machine 10, but the electrical configuration not described (for example, for example). The same configuration as the 21st control example described above is applied to the power supply device 115, the payout control device 111, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 674, in the 22nd control example, a command (information) for displaying an image based on the image data is output from the output port 239 of the display control device 114 to the third symbol display device 81. , It is configured to output a command for operating the movable accessory to the accessory control device 229. Here, as shown in FIG. 674, the accessory control device 229 is connected so as to be able to receive the data (various commands) output from the display control device 114, and the data (various types) output from the display control device 114. Input port Y304 for inputting commands), MPUY301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit, and output port Y306 for outputting operation data to various movable accessories (tilting device 310, other devices 228). And, are installed. The MPUY 301 includes a ROMY 302 that stores predetermined program information (operation scenarios for operating movable accessories (preparatory operation scenarios, etc.)) when executing various control programs executed by the MPUY 301, and various types. RAMY 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing the data and the like of the above, is built in.

The MPU Y301 of the accessory control device 229 is electrically connected to the input port Y305 and the output port Y306. When a command for designating movable data for moving a movable accessory is received from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229, the command is sent to the MPU Y301 via the input port Y305 and the bus line. Entered. Further, the operation pattern (operation scenario) specified by the display control device 114 is read from the ROMY 302, and the operation instruction corresponding to the read operation pattern is given to various movable accessories via the output port Y306. Is output.

Further, in this control example, the accessory control device 229 is configured to be able to determine the operating status of the tilting device 310. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether or not the driving means (motor) for driving the tilting device 310 is driven by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction from the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the tilting device 310 is operating, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not movable, operation data is output to the tilting device 310. can do.

In this control example, the operation data for moving the movable accessory from both the voice lamp control device 113 and the accessory control device 229 (in the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario). The corresponding electrical signal) is configured to be output to the movable accessory, but the operation is not limited to this, and only the operation scenario for the movable accessory is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the set operation is performed. The scenario is configured to be output to the accessory control device 229, and only the accessory control device 229 has operation data (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) for the movable accessory. It may be configured to output the corresponding electrical signal). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation data for the movable accessory from being output from a plurality of control devices, so that the operation control for the movable accessory can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

Further, in this control example, data (command) related to audio output can be output to the audio output device 226 from the output port 239 of the display control device 114. Here, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the display control device 114. Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, the voice output device 226 is configured to be able to receive data (command) related to voice output from the voice lamp control device 113 as in each control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 674, the audio output device 226 is equipped with the MPUM 301 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU M301 has a ROM M 302 that stores predetermined program information (operation scenario for operating a movable accessory (preparatory operation scenario, etc.)) when executing various control programs executed by the MPUM 301, and the relevant ROMM 302. It has a built-in RAMM 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing various control programs executed by the MPUM 301.

The MPUM 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port M305 and the amplifier unit M306. When a command for designating voice data is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 to the voice output device 226, the command is input to the MPUM 301 via the input port M305 and the bus line M304. Will be done. Further, the voice data designated by the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM M302 and output to the channel corresponding to the voice type of the amplifier unit M306. For example, the voice data corresponding to the BGM is output to the CN1, the voice data corresponding to the stop sound is output to the CN2, and the voice data corresponding to the warning sound is output to the CN3. Then, it is amplified by the amplifier unit M306 and input to the speaker unit 450. As a result, various sounds designated by the display control device 114 can be output from the speaker unit 450.

Here, the configuration of the ROM M302 provided in the MPUM 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROMM 302 of the MPUM 301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (not shown).

The audio file storage area is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, and the like are stored. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the display control device 114, the audio file corresponding to the effect is read from the audio file storage area and output to the corresponding channel of the amplifier unit M306.

Specifically, in the voice file storage area (not shown), music data related to music (BGM), stop sound data related to stop sound, and voice generated during preparation drive for accessory operation are simulated. Pseudo-voice data related to the reproduced pseudo-sound is stored. In this control example, it is possible to output the above-mentioned pseudo voice during the preparation period in which the movable accessory can execute the preparation drive.

With this configuration, the same pseudo voice is output regardless of whether the preparation drive is actually executed or the preparation drive is not executed during the preparation period. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed. Specifically, in this control example, as in the 21st control example described above, it is configured to execute the bonus effect of moving the tilting device 310 as a movable bonus, for example, the ending period of the jackpot game. In the case of the accessory effect executed during the operation, the operation contents (see FIG. 667 (B)) of the operation pointers “1” and “2” defined in the ending scenario table 222IB2 correspond to the preparatory drive.

Here, the operation contents (see FIG. 667 (B)) of the operation pointers “1” and “2” defined in the ending scenario table 222IB2 are operations for moving the mechanism (cam, etc.) inside the tilting device 310. Therefore, the player cannot visually recognize the operation, but since the drive motor is driven during the preparatory drive, the drive sound and the sound generated when the cam is disengaged reach the player. There is a possibility that it will end up.

Therefore, as in this control example, by outputting the sound generated at the time of the preparatory drive in a pseudo manner according to the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable accessory can be executed, whether or not the preparatory drive is executed for the player is determined. It can be difficult to distinguish. As a result, in the case of executing the character effect that requires the preparatory drive, it is possible to suppress the determination of the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed for the player at the stage where the preparatory drive is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect of the operation effect is reduced.

In this control example, by outputting the sound generated when the preparatory drive is executed, it seems that the preparatory drive is executed even when the preparatory drive is not actually executed. By making it possible, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, but it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the player cannot easily determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, for example, actually. The sound generated when the preparation drive is performed may be configured to output a sound (for example, a decorative sound effect) that is difficult for the player to identify. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the preparatory drive is being executed, and it is possible to obtain the same effect.

Further, in this control example, as described above, since it is difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is executed, it is difficult to understand whether or not the preparatory drive is executed. Therefore, a pseudo voice is used. However, in addition to this, for example, when using a configuration in which it is possible to visually indicate that the preparatory drive is being executed, the preparatory drive is executed in addition to the pseudo audio output. It is necessary to take measures so that it cannot be visually determined. In this case, for example, when the preparation period during which the preparation drive can be executed is set, the covering movable member that covers the member that is movable by the preparation drive so as to be difficult for the player to see is provided regardless of whether or not the preparation drive is executed. It is good to provide it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually and audibly discriminating that the preparation drive is executed.

<About the flow of production during the jackpot game in the 22nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 675 to 677, the flow of the effect during the jackpot game executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the 21st control example described above, the display control device 114 is configured to output an effect execution command to the accessory control device 229 and the voice output device 226. The control content for the effect executed during the final round (16 rounds) and the control content for the effect executed during the ending period are different, and other than that, they are the same. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 675, a flow in the case of executing a hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 675 is a timing chart schematically showing a flow in the case of executing a hold continuous effect (last effect) which is a compound effect during the ending period of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 675, when the jackpot game (big hit game period) is started, the specific period (opening period, round game period, interval period, ending period) forming the jackpot game period is started at the timing. A display command indicating a display mode of the effect content (liquid crystal display) within a specific period is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 creates image data based on the received display command, and displays the liquid crystal display (opening display, round) on the third symbol display device 81. Display, interval display,) is executed. Since the detailed control content for the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute various displays is the same as each control example described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As a display command (display final round command) corresponding to the final round (16 rounds), the voice lamp control device 113 assigns a specific timing (for example, 6 seconds after the start of the round game) to the display command. Set including the specified information for specifying. Upon receiving the final round command for display, the display control device 114 executes the liquid crystal display during the final round, and at a specific timing specified by the designated information included in the final round command for display, the accessory control device 229. , And a command (operation command) is output to the voice output device 226.

Upon receiving the operation command (command for the accessory) output from the display control device 114, the accessory control device 229 executes a preparatory drive for the movable accessory (tilting device 310). Further, the voice output device 226 executes pseudo-voice output when it receives an operation command (voice command) output from the display control device 114. That is, based on the designated information included in the final round command for display, the preparation drive (preparation period 2 seconds) for the composite effect (last effect) that can be executed during the ending period is executed.

Here, the specific timing specified by the designated information included in the final round command for display is set to be 2 seconds before the timing at which the final round can be completed. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is the same as the pachinko machine 10 used in each of the above-mentioned control examples, and the first condition that 10 balls win a prize in the specific winning opening 65A in one round game, or , It is configured to end when any of the second conditions in which 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round game is satisfied. Therefore, in this control example, the timing obtained by subtracting 2 seconds from the timing at which the first condition can be satisfied (the timing at which 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round game) (8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round game). Timing) is set as the timing specified by the specified information.

During this preparation period, the accessory control device 229 executes the preparation drive for the tilting device 310, and the voice output device 226 outputs pseudo voice to the speaker 450 during the preparation period. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, the round display of the final round is continuously executed (standby state) so that the player is not determined that the current preparation period is in progress. After that, when the round game of the final round ends and the ending period starts, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the combined effect (last effect) during the ending period, and determines whether or not to execute the compound effect (last effect). When it is determined that the (holding continuous effect) is to be executed, a display ending command including the execution of the last effect is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command including the execution of the last effect, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute the liquid crystal display corresponding to the last effect, and causes the accessory control device 229 to execute the liquid crystal display. Outputs a command for a character to execute an operation effect corresponding to the last effect. Then, when the bonus control device 229 receives a command for the bonus to execute the operation effect corresponding to the last effect, the tilt device 310 whose preparatory drive has been completed is provided with the bonus effect corresponding to the last effect. It outputs operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) for execution.

As described above, in this control example, the preparatory drive for the character effect (effect drive) of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) executed as the composite effect executed during the ending period is executed during the final round of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. As a result, at the start of the ending period, the tilting device 310 is in a state where the preparatory drive is completed, that is, a state in which the operation of the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222IB2 is completed (see FIG. 667 (B)). Therefore, the operation effect period can be set longer during the ending period in which the predetermined period is set, as compared with the case where the preparation drive is executed from the start of the ending period.

Further, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparing and driving the movable accessory, and the display control device 114 transfers the accessory to the accessory control device 229. Since the command is configured to be output, the voice lamp control device 113 measures the timing at which the movable accessory is made to execute the preparatory drive, and when the execution timing is reached, the movable accessory is preliminarily driven. There is no need to output a command for the accessory to execute. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, the display control device 114 is configured to output a voice command to the voice output device 226 at the same time as outputting the character command to the character control device 229, corresponding to the execution period of the preparation drive of the movable character. Since the speaker 450 is configured to output the pseudo voice, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the voice generated during the preparation drive of the movable accessory.

In this control example, as in the 21st control example described above, it is configured to determine at the start of the ending period whether or not to execute the composite effect (last effect) during the ending period. Therefore, at the start of the final round (16 rounds), which is the timing before the start of the ending period, it is not determined whether or not the composite effect (last effect) is executed. By designating the timing for executing the preparatory drive for the movable accessory in such a state, that is, in a state where it has not been determined whether or not the compound effect (last effect) is executed during the ending period. The preparation drive is executed regardless of whether the compound effect (last effect) is executed or not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the composite effect (last effect) is executed during the ending period, depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive.

Next, with reference to FIG. 676, the flow when the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, is not executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 676 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, is not executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 676 is the same as FIG. 675 described above, except that the composite effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period. The detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 676, when it is determined that the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not executed as a result of the determination executed by the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of the ending period, the voice lamp control is performed. A display ending command that does not include the last effect is output from the device 113 to the display control device 114. In this case, for example, as in the 21st control example described above, if the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not satisfied (there is no winning information indicating the probability change jackpot in the hold symbol), the normal ending is performed. When the display is executed and the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is satisfied, but the compound effect cannot be executed due to the operation status of the movable accessory, the same effect result as the held continuous effect is displayed. It is good to configure it to execute the effect display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 677, the flow when the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not executed in the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 677 is a timing chart schematically showing a flow when the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not executed in the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds) of the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 677 differs from FIG. 676 in that the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not executed during the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds). Everything else is the same. The detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 677, in the final round (16 rounds), an operation effect for moving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed (round effect drive is executed), and then the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position. When the accessory control device 229 receives the accessory command output from the display control device 114 during the moving operation (return operation), the preparatory drive based on the received accessory command is performed by the movable accessory (tilting device 310). ) Is determined to be in an unexecutable state, and the preparatory drive is not executed. Even in this case, the audio output device 226 outputs pseudo audio.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the preparation drive is not executed during the preparation period. Further, since the preparatory drive was not executed during the final round (16 rounds), the compound effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period. In this case as well, as in the pattern described with reference to FIG. 676, as a result of the determination executed by the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of the ending period, the last effect (holding continuous effect). If it is determined that the above is not executed, a display ending command that does not include the last effect is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In this case, for example, as in the 21st control example described above, if the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not satisfied (there is no winning information indicating the probability change jackpot in the hold symbol), the normal ending is performed. When the display is executed and the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is satisfied, but the compound effect cannot be executed due to the operation status of the movable accessory, the same effect result as the held continuous effect is displayed. It is good to configure it to execute the effect display.

As described above, in this control example, even if it is not determined whether or not the specific operation effect is executed, the preparatory drive for the specific operation effect that can be executed during the specific effect period (ending period) is not determined. It is configured to run. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the specific operation effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

Further, the preparation drive is executed as an obstruction means for setting a preparation period for executing the preparation drive in advance and making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed during the preparation period. It has a pseudo-voice output means for pseudo-outputting the sound generated in the case. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the specific operation effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

Further, in this control example, the preparatory drive is not executed when a predetermined non-executable condition is satisfied during the preparatory period, and even if the preparatory drive is not executed during the preparatory period, it is simulated. It is configured to output pseudo-voice by voice output means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the specific operation effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

<Control processing in the voice lamp control device of the 22nd control example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 678. The 22nd control example differs from the 21st control example in that the round processing 12 (see Z8352 in FIG. 678) is executed instead of the round processing 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 672). The other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents will be omitted.

FIG. 678 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process 12 (Z8352). This round process 12 (Z8352) is a process of determining whether the newly executed round is the final round (16 rounds) with respect to the round process 11 (see Z8302 of FIG. 672) of the 21st control example described above. The difference is that a process of setting a display command dedicated to the final round (16 rounds) is added when it is determined to be the final round (16 rounds).

Specifically, when the round process 12 (Z8352) is executed, the same Z8411 to Z8413 as the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 672) of the 21st control example described above are executed, and then newly executed. It is determined whether the round is the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451). In the processing of Z8451, when it is determined that it is the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451: YES), then the final round command for display is set (Z8452), and the round processing 11 of the 21st control example described above (FIG. FIG. The same processing of Z8414 as (see Z8302 of 672) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8451 that it is not the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451: NO), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, the processing of Z8452 includes information for indicating the round display corresponding to the final round (16 rounds) and information for indicating the timing for executing the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310). The final round command for display is set. In this way, by including the information for indicating the timing of executing the preparatory drive in the final round command for display set at the start timing of the new round, the voice lamp control device 113 has a movable accessory (tilting device). It is not necessary to provide a measuring means (timer) for measuring the timing of executing the preparatory drive of 310).

When the display control device 114 receives the final round command for display, the display data table for the final round corresponding to the received command is set, and the time data corresponding to the effect time of the display data table is stored in the time counting counter 233H. Since the effect display corresponding to the value of the time counting counter 233H that is set and updated is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the timing for executing the preparation drive for the final round command for display is executed. By including the information for indicating the above, it is possible to determine the timing at which the preparation drive is executed by diverting the time measurement information of the time measurement counter 233H used for displaying the image on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a new measuring means (timer) for determining the timing of executing the preparation drive, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the 22nd control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 679 and 680. In the 22nd control example, the command determination process 12 is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 448) for the control process executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 21st control example described above. (See Z3392 in FIG. 679) is different in that it is performed.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) will be described with reference to FIG. 679. FIG. 679 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 12 (see Z3392). When the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, the same processes from Z3401 to Z3419 as in the command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 448) are executed, and it is determined that there is no error command in the Z3418 process. If so (Z3418: NO), then it is determined if there is a final round command for display (Z3491).

If it is determined that there is a final round command for display in the processing of Z3491 (Z3491: YES), the final round processing is executed (Z3492), the process proceeds to the processing of Z3401, and it is determined that there is no final round command for display. If this is the case (Z3491: NO), the process proceeds to the same Z3420 process as the command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 448) described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 680, the contents of the final round process (Z3492) executed in the command determination process 12 (see Z3392 in FIG. 679) will be described. In this final round process (Z3492), a process for setting a display data table based on the received final round command for display and a process for outputting a command to the accessory control device 229 and the voice output device 226. And are executed.

When the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, first, the display data table for the final round corresponding to the received final round command is set (Z3495), and then the standby display timing set in the display data table is set. Set the process to output the accessory command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory drive and the audio command for causing the audio output device 226 to output pseudo-audio. (Z3496), this process is terminated.

As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233H becomes a value for indicating the standby display timing (start timing of the preparation period), the command for the accessory and the command for the voice can be output in synchronization.

<Control processing in the audio output device of the 22nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 681 and 682, various control processes executed by the MPUM 301 of the audio output device 226 in the 22nd control example will be described. In the 22nd control example, the voice command set by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is the voice output device 226 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 or the command output process of the display control device 114. The voice output device 226 is configured to output voice data corresponding to the received voice command.

In this way, various display commands and voices output to the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113 that can receive commands for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110. By setting various voice commands to be output to the output device 226, a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (effect display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). (Visual display mode) and directed sound mode (auditory voice mode) output from the speaker 450 via the voice output device 226) can be centrally set. Therefore, when a plurality of effect modes are executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player Anything may be used as long as it performs an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory effect mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It may be configured to suggest and notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. As described above, by appropriately combining a plurality of types of effect modes to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes to be executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, in this control example, the display control device 114 is also configured to set a voice command (command for outputting a pseudo voice) to be output to the voice output device 226. With this configuration, the display control device 114 can output the sound at the timing when the display data is actually created. Therefore, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the display contents are displayed. It is possible to perform an effect that is more synchronized with the sound output from the speaker 450.

In addition, for example, when the effect display is not properly executed due to an abnormality in the control process of the display control device 114, the sound command is not output to the sound output device 226, so that the effect display is not executed. Regardless, it is possible to suppress that only the sound is output or that the effect display and the sound execution timing are different from each other.

First, with reference to FIG. 681 (A), the main process executed by the MPUM 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 681 (A) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (Z8501). The details of this command determination process (Z8501) will be described later with reference to FIG. 682, but when various voice commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 are received, they are received. The process for outputting the voice corresponding to the voice command is executed. After the processing of Z8501, other processing is executed (Z8502). In the processing of the Z8502, processing for executing playback of audio data and updating of the value of the pointer for music is executed.

When the processing of the Z8502 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAMM 303 (Z8503). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z8503 process (Z8503: YES), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are turned on (Z8505), and the power-off process is executed (Z8506). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z8507), and then the process is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the Z8503 process (Z8503: NO), it is determined whether or not the RAMM 303 is destroyed (Z8504) based on the keyword stored in the RAM M 303, and the RAM M 303 is destroyed. If not (Z8504: NO), the process returns to Z8501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAMM 303 is destroyed (Z8504: YES), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPUM 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 681 (B). FIG. 681 (B) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 681 (B)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAMM 303 (Z8601), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing is performed according to the read commands.

Next, with reference to FIG. 682, a command determination process (Z8501), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 681 (A)) executed by the MPUM 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 682 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z8501). In this command determination process (Z8501), control according to the type of various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is executed.

In the command determination process (Z8501), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z8701), and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (Z8701: NO), a command is used. The judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z8701: YES), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (Z8702), and then the unprocessed stored in the command buffer area is set. For all the commands of, the type of the command is analyzed (Z8703).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice command output from the display control device 114, that is, a voice command for outputting a pseudo voice (Z8704), and the pseudo voice is determined. When it is determined that there is a voice command for outputting (Z8704: YES), a voice file (pseudo voice data) indicating the pseudo voice notified by the command is read from the voice file storage area of the ROM M302. Next, set the value of the pointer for music to the value corresponding to the timing at which the pseudo-voice is played, set the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the pseudo-voice data, and set the playback of the pseudo-voice data. (Z8706), the process proceeds to Z8707.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no voice command output from the display control device 114 in the processing of Z8704 (Z8704: NO), or when the above-mentioned processing of Z8706 is executed, then another voice command is used. It is determined whether or not there is a command, that is, a voice command received from the voice lamp control device 113 (Z8707).

In the processing of Z8707, for example, a music BGM corresponding to a special symbol variation effect or a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game, a stop sound sound corresponding to the stop display timing of the special symbol (third symbol), and a frame button 22A. It is determined whether the voice lamp control device 113 has output a voice for pressing sound corresponding to the pressing timing of the button, a voice for error corresponding to error notification, or the like. Here, if it is determined that there are various voice commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 (Z8707: YES), the voice file (music data) corresponding to the voice (music) indicated by the received various voice commands. The group) is read from the voice file storage area, and the read voice file (data group for music) is stored in a predetermined storage area. Then, the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the voice data indicated by the received various voice commands is set in a predetermined time measuring means (timer), the playback of various voice data is set (Z8708), and the process of Z8701 is performed. Transition.

If it is determined that there is no other voice data in the processing of Z8707 (Z8707: NO), other command processing is executed (Z8709), the process shifts to Z8701, and the above-mentioned control is repeatedly executed.

<Regarding the control process of the accessory control device 229 in the 22nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 683 and 684, the control processing contents of the accessory control device 229 in the 22nd control example will be described. In the 22nd control example, the accessory command set by the display control device 114 is output to the accessory control device 229 by the command output process of the display control device 114, and the accessory control device 229 receives the accessory. It is configured to output operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) corresponding to the command to the corresponding movable accessory.

In this way, the display control device 114 receives the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, and the display control thereof. By setting various command for the accessory that the device 114 outputs to the accessory control device 229, a plurality of effect display modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). It is possible to operate the movable accessory in synchronization with the effect display mode (visual display mode) to be performed. Therefore, as an effect executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, various devices (third symbol). When a composite effect of a display device 81, a movable accessory, and a speaker 450) is executed, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode set by each of the various devices, and the effect can be achieved. The effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player Anything may be used as long as it performs an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory effect mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It may be configured to suggest and notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. As described above, by appropriately combining a plurality of types of effect modes to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes to be executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

First, with reference to FIG. 683 (A), the main process executed by the MPUY 301 of the accessory control device 229 will be described. FIG. 683 (A) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the accessory control device 229 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the display control device 114 is executed (Z9001). The details of this command determination process (Z9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 684, but when various command for the accessory output from the display control device 114 is received, it corresponds to the received command for the accessory. The process for outputting the made operation data is executed. After the processing of Z9001, other processing for executing the reproduction of the operation data and the update of the value of the operation timer for updating the operation scenario is executed (Z9002).

When the processing of the Z9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAMY 303 (Z9003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z9003 process (Z9003: YES), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (Z9005), and the power-off process is executed (Z9006). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z9007), and then the process is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the Z9003 process (Z9003: NO), it is determined whether the RAMY 303 is destroyed or not based on the keyword stored in the RAMY 303 (Z9004), and the RAMY 303 is destroyed. If not (Z9004: NO), the process returns to Z9001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAMY 303 is destroyed (Z9004: YES), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPUY 301 of the accessory control device 229 will be described with reference to FIG. 683 (B). FIG. 683 (B) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 683 (B)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the display control device 114.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAMY 303 (Z9101), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing is performed according to the read commands.

Next, the command determination process (Z9001), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 683 (A)) executed by the MPUY 301 of the accessory control device 229, will be described with reference to FIG. 684. FIG. 684 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z9001). In this command determination process (Z9001), control according to the type of various commands received from the display control device 114 is executed.

In the command determination process (Z9001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z9201), and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (Z9201: NO), the command is commanded. The judgment process is finished and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z9201: YES), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (Z9202), and then the unprocessed stored in the command buffer area is set. For all the commands of, the type of the command is analyzed (Z9203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory command among the unprocessed commands (S9204), and if it is determined that there is an accessory command (Z9204: YES), then this time. It is determined whether or not the movable accessory to be operated by the received accessory command is in operation (Z9205). Here, in the processing of Z9205, first, it is determined which movable accessory command is the command indicating the operation scenario for which the accessory command received this time, and for example, the operation scenario for moving the tilting device 310. When the command indicates, the displacement of the amount of current applied to the drive motor that moves the tilting device 310 is determined. When this amount of current is sufficient to drive the drive motor, it is determined that the tilting device 310 is in operation because the drive motor is being driven.

In this way, by configuring so as to directly grasp the drive status of the drive motor, even when the configuration in which operation data is output from a plurality of control devices is used, the movable status of the movable accessory can be reliably grasped. Can be grasped.

If it is determined in the processing of Z9205 that the target movable accessory is in operation (Z9205: YES), the operation based on the command for the accessory received this time cannot be executed, so that the operation is performed. Without outputting the data, the command for the accessory received this time is discarded (Z9206), and the process proceeds to Z9201. On the other hand, when it is determined that the target movable accessory is not in operation (Z9205: NO), the operation data (ending scenario table 222IB2) for causing the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to execute the preparatory operation. (Operation data corresponding to the operation pointers "1" and "2" (see FIG. 667 (B))) are output (Z9207), and the process proceeds to Z9201.

Further, in the processing of Z9204, if it is determined that there is no command for the accessory (Z9204: NO), other command processing is executed (Z9207), and the process proceeds to the processing of Z9201.

As described above, in the 22nd control example, the accessory control device 229 for executing the motion control for the movable member is provided, and the movable member (for example, tilting) is provided from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229. It is configured to output a command for moving the device 310). Then, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period is a command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory operation (the accessory). It is configured to include information indicating the timing to output the command).

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 simply outputs a display command corresponding to a predetermined effect period to the display control device 114 at the start of the effect period, and prepares the movable member at an appropriate timing. The operation can be performed. Further, even if a plurality of compound effect execution timings can be set and the timing for executing the preparatory operation is different according to the set compound effect execution timing, the display command to be output to the display control device 114 is displayed. Since it is only necessary to variably set the timing for outputting the command for the accessory included in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a measuring means (timer) for measuring a plurality of periods in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, the accessory control device 229 is configured to be able to determine the operating status of the tilting device 310. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether or not the driving means (motor) for driving the tilting device 310 is driven by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction from the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the tilting device 310 is operating, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not movable, operation data is output to the tilting device 310. can do.

In this control example, the operation data for moving the movable accessory from both the voice lamp control device 113 and the accessory control device 229 (in the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario). The corresponding electrical signal) is configured to be output to the movable accessory, but the operation is not limited to this, and only the operation scenario for the movable accessory is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the set operation is performed. The scenario is configured to be output to the accessory control device 229, and only the accessory control device 229 has operation data (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) for the movable accessory. It may be configured to output the corresponding electrical signal). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation data for the movable accessory from being output from a plurality of control devices, so that the operation control for the movable accessory can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

In addition, as in this control example, whether or not the preparatory drive is executed for the player by outputting a voice generated during the preparatory drive in a pseudo manner according to the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable accessory can be executed. Can be made difficult to distinguish. As a result, in the case of executing the character effect that requires the preparatory drive, it is possible to suppress the determination of the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed for the player at the stage where the preparatory drive is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect of the operation effect is reduced.

In this control example, by outputting the sound generated when the preparatory drive is executed, it seems that the preparatory drive is executed even when the preparatory drive is not actually executed. By making it possible, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, but it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the player cannot easily determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, for example, actually. The sound generated when the preparation drive is performed may be configured to output a sound (for example, a decorative sound effect) that is difficult for the player to identify. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the preparatory drive is being executed, and it is possible to obtain the same effect.

Further, in this control example, as described above, since it is difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is executed, it is difficult to understand whether or not the preparatory drive is executed. Therefore, a pseudo voice is used. However, in addition to this, for example, when using a configuration in which it is possible to visually indicate that the preparatory drive is being executed, the preparatory drive is executed in addition to the pseudo audio output. It is necessary to take measures so that it cannot be visually determined. In this case, for example, when the preparation period during which the preparation drive can be executed is set, the covering movable member that covers the member that is movable by the preparation drive so as to be difficult for the player to see is provided regardless of whether or not the preparation drive is executed. It is good to provide it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually and audibly discriminating that the preparatory drive is executed.

As described above, in this control example, the preparatory drive for the character effect (effect drive) of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) executed as the composite effect executed during the ending period is executed during the final round of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. As a result, at the start of the ending period, the tilting device 310 is in a state where the preparatory drive is completed, that is, a state in which the operation of the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222IB2 is completed (see FIG. 667 (B)). Therefore, the operation effect period can be set longer during the ending period in which the predetermined period is set, as compared with the case where the preparation drive is executed from the start of the ending period.

Further, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparing and driving the movable accessory, and the display control device 114 transfers the accessory to the accessory control device 229. Since the command is configured to be output, the voice lamp control device 113 measures the timing at which the movable accessory is made to execute the preparatory drive, and when the execution timing is reached, the movable accessory is preliminarily driven. There is no need to output a command for the accessory to execute. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, the display control device 114 is configured to output a voice command to the voice output device 226 at the same time as outputting the character command to the character control device 229, corresponding to the execution period of the preparation drive of the movable character. Since the speaker 450 is configured to output the pseudo voice, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the voice generated during the preparation drive of the movable accessory.

In this control example, a composite effect executed during the jackpot game is taken as an example, but the timing at which the composite effect is executed is not limited to the jackpot game, and for example, to show the lottery result of a special symbol. The special map may be changing. In this case, when the technical idea of setting the character effect and the preparatory operation differently is used as the variation effect executed during the special figure variation, for example, the winning information stored on hold is preliminarily determined. Based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means, for example, when it is determined that the compound effect is to be executed in the special figure variation executed after two fluctuations, or the composite effect is not executed in the special figure variation executed in the two fluctuation degrees. In a part of the case where it is determined that the preparatory movement is executed, it is preferable to set the preparatory movement so that the preparatory movement is executed before the special figure fluctuation after the two fluctuations is executed.

Further, when a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the preparatory operation is provided for the operation means (frame button 22) when a specific operation is executed, and it is determined by the determination means to execute the preparatory operation. It may be configured to perform a preparatory operation. In this case, it is preferable to configure the operation effect so that the operation effect can be executed only when the movable accessory is located at the initial position of the operation effect at the timing of setting the operation effect. As a result, the probability that the composite effect is executed can be changed depending on whether or not the player operates the operating means, so that the player can operate the operating means more positively. Further, the operation timing to the operation means in which the above-mentioned determination means is used is, for example, an operation means as a suggestion effect suggesting a lottery result of the previous special figure change executed before the special figure change in which the operation effect is executed. As a result of operating the operation means, when the effect suggesting that the lottery result of the previous special figure fluctuation is out of order is executed, the determination means decides to execute the preparatory operation. Good to configure.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player operate the operating means for performing the preparatory operation without discomfort. Further, since it is possible to execute the preparatory operation of the movable accessory while the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the change in the previous special figure is being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the movable accessory It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the object is moving.

<23rd control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 685 to 696. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example (and the 18th control example) described above, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special figure change, the pachinko machine is reproduced according to the special figure change when the power supply is cut off. The configuration is such that the playback position of the BGM is backed up, and then, when the power is turned on again and the special figure fluctuation is restarted, the playback of the BGM is started from the backed up playback position. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the special figure fluctuation that was being executed before the power was turned off was restarted as it was after the power was turned on again. Was there.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd control example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special figure change and then the power is turned on again to restart the special figure change, the initial display control device 114 After the setting is completed (that is, after the normal display effect can be executed on the third symbol display device 81), the variation display effect corresponding to the special figure variation interrupted by the power failure is started in a pseudo manner. It was configured to be. This pseudo variation display effect is also executed when the special figure variation restarted based on the power being turned on again ends before the completion of the initial setting. That is, during the predetermined period from the end of the initial setting, the first is not synchronized with the fluctuation start timing or stop timing of the actual special symbol fluctuation (variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37). 3 The configuration is such that the variable display effect that is pseudo-executed in the symbol display device 81 is executed. With this configuration, by confirming the pseudo variation display executed in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed, the result of the variation display executed when the power is cut off can be played. It can be easily understood by a person. Further, in accordance with this, in the 23rd control example, the playback start position of the BGM at the time of turning on the power is set so that the last part of the melody of the special figure fluctuation BGM ends when the initial setting is completed. did. With this configuration, it is possible to perform reproduction from the first part of the special figure fluctuation BGM at the timing of starting the pseudo fluctuation. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be made to appear as if it is a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display that was executed before the power failure occurred is notified to the player without causing a sense of discomfort. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example described above, when the background change operation (pressing operation for the frame button 22A) is executed during the execution of the special figure change, the “silhouette display” is displayed at a predetermined ratio. It was configured to be selectable. This silhouette display is basically configured so that it is easier to set when the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation than when it is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, so the degree of expectation of a jackpot depends on the presence or absence of the silhouette display. It has realized a novel game property that the player who wants to predict can be made to positively change the background mode while the special figure change is being executed. In other words, since it is configured so that the player can positively change the background mode, the effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the background mode) executed during the special figure change is also frequently changed. It was possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd control example is common to the 19th control example up to the point that the silhouette display can be set by executing the background change operation. Is different from the 19th control example. More specifically, in the 23rd control example, silhouettes of a plurality of shapes (display modes) are provided, and the silhouettes are displayed according to the shape (display mode) of the silhouettes displayed during the execution of the variable display effect. It is configured to be able to suggest (notify) the type of advance notice effect (type of reach effect) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display. With this configuration, the type of the advance notice effect can be known in advance before the advance notice effect is started, so that the player can positively execute the background change operation. Also, when the silhouette display is set, it is confirmed that it will develop into a reach production, so for players who want to know at an early stage whether or not a reach production (a production with high expectations for big hits) will be executed. On the other hand, the background change operation can be executed more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. In the 23rd control example, the effect using the silhouette display is referred to as "silhouette notice effect".

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 19 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 19th control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 685, in the 23rd control example, the transition of the display mode in the BGM and the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation. explain. FIG. 685 (A) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode when the fluctuation time of the special figure variation restarted after the power is turned on elapses after the initial setting period of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. 685 (A), in the 23rd control example, the end timing of the C melody and the initial stage of the display control device 114 among the special figure variation BGM composed of the A melody, the B melody, and the C melody. The reproduction start position of the special figure variation BGM is set so as to match the end timing of the setting. FIG. 685 illustrates a case where the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 and the end timing of the C melody of the special figure variation BGM are matched by starting the special figure variation BGM from the middle of the B melody. ing. By setting the playback start position of the BGM so that the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the C melody of the BGM match, after that, the special figure fluctuation BGM is simply loop-played until the end of the fluctuation as in the normal time. Then, at the return timing of the display control device 114, the BGM can be started from the beginning of the special figure variation BGM. That is, the timing at which the initial setting is completed and the variation display of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81 can be matched with the timing at which the BGM is reproduced from the beginning of the special symbol variation BGM. Therefore, the BGM in the special figure variation effect executed in the remaining variation time at the end of the initial setting can be reproduced in a natural voice mode. Therefore, a more suitable voice mode can be realized. Further, since it is not necessary to set the reproduction from the head position of the BGM at the end of the initial setting, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the initial setting of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

The end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 mainly changes according to the progress of the special figure change. The display control device 114 executes control to transfer images used for various effects to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 while performing the initial setting. Here, if the special figure change is not executed, only the transfer of the resident image needs to be executed, and the initial setting time is relatively short. However, if the special figure change is executed, the initial setting is completed. Sometimes, it is necessary to prepare image data used for variable display effect. Therefore, the more image data used for the special map fluctuation, the longer the period required for the initial setting. In the 23rd control example, the display mode of the special figure variation is before the reach development where the image data used is relatively small, or after the normal reach development where the image data used is relatively large, or the supermarket using the most image data. The time required for initial setting varies depending on whether the reach has been developed. Specifically, before the reach development, the initial setting is completed in 1 second, but after the development to the normal reach, it takes 2 seconds for the initial setting, and after the super reach development, the initial setting is completed. It takes 4 seconds to complete. Therefore, in the 23rd control example, the development status of the fluctuation display at the time of turning on the power is discriminated from the remaining fluctuation time and the fluctuation type, the period required for the initial setting is predicted, and the predicted initial setting period is used. The configuration is such that the start timing of the special figure fluctuation BGM is set. As a result, the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the special figure variation BGM can be surely matched.

FIG. 685 (B) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode when the special figure fluctuation interrupted when the power is turned off and restarted after the power is turned on is completed before the initial setting is completed. FIG. 685 (B) illustrates a case where the special figure change is executed in a situation where at least one holding ball is present when the power is cut off. As shown in FIG. 685 (B), when the power is turned on again and the special figure fluctuation is restarted, the end timing of the initial setting is predicted, and the BGM ends according to the predicted end timing. Playback start position is set. That is, similarly to FIG. 685 (A), the reproduction is started from the middle of the B melody, so that the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the C melody coincide with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 685 (B), when the special figure change ends during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114, the special figure based on the reserved ball (held ball 1) held at the time of power failure. Figure variation (variation display of the first symbol in the first display device 37) is started. FIG. 685 (B) illustrates a case where the fluctuation stop timing of the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball 1 (maintenance 1) is later than the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. 685 (B), the variation display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the hold ball 1 at the time of power failure continues across the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. do. On the other hand, as a display mode of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 685 (B), the screen during the initial setting (image at power-on) continues to be displayed until the initial setting is completed. Based on the completion of the initial setting (it is possible to display a normal image), first, a pseudo deviation display for 1 second is executed. This is a variation for simulating the result of the variation display interrupted when the power is cut off (the result was shown in the first symbol display device 37 during the initial setting) in the third symbol display device 81. It is a display effect. By executing this pseudo-variation effect, the result (comparison) of the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the simple variation display by the power-on variation image in the third symbol display device 81, which ended during the execution of the initial setting. It is possible to notify the player who overlooked the result of the variation display in a mode that is difficult to confirm) in a mode that is easier to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player understand the result of the special figure change during execution when the power is turned off. If the lottery result of the special figure change that was being executed when the power was turned off was a big hit, the fluctuation period of the special figure change that was restarted after the power was turned on has elapsed (that is, during the execution of the initial setting). ) Since the jackpot is started (there is no room to execute the pseudo fluctuation), even if the pseudo fluctuation is not executed, the player may be suspicious that the lottery result has been discarded due to the power failure. do not have.

As shown in FIG. 685 (B), after the pseudo fluctuation display for 1 second is completed, the fluctuation display of the third symbol is executed in the remaining fluctuation time. With this configuration, both the result of the variation display that ended during the execution of the initial setting in the display control device 114 and the result of the variation display that started during the execution of the initial setting are displayed to the player. It can be easily understood.

If the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display started during the execution of the initial setting is less than 1 second (the fluctuation time elapses during the execution of the pseudo fluctuation), the fluctuation that was being executed when the power was turned off. After the pseudo-variation for 1 second corresponding to the display is executed, the pseudo-variation for 1 second corresponding to the hold 1 when the power is turned off is executed. If the residual variation time of the variation display started during the execution of the initial setting is less than 2 seconds, the pseudo variation corresponding to the variation display that was being executed at the time of power failure was executed over the residual variation time. Later, a one-second pseudo-variation corresponding to hold 1 when the power is turned off is executed. With such a configuration, the pseudo-variation can be more preferably executed.

<Electrical configuration in the 23rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 686 (A), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd control example will be described. FIG. 686 (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the 23rd control example. As shown in FIG. 686 (A), in the configuration of ROM 222 in the 23rd control example, the background notice selection table 222GA is deleted with respect to the configuration of ROM 222 in the 19th control example (see FIG. 639 (A)). The difference is that the silhouette notice selection table 222JA is provided instead. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of ROM 222 in the 19th control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The silhouette notice selection table 222JA is a data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the silhouette notice effect in the 23rd control example. Here, as described above, the silhouette notice effect in the 23rd control example is the latter half of the variation display according to the shape (display mode) of the silhouette displayed by the background change operation during the execution of the variation display effect. It is an effect that suggests (notifies) the type of advance notice effect (type of reach effect) to be executed in (predetermined period). More specifically, as the silhouette mode (shape) that can be displayed in the silhouette notice effect in the 23rd control example, a bubble-shaped silhouette imitating the shape of a bubble and a fish-shaped silhouette imitating the shape of a fish (FIG. 641 (A). ), A wooden silhouette imitating the shape of a tree (see FIG. 641 (B)), and a volcanic silhouette imitating the shape of a volcano. Each of these silhouettes suggests the type of advance notice effect (notice type) executed in the latter half of the variable display. That is, the bubble-shaped silhouette suggests that a bubble warning effect in which a large number of bubbles are generated in the display screen is executed when developing into super reach, and the fish-shaped silhouette develops into super reach. It is suggested that the fish school notice effect that the school of fish crosses the display screen is executed when doing so, and the wooden silhouette shows the display mode in which the tree fluctuates due to the strong wind when developing into super reach. The volcanic silhouette suggests that the notice effect will be executed, and the volcanic silhouette suggests that the eruption notice effect will be executed, which shows the display mode in which the mountain erupts when developing into super reach. be.

The bubble notice effect and the fish school notice effect are for exclusive use when the background mode is set to the sea mode, and the wind advance notice effect and the eruption advance notice effect are for exclusive use when the background mode is set to the mountain mode. It is a notice production of. The fish school notice effect is a notice effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the bubble notice effect (the rate of selection is low in the case of deviation fluctuation), and the eruption notice effect is a notice effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the wind notice effect. Is. The bubble notice effect and the wind notice are configured to have the same jackpot expectation when executed, and the fish school notice effect and the eruption notice effect are also configured to have the same jackpot expectation. ing. For this reason, if the background is changed to the mountain background by performing a background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect in which the bubble warning effect is set, the variable display effect is switched to the wind notice effect, and the wind notice effect is set. If the background is changed to the sea background by performing the background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect, the display is switched to the variable display effect accompanied by the bubble notice effect. In addition, if the background is changed to the mountain background by performing a background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the fluctuation display effect in which the fish school notice effect is set, the change is switched to the variation display effect accompanied by the eruption notice effect, and the change in which the eruption notice effect is set. If the background is changed to the sea background during the high-speed fluctuation period in the display effect, the display effect is switched to the variable display effect accompanied by the fish school notice effect. The details of the silhouette notice selection table 222JA for selecting the effect mode of the silhouette notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 687.

FIG. 687 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the silhouette notice selection table 222JA in the 23rd control example. As shown in FIG. 687, in the silhouette notice selection table 222JA in the 23rd control example, the type of the silhouette notice effect to be selected is defined in association with each range of the value of the effect counter 223H. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 687, for the variable display effect in which the advance notice type that does not accompany the development to super reach is set, regardless of the background mode after being changed by the background change operation, A silhouette notice "none" is specified in association with the entire range that the effect counter 223H can take. Therefore, if the player performs the background change operation while the variable display effect of the effect mode that does not accompany the development to super reach is executed, the silhouette notice effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 687, the effect counter is used for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the sea mode and the variable display during execution is the variable display accompanied by the bubble notice super reach. The value of 223H is defined in the range of "0 to 149" in association with the silhouette notice "none", and in the range of "150 to 198" in association with the silhouette notice effect of the "foam-shaped silhouette". There is. Therefore, if the mode is changed to the sea mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by the bubble warning super reach, the bubble-shaped silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a bubble notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to positively change the background mode for the player who wants to confirm the silhouette notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 687, the effect counter 223H is used for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the sea mode and the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation display accompanied by the fish school notice super reach. A silhouette notice "none" is associated with a value in the range of "0 to 179", and a silhouette notice effect of a "fish-shaped silhouette" is associated with a value of "180 to 198". Therefore, if the mode is changed to the sea mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by the fish school notice super reach, the silhouette notice effect that the fish-shaped silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 9.5% (19/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a fish school notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, the silhouette notice effect is achieved by configuring the super reach effect with the fish school notice effect, which has a relatively high expectation of being a big hit, at a lower execution rate than the super reach effect with the bubble notice effect. If this does not occur, it can be expected that the fish school notice effect will be executed. Therefore, since the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the silhouette effect is executed and the type of silhouette, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As shown in FIG. 687, the effect counter 223H is used for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the mountain mode and the variable display during execution is the variable display accompanied by the wind warning super reach. A silhouette notice "none" is associated with a value in the range of "0 to 99", and a silhouette notice effect of a "wooden silhouette" is associated with a value of "100 to 198". Therefore, if the mode is changed to the mountain mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by the wind warning super reach, the silhouette notice effect that the wooden silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 50.2% (100/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a wind notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, since the ratio of the silhouette notice effect to the wind notice super reach is higher than the ratio of the silhouette notice effect to the bubble notice super reach in the sea mode, see more silhouette notice effects. It is possible to have the player who wants to perform the background change operation to the mountain mode positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

As shown in FIG. 687, the effect counter 223H is used for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the mountain mode and the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation display accompanied by the eruption notice super reach. A silhouette notice "none" is associated with a value in the range of "0 to 149", and a silhouette notice effect of a "volcanic silhouette" is associated with a value of "150 to 198". Therefore, if the mode is changed to the mountain mode by the background change operation and the fluctuation display is accompanied by the eruption notice super reach, the silhouette notice effect that the volcano type silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by an eruption notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, since the ratio of the silhouette notice effect to the eruption notice super reach is higher than the rate of occurrence of the silhouette notice effect for the fish school notice super reach in the sea mode, see more silhouette notice effects. It is possible to have the player who wants to perform the background change operation to the mountain mode positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

As described above, in the 23rd control example, when the player performs the background change operation during the execution of the variable display effect in which the advance notice effect of a specific type is executed, it is predetermined for each type of the advance notice effect. At a certain rate, the silhouette notice effect that suggests the execution of the notice effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to know whether or not the advance notice effect has been executed and the type of the advance notice effect before the advance notice effect is started. The background can be changed. Further, in the 23rd control example, when the silhouette notice effect occurs, it is confirmed that the super reach, which has a relatively high expectation of a big hit, is developed. Expectations can be improved. Further, in the 23rd control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different depending only on the type of the notice effect. That is, the silhouette advance notice effect is selected regardless of whether the fluctuation is a big hit or a miss. With such a configuration, even if the silhouette notice effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the jackpot from being impaired. Further, in the 23rd control example, the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. There is. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect of the player's preference and performing the game. In addition, since the silhouette advance notice effect is configured to notify the type of the advance notice effect of the super reach to be executed after that in advance, the silhouette can be maintained by maintaining the background mode after knowing the type of the advance notice effect by the silhouette advance notice effect. By executing the notice effect notified by the notice effect as it is, or by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period), the background after the change corresponding to the notice effect notified by the silhouette notice effect is supported. It is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect may be the same. With such a configuration, the specified contents of the silhouette notice selection table 222JA can be simplified, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the 23rd control example, the possibility of executing the silhouette advance notice effect and the type of the silhouette are selected only according to whether or not the advance notice effect of a specific type is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect may be changed according to whether or not it is a big hit. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the silhouette notice effect, so that the player can be made to perform the background change operation more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 686 (B), the details of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd control example will be described. FIG. 686 (B) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 686 (B), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 23rd control example is the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA and the pseudo fluctuation time with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 19th control example (see FIG. 639 (B)). The only difference is that the counter 223JB and the silhouette lottery flag 223JC have been added.

The pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is the number of fluctuation displays in which the fluctuation display of the third symbol (excluding the fluctuation image when the power is turned on) is not executed in the third symbol display device 81 among the fluctuation displays executed after the power is turned on again. It is a counter for counting (the number of executions of pseudo-variation). The pseudo-variation counter 223JA is incremented by 1 each time a stop command is received (at the fluctuation stop timing) during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114 (see Z2277 in FIG. 688) to produce a pseudo-variation effect. Each time it is executed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see Z2316 in FIG. 691 and Z2560 in FIG. 693). When the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223J is 1 or more, a new pseudo-variation is executed every time the variation or the pseudo-variation ends.

The pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation effect. In this pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB, counter values corresponding to the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation are set at the start of the pseudo fluctuation (Z2315, Z2321 in FIG. 691, Z2257, Z2259 in FIG. 693). When the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JB becomes 0, and when the value of the above-mentioned pseudo-variation counter 223JA is 1 or more, the execution of the pseudo-variation is set. On the other hand, if the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB becomes 0 during the execution of the fluctuation display, the normal fluctuation display is executed for the remaining fluctuation time, and the pseudo fluctuation time counter is in the fluctuation stop state (pending out state). When the value of 223JB becomes 0, the fluctuation is stopped as it is.

The silhouette lottery completed flag 223JC is a flag for indicating whether or not the lottery using the silhouette notice selection table 222JA has been executed in the variable display of 1. If this silhouette lottery completed flag 223JC is on, it means that the lottery using the silhouette notice selection table 222JA has already been executed in the variable display during execution, and if it is off, it means that it has not been executed. means. The initial value of the silhouette lottery flag 223JC is set to off, and is set to on at the timing when the background change operation is first performed during the execution of the variation display (see Z2896 in FIG. 694). It is also set to off when the fluctuation is stopped (see Z2280 in FIG. 688).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 23rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 688 to 696, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd control example will be described. First, the fluctuation stop processing 13 (Z2246) in the 23rd control example will be described with reference to FIG. 688. The fluctuation stop process 13 (Z2246) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 645) in the 19th control example, and is the same as the fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 645). This is a process for setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 81.

Of the fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 688) in the 23rd control example, each processing of Z2265 to Z2269 is the same as each processing of Z2265 to Z2269 of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 645) in the 19th control example, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the fluctuation stop process 13 (see FIG. 688) in the 23rd control example, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265), and the process shifts to Z2266. When the processing of Z2269 is completed, the next background change flag 223FA is set to off (Z2270), and the processing is shifted to Z2273.

In the processing of Z2273, the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is cleared to 0 (Z2273), and then it is determined whether or not the return-changing flag 223FF is on (Z2275). If it is determined in the processing of Z2275 that the return-changing flag 223FF is off (Z2275: NO), the processing is shifted to Z2280. On the other hand, in the process of Z2275, when it is determined that the return changing flag 223FF is ON (Z2275: YES), it is determined whether or not the jackpot stop symbol is set (Z2276). When it is determined that the jackpot stop symbol is set in the processing of Z2276 (Z2276: YES), the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is cleared to 0 (Z2278), and the return fluctuation flag 223FF is set to off (Z2278). Z2279), the process shifts to Z2280.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2276, when it is determined that the stop symbol of the jackpot is not set (Z2276: NO), it is determined that the first symbol that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed during the initial setting of the display control device 114. Therefore, 1 is added to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA (Z2277), and the process shifts to Z2280. In the processing of Z2280, the silhouette lottery flag 223JC is set to off (Z2280), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 688), the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA can be added by 1 each time the first symbol that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed during the initial setting of the display control device 114. Therefore, it is possible to accurately execute the pseudo-variation effect for the number of deviation fluctuations executed during the initial setting after the initial setting is completed. Therefore, after the initial setting is completed, the variation display that was being executed when the power is turned off and the variation display of the third symbol that is the same number of times as the variation display based on the reserved ball when the power is turned off are displayed to the player. Can be done at. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being suspicious that the lottery result has been discarded due to the power failure, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, the fluctuation return processing 13 (Z2262) in the 23rd control example will be described with reference to FIG. 689. The fluctuation return processing 13 (Z2262) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 622) in the 19th control example (and the 18th control example), and is a process executed in place of the 19th control example (and the 18th control example). ) Is the same as the change return process (see FIG. 622), which is a process for executing control according to the return change command received from the main control device 110.

Of the fluctuation recovery processing 13 (see FIG. 689) in the 23rd control example, in each of the processes Z2281 to Z2284, the fluctuation recovery processing (see FIG. 622) in the 19th control example (and the 18th control example), respectively, Z2281 to The same process as each process of Z2284 is executed. Further, in the fluctuation return processing 13 (see FIG. 689) in the 23rd control example, when the processing of Z2284 is completed, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation recovery command and the fluctuation type (variation time) is next. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the residual variation time corresponds to the normal reach effect (Z2331), and if it is determined to be the residual variation time corresponding to the execution of the normal reach effect (Z2231: YES), the special figure variation. BGM is set to be played from the playback position corresponding to 2 seconds before the end of the music (Z2332), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2331 that it is not the residual variation time corresponding to the execution of the normal reach effect (Z2331: NO), then whether or not it is the residual variation time corresponding to the super reach effect is determined. If it is determined (Z2333) and it is determined that the super reach effect is in progress (Z2333: YES), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is set to be played from the playback position corresponding to 4 seconds before the end of the music (Z2333: YES). Z2334), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2333 that the super reach effect is not being executed (Z2333: NO), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is reproduced from the reproduction position corresponding to 1 second before the end of the music. Set to (Z2335) to end this process.

By executing this fluctuation return processing 13 (see FIG. 689), the BGM of the special figure variation can be terminated at the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. That is, the display mode of the special figure variation is before the reach development where the image data used is relatively small, after the normal reach development where the image data used is relatively large, or after the super reach development where the image data used is the most. By making the start timing of the special figure variation BGM different depending on the case, it is possible to surely match the end timing of the initial setting with the end timing of the special figure variation BGM.

Next, the display rising process 13 (Z2247) in the 23rd control example will be described with reference to FIG. 690. The display rising process 13 (Z2247) is a process executed in place of the display rising process (see FIG. 623) in the 19th control example (and the 18th control example), and is a process executed in place of the 19th control example (and the 18th control example). ) Is the process for setting the variation display of the third symbol according to the value of the remaining variation time counter when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, as in the display rise process (see FIG. 623). ..

Of the display rise processing 13 (see FIG. 690) in the 23rd control example, in each of the processes Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299, the display rise processing (FIG. 623) in the 19th control example (and the 18th control example), respectively. The same processing as each processing of Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299 of (see) is executed. Further, in the display rise processing 13 (see FIG. 690) in the 23rd control example, when it is determined that the return changing flag 223FF is ON in the processing of S2291 (Z2291: YES), then the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is used. When it is determined whether or not the value is larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (Z2301) and the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA is determined to be larger than 0 (Z2301: YES), the display control device 114 Since it means that the special figure change has been completed at least once during the initial setting, the pseudo change start process for starting the pseudo change effect indicating the result of the special figure change completed during the initial setting is performed. Execute (Z2302) to end this process. The details of this pseudo-variation start processing (Z2302) will be described later with reference to FIG. 691. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA is 0 in the processing of Z2301 (Z2301: NO), the processing is shifted to Z2292.

Next, with reference to FIG. 691, the details of the above-mentioned pseudo-variation start processing (Z2302) will be described. As described above, this pseudo-variation start process (Z2302) is a process for starting a pseudo-variation effect indicating the result of the special figure variation completed during the initial setting. As shown in FIG. 691, when the pseudo fluctuation start processing (Z2302) is executed, first, the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is read (Z2311), and the balance specified from the read residual fluctuation time counter 223FG value. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 0 (Z2312).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2312 that the residual variation time is not 0 (Z2312: NO), then it is determined whether or not the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2313). When it is determined that the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds in the processing of Z2313 (Z2313: YES), and when it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2312 (Z2312: YES), 1 The start of the pseudo-variation effect for one second is set (Z2314), and the counter value corresponding to one second is set for the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223JB (Z2315). Next, it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA (Z2316), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2313, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2313: NO), then it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317), and the residual fluctuation is performed. If it is determined that the time is 1 second or less (Z2317: NO), it means that the remaining fluctuation time is not sufficient to perform the pseudo fluctuation, so the display of the power recovery screen (image when the power is turned on) is continued. Is set (Z2318), 1 is added to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA to update (Z2319), and the process shifts to Z2231. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2317, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317: YES), if the pseudo fluctuation of 1 second is set, the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the pseudo fluctuation is set. Is less than 1 second, and there is not enough time left to perform the special figure fluctuation. Therefore, the start of the pseudo fluctuation over the remaining fluctuation time is set (Z2320), and the processing is shifted to Z2321. In the processing of Z2231 executed after the processing of Z2319 or Z2320, a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set for the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB (Z2321), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this pseudo-variation start processing (see FIG. 691), the result of the special figure variation that ended during the execution of the initial setting is notified in an easy-to-understand manner in the form of a pseudo-variation effect by the third symbol after the completion of the initial setting. can do. Therefore, it is possible to realize a production that is easier for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 692, the details of the variation display setting process 13 (Z2185) in the 23rd control example will be described. The variation display setting process 13 (Z2185) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 624) in the 19th control example (and the 18th control example), and is a process executed in place of the 19th control example (and the 19th control example). Similar to the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 624) in 18 control example), this is a process for executing control according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

Of the variation display setting processes 13 (see FIG. 692) in the 23rd control example, in each process of Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534, the variation in the 19th control example (and the 18th control example), respectively. The same processes as those of Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534 of the display setting process 8 (see FIG. 624) are executed.

Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 692) in the 23rd control example, when the processing of the Z2503 is completed, a detailed variation display mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is subsequently determined, and the determined variation display is performed. The variation pattern command setting process for setting the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the embodiment is executed (Z2521), and the process is transferred to Z2535. The details of this fluctuation pattern command setting process (Z2521) will be described with reference to FIG. 693.

FIG. 693 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command setting process (Z2521). In this fluctuation pattern command setting process (Z2521), first, the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation type extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is set in the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG (Z2551), and then the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is set. If it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2552) and the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA is 0 (Z2552: YES), the variation according to the extracted variation pattern is determined. A display mode is selected (Z2553), a display variation pattern command indicating the selected variation display mode is set (Z2554), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2552, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is a value larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2552: YES), then the residual fluctuation time indicated by the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is indicated. It is determined whether or not is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555), and if it is determined that it is 2 seconds or less (Z2555: NO), if a pseudo-variation effect of 1 second is set, after the pseudo-variation ends. Since the remaining fluctuation time becomes insufficiently long for performing the fluctuation display effect, a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the pseudo variation effect of the variation time over the remaining variation time is set (Z2556). Next, a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set for the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB (Z2557), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2555, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555: YES), even if the pseudo fluctuation effect for 1 second is executed, it is sufficient (at least 1) after the pseudo fluctuation is completed. Since a time (longer than a second) can be secured as the fluctuation time, a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of a pseudo fluctuation for 1 second is set (Z2558). Next, a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the pseudo-variation time counter 223JB (Z2559), and the value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA (Z2560), and this process is terminated.

By executing this variation pattern command setting process (see FIG. 693), the variation display mode can be preferably set in consideration of the remaining number of pseudo-variations at the start of the variation.

Next, the background change process 13 (see FIG. 694) in the 23rd control example will be described with reference to FIG. 694. This background change process 13 (Z2541) is a process executed in place of the background change process 9 (see FIG. 644) in the 19th control example, and is the same as the background change process 9 (see FIG. 644) in the 19th control example. In addition, when a background change operation is performed, it is a process for setting a background change according to the timing of the operation.

Of the background change processes 13 (see FIG. 694) in the 23rd control example, the processes Z2963 to Z2967 are the same as the processes Z2963 to Z2967 of the background change process 9 (see FIG. 644) in the 19th control example, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the background change process 13 (see FIG. 694) in the 23rd control example, when the process of Z2967 or the process of Z2968 is completed, it is nextly determined whether or not the silhouette lottery completed flag 223JC is on (Z2981). , If it is determined that the silhouette lottery completed flag 223JC is off (Z2981: NO), it means that the lottery for the silhouette notice effect has not been executed in the variable display being executed this time, so the lottery for the silhouette notice effect. And the process for making the setting (each process of Z2982 to Z2986) is executed. More specifically, the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired (Z2982), and the silhouette advance notice mode corresponding to the acquired value of the effect counter 223H is selected from the silhouette advance notice selection table 222JA (Z2983).

When the processing of Z2983 is completed, the silhouette lottery completed flag 223JC is then set to ON (Z2984), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the silhouette notice effect by the processing of Z2983 is the result indicating the execution of the silhouette notice effect. (Z2985). In the process of Z2985, if it is determined that the result is a lottery indicating the execution of the silhouette notice (Z2896: YES), a display silhouette notice command indicating the execution of the selected silhouette notice effect is set (Z2896), and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2985, if it is determined that the result is a lottery indicating "none" of the silhouette notice effect (Z2985: NO), the processing of Z2896 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

By executing this background change process 13 (see FIG. 694), a lottery for the silhouette notice effect can be executed based on the initial background change operation during the execution of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to give the player who has confirmed the silhouette notice effect a sense of expectation for the big hit, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the counter update process 13 (Z2177) in the 23rd control example will be described with reference to FIG. 695. The counter update process 13 (Z2177) is a process executed in place of the counter update process (see FIG. 633) in the 19th control example (and the 18th control example), and is a process executed in place of the 19th control example (and the 18th control example). ) Is the same as the counter update process (see FIG. 633), which is a process for updating various counters.

Of the counter update processes 13 (see FIG. 695) in the 23rd control example, in each of the processes Z2861 to Z2866, the counter update processes (see FIG. 633) in the 19th control example (and the 18th control example) are Z2861 to The same process as each process of Z2866 is executed. Further, in the counter update process 13 (see FIG. 695) in the 23rd control example, when the process of Z2864 or Z2865 is completed, the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB is next to a value larger than 0 (1 or more). If the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB is 0 (Z2871: NO), the process shifts to Z2866.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2871 when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB is larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2871: YES), the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB is subtracted by 1 (Z2872). ), It is determined whether the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JB after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2873). If it is determined in the processing of Z2873 that the counter value after subtraction is 0 (Z2873: YES), whether to execute pseudo variation or normal variation display according to the value of the pseudo variation counter 223JA. Pseudo-variation setting processing for determining is executed (Z2874), and the processing is transferred to Z2875. The details of this pseudo-variation setting process (Z2873) will be described later with reference to FIG. 696. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2873 that the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223JB after subtraction is not 0 (Z2873: NO), the processing of Z2874 is skipped and the processing is shifted to Z2875.

Next, with reference to FIG. 696, the details of the above-mentioned pseudo-variation setting process (Z2874) will be described. As described above, this pseudo-variation setting process (Z2874) is a process for determining whether to execute the pseudo-variation or to execute the normal variation display according to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA. In this pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z2874), first, the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is read out (Z2881), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is 0 (Z2882).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2882 that the value of the read pseudo-variation counter 223JA is 0 (Z2882: YES), then whether or not the remaining fluctuation time indicated by the counter value read in the processing of Z2881 is 0. Is determined (Z2883). In the processing of Z2883, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not 0 (Z2883: NO), the execution of the variation display over the residual variation time is set (Z2884), and the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2884). Z2885), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 in the processing of Z2883, it means that the game state of the actual pachinko machine 10 is the fluctuation stop state, so that the execution of the fluctuation display is not set. This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2882 that the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA is not 0 (1 or more) (Z2882: NO), then whether or not the remaining variation time is longer than 2 seconds. (Z2886), and if it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2886: NO), it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time is 0 (Z2887). If it is determined in the processing of Z2887 that the residual fluctuation time is not 0 (Z2887: NO), the start of the pseudo fluctuation over the residual fluctuation time is set (Z2888), and the residual fluctuation time is set with respect to the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB. The counter value corresponding to (Z2889) is set, and the process shifts to Z2893.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds in the processing of Z2886 (Z2886: YES), and when it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2887 (Z2887: YES). The start of the pseudo-variation effect for 1 second is set (Z2890), and the counter value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223JB (Z2891). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA (Z2892), and the process shifts to Z2893. In the processing of Z2893, the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2893), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this pseudo fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 696), when the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation has elapsed, the pseudo fluctuation is set again according to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA, or the normal fluctuation display is displayed. You can accurately determine whether to execute it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd control example, the power supply is cut off during the execution of the special symbol variation, and then the power is turned on again to cause the special symbol variation (the first symbol in the first symbol display device 37). When the variable display) is restarted, it is restarted when the power is turned on after the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed (that is, after the normal display effect can be executed on the third symbol display device 81). The configuration is such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a pseudo-variation display effect showing the result of the special figure variation. In other words, the configuration is such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a pseudo-variation effect asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the fluctuation display of the first symbol that is restarted based on the power-on. With this configuration, by confirming the pseudo variation display executed in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed, the result of the variation display executed when the power is cut off can be played. It can be easily understood by a person. Further, in accordance with this, in the 23rd control example, the playback start position of the BGM at the time of turning on the power is set so that the last part of the melody of the special figure fluctuation BGM ends when the initial setting is completed. did. With this configuration, it is possible to perform reproduction from the first part of the special figure fluctuation BGM at the timing of starting the pseudo fluctuation. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be made to appear as if it is a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display that was executed before the power failure occurred is notified to the player without causing a sense of discomfort. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the special figure fluctuation interrupted due to the power off is executed without being discarded after the power is turned on again, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd control example, when the background change operation is executed during the execution of the variation display, if a specific condition is satisfied, a silhouette notice effect that can suggest the establishment of the specific condition is predetermined. It was configured to be feasible at the rate of. More specifically, the background is changed to determine whether or not the silhouette notice effect can be executed, which suggests (notifies) the type of advance notice effect (type of reach effect) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display according to the display mode of the silhouette display. The lottery is based on the fact that the operation has been executed. With this configuration, when the silhouette advance notice effect is executed, the type of the advance notice effect can be known in advance before the advance notice effect is started, so that the player can positively know the type of the advance notice effect. The background change operation can be executed. Also, when the silhouette display is set, it is confirmed that it will develop into a reach production, so for players who want to know at an early stage whether or not a reach production (a production with high expectations for big hits) will be executed. On the other hand, the background change operation can be executed more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. Further, in the 23rd control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different depending only on the type of the notice effect. That is, the silhouette advance notice effect is selected regardless of whether the fluctuation is a big hit or a miss. With such a configuration, even if the silhouette notice effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the jackpot from being impaired. Further, in the 23rd control example, the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. There is. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect of the player's preference and performing the game. In addition, since the silhouette advance notice effect is configured to notify the type of the advance notice effect of the super reach to be executed in advance, the silhouette can be maintained by maintaining the background mode after knowing the type of the advance notice effect by the silhouette advance notice effect. By executing the notice effect notified by the notice effect as it is, or by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period), the background after the change corresponding to the notice effect notified by the silhouette notice effect is supported. It is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect may be the same. With such a configuration, the specified contents of the silhouette notice selection table 222JA can be simplified, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the 23rd control example, the possibility of executing the silhouette advance notice effect and the type of the silhouette are selected only according to whether or not the advance notice effect of a specific type is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect may be changed according to whether or not it is a big hit. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the silhouette notice effect, so that the player can be made to perform the background change operation more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

In the 23rd control example, when the power is cut off and the power is turned on again during the execution of the special figure change, the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 and the end of the special figure change BGM are reproduced. In order to match the timing, the end timing of the initial setting is determined when the power is turned on, and the playback start position of the special figure fluctuation BGM is adjusted (variable) according to the determination result, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the reproduction start position may be adjusted so that the special figure change BGM ends in accordance with the end timing of the special figure change restarted when the power is turned on.

In the 23rd control example, the number of special figure fluctuations completed during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114 is counted, and after the completion of the initial setting, a pseudo variation display effect for the number of counts is performed. The configuration is such that the three symbol display devices 81 are sequentially executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the completion of the initial setting, the result of the special figure variation for the number of counts may be collectively notified by the pseudo variation display effect of 1. More specifically, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided by at least the number of counts, and in each of the divided display areas, the result of the special figure change completed during the execution of the initial setting is obtained. It may be configured to execute the pseudo-variation display shown. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the effect time of the pseudo-variation effect for notifying the result of the special figure variation that ended during the execution of the initial setting, so that the normal third symbol variation can be performed earlier. The display can be returned to an executable state.

In this 23rd control example, the silhouette notice effect is developed into a specific type of reach effect (bubble notice super reach, fish school notice super reach, wind notice super reach, eruption notice super reach) in the variable display during execution. Although it was configured to be executed as an effect for notifying in advance, the target to be notified by the silhouette notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the silhouette advance notice effect may be executed not only when there is a holding ball that develops into a reach effect to be targeted in the pending variation display as well as the variable display being executed. With this configuration, not only the variable display that is being executed when the silhouette notice effect is executed, but also the reserved ball at the time when the silhouette notice effect is executed can be expected, so that the game can be played. It is possible to maintain a person's expectation for a big hit for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the 23rd control example, when the special figure change is restarted based on the power-on, the period required for the initial setting of the display control device 114 is predicted, and the special figure change BGM ends in the predicted period. , The configuration was such that the start position of the special figure fluctuation BGM when the power was turned on was set, but in addition to this, when the end timing of the actual initial setting deviates from the prediction result, the initial screen (display of the image when the power is turned on). By extending the period), it may be configured to match the end timing of the special figure fluctuation BGM. With this configuration, the end timing of the special figure variation BGM and the end timing of the initial screen can be more reliably matched.

<24th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 697 to 706. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example described above, the movable member (for example, the tilting device 310) is moved from the display control device 114 with respect to the accessory control device 229 for executing the motion control for the movable member. It was configured to output a command. Then, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period is a command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory operation (the accessory). It was configured to include information indicating the timing to output the command), and the display control device 114 was configured to determine whether or not it was the execution timing of the preparatory operation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example, the timing for outputting the command for executing the preparatory operation is set in advance in the display data table, and when reading the drawing contents from the display data table, the drawing contents are read. , The configuration is such that the command for the accessory is output by reading the information indicating the output of the command. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a timer means or the like for timing the timing of outputting the command for the accessory, so that the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified.

Further, in the 24th control example, the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed as a kind of hobby effect. This reach line suggestion effect is an effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the reach occurs and the line of the reach line or the like before the reach effect occurs. When the reach effect occurs, the expectation of the big hit increases, and as the reach line increases, the expectation of the big hit increases, so pay attention to the content of the reach line suggestion effect and let the game play. Can be done.

First, the contents of the reach line suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 697 and 698. This reach line suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed during the high-speed fluctuation period. As shown in FIG. 697 (A), when the reach line suggestion effect is executed, first, a character imitating a dinosaur is placed behind the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. 810 is displayed, and a balloon image 810A imitating a balloon is displayed on the right side of the character 810. In this balloon image 810A, the characters "The more the same numbers are lined up, the higher the expectation!" Are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the advance notice effect in which the numbers are lined up is executed and that the degree of expectation changes depending on how the numbers are lined up. In this reach line suggestion effect, an effect is executed in which nine numbers are divided into three times and displayed inside the balloon image 810A. Of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810A, two numbers are aligned vertically, so the degree of expectation is higher than the double line reach effect (the effect is higher than the single line reach effect). It is confirmed that it will develop into the production of or become a big hit. In addition, out of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810A, three numbers are aligned vertically, which leads to a triple-line reach effect (a production with higher expectations than a double-line reach effect). It is decided that it will be done or that it will be a big hit. Furthermore, it is confirmed that a big hit will be achieved by aligning three numbers horizontally. In this way, since the reach line suggestion effect can suggest the reach line of the reach effect that develops after that, the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the reach line suggestion effect and play the game. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In the following figures, in order to make the content of the effect easy to understand, the description of the image (dashed line arrow pointing to the left) showing the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation is omitted.

FIG. 697 (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the first three numbers out of the nine numbers are displayed in the reach line suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 697 (B), the first three numbers are displayed side by side on the upper side of the balloon image 810A. FIG. 697 (B) illustrates a state in which an image imitating the number "7", an image imitating the number "6", and an image imitating the number "5" are displayed.

FIG. 698 (A) is a diagram showing a state in which all nine numbers are displayed and three identical numbers are vertically aligned. As shown in FIG. 698 (A), when the same numbers are aligned, the effect image 810B surrounding the same numbers is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the numbers are aligned and the number of aligned numbers. If two or more numbers are aligned in the reach line suggestion effect, the mode shifts to the dedicated background mode according to the number of aligned numbers. Specifically, the "super sea mode" (the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion effect is the sea mode) corresponding to the effect of expectation higher than the reach effect of the double line by aligning two identical numbers vertically. (In the case of), or shift to the "super mountain mode" (when the background mode at the time of executing the reach line suggestion effect is the mountain mode). In addition, by aligning the same three numbers vertically or horizontally, the "premium sea mode" (the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion effect is the sea mode) corresponding to the effect of expectation higher than the reach effect of the triple line. (Case), or shift to "Premium Mountain Mode" (when the background mode at the time of executing the reach line suggestion effect is Mountain Mode). In addition, in "Super Sea Mode" and "Super Mountain Mode", there is a low probability that it will develop into a single line reach production with lower expectations than a double line reach production, but this background mode and the reach that occurs Patterns that are inconsistent with the type of are selected only in the case of a jackpot. Similarly, if you move to "Premium Sea Mode" or "Premium Mountain Mode" but do not develop into Triple Reach (developed to Single Reach or Double Reach), the jackpot will be confirmed. In this way, the single reach effect and double reach effect, in which the expectation of a big hit is relatively low in normal times, are confirmed when the big hit occurs under specific conditions. Therefore, the reach after the background mode is promoted in the reach line suggestion effect. You can play the game by paying attention to the number of lines. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 698 (B) shows a display mode in the case of shifting to the premium sea mode by aligning three numbers vertically in the reach line suggestion effect executed in the sea mode. In this premium sea mode, as shown in FIG. 698 (B), the characters "premium sea mode" are displayed for the mode display area DM1A. Further, as shown in FIG. 698 (B), when the "premium sea mode" is entered, the three effective lines of the vertical effective line L1 in the center of the screen, the upward-sloping effective line L2, and the downward-sloping effective line L3 It develops into a triple reach production that takes reach. As mentioned above, the triple reach production has a higher expectation of being a big hit than the single reach production and the double reach production (the ratio of being selected in the case of a loss is low), so that the player has a feeling of expectation for the big hit. Can be improved. As described above, the reach line suggestion effect is not only an effect suggesting the number of reach lines, but also an effect suggesting promotion of the rear mode (mode promotion effect).

<Electrical configuration in the 24th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 699, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th control example will be described. FIG. 699 is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the 24th control example. As shown in FIG. 699, the configuration of ROM 222 in the 24th control example differs from the configuration of ROM 222 in the 22nd control example (see FIG. 665) only in that the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA is added. do. This mode promotion effect selection table 222KA is a data table referred to for selecting an effect mode (the same number of numbers aligned in the balloon image 810A) of the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect). The details of this mode promotion effect selection table 222KA will be described with reference to FIGS. 700 and 701.

FIG. 700A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA in the 24th control example. As shown in FIG. 700 (A), the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA has a hit table 222KA1 for selecting whether or not the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed and the effect mode in the variable display of the jackpot. And, in the variation display of the deviation, at least the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed, and the disengagement table 222KA2 for selecting the effect mode is composed of at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 700 (B), the specified contents of the winning table 222KA1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 700 (B), the hit table 222KA1 has a range of values of the effect counter 223H and an effect mode (numbers aligned in the balloon image 810A) for each number of reach lines when the reach effect is developed. The correspondence with the aspect) is defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 700 (B), in the hit fluctuation in which single line reach occurs, the mode promotion effect “none” is used as the effect mode for the value of the effect counter 223H in the range of “0 to 149”. Is specified in association with each other. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "0 to 149", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "none" is 150, so in the jackpot fluctuation where the single line reach effect is set. , The rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 75.4% (150/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 700 (B), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H corresponds to the range of "150 to 192" as the effect mode. It is specified with. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "150 to 192", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is also displayed vertically. A mode (separate) that is not lined up side by side is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "bare eyes" is 43, so a jackpot with a single-line reach effect set. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of the looseness is executed is about 21.6% (43/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 700 (B), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "193,194", and the effect mode is "two vertical lines". It is specified in association with each other. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "193,194", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is vertically 2. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "two vertical alignments" is two, so a single-line reach effect was set. In the jackpot fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of two vertical lines is executed is about 1% (2/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 700 (B), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value "195" of the effect counter 223H is defined by associating "three vertical alignments" as the effect mode. ing. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "195", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and three same numbers are aligned vertically. The aspect is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "3 vertical sets" is 1, so a single-line reach effect was set. In the jackpot fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three vertical lines is executed is about 0.5% (1/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 700 (B), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value "196 to 198" of the effect counter 223H is associated with "3 horizontal alignment" as the effect mode. It is stipulated. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "196 to 198", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is 3 horizontally. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "horizontal 3 sets" is 4, so a single-line reach effect was set. In the jackpot fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontal lines is executed is about 2% (4/199).

As described above, in the reach effect in which the reach of the single line occurs, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 3/4 (it is difficult to execute the mode promotion effect). Therefore, when the mode promotion effect is executed, the player can expect the reach effect of the double line or the triple line, which has a high expectation of a big hit, to occur.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 700 (B), in the hit fluctuation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the mode promotion effect "None" is associated with the value of the effect counter 223H in the range of "0 to 99". It is stipulated. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "0 to 99", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "none" is 100, so in the jackpot fluctuation with the double line reach effect set. , The rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 50.2% (100/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in association with the range of "100 to 119" as the effect mode. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "100 to 119", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the gap is displayed. To. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "bare eyes" is 20, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of the loose eyes is executed is about 10% (20/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in association with the range of "120 to 189" as the effect mode of "two vertical alignments". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "120 to 189", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is vertically 2. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 2" is 70, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of two vertical lines is executed is about 35.2% (70/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined as "190" in association with "three vertical alignments" as the effect mode. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "190", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same numbers are aligned vertically. The aspect is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 3" is 1, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three vertical lines is executed is about 0.5% (1/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in association with the range of "191 to 198" as the effect mode of "alignment of three horizontal lines". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "191 to 198", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is 3 horizontally. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3" is 8, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontal lines is executed is about 4% (8/199).

As described above, in the hit variation in which the double line reach effect occurs, the execution rate of the mode promotion effect is higher (about 25% → about 50%) than in the hit variation in which the single line reach effect occurs. Further, when the mode promotion effect is executed, two vertical effect modes are selected at a high rate, but about 10% of the staggered modes are also selected. Therefore, even when the disparity is displayed, the player can be expected to produce an expectation higher than the reach effect of the double line.

Further, as shown in FIG. 700 (B), in the hit fluctuation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the mode promotion effect "None" is associated with the range of the effect counter 223H in the range of "0 to 49". It is stipulated. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "0 to 99", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "none" is 50, so in the jackpot fluctuation with the triple line reach effect set. , The rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 25.1% (50/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in association with the range of "50 to 69" as the effect mode. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "50 to 69", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the gap is displayed. To. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "bare eyes" is 20, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of the loose eyes is executed is about 10% (20/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in association with the range of "70 to 99" as the effect mode of "two vertical alignments". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "70 to 99", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is vertically 2. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 2" is 30, so a jackpot with a triple line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of two vertical lines is executed is about 15.1% (30/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in association with the range of "100 to 189" as the effect mode of "alignment of three vertical pieces". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "100 to 189", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is 3 vertically. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 3" is 90, so a jackpot with a triple line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three vertical lines is executed is about 45.2% (90/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in association with the range of "190 to 198" as the effect mode of "alignment of three horizontal pieces". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "190 to 198", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is 3 horizontally. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3" is 9, so a jackpot with a triple line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontal lines is executed is about 4.5% (9/199).

In this way, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the execution rate of the mode promotion effect is higher than the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line or the double line occurs (about 75%). Further, when the mode promotion effect is executed, three vertical effect modes are selected at a high rate, but about 25% of the staggered and two vertical mode are also selected. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to have a triple-line reach effect even when the mode promotion effect is displayed, which is a set of two vertical lines.

Next, with reference to FIG. 701, the details of the disengagement table 222KA2 constituting the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA will be described. As described above, the deviation table 222KA is a data table referred to for drawing whether or not the mode promotion effect can be executed and the effect mode when the mode promotion effect is executed in the deviation variation. Similar to the hit table 222KA, the disengagement table 222KA defines the correspondence between the value range of the effect counter 223H and the effect mode for each number of reach lines.

As shown in FIG. 701, for the non-reach variable display effect in which reach does not occur, the mode promotion effect “none” is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of the effect counter 223H. There is. Therefore, in the variable effect in which reach does not occur, the mode promotion effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 701, for the reach effect of the single line, the mode promotion effect "None" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223H in the range of "0 to 155". With respect to the range of "156 to 198", the effect mode of "separation" is defined in association with each other. That is, in the single-line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 78.4% (156/199), and the mode of "separation" is performed at a rate of about 21.6% (43/199). The promotion effect is executed. In other words, the rate at which the "separate stitch" is selected is the same (21.6%) regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss. In addition, only the percentage (about 3.5%) that the winning pattern (the production pattern that develops into a single reach with 2 or 3 verticals or the production pattern with 3 horizontals) is selected is out of order. The single-line reach effect has a lower execution rate of the mode promotion effect. In other words, if the production mode of "bare eyes" is set and develops into a single-line reach production, it will be difficult to estimate the jackpot expectation from the mode promotion production mode, so the result of the reach production will be You can pay attention to the end. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 701, for the reach effect of the double line, the mode promotion effect “none” is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223H in the range of “0 to 108”. The range of "109 to 128" is defined in association with the effect mode of "separate stitches", and the range of "129 to 198" is defined in association with the effect mode of "two vertical lines". Has been done. That is, in the double-line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 54.8% (109/199), and the mode promotion effect of "bare eyes" is performed at a rate of about 10% (20/199). Is executed, and the effect mode of "two vertical pieces" is executed at a rate of about 35.2% (70/199). That is, in the double-line reach effect, the selection rate of "separate stitches" and "two vertical lines" is the same regardless of whether the hit or miss. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the jackpot expectation from the mode promotion effect itself when the mode promotion effect of "separate eyes" or "two vertical lines" is executed and develops into a double line reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the content of the suggestion in the reach production and perform the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 701, for the reach effect of the triple line, the mode promotion effect “none” is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223H in the range of “0 to 58”. The range of "59 to 78" is defined in association with the effect mode of "separate stitches", and the range of "79 to 108" is defined in association with the effect mode of "two vertical lines". Therefore, the effect mode of "three vertical alignments" is defined in association with the range of "109 to 198". That is, in the triple line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 29.6% (59/199), and the mode promotion effect of "bare eyes" is performed at a rate of about 10% (20/199). Is executed, and the production mode of "2 vertical alignment" is executed at a rate of about 15.1% (30/199), and "3 vertical alignment" is executed at a ratio of about 45.2% (90/199). The production mode is executed. That is, regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss, the ratio of selecting each of "separate stitch", "vertical two-piece alignment", and "vertical three-piece alignment" is the same. Therefore, if the mode promotion effects of "separate eyes", "vertical 2 pieces", and "vertical 3 pieces" are executed and develop into a triple line reach effect, a big hit from the mode promotion effect itself. Since it becomes difficult to estimate the degree of expectation, it is possible to pay attention to the content of the suggestion in the reach production and perform the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the 24th control example, the mode promotion effect can suggest the effect mode (reach line of the reach effect) executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable effect. Here, in the reach production, the higher the number of reach lines, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be, so the result of the mode promotion production is expected to be a production mode that suggests more reach lines. You can check it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 702, the specified contents of the display data table in the 24th control example will be described. FIG. 702 is a diagram showing an example of a round number display data table set in a round accompanied by a preparation drive of an accessory in the 24th control example. As shown in FIG. 702, the display data table in the 24th control example defines a command to be output to another control device (for example, accessory control device 229) in addition to the drawing contents. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 702, a preparation drive command is defined as a command for the accessory for the end of the drawing content stored in the address "00FAH". Therefore, when the value of the pointer 233F updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 494 (B)) is executed (every 20 milliseconds) becomes the pointer value corresponding to the address "00FAH", the address " In addition to the drawing contents specified in "00FAH", the preparation drive command is read out. When the preparation drive command is read, the preparation drive command is output from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229. With this configuration, the control process for acquiring the drawing contents and the process for outputting the command can be performed collectively, so that the control process can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, since the command can be output by using the value of the pointer 233F provided for acquiring the drawing contents, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 24th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 703 and 704, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th control example will be described. First, the variation display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the 24th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 703. The variation display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the 24th control example is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 487) in the 22nd control example (and the 11th control example), and is the 22nd control. Similar to the variation display setting process (Z2114) in the example (and the eleventh control example), this is a process for determining the mode of the variation display effect according to the variation type (variation time) notified by the variation pattern.

Of the variation display setting processes 14 (see FIG. 703) in the 24th control example, in each process of Z2501 to Z2513, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 487) in the 22nd control example (and the 11th control example), respectively. The same processing as each processing of Z2501 to Z2509 is executed. Further, in the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 703) in the 24th control example, when the process of Z2503 is completed, the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed or not, and the effect mode is drawn by lottery. The mode promotion effect lottery process is executed (Z2571), and the process shifts to Z2504. The details of this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571) will be described with reference to FIG. 704.

FIG. 704 is a flowchart showing a mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571). In this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571), first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z2771), and if it is determined to be a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z2771: YES). Then, the winning table 222KA1 (see FIG. 700 (B)) of the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA is read out (Z2772), and the process is shifted to Z2774. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2771 when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (that is, it is a fluctuation pattern of deviation) (Z2771: NO), the deviation table 222KA2 of the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA (see FIG. 701). ) Is read (Z2773), and the process is transferred to Z2774. In the processing of Z2774, the effect mode (number of reach lines) set for the current variation pattern and the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223H are determined from the table read by the process of Z2772 or Z2773. Then (Z2774), this process is terminated.

By executing this mode promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 704), whether or not the mode promotion effect can be executed and the effect are performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of reach lines of the reach effect executed in the variable display effect. Aspects can be suitably drawn.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the 24th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 705 and 706, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the 24th control example will be described. First, the details of the display setting process 14 (Z3303) in the 24th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 705. This display setting process 14 (Z3303) is a process executed in place of the display setting process (see FIG. 501) in the 22nd control example (and the 11th control example), and is a process executed in place of the 22nd control example (and the 11th control example). ), Based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, as in the display setting process (see FIG. 501). Is a process for specifically specifying.

Of the display setting processes 14 (see FIG. 705) in the 24th control example, in each process of Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321, the display setting process (and FIG. 501) in the 22nd control example (and the 11th control example), respectively. The same processes as those of Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321 of (see) are executed. Further, in the display setting process 14 (see FIG. 705) in the 24th control example, when the Z4305 process is completed, the drawing content acquisition process for acquiring the drawing content for one frame from the content of the display data table is next. Is executed (Z4331), and the process shifts to Z4307. The details of this drawing content acquisition process (Z4331) will be described with reference to FIG. 706.

FIG. 706 is a flowchart showing the drawing content acquisition process (Z4331). In this drawing content acquisition process (Z4331), first, among the display data tables set in the display data table buffer 233D, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233F is acquired (Z4351). Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired drawing content includes the specified content indicating the accessory command (Z4352), and when it is determined that the content indicating the accessory command has been acquired (Z4352: YES). , The command for the accessory of the acquired contents is set to be output to the accessory control device 229 (Z4353), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z4352, if it is determined that the content indicating the command for the accessory is not acquired from the display data table (Z4352: NO), the process of Z4353 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this drawing content acquisition process (see FIG. 706), the control process for acquiring the drawing content and the process for outputting the command can be performed collectively, so that the control process can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, since the command can be output by using the value of the pointer 233F provided for acquiring the drawing contents, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example, the mode promotion effect can be executed as a kind of hobby effect. In this mode promotion effect, before the reach effect occurs, the effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the reach occurs, the number of reach lines, etc. is executed, so that the actual reach effect is performed. Can increase expectations for a big hit before it is executed.

Further, in the 24th control example, a command output instruction to the accessory control device 229 is also included in the specified contents of the display data table in which the drawing contents in various effects are specified for each frame. Then, when the drawing content is acquired from the display data table, if the command seed and force instruction are acquired, the display control device 114 executes the command output together with the acquisition of the drawing content. .. With such a configuration, the control process of the display control device 114 can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, since the command can be output by using the value of the pointer 233F provided for acquiring the drawing contents, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the operation device 300 (frame button) of the pachinko machine 10 in the 11th control example to the 24th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 707 to 746.

FIG. 707 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 707, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and is located in an area composed of a housing recess 17A recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17A so that at least the fingers of the hand can easily enter. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by arranging the fingertip on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 709).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with his left hand.

708 (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 708 (B) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIB-VIB line of FIG. 708 (A), and FIG. 709 (A). Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 709 (B) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIIB-VIIB line of FIG. 709 (A).

In FIGS. 708 and 709, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 708 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312A1 faces in the vertical direction, and FIG. 709 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312A1 is arranged in the second state facing upward and rearward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is shown. In FIG. 709, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "press a button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 139).

Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a method of dropping the hand vigorously downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312A1 moves toward the front side depending on the degree of tilting. The palm and the operation surface 312A1 are easily rubbed against each other. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping his / her hand downward vigorously.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 709, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312A1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to operate by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to forcefully drop the hand downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 710 and 711, the difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view will be described. 710 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 in the arrow VIII directional view of FIG. 708, and FIG. 711 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 in the arrow IX directional view of FIG. 709. In FIGS. 710 and 711, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 711, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 710 and 711, the operation surface 312A1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's point of view in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it becomes invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312A1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311I is gradually increased in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, and the LED device 341F (FIG. 3) is arranged inside the operation device 300 accordingly. Since the amount of light in (see 714) is gradually increased, the difference in the amount of light (degree of lightness and darkness) that the player can see between the first state and the second state becomes large, and the first state and the second state are displayed. The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 711, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 709) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312A1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to operate by lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward.
As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 712 and 713. FIG. 712 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 713 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 712, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 713, the voice coil motor 352 that gives an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that gives the driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner region of the lower frame member 320 is largely used and tilted. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. As a result, a large amount of movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 714 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 715 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 714 and 715, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear side end portion (the back end portion on the paper surface of FIG. 714) and tilting thereof. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defining the push-in end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed portion arranged facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. To the tilting device 310 via the upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and the arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and that constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. It mainly includes a drive device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering the drive device 340 from three sides in the left-right direction and the rear direction.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member having a mode in which the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 which is inclined downward toward the front side and the bottom plate portion 321 thereof. A semi-circular receiving portion and a tilting device 310 that is open upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end portion on the back side of the horizontal portion 322. The lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, the left side detection sensor 324L arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the bottom plate portion 321 horizontally at the center position in the left-right direction. It mainly includes an opening 325, which is an opening opened by scraping a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a plurality of openings so as to determine the moving end of the tilting device 310 by abutting with the tilting device 310, and the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321 through the openings. To.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321A drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321B drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right on the left and right of the opening 325. It mainly includes an insertion hole 321C that is formed symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321A is arranged at the front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the overhanging convex portion 311J of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the overhanging convex portion 311J of the tilting device 310 projects below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321B is a through hole through which the detection pieces 311GL and 311GR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. By arranging the detection pieces 311GL and 311GR protruding from the detection hole 321B in the detection groove of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321C is configured to have a size that allows the shaft portion 311C arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the drive device 340 is operated. A through hole is formed to a position where interference with the 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is formed of a U-shape extending upward from the upper surface thereof and having an open portion on the front side in the cross section. A locking portion 322A is provided.

The locking portion 322A is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322A locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322A acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distances (positions of the detection grooves) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 are the same on the left and right.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. Means a sensor that is arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341F of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width thereof is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341F toward the upper front side (see FIG. 719 (B)), the drive device 341F passes through the opening 325 and then the drive device. By pushing the 340 upward, the LED device 341F can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 is compared with the vertical width including the LED device 341F to the rotary claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face the opening 331, which is an opening having a size for the extension portion 311H extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower bearing portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. It is mainly provided with an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed of a semicircular shape whose lower side is open and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be separable in the vertical direction and is configured to cover three directions except the front side, and is a main body cover 351 fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351 thereof. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and is arranged on the front side and whose vibration surface is directed diagonally forward and upward, a left side detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351 and a right side. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 714 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 712). As a result, when the tilting device 310 projects the overhanging convex portion 311J downward through the transmission hole 321A, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phase of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. Disk cam 344L, 3 of the drive device 340
The 44R is arranged in such a manner that it is arranged inside the detection groove of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344EL and 344ER of the disk cams 344L and 344R are the detection sensors 353L and 3
It is possible to detect whether or not the disc cams are arranged in the detection groove of 53R, and it is possible to detect that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 include the detection holes 344EL and 344ER in different phases, the detection sensors 353L and 35
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by the 3Rs.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 716 to 718. 716 (A) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 716 (B) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVB of FIG. 716 (A), and FIG. 716 (C) is a side view of the tilting device 310. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus 310 in the XIVC-XIVC line of FIG. 716 (A). FIG. 717 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 718 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 716 to 718, the tilting device 310 has a mode in which a case main body 311 composed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and upper and lower openings and a lid on the upper opening of the case main body 311 are covered. A mode in which the lid 312 to be fastened and fixed to the case body 311, the spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312 are sandwiched between them. A ring shape that inseparably fixes the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the rear ends of the shaft portion 314, the torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and the case body 311 and the lid 312. Mainly includes a ring member BR1.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311A that is tilted downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311B opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311A, and left and right of the opening 311B. A cylindrical shaft portion 311C extending downward from a flange extending downward along the edge of the spring to the center side in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311D which is a semicircular concave portion supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And the insertion groove 311E which is a groove where both arm portions 315A of the torsion spring 315 are arranged at a position where they can be inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 311F which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315B of the torsion spring 315. A pair of left and right detection pieces 311GL extending below the bottom plate portion 311A, a right side detection piece 311GR (see FIG. 717), and a extension extending from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311A to the front side by a predetermined amount. The setting portion 311H, the protective lens member 311I which is arranged above the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311A and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and the protective lens member 311I formed of a light transmissive material, and the bottom plate portion. It mainly includes an overhanging convex portion 311J that is projected downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the 311A.

The bottom plate portion 311A is a lower frame member 3 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.
It is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of 20 on a surface.

The opening 311B is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341F of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311C is a cylindrical member inserted into the guide hole 345B of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 719 (B)) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the drive device 340. To prepare for.

The left side detection piece 311GL and the right side detection piece 311GR are the portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 717) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311GL. However, the overhang length is longer than that of the right side detection piece 311GR.

In this embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311GR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311GL with respect to the shaft portion 314 is approximately 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 724) to the push-in end (FIG. 724). The left side detection piece 311GL is projected as compared with the right side detection piece 311GR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to (see 725).

The extension portion 311H is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311I to the front side, and projects to a position where it is locked to the opening portion 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 712). Consists of aspects.

Since the protective lens member 311I is configured to have a curved shape in the top view (see FIG. 716 (A)) and a curved shape in the left-right direction view (see FIG. 716 (C)), the player can use it. The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311J is projected at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311A, and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321A of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 731), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321A and its tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 718, the lid 312 has a top plate member 312A having an operation surface 312A1, an intermediate plate member 312B fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312A, and the intermediate plate member 312B of the top plate member 312A. It is mainly provided with a cylindrical member 312C having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding the LED device 341F in the first state (see FIG. 708).

The cylindrical member 312C improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 708), due to its positional relationship, the light emitted from the LED device 341F toward the tilting device 310 is cylindrical. While it is fastened to the inside of the member 312C, in the second state (see FIG. 709), it is arranged in such a manner that such limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341F can be irradiated over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is configured to have a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311I. , A spherical shell portion 313A formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 by a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315A extending rearward from the left and right outer end portions of the twisted portion, and a central portion 315B connecting the pair of twisted portions. , Equipped with.

Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 719 and 720. 719 (A) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 719 (B) is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIB of FIG. 719 (A), and FIG. 720 is a side view of the drive device 340. It is a front view exploded perspective view of.

As shown in FIGS. 719 and 720, the drive device 340 is a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 that constitutes a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member and a drive motor that generates a driving force. A pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) fixed non-rotatably to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the 342 and its drive motor 342, and the transmission shaft rod 343. 344R), the arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344D of the disc cam 344, and the first overhanging portion 344C1 and the second of the disc cam 344 while being pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341C of the main body member 341. The release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhanging portion 344C3 in the rotational direction, the rotary claw member 347 that is pivotally supported by the release member 346 and that moves relative to each other with the rotation of the release member 346, and the rotary claw member 347 are tilted down. A torsion spring-like first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in a direction to cause a force, and a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in a direction that separates the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 from each other. It mainly includes a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is a motor accommodating portion 3 formed in a U-shape when viewed from above by being bent rearward on the left and right sides.
The shaft support hole 341B which is bored at the same position of the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341A and the motor accommodating portion 341A which is arranged opposite to each other and supports the disk cam 344, and the shaft parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341B. A shaft portion 341C projecting in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341B, an extension portion 341D extending from the motor accommodating portion 341A below the shaft portion 341C, and a motor. Lighting support section 341 extending forward and upward from the accommodating section 341A
Mainly includes E and an LED device 341F arranged at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341E and having an LED light source inside.

The LED device 341F is a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and is a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light).
A part that refracts light) is provided. This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light of the LED device 341F both upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 has a motor accommodating portion 34 inside the U-shape of the motor accommodating portion 341A.
A fixing member 342A to be fastened and fixed to 1A is provided.

The fixing member 342A pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342, and supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343B meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is formed in a perfect circular shape at one end, and is formed in a rectangular shape at the other end and a shaft support hole 345A pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344D of the disk cam 344. Along with this, a guide hole 345B through which the shaft portion 311C (see FIG. 717) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

The guide hole 345B is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345A comes into contact with the shaft portion 311C in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 makes one or more rotations on the opposite end. It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 721. FIG. 721 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343A to which a disc cam 344 (see FIG. 720) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343B that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343A and meshes with the rotary gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343C that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343B and the cylindrical member 343A by moving in the axial direction, and a coil spring 343D that presses the movable clutch 343C against the transmission gear 343B. Mainly prepared for.

The cylindrical member 343A has a fixing portion 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 344 at both ends thereof.
43A1 and 343A2 are provided, and the right fixed portion 343A2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixed portion 343A1. Here, the fixed portion 343A2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
The 43C is formed to have a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343B when it moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343D.

The transmission gear 343B has a perfect circular insertion hole 343B1 into which the cylindrical member 343A is inserted.
The movable clutch 343C is provided with a clutch portion 343B2 in which irregularities along the axial direction are formed at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged opposite to the movable clutch 343C.

Since the insertion hole 343B1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343B can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343A even when the cylindrical member 343A is fixed.

The movable clutch 343C has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343A is inserted.
The 43C1 is provided with a clutch portion 343C2 which is formed with irregularities along the axial direction at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged opposite to the transmission gear 343B and is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343B2. ..

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343B2 and 343C2 have a top angle of about 100.
It consists of a mountain-shaped convex and concave part of °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343C1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343C cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343A. Therefore, the clutch portion 343B2 of the transmission gear 343B and the clutch portion 343C2 of the movable clutch 343C are engaged with each other. Therefore, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343B is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343A via the movable clutch 343C. This makes it possible to rotate the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 720) by rotating the drive motor 342.

The movable clutch 343C is usually a transmission gear 3 due to the urging force of the coil spring 343D.
It is arranged at a position close to 43B, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343B2 and 343C2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343C, the fixed portion 3
It is configured to be movable along 43A2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343B.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. 722. As for the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirrored, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344EL and 344ER, so only the left disk cam 344L. The description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

722 (A) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the arrow XXA direction view of FIG. 720, and FIG. 722 (B) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the arrow XXB direction view of FIG. 720. be. Note that FIGS. 722 (A) and 722 (B) show a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG. 720.

As shown in FIGS. 722 (A) and 722 (B), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is a member at the center position of the disk. A central shaft portion 344A projecting inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344B projecting inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344A, and a circular rib 344B outside the circular rib 344B. The engaging rib 344C, which is convex inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344B and has a portion protruding radially outward at two points, and the outer side between the circular rib 344B and the engaging rib 344C. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344D which is convex in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 720), and a detection hole 344EL which is formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344ER is arranged at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344EL, and the other components are a mirror image of the shape of the left disk cam 344L. ..

The central shaft portion 344A has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner circumference engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343A (see FIG. 721), and the outer circumference is fitted into the shaft support hole 341B (see FIG. 720). It is composed. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341B.

The circular rib 344B is projected to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341A (see FIG. 720) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341B. Thereby, the misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344C protrudes outward in the radial direction at a position deviated by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 722 (A)) from the position where the detection hole 344EL is arranged. From the overhanging portion 344C1 and the first retracting portion 344C2 and the first overhanging portion 344C1 that retract inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344C1 by an angle Θ1 (angle Θ1 = 50 ° in this embodiment). At a position deviated from the angle Θ2 (angle Θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), the second overhanging portion 344C3 is again overhanging outward in the radial direction, and the angle Θ3 (angle in the present embodiment) from the second overhanging portion 344C3. Θ3 = 20 °) Mainly provided with a second retracting portion 344C4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a displaced position.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344D is arranged at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311E of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 724). That is, the connecting pin 344D is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311E of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344A.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. 723. Since the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one of them will be described.

723 (A) and FIG. 723 (B) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. Note that FIG. 723 (A) shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 723 (B) shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346B is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347B). (See FIG. 737).

As shown in FIGS. 723 (A) and 723 (B), the release member 346 has a shaft support hole 346A formed from a substantially rectangular plate member and pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341C (see FIG. 720). From the convex pin 346B having an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346A and protruding in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346C into which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346A. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346D configured as a portion overhanging at the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346D is a portion configured to be in contact with the engaging rib 344C (see FIG. 722) of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 712). In the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the engaging portion 346D is formed to be curved, so that the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be smoothly performed.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and has a shaft support hole 347A pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341C (see FIG. 720) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347A. A guide slot 347B (punched with a size including the movement locus of the convex pin 346B inside) to guide the convex pin 346B of the release member 346, and the end of the second spring SP2. It is possible to insert the insertion hole 347C into which the portion is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347D which is projected downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347A, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 720). It is mainly provided with a pull-down hole 347E drilled in the.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 723 (A), the release member 346 is arranged at the terminal position in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 723 (A)) with respect to the rotary claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the pushing direction is applied to the engaging portion 346D in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion is When a load in the push-up direction is applied to the 346D, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle is small as shown in FIG. 723 (B).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 724 to 726, an operation example in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the first state is described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

724 to 726 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708 (A). Note that FIG. 724 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 725 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 724. Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 725 to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 724 to 726, an example of a player's hand in which the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 724, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 724) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311A is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347D of the rotary claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 724) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 724, the left side detection piece 311GL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311GR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 713).

As shown in FIG. 725, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 725). In this state, the left side detection piece 311GL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311GR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 724 and the state shown in FIG. 725 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. The return of the spring is not in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 resists the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 that pushes down (see FIG. 720), and it is necessary to increase the size of the driving motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost rises and the space cannot be saved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibration operation is arranged at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311J of the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in. To.

As shown in FIG. 726, by driving the voice coil motor 352 from the state shown in FIG. 725 in the extension direction, it is possible to quickly return the tilting device 310 without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player is informed. Since it gives an unnecessary load, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and when the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is calculated. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player repeatedly strikes. This will result in
The player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (fanning operation) up and down from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 727 to 732. 727 to 732 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708 (A).

In addition, in FIG. 727, the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state is shown, and in FIG. 728, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the posture has changed is shown. FIG. 729 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 728, and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 returns. A state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and rotates is shown, FIG. 731 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state of FIG. 730, and FIG. 732 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. 731. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344C3 of the engaging rib 344C is in contact with the engaging portion 346D of the disengaging member 346. Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 730, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 729 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 731, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 727, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341F is housed inside the cylindrical member 312C of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312C is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312C, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be largely secured. As a result, the cylindrical member 312C can exert the effect of improving the intensity as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341F in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 728, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 728) from the state shown in FIG. 727 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state. When rotated in the direction), the first overhanging portion 344C1 of the disc cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346D of the disengaging member 346, so that the disengaging member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 728). Along with this, the rotary claw member 347 rotates in the counterclockwise direction to a position where the tilting device 310 is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311A.

The posture change of the release member 346 is caused by the first retracting portion 344C2 of the engaging rib 344C and the engaging portion 34.
The disc cam 344 is maintained until it faces the 6D until the disc cam 344 is rotated, during which the tilting device 310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 (rotated clockwise in FIG. 728).

At this time, in the states of FIGS. 727 and 728, the shaft portion 311C of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345B of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the movement of the tilting device 310 in the ascending direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 becomes an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 729, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 729) and the first retracting portion 344C2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346D of the release member 346, Due to the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 729), and the rotary claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 729). Return to the state shown in 727). At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 729), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member The 347 rotates while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG. 728.

In this state, the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341F, and the area visible from the player's point of view of the protective lens member 311I increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341F can be irradiated in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341F can be changed, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 730, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 730) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 729, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction by the same amount (FIG. 730 counterclockwise). By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 730), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 730. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341F, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 730, since the spherical shell portion 313A of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 730) of the LED device 341F, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341F is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 730).

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341F travels upward, and the irradiation range thereof is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312C. (See Fig. 727). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 ascends from the first state, the light of the LED device 341F is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 731, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 730, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 730, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311C Only moves through the guide hole 345B of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 730, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 720). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 731, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 730 to the end of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311A of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347D of the rotary claw member 347 to push the rotary claw. When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 731) and the bottom plate portion 311A passes through the hook-shaped portion 347D by subsequently pushing the tilting device 310, the rotating claw member 347 becomes the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 730. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 731, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force that assists the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 726), and the purpose is to vibrate the tilting device 310 arranged at the push-in end position to produce a vibration effect. Can be used for.

As shown in FIG. 732, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311J of the tilting device 310 is the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 toward the end.

Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, it is determined whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing when the tilting device 310 is pushed.
Only the player who pushed the tilting device 310 into operation can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 is not operated at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when the jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and operates the tilting device 310. It is possible to improve the value as a look-ahead means.
As a result, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 732, from the state shown in FIG. 731, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 731) until the second overhanging portion 344C1 abuts on the engaging portion 346D of the disengaging member 346. By rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction), the drive device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

The second initial state is a state in which the engaging rib 344C and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344C1 comes into contact with the engaging rib 344C, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344C3 and the engaging rib 344C come into contact with each other.

From the state shown in FIG. 731, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 731), and the first overhanging portion 344C1 of the engaging rib 344C passes through the engaging portion 346D and then rotates in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 731 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 727. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 731) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 733 to 736, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (fanning operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state (the tilting operation). The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (fanning operation) of reciprocating up and down through the second state.

733 to 736 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708 (A). In FIG. 733, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 733) from the state shown in FIG. 732, and the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 733). 734 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state from the state shown in FIG. 733, and FIG. 735 shows the state shown in FIG. 734. A state in which the disk cam 344 reciprocates and rotates is shown, and FIG. 736 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 735. Further, in FIG. 735, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 734 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 736, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 733, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 733) from the state shown in FIG. 732, the engagement between the rotary claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released and the disc cam is tilted. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345B of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311C of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disk cam 344. The tilting device 310 can be moved up with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 734, the posture of the disk cam 344 is tilted by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 733 (the state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged). The 310 can be placed in a posture in which it can be arranged in the second state (a posture in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state in a short period of time from the state shown in FIG. 732, the disk cam 344 interferes with the state change (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

As shown in FIG. 735, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 734) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 734), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 735. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341F, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 735, since the spherical shell portion 313A of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 735) of the LED device 341F, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341F is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 735).

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 735 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 730. That is, in the present embodiment, as an aspect of the vertical movement of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movements (fanning movements), that is, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 730 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. This can be done immediately after the restriction on the ascending movement of the device 310 is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to make two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342.

As a result, the operating member 310 can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big hit) in the operation mode as compared with the case where the operating member 310 performs the same operation each time, and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 735, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 734, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 735, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion). The 311C only moves through the guide hole 345B of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311C from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 735, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 720). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 736, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into operation, the bottom plate portion 311A of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347D of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311A passes through the hook-shaped portion 347D by rotating in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 736) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 735 (see FIG. 736), the tilting device 310 is put into the first state. Can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 737 to 739, an operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotary claw member 347 after the pushing operation by the player will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (fanning movements) of the tilting device 310, or to continuously perform one of them.

737 to 739 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708 (A). FIG. 737 illustrates a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 737) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 737) from the state shown in FIG. 736. In FIG. 738, after the rotary cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 737) more than the state shown in FIG. The state of rotation (FIG. 737 counterclockwise) is shown, and in FIG. 739, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 738 counterclockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 738 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. The state in which the sensor 353L is turned on is illustrated. In FIGS. 737 to 739, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 737, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 736) from the state shown in FIG. Contact with 346D. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 is changed by pushing up the release member 346 by the engaging rib 344C, but the convex pin 346B of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide slot 347B of the rotary claw member 347. It stays and the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 737.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 737) from the state shown in FIG. 737 to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344C and the disengaging member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 737, the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 737), and then the rotary cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 737). As shown in, the drive device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 738, but the disk cam 344 goes through the second initial state shown in FIG. 738. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 738, it is possible to perform a vertical movement (fanning operation) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. be.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by pushing the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the effect and forgetting to release the operated hand. In this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the regulation by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 may be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 717) of the lower frame member 320 is turned ON in the state where the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 738) from the state shown in FIG. 738. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 739, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 is used. (See FIG. 716) is controlled in a mode in which the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned on.

In the state shown in FIGS. 738 and 739, the tilting device 310 does not ascend due to the player's hand being placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, from the state shown in FIG. 738 to the state shown in FIG. 739. The change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 737 to 739, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is continuously placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 717) is maintained in the ON state when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 733) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately rotate in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 738. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and an unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 720) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 740 and 741, the device for preventing the destruction of the drive device 340 will be described. 740 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 708 (A), and FIG. 741 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 740. In addition, in FIG. 740, the hand of the player who grasps and fixes the tilting device 310 in the state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 741, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 740, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state of FIG. 740. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 741) starts to rotate, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343B, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 720) may break down. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343B is configured to be able to rotate idly with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343A fixing the disk cam 344, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 741, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343B is urged in the rotational direction, so that the transmission gear 343B is urged in the rotational direction via the clutch portions 343B2 and 343C2. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343C moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343B. As a result, the engagement between the transmission gear 343B and the movable clutch 343C can be disengaged, and the transmission gear 343B can be idled. This makes it possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

If the player does not grasp the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state if the disk cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operating device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °).
When the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 is not turned on (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, for example, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while notifying the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation and notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343B and the movable clutch 343C are separated from each other to cause a phase shift,
The initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343C are out of phase. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is turned on.
By detecting that the state has been reached, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 has reached the first initial state, so that the control of the drive motor 352 is restarted with that state as the initial position (of the drive motor 342). By resetting the initial phase), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343B and the movable clutch 343C, the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are controlled in a realigned state. It can be performed.

As a result, the drive motor 342 is used when the tilting device 310 is operated to produce an effect.
It is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the tilting device 310. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343B and the movable clutch 343C, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform the effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 741, the movable clutch 343C is configured to idle with respect to the transmission gear 343B regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343B. The necessity will be described below.

742, 743, 744 and 745 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 on line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708 (A). Note that FIG. 742 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 740, and FIG. 743 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 742. The state where 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW is shown. Further, FIG. 744 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 740, and FIG. 745 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 744. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CW is shown.

As shown in FIG. 743, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves upright toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 742. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 745, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 744.

This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344C operates in such a manner that it separates from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 744 to the state shown in FIG. 745, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344C comes into contact with the release member 346, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344C abuts on the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344C, and the rotary claw No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, the operations from FIG. 740 to the first state shown in FIGS. 742 and 744 all appear to be the same operation, and the subsequent movements after the first state is reached. Will be different in either FIG. 743 or FIG. 745.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by the control of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 741), but the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in the change, the player may notice the mode of control being performed, and the player may be aware of the effect to be performed, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 becomes large, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 740 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is Since the direction is different only, it can be difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction depending on the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is operating toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, the player confirms whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, so that the player can produce the effect. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player can see the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 740) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. You can make them watch over.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 741) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the burden given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. This can improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, with reference to FIG. 746, even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 746 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708 (A). In addition, in FIG. 746, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in a predetermined amount forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 746) from the first initial state (see FIG. 727) of the drive device 340 is shown, and the first state is shown. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 746) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344C1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346D of the disengaging member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. ..

As shown in FIG. 746, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344C1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344C1 and the first retracting portion 344C2 engage with the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship that does not pass through the 346D, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 746) as the posture of the release member 346 changes. Even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and operated by the player in the case of vertical movement, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases the hand. It is possible to carry out an operation mode in which the claw member 347 moves upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues the vertical movement.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the operation is performed by providing a difference in production between the above-mentioned first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. 746. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the movement was performed or the movement was performed up and down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). Assuming that the difference is that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since the opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide a lot of timings for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

Further, depending on the above-mentioned set value, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different, the probability of winning a small hit is different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the selection ratio. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by paying attention to the player.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be executed. When it is received, the set value currently set may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the discriminant result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when the configuration in which the above-mentioned set value can be set is used, the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol is changed for each set value according to the set set value. Various parameters may be specified, and if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including the advantage to the player.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, the probability change state is set to a specification that continues until the change display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal gaming state is executed every time the special symbol changes, and the lottery is performed. By winning the game, the player may be configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the normal game state. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is unfavorable to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal gaming state is different. You may try to do it.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high-probability state of a normal symbol, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a specific number of fluctuations, the time is shortened. When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the variable number end condition is satisfied, when the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small hit is won by the special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied. Then, it may be configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low-probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time reduction state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time reduction end condition that is satisfied, the range obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the shortened working hours condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the conditions for ending the reduced working hours, the electric accessory 640A may be operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods during which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the shortened working hours end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed contents of the shortened working hours end condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the winning of the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on the above.

In each of the above control examples, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203D is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and the normal state is in progress. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the operation means is configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or close proximity. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22B (1022B, 1122B), and the third frame button (release button) 22C. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

Further, depending on the above-mentioned set value, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different, the probability of winning a small hit is different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the selection ratio. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by paying attention to the player.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be executed. When it is received, the set value currently set may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the discriminant result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when the configuration in which the above-mentioned set value can be set is used, the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol is changed for each set value according to the set set value. Various parameters may be specified, and if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including the advantage to the player.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, the probability change state is set to a specification that continues until the change display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal gaming state is executed every time the special symbol changes, and the lottery is performed. By winning the game, the player may be configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the normal game state. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is unfavorable to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal gaming state is different. You may try to do it.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high-probability state of a normal symbol, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a specific number of fluctuations, the time is shortened. When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the variable number end condition is satisfied, when the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small hit is won by the special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied. Then, it may be configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low-probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time reduction state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time reduction end condition that is satisfied, the range obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the shortened working hours condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the conditions for ending the reduced working hours, the electric accessory 640A may be operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods during which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the shortened working hours end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed contents of the shortened working hours end condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the winning of the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on the above.

In each of the above control examples, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203D is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203D increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and the normal state is in progress. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the operation means is configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or close proximity. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22B (1022B, 1122B), and the third frame button (release button) 22C. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be determined. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. In setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game property in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like different from the above embodiments and control examples. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be determined. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. In setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of spheres are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Further, the configurations of the above embodiments and the control examples may be configured to be implemented in whole or in combination.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
It is provided with a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is high. The gaming machine A1 is provided with an emission increasing means for increasing emission, and the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light are provided from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device via the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. Then, it is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged in the reflecting portion, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly show (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiation means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption are increased, but also the amount of heat generated is increased, which causes a problem that heat affects other members and devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is provided, the light reflected by the reflecting portion is provided. The light emitted from the front of the transmissive member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the calorific value can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be difficult for the player to see it, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance by that amount.

The position of forming the reflective portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmitting member or the inside of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A2, since the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitting means irradiates the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly but also the light that is emitted from the light irradiating means and reflected by the outer edge member can be incidented from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member by that amount can be incident. The light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light that reaches the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light irradiating means, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the calorific value can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the other device in the game area emits light. Can prevent the outer edge member from blocking the light of the other device and incident light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end surface and that deviates to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that deviates to the back side are reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved by that amount.

Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, even if the light emitted by another device in the gaming area arrives from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the display of patterns and patterns on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means can be emitted. , It is possible to reflect the light at the overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved by that amount.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A5, in any of the effects of the game machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, and thus is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be collected from the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since it can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary with and, it is possible to secure the light that reaches the reflecting portion.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A6, in the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in the refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

In any of the game machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear. A game machine A7 characterized by being provided with a driving means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member has both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate the light. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by that amount, reduce the product cost, and improve the reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

In any of the game machines A2 to A7, the light transmitting member is rotatably supported and a rotation mechanism for applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotating mechanism is recessed and includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed by the action of the guide groove and the support ring, that is, light. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can have both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved by simplifying the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably pivotally supported, or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as the form in which the support ring is guided along the guide groove, the support ring rotatably supported by the shaft rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or becomes non-rotatable. An example is a mode in which a fixed support ring slides along a guide groove.

Further, in the gaming machine A8 which is subordinate to the gaming machine A7, the outer edge member in which the curved rack gear is engraved is on either the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member in which the guide groove is recessed is the light transmitting member. It is preferable to dispose of them on the other side of the front surface or the back surface, respectively. That is, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light radiated from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Further, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, the light emitted by the other device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Even in this case, it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, and it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the opposite space between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the outer peripheral side thereof is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side thereof faces the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member are formed. Since the space opposite to the guide groove is used as a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by supporting one inner wall of the guide groove on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is directed to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Alternatively, it can be easily reflected on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means has a direction of irradiating light from the irradiating surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end faces of the light transmitting member are formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means thereof irradiates the light transmitting member. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated from the light irradiation means. The light incident from the light can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<Concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which each of the target members faces an irradiation surface, the plurality of light emitting means. It is provided with one or a plurality of substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate member in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Characteristic gaming machine B1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in such a posture that each of the target members faces an irradiation surface (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015). -29735 (publication). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from a light emitting means and incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light is advanced inside the light transmitting member and reflected by a reflecting portion. It can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member in a disk shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflective portion, while irradiating a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). We devised a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member (not known at the time of filing the present application).

However, it has been newly found that in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light emitting means around the target member, there is a problem that the disposition work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which each irradiation surface is directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each has a different orientation), the disposition work is troublesome from this point as well. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of substrate members formed so as to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. By disposing one substrate member on the base member, it is possible to complete the disposing work of at least two or more light emitting means. Therefore, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the substrate member is arranged on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the labor of disposing the light emitting means can be suppressed from this point as well.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the gaming machine B1 is provided with a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member and is arranged on the substrate member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is provided on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. , It is possible to suppress warpage and bending of the substrate member and easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine B2, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is arranged in the region where the block body is arranged in the substrate member, so that the posture of the light emitting means is the warp of the substrate member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be further easily maintained.

In the gaming machines B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the substrate members at predetermined intervals, and the base members are elastically deformed from the substrate members located between the block bodies. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board members at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since it is held by the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is the substrate member on the opposite side to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the back surface.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is arranged on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front surface of the board member, and the head of the screw is projected to the front surface of the board member.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw is projected to the front surface of the substrate member, so that the light emitting means can be used. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, and it is possible to prevent the member from being in contact with the light emitting means and being damaged.

In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

It is preferable that the two screws are arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, it is possible to easily bring the movable member into contact with the head of the screw, and it is possible to easily protect the light emitting means.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected from one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving and fitting the protrusion is formed on the other side of the base body or the block body. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being recessed in.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of either the game machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected on one of the base body and the block body, and the protrusion is received and fitted to the one of the base body and the block body. Since the hole is recessed in the other side of the base body or the block body, the block body can be arranged in the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the arrangement work can be suppressed. .. In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one of the block bodies is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a recess on the surface on the side where the board member is disposed, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recess of the block body. A gaming machine B9 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine B9, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a recess on the surface on the side where the block body is disposed, and is disposed on the substrate member in the recess of the block body. Since the electronic parts are stored, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a movable member from coming into contact with an electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game including a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. In the machine, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as it is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state of being disposed on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, the base member, the displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and the driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. A gaming machine is known to provide an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position (for example, either the first position or the second position) which is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game. When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the movement of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. The production is performed so that the person can see it. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so that it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided with an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is the first from the first position due to the action of gravity. It is arranged on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction toward the two positions, and in a state where the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member is centered on this equilibrium position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravity direction can be regarded as the normal projection motion of the constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (movement of normal projection of constant velocity circular motion). It is possible to increase the variation of displacement accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased only by switching whether or not the driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, and the structure and control do not need to be complicated, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved. It can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is characterized in that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member by releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a displacement that combines not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion centered on one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

The gaming machine C2 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means is a rotating member rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a connecting member having one end rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the transmission means are rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentricity from the rotation center of the rotating member. Since one end is connected to the displaced position and the other end is connected to the displacement member, the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are provided. When reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to force is performed on the displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, and the pushing and pulling causes the rotating member to rotate. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. It is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

In the game machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, with respect to the direction connecting the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the directions connecting the connecting positions of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting positions of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to each other.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member are connected. Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the and, the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the equilibrium position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is smaller than the central range. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to the above, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating or connecting members comprises a protruding portion that projects towards the other and is between the first and second positions. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the predetermined position in the movable range of the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the first position from the central side range or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the driving force applied from the driving means to the displacement member is released. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement centered on the equilibrium position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion in the central range. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the projecting portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable in the outer range, and the displacement members are rotated. It is possible to suppress rattling between the member and the connecting member.

In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center side range, and the center side range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central side range, and the central side range includes a predetermined position and a second position. Since it is set in the range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing the rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member by using the projecting portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, which acts on the displacement member. It is possible to smoothly displace the displacement member while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is the retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is the overhang position where the displacement member projects toward the center side of the game area. At the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the effect of other members can be suppressed from being hindered, and the displacement member can be suppressed. Is displaced from the first position to the second position (overhanging position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. ..

In the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. The gaming machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since it is located on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the center of rotation of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is generated. A state that does not occur (that is, a dead point) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, the second displacement member can be smoothly (quickly) displaced while avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion. After being placed at the position, the action of the dead center described above suppresses the rattling of the displacement member, and the appearance and durability can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting positions of the member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the side opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. Game machine C8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is a displacement member and a base. Since it is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. , When the displacement member rattles against the base member, the contact portion of the connecting member comes into contact with the base member, so that the connecting portion of the rotating member and the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member can rotate). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation axis) with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means are the first drive means and the first drive means. Two driving means are provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performing an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while when a predetermined game state is formed, the displacement member is stretched over the game area. The displacement member is displaced toward the protruding position, and the player is made to visually recognize the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position.

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, the displacement mode (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, so the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to produce a surprising effect for the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the driving means includes a first driving means and a second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. (2) Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the drive means, the effect of the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited in one way, the effect is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since the displacement can be performed according to the displacement mode, the player can perform a surprising effect by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member that is slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first drive means, and a second drive means that is slidably displaceable on the base member. The gaming machine D2 is provided with a second member driven by the displacement member, and the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member at least rotatably, respectively. ..

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the first member is displaceably displaced on the base member and is slidably displaceable on the base member and the first member driven by the first driving means. The first and second portions of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively, with a second member driven by the second drive means. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the second member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In particular, according to the gaming machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the center of rotation the same and different the direction of rotation, but forming the center of rotation differently and the center of rotation differently. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from the first portion of the displacement member or one of the first members is provided. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first part or the first member of the displacement member. Since the connecting pin projecting from is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means or the driving force of the second driving means. A displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement with a curved locus (with a curved locus). If there is, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. (Given), for example, a rack pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other. In addition to the displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, the displacement in which both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Aspects can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player by switching such displacement modes.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the type of displacement itself is different in addition to the one that makes the direction of rotation different from the position of the center of rotation. (That is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), so that the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is possible to further facilitate the surprising effect of the player.

In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being speed.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first drive means and the second drive means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second member. Since the displacement velocity is different from the displacement velocity of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include the rotational motion and the linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linear motion) in parallel with the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines such rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , It is possible for the first time to use the driving means of 2 as in the present invention.

In any of the game machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement thereof. The second displacement member is displaced together with the member, while the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Amusement machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. , The device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

<Concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiating means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiating means is formed displaceably. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the above.

Here, a game in which a displacement member displaceably formed between the first position and the second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member are provided, and the effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this gaming machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is arranged inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a light transmissive material is provided on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the displacement member, and the translucency thereof is provided. By irradiating the light portion from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (translucent portion) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem that there is little change in the mode visually recognized by the player, and it is difficult to have a hobby.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed so as to be displaceable, and the displacement of one or both changes the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means. It is possible to change the mode in which the player visually recognizes. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

As the mode in which the light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. The form to be used, the form in which these are combined, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

In the game machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player from the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. Formed from a transmissive material in a plate shape and provided with a reflecting portion, the light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A game machine E3 featuring.

Here, in the reflecting portion, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, different parts of the target member can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position in which the first group of the plurality of groups constituting the reflective portion is visible through the opening and a second group different from the first group are the openings. When the target member is displaceable from the second position which becomes visible via While making the player visually recognize the first pattern or pattern to be formed, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member can be obtained. , Can be changed to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in a front view, and is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Game machine E4 to play.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a front view circular shape or an annular shape, and can rotate to the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as the center of rotation. Since it is arranged in, the target member is arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member, as compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced. Space required for can be suppressed.

In the game machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material in the shape of a circular plate in front view and has a reflecting portion, and receives light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface. A plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed toward the side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape and has a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. can.

In the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiating means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( Regardless of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily kept constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member. It is possible to increase the variation of the change of the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the mode in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

The gaming machine E7 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it is provided, and the light irradiation means is a target displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. When the members are in contact with each other, they are displaced together with the target member, so that the drive means for displacing the target member can also be used, and it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for displacing the light irradiation means. can.

<Characteristic F group> (Countdown notice can be set freely)
Among the different production periods, the effect period setting means for setting one effect period, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect in the specific period set within the one effect period, and the specific effect execution means are described above. A second information different from the first information, in which a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect for notifying in advance that a specific effect is to be executed and a trigger for starting the notification effect are set based on a predetermined first information. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by having a notification effect setting means for setting an end trigger of the notification effect based on information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won the prize. Then, among the effects executed for a predetermined period, a game in which a advance notification effect (countdown effect) that notifies the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) is executed can be executed. There is a machine. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-198568).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by notifying the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect is executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the player's expectation for a big hit. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is to be executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set, so that the effect content becomes monotonous. There was a problem that the player got tired of the production early. Further, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the effect mode of the advance notification effect is changed (for example, a specific effect to be the target of the advance notification effect is changed while the advance notification effect is being executed. ), And there was a problem that the production effect could not be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine F1, a start trigger is set based on the first information by the notification effect setting means as an execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is executed, and based on the second information. The end opportunity is set. As a result, since the period for executing the notification effect is set based on a plurality of different information, the period for executing the notification effect can be freely set, and there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 has an execution information discriminating means for discriminating the execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting means uses the execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information discriminating means as the second information. A gaming machine F2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is executed is set as the second information to set the end trigger of the notification effect, so that the execution information of the specific effect is set. It is possible to set the notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed, so that there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F2, the execution information determining means is characterized in that at least the timing at which the specific effect is executed is determined.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is executed is set as the second information to set the end trigger of the notification effect, so that the execution timing of the specific effect is set. It is possible to set the notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, there is a specific effect setting means for setting one of the specific effects having different execution timings. A gaming machine F4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to easily set a notification effect according to the timing at which the specific effect is executed for a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings. can. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the period during which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means is different from the timing of setting the start trigger of the notification effect based on the first information, and the end trigger of the notification effect is set based on the second information. The gaming machine F5, which is characterized by setting.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification effect can be set at different timings, so that the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set. It has the effect of being able to enhance the effect of production.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification effect period setting means sets the end trigger of the notification effect based on the second information while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. The featured gaming machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F5, it is possible to set the end trigger of the notification effect after the notification effect is executed, so that the notification effect is executed after the notification effect is executed. The execution period will be set. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, and there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is not set at what timing the notification effect is targeted at the time when the notification effect is executed, the content of the notification effect is predicted in advance by the player. It can be reliably prevented.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation effect execution means that executes an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation executed by the operation effect execution means. It has an operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated during the effect, and the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the notification effect based on the determination result of the operation determining means. The gaming machine F7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect period of the notification effect is set based on the operation content of the operating means during the operation effect, so that the player participates in the effect. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means has a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period in which the notification effect is executed. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, at least, the second notification effect period is set based on the second information.

According to the gaming machine F8, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the second notification effect period can be set based on the second information among the periods during which the notification effect is executed, so that the notification effect period can be freely set. In the gaming machine that can be set to, it is possible to secure a period for executing the effect based on the second information, and there is an effect that the effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the notification effect execution means executes a time-dependent effect that suggests a period until the specific effect is executed during the second notification effect period. Machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F8, the timekeeping effect can be executed during the second notification effect period, so that the player can be informed of the timing when the specific effect is executed in an easy-to-understand manner. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine F9, based on the notification effect period determining means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means and the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means. The gaming machine F10 is characterized by having a time-lapse effect period setting means for setting a period during which the time-lapse effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F9, the period for executing the time-lapse effect is executed for a certain period by the time-lapse effect period setting means based on the length of the effect period for which the notification effect is executed. Since the timing obtained by subtracting a certain period from the execution timing of the specific effect is determined as an opportunity to execute the time-dependent effect, the start timing of the specific effect is accurate even if a different effect period is set by the effect period setting means. It has the effect of being able to suggest to the player.

In any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets an effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information. (1) The gaming machine F11 comprising a first effect mode changing means for changing the first effect mode when a predetermined effect variable condition is satisfied during the notification effect period.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period is established while the first effect is being executed. It is variable when the possible effect variable condition is satisfied. As a result, after the notification effect is executed, the effect mode of the notification effect can be changed, so that there is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F12 is characterized in that the effect variable condition is satisfied when the end trigger of the notification effect is set by the notification effect setting means.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the end trigger of the notification effect is set and the effect period of the notification effect is fixed, the effect mode of the first effect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first effect corresponding to the set end trigger, and it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine F1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect execution means that executes the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. It has an operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect executing means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect executing means. The gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on the determination result by the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the end trigger of the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to change the effect period of the notification effect by the operation of the player, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F13 has a specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the determination result by the operation determination means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F14, characterized in that the information for the purpose is the second information.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F13, a specific period in which the specific effect is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect, and the specific period is set. Since the effect period of the notification effect can be changed based on the effect, there is an effect that the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed.

In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period from a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific effect executing means is set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F15, characterized in that the specific effect corresponding to the specific period is executed.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F14, the specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed, so that the specific effect different depending on the operation content of the operating means is executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically participated.

In the game machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period in which the notification effect is executed. The operation effect executing means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and the length of the second notification effect period corresponds to the specific period set by the specific period setting means. It has a means for varying the effect period to be made variable. A gaming machine F16 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period. The length of the notification effect is changed by changing the length of the second notification effect period based on the operation content to the operation means during the operation effect. Therefore, when the length of the notification effect is changed, the period during which the operation effect is executed can be secured, so that there is an effect that the effect that makes it easy for the player to operate the operation means can be executed.

<Characteristic G group> (Variations of HP display)
The variable effect is executed by the determination means that executes the determination based on the effect information, the variable effect execution means that executes the variable effect that changes the effect value based on the determination result by the determination means, and the effect execution means. When the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means for determining the first effect value for varying the effect value and the first effect value determining means, the effect value is determined. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the above.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the jackpot has been won. Then, as a variable effect, a game machine that executes an effect (battle effect) in which the own character and the enemy character play against each other and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot is won according to the value of each physical strength point at the end of the effect. be. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-9075).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the effect of reducing the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during the battle effect, and it is specified whether or not the reduced physical strength points are won by the player as a big hit. By notifying the player in advance of the timing at which the effect of the above is executed, it was possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the expectation of the player for the jackpot. Further, by setting the physical strength points to be reduced during the battle production in detail, the production pattern of the battle production is increased, and the player is prevented from getting bored with the battle production. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the detailed physical strength points displayed on the display screen are managed, and the next physical strength points are set based on the managed physical strength points, so that the physical strength points are reduced. There is a problem that the amount of processing for management becomes enormous. In addition, it is possible to simplify the management of reducing the physical strength points by reducing the pattern of reducing the physical strength points during the battle production, but in this case, the production pattern of the battle production will be reduced, and the player will be early. There was a problem of getting bored with.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the value determined by a plurality of determination means, it is easier to increase the variation of the effect value as compared with the case where the effect value is determined by one determination means. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine G1, the effect value is set when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means capable of setting the specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed and the effect state setting means. The effect value updating means includes a effect value updating means that continuously and variably updates, and a first effect value storage means that can store the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining means. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value stored in the first effect value storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, when the effect value determined based on the first effect value and the second effect value is variably updated in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, the effect value is not the sum of the effect values but the first effect value. Since only one effect value is stored and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, the actually displayed effect value (the effect value obtained by adding the first effect value and the second effect value) With respect to the display pattern, it is possible to reduce the pattern of the value (first effect value) that is variably updated by the effect value update means, and there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on a variable amount of the effect value that is variably updated by the effect value update means, and an effect for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine G3 characterized by having an aspect display means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, the effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect update means is displayed. There is an effect that the variable amount of the effect value can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of the effect value, the second effect value is composed of a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the effect value are described. The gaming machine G4 is characterized by having an effect value summing means for calculating the effect value by adding it to the second effect value.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the first effect value which is a part of the effect value and the second effect value different from the first effect value are added up by the effect value summing means. Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be made more diverse.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a discriminant means for executing the discriminant when a predetermined discriminant condition is satisfied and a privilege are granted based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discriminant result. The gaming machine G5 is provided with a privilege granting means, and the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the determination by the determination means is executed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined and the effect value is variable when the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed. The effect can be executed so as to be related to the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the variable situation of the effect value and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determining means determines the second effect value based on the determination of the first effect value by the first effect value determining means. The gaming machine G6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the first effect value is determined, the second effect value is determined, so that the first effect value and the second effect are determined. The effect value that is the sum of the values is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the effect value that has been changed due to the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and it is possible to provide the fun of predicting.

In the gaming machine G5 or G6, the gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the first effect value determining means makes the discriminating means different the variable amount of the first effect value based on the discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the effect value can be made different based on the determination result of the discrimination means, so that the variable amount of the effect value can be different for the player. It has the effect of being able to gaze at and enhance the effect of the production.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determining means facilitates determination of the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the effect value, the easier it is to give a privilege. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the second effect value determined by the second effect value determining means can be selected as a first range or a second range different from the first range. The second effect value determination means has a selection range storage means having the above, and a determination value determination means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is equal to or higher than a predetermined value. The means is to select one selection range from a plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means to determine the second effect value. The gaming machine G9 featuring.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, if the selection range in which the second effect value is selected differs depending on whether or not the first effect value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect value.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means has a first selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be increased or decreased is stored as the second effect value, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. The second effect value determination means determines that the determination result of the determination value determination means is less than a predetermined value. The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that the second selection range is selected and the second effect value is set.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G9, when the first effect value is less than a predetermined value, the second effect value for reducing the first effect value is selected, so that the first effect is selected. It is possible to prevent the effect value, which is the sum of the value and the second effect value, from becoming larger than the first effect value. As a result, for example, when the lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to suppress the determination of a value larger than the lower limit value as the effect value, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect.

<Characteristic H group> (Notification of suggestion of advantageous period of fall lottery machine)
When the predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, the first discrimination means for executing the discrimination and the privilege game execution for executing the privilege game when the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is the predetermined first discrimination result. The means, the high-probability state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result, and the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means are predetermined rather than the high-probability state. When the predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied in the state where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means that can set the low probability state that is unlikely to be the first discrimination result and the probability setting means. The probability setting means has a second discrimination means for executing the discrimination, and sets the low probability state when the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied and a second gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first gaming state. In a gaming machine having a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for notifying the period in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the game state setting means is described as described above. In the state where the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set when the first condition is satisfied, and the period effect executing means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. The period effect including the first effect for showing and the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is repeatedly executed, and the first condition is determined by the probability setting means. It is established when both the first requirement that the low-probability game is set and the second requirement that the determination is executed a predetermined number of times by the first determination means in the state where the first gaming state is set are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a period effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the period effect in response to the establishment information of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state in which the probability of winning is high) that is advantageous to the player based on the winning. There is a gaming machine that suggests to the player whether or not the period in which the gaming state continues ends by the result of the effect (for example, the battle effect). (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-143197).

In such a conventional gaming machine, when the winning pattern is won when the advantageous gaming state continues, the production result of the winning pattern in which the own character wins is displayed, and when the winning is won when the advantageous gaming state ends, the own character is selected. The battle effect is displayed so that the effect result of the defeat pattern that is defeated is displayed, and if the winning is not won (when the advantageous game state is still set), the effect result of the draw pattern that does not win or lose is displayed. Since it is executed, the content of the battle effect can be watched by the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, when the game is executed without winning for a long period of time in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to execute the battle effect in which the effect result of the draw pattern is displayed as a result, and the player for the battle effect. There was a problem that the degree of expectation of was lowered. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a specific variation pattern is drawn without winning as a result of the lottery, the battle effect of the draw pattern is executed. When a specific fluctuation pattern is continuously drawn, there is a problem that the battle effect of the draw pattern is continuously executed and the player's expectation for the battle effect is further lowered.

According to the gaming machine H1, among the period effects executed in the state where the first game state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the first requirement and the second requirement are satisfied based on the effect mode of the second effect. As a result, even when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the effect mode of the second effect to be newly executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early with respect to the period production.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a first effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the production mode of the first effect for showing whether or not the first condition is satisfied is, in addition to the effect result of the second effect, the first requirement or. Since it is set based on whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, it is necessary to predict the result of whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the situation until the first condition is satisfied, depending on the production mode of the first effect. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more closely watched by the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the effect mode of the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is based on the presence or absence of the first requirement or the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict the situation until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the second effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when any of the first requirement and the second requirement is satisfied. The featured gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the effect of the period effect is changed by satisfying one of the plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition. It is variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the period effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting means is the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it sets an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the determination result.

According to the gaming machine H5, the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game while giving the player a sense of crisis, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period effect executing means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the ease with which the effect switching condition is satisfied differs depending on whether the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the case where the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the case where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the case where the low probability state is set are the first. Since the frequency at which one effect is executed can be made different, it is possible to predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect.

The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that it has a condition setting means for facilitating the establishment of the effect switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H6, the first effect can be easily executed for a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the period effect executing means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. The gaming machine H8 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the discrimination result of the first discriminating means is the discriminating result of executing the privilege game. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, the effect is watched while being aware of both whether or not the privilege game is won or whether or not the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the performance to be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, there is a number measuring means for measuring the number of times of the period effect that is continuously executed while the first gaming state is continuously set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine H9 is characterized in that the second effect mode setting means sets the second effect mode based on the number of executions of the period effect measured by the number of times measuring means.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the second effect mode is set based on the number of times the period effect is repeated. When the gaming state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same effect mode from being repeatedly set as the second effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, the effect period determining means for determining the effect period after the first effect is executed by the period effect execution means, and the state in which the predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied, the said When the effect period determined by the effect period determination means is within a predetermined period, the effect control means for restricting the execution of the first effect by the period effect execution means is provided. The featured gaming machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the effect switching condition is satisfied, it is determined that the effect period after the first effect is executed is within a predetermined period. If so, the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect regulating means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of the first effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the execution of the first effect.

In the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result is not regulated by the effect regulating means. The featured gaming machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the privileged game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the effecting period determining means, so that the privileged game is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect when it is executed. Further, when the first effect is executed again within a predetermined effect period after the previous first effect is executed, the expectation that the privilege game is executed can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. There is an effect.

<Characteristic J group> (The target effect is different depending on the notification timing of the expected increase effect)
The expectation display control means capable of displaying a plurality of expectation display modes capable of suggesting the expectation degree for indicating that a predetermined condition is satisfied in a stepwise manner on the display means, and the expectation display control means displayed by the expectation display control means. A display mode variable means for gradually changing the expectation display mode, a variable information setting means for setting variable information variable by the display mode variable means, and at least one expectation among the plurality of expectation display modes. It has a variable suggestion effect executing means for executing a variable suggestion effect suggesting that the degree display mode is variable, and the expectation degree display control means has at least one of the plurality of expectation degree display modes. The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the display mode is displayed on the display means at different timings, and the game machine J1 has an execution timing setting means for setting a timing for executing the variable suggestion effect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the jackpot has been won. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period, there are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the expected degree of the jackpot, and the expected degree of the jackpot of the current variable effect is displayed. There is a gaming machine that notifies the player depending on the display mode of the character. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-248305).

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to show the player the expectation of a big hit by the display mode of the character displayed during the variation effect, so that the player is interested in the effect content of the variation effect to be executed. It is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, among a plurality of display modes, a plurality of types of expectation display modes in which display modes corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot are displayed are provided, and the display modes of each expectation display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation to the player by making a specific judgment, it is possible to make the player predict the jackpot expectation based on the display modes of a plurality of types of expectation display modes, and the effect to be executed is It was possible to make the player pay close attention to the content and enhance the effect of the production. Further, in the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, the suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation degree display mode is configured to be executable, and which display mode is displayed as the expectation degree display mode is suggested. There is also a gaming machine that executes an expectation display mode prior suggestion effect that causes the player to predict in which display mode the expectation display mode is displayed as a variable effect. There is also a gaming machine in which the display mode of the expectation degree display mode is changed from the display mode once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expectation display modes, when the expectation display mode prior suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expectation display mode is executed, the expectation that the expectation display mode prior suggestion effect is not applied. There is a problem that the effect of the effect is deteriorated because it is implicitly denied that the display mode is variable.

According to the gaming machine J1, the variable suggestion effect suggesting that one of the plurality of expectation display modes displayed on the display means at different timings is variable is the variable suggestion effect execution means. Will be executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect can be different. This has the effect that even if the same effect mode is used as the variable suggestion effect, the expected degree display mode that is the suggestion target of the variable suggestion effect can be different.

In the gaming machine J1, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and a privilege granting means. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is given, the expectation degree display mode can easily show a high expectation degree, so that the player can display the expectation degree display mode. You will be watching the contents. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect is a gaming machine J3 for notifying variable information of a stepwise variable expectation degree display mode.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect can be notified to the player by the variable suggestion effect, so that the variable information of the target expectation degree display mode can be notified. It has the effect of being able to be watched and enhancing the effect of production.

In the gaming machine J3, the variable suggestion effect is characterized in that a plurality of variable quantities including at least a variable quantity for indicating the degree to which the expected degree display mode is actually varied are displayed. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as variable suggestion effects, so that the larger variable amount is displayed among the plurality of variable amounts displayed for the player. It is possible to play the game with the expectation that the amount will be a real variable amount, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the machine having the target notification means for notifying the expectation degree display mode to be the target of the variable suggestion effect executed by the variable suggestion effect execution means before the end of the variable suggestion effect. The gaming machine J5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the variable execution is performed for the player by notifying the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestion effect to be executed this time. There is an effect that the suggestion production can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, based on the expectation type setting means for setting the expectation type based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the expectation type set by the expectation type setting means. , The expectation degree setting means for setting the expectation degree for each of the plurality of expectation degree display modes, and the expectation degree display control means is the plurality of expectation degree display modes set by the expectation degree setting means. The expectation degree display mode for showing at least a part of the expectation degree is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the already displayed expectation degree and the expectation degree setting means. The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the difference from the expected degree is suggested as the variable amount.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, an effect of suggesting the difference between the already displayed expectation degree and the preset expectation degree as a variable amount is executed. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable suggestion effect is small, the privilege is given if the variable suggestion effect is executed for the expectation degree display mode in which the high expectation degree is already displayed. It is possible to increase the possibility of Therefore, not only the effect content of the variable suggestion effect but also the display mode of the current expectation degree display mode is drawn by lottery, which has the effect of enhancing the effect.

In the gaming machine J2, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation effect execution means that executes the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. It has an operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, and the display mode changing means changes the expected degree display mode in response to the discrimination result by the operation determining means. The featured gaming machine J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the expected degree display mode is changed in response to the operation of the operating means, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means. There is an effect.

In the game machine J8, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and a bonus game execution means. When a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, the acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information and the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means are stored up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. A possible storage means, a pre-determination means that executes pre-discrimination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, and a number of ball entry information indicating the number of the ball entry information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having a ball entry information number display means to be displayed, when a predetermined additional condition is satisfied, the ball entry information number display means is displayed in response to the determination result by the operation determination means. The gaming machine J9 is characterized by having an additional effect executing means for executing an additional effect that changes a display mode for indicating the number of ball entry information.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J8, the display mode for showing the number of ball entry information can be changed by the additional effect executed in response to the operation to the operating means. , There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means.

The gaming machine J9 has an effect condition determining means for determining whether the expected degree display mode displayed by the expected degree display control means satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and satisfies the effect condition by the effect condition determination means. The gaming machine J10, characterized in that the above-mentioned additional conditions are satisfied when it is determined that the above-mentioned additional conditions are not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J9, when the expected degree display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy a predetermined effect condition, an additional effect is executed, so that a plurality of effects can be achieved. It has the effect of being able to have relevance and enhancing the effect of production.

The gaming machine J10 is characterized in that, when the expected degree display control means does not display a predetermined number of the expected degree display modes, the effect condition determination means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied. Gaming machine J11.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J10, the number of the effects to be executed can be complemented by executing the additional effect, so that the playing motivation is increased by the small number of the effects to be executed. It has the effect of suppressing the decrease.

<Characteristic K group> (Big hit production at the time of holding consecutive times)
The discrimination means that executes the discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, the privilege game execution means that executes the privilege game when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is the predetermined discrimination result, and the predetermined acquisition condition are When it is established, the acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information and the storage means for storing the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a pre-discrimination means for executing pre-discrimination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, the pre-discrimination means satisfies at least the pre-discrimination condition during the privilege game. In this case, the pre-determination is executed, and the pre-discrimination means is characterized by having an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode during the privilege game in response to the determination result of the pre-determination means. Game machine K1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding means that can acquire ball entry information based on the ball entering the starting port and hold the ball entry information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and a lottery condition are established. It has a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the ball entry information, and an execution means for executing a winning game that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is won. There is a game machine. Then, it has a pre-determining means for discriminating the entry information held in the holding means in advance before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the pre-determining means means that there is a hit in the hold at the end of the game. There is a gaming machine that continuously displays the display mode (number of rounds) during the winning game when it is determined. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-30737).

In such a conventional gaming machine, a special effect can be executed during the second hit game when the hit is won again in the hold, and the player can be satisfied. However, since it is configured to determine the winning information held at the end of the big hit and only the effect set at the time of winning is executed during the first winning game, for example, the winning is won during the first winning game. Even if the winning information to be played is withheld, there is a problem that the effect for the first hit game cannot be changed and the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced.

Further, although the effect is configured to be continuous for a plurality of hit games, only the effect that the player can easily identify the break between the first hit game and the second hit game is executed. There is a problem that it is possible to easily predict how much the winning game will be executed during the production that is continuously executed during the winning game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the effect mode during the privilege game is set based on the determination result of the prior determination means executed during the privilege game, so that the effect mode during the privilege game is set in advance as compared with the case where the effect mode during the privilege game is set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when setting the effect mode corresponding to the pre-determination result can be reduced.

In the gaming machine K1, the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means is such that a plurality of small privileged games are executed, and the prior determination condition is satisfied when the small privileged game is executed. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the pre-determination condition is satisfied when the small privilege game is executed, and the production mode during the privilege game is set, so that the execution status of the small privilege game is set. It is possible to set the production mode of the privilege game according to the above. Therefore, even if the production mode of the privileged game is set during the privileged game, there is an effect that the privileged game can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the game machine K2, as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, there is a privilege game selection means for selecting one privilege game from a plurality of the privilege games in which a different number of small privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K2, as a privilege game, one privilege game is selected from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. It has the effect of being able to change and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K3, when the pre-determination result is a predetermined pre-determination result, the storage means includes the entry information on which the privilege game is executed. The effect mode setting means determines in advance, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode during the privilege game according to the number of small privilege games executed in the privilege game previously determined by the advance determination means. A gaming machine K4 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3, the production mode during the privileged game is set according to the number of small privileged games determined by the prior determination means, so that the player is in the privileged game. There is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to the production mode.

In the game machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of small privilege games of the privilege game selected by the privilege game selection means and the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means. Of these, the small privilege game number notification means for notifying at least a part, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means, and the small privilege notified by the small privilege game number notification means. Notification to set the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means based on the determination result of the first difference determination means for determining the difference from the number of games and the first difference determination means. A gaming machine K5 characterized by having a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, one privilege is provided by partially notifying the number of small privilege games (round games) executed during the privilege game (big hit). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of small privilege games executed during the game, and while the privilege game is being executed, the game is performed while expecting more small privilege games to be executed. It has the effect of being able to make it.

The gaming machine K5 is characterized by having an addition means for adding the number of the small privilege games executed in the privilege game pre-determined by the pre-determination means to the execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, if it is determined in advance that the privileged game will be executed by the prior determination means during the privileged game (big hit), in the previously determined privileged game. The number of small privilege games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the addition means. As a result, when a plurality of privilege games are executed at short intervals, the number of small privilege games notified while the previous privilege game is being executed is the number of small privilege games executed in the later privilege games. It can be set by adding the number of. Therefore, by looking at the number of small privilege games notified during the privilege game by the small privilege game number notification means, it is possible to predict whether or not the next privilege game will be executed, and one privilege game ends. There is an effect that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after playing.

The gaming machine K5 or K6 has an update determination means for determining whether to update the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means when the small privilege game is executed. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5 or K6, the update determination means determines whether to update the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means, so that the number of notifications is notified. Even if the number of small privilege games is set by the setting means, the number of small privilege games may not be updated. Therefore, when a new small privilege game is executed, even if the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is not updated, the next time the small privilege game is executed, the small privilege game is executed. It is possible to leave the possibility that the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means will be updated, and it is possible to play games while expecting more small privilege games to be executed. effective.

In the gaming machine K7, when the discrimination result by the first difference discriminating means satisfies the first condition, the forced updating means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is provided. A gaming machine K8 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, when the discrimination result by the first difference discriminating means satisfies the first condition, it is notified by the forced update means and by the small privilege game number notification means. By forcibly updating the number of small privilege games, there is an effect that it is possible to set a period for the player to execute the privilege games with peace of mind.

In the game machine K7 or K8, the executed small privilege game number notification means for notifying the number of the small privilege games already executed, the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means, and When the second difference discriminating means for discriminating the difference from the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means and the discrimination result by the second difference discriminating means satisfy the second condition. The game machine K9 is characterized by having a compulsory update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the discrimination result by the second difference discrimination means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means is used to notify the small privilege game number notification means. Since the number of small privilege games that have been played is forcibly updated, it is possible to prevent the number of executed small privilege games from becoming larger than the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small privilege game number notification means preliminarily determines the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period during the period during which the privilege game is being executed. The gaming machine K10 is characterized in that when the result of the above is the predetermined predetermined result, the notification of a specific small privilege game number is executed.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the ball entry information acquired within a specific period during the period during which the privileged game is being executed is the result of the privileged game. If the player is elected, the specific small privilege game number notification is executed by the small privilege game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of acquiring the entry information during the privilege game.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means. When the third difference discriminating means for discriminating the difference and the discriminant result of the third difference discriminating means satisfy the third condition in the state where the privileged game is completed, the privileged game is terminated. The gaming machine K11 is characterized by having a production continuation means for continuing the production executed during the privilege game from the time when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, if the discrimination result by the third difference discrimination means satisfies the third condition, it is executed during the privilege game by the effect continuation means. The effect is continuously displayed. As a result, when it is determined by the prior determination means that the privilege game is to be executed, there is an effect that it is possible to continuously display the effect executed during the privilege game after the first privilege game is completed. be.

In the gaming machine K11, the gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next privileged game is executed.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K11, it is executed during the privileged game during the period from the end of the first privileged game to the execution of the second privileged game by the directing continuation means. It is possible to surely execute the effect to be performed. Therefore, since a series of effects can be executed for a plurality of privilege games, it is possible to perform the games while expecting more small privilege games to be executed while the effects are being executed. effective.

In any of the game machines K5 to K12, when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a predetermined discriminating result, the storage number discriminating means for discriminating the number of the ball entry information stored in the storage means and the storage number discriminating means. It has an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes executed during the privilege game, and is stored in the effect mode storage means based on the number of the ball entry means determined by the storage number determination means. The gaming machine K13 is characterized by having a privileged game effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, if it is a predetermined determination result, the effect mode during the privilege game is based on the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means. Is selected, it is possible to provide various effects to the player during the privileged game. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the effect mode storage means, as the plurality of effect modes, indicates that the result of the pre-determination of the pre-determination means is the predetermined pre-determination result at the time when the privilege game is started. The gaming machine K14 is characterized in that it stores at least a first effect mode that can be notified to a person and a second effect mode that can be notified to a player after the privilege game is completed.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K13, it is notified that the result of the pre-determination of the pre-discrimination means is a predetermined pre-discrimination result by the effect mode selected by the privilege game effect mode selection means. Since the timing can be changed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic L group> (Change the production frequency in the game history)
The determination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied, the effect execution means for executing the effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the effect for showing the specific determination result by the effect execution means. It is executed by the privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when executed, the storage means that stores the corresponding game information as history information when a specific condition is satisfied, and the effect executing means. The gaming machine L1 is characterized by having a determination means for determining whether to execute a specific effect among the effects.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won the prize. Then, as a variable effect executed for a predetermined period, there is a gaming machine that executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-249877).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the effect mode is changed based on the operation content of the player to the operating means, the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced if the operation effect is frequently executed for the player who does not enthusiastically operate the operating means.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, the execution frequency of the specific effect can be changed according to the progress of the game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L1 has an effect selection table storage unit in which a plurality of effect selection tables set so that the selection rates of the specific effects are different, and the determination unit has the effect selection corresponding to the history information. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it determines a table.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the selection rate of the specific effect can be switched by selecting the corresponding effect selection table, so that the selection rate of the specific effect can be changed by simple control. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine L1 or L2 has an operation means operated by the player and an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. When the predetermined operation is discriminated by the operation discriminating means, an operation effect for changing the effect mode is set, and the specific condition is that at least one that the predetermined operation is discriminated by the operation discriminating means. The gaming machine L3, which is characterized in that it is set to the condition of.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1 or L2, by operating the operating means in the operation effect, not only the effect mode is changed but also the specific condition is easily satisfied. Has the effect of being able to change and affect the execution rate of a specific effect.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, at least the storage means capable of accumulating the history information, the setting means capable of setting the storage value up to a predetermined value based on the storage result by the storage means, and the setting means thereof. A selection means for selecting the accumulated privilege system corresponding to the set accumulated value from a plurality of accumulated privilege systems, and an accumulated privilege granting means for granting the accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system selected by the selection means. When a new accumulated value is set by the setting means, the accumulated privilege granting means grants a new accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated value privilege selected by the selection means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the selection means selects one storage privilege system from a plurality of storage privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and the accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is given. As a result, both the setting of the frequency at which the specific effect is executed and the granting of the accumulated privilege are executed based on the history information. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine L4, the accumulated privilege given by the accumulated privilege granting means is different for each of the accumulated privilege systems selected by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L4, the accumulated benefits given by the accumulated privilege system can be different, so that it is fun to acquire various accumulated benefits while differently operating the operation means. Can be provided to the player. Further, by making the operation contents of the operation means different, it is possible to make the effect frequency different, so that there is an effect that new enjoyment can be provided to the player for the effect to be executed.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized by having a history information erasing means capable of erasing the history information stored in the storage means to a state in which the storage privilege system different depending on the selection means can be selected. Game machine L6 to play.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L5, the history information can be deleted until a different storage privilege system can be selected. Therefore, as compared with the case where all the history information is deleted, the following It is possible to make it easier to select the accumulated privilege system. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits can be increased.

In addition, the accumulated value set by the setting means is also variable (decreased) based on the partial deletion of the history information by the history information erasing means, so that the accumulated value is a predetermined upper limit. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the value is reached and the effect of the effect is reduced.

The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6 has a guiding means for guiding the game content for selecting a specific accumulation privilege system by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L4 to L6, the game is played based on the game content guided by the guiding means, so that a specific accumulated privilege system is selected. Therefore, it is possible to give various accumulation benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the effect of the production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine L7, the guiding means guides the game content for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by changing the effect mode of the operation effect.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L7, the effect mode of the operation effect is changed by the guiding means, so that a different accumulation privilege system can be selected simply by operating the operation means according to the effect mode of the operation effect. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to give various benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L8, as the effect mode of the operation effect, the guidance means has either a notification effect mode for notifying the operation means to perform the predetermined operation or a non-notification effect mode for not notifying the operation means. A gaming machine L9 characterized in that the game content is guided by using a machine.

According to the gaming machine L9, as the operation effect, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easy to be performed on the operation means and an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is difficult to be performed. Just by operating it, different accumulated privilege systems will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to give various benefits to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the player has a system selection means capable of selecting the specific storage privilege system corresponding to the game content guided by the guidance means from the plurality of storage privilege systems. A gaming machine L10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the game content can be notified so that the player can select the accumulated privilege system desired by the player, so that the effect of the game is further enhanced. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic M group> (Measures for discrimination when small hits are confirmed)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball entering the ball entry means. A determination means capable of executing a determination in a case, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. And the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the display means are stopped. In a game having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a game ball is inserted during the period in which the privileged game is executed by the privileged game executing means. A special ball-entry means that enables a ball, a specific area where a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can enter, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. The privilege granting means to be granted, the privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed. A notification means for notifying the notification information that the player can identify the type of, and the specific input when the firing by the firing means is stopped for a predetermined period or more after the notification information is notified by the notification means. The gaming machine M1 is characterized by having a means for making it difficult to enter the ball means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. As the type of the winning game, when the lottery result is displayed by a symbol or the like and notified, the notification is performed in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a game is set after the hit game is further executed by the game ball entering a specific entrance or a specific area during the hit game. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of the hit game in which the player is executed first, it is determined whether the state is the hit type to which the game state disadvantageous to the player is given, and a specific entrance or a specific area is determined. There is a risk that the disadvantage of the game store side will increase due to the game method in which the game is performed so that the game ball does not enter.

The present gaming machine M1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming store side.

According to the gaming machine M1, when the player tries to avoid being given a specific privilege type by confirming the notification information indicating the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means, another privilege type is used. Even in this case, it becomes difficult to enter the specific ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the disadvantage on the amusement shop side can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode among different dynamic display modes in which the pseudo-stop mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped is combined. A gaming machine M2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine M2, the temporary stop in the pseudo-stop mode makes it difficult to understand the final stop timing of the identification information, and when a specific privilege game is executed, the gaming ball is sent to the specific entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method that avoids the entry of a ball.

The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that the gaming machine M1 or M2 has a variable control means for varying the entry rate of a ball entering the specific area according to the type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the entry rate of entering a specific area can be changed depending on the type of privileged game to be executed, so that the probability of entering a specific area can be changed. Has the effect of being able to be easily controlled.

<Characteristic N group> (Direct hit production 2)
There are an entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When the mode determining means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, the first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game. In a game having a privileged game executing means capable of executing the privileged game, the game ball can be entered during the period in which the first privileged game or the second privileged game is executed by the privileged game executing means. A specific ball entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. And an effect executing means capable of executing an effect spanning a period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the entry into the specific ball entry means. , A gaming machine N1 characterized by having.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the game is only produced up to the hit game, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The present gaming machine N1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing early boredom of a game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed in the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the identification information not only indicates a specific determination result but also to enter a specific area by the effect, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N1, the effect executing means is characterized in that the effect of 1 is executed based on the types of privileged games given by a plurality of effects.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the effect executing means is characterized in that if the game ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed, the effect is switched to the specific effect and executed. The gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, if the ball does not enter the specific area, the ball can be switched to the specific effect, so that it is effective for the player not to enter the specific area. It has the effect of being able to notify the pachinko machine.

<Characteristic P group> (A delay device is provided above the V attacker to prevent choro hitting)
There are an entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has an aspect determining means and a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game, a specific ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter during a period in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specific ball that can enter a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. An area, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the gaming ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed, the notification means for notifying the information regarding the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means and the position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine P1 comprising: an adjusting means for reducing the amount of flow of a gaming ball guided to a specific ball entering means for a predetermined period.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. As the type of the winning game, when the lottery result is displayed by a symbol or the like and notified, the notification is performed in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a game is set after the hit game is further executed by the game ball entering a specific entrance or a specific area during the hit game. Assuming that the state is determined by the type of the hit game in which the player is executed first, it is determined whether the state is the hit type to which the game state disadvantageous to the player is given, and a specific entrance or a specific area is determined. There is a risk that the disadvantage of the game store side will increase due to the game method in which the game is performed so that the game ball does not enter.

The present gaming machine P1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming store side.

According to the gaming machine P1, the amount of flow down for a predetermined period guided to the specific ball-entry means is reduced by the adjusting means, so that the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is input to the specific ball-entry means. It has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish whether or not to make a ball.

In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity launched by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means enters the game ball flowing down the second flow path into the specific ball. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio to a specific flow path capable of entering the means and a flow path having difficulty in entering the specific ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the amount of the gaming balls that are guided to the specific entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path can be easily reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a launching intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine P3 is characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving the gaming ball and discharging the gaming ball into a flow path guided to the specific entry means.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer is rolled by the adjusting means, so that the player has stopped launching the gaming ball. However, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means after a lapse of a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the period from when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball-entry means can enter the ball is to the second flow path. The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from launching the gaming ball to reaching the specific entry means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball in order to enter the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the special game to enter the specific ball entry means.

<Characteristic Q group> (Countermeasures against cholo hitting 2)
There are an entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has an aspect determining means and a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game, a specific ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter during a period in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specific ball that can enter a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. A region, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when a gaming ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means. The pachinko / pachinko ball is guided to the specific ball-entry means at a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball-entry means. Gaming machine Q1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the disadvantage on the gaming store side will increase because the gaming method is performed so that the gaming ball does not enter a specific entrance or a specific area. was there.

The present gaming machine Q1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming store side.

According to the gaming machine P1, the amount of flow down for a predetermined period guided to the specific ball-entry means is reduced by the adjusting means, so that the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is input to the specific ball-entry means. It has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish whether or not to make a ball.

In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means enters the game ball flowing down the second flow path into the specific ball. The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio to a specific flow path capable of entering the means and a flow path having difficulty in entering the specific ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q1, the amount of the gaming balls that are guided to the specific entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path can be easily reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the launching means by the operation of a player, and a first method in which the gaming ball can flow down. It has one flow path and a second flow path that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving the gaming ball and discharging the gaming ball into a flow path guided to the specific entry means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer is rolled by the adjusting means, so that the player has stopped the firing of the gaming ball. However, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means after a lapse of a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the period from when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball-entry means can enter the ball is to the second flow path. The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from launching the gaming ball to reaching the specific entry means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball in order to enter the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the special game to enter the specific ball entry means.

<Characteristic R group> (Direction until passing V in small hit and direct hit)
There are an entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a determination means that can execute a determination when a game ball enters the entry means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A second privilege game different from the first privilege game and the first privilege game, which is advantageous to the player when the mode determining means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. And an effect executing means capable of executing an effect spanning a period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information for showing the specific determination result to the entry into the specific ball entry means. , And the effect executing means executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the method of launching the gaming ball is gradually switched before the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine R1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a gaming ball into a starting port provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and a state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player is set depending on the type of the hit game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the game is only produced up to the hit game, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The present gaming machine N1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing early boredom of a game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the identification information for showing a specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed in the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the identification information not only indicates a specific determination result but also to enter a specific area by the effect, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R1, the effect executing means is characterized in that the effect of 1 is executed based on the type of privileged game given by the plurality of effects.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machines R1 or R2, the effect executing means is characterized in that if the game ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed, the effect is switched to the specific effect and executed. The gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1 or R2, if the ball does not enter the specific area, the ball can be switched to the specific effect, so that it is effective for the player not to enter the specific area. It has the effect of being able to notify.

<Characteristic S group> (Switching between two types of control for small hits and symbol hits)
The entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the entry means, and the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game when the mode determination means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball entry means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and a game when the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. In the first state where the taxiway for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area and the second state where it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. When the switching means for switching and the first privilege game are executed, the first switching information for switching the taxiway by the switching means is set, and when the second privilege game is executed, the said The gaming machine S1 is characterized by having a setting means for setting a second switching information different from the first switching information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting port provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The game is executed, and the state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of the hit game. It has been proposed that when a gaming ball enters the area, benefits such as winning games are further granted. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

The present gaming machine P1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the taxiway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, the player can be shown the guidance mode to a different specific area, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the taxiway can be switched to the first state by switching the guidance path according to the second switching information.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, the taxiway is switched to the first state by the second switching information, so that in the second privilege game, the gaming ball can be easily entered into a specific area. Even if it is a second privilege game, there is an effect that the player can be made to think that the second privilege is given by entering the specific area.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first switching information is set to a plurality of different information, and the information of 1 is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, there is an effect that the first switching information can be diversified and the guidance state of the taxiway can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic T group> (Switch between 2 types for small hits and symbol hits 2)
The entry means on which the game ball can enter, the determination means capable of executing the determination when the game ball enters the entry means, and the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means. The display means to be displayed, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The first privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game when the mode determination means and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In a game having a privileged game executing means capable of executing the privileged game, the game ball can be entered during the period during which the first privileged game or the second privileged game is executed by the privileged game executing means. When the first privilege game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area, the game is a game. A privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player and, when the second privilege game is executed, granting a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area. In the first state where the taxiway for guiding the gaming ball that has entered the specific ball entry means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area and the second state where it is difficult to guide the taxiway to the specific area. When the switching means for switching and the first privilege game are executed, the first switching information for switching the taxiway by the switching means is set, and when the second privilege game is executed, the said The gaming machine T1 comprising: a setting means for setting a second switching information for switching the taxiway to the first state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting port provided in the game board, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The game is executed, and the state after the hit game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of the hit game. It has been proposed that when a gaming ball enters the area, benefits such as winning games are further granted. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

The present gaming machine P1 is made for solving the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the taxiway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, the player can be shown the guidance mode to a different specific area, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming ball reaches the specific area by different taxiways depending on whether the second state is switched to the first state by the second switching information or the first state is switched by the first switching information. The gaming machine T2, which is characterized by being guided by.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored at an early stage because he / she is guided to a specific region by different guidance.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information is set to a plurality of different information, and the information of 1 is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is an effect that the first switching information can be diversified and the guidance state of the taxiway can be switched in various ways.

<Characteristic group U> (The production mode is set based on the length of the period from the special 2 prize to the special 2 fluctuation)
When the first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination means for executing the first determination, the acquisition means for acquiring the acquisition information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means are predetermined. A storage means that can store up to a number, a second discrimination means that executes a second discrimination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the second discrimination condition is satisfied, and the first discrimination. It has a first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the means, or a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means for a predetermined period. In the gaming machine, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is not started, and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the period effect executing means for executing the period effect based on the above and the first identification information are dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. It has a period determining means for determining the period up to, and an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode in the period effect executed by the period effect executing means based on the determination result of the period determination means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of starting openings are provided and different lottery is executed according to the starting openings in which the game ball enters. Then, there is one that executes a suggestion effect suggesting the result of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each starting port (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). Such a gaming machine is executed when a game ball enters the other starting port while a winning / failing lottery is being executed based on the entry of the game ball into one starting port. By preventing the new winning / failing lottery from being executed until the lottery is completed, it was possible to prevent the player from executing the winning / failing lottery excessively.

However, the period from the entry of the game ball into one starting port to the execution of the winning / failing lottery (suggestion effect) based on the entry is based on the entry of the game ball into the other starting opening. Since it differs depending on the situation of the winning / failing lottery to be executed, for example, after the game ball enters the starting opening, a suggestion effect for showing the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry is executed. If the period until the game becomes long, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which ball-based suggestion effect is being executed, the effect of the suggestion effect is reduced, and the motivation for playing is reduced. there were. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine U1, the effect of the period effect executed by the period effect executing means is based on the length of the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information. Since the mode can be set, even if the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is different, it is possible to execute the period effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is long.

The gaming machine U1 has a remaining period determining means for determining the residual dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determining means has the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means. The gaming machine U2, characterized in that the period is determined based on the above.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, the second identification information is obtained after a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the residual dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed by the period determining means. Since the period until the dynamic display of is started can be determined, the accuracy of the determination result can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed according to the actual game content, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machines U1 or U2, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the acquisition means acquires the acquisition information, and the period determination means is said after the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information for which the start condition is satisfied is started is determined.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, the period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is determined. Since the discrimination is performed by means, the accuracy of the discrimination result can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed according to the actual game content, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U3, the period effect executing means includes at least a period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information. A gaming machine U4 characterized in that the period production is executed during the production period.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U3, as an effect period in which the period effect is executed, at least after the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, the second identification information based on the acquired information is dynamically dynamic. Since the period until the display is started can be set, it is possible to set the effect mode corresponding to the actual gaming situation during the period corresponding to the actual gaming situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine U1 or U2 has a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the acquisition condition is easily satisfied when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and the period determination means is the specific game execution means. The period from the execution of the specific game to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information is determined, and the period effect executing means is at least after the predetermined execution condition is satisfied. The gaming machine U5 is characterized in that the period effect is executed during the effect period including the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is started.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started before the acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode for a longer period based on the determination result of the period determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the period effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U5, when the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means, the dynamic display determination means capable of determining whether or not the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display determination means. When it is determined that the first identification information is not dynamically displayed, the second period determination means for executing the determination of the second period different from the period determination means is provided, and the second period determination is performed. The means determines the period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information in the state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine U6 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U5, when the first identification information is not dynamically displayed at the timing when the discrimination can be executed by the period determining means, the second identification information is performed at a timing different from that timing. It is possible to execute the determination of the period determination means. Therefore, since the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information can be determined at a plurality of timings, the period effect according to the actual game content is executed. It has the effect of making it easier.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the period effect executing means has a first period effect executed in a predetermined first period and a second period effect executed after the first period as the period effect. The gaming machine U7 is characterized in that at least the second period effect executed in the period effect is executed, and the effect mode setting means is for setting the effect mode of the second period effect.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the common first period effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the period determination means, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. There is an effect that the period production can be executed without giving.

In the gaming machine U7, when the discrimination result by the period discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the effect mode setting means is a part of the effect mode of the first period effect as the effect mode of the second period effect. The gaming machine U8, which is characterized by setting.

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the first period effect can be set as the effect mode of the second period effect, whether the first period effect is executed or the second period effect is executed for the player. It can be difficult to understand. Therefore, even when the second period is determined to be long by the period determining means, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

<Characteristic group V> (When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal figure long opening suggestion effect is executed)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the game ball enters the variable entry means. A discrimination means that executes discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied based on a ball, and a privilege granting means that can grant a privilege to a player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. In a gaming machine having a determination means for executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the result of the determination based on the determination condition for a predetermined period. The effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. The variable ball-entry means has a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game for a predetermined period to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the effect execution means satisfies a predetermined effect condition. The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that, in the case of the above, the effect for indicating that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode is executed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winner of the game is first drawn, and when the lottery result is a hit, the player There was a special game that was advantageous to the player. Further, a movable member is provided at the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved so that the game ball enters the starting port. There is something that makes it easier. In addition, there is one configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, since the lottery result of the second lottery can be suggested by the suggestion effect, the player is expected to play the game while expecting that the gaming ball can be easily inserted into the starting opening. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, it is highly possible that the player stops firing the game ball by executing the suggestion effect and restarts the game based on the effect result of the suggestion effect. In that case, the game is stopped until the suggestion effect is completed, and the game is restarted at the timing when the movable member moves, or the suggestion effect is likely to be out of order. Is the period from when the game ball enters one of the starting ports until the suggestion effect is completed until the winning / failing lottery (suggestion effect) is executed based on the entry into the other starting port. Since it differs depending on the situation of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball, for example, the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball after the game ball enters the starting opening. If the period until the suggestion effect for showing the above is executed becomes long, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which entry-based suggestion effect is being executed, and the effect of the suggestion effect is reduced. , There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine V1, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify that the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played a game for establishing the production condition, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1, as the types of the specific games executed by the specific game execution means, the first type corresponding to the first specific game that is advantageous to the player and the first type that is more disadvantageous than the first specific game. 2 It has a game type setting means capable of setting a second type corresponding to a specific game, and the effect executing means executes the effect when the first type is set by the game type setting means. A gaming machine V2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1, when the first specific game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the effect by the effect executing means is executed, so that the effect can be enhanced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machines V1 or V2, a condition discriminating means capable of discriminating whether or not the effect condition is satisfied and specific identification information for indicating the result of the discriminating executed by the discriminating means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. It has a display means, and the condition determination means determines that the effect condition is satisfied when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The gaming machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, since the effect condition can be satisfied when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, the player is motivated to play the game of dynamically displaying the specific identification information. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine V3, it is determined whether the information holding means capable of holding the execution information indicating that the discrimination has been executed by the discriminating means and the execution information held by the information holding means satisfy the valid conditions. The effect discriminating means is determined to satisfy the effect condition even when the valid condition discriminating means determines that the valid condition is satisfied. A gaming machine V4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V3, even if the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, the effect condition can be satisfied as long as the execution information satisfies the valid condition. Therefore, even if a timing occurs in which the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed even though the game of dynamically displaying the specific identification information is performed, it is possible to execute the effect by the effect executing means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be stably executed for the player who is enthusiastically playing the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In either of the gaming machines V3 or V4, an acquisition means capable of acquiring acquired information when the acquisition condition is satisfied, and a storage means capable of storing the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means makes the determination based on the acquisition information stored in the storage means, and the condition determination means is the acquisition means. Executes the first condition determination based on the acquisition of the acquired information, and executes the second condition determination based on the determination being executed by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect is executed when it is determined that the effect condition is satisfied in either the result of the first condition determination or the result of the second condition determination. V5.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V3 or V4, the establishment of the production condition can be determined at a plurality of timings by the condition determining means, so that the player who is enthusiastically playing the game can be determined. There is an effect that the production can be performed stably and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1 or V5, the effect executing means is characterized in that, as the effect, a timing notification effect for notifying the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state can be executed. Machine V6.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1 or V5, depending on the effect executed by the effect executing means, not only the determination result of the determination means but also the timing when the variable ball entry means becomes the first state is the game. Since the person is notified, the game can be enthusiastically performed so that the effect by the effect execution means is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V6, the effect executing means can execute a pseudo timing notification effect that notifies a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state when the effect condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine V7 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effect condition is not satisfied, a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state is notified, so that the game in which only the determination condition is satisfied without satisfying the effect condition is performed. There is an effect that the player who plays can be made to play a disadvantageous game.

The gaming machine V8 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the effect condition.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is easier to be satisfied than the production condition, so that the game is performed more enthusiastically in order to satisfy the production condition. It has the effect of being able to make it.

<Characteristic group W> (Notify the advantageous small hit winning with a higher probability than the distribution ratio during the time saving in the small hit winning production during the time saving)
When the acquisition means for acquiring the acquisition information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the predetermined determination condition are satisfied, the above-mentioned A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a first privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the first discrimination result are executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when the second determination result is different from the first determination result. The game state setting means capable of setting the first game state after the end of the first privilege game or the second privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the acquisition information stored in the storage means are referred to. During the first game state, a pre-determination means for pre-determining before the determination based on the acquired information and a suggestion effect for indicating that the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed are performed. The game state setting means has the effect execution means that can be executed, and the game state setting means has the first game state and the first game state based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set. Is to set a different second gaming state, and the effect executing means is based on the result of the prior determination corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is executed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine W1 characterized in that it is capable of performing a suggestion effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winner of the game is first drawn, and when the lottery result is a hit, the player There was a special game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of privilege games having different degrees of advantage are configured to be executable, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of the privilege games is different depending on the set game states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). Further, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the soundness of the game, the ratio (so-called continuation rate) in which the gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, the time saving state or the probable change state) is set after the jackpot game is completed is low. (For example, 65% or less) There is something that suppresses the gambling of the game by setting it.

In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a hit (for example, a big hit or a small hit) is won in a state where an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is again changed after the winning game is completed. Since the set ratio is suppressed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to give a sense of expectation to the hit notification effect during the advantageous gaming state, and the motivation for playing is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine W1, the suggestion effect executed during the first gaming state executes the first privilege game or the second privilege game which is more advantageous than the first privilege game based on the result of the preliminary determination. Is suggested. Then, since the suggestion effect can be executed based on the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed after the second game state is set, the privilege game is executed during the first game state. It can be easy to suggest that. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the suggestion effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W1, in the effect executing means, the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the acquired information in which the discrimination is executed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied is before the second discrimination result is shown. The gaming machine W1 is characterized in that the case where the pre-article discrimination result is obtained is easier to execute the suggestion effect than the case where the pre-discrimination result for showing the first discrimination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine W2, the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the acquired information in which the discrimination is executed after the second gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the first gaming state indicates the second discrimination result. In the case, the suggestion effect by the effect execution means is more likely to be executed than in the case of showing the first determination result. As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed during the first game state, in addition to the determination result of the determination means executed during the first game state, the determination means executed after the second game state is set. In the configuration in which the suggestion effect is executed based on the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the determination result, the ratio of the second privilege game being executed when the first suggestion effect is executed can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the suggestion effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine W2 has a ratio setting means capable of setting a ratio in which the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result and a ratio in which the second discrimination result becomes the second discrimination result, and the ratio setting means The feature is that the ratio of the second determination result is larger when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine W3.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine W1, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the second determination result in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the ratio of the second privilege game being executed when the first suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the suggestion effect is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the effect executing means has a period until the determination corresponding to the acquired information for which the advance determination has been performed is executed by the advance determination means as an effect period. A gaming machine W4 characterized in that a suggestion effect can be executed.

According to W4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the suggestion effect is executed with the period until the determination corresponding to the pre-determined acquisition information is executed as the effect period. It has the effect of being able to increase.

<Characteristic X group> (When the condition for transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state is satisfied, the notification for executing a lot of special figure 2 fluctuations in the normal state is executed during the time saving state)
When the acquisition means for acquiring the acquisition information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the predetermined determination condition are satisfied, the above-mentioned A discriminating means that executes a discriminant based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a privileged game that executes a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. A game having an execution means, a first game state in which the acquisition means is easy to acquire the acquisition information, a second game state in which the acquisition means is more difficult to acquire than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state at least when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first game state is set, and the storage means is used for the second game state. A notification mode setting that can set a storage number discriminating means that can discriminate the number of stored information and a notification mode based on the discrimination result of the storage number discriminating means in a state where the first gaming state is set. It has a means and a notification executing means capable of executing a notification operation in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting means, and the notification mode setting means has at least the storage at a specific timing of the first gaming state. The gaming machine X1 is characterized in that the notification mode is set based on the determination result of the number determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Further, there is a case in which a plurality of privilege games having different degrees of advantage are configured to be executable, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of the privilege games is different depending on the set game states. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). Further, in such a gaming machine, when a specific gaming state is set, a specific starting port is provided, which makes it easier to enter the ball than when another gaming state is set, and the game is played at the specific starting port. When a lottery based on the entry of a ball is executed, it is configured so that a privileged game with a higher degree of advantage is more likely to be executed than when a game ball enters another starting port, and further specified. There is a structure in which the right of lottery executed based on the entry of a game ball into the starting opening can be held and stored up to a predetermined number. In the gaming machine configured in this way, when a specific gaming state is set, the player can efficiently execute a lottery executed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the specific starting port. Therefore, it was possible to enthusiastically play a game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, when the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery executed based on the game ball entering the specific start port. Therefore, as the end of the specific game state approaches, the player There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine X1, the mode of notification executed by the notification executing means can be set according to the number of stored information stored in the storage means in the specific period of the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play a game for varying the number of stored information so that the notification execution means executes various modes of notification operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the game machine X1, the notification executing means executes acquisition suggestion notification suggesting that the acquired information is acquired during the first gaming state, and the notification mode setting means is the storage number determination means. The gaming machine X2 is characterized in that, when it is determined that the acquired information stored in the storage means is not more than a predetermined number, a notification mode corresponding to the acquisition suggestion notification is set.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X1, the acquisition suggestion notification is executed when the number of acquired information stored in the storage means in the storage means in the first gaming state is equal to or less than a predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. Further, when the number of acquired information stored in the storage means in the first gaming state is larger than the predetermined number in a specific period, for example, when the storage means stores the upper limit number of acquired information, the acquisition suggestion is made. Since the notification can be configured not to be executed, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the notification executed by the notification executing means.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, based on the discrimination number measuring means for measuring the number of times of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means in the state where the first gaming state is set, and the measurement result by the discrimination number measuring means. The transition condition determining means for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied, and the notification execution means from the time when the transition condition determining means determines that the transition condition is satisfied until the transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine X3, characterized in that the notification effect is executed within a specific period of the above.

According to the gaming machine X3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X2. That is, since the notification effect is executed after it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, the player is made to play the game for acquiring the acquired information within a limited period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game until the final period in which the first game state is set.

The gaming machine X3 has a period setting means capable of setting at least a first period and a second period set after the first period as the specific period, and the notification executing means has at least. , The notification effect is executed in the first period, and the second period effect is executed during the second period based on the determination result of the storage number determination means at the end timing of the first period. It has a period effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the above, and a second period effect execution means for executing the second period effect in the effect mode set by the period effect mode setting means. Characterized gaming machine X4.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X3, the effect mode of the second period effect is set based on the number of acquired information stored in the storage means after the notification effect is executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine X4, the number of the acquired information stored in the storage means at the time when the first period is set and the acquired information stored in the storage means at the end of the first period. The period effect mode setting means has an increase number determining means capable of discriminating the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period based on the number of the increase number. The gaming machine X5, characterized in that the effect mode is set based on the determination result of the means.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X4, the production mode of the second period production is set based on the number of acquired information stored during the first period, so that the first period is set. By adjusting the number of acquired information stored at a certain point in time by the player, the number of acquired information stored during the first period can be varied, so that the production mode of the second period effect can be different. .. Therefore, since it is possible to execute different effects according to the game content executed by the player, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine X4 or X5 has a pre-discrimination means for preliminarily discriminating the acquired information stored in the storage means before the discrimination based on the acquired information is executed, and the period effect mode setting means. The gaming machine X6 is characterized in that the effect mode is set based on the determination result of the advance determination means.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X5, the effect mode of the second period effect can be set based on the pre-determination result of the acquired information stored in the storage means, so that the player can set the effect mode. On the other hand, there is an effect that the second period production can be more interesting.

In the gaming machine X6, the second period effect executing means is a case where the discrimination result of the discriminating means being executed is other than the specific discriminating result, and the discriminating result of the pre-discriminating means is a specific discriminant result. When it is shown, it is characterized in that the second period effect is executed until the discrimination result of the discrimination means based on the acquisition information which is the specific discrimination result is notified. Game machine X7.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X6, when the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is a specific discriminant result, the effect executing means is used until the identification information corresponding to the pre-discrimination is stopped and displayed. The production is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the effect performed during the second period.

In the gaming machine X7, the effect mode setting means indicates a suggestion effect mode that suggests that the determination result of the pre-discrimination means is a specific determination result until the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine X8 characterized by being set.

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X7, it is suggested that the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is a specific discrimination result depending on the suggestion effect mode until the dynamic display during execution is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which discrimination results in a specific discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Y group> (Multiple time-saving end conditions are set, and different benefits are given according to the established time-saving end conditions)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. A game having a game state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the discrimination is easily executed by the discrimination means and a second gaming state in which the discrimination is more difficult to be executed than in the first gaming state. In the machine, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state at least based on the fact that a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set, and the transition is performed. As a condition, a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition, and the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means are satisfied. Based on this, it has a privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the privilege granting means grants the first privilege when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the second privilege. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that a second privilege different from the first privilege is given when the transition condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, the winner of the game is first drawn, and when the lottery result is a hit, the player There was a special game that was advantageous to the player. Further, a movable member is provided at the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved so that the game ball enters the starting port. There is something that makes it easier. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a specific gaming state is set, the fluctuation period of the second lottery is set shorter than when other gaming states are set, so that the specific gaming state is set. Is configured to execute more second lottery during the set period.

However, since the fluctuation period of the second lottery set in the specific gaming state is constant, there is a problem that the game in the specific gaming state becomes monotonous and the player's motivation to play is reduced. there were. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the first gaming state in which the acquired information is easily acquired is set, it differs depending on the established transition condition among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. Benefits can be granted. Therefore, even though the first game state is set, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which the first game state ends without obtaining a privilege. Therefore, the first game state is set for the player. There is an effect that the game for setting can be enthusiastically performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Y1, the transition condition setting means satisfies the condition that the determination number of the determination means executed in the state where the first gaming state is set reaches a predetermined number of times. 1 The gaming machine Y2 characterized in that it is set as a transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to set a limit on the number of discriminations of the discrimination means executed during the period in which the first gaming state is set, which is excessive for the player. It has the effect of suppressing the granting of benefits.

In the game machine Y1 or Y2, a variable ball entry means that can be varied into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a predetermined execution. When the condition is satisfied, the variable ball-entry means has a specific game execution means for executing the specific game that can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and the discriminating means is the variable ball-entry means. The determination is executed based on the entry of the game ball, and the first game state set by the game state setting means is a game in which the specific game is more easily executed than the second game state. A gaming machine Y3 characterized by being in a state.

In the gaming machine Y3, the privilege granting means grants a gaming state in which the specific game is more easily executed than the first gaming state as the first privilege granted when the first transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine Y4 characterized by being.

In the gaming machine Y4, a determination means capable of executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination executed by the determination means for a predetermined period. , A dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the predetermined execution condition is a display in which the identification information is specific. It is established when the stop display is performed in the mode, and the dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the first privilege is given than when the first privilege is not given. The gaming machine Y5, which is characterized by facilitating the setting of a target display period.

In the gaming machines Y1 or Y5, the transition condition setting means has a special discrimination result in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed in the state where the first gaming state is set is different from the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine Y6 is characterized in that a condition that is satisfied based on the number of times reaching a predetermined number of times is set as the second transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state according to the determination result of the discrimination means executed during the period in which the first gaming state is set. Therefore, the period during which the first gaming state continues can be indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the first game state to continue for a long period of time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AA group> (It makes it difficult for the player to understand the opportunity until the jackpot game is executed)
A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition, a first determination means for executing the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied, and a first determination means. A second discrimination means that executes a second discrimination when a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is satisfied, a determination means that executes a determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and a gaming ball enter the ball. When the variable ball entry means that can be changed from the difficult first state to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state, and the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. In a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game that causes the variable ball entry means to be variable to the second state for a predetermined period, the second determination condition is that the variable ball entry means has a game ball. The first execution condition, or the first execution condition, which is established when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, can be established based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball. The privilege game is executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition that can be satisfied based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first. Execution of an effect for notifying the first information indicating that the determination result is the determination result or the second information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, using the same effect mode. The effect executing means has means, the period from the execution of the effect to the execution of the privilege game based on the satisfaction of the first execution condition, and the period from the execution of the effect to the execution of the effect. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized in that the effect is executed so that the period until the privileged game is executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition is the same.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the gaming board, a first lottery is executed in which the winning or losing of the game is drawn, and the lottery result is a hit. In some cases, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, a movable member is provided at the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved so that the game ball enters the starting port. There is something that makes it easier. Then, a first suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the first lottery to the player and a second suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player can be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-115411). In such a gaming machine, by executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the player can play the game while giving the player a sense of expectation in both the first lottery and the second lottery. I was able to do it, and I was able to improve the interest of the game.

However, since the production mode of the effect executed by the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is different, there is a problem that the player can easily determine the game situation and the player's motivation to play is reduced. .. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AA1, regardless of which execution condition is satisfied, the period from the execution of the production by the production execution means to the execution of the privilege game can be the same, so that the player can use the same period. It is possible to make it difficult to understand which execution condition the privileged game to be executed is based on. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA1, the second execution condition is satisfied after the effect for notifying the second information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result is executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect when it cannot be performed.

According to the game machine Z2, after the effect is executed by the effect execution means, the special effect can be executed when the privilege game cannot be executed, so that the player can easily understand the effect. It has the effect of being able to enhance the effect of production.

In the gaming machines AA1 to AA2, the gaming machine having a gaming area in which the gaming ball can flow down and a launching means capable of causing the gaming ball to reach the gaming area with variable firing intensity. The gaming area includes at least a first gaming area in which a gaming ball launched by the launching means at one firing intensity can flow down, and a gaming ball launched at a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity. A first ball entry means that has a second gaming area that is different from the first gaming area that can flow down, and the first determination condition is satisfied by the game ball entering the first gaming area. And the specific ball-entry means for which the determination condition is satisfied when the game ball enters, and the variable ball-entry means and the privilege game execution means for the privileged game in the second game area. Is executed, the specific variable ball-entry means that can be changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state is arranged. The gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes the effect in an effect mode including a variable firing notification for launching a game ball with the predetermined firing intensity.

According to the gaming machine AA3, since the notification for changing the firing intensity is executed based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the timing for changing the firing intensity can be the same. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the execution opportunity of the specific game.

In the gaming machine AA3, the first period required for the gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area to reach the variable entry means and the gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area become the specific variable entry means. The gaming machine AA4 characterized in that the second period required to reach it is different from that of the second period.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA3, the timing at which the ball flowing down the second gaming area enters the second variable entry means and the timing at which the ball enters the specific variable entry means are different. Therefore, it is possible to confirm in order whether the gaming ball flowing down the second gaming area enters the variable ball entry means or the specific variable entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the flow situation of the game ball can be more enjoyed.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, the award game executing means has the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discriminating means, and the privilege game executing means is the dynamic display means. When the identification information dynamically displayed by the player is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating the specific determination result, the privilege game is executed, and the effect executing means is the dynamic display means. The gaming machine AA5 is characterized in that the effect is executed during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

<Characteristic AB group> (Provide a period to increase the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed by opening the electric chew once)
When a variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a predetermined execution condition are satisfied. The specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the variable ball entry means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and the discrimination condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. When it is established, the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means thereof. When the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period of the identification information to be executed and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means are stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, the variable input is performed by the specific game as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means. The gaming machine AB1 is characterized in that the ball means has a specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period in which a short dynamic display period shorter than a predetermined period variable to the first state is easily set.

According to the gaming machine AB1, when the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, it becomes easy to set a dynamic display period shorter than the period in which one specific game is executed. This makes it possible to execute the determination of the discrimination means a plurality of times during one specific game period. It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that a specific period is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, the second discrimination means capable of executing the predetermined second discrimination and the second identification information for showing the result of the second discrimination executed by the second discrimination means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. As the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means, one of a plurality of dynamic display periods can be set. The second dynamic display period setting means is provided, and the predetermined execution condition is satisfied when the result of the second determination executed by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. The first gaming state in which the dynamic display period of the first period can be set by the second dynamic display period setting means, and the second period longer than the first gaming state. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized by having a second gaming state in which is easy to set, and a state setting means capable of setting at least.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, there is an effect that the number of determinations by the determination means per unit time can be increased in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state.

In the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, the gaming state setting means is set as the first gaming state for an advantageous first gaming state that can be set for the first period and a second period shorter than the advantageous first gaming state. At least the possible disadvantageous first gaming state can be set, and the execution condition is satisfied when the advantageous first gaming state is set than when the disadvantaged first gaming state is set. A gaming machine AB3 characterized by being easy to use.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is easier to execute the special game if the first game state is set for a long period of time, so that the privilege game is executed during the first game state even though the first game state is set for a long period of time. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the playing motivation of a player who is not played.

In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, there is a transition condition determining means capable of determining whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means is in a state where the first gaming state is set. The second gaming state is set when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the execution condition is satisfied when it is determined by the transition condition determining means that a specific transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AB4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a special game can be executed when a specific transition condition is satisfied and the first gaming state ends. It has the effect of allowing a person to play the game enthusiastically until the end.

The gaming machine AB4 is characterized by having a suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion effect suggesting that the specific transition condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. Amusement machine AB5.

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, a suggestion effect suggesting that a specific transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set is executed. When is executed, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic BA group> (BGM is reset when the power is restored)
A power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, a notification means capable of executing notification for indicating that the power has been supplied by the power supply means, and after the notification executed by the notification means is completed. In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect and a voice output means capable of outputting voice based on voice data for a predetermined period, the voice output means can be notified by the notification means. It is determined that the voice is output from the start position of the voice data during the execution notification period, and the voice is output from a predetermined position of the voice data when the effect is executed by the effect executing means. Characterized game machine BA1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was playing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, if the power is turned off during the predetermined fluctuation time, the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped, the return screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the subtraction of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016). -No. 005505). In such a gaming machine, it was possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the power was turned on by displaying the return screen. There was a problem that it was not possible to clearly notify that the subtraction of the fluctuation time was resumed. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying the player of the gaming situation at the time of power recovery in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine BA1, the sound output during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed can be output even while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the period for notifying that the power is supplied can be related to the subsequent period. In addition, at the timing when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied ends and the predetermined effect is started, the voice based on the voice data for the predetermined period is output from the specific position of the voice data. Since it is configured, it is possible to output the sound with the content corresponding to the effect executed after the period when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the sound can be output without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the above-mentioned gaming machine BA1 is used, it is between a determination means for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation is executed when the power is turned off and a predetermined period in which the determination result is turned off. A memorable storage means is further provided, and when the power is supplied, if it is determined that the power is turned off during the fluctuation of the special figure, the special feature is provided during the notification period for notifying that the power is supplied. It is preferable to configure the BGM to be output during the fluctuation of the figure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player by voice that the special figure fluctuation is being executed while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, it is preferable to configure the period for notifying that the power is supplied to be continuously set until the start-up process is completed for the various control devices of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that power has been supplied. If the power is turned off during the special map fluctuation, or if the special map fluctuation is started during the period for notifying that the power has been supplied, the period for notifying that the power has been supplied ends. , There is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation will straddle the timing when the normal display screen is displayed. In this case, the period from the time when the normal display screen is displayed until the end of the special figure fluctuation during execution is determined, and the variation effect (remaining variation time corresponding effect) is set based on the determination result. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special figure variation.

If the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to delay the end timing of the effect of notifying that the power is supplied by a predetermined time (1 second). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from executing the effect corresponding to the remaining variation time only for a short period of time, which makes it difficult for the player to identify, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<Characteristic BB group> (Background change timing is different according to the pattern fluctuation speed when the button is operated)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It is possible to execute an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, an effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. Variable timing setting for setting the timing for changing the effect mode based on the effect execution means and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been performed. A gaming machine BB1 characterized by having means and means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was playing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also a case in which an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed according to the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means, so that the operation means can be provided to the player. It was possible to operate enthusiastically, that is, to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, but when the player participated in the game (when the operation means was operated in the operation effect). Since there are few production modes to be executed, it has been desired to make it possible to set a wider variety of production modes and enhance the production effect.

According to the gaming machine BB, since the effect mode can be changed according to the fluctuation speed of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to provide various effects. In the above-mentioned gaming machine BB, as the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means, for example, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be considered. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the background mode is variably set according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set in a state where the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, a state immediately before the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the dynamic display speed of the current identification information. Thereby, when the operation means is operated to change the effect mode, the player can determine whether or not the effect mode is changed immediately afterwards. Further, when the period from the operation of the operating means by the player to change the effect mode to the change of the effect mode is longer than a predetermined period, the player can change the effect mode after the predetermined period elapses. It is good to configure to display the comment shown in. This makes it possible for the gaming company to easily grasp whether or not the gaming machine accepts the operation when the operation for changing the effect mode is executed.

Further, when an interval of a predetermined period or longer is provided from the operation of the operating means to the change of the effect mode, for example, the predetermined period is set up to the timing when the next special figure change is executed. Then it is good. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode while the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is not executed.

<Characteristic BC group> (Switches the development effect according to the button operation timing and the number of operations)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. The operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating, the operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the predetermined operation is determined to be performed by the operation discriminating means, the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means, and the operation number of times. Having an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the measurement result of the measurement means, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The featured gaming machine BC1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was playing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also a case in which an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, the effect mode is set based on the operation content or the number of operations for the operating means. With a gaming machine configured in this way, it is difficult to set various production modes according to the operation content of the operating means, so it was possible to enhance the production effect, but more diverse production. There has been a demand for a gaming machine whose mode can be set.

According to the gaming machine BC1, since the effect mode can be changed based on both the operation timing for the operation means and the number of operations, more various effects can be set and the effect can be enhanced. ..

In addition, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine BC1, the continuous operation effect in which the effect mode changes in response to the operation to the operation means a plurality of times is configured to be executable, and the continuous operation effect is executed. Of these, it is preferable to set the effect mode variable timing of the subsequent continuous operation effect according to the operation timing of the predetermined number of times. Specifically, based on the operation timing for the first operation means during the period in which the continuous operation effect is being executed, the easiness of changing the effect mode for the second and subsequent operations to the operation means is different. Good to configure. With this configuration, various production modes can be set without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this case, regardless of the operation timing to the first operation means, it is preferable to set the same effect mode set for the first operation to the operation means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the operation timing to the first operation means.

In addition, it may be configured to change the effect mode executed after the continuous operation effect according to the effect mode of the continuous operation effect displayed in the state where the continuous operation effect is completed. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the continuous operation production. In addition, the continuous operation effect is configured to be executable based on the special figure change, and the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect is set based on the effect result of the continuous operation effect and the lottery result of the special figure change. The effect mode variable condition (operation) of the continuous operation effect is based on the lottery result of the special figure variation and the operation timing of the predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation effect period. It may be configured to set the number of operations of the means, the operation method, etc.).

<Characteristic BD group> (Provides a state in which the hold number display displayed on the liquid crystal is synchronized with the actual number of hold balls and a state in which the hold number is not synchronized).
The acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the said acquisition means. To indicate a storage means that can store information up to a first predetermined number up to an upper limit, an effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect a plurality of times, and a predetermined number until at least the determination condition for the information is satisfied. The display means includes a mode display means for displaying the display mode of the above, and the mode display means indicates the number of the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied. The first aspect for the purpose is displayed on the display means as the display mode, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine BD1 is characterized in that a second aspect for indicating the number of times is displayed on the display means as the display mode.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The privilege game that became was executed. Further, a plurality of rights to execute the lottery are memorable so that the game can be played efficiently. Then, in a gaming machine configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (holds) for executing a lottery, there is one that displays a hold symbol for indicating the stored number of holds to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, since the player can easily grasp the current number of holdings, the game content can be determined based on the number of holdings, and efficient gaming can be performed. In addition, the stored hold has a function to determine the lottery result in advance before the lottery is actually executed, and the number of stored holds is a specific number. In that case, there was a case where a series of effects (continuous effects) were executed by using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of holds was executed. In such a continuous effect, the result of pre-determination for a plurality of holds can be executed by using a series of effects, so that the target lottery includes a hit rather than the effect based on the result of one lottery. It is possible to increase the possibility and make the player pay close attention to the production. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a new hold is acquired during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbol indicating the hold that is the target of the continuous effect. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which reserved symbol is the target of the continuous production, and there is a problem that the production effect is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of a reserved symbol to be produced in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine BD1, the display mode indicating the storage number displayed on the display means displays the case where the storage number stored in the storage means is displayed according to the condition to be established, and the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Since it can be variably set depending on the case of playing, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine BD1, it is preferable to provide a second display means capable of constantly displaying the stored number stored in the storage means separately from the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the number of stored memories of the storage means that affect the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as an LED. Is also good.

Further, the display means may be configured to display the number of storages stored in the storage means by the second display means during the period in which the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Further, the second display means may be configured to be less conspicuous than the display means. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of times of effect, the display means may be configured to display the number of stored items of the storage means corresponding to the number of determinations executed during the effect period. It may be configured to display based on the length of (for example, one display every 30 seconds). Further, a display indicating the number of times that the third symbol is stopped (including a temporary stop) during the effect period may be used.

<Characteristic BE group> (Notice effect performed only when the background is changed)
An effect mode in which an effect mode is changed based on an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a determination result of the operation determination means. When the variable means, the effect executing means for executing the effect changed by the effect mode variable means, and the variable timing in which the effect mode is changed by the effect mode variable means satisfy specific conditions. , A gaming machine BE1 characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The privilege game that became was executed. Further, there is a device that performs a suggestion effect for the player to play the game while expecting the player to win the lottery result. Then, in order to increase the variation of the effect mode of the suggestion effect, there is one that variably configures the mode in which the suggestion effect is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-21399). Further, there is also one that changes the mode (background) in which the suggestion effect is executed based on the player operating the operating means. In such a gaming machine, by providing a variety of effects to the player by executing a dedicated suggestion effect according to the set mode, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, there is a problem that the player enthusiastically operates the operation means after seeing the dedicated production corresponding to each mode, and the motivation to change the mode is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a player to enthusiastically change a mode in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine BE1, since it is configured to be able to execute a dedicated effect when the effect mode is changed, it is possible to experience even if a long-term game is played during the period in which each mode is set. It is possible to execute effects that cannot be performed at the mode switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically operate the operation means for the player who wants to experience various effects.

<Characteristic BF group> (A period for notifying the current mode and a period for not notifying are provided, and the current mode can be grasped by button operation even during the non-notifying period).
A mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means setting the mode setting means. It has an effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation determination unit that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. , The effect mode notification means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determination means during a predetermined first period or a second period different from the first period. The gaming machine BF1 is characterized in that, when the mode is set, information for indicating the effect mode set by the mode setting means is notified. According to the gaming machine BF1, a period for notifying the effect mode and a period for not notifying the effect mode are set, and the effect mode can be notified based on the operation to the operating means even during the period without the notification. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically operate the operation means in order to grasp the effect mode. In this case, if a predetermined operation is not performed on the operating means during the second period, it may be configured to notify another information about the game. For example, the dynamic display of the identification information may be performed. It may be configured to notify the speed and the suggestion information suggesting the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Thereby, during the second period, the game information desired by the player can be selected based on the operation of the player to the operating means.

<Characteristic BG group> (Step up of button vibrator)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, a vibration means that can vibrate the operation means, and a vibration means thereof. It is possible to change the vibration amount by the vibration amount changing means that can change the vibration amount that vibrates the operation means to a different vibration amount, and the vibration amount changing means based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means. It is characterized by having a period setting means for setting a possible variable period, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Game machine BG1. According to the gaming machine BG1, since the suggestion effect suggesting that the vibration amount of the operating means is variable is executed, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

<Characteristic BH group> (The color of the button informs the speed of pattern fluctuation)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means, and a mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the operation means. The mode-variable means is the mode in which the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. BH1 is a gaming machine characterized in that the speed is variable. According to the gaming machine BH1, the dynamic display speed of the identification information can be grasped depending on the mode of the operating means.

<Characteristic BI group> (Background changes depending on the combination of stop symbols)
The discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specific discrimination results. If this is the case, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and if the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result, the identification information is displayed in a predetermined manner different from the specific display mode. In a gaming machine having a stop display means for displaying a stop in a display mode and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means. The stop display means can stop and display a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and the effect mode is changed based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. The gaming machine BI1 is characterized by having a variable means and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. According to the gaming machine B11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode. In this case, when the player stops and displays the identification information in a predetermined stop display mode, the stop display mode may be selected. Specifically, it may be configured so that the player can select one stop display mode from a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operable operating means.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Prevention of leading by preparatory drive for accessory movement)
A display means for executing a predetermined effect display, an effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario, a movable means for executing a predetermined effect operation, and the predetermined effect. It has an effect operation control means for causing the movable means to execute the effect operation based on the effect scenario, and an effect scenario setting means capable of setting one effect scenario from a plurality of effect scenarios as the effect scenario. The movable means is configured to be movable from at least the first position to a second position different from the first position, and is prepared to move the movable means to the initial position of the effect operation. It has a preparatory movable control means that can be executed, and the preparatory movable control means executes the preparatory movement before the effect display is executed by the effect display control means based on the effect scenario. The gaming machine BJ1 characterized by this. According to the gaming machine BJ1, by performing the preparatory movement in advance, it is possible to surely execute the production based on the production scenario. Furthermore, since the preparatory movement control is configured to be performed separately from the effect operation based on the effect scenario, the preparatory movement can be performed regardless of whether the effect operation is executed or not. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the effect operation is executed even if the movable means is preparatory and movable.

<Characteristic BK group> (Replace the look-ahead result according to the operating state of the accessory)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. In a display means that can be displayed and a gaming machine to which a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least the said with respect to the information. Until the determination is executed, the storage means that can store up to the first predetermined number and the information stored in the storage means until the dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started. A pre-determination means capable of pre-determining, an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a specific effect based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, and the effect set by the effect mode setting means. The specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the embodiment at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect executing means when the specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. As the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the above-mentioned method, the effect mode replacement means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is provided. Game machine BK1 to play. According to the gaming machine BK1, the effect mode set based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination means can be replaced with the replacement effect mode, so that the effect according to the situation can be executed and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the effect mode that can be set by the effect mode setting means, the movable mode of the movable means that can move a predetermined range is used, and the effect mode is changed by the effect mode changing means based on the position information of the movable means. It is good to configure it so that it can be replaced. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means acquires the position where it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, the position information indicating a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, the movable means is used by the effect mode changing means. It is preferable to configure the effect mode that is not used, for example, the effect mode that uses only the display means as the replacement effect mode. Further, by providing a movable control means for moving the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, and by using the above-mentioned technical idea for the gaming machine having enhanced the effect of the effect, the effect mode can be changed. The effect is more pronounced in the means.

<Characteristic BL group> (During the demo, the setting timing of the operation validity period differs depending on the game state)
The discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first gaming state in which a first period is easily set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, is easily set. , And a standby for setting a standby state when a predetermined wait condition is satisfied in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed by the dynamic display execution means. A predetermined state setting means, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined result based on the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and a valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period that can effectively determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. In the case where the second period is set by the gaming state setting means, the valid period setting means sets the valid period after the standby state is set, as compared with the case where the first period is set. The gaming machine BL1 characterized in that the start timing of the valid period is set so that the period until the setting is long. According to the gaming machine BL1, the setting timing of the operation valid period for effectively determining the operation to the operating means can be changed according to the set gaming state, so that the operation is inadvertently executed. Can be suppressed. Further, when the notification means for notifying the player that the operation valid period has been set is provided, it is possible to suppress the frequent notification by the notification means. In addition, while the second gaming state is set, it is preferable to configure the discriminating means so that the discriminating means can be easily executed. As a result, the second gaming state can be set to a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second gaming state, the standby state can be terminated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic BM group>
It is executed by a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine, a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means, and the notification means thereof. The effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the end of the notification, and the reproduction reproducible of the predetermined voice data based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the power supply means. In a gaming machine having a means and an audio output means capable of outputting an electric power corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, the notification is set as a reproduction start position of the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. The gaming machine BM1 is provided with a reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen for notifying the player that the power has been turned on when the power is turned on (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-005505). In such a gaming machine, it has been required to make the gaming situation at the time of turning on the power easier to understand. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

According to the game machine BM1, a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine and a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means. , The effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the end of the notification executed by the notification means, and the predetermined power supply means based on the start of the supply of the electric power. It has a reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, and the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. As the reproduction start position, the reproduction start position setting means for setting the reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the notification means is provided. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine BM1, the reproduction start position setting means sets the reproduction start position so that the reproduction position at the end of the voice data is reproduced in accordance with the end timing of the notification. Game machine BM2.

According to the gaming machine BM2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BM1, there is an effect that the sound can be output more preferably.

In the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the reproducing means is characterized in that the audio data is repeatedly reproduced at least until the predetermined effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed, so that the audio is output more preferably. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM3, an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means is provided. The gaming machine BM4 is characterized in that the reproduction means reproduces the voice data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means.

According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BM1 to BM3, the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. The reproduction means is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the presence or absence is present, and the reproduction means reproduces the audio data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic BN group>
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. In a gaming machine having an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating between, at least a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed are used as the dynamic display speed of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means. A speed setting means capable of setting a speed, and a period shortening means for shortening a first period for dynamically displaying the identification information at the first speed when the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. The gaming machine BN1 characterized by having and.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BN1, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display thereof. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the executing means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and predetermined operating means. The operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that the operation of the above operation has been performed, the effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means, and the effect mode variable by the effect mode variable means. The effect mode is changed based on the effect execution means capable of executing the corresponding effect and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. It has a variable timing setting means for setting the timing. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BN1 has an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, and the effect executing means is provided by the speed setting means. The gaming machine BN2 is characterized in that different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information to be set.

According to the gaming machine BN2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BN1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine BN2, a second operation means different from the operation means, a second operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined second operation has been performed on the second operation means, and the first period. The gaming machine BN3 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the second operation is performed in a state where is set.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BN2, the player can be made to select whether to operate the operating means or the second operating means during the first period, and the player's game. You can increase your motivation to participate in. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BO group>
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the predetermined operation by the operation determination means within a predetermined first period. Based on the operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating the operation timing determined to have been performed and the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means, the effect mode during the second period set after the first period is set. It has an effect mode setting means and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and the effect execution means is set by the effect mode setting means. BO1 is a gaming machine BO1 characterized in that a suggestive effect suggesting an effect mode during the second period is executed during the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BO1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the operation within a predetermined first period. A second set after the first period based on the operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating the operation timing determined by the discriminating means and the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means. The effect executing means includes an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode during a period and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The suggestion effect suggesting the effect mode during the second period set by the effect mode setting means is executed during the first period. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BO1 has a measuring means for measuring the number of times the determination is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed within the first period, and the effect mode setting means has the number of determinations measured by the measuring means. The gaming machine BO2 is characterized in that the effect mode during the second period is set based on the operation timing in which is a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine BO2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BO1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine BO2, when the number of times of discrimination measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number of times less than the specified number of times, the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means during the second period. The gaming machine BO3, which is characterized by performing a unified production that does not suggest a production mode.

According to the gaming machine BO3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BO2, it is possible to prevent the player from early grasping the effect mode set in the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic BP group>
The discrimination means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specified. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the acquisition means. A storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the above method up to a first predetermined number up to a predetermined number, a display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and a display means thereof, at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied. As a display mode to be displayed on the screen, a specific display mode is displayed based on the fact that the number of information of the information stored in the storage means becomes a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. A third predetermined number of the second predetermined number or less among the display control means capable of the display and the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. The game BP1 is provided with an aspect ending means for terminating the display of the specific display aspect based on at least the information used in the discrimination by the discriminating means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine BP1, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the determination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means thereof. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and a specific effect for executing a specific effect for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means. It is possible to display the execution means, the storage means that can store the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number up to a predetermined number, and a predetermined display mode until at least the discrimination condition for the information is satisfied. The display means and the display mode to be displayed on the display means are specified based on the fact that the number of information of the information stored in the storage means becomes a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. The second predetermined number of the display control means capable of displaying the display mode of the above and the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. It is provided with a mode ending means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on at least the use of the following third predetermined number of the information for the discrimination by the discriminating means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BP1 is provided with a second display control means for causing the display means to display a number-of-times suggestion mode suggesting the number of discriminating counts of the remaining discriminating means executed by the end of the specific display mode. A gaming machine BP2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BP2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP1, the number of times suggestion mode suggesting the number of times of discrimination of the remaining discriminating means executed by the end of the specific display mode is provided to the display means. Since the second display control means for displaying is provided, there is an effect that a display mode that is easier for the player to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine BP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, the information number suggestion mode suggesting the number of information of the information stored in the storage means is difficult to distinguish from the number suggestion mode. The gaming machine BP3, which comprises a third display control means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine BP3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP2, the information number suggestion mode suggesting the number of information of the information stored in the storage means when the specific display mode is not displayed. Since the third display control means for displaying in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the number-of-times suggestion mode is provided, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the meaning of the number-of-times suggestion mode.

In the gaming machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means sets a predetermined specific condition when new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is displayed. If is satisfied, the gaming machine BP4 is characterized in that the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased.

According to the gaming machine BP4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means stores new information in the storage means while the specific display mode is displayed. In this case, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BQ group>
A discriminant game that executes a discriminant game based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a discriminant result that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discriminant result. The specific effect of the specific effect is based on the fact that the execution means, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for showing the determination result of the discriminating means, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. A gaming machine BQ1 comprising a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting a type.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BQ1, it is advantageous for the player based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. Based on this, a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect is provided. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BQ1, as the types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first specific effect in which the first effect mode is executed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect, and the specific effect. One type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a second specific effect in which a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the effect. A gaming machine comprising a type determining means, wherein the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied before the specific period elapses. BQ2.

According to the gaming machine BQ2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BQ1, as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, a first effect mode is provided after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect. A plurality of including at least a first specific effect to be executed and a second specific effect in which a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect. The suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied before the specific period elapses. It is something to do. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine BQ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine BQ1 or BQ2 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the specific condition is satisfied based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine BQ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BQ1 or BQ2, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the specific condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operating means. , It is possible to positively operate the operation means for the player who wants to execute the suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an effect mode according to the player's preference.

<Characteristic BR group>
A mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means setting the effect mode. Based on the effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode and the predetermined first condition being satisfied, the suppression period during which the effect mode notification means is suppressed from the effect mode notification means is set. It is provided with a suppression period setting means and a notification control means for notifying the effect mode notification means of the effect mode based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied during the suppression period. A gaming machine BR1 characterized by being present.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BR1, a mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means. The notification of the effect mode by the effect mode notification means is suppressed based on the fact that the effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode set by the mode setting means and the predetermined first condition are satisfied. A notification control for notifying the effect mode notification means of the effect mode based on the suppression period setting means for setting the suppression period and a predetermined second condition being satisfied during the suppression period. It is provided with means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BR1, the first operation for the operating means is detected during a specific period included in the effect period as the type of the operation means that can be operated by the player and the effect executed by the effect execution means. The effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the above means, and the suppression period setting means is provided for at least the specific period. The suppression period is set, and the effect mode notification means notifies the effect mode based on the detection of the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. A gaming machine BR2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BR2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BR1, the operation means that can be operated by the player and the type of the effect executed by the effect executing means are the above-mentioned during a specific period included in the effect period. The suppression includes an effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the detection of the first operation on the operating means. The period setting means sets the suppression period at least for the specific period, and the effect mode notification means detects the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. The effect mode is notified based on the above. This has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

The gaming machine BQ3 is characterized in that the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is executed for the operating means.

According to the gaming machine BQ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is executed for the operating means. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

<Characteristic BS group>
Between the operation means that can be operated by the player and the specific effect execution means that executes the specific effect in which the valid period for treating the operation for the operation means as effective is set during the effect period of 1, and the effective period. The specific control executing means that executes a specific control based on the operation on the operating means, and the first control and the second control as the types of the specific control executed by the specific control executing means. When a control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least, and a specific number of operations for the operating means are performed in the valid period of 1 as the type of the specific effect. A plurality of types including at least a first type in which the first control is easily executed, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than the first type. The gaming machine BS1 is provided with a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among the types.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine BS1, an operating means that can be operated by the player, a specific effect executing means that executes a specific effect in which an effective period for treating the operation for the operating means as effective is set during the effect period of 1. The first is a specific control executing means that executes a specific control based on the operation performed on the operating means during the valid period, and a specific control type executed by the specific control executing means. A control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a control and a second control, and a specific number of operations for the operating means in the valid period of 1 as the type of the specific effect. The first type in which the first control is easily executed when the first control is performed, and the second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than the first type. It is provided with a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BS1, in the specific effect, the correspondence relationship between the number of operations for the operation means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determination means is determined in advance for each type of the specific effect. The gaming machine BS2 characterized by being defined.

According to the gaming machine BS2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BS1, the specific effect corresponds to the number of operations for the operating means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determining means. Since the relationship is predetermined for each type of the specific effect, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with the first vibration intensity, and the second control is different from the first vibration intensity of the operating means. The gaming machine BS3 characterized in that it is a control for vibrating with a second vibration intensity.

According to the game machine BS3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with the first vibration intensity, and the second control is the operation. Since the means is controlled to vibrate with a second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity, it is possible to easily understand the type of the specific effect by checking the vibration intensity of the operating means. effective.

In any of the gaming machines BS1 to BS3, the specific effect has a correspondence relationship between the number of operations for the operating means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determining means. The gaming machine BS4, which is characterized in that it is predetermined for each type of.

According to the gaming machine BS4, in addition to the effect of any one of BS1 to BS3, the display means capable of displaying the display mode and the specific control execution for the display means during the execution period of one specific effect. The display control means for displaying the history of the control executed by the means is provided. As a result, the type of the executed specific effect can be easily understood by the player, which has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

<Characteristic BT group>
It is possible to execute a predetermined operation effect based on an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a determination result of the operation determination means. In a gaming machine having various operation effect execution means, as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, an operation effect setting means for setting one of the operation effects from a plurality of the operation effects, and the operation means. The mode-variable means has a mode-variable means capable of varying the mode of the above-mentioned, and the mode-variable means changes the mode of the operation means to a mode suggesting the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. The gaming machine BT1 characterized by being.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BT1, based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect, and as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, one operation effect is set from a plurality of the operation effects. It has a setting means and a mode variable means capable of changing the mode of the operation means, and the mode variable means sets the mode of the operation means to the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. It is variable to the suggested mode. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BT1 is characterized in that it has a light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. BT2.

According to the gaming machine BT2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BT1. That is, it has a light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. This has the effect of notifying the player who intends to operate the operating means of the current situation in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine BT1 or BT2, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display thereof. The operation effect setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the execution means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the identification information is dynamically displayed in the operation effect setting means. The gaming machine BT3 is characterized in that different operation effects can be set during the displayed period.

According to the gaming machine BT3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BT1 or BT2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays the identification information. The operation effect setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the displayed identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the operation effect setting means is during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to set different operation effects.

As a result, different operation effects are set during one dynamic display period, so that the player can enjoy the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BU group>
A privilege to execute a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a display means capable of displaying identification information, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the game execution means, the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means are the dynamic. The first dynamic display type in which the first aspect is displayed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the display, and the second aspect different from the first aspect after the specific period has elapsed are displayed. A mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type, and between the start of the dynamic display of the identification information and the elapse of the specific period. A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect, and a first specific effect capable of suggesting that the first aspect is displayed as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. BU1 is characterized by comprising a second specific effect capable of suggesting that the second aspect is displayed, and a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of including at least. ..

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BU1, it is advantageous to the player based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means to be a specific discrimination result. The privilege game executing means for executing the privileged game, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. The first dynamic display type in which the first mode is displayed at least after a specific period has elapsed since the start of the dynamic display, and the first mode after the specific period has elapsed. A mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type in which a different second mode is displayed, and the identification after the dynamic display of the identification information is started. It is suggested that the first aspect is displayed as a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect until the period elapses and a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of possible first specific effects and a second specific effect that can suggest that the second aspect is displayed is provided. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BU1, the specific effect executing means can display a deviation effect mode showing an deviation determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of the specific effect of 1. In the first specific effect, the combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is the first combination, and the second specific effect is the first combination. The gaming machine BU2 is characterized in that the combination of the deviation effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is a second combination different from the first combination.

According to the gaming machine BU2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BU1. That is, the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to display the deviation effect mode showing the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of the specific effect 1. In the first specific effect, the combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is the first combination, and the second specific effect is 1 The combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect is a second combination different from the first combination. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BV group>
In a gaming machine having an effect control means capable of executing an effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means includes an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect and an effect mode setting means thereof. It has an output means capable of outputting the effect information indicating the effect mode set by the above-mentioned, and based on the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined first effect unit is provided with respect to the first effect means. Based on the first effect control means for executing the effect operation and the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined second effect operation is executed by a second effect means different from the first effect means. The first effect control means has a second effect control means, and the first effect control means can output specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. The gaming machine BV1 characterized by having the above.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BV1, in a gaming machine having an effect control means capable of executing an effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means is an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect. And an output means capable of outputting the effect information indicating the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and based on the effect information output by the output means, the first effect means. A predetermined effect control means for executing a predetermined first effect operation, and a second effect means different from the first effect means based on the effect information output by the output means. It has a second effect control means for executing a second effect operation, and the first effect control means transfers specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. It has a specific information output means that can be output. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BV1, the effect mode setting means can set a duplicate effect mode using at least the first effect operation and the second effect operation, and the output means indicates the overlap effect mode. The effect information is output to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation as the specific information to the second effect control means among the overlapping effect modes. A gaming machine BV2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BV2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BV1. That is, the effect mode setting means can set an overlapping effect mode using at least the first effect operation and the second effect operation, and the output means can set the effect information indicating the overlap effect mode. Is output to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation as the specific information to the second effect control means among the duplicate effect modes. .. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BV2, the effect mode setting means is characterized in that the overlap effect mode is set so that the start timing of the first effect operation is earlier than the start timing of the second effect operation. Gaming machine BV3.

According to the gaming machine BV3, the effect mode setting means sets the overlap effect mode so that the start timing of the first effect operation is earlier than the start timing of the second effect operation. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BW group>
When the first effect condition is satisfied while the first effect period is being set by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period and the effect period setting means, at least from the first position. While the first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect using the effect member movable to the second position different from the first position and the first effect period are set, the first effect is set. In a gaming machine having a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect using the display means when a second effect condition different from the effect condition is satisfied, the first effect. In the specific effect period within the effect period, the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect using the effect member, the display means, the movable state determining means for determining the movable state of the effect member, and the above-mentioned It is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. Game machine BW1 to play.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BW1, when the first effect condition is satisfied while the first effect period is set by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period and the effect period setting means. The first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect using the effect member movable from at least the first position to the second position different from the first position, and the first effect period are set. In the middle of the process, it has a second effect executing means that can execute a second effect different from the first effect using the display means when a second effect condition different from the first effect condition is satisfied. In the gaming machine, in the specific effect period within the first effect period, the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect using the effect member and the display means, and the movable state of the effect member are determined. It has a movable state determining means and a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. It is a thing. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine BW1 is characterized in that the movable state discriminating means discriminates from the specific discriminating result when the effecting member is not located at the first position.

According to the gaming machine BW2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BW1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable state discriminating means discriminates from the specific discriminant result when the effecting member is not located at the first position. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW1 or BW2, the gaming machine BW3 is characterized in that the special effect executing means is for executing the special effect using the display means.

According to the gaming machine BW3, the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines BW1 to BW3, the first one has an operating means that can be operated by the player and an operation determining means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. The effect condition is satisfied when it is determined by the operation determining means that the predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine BW4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BW1 to BW3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. It is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW4, the valid period setting means capable of setting the operation valid period for which it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means by the operation determining means, and the valid period setting means thereof. It has a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set.

According to the gaming machine BW5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BW4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. It is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW4, the valid period setting means capable of setting the operation valid period for which it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means by the operation determining means, and the valid period setting means thereof. It has a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BX group>
The discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first gaming state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, can be set. , A game state setting means that can set, a standby state setting means that sets a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined operation means. The operation discriminating means has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that the operation of the above operation has been performed, and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means. When the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, and the game state is set based on the game state setting means. The gaming machine BX1 having a standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting the standby condition.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BX1, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and an operation thereof. A first gaming state in which the first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the target display execution means, and a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, are set. A game state setting means that can set a possible second game state, a standby state setting means that sets a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation means that can be operated by the player. It has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means. The operation determining means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed when the waiting state is set by the waiting state setting means, and is set by the gaming state setting means. It has a standby condition variable setting means capable of variablely setting the standby condition based on the gaming state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine BX1, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting is established. The means is to variably set the waiting condition so that the waiting condition is less likely to be satisfied when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine BX2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine BX2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BX1. That is, the waiting condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is a predetermined period, and the waiting condition variable setting means is satisfied. The waiting condition is variably set so that the waiting condition is less likely to be satisfied when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BX1 or BX2, the gaming machine BX3 is characterized in that the second gaming state is easier to be discriminated by the discriminating means than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BX3, the second gaming state is easier to discriminate by the discriminating means than the first gaming state. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
It has been proposed that gaming machines such as pachinko machines allow a game ball to enter a specific entrance or a specific area during a hit game, thereby further granting benefits such as a hit game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-9795).
In such a gaming machine, it is required to improve the interest of the game.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 can be changed into a first state in which the gaming ball can enter and a second state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The variable ball entry means, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means are specific discrimination results. In this case, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege to the player, the determination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and the identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the determination condition are moved for a predetermined period. An effect executing means having a dynamic display means for displaying a target and capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information being specific. It has a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game for a predetermined period to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the stop display in the display mode. The effect executing means executes an effect to show that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the first specific game corresponding to the first specific game that is advantageous to the player as the type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. It has a game type setting means capable of setting a type and a second type corresponding to a second specific game that is more disadvantageous than the first specific game, and the effect executing means is described by the game type setting means. The effect is executed when the first type is set.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 shows a condition determining means capable of determining whether or not the effect condition is satisfied in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and a result of the determination executed by the determining means. The condition determination means has a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the specific identification information for a predetermined period, and the condition determination means is the effect condition when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Is determined to hold.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. And, when the discrimination means that executes the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. , A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player, a determination means for executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and an operation of dynamically displaying identification information for showing the result of the determination based on the determination condition for a predetermined period. An effect executing means having a target display means and capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information is stopped in a specific display mode. Based on what is displayed, the variable ball-entry means has a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game for a predetermined period of time to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the effect execution is performed. The means is to execute an effect for showing that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, as the types of the specific games executed by the specific game execution means, the first type corresponding to the first specific game that is advantageous to the player and the second specific game that is more disadvantageous than the first specific game. It has a game type setting means capable of setting a second type corresponding to the above, and the effect executing means executes the effect when the first type is set by the game type setting means. ..
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, a condition discriminating means capable of discriminating whether or not the effect condition is satisfied and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying specific identification information for indicating the result of the discriminating executed by the discriminating means for a predetermined period. The condition determining means determines that the effect condition is satisfied when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 1st prize opening (part of the means of entering the ball)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
111 Withdrawal control device (part of privilege granting means)
112a launch unit (launching means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic display means)
600a V entrance (specific area)
S213 determination means
S1004, S1005 privilege game execution means

Claims (1)

A launching means that can launch a game ball based on the player's operation,
An entry means that allows a game ball launched by the launch means to enter,
A determination means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entry means,
A display means for displaying identification information for showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and a display means for displaying the identification information.
A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means,
A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a dynamic display mode determining means.
In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means.
A specific ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter during the period in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specific ball entry means.
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the specific entry means can enter, and
When a game ball enters the specific area, a privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player and a privilege granting means .
It has a means capable of temporarily stopping the dynamic display of the identification information on which the privilege game is to be executed in a manner indicating that the determination result is the specific result .
In order to show that the player fires the game ball so that the game ball can be put into the specific ball entry means during the period of temporary stop in the embodiment showing that the specific determination result is obtained . Has a specific period during which information can be transmitted,
The information for indicating that the player fires the game ball is made possible to display a predetermined notification symbol on the display means.
The notification symbol is a gaming machine characterized in that the mode in which the display is displayed so that the visibility is variable stepwise can be changed stepwise .

Images